top of page
What Determines a Nation's Value in the Age of AI?: Production, Transformation, Utilization, and the Nine Cells

This paper develops a general theory of national value models and geoeconomic strategy for middle powers in the age of AI. It addresses states that do not belong to the two poles of frontier-class AI capability production.

Treating AI as a strategic general-purpose resource, this paper rejects simple, blanket historical analogies. Instead, it formulates a "discipline of analogy" by decomposing resources into bundles of properties and dividing AI into three capability tiers: Commodity (C1), Frontier (C2), and Critical (C3).

By crossing the three national value models derived from the oil era — Resource-Producing (M1), Transformation (M2), and Utilization (M3) — with these three capability tiers, the paper constructs a Nine-Cell Matrix. Because position on the matrix alone does not measure a state’s capacity to withstand external pressures, a second axis, Geoeconomic Leverage, is introduced, defined by two independent components: Indispensability (chokepoints that depreciate upon exercise) and Desirability (trust and rules that appreciate with adoption).

To resolve the vulnerability of transforming states to model compression, the paper introduces the AI Foundry Model. Under this model, a state procures frontier capability from outside, converts it into operable systems via domain-specific complementary assets, national brain capital, and trust infrastructure, and exports these as "integrated systems."

Finally, the paper examines the "cost of sovereignty," demonstrating that domestic guarantees entail a sovereignty premium and lower Layer-Three capital efficiency, justifying such interventions solely as insurance against supply interruptions.

What Determines a Nation's Value in the Age of AI?: Production, Transformation, Utilization, and the Nine Cells

No. 10

What Determines a Nation's Value in the Age of AI?: Production, Transformation, Utilization, and the Nine Cells
9cell future.png

National Value Model

V U R A Wo r k i n g P a p e r S e r i e s N o . 1 0 — L ay e r Z e r o ( N a t i o n a l S t r u c ‐ t u r e ) National Value Models: A Theory of Resource, Transformation, and Utilization for Nations in the Age of AI, with Critical-Tier Governance 国家価値モデル ― AI時代における資源・変換・活用の国家理論と臨界ガバナ ンス Naoki Kadowaki VURA Capital Innovation Holdings, Inc. Version 1.0 (Working Paper) — August 2026 This paper is a working paper and has not undergone journal peer review. Please note this when citing. Abstract This paper is a general theory, not an argument about any one country. Its apparatus — the Nine-Cell Matrix, geoeconomic leverage, the dynamics of transition, critical-tier governance, and value-definition capability — applies to every state that does not belong to the two poles of the Resource-Producing Model. AI is reorganizing the structure of relations among states as a "strategic general-purpose resource" resembling oil, but no single analogy holds. Resource characteristics differ by capability tier: the commodity tier corresponds in part to oil and electricity, the frontier tier to managed strategic materials, and the critical tier to nuclear technology. This paper neither discards nor abuses analogy; its methodology is a discipline of analogy that states explicitly which properties transfer. As a matter of comparative design, this paper uses a contemporaneous comparison with the oil market of 2026 in addition to the diachronic comparison with 1973 — observation at a single point in time removes era effects from the difference as a common term and grounds transfer judgments in observation of an ongoing present (Sections 3.9 and 6.11). The 2026 supply disruption event is described only as market fact, in accordance with the editorial policy set out in Section 1. The Nine-Cell Matrix is the product of the three types of national value model of the oil era (M1 Resource-Producing, M2 Transformation, M3 Utilization) and the three AI capability tiers (C1/C2/C3). The tiers are defined by capability distance alone; the differentiation of market structure and of governance form is not a consequence of the definition but a dependent variable of Propositions 2 and 2b. The cells are non-equivalent in their institutions, their conditions of viability, and their modes of failure; national strategy is therefore not the choice of a single cell but a portfolio. The Nine Cells describe the mode of value generation, but they do not describe whether a state can push back when its conditions are changed from outside. This paper introduces a second axis, geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15), with two components: indispensability (the cost and the degree of malfunction that arise if others attempt to bypass or exclude the state in question) and desirability (the degree to which other states voluntarily seek engagement). Position and leverage are independent variables and do not coincide (Proposition 22). National strategy therefore has two objective functions — optimization of position and maximization of leverage — and the two do not call for the same policies. Furthermore, indispensability grounded in a chokepoint does not depreciate while it is merely held; it begins to depreciate the moment it is exercised, because exercise induces a search for alternatives — building inventories, designing bypasses, developing substitute sources of supply, investing in domestic production (Proposition 23). What the Transformation Model can export falls into three kinds: capability, products, and integrated systems. What withstands compression is the export of integrated systems (Definition 20), protected by the wall of integration cost. On the side of desirability there is no such paradox: the more an integrated system is adopted, the more conformity investment accumulates on the recipient side, and desirability 2 appreciates together with switching costs. Indispensability depreciates when exercised; desirability appreciates the more it is used (Proposition 38). What can be exported is determined not by the jurisdiction with the highest capability but by the jurisdiction able to separate the system from its own institutions (Proposition 39); on the importing side the same variables govern the division of labor among three modes — construction within the home jurisdiction, procurement of capability, and procurement of integrated systems (Proposition 40). By way of this axis, standard-setting power is recovered inside the theory not as a fourth value model but as leverage on the side of desirability. This paper gives this configuration a name. The type that does not itself produce frontier capability but procures it from outside, converts it into an operable system by means of the complementary assets, national brain capital, and trust infrastructure of its own jurisdiction, and supplies that system outward as an integrated system, is called the AI Foundry Model (Definition 21); a state that adopts this type is called an AI Foundry State. The name derives from the correspondence with the structure of a semiconductor foundry, which owns not the design but the process capability. The correspondence is limited, however, to the structure of "taking value at the process stage without holding the design"; the indispensability that a semiconductor foundry retains through capital specificity and the difficulty of reproducing its processes does not transfer — to give a name and, in the same act, to state where the metaphor fails to transfer is this paper's discipline of applying the discipline of analogy to its own act of naming. Two questions that this paper had carried within itself remain at this point. First, the deep institutional embeddedness required by Propositions 4 and 18 and the separability from the institutions of the home jurisdiction required by Proposition 39(iv) appear to be contradictory demands upon one and the same system. They coexist only if the system is separated into a jurisdiction-specific layer and a portable core, with the interface between them explicitly defined (Proposition 41) — the design principle is not to make embedding shallow but to confine the locus of embedding to the outside of the interface. Second, does the height of switching costs, where an integrated system is deeply embedded, amount to substantive indispensability? It does not: lock-in is not indispensability (Proposition 42). Indispensability is a property concerning whether a third party can bypass the actor in question; lock-in is a property concerning whether a party already engaged can leave. A high level of lock-in is not evidence of indispensability unless it is accompanied by an indicator of supplier concentration. And the self-reinforcement of desirability has an upper bound, because a rise in switching costs simultaneously raises the recipient's incentive to institutionalize in-house production, multi-sourcing, and requirements of portability. The Nine Cells are not a static classification but a field of transitions. Upward transition requires the accumulation of complementary assets, national brain capital, computing infrastructure, and electricity, and its time constant is longer than the time constant of policy decision. Downward transition requires no accumulation and occurs passively, through the relative depreciation of existing accumulations alone (Proposition 15). "Doing nothing" is not "holding position" but "descending." As AI becomes critical infrastructure, it gives rise to a new systemic risk in the form of correlated supply stoppage — "AI outage," a coinage of this paper formed in correspondence with power outage in elec‐ 3 tricity. A state requires a sovereign minimum guarantee level corresponding to oil stockpiles; but AI capability cannot be stockpiled in barrels and depreciates at the speed of the frontier, so the guarantee is not a requirement that is achieved once but holds only as continuous construction. Tier C3 (the critical tier) is an unrealized anticipatory category, and what follows is a conditional design argument for the case in which it arrives. Across five regimes — nuclear, chemical, biological, missile, and cyber — verification mechanisms came into being only where the object of control was accompanied by a measurable physical correlate (the verification anchor hypothesis, Proposition 9). In AI only compute, electricity, and facilities can serve as anchors; and because an anchor depreciates with a half-life, critical-tier governance is sustained only if it has continuous downward revision of thresholds built into it. Concerning Layer Zero (national structure), this paper derives two consequences. First, because the advantage obtained through efficiency gains from capability that has descended to C1 diminishes as the cost of imitation falls, the residual that makes a difference shifts from efficiency to definition — to "the capability to select what is to be aimed at and to realize it" (Proposition 17). To design AI policy as efficiency policy is a systematic error. Second, the substrate of the defensibility of the Transformation Model is national brain capital. AI capability can be imported, but tacit knowledge on the ground, judgment embedded in language and culture, trust in institutions, and long domain experience cannot be imported (Proposition 18). The two consequences converge upon the common constraints of middle powers: states outside the two poles of the Resource- Producing Model are subject, regardless of region, income, or political system, to three constraints — energy, data sovereignty, and value-definition capability (Proposition 21). This paper makes no predictions, but it supplies instruments of identification. There are at least three branches in the advance of AI capability — [S1] Fragmentation, [S2] Diffusion, [S3] Stagnation (Definition 13). This paper does not state which will occur; it supplies leading indicators (Definition 14) that identify the branch before its consequences appear, together with a set of no-regret actions that carry positive expected value in all three branches — national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, and operational readiness (Proposition 20). Owning frontier-class computing infrastructure outright does not belong to this set: it has high value under S1, but under S2 it is overinvestment and under S3 a stranded asset. The Nine Cells are not, however, a uniform lattice. The M axis and the C axis are not orthogonal, and the higher the capability tier, the narrower the set of positions a state may occupy (the feasible region, Definition 18) becomes (Proposition 29). And recommendations have costs. Because domestic guarantees run counter to economies of scale, they generate a sovereignty premium (Definition 19) and are justified not as efficiency but only as insurance — only where the total premium is less than the expected value of the losses avoided (Proposition 30). A requirement of redundancy lowers capital efficiency at Layer Three; its benefits accrue to the system as a whole while its costs are borne by individual actors, so it holds only if it is designed together with an allocation of that cost (Proposition 31). The diagnostic framework itself also consumes administrative capacity, and so has no implementability unless it is accompanied by a minimum indicator set 4 (Proposition 36). Section 19, "The Cost of Sovereignty," treats these together, and thereby fixes, by this paper's own hand, the range within which its recommendations hold. The application treated in greatest detail is Japan (Section 18). None of the conditions for the success of the postwar processing-trade model transfers unmodified to the age of AI, and the viable portfolio is limited to a set of three: transformation protected by integration cost (M2′), the compounding of depth of utilization (M3), and a sovereign minimum guarantee level narrowed to three functions. This position does not coincide, however, with the position on the leverage coordinates — Japan is an application of Proposition 22, not the purpose of the theory. Japan's half-century of oil also supplies one general structure: a policy that reduces exposure in aggregate does not reduce dependence if supplier concentration rises in the remaining portion (Proposition 37). Reducing exposure and reducing concentration are separate policy objectives, and a design that pursues only the former may improve the aggregate while worsening the degradation that occurs upon interruption. This paper claims no comprehensiveness. The subjects deliberately not treated, and the reasons for not treating them, are declared in Section 20 — the post-truth condition and the redesign of democracy, the state as a provider of existential purpose, and the civilizational-historical debate over the multipolarity of intelligence. The Position of This Paper This paper is the tenth in the VURA Working Paper Series. The series has so far carried out the work of redefinition for the enterprise (Layer Three), society (Layer Two), and capital (Layer One). This paper extends that work to the state (Layer Zero) and turns the national conditions that the three lower layers have treated as given into the object of analysis. This paper is written in Japanese, and treats the Japanese case in detail in Section 18, because Japan is the country whose primary sources — official statistics, statutes, advisorycouncil materials, and practice on the ground — the author can approach most closely, and not because the framework itself is specific to any one country. The thickness of the case study is not intended to narrow the generality of the theory; it is intended as a worked example by which readers elsewhere can see how an analysis of comparable thickness might be assembled for their own country. In reading Section 18, attention is best directed not at the Japanese figures described but at the procedure by which figures are translated into position and constraint. The diagnostic instruments for applying the same procedure are set out separately in Appendices D, E, F, and G. An English edition of this paper is to be prepared in due course, preserving the content of the Japanese edition. The author is a practitioner at an investment holding company and is presently engaged in business and investment in the domains on which this paper makes recommendations. This position gives the paper two characteristics. First, sensitivity to practical constraints: the author stands closer, as a participant rather than as an analyst, to constraints such as the feasibility of policy, the time constant of corporate decision-making, and the years required for accumulation. Second, a structural conflict of interest: if the recommendations of this 5 paper were adopted, the author's business opportunities may expand. Readers should read the policy recommendations of this paper together with this fact. Because of this position, the author presents the claims of this paper both as "recommendations" and as "hypotheses whose verification the author undertakes to bear." Stating the conflict of interest rather than concealing it is the condition for writing from this position. The details of the disclosure are placed in Section 2.7, and the acknowledgment of limitations in Section 20. Editorial Policy of This Paper — Political Neutrality This paper takes the state as its unit of analysis and not as an object of evaluation. What it describes are observed institutions, measures, and supply structures, together with the structural consequences these have for the options available to states. The content and dates of published policy documents and statutes, and the fact that suppliers and productive capacity are concentrated in particular countries or regions, are described, because they are indispensable to the analysis. On the other hand, this paper makes no judgment about the motives behind measures, the appropriateness of policies, or the legitimacy of political systems. Measures can be observed; intentions cannot. Nor does this paper endorse any camp or issue any call to counter one. This position carries costs. First, this paper cannot treat normative questions — which allocation is just, which form of governance is preferable. Second, since motives are placed outside the object of analysis, this paper's explanatory power with respect to why the same measure is taken at one moment and not at another extends only to the description of structural conditions. These two constraints are accepted in order to separate analysis from advocacy. When analysis is mixed with the defense of a particular position, what is lost is not the persuasiveness of the advocacy but the falsifiability of the analysis. Accordingly, when readers use this paper in judgments about their own country or organization, normative judgment is reserved to the reader. What this paper supplies is a map of options and of their structural consequences, not an answer as to which should be chosen. This policy is reaffirmed in Section 20 (the acknowledgment of limitations). JEL classification: F52, F51, F13, F02, O33, O38, O25, L13, L51, L86, L94, K23, Q34, H54 Keywords (17): national value models; AI capability tiers; strategic general-purpose resource; discipline of analogy; resource curse; transformation value; AI outage; sovereign minimum guarantee level; critical-tier governance; compute governance; geoeconomic leverage; trust infrastructure; feasible region; national brain capital; AI Foundry Model; national redefinition; Layer Zero Contents 1. Cover, Abstract, Editorial Policy, and Contents (this section) 6 2. Introduction 2.1 The Autumn of 1973 — Making Dependence Visible and the Redefinition of a National Model 2.3 Research Questions (four sub-problems) 2.4 The Contributions of This Paper (eight; one of which is "treating the supply side and the procurement side as two faces of a single framework") 2.6 The Structure of This Paper 2.7 Disclosure of Conflicts of Interest and of Observational Position 3. Methodology: The Discipline of Analogy 3.4 Decomposing the Analogy — Bundles of Properties and the Correspondence Table 3.7 Proposition 1 — Formulating the Core of the Methodology 3.9 Contemporaneous Comparison — Controlling for Era Effects 4. Theoretical Background: Resources and the State 4.9 Where Is Value Captured? — Global Value Chains, the Smile Curve, Trade in Value Added, and Economic Complexity 4.10 Network Power and Regulatory Power — Value Positions Not Based on Production 5. A Theory of AI Capability Tiers 5.1 Definition 2 and Its Operationalization 5.5 Propositions 2 and 2b — The Covariation of Tier and Governance, and Its Dynamic Character 6. The Three Types of National Value Model 6.7 Definition 3 — National Value Models 6.9 Development into the Nine Cells — Proposition 3 6.10 Non-Orthogonality of the Axes and the Feasible Region — The Nine Cells Are Not a Uniform Grid (Definition 18, Proposition 29) 6.11 The Oil Market in 2026 — A Contemporaneous Observation 7. The Nine-Cell Matrix I — Row C1 (Commodity Tier) 8. The Nine-Cell Matrix II — Row C2 (Frontier Tier) 9. The Nine-Cell Matrix III — Row C3 (Critical Tier) and Critical-Tier Governance 9.4 Comparison of Control-Group Regimes — Chemical, Biological, Missile, and Cyber (the section that raises Proposition 9 from an induction on a sample of one to a comparative proposition across four regimes) 9.7 The Half-Life of the Verification Anchor — Integrating Proposition 8 and Proposition 9 9.9 The Stability of Deterrence — The Conditions for MAD and Incentives to Pre-empt in AI 10. Focal Analysis: The M2×C2 Cell — Conditions for High-Value-Added Transformation 10.3 Condition I — The Four Indicators of Complementary Assets Made Concrete at C2 10.4 Condition II — National Brain Capital as the Substrate (Definition 11, Proposition 18) 10.5 Failure Modes Specific to This Cell 7 10.6 The Minimum Engagement With the Higher Tier Needed to Hold the Position 10.9 Verification by Contemporaneous Comparison — The Petroleum Market in 2026 11. Geoeconomic Leverage — Indispensability and Desirability (Definitions 15 and 17; Propositions 22, 23, 25, and 28) 11.1 Why Position Alone Is Not Enough (Definition 15) 11.2 The Sources of Indispensability 11.3 The Sources of Desirability (Definition 17, Proposition 25) 11.4 Resolving the M4 Problem — Not Exclusion but Recovery 11.5 The Non-Identity of Position and Leverage (Proposition 22) 11.6 The Paradox of Leverage Exercise (Proposition 23) 11.7 Non-State Actors and the Residual Functions of the State (Proposition 28) 11.8 The Institutional Treatment of Military and Dual-Use Questions 11.9 Summary — The Move to Dual Coordinates 12. The AI Foundry Model — Export and Procurement of Integrated Systems (Definitions 20 and 21; Propositions 38, 39, and 40) 12.1 What Does the Transformation Model Export? (export of capability / export of products / export of integrated systems. Definition 20. Section 12.1.6 gives the type its name [Definition 21; the discipline of notation], and Section 12.1.7 determines what transfers and what does not by contrast with semiconductor foundries [Table 27]) 12.2 Why It Is Bought Even Though It Costs More (three things thereby established: where responsibility lies, proof of conformity, and accountability to supervisory authorities) 12.3 Conditions for a State That Exports Integrated Systems (Proposition 39. Of the four conditions, portability is the most binding. Section 12.3.7 formulates the condition under which embedding and portability coexist, by making the interface explicit [Proposition 41]) 12.4 Types of Exporting State (described as combinations of conditions; no evaluation of particular states) 12.5 The Self-Reinforcement of Desirability (Proposition 38. Indispensability depreciates when exercised; desirability appreciates the more it is adopted. Sections 12.5.6–12.5.8 respond to the objection that lock-in amounts to substantive indispensability and formulate the upper bound of self-reinforcement [Proposition 42]) 12.6 The Procurement Portfolio of the Importing Side (Proposition 40. Three modes and three variables. Table 26) 12.7 The Risks Attending the Import of Integrated Systems (the situations in which Proposition 24 operates as a direct consequence of the procurement mode, and the design of mitigations) 12.8 The Asymmetry Between Exporting and Importing States (not adversarial, but their interests do not coincide) 8 13. AI as Infrastructure: Price, Scarcity, and AI Outage 13.3 A Theory of AI Outage — Definition 4 and Proposition 7 13.6 The Sovereign Minimum Guarantee Level — Correspondence with Oil Stockpiles and the Asymmetry 13.7 Rationing and Priority — Designing Allocation Institutions for Periods of Scarcity 13.10 The Performance of Buffers in 2026 — A Triple Buffer and the Blank in AI 14. Country Profiles (described in three coordinates: position on the Nine Cells, geoeconomic leverage, and the possibility of exporting integrated systems) 14.12 Small-State Strategy in General — Value Strategy Under Constraints of Scale 14.13 Common Constraints on Middle Powers — Three Constraints That Operate Independently of Region, Income, and Political System (Proposition 21) 14.14 Cross-Cutting Observations — Structure Visible in the Distribution (Section 14.14.3 treats the export of integrated systems as a third distribution) 15. The Dynamics of National Value Models 15.2 The Asymmetry of Transition — Ascent Requires Accumulation, Descent Does Not (Definition 10; Propositions 15 and 16) 15.3 Scenario [A] The Branching of the Transformation Model — Ascent and Fall 15.4 Scenario [B] Vertical Integration Across the Axes — From Market Allocation to Allocation Within Alliances 15.5 Scenario [C] Moving Upstream Through Capital — The Ladder and the Drilling Right 15.6 Scenario [D] Downward Transition Through Physical Constraints — A Path That Operates Independently of Intention 15.7 Conditions for a Third Pole — As an Analysis of Conditions, Not an Advocacy (Proposition 19) 16. World Scenarios and Leading Indicators (Definitions 13 and 14; Proposition 20 — the three branches [S1] Fragmentation / [S2] Diffusion / [S3] Stagnation, the leading indicators by which they are identified, and the no-regret actions that carry positive expected value in all three) 16.5 Leading Indicators 16.6 No-Regret Actions 17. Layer Zero and the Four-Layer Architecture — Value-Definition Capability and National Brain Capital 17.2 Proposition 11 — Three Channels of Inter-Layer Transmission 17.3 Diminishing Returns to Efficiency and the Residual of Value-Definition Capability — Proposition 17 (Definition 12, Proposition 32) 17.4 National Brain Capital — Connecting Layer Zero to the Human Substrate (Propositions 18, 24, 33, and 34. Section 17.4.5 makes the connection to the procurement of integrated systems) 9 17.6 National Redefinition — Proposition 14 and the Correspondence with the Five Dimensions 17.9 The Future Value of a State — Connection to Future Value Theory 17.10 The Institutional Time Constant — Governance Design at Layer Zero (Propositions 26 and 35) 17.11 The Relative Scarcification of Authentic Data — Rereading the First Indicator of Proposition 4 (Definition 16, Proposition 27) 18. Case Study: Japan — Generalization to Middle Powers (an application, not the purpose of the theory; the same procedure applies to any middle power) 18.3 Establishing the Present Position Empirically — Japan's Position With Respect to AI as a Resource (Proposition 37. Section 18.3.5 treats the reduction of exposure alongside the concentration of dependence) 18.5 What National Brain Capital Consists of in Japan — Four Components and Their Attrition 18.7 Proposition 13 — A Viable Portfolio for Japan 18.11 The Complementarity of the Three-Part Set, and Japan on the Leverage Coordinates (the application of Propositions 22, 23, and 25 to Japan) 18.15 Generalization to Middle Powers — Country-Independent Lessons Extracted from the Analysis of Japan 18.16 Applying the Conditions for an AI Foundry State to Japan — Assessment by the Four Conditions of Proposition 39 (Section 18.16.10 makes explicit that the bargaining power that may be expected lies on the side of desirability and not of indispensability) 19. The Cost of Sovereignty — Scale, Fiscal Capacity, Cost of Capital, and Institutional Coherence (Definition 19; Propositions 30, 31, and 36. The section that treats the costs and constraints carried by this paper's own recommendations) 19.1 Why a Section That Counts Costs Is Required 19.2 Diseconomies of Scale and the Sovereignty Premium (Definition 19, Proposition 30) 19.3 The Fiscal Ceiling 19.4 Frictions in the Cost of Capital and the Inter-Layer Conflict of Interest (Proposition 31) 19.5 The Process of Examining Institutional Coherence (not legal advice) 19.6 Graduated Treatment of Data 19.7 Administrative Capacity Constraints and the Minimum Indicator Set (Proposition 36) 19.8 The Total Cost, and the Part That Remains Justified 20. Objections and Limitations 20.8 The Absence of a Measurement Framework — Erecting Concepts Without Constructing Observables (ten items) 20.9 Incomplete Formalization — Signs Given, Magnitudes Not (nine items) 10 20.10 The Absence of Opportunities for Falsification, and the Thinness of the Evidence (ten items) 20.11 Failure to Reach Design — Where the Paper Stops at Noting a Need (six items) 20.12 Limitations Arising from the Choice of Framework, the Unit of Description, and the Observational Position (twelve items; 47 limitations in Sections 20.8–20.12) 20.14 What This Paper Does Not Cover — A Declaration of Explicit Exclusions (this paper claims no comprehensiveness) 20.15 The Conflict of Interest When a Practitioner Recommends Policies That Bear on His Own Business Opportunities (including an eighth item) 20.16 Acknowledgment of Five Weaknesses 20.17 The Limitations of This Section Itself 21. Conclusion and Research Agenda 21.2 Table 10 — The Map of the Verification of the Propositions (All 42 Numbers, 44 Statements) 21.7 Priorities in the Research Agenda (including the construction of a measurement framework for portability) 21.8 Concluding Remarks 22. References Appendix A. The Nine Cells in Detail (Tables A-1 to A-11) Appendix B. Nuclear–AI Governance Correspondence Table (Tables B-1 to B-2) Appendix C. AI Dependence Audit Protocol (Tables C-1 to C-8) Appendix D. National Diagnostic Checklist (Tables D-1 to D-8) Appendix E. The Cell-Transition Matrix and a Measurement Framework for National Brain Capital (Tables E-1 to E-8. Section E.7 sets out a provisional proposal for measuring portability [Table E-8]) Appendix F. Scenario Monitoring Indicator Table (Tables F-1 to F-5) Appendix G. Geoeconomic Leverage Diagnostic (Tables G-1 to G-7; seven tables, 113 items in total. Section G.9 places the diagnostic for making the interface explicit [Table G-6], Section G.10 the discrimination between lock-in and indispensability [Table G-7], and Section G.11 the order of implementation) Appendix H. Glossary (Japanese–English) (Table H-1. A list of the 21 definitions and the principal concepts) 11 Summary of the Definitions and Propositions (Definitions 10–21, Propositions 15– 42) What follows is a summary of those theoretical instruments used in this paper that are numbered Definitions 10–21 and Propositions 15–42. Definitions 1–9 and Propositions 1–14 are placed in the sections of the main text where they belong, and a list of all definitions appears in Appendix H (Table H-1). Definition 10 (Cell Transition) — Section 15. Defines the movement of the centroid of a state's portfolio weights across the Nine Cells, decomposed into three directions: horizontal (the M axis), vertical (the C axis), and cross-axis. Definition 11 (National Brain Capital) — Section 10. The whole of that part of the human capital of the country in question which AI cannot replicate or transfer at low cost (four components: tacit knowledge on the ground; judgment embedded in language and culture; the professional ethics and practical conventions that make trust in institutions possible; and the capacity for audit and verification grounded in long domain experience). Definition 12 (Value-Definition Capability) — Section 17. The capability to select for oneself the future state to be achieved and to realize it by translating it into allocation of resources, institutional design, and organizational structure. It is distinguished from efficiency in achieving an existing objective. Definition 13 (World Scenarios) — Section 16. Identifies the exogenous states of the world determined by combinations of the mode of advance of AI capability, supply structure, and physical constraints, as three states: [S1] Fragmentation, [S2] Diffusion, and [S3] Stagnation. The three states are neither exclusive nor exhaustive, and different states may hold simultaneously in different sectors and applications. Definition 14 (Leading Indicators) — Section 16. Observables that permit identification of which world scenario is coming into being, before the consequences of that scenario appear. Only those that satisfy three conditions — repeatable observability, discriminating power, and leadingness — are admitted. Definition 15 (Geoeconomic Leverage) — Section 11. Defines the power of a state to realize its own preferences in international negotiation and conflict as having two components: indispensability (the cost and the degree of malfunction that arise if other states attempt to bypass or exclude the state in question) and desirability (the degree to which other states voluntarily seek engagement with it). It is a variable independent of position on the Nine Cells (Definition 3). Definition 16 (Authentic Data) — Section 17. Data generated directly from human action or physical process, whose provenance is verifiable. It is distinguished from synthetic data derived from the outputs of generative models. Its scarcity is determined not by the total volume of what is produced but by the verifiability of provenance. 12 Definition 17 (Trust Infrastructure) — Section 11. The whole of the institutions that, with respect to harm arising from acts that use the outputs of AI, fix in advance where responsibility lies, compensate the harm, and have conformity certified by a third party (three elements: rules for allocating liability, conformity assessment, and insurance). Definition 18 (Feasible Region) — Section 6. The set of positions of value generation on the M axis that a state can in fact occupy at a given capability tier. The feasible region differs by tier; not all nine cells are equally stable occupiable points. Definition 19 (Sovereignty Premium) — Section 19. The difference between the unit price of use for compute, data, and models guaranteed domestically or within an alliance, and the unit price of use if procured from an unconstrained international market. It grows larger the further the guaranteed scale of supply falls below the minimum efficient scale, and for the domestic actors that use it has the character of an effective cost increase, that is, of an insurance premium. Definition 20 (Export of Integrated Systems) — Section 12. Transferring to an external jurisdiction neither AI capability itself nor products produced using AI capability, but the whole of the system that makes capability operable in a particular field of work — the five elements of (i) access to capability, (ii) the design of its incorporation into work processes, (iii) the arrangements for allocating responsibility, (iv) proof of conformity, and (v) the human capacity to operate and verify it. It is distinguished from both the export of capability and the export of products in that it involves embedding within the institutions, work, and personnel of the recipient. Definition 21 (AI Foundry Model) — Section 12 (Section 12.1.6). That configuration among national value models (Definition 3) in which a state does not itself produce frontier capability but procures it from outside, converts it by means of the complementary assets of its own jurisdiction (the four indicators of Proposition 4), national brain capital (Definition 11), and trust infrastructure (Definition 17) into a system operable in a particular field of work, and supplies that system to external jurisdictions as an export of integrated systems (Definition 20). It is thus the type that arises when M2 (the Transformation Model) takes C2 (the frontier tier) capability as its object and chooses integrated systems as the form of its output; a state that adopts this type is called an AI Foundry State. The name derives from the structural correspondence with a semiconductor foundry (a business form that owns not the design but the process capability), but the correspondence is limited to the structure of "taking value at the process stage without holding the design," and the indispensability (Definition 15) that a semiconductor foundry retains through capital specificity and the difficulty of reproducing its processes does not transfer — the bargaining power of an AI Foundry State rests on the side of desirability (Proposition 38). The determination of what transfers is placed in Section 12.1.7 and Table 27. This paper always uses the qualified forms "AI Foundry State" and "AI Foundry Model," and does not use any form lacking the qualifier to denote the type introduced here (Section 13 12.1.6). The type-name used in this paper is unrelated to commercial products or services bearing the same or a similar name in the field of information technology. Proposition 15 (Asymmetry of Cell Transition) — Section 15. Upward transition requires accumulation and has a time constant on the order of years, whereas downward transition occurs passively, through the relative depreciation of accumulations alone. Proposition 16 (Pressure Toward Cross-Axis Transition) — Section 15. A rise in the level of capability generates pressure that irreversibly moves the logic governing the allocation of that capability from economics to national security. Proposition 17 (Diminishing Returns to Efficiency and the Residual of Value-Definition Capability) — Section 17. As capability descends to C1, the competitive advantage of efficiency gains diminishes with the falling cost of imitation, and the residual that makes a difference shifts to value-definition capability (Definition 12). This is the consequence, at the level of the state, of Future Value Theory (2026a). Proposition 18 (The Non-Replicability of National Brain Capital) — Section 10. The defensibility of the transformation margin at the C2 tier depends on the thickness of national brain capital; a strategy that aims at the Transformation Model while lacking national brain capital reduces to transformation without complementary assets (Proposition 4). Proposition 19 (Conditions for a Third Pole) — Section 15. States outside the two poles of the Resource-Producing Model can constitute an independent third pole only where three conditions are satisfied simultaneously: complementarity, mutual guarantees of access, and shared discipline. Proposition 20 (The Existence of No-Regret Actions) — Section 16. The set of investments carrying positive expected value irrespective of which scenario is realized is not empty; it consists of national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, and operational readiness. Owning frontier-class computing infrastructure outright is, by contrast, scenario-dependent. Proposition 21 (Three Constraints on Middle Powers) — Section 14. States that do not belong to the two poles of the Resource-Producing Model are subject in common to three constraints — the energy constraint, the data-sovereignty constraint, and the value-definition constraint — regardless of differences of region, income level, and political system. All three constraints are independent of the level of technological capability. Proposition 22 (The Non-Identity of Position and Leverage) — Section 11. Position on the Nine Cells and geoeconomic leverage are independent variables, and neither can be derived from the other. National strategy has two objective functions: optimization of position and maximization of leverage. Proposition 23 (The Paradox of Leverage Exercise) — Section 11. Indispensability grounded in the holding of a chokepoint depreciates through being exercised. Exercise induces a search for 14 alternatives on the side affected, and indispensability declines to the extent that this search succeeds. Proposition 24 (Self-Erosion of Brain Capital) — Section 17. To the extent that reliance on imported cognitive capability substitutes for the repetition of human practice, national brain capital (Definition 11) wears away and the four indicators of complementary assets in Proposition 4 decline. A strategy that deepens utilization while lacking transformation capability loses the basis for ascent through the very deepening of utilization. Proposition 25 (The Priority of Trust Infrastructure) — Section 11. The depth to which AI is deployed in regulated sectors is bounded above by the level of development of the trust infrastructure (Definition 17) of the jurisdiction in question. Trust infrastructure is a condition prior both to the depth of the Utilization Model (Proposition 5) and to the margin of the Transformation Model (Proposition 4). Proposition 26 (Institutional Time Constant) — Section 17. The effectiveness of governance depends on the ratio of the time an institution requires to reach a decision to the time the capability under control requires to change substantially. It is the general form of Definition 9 (the half-life of the verification anchor) and Proposition 9. Proposition 27 (Relative Scarcification of Authentic Data) — Section 17. As the proportion of public information space occupied by the outputs of generative models rises, the marginal value of authentic data with verifiable provenance (Definition 16) rises. This strengthens the exclusive data endowment of Proposition 4. Proposition 28 (Non-State Actors and the Residual Functions of the State) — Section 11. In domains where the compute, capital, and engineers of private actors exceed those of the state, the functions that the state still supplies irreplaceably converge upon three: legal finality, physical security, and permissions for siting and resources. Proposition 29 (Non-Orthogonality of the Axes and the Feasible Region) — Section 6. The M axis and the C axis are not orthogonal, and the higher the capability tier, the narrower the feasible region (Definition 18) becomes, owing to the rise in the class of externality. Proposition 30 (The Sovereignty Premium and the Lower Bound of Scale) — Section 19. Domestic guarantees enlarge the sovereignty premium (Definition 19) the further the guaranteed scale falls below the minimum efficient scale; they are not justified from the standpoint of efficiency and are justified only as insurance against a stoppage of supply. Proposition 31 (Inter-Layer Conflict of Interest and the Need for Compensation) — Section 19. The redundancy required by Layer Zero lowers capital efficiency at Layer Three. Because the benefits accrue to the system as a whole while the costs are borne by individual actors, this mismatch is not resolved by the market, and the requirement does not hold unless it is designed together with an allocation of that cost. Proposition 32 (Conditions for the Propagation of Value-Definition Capability) — Section 17. For value-definition capability (Definition 12) to be converted into national value, the value that has 15 been defined must be accepted outside the jurisdiction in question, and the channel for this is one of three: market size, incorporation into standards, or connection to existing international frameworks. Proposition 33 (Asymmetry in the Mobility of National Brain Capital) — Section 17. National brain capital (Definition 11) cannot be acquired by import, but can be lost through outflow. Its level is determined by the net increase obtained by subtracting the rate of outflow from the rate of formation. Proposition 34 (Mismatch of Time Scales) — Section 17. The time constant required for the formation of national brain capital exceeds the time constant of change in capability tiers by more than an order of magnitude. The speed at which a complementary good is formed is structurally slower than the speed at which the object it complements changes. Proposition 35 (Hysteresis of Securitization) — Section 17. Once a capability has been placed under the logic of national security, the framework of control is not relaxed at a speed corresponding to any subsequent descent of that capability through the tiers. Cross-axis transition (Proposition 16) proceeds at different speeds on the outward and the return path. Proposition 36 (Administrative Capacity Constraints and the Minimum Set for Monitoring) — Section 19. Implementing a framework of diagnosis and audit consumes administrative capacity. Where administrative capacity is constrained, a requirement of comprehensive monitoring leads to non-implementation, formalism, or delay; a framework must therefore be accompanied by a minimum indicator set to be maintained as a priority under constraints of administrative capacity. Proposition 37 (Reduction of Exposure and Concentration of Dependence) — Section 18. A policy that reduces aggregate exposure (Definition 4) to a given resource does not reduce dependence if supplier concentration rises in the portion that remains. Reduction of exposure and reduction of concentration are separate policy objectives, and a design that pursues only the former may produce the outcome of improvement in the aggregate together with worsening in the degradation that occurs upon interruption. Proposition 38 (Export of Integrated Systems and the Self-Reinforcement of Desirability) — Section 12. The two components of geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15) carry opposite signs with respect to exercise. Indispensability depreciates through being exercised (Proposition 23), whereas the desirability formed through the export of integrated systems appreciates the more it is adopted, because the recipient's conformity investment raises switching costs in proportion to the depth of adoption. Proposition 39 (Conditions for a State That Exports Integrated Systems) — Section 12. The export of integrated systems occurs only where four conditions are satisfied simultaneously: (i) domain-specific national brain capital, (ii) trust infrastructure, (iii) an operating record within the home jurisdiction, and (iv) portability. The most binding is (iv): the capacity to export is 16 determined not by the height of capability but by the looseness of the coupling between capability and the institutions of the home jurisdiction. Proposition 40 (Portfolio of Procurement Modes) — Section 12. Procurement on the importing side has three modes — (A) construction within the home jurisdiction, (B) procurement of capability, and (C) procurement of integrated systems — and the domains to which each is suited are determined by three variables: the severity of the consequences of failure, the domain-specificity of judgment, and reversibility. Because in a domain where (C) is chosen the opportunity to form national brain capital in that domain is lost (Proposition 24), that choice must be made explicitly, domain by domain. Proposition 41 (The Condition Under Which Embedding and Portability Are Compatible) — Section 12 (Section 12.3.7). The institutional embeddedness and linguistic-contextual specificity of Proposition 4 defend the transformation margin, while the portability of Proposition 39(iv) requires separability from the institutions of the home jurisdiction. The two appear to be contradictory requirements, but they coexist only where the system is separated into (a) a jurisdiction- specific layer and (b) a portable core, with the interface between them explicitly defined. In a system whose interface is not made explicit, deeper embedding diminishes portability; in a system whose interface is made explicit, embedding is confined to the outside of the interface and the cost of transplanting the portable core becomes independent of the depth of embedding. What is to be adopted is not the shallowing of embedding but the confinement of the locus of embedding to the outside of the interface. Proposition 42 (Upper Bound of Self-Reinforcement; Lock-in Is Not Indispensability) — Section 12 (Sections 12.5.6–12.5.8). The self-reinforcement of desirability in Proposition 38 is bounded in two respects. (i) Lock-in is not indispensability — indispensability is a property concerning whether a third party can bypass the actor in question, whereas lock-in is a property concerning whether a party already engaged can leave. So long as multiple alternative suppliers exist, the exporting side may hold a strong position in an individual relationship while remaining substitutable within the system; a high level of lock-in is therefore not evidence of indispensability unless it is accompanied by an indicator of supplier concentration. (ii) An upper bound exists through counteraction on the recipient side — because a rise in switching costs simultaneously raises the incentive to institutionalize in-house production, multi-sourcing, and requirements of portability, desirability reaches its upper bound at the point where the recipient prefers to "recover autonomy even at the price of switching costs." The level of that bound is a function of the national brain capital remaining on the recipient side in the domain in question, the existence of alternative suppliers, and the severity of the consequences of failure. The theoretical apparatus of this paper consists of 21 definitions, 42 numbered propositions (44 statements, counting the splits of Proposition 2b and Propositions 6a/6b), and three hypotheses, together with 13 figures and 27 tables in the main text and 51 tables in the appendices (Tables A-1 to A-11, B-1 17 to B-2, C-1 to C-8, D-1 to D-8, E-1 to E-8, F-1 to F-5, G-1 to G-7, and H-1); the map of verification is gathered in Section 21 (Table 10), and the acknowledgment of limitations together with the declaration of what this paper does not cover in Section 20. "Exporting state" and "importing state" denote structural positions specific to a domain, not classifications of states — no assessment is made that a particular jurisdiction can or cannot be an exporting state (the editorial policy of Section 1). With respect to requirements concerning the handling of data, and with respect to platform operators, this paper likewise makes no judgment either about the appropriateness of the requirements or about the operators — what is described extends only to the structural fact that such requirements and such actors exist, and to the consequences this has for portability and for the differentiation of layers (the editorial policy of Section 1). The 2026 supply disruption event is likewise described only as market fact — volumes of supply, volumes of transport, prices, and inventories — without entering into causes, background, or parties. This paper claims no comprehensiveness: stating what it does not treat does not weaken the claims made about what it does treat, but is a procedure for calibrating their strength correctly. 18 2. Introduction The intended readership of this paper. This paper is written with all states outside the two poles of the Resource-Producing Model — the small number of states that produce frontier-class AI capability within their own territory — in view. The readers specifically envisaged are, first, the policymakers of such states: those responsible for industrial policy, energy policy, economic security, and digital policy, who must decide where their own country stands with respect to AI as an input, which constraints bind it, and which accumulations it should prioritize. Second, those responsible for strategy at multinational firms, who must assess how the conditions of AI access, the regulation of data, and the constraints on electricity in each jurisdiction where they operate delimit the set of redefinition options open to the firm. Third, international organizations: those in a position to design multilateral frameworks for the allocation of access, the verification of capability, and the guarantee of supply. Fourth, academic readers who study national strategy, international political economy, and technology governance. This specification of readership carries one implication. The framework of this paper is not specific to any one country. The Nine-Cell Matrix, the dynamics of cell transition, the assessment of the transplantability of critical-tier governance, and the identification of value-definition capability and national brain capital as the substrate are all constructed so as to be applicable by the same procedure — whether to a middle power in Europe, an oil-producing state in the Gulf, an industrial state in East Asia, a hub state in Southeast Asia, or a populous state of the Global South. This paper treats Japan in detail in Section 18 because Japan is the country whose primary sources the author can approach in greatest detail, not because the purpose of the theory lies in the analysis of Japan. So that readers may perform the same work for their own country or firm, the diagnostic instruments have been separated from the main text and placed in the appendices: Appendix D (National Diagnostic Checklist) gives the procedure for identifying present position, target position, and missing accumulations; Appendix E (The Cell-Transition Matrix and a Measurement Framework for National Brain Capital) gives the measurement of transition possibilities and of national brain capital and value-definition capability; and Appendix F (Scenario Monitoring Indicator Table) gives quarterly monitoring of the leading indicators of the world scenarios — each in an operable form. It is possible to begin from the appendices without reading the main text; in that case, however, it should be noted that the interpretation of the diagnostic results depends on the propositions of the main text. 19 2.1 The Autumn of 1973 — Making Dependence Visible and the Redefinition of a National Model This paper begins from a single historical case. It is presented, however, not as the story of a particular country but as a general case in which an external resource shock forced the redefinition of a national value model. The oil crisis of 1973 is the most fully documented instance of the half-century that followed, and almost all of the structures with which this paper is concerned are contained in it: dependence on a general-purpose input, supplier concentration, the correlation of supply interruptions, the lag in measuring dependence, and institutionalization as a response. What matters is the fact that responses to the same shock diverged systematically across countries. Importing countries redesigned their conversion efficiency and their input mix (the Japanese example examined below); groups of importing countries jointly constructed multilateral buffer institutions (the IEA and national strategic stockpiles); and producing countries diverged to opposite outcomes according to whether or not they possessed fiscal institutions for converting production flows into permanent stocks (the contrast between Norway and Venezuela, Section 4). Readers may read what follows by substituting their own country's response — or non-response — to past resource shocks. What this section follows in greatest detail is the Japanese response, but that is a choice dictated by the availability of sources and does not imply the superiority of that response as a type. A detailed analysis of the Japanese response is placed in Section 18 (the case study); this section extracts only its structure. In October 1973, following the 1973 supply disruption event, oil-producing states in the Middle East restricted the supply of crude oil and raised prices substantially. This is what is known as the first oil shock. The position Japan occupied at that time is worth confirming in figures. In fiscal 1973, oil accounted for 75.5% of Japan's domestic supply of primary energy. Moreover, dependence on the Middle East within its crude oil imports reached 77.5% (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). The energy self-sufficiency ratio had fallen sharply from 58.1% in fiscal 1960 over the course of the high-growth period, and Japan had built the world's second-largest economy within a structure that depended on foreign sources — and on one particular region — for nearly all of the basic inputs of its economy. Holding no oil fields at home, importing crude oil, and turning it into export value through a chain of transformation running from refining to petrochemicals, steel, shipbuilding, and automobiles, the postwar Japanese processing-trade model was a national value model that took an extreme form of "zero production, specialization in transformation." This structure was not the product of accident but of choice. Postwar Japan's energy transition — the fuel switch from domestic coal to imported oil — was a choice of industrial policy that, on the premise of cheap and stable Middle Eastern crude, sited industrial complexes along the coast and built an agglomeration of transformation running from refining to materials and from materials to final goods. The sharp fall in self-sufficiency is the obverse of that choice. In place of self-sufficiency from domestic resources, the country

built the most efficient transformation system in the world. To one imported barrel of crude, it added the value of refining, chemicals, steel, and machinery, and through exports earned the foreign currency to buy the next barrel. This model functioned remarkably well through the 1960s, and for that very reason dependence continued to deepen. The depth of dependence was a function of the model's success. This point is suggestive for the theme of this paper. Dependence on AI, too, becomes deeper the more successfully a country or a firm uses it. Avoiding dependence and creating value are not straightforwardly compatible. The question is not whether there is dependence but how dependence is designed. What the oil shock confronted Japan with was not merely a rise in prices. It was the making visible of a vulnerability that a Transformation Model national model carries structurally — the transformer holds no upstream. If producing countries tighten supply, the chain of transformation stops at its entrance. This crisis, which remains in popular memory as the panic buying of toilet paper, made unavoidable, at the level of the state, the question of what one's own model of value creation depends upon for its existence. And what deserves attention is that Japan's response to this question was not the acquisition of upstream assets (the acquisition of oil fields) but the redesign of the model itself. The response can be traced as a sequence of institutions. In 1973 the Petroleum Supply and Demand Optimization Act was enacted, establishing a framework for government intervention in times of shortage. In 1978, under the "90-Day Stockpile Expansion Plan," the national oil stockpile was begun. The Act on the Rational Use of Energy of 1979 introduced efficiency regulation for factories, transport, and buildings, and the Act on the Promotion of the Development and Introduction of Petroleum Alternative Energy of 1980 promoted the development of substitutes for oil (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). Internationally, the International Energy Agency (IEA) was established in 1974 in response to the crisis of 1973, and member countries assumed an obligation to hold oil stocks equivalent to at least 90 days of net imports (IEA, n.d.). Against a cartel on the supply side, the demand side jointly constructed an institution for buying time. The outcome of this sequence of institutionalization can likewise be confirmed quantitatively. Dependence on oil within primary energy fell from 75.5% in fiscal 1973 to 36.0% in fiscal 2021. The primary energy required to generate one trillion yen of GDP was halved, from 70 PJ in fiscal 1973 to 35 PJ in fiscal 2021 (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). Japan, that is, redesigned the structure of its dependence — without changing the condition of having no production of its own — by three pillars: (1) a doubling of conversion efficiency (energy conservation), (2) diversification of inputs (moving away from oil), and (3) institutionalization of buffers (stockpiling). Oil stocks today stand on three legs — national stocks, private-sector stocks, and joint stocks with producing countries — totaling 254 days (as of the end of December 2025: 146 days of national stocks, 101 days of privatesector stocks, and 7 days of joint stocks with producing countries; 214 days on the IEA basis), a level institutionalized well above the IEA's 90-day standard (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026b). 21 It is also necessary, for the analysis that follows, to add the perspective of the supply side. What made the "oil weapon" of 1973 possible was the framework of production management under OPEC (the Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries), established in 1960. OPEC is a cartel that manages supply by allocating production quotas to its members, and since 2016 it has operated in expanded form as OPEC+, with the addition of nonmember producing countries including Russia. Its scale remains large: as of 2022, OPEC accounted for approximately 38% of world crude oil production and OPEC+ for approximately 59% (EIA, 2023). Yet the history of oil shows at the same time that supply management on the production side has structural limits. In the first half of the 1980s, Saudi Arabia supported prices as a "swing producer" by cutting its own output, but continued to lose share as other members exceeded their quotas and non-OPEC supply increased; at the end of 1985 it abandoned that role and moved to increase production, and in 1986 oil prices collapsed. This is a case in which the internal instability of a cartel lacking legal means to enforce compliance with quotas was exposed (Griffin & Neilson, 1994). In March 2020, a breakdown between Saudi Arabia and Russia over coordinated production cuts coincided with a collapse in demand and brought a sharp fall in oil prices; in April of the same year OPEC+ resolved the situation with a coordinated cut of approximately 9.7 million barrels per day, the largest on record. Producing countries hold short-term pricing power over transforming and utilizing countries, but over the long run that power is eroded by adaptation on the demand side — conservation, substitution, and new supply. This general proposition — that the bargaining power of resource holdings depreciates at the speed of the demand side's adaptation — is inscribed most sharply in the fact that the crisis of 1973 itself produced Japan's energy-conservation revolution and the IEA's network of stockpiles. Institutionalization on the demand side was not confined to Japan. The United States established the Strategic Petroleum Reserve (SPR) under the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (EPCA) of 1975. Its maximum storage capacity reaches approximately 714 million barrels, and at the time of the 2022 supply disruption event a release of 180 million barrels — the largest on record — was carried out (Bipartisan Policy Center, n.d.). Coordinated releases by the IEA number six since its establishment: the 1991 supply disruption event, the hurricanes of 2005, the 2011 supply disruption event, two releases at the time of the 2022 supply disruption event, and the release at the time of the 2026 supply disruption event (IEA, n.d.). Over half a century, the risk of oil supply was institutionalized from "an unmanaged vulnerability that shook markets at every crisis" into "a managed vulnerability absorbed by stockpiles, coordinated releases, and diversification." The concern of this paper is how far, and subject to what modifications, this half-century of institutionalization can be repeated for AI — or cannot. Types of response existed not only on the importing side. Responses on the producing side likewise diverged in outcome according to institutions. Norway established the Government Petroleum Fund (now the Government Pension Fund Global) by a law of 1990 and made the first transfer of oil revenues in 1996, fixing at an early stage — around the point at which revenues began in earnest — a fiscal institution for converting the flow of pro‐ 22 duction into a permanent stock. What fiscal policy may use is limited to a portion corresponding to the expected real return of the fund, and the channel by which fluctuations in production are transmitted directly to the domestic economy is institutionally interrupted. By contrast, in countries that were likewise of the Resource-Producing Model but lacked fiscal institutions and investment circuits, revenues from production were absorbed into distributive politics, and production itself was not converted into long-term national value (the contrast between Norway and Venezuela is treated in Sections 4 and 6). Whichever of the positions — Resource-Producing, Transformation, or Utilization — a country occupied, responses to the shock diverged according not to the resource itself but to institutions. This is the most general observation that can be extracted from 1973. Readers may therefore read what follows by substituting the history of their own country. A middle power in Europe may substitute the industrial adjustment of the 1970s and its corporatist compensation arrangements; an oil-producing country, the fiscal institutionalization of production revenues and plans for diversification; an industrial state in East Asia, fuel switching and energy-conservation regulation; a later-developing importing country, the absence of allocation institutions at times of supply interruption. Each can be placed under one and the same question: with what did their own country respond to an external resource shock? The question this paper poses about AI is the present-tense form of that question — what does one's own country now hold, as an institution, against dependence on AI as an input? It should also be noted, however, that this redesign was not a complete escape from dependence. Dependence on the Middle East within crude oil imports fell to 68.8% in fiscal 1985, but subsequently rose again and has remained high, at 94.7% in fiscal 2023 (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). The crisis response of a Transformation Model state was not the elimination of dependence but the management of dependence — an explicit design of which dependencies to accept, which to insure against, and which to disperse. This paper places that experience of half a century ago at its opening not out of nostalgia. It does so because it is the most fully documented precedent for a situation in which the structure of dependence on a strategic resource governs a state's model of value creation, and in which changes in the structure of supply force the redefinition of the national model. Three lessons that orient the whole of this paper's analysis may be extracted in advance from the experience of 1973. The first lesson is that dependence is not measured until a crisis. The figures of fiscal 1973 — 75.5% dependence on oil, 77.5% dependence on the Middle East — existed in the statistics before the crisis. But they acquired political meaning as "measurements of national vulnerability" only after supply was actually threatened. Putting in place a framework for measuring dependence before a crisis determines the speed and quality of the response to it — this lesson is the reason this paper places the measurement of AI dependence (Definition 4 and Hypothesis H1) at the center of its theory. The second lesson is that a response to a crisis may be the redesign of a model rather than the acquisition of a resource. Japan did not answer the crisis by 23 buying oil fields; it answered by redesigning the internal variables of its own model — conversion efficiency, input mix, and buffers. The strategic space of a state without resources is not limited to entry into competition for the acquisition of resources. The third lesson is that institutionalization takes decades. From the crisis of 1973 to the beginning of stockpiling (1978), the Energy Conservation Act (1979), and the Alternative Energy Act (1980), five to seven years elapsed; reaching the level at which dependence on oil was halved (36.0%) took half a century. If institutionalization of the same kind becomes necessary for AI, that time is being consumed now. 2.2 The Mapping Half a Century Later — AI as a Candidate Resource The point of departure of this paper is a simple observation. Artificial intelligence (AI), and in particular large foundation models and the compute that supports them, appears to be coming to occupy a position within national economies structurally similar to that of oil half a century ago. AI is not a tool of a particular industry; it is increasingly taking on the character of a general-purpose input that governs productivity across broad sectors of the economy. Its supply — the development of frontier-level models and the computing infrastructure that supports them — is concentrated in a small number of countries and a small number of firms, and for the great majority of states the supply of AI capability is dependent on foreign sources. Many countries, Japan among them, record a persistent "deficit in the digital-related balance" as payment for cloud services, software, and AI services, and the balance-of-payments structure of an AI-importing country already displays a form isomorphic to that of oil imports. The path of dependence once borne by crude oil tankers is now borne by submarine cables and data centers: such is the mapping. This paper does not, however, adopt that mapping uncritically. On the contrary, the central methodological claim of this paper is that the proposition "AI is the new oil" does not hold as it stands. The scarcity of oil is the scarcity of a stock in the form of reserves, whereas AI models are replicable and what is scarce is a flow of productive capacity — compute, electricity, and people. Oil disappears when burned; data and models are not exhausted by use. An oil analogy that ignores this divergence risks importing into policy inferences that do not transfer, such as stockpiling, production quotas, and reserve volumes. Conversely, to discard the analogy wholesale on the ground of that divergence would be to throw away inferential assets that do transfer: the structural theory of trade and dependence, and the institutional objective of buying time against interruptions of supply. What transfers extends to that institutional objective and no further; the institutional means by which it was realized (stockpiling through physical storage) does not transfer — and this separation of objective from means is itself a product of the discipline (Proposition 1, Section 3). What is required is neither the adoption nor the discarding of the analogy, but a "discipline of analogy" that states explicitly which properties transfer and which do not (Section 3). Passed through this discipline, AI appears not as a single resource but as a bundle of three tiers, each bearing different resource characteristics by capability tier. This paper 24 distinguishes the tiers by a single observable, capability distance from the frontier (Definition 2, Section 5). The commodity tier (C1), far from the frontier and with substitutes meeting the required level available in multiple jurisdictions, corresponds in part to market goods of the oil and electricity type; the frontier tier (C2), at the frontier or within a short lag width of it, concentrated among a few suppliers and subject to export controls, corresponds in part to managed strategic materials; and the critical tier (C3), exceeding the frontier by more than a prescribed threshold, corresponds in part to objects of nuclear- type control. What matters here is that market structure and governance form are not contained in the definition — which governance form each tier is placed under is not a consequence of the definition but a claim about an empirical covariation with capability distance as the independent variable (Proposition 2), and for C3 the shift to nuclear-type governance is a prediction (Proposition 2b). C3 is, moreover, an unrealized anticipatory category as of the time of writing, and whether and when it arrives is an empirical question (Section 5). When this differentiation into three tiers intersects with the state's own model of value creation — whether it produces, transforms, or utilizes the resource — the description of national value models, for which three types sufficed in the oil era, differentiates into a matrix of nine cells. This is the theoretical skeleton of this paper. Further, as AI is embedded in the critical processes of society, it takes on the character of critical infrastructure resembling electricity. The new systemic risk that arises there is what this paper calls "AI outage" (a coinage of this paper, formed in correspondence with power outage in electricity) — a correlated stoppage of the supply of AI services caused by technical failure, commercial decision, or geopolitical measure (Definition 4, Section 13). Whereas power outages are localized geographically, the concentration of AI suppliers is global, and so an AI outage may be correlated across borders and across sectors. What can a state that began a national oil stockpile in 1978 "stockpile" with respect to AI in the 2020s? Unlike oil, a stockpile of AI capability depreciates at the speed of the frontier's advance (Proposition 8, Section 13). What is to be guaranteed domestically is therefore not the frontier of capability but three functions that sustain the degraded operation of critical processes when external supply has stopped: operational capacity, renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition (Definition 6, Section 13). This asymmetry is precisely why the institutions of oil cannot be copied across as they are, and at the same time why the experience of oil's institutional design — the 90-day standard, coordinated release, priority allocation — should be consulted as a starting point. The Nine Cells are not, however, a static classification. The centroid of a state's portfolio weights moves in three directions: horizontal (the position of value generation), vertical (the capability tier addressed), and cross-axis (from the logic of economics to the logic of national security) (Definition 10, Section 15). This movement has an asymmetry. Upward transition requires the accumulation of complementary assets, national brain capital, computing infrastructure, and electricity, and its time constant is on the order of years, longer than the time constant of policy decision. Downward transition, by contrast, requires no accumulation and occurs passively, through nothing more than the relative depreciation of existing accumulations (Proposition 15, Section 15). A Transformation Model 25 state is therefore permanently placed at the branching point between ascent through producing higher-tier capability itself and a fall through deepening dependence, and the physical constraints of electricity and compute tilt that branch downward. In addition, a rise in the level of capability generates pressure that irreversibly moves the logic governing the allocation of that capability from economics to national security (Proposition 16, Section 15); and for a capability in which cross-axis transition has occurred, availability becomes a function not of price and quality but of political position. These dynamics move the focus of competition itself. Through Frontier Descent, a capability at the frontier at one moment descends within a few years to a level procurable from multiple jurisdictions, and efficiency gains using the descended capability become attainable by anyone. Since advantage dissipates as the cost of imitation falls, the more AI diffuses, the more the residual that makes a difference between states and between firms shifts away from how cheaply and quickly a given objective is achieved and toward the capability to select what is to be aimed at and to realize it (value-definition capability, Definition 12) (Proposition 17, Section 17). This consequence bears directly on policy design: to design AI policy as efficiency policy is to concentrate resources on a diminishing residual, and is a systematic error. On the other hand, differences also remain on the side of the substrate. AI capability can be imported, but tacit knowledge on the ground, judgment embedded in language and culture, the professional ethics that make trust in institutions possible, and the capacity for audit grounded in long domain experience cannot be imported. This paper calls the whole of this non-importable portion national brain capital (Definition 11, Section 10) — the term denotes the stock of such capital located within the jurisdiction; it refers neither to nationality nor to ethnic identity, and implies no claim about who may hold it — and places it as the substrate of the defensibility of the transformation margin where the Transformation Model is viable at the C2 tier (Proposition 18, Section 10). When efficiency is no longer anyone's advantage, what remains is the power to decide what to aim at, and the layer of people that sustains it. None of the apparatus set out so far presupposes any particular country. This paper rather binds it together to formulate the constraints borne in common by states outside the two poles of the Resource-Producing Model — hereafter middle powers. There are three constraints. First, the energy constraint: the expansion of computing infrastructure is ratelimited by electricity supply and grid development, and a country that cannot procure these domestically cannot maintain the higher tiers of the Resource-Producing or Transformation Models. Second, the data-sovereignty constraint: a country that cannot itself design the conditions on which the data of its language, its industry, and its administration are handed over to foreign infrastructure is structurally impeded in forming complementary assets. Third, the value-definition constraint: a country that limits the purpose of introducing AI to efficiency gains is maximizing a diminishing variable within a structure in which the competitive advantage of efficiency diminishes (Proposition 17). These three constraints operate regardless of differences of region, income level, and political system, and are independent of the level of technological capability (Proposition 21, Section 14). Cases in which a technologically advanced country is bound by one of the 26 three constraints, and cases in which a technologically later-developing country satisfies all three, are both possible — and it is precisely this non-correspondence that shows the systematic error of reading national AI strategy as a "ranking table of technological levels." Section 14 illustrates this commonality across ten country profiles. Finally, it is worth stating in advance what this paper does not do. This paper makes no predictions. It does, however, supply instruments of identification. There are at least three branches in the mode of advance of AI capability: [S1] Fragmentation (a world in which the advance of the frontier continues to depend on large-scale compute, supplier concentration is maintained, the allocation of capability is taken into the logic of national security, and electricity and compute are rate-limiting); [S2] Diffusion (a world in which open-weight and small models come to meet the requirement levels of applications at the edge, the effective significance of capability distance shrinks, and supplier concentration moves toward dissolution); and [S3] Stagnation (a world in which the advance of capability meets diminishing returns, the increment of capability per additional investment falls below the opportunity cost of that investment, and AI capability is leveled into a generalpurpose tool) (Definition 13, Section 16). Optimal national investment differs according to which branch is realized. This paper does not state which will occur and instead supplies two things: leading indicators (Definition 14) that identify the progress of a branch before its consequences appear, and a set of no-regret actions carrying positive expected value in all three branches. The result that the latter consists of national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, and operational readiness (Proposition 20) indicates that the substrate derived theoretically in this paper also withstands a crossscenario robustness check. Conversely, owning frontier-class computing infrastructure outright is scenario-dependent: it has high value under S1, but under S2 it is overinvestment and under S3 a stranded asset. At a stage where scenarios are hard to identify, the priority of investment should be decided not by the height of expected value but by robustness across scenarios — which corresponds not to guessing the future price of a resource but to fixing in advance a configuration that does not lose money at any price. As an empirical anchor for the mapping, attention should be drawn to the structure of the balance of payments. Japan's vulnerability in 1973 was, in the last analysis, a balance-ofpayments structure in which payment for a basic input flowed continuously outward. Japan today records a persistent deficit in the digital-related services balance, in the form of fees for cloud services, software licenses, and AI services. Each individual transaction is a rational procurement choice by a firm, but their accumulation forms a structure in which the national economy pays continuously outward for AI as an input — a structure isomorphic to oil imports. What differs from oil is that this payment has not yet been thematized politically as "dependence," and that the level and continuity of the capability obtained in return for the payment depend on variables on the supply side: price, terms of service, and export controls. The digital-balance deficit is not in itself proof of a problem — if the productivity gains from utilization exceed the payments, it is a good bargain. Here the level of measurement should be made clear. What the total of external payments measures is exposure (the scale and share of external procurement of AI inputs); it meas‐ 27 ures neither dependence (degradation upon interruption) nor a transfer of rents to producing countries (Definition 4, Proposition 5). The digital-related deficit can therefore be read as an empirical anchor showing that the scale of external procurement of AI inputs has already reached a level isomorphic to oil imports, but it is not in itself an indicator for judging the success or failure of policy. The indicator to be used for that judgment is not the size of the deficit but domestic value added per yen of digital procurement — the mapping of the role played by the improvement in energy intensity after 1973. The problem lies in the degree to which a country cannot control the terms of this transaction, that is, in the absence of a design of dependence. This point is treated in detail, in the Japanese context, in Section 18. It should be signaled here that the analogies of this paper are not limited to oil. This paper refers to three historical resource regimes: oil, electricity, and nuclear technology. What oil gives is the structural theory of trade and dependence, and the institutional objective of buffers — the vulnerability of importing countries, supply-side cartels and their limits, and the policy objective of buying time against interruptions of supply (the means, physical storage, does not transfer). What electricity gives is a theory of infrastructure: reliability as a grid, universal service, the social cost of outages, and the regulation of natural monopoly. What nuclear technology gives is a theory of critical-tier governance: the design of international regimes of verification, nonproliferation, and stabilization. These three are not mutually exclusive alternatives. On this paper's reading, AI has three faces at once, according to capability tier. The commodity tier is traded like oil and electricity; the frontier tier is controlled like a managed strategic material; and the critical tier, if it arrives, is required to be managed like nuclear technology. The dispute over choosing a single analogy — "is AI oil, electricity, or nuclear?" — is, within this paper's framework, mistaken in the very way the question is posed; the correct question is which properties of which resource correspond to which tier of AI. The methodological justification of this division is the task of Section 3. As the basic concepts underlying this outline, this paper defines "general-purpose input" and the "strategic character" that is measured as a matter of degree upon it, as follows. There is a reason this definition takes a two-level structure — a basal distinction, the general-purpose input, and strategic character riding upon it as a matter of degree. As shown below, even for one and the same input, the height of strategic character differs greatly according to which capability level is meant. 28 Definition 1 (General-Purpose Input and Strategic Character) A general-purpose input is (i) an input that governs productivity across broad sectors of the economy. The strategic character (strategicness) of a general-purpose input is the degree to which three properties hold of that input: (ii) foreign dependence of supply; (iii) that an interruption of supply degrades the output of the national economy within a short period (infrastructural criticality); and (iv) that the level of holding of, and access to, the input governs the gap in capability between states. Strategic character is not a physical property of a resource; it is determined by the relation to the economic structure of the era, and by which capability level of the input in question is meant (historical relativity and tier relativity). A general-purpose input for which (ii), (iii), and (iv) all hold at a high level is called a strategic general-purpose resource. Strategic character is not a binary attribution but a matter of degree, and one and the same input may have different strategic character at different capability levels. Let the basal property (i) of Definition 1 and the three properties of strategic character be set against the oil of 1973 and the AI of today. On the basal property (general-purpose input character): the oil of 1973 had entered the cost structure of virtually every industry, in the form of electricity, transport, materials (petrochemicals), and heat. AI today is entering cross-industry work processes in the form of document preparation, translation, code generation, image analysis, and decision support. The depth of penetration has not yet reached the level of oil, but the breadth of penetration — that it is not confined to particular industries — is already observed. In this sense AI is coming to satisfy the requirement of a general-purpose input, and all the questions that follow become questions of degree: at which level, and how high, is its strategic character? On the first property of strategic character (foreign dependence of supply): for Japan in 1973, 77.5% of oil supply depended on the Middle East. Today, the developers of frontier-level foundation models and the agglomeration of computing infrastructure that supports them are unevenly distributed across a small number of countries, and for the great majority of states, including Japan, the supply of frontier AI capability is dependent on foreign sources. On the other hand, for capability levels at which already published weights can be self-hosted, this property attenuates greatly. On the second property (infrastructural criticality): in 1973, restrictions on the supply of oil propagated to industrial production and prices on a timescale of months. For AI, the channels by which an interruption of supply causes degradation of output can be specified theoretically (Section 13), but their depth and speed have not yet been verified at scale — a verification design using failure events in cloud and AI services as natural experiments is presented as Hypothesis H3. On the third property (governing the gap in capability): the holding of and access to oil was a principal axis of inter-state disparity in the twentieth century. Whether the level of access to AI governs the gap in capability between states is precisely the theme of this paper as a whole, and is examined tier by tier from Section 5 onward. 29 The point of this definition is that strategic character is not a binary attribution but a matter of degree, and that this degree is relative in two ways. The first relativity is historical. In the nineteenth century oil was no more than a feedstock for lamp oil; it took on high strategic character only once the internal combustion engine and petrochemicals were placed at the base of the economy. Likewise, the height of AI's strategic character depends not on the technical properties of AI itself but on how far each national economy embeds AI in its critical processes. The second relativity is tiered. The bundle of capabilities called by the single word "AI" does not have a single strategic character — at capability levels that anyone can procure from suppliers in multiple jurisdictions, (ii), (iii), and (iv) all remain at low levels, while at capability levels close to the frontier, (ii) and (iv) are high and (iii) rises as a function of dependence. The question "is AI a strategic general-purpose resource?" is thus neither a static problem of classification nor a choice between two answers, but an empirical question of degree: for which capability level, at which point in time, and to what degree does strategic character hold? The position of this paper is that AI is coming to satisfy the basal requirement of a general-purpose input; that its strategic character is high at capability levels close to the frontier and low at levels distant from it; and that AI cannot therefore be argued to be "a strategic resource" or "not a strategic resource" as a whole, but only measured in degree after a tier has been specified. This tier-by-tier difference of degree is the theme of the capability tiers formulated in Section 5 (Definition 2) and of their covariation with governance form (Proposition 2). Whether an interruption is accompanied by actual degradation of output is a matter for verification, and this paper presents the verification designs themselves as Hypotheses H1 to H3 (Section 21). 2.3 Research Questions The research question of this paper is as follows. According to which of the resource characteristics of oil, electricity, and nuclear technology AI takes on, how do national models of value creation differentiate, and what institutions become the conditions of viability for each cell? This question decomposes into four sub-problems. First, the problem of analogy. Which inferences from the three historical resource regimes of oil, electricity, and nuclear technology transfer to AI, and which do not? This is not a problem of rhetoric but of methodology. When a state formulates an AI strategy, it necessarily relies on some historical analogy, whether explicitly or tacitly. If the choice of analogy is left tacit, policy is governed by unverifiable intuition. Section 3 formulates this problem by decomposing analogy into a bundle of properties and constructing a correspondence table (Table 1) that judges transferability item by item. Second, the problem of differentiation. How are the national value models of the oil era — the Resource-Producing Model (M1), which obtains value by producing a resource; the Transformation Model (M2), which obtains value by procuring and transforming a re‐ 30 source; and the Utilization Model (M3), which obtains value by inputting a resource to amplify other value — mapped onto the age of AI? This paper's answer is a differentiation into nine cells as the product with the three AI capability tiers (C1/C2/C3) (Sections 6–9). The cells are mutually non-equivalent in the institutions, investments, and personnel they require, in the mode of value expected, and in their characteristic modes of failure (Proposition 3, Section 6), and national strategy becomes a portfolio choice over the Nine Cells rather than the selection of a single cell. Third, the problem of conditions of viability. What are the institutional conditions for a state to be viable in each cell? This paper explores three situations in particular. The conditions of viability of the Transformation Model (M2): the refining margin of oil was physically defensible, but AI producers can internalize the portion of the value added of the application layer that reduces to general-purpose functions, by the route of standard inclusion in the next generation of models at a marginal cost of nearly zero. The cost of internalizing the portions consisting of integration into work processes, regulatory compliance, and assumption of responsibility is not zero. What is structurally compressed is therefore the transformation margin that reduces to general-purpose functions, and not the transformation margin protected by integration cost (Proposition 4, Section 7). The guarantee of supply where AI has become critical infrastructure: the design of a sovereign minimum guarantee level against AI outage, and the asymmetry with oil that stockpiles depreciate (Section 13). And governance for the case in which the critical tier arrives: which elements of the nuclear control regime are transplantable and which are not (Section 9). Fourth, the problem of leverage. The Nine Cells describe the mode of value generation but do not describe whether a state can push back when its conditions are changed from outside. These two are not the same variable. One state may sit in the Utilization Model and yet hold a point of passage such that a producer's production plans cease to be feasible; another may sit close to production and yet be one with which other states have little desire to engage. This paper therefore introduces a second axis: geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15), consisting of two components — indispensability, the cost and the degree of malfunction that arise if other states attempt to bypass or exclude the state in question, and desirability, the degree to which other states voluntarily seek engagement with it. In this paper, "desirability" denotes the observed propensity of other states to seek engagement, and carries no normative evaluation. Position and leverage are distinct variables, and neither can be derived from the other (Proposition 22). As a consequence, national strategy has two objective functions — the capture of transformation value (optimization of position) and resilience against externally imposed changes of condition (maximization of leverage) — and the two do not necessarily call for the same policies. The two components also differ in their mode of depreciation. Indispensability grounded in the holding of a chokepoint does not depreciate while it is held, and begins to depreciate the moment it is exercised — exercise induces on the affected side a search for alternatives, in the form of building inventories, designing bypasses, developing substitute sources of supply, and investing in domestic production, and the indispens‐ 31 ability of that chokepoint itself declines to the extent that the search succeeds (Proposition 23). On the side of desirability there is no such paradox: conformity investment in a set of rules is sunk with each exercise and reinforces desirability. Indispensability is an asset to be conserved; desirability is an asset to be exercised continuously — this asymmetry is the central finding that Section 11 adds to this paper. Two points should be made clear about how the question is posed. First, this paper makes no predictions. It takes no position as a prophet on the timing of C3's arrival, the outcome of frontier development, or the success or failure of particular countries. What it does is conditional design analysis — analysis of the form "if X holds, Y follows, and institution Z becomes necessary." Yet making no predictions is not an abandonment of usefulness. In place of prediction, what this paper supplies is identification: a framework for discerning by leading indicators (Definition 14) which world (Definition 13) is coming into being, and a set of actions carrying positive expected value whichever world is realized (Proposition 20) (Section 16). The attitude of deferring judgment on the ground that prediction is impossible, and the attitude of holding a framework for judging without predicting, are entirely different things. Second, this paper does not discuss "winning and losing" among states. States, unlike firms, do not go bankrupt, and trade is not zero-sum. What this paper treats is not a ranking of victory and defeat but the structure of the creation, transformation, and capture of value; the policies of each country are described not as "superior or inferior" but as "position and constraint" (the theoretical grounds for this discipline are discussed in Sections 3 and 4). A word about the unit of analysis. The unit of analysis in this paper is the state. This choice carries a conscious limitation. The methodological criticism that analysis taking the national economy as its unit cannot hold in an era of global value chains is legitimate, and indeed the supply chain of AI — semiconductor design, manufacturing equipment, foundries, cloud, model development, applications — is thoroughly cross-border. The state is nevertheless placed at the center for three reasons. First, the institutions that actually govern the structure of AI supply — export controls, access controls, stockpiling obligations, electricity permitting — are triggered with the state (and its alliances) as the unit. Second, the risk of supply interruption is ultimately borne by the national economy, and the cost of an AI outage becomes manifest at the level of the state. Third, the distribution of conditions to the three lower layers of this series (capital, society, enterprise) takes place through the national mediations of jurisdiction, currency, and language. This paper does not, however, treat the state as a monolithic actor. A state's cell position is formed not only by the choices of government but also by the accumulated choices of firms that locate — or do not locate — within it. This interaction of government and firms is treated explicitly within the analysis of each cell (Sections 7–9). Finally, why pose this question now? There are three reasons. First, the formation of dependence is beginning to take on irreversibility. The speed at which firms and administrations in each country embed AI services in their work processes exceeds the speed at which institutions guaranteeing supply are designed, and, as was the case for Japan in 32 1973, dependence tends not to be measured until the moment of a crisis that makes it visible. A framework for measuring dependence (Hypothesis H1, Appendix C) acquires meaning only if it is put in place before a crisis. Second, the system of control on the supply side is in a formative period. Frameworks of export control and access control for frontier capability are currently under construction (Section 5), and choices about which country stands in which cell during this formative period carry a high cost of subsequent change. Third, institutional argument concerning the critical tier can be designed relatively free of interests only now, while its object is unrealized. What the history of the nuclear control regime shows is that institutional design after possession has become a fait accompli necessarily carries the asymmetry of fixing what has already been acquired (Proposition 10, Section 9). The proposition of the series that "a system is not an age that arrives but a contingency that is constructed" (Kadowaki, 2026g) carries its greatest weight precisely at Layer Zero. One convention of notation. In what follows, the three types of national value model are abbreviated as M1 (Resource-Producing), M2 (Transformation), and M3 (Utilization); the three AI capability tiers as C1 (commodity tier), C2 (frontier tier), and C3 (critical tier); and cells formed by their product are written in the form "M2×C2" (the formal definitions are Definition 3, Section 6, and Definition 2, Section 5). In addition, the portfolio component that modifies the postwar Japanese Transformation Model to the conditions of AI is written "M2′" (Section 18). In each section that refers to C3, the series' descriptive discipline of stating at the head of that section that C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category as of the time of writing is applied. 2.4 The Contributions of This Paper The contributions of this paper may be organized into eight points. Contribution 1: Turning the discipline of analogy into a methodology (Section 3). Resource analogies, of which "data is the new oil" is representative, have become a commonplace of policy discourse since the phrase was coined in 2006, while academically they have drawn strong criticism from the standpoints of nonrivalry and non-exhaustibility. Existing debate has tended toward a choice between defending and discarding the analogy. As a third way, this paper decomposes analogy into a bundle of about twelve properties and formulates as a methodology a correspondence table (Table 1) that judges, item by item, which properties of oil, electricity, and nuclear technology transfer to which capability tier of AI and which do not. Resource analogy is thereby turned from rhetoric into a verifiable analytical instrument. Each item of the transfer judgment is individually falsifiable and can be updated as technical and market conditions change. This method has the generality to be applicable to future candidates for general-purpose resources other than AI (for instance, general-purpose robotics or the foundational capabilities of synthetic biology). 33 Contribution 2: The nine-cell theory — the product of national value models and AI capability tiers (Sections 5–9). Existing theories of national AI strategy often rely on a one-dimensional ranking ("is this an AI power or not?") or a dichotomy ("developer country or user country?"). This paper constructs a matrix of nine cells as the product of the three national types of the oil era (M1 Resource-Producing / M2 Transformation / M3 Utilization) and the three AI capability tiers (C1 commodity / C2 frontier / C3 critical), and describes systematically the institutional requirements, modes of value, and modes of failure of each cell. This framework has three uses. First, the undifferentiated objective of "winning at AI" can be decomposed into questions about the conditions of viability of each cell. Second, national strategy can be described as a portfolio rather than the choice of a single cell, so that the trade-offs between production and utilization, and between sovereignty and efficiency, can be treated explicitly. Third, because Frontier Descent (yesterday's C2 is tomorrow's C1) makes the Nine Cells dynamic, the framework captures a temporal structure that static theories of national ranking necessarily miss. In addition, the number of divisions of the tier axis is itself an object of verification in this paper. To the question "why three tiers rather than two or four?" this paper answers that the number of tiers is determined empirically as the number of discontinuities along capability distance (Proposition 2). If two discontinuities are observed there are three tiers; if one, two tiers; if none, the tier theory itself is rejected. Contribution 3: Analysis of the transplantability of critical-tier governance (Section 9). In debates on the security aspects of AI the analogy with nuclear technology is frequently invoked, but the work of judging item by item which components of the nuclear control regime (the NPT, IAEA safeguards, arms control) are transplantable to AI is still being systematized. For the three functions of critical-tier governance — verification, nonproliferation, and stabilization — this paper sets each institutional device of the nuclear regime against candidate counterparts in AI and presents a table of transplantability judgments (Table 7, Appendix B). So as not to rest the basis of judgment on an induction from a sample of one, this paper compares across four regimes — not only nuclear but also chemical, biological, and missile — and advances the comparative proposition that verification mechanisms came into being only in regimes where the object of control was accompanied by a measurable physical correlate (Proposition 9, Section 9). To anticipate the conclusion, transplantability is highest for the physical basis of verification — the accounting of compute, electricity, and facilities, corresponding to the accounting of fissile material — and lowest on three points: replicability, the leading role of private actors, and the absence of physical signatures. This anchor is not, however, static. Because Frontier Descent reduces the compute required to attain a given capability level with a short halflife (Definition 9), a fixed threshold based on quantity of computation loses effectiveness within a few years. The verification function of critical-tier governance is sustained only by building continuous downward revision of thresholds into the institution, rather than by fixing a threshold — the counterpart, within the institution of verification, of the fact that because stockpiles depreciate, the guarantee of supply holds only as continuous construction (Proposition 8). This analysis, having made explicit that C3 is an unrealized 34 anticipatory category, positions critical-tier governance as a problem of the ex ante design of an institution for which "waiting for arrival before designing would be too late." Contribution 4: The dynamics of cell transition (Section 15). The nine-cell framework gives a classification of positions but does not guarantee that a position stays where it is. Existing theories of national AI strategy, whether ranking tables or typologies, often stop at cross-sectional description and have lacked a framework for treating the conditions under which position changes. This paper redefines the Nine Cells as a field of transitions (Definition 10) and formulates the asymmetry of transition: upward transition requires the accumulation of complementary assets, national brain capital, computing infrastructure, and electricity, and its time constant is longer than the time constant of policy decision, whereas downward transition requires no accumulation and occurs passively through nothing more than the relative depreciation of existing accumulations (Proposition 15). In addition, a rise in the level of capability generates pressure that irreversibly moves the logic governing the allocation of that capability from economics to national security (Proposition 16). With the introduction of these dynamics, the question moves from "which cell is a state in?" to "which accumulations, continued at what rate, make which transition possible?" The conditions for a third pole (Proposition 19) are likewise treated not as advocacy but as a problem of satisfying three conditions: complementarity, mutual guarantees of access, and shared discipline. This is not, however, a prediction. The time constants of transition are not estimated in this paper, and none of the exogenous conditions that govern transition — the measures of other states, the speed of technical advance, the physical constraints of electricity and compute — is under this paper's control. This limitation is acknowledged in Section 20. Contribution 5: Connecting Layer Zero to Layers One through Three by way of valuedefinition capability and national brain capital (Sections 10 and 17). Once Layer Zero is newly established, a responsibility arises to show how it connects theoretically to the three lower layers. This paper supplies that connection through two concepts. The first is value-definition capability (Definition 12). As capability descends to C1, the competitive advantage brought by efficiency gains using that capability diminishes with the falling cost of imitation. The more AI capability diffuses, therefore, the more the residual that makes a difference between states and between firms shifts from efficiency in achieving a given objective to the capability to select what is to be aimed at and to realize it (Proposition 17). This is the consequence, at the level of the state, of Future Value Theory (Kadowaki, 2026a), and it implies the systematic error of designing AI policy as efficiency policy. The second is national brain capital (Definition 11). Where the Transformation Model is viable at the C2 tier, the defensibility of its transformation margin depends on a thickness of human capital that cannot be acquired by import (Proposition 18). The four indicators of Proposition 4 — exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, and linguistic-contextual specificity — are nothing other than the externalized traces and institutionalized forms of this national brain capital. The two concepts connect to Layer Zero the arguments the series has constructed at the level of the firm — Future Value Theory (Kadowaki, 2026a), Brain Capital Management (Kad‐

owaki, 2026e), Ageless Management (Kadowaki, 2026i) — and make it possible to treat the argument about the human substrate and the argument about national strategy as one theory. Contribution 6: The introduction of geoeconomic leverage as a second axis, and the resolution of the M4 problem thereby (Section 11). The Nine Cells are an instrument for describing the mode of value generation and do not describe whether a state can push back when its conditions are changed from outside. Existing theories of national AI strategy also tend to rely on either the volume of capability held or the position in the supply chain, and lack a framework for treating both simultaneously as independent variables. This paper introduces geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15) as a second axis and decomposes it into two components: indispensability (the cost and the degree of malfunction that arise if other states attempt to bypass or exclude the state in question) and desirability (the degree to which other states voluntarily seek engagement with it). This introduction has four uses. First, the independence of position and leverage (Proposition 22) makes explicit that national strategy has not one objective function but two. Second, the paradox that indispensability begins to depreciate the moment it is exercised (Proposition 23) explains the phenomenon whereby an expansion of export controls simultaneously induces a search for alternatives, not as a collision of two separate forces but as a consequence of a single structure. Third, this axis places two existing theoretical lineages — the formulation whereby hubs in a network generate chokepoint effects (Farrell & Newman, 2019), and the formulation whereby market size and regulatory capacity generate de facto standards (Bradford, 2020) — on one and the same coordinate system as two components of a state's bargaining power, rather than as two arguments developed independently. Fourth, and most important for the internal economy of this paper, the M4 problem is resolved. Definition 3 places outside its domain of quantification the position that obtains value not by producing, transforming, or utilizing a resource but by supplying the rules and verification for the trading and use of a resource (standard setting, conformity assessment, certification). The reason for the exclusion is "that the source of value lies not in the relation to a general-purpose input but in the constraint of other actors' behavior" — yet the power to constrain other actors' behavior is precisely what Definition 15 defines as leverage. The reason for the exclusion thus itself specified where this position belongs. Regulatory power is not a fourth value model (M4, a regulatory type) but leverage on the side of desirability; whereas adding a fourth value to the M axis would destroy the principle of division, placing it on the leverage axis yields three falsifiable consequences (Section 11.4). This is not a withdrawal of the exclusion but a recovery into the interior of the theory. This section also formulates trust infrastructure (Definition 17) as one component of desirability, and presents the finding that the depth of AI deployment in regulated sectors is bounded above by institutions rather than by capability (Proposition 25), and that in domains where private actors exceed the state in capability, the residual functions of the state converge upon three — legal finality, physical security, and permissions for siting and resources (Proposition 28). From Section 14 onward, each country 36 and region is described by dual coordinates: position on the Nine Cells and quadrant on the 2×2 of leverage. Contribution 7: Having a section that computes the cost of its own recommendations (Section 19). Papers with policy implications often discuss the benefits of their recommendations while not treating the costs the recommendations themselves impose. The recommendations of this paper — construction of a sovereign minimum guarantee level (Section 13), investment in complementary assets (Section 10), development of trust infrastructure (Section 11), and implementation of the diagnostic frameworks (Appendices C, D, F, and G) — all require resources. Section 19 discusses the quantity of resources required and the consequences of drawing those resources away from other uses. First, where domestic guarantees are provided for an input subject to economies of scale, the sovereignty premium (Definition 19) grows larger the further the guaranteed scale of supply falls below the minimum efficient scale, and this appears as a cost increase for domestic users. Domestic guarantees are therefore not justified from the standpoint of efficiency, and are justified only as insurance against a stoppage of supply — only where the total premium is less than the expected value of the losses avoided (Proposition 30). Second, the redundancy required by Layer Zero appears to actors at Layer Three as a reduction in capital efficiency; because its benefits accrue to the system as a whole while its costs are borne by individual actors, this mismatch is not resolved by the market, and the requirement does not hold unless it is designed together with an allocation of that cost (Proposition 31). Third, whether requirements concerning domestic guarantees, the handling of data, and procurement are coherent with existing international commitments on trade and investment is an indispensable step of design; legal judgment on the interpretation or applicability of particular agreements exceeds the competence of this paper and is not undertaken. Fourth, because this paper's diagnostic framework itself consumes the administrative capacity of those who implement it, a requirement of comprehensive monitoring, unless accompanied by a minimum indicator set to be maintained as a priority under constraints of administrative capacity, results in non-implementation, formalism, or delay (Proposition 36). This section is not a withdrawal of the recommendations but a determination of the range within which they hold. To compute the cost of one's own recommendations is a condition of their credibility. Contribution 8: Treating the supply side and the procurement side as two faces of a single framework (Section 12). Definition 3 (Section 6) defines the Transformation Model (M2) as "the type that adds value by transformation and supplies it outward," but that definition itself does not distinguish the form of what is supplied. Resistance to compression differs, however, according to the form of supply. Section 12 distinguishes three forms of what the Transformation Model may export — the export of capability (access to models), the export of products, and the export of integrated systems (Definition 20) — and explains by means of Proposition 4 that only the export of integrated systems is protected by the wall of integration cost. There are four conditions for the export of integrated systems, and the most binding is portability — that the system be separable from the specific institutions of the home jurisdiction — so that what divides those who 37 can export from those who cannot is not the height of capability but the looseness of the coupling between capability and the institutions of the home jurisdiction (Proposition 39). This conclusion is counter-intuitive, and it derives a tension whereby two of the four indicators of Proposition 4 — exclusive data endowment and linguistic-contextual specificity — protect the transformation margin while fixing the system to the home jurisdiction. From here follows the consequence that the two components of leverage carry opposite signs with respect to exercise — indispensability depreciates through exercise (Proposition 23), while desirability appreciates because conformity investment accumulates on the recipient side with each adoption (Proposition 38). Only thereby does the second axis introduced in Section 11 acquire dynamic content. The same section then reverses the viewpoint to the importing side. From a formulation of the supply side alone, the selection rule for the mode of procurement itself cannot be obtained: for a given field of work, is the system to be constructed within the home jurisdiction, is capability alone to be bought and integration performed in house, or is a completed system to be accepted whole? Proposition 40 determines the domains suited to these three modes by three variables — the severity of the consequences of failure, the domain-specificity of judgment, and reversibility — and makes explicit, as a decision accompanying that choice, that in a domain where the procurement of integrated systems is chosen the opportunity to form national brain capital is lost (Proposition 24). The two formulations are placed in one section because both are described by the same variables: the portability of Proposition 39(iv) and the domain-specificity of Proposition 40(b) are one and the same variable, and the set of what can be exported and the set of what can be procured are identical. This paper gives this configuration a name — the AI Foundry Model (Definition 21, Section 12.1.6). Naming is not for this paper the mere attachment of a label: since a name is borrowed from a metaphor, it is required as a condition of naming that one judge at the same time which properties of that metaphor transfer and which do not (Proposition 1, Section 12.1.7). What transfers from the semiconductor foundry is the structure of "taking value at the process stage without holding the design"; what does not transfer is the indispensability (Definition 15) arising from capital specificity. A naming that lacks this judgment carries into the name a mistaken assumption about the source of bargaining power. A word about the type of paper. This paper takes a hybrid form of conceptual paper, institutional design, and measurement proposal. As a conceptual paper, it constitutes a theoretical system of national value models by means of 21 definitions and 42 numbered propositions (44 statements). As institutional design, it discusses, for the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Section 13) and critical-tier governance (Section 9), the boundary between transplantation from existing institutions (oil stockpiles, the nuclear control regime) and new design, at the level of specification. As a measurement proposal, it presents an audit protocol for AI dependence (Hypothesis H1, Appendix C) in an implementable form, as a composite indicator isomorphic to indicators of energy security. This trinity integrates the methods of the macro-theoretical type (Kadowaki, 2026g) and the measurement- proposal type (Kadowaki, 2026i) within the series. A theory of the state that is only 38 theory is not verified; an indicator argument that is only measurement does not guide design; a policy argument that is only design lacks theoretical coherence — binding the three into a single paper is the methodological choice made in erecting a new layer, Layer Zero. The eight contributions are not independent; they form a single line from method to structure, from structure to dynamics, from dynamics to institutions and substrate, from substrate to bargaining power, and from bargaining power to the cost of the recommendations. Without the discipline of analogy (Contribution 1), the rows of the Nine Cells — the assignment of oil and electricity types to C1, of managed-material types to C2, and of nuclear types to C3 — would remain an arbitrary assemblage of metaphors. Without the ninecell theory (Contribution 2), critical-tier governance (Contribution 3) would readily drift into apocalyptic speculation cut off from the analysis of the other cells. Conversely, a ninecell argument lacking the analysis of the critical tier would close itself within a description of the present market structure and pass over the domain where institutional design is most difficult and requires the greatest advance investment. Without the dynamics of cell transition (Contribution 4), the Nine Cells would remain a cross-sectional classification, and the variables on which policy can act — what to accumulate, and at what rate — would not be specified. And without the connection through value-definition capability and national brain capital (Contribution 5), Layer Zero would become a geopolitical argument cut off from the three lower layers and would not be incorporated into the theoretical system of the series. Finally, without geoeconomic leverage (Contribution 6), the Nine Cells would remain an instrument that speaks only of the mode of value generation, unable to treat what a state can do about the process by which that mode is rewritten by external decisions — the process described in Section 8 as modes of failure and in Section 15 as cross-axis transition. And without the computation of the cost of the recommendations (Contribution 7), the implications derived from the preceding six would remain a list of proposals set out without indicating the quantity of resources required or their source. This paper is constructed at this length as a single paper in order not to separate these seven. The seven contributions are, moreover, all presented in falsifiable form. Each judgment in the correspondence table is tied to observable conditions (Section 3); the nonequivalence of the Nine Cells is verifiable as systematic differences in institutions and outcomes (Proposition 3, Section 6); the transplantability judgments carry conditions of rejection through technical change (Proposition 9, Section 9); the claims about the asymmetry of transition, value-definition capability, and national brain capital each carry falsification conditions (Propositions 15–18); the claims about the independence of position and leverage, depreciation through exercise, the priority of trust infrastructure, and the convergence of residual functions each carry falsification conditions (Propositions 22–28); and the same holds for the narrowing of the feasible region, the sovereignty premium and the lower bound of scale, the inter-layer conflict of interest, and the constraint of administrative capacity (Propositions 29–36). Two further theses accompany these contributions. First, the Nine Cells are not a uniform lattice. The M axis and the C axis are not orthogonal, and the higher the capabil‐ 39 ity tier, the narrower — owing to the rise in the class of externality — becomes the set of positions a state can in fact occupy, the feasible region (Definition 18) (Proposition 29, Section 6.10). This paper retains the Nine Cells as a coordinate system but does not claim that the nine positions are equally stable occupiable points. Not to claim uniformity of the lattice is not to abandon the lattice itself; it is to superimpose upon the lattice a distribution of occupiability. Second, recommendations have costs. Every recommendation of this paper requires resources, and the resources required are drawn away from other policy objectives. To set out recommendations without computing this cost is to leave the range within which they hold undetermined (Section 19). The two theses appear to point in opposite directions, but they are two appearances of one discipline: the former narrows the range of application of the theory, and the latter the range of application of the recommendations — both by this paper's own hand. And there is a third thesis. The Transformation Model can export three different things — capability itself, products, and integrated systems (Definition 20) — and the three differ in their resistance to compression. Seen from the importing side, moreover, the three correspond to three modes of procurement and form a portfolio to be used differently according to the character of the domain (Proposition 40). This thesis gives dynamics to the second axis (geoeconomic leverage) and at the same time indicates that the theory of the supply side and the theory of the procurement side are two faces of one framework — a theory that holds only one of them describes only half of the transaction. It should be noted that "exporting state" and "importing state" denote structural positions specific to a domain and are not classifications of states. It is common for one and the same jurisdiction to stand on the exporting side in one domain and the importing side in another, and this paper makes no assessment of whether a particular jurisdiction can be an exporting state (the editorial policy of Section 1). There follows a sixteenth thesis. This paper gives a name to the type of state that imports AI capability, transforms it, and exports it as integrated systems — the AI Foundry Model (Definition 21). Just as a semiconductor foundry owns not the design but the process capability, a state of this type owns not frontier models but the capability of transformation — the four indicators of complementary assets (Proposition 4), national brain capital (Definition 11), and trust infrastructure (Definition 17). A state that adopts this type is called an AI Foundry State. Presenting the limits of the metaphor at the same time as the name is, however, half the content of this thesis. The indispensability that a semiconductor foundry retains through capital specificity and the difficulty of reproducing its processes does not transfer to an AI Foundry State — its position rests not on indispensability but on desirability (Definition 15, Proposition 38). If the discipline of analogy formulated in Section 3 (Proposition 1) were applied only to the arguments of others and not to this paper's own act of naming, the discipline would remain rhetoric rather than method. It is for this reason that, at the same time as giving the type a name, this paper places a table of transfer judgments (Table 27, Section 12.1.7). The AI Foundry Model is, moreover, a configuration delimited by a combination of conditions and not a classification of states, and this paper makes no assessment of whether a particular juris‐ 40 diction falls under this type (the editorial policy of Section 1). As to notation, the qualified forms are always used — "AI Foundry State" when a state is meant, "AI Foundry Model" when the model or type is meant — and no form lacking the qualifier is used to denote the type introduced here. This is because commercial products bearing the same or a similar name exist in the field of information technology; no assessment of those products is made (Section 12.1.6). The seventeenth thesis differs in character from those preceding it: rather than widening the range of what is explained, it turns two contradictions left inside this paper into propositions and thereby makes more precise the conditions under which the existing claims hold. First, embedding and portability coexist through the design of the interface (Proposition 41, Section 12.3.7). Propositions 4 and 18 state that deep institutional embeddedness and linguistic-contextual specificity protect the transformation margin, while Proposition 39(iv) requires, as a condition of export, separability from the institutions of the home jurisdiction — at first sight this paper imposes two contradictory requirements upon one and the same system. The solution lies not in the quantity of embedding but in its locus. The two coexist only where the system is separated into a jurisdiction- specific layer and a portable core with the interface between them explicitly defined; in a system whose interface is made explicit, the cost of transplanting the portable core becomes independent of the depth of embedding. Second, the self-reinforcement of desirability has an upper bound, and lock-in is not indispensability (Proposition 42, Sections 12.5.6–12.5.8). The height of switching costs where an integrated system is deeply embedded is a binding within an individual relationship (lock-in) and not irreplaceability within the system as a whole (indispensability, Definition 15) — indispensability is a property concerning whether a third party can bypass the actor in question, whereas lock-in is a property concerning whether a party already engaged can leave, so a high level of lockin is not evidence of indispensability unless it is accompanied by an indicator of supplier concentration. Moreover, because a rise in switching costs simultaneously raises the recipient's incentive to institutionalize in-house production, multi-sourcing, and requirements of portability, desirability reaches an upper bound at the point where the recipient prefers to recover autonomy. Both propositions work in the direction of weakening this paper's claims, but narrowing conditions is itself the addition of new empirical content; Section 20 acknowledges that the observations newly required for that purpose — whether an interface is made explicit, supplier concentration by domain, and the three variables of the upper bound — have not been constructed (Sections 20.11(e), 20.9(h), 20.9(e), and 20.8(j)). At this point it is worth stating directly the calibration readers should apply to the list of contributions. This paper claims no comprehensiveness. To set out eight contributions is not a claim to have covered every viewpoint from which the state in the age of AI might be discussed, and this paper makes no such claim. There are three reasons. First, a claim of that kind is unverifiable. There exists no procedure for showing that no uncovered viewpoint remains, and a claim of comprehensiveness can have no falsification condition; it is therefore incompatible with the discipline this paper imposes on all its propositions 41 (a falsification condition for each). Second, aiming at comprehensiveness would make the treatment of each subject shallower. In the course of conceiving this paper more than a dozen additional topics were considered, but incorporating all of them into the main text would have degenerated each into a sketch of a few pages, failing the condition of combining with the existing apparatus to yield new falsifiable propositions. Third, a theory that can explain any observation predicts no observation. An extension of explanatory range is not in itself an improvement and may be accompanied by an increase in distance from the evidence. This paper has therefore sorted explicitly between the subjects it treats and those it does not. This paper is not a work covering every direction but a limited set of instruments. Declaring this to readers at an early stage is a matter of candor, and at the same time serves to calibrate correctly the strength of the claims made in the chapters that follow — declaring the range not treated does not weaken the claims about the range treated but strengthens them. Section 20 declares the subjects considered in the course of conception but deliberately not treated — the post-truth condition and the redesign of democracy (algorithmic consensus formation), the theme of the state as a provider of existential purpose and meaning, the civilizational-historical debate over the multipolarity of intelligence, and the development of the Compute-Dollar as a theory of currency — together with the reason for not treating each, and indicates the research fields to be consulted so that readers pursuing those subjects can supplement what lies outside this paper. Readers are asked to read this paper not as "a conspectus of what should be known about AI and the state" but as "an attempt to give falsifiable answers to a limited set of questions." 2.5 Position Within the Series — The New Layer Zero and the Four-Layer Architecture This paper is the tenth in the series of working papers the author has published in 2026, and it adds a new layer to the architecture of the series: Layer Zero (national structure). The series has so far taken a three-layer form. Layer One (the structure of the era) is the theory of redefinition capitalism, which treats how AI changes the allocation of capital and the pricing of future value (Kadowaki, 2026g). Layer Two (the structure of society) is the theory of the self-defined society, which treats the institutional footing that supports the self-definition of individuals (Kadowaki, 2026f). Layer Three (enterprise management) is a set of studies treating the redefinition of firms and their creation of value — Future Value Theory (Kadowaki, 2026a), Enterprise Redefinition (Kadowaki, 2026b), Enterprise Redefinition Observed (Kadowaki, 2026c), From Job Description to Purpose Description (Kadowaki, 2026d), Brain Capital Management (Kadowaki, 2026e), Human on the Loop (Kadowaki, 2026h), and Ageless Management (Kadowaki, 2026i). All three layers, however, stand upon one premise. For capital to be allocated, for individuals to define themselves, and for firms to redefine themselves, the state in question must be able to reach AI as an input. In a world where access to frontier capability is sub‐ 42 ject to export controls, where compute is geographically uneven, and where the supply of AI services is concentrated in a few countries and a few firms, "which country one stands in" governs the operating conditions of all the lower layers. Layer Zero is the layer that makes explicit the distribution of this precondition, and this paper defines it as follows. Definition 8 (Layer Zero; National Structure) Layer Zero is, within the four-layer architecture of this series, the layer at which the arrangement of resources, capabilities, and institutions among states distributes the operating conditions of the three lower layers — Layer One (the structure of the era: capital allocation), Layer Two (the structure of society: the institutional footing of self-definition), and Layer Three (enterprise management: redefinition and value creation). Each layer makes explicit the conditions presupposed by the layer above it. The arrangement is architectural and is not a claim of logical dependence (a note common to the series). Figure 1. The four-layer architecture of the series. Layer Zero (national structure), newly established in this paper, distributes the operating conditions of Layer One (RCap: capital allocation), Layer Two (SDS: the institutional footing of self-definition), and Layer Three (the enterprise-redefinition group ①–⑤, ⑧, ⑨). Setting side by side the questions treated by each of the four layers makes the position of Layer Zero clear. The theory of enterprise management at Layer Three asks: what does this firm aim at, within which boundaries, and over which time horizon does it create value? The theory of social structure at Layer Two asks: what is the institutional footing on which individuals may redefine themselves? The theory of the structure of the era at Layer Zero — National Structure (Geo) National Value Models (this paper, No. 10) Layer One — Structure of the Era (Macro) (7) Redefinition Capitalism (RCap) Layer Two — Structure of Society (Meso) (6) Self-Defined Society (SDS) Layer Three — Enterprise Management (Micro) (1) Future Value Theory (2) Enterprise Redefinition (3) Redefinition Observed (4) Purpose Description (5) Brain Capital Management (8) Human on the Loop (9) Ageless Management Each layer distributes the operating conditions of the layer below 43 Layer One asks: whose future value, and which future value, can capital price? And Layer Zero asks: at what level, on what conditions, and carrying which vulnerabilities does this state reach the AI capability that is the premise of all these? However finely a firm designs its redefinition, if that country's AI access can contract at a single change of terms by a supplier, then the set of redefinition options is itself narrowed exogenously. If AI is required as a cognitive instrument for individual self-definition, its distribution depends on the state's design of access. For capital to price future value, where the bottleneck in AI complements lies must be determined by the arrangement of states. Layer Zero is the layer that turns these "givens" into objects of analysis. The note at the end of Definition 8 is a discipline common to the series as a whole and is emphasized here as well. The arrangement of the four layers is an architecture of analysis, not an ontological claim that "the state logically precedes the firm." In fact, the arrangement at Layer Zero is itself partly formed by the behavior of firms (frontier developers and cloud providers), and causation between the layers runs in both directions. Layer Zero is placed at the top only because the object of this paper's analysis — the arrangement of resources, capabilities, and institutions among states — is the condition that has been treated as "given" in the analysis of the lower layers. The concrete channels by which Layer Zero distributes conditions to the lower layers are set out in detail in Section 17 (Proposition 11), but the outline is as follows. A state's cell position and conditions of access govern, respectively, the range of future value that capital can price (Layer One), the distribution of the cognitive means required for self-definition (Layer Two), and the set of redefinition options that firms can reach (Layer Three). Conversely, the theories developed in the papers on the lower layers — for instance the bottleneck theorem that "the more abundant AI becomes, the higher the marginal value of slow complements" (Kadowaki, 2026g), or the five dimensions of enterprise redefinition (Kadowaki, 2026b) — have counterparts at the level of the state. The latter in particular connects to this paper's final proposition, "national redefinition" (Proposition 14, Section 17): the state, too, is a subject of redefinition along the five dimensions of purpose, boundary, time, agent, and measurement. The establishment of Layer Zero does not, it should be added, entail any change in the claims of the nine papers already published. Each of those papers stands on its own within its layer, and what this paper adds is the making explicit of the national conditions they have tacitly presupposed. In that sense Layer Zero is less an extension than an excavation of foundations. The methodological disciplines of the series — construction from the set of counterarguments, explicit falsification conditions for each proposition, explicit evidence grades (distinguishing well established findings, supporting evidence, contested points, and grey literature), the threefold classification of self-citation, structural disclosure of conflicts of interest, and the premise of adversarial review — apply in full to this paper. All 21 definitions, 42 numbered propositions (44 statements), and three hypotheses carry either a 44 falsification condition or a verification design, and the list is gathered in Section 21 (Table 10). 2.6 The Structure of This Paper This paper consists of 22 sections and eight appendices. Section 3 is the methodology: after organizing the lineage of the "data is the new oil" discourse and the criticism of it, it formulates the discipline of analogy (Proposition 1) and the method of divided analogy. Section 3.9 additionally makes the comparative design itself an object of discipline and introduces, in addition to the diachronic comparison with 1973, a contemporaneous comparison with the oil market of 2026 — because observation of two resources at one and the same point in time removes era effects from the difference as a common term and grounds transfer judgments in observation of an ongoing present rather than in a counterfactual. Section 4 is the theoretical background, organizing with evidence grades the research lineages on which this paper stands, from the resource curse, the rentier state, Dutch disease, and staple theory to the theory of general-purpose technologies, national innovation systems, GVC theory, and economic complexity. Section 5 gives the definition and operationalization of the AI capability tiers (C1/C2/C3) by capability distance (Definition 2), presents the covariation of tier and governance form (Proposition 2) and the regime- class transition of C3 (Proposition 2b), and then introduces the dynamic structure of Frontier Descent. Section 6 extracts the three national types of the oil era (M1/M2/M3) from historical instances and erects the skeleton of the nine-cell matrix (Definition 3, Proposition 3); at its end, Section 6.10 formulates the fact that the M axis and the C axis are not orthogonal and that the higher the capability tier, the narrower the set of occupiable positions (the feasible region, Definition 18) becomes (Proposition 29) — the Nine Cells are retained as a coordinate system but are not claimed to be a uniform lattice. Section 6.11 then records the oil market of 2026 as a contemporaneous observation, on five points: the extent of downstream integration achieved, the attribution of the share taken by transformation, the response of prices and production, the performance of buffers, and changes in the structure of demand — all confined to market facts of supply volumes, transport volumes, prices, and inventories (the editorial policy of Section 1). Sections 7 to 9 analyze each row of the Nine Cells. Section 7 treats row C1 (the commodity tier) and Section 8 row C2 (the frontier tier), developing the conditions of viability of the Transformation Model (Proposition 4), the compounding of the Utilization Model and the outflow of value (Proposition 5), and the AI version of the resource curse — the curse of concentration in producing countries (Proposition 6a) and extractive distortion in recipient countries (Proposition 6b). Section 9 treats row C3 (the critical tier) and critical-tier governance, discussing the transplantability of the nuclear control regime (Proposition 9) and the asymmetry of a freeze (Proposition 10). The theoretical apex of this paper lies in that section. Section 10 is a focal analysis that isolates M2×C2 among the Nine Cells — the position that procures frontier-tier capability from outside and supplies it with value added through transformation — giving its conditions of viability by the four indicators of 45 Proposition 4 and by national brain capital (Definition 11, Proposition 18), and then identifying the modes of failure specific to this cell and the minimum engagement with higher tiers required to hold the position. Section 11 is the section that erects this paper's second axis: whereas the Nine Cells explain the mode of value generation, geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15) is introduced as the variable that explains whether a state can push back against externally imposed changes of condition; after decomposing the sources of indispensability (physical chokepoints, the absence of alternative suppliers, the time required to switch) and the sources of desirability (market, rules, technology, capital, and trust), it formulates the non-identity of position and leverage (Proposition 22), the depreciation of indispensability through exercise (Proposition 23), the fact that trust infrastructure (Definition 17) bounds above the depth of deployment in regulated sectors (Proposition 25), and the residual functions of the state in domains where private actors exceed the state in capability (Proposition 28). This section at the same time recovers into the interior of the theory the position of standard setting and conformity assessment, which Definition 3 places outside its domain of quantification, not as a fourth value model but as leverage on the side of desirability. Section 12 is the section that fills two gaps in this supply-side theory: the form of export and the mode of procurement. It distinguishes three forms of what the Transformation Model may export — capability, products, and integrated systems (Definition 20) — and formulates that of the four conditions for the export of integrated systems portability is the most binding (Proposition 39); that desirability appreciates through adoption and thus carries the opposite sign to the depreciation of indispensability (Proposition 23) (Proposition 38); and that procurement on the importing side is governed, as a portfolio of three modes — construction within the home jurisdiction, procurement of capability, and procurement of integrated systems — by three variables: the severity of the consequences of failure, the domain-specificity of judgment, and reversibility (Proposition 40). This section at the same time identifies the situation in which the procurement of integrated systems sets the attrition of Proposition 24 in motion as a direct consequence of the procurement mode, and indicates the design of mitigations: reserving audit rights and authentic data to the home jurisdiction, bringing part of operations in house, portability clauses in contracts, and a staged plan for in-house production. The same section then gives a name to this configuration, which until now has had none — the AI Foundry Model (Definition 21, Section 12.1.6); a state that adopts this type is called an AI Foundry State. The naming is placed as a pair with the judgment of Section 12.1.7: what transfers from the semiconductor foundry is the structure of "owning not the design but the process capability," and what does not transfer is the indispensability arising from capital specificity — the position of an AI Foundry State rests on the side of desirability (Definition 15, Proposition 38; the table of judgments is Table 27). Exporting and importing sides are structural positions specific to a domain and not classifications of states, and the AI Foundry Model too is a configuration delimited by a combination of conditions and not a classification of states — this section makes no assessment of the policies or international relations of any particular jurisdiction. The same section further disposes, within itself, of two theoretical holes this configuration had carried: Section 12.3.7 formulates that the two contradictory requirements of deep embedding 46 (Propositions 4 and 18) and separability (Proposition 39(iv)) coexist only where the system is separated into a jurisdiction-specific layer and a portable core with the interface between them explicitly defined (Proposition 41); and Sections 12.5.6–12.5.8 answer the objection to the central judgment — "does lock-in not amount to substantive indispensability?" — by giving the distinction between lock-in (whether a party already engaged can leave) and indispensability (whether a third party can bypass the actor in question), together with the upper bound on self-reinforcement set by counteraction on the recipient side (Proposition 42). Section 13 is the theory of AI as infrastructure, discussing the structure of AI outage (Definition 4, Proposition 7) and the design of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6, Proposition 8) against the institutional history of electricity and oil stockpiling. Section 14 plots country profiles for ten countries and regions in dual coordinates: position on the Nine Cells and quadrant on the 2×2 of leverage — since, by the independence asserted in Proposition 22, neither can be derived from the other, where the two do not coincide it is precisely that discrepancy which best characterizes the structure of the country in question. Section 15 is the section that places the static arrangement developed so far on a time axis: after formulating cell transition (Definition 10), the asymmetry of transition (Proposition 15), and the pressure toward cross-axis transition (Proposition 16), it analyzes four scenarios — the branching of the Transformation Model, vertical integration across the axes, moving upstream through capital, and downward transition through physical constraints — together with the conditions for a third pole (Proposition 19), as conditional paths rather than predictions. Section 16 rises one level above the transitions of individual states to treat the higher-order branching of which world one is in: it presents three world scenarios (Definition 13), selects the leading indicators that identify them before their consequences appear (Definition 14), and derives the set of no-regret actions carrying positive expected value in all three (Proposition 20). This section is at the same time a cross-scenario robustness check on the substrate derived in Section 10 (the conditions of viability of M2×C2) and Section 17 (valuedefinition capability and national brain capital). Section 17 develops the channels of transmission from Layer Zero to the three lower layers (Propositions 11 and 12) and, by way of the diminishing returns to efficiency and the residual of value-definition capability (Definition 12, Proposition 17) and the connection to the human substrate through national brain capital, arrives at national redefinition (Proposition 14). Section 18 is the case study, applying the general theory constructed thus far to one middle power, Japan: returning to the precedent of the national redefinition of 1973, it applies the conditions of viability of Section 10 and the branching analysis of Section 15, and discusses the M2′+M3 portfolio and the design of a sovereign minimum guarantee level (Proposition 13). Section 18.3.5 reads Japan's half-century of oil as an instance of the divergence between exposure and dependence and formulates as Proposition 37 the fact that a reduction in the aggregate is compatible with a rise in concentration. This section is an application and not the purpose of the theory; the same procedure applies to any middle power. Section 19 is the section that counts the cost of the recommendations this paper has made up to that point: the sovereignty premium generated by diseconomies of scale (Definition 19, Proposition 30), the fiscal ceiling, the conflict of interest between the redundancy required by 47 Layer Zero and capital efficiency at Layer Three (Proposition 31), the process of examining the coherence of requirements on domestic guarantees, data, and procurement with existing international commitments, the staging of the handling of data by three criteria (confidentiality, reversibility, and substitutability), and the administrative capacity consumed by the diagnostic framework together with the minimum indicator set (Proposition 36). The role of this section is not the withdrawal of the recommendations but the determination of the range within which they hold, and the policy implications of this paper are intended to be read in the form they take after passing through Section 19. Section 20 treats objections and limitations in the form of acknowledgment — the objection of excessive use of analogy, scenarios in which the tier division collapses, the risk of self-fulfillment in discussing C3, the structural conflict of interest of a practitioner recommending policies that bear on his own business opportunities, and the explicit declaration of the range this paper does not cover — and Section 21 gives the conclusion and the research agenda (the plan for implementing Hypotheses H1 to H3), with Section 22 the references. The appendices are eight: the Nine Cells in detail (A), the Nuclear–AI Governance Correspondence Table (B), the AI Dependence Audit Protocol (C), the National Diagnostic Checklist (D), the Cell-Transition Matrix and a Measurement Framework for National Brain Capital (E), the Scenario Monitoring Indicator Table (F), the Geoeconomic Leverage Diagnostic (G), and the Glossary (H, Japanese–English). Of these, Appendices D, E, F, and G are designed to be usable independently of the main text, as instruments by which readers may apply this paper's procedure to their own country or firm. Ways of reading according to the reader's interest may be indicated. Researchers interested in methodology can follow the falsification conditions of each proposition, taking Section 3 (the discipline of analogy) and Section 21 (the map of verification) as their axes. For policymakers, the direct points of practical contact are Section 11 (geoeconomic leverage and trust infrastructure), Section 12 (the AI Foundry Model — the export of integrated systems and the modes of procurement), Section 13 (AI outage and the sovereign minimum guarantee level), Section 14 (country profiles and the common constraints on middle powers), Section 15 (the dynamics of transition), Section 16 (world scenarios and leading indicators), and Appendices C, D, E, F, and G. Business managers can obtain from Sections 7 and 8 (the conditions of viability of transformation and utilization in rows C1 and C2), Section 10 (the conditions of viability of the M2×C2 cell), and Section 17 (the connection between Layer Zero and enterprise redefinition) the implications bearing on their choices of location, procurement, and complementary assets. For readers in countries other than Japan, it is efficient to identify in Section 14 the type closest to their own country, diagnose their country's leverage with Section 11 and Appendix G, confirm the reachable transitions in Section 15, and then read Section 18 as a worked example of "what happens when this paper's procedure is carried through to the end for one middle power" — the figures appearing in Section 18 are Japan's, but the procedure used there is written so that it can be replaced with the figures of one's own country. For readers who have not read the earlier papers of the series, this paper is constructed to be read on its own, and references to the series are confined to the placing of context. 48 The theoretical apparatus of this paper as a whole is constituted as 21 definitions, 42 numbered propositions (44 statements, counting the splits of Proposition 2b and Propositions 6a/6b), three hypotheses, 13 figures, and 27 tables (together with 51 appendix tables). All definitions and propositions are given verbatim in boxes within the main text, and each proposition carries a falsification condition. The figures are thirteen: the four-layer architecture (Figure 1), the discipline of analogy (Figure 2), the Nine-Cell Matrix with country plots (Figure 3), the pyramid of capability tiers (Figure 4), the structure of AI outage (Figure 5), the channels of inter-layer transmission (Figure 6), the conditions of viability of the M2×C2 cell (Figure 7), the dynamics of cell transition (Figure 8), the movement of the residual from efficiency to definition (Figure 9), the branching of the three world scenarios and the leading indicators (Figure 10), the 2×2 of indispensability and desirability with the placement of principal countries and regions (Figure 11), the feasible region (Figure 12), and the three procurement modes and their domains (Figure 13). Central among the tables are the analogy correspondence table (Table 1), the summaries of analysis by cell (Tables 4 to 6), the nuclear–AI transplantability judgments (Table 7), the correspondence table for the five dimensions of national redefinition (Table 9), the map of the verification of the propositions (Table 10), the leading indicators for identifying scenarios (Table 16), the typology of the leverage 2×2 (Table 17), the six layers that give rise to AI outage (Table 18), the sources of the sovereignty premium and the means of mitigation (Table 20), the levels of the three variables by domain and the corresponding procurement modes (Table 26), and the decomposition of the bundles of properties of semiconductor foundries and AI Foundry States with the judgment of what transfers (Table 27). Finally, the editorial policy governing the whole of this paper's description should be stated. This paper takes the state as its unit of analysis and not as an object of evaluation. What it describes are observed institutions, measures, and supply structures, together with the structural consequences these have for the options available to states. The content and dates of published policy documents and statutes, and the fact that suppliers and productive capacity are concentrated in particular countries or regions, are described, because they are indispensable to the analysis. On the other hand, this paper makes no judgment about the motives behind measures, the appropriateness of policies, or the legitimacy of political systems — measures can be observed, intentions cannot. Nor does it endorse any camp or issue any call to counter one. This policy carries two costs — the inability to treat normative questions, and the restriction of explanatory power to the description of structural conditions that follows from placing motives outside the object of analysis — but it is accepted in order to separate analysis from advocacy. The full text of the policy, together with its implication for readers — that normative judgment is reserved to the reader — is set out in Section 1, "Editorial Policy of This Paper — Political Neutrality." Readers are asked to consult that passage first. Section 2.7 below (disclosure of observational position) and Section 20 (the acknowledgment of limitations) are both placed under this policy. 49 2.7 Disclosure of Conflicts of Interest and of Observational Position In accordance with the discipline of the series, the conflicts of interest (COI) of this paper are disclosed structurally. "The Position of This Paper," attached to the cover, is a summary that allows readers to know the author's position before entering the main text; this section decomposes it into the items of disclosure. First, the incentive to self-citation. This paper cites the author's own nine papers in the series and positions itself within their theoretical system (the four-layer architecture). The author is structurally subject to an incentive to make the coherence and value of the series appear high. To control this incentive, the core propositions of this paper (Propositions 1 to 10) are constructed so as to stand on literature and evidence from outside the series, and self-citation of the series is confined to three classes of use: (i) reference to a foundational axiom, (ii) indication of a structural correspondence, and (iii) forward reference to future research. Whether the claims of this paper hold without citing the series is something readers can verify. Second, observational position. This paper discusses national strategy, but the author belongs to a Japanese firm (VURA Capital Innovation Holdings, Inc.), writes in Japanese, and devotes an independent section (Section 18) to a Japanese case study. This choice is methodological, arising from accessibility to primary sources — Japan is the country whose official statistics, statutes, advisory-council materials, and practice on the ground the author can reach most closely — and does not mean that the framework is specific to Japan. Even so, the selection of cases remains a product of observational position. This paper is written, that is, from the observational position of an AI-importing, transforming and utilizing country rather than of a frontier-producing country. This position carries the advantage of allowing the conditions of viability of the Transformation and Utilization Models and the problem of guaranteeing access to be described with a practical feel, and at the same time may be a source of bias that treats too lightly the internal logic of producing countries and the constraints of developing countries whose conditions differ from Japan's. This paper's discipline of describing the policies of each country not as "superior or inferior" but as "position and constraint" (Section 2.3) is also a countermeasure to this bias. Residual bias is examined again in Section 20. Third, business interests as a practitioner. The author is a practitioner at an investment holding company and is presently engaged in business and investment in the domains on which this paper makes recommendations, including the implementation of AI in management. This position gives the paper two characteristics. On the one hand it brings sensitivity to practical constraints: the author stands closer, as a participant rather than as an analyst, to constraints such as the feasibility of policy, the time constant of corporate decision-making, and the years required for accumulation. This paper's emphasis on the time constants of transition (Section 15) and on ex ante observation of complementary assets (Proposition 4) is a consequence of that closeness. On the other hand it carries a structural conflict of interest. If the directions this paper recommends — investment in complementary assets, deepening the depth of utilization, construction of a sovereign minimum

guarantee level, and investment in trust infrastructure (Definition 17), national brain capital, and domain data — were adopted as policy, the author's business opportunities may expand. An argument that emphasizes the importance of AI coincides in direction with that business interest. The means of controlling this interest is not concealment but explicitness and verifiability. All figures and sources on which this paper relies are identified, and each proposition carries a falsification condition, so that readers may evaluate the claims separately from the interest. In addition, because of this position, the author presents the claims of this paper both as "recommendations" and as "hypotheses whose verification the author undertakes to bear" (Section 21). That a proponent does not bear responsibility for verifying his own recommendations is the gravest problem arising when a practitioner discusses policy, and this paper treats it again as a limitation in Section 20. Fourth, the process of writing and verification. In accordance with the discipline of the series, this paper is written on the premise of adversarial review. Each proposition takes a form in which "what a referee wishing to reject this paper's claim should observe" is written into the proposition itself (the accompanying falsification condition), and Section 20 reconstructs, from the standpoint of an objector, the strongest objections anticipated against this paper — excessive use of analogy, collapse of the tier division, the risk of alarmism in discussing an unrealized C3, complicity in techno-nationalism, and Japancentered bias — and responds to them. As to evidence, the discipline was applied that all figures and sources relied upon were checked in advance and that items that could not be verified, or on which sources disagreed, were excluded from the main text. Errors that nonetheless remain are the author's responsibility. In closing the introduction, return to 1973. In that autumn, what importing countries faced appeared to be a question of procurement: how is oil to be secured? Japan is taken as the example below, but the same configuration was common, with differences of degree and timing, to the other importing countries of the time — middle powers in Europe, industrial states in East Asia, and the many states without production of their own. Looking back after half a century, however, what was actually at issue was a question about the national model: how is the shape of this country, dependent on oil, to be redesigned? The answer to the question of procurement was makeshift; it was the answer to the question of the model — the bundle of institutions comprising the Energy Conservation Act, stockpiling, and diversification — that governed the structure of the following half-century. Many of the questions countries are now posing about AI take the form of procurement: how is compute to be secured, how are models to be developed? The claim of this paper amounts to this: the question about the model that lies behind them — in what configuration does this state generate value, in its relation to AI as a general-purpose input, and under the condition that AI's strategic character holds to differing degrees at differing capability levels? — should be posed explicitly. The first task in posing that question is to decompose into verifiable form the very analogy that is used half-unconsciously: "AI is the new oil." The next section is devoted to that task. 51 3. Methodology: The Discipline of Analogy 3.1 The Lineage of "Data Is the New Oil" It is fair to begin an examination of resource analogies with their most widely circulated formulation. The phrase "data is the new oil" is attributed to Clive Humby, a British mathematician and data scientist, who is said to have uttered it in 2006. Humby, who founded dunnhumby with Edwina Dunn in 1989 and designed the "Clubcard" loyalty card (launched in 1995) for the British retailer Tesco, was a pioneer of the practice of consumer data analysis. What must not be overlooked here is Humby's original meaning. According to his official profile at the University of Sheffield, what Humby placed in the phrase was, in addition to an analogy with the revolution oil brought to industry, the point that data shares with oil the problems of the process of refining (University of Sheffield, n.d.). The original meaning, that is, was not a claim about value — "data is as precious as oil" — but a claim about the requirement of transformation: just as crude oil cannot be used as it is, data has no value unless it is refined. What raised the phrase to a worldwide commonplace was the leading article of The Economist of 6 May 2017, "The world's most valuable resource is no longer oil, but data" (The Economist, 2017). That article likened the large platform firms of the day to the oil majors of the twentieth century and called for a rethinking of monopoly regulation for the data economy. What deserves attention is that the center of gravity of the analogy shifted in the course of its circulation. Humby's original meaning was a process analogy — refining, that is, transformation, is the source of value — whereas the popular version after The Economist was extended into an asset analogy ("data is the most valuable resource") and further into a hegemony analogy ("who controls data controls the world"). With each extension, the weight of inference the analogy was made to bear increased, and its verification thinned. The lineage of this phrase in policy discourse has a double significance for this paper. First, the lineage is itself a case study in the absence of a discipline of analogy. The process by which a single metaphor, having departed from the speaker's limited intention (the requirement of transformation), was diverted into a warrant for resource-nationalist policy arguments (data localization, data sovereignty, treating data as a national asset) shows how an unverified analogy can drive policy. Second, however, the original meaning of the phrase contains an insight worth preserving. The claim that value is produced not by the resource itself but by transformation aligns exactly with the configuration of the three types of national value model that this paper extracts from the history of oil — production, transformation, and utilization. Criticism of the analogy must not amount to discarding the metaphor together with that insight. 52 3.2 The Full Weight of the Criticism — Nonrivalry, Non-Exhaustibility, and Other Dissimilarities Before this paper's own argument, the academic criticisms of "data is the new oil" are set out in as strong a form as possible. In accordance with the series' discipline of constructing from the set of counterarguments, this paper's method starts from what remains after all of these criticisms have been accepted. The most fundamental criticism is nonrivalry. Jones and Tonetti (2020), in the paper that gave the economics of data its foundation, formulated the decisive difference in physical character between oil and data. Oil is a rival good: a barrel of oil can be burned only once. One agent's use physically excludes another's. Data, by contrast, is a nonrival good: the same data can be used simultaneously by an unlimited number of agents. From this difference in physical character, the normative consequences reverse. For oil, a rival good, allocating a scarce resource to its highest-value use is the central problem of efficiency. For data, a nonrival good, social value lies in wide sharing and reuse, and enclosure of data by firms may instead produce the inefficiency of underuse. The placement of property rights (firm ownership or consumer ownership) governs the equilibrium between efficiency of use and privacy: such is that paper's analysis (Jones & Tonetti, 2020). To apply the oil analogy directly to the problem of allocating data is to take up the mistaken starting point that "enclosure is natural and the only issue is allocation." The second criticism is non-exhaustibility. Oil is physically consumed by use, and reserves decline through extraction. Data is not exhausted by use; on the contrary, use generates new data. The marginal cost of replication is nearly zero, value is context-dependent, and combination with other data increases rather than diminishes it. The institutional devices assembled on the premise of an exhaustible resource — assessment of reserves, production quotas, conversion into a fund in anticipation of depletion — have no counterparts for a resource that is not exhausted. The third criticism is normative misdirection. This criticism can be stated rigorously as the obverse of the first (nonrivalry). What the analysis of Jones and Tonetti (2020) shows is that, since data is a nonrival good, the normative issue moves from "to whom is a scarce resource to be allocated?" to "where should property rights be placed so as to optimize the equilibrium between efficiency of use and privacy?" Depending on whether firm ownership or consumer ownership is taken as the default, the equilibrium between the volume of data use and the level of privacy settles at a different point (Jones & Tonetti, 2020). This is the crux: the oil analogy supplies a default answer before that normative issue can be raised. To frame data as a "resource" is to make it someone's property, to reduce the issue to allocation and price, and to place aspects of rights such as personality, privacy, and collective interest outside the framework. An analogy is thus not merely an instrument of exposition but a device that anticipates the choice of a legal and policy framework. This structure — that the choice of an analogy is already a normative choice — is isomorphic 53 to the argument of Krugman (1994) considered next, and is the principal reason this paper places the making explicit of analogy at the center of its methodology. Fourth, as a warning from social science against analogy in general, Krugman (1994) should be cited. Krugman's target was not data but the concept of "national competitiveness," yet his line of argument bears directly on this paper's methodology. An analogy that likens a state to a firm is a category error, since a state, unlike a firm, does not "go bankrupt" and trade is not zero-sum. Moreover, Krugman argued, this error is not harmless but a "dangerous obsession" that brings real damage in the form of protectionism, waste in industrial policy, and trade friction (Krugman, 1994). The core of the warning is that a mistaken analogy is not merely inaccurate but carries a direction that biases policy systematically. Liken a state to a firm and "winning and losing" becomes the issue; liken data to oil and "enclosure" becomes natural; liken AI to a weapon and an "arms race" appears inevitable. An analogy is at once a device of description and a device that pares down the set of options in advance. Fifth, the criticism should be added that the choice of an analogy has an asymmetric political effect. A resource analogy can be told from the viewpoint either of those who hold the resource or of those who do not, but the formulations that actually circulate in most cases tacitly adopt the framework of the holders. That the phrase "data is the new oil" is spoken on the premise of data as an asset of the firms that accumulate it, and makes it difficult to thematize the share of the individuals who generated the data or of the regions from which it was obtained, is one instance. Likewise, a framework that speaks of AI as a strategic resource naturalizes the viewpoint of states able to enter the competition for acquiring the resource, and tends to treat as secondary the problems faced by states that cannot enter it — the conditions, price, and continuity of access. This paper disclosed that it is written from the observational position of an AI-importing, transforming and utilizing country (Section 2.7) in order that readers may take this asymmetry into account. On this paper's view, all of the above criticisms are correct. Data and AI models are nonrival, are not exhausted, have a replication cost of nearly zero, and undisciplined use of analogy brings normative misdirection and policy error. The question is what to conclude from these criticisms. 3.3 Neither Discarding nor Abusing — "The Discipline of Analogy" as a Third Position Having granted the full weight of the criticism, two observations remain. The first observation. The criticisms from nonrivalry and non-exhaustibility are criticisms of some properties of the analogy, not of all of them. The inferences an oil analogy can carry come in at least two bundles. One is inference concerning the physical character of the resource — rivalry, exhaustibility, storability — and it is this bundle that the criticism strikes directly. The other is inference concerning the structure of dependence — foreign dependence of supply, concentration of suppliers, the economic consequences of interrup‐ 54 tion, the institutionalization of buffers — and this bundle concerns not the physical character of the resource but the properties of the relation between resource and economic structure. That data and AI services are nonrival and have zero replication cost is in no way inconsistent with the possibility that their supply may be concentrated among a few actors, that an interruption of supply may damage a dependent economy, or that a dependent country may require insurance-like institutions. Indeed, the balance-of-payments structure of a persistent digital-related deficit (Section 2) indicates that the position of an "importing country" exists economically even for nonrival goods. What the critics rightly rejected is the bundle of physical character; the bundle of dependence structure has not been rejected — and yet in popular debate the two have been dissolved into the single question of whether "the analogy is right or wrong." The second observation. Discarding analogy entirely is itself methodologically impossible. In analyzing an object without precedent, one necessarily relies on analogy from known objects. Actual policy documents and discourse on national AI strategy are full of the vocabulary of analogies — oil (resource security), electricity (infrastructure and universal service), nuclear technology (nonproliferation and arms control), semiconductors (export control), space and the internet (international common resources) — and the option of "not using" analogy does not exist in practice. There are only two options: to use analogy tacitly, or to make it explicit and discipline it. A tacit analogy is not verified, is not falsified, and its errors are discovered only through the failure of policy. An explicit analogy can be verified item by item and updated as conditions change. This paper therefore formulates a third position as its methodology. The discipline of analogy is the procedure of (1) treating an analogy not as a single universal proposition ("A is B") but as a correspondence between bundles of properties; (2) judging individually, with reasons, whether each property in the bundle transfers or does not; (3) attaching to each item of judgment observable conditions of holding and of rejection; and (4) drawing inferences only from the properties judged transferable. Under this procedure the question "is AI the new oil?" disappears and is replaced by a set of verifiable questions: which property of oil transfers to which tier of AI, and on what grounds? This procedure is set out explicitly as three rules that all subsequent sections are to follow. Rule 1 (Decomposition of properties). An analogy must not be erected as a universal proposition. The correspondence between a reference resource and AI is to be stated only after decomposition into items of property that can be judged independently. Blanket claims such as "AI is oil" or "AI is not electricity" do not qualify as propositions in this paper. The granularity of decomposition is set by the criteria that each item has been an independent object of analysis in existing research, and that the presence or degree of each item is observable. An analogy that has not passed through decomposition cannot specify which inferences it permits and which it forbids, and therefore has no standing to derive policy implications. 55 Rule 2 (Explicit judgment of transfer). For each decomposed property, it must be judged explicitly, with reasons, to which AI capability tier it transfers or does not transfer, and the result of the judgment must be preserved as a document. A judgment of non-transfer must be preserved with the same standing as a judgment of transfer. As discussed in Section 3.6, the principal route by which an analogy is misused is the quiet dropping away of the noncorresponding portions in the course of repeated use. Documenting the judgments (Table 1) is a structural check against that dropping away. Rule 3 (Attachment of falsification conditions). For each property judged to transfer, the observational condition under which that judgment would be found erroneous must be attached. A transfer judgment without a falsification condition escapes verification by retreating to the standing of a "suggestion" or a "metaphor," and so does not function as an analytical instrument. This rule converts a claim originating in analogy into an empirical claim that can be rejected independently of the analogy. That Proposition 1 (Section 3.7), this paper's central claim about analogy, carries a falsification condition is a direct application of this rule. The three rules are not independent but ordered. Judgment (Rule 2) is impossible without decomposition (Rule 1), and falsification conditions (Rule 3) cannot be written without judgment. Conversely, if a falsification condition cannot be written, that is a sign either that the judgment is vague or that the granularity of the decomposition is too coarse. This three-stage procedure is carried out in the remainder of this section (Sections 3.4 and 3.5). 3.4 Decomposing the Analogy — Bundles of Properties and the Correspondence Table The first task of the discipline of analogy is to decompose the properties of the reference resources — in this paper, oil, electricity, and nuclear technology — into items that can be judged independently. This paper takes about twelve properties as the units of judgment. The criteria of decomposition are three: (i) that each property has been an independent object of analysis in existing research in resource economics and resource politics; (ii) that the presence or degree of each property is observable; and (iii) that overlap between properties is minimal. On the AI side, judgment is made not for AI as a single resource but tier by tier — C1 (the commodity tier), C2 (the frontier tier), and C3 (the critical tier) (Definition 2, Section 5). C3 is, as of the time of writing, an unrealized anticipatory category, and whether and when it arrives is an empirical question. All judgments below concerning C3 should be read as conditional on "if C3 arrives." The judgments as a whole are given in Table 1. Each row is one property; the columns are the reference resources (oil, electricity, nuclear) and the correspondence in AI, with the final column recording the judgment of transfer to each tier of AI. Table 1. The analogy correspondence table — bundles of properties of oil, electricity, and nuclear technology and judgments of transfer to the AI capability tiers 56 Property Oil Electricity Nuclear Correspondence in AI Judgment of transfer 1. Rivalry (exclusion of simultaneous use of the same unit) Present (a barrel can be burned only once) Present (the same kWh only once) Present (nuclear material is a physical quantity) Models and data are nonrival (Jones & Tonetti, 2020). Only time of compute use is rival Does not transfer (partial transfer for the compute flow alone) 2. Exhaustibility (reduction of the stock through use) Present (depletion of reserves) Absent (a continuously produced flow) Present for material (partially recovered by reprocessing) Data and models are not exhausted by use; use generates new data Does not transfer 3. Mode of scarcity (stock or flow) Stock (reserves) Flow of productive capacity (installed capacity) Flow of enrichment and reprocessing capacity, plus a stock of material A flow of productive capacity: compute, electricity, and people The electricity type transfers (the oil type does not) 4. Marginal cost of replication and delivery Large (physical transport) Moderate (transmission losses, grid constraints) Transfer itself is strictly controlled Cost of replicating a model nearly zero; cost of API delivery small Does not transfer (scarcity at C2 is an artificial scarcity produced by control) 5. Generalpurpose input character (governing productivity across broad sectors) High (energy, materials) High (all sectors) General-purpose in energy uses, not generalpurpose in weapons uses High (a cross-cutting input to cognitive work) Transfers (common to C1 through C3) 6. Geographical unevenness of supply and supplier concentration High (uneven distribution of reserves) Low (grids by country and region) High (enrichment technology held by few) Concentration of frontier development and computing infrastructure in a few countries and a few firms Transfers to C2 (at C1 the concentration dissolves) 7. Possibility of supply management and cartels Present (OPEC, though internally unstable) Regulated monopoly and system operation Present (export control regimes) Export controls and access controls are in fact applied to C2 Partial transfer (C2 is closer to nuclear-type export control than to an oil cartel) 8. Infrastructural critical‐ High (weeks to months) Rising in proportion to dependence The electricity type transfers 57 Property Oil Electricity Nuclear Correspondence in AI Judgment of transfer ity (immediate degradation of output upon interruption) Very high (immediate) High as a power source (verification by Hypothesis H3) (conditional on deepening dependence) 9. Stockpilability (buying time through physical storage) High (strategic reserves, the 90-day standard) Low (largescale storage is difficult; substituted by capacity) Fuel can be stored Model weights can be preserved, but capability depreciates with the advance of the frontier (Proposition 8, Section 13) The means does not transfer (only the institutional objective — buying time against an interruption of supply — transfers; Proposition 1) 10. Verifiable physical correlate (the anchor of accounting) Tankers, pipelines, inventory statistics Grid metering (generation and power flows) Accounting of fissile material (safeguards) Compute, electricity consumption, data center facilities The nuclear type transfers to C3 (the element of greatest transplantability; Proposition 9, Section 9) 11. Class of national security externality Economic security (supply crises) Domestic resilience Existential (an object of deterrence and nonproliferation) C1 is low. C2 lies between the economic and the military. C3, if it arrives, is predicted to come to be treated in the same class as nuclear technology (Proposition 2b) Divided (the class differs by tier) 12. Character of the supplying actor (state or private firm) A mix of national oil companies and international majors Public utilities (under regulation) Began as a state monopoly Began under the leadership of private firms (the state is involved through regulation and procurement) No correspondence with the nuclear type (one of the greatest obstacles to transplanting C3 governance) What can be read immediately from Table 1 is that none of the three reference resources covers all the properties of AI. What transfers from oil is property 5 (general-purpose input character), properties 6 and 7 (concentration and management, but only at C2), and the structure of dependence generally; properties 1 to 4 (physical character) and property 9 (stockpiling) do not transfer. What transfers from electricity is property 3 (the scarcity of a flow) and property 8 (infrastructural criticality); geographical locality (property 6) does 58 not transfer — the concentration of AI suppliers is global, and this difference is what separates AI outage from power outage (Proposition 7, Section 13). What transfers from nuclear technology is property 10 (the physical correlate of verification) and, for C3 alone, property 11 (existential externality); property 12 (starting from a state monopoly) unambiguously does not transfer. Neither wholesale adoption nor wholesale rejection of a single analogy can be maintained at the granularity of this table of judgments — and this is the methodological footing that remains for this paper after the full weight of the criticism (Section 3.2) has been accepted. In compliance with Rule 2, the grounds for the judgment on each of the twelve rows of Table 1 are stated in one sentence each. Property 1 (rivalry) does not transfer — the same copy of data or a model can be used simultaneously by an unlimited number of agents, and this nonrivalry differs in principle from the physical character of oil (Jones & Tonetti, 2020). Property 2 (exhaustibility) does not transfer — since use does not reduce the quantity of the resource but rather generates new data, the whole series of inferences concerning reserves, years of extractable supply, and conversion into a fund against depletion has no counterpart. Property 3 (mode of scarcity) transfers in its electricity form — what is actually scarce in AI is not an accumulated stock but productive capacity per unit of time in the form of compute, electricity, and people, which is isomorphic to the scarcity of installed generating capacity. Property 4 (marginal cost of replication and delivery) does not transfer — since the cost of replication is nearly zero, the scarcity observed at C2 is not physical scarcity but an artificial scarcity produced by access control and the allocation of compute. Property 5 (general-purpose input character) transfers to all tiers — AI is not a tool of a particular industry but is coming to govern productivity across broad sectors as a cross-cutting input to cognitive work, which is the very requirement for Definition 1(i) to hold (general-purpose input character is the basal distinction; what varies by tier is the strategic character (ii), (iii), and (iv) that rides upon it). Property 6 (supplier concentration) transfers to C2 alone — the developers of frontier capability and the agglomeration of computing infrastructure are unevenly distributed across a few countries and a few firms, whereas at C1 this concentration has been dissolved by price competition. Property 7 (possibility of supply management) transfers in part — export controls and access controls are in fact applied to C2, but their institutional form is not price domination by a cartel of producing countries; it is control of transfer by technology- holding countries, whose structure is closer to the nuclear suppliers' regime than to oil. Property 8 (infrastructural criticality) transfers in its electricity form — though conditionally: whether an interruption is accompanied by degradation of output is a function of the deepening of dependence and is at present a matter for verification (Hypothesis H3, Section 21). Property 9 (stockpilability) does not transfer as a means — model weights can be preserved, but the relative value of the preserved capability depreciates with the advance of the frontier, so the "time" that physical storage purchased cannot be purchased by storage (Proposition 8, Section 13). What transfers extends only to the institutional objective that stockpiling realized (buying time against an interruption of supply), and this separation of objective from means is stated explicitly in the text of 59 Proposition 1. Property 10 (the physical correlate of verification) transfers in its nuclear form to C3 — isomorphically with the way the accounting of fissile material was the basis of safeguards, compute, electricity consumption, and data center facilities are physically measurable and can serve as the verification anchor of critical-tier governance (Proposition 9, Section 9). Property 11 (class of national security externality) is divided by tier — the externality of C1 remains at the economic level, C2 lies between economic security and the military, and C3, if it arrives, is predicted to reach a class equal to that of nuclear technology. It should be noted here that "governments will treat it so" is not a definition but a prediction. Definition 2 fixes C3 by capability distance alone, and the institutional treatment of that capability by governments is an independently observed dependent variable, the object predicted by Proposition 2b (Section 5). Property 12 (character of the supplying actor) has no correspondence with nuclear technology — whereas nuclear technology began as a state monopoly and diffused later into civilian use, AI began under the leadership of private firms, and this difference in starting point constitutes the deepest non-correspondence in the design of an international regime. In compliance with Rule 3, a word on the conditions for updating the judgments. Each judgment in Table 1 is moored to observable facts, property by property. The "does not transfer" verdicts for properties 1, 2, and 4 (nonrivalry, non-exhaustibility, zero replication cost), for instance, rest on the theoretical formulation of Jones and Tonetti (2020). The "does not transfer" verdict for property 9 rests on the observation that the relative value of model capability depreciates with the advance of the frontier (Section 5), and if the advance of the frontier stagnates the judgment is updated to the "transfers" side (the falsification condition of Proposition 8, Section 13). The "transfers to C2" verdicts for properties 6 and 7 rest on the institutional fact that export controls and access controls are in fact applied to frontier capability (Section 5). This judgment is supported by the observation that supplier concentration and the effectiveness of access control change stepwise with respect to capability distance, and if both are observed to change only continuously and monotonically with respect to capability distance, the tier division that is the basis of the judgment is itself rejected (the falsification condition of Proposition 2, Section 5). Table 1 is thus not a static declaration but a set of judgments, each cell independently falsifiable and subject to updating. 3.5 The Method of Divided Analogy — Three Resources onto Three Tiers Rearranging the judgments of Table 1 from the side of the capability tiers brings out a pattern. The properties judged transferable differ systematically in which tier of AI they transfer to. This paper calls the formulation of this observation as a method divided analogy: rather than applying a single resource analogy to AI as a whole, it divides AI by capability tier, assigns to each tier the resource regime with which the correspondence is deepest, and then makes transfer judgments tier by tier. The outline of the assignment is as follows. To C1 (the commodity tier) corresponds the bundle of properties of oil and electricity as market goods. What requires attention 60 here is that C1's being "a tier with many suppliers, working price competition, and access restrictions that do not function in practice" is not part of the content of Definition 2 — Definition 2 marks off the tiers by capability distance alone and includes neither market structure nor governance form. The multiplicity of suppliers and the lapsing of control measures are dependent variables that Proposition 2 (Section 5) predicts for this band of capability distance. To the extent that the prediction holds, the mode of scarcity appears as the price of a flow, the policy problems are procurement cost, diffusion, and efficiency, and the guarantee of supply is borne by the depth of the market. To C2 (the frontier tier) corresponds the bundle of properties of a "managed strategic material." The history of oil to be consulted here is not free trade in normal times but the phases of supply management and embargo — restriction of supply by a cartel, and stockpiling, diversification, and coordinated release on the side of dependent countries — and, in the institutional form of export control, it approaches the nuclear suppliers' regime. To C3 (the critical tier) corresponds the bundle of properties of nuclear technology — but, as property 10 of Table 1 (the physical correlate of verification) shows, what corresponds is not the physical character of nuclear technology but the institutional logic of the nuclear control regime, and the deep non-correspondence at property 12 (the leading role of private actors) forbids any simple transplantation. To repeat, C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category, and this assignment is the designation of "a reference system for the institutions that would be required if C3 arrives." The grounds for the assignment are stated in order from the side of the reference resources. The ground for assigning oil to C1 lies in the isomorphism of the mode of adjustment through price-mediated allocation. In a market with many suppliers, broadly standardized quality, and buyers able to switch suppliers, allocation of the resource is borne by price, and the role of the state is confined to managing procurement cost and promoting diffusion. The inference API of C1 behaves as a market good for which switching between suppliers is technically possible and prices fall continuously. Even under this assignment, however, the physical character of oil — depletion, reserves, production quotas — does not transfer (properties 1 and 2 of Table 1). What transfers is the behavior of buyers in a competitive resource market, not the character of the resource itself. The ground for assigning electricity across both C1 and C2 derives from two distinct properties. First, the mode of scarcity (property 3 of Table 1). Electricity is a resource whose scarcity is governed by generating capacity rather than by storage, and this structure is isomorphic to the compute constraint in AI. This correspondence extends to both C1 and C2. Second, infrastructural criticality (property 8). Just as an interruption of electricity supply immediately degrades social functions, an interruption of supply where AI has been embedded in critical processes may bring immediate degradation of function. How far this correspondence actually holds is a function of dependence: it is strong in C2-dependent countries where dependence is deep, and weak in substitutable C1 uses. On the other hand, the most important property in which the electricity analogy does not transfer is geographical locality. An electricity grid is self-contained by country or region, and outages are localized geographically. Because the concentration of AI service suppliers is 61 global, an AI outage may be correlated across borders and across sectors (Proposition 7, Section 13). This single non-correspondence is why the institutional devices of the electricity regime — balancing by system operators, planned power outages, priority supply — cannot be transplanted to AI as they stand. The ground for assigning nuclear technology to C3 lies in the class of externality and the correspondence of the institutional form that it calls for. The logical standing of this assignment requires care, however. Definition 2 fixes C3 as "an unrealized capability level exceeding the frontier of the time by more than a prescribed threshold," by capability distance alone. Neither market structure nor governance form, still less "treatment by governments," is contained in the definition. Assigning nuclear technology to C3 is therefore no longer a consequence of definition. It is an assignment resting on the empirical prediction asserted by Proposition 2b (regime-class transition) — that if capability exceeds the threshold, institutional treatment by governments shifts from the framework of economic regulation (market regulation and export control) to the framework of a nonproliferation- type regime — and it is rejected if capability exceeding the threshold is realized while governmental treatment remains within the framework of export control and market regulation. It would have been possible to define C3 as "a capability level treated by governments in the same class as nuclear technology," but this paper does not take that route. Under that formulation the assignment would become a consequence of definition and hence unfalsifiable, and in addition a reflexivity would arise whereby this paper's own discourse would constitute the "arrival" of C3. Separating capability from treatment has two effects. First, the assignment becomes falsifiable. Second, this reflexivity is severed — because the aspect of capability (the independent variable) and the aspect of treatment (the dependent variable) are separated, the fact that a policy document has graded some capability in the same class as nuclear technology becomes not the arrival of C3 but data for verifying Proposition 2b (this point about reflexivity is taken up again in Sections 5.4 and 20.3). What should therefore be asked is not "does C3 resemble nuclear technology?" but "if a capability exceeding the threshold appears and the regime-class transition predicted by Proposition 2b occurs, which institutional devices of the nuclear control regime can function?" This way of posing the question governs the form of the transplantability analysis in Section 9. What transfers from nuclear technology is not physical character but institutional logic, and its core is the physical basis of verification (property 10). Conversely, non-correspondence on three points — the leading role of private actors (property 12), replicability (property 4), and the absence of a distinctive physical signature — makes a copy of the NPT impossible (Proposition 9, Section 9). 62 Figure 2. The discipline of analogy — bundles of properties of oil, electricity, and nuclear technology and their transfer correspondence to the AI capability tiers C1/C2/C3. Solid lines indicate properties that transfer; dashed lines indicate properties that do not. Divided analogy avoids at once two kinds of error generated by single analogies. The first error is overgeneralization. The single analogy "AI is nuclear technology," for instance, applies the logic of nonproliferation even to translation APIs at the commodity tier and needlessly sacrifices the value of utilization that diffusion would bring (Proposition 5, Section 7). Conversely, the single analogy "AI is electricity" dismisses the supplier concentration and geopolitical control of the frontier tier as "transitional friction that will eventually dissolve," and so leads to a neglect of the design of dependence. The second error is leakage of inference across tiers. Under a single analogy, an inference that holds at one tier slides unnoticed into another. Divided analogy stops inference at the tier boundary and requires independent grounds for claims that cross it. Division does, however, bring in a new mode of failure of its own. A tier boundary (the C1/C2 boundary) is defined as a point on capability distance, and its position moves over time as a function of lag width and the requirement level of applications (Frontier Descent, Definition 2, Section 5). Where the boundary lies is estimated by observing the point at which supplier concentration and the effectiveness of access control break down stepwise with respect to capability distance — but these are not the definition of the boundary; they are dependent variables that Proposition 2 predicts will change discontinuously at the boundary. The application of divided analogy must therefore always be paired with measurement of the boundary's present position. A division lacking measurement of the boundary is as arbitrary as a single analogy. Resource analogies (20th century) AI Capability Tiers Oil Electricity Nuclear technology C1 Commodity Tier C2 Frontier Tier C3 Critical Tier Structure of dependence, trade, stockpiling Infrastructural criticality, risk of stoppage Verification, nonproliferation, stabilization Properties that do not transfer Scarcity of reserves (oil) / geographic locality (electricity) / non-replicability (nuclear) Solid = inferences that transfer; dashed = inferences that do not (Proposition 1, the Discipline of Analogy) 63 As an application of this method, one of this paper's central transfer judgments may be anticipated. The most important institutional achievement in the history of oil was the institutionalization of stockpiles following the crisis of 1973 — the IEA's 90-day standard and coordinated release (Section 2). Divided analogy judges the transplantability of this institution to AI as follows. The problem that stockpiling solved (buying time at an interruption of supply) is real for C2-dependent countries and is an institutional objective that should transfer. But the means that stockpiling used (physical storage) is unusable, by the judgment on property 9 (does not transfer). Model weights can be preserved, but the relative value of the preserved capability depreciates with the advance of the frontier. What should be transplanted is therefore not "stockpiles" but "the time that stockpiles were purchasing," and the means of supplying that time is not storage but the continuous construction of capability — the maintenance of a sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6, Section 13). The institutional objective transfers; the institutional means does not. Judgment at this granularity is the kind of finding that the discipline of analogy produces. This paper places this distinction not merely as commentary within this section but at the level of a proposition. The text of Proposition 1 (Section 3.7) limits transferable inference to "the structural theory of trade and dependence, and the institutional objective of buying time against an interruption of supply," and states explicitly that "the institutional means of the buffer (physical storage) does not transfer." There are two reasons for this formulation. First, self-application of the discipline. Route 4 of the misuses this paper forbids in Section 3.6 (the quiet dropping away of non-corresponding portions) would occur within this paper's own proposition if a coarse sentence such as "the structural theory of stockpiling transfers" were placed in the first proposition — because a reader or a citer quoting Proposition 1 alone could read it as transferring the inference about physical storage as well. Second, theoretical gain. By embedding the separation of objective from means in the proposition, what this section has called "the kind of finding that the discipline of analogy produces" is presented not as commentary but as a verifiable claim. The sovereign minimum guarantee level of Section 13 (Definition 6) is a design consequence of this separation, and its depreciation (Proposition 8) is the ground on which the separation is unavoidable in practice. 3.6 Self-Discipline Against the Misuse of Historical Analogy The discipline of analogy is not completed by the transfer judgments from reference resources to AI (Table 1) alone. It requires a procedural self-discipline against the systematic proneness to error of the cognitive operation of historical analogy itself. This paper identifies five typical routes by which its own use of analogy could turn into misuse, and states the discipline against each. This is an anticipation, at the level of methodology, of the selfcriticism carried out in Section 20. First, the structure by which misuse of analogy systematically distorts policy judgment should be made clear. The route by which historical analogy enters policy is not merely one of expository convenience. Analogy acts simultaneously on all four stages of policy 64 judgment: (1) the definition of the situation — what is happening now; (2) the identification of the problem — what is at issue; (3) the set of options — what moves are available; and (4) the anticipation of consequences — what will happen if this move is made. Since everything from the definition of the situation to the range of options is settled at once the moment a precedent is adopted, the choice of an analogy carries in practice a weight close to the choice of a conclusion. Moreover, most of this action operates without explicit examination. The single sentence "this is a second oil shock" automatically summons the policy series of measuring dependence, stockpiling, and diversification, and at the same time removes from view another series — for instance, negotiating international guarantees of supply on the premise of deepening dependence. The error lies not in the analogy's being inaccurate but in its paring down the options without being examined. The most lucid formulation of a warning against this structure from the side of social science was given by Krugman (1994). The analogy of "national competitiveness," which likens a state to a firm, is a category error, since a state, unlike a firm, does not go bankrupt and trade is not zero-sum; moreover this error is not harmless but a "dangerous obsession" inviting real damage in the form of protectionism, waste in industrial policy, and trade friction — such was the argument (Krugman, 1994). What matters here is that Krugman did not forbid the use of analogy in general but pointed to a causal relation whereby a mistaken analogy biases policy systematically in a particular direction. This paper's self-imposed discipline in discussing national AI strategy — taking as its object of analysis the structure of the creation and capture of value rather than a ranking of winners and losers, and describing the policies of each country not as "superior or inferior" but as "position and constraint" (Section 2.3) — is a direct response to that warning. The five routes set out below are a list of the situations in which bias of the same kind could arise in this paper itself. Route 1: Selection by surface resemblance. Analogy is drawn not toward the precedent with the deepest structural correspondence but toward the precedent most readily called to mind — one that is dramatic, recent, or belongs to one's own country's experience. That this paper placed the oil shock of 1973 in its introduction is itself within this danger. Discipline: state explicitly the reason for selecting the reference precedent (in this paper's case, the criterion of Definition 1, that on a base of general-purpose input character the three properties of strategic character all hold to a high degree), and set alongside it competing precedents satisfying the same criterion (electricity and nuclear technology), so as to prevent fixation upon a single precedent. Route 2: Universalization of the analogy. The slide from "A resembles B" to "A is B." Discipline: all analogical claims in this paper are written as partial propositions at the level of individual properties (the rows of Table 1), and no proposition is erected in universal form. Route 3: Advance paring down of the set of options. As Krugman (1994) showed, analogy has the power to fix the range of options prior to description. The oil analogy makes "securing supply," the nuclear analogy "control," and the electricity analogy "diffusion" 65 appear in advance as the natural policy objective. Discipline: in the analysis of each tier, this paper explicitly examines the options that the dominant analogy of that tier tends to exclude — for instance, at C2, "the conditions under which diffusion dominates control" (a world in which the falsification condition of Proposition 2 is satisfied). Route 4: The quiet dropping away of non-corresponding portions. As an analogy is used repeatedly, the qualifications initially stated fall away and even non-corresponding properties begin to be tacitly transferred. The shift in the center of gravity observed in the lineage of "data is the new oil" (Section 3.1) — from the requirement of transformation to asset value, and from asset value to hegemony — is an instance of this route. Discipline: this paper's transfer judgments are documented as Table 1, and the judgments of non-correspondence (the "does not transfer" rows) are preserved in the main text with the same standing as the judgments of correspondence. That Figure 2 draws dashed lines (properties that do not transfer) with the same visual weight as solid lines is the graphical form of this discipline. Route 5: Exemption from verification. Claims based on analogy frequently escape falsification by retreating to the standing of "suggestion" or "metaphor." Discipline: this paper formulates its central analogical claim as Proposition 1 with a falsification condition attached, and forbids itself the retreat to the standing of metaphor. A proposition born of analogy can be rejected by observation independently of the analogy. 3.7 Proposition 1 — Formulating the Core of the Methodology The methodological examination above — the lineage and the full weight of the criticism (Sections 3.1 and 3.2), decomposition into bundles of properties (Section 3.4), divided analogy (Section 3.5), and self-discipline against misuse (Section 3.6) — is gathered into the first proposition of this paper.

Proposition 1 (The Discipline of Analogy) The analogy between AI and oil holds, for the capability of C2 (the frontier tier), only within the bundle of properties constituting "the structure of strategic dependence" (Definition 1(ii), (iii), and (iv)), and does not hold for "the mode of scarcity." The scarcity of oil is the scarcity of a stock in the form of reserves, whereas the scarcity of AI is the scarcity of productive capacity (a flow) in the form of compute, electricity, and people, and models themselves are replicable (nonrival). The inferences transferable from oil are therefore limited to the structural theory of trade and dependence and to the institutional objective of buying time against an interruption of supply. The institutional means of the buffer (physical storage) does not transfer, nor do inferences about depletion, reserves, and production quotas. For capability that has descended to C1, Definition 1(ii), (iii), and (iv) all attenuate, so that the dependence-structure portion of the oil analogy also ceases to hold — Frontier Descent narrows year by year the very range within which the analogy holds. Falsification condition If it is repeatedly observed that interruption of access to C2 capability is not accompanied by degradation of the output of major economies (failure of Definition 1(iii)), or if the replication and procurement of models and compute become unconstrained in practice and concentration on the supply side disappears, the portion of this proposition asserting that the analogy holds is rejected. Three structural features are deliberately embedded in the text of Proposition 1. The first is a tier index. The proposition asserts something not "about AI in general" but "about the capability of C2." Since Definition 1 defines strategic character as a matter of degree (Section 2.2), the transfer of the dependence structure likewise differs in degree by tier. At capability levels far from the frontier, where substitutes meeting the required level exist in multiple jurisdictions, foreign dependence of supply, degradation upon interruption, and the governing of capability gaps all attenuate. A transfer judgment that does not specify a tier lumps together the tiers at which it holds and those at which it does not, and so cannot even be assessed for truth. The second is the separation of objective from means. What transfers from oil is the institutional objective of "buying time against an interruption of supply," and not the institutional means (physical storage) by which that objective was realized. This distinction is placed at the level of a proposition because the judgment anticipated in Section 3.5 — the institutional objective transfers, the institutional means does not — is itself the very type of finding that this paper's analytical apparatus produces. The third is dynamism. The end of the proposition states that transfer judgments depend on the point in time. Through Frontier Descent (Section 5), a given capability level descends from C2 to C1 within months to years. Since the dependence-structure portion of the oil analogy ceases to hold for descended capability, the range within which the analogy holds retreats upward year by year along the scale of capability levels. A stat‐ 67 ic table of transfer judgments must therefore be paired with a rule for updating the judgments (the end of Section 3.4). The falsification condition of Proposition 1 opens the possibility of rejection from two directions. The first direction is the failure of the dependence structure itself. If it is repeatedly observed that even a large-scale interruption of access to C2 capability is not accompanied by significant degradation of the output of major economies, then AI does not satisfy Definition 1(iii) to a high degree at that level, and the transfer of "the structure of strategic dependence" loses its ground. Failure events in cloud and AI services provide natural experiments for this verification (Hypothesis H3, Section 21). The second direction is the disappearance of scarcity. If the procurement of models and compute becomes unconstrained in practice and concentration on the supply side dissolves, dependence loses its significance as a structure, and the strategic character of AI converges to a low level at every capability level and merges into commodities in general. In either case, this paper's nine-cell theory would require substantial contraction — this contraction scenario is treated explicitly in Sections 16 and 20. Conversely, so long as these are not observed, this paper's framework retains its methodological footing. It should be added that falsification in the first direction must be tested with a tier index attached. An observation that interruption of C1 capability is not accompanied by degradation of output is not a falsification of Proposition 1; it is rather what the latter part of Proposition 1 (that the dependence structure does not hold for descended capability) predicts. 3.8 The Implications of Proposition 1 — Drawing the Line Between Transferable and Non-Transferable Inference Proposition 1 limits the range within which the oil analogy holds to "the structure of strategic dependence" for the capability of C2, and explicitly excludes "the mode of scarcity." In addition, with respect to buffers, it transfers only the institutional objective and excludes the institutional means. What this line actually permits and forbids is made concrete below at the level of inference. Each of the following items is a judgment concerning the capability level of C2; for capability that has descended to C1 through Frontier Descent, even the inferences on the transferable side lose their range of validity (the end of Proposition 1). Transferable inference (1): the measurement of dependence. The idea of measuring the structure of a country's resource dependence through a set of indicators — import dependence, supplier concentration, and the speed of degradation upon interruption — transfers directly to AI. Just as Japan in fiscal 1973 grasped its vulnerability after the fact through the figures of 75.5% dependence on oil and 77.5% dependence on the Middle East (Section 2), AI dependence too can be measured as a composite of sectoral input shares, supplier concentration, and degradation upon interruption (Definition 4, Hypothesis H1). What transfers is the logic by which the indicators are constructed, not their units — since AI has no natural unit corresponding to the barrel, measurement becomes a problem of designing proxy variables. 68 Transferable inference (2): the bargaining power of the supply side and its depreciation. The structure whereby the production side holds short-term pricing power while over the long run that power is eroded by adaptation on the demand side — efficiency, substitution, and new supply — transfers. The supply restriction of 1973 produced Japan's energy-conservation revolution and the IEA's network of stockpiles, and the producers' cartel, lacking means to enforce compliance with quotas, arrived at the price collapse of 1986 (Griffin & Neilson, 1994). This route — pressure induces adaptation, and adaptation depreciates the source of the pressure — may operate for access control in AI as well. The speed of depreciation is, however, an empirical question depending on the technical possibility of substitution. Transferable inference (3): the policy objective of institutionalizing a buffer. The value of holding an institution that "buys time" against an interruption of supply transfers. What does not transfer is its means (see below). This operation of separating objective from means in transplantation is precisely the type of finding proper to the discipline of analogy, and for that reason the separation is written into the very text of Proposition 1 (the end of Section 3.5 and Section 3.7). Following this line, the claim that "an institution corresponding to oil stockpiles is required for AI as well" is supported by Proposition 1 insofar as it is a claim about the objective of buying time, and rejected by Proposition 1 insofar as it is a claim about the means of physically storing capability. Since one and the same sentence is correct read as an objective and mistaken read as a means, the use of this vocabulary in policy documents must always be read with the level of the claim made explicit. Non-transferable inference (1): the logic of depletion and reserves. The series of inferences comprising years of extractable supply, assessment of reserves, and conversion into a fund against depletion has no counterpart in AI. Institutional design such as Norway's conversion of oil revenues into the stock of a permanent fund is a solution to a problem specific to producing countries with an exhaustible resource, and does not apply as it stands to producers of AI. Non-transferable inference (2): price domination through production quotas. The inference that the production side dominates price by restricting quantity does not transfer. Since the cost of replicating a model is nearly zero, the scarcity observed at C2 is not a physical constraint on production but an artificial scarcity produced by access control and the allocation of compute (property 4 of Table 1). Supply management at C2 should therefore be analyzed not as an OPEC-type cartel but as control of transfer by technology-holding countries. To mistake this distinction is to be led to anticipations that misidentify the institutional form, such as "the formation of an AI OPEC." Non-transferable inference (3): guaranteeing supply through physical storage. The means that oil stockpiling used does not transfer to AI, because the relative value of preserved capability depreciates with the advance of the frontier (Proposition 8, Section 13). Neither the numerical standard of 90 days nor the unit on which it rests, "days of con‐ 69 sumption," has a counterpart in AI. What transfers is the objective alone (buying time), and the means must be redesigned in the different form of continuous construction. The practical implication of this line is clear. When the vocabulary of oil appears in debates on national AI strategy, the first task in judging the validity of the claim is to identify whether it is the vocabulary of dependence structure (dependence, concentration, interruption, guarantee) or the vocabulary of physical character (reserves, depletion, output, quotas). In the former case, the accumulated findings of the history of oil can be consulted. In the latter, the claim rests on non-transferable inference and requires independent grounds. 3.9 Contemporaneous Comparison — Controlling for Era Effects The discipline formulated up to this point requires that transfer judgments from a reference resource to AI be made property by property. But the comparative design from which the observations supporting those judgments are obtained has not yet been questioned. This section addresses that point. To state the conclusion first, the comparison this paper has used so far — setting the oil of 1973 alongside the AI of today — has a methodological weakness: it cannot separate era effects from properties specific to the resource. Against this weakness this paper introduces a comparison of two resources at one and the same point in time. 3.9.1 The Identification Problem of Diachronic Comparison This paper's references to oil, from the introduction in Section 2 to the extraction of the three types in Section 6, have relied on 1973 and the half-century that followed. This is a diachronic comparison — a design that contrasts observation of resource A at a past point in time with observation of resource B at the present. The weakness of diachronic comparison is that the two points of comparison differ simultaneously in both resource and era. When the oil of 1973 and the AI of 2026 are set side by side, the differences observed between them cannot in principle be distinguished as arising from (i) differences in properties specific to the resource, or (ii) the industrial structure, institutions, and technological level that changed over half a century — hereafter era effects. Because only two observations exist, in which the two factors are completely confounded, there is no degree of freedom for separating them. A judgment of the form "with oil it was so, but with AI it is otherwise" cannot identify whether it is due to the difference of resource or to the difference of half a century. This confounding is not an abstract concern; it reaches directly into each row of this paper's judgments. Three examples may be given. First, the judgment that "with oil, time could be bought through physical storage, but with AI a stockpile depreciates" (Proposition 1, Section 3.8) is read as a difference in the properties of the resource. Yet in 1973 the situation in which the performance of the good being stockpiled became obsolete within a year or two did not arise for oil, or for most strategic materials. Is the 70 presence of depreciation a difference of resource, or a difference between being situated in an era of high rates of technical progress and not being so? Second, the judgment that "with oil the share taken by transformation stood independently, but with AI the portion reducible to general-purpose functions is compressed" (Proposition 4) rests on the failure of the three conditions that supported the defensibility of transformation (Section 6.3.2). But two of those three conditions — the asymmetry of transport costs and locational rent — plainly depend on a variable of the era, namely the relative level of transport and communication costs. Third, the specification that "the scarcity of oil is the scarcity of a stock in the form of reserves" (Proposition 1) is based on observation in 1973. Both the technology for assessing reserves and the technology of extraction have changed over half a century. In none of these cases is it being said that the judgment is itself mistaken. What is being said is that judgments obtained from diachronic comparison are fragile with respect to confounding, and that this fragility should be reflected in the confidence attached to them. The five routes of misuse enumerated in Section 3.6 were disciplines concerning the selection and use of precedents. What is at issue here is not selection but comparative design itself. Since the discipline of analogy takes the falsifiable form of Proposition 1, the design of the observations supporting that proposition must also be an object of the discipline. 3.9.2 Contemporaneous Comparison — Setting Two Resources Side by Side at One Point in Time This paper's response to this identification problem is the introduction of contemporaneous comparison: setting alongside AI not the oil of the past but the oil of the present. If the oil market of 2026 and the AI market of 2026 are observed at the same point in time, era effects drop out of the difference as a term common to both. The two are observed under the same capital markets, the same interest-rate environment, the same logistics networks, the same level of information technology, and the same conventions of corporate governance. The difference that remains is far closer to a difference in properties specific to the resource than is the case in diachronic comparison. This design is possible because oil is not a resource of the past. Oil in 2026 remains the world's largest source of primary energy; its market is observed daily and reported monthly by public institutions. Moreover, the oil market of 2026 was, through the largescale supply disruption event that occurred from February onward, made to display properties not observable in normal times — the reaction of the market to a physical absence of supply, the effectiveness of buffering devices, and the separation of the shares taken by production and by transformation. The oil of 2026 is thus, for this paper, not history but an object of ongoing observation. The second merit of contemporaneous comparison is that transfer judgments require no counterfactual. Transfer judgments in diachronic comparison pass tacitly through a counterfactual: "if the oil of 1973 had been placed in the environment of 2026." A counterfactu‐ 71 al cannot be verified. Contemporaneous comparison does not pass through it. For oil as for AI, what is observed are measured values for 2026. Transfer judgments come to rest on observation of an ongoing present. The discipline applied to contemporaneous observation should be made explicit here. With respect to the 2026 supply disruption event, what this paper describes is limited to market facts: volumes of supply, volumes of transport, prices, inventories, and periods of recovery. It does not enter at all into the causes, background, parties, or course of the event, and makes no reference to the policies or actions of particular states and no inference about intentions. This is the concrete form, in this section, of the editorial policy of political neutrality set out in Section 1. The constraint of using market facts alone does not weaken the analysis. What this paper undertakes to extract from contemporaneous comparison is the structure of how price, inventories, and shares moved when supply fell, and that structure does not depend on what the cause was. 3.9.3 Formulating the Division of Labor — Observation of Consequences and Observation of Transfer Judgments Contemporaneous comparison does not replace diachronic comparison, because diachronic comparison has a merit that contemporaneous comparison cannot in principle possess. That merit is the ability to observe the entire course of a completed event. For the series beginning in 1973, what happened, how each country responded, and what that response brought about half a century later are already settled. The share of oil in Japan's domestic supply of primary energy fell from 75.5% in fiscal 1973 to 34.8% in fiscal 2024 (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026a), and the primary energy required to generate one trillion yen of GDP was halved, from 70 PJ in fiscal 1973 to 35 PJ in fiscal 2021 (Energy White Paper 2023). Emergency stockpiles were institutionalized from zero. These are the consequences of the responses, quantities observable precisely because half a century has passed between response and consequence. Contemporaneous comparison lacks this. The event of 2026 is ongoing as of the time of writing, and supply has not returned to its level before the event. The success or failure of the responses of countries and firms is undetermined. In addition, observation of a single year cannot separate cyclical fluctuation from structural change. The two are therefore complementary, and this paper formulates the division of labor as follows. Diachronic comparison is used for observing "the consequences of responses." Only a completed series can answer the question of what a policy or institution produced over the long run. The institutionalization of buffers and its effectiveness half a century later (Sections 6.5 and 13), the design of energy intensity as an outcome indicator (Section 18), and the time constant required for the transformation of industrial structure (Section 15) are treated by this route. 72 Contemporaneous comparison is used for observing "judgments of the transfer of properties." Only the juxtaposition of two resources sharing an era can answer the question of whether a property is specific to the resource or specific to the era. Each row of the table of judgments for Proposition 1 (Table 1), and the judgments bearing on Propositions 4, 8, and 15, are calibrated by this route. This division of labor means that two sources of evidence are assigned to each row of Table 1. Each subsequent section, in drawing an inference from oil, makes explicit whether it rests on observation of consequences or on observation of transfer judgments. Inferences that confuse the two — for instance, deriving from the consequence that the stockpiling institutions after 1973 were effective a transfer to the effect that stockpiling of the same form is effective for AI — are explicitly forbidden by this division of labor. 3.9.4 Five Judgments Made Possible by Contemporaneous Comparison What contemporaneous comparison specifically makes possible is set out in advance below. The observations themselves are placed in Section 6.11; here the content of each judgment and where it is used are indicated. (1) The extent of downstream integration achieved by producers. How far producers have in fact reached into the domain of transformation is measured not by declarations but by the record of capability and the ratio of capital allocation. In oil, the largest producer has reached the stage of processing 52% of its own crude itself, while capital expenditure in the first half of 2026 was 20.2 billion dollars upstream against 4.5 billion dollars downstream (Saudi Aramco H1 2026 Interim Report, published 4 August 2026). Decades have been required, and capital allocation is still weighted upstream. This observation is the era-effect-controlled counterpart of the judgment Proposition 4 (Section 7) asserts for AI — that producers can integrate downstream by a route with a marginal cost of nearly zero. It is used in Section 6.11 (presentation of the observations) and Section 10 (the conditions of viability of the M2×C2 cell). (2) The attribution of the share taken by transformation. Whether it is producers or independent transformers who in fact capture the excess profit of transformation is observed at a single point in time. In oil, it was independent transformation companies whose share prices roughly doubled under record transformation margins. It is used in Sections 6.11 and 10. (3) The speed of response of price and production. With how much delay a rise in price calls forth an increase in production, and how much of the current year's investment is already committed in advance, are observed as a time constant. It is used in Section 13 (the physical constraints of infrastructure) and Section 16 (the identification of scenarios). (4) The effectiveness of stockpiles. The degree to which institutionalized buffering devices absorbed a physical absence of supply is measured. It is used in Section 13 (the design of the sovereign minimum guarantee level) and Section 18 (Japan's position). 73 (5) The accuracy of forecasts. With what margin of error public institutions holding primary statistics can see one year ahead for the price, inventories, and demand of the same commodity is observed. In oil, two public and quasi-public institutions reported opposite signs for world demand for the same year on the same day (the IEA put world oil demand in 2026 at −1.6 million barrels per day year on year, OPEC at +0.6 million barrels per day; both on 12 August 2026). It is used in Section 16 (the design of leading indicators) and Section 20 (the acknowledgment of limitations). All five judgments pose questions of the same form about AI: where does the ratio of capital allocation lie, as distinct from declarations? Who is capturing the excess profit? With how much delay does supply respond to price? What fraction of the shortfall do buffering devices absorb? How large is the error of forecasts? All of these are questions for which measured values exist in another resource sharing the same era, and which therefore provide a scale by which observations on the AI side can be calibrated. A judgment without a scale cannot speak of degree. 3.9.5 Relation to Proposition 1 — A Third Route to Falsification Contemporaneous comparison opens a new route for verifying Proposition 1. The falsification condition of Proposition 1 named two directions (Section 3.7). The first is the failure of the dependence structure — that interruption of access to C2 capability is not accompanied by degradation of the output of major economies. The second is the disappearance of scarcity — that procurement becomes unconstrained in practice and concentration on the supply side vanishes. Both rest on observation of the AI side. Contemporaneous comparison adds a third route: if present observation on the oil side diverges from what Proposition 1 presupposed as "the properties of oil," the reference point of the judgment itself moves. Since Proposition 1 stands upon a contrast between AI and oil, if one side of the contrast moves, the judgment moves too. Moreover, this test can be carried out without waiting for a large-scale event on the AI side. That the routes to falsification increase by one means that the strength of the proposition increases. That this route in fact operates can already be confirmed in one instance. Proposition 1 specifies the scarcity of oil as "the scarcity of a stock in the form of reserves." Yet in the observations of 2026, even in a phase in which the price of crude rose 44% from the start of the year, output in the United States barely increased, and the expected increase for 2026 remained at +0.2 million barrels per day (14.6 → 13.8 million barrels per day) (EIA Short-Term Energy Outlook, August 2026). Approximately three-quarters of energy investment in the same year had already been committed before the supply disruption event occurred (IEA, World Energy Investment 2026, published 28 May 2026). In the short run, that is, what governed the output of oil was not a constraint of reserves but the time constant of capital commitments fixed several years earlier. The short-run scarcity of oil, too, appears as the scarcity of productive capacity (a flow). 74 This observation does not reject Proposition 1. The contrast in Proposition 1 can be read as a statement about long-run properties, and in the long run the finiteness of reserves remains specific to oil. But the observation does require that the location of the contrast be made more precise. The contrast between stock and flow acquires meaning only once a time horizon is specified, and a transfer judgment that does not specify one — such as the short circuit "oil can be stockpiled but AI cannot" — is corrected by this observation. This paper does not amend the text of Proposition 1, but requires that its application be accompanied by the specification of a time horizon. This is the first result obtained from contemporaneous comparison. Contemporaneous comparison also gives a calibration point to the falsification condition of Proposition 1 itself. The falsification condition in the first direction calls for the observation that "interruption of access to C2 capability is not accompanied by degradation of the output of major economies," but judging whether it is or is not accompanied requires a scale. In oil, what happened to markets and to the real economy when approximately one-tenth of world supply was absent for half a year has been measured (Section 6.11). These measured values give a non-arbitrary basis of comparison for assessing the consequences of an interruption of AI supply as "serious" or "slight." This operation of borrowing a scale from another resource cannot be performed in diachronic comparison — the depth of degradation of an economy half a century ago cannot be read in the same units as the depth of degradation of the economy today. Finally, the limitations of contemporaneous comparison itself should be acknowledged. Contemporaneous comparison is observation of two resources at one point in time; era effects are controlled, but effects specific to the resource remain confounded with circumstances specific to the year in question. The oil market of 2026 is under a large-scale supply disruption event and is not a normal year. Judgments obtained from contemporaneous comparison therefore carry a different confounding, that of the particularity of a single year. The only way to reduce this confounding is to accumulate years of observation, and that exceeds the reach of a single paper. Contemporaneous comparison does not replace diachronic comparison but complements it — this positioning is confirmed again in Section 20. 3.10 The Application of the Discipline in the Sections That Follow The discipline formulated in this section is applied in the sections that follow as set out below. In Section 5 (AI capability tiers), the tier boundaries that are the premise of the discipline themselves become the object of analysis. The tiers are defined by capability distance from the frontier (Definition 2), and it is made explicit that the boundaries move over time (Frontier Descent). Supplier concentration and the effectiveness of access control are treated not as the definition of a boundary but as dependent variables that Proposition 2 predicts will change stepwise with respect to capability distance, and the shift in gov‐ 75 ernance form with respect to C3 is separated out as the prediction of Proposition 2b. The reservation of Section 3.5, that divided analogy is arbitrary unless paired with measurement of the boundary, is given substance in that section. In Section 6 (the three types of national value model), the three types of the oil era — Resource-Producing, Transformation, and Utilization — are extracted from historical instances, and their mappability onto AI is filtered through the judgments of Table 1. What transfers here is the distinction of positions of value generation — production, transformation, utilization — and not the constraints each type received from the physical character of oil as a resource. For the Transformation Model in particular, the non-correspondence whereby the refining margin of oil was physically and locationally defensible while the portion of the application margin in AI that reduces to general-purpose functions can be internalized through standard inclusion by producers constitutes the core of Proposition 4. What is compressed is that portion, and not the margin protected by integration into work processes, regulatory compliance, and assumption of responsibility — portions for which the cost of internalization is not zero for producers. In Section 9 (the critical tier and critical-tier governance), each institutional device of the nuclear control regime — verification, nonproliferation, and stabilization — is judged item by item for transplantability. Property 10 of Table 1 (greatest transplantability) and property 12 (no correspondence) form the two ends of that judgment. The disciplines of making explicit that C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category, of forbidding rhetoric that exaggerates capability or arouses fear, and of confining description to the level of institutions and governance are also applied in full in that section. In Section 13 (AI as infrastructure), the transferability to AI of the concepts of the electricity regime — natural monopoly, universal service, grid reliability, the social cost of outages — is examined closely, and the correspondences and asymmetries with the oil stockpiling institutions (the 90-day standard, coordinated release, priority allocation) are discussed. It is in that section that the judgment anticipated in Section 3.5 — the institutional objective transfers, the institutional means does not — is translated into concrete design as the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6). Finally, the burden that the method of this section imposes on this paper itself should be confirmed. The discipline of analogy requires of every subsequent section that (1) every inference from a historical precedent pass through the transfer judgments of Table 1; (2) where a new transfer not in the table is made, the judgment be added explicitly; and (3) inferences bearing on C3 make explicit the condition that it is unrealized. The extraction of the three types of the oil era in Section 6, the anatomy of the nuclear control regime in Section 9, and the references to the electricity and stockpiling institutions in Section 13 should all be read as applications of this procedure. A methodology is the form of verifiability that an author promises to readers. This section is the written text of that promise. It should be noted that the application of the discipline also works in the direction of weakening this paper's claims. In the light of the judgments of Table 1, what this paper 76 can draw from the history of oil is narrower than might initially be expected — confined to the structural theory of dependence, with much of the central toolkit of resource economics failing to transfer. Likewise, the institutional design that can be drawn from the nuclear control regime has low transplantability except at the single point of the physical basis of verification. What remains after passing through the discipline is far less than what popular resource analogies promise. But a small number of verified transfers is a firmer foundation for policy than a large number of unverified ones. The nine-cell theory and the institutional designs this paper presents in the sections that follow are constructed upon this narrowed foundation. 77 4. Theoretical Background: Resources and the State This section organizes, as the foundation of this paper's analytical framework, the body of theory that has addressed the structures through which states generate value in their relation to resources. The material is at first sight heterogeneous — resource economics (the resource curse, Dutch disease), political economy (the rentier state, the developmental state), economic history (staple theory, the advantages of backwardness), strategic management (the competitive advantage of nations), comparative institutional analysis (national innovation systems, varieties of capitalism), international economics (global value chains and trade in value added), and economic complexity, which derives from network science. From the vantage point of this paper, however, these align into three questions. First, what does the production of a resource bring to a state (the theory of production). Second, where does the capability to turn a resource into value added come from (the theory of transformation). Third, where is value realized, and by whom is it captured (the theory of utilization and capture). These three questions correspond respectively to the three types of national value model formalized in Section 6 — the Resource- Producing Model, the Transformation Model, and the Utilization Model. In organizing this material, this section follows two disciplines. The first is the explicit marking of evidence grade. For each theory, this section distinguishes in its prose between what is well established (primary sources, scholarly consensus), what is supported by evidence (reliable, but dependent on a single source or open to a range of interpretation), and what is contested (subject to academic dispute). The second is a reservation about applicability to AI. Every theory organized here was formed in the era of oil, manufacturing, and information technology, and any extrapolation to AI must pass the examination of the discipline of analogy formalized in Section 3 (Proposition 1). The end of this section (Section 4.11) reviews the current state of the recent arguments that have begun to apply these theories to AI, including the fact that many of them remain under dispute. The standing of this section should be made clear at the outset. This paper does not erect a new theory from nothing. On the relation between resources and states there exists more than half a century of accumulated empirical and theoretical work, and that accumulation — even though its object was oil and manufacturing — has succeeded in identifying recurring patterns. That abundance in production turns into prosperity only by way of institutions; that transformation capability is a path-dependent stock; that the capture of value separates from the geography of production. To judge whether these patterns are preserved across a change of resource (oil to AI), or whether they break down because of the change in the physical properties of the resource (from rival to non-rival goods, from stock to flow), the patterns themselves must first be held accurately in hand, together with the strength of the evidence for them. That is the work of this section. The account here therefore deliberately places its weight on the period before AI; the connection to AI is 78 only foreshadowed at the end of each subsection, and the substantive application is left to the analysis from Section 5 onward. 4.1 The Resource Curse — From an Unconditional Law to Conditionality Contemporary empirical research on the relation between resources and states departs from the formalization of the resource curse. Sachs & Warner (1995) showed by crosscountry regression that countries with a higher ratio of primary-commodity exports to GDP in 1971 grew systematically more slowly over 1971–89, and reported that this negative relation remained after controlling for initial income, trade policy, investment rates and other variables. Their summary paper, Sachs & Warner (2001), placed the evidence that resource-rich countries grow more slowly than resource-poor ones among "one of the most robust stylized facts in the empirical growth literature," and identified as its channel the pressure placed on tradable manufacturing through a high price level (real exchangerate appreciation). The paradox that states blessed with natural wealth are poor while states without resources become rich became, for the following quarter century, the central object of research in resource economics. The point at which the subsequent literature has arrived, however, is not support for the proposition that resources are unconditionally a curse. What comes closest to the current scholarly consensus is conditionality. The comprehensive survey in the Journal of Economic Literature by van der Ploeg (2011) — as its title, "Natural Resources: Curse or Blessing?", indicates — organizes the literature around the point that resources may become either a curse or a blessing, and emphasizes both that the volatility of resource prices is an independent channel harming investment and growth, and that institutions, financial development and trade openness are the conditions on which the outcome turns. Venables (2016) set out that turning resource revenue into development requires success at every step of a long chain of decisions — discovery, extraction, conversion into revenue, saving and investment, and absorption into the domestic economy — and that each stage has its own political-economy point of failure. That the management of resource revenue is not a mere problem of macroeconomic operation but a problem of political economy is the current standard view in this field. The decisive empirical demonstration of conditionality is Mehlum, Moene & Torvik (2006). That study showed, through interaction terms with institutional indicators, that the growth effect of resources depends on the quality of institutions. In countries with "producer friendly" institutions — institutions in which investment in productive activity is rewarded — resources help growth; the curse appears only in countries with "grabber friendly" institutions, in which the seizure of rents is rewarded. The finding that the cause of the curse is not the resource itself but the interaction of "resources × bad institutions" may be taken as well established, and it supplies the theoretical basis for the contrasting outcomes of Norway and Venezuela examined in Section 6. 79 There is, further, counter-evidence directed at the curse thesis itself, and on this point both sides must be set down as contested. Brunnschweiler & Bulte (2008) objected that the resource variable in Sachs–Warner-type studies (export dependence) measures no more than an endogenous "resource dependence," and that when it is remeasured by exogenous "resource endowment" (a stock) the curse disappears, resource endowment being if anything positively correlated with growth. Their point that the result reverses with the choice of resource proxy has been supported in critical surveys as well, and the position now reached is that the resource-curse thesis does not hold as an unconditional law but is a conditional pathway dependent on the method of measurement, on institutional conditions and on the period. A further axis of conditionality is price variability. As van der Ploeg (2011) emphasized as an independent channel, the volatility of resource prices harms growth through the uncertainty of investment and the amplitude of public finances, separately from the level of resource endowment. Because the revenue of a state on the Resource-Producing Model is tied to world prices, a variable outside its own control, spending expanded in a boom is forced to contract in a bust, and the repeated interruption and restarting of public investment destroys investment efficiency. In the language of Venables's chain, a state that succeeds at "conversion into revenue" but is buffeted by the price cycle at the stage of "saving and investment" cannot turn resource revenue into permanent capital. This point is the key to understanding what Norway's fiscal rule solves as an institution — the use of only the expected return on the stock held in the fund, rather than the flow of revenue — as examined in Section 6; it is also the prototype of a question for verification, taken up in Section 8, of whether an economy in which AI-related revenue and investment are tied to the results and valuations of a small number of specific firms (in producing states and in host states alike) may exhibit an amplitude problem of the same form. The implication for this paper is clear. The strong claim that "states on the Resource-Producing Model must fail" is not supported academically. The correct formulation is that production (resource endowment) is in itself neutral, and that what divides outcomes is the presence or absence of the institutional circuitry — governance, fiscal rules, investment mechanisms — that connects production to transformation and utilization. This formulation is the point of departure for Proposition 6a and Proposition 6b (Section 8), which treat an AI version of the resource curse. Both propositions, however, are not possibility claims to the effect that a distortion may operate depending on institutional conditions; they state the association between concentration and distortion in the indicative, and set out on the side of the falsification condition those institutional conditions that must be controlled for — the scale of fiscal transfers, the intensity of enforcement of competition policy, and the explicit statement of local value-capture clauses in higher-education enrolment quotas and in the terms on which facilities are attracted. The transition from an unconditional law to conditionality at which resource-curse research arrived over a quarter century is connected by this paper to testability by writing the conditions down as control variables. It is also the ground on which the three-type theory of Section 6 takes as its unit of analysis not the type but the type combined with institutions. In addition, Brunnsch‐

weiler and Bulte's measurement critique — that conflating dependence (a flow) with endowment (a stock) distorts the conclusion — should be read as a methodological warning for anyone conducting an argument of the same kind about AI. "A country with high AI dependence" and "a country with a thick endowment of AI capability" are different variables, and the former can arise in importing countries as well. That this paper defines dependence independently of endowment in Definition 4 (Section 13), and designs its measurement in Hypothesis H1 as distinct from endowment indicators, is a direct inheritance of the lesson that oil research took a quarter century to learn. 4.2 The Rentier State and Dutch Disease — The Political and Economic Pathologies of Resource Production Behind the average tendency captured by the regressions of the resource curse, two concrete mechanisms have been identified: the rentier state as a political mechanism, and Dutch disease as an economic one. The concept of the rentier state is generally attributed in its first appearance to Mahdavy (1970), who advanced it with Iran as his case. In a state where rents from outside (oil revenue) flow directly to the government, the government becomes fiscally independent of domestic taxation, and the pattern of economic development is distorted. Beblawi & Luciani (1987) formalized this, defining as a rentier state one in which (1) rents dominate the economy, (2) the rents are external in origin, (3) a few are engaged in generating the rents while the many receive distributions, and (4) the government is the principal recipient of the rents. The political consequence that follows from this structure is the converse of "no taxation without representation": a state that does not tax bears no accountability. A state that obtains revenue by taxing the productive activity of its people is under pressure to develop, in return, the circuits of accountability and representation; a state whose revenue wells up from underground is exempt from that pressure. The pathology of resource production appears first as a pathology of governance. This line of theory has continued to develop actively for half a century and is well established. As Section 6 shows, the public finances of the Gulf oil producers remain a contemporary instance of this structure. The standard theory of the economic mechanism was supplied by Corden & Neary (1982). The expansion of the booming sector (resources) presses on the lagging sector (manufacturing) through two channels. The first is the resource-movement effect: labour and capital move to the booming sector and to the non-traded (services) sector and flow out of manufacturing. The second is the spending effect: the rise in income from resource revenue increases demand for non-traded goods and, through real exchange-rate appreciation, erodes the competitiveness of tradable manufacturing. The name derives from the experience of stagnation in Dutch manufacturing after the discovery of North Sea gas fields in the 1960s. In the terms of this paper, Dutch disease is a mechanism by which specialization in production erodes transformation capability. The temporal structure in which the temporary abundance of the producing sector causes the more durable source of value, the transformation sector (processing and manufacturing), to atrophy leaves a state 81 with "neither production nor transformation" once the resource boom has passed. This pairing — the rentier state supplying the political pathology of resource production (the loss of accountability) and Dutch disease the economic one (the atrophy of the transformation sector) — is the theoretical prototype of the "curse of concentration inside an AI-producing country" (Proposition 6a) and the "extractive distortion of attracting data centres" (Proposition 6b) examined in Section 8. It is also necessary to note that the two pathologies amplify one another. If the transformation sector atrophies through Dutch disease, the weight of rents in the economy rises further and the rentier structure deepens. If the rentier structure deepens, the political incentive for the government to undertake policies that cultivate the transformation sector — long-term investment in education, infrastructure and the competitive environment — weakens, since procuring support by distribution is cheaper in the short run. The existence of this vicious circle implies that escape from resource production becomes harder with time; that is, that the window for intervention is open only early. Conversely, the case of Norway discussed below (Section 6) may be read as an instance in which fixing the fiscal institutions at an early stage, around the point at which resource revenue began in earnest, blocked the entrance to the circle. As for AI, if the attraction of computing infrastructure and the rapid expansion of a producing sector were to begin distorting the domestic allocation of institutions and people, it is possible that responding only once this has been observed would be too late — though the transferability of this dynamic to AI is itself, in the light of the discipline of Proposition 1, still a question for verification, and this paper does no more than formalize it in the form of observational indicators in Section 8. 4.3 Staple Theory — The Problem of Transition from Production to Transformation and Utilization Thirty years before the empirical research on the resource curse, there was a line of theory that had already formalized the claim that what decides a state's fate is not production in itself but whether it succeeds in the transition out of production. This is staple theory, which originates in Canadian economic history. Innis, through his studies of fur (The Fur Trade in Canada, 1930) and of the cod fishery (The Cod Fisheries, 1940), showed that the development of the Canadian economy was formed around primary commodities produced for export (staples), and became the progenitor of this approach. It was Watkins (1963) who formalized it as a theory of growth. On Watkins's account, the transition from staple exports to the diversification of an economy depends on the formation of three linkages. (1) Backward linkage: the development of industries supplying inputs to staple production. (2) Forward linkage: the development of industries that process the staple as an input. (3) Final-demand linkage: the income generated by staple exports fostering domestic consumer-goods industries. An economy that fails to form these linkages falls into the "staple trap," fixed in the export of primary commodities. 82 Seen from the framework of this paper, these three linkages correspond almost directly to the three types of national value model. Forward linkage is the transition from production (M1) to transformation (M2), and final-demand linkage is the domestic extension of utilization (M3). Staple theory was thus an intellectual predecessor that had, as early as 1963, formalized this paper's sequence of production, transformation and utilization as a problem of transition, and the three-type theory of this paper may be positioned as a reformulation of staple theory's transition problem at the point where the resource changes from oil to AI. That a contemporary version of the staple trap may logically exist — a state that supplies compute and data as its "production," or supplies the sites for them (data centres), while connecting neither to forward linkage (application) nor to final-demand linkage (the deepening of domestic utilization) — is revisited in the discussion of extractive distortion in Section 8. A second legacy of staple theory is the view that the physical properties of a resource govern the possibilities for forming linkages. In Innis's historical account, fur, cod, wheat and minerals each imposed different patterns of transport, processing and settlement, and inscribed different institutions and social structures on Canada. Depending on what the staple is, the ease of creating forward linkage changes — whether processing near the site of production is economically compelled, and whether processing is capital-intensive or labour-intensive. Directed at the object of this paper, the question to be asked is: what linkage structures does the staple called AI permit? Oil, as Section 6 sets out in detail, generated through the physical property of asymmetric transport costs a geography of forward linkage in which "refining takes place at the point of consumption," and thereby created room for the existence of states on the Transformation Model. Whether the physical properties of AI — zero marginal cost of replication, the possibility of remote supply, the ease of downstream integration by the producer — permit the same room is not self-evident, and this question is precisely the subject of Proposition 4 (Section 7). What should be established at the level of theory is staple theory's lesson that the possibility of forming linkages is a function not of policy will alone but of the physical properties of the resource. 4.4 General-Purpose Technologies and the Lag in Diffusion — Theory on the Utilization Side Against the theories of production and transformation, the theoretical foundation on the utilization side is supplied by the line of work organized in the history of technology and in growth theory under the concept of the general-purpose technology. A general-purpose technology is one that, like electric power, the internal combustion engine or information technology, governs productivity across a broad range of sectors and induces a chain of complementary innovations. In this line of work, three marks of a general-purpose technology have been given: (1) pervasiveness — that it is used as an input across a broad range of sectors of the economy; (2) continuing improvement — that the performance and cost of the technology itself improve persistently; and (3) the inducement of 83 complementary innovation — that it gives rise to invention and reorganization on the side of the using sectors. The base of Definition 1 (Section 2), element (i), general-purpose input character — that it is an input governing productivity across a broad range of sectors of the economy — is a restatement of this line of work from the side of the theory of resources. The distinctiveness of this paper's definition lies in layering onto that base, as the degree of strategic character, the security dimensions of external dependence in supply (ii), infrastructural criticality (iii), and the governing of capability gaps (iv). Whereas general-purpose technology character is given as an attribute of the resource, strategic character varies with the relation to the economic structure of the period and with which level of capability of the input in question is meant; this historical and tier relativity is what makes the tier-by-tier analysis from Section 5 onward necessary. Where the theory of general-purpose technologies is an economics of technology, this paper connects it to a political economy of resources. The central lesson left by the economic history of general-purpose technologies is the lag in diffusion. What is well established about the experience of electrification is that the change in the source of power did not by itself raise productivity immediately. Even when factories replaced the centralized power of the steam engine with the distributed power of the electric motor, the productivity effect of electrification did not become manifest until the complementary investment and learning — redesign of factory layout, change in the organization of work, reconfiguration of skills — had been completed. A lag of the same form has been observed for information technology, and research on the measurement of intangibles (Corrado, Hulten & Sichel, 2005; Haskel & Westlake, 2017) supplies evidence supporting the view that productivity effects are realized only once intangible complementary investment — organizational capital, training, process redesign — has been made behind the visible investment in equipment and software. The temporal shape in which measured productivity is if anything stagnant in the early period of adoption, with effects accelerating once complementary investment passes a threshold, is the structure of the "J-curve" treated in Proposition 5 (Section 7), and it is the historical basis of this paper's formulation that the value of the Utilization Model (M3) compounds as the product of the rate of diffusion and absorptive capacity. Two implications are drawn from this line of work. First, utilization is not automatic. Even where access to the technology is given, in an economy lacking complementary investment — organization, institutions, people — the depth of utilization remains shallow. That "outcomes of utilization diverge among states with access to the same resource" is a direct prediction from the theory of general-purpose technologies. Second, the effects of utilization escape measurement easily. Intangible investment is not readily captured as investment in GDP statistics, and the consumer surplus from free digital goods is not recorded in GDP (as the measurement gap indicated by Brynjolfsson and colleagues' GDP-B exercise shows). The value of the Utilization Model may therefore be systematically under- recorded in the existing national accounts, and this measurement problem connects to national redefinition in its measurement dimension (Section 17). 84 The lag in diffusion also has implications specific to the temporal design of policy. Under a lagged structure, the results of policies promoting utilization appear later than the policy cycle (the budget year, the electoral cycle), so that there is a structural risk of complementary investment being interrupted on the ground that "no effect is visible." What the history of electrification and of information technology suggests is that the compounding of utilization is itself conditional on the continuity of investment. Furthermore, because the effect of a general-purpose technology resides in the reorganization of the using sectors rather than in the adopting sector, the setting of the policy object is also difficult: "fostering an AI industry" and "the reorganization of industries by AI" are different policies, and the main field of the latter lies outside the AI sector. This implication of the theory of general-purpose technologies is the theoretical ground for holding that the institutional requirements of the Utilization Model (M3) differ fundamentally from those of the Resource- Producing and Transformation Models, and hence that the institutions demanded by the three types are not interchangeable; it supports the non-equivalence of the cells in Proposition 3 (Section 6) from the utilization side. 4.5 Can a State Create Competitive Advantage? — Porter and His Critics It was Porter (1990) who opened the discussion of value creation with the state as its unit from the side of strategic management. The innovation in Porter's way of posing the question lay in shifting it from "why are states rich?" to "why do particular industries in particular countries succeed internationally?", and in lowering the unit of analysis from the state to the industrial cluster. From empirical research on ten countries and more than a hundred industries, Porter formalized the determinants of competitive advantage as a "diamond" of four elements — (1) factor conditions, (2) demand conditions, (3) related and supporting industries, and (4) firm strategy, structure and rivalry — with government and chance placed as auxiliary variables. The element of demand conditions — that sophisticated domestic demand forces upgrading on the supply side — is also one antecedent formulation of this paper's hypothesis of mutual complementarity (Proposition 13, Section 18), that the depth of utilization (M3) cultivates the capability of transformation (M2). Porter also presented a four-stage theory of national development (factor-driven, investment- driven, innovation-driven, wealth-driven), portraying the final "wealth-driven" stage as a phase of decline in which vitality is lost through dependence on accumulated wealth. What matters for this paper is the content of the first element. Porter held that "created advanced factors" such as advanced people and research infrastructure govern sustained advantage more than "given factors" such as natural resources. Factor conditions are not given but created — in the terms of this paper, this proposition is the classical formulation of the endogeneity of transformation capability, and one of the headwaters of the three-type theory that distinguishes production (given resources) from transformation (created capability). Porter's framework has nevertheless been exposed to serious criticism, and this paper must take up that criticism in advance. The most fundamental critique is Krugman (1994). 85 Krugman's argument may be summarized in three points. First, states, unlike firms, do not go bankrupt, and trade is not zero-sum, so that the analogy of competition between states is a category error. Second, what determines a people's standard of living is almost entirely domestic productivity, not victory or defeat in international competition. Third, the rhetoric of competitiveness is a "dangerous obsession" that brings real harms — protectionism, waste in industrial policy, and trade friction. On the empirical side, in addition, Davies & Ellis (2000) pointed out the weakness of empirical support for the diamond model and its tautological character, and showed that the existence of countries that have attained high income while remaining resource-dependent is a counterexample to the stage theory's claim that an innovation-driven stage is indispensable to prosperity. Grant (1991) pointed to the absence of testability and the vagueness of variable definitions (while acknowledging the usefulness of the framework), and the criticism that under globalization the explanatory power of the "home diamond" alone declines (the double-diamond argument, on which small countries cannot be explained by their own diamond alone) has likewise become established. These criticisms are widely accepted at the level of evidence that is supportive. The position of this paper should be stated explicitly. This paper discusses "national value models" not in order to adjudicate victory and defeat between states. What Krugman's critique rightly forbids is treating states as firms competing for market share; what this paper does is a structural analysis of the creation, transformation and capture of value with the state as its unit. Krugman's second point, that domestic productivity determines living standards, can within this paper's framework be read rather as another expression of the centrality of the Utilization Model (M3) — that the greater part of a resource's value is realized as productivity improvement on the utilization side. On the other hand, the world that Krugman could presuppose in the 1990s, in which trade and dependence are not weaponized, cannot be presupposed as such in an age of export controls and supply cut-offs around AI. This point connects to the discussion of weaponized interdependence examined in Section 4.10. What remains of Porter after passing through the criticism should be set out. First, the lesson about the unit of analysis. A state's advantage is established not as a whole but in particular industries, clusters and processes — this view is the ground for the granularity at which this paper formalizes national strategy as "a portfolio over nine cells rather than the choice of a single cell" (Definition 3, Section 6). Second, the proposition of factor creation. Unlike natural resources, advanced factors (specialist people, research infrastructure, specialized infrastructure) are created by investment, and created factors form the basis of an advantage that is difficult to imitate — in the context of AI, computing infrastructure, electric power, AI talent and data infrastructure are precisely "created factors," and the speed and quality of their creation are diverging between states. Third, the proposition of demand conditions. The mechanism by which sophisticated domestic demand trains suppliers is the theoretical seed of this paper's portfolio complementarity (Section 18), that an M3 state with deep utilization may endogenously cultivate the capability of transformation (M2). 86 4.6 Institutional Theories of Transformation Capability — National Innovation Systems, the Developmental State, and Backwardness Where does transformation capability come from? Answering this question from the side of institutional theory are the theory of the national innovation system (NIS) and the theory of the developmental state. Both have their empirical origin in the study of Japan. The first monograph regarded as making systematic use of the NIS concept is Freeman (1987), and its object was Japan. Freeman formalized the linkages among institutions — including the Ministry of International Trade and Industry, in-house corporate R&D, education and training, and the keiretsu — as "the network of institutions in the public and private sectors whose activities and interactions initiate, modify and diffuse new technologies" (Lundvall had used the concept earlier, and Freeman himself traced its lineage back to Friedrich List's system of national productive forces). Lundvall (1992) proposed a broad NIS encompassing the economic structure and the institutional setup as a whole, with interactive learning and producer–user relations at its core, and stated that knowledge is the most important resource in the modern economy and learning the most important process. Nelson (1993) demonstrated the diversity of such systems through a comparative analysis of fifteen countries, distinguishing among others a United States type (led by universities and defence procurement) and a Japanese type (led by in-house corporate learning). NIS theory was adopted by the OECD in the 1990s and became the standard vocabulary of innovation policy. There is an irony of history here: the NIS concept was born to explain Japan's success and was exported to the world, yet Japan itself faced, from the 1990s onward, the problem that its own system did not fit a frontier phase (the analysis of Callon, discussed below). Strength as a network of institutions is the obverse of slowness in reconfiguration when the environment shifts. This issue of "the inertia of the system" is a premise for this paper, which discusses institutional adaptation to a new general-purpose resource, when it analyses the case of Japan (Section 18). For this paper, NIS is the first substantial framework to grasp a state's transformation capability as the mutual linkage of institutions. NIS theory has, however, always been accompanied by the criticism that its measurement framework is weak (vagueness of the concept, description after the fact), and this measurement gap is part of the space that this paper's proposals for measuring dependence and transformation value (Section 13, Appendix C) attempt to fill. The theory of the developmental state makes a stronger claim about the role of the state in the formation of transformation capability. Johnson (1982) analysed the lineage of the Ministry of International Trade and Industry from the pre-war period and originated the concept of the "capitalist developmental state," finding its key in "plan rationality": Japan was a plan-rational state pursuing developmental goals through the market, different both from a regulatory state (the United States) and from a plan-ideological state (the Soviet Union). Amsden (1989) understood South Korea's late industrialization as "industrialization through learning," and formalized both that the state exchanged subsidies for performance- based discipline and that for a late-developing country "getting prices deliber‐ 87 ately wrong" may be a rational strategy. Wade (1990), centring on Taiwan, presented a theory of the "governed market," in which the state deliberately moves the level of investment and the composition of industry away from market equilibrium. Evans (1995) extracted "embedded autonomy" — the simultaneous attainment of Weberian coherence in the bureaucracy (autonomy) and dense social ties with industry (embeddedness) — as the condition of a developmental state, placing the predatory state at its opposite pole. The frameworks of these four major works are well established. Two reservations are nevertheless necessary about the theory of the developmental state. The first is empirical scepticism. Beason & Weinstein (1996) examined Japan over 1955–90 and concluded that the ministry's support (subsidies, low-interest loans, protection) was if anything allocated to low-growth industries, and that the evidence that targeting raised productivity growth is thin. The second is phase dependence. Callon (1995) analysed the malfunctioning of large technology consortia over 1975–93 and showed that after catchup was complete — in the phase in which a frontier to be imitated no longer existed outside — cooperative industrial policy ceased to work. These are at the level of evidence that is supportive, and are consistent with the general summary of the limits of developmental- state theory (optimization for the catch-up phase, the narrowing of policy instruments by international disciplines, and the loss of autonomy through success). The distinction this paper draws from them is decisive: catch-up transformation and frontier transformation require different institutions. This distinction is one ground for the nonequivalence of the nine cells in Proposition 3 (Section 6), and it is also the reason why Japan's AI strategy cannot be formulated in the form of "the ministry model once again" (Section 18). It should be noted that arguments about a "new industrial policy" have been reactivated in the context of economic security — the CHIPS Act in the United States, the return of industrial policy in the European Union — and that the re-evaluation of developmental-state theory is a contested matter still in progress. Two classics may be appended as theoretical ancestors of developmental-state theory. The flying-geese pattern (Akamatsu, 1962; deriving from Akamatsu's series of studies in the 1930s, with theoretical elaboration by Kiyoshi Kojima — Kojima, 2000) formalized the pattern by which industries in a late-developing country rise through the time lag among three curves, import, domestic production and export, and became a descriptive framework for the propagation of industry in post-war Asia — though it has been criticized on the ground that in the era of global value chains, in which transfer occurs at the level of processes rather than industries, the unit of analysis of the flying-geese pattern ceases to hold. Gerschenkron (1962) held that late-developing countries have the "advantages of backwardness" in being able to borrow the technology of early developers, but that the deeper the backwardness, the more abrupt and large-scale industrialization becomes, and the more it depends on institutional substitutes (the market in Britain, the universal bank in Germany, the state in Russia). This finding, that the optimal institution is a function of the distance from the frontier, gives the form of the question for the age of AI: is catch-up by "borrowing" compute and foundation models possible, and what are its institutional substitutes? 88 4.7 Varieties of Capitalism — Institutional Configuration and Types of Transformation Even among advanced economies with access to the same resources and the same technologies, the type of transformation diverges. What theorized this divergence is the theory of the varieties of capitalism (VoC). Hall & Soskice (2001), from a relational approach placing the firm at the centre, divided the advanced economies into two types according to the manner in which five coordination problems are solved: industrial relations, vocational training, corporate governance, inter-firm relations, and relations with employees. Liberal market economies (LMEs; the United States, the United Kingdom and others) are characterized by coordination through markets, competition, fluid labour markets and equity markets, and by investment in general skills; coordinated market economies (CMEs; Germany, Japan, the Nordic countries and others) are characterized by non-market coordination (industry associations, banks, long-term employment) and by investment in firm- and industry-specific skills. The core proposition is "institutional comparative advantage": LMEs have a comparative advantage in radical innovation (software, biotechnology, semiconductor design and the like) and CMEs in incremental innovation (machine tools, premium automobiles, chemicals and the like), and because institutions are stabilized as bundles by complementarity, convergence is unlikely. The implication of institutional complementarity is practically weighty: transplanting a single institutional element (a fluid labour market, say) will not make it work if the other elements that complement it (a supply of general skills, governance through equity markets) are absent. Institutions operate as bundles, not as parts. The empirical status of VoC is contested. Taylor (2004), in a test using patent data, criticized the LME/CME hypothesis about radical and incremental innovation as not robust once the United States is excluded — a single country, the United States, drives the result. The coarseness of the dichotomy (France, Italy, South Korea and China do not fit, and third types such as a state-led type have been proposed), the methodological-nationalism critique asking whether institutional analysis with the national economy as the unit holds in the era of global value chains, and the critique of its static character have also become established. Application to the age of AI is further unsettled: one reading holds that AI and the platform economy are a typical domain of radical innovation and that, as VoC predicts, the LME type is dominant, while another holds that the industrial implementation of AI (embedded in manufacturing) has the character of incremental improvement and leaves room for the CME type to recover ground; and China's state capitalism lies outside the VoC typology altogether. All of these are recorded as contested. What VoC gives this paper is nonetheless substantial. VoC is the most systematic theorization of the point that the type of transformation differs by institutional configuration even for the same resource, and it is the theoretical ground for holding that institutional diversity among states remains even within each cell of the Nine-Cell Matrix — that a cell governs the space of strategy, but that there is more than one way of solving within a cell. Whether the LME/CME hypothesis is borne out for AI is, moreover, an empirical question 89 directly bound up with the feasibility of Japan's M2′ strategy (AI transformation embedded in manufacturing; Section 18). 4.8 Scale as a Constraint — Theories of Small-State Strategy The institutional theories of transformation capability (Section 4.6) and the theory of institutional diversity (Section 4.7) were forged mainly out of the experience of large or medium- sized states. For the analysis of national value models, however, a line of theory that makes scale itself explicit as a constraint — the theory of small-state strategy — is indispensable. Given the scale of capital, electric power and people that the development of frontier AI demands (Section 5), the great majority of the world's states stand by definition on the side of the small. The classic is Katzenstein (1985). The small European states (Switzerland, Austria, the Nordic countries, the Benelux countries), accepting dependence on the world market as given, operated a combination of "international liberalization plus domestic compensation" through democratic corporatism — social partnership, encompassing interest associations, continuous political adjustment — and achieved flexible industrial adjustment. This is a third path, different both from the United States type, which shifts risk onto the market, and from the Japanese type, which attempts to transform industrial structure directly. Quantitative studies showing a positive correlation between openness and the size of government (Cameron; Rodrik) have been cited alongside as support for this small-state strategy, in which the state insures the risks of openness. These stand at the level of wellestablished or supportive evidence. Research on small states in the era of the knowledge economy has updated this line. Breznitz (2007) showed that three small states — Israel, Taiwan and Ireland — achieved the same "IT growth" at different positions of state involvement: Israel at the far upstream of R&D (the Office of the Chief Scientist and the creation of a venture-capital market), Taiwan in midstream by way of the public research institute ITRI, and Ireland downstream through the attraction of foreign direct investment; and thereby demonstrated that more than one path to success exists for small states. Ornston (2012) analysed how the Nordic countries and Ireland redeployed traditional corporatism into "creative corporatism" — coordinated investment in human capital, research and venture capital — and traced a shift from Katzenstein's compensatory model to an investment model. For Singapore there is an accumulation of research as a small-state version of the developmental state (the combination of investment attraction led by the Economic Development Board with state capital), continuous with that country's experience as an oil-refining hub examined in Section 6. What the theory of small-state strategy gives this paper is the perspective of "the differentiation of transformation and utilization strategies under the resource constraint of scale." In an age of AI in which the economies of scale in the development of foundation models are extreme, the theorization of the menu of strategies available to small states — special‐ 90

ization in applications, the export of regulation and trust, niche compute, becoming a hub for talent — lies on the extension of this line. What matters is that the plurality of paths shown by Breznitz can be translated into the language of the nine cells: a small state cannot in principle stand at M1×C2 (frontier production), but by choosing its position within the chain — where in the upstream, midstream or downstream the state becomes involved — it can compose a combination of several cells. The particulars of small-state strategy are developed in Section 14 (Singapore, Israel, and small-state strategy in general). 4.9 Where Is Value Captured? — Global Value Chains, the Smile Curve, Trade in Value Added, and Economic Complexity The global fragmentation of production from the 1990s onward laid bare the separation between "where production takes place" and "where value is captured." The theorization and measurement of this separation is the direct predecessor of this paper's concept of transformation value (Definition 5, Section 7). The theoretical foundation is the theory of global value chain governance in Gereffi, Humphrey & Sturgeon (2005). From three variables — the complexity of transactions, the codifiability of information, and the capability of suppliers — the governance form of a chain divides into five types, market, modular, relational, captive and hierarchy, with explicit coordination and asymmetry of power increasing as one moves from market to hierarchy. The capture of value is determined, independently of the geography of production, by governance position within the chain: standard-setter, platform owner, brand holder. This framework is well established, and is transferable to the analysis of the position that providers of foundation models occupy relative to application developers (setters of the terms of an API, standard-setters) in AI (Section 7). Its prehistory includes Gereffi's dichotomy of producer-driven and buyer-driven chains, and a related concept is the theory of "upgrading" (Humphrey & Schmitz, 2002), which grasps improvement of position within a chain in four types: process, product, functional and inter-chain. The four types of upgrading correspond, in this paper's terms, to the distinction between "advancement within a cell" and "movement between cells," and supply the vocabulary in which the country profiles of Section 14 describe attempts at cell transition. What expressed the distribution of value added across processes intuitively is the smile curve. When processes are arrayed from upstream (R&D, components) through midstream (assembly) to downstream (brand, services), value added traces a U shape, high at both ends and low in the middle; this schema is generally attributed to Stan Shih, the founder of Acer, who advanced it around 1992 in the course of his plan for the company's reconstruction — a concept originating in practice, to which subsequent empirical research has given support. Baldwin & Ito (2021) demonstrate, using international input– output data, the rise of value added originating in services and a "deepening of the smile." The emblematic case is the iPhone study of Xing & Detert (2010): of the approximately 179 dollars in shipment value of the iPhone (3G), the value added by assembly in China was 91 only approximately 6.5 dollars (approximately 3.6%), while gross trade statistics recorded the entire amount as a Chinese export to the United States. It is a decisive numerical illustration that the place of production is not the place of value capture. How the deepening of the smile curve — the relative decline of value added in the middle (assembly and execution) and its rise at both ends (upstream design, and downstream brand and services) — appears in AI is the central question of this paper's theory of transformation value. Whether the margin of the application layer, positioned between the "upstream" of foundation models and the "downstream" of the relation with final demand (a position corresponding to assembly), becomes structurally thin, or whether it can be defended by complementary assets, is the subject of Proposition 4 (Section 7) and Hypothesis H2, and the smile curve provides the coordinate system in which to pose that question. The turn in measurement was institutionalized when Koopman, Wang & Wei (2014) supplied an accounting framework decomposing gross exports completely into domestic value added, foreign value added and double counting (a related line is Johnson & Noguera's work on the VAX ratio). The OECD–WTO Trade in Value Added (TiVA) database was first released in 2013 and became the international standard for measuring "whose value added reached final demand." From the vantage point of this paper, the TiVA and GVC-income lineage is a precedent that remeasured "the value of a state" by the attribution of value added rather than by the place of production, and is the methodological ancestor of the measurement of transformation value that this paper proposes for AI (Hypothesis H2). Its limits are equally clear: transfers of value by way of data, models and intellectual property are not readily mapped into input–output tables, and the measurement of value attribution in the age of AI connects to the unresolved area of profit shifting in intangible assets. Finally, as an attempt to quantify a state's transformation capability itself, there is the line of economic complexity. Hidalgo & Hausmann (2009), taking products to be made from combinations of invisible "capabilities," applied an iterative computation to the bipartite network of countries and products and derived the economic complexity index (ECI) from the diversity of exports and the ubiquity of products. The ECI predicts subsequent growth even after controlling for the level of income. Earlier work (Hidalgo, Klinger, Barabási & Hausmann, 2007) had shown that proximity in the product space constrains the paths of diversification — that states can extend only to products lying "near" their current capabilities. Economic complexity is the leading quantification of the view that the value of a state is a stock of accumulated non-tradable capabilities, and it is well established (with the reservations that it is based on exported goods and captures services and digital trade weakly, that the theoretical interpretation of "capabilities" is open, and that there is methodological dispute with alternative indicators). The implication for this paper lies in the point that transformation capability is a stock and accumulates only path-dependently. The AI version of the question — how to measure the complexity of the capability space of data, compute, people and organizational know-how — is an open research problem, and is included in the research agenda of Section 21. 92 4.10 Network Power and Regulatory Power — Value Positions Not Based on Production The theories above have sought the source of value in the structure of production, transformation and capture. From the latter half of the 2010s, however, international political economy has theorized a third value position orthogonal to these — position on a network and the right to cut off access, together with the power to set regulatory standards. In analysing relations among states around AI, this line is indispensable. According to the theory of weaponized interdependence of Farrell & Newman (2019), global economic networks (international payments, the internet backbone and the like) converge on a hub-and-spoke structure because of efficiency, and the state with jurisdiction over the hub (mainly the United States) obtains two forms of power: informational advantage from observing the information flowing through the hub (the panopticon effect), and coercion through cutting off access to the hub (the chokepoint effect). Exercising this power requires domestic institutions (jurisdiction, regulatory capacity), and target states respond by insulating themselves or by building alternative networks — and the original article itself points to an "overuse dilemma," in which the very anticipation of weaponization induces decoupling and investment in domestic production. Among the theoretical ancestors of this framework are the theory of hegemonic stability and the theory of structural power formalized by Strange (1988) as four structures: security, production, finance and knowledge. Application to semiconductors and AI is already wide-ranging, and export controls on advanced semiconductors have been analysed within this framework as the exercise of jurisdiction over a small number of nodes — lithography equipment, design software, advanced GPUs (for a general history, Miller, 2022). This is at the level of evidence that is supportive. Implications specific to AI follow directly from the framework as well. Compute, cloud services and foundation-model APIs are all networks converging, because of efficiency, on a small number of hubs, and the further the convergence proceeds, the more the state with jurisdiction over a hub acquires both the panopticon effect (observation of use) and the chokepoint effect (cutting off access, or changing its terms). This paper's concept of AI outage (Definition 4, Section 13) may be positioned as a generalization of the risk of supply cut-off, extending to the fact that this chokepoint effect may be triggered not only as a geopolitical measure but also as a technical failure or a commercial decision. The "overuse dilemma" — that anticipation of weaponization induces insulation and domestic production in target states and thereby damages the value of the hub itself — foreshadows that the equilibrium of export controls is not static; that is, that the control regime of row C2 (Section 8) has a dynamic in which it is continually eroded by countervailing investment. A second position not based on production is regulatory power. Bradford's (2020) theory of the Brussels effect showed that when five conditions are met — market size, regulatory capacity, stringent standards, inelastic targets and non-divisibility — European Union regulation becomes a global standard through a "de facto" effect by way of corporate conduct and a "de jure" effect by way of imitation in the legislation of other countries (the 93 typical case being the General Data Protection Regulation). It is a theorization of a channel of value capture for a state that is not based on production: exporting regulation and thereby taking a standard-setting position in the value chain. Extrapolation to AI is, however, under dispute: the argument that a Brussels effect operates on the European Union's AI Act (Regulation (EU) 2024/1689, in force from August 2024) (Siegmann & Anderljung, 2022) stands alongside scepticism holding that, given divisibility, the weakness of industry within the bloc and regulatory competition between the United States and China, propagation of the GDPR type is limited; this paper treats the matter as contested (and revisits it in the European Union profile in Section 14). What this line means for the framework of this paper is that a state's value position is not exhausted by "the resources it holds" and "the capability by which it transforms them." Jurisdiction over chokepoints on a network and the power to set regulatory standards operate on an axis distinct from the capture of value added in the TiVA sense, yet in the age of AI they often operate as a coercive force surpassing it. The description of each cell of the Nine-Cell Matrix (Sections 7 to 9) incorporates this axis of the right to cut off and of standard-setting power. The position that obtains value through the supply of rules and verification is, however, as the note to Definition 3 (Section 6) makes explicit, outside the domain over which the nine cells quantify, since its source of value lies not in a relation to a general-purpose input but in constraining the conduct of other actors. The theory of regulatory power organized in this section is therefore treated not in the description of positions on the nine cells but separately, as a "position concerning the rules of the cells," in Section 14 (the European Union, the United Kingdom) and in Section 20, and the possibility of extending the framework to a fourth value model (M4, a disciplining type) is reserved as a task for the future. 4.11 Applying Existing Theories to AI — The Current State of the Debate Attempts to apply the theories above to AI have increased rapidly since the beginning of the 2020s. This subsection reviews their current state in accordance with the discipline of evidence grade. To state the conclusion first: much of the discussion in this area is at the stage of working papers or of policy discourse, and little is yet well established. It is for that very reason that an explicit framework of the kind offered here — a discipline for determining how far each analogy holds — has value. First, the discussion of disparities in compute. Because the development of frontier AI demands an extreme concentration of compute (and of electric power and capital), a body of research taking compute as the anchor of governance — what is called compute governance — is in the course of formation. It attends to the property that compute is physical, visible and measurable, and places its measurement, licensing and verification at the foundation of international governance; the stipulations of Definition 7 (critical-tier governance, Section 9) and the analysis of Section 9 share a problem consciousness with this body of research. That literature is, however, still forming, and its evaluation is unsettled; 94 this paper avoids relying on any individual claim within it and refers to it only at the level of the framework. Second, the body of critical discourse called "digital colonialism" and "data extractivism." This lineage criticizes as a repetition of colonial-era resource extraction the structure in which countries of the global South supply data, attention and resources (electric power, water, land) while the transformation and capture of value accrue to platforms in the North; in the terms of this paper it may be read as an indictment of a structure in which a state becomes a passive terminal of M3 without being able to stand at either M1 or M2. This discourse is active as normative critique, but its empirical measurement framework remains weak; this paper positions it as contested, and reformulates the structural intuition at its core — that providing a site and capturing transformation value are different things — in a testable form as the extractive distortion of Proposition 6b (Section 8). Third, the policy discourse of "AI nationalism" and "sovereign AI." The movement by which states pursue domestic holding of their own AI capability (models, computing infrastructure, data) can be understood as anticipatory counteraction to weaponized interdependence (the realization of the overuse dilemma noted above). The concepts of "digital sovereignty" and "strategic autonomy" originating in Europe have also become objects of scholarly organization (Floridi, 2020; Broeders, Cristiano & Kaminska, 2023), and the points at issue are the aptness of transposing a territorial concept of sovereignty into digital space, the boundary with protectionism, the unmeasurability of "autonomy," and the European dilemma of a gap between regulatory power and industrial base. All of these discourses are as yet unoperationalized antecedents of the question that this paper's Definition 6 (the sovereign minimum guarantee level, Section 13) attempts to answer — what, and to what extent, should be guaranteed domestically. In particular, the "gap between regulation and capability" that the European experience displays — regulatory power without the industrial base of cloud services, semiconductors and foundation models — is the obverse of the limits on the application of the Brussels effect examined in Section 4.10, and anticipates the central empirical problem of the nine-cell analysis (Sections 8 and 14): how far a value position consisting in regulatory power can stand on its own without a foundation in production or transformation. Fourth, the reapplication of developmental-state theory and NIS theory to AI. The wave of "new industrial policy" motivated by economic security — the CHIPS Act in the United States, the return of industrial policy in the European Union, support for domestic foundation models in various states — has made the framework of developmental-state theory organized in Section 4.6 an active analytical instrument once more. Yet the two reservations established there — empirical scepticism about targeting (Beason & Weinstein, 1996) and the failure of cooperative policy in a frontier phase (Callon, 1995) — are pressed still more sharply in the case of AI. The frontier of AI is not a known target that can be imitated but a moving object of search, so that the premise on which the catch-up policy mode (identifying the target, concentrating resources, exchanging support for discipline) functions effectively has broken down. On the other hand, Amsden's formulation of "support 95 exchanged for discipline" remains alive at the level of abstraction even when the resource changes, and what the developmental state of the age of AI takes as the currency of discipline — allocation of compute, access to data, or the results of talent development — is an open problem of design. This paper gives that question concrete form in Section 8 (the institutional requirements of row C2) and Section 18 (Japan's portfolio). Summarizing this subsection as a whole in the language of evidence grade: the application of existing theories to AI is (a) active as a transfer of frameworks, (b) almost untouched as empirical work, and (c) in part a matter in which policy discourse has run ahead of academic verification. The application of weaponized interdependence to semiconductors is approaching the level of evidence that is supportive, the application of the Brussels effect to the AI Act is contested, compute governance is still forming, and digital colonialism is at the stage of normative discourse. It is precisely this asymmetry of maturity that leads this paper to take the form not of the application of a single theory but of a correspondence table across several theories (the discipline of analogy, Section 3) together with a set of testable propositions (Propositions 1 to 14). Not to assert the transfer of a theory, but to make the conditions of transfer explicit and open them to testing — that is the role a conceptual framework should play in an area where well-established findings are scarce. 4.12 Summary — From the Theoretical Map to the Three Types The theoretical map of this section may be summarized along the three questions with which it opened. To the first question (what does production bring?): resource endowment is in itself neutral, and it is the interaction of "resources × institutions" that decides the outcome (Mehlum, Moene & Torvik, 2006). The pathologies of specialization in production have been given mechanisms politically as the loss of the taxation–representation circuit (the rentier state) and economically as the erosion of the transformation sector (Dutch disease). To the second question (where does transformation capability come from?): transformation capability is a created, endogenous stock of capability (Porter; economic complexity), formed by the mutual linkage of institutions (NIS) and by the organizing activity of the state (the developmental state), but the institutions required differ between the catch-up phase and the frontier phase (Beason & Weinstein; Callon), and diversity in the type of transformation by institutional configuration remains (VoC). To the third question (where is value captured?): the capture of value is a variable independent both of the geography of production and of position within a chain (global value chains, the smile curve, TiVA), and there exist in addition positions not based on production, namely the right to cut off a network and the power to set regulatory standards (weaponized interdependence, the Brussels effect). These theories were forged in the era of oil and, subsequently, of manufacturing and information technology. After operationalizing the AI capability tiers (C1/C2/C3) in the next section (Section 5), Section 6 tests the theories of this section against the historical instances of oil — the Gulf, Norway and Venezuela; post-war Japan and Singapore; motoriz‐ 96 ation in the United States — and formalizes the three types of national value model (M1/ M2/M3). In doing so, which of the theories of this section may be carried over to AI is in every case passed through the examination of the discipline of analogy in Proposition 1 (Section 3). The import of a theory shifts when the physical properties of the resource change — this awareness is what makes the theoretical map of this section not a mere catalogue but a disciplined toolbox. Finally, it may be foreshadowed where the theories of this section are placed within the propositions of this paper. The conditionality of the resource curse, the rentier state and Dutch disease are the theoretical basis of the AI version of the resource curse (Propositions 6a and 6b, Section 8). Staple theory and the economics of refining (set out in detail in Section 6) flow into the conditions for the survival of the Transformation Model (Proposition 4, Section 7). The theory of general-purpose technologies and the lag in diffusion are the basis of the compounding of the Utilization Model (Proposition 5, Section 7). NIS, the developmental state, VoC and the theory of small-state strategy support the non-equivalence of the nine cells (Proposition 3, Section 6) and the institutional requirements of each cell (Sections 7 to 9). Global value chains, the smile curve, TiVA and economic complexity are the methodological foundation of the measurement theory (Hypothesis H2) of transformation value (Definition 5, Section 7). And weaponized interdependence and the Brussels effect supply the analytical framework for the managed trade of row C2 (Section 8) and for AI outage and the risk of access cut-off (Section 13). Only here are the theories fully assembled. What is needed next is the historical laboratory in which to test them — a century of oil. 97 5. A Theory of AI Capability Tiers The preceding sections established that AI is a strategic general-purpose resource corresponding only partially to oil, to electric power and to nuclear technology alike, and that the discipline of analogy (Proposition 1, Section 3) requires an explicit correspondence stating which properties transfer and which do not. This section formalizes the AI capability tiers, the central device for implementing that discipline. Anticipating the conclusion of this section, it comes to a single point: AI is not a single resource. The bundle of capabilities called by the one word "AI" divides, along capability distance from the frontier, into at least three tiers, and to each tier there corresponds a different market structure, a different governance structure, and a different significance for national strategy. What divides the tiers here is capability distance alone; that market structure and governance form change discontinuously in accordance with it is not a definition but an empirical claim (Proposition 2). One cannot discuss "the price of AI" as one discusses the price differential between WTI and Brent for oil, and just as one cannot discuss proliferation risk for uranium without regard to the degree of enrichment, one cannot discuss "the regulation of AI" without regard to the level of capability. An argument that does not distinguish tiers arrives at one of two errors: imposing the controls appropriate to a strategic material on a commodity and losing the gains from diffusion, or leaving a strategic material to be treated as a commodity and creating a vacuum of control. This section refers to C3 (the critical tier), but as Definition 2 makes explicit, C3 is at the time of writing (August 2026) an unrealized anticipatory category, and whether and when it arrives is an empirical question. Every statement about C3 in this section and in this paper is not a portrayal of a capability that exists but a description of the institutionbuilding based on anticipation that governments and developers are actually carrying out, together with a conditional theory of design premised on arrival. This discipline is set out again in detail in Section 5.4. The structure of this section is as follows. Section 5.1 presents Definition 2 and operationalizes the tier classification into observable indicators (Table 2). Section 5.2 treats the empirical evidence on C1 (the commodity tier) — the catch-up of open-weight models and the collapse of inference prices — and Section 5.3 the evidence on C2 (the frontier tier) — the capital intensity of training costs, supplier concentration, the evolution of export controls, and the geographic concentration of compute. Section 5.4 shows how to treat C3 in a disciplined manner as an unrealized category, separating the capability aspect (the independent variable) from the treatment given by governments (the dependent variable). Section 5.5 presents Proposition 2 (the covariation of tier and governance) and Proposition 2b (regime-class transition), and argues that the number of tiers is determined empirically as the number of points of discontinuity, that the tier structure is not a static classi‐ 98 fication but a dynamic structure driven by Frontier Descent, and that this makes the Nine- Cell Matrix of Section 6 and beyond a dynamic one. 5.1 Definition 2 and Its Operationalization Definition 2 (AI Capability Tiers) The AI capability tiers are a division of AI capability by capability distance from the frontier. Tier C1 (Commodity Tier): a level of capability distant enough from the frontier that substitutes meeting the requirements of the use in question exist in multiple jurisdictions (operationalization: the capability gap relative to the open-weight frontier lies within the tolerance of the use in question). Tier C2 (Frontier Tier): the frontier, and the levels of capability lying within a short lag width of it. Tier C3 (Critical Tier): an unrealized level of capability exceeding the frontier of the time in question by at least a stipulated threshold. The boundaries move over time as a function of the lag width and of the requirement level of the use (Frontier Descent). This definition does not include market structure or governance form. The level at which strategic character (Definition 1, (ii), (iii) and (iv)) is established in each tier, and the institutional treatment given to each tier by governments, are not derived from this definition; they are the dependent variables asserted by Proposition 2 and Proposition 2b. C3 is at the time of writing an unrealized anticipatory category, and whether and when it arrives is an empirical question. The essential point of Definition 2 is that the criterion dividing the tiers is confined to a single quantity, capability distance. Capability distance here means the gap between the level of capability in question and the frontier of that time. What confining the criterion to capability distance means becomes clearest through what this definition does not include. Definition 2 includes nothing about how many suppliers there are, whether export controls apply, or under what institutional framework a government has placed the capability. All of these are dependent variables to be explained with capability distance as the independent variable. There are two reasons for this choice. The first is the avoidance of circularity. Were the tiers defined as "the level at which suppliers are concentrated among a few and export controls are actually applied," then the claim that "at C2 suppliers are concentrated and export controls apply" would be analytically true and could not be rejected by any observation. Mixing the mechanism of the conclusion into the definition demotes an empirical claim to a proposal about usage. To avoid this, this paper places in the definition only an independently observable quantity (capability distance), and separates the differentiation of market structure and governance form as claims carrying falsification conditions, namely Proposition 2 and Proposition 2b. The second reason is the fragility of classification by the content of capability. A division by the absolute value of benchmark scores becomes obsolete within months, through changes in measurement methods and the rapid advance of capability. Capability distance, by contrast, is a relative quantity, and the defin‐ 99 ition is not invalidated when the frontier advances. Just as the analysis of the oil market is founded on supply structure rather than on the chemical properties of crude grades, what is decisive for the analysis of AI capability is not the absolute level of capability but the position relative to the frontier — for it is this relative position that governs who can supply that capability now, and with how much delay. The operationalization of capability distance is possible with existing measurement resources. The principal proxy used in this paper is the capability gap between the open-weight frontier and the closed frontier (the difference on a capability index, and its conversion into time as the lag width), which Epoch AI publishes continuously on the basis of its capability index (ECI) (Section 5.2.1). C1 is the level of capability at which this gap falls within the tolerance of the requirement level of the use in question — that is, the level at which substitutes meeting the requirement for that use exist in multiple jurisdictions — and C2 is the frontier and the interior of its short lag width. This operationalization has two consequences. First, the C1/C2 boundary is use-dependent. At the same capability gap, a substitute is not established for the domestic processing of sensitive data or for research and development requiring the most advanced capability, while it is established for routine document processing. A state's tier position is measured not as a single scalar but as a vector across sectors and uses (revisited in Section 5.5.2). Second, the boundaries move over time. A narrowing of the lag width pushes the lower edge of C1 up towards the frontier, and the advance of the frontier raises the boundary itself. Against this, the following three indicators are observed as dependent variables. First, supplier concentration: the number of actors able to supply the capability level in question and the distribution of market shares, for which the HHI-type (Herfindahl–Hirschman Index) measurement of concentration standard in energy security analysis can be transplanted directly as supplier concentration (HHI). Second, the effectiveness of access control: this asks not whether restrictions on access through export controls, licensing of use, or contractual terms "exist as institutions" but whether they "function in practice." At a level where the weights of open-weight models are redistributed free of charge and equivalent capability is obtainable by many routes, access restrictions do not function in practice even where they exist in institutional form. Conversely, at a level where access to advanced chips and advanced models is actually allocated under a licensing regime and where the refusal of a licence actually constrains capability on the demand side, access control is effective. Third, the type of institutional treatment: whether a government has placed a given capability under the framework of market regulation, of export control, or of a nonproliferation regime can be observed from official documents. Placing the object of measurement here on "the government's treatment" rather than on "objective dangerousness" is not arbitrary but a requirement of measurability — though, decisively, this treatment is not the definition of the tier but a quantity to be observed and explained by capability distance. What Sections 5.2 and 5.3 show is how these three dependent variables are distributed along capability distance, and Proposition 2 in Section 5.5 is the claim that this distribution exhibits a step-like discontinuity.

Two distinctions must be made clear in advance of the operationalization. The first is the distinction between capability tiers and the vertical stack. AI supply consists of vertical stages of production (a stack) — chip design, chip fabrication, data centres (cloud), foundation models, applications — and each stage has its own structure of concentration. The capability tiers of this section (C1/C2/C3) form an axis orthogonal to this vertical stack; they cut not by "which stage of production" but by "which level of capability." The two are not, however, independent. When the supplier concentration of a given capability level is measured, the vertical stage constraining supply at that level — in many cases the most concentrated stage — becomes the de facto point of measurement. For C2 as of 2026, the concentration of the model-development layer (about ten firms, as set out below) and the concentration of advanced chips and fabrication equipment upstream of it form a double bottleneck, and export controls have acted mainly at the chip stage because that is the stage most readily verified and cut off as a physical good (this point is revisited as compute governance in Section 5.3.4 and Section 9). The second is the relation between the tier classification and Definition 1. Definition 1 separates the basal classification of the general-purpose input from strategic character, which rides on it as a degree ((ii) external dependence in supply, (iii) infrastructural criticality, (iv) the governing of capability gaps). Under this two-layer structure, differences in strategic character across tiers are not a contradiction but a direct consequence of the definition. AI satisfies (i), generalpurpose input character, at every level of capability — that it is a cross-cutting input to cognitive work does not change with capability distance. What changes is the degree of strategic character. At a level of capability far from the frontier, where substitutes meeting the requirement level exist in multiple jurisdictions (C1), (ii) external dependence in supply is attenuated by the possibility of self-hosting already published weights, (iii) infrastructural criticality is weakened by the existence of many alternative suppliers, and (iv) the governing of capability gaps declines through the practical equalization of access — all three properties remain at a low level. At and near the frontier (C2), by contrast, (ii) and (iv) are high, and (iii) rises as a function of the dependence of the state in question. The strategic character of AI is thus a quantity that varies along capability distance, and the statement that "AI at C1 has low strategic character" is not a contradiction between the theory of tiers and the definition of the resource but a consequence of having defined strategic character as a degree. Under a binary definition — one requiring the simultaneous satisfaction of all four properties — that statement would have placed C1 AI outside the definition of the resource and made the three cells of row C1 impossible to construct. A definition by degree does not produce this breakdown. This consequence gives a deductive basis to the cross-cutting observations of the later sections. That the institutional requirements of row C1 are closed within domestic institutions (people, data, quality, clarity of regulation) and contain almost no variables of diplomacy, alliance or security (Section 7.5) follows from the fact that at C1 all three properties of strategic character are low, so that there is no room for such variables to enter the institutional requirements. Conversely, that the institutional requirements of row C2 centre on the security of procurement and on alliance management (Section 8.5) is a consequence of (ii) and (iv) being high. The nine cells are not the mechanical product of two convenient trichotomies but 101 the product of the tier-by-tier pattern in which the three properties of strategic character are established × the position of value generation. The question "is AI a strategic resource?" has no univocal answer because the question does not specify a tier and because it demands a binary answer. The correct question is: for which level of capability, at what point in time, and to what degree, is strategic character established? Table 2. Operationalization indicators for the AI capability tiers (as of August 2026). The first row is the classifying variable of Definition 2 (the independent variable); the rows below it are the dependent variables predicted by Proposition 2 and Proposition 2b. Indicator C1 (Commodity Tier) C2 (Frontier Tier) C3 (Critical Tier) Capability distance (the classifying variable of Definition 2) A level distant enough from the frontier that substitutes meeting the requirement level of the use in question exist in multiple jurisdictions (operationalization: the gap relative to the open-weight frontier lies within the tolerance of the use; aggregate estimates for 2026 give an average of approximately four months, or 8 points on the ECI) The frontier, and the interior of a short lag width from it (Unrealized) a level exceeding the frontier of the time in question by at least a stipulated threshold Supplier concentration (dependent variable) Many (open-weight suppliers plus many API and hosting providers). The exit of an individual supplier has no persistent effect on price Developers at the frontier level are concentrated in approximately ten firms worldwide. Approximately 90% of advanced GPU cluster performance is located in two countries, the United States and China (Unrealized) under Proposition 2b, holders are predicted to be limited under state control and an international regime Effectiveness of access control (dependent variable) Does not function in practice (free redistribution of weights, multiple routes of acquisition, self-hosting possible) Functions effectively (licensing requirements for the export of advanced chips, terms of use and capacity allocation for model APIs, trials of controls on the transfer of model weights) (Unrealized) criticaltier governance with the three functions of verification, nonproliferation and stabilization (Definition 7, Section 9) is required Level at which strategic character is established (Definition 1 (ii)(iii) (iv); dependent variable) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are all low. Externalities are limited to the economic (productivity, prices), and the social impact of an individual supply stoppage is limited (ii) and (iv) are high, and (iii) rises as a function of dependence. Externalities are economic and strategic (competitive advantage, dependence, risk of supply stoppage) (Unrealized) the three properties are anticipated to reach their highest level Institutional treatment A managed strategic material (export controls, (If it arrives) transition from economic 102 Indicator C1 (Commodity Tier) C2 (Frontier Tier) C3 (Critical Tier) (the object predicted by Propositions 2 and 2b) Market (price competition, open licensing) licensing, allocation within an alliance) regulation to a nonproliferation regime (Proposition 2b) Examples as of 2026 Language-model capability at the level of previous generations (including the GPT-4 class), openweight model families, low-priced APIs The most advanced closed models, advanced AI chips (subject to export licensing), compute clusters for frontier training None (an anticipatory category). Only anticipatory institution- building in national security documents and in developers' safety frameworks is observed Monitoring indicators (corresponding to the falsification condition of Proposition 2) (i) The lag width of the capability gap between the open-weight and closed frontiers (a proxy for the independent variable, capability distance); (ii) supplier concentration (HHI type); (iii) the effectiveness of export controls and access controls (the record of licence refusals, the scale of circumvention). The test is conducted by regressing (ii) and (iii) on (i) and asking whether a step-like discontinuity is detected The limits of the operationalization should also be stated. First, the measurement of supplier concentration depends on public information, but the actual numbers for compute (the chip counts of clusters, government-held and privately held stock) are largely undisclosed, and existing empirical research extends only to counts of public cloud regions and of clusters that can be captured (Section 5.3.4). Estimates of concentration may carry systematic error in both the downward and the upward direction. Second, the effectiveness of access control depends not only on the record of licence refusals but on the scale of circumvention and smuggling, and estimates of the latter carry a wide range, so that point estimates are not reliable. Third, the typing of institutional treatment requires interpretation of government documents, and there are cases in which the position taken in a document and the reality of its operation diverge. Fourth, the measurement of the independent variable, capability distance, itself carries a range. Methods of converting a gap on a capability index into time differ across index series (Section 5.2.1), and since the requirement level of the use differs by sector, a single point estimate is not available. The tier classification of this paper is therefore not a mechanical line drawn by a single indicator but a judgement matching observations of the dependent variables against an estimate of capability distance, and it acknowledges the existence of boundary cases — for example, a level of capability that is subject to control but where circumvention is widespread. These limits do not justify abandoning the classification. Dependence indicators in energy security have likewise carried measurement difficulties of the same kind while functioning as a common language for policy; the point is to use them with the error structure made explicit. 103 The three monitoring indicators shown in the bottom row of Table 2 correspond one to one with the falsification condition of Proposition 2 (Section 5.5). The form of the test should be made explicit here. What Proposition 2 asserts is not a correspondence mediated by tier names, such as "concentration is low at C1," but that with respect to the continuous quantity of capability distance, concentration and the effectiveness of control change in a step-like manner. Falsification is therefore conducted not as a between-group comparison presupposing assignment to tiers but as a test of functional form with capability distance on the horizontal axis — whether points of discontinuity are detected, or whether the change remains continuous and monotonic. By taking this form, the tier classification of this section is neither a proposal for a normative classification nor a proposal about usage, but an empirical claim with its conditions of collapse made explicit. A world in which the C1/C2 boundary disappears — in which open-weight models become practically indistinguishable from the frontier and access control loses its effectiveness — is logically possible, and in that case the nine cells of this paper degenerate into three (revisited in Section 20). Sections 5.2 and 5.3 below show that the evidence as of August 2026 supports the persistence of this classification, while the boundaries are moving sharply. 5.2 Tier C1 (Commodity Tier): The Tier Governed by Price 5.2.1 The Catch-Up of Open Weights — The DeepSeek Shock and the Narrowing of the Lag Width The most important series of facts showing the existence and expansion of C1 is that openweight models (models whose weights are published and which may be self-hosted, modified and redistributed) have continued to approach the closed frontier. The turning point was the so-called DeepSeek shock of January 2025. DeepSeek, of China, released Deep‐ Seek-V3 on 26 December 2024 and reported in its technical report that the final training run had used 2,048 H800 chips (a performance-limited chip for the Chinese market under United States export controls) and 2.788 million GPU-hours, equivalent at rental prices to approximately 5.576 million dollars. This figure should be read with the qualification that it is the rental-equivalent cost of the final training run alone and does not include preceding experiments, personnel costs, or investment in owned hardware; the widely circulated interpretation of a "development cost of 5.57 million dollars" is an understatement. Even read with that qualification, however, it was striking in showing that the marginal training cost of a model closely approaching the frontier class may be lower by more than an order of magnitude than the level assumed at the time. Subsequently, on 20 January 2025, the reasoning-specialized DeepSeek-R1 was released as open weights under an MITstyle licence, claiming reasoning performance of the OpenAI o1 class, and reached the top of the United States app store within a week of release. The market reaction was dramatic: on 27 January 2025 NVIDIA's shares fell approximately 17% in a single day, erasing approximately 589 billion dollars of market capitalization. This is the largest single-day loss of market capitalization in the history of the United States equity market. As a subsequent 104 academic verification, the DeepSeek-R1 paper became on 17 September 2025 the first mainstream large language model to pass peer review as a cover article in Nature, and disclosed that the additional training cost of R1's reinforcement-learning stage was 294,000 dollars (the cost of the V3 base model being separate) (DeepSeek-AI, 2025). For accuracy, it should be emphasized that what the DeepSeek shock showed was not that building the frontier had become cheap. What it showed is that the cost of reaching a level of capability already traversed falls rapidly, and that what is reached may be distributed to the world as open weights. This distinction is the key to the whole of this section: as Section 5.3 shows, the cost of building the frontier itself has continued, if anything, to rise sharply. The estimation of the capability gap between the open-weight and closed frontiers — which this paper calls the lag width — is published continuously by Epoch AI on the basis of its capability index (ECI). According to the aggregation of May 2026, since January 2026 the strongest open-weight models have followed the closed frontier with an average lag of four months (8 points on the ECI) (Epoch AI, 2026). At the same point, the closed frontier was formed by three United States models (GPT-5.2, Claude Opus 4.6, Gemini 3 Pro), while the leading open models were Kimi K2.5, DeepSeek-V3.2, Qwen3-235B and GLM-4.7. Estimates carry a range depending on the indicator, and some series, based on the date at which benchmarks are attained, give an average of approximately three months. Since estimates for 2024–2025 put the lag width at approximately one year, it is accurate to summarize the position as follows: within a range of roughly three to twelve months, the principal estimates show a narrowing tendency to approximately four months. A second structural change is the change in who leads. The leading role at the open-weight frontier has passed from Meta of the United States (the Llama family) to Chinese developers (Deep‐ Seek, Qwen, Kimi, GLM). Against Llama 3.1-405B's ECI of 126.5, the leading Chinese models reach 141 to 145, and a double structure — the closed frontier almost exclusively in the United States, the open-weight frontier led by Chinese developers — became established in 2025–2026. This double structure means that the expansion of the C1 tier is not merely a market phenomenon but also a consequence of a Chinese national strategy of offsetting a disadvantage in single-chip performance through an open-weight strategy and drawing in the world's developer ecosystem; this is revisited in Sections 8 and 14. Seen from the standpoint of a state, the significance of the catch-up of open weights is the existence of an alternative for procurement. Even where access to the closed frontier is refused, restricted, or subjected to changed terms, a level of capability a few months behind can be secured by obtaining weights and self-hosting them — a fact that places an upper bound on the bargaining power of the suppliers (and supplier states) of C2 access, and that gives, free of charge and irrevocably, a realistic lower bound to the level of capability itself that the sovereign minimum guarantee level discussed in Section 13 (Definition 6) seeks to support. Since, however, the domestically held capability of Definition 6(i) is composed not as a level of capability but as the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability and the sensitive-processing condition, the publication of 105 weights automatically supplies none of these — what is supplied is a lower bound, not the conditions for operating, renewing and protecting that lower bound (Sections 13.6 and 18.10). Two reservations are required on this point. First, although the use of open weights is free of charge, their operation is not. Self-hosting a model of a scale close to the frontier requires commensurate compute, electric power and operating personnel, and these are, as Section 5.3.4 shows, geographically concentrated. The availability of weights does not mean equality of access. Second, the supply of open weights itself depends on the continuing decision to publish taken by a small number of actors — at present mainly several firms in China and some in the United States. Publication is a revocable strategy, and a national strategy that treats the abundance of open weights as an exogenous public good is vulnerable to a change of strategy by suppliers. This issue is treated substantively in Section 7 (M1×C1: the economics of open-weight supply). 5.2.2 The Collapse of Inference Prices and the Commoditization of APIs A second piece of evidence for C1 is price. The cheapest inference price attaining a given level of performance has been falling at annual rates of between 9-fold and 900-fold depending on the task (Epoch AI). At the level of doctoral-level science questions (GPQA Diamond) the rate is approximately 40-fold per year, the decline being steeper the higher the performance threshold. To give examples at individual levels: the inference cost of the GPT-3.5 class (equivalent to 64.8% on MMLU) fell between November 2022 and October 2024 from 20 dollars to 0.07 dollars per million tokens, a fall by a factor of more than 280 (Stanford HAI, 2025). For the GPT-4 class as well, the cost of attaining the MMLU level fell from 37.50 dollars per million tokens in March 2023 to 0.18 dollars in February 2025, a factor of approximately 208, and at the level of code generation (HumanEval) by a factor of approximately 375. Behind this, hardware costs have fallen by approximately 30% a year and energy efficiency has improved by approximately 40% a year (Stanford HAI, 2025). As Epoch AI itself makes explicit, however, the steepest declines are concentrated in the most recent year, and whether this pace persists is uncertain. A distinction in notation should be noted here. This paper expresses the speed of decline as an annual factor ("Nfold per year"), and the cumulative decline that has occurred over the whole observation period for a particular level of performance as a factor ("by a factor of N"). The two are different expressions of the same phenomenon, and since the cumulative factor depends on the length of the observation period, it cannot be compared directly with the annualrate notation (this usage is identical throughout this paper, including Section 13.1 and Section 16). This collapse of prices has two implications. First, because the marginal cost of capability already attained moves rapidly towards zero, competition other than price competition is difficult to establish in the C1 tier. The moment a level of capability becomes suppliable by many providers (including self-hosting of open weights), maintaining access to that level as diplomatic leverage or as a source of competitive advantage becomes impossible in practice. The paradox of the M1×C1 cell set out in detail in Section 7 — that one may produce without being able to command — arises from this. Second, the collapse of 106 prices coexists with an explosion of demand. It is widely known that on 27 January 2025, the day of the DeepSeek shock, Microsoft's chief executive Nadella posted that this was "Jevons paradox again — as AI becomes more efficient and accessible, its use will skyrocket"; there is, however, academic criticism of the unconditional application of Jevons-type dynamics by which efficiency increases aggregate demand. This paper treats the matter at the level of the fact that a steep fall in prices and a steep rise in aggregate demand and in demand for compute are observed simultaneously (details of the infrastructure demand side are in Section 13). The discursive history of this tier is also worth touching on. Since 2024 the prospect that "intelligence will become too cheap to meter" has been stated repeatedly by participants in frontier development. The source of the phrase is the chairman of the United States Atomic Energy Commission speaking about nuclear power in 1954 — "electricity too cheap to meter," a phrase that remains in the history of science and technology policy as a prediction that was not realized. Seen from the tier theory of this paper, this prospect is a claim that may hold precisely and only for C1. The trend by which the marginal cost of attained capability collapses at annual factors of one to two orders of magnitude does indeed point in the direction of "too cheap to meter," but over the same period the cost of building the frontier has risen at 2.4-fold per year, and allocation under tight conditions is made not by price but by quota (next paragraph). "The becoming-free of intelligence" and "the becoming-strategic-material of intelligence" are thus not contradictory observations but processes proceeding simultaneously in different tiers. The opposition between the statements "AI is becoming cheap" and "AI is becoming scarce," where no tier is specified, is in most cases no more than a confusion of C1 with C2. That C1 is "the tier of price" does not mean that no rationing exists at C1. In November 2023 OpenAI temporarily suspended new registrations for ChatGPT Plus, citing excess demand and GPU capacity constraints, and in March 2025 it introduced rate limits in the face of an explosion of demand for image generation, stating that "our GPUs are melting." In API practice, rate limits, priority access tiers and capacity reservations exist permanently, and under tight conditions allocation is made by quota rather than by price. AI supply thus contains an element of capacity rationing rather than being a pure price-adjusting market even in its most commercialized tier — a fact that becomes a theme of Section 13 in comparison with allocation institutions during power outages. 5.2.3 The Governance Form of C1 — The Market, and a Capability That Is No One's Advantage Summarizing the above in the language of governance form, the dominant form at C1 is the market. Suppliers are many, price competition operates, and access restrictions do not function in practice. From the standpoint of a state, the procurement of C1 capability resembles procurement from the oil spot market and is, in normal times, not even an object of strategy. This requires two qualifications. First, the abundance of C1 is the obverse of its strategic insignificance. A capability that everyone can buy at the same price is no 107 one's competitive advantage (Section 7), and a national strategy resting on C1 alone is not viable. Second, the abundance of C1 is not a given but a consequence. The C1 tier is thick and cheap because frontier competition at C2 and the descent of capability it generates (Section 5.5) continue; C1 exists as the "downstream" of C2. This dependence is precisely why the structure of the C2 tier, examined next, is decisive for national value models. From the standpoint of the discipline of analogy, it may be added that the image of oil corresponding to C1 is the spot market in normal times — many sellers and buyers, adjustment by price, short-term fluctuations that can be absorbed by stockpiles. The correspondence is, however, partial. Whereas the commodity market in oil is rate-limited by the physical constraints of transport and refining, AI capability at C1 has a marginal cost of replication of nearly zero and an elasticity of supply higher by orders of magnitude. This difference makes the appearance of a "supply interruption" at C1 very different from that in oil. Interruption at C1 appears not as the physical scarcity of a resource but as a failure of the compute, electric power and networks that run it — that is, as a problem of infrastructure. This issue connects to the theory of AI outage in Section 13. 5.3 Tier C2 (Frontier Tier): The Tier Governed by Control C2 is the centre of gravity of this paper's analysis. In the language of the discipline of analogy (Section 3), the image of oil corresponding to C2 is not oil as a commodity traded freely on the spot market but oil as a strategic material, subject to embargo, quota and allocation within an alliance — oil in the phase, under the oil crises of the 1970s, in which access itself became a variable of diplomacy. At C2 the leading edge of capability governs competitive advantage, and access to it is allocated not by market price but by the strategic judgement of suppliers and the control measures of states. The four series of facts composing C2 — the exponential growth of the cost of building the frontier, the concentration of developers, the actual operation of access control, and the geographic concentration of the physical base — are examined below in turn. 5.3.1 The Capital Intensity of Building the Frontier — The Trajectory of Training Costs A dynamic exactly opposite to the collapse of prices at C1 governs the cost of building the frontier. According to Epoch AI's central estimate, the cost of the final training run of frontier models (amortized hardware cost plus electricity cost) has grown since 2016 at approximately 2.4-fold per year (90% confidence interval 2.0 to 3.1-fold) (Cottier et al., 2024). Examples of estimates on an amortized compute-cost basis are approximately 78 million dollars for GPT-4 and approximately 191 million dollars for Gemini Ultra (these figures approximately double if estimated on a cloud rental basis — cost estimates cannot be compared without the method being made explicit). The composition of total development cost is 47% to 67% hardware, 29% to 49% research and development personnel, and 2% to 6% electric power. On another series of estimates, the training compute cost of the largest models has doubled in approximately eight months. If this trend continues, the 108 largest single training run is projected to exceed one billion dollars by 2027 (Cottier et al., 2024). Here, taken together with the collapse of inference prices seen in Section 5.2, lies the central observation of this section: the asymmetry by which the cost of building the frontier rises at approximately 2.4-fold per year while the cost of using capability already attained collapses at annual factors of one to two orders of magnitude. This asymmetry generates a fundamental divergence in national strategy. The path aiming at possession of the frontier demands an exponentially increasing commitment of capital, electric power and people, and rapidly narrows the set of actors able to enter. The path holding that following is sufficient saves cost by orders of magnitude in exchange for a delay of a few months to a year. Which is rational depends on the valuation of the value the frontier generates during the period of the lag width — competitive advantage, bargaining power, options in security — and this is a question that has different answers for each M type from Section 6 onward. What should be established here is that this asymmetry is the economic mechanism that differentiates C1 and C2 into separate markets. 5.3.2 The Concentration of Frontier Labs and the Asymmetry of Investment The consequence of capital intensity is an extreme concentration of suppliers. As of 2026, developers able to release models within a few months of the capability frontier are concentrated in approximately ten firms worldwide: OpenAI, Anthropic, Google DeepMind, Meta and xAI in the United States; DeepSeek, Alibaba (Qwen), Moonshot AI (Kimi) and Zhipu/Z.ai (GLM) in China; and in Europe Mistral AI (France) as nearly the only instance. The frontier of the capability index itself (as of mid-2026) is defined by three models from three United States firms (Epoch AI, 2026). By nationality of the developer, the frontier is in effect closed to two countries, the United States and China, plus one European firm. The concentration of investment flows is more extreme still. Private AI investment reached 109.1 billion dollars in the United States against 9.3 billion dollars in China in 2024 (a difference of approximately 12-fold), and approximately 285.9 billion dollars against approximately 12.4 billion dollars in 2025 (a difference of approximately 23-fold) (Stanford HAI, 2025, 2026). Moreover, of United States investment, California accounts for 218 billion dollars (more than 75%), so that concentration is extreme not only between states but also in the geography within a single country. The puzzle to note here is that, notwithstanding this asymmetry of investment, the performance gap between the top models of the United States and China has almost disappeared. Whereas in May 2023 the score gap between the top United States and Chinese models on several benchmarks showed a spread of 18.5 to 31.6 points, as of March 2026 the difference is only 2.7% (Stanford HAI, 2026). These two figures use different units of measurement. The former is an absolute difference in benchmark scores (points), the latter a relative difference against the highest performance (percent), so that one cannot subtract one from the other to compute a "narrowing." What should be read here is not the size of the narrow‐ 109 ing but the direction: on either measurement the difference has narrowed substantially and, as of 2026, approaches effective disappearance. The coexistence of a 23-fold difference in investment with a near-zero difference in performance may be read as a compound of (i) the asymmetry noted in the previous subsection, that the cost of following is cheaper by orders of magnitude than the cost of building; (ii) improvements in algorithmic efficiency and the open diffusion of knowledge; and (iii) the limits of the effectiveness of export controls. At the least, this coexistence shows that a simple comparison of investment amounts is inadequate as a measurement of "AI national power," and, together with the note of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System confirming compute disparities among advanced economies (Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, 2025), it foreshadows the measurement argument of Sections 17 and 21 (the redesign of the national accounts). Flow indicators may also be used alongside in measuring concentration. The number of notable models published annually moved from 40 in the United States, 15 in China and 3 in Europe in 2024 to 50 in the United States and 30 in China in 2025 (Stanford HAI, 2025, 2026). China's doubling is the expression on the output side of its open-weight strategy, while Europe's thinness shows that regulatory power and market size are variables distinct from output capacity (set out in detail in the European Union profile in Section 14). The concentration of frontier development is, moreover, not simply a small number of firms but a small number of actors able to procure simultaneously the bundle of inputs required — capital growing at 2.4-fold per year, electric power heading towards the gigawatt scale, and research personnel scarce worldwide. This bundle of inputs is also a barrier to entry for states, and it governs the cost structure of any national strategy aiming at the position of a frontier-producing state (M1×C2, Section 8). 5.3.3 The Evolution of Export Controls (2022–2026) — The Formation and Mutation of a Managed Strategic Material The clearest dependent variable that Proposition 2 predicts for C2 is that access control is actually applied and is effective. Whether this prediction holds is judged by the record of how control measures have actually operated with respect to levels of small capability distance. The existence and the evolution of their application are most clearly observed in the policy series of United States export controls from 2022 to 2026. In only three and a half years, this system swung from a multilateral technological closure to a worldwide three-tier licensing regime, and then to the rescission of that regime and to transactionbased export control. The dates are followed precisely below. The first stage is 7 October 2022. The Bureau of Industry and Security (BIS) of the United States Department of Commerce published an interim final rule on export controls applying to China (87 FR 62186), imposing licence requirements on the export to China of advanced computing chips (the A100/H100 class), of supercomputer end uses, and of semiconductor manufacturing equipment, and also regulating support by United States persons for advanced semiconductor development in China. The scope of this rule is not a

regulation confined to military end use but extends generally to transfers of compute exceeding stipulated performance thresholds and of the related manufacturing equipment. On the ground that its scope is drawn by level of capability rather than by end use, this rule has been discussed as a qualitative turn in post-Cold War export control — the formalization of a "chokepoint strategy." The motives behind the measure, and the propriety of the measure, are not objects of judgement for this paper. The performance thresholds were defined by a composite criterion of chip-to-chip interconnect bandwidth and computing performance, and NVIDIA designed the A800 and H800 derivatives for the Chinese market so as to fall below those thresholds. The second stage is the revision of 17 October 2023 (in force November 2023). BIS changed the criterion to total processing performance (TPP) and performance density, closing the A800/H800 route, and expanded the scope to arms-embargoed destinations other than China in response to circumvention by way of third countries. In response to this revision, NVIDIA developed the H20 (a performancelimited version of the Hopper generation) for the Chinese market. A regulator draws a threshold, industry designs a product just below it, and the regulator moves the threshold again — this pursuit is itself an illustration that the C1/C2 boundary is a dynamic line continually constructed by policy. The third stage is the "AI diffusion rule" announced on 13 January 2025 (formally the Framework for Artificial Intelligence Diffusion; published in the Federal Register on 15 January 2025, 90 FR 4544). This interim final rule, issued at the end of the Biden administration, divided the world's countries into three tiers — the United States and approximately eighteen allied countries (no restriction), the great majority of other countries (country- level and company-level quantitative ceilings), and arms-embargoed countries including China and Russia (a presumption of denial) — and made subject to licensing, comprehensively, not only the export of advanced AI chips but the transfer of the weights of advanced models; it was the first framework in history for the worldwide allocation and control of AI capability as such (a due-diligence rule for advanced computing integrated circuits was also published on 16 January 2025). The extension from the control of a physical good, the chip, to the control of an informational good, the model weight, is the most explicit document in which the United States government treated AI capability as a tiered strategic resource, and it shows that the classification of Definition 2 was already immanent in policy practice. The rule was, however, rescinded on 13 May 2025, two days before its scheduled entry into force (15 May 2025), by BIS under the Trump administration. BIS criticized the rule as bureaucratic, as impeding innovation, and as treating allied countries as second-tier states, and on the same day published three items of guidance concerning, among other matters, the risks of using Huawei Ascend chips. As an important point to note, what the rescission removed was the three-tier framework; the controls applying to China under the 2022 and 2023 rules remained in place — the rescission was not a relaxation with respect to China. No comprehensive replacement rule had been promulgated as of August 2026, and what became the de facto framework is the transaction-based individual arrangements examined below. 111 The typical instance is the repeated reversals surrounding the H20. Around 9 April 2025, the United States government notified NVIDIA that a licence would be required for the export of the H20 to China, and NVIDIA disclosed in a filing with the Securities and Exchange Commission on 15 April 2025 an expected charge of approximately 5.5 billion dollars (the amount actually recorded in the quarter was approximately 4.5 billion dollars) — in effect an embargo on the H20 to China. On 14–15 July 2025, however, following lobbying visits by chief executive Huang and a meeting with President Trump, NVIDIA announced that it had obtained an assurance of licences for sales to China, and the policy changed markedly. Further, in early August 2025 it was reported that NVIDIA and AMD had obtained export licences in exchange for remitting 15% of the revenue from sales to China to the United States government, an arrangement without precedent, and the President himself acknowledged its existence. This method, directly linking export licences with payments to the treasury, has been taken as emblematic of "transaction-based export control," and its consistency with the constitutional prohibition on export taxes was questioned by legal scholars. On 8 December 2025 it was stated that sales to China of the higher-performance H200 would be approved on condition of a 25% remittance of revenue, and on 14–15 January 2026 the Department of Commerce formalized the framework, so that licence review for China shifted from a presumption of denial to conditional case-by-case review (reports describe a quota on the order of 75,000 units per approved buyer, though the interpretation of the quota varies across reports). The most advanced Blackwell generation remains prohibited. The situation in 2026 shows measures governing whether transfers may occur placed not only on the supply side but on the demand side. On the Chinese side, at the end of July 2025 the Cyberspace Administration of China (CAC) summoned NVIDIA over allegations of a "backdoor" in the H20, after which it was reported that the authorities had instructed major technology firms to halt purchases of the H20 and similar chips, and it was reported that NVIDIA instructed its component suppliers in late August 2025 to suspend H20 production. Even after the H200 was permitted, the National Development and Reform Commission (NDRC) of China reviews imports case by case and requires a showing of the reasons why domestic substitutes cannot be used, and as of 19 August 2026 deliveries remain at approximately 10,000 units each to ByteDance and Tencent (approximately 13% of the quota) — a structure in which licensing on the supply side draws the ceiling on quantity and review on the demand side draws the actual quantity. In summary, export controls as of August 2026 stand at a new three-layer equilibrium: (1) transaction-based licensing by the United States (revenue sharing), (2) import-side control by China (inducement of domestic substitution), and (3) the continued closure of the most advanced generation. It should be added that several studies and reports hold that the effectiveness of control leaks substantially through smuggling and circumvention, and that estimates of the scale carry a wide range (this paper does not use point estimates of that scale). What this paper draws from this policy series is not the propriety of individual measures (the treatment of any state's policy is confined to description) but the following three structural observations. First, access control is actually applied and actually con‐ 112 strains capability on the demand side. Moreover, control operates only at levels of small capability distance: the object of the measures has consistently been advanced chips and advanced models, and with respect to weights already published and to the capability levels of earlier generations, measures of the same kind do not constrain in practice even where they exist institutionally. The covariation that Proposition 2 predicts has been observed consistently since 2022. Second, the mode of control may change fundamentally with a change of administration or with a geopolitical transaction. The turn from a three-tier licensing regime to a transaction-based one shows that the terms of C2 access are revised by a political rather than a market logic, and this is empirical evidence of the risk of changed access terms for states dependent on C2 (the M2×C2 and M3×C2 cells, Section 8). Third, control has become bidirectional. A structure in which control on the side that will not sell is met by control on the side that will not buy implies, for a third country seeking assurance of supply, that the design of dependence (the sovereign minimum guarantee level of Section 13) cannot rest on trust in a single supplying state. 5.3.4 The Geographic Concentration of Compute — Compute North/South/Desert The geographic distribution of the advanced compute forming the physical base of C2 shows extreme concentration. Lehdonvirta, Wú & Hawkins (2024) surveyed on the ground the AI GPU regions of the public clouds of nine major cloud providers worldwide, and showed that only approximately thirty countries have AI GPU clusters. They divide the world into a "Compute North," possessing chips for advanced training; a "Compute South," able only to run inference on earlier-generation chips; and a "Compute Desert," with zero public GPU infrastructure. The eight public cloud regions with the H100, the most advanced chip at the time of the survey, were all held by United States firms. This study has limits, including the exclusion of government-held and privately held GPUs, but its qualitative finding that access to compute is stratified across states is reinforced by Epoch AI's aggregation of AI supercomputers. As of May 2025, approximately 75% of the world's AI supercomputer (GPU cluster) performance was located in the United States and approximately 15% in China, with the rest of the world accounting for only approximately 10% (Pilz et al., 2025). Germany, Japan and France, formerly powers in high-performance computing (HPC), are peripheral in AI clusters. The same study further shows that the performance of AI supercomputers is growing at 2.5-fold per year and their electricity demand and cost at approximately 2-fold per year, and extrapolates that if the trend continues the leading cluster will reach two million chips, tens of billions of dollars and the 9 GW range by 2030 — the entrance to the multi-stage bottleneck structure in which electric power constrains compute and the transmission grid constrains electric power (Section 13). These properties of compute — that it is detectable, excludable and quantifiable, and is produced in an extremely concentrated supply chain — make compute a point of intervention for AI governance, as Sastry et al. (2024) set out. It is because of these physical properties that export controls (the preceding subsection) are possible, and it is for the same reason that the critical-tier governance of C3 discussed below (Section 9) tends to‐ 113 wards a design taking compute as the verification anchor. The concentration is not, however, fixed. In China, SMIC demonstrated 7 nm volume production using DUV under the EUV embargo in August 2023, and Huawei was reported to plan to double shipments of the Ascend 910C to approximately 600,000 units in 2026, making explicit a strategy of offsetting a disadvantage in single-chip performance through large-scale clustering and an advantage in electric power (the thickness of China's power reserve margin is noted by the AI Index 2026 as well). Huawei published in September 2025 an unusual multi-year roadmap (a successor chip family including internally developed high-bandwidth memory), making explicit a strategy of offsetting the single-chip performance gap through large-scale clustering — a configuration that compensates through scale at the cost of electricity consumption. The geography of C2 is thus not a natural outcome of the market but a political construct in which export controls, industrial policy and investment in power infrastructure press against one another, and this recognition is a premise for Section 8 (the nine-cell analysis of row C2) and Section 14 (country profiles). The marginalization of Germany, Japan and France, formerly powers in HPC, has particularly weighty implications for states with a tradition of the Transformation Model, Japan among them. Twentieth-century computational sovereignty in the form of national possession of a supercomputer — the mode of securing peak performance as a national project — guarantees almost no position in the world of AI clusters. The main field of AI computation has shifted from one-off large procurements by public institutions to continuous and exponential capital investment by private cloud providers and frontier labs, and against a performance frontier growing at 2.5-fold per year, a one-time build-out becomes relatively meaningless within a few years. Here too appears the basic property of the AI resource as flow rather than stock (Proposition 1, Section 3). As what institution (a commitment to continuous construction) a state's computing base should be designed is the subject of Section 13 (Proposition 8) and Section 18 (Japan's computing base). 5.4 Tier C3 (Critical Tier): The Disciplined Treatment of an Unrealized Anticipatory Category 5.4.1 Why Define an Unrealized Category? — The Discipline of Description To state it once more: C3 is at the time of writing an unrealized anticipatory category. As of August 2026, no capability exceeding the frontier of the time by at least the stipulated threshold has been realized, and this paper makes no claim that such a capability exists. Whether and when C3 arrives is an empirical question, and this paper offers no prediction of it. One important choice in the manner in which Definition 2 stipulates C3 should be made explicit. This paper separates the definition of C3 from the treatment given by governments. A formulation stipulating C3 as "the level of capability whose possession and exercise is treated (or is anticipated to be treated) by governments as of the same class as nuclear weapons in its security externalities" appears natural, but it introduces a recur‐ 114 sion that undermines the logic of this paper itself: since the definition would then depend on the treatment given by governments, the fact constituting the "arrival" of C3 would be the change in that treatment itself, and C3 would arrive the moment a policy document graded some capability as of the same class as nuclear weapons, even if nothing about the capability had changed. And policy discourse includes papers such as this one. Under that formulation, the proviso that "whether and when it arrives is an empirical question" would be correct only for the capability, not for the arrival of the category. Since the legitimacy of erecting a proposition with a falsification condition about an unrealized category depends on that proviso, this flaw cannot be overlooked. Definition 2 cuts this recursion by separating two variables. The capability aspect (the independent variable): C3 is an unrealized level of capability exceeding the frontier of the time in question by at least a stipulated threshold. This is defined independently of the conduct of governments and is in principle observed by capability evaluation. The treatment aspect (the dependent variable): which institution (market regulation, export control, or a nonproliferation regime) governments apply to that capability is not the content of the definition but the object of observation predicted by Proposition 2b (regime-class transition). This separation has three effects. First, the route by which this paper's own discourse would constitute the arrival of C3 is cut — a change of grading in policy documents is now not the arrival of C3 but verification data for Proposition 2b. Second, only by the treatment given by governments changing from a definition into a prediction does it become falsifiable at all (if a capability exceeding the threshold is realized and the treatment remains within the framework of export control and market regulation, Proposition 2b is rejected). Third, the discussion of self-fulfilment risk treated in Section 20.3 obtains a clearly delimited object confined to the treatment side. Everything observed in Section 5.4.2 below is the present value of the treatment aspect; on the capability aspect this paper asserts nothing. There are nevertheless three reasons for including an unrealized category in the definition. First, the completeness of the definition. The classifying criterion of Definition 2 is capability distance, and if only positive distance from the frontier (C1) and the neighbourhood of the frontier (C2) were defined, leaving a gap on the side exceeding the frontier, the theory of tiers would degenerate into a description of the present market and could not treat future changes in the distribution of capability. Since the division is made on the continuous quantity of capability distance, there is no principled reason not to define the interval above the frontier. Second, the reality of anticipation. That C3 is unrealized and that anticipation of C3 is driving actual institution-building are compatible but distinct propositions. As the next subsection shows, governments and developers are actually constructing institutions that explicitly presuppose a level of capability "anticipated to be treated" in a certain way, and this conduct must be included as observable fact within the analysis of national value models. Third, the temporal structure of design. As Section 9 sets out in detail, the core functions of critical-tier governance (verification, nonproliferation, stabilization) are none of them of a kind that can be built in a short period after arrival. What the history of the nuclear control regime shows is that the framework 115 of control has always lagged behind the appearance of the capability, and that the period of that lag was the most unstable. From this paper's position that a regime is not an era that arrives but a contingency that is constructed (Proposition 10, Section 9), to discuss C3 is not to prophesy arrival but to formalize in advance a problem of design conditional on arrival. At the same time, discussing an unrealized category carries its own risks. Exaggeration of capability may be diverted into mobilization through fear or into restriction of competition by pre-emptive regulation, and the rhetoric of "inevitable arrival" may itself contribute to an arms-race-like self-fulfilment (this self-referential risk is examined in Section 20 as a weakness of this paper itself). This paper therefore follows the following discipline in describing C3. (i) The unrealized status of C3 is made explicit at the opening of each section that refers to it. (ii) No rhetoric of exaggerated capability or of arousing fear is used. (iii) The technical details of weaponization are not referred to; the discussion is conducted only at the level of institutions and governance. (iv) The conditional clause "if it arrives" is not omitted. This discipline is also the application to C3 of the discipline of analogy of Section 3. The inferences transferable from the nuclear analogy to C3 are limited to the structural theory of institutions — the class of externality and the corresponding requirement of a governance form (verification, nonproliferation, stabilization). Moreover, this transfer is not guaranteed by the definition. Assigning the nuclear case as the reference system for C3 is justified only insofar as the regime-class transition predicted by Proposition 2b actually occurs; if that prediction fails, taking the nuclear regime as the reference system itself loses its ground (Section 3.5). What cannot be transferred are inferences about the existence, the timing, or the form of the capability. Nuclear weapons appeared as an existing fact in 1945, and the control regime followed after. C3 is the reverse: anticipation precedes institutions. This reversal of order generates simultaneously an opportunity for design (a framework can be conceived before existence) and an epistemic danger (the definition and verification criteria of something that does not exist must be agreed without evidence of its existence). The analysis of transferability in Section 9 (Proposition 9) needs to be read on the premise of this reversal of order. 5.4.2 What Can Be Observed — Evidence of Institution-Building Based on Anticipation C3 itself cannot be observed, but institution-building based on the anticipation of C3 can be. Four series can be confirmed as of August 2026. First, a turn in how these matters are positioned in security documents. The most explicit evidence is the United States AI diffusion rule of January 2025 examined in the previous section. That rule included a design making the transfer of the weights of advanced models subject to a presumption of denial with respect to arms-embargoed countries, and became a precedent for a government document treating an informational good, a model, as an object of security control (the rule itself was rescinded, but the persistence of the 116 controls applying to China and the shift to transaction-based control show the continuation of its treatment as an object of control). An example showing a shift in the centre of gravity of institutions is the United Kingdom. The AI Safety Institute, established in November 2023 as the world's first governmental body for the evaluation of AI safety, was renamed the AI Security Institute in February 2025, moving its centre of gravity from safety to security. That body was allocated 240 million pounds in the 2025 spending review, holds more than a hundred researchers, and has evaluated thirty frontier models (GOV.UK, 2026). The establishment of evaluation bodies and their securitization is not confined to the United States and the United Kingdom but has spread to several countries, and the movement to internalize the evaluation of advanced AI capability as a state function may itself be read as an expression of the judgement that the most advanced level of capability cannot be left to the surveillance of the market. Second, the safety frameworks of frontier developers. The major firms developing frontier models have published staged frameworks stipulating in advance that, if the capability of a model reaches a stipulated threshold, they will move to strengthened protective measures and restrictions on deployment. This form — the advance declaration of capability thresholds and corresponding levels of safety — is a conditional self-discipline premised on an unrealized level of capability, and is direct evidence that private actors are designing treatment in advance in anticipation of a threshold in capability distance being exceeded. It may thus be read as an antecedent form, in private actors, of the regime- class transition that Proposition 2b predicts for governments. At the same time, that these are private and voluntary frameworks, with neither verification nor enforcement by a third party, becomes the reference point for measuring their distance from the critical-tier governance discussed in Section 9. Third, the institutionalization of international scientific assessment. With the involvement of the governments of major states, a framework of reports in which an international group of experts periodically aggregates and assesses scientific knowledge on the capabilities and risks of advanced AI has begun to operate. It is not the task of this section to enter into the content of individual assessments, but in the light of the precedent by which the international institutionalization of scientific assessment in climate change became the epistemic foundation of a treaty regime, the existence of a consensus-forming device of this kind may itself be positioned as a nascent precondition for the verification function of a future critical-tier governance (Definition 7). Fourth, the establishment of a highest category within general regulation. The European Union's AI Act (in force from 1 August 2024) applies obligations to general-purpose AI models in stages from 2 August 2025, and within them establishes a category of models with systemic risk. China, through the Interim Measures for the Management of Generative Artificial Intelligence Services (effective 15 August 2023), instituted a system of prior filing for public services, and on 26 August 2025 the State Council systematized national objectives for diffusion and management in its opinions on the "Artificial Intelligence Plus" initiative. These are not nuclear-type governance, and they do not signify the 117 realization of C3. But that a tiered design of regulation, switching the form of governance according to a class of risk, is becoming standard in major jurisdictions shows that the structure asserted in Proposition 2 — that the form of governance switches discontinuously according to the level of capability — is becoming a common grammar of regulatory practice. What is observed here is not the definition of the tiers but the expression, from the institutional side, of the covariation that Proposition 2 predicts. In summary, C3 does not exist, but institution-building in anticipation of C3 already does. For the analysis of national value models this distinction is decisive. And structural features that warrant attention already appear in the present institution-building. First, the actors doing the building are confined almost entirely to two states and a small number of developing firms, so that the initial conditions of the problem of "the freezing of the possessing states" if C3 arrives (Proposition 10, Section 9) are being formed in advance of the establishment of any regime. Second, the present control measures are all either the domestic law of a single state (export control, filing systems) or private frameworks; institutions of international verification and nonproliferation — the form required by the critical- tier governance of Definition 7 — do not exist. Third, for third countries, what already constrains the present is not so much whether C3 arrives as the consequences of the two major states acting in anticipation of C3: the strengthening of controls, the politicization of the terms of access, and allocation through alliances. Even though C3 is unrealized, the shadow of C3 falls on the present governance of C2. Section 9 examines systematically the point reached by this institution-building and its limits, as a question of transferability from the nuclear control regime (Propositions 9 and 10). 5.5 Propositions 2 and 2b — The Covariation of Tier and Governance, and Its Dynamic Character The evidence presented in Sections 5.2 to 5.4 is now re-read from the standpoint of the verification of propositions. What matters here is as evidence of what this material is presented. Since Definition 2 divides the tiers by capability distance alone and includes neither market structure nor governance form, the observations of Sections 5.2 and 5.3 cannot be illustrations that "each clause of the definition has a referent." They are observations of how the dependent variables — supplier concentration, the effectiveness of access control, and the level at which strategic character is established — are distributed with respect to the independent variable, capability distance. That distribution may be summarized as follows. At levels of large capability distance — levels at which the open-weight frontier meets the requirements of the use — suppliers are many (open-weight suppliers plus many API and hosting providers), the inference price of capability already attained collapses at annual factors of one to two orders of magnitude, and access control measures, though they exist institutionally, are circumvented by the redistribution of weights and by self-hosting and lose their effectiveness (Section 5.2). At levels of small capability distance — the frontier and the interior of its short lag width — suppliers are concentrated in approximately ten firms, approximately 90% of 118 advanced GPU cluster performance is located in two countries, and the refusal of export licences actually constrains capability on the demand side (Section 5.3). And the transition between these two states is not gradual. The object of export control measures has consistently been advanced chips and advanced models, and with respect to weights already published, measures of the same kind do not constrain in practice even where they exist institutionally — what the policy series since 2022 shows (Section 5.3.3) is a pursuit in which the regulator draws a threshold, industry designs products just below it, and the regulator moves the threshold, not a structure in which the intensity of control declines smoothly along capability distance. The effectiveness of control breaks down over a certain interval of capability distance. The above is formalized as the second proposition of this paper. Proposition 2 (Covariation of Tier and Governance) The market structure and governance form of AI capability change discontinuously as a function of capability distance (Definition 2). That is: (i) at levels where capability distance is large beyond a certain threshold (C1), supplier concentration falls below a stipulated level, access control measures lose effectiveness through circumvention even where applied, and strategic character ((ii), (iii) and (iv)) is low in all three respects. (ii) At levels within the threshold (C2), supplier concentration persists at a high level, access control measures actually constrain capability on the demand side, and of strategic character (ii) and (iv) are high while (iii) rises as a function of dependence. (iii) This relation is not a continuous monotonic change but arises because the effectiveness of access control breaks down in a step-like manner with respect to capability distance. The number of tiers is determined empirically as the number of these points of discontinuity. Falsification condition If supplier concentration and the effectiveness of access control are observed to change continuously and monotonically with respect to capability distance (if no step-like discontinuity is detected), the description in terms of "tiers" is rejected, and AI capability should be described as a single continuous market. Likewise, if the variance in concentration and in the effectiveness of control is not explained after controlling for capability distance, the proposition is rejected. The essential point of this formulation is that the proposition contains no repetition of the definition. A proposition of the form that defines the tiers by supply structure and then states that "at C1 price competition among many suppliers is the dominant form" reads as "at levels where price competition among many suppliers operates, price competition among many suppliers is the dominant form" — because what the proposition asserts has been pre-empted in the definition. An analytically true statement is not rejected by any observation, and is not even an object to which an evidence grade may be attached. Since the material is presented as a proposition with a falsification condition, this form must be avoided. Proposition 2 of this paper asserts in what shape quantities not included in the definition (concentration, the effectiveness of control, the level of strategic 119 character) change as a function of a quantity included in the definition (capability distance). What is asserted is not the existence of a correlation but a functional form — step-like, or continuous and monotonic. This claim can be tested by standard methods that place capability distance on the horizontal axis and detect change points in the dependent variables. 5.5.1 Why Three Tiers Rather Than Two or Four? — Boundaries as Points of Discontinuity The criticism most naturally directed at a theory of tiers is the arbitrariness of the number of divisions: dividing AI capability into three tiers is a convenience, and the same argument could be made with two or with five. A framework that defines tiers by supply structure or by the class of externality cannot answer this criticism — in that case the number of divisions is no more than a number chosen by the designer of the definition, and the number three has no theoretical standing. Proposition 2 of this paper, which erects tiers upon the continuous quantity of capability distance, has an answer to this question. The number of tiers is determined empirically as the number of points of discontinuity along capability distance. And this paper asserts that there are two points of discontinuity. The first point of discontinuity (the C1/C2 boundary) is the point at which the effectiveness of access control breaks down. Once capability distance exceeds a certain value, substitutes meeting the requirement level of the use in question come to exist in multiple jurisdictions, and at that moment control measures have their institutional existence severed from their practical effect — for even if a licence is refused, the demander can meet the requirement by self-hosting weights from another jurisdiction. This breakdown is not continuous. The transition from "no substitute exists" to "a substitute exists" is a discrete event, and the meaning of a control measure changes qualitatively across it. That export controls since 2022 have consistently acted only on the advanced side (Section 5.3.3), and that the collapse of prices is concentrated in capability already attained (Section 5.2.2), are observations of this point of discontinuity. The second point of discontinuity (the C2/C3 boundary) is the point at which the class of externality turns from the economic to the existential. Whereas what separates C1 from C2 is the effectiveness of control, what separates C2 from C3 is the purpose of control. Economic regulation (market regulation, export control) manages conditions of competition and the transfer of technology, whereas a nonproliferation regime (verification, limitation of the actors permitted to hold, stabilization negotiations) manages existential risk. Between these two institutional forms there are few continuous intermediate forms in object, in instrument or in justification — which is why Proposition 2b uses the word "transition." Under this formulation the number of divisions itself becomes an object of verification. If two discontinuities are observed, there are three tiers; if one, two tiers; if none, the theory of tiers is rejected and AI capability should be described as a single continuous market. Conversely, if a third point of discontinuity is observed, the framework of this paper

should be revised to four tiers. This claims a stronger theoretical standing than a construction that fixes the number of divisions a priori and builds the argument on top of it — the number of tiers in this paper is not a premise of the theory but a prediction of it. Two reservations are still required about the second point of discontinuity. First, it is unrealized. As stated in Section 5.4, no capability exceeding the threshold has been realized, and therefore no observation of this point of discontinuity exists either. What this paper asserts about the C2/C3 boundary is a prediction that treatment will shift if capability exceeds the threshold, not a claim that a shift has already been observed. Second, by virtue of the separation of the capability aspect from the treatment aspect (Section 5.4.1), this prediction is independently falsifiable. It is formalized below as Proposition 2b. Proposition 2b (Regime-Class Transition) If AI capability exceeds the C3 threshold of Definition 2, the institutional treatment of that capability by governments shifts from the framework of economic regulation (market regulation, export control) to the framework of a nonproliferation regime (verification, limitation of the actors permitted to hold, stabilization negotiations). Falsification condition If a capability exceeding the threshold is realized and the treatment given by governments remains within the framework of export control and market regulation, with no nonproliferation-type negotiation being initiated, this proposition is rejected. Separating Proposition 2b from Proposition 2 has three points of significance. First, falsifiability. If the governance form of C3 were built into the definition, "at C3 nucleartype governance is the dominant form" would be analytically true and there would be no room for rejection. Only by separating it out as a prediction does the observation that "a capability exceeding the threshold was realized but governments remained within the framework of export control" become a fact that rejects the proposition. Second, the cutting of the recursion (Section 5.4.1). Third, clarity about the standing of the evidence. The four series observed in Section 5.4.2 — the turn in positioning within security documents, the staged safety frameworks of frontier developers, the institutionalization of international scientific assessment, and the establishment of a highest category within general regulation — are none of them evidence of the existence of C3 but are read as leading indicators of the transition predicted by Proposition 2b. That is, each actor, anticipating that capability will exceed the threshold, has begun to reorganize the framework of treatment in advance. The verification of Proposition 2b will be settled, when the event of exceeding the threshold actually occurs, by whether this advance reorganization proceeds as far as the initiation of nonproliferation-type negotiation. 121 Figure 4. The AI capability tier pyramid and forms of governance. Each tier — C1 (market), C2 (managed strategic material), C3 (nonproliferation-type governance if it arrives) — is matched with its dominant form of governance, and Frontier Descent, the constant downward movement by which yesterday's C2 capability descends into tomorrow's C1, is shown by arrows. The figure makes explicit that C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category. 5.5.2 Frontier Descent — The Boundaries Move The tiers of Proposition 2 are not divisions fixed like geological strata. As Definition 2 states explicitly, the boundaries move over time as a function of the lag width and of the requirement level of the use, and the most important property of the tier structure is its dynamism. This paper calls this downward movement Frontier Descent. The evidence of Section 5.2 gives its speed. The GPT-4-class capability that belonged to the C2 frontier in March 2023 saw its cost of attainment fall by a factor of approximately 208 within less than two years, and descended into the tier in which open weights follow with a lag width of approximately four months — that is, into C1. For the GPT-3.5 class the factor is 280 over two years. Generalized: yesterday's C2 is tomorrow's C1. A level of capability that was at one point an object of access control becomes, through the advance of the frontier together with the collapse of prices and the catch-up of open weights, an uncontrollable commodity within months to years. Descent is not, however, a law of nature, and three qualifications must be attached. First, the speed of descent is a function of policy. Export controls may be read as an attempt to slow descent, and open-weight strategies as an attempt to accelerate it. The exchange of controls between the United States and China seen in Section 5.3.3 is a contest over the position and the speed of movement of the C1/C2 boundary itself. Second, descent is a proposition about capability, not about supply structure. Even as GPT-4-class capability becomes C1, the developers at the frontier remain concentrated in approximately ten AI Capability Tiers Dominant form of governance C1 Commodity Tier C2 Frontier Tier C3 Critical Tier Nonproliferation-type regime (verification, freezing, stabilization) * unrealized anticipatory category Managed trade (export controls, control of access) Market (price competition) Frontier Descent (yesterday's C2 is tomorrow's C1) The C1/C2 boundary is operationalized by supplier concentration and the effectiveness of access control, and moves downward over time (Definition 2, Proposition 2). 122 firms, and the cost of building the frontier is if anything rising. Descent is not the disappearance of C2 but a constant transfer of material between C2 and C1. Third, the persistence of descent is the obverse of the falsification condition. If the lag width continues to narrow and approaches zero (if open weights become practically indistinguishable from the frontier), the point on the scale of capability distance at which the effectiveness of control breaks down converges on the frontier itself, and the C1/C2 point of discontinuity disappears. If the points of discontinuity become zero, the description in terms of tiers is rejected and AI capability should be described as a single continuous market (the falsification condition of Proposition 2). Conversely, if the lag width turns to widening, the growth in the thickness of C1 slows and the tiers approach a more rigid double structure. The observation of a narrowing from approximately one year in 2024–2025 to approximately four months in 2026 shows that the boundary is in fact cutting into the C2 side, but has not reached disappearance. Continuous observation of the three monitoring indicators (supplier concentration, lag width, effectiveness of control) is the device that maintains the tier theory of this paper as a testable claim. The economic meaning of the lag width should be made explicit. The lag width is the duration of the premium carried by C2 access. The value that assured access to frontier capability holds relative to capability that can be followed grows in proportion to the period over which the capability difference between the frontier and the following line is economically and strategically meaningful — that is, to the length of the lag width. The observation that the lag width has narrowed from approximately one year to approximately four months means that the premium on C2 access is being compressed, and, in contrast with the exponential cost devoted to holding the frontier and to assuring access (Section 5.3.1), it causes the valuation of "the value of holding the frontier" to diverge across states. It must be noted, on the other hand, that this calculation is an approximation assuming homogeneity of tasks. The lag width of approximately four months on average is an aggregate on a capability index, and in particular domains and under particular operational requirements (domestic processing of sensitive data, assured capacity, research and development requiring the most advanced capability) there may remain areas in which substitution by open weights is not established in practice. The lag width for a state is not a single number but a vector across sectors and uses, and its assessment becomes a component of the dependence audit of Section 13 (Hypothesis H1, Appendix C). 5.5.3 The Dynamic Character of the Nine Cells — A Bridge to Section 6 Frontier Descent has decisive implications for the Nine-Cell Matrix (M1/M2/M3 × C1/C2/C3) developed from the next section onward. Since the columns of the cells (the C axis) move, membership of a cell is not an asset but a flow. That a state is today a producer of C2 capability, or a holder of assured access to it, depreciates without renewal investment within a few years into the strategically empty position of "holder of C1 capability." This is the tier-theoretic basis of the asymmetry formalized in Section 13 as "the depreciation of stockpiles" (Proposition 8) — that an oil stockpile can physically buy time, whereas a stockpile of AI capability depreciates at the speed of the frontier. Likewise, the tier posi‐ 123 tion of the AI capability procured by a state on the Transformation Model (M2) cannot be fixed at the time of contract, and there is no guarantee that the abundance of C1 enjoyed by a state on the Utilization Model (M3) will continue to be supplied as the downstream of competition at C2. The nine cells are thus not a static table of classification but a dynamic board on which the boundary conditions of each cell continue to move under the pressure of descent, export controls and open-weight strategies, and national strategy is not a single choice of position on that board but the design of the continuing commitment required to maintain and to move position (Proposition 3, Section 6). The anatomy of each row and each cell of this board is the task of Sections 6 to 9. Finally, the shift that the tier theory of this section forces upon the thinking of national strategy may be summarized. First, the question "how is AI to be dealt with?", posed in the singular, does not hold. A state must hold, as separate policy systems, institutions of diffusion and utilization for C1 (competition policy, people, absorptive capacity), a design of dependence for C2 (assurance of access, diversification of supply, selective domestic capability), and engagement with international institutions conditional on arrival for C3; and there is tension in the allocation of resources among the three. Second, movement between tiers is the principal point at which value arises. At the moment C2 capability descends into C1, the competitive advantage built upon that capability disappears and the locus of value moves to complementary assets (the four indicators of Proposition 4, Section 7) — that the conditions for the survival of a state on the Transformation Model (Proposition 4) depend on the speed of this movement becomes the core of the discussion of Japan in Section 18. Third, the observation of the tier structure is itself a capability of the state. Without the capability to measure continuously the three indicators of supplier concentration, lag width and the effectiveness of control in a manner fitted to a state's own structure of dependence, both the choice of cell position and movement between cells degenerate into passive adaptation to the decisions of other states (Proposition 14, Section 17). The next section extracts from the history of oil the other axis intersecting this tier axis — the mode in which a state generates value in its relation to a resource (M1/M2/M3). 124 6. The Three Types of National Value Model The preceding sections have supplied a theoretical map of resources and the state (Section 4) and an operationalization of the AI capability tiers (Section 5). This section places history between them. The century of oil is an enormous natural experiment in which, with respect to a single strategic general-purpose resource, many states took different positions, built different institutions, and arrived at different outcomes. From this laboratory this section extracts the three basic types by which a state generates value in its relation to a resource — the Resource-Producing Model (M1), the Transformation Model (M2) and the Utilization Model (M3) — and identifies from the concrete record of the history of oil the conditions of success and of failure of each type. It then sorts which of the conditions extracted are transferable to AI and which are not, in the light of the discipline of analogy of Proposition 1 (Section 3). A methodological caution is placed first. This section does not predict the future of AI by historical analogy. What it does is extract conditions. It identifies under what conditions each type of the oil era subsisted and through the absence of what conditions it failed, and judges individually whether those conditions are preserved across the change in the physical properties of the resource (from a rival to a non-rival good, from the scarcity of a stock to the scarcity of a flow). Where a condition is not preserved, this is made explicit and the condition is excluded from subsequent inference. What this section produces is thus not "the lessons of oil" but a judgement about the range of application of those lessons. The question why oil should also be answered. In history there have been several resources that governed productivity across a broad range of sectors, whose supply depended on other countries, whose interruption degraded a national economy within a short period, and whose possession governed capability gaps among states (coal, iron, grain). Oil is the privileged reference point for this paper for three reasons. First, it satisfies (i) general-purpose input character in Definition 1 (Section 2) and is a rare resource in which the three properties composing strategic character, (ii), (iii) and (iv), all continued to hold at a high level throughout the twentieth century — in the language of Definition 1, a general-purpose input whose strategic character remained at the highest level over a long period, and whose period moreover overlaps with the era of modern national accounts, international institutions and corporate organization, so that the evidence is abundant. Second, producing states, transforming states and utilizing states were clearly separated and each developed different institutions, so that the extraction of types is possible. Third, there exists the natural experiment of a political cut-off of supply (1973), so that it is possible to observe how each type responded to that shock. Oil is the single case that has left the most complete record of the responses of states to a strategic generalpurpose resource. 125 6.1 The Reality of M1 (the Resource-Producing Model) — The Same Production, Opposite Outcomes The Resource-Producing Model is the most readily grasped type. It produces the resource itself and obtains value from its sale and from control over it. But the most important lesson left by the history of oil is that this type does not have a single outcome. The conditionality of the resource curse confirmed in Section 4 — that the curse lies not in the resource itself but in the interaction of "resources × bad institutions" (Mehlum, Moene & Torvik, 2006) — is illustrated by three instances from the oil era. 6.1.1 The Gulf States — The Persistence of the Rentier Structure and Attempts at Diversification The Gulf oil producers are a contemporary instance of the structure depicted by the theory of the rentier state (Section 4.2). Saudi Arabia's government revenue in 2024 totalled 1,259 billion riyals (approximately 336 billion dollars), of which oil revenue was 756.6 billion riyals, approximately 60% of total revenue (62.24% in 2023). Non-oil revenue has expanded to 502.5 billion riyals, 40%, but the mainstay of public finance remains oil rent. Each clause of the Beblawi–Luciani definition — that externally originating rent flows directly to the government, that the government is the principal recipient of the rent, and that a few are engaged in generating the rent while the many receive distributions — still holds half a century later. What is notable is that escape from this structure has been set as an explicit national objective. The diversification strategies represented by Vision 2030 are, in the terms of this paper, nothing other than an attempt at the transition from M1 to M2 and M3. In the language of staple theory (Section 4.3), they are the formation of forward linkage and finaldemand linkage. That the share of non-oil revenue has reached 40% is evidence supporting the view that, at least in the composition of revenue, the transition is under way. Diversification of revenue and diversification of the structure of value creation are not, however, the same thing — if a substantial part of non-oil revenue is tax revenue derived from domestic expenditure that itself originates in rent, then this is not a transformation of the structure but only a change in the unit in which the structure is measured. The same distinction is required when evaluating the phase, examined in Section 14, in which oil-producing states of the age of AI attempt entry into AI production with capital and electric power as their instruments. 6.1.2 Norway — Avoiding the Curse by Institutions Norway, while belonging to the same Resource-Producing Model, succeeded in converting resource revenue into a permanent national asset. At the core lies the institutional design of the Government Pension Fund Global (GPFG). It was established by legislation in 1990 (the Government Petroleum Fund Act), the first deposit of oil revenue was made in 1996, and its management is conducted by NBIM, the asset-management arm of the Norwegian 126 central bank. The value of the fund exceeded 20,000 billion kroner in 2024, and in dollar terms was reported at approximately 2 trillion dollars as of October 2025. It holds approximately 1.5% of all listed equities in the world, and its investments extend to approximately 7,200 companies. Its return in 2025 was reported at approximately 247 to 248 billion dollars (this is evidence at a supportive level, based on press reporting). The core of the institutional design is not the size of the fund itself but the fiscal rule (handlingsregelen) that prevents its drawdown. What the government may transfer into the budget in each year is only the equivalent of the expected real return of the fund (approximately 3%); the principal — the wealth into which oil, a depletable resource, has been converted — is not touched. This design solved two problems. First, the problem of price volatility confirmed in Section 4.1. If revenue is tied directly to the world oil price, public finance is buffeted by the amplitude of the resource price, and the repetition of boom and bust destroys investment efficiency. By interposing the fund as a buffer, fiscal expenditure is tied not to the oil price but to a smoothed variable, the expected return on the balance of the fund. Second, the problem of intergenerational allocation. Oil underground is a finite stock, and devoting it to the consumption of the present generation is nothing other than a transfer from future generations. A design that preserves the stock rather than consuming the flow refuses this transfer explicitly. What matters for the framework of this paper is that Norway's success is attributable neither to the quantity nor to the quality of its oil. Production itself is neutral, and what divided the outcome was the institution that governed what the production was converted into. Norway converted oil into a stock of financial assets — this is not physical processing (M2), but in the sense of having converted resource rent into permanent value it may be regarded as one form of transformation. 6.1.3 Venezuela — The Failure of the Resource-Producing Model The contrast is stark. Despite holding among the largest crude reserves in the world, Venezuela saw the standard of living of its people (income per head) fall by 74% between 2013 and 2023. This is regarded as among the largest economic collapses not caused by war in modern economic history. Oil production fell from approximately 3 million barrels per day at the beginning of the twenty-first century to the several-hundred-thousand-barrels- per-day range around 2020, by way of the destruction of institutions through the politicization of the state oil company PDVSA and the mass dismissal of engineers, the exhaustion of investment, price controls and foreign-exchange controls, and hyperinflation (it has recovered somewhat in recent years). The contrast between Norway and Venezuela is the sharpest paired case of the Mehlum– Moene–Torvik proposition of divergence through institutions. Both countries had abundant oil, and in both the state managed the oil sector. What diverged was whether they had producer-friendly institutions (independence of operation, fiscal rules, the rule of law) or were engulfed by grabber-friendly ones. The Resource-Producing Model is not a fate but a branching point conditioned by institutions. 127 Of Venezuela's path, what is most suggestive for this paper is the mechanism of the destruction of capability. What that country lost was not reserves — the oil remains underground. What was lost was the organizational capability to keep extracting it: the engineers, the maintenance system, the circuit of investment. That the value of the Resource- Producing Model resides not in "matter that lies underground" but in "the bundle of capabilities that keeps producing it" accords with the way the theory of economic complexity (Section 4.9) grasped the value of a state as a stock of capabilities. This view has immediate implications for AI. The production of AI capability is likewise a bundle of facilities, electric power, people and organizational knowledge, and if part of the bundle is destroyed, the remainder rapidly loses value. Possession of matter and possession of capability are different things, and the latter is lost if its maintenance is neglected. 6.1.4 The Limits of Bargaining Power on the Producing Side — The Experience of OPEC The value of the Resource-Producing Model depends not only on the volume produced but on power over price. The attempt to organize this power was OPEC (founded in 1960), operated in expanded form since 2016 as OPEC+ with the addition of Russia and others. Its scale cannot be ignored: as of 2022 OPEC accounted for approximately 38% of world crude production (approximately 28.7 million b/d) and OPEC+ for approximately 59% (approximately 48 million b/d). The experience of the cartel nevertheless showed that bargaining power on the producing side has structural limits. First, there is no legal means of enforcing compliance with quotas, and the incentive to produce in excess is permanent. In the first half of the 1980s Saudi Arabia supported the price as a swing producer by cutting its own output, but continued to lose share to quota-busting by other members and to increased non-OPEC supply (the North Sea and elsewhere); at the end of 1985 it abandoned this role and turned to increased output, and the oil price collapsed in 1986. Second, raising the price too far induces new supply from non-members and energy saving and substitution on the demand side, so that long-run demand and share are lost. Third, internal disputes over the distribution of the burden of coordination erupt periodically — the price war of March 2020 (an increase in output following the breakdown of coordinated cuts) and its resolution the following April by the largest coordinated cut in history, approximately 9.7 million barrels per day, are the most recent repetition. The general proposition extracted from this is important for this paper: the bargaining power conferred by holding a resource depreciates at the speed of adaptation on the demand side. That the exercise of the "oil weapon" in 1973 produced permanent adaptation on the demand side — Japan's energy-saving revolution and the IEA's network of stockpiles — and thereby eroded the long-run bargaining power of oil, is the clearest example. The power of the Resource-Producing Model is consumed by its exercise. 128 6.2 The Reality of M2 (the Transformation Model) — The Value of a State Without Production The Transformation Model procures a resource from outside, adds value by transformation, and supplies it outward. The two purest instances in the oil era are post-war Japan and Singapore. The two display different aspects of the Transformation Model — the former the depth of the chain of transformation, the latter the logic of the location of transformation. 6.2.1 Post-War Japan — The Structure and Crisis of the Processing-Trade State Post-war Japan took an extreme form of "zero production, specialization in transformation." In fiscal 1973, oil accounted for 75.5% of Japan's domestic supply of primary energy, and dependence on the Middle East within its crude imports was 77.5%. Energy self-sufficiency had fallen sharply from 58.1% in fiscal 1960 through the high-growth period, and a structure in which the whole base of the economy depended on the production of other countries was complete. On top of this were stacked the chain of transformation of refining, petrochemicals, steel, shipbuilding and automobiles, and the processing-trade state that turned imported crude into export value was formed. The essential point of this structure is the depth of the chain. If crude is merely refined and the products sold, the value added by transformation stops at a single stage, the refining margin. What was distinctive about the Japanese model is that the output of refining became the input of petrochemicals, whose output became the input of materials industries, whose output in turn became the input of the assembly industries of machinery, automobiles and electrical equipment — a multi-stage linkage completed within the country. In the language of staple theory (Section 4.3), forward linkage was formed not over one stage but over several. The value added at each stage accumulated domestically and was supplied outward in the form of exports of final products; each transformer was the customer of the next stage, and a self-reinforcing structure was established in which demand conditions (Porter's second element, Section 4.5) continued to be refined domestically. The strength of the processing-trade state lay not in the difference between imports and exports but in how many stages of transformation were interposed between them. The oil crisis of 1973 exposed at a stroke the vulnerability of this structure — that the Transformation Model has no upstream. What is notable is that Japan's response was not the acquisition of the upstream. The response developed in three directions. First, improvement in the efficiency of transformation. Centred on the Energy Conservation Act of 1979 (efficiency regulation for factories, transport and buildings), the primary energy required to generate one trillion yen of GDP halved from 70 PJ in fiscal 1973 to 35 PJ in fiscal 2021. Second, diversification of inputs. Through the Alternative Energy Act of 1980 (promotion of the development of energy alternatives to oil) and similar measures, the dependence of primary energy on oil fell from 75.5% in fiscal 1973 to 36.0% in fiscal 2021. Third, the institutionalization of buffers. Following the Petroleum Supply and Demand Op‐ 129 timization Act of 1973 (government intervention in the event of a supply shortfall), national oil stockpiling began in 1978 (the "90-day stockpile expansion plan"). This three-directional response is a textbook case of crisis response by a state on the Transformation Model. Taking as given the structural constraint that it cannot hold the upstream, it institutionalized three defences: efficiency of transformation, diversity of inputs, and a buffer in time. The residual risk is nevertheless clear — dependence on the Middle East within crude imports fell at one point to 68.8% in fiscal 1985 but rose again thereafter and has remained high, at 94.7% in fiscal 2023. Diversification of inputs advanced across energy sources, but with respect to the sources of oil itself it moved in the opposite direction. The vulnerability of a state on the Transformation Model can be mitigated by institutions but not eliminated. 6.2.2 Singapore — Transformation as Location Singapore is the purest instance of the fact that transformation can be entirely independent of production. The country has no crude reserves whatever. Nevertheless it has refining capacity exceeding 1.5 million barrels per day and occupies the position of Asia's oil hub as one of the world's leading refining centres (of the top three class). At its core is Jurong Island — an artificial island created by joining seven islands through land reclamation — where approximately 95 oil and chemical firms are agglomerated and the international oil majors operate large refineries and chemical plants. Sales of marine fuel (bunkers) in 2025 were 51.8 million tonnes, making it also one of the world's largest bunkering ports. The conditions on which Singapore subsists as a Transformation Model state differ from Japan's. Whereas Japan took value through the depth of the chain of transformation (from refining to final products), Singapore took value through the advantage of location of transformation. The nodal position of the Strait of Malacca in maritime shipping, the ecosystem of logistics, insurance and trading created by agglomeration, the predictability of the legal system, skilled labour — this "transformation infrastructure" generated a locational rent more than compensating for the absence of production. In the language of the theory of small-state strategy seen in Section 4.8, it is a typical case of choosing the position of a node under the constraint of scale. Placing the two Transformation Model states side by side shows that the type has no single prescription. The Japanese type is a strategy of depth, stacking a multi-stage linkage domestically on the premise of the scale of the domestic market and industrial base. The Singaporean type is a strategy of position, which, unable to presuppose scale, draws external flows in by geography and institutions and takes value at the point of passage. The former is vulnerable to a break in the chain (if one stage is lost to international competition, the whole downstream thins), the latter to the obsolescence of position (changes in routes, regulation or technology may destroy the significance of the node). In conceiving a Transformation Model for the age of AI, which aspect to aim at is a branching point of 130

strategy — to pursue depth, or to take a position. For Japan this question is treated in Section 18, and for small states in Section 14. 6.3 The Economics of the Refining Margin — Why Transformation Could Be Separated from Production The experience of Japan and Singapore poses one question. Why, in oil, was the share of transformation not absorbed by the producer but able to remain in the hands of the transformer? The answer to this question is the key to judging the feasibility of a Transformation Model (M2) in the age of AI. 6.3.1 The Transformer's Share Is an Independent Variable — The Crack Spread The margin of the refining business is approximated by the crack spread. This is the difference between the price of crude and the prices of petroleum products (gasoline, distillates), the representative indicator being the 3-2-1 crack spread — assuming that three barrels of crude yield two barrels of gasoline and one barrel of distillate (diesel and the like), and computing the difference between product revenue and crude cost. It is an industry- standard benchmark reflecting the typical yield composition of United States refineries. The significance of this indicator for this paper goes beyond mere industry practice. The crack spread varies separately from the price of crude itself. That is, the producer's share (the crude price) and the transformer's share (the spread) are separate economic variables. There are phases in which crude is cheap while refining margins are thick, and the reverse. The revenue of a state on the Transformation Model is not the residual of the revenue of a state on the Resource-Producing Model but an independent value with independent determinants. Definition 5 (transformation value, Section 7) is a formalization of this structure in correspondence with AI, and the crack spread is its counterpart in oil. 6.3.2 The Three Conditions That Made Separation Possible Why, then, could the transformer's share subsist independently? On the standard qualitative understanding, at least three conditions operated (this is a structural explanation and stands at the level of evidence that is supportive). First, the asymmetry of transport costs. Crude is cheap to transport in large volumes over long distances by tanker and pipeline, whereas petroleum products are of many kinds in small lots and their quality specifications differ by market, so that it is more efficient to produce them near the point of consumption. As a consequence of this asymmetry, post-war refining capacity shifted substantially from a location at the source to a location at the point of consumption (Japan, Europe, points of consumption within the United States). The geography of transformation was prised away from the geography of production. 131 Second, asset specificity and economies of scale. A refinery is an enormous installed capital, and its configuration is designed to the product specifications of the demand region (the ratio of gasoline to gas oil, the content of environmental regulation). Because the nature of the asset is fundamentally different from the oil fields held by producing states, ownership and location separate readily. It is not inevitable that the assets of production and the assets of transformation be held by the same firm or the same state. Third, the existence of a locational rent. As the case of Singapore shows, a refining hub can be established without holding crude, through a node of maritime shipping, a regulatory environment and agglomeration. Transformation has a locational logic independent of production. Summarizing the three conditions in a sentence: in oil, transformation was separable from production physically, geographically and in capital, and that separation generated a defensible margin. 6.3.3 Downstream Integration by Producers — A Constant Pressure on Separation This separation was not, however, a static equilibrium. States on the Resource-Producing Model have a permanent incentive to internalize the share of transformation, and attempts at downstream integration have been repeated historically. The representative contemporary case is Saudi Aramco. Through Motiva Enterprises, it made the Port Arthur refinery in Texas a wholly owned subsidiary in May 2017. That refinery has a capacity of more than 600,000 barrels per day, among the largest in the United States, and the configuration in which the state company of a producing country directly holds refining assets in a consuming country was realized. The lesson this fact gives this paper is twofold. On the one hand, producers constantly attempt to advance into transformation — downstream integration is not an exception but a tendency. On the other hand, integration met a wall: the locational logic of transformation, market access, conformity to specifications, and the enormous capital and time required for acquisition. That "a producing country simply becomes a transforming country" was not easy in oil. It is because of the thickness of this wall that Japan and Singapore were able to hold the position of transformation for half a century. Here the central question of this paper arises. In AI, does this wall have the same thickness? When the supplier of a foundation model integrates into the application layer, is there a barrier corresponding to the asymmetry of transport costs? Is there a separation of assets corresponding to asset specificity? Is there a defensible position corresponding to a locational rent? It should also be recorded that the direction of integration was not oneway. Transformers too had an incentive to move upstream, and vertical integration and separation have been repeated throughout a century of the oil industry. That production and transformation belong to separate actors is not something imposed as inevitable by the physical properties of the resource but a historical arrangement generated by the balance of technology, transport, regulation and bargaining power at each time. It cannot 132 therefore be presupposed for AI that producers and transformers will divide the work between them. Whether such a division is established depends on whether each of the three conditions identified in Section 6.3.2 holds for AI. The answer to this question is left to Proposition 4 (Section 7). What this section establishes is the structure of the question: since the conditions that made separation possible in oil have been identified, each of them can be examined individually for AI. 6.4 The Reality of M3 (the Utilization Model) — Value Is Realized on the Utilization Side The Utilization Model inputs a resource into domestic processes of production and life and uses it to amplify other values. The ideal type in the oil era is motorization in the United States in the first half of the twentieth century. Registered automobiles in the United States roughly tripled in a decade, from more than 8 million in 1920 to approximately 23 million by 1929. What made this diffusion possible was transformation on the supply side — through Ford's line production the price of the Model T fell to 490 dollars in 1914 (approximately a quarter of its level a decade earlier) — and the conditions were in place for the mass of the population to become the final users of oil. And the effects of utilization did not remain within the automobile sector. Vulcanized rubber (tyres), road construction (highway investment by state and local governments), filling stations, motels, roadside food service — the utilization of oil generated employment and industries outside the oil sector, and did so with compounding effect. Decisive in interpreting this case is the fact that the United States of that time was also among the world's largest oil producers. Even so, the principal contribution of oil to the national wealth of the United States lay not in revenue from the sale of crude (M1) but in the industrial system on the utilization side that was assembled on the premise of cheap oil — automobiles, roads, suburbanization, retail, tourism. The greater part of a resource's value is realized on the utilization side. This is the most important general proposition shown by the ideal type of the Utilization Model, and it is the historical substance of the theory of the diffusion of general-purpose technologies confirmed in Section 4.4 (that complementary investment and reorganization generate the productivity effect). At the same time, the Utilization Model has its own modes of failure. First, utilization without complementary investment remains shallow. Without roads automobiles do not diffuse, and without diffusion no spillover industries arise. The compounding of utilization is not automatic but a function of complementary investment in public infrastructure, organizational reform and skill formation. Second, pure utilization unaccompanied by transformation reduces the value retained domestically through two channels. One is the cost channel: the portion paid abroad as consideration for the input is not retained domestically, a channel that operates even in a competitive market. The other is the rent channel: in phases where supply is concentrated and demand is inelastic, the consideration includes a mark-up over marginal cost, and that excess portion is transferred to the 133 producer. The latter was a reality in oil because the conditions of supply concentration through a cartel and of demand inelastic in the short run were both present. An economy that merely imports and consumes oil loses income through a deterioration in the terms of trade in phases of rising oil prices. It was precisely this channel that struck Japan in 1973, and its response was the doubling of the efficiency of transformation, as seen in Section 6.2.1. The distinction between the two channels transfers to AI: Proposition 5 (Section 7) formalizes them as (α) the cost channel and (β) the rent channel, and derives from the requirement of supplier concentration and inelastic demand for the latter that it is specific to C2. Utilization and transformation are complementary. As a third mode of failure, a problem of measurement attaches specifically to the Utilization Model. The value of the Resource-Producing Model appears comparatively clearly in export statistics, and that of the Transformation Model in the trade balance and in manufacturing value added. The value of the Utilization Model, by contrast, is realized as productivity improvement thinly dispersed across countless sectors, so that its attribution in statistics is difficult. Even in the United States of the 1920s, the statistics of the time did not connect, as consequences of the same resource, the portion of oil's value to the national economy recorded as sales of crude and the portion recorded as the industries of the utilization side — automobiles, roads, retail, tourism. The measurement gap for intangible investment and free digital goods confirmed in Section 4.4 is the AI version of this problem. That a state on the Utilization Model cannot demonstrate its own success is not a mere statistical inconvenience but a substantive path to failure, since it cannot sustain the continuation of complementary investment politically. This is why the redesign of the national accounts (Proposition 14, Section 17) is among the tasks of this paper. 6.5 The Institutionalization of Buffers — A Fourth Strategy for States Without Production As a supplement to the description of the three types, one further institutional response adopted by states without production should be recorded: stockpiling. The IEA (International Energy Agency), established in 1974 in response to the crisis of 1973, imposed on member countries an obligation to hold oil stocks of at least 90 days of net imports. Coordinated releases have been carried out six times since its establishment (the 1991 supply disruption event, hurricane damage in 2005, the 2011 supply disruption event, twice in connection with the 2022 supply disruption event, and at the time of the 2026 supply disruption event). National implementations exceed the international standard. Japan's stockpiles are of three kinds — national, private, and jointly held with producing countries — and as of the end of December 2025 totalled 254 days (national stocks of 146 days, approximately 41.12 million kilolitres; private stocks of 101 days, approximately 28.48 million kilolitres; jointly held stocks of 7 days), or 214 days on the IEA basis. The Strategic Petroleum Reserve (SPR) of the United States was established under the Energy Policy and Conservation Act of 1975, and its present maximum storage capacity is approximately 714 million barrels. In 134 2022 a release of 180 million barrels, the largest in its history, was directed in connection with a supply disruption event, and in 2026 a release of 172 million barrels was announced following a sharp fall in transit volumes through the Strait of Hormuz, so that inventories in the week ending 10 July 2026 stood at 316.5 million barrels, the lowest level since April 1983 (EIA weekly data; for the subsequent course see Section 6.11.5). The essence of the stockpiling institution is that a state without production "buys time." The figures of 90 days, or of 254 days, are the length of the respite available for negotiation and adaptation should supply be cut off. The asymmetry of bargaining power on the producing side is partly mitigated by this purchase of time. What must be established here is that this strategy depends on a property specific to oil, namely physical storability. Crude in a barrel remains crude with the passage of time; a stockpile does not depreciate. That this premise does not hold for AI — that the sovereign minimum guarantee level depreciates in proportion to the speed of advance of the frontier — is the subject of Proposition 8 (Section 13), and this section supplies the oil-side reference point of that asymmetry. The transferable element that can be extracted from the stockpiling institution is not the instrument of storage but the three-layer structure of its design. The first layer is the level of holding — how many days, and by whom (the state, private industry, or an alliance), the stock is held. Japan's three-part structure (146 days national, 101 days private, 7 days jointly held with producing countries) shows that this allocation is not single. The second layer is the discipline of release — what circumstances constitute the trigger, who decides, and in what order allocation is made. That the IEA's coordinated releases number only six since its establishment means that the threshold for triggering has been deliberately kept high. The third layer is international coordination — the stockpile of one country affects price formation only in combination with those of others. Setting aside the physical premise of storability, these three layers are a problem of design that can be put in the same terms to the assurance of supply of AI capability. That Definition 6 (the sovereign minimum guarantee level) is composed of the three elements of domestically held capability, allied assurance and operational readiness is nothing other than a mapping of this three-layer structure. The course by which the SPR of the United States, after the large releases of 2022 and 2026, reached in July 2026 its lowest level since April 1983 is a concrete instance of the fact that a stockpile is a consumable asset and that its replenishment likewise requires a continuing commitment. 6.6 Extracting the Conditions of Success and of Failure From the concrete record above, the conditions of success and of failure of each type are extracted. The conditions of success for M1 (the Resource-Producing Model) are (i) fiscal institutions that convert rent into permanent assets (Norway's fund and fiscal rule), (ii) a buffer absorbing price volatility, (iii) governance insulating the operation of the producing sector from politics (the rule of law, protection of the professional standing of engineers), and 135 (iv) deliberate investment in forward and final-demand linkage. The conditions of failure are (i) the loss of the circuit of accountability (the rentier structure), (ii) the erosion of the transformation sector through Dutch disease, (iii) the destruction of productive capacity itself through the politicization of the producing sector (Venezuela), and (iv) overconfidence in bargaining power — its exercise inducing permanent adaptation on the demand side and eroding long-run power (OPEC). The conditions of success for M2 (the Transformation Model) are (i) security of procurement — diversification and buffers against supply interruption, (ii) a defensible transformation margin — assets that producers cannot easily replicate or integrate (the asymmetry of transport costs, asset specificity, locational rent), (iii) access to the demand market for the transformed goods, (iv) institutions that continuously raise the efficiency of transformation (Japan's system of energy-conservation legislation), and (v) the institutionalization of quality and standards. The conditions of failure are (i) defencelessness against interruption of the upstream, (ii) compression of the margin through downstream integration by producers, (iii) recurrence of concentration in sources of procurement (the renewed rise of Japan's dependence on the Middle East), and (iv) institutional rigidity after the completion of catch-up (Section 4.6). The conditions of success for M3 (the Utilization Model) are (i) cheap and stable access to the resource, (ii) the thickness and continuity of complementary investment — infrastructure, organization, skills, (iii) breadth of diffusion (its reaching the mass of the population), and (iv) a domestic market and institutions able to receive the spillover industries that utilization generates. The conditions of failure are (i) shallow utilization through insufficient complementary investment, (ii) outflow of value through the absence of transformation capability (the cost channel, and the rent channel under supply concentration and inelastic demand), (iii) vulnerability of the terms of trade to rises in the resource price, and (iv) loss of policy continuity because the results of utilization are not measured (Section 4.4). Three patterns observed across the three types may be recorded. First, each type requires institutions specific to its position. The Resource-Producing Model needs fiscal institutions, the Transformation Model institutions of quality and efficiency, and the Utilization Model institutions of complementary investment and diffusion, and these do not substitute for one another. Transplanting Norway's fund into Japan would not generate competitiveness in processing trade, and transplanting Japan's energy-conservation legislation into Venezuela would not restore productive capacity. Second, each type is fragile on its own. Production is exposed to the consumption of bargaining power and to price fluctuation, transformation to interruption of the upstream and to downstream integration, and utilization to the outflow of rent and to the terms of trade. Every state that achieved long-run success in the oil era combined several types — the United States production with utilization, Japan transformation with utilization, Norway production with transformation (into financial assets). Third, the conditions of success are not static. Japan's improvement in the efficiency of transformation was the result of a quarter century 136 of continuous investment after 1973, and Norway's fund obtained its scale by keeping to its rule for thirty years. An institution does not operate once it has been created; it operates only by continuing to be kept. These three patterns are all structures of political economy that do not depend on the physical properties of the resource, and in the selection of the next subsection they are judged transferable. Table 3. State examples of the three types of the oil era and their conditions of success Type State examples Mode of value Conditions of success Modes of failure M1 Resource- Producing Model Norway (success) / the Gulf states (persistence and attempted transition) / Venezuela (failure) The capture and distribution of resource rent Fiscal institutions converting rent into permanent assets (a fund, a fiscal rule), a buffer against price fluctuation, depoliticization of the producing sector, investment in the formation of linkages The rentier structure (loss of accountability), Dutch disease, destruction of capability through the politicization of the producing sector, consumption of bargaining power M2 Transformation Model Post-war Japan (depth of the chain of transformation) / Singapore (locational advantage in transformation) The transformation margin (value added, represented by the crack spread) Security of procurement (diversification, stockpiles), a defensible margin (asymmetry of transport costs, asset specificity, locational rent), access to the demand market, continuous improvement in the efficiency of transformation, institutionalization of quality and standards Defencelessness against interruption of the upstream, downstream integration by producers, recurrence of concentration in sources of procurement, institutional rigidity after catch-up M3 Utilization Model Motorization in the United States (the 1920s) Compounding amplification of the productivity and industries of other sectors through utilization Cheap and stable access, thickness and continuity of complementary investment (infrastructure, organization, skills), breadth of diffusion, a domestic market able to receive the spillovers Shallow utilization through insufficient complementary investment, outflow of rent through the absence of transformation capability, vulnerability of the terms of trade, discontinuity of policy through the unmeasurability of effects Common institutional device IEA member countries (the 90-day stockpiling obligation) / Japan (254 days) / the United States (the SPR) The purchase of time against supply interruption That physical storage does not depreciate; international coordination of release (six times since establishment) A permanently lowered level through drawdown of stocks; finiteness in the face of a prolonged interruption 137 6.7 Definition 3 — National Value Models On the basis of this extraction, the central concept of this paper is defined. Definition 3 (National Value Models) A national value model is the configuration by which a state generates national value in its relation to a general-purpose input (Definition 1), and is divided into the following three basic types. M1 (the Resource-Producing Model): the type that produces the resource itself and obtains value from the fact of that production. The path by which value is realized depends on the tier: at levels of high strategic character it takes the exclusive paths of sale, the setting of terms of access, and the assurance of supply, whereas at levels of low strategic character it takes the non-exclusive paths of ecosystem externalities and standard formation rather than sales revenue. M2 (the Transformation Model): the type that procures the resource from outside, adds value by transformation (processing, application, integration), and supplies it outward. M3 (the Utilization Model): the type that inputs the resource into domestic processes of production and life and uses it to amplify other values. Actual states are not of a single type but are described as a weighted portfolio over the nine cells of the product with the capability tiers (M×C). Note (boundary of the framework): the position that obtains value by supplying the rules and verification for the trading and use of a resource (standard-setting, conformity assessment, certification), without depending on the production, transformation or utilization of the resource, lies outside the domain over which this definition quantifies. This is because its source of value lies not in a relation to a general-purpose input but in constraining the conduct of other actors. This position is treated separately in Section 14 and Section 20 as a "position concerning the rules of the cells" rather than as a position on the nine cells, and the possibility of extending the framework to a fourth value model (M4, a disciplining type) is made explicit as a task for the future. The fate of the note is indicated first. The position that this note placed outside the domain of quantification is recovered within the theory in Section 11.4, as geoeconomic leverage on the side of desirability. The third point below and the two paragraphs that follow it state the significance of this recovery and the reason why it does not take the form of an extension of the M axis. Three points about the wording of Definition 3 should be made explicit. First, the domain of quantification is not "strategic general-purpose resource" but general-purpose input. Strategic character, as Definition 1 stipulates, is not a binary attribution but a degree, and moreover the same input has different strategic character at different levels of capability. Were the domain of quantification of national value models placed at "strategic generalpurpose resource," levels of low strategic character — for AI, the C1 tier — would fall outside the domain, and the three cells of row C1 could not formally be constructed. By placing the base at the general-purpose input, both axes of the nine cells are defined over the 138 same object domain, and the product of the M axis and the C axis has meaning. Second, the defining clause of M1 is neutralized with respect to tier. The ground on which value is obtained is "the fact of production," and the path by which it is realized — the exclusive path of sale and the setting of terms of access, or the non-exclusive path of ecosystem externalities and standard formation — is a function of the level of strategic character. Without this neutralization, M1×C1 (Section 7.2) would appear in the table under the name of M1 while failing to satisfy the defining clause "obtains value from sale and control." Third, the note makes the boundary of the framework explicit. The position that obtains value through standard-setting, conformity assessment and certification lies outside the domain of quantification of this definition because its source of value is the constraint of other actors' conduct rather than a relation to the resource. Declaring on the side of the definition that this position will be treated separately, rather than forcing it onto the nine cells, raises the reservation about the exhaustiveness of the classificatory framework from a descriptive proviso to a theoretical exclusion. On this third point, the position at which this paper arrives should be stated in advance. This paper does not erect this position as a fourth value model, but recovers it within the theory in Section 11 as geoeconomic leverage on the side of desirability. That is, what the note placed outside the domain of quantification was placed outside with respect to the coordinate system of the nine cells, not with respect to the theory as a whole. Section 11 introduces a second axis independent of the nine cells — geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15) — and positions explicitly, as one source of desirability (the degree to which other states of their own accord seek engagement with the state in question), one of its two components, the position of writing rules and standards. A jurisdiction that writes rules constrains the conduct of other actors by requiring conformity with its conditions from actors outside its territory that seek to do business in the market in question, and the property that the note gave as its ground for exclusion — that the source of value lies in constraining the conduct of other actors — was at once the reason for exclusion and a description of the fact that this position lies on the second axis. The exclusion in the note is therefore not withdrawn but given a place to be received. Section 11.4 formalizes this operation as "not exclusion but recovery." The reason why the recovery takes the form of placement on the leverage axis rather than an extension of the M axis is left to Section 11, but two points may be recorded here in relation to the account in this section. First, the three values of the M axis constitute an exhaustive division based on a single principle of division — whether the general-purpose input is produced, transformed, or utilized — and the position of writing rules has no value under that principle, since the actor in question obtains value in a relation other than a relation to the input. To place a fourth value here would create a series in which the principle of division differs between the first three and the fourth, and would destroy the consistency as a classification that is preserved by the first point above (coherence of the domain of quantification) and the second (the tier-neutralization of M1). The note's use of the strong phrase "outside the domain of quantification" reflected this requirement of consistency. Second, only when placed on the leverage axis does the position yield 139 falsifiable consequences — for the observable quantities of the magnitude of compliance costs and the inelasticity of the market predict the rise and fall of the value of that position. Were it placed as a fourth value model, the value on the M axis would do no more than describe a relation to the input, and these predictions would not follow. Through this recovery, the treatment of the matter that the note described as "made explicit as a task for the future" is settled as follows. No extension of the framework to M4 (a disciplining type) is undertaken. The position in question is described in the second coordinate of a set of dual coordinates (Section 11.5.4) — a position on the nine cells and a quadrant on the two-by-two of leverage — and the country profiles that follow (Section 14) adopt these dual coordinates. A jurisdiction that writes rules is therefore described not as "an actor located nowhere on the nine cells" but as "an actor located on the nine cells in the Utilization or Transformation Model and located, in leverage coordinates, in a quadrant of high desirability." The reader should read the fact that the account of the nine cells from this section onward says nothing about the bargaining power of states not as a lacuna in the framework but as a separation of variables. That the two are independent variables is what Proposition 22 (Section 11) asserts, and it is that independence which makes both the description of position and the description of leverage necessary. With this treatment of the note in view, the discussion returns to the body of the definition. The final sentence of the body of the definition fixes the unit of analysis of this paper. Even in the oil era, no pure single type existed. The United States was among the world's largest producers (M1), held enormous refining capacity domestically (M2), and realized its greatest value in utilization through motorization (M3). Japan had almost no production but developed both transformation (M2) and utilization (M3) deeply. Norway specialized in production (M1) while institutionalizing a transformation of its own kind, the conversion of rent into financial assets. A state does not choose a type; it chooses the weights on the types. In the age of AI these weights differentiate into nine cells in product with the capability tiers (C1/C2/C3) — this is the central analytical device of this paper. 6.8 Mappability to AI — Selection by the Discipline of Proposition 1 Which of the conditions extracted from the oil era are transferable to AI? The selection is made in the light of the discipline of Proposition 1 (Section 3) — that what transfers is the structural theory of trade, dependence and stockpiling, and that inferences about depletion, reserves and production quotas do not transfer. Structures that transfer. First, the neutrality of production and divergence through institutions. The proposition that production is not in itself a fate and that what divides outcomes is the institution governing what it is converted into is a proposition about the structure of political economy rather than about the physical properties of a resource, and it transfers to AI. In a state that produces AI capability (M1×C2) as well, a path operates by which, when that wealth and rent are concentrated in particular sectors and particular firms, other sectors thin and institutions are distorted — this is the content of Proposition

6a (Section 8). There is a counterpart on the side of those attracting computing infrastructure as well, and the distortion by which the value added remaining locally is thin relative to the electric power, land, water and tax concessions granted is formalized separately as Proposition 6b (Section 8). Second, that the transformer's share is an independent variable. Just as the crack spread varied separately from the price of crude, in AI too the share of the application layer has determinants distinct from the price of the foundation model. Definition 5 (transformation value) rests on the transfer of this structure. What transfers, however, is the structure of "being an independent variable," not the outcome of "a thick margin being obtainable." Third, that the greater part of value is realized on the utilization side. The proposition displayed by motorization in the United States, that the greater part of a resource's value is realized in the industrial system of the utilization side, is independently supported by the theory of general-purpose technologies (Section 4.4) and transfers to AI. The conditionality that complementary investment governs the depth of utilization transfers as well. Fourth, the structure of asymmetry in dependence and bargaining power, and the depreciation of bargaining power through adaptation on the demand side. The dynamic by which the exercise of power on the supply side, in the form of export controls or changes in the terms of access, induces permanent adaptation on the receiving side (the construction of alternative systems, investment in domestic production) is of the same form as the "overuse dilemma" of the theory of weaponized interdependence (Section 4.10), and transfers. Structures that do not transfer. First, the whole of the inferences concerning reserves, depletion and production quotas. AI has no reserves, is not depleted by use, and the concept of a production quota has no meaning for it. The inferences drawn from an OPECtype supply cartel therefore do not transfer, at least with respect to capability itself (physical bottlenecks such as compute or particular semiconductors require separate consideration, but that is the control of productive facilities, not the allocation of capability). Second, the direct transfer of the strategy of buying time through stockpiles. Crude does not depreciate in storage, whereas a "stockpile" of AI capability depreciates relatively through the advance of the frontier. Because of this asymmetry it is not directly possible to set for AI a figure corresponding to the international standard of a 90-day stockpile (Proposition 8, Section 13). Third, and most importantly, the transfer of the three conditions that supported the defensibility of the refining margin. Examining individually the three conditions identified in Section 6.3.2, none of them holds self-evidently for AI. As to the asymmetry of transport costs, the supply of AI has a marginal transport cost of nearly zero, and location at the point of consumption is not compelled. As to asset specificity, a substantial part of the assets of the application layer can also be built from the side of the foundation model, and the separation of production assets from transformation assets is less clear than in 141 oil. As to locational rent, the significance of a physical node is thin. That is, the three walls that made the Transformation Model subsist in oil may all be thin in AI. This consequence is the ground of the claim of Proposition 4 (Section 7) — that of the value added of the application layer, the portion reducible to general-purpose functionality can be internalized by the producer through the path, at nearly zero marginal cost, of standard inclusion in the next generation of the model, so that the transformation margin on that portion is structurally compressed — and it is also the core of Proposition 13 (Section 18), that Japan's post-war model cannot be transplanted as it stands. There is, however, a limit to the range of the compression. Because the cost of internalizing the portion consisting of integration into business processes, regulatory compliance and the assumption of liability is not zero, the transformation margin protected by integration cost is not compressed. The judgement that the three walls that made the Transformation Model subsist in oil are thin is not a judgement that the Transformation Model does not hold, but a judgement that the conditions on which it subsists move from physical walls to the wall of integration cost. One methodological lesson from this work of selection may be recorded. The value of an analogy lies not in pointing out similarity but in identifying dissimilarity. The point of placing oil and AI side by side is not to state that "AI too is something like oil" but to identify precisely what made the Transformation Model possible in oil and to create a state in which each of those items can be examined for AI. Section 4 prepared a toolbox of theory and this section a historical reference point in order to make this examination possible. Summarizing the result of the selection: what transfers is the conditionality by which institutions divide outcomes, the accounting structure by which the transformer's share is an independent variable, the distribution by which the greater part of value is realized on the utilization side, the dynamic of asymmetry in dependence and of the depreciation of bargaining power through adaptation, and the structure by which each type requires its own institutions and is fragile on its own. What does not transfer is the inferences bound up with reserves and depletion, the instrument of buying time through storage, and the three conditions that supported the defensibility of the refining margin. This asymmetry — the structures of political economy transfer, and the conditions that depend on the physical properties of the resource do not — is the discipline running through the whole of this paper. The framework of the three types of the oil era itself transfers to AI. But the conditions on which each type subsists must be examined anew, one by one. 6.9 Development into the Nine Cells — Proposition 3 The three types differentiate into nine cells in product with the AI capability tiers (Section 5). Whereas the three types of the oil era could presuppose a single market structure, in AI the market structure and the governance structure differ at C1 (the commodity tier), C2 (the frontier tier) and C3 (the critical tier) (Proposition 2, Section 5). Even within the same "Transformation Model," therefore, transformation at C1 and transformation at C2 do not 142 require the same institutions and do not share the same modes of failure. This nonequivalence is formalized as a proposition. Proposition 3 (Non-Equivalence of the Nine Cells) The nine cells that are the product of the national value models (M1/M2/M3) and the AI capability tiers (C1/C2/C3) are mutually non-equivalent in the institutions, investment and composition of people they require, in the mode of value expected, and in their specific modes of failure. A strategy or institution optimal in one cell is inferior or harmful in another. Falsification condition Cell position is assigned without using any institutional variable, using only the following observable quantities on the supply side and the dependence side: (a) the distance from the frontier of the capability produced by actors of the state in question, (b) net exports and imports of AI-related goods and services, (c) the supplier concentration of procurement (HHI), and (d) whether access control measures apply. If, under this assignment, the relation between institutional variables (the composition of the policy package) and outcome variables (productivity, the capture of transformation value, the course of dependence) does not differ across cells (if the same policy produces equivalent outcomes irrespective of cell position), this proposition is rejected. A discipline is embedded in the wording of the falsification condition. The variables used to assign cells and the variables across which differences between cells are tested must not overlap. If cell position were judged by institutional features such as "whether the state cooperates in export controls" or "what type its industrial policy is," and it were then confirmed that "institutional requirements differ across cells," that would not be a test but a circularity — for what has been assigned by institutions naturally differs by institutions. This paper therefore confines the observable quantities used in the assignment to four on the supply side and the dependence side — (a) the distance from the frontier of productive capability, (b) net exports and imports of AI-related goods and services, (c) the supplier concentration of procurement, and (d) whether access control measures apply — and excludes institutional variables from the assignment entirely. All four are quantities already collected in Section 5 and Section 14, and require no new measurement. Only when the assignment is independent of institutions is the claim of Proposition 3, that the relation between institutional variables and outcome variables differs across cells, opened to independent testing. The intuitive grounds for Proposition 3 have already been supplied by this section and Section 4. The institutional difference between catch-up transformation and frontier transformation confirmed in Section 4.6 — that different institutions are effective in a phase where the target is specified externally and in a phase where search is required — is one instance of the non-equivalence of M2×C1 and M2×C2. The requirement of complementary investment for utilization confirmed in Section 4.4 shows that the institutional 143 requirements of M3 are not interchangeable with those of M1 and M2. And the divergence of Norway and Venezuela shown in Section 6.1 shows that institutions divide outcomes even within the same cell — what Proposition 3 asserts is non-equivalence between cells, not uniqueness within a cell. As the last sentence of Definition 3 states, actual states are described as a weighted portfolio over the nine cells. This formulation has three implications. First, strategy is not choice but allocation. The question "which cell should Japan aim at?" is wrongly posed; the correct question is "how much resource should be allocated to which cells, and what complementarities does that combination have?" The observation that every state achieving long-run success in the oil era combined several types (Section 6.6) shows that this problem of allocation is not new. Second, a portfolio has complementarities. The mutual complementarity by which the deepening of utilization (M3) cultivates the complementary assets of transformation (M2), and by which transformation capability supports the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6), forms the core of Proposition 13 (Section 18). Third, the nine cells are dynamic. Through Frontier Descent (Section 5), yesterday's C2 becomes tomorrow's C1. The appropriate weights of a portfolio therefore move over time, and fixing a cell position is not strategy but inertia. The following three sections examine these nine cells row by row. Section 7 treats row C1 (the commodity tier), Section 8 row C2 (the frontier tier), and Section 9 row C3 (the critical tier) together with critical-tier governance. One discipline of description should be confirmed here. C3 is at the time of writing an unrealized anticipatory category (Definition 2, Section 5), and the whole of the account in Section 9 and of the three cells of row C3 should be read as a conditional theory of design premised on "if C3 arrives." The exposition below, which treats the nine cells as a uniform lattice, is likewise subject to this reservation as regards row C3. For each cell, the defining features, institutional requirements, mode of value, modes of failure and applicable state examples are described, and how far the conditions of success of the oil era extracted in this section are mapped over is judged individually in accordance with the discipline of Proposition 1. As guidance for the reader, one way of reading the nine cells may be added. The rows (C1/ C2/C3) govern the market and governance structure that a state faces, and the columns (M1/M2/M3) govern the position a state takes within that structure. As a rule the row cannot be chosen by a state — the boundaries of the capability tiers are determined by technology, supplier concentration and the effectiveness of access control, and lie outside the will of any individual state. The column can be chosen, but only within a range conditioned by endowment, institutions and history. Cell position is therefore the result of a choice about how much to stake on which column within a given row. And since the rows themselves move over time (Frontier Descent), this choice must be made not once but repeatedly. The same work that states of the oil era carried out over half a century, holding to their type or continuing to recompose it, is demanded of states of the age of AI. 144 6.10 Non-Orthogonality of the Axes and the Feasible Region — The Nine Cells Are Not a Uniform Grid The guidance just given stated that "the column can be chosen, but only within a range conditioned by endowment, institutions and history." This subsection extracts and formalizes the most structural part of that conditioning — the part in which the row itself restricts the options in the column. What is treated here is the deepest objection that may be raised against the framework of this paper: the nine cells are defined as the Cartesian product of the M axis and the C axis, but the two axes are not orthogonal. Below, this objection is reconstructed in the strongest form possible, and this paper's response to it is given as Definition 18 and Proposition 29. Stating the substance of the response in advance: this paper retains the nine cells as a coordinate system and abandons only the implication that all cells are equally occupiable. The content of the objection may be set out as follows. The operation of constituting a space as the product of two variables ordinarily presupposes, implicitly, that the value of one does not change the selectable range of the other — that is, orthogonality. If rows and columns are not independent, each point of the lattice ceases to be a position of equal standing, and the very counting of "nine possibilities in a 3×3" becomes misleading. Between the M axis and the C axis, however, this independence breaks at two ends. When the capability tier changes, the set of positions of value generation that can hold at that tier changes. The break is not symmetrical: at the low end and at the high end of the tiers, by separate mechanisms, opposite positions thin. The first break is one that this paper has already written down itself. Section 7.2 describes M1×C1 as the cell in which "one can produce but cannot command," and shows that at the C1 level none of the exclusive paths — sale, the setting of terms of access, assurance of supply — holds, so that the realization of value can only proceed by non-exclusive paths (ecosystem externalities, standard formation). This description is recovered within the definition by the tier-dependence clause of M1 in Definition 3, but the very fact of that recovery indicates where the problem lies. M1×C1 satisfies the defining core of M1, "obtaining value from the fact of production," while not carrying the exclusive capture of value that accompanies the other M1 cells. It is, that is, a position that satisfies the defining requirements only in part. Section 7 treats this not as a breakdown of the definition but as a consequence of tier dependence; but that the treatment succeeds and that the cell is of equal standing with the others are different matters. The second break operates in the opposite direction. M3×C3, treated in Section 9.10.3 — the position of not holding critical-tier capability and concentrating on utilization — is, if C3 arrives, unlikely to be stable as pure utilization. Because of the magnitude of the consequences that holding and using critical-tier capability has for other actors, such capability becomes the object of the control functions of verification, nonproliferation and stabilization (Definition 7). An actor connecting to capability at that tier is therefore required to be, at the same time as a user, a party to control — accepting declaration and monitoring, 145 submitting to terms of access, making its own latent capability transparent. What Section 9.10.3 describes as "constraints on autonomy in exchange for assurance of access" is this structure. The defining content of the position of concentrating on utilization is eroded from the side of the tier. The mechanisms producing the two breaks are not the same. What operates at the low end is non-exclusivity: because the cost of replicating the output is nearly zero, the exclusive paths of value capture are closed (Section 7.2.2). What operates at the high end is the class of externality: because the consequences that holding and using the capability has for third parties are large, other actors impose conditions on the occupation of that position. The former is a problem on the side of the definition, the latter a problem on the side of permission. Distinguishing these two mechanisms, the set of positions that can be occupied is defined tier by tier. Definition 18 (Feasible Region) The feasible region is the set of positions of value generation (the M axis) that a state can actually occupy at a given capability tier. The feasible region differs by tier, and not all of the nine cells are equally stable points of occupation. That a cell lies outside the feasible region, or on its boundary, means that the position corresponding to that cell falls under one of the following: (i) it cannot satisfy the requirements of the definition (production without the capture of exclusive value, and the like); (ii) it is not permitted by other actors under the class of externality of that tier; (iii) it lacks empirical instances. 146 Proposition 29 (Non-Orthogonality of the Axes and the Feasible Region) The M axis (the position of value generation) and the C axis (the capability tier) are not orthogonal. The higher the capability tier, the narrower, through the rise in the class of externality, the set of positions of value generation that can be occupied at that tier (the feasible region, Definition 18). Specifically: (i) at the tier of lowest strategic character, the position of production does not carry exclusive capture of value, so that the Resource- Producing Model satisfies the requirements of the definition only in part. (ii) At the tier of highest strategic character, an actor holding or using that capability is required to be a party to control, so that the position of pure utilization is unlikely to be stably established. Accordingly, the nine cells are not a uniform grid but a non-uniform space in which the feasible region changes by tier, and stability and the density of instances differ across cells. The nine cells are retained as a coordinate system, but it is not asserted that all cells are equally occupiable positions. Falsification condition If no systematic difference is observed in the density of stable instances across cells (if all cells are occupied to a comparable degree), the claim of nonuniformity is rejected. It is likewise rejected if the feasible region is observed not to change by tier, that is, if the set of occupiable positions is identical after controlling for capability tier. It is necessary to make clear here what is withdrawn and what is retained. What is withdrawn is only the implication of uniformity: the reading on which a 3×3 lattice presents nine options of equal standing, and the implication that "one can in principle stand in any cell." What is retained is the coordinate system itself, the device of describing a position by intersecting the M axis and the C axis. This distinction is a line this paper cannot concede. It would be logically possible, in response to the objection, to dismantle the lattice and replace it with an enumeration of the positions actually observed, but this paper does not adopt that course. There are four reasons. First, to be able to say that something is non-uniform, coordinates are required. The statement that a cell is thin, or empty, holds only once that cell can be specified as a point in a coordinate system. A description that enumerates only observed positions says nothing about positions not observed — it cannot distinguish "one cannot stand there" from "that position has not been examined." Being able to show which cells are thin is itself part of the content of the theory, and that content can be expressed only on a coordinate system. That the falsification condition of Proposition 29 can require "a systematic difference in the density of instances" is likewise possible only because the cells in which density is counted are defined first. Second, an empty cell is a prediction. If a state is observed stably occupying a position that this paper has judged to lie outside the feasible region, that shows this paper's judgement to be in error. In this sense a thin or empty cell is not a lacuna in description but a claim open to falsification. Dismantling the lattice would remove the site of that claim. 147 The value of a theory is measured by the breadth of the states of affairs it excludes, not by the breadth of those it can accommodate. Third, the dynamics of transition presuppose coordinates. Definition 10 (cell transition) defines transition as the movement of the centroid of a portfolio from one cell of the nine to another, and decomposes it into three directions: horizontal, vertical and crossaxis. The asymmetry of transition treated in Section 15 (Proposition 15) and the table of transition possibilities given in Appendix E depend entirely on being able to specify the point of departure and the point of arrival as points in a coordinate system. Non-uniformity is if anything useful additional information for the analysis of transitions — a transition towards a point outside the feasible region is blocked not by insufficiency of accumulation but by the non-establishment of the position. Being able to distinguish two kinds of unreachability raises the precision of diagnosis. Fourth, the description of a portfolio requires common coordinates. Definition 3 stipulates that actual states are described as a weighted portfolio over the nine cells. Weights have meaning only where the objects weighted are placed in a common space. Weights over a non-uniform space simply carry more information than weights over a uniform one — since it becomes possible to state, at the same time as the weights are described, which weights are structurally bounded above. For these reasons this paper retains the nine cells as a coordinate system and attaches to each cell a classification of density. Density means the degree to which the position corresponding to a cell can be stably occupied, and the following three classes are used. (A) Stably occupied positions: positions that satisfy the requirements of the definition in full, are not constrained by the permission of other actors, and for which several instances are persistently observed. (B) Positions on the boundary: positions falling partly under one of (i) to (iii) of Definition 18. Occupation is not impossible, but either part of the definitional requirements is lacking, or the position persists only in combination with other positions, or the instances are singular or intermittent. (C) Positions outside the feasible region: positions falling entirely under one of (i) to (iii) of Definition 18, for which stable occupation is not established. The three classes are a cutting of a continuous quantity, and their boundaries are not precise. The assignments below are derived from the results of the analysis of Sections 7 to 9 and are not claims made independently by this subsection. Row C1. M3×C1 is (A) — as Section 7.4 shows, the friction of participation is minimal and substantially every state carries some weight there. M2×C1 is (B). On the analysis of Section 7.3, thin wrappers lacking complementary assets die out, and the transformation that survives is limited to that equipped with one of the four indicators of Proposition 4; but in that case the transformation has in effect moved to a position protected by integration cost — that is, to a structure of the same form as M2 in row C2. It is therefore more accurate to read this cell not as an independent stable point but as a band lying on the way to transition to the cells above and below. M1×C1 is (B). It lacks the exclusive value-capture part of the definitional requirements (Proposition 29(i)), and instances exist; but as Sec‐ 148 tion 7.2 makes explicit, this cell alone does not complete a national value model, and it converts into national value only where the circuit for recovering the spillover gains lies in other cells. Row C2. M2×C2 is (A). As Section 10 analyses on its own, its establishment requires four conditions, but where the conditions are met stable occupation is established and several instances are observed. M3×C2 is also (A) — the vulnerability described in Section 8.4 is not instability of occupation but the three risks of changed terms, price and data reflux borne once the position is occupied; the position itself is established. M1×C2 is (A), but its density is the lowest. The three required levels of capital, electric power and people shown in Section 8.2 do not prevent the position from being established; they narrow the number of actors able to reach it. It falls under neither (i) nor (ii) of Definition 18, nor under (iii) — instances are few but exist. Low density and lying outside the feasible region are different things. This distinction is the substance of Proposition 29's setting "the density of instances" alongside "stability": the former reflects the height of the cost of reaching the position, the latter the possibility of the position being established. Row C3. The three cells of this row all fall entirely under (iii) of Definition 18 — C3 is at the time of writing an unrealized anticipatory category (Definition 2), and instances are by definition zero. It is therefore not possible at present to assign the classes (A), (B) and (C) to the cells of row C3 empirically. What this paper can do is confined to a conditional judgement premised on the arrival of C3. Under that condition, the analysis of Section 9.9 suggests the following. M1×C3 and M2×C3 are subject to the constraint of permission that accompanies the rise in the class of externality (Definition 18(ii)), but that constraint appears not as the non-establishment of the position but as an added weight of institutional requirements — acceptance of verification, cooperation in the measurement of supply chains, and transparency about latent capability. M3×C3, by contrast, is the very position that Proposition 29(ii) names, and as pure utilization it approaches (C). A position that seeks to concentrate on utilization is pushed out, by the requirement of being a party to control, into a mixed position of utilization and control. That Section 9.10.3 discusses a "capability umbrella" in correspondence with the nuclear umbrella and describes constraints on autonomy as its price is nothing other than a description of this pushing out. The provisional character of these assignments should be stated. The judgement of the three classes depends on how instances are counted — what is to count as "stable occupation," and above what level a weight is to count as an instance of the cell in question — and this paper does not give an operational definition of that counting. It would be possible to apply to the measurement of density the assignment of cells by observable quantities on the supply side and the dependence side, excluding institutional variables, that the falsification condition of Proposition 3 adopts, but carrying that out exceeds the scope of this paper. The list of instances given by the transition matrix of Appendix E serves as a provisional basis for the time being. The judgement of density is the part of this paper's claims most liable to be updated, and indeed if the boundaries of the rows move through Frontier Descent, the distribution of density moves as well. 149 Figure 12. The feasible region (Definition 18) and the density of the nine cells — the feasible region, which changes by tier, is superimposed as shading on the 3×3 lattice. The classes are stably occupied positions (A), positions on the boundary (B), and positions outside the feasible region (C). At the lower tier the M1 side thins through non-exclusivity, and at the higher tier the side of pure M3 thins through the class of externality (Proposition 29). All judgements for row C3 are conditional on "if C3 arrives," and instances are by definition zero. The figure is a schematic of the structure, and the shaded areas are not measured values. Finally, the relation between Proposition 29 and Proposition 3 should be set out. The two resemble one another in that both are claims about the non-uniformity of the nine cells, but they are different claims, and neither follows from the other. What Proposition 3 states is that institutions and outcomes differ across cells — that the institutions, investment and composition of people each cell requires, the mode of value expected, and its specific modes of failure are mutually non-equivalent, and that a policy optimal in one cell is inferior or harmful in another. This claim presupposes that the cell is occupied and states a difference in the content of occupation. What Proposition 29 states, by contrast, is that occupiability differs across cells — which cells one can stand in at all changes with the tier. The former concerns the content of occupation, the latter whether occupation is possible. The logical independence of the two is confirmed by the fact that all four combinations can be conceived without contradiction. (a) Both true: the cells one can stand in change Definition 18, Proposition 29 National Value Model (M) AI Capability Tiers (C) M1 Resource-Producing M2 Transformation M3 Utilization C3 Critical Tier C2 Frontier Tier C1 Commodity Tier M1×C3 (B) On the boundary Constrained by permission, which appears as added institutional requirements M2×C3 (B) On the boundary Acceptance of verification and transparency about latent capability M3×C3 (C) Nearly outside Required to be a party to control (pure utilization) (unrealized anticipatory category, Definition 2) — all three classes are conditional M1×C2 (A) Stable — least dense Capital, power and people requirements narrow actors M2×C2 (A) Stable Holds where the four conditions are met; several instances M3×C2 (A) Stable The position holds; what is borne is three risks after occupation M1×C1 (B) On the boundary No exclusive capture of value; incomplete on its own M2×C1 (B) On the boundary Thin transformation dies out; a band on the way to the cells above, below M3×C1 (A) Stable Friction of participation is minimal; substantially every state occupies it (A) Stably occupied positions — requirements met in full; instances persistently observed. (B) Positions on the boundary — partly under Definition 18(i)–(iii); requirements partly lacking. (C) Positions outside the feasible region — fully under Definition 18; no stable occupation. Outline of the feasible region (Definition 18) — narrows as the tier rises (Proposition 29). The nine cells are retained as a coordinate system, but it is not asserted that all cells are equally occupiable (Proposition 29). The figure is a schematic of the structure; the shaded areas and the widths of the outlines are not measured values. 150

with the tier, and the institutions required differ by the cell stood in — this is the claim of this paper. (b) Only Proposition 3 true: all cells are equally occupiable, but institutional requirements differ by cell — this corresponds to the understanding obtained by reading the nine cells as a uniform grid. (c) Only Proposition 29 true: occupiability changes with the tier, but the institutional requirements of the cells that can be occupied are common — in this case the nine cells are a device of selection but not a device of policy design. (d) Both false: the nine cells do not function as a classification. The falsification conditions differ as well — Proposition 3 is rejected by the relation between institutional and outcome variables not differing across cells, and Proposition 29 by no systematic difference being observed in the density of instances; the two are rejected independently. Nor do the observable quantities required overlap. This is the reason for setting the two propositions apart. The upshot of this subsection gives one instruction for reading Sections 7 to 9. Those three sections scan the nine cells row by row and describe for each cell the defining features, institutional requirements, mode of value, modes of failure and applicable state examples; but the thickness of that description is not uniform across cells. The difference in thickness is not a shortcut in the analysis but a reflection of the non-uniformity of the feasible region. A cell written thinly is a cell about which there is little to write, and that there is little to write is itself an indication of the structural properties of that position. The reader may read the volume of description of each cell as a rough indicator of that cell's density. 6.11 The Oil Market in 2026 — A Contemporaneous Observation Up to this point this section has extracted the three types of the oil era from a half-century series beginning in 1973, and has sorted the conditions of their establishment into parts mappable to AI and parts not. This subsection observes the same oil, not in the past but at the present time. Its methodological standing was given in Section 3.9 — a comparison of two resources at the same point in time (contemporaneous comparison) removes the era effect from the difference as a common term, and bases the judgement of transfer on observation in progress rather than on a counterfactual. What this subsection presents is observation; the detailed discussion on the AI side is deferred to the respective sections. The discipline is confirmed before the observation. The oil market of 2026 stands under a large-scale supply disruption event that arose from February onward. What this paper describes about this event is confined to the facts of the market: volumes of supply, volumes of transport, prices, inventories, and periods of recovery. It does not enter into causes, background, parties or sequence of events, and makes no reference to the policies or conduct of any particular state and no inference of intent (the editorial policy of Section 1). All figures below are based on published materials of public bodies or firms, with the name of the body and the point in time given. The outline of the market is placed first. World oil supply in 2026 is projected at 102 million barrels per day, down 4.3 million barrels per day year on year, and world oil demand 151 down 1.6 million barrels per day year on year (IEA, Oil Market Report, August 2026 issue, 12 August 2026). World observable inventories were drawn down by a cumulative 410 million barrels between February and July from 8,210 million barrels in January 2026 — the highest level since February 2021 — to just under 7.9 billion barrels at the end of July (ibid.). The price (North Sea Dated) reached a high for the year of 144 dollars per barrel in mid-April, fell to approximately 68 dollars at the beginning of July (down 22 dollars month on month), and recovered to 96.80 dollars at the end of July (IEA OMR, May, July and August 2026 issues). Brent on 21 August 2026 was 94.39 dollars per barrel (Trading Economics, n.d.-a; spot quotation). The range within the year, so far as can be confirmed, is at least 68 to 144 dollars, the high being approximately 2.1 times the low. The range within the single month of July alone spanned approximately 40 dollars per barrel (IEA OMR, August 2026 issue). 6.11.1 The Point Reached by Downstream Integration — Advanced in Capability, Skewed Upstream in Capital Allocation Of the observations in this subsection, this is the most important for this paper. How far producers (national oil companies) transform their own crude themselves is the oil-side counterpart of "internalization of the downstream by producers," which Proposition 4 (Section 7) asserts for AI. On the side of capability, integration has in fact advanced substantially. Saudi Aramco's net refining capacity rose from 4.1 million barrels per day in 2024 to 4.2 million barrels per day in 2025, and its net chemicals production capacity reached 59.3 million tonnes per year (Aramco, "Results and performance 2025"). XRG, the international investment arm of ADNOC, and OMV completed on 31 March 2026 the establishment of Borouge International, held 50% by each. Combined production capacity is 13.6 million tonnes per year, with an additional Borouge 4 project of 1.4 million tonnes; identified EBITDA synergies are put at more than 500 million dollars a year, and the transaction includes the acquisition of NOVA Chemicals of North America (Borealis and OMV, 31 March 2026). On the demand side too the economic rationale for integration has risen. The IEA's Oil 2025 holds that from 2026 onward petrochemical feedstock will be the largest source of growth in world oil demand, and projects demand for petrochemical feedstock in 2030 at 18.4 million barrels per day — more than one barrel in six. The destination of producers' integration corresponds exactly to the area in which growth remains. The ratio of capital allocation, on the other hand, has not moved. Aramco's capital expenditure in the first half of 2026 was 20.2 billion dollars upstream against 4.5 billion dollars downstream, a ratio of approximately 4.5 to 1 (total capital expenditure 25.3 billion dollars; Aramco H1 2026 interim report, published 4 August 2026). Its downstream utilization rate for its own crude production was 52% for the year to date in 2026 (ibid.). That is, the largest producer still entrusts approximately half of the crude it lifts to the transformation of others. After decades in which the call for integration has continued, roughly 80% of the capital being committed remains on the drilling side. 152 Constraints appear in the mode of integration as well. Borouge International is not held solely by the producer but is an equal-equity venture with an existing firm on the transformation side (OMV of Austria), and NOVA Chemicals is an acquisition. The mode observed is that downstream capability can be bought but has not been made endogenous. Moreover, by the time producers entered in earnest, the transformation sector itself was in a phase of contraction. The pace of increase in world refining capacity has slowed from approximately 1 million barrels per day a year in 2022–2024 to 620 thousand barrels per day a year in 2025–2027 (Industrial Info Resources, aggregation as of 17 December 2025). World refinery throughput was 80.9 million barrels per day in July 2026, approximately 5 million barrels per day lower than in the same month of the previous year (IEA OMR, August 2026 issue). In summary, downstream integration by producers in oil has advanced substantially as capability and remains unattained in capital allocation and in the attribution of profit. This fact functions as a contrast to the structure that Proposition 4 asserts for AI — that producers can internalize the general-purpose-functionality portion through the path, at nearly zero marginal cost, of standard inclusion in the next generation of the model. That in oil integration has required decades and is still incomplete is, in the light of the discipline of Proposition 1 (Section 3), evidence that the property "producers cannot easily internalize the downstream" is specific to oil and does not transfer to AI. And the failure to transfer cannot be attributed to an era effect — the oil of 2026 and the AI of 2026 stand under the same capital market and the same level of technology. The detailed argument is deferred to Section 10. What is fixed here is a practice of measurement: what must be asked is not whether integration has been declared but whether the ratio of capital allocation has moved. 6.11.2 The Attribution of the Transformer's Share — Who Captured the Excess Profit In 2026 the share of the transformation sector reached a record level. The United States 3-2-1 crack spread stood at a record high as of 23 July 2026, and the price change for the year to date at that point was +98% for gasoline and +44% for WTI crude. The average retail price of gasoline across the United States was 4.06 dollars per gallon (all from Forbes, 23 July 2026). The IEA's Oil Market Report for July 2026 likewise records that product cracks and margins surged at the beginning of July to their highest level in four years. The question is who captured this excess profit. Those whose share prices approximately doubled in the year to date in 2026 were the United States independent refiners — Marathon Petroleum, Valero and Phillips 66 (+66%) — and an exchange-traded fund investing in refining rose 21% in the single month of July (Forbes, 23 July 2026). On the producer side, Aramco's downstream segment adjusted EBIT was 11.7 billion dollars in the first half of 2026, and the company's adjusted net income was 67.2 billion dollars in the first half and 33.4 billion dollars in the second quarter (up 33% year on year; Arab News, 4 August 2026). The two cannot be compared directly because the definitions of the indicators dif‐ 153 fer, and this paper does not compute a ratio. But the fact remains that, under record transformation margins, it was independent transformers whose enterprise value doubled. That is, the principal recipient of the excess profit of transformation was, in 2026 as before, not the producer. Producers have acquired the capability of transformation but have not brought the attribution of the profit of transformation to themselves. Section 6.3.3 stated that downstream integration by producers is "not an exception but a tendency" and at the same time that "integration met a wall." The observation of 2026 shows that this wall still stands. The question this observation puts to AI is one: who is actually capturing the excess profit of transformation? Not declarations, not capability — the attribution of profit is what should be measured. This question is treated in Section 10. 6.11.3 Independent Movement of the Production Price and the Transformer's Share — Ex Post Confirmation of Definition 5 The observation of the preceding subsection can be extracted in a sharper form. In July 2026 the crude price fell to approximately 68 dollars, down 22 dollars month on month (IEA OMR, July 2026 issue). In the same period, product cracks and margins surged to their highest level in four years (ibid.). The IEA attributes this to the fact that, while crude prices fell as crude supply recovered, tightness in product markets continued. For the year to date as well, products (gasoline) rose 98% against crude's 44%, a rate of increase more than twice as high. The significance of this observation for this paper is particular. In Definition 5 (transformation value, Section 7) this paper defines transformation value as "an accounting quantity that varies independently of the producer's share (the procurement price)." That definition is placed a priori, and the definition itself contains no empirical claim — Definition 5 states explicitly that the determinants of attribution are an empirical question and not part of the content of the definition. The observation of 2026 is an ex post empirical confirmation of this definition. In a phase in which the price of production fell by more than 20%, the share of transformation rose to a four-year high. The two moved neither in the same direction nor by the same magnitude. Section 6.3.1 stated that the crack spread varies separately from the crude price as a general property of the oil era; the observation of 2026 shows that this property still holds — and holds even under the extreme condition of a physical shortfall of supply. The accounting distinction that Definition 5 establishes for AI is a distinction actually measured in another resource of the same period. This order — the definition placed first, the observation supporting it afterwards — constitutes one response to the charge that the definition is arbitrary. 6.11.4 The Response of Price and Production — Observing the Time Constant The most counter-intuitive fact displayed by the oil market of 2026 is that production did not increase even as prices rose. 154 United States crude production averaged 13.6 million barrels per day in 2025, a record high (EIA, 9 July 2026). The EIA Short-Term Energy Outlook (August 2026 issue) projects 14.8 million barrels per day for 2026 and 14.2 for 2027. That is, under a price environment in which gasoline was up 98% and crude up 44% for the year to date, the projected increase in output for 2026 is only 0.2 million barrels per day. On the corporate side, in the first half of 2026 Chevron and ConocoPhillips cut spending by 10% year on year, and Occidental cut Permian spending by up to one fifth. The increase in the drilling rig count as of mid-August 2026 was 43 rigs year on year (all from OilPrice.com, August 2026). The same structure can be confirmed from the side of investment. The IEA's World Energy Investment 2026 (published 28 May 2026) projects total energy investment in 2026 at 3.4 trillion dollars (of which clean energy 2.2 trillion dollars, fossil fuels 1.2 trillion dollars, and upstream oil and gas 546 billion dollars), and states explicitly that approximately three quarters of the investment of 2026 had already been committed before the supply disruption event occurred. Short-term reallocation of investment was limited. The scale of the published adjustments to production shows the same inelasticity from another angle. The unwinding of voluntary adjustments announced in 2026 is on a scale of 188 thousand barrels per day per month (decision of 3 May 2026, applied in June; decision of 2 August 2026, applied in September; both published by OPEC. A resumption of unwinding was also decided on 1 March 2026). Against this, the volume of supply that actually moved in the same year was, on IEA measurement, a fall in world supply of 9.4 million barrels per day relative to the level before the event (as of July 2026, OMR July 2026 issue). The scale of the agreed quantitative adjustments is only approximately 2% of the volume of supply that actually moved. What determined the level of output in 2026 was not agreed quotas but physical operability. All of these are observations of the time constant. Adding productive capacity requires a long-term commitment of capital and does not move with a temporary spike in price. In the terms of this paper, ascent requires accumulation, and the time constant of accumulation is longer than the time constant of decision — which is of the same form as the structure that Proposition 15 (the asymmetry of cell transition, Section 15) asserts for AI. The same problem of time appears on the side of the guarantee level as well. Proposition 8 (the asymmetry of stockpiling, Section 13) states that the guarantee level for AI is established only as continuous construction, and that construction too is a commitment of capital measured in years. The contemporaneous observation of oil shows, with the era effect controlled, the structure by which in a capital-intensive producing sector the volume of supply in the current year is determined not by price but by decisions taken several years earlier. It is used in Section 13 and Section 16. 6.11.5 The Record of Stockpiles and Coordinated Release — A Triple Buffer The year 2026 is the year in which the emergency stockpiling institutions actually operated on the largest scale since their establishment. 155 The level of inventories. World observable inventories stood in January 2026 at 8,210 million barrels, the highest level since February 2021 (composed of 50% OECD, 15% Chinese crude, and 25% floating storage). These were drawn down by a cumulative 410 million barrels between February and July, reaching just under 7.9 billion barrels at the end of July (IEA OMR, August 2026 issue). OECD commercial oil inventories stood at 2,729 million barrels as of June 2026, 58.7 days of forward cover, 66.5 million barrels below the average of the preceding five years (OPEC MOMR, August 2026 issue). In half a year the position reversed from "the most abundant in a decade" to "below the five-year average." Coordinated release. The IEA has taken collective action six times since its establishment in 1974 (1991, 2005, 2011, twice in 2022, and 2026); the sixth was decided on 11 March 2026, and member country contributions were confirmed on 19 March. Against the total of 400 million barrels announced at the time of the decision, member country contributions totalled 426 million barrels. The composition was 271.7 million barrels of government stocks, 116.6 million barrels of mandated industry stocks and 23.6 million barrels of other stocks, 72% crude and 28% petroleum products. By region, the Americas contributed 195.8, Asia and Oceania 108.6, and Europe 107.5 million barrels (IEA, March 2026). The volume actually released to the market was 290 million barrels by 22 July 2026 (approximately 68% of the contributions pledged), and member countries' remaining emergency stocks were 1 billion barrels (IEA announcement; Energy Connects, 22 July 2026). Japan's share. Japan's contribution was 79.8 million barrels, second in the world after the United States' 172.2 million barrels and 18.7% of the total (IEA). This is equivalent to approximately 43% of Japan's total strategic stocks of 187 million barrels (second quarter of 2026, EIA Short-Term Energy Outlook, August 2026 issue). Japan's days of stockpile were, as of the end of January 2026, 146 days national, 96 days private and 6 days jointly held with producing countries, totalling 248 days (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026b), and 241 days in total on the estimate of 20 March 2026 (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2026a) — approximately 2.7 times the IEA member obligation of 90 days of net imports. Domestically, 15 days of private stocks were released from 16 March 2026, the first tranche of national crude stocks from 26 March, and approximately 6 days of crude jointly held with producing countries likewise from 26 March; the second tranche of national stocks, approximately 20 days of domestic consumption, was released from 1–2 May (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2026b; Japan Oil, Gas and Metals National Corporation, 2026). For reference, the Strategic Petroleum Reserve of the United States stood at 293.43 million barrels as of 14 August 2026, approximately 40% of its alltime high of 726.62 million barrels in January 2010 (EIA weekly data). Outside the institution, China's strategic stocks are put at 1,492 million barrels on EIA estimates (EIA Short- Term Energy Outlook, August 2026 issue, second quarter of 2026). A triple buffer. What absorbed the physical shortfall of supply was not inventories alone. First inventories (8,210 million barrels as of January 2026), second alternative routes, and third coordinated release. As to rerouting, transit through the Strait of Hormuz fell 67%, 156 from 14.9 million barrels per day in the first quarter of 2026 to 4.9 million barrels per day in the second, while the Bab el-Mandeb Strait rose 45%, from 5.6 to 8.1 million barrels per day, and the Strait of Malacca fell from 21.3 to 16.6 million barrels per day (EIA Short- Term Energy Outlook, August 2026 issue). In pipelines, the East–West pipeline (nominal capacity 7 million barrels per day) has spare capacity of 3 to 5 million barrels per day, and ADCOP a capacity of up to 700 thousand barrels per day (IEA, February 2026). Rerouting capacity does not, however, substitute for the whole of the shortfall — in this respect the situation differs from the case of the Bab el-Mandeb Strait in late 2023 and 2024, which was absorbed by rerouting alone (that strait 8.7 → 4.0 million barrels per day, the Cape of Good Hope route 6.0 → 9.2 million barrels per day; EIA, 11 October 2024). A disruption of transport and a disruption of supply are events of different kinds. The result. Even with approximately one tenth of world supply absent for half a year, the market maintained its functioning. The price returned from the high for the year of 144 dollars to the 94-dollar range in late August, and 7.9 billion barrels of inventory remained. Within Japan, the price of gasoline fell from 190.8 yen per litre on 16 March 2026 to 170.2 yen per litre on 30 March, and naphtha procurement doubled from 450,000 kilolitres a month in normal times to 900,000 kilolitres a month as of 30 March (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2026b). The thickness of the buffers institutionalized over half a century separated the physical scale of the event from its impact on the market. The details are deferred to Section 13, but one contrast should be recorded here: no device corresponding to this triple buffer exists at present for AI. There is no store corresponding to inventories, alternative routes are thin, and there is no institution corresponding to coordinated release. 6.11.6 Changes in the Structure of Demand — The Scale of Substitution and Disagreement Among Outlooks Contemporaneous observation includes not only events on the supply side but structural change on the demand side. Electric vehicles. According to the IEA's Global EV Outlook 2026, world sales of electric vehicles exceeded 20 million units in 2025, reaching approximately 25% of new vehicle sales (one in four). By region the shares are approximately 55% in China, 28% in Europe (sales up more than 30% year on year) and just under 10% in the United States. For 2026, 23 million units and a share of 28% are projected. Substitution of oil demand by electric vehicles was approximately 1.7 million barrels per day on 2025 results, and is projected to rise to approximately 5 million barrels per day by 2030. The contrast of scale matters. 1.7 million barrels per day is approximately 1.6% of world oil consumption of 103 million barrels per day in 2025. In the same year, the supply that the supply disruption event temporarily removed was, in the Gulf producing states, 14.4 million barrels per day relative to the level before the event (April–May 2026, IEA OMR, May 2026 issue). Structural change takes effect at annual rates, and a shortfall of supply takes effect within weeks. This difference of time scales shows that an argument 157 dispensing with the discussion of dependence structures on the ground of progress in substitute technologies does not hold. The argument over peak demand. The outlooks of public bodies do not agree on when oil demand will level off. The IEA's Oil 2025 projects that world oil demand will reach a plateau at approximately 105.5 million barrels per day by the end of 2030, an increase of 2.5 million barrels per day from 2024 to 2030 (emerging economies +4.2, OECD −1.7, India alone +1.0), turning to a slight decline in 2030. OPEC, by contrast, projects +0.6 million barrels per day for 2026 and +2.2 for 2027, and maintains the position that no peak is expected in the near future (MOMR, August 2026 issue). This paper adopts neither outlook and records both. The disagreement is not confined to future outlooks. On the same day, 12 August 2026, the IEA reported world oil demand in 2026 as down 1.6 million barrels per day year on year (a decline) and OPEC as up 0.6 million barrels per day (an increase). The directions are opposite and the divergence is 2.2 million barrels per day — approximately 2% of world demand. A structure of the same kind appears in prior forecasts as well: the EIA Short-Term Energy Outlook of July 2025 forecast an annual average WTI price of 54.82 dollars per barrel for 2026 and expected OECD commercial inventories to build to 66 days by the end of 2026 (as summarized by Aegis Hedging, 9 July 2025). The outturn was a realized crude price of 90.1 dollars per barrel in the first half (Aramco) and OECD commercial inventories of 58.7 days, below the five-year average. Not only the level was in error; the direction of inventories was opposite. This disagreement is not a negative datum for this paper but an observational one. Even in a market with a century of accumulated statistics and primary data, two institutions do not agree on the sign of demand in the current year, and a price outlook one year ahead diverges widely from the outturn. It is used in Section 16 (the design of leading indicators) and Section 20 (the acknowledgement of limits). 6.11.7 A Contrast with 1973 — What Changed and What Did Not Contemporaneous comparison and diachronic comparison join here. Placing the observations around 1973 and those of 2026 in the same table separates the items that changed over half a century from those that did not. Items that changed are candidates for era effects, and items that did not change are candidates for properties specific to the resource and to industrial structure. This separation is not complete — the confounding of a single-year observation remains (Section 3.9.5) — but it gives information obtainable neither from diachronic comparison alone nor from contemporaneous comparison alone. Table 23. Observations around 1973 and observations in 2026 — items that changed and items that did not 158 Item observed Around 1973 2026 (or most recent) Judgement Oil in Japan's domestic supply of primary energy 75.5% (fiscal 1973) 34.8% (fiscal 2024) Changed (by a factor of approximately 2.2) Dependence of Japan's crude imports on the Middle East 77.5% (1973) 95.9% (fiscal 2024) / 95.1% (January 2026) Changed (risen, in the opposite direction) Japan's energy intensity 70 PJ per trillion yen of GDP (fiscal 1973) 35 PJ (fiscal 2021) Changed (halved) Institutions of emergency stockpiling Not in place (the IEA was established in 1974; Japan's national stockpiling began in 1978) Japan's total stocks 241 to 248 days. The IEA obligation is 90 days of net imports Changed (institutionalized from zero) Record of coordinated release No institution Six times since establishment. Contributions to the sixth (March 2026) totalled 426 million barrels Changed Japan's position in coordinated release No institution Contribution of 79.8 million barrels, second in the world after the United States (18.7% of the total) Changed (from beneficiary to contributor) Japan's crude processing capacity and number of refineries Expanding throughout the oil era (capacity peaked at 5.27 million barrels per day at the end of March 2001; the number of refineries peaked at 36 at the end of March 1995) 3.11 million barrels per day and 19 refineries (end of April 2026) Changed (down 41% from peak) Means of substitution on the demand side Energy conservation and fuel switching (the Energy Conservation Act of 1979, the Alternative Energy Act of 1980) Substitution by electric vehicles of approximately 1.7 million barrels per day (2025; approximately 1.6% of world consumption) Changed (the means have changed; the scale is still small) Market resilience to a physical shortfall of supply Buffering devices not in place Even with approximately one tenth of world supply absent, 7.9 billion barrels of inventory remained and the price ceiling was 144 dollars Changed Downstream integration by producers Attempts repeated throughout the oil era (the representative case being the full subsidiarization of the Port Arthur refinery in 2017) Downstream utilization rate for own crude 52%; ratio of upstream to downstream capital expenditure approximately 4.5 to 1 (first half of 2026) Did not change (capability advanced, capital allocation unattained) Did not change 159 Item observed Around 1973 2026 (or most recent) Judgement Attribution of the excess profit of transformation Independent refiners and transforming states Under record crack spreads, those whose enterprise value roughly doubled were three United States independents Relation between the production price and the transformer's share The crack spread varies independently of the crude price In a phase in which crude fell 22 dollars month on month, product margins were at a four-year high Did not change How Table 23 is to be read may be indicated. The items that changed — the energy mix, energy intensity, the stockpiling institution, the contributors to coordinated release, the scale of transformation capacity — are all quantities that are objects of policy and investment. Half a century of response actually moved them. The items that did not change, by contrast — that downstream integration by producers remains unattained at the level of capital allocation, that the excess profit of transformation accrues to independent transformers, and that the transformer's share moves independently of the production price — are all quantities belonging to the structure of the industry. That they are still observed in the same form after half a century of change in policy and technology raises the possibility that they are not era effects but properties specific to the resource and to industrial structure. What demands the most attention is the rows in which the direction of change was opposite between items. Japan halved the share of oil in primary energy from 75.5% to 34.8%, but dependence on the Middle East within the oil that remained rose from 77.5% to 95.9%. The quantity of exposure fell and the concentration rose. The share of Japan's crude imports passing through the Strait of Hormuz was 93.0% in 2025 (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2026a). This is the oil-side instance of the structure formalized by Proposition 37 (the contraction of exposure and the concentration of dependence, Section 18). Reduction in total volume and reduction in concentration are separate policy objectives, and attaining the former alone is compatible with a worsening of the latter. 6.11.8 Summary — Where These Observations Are Used The observations of this subsection are used in the sections that follow as set out below. The point reached by downstream integration becomes the criterion of evaluation for Proposition 4 in Section 10 — what must be asked is not the declaration of integration but the ratio of capital allocation and the attribution of excess profit. The attribution of the transformer's share is used, likewise in Section 10, in judging the conditions for the establishment of the M2×C2 cell. The independent movement of the production price and the transformer's share is referred to in Section 7 and Section 10 as an ex post empirical confirmation of Definition 5 (Section 7). The time constant of the response of price and production

becomes a contrast object in Section 13 (the physical constraints of infrastructure) and Section 16 (the identification of scenarios) when the supply elasticity of compute, electric power and data centres is discussed. The record of stockpiles and coordinated release is used in the design of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6) in Section 13 and in the evaluation of Japan's position in Section 18. Changes in the structure of demand and the disagreement of outlooks among institutions connect to the design of leading indicators in Section 16 and the acknowledgement of limits in Section 20. Finally, there is one thing this subsection should state as settled. Contemporaneous comparison was not introduced in order to show that oil and AI are alike. Many of the observations here show, on the contrary and with the era effect controlled, that the two differ. That downstream integration by producers has required decades in oil and is still incomplete is not a ground for expecting the same slowness in AI but the reverse — under the same era and the same capital market, one has required decades and still places 80% of its capital upstream, while the other has the path, at nearly zero marginal cost, of standard inclusion in the next generation of the model. This difference cannot be a difference of era. The lesson of Section 6.8, that the value of an analogy lies in identifying dissimilarity rather than in pointing out similarity, operates most sharply in contemporaneous comparison. 161 7. The Nine-Cell Matrix I — Row C1 (Commodity Tier) 7.1 The Common Logic of Row C1 — A Floor That Keeps Expanding From this section through Section 9, the nine cells that are the product of the three types of national value model of Definition 3 (Section 6) (M1 the Resource-Producing Model, M2 the Transformation Model, M3 the Utilization Model) and the three AI capability tiers of Definition 2 (Section 5) (C1/C2/C3) are dissected row by row (that is, tier by tier). What this section treats is row C1 (the commodity tier): the three cells in the band of capability distance that Definition 2 stipulates as "a level of capability distant enough from the frontier that substitutes meeting the requirements of the use in question exist in multiple jurisdictions." Since Definition 2 includes neither market structure nor governance form, that "suppliers are many, price competition operates, and access restrictions do not function in practice" is not a definition but a dependent variable that Proposition 2 asserts for this band of capability distance. The state of the market observed in each cell in this section is therefore not a repetition of the definition but also an inspection of whether the prediction of Proposition 2 actually holds. As Proposition 3 (Section 6) asserted, the cells are nonequivalent in the institutions they require, in the mode of value expected, and in their specific modes of failure, and this non-equivalence appears clearly within row C1 as well. In referring to other rows in what follows, it should be reconfirmed in advance that C3 (the critical tier) is at the time of writing an unrealized anticipatory category, and that whether and when it arrives is an empirical question (Definition 2). The first common property of row C1 is the collapse of prices for capability already attained. According to Epoch AI's estimates, the lowest inference price for attaining a given level of performance has been falling at annual rates of between 9-fold and 900-fold depending on the task, the fall being steeper the higher the performance threshold (Epoch AI, 2025). On the Stanford AI Index's aggregation, the inference cost of the GPT-3.5 class (equivalent to 64.8% on MMLU) fell by a factor of more than 280 between November 2022 and October 2024 — from 20 dollars to 0.07 dollars per million tokens — while hardware costs fell by approximately 30% a year and energy efficiency improved by approximately 40% a year (Stanford HAI, 2025). This is not merely supportive evidence but a well-established trend on which several independent estimates agree. Set against the rise in the cost of building the frontier shown in Section 5 (growth of training costs at approximately 2.4- fold per year), the cost structure of AI displays a marked asymmetry: the cost of building the frontier surges while the cost of using capability already attained collapses. Row C1 is the latter side of this asymmetry, the domain created by the collapse of prices. The second common property is that row C1 is not a static division but a floor that keeps expanding. The frontier of open-weight models has, on Epoch AI's principal estimate for 2026, closed to within an average lag of approximately four months of the closed 162 frontier (8 points on the capability index ECI), with some series putting it at approximately three months. Since estimates for 2024–2025 put it at approximately one year, the lag width is on a narrowing tendency (Epoch AI, 2026). This narrowing of "the lag width of the capability gap," which Proposition 2 (Section 5) gave as an observational indicator, means that the speed of Frontier Descent — yesterday's C2 capability descending tomorrow into C1 — is if anything rising. The structures discussed in each cell of row C1 are therefore structures whose range of application widens with time. A substantial part of the work for which a state currently depends on C2 access will within a few years be procurable at C1. It is precisely this dynamic that makes it an error to treat row C1 as "the row of lesser importance." Put the other way, row C1 is also the future image of row C2. The decisions a state takes today about capability belonging to the C2 tier — how much to hold itself, from whom to procure, into which processes to embed it — determine the assets and liabilities that remain when that capability descends to C1 a few years later. Expenditure on C2 capability disappears, but the complementary assets and absorptive capacity formed by using that capability remain. This asymmetry suggests that investment in the C2 tier should be evaluated not by "the value of the period of holding the capability" but by "what was accumulated during the period of holding." The observation of the C1/C2 boundary is carried out with the capability distance of Definition 2 as the criterion, as the point of discontinuity in the three indicators whose covariation Proposition 2 (Section 5) asserts — supplier concentration, the lag width of the capability gap, and the effectiveness of control measures. When for a given level of capability the three conditions are met that (a) suppliers practically equivalent exist across multiple jurisdictions, (b) the lag from the frontier falls within the tolerance of the demand side (the range in which operational requirements do not demand the frontier), and (c) an access restriction, even if imposed, is nullified in practice by alternative procurement, that level of capability may be judged to have entered C1. What matters is that this judgement is use-dependent. At the same point in time, AI for routine document processing is already deep within C1, while AI for support of the most advanced research and development is still C2. A state's strategy for row C1 must be designed not for "AI in general" but on a view of which groups of uses, given its own industrial composition, become C1 and when. The third common property is the physical nature of the resource. As Proposition 1 (Section 3) established, the scarcity of AI is the scarcity not of a stock but of a flow (productive capacity), and the model itself is a non-rival good. As a well-established finding of the economics of data, a non-rival good can be used simultaneously by an unlimited number of actors on the same object, and enclosure may if anything produce under-use (Jones & Tonetti, 2020). In the C1 tier this non-rivalry operates in full, overlaid with price competition. In the analogy with oil, what row C1 corresponds to is not the oil market before the 1970s, dominated by long-term contracts and quotas, but the commodity market after its spot-market transformation, in which many sellers and buyers meet on price — except that whereas even the commodity market in oil presupposed the rivalry of a barrel, AI at C1 has no rivalry at all. This difference tells decisively at many points in this section. 163 The examination of each cell in this section proceeds along a common set of questions: (a) in what mode does value arise in that cell and to whom does it accrue; (b) what transfers and what does not from the corresponding cell of the oil era (Section 6) (the discipline of analogy of Proposition 1); (c) what institutional requirements are demanded for occupying the cell; (d) what are its specific modes of failure; and (e) which states and actors currently stand in that cell. This common set of questions is carried over into Section 8 (row C2) and Section 9 (row C3), making comparison across rows possible. Below, M1×C1 (Section 7.2), M2×C1 (Section 7.3) and M3×C1 (Section 7.4) are examined in turn, and Section 7.5 summarizes them in Table 4. 7.2 M1×C1 — The Commodity Supplier: One Can Produce but Cannot Command 7.2.1 Open-Weight Supply as a Mode of Production M1 (the Resource-Producing Model) of Definition 3 is "the type that produces the resource itself and obtains value from the fact of that production," and its path of realizing value depends on the tier. At levels of high strategic character it takes the exclusive paths of sale, the setting of terms of access and the assurance of supply; at levels of low strategic character it takes the non-exclusive paths of ecosystem externalities and standard formation rather than sales revenue. Open-weight supply, the principal mode of production in the C1 tier, publishes what is produced free of charge. This is not a paradox for the definition but is precisely the latter path that the definition specifies. The occupant of the M1×C1 cell is a producer that obtains value from the fact of production while placing its recovery not in sale but in a non-exclusive path. The analytical task of this cell is to identify by what mechanism this non-exclusive path returns value to the national economy, and what the unavailability of the exclusive path imposes on the institutional requirements and modes of failure of this cell. The facts are established first. DeepSeek-V3, released on 26 December 2024, reported in its technical report that its final training run used 2,048 H800 chips and 2.788 million GPUhours, at an equivalent cost of approximately 5.576 million dollars at cloud rental prices — a figure that, it must be noted, is a rental equivalent for the final run alone and does not include personnel costs, preceding experiments or hardware investment (the scale of investment in the development organization as a whole is estimated to be far larger). When the reasoning-specialized open-weight model DeepSeek-R1 was released on 20 January 2025, the disturbance caused by the demonstration that a Chinese firm under export controls could build a frontier-class model at low cost was followed on 27 January by a fall of approximately 17% in NVIDIA's share price in a single day, erasing approximately 589 billion dollars of market capitalization (the largest single-day loss of market capitalization in the history of the United States equity market). On 17 September 2025 the R1 paper became the first mainstream large language model to pass peer review as a cover article in Nature, disclosing that the additional training cost of the reinforcement-learn‐ 164 ing stage was 294,000 dollars (the base model cost being separate). The so-called DeepSeek shock may be read as an event in which the market re-evaluated the speed of expansion of row C1 — the speed at which frontier-class capability diffuses as open weights. The composition of suppliers has also turned. The leading positions at the open-weight frontier as of 2026 are held by Chinese developers — DeepSeek, Alibaba (Qwen), Moonshot AI (Kimi), Zhipu/Z.ai (GLM) — while Meta (the Llama family), which once led the open strategy, has fallen back substantially on the capability index. In Europe, Mistral AI (France) is nearly the only instance. As stated in Section 5, a double structure was established in 2025–2026 in which the "closed" frontier is almost exclusively in the United States and the "open-weight" frontier is led by Chinese developers (Epoch AI, 2026; Stanford HAI, 2026), and the state examples of the M1×C1 cell are in effect China (and in part France and the United States). What should be noted is that this composition is not fixed. Open-weight supply has a lower barrier to entry than building the frontier (the cost of reproducing methods already attained collapses — Section 7.1), and a change of supplier has already occurred once (from Meta to Chinese developers). Occupation of M1×C1 is not a fact of endowment like the possession of an oil field but the consequence of continuing investment and of a choice to publish, and in that sense it is an essentially contestable position. 7.2.2 The Economics of Production Without Charge Why does production that is not sold subsist? At the level of the firm, at least four paths of recovery can be identified. First, the commoditization of complements. If a model, as a complement, is made free, demand rises for the firm's other goods required to use it — computing infrastructure, cloud services, semiconductors, applied services. Second, the attraction of research personnel and the formation of an ecosystem. Open weights take in the improvements, derivations and verifications of developers worldwide free of charge, and the breadth of adoption itself creates a de facto standard position. Third, the formation of dependence. Application assets built on a set of weights have the lowest cost of migration to successor models of the same lineage, and publication lays a path to a future commercial version. Fourth, at the level of the state, as one part of the countervailing strategy of China organized in Section 5 — offsetting a disadvantage in single-chip performance by the four means of clustering, electric power, an open-weight strategy and import- side control — open-weight supply is a means of forming an "export sphere" that draws the world's developer ecosystem into a technological base of its own lineage. What should be noted is that none of these is recovery through the sale of the output but recovery around the output. As the economics of non-rival goods (Jones & Tonetti, 2020) shows, in a good whose cost of replication is nearly zero the sale price collapses towards marginal cost, so that direct revenue models thin structurally under price competition and only indirect models of recovery remain. 165 7.2.3 One Can Produce but Cannot Command — The Absence of an OPEC M1 in oil had a mode of command: influencing price through the adjustment of output. OPEC managed supply by allocating production quotas to its members, and as of 2022 OPEC accounted for approximately 38% of world crude production and OPEC+, with Russia and others added, for approximately 59% (EIA). That even this mode of command was internally unstable was seen in Section 6 — in 1985–86 Saudi Arabia abandoned the role of swing producer and the oil price collapsed, and in March 2020 the breakdown of coordination required resolution by the largest coordinated cut in history, approximately 9.7 million barrels per day. The absence of a legal means of enforcing compliance with quotas, and the long-run erosion by which raising the price too far induces substitute supply and energy saving, are the structural limits of a cartel. For AI in the C1 tier, even this unstable cartel cannot be defined. First, the concept of a production quota does not hold. Oil is a rival good, and a barrel can be burned only once, so that the allocation of output maps into price. The weights of a model are a non-rival good; once published, weights cannot be recovered, and the marginal cost of replication is nearly zero. Even if a producer halts supply today, it cannot stop the use of the already published stock replicated across the world. Second, the barrier to entry for suppliers continues to fall at the C1 level. With the collapse of prices and the publication of methods, the cost of reproducing a level already attained only declines, and any attempt to restrict supply is filled by the entry of third parties. Third, the effectiveness of access restriction — which Proposition 2 asserts breaks down in step-like fashion between C1 and C2 — does not operate at the C1 level. M1×C1 is thus the cell in which one can produce but cannot command. This consequence is exactly what the tier-dependence clause of M1 in Definition 3 specifies. The ground on which M1 obtains value lies in the fact of production, and its path of realization is a function of the level of strategic character; at a level such as C1, where all three properties of strategic character (Definition 1, (ii), (iii) and (iv)) are low, the exclusive paths — sale, the setting of terms of access, the assurance of supply — do not hold, and the non-exclusive paths, namely ecosystem externalities and standard formation, are taken. The inference that carries into this cell the exclusive paths that M1 in oil actually used therefore does not transfer, in the light of the discipline of analogy of Proposition 1. What does not transfer is not the type M1 itself but the path of realization that M1 of the oil era took under a particular level of strategic character. This distinction is not a verbal nicety. On the former reading, M1×C1 among the nine cells would be blank and the framework of this paper would not hold as a 3×3 product; on the latter, M1×C1 is a regular cell contained within the definition, and its content — by which path, under which institutional requirements, and exposed to which modes of failure value is realized — becomes an object of analysis. That this treatment succeeds and that M1×C1 is of equal standing with the other M1 cells are, however, different matters. The very fact that it is recovered within the definition by the tier-dependence clause of Definition 3 indicates the singularity of this cell's position. Section 6.10 formalized this singularity at the level of the framework — the M axis and the 166 C axis are not orthogonal, and the set of positions that can be occupied (the feasible region, Definition 18) changes by capability tier. Proposition 29(i) states that at the tier of lowest strategic character, because the position of production does not carry exclusive capture of value, the Resource-Producing Model satisfies the requirements of the definition only in part. The consequence confirmed above, that one can produce but cannot command, is precisely the content of that claim. This paper therefore retains M1×C1 as a regular member of the nine cells while grading its position explicitly as a position on the boundary of the feasible region — a position falling in part under (i) of Definition 18. Occupation is actually possible and instances exist, but it is a position lacking part of the requirements of the definition: this is the standing of this cell in this paper. This grading is not a demotion of the description but the grounding of the observations that follow. The two facts stated below in this subsection — that spillover gains convert into national value only indirectly, through connection to transformation and utilization, so that M1×C1 alone does not complete a national value model; and that this position is a flow rather than a holding, and begins to be lost from the moment investment stops — are both properties specific to a position on the boundary. A stably occupied position would be complete on its own, and the state of occupation would persist. That M1×C1 satisfies neither is not a contingent conclusion of the analysis in this subsection but what Proposition 29 structurally predicts. Conversely, if a case were observed in which a state stood in this cell alone and realized national value persistently without connection to other cells, that would be a candidate falsification of Proposition 29(i) (Section 6.10). As a consequence, the mode of value of M1×C1 is placed not in direct revenue but in spillover gains — the standard position, the centre of gravity of an ecosystem, the agglomeration of talent, and the formation of other countries' dependence on a technological base of one's own lineage. The seat of "a producing country that commands the price" does not exist in row C1; what exists is the seat of "the designer of diffusion." The value of this seat is difficult to measure and converts into national value only indirectly, through spillover into transformation and utilization, so that M1×C1 alone does not complete a national value model. This is the first instance of the fact that the nine cells have meaning only as a portfolio (Definition 3). One further point should be established: the governance implications of the irreversibility of publication. An oil embargo had meaning as a measure halting a future flow, but an ex post measure halting supply has no effect on an already diffused stock of open weights. This asymmetry has become the focus of policy debate over the instruments of governance on the supply side (prior review of publication, extension of export controls to model weights), and indeed the United States "AI diffusion rule" of January 2025, discussed below, sought for the first time to include the transfer of the weights of advanced models within a comprehensive licensing regime (set out in detail in Section 8). But for weights at the C1 level — many suppliers, small capability gap — the effectiveness of control does not hold by definition, and in this lies the governance significance of the C1/C2 boundary. A state that chooses M1 in row C1 is a state that has accepted, as a premise of 167 strategy, the irreversibility of not being able to take back what it has published. At the same time this irreversibility is insurance for the receiving side. Already published weights cannot be recovered by a supplier's commercial judgement or by a geopolitical measure, and they may function, as a component of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6, Section 13), to fix domestically a lower bound of capability against changes in external conditions. The existence of open weights operates as an attenuator, common to the whole world, against the risk of access cut-off at the C2 tier (Section 8). The difficulty of measuring spillover gains should also be stated frankly. The value of M1×C1 — the standard position, the centre of gravity of an ecosystem, the formation of dependence — appears directly neither in GDP nor in trade statistics. Use of open weights is free of charge and therefore generates no export value, and the value of applications built on them in other countries is recorded in those countries' GDP. Conceivable observable proxies include the share of one's own lineage in the family tree of derivative and finetuned models, the number of adoptions in major development frameworks and weightdistribution platforms, and the degree to which weights of one's own lineage are built into the composition of other states' sovereign minimum guarantee levels (Definition 6); but for none of these does a standardized statistic exist at the time of writing. The point of Proposition 14 (Section 17), that the national accounts of Layer Zero require measurement beyond GDP, takes its earliest practical form in this cell. An oil-producing country could measure its own resource power by output and price; an open-weight-producing country does not yet have statistics that measure the spread of the web of dependence it has distributed. Institutional requirements, modes of failure, state examples. The institutional requirements of M1×C1 are (i) a depth of research personnel and (public and private) access to compute sufficient to make publication possible, (ii) a regulatory environment that does not impede publication (if publication of weights is itself made subject to licensing, the position of supplier moves to another country), and (iii) circuits connecting spillover gains to domestic transformation and utilization (support for implementing published models in domestic industry). The modes of failure are (a) "production that is ignored" — publication without the formation of an ecosystem; (b) "production without revenue" — continuing to commit compute and people while lacking a circuit for recovering spillover gains; and (c) attrition, where investment fails to keep pace with the speed at which published capability is rendered obsolete by Frontier Descent. State examples include the Chinese developers occupying the open-weight frontier (DeepSeek, Qwen, Kimi, GLM), France (Mistral) as the only instance in Europe, and the United States (Meta), which is shifting its strategy. That the publication of the Chinese developers operates consistently with a national export-sphere strategy while the publication strategy of a single firm is subject to the constraint of commercial sustainability — a difference among actors standing in the same cell — shows that institutional context divides outcomes within a cell as well. Finally, the third mode of failure of M1×C1 — defeat by the speed of obsolescence — may be expanded. Open-weight supply is not a business that ends once publication has oc‐ 168 curred but a continuing business requiring renewal each time the frontier of capability advances. As seen in Section 7.1, the lag width between the open-weight and closed frontiers has narrowed to approximately four months, but this is an observation about suppliers that continue to follow; the published weights of a supplier that stops following rapidly lose relative value. Indeed, the fact that the lineage of Meta, which once led the open strategy, has fallen back substantially on the capability index shows the speed of this attrition. An oil field does not lose its reserves if left alone, but the published weights of a model, while replicable, depreciate rapidly — as a form of holding they resemble inventory more than a stockpile. This structure of depreciation is also the expression, from the supplier's side, of "the asymmetry of stockpiling" that Proposition 8 (Section 13) states about the sovereign minimum guarantee level — that the holding of AI capability depreciates in proportion to the speed of advance of the frontier and is established only as continuous construction. The position of M1×C1 is a flow, not a holding, and begins to be lost from the moment investment stops. 7.3 M2×C1 — Commodity Transformation: The Death of Thin Wrappers and the Transformation That Survives 7.3.1 Why the Refining Margin Was Protected, and Why It Is Not in AI The economic core of M2 in the oil era was the refining margin. The margin of the refining business is approximated by the crack spread — the difference between the price of crude and the prices of petroleum products, representatively the 3-2-1 spread assuming that three barrels of crude yield two barrels of gasoline and one barrel of distillate — and this is an economic variable that varies separately from the crude price itself (EIA). In oil, that is, the producer's share and the transformer's share were separated both institutionally and in the market. Three structures supported this separation. First, the asymmetry of transport costs: crude is cheap to transport in bulk over long distances, whereas products are of many kinds in small lots with quality specifications differing by market, so that location at the point of consumption is efficient, and post-war refining capacity moved substantially from the source to the point of consumption. Second, asset specificity: a refinery is an enormous installed capital fitted to the product specifications of the demand region, and because the nature of the asset differs from the oil fields of a producing country, ownership and location separate readily. Third, locational rent: as Singapore, holding no crude whatever, became one of the world's leading refining hubs with refining capacity of more than 1.5 million barrels per day (Section 6), a node of maritime shipping and a regulatory environment constituted an independent locational logic for transformation. Producing countries continued to attempt downstream integration — Saudi Aramco's full subsidiarization of the Motiva Port Arthur refinery (among the largest in the United States) in 2017 is the contemporary case — but because of the walls of conformity to specifications, market access and location, it was not easy for a producing country to displace a transforming country as such. 169 In the C1 tier of AI, all three of these defences fall. First, because the supply of a model reaches the whole world simultaneously through an API at nearly zero marginal cost, there is no asymmetry of transport costs. Second, the principal capital of applications in the C1 tier is software, the specificity of installed capital is thin, and the barrier to a producer building applications of the same kind itself is low. Third, because no physical node exists, no locational rent arises. Producers can therefore internalize, as regards the portion of the value added of the application layer that is reducible to general-purpose functionality, through the path of standard inclusion in the next generation of the model at nearly zero marginal cost. If a foundation-model provider includes a general- purpose application function as standard in its next generation, the margin of the transformer that had been providing that function disappears. This "nearly zero marginal cost" is, however, the cost of replication and not the cost of integration. The costs of embedding into the business processes of a particular industry, of supporting sales and deployment, of regulatory compliance, of assuming liability, and of connecting to existing systems are not zero and are often large. To equate the two would leave one unable to answer the obvious question: if downstream integration by producers were universally cheap, why do vertical applications for regulated industries actually persist? What is compressed is the margin on the portion reducible to general-purpose functionality; the margin on the portion protected by integration cost is not compressed. The original sense of Humby's phrase of 2006, the origin of the commonplace that "data is the new oil," was the claim that data has no value unless refined — a claim about the need for transformation (Section 3) — and to this extent it transfers to AI. But the empirical regularity of oil, that "the refiner's share is structurally protected," does not transfer. What transfers is the need for transformation, not the defensibility of the transformation margin. Here Definition 5 of this paper is placed. Definition 5 (Transformation Value) Transformation value is the difference between the consideration paid by a transformer for the AI capability it procures and the consideration it receives from final demand (the counterpart of the refining margin in oil). Transformation value is defined as an accounting quantity that varies independently of the producer's share (the procurement price), and the determinants of its attribution are an empirical question and not part of the content of the definition. Definition 5 is deliberately purified into an accounting quantity. It is the same as the crack spread in oil being an accounting quantity, the difference between the crude price and product prices, containing no theory of to whom that difference accrues. How much transformation value is obtained, and whether that share remains with the transformer or is absorbed by the producer, are not matters deduced from the definition but empirical questions settled by observation. This paper's claim about the determinants is placed not on the side of the definition but on the side of Proposition 4. If the mechanism of the con‐

clusion were mixed into the definition, the corresponding proposition would be analytically true and would degenerate into a statement that no observation could test. The division of labour between Definition 5 and Proposition 4 is a compositional judgement made to avoid this danger. 7.3.2 The Death of Thin Wrappers The mode of failure of transformation in the C1 tier is displayed most purely by the death of the thin wrapper — an application that merely places a simple user interface and formulaic instructions over the API of a foundation model. The value added of a thin wrapper exists in the gap between what the current generation of the foundation model "cannot yet do" and the demands of users. This gap is filled from the producer's side at each change of model generation. Summarization, translation, the drafting of routine documents, code completion — each initially subsisted as an independent application and was successively incorporated into the standard functions of foundation models. As seen in the preceding subsection, all of these are value added reducible to general-purpose functionality, and the cost of internalizing them for the producer rides on the path of standard inclusion in the next generation of the model at nearly zero marginal cost. This incorporation is a natural extension requiring almost no additional investment by the producer. Moreover, the steep fall in inference prices (Section 7.1) erases within a short period even the procurement-cost advantage on which a wrapper relies. The death of thin wrappers is not the managerial failure of individual firms but a structural consequence of the C1 tier. Conversely, the range within which this mechanism operates is limited to the portion reducible to general-purpose functionality. An application that places the centre of gravity of its value added in integration, regulatory compliance and the assumption of liability — the portion for which the producer's cost of internalization is not zero — receives the same change of generation as a tailwind rather than a compression. Hypothesis H2 of this paper (Section 21) formalizes this structure — that the persistence of value capture in the application layer is related not to the terms of access to models but to the four indicators of Proposition 4 (exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, linguistic-contextual specificity) — in a form testable on a panel of application firms with generational change in foundation models as an exogenous shock. The boundary between "thin" and "thick" is not binary but continuous. What is adopted as the criterion of judgement therefore becomes decisive. The criterion "does the firm hold assets that the producer cannot replicate?" appears natural yet is unusable — that something could not be replicated can be judged only from the outcome that value capture persisted, and judging the cause from the outcome allows any counterexample to be reclassified after the fact as "there must in fact have been unreplicable assets." Proposition 4 would then become a statement incapable in principle of falsification. This paper therefore severs the criterion of judgement entirely from outcomes and places it in the four ex ante observational indicators that Proposition 4 specifies: (a) exclusive data endowment — the share of the data used by the application that cannot be obtained from the public web and is generated only from the operating processes of the transformer in question; 171 (b) physical-interface intensity — the share of the application's revenue that is inseparable from the operation of physical equipment, mechanisms and on-site work; (c) institutional embeddedness — the presence and number of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations and liability-assumption contracts that the application holds; and (d) linguisticcontextual specificity — the number of language- and jurisdiction-specific standards that conformity of the application's output requires. All four are quantities measurable from the present composition of the business alone, without knowing whether the application survived a change of generation. Measured by these four indicators, the distribution of applications becomes clear. Applications in the lower quantiles on all four — general-purpose document processing, generalpurpose conversational interfaces, simple intermediation between models — shrink with each change of generation, because the centre of gravity of their value added lies in the portion reducible to general-purpose functionality. Applications in the upper quantile on any one — deep integration into business systems, a continuing accuracy advantage from exclusive data, institutional devices for regulatory compliance — take a change of generation as a tailwind, because their centre of gravity lies in the portion for which the producer's cost of internalization is not zero (the improvement of the underlying capability raises the ceiling of the value they themselves provide). For intermediate forms such as vertically specialized services and agent-type performance of work, the level of the four indicators is determined by the design of the business itself. The design problem of a transformation business in the C1 tier is thus the problem of deliberately and continuously raising the four indicators, and a state's M2×C1 policy is the problem of supplying the assets — data, physical interfaces, institutions, people — that make that raising possible. The gain from fixing the indicators in advance is the same for the operator and for the policy maker: each can measure its own position without waiting for success or failure after the fact. 172 Proposition 4 (Conditions for the Survival of the Transformation Model) The necessary conditions for M2 (the Transformation Model) to subsist in AI are three: (i) security of procurement (a continuing assurance of access), (ii) complementary asset endowment at or above a stipulated level on at least one of the following four indicators, and (iii) access to the demand market for what is transformed. Complementary asset endowment is measured, independently of the outcome of value capture, by the following ex ante observable quantities: (a) exclusive data endowment = the share of the data used by the application that cannot be obtained from the public web and is generated only from the operating processes of the transformer in question; (b) physical-interface intensity = the share of the application's revenue that is inseparable from the operation of physical equipment, mechanisms and on-site work; (c) institutional embeddedness = the presence and number of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations and liability-assumption contracts that the application holds; (d) linguistic-contextual specificity = the number of language- and jurisdiction-specific standards that conformity of the application's output requires. Unlike refining in oil, the producer in AI can internalize the portion of the value added of the application layer that is reducible to general-purpose functionality, through the path of standard inclusion in the next generation of the model at nearly zero marginal cost. On the other hand, the cost of internalizing the portion consisting of integration into business processes, regulatory compliance and the assumption of liability is not zero. What is structurally compressed is therefore the transformation margin reducible to general-purpose functionality, and not the transformation margin protected by integration cost. The substance of the four indicators above is the endowment of assets that keep this integration cost high for the producer. Falsification condition If the four indicators are measured before an event of generational change in foundation models and the relation with gross margin and survival rate after the event is estimated, and none of the four indicators has significant predictive power, (ii) is rejected. In particular, if a group of application firms in the lower quantiles on all four indicators is systematically observed to maintain gross margins across a change of generation, this proposition is rejected (the route of reclassifying after the fact as "there were in fact complementary assets" is excluded by ex ante measurement). If downstream integration by producers fails repeatedly even in the general-purpose-functionality portion, the claim of "structural compression" is weakened. Applying the three conditions of Proposition 4 to the C1 tier makes clear where the binding constraint lies. Condition (i), security of procurement, is at C1 nearly given, through the multiplicity of suppliers and the existence of open weights — this is the decisive difference from the C2 tier, where, as Section 8 shows, it is precisely (i) that holds the fate of a transforming state. Condition (iii), access to the demand market, involves thin tariff barriers so far as what is transformed is software and services, but its substance is determined by non-tariff conditions of market access: data protection law, cross-border data regula‐ 173 tion, procurement rules and sectoral regulation. The binding constraint on M2 in the C1 tier is therefore concentrated almost entirely on condition (ii) — the holding of complementary assets. An M2 strategy at C1 is, in the last analysis, a strategy for forming complementary assets. The structure of Proposition 4 can be located precisely in the vocabulary of the theory of global value chains (GVC). In the five types of Gereffi, Humphrey & Sturgeon (2005), the relation between a foundation-model provider and a wrapper is governance of the modular type, in which transactions are highly codified — or of the captive type where the supplier's capability is thin — and the capture of value is determined by governance position within the chain. The AI version of the fact observed in manufacturing GVCs — that of the approximately 179 dollars of shipment value of the iPhone (3G), the value added by assembly in China was only approximately 6.5 dollars (approximately 3.6%) (Xing & Detert, 2010) — is the wrapper's share. The smile curve, on which value added is high at the two ends of the process (upstream research and development, downstream brand and services) and low in the middle, has been demonstrated to be deepening in international input– output data (Baldwin & Ito, 2021); in the application layer of AI, the upstream end is occupied by the foundation model and the downstream end by holders of complementary assets, while the simple connecting stage in the middle — the wrapper — sinks lowest. 7.3.3 The Transformation That Survives — Four Indicators of Complementary Assets What, then, survives? The four ex ante observational indicators specified by Proposition 4 may be expanded in the context of the C1 tier. First, (a) exclusive data endowment — the share of the data used by the application that cannot be obtained from the public web and is generated only from the operating processes of the transformer in question. In domains where regulation, commercial practice and tacit on-site knowledge are thick and the data needed to learn them are not published — professional work, industry-specific processes, operations under safety regulation — a producer may hold the capability yet be unable to obtain the premises of its application. The value added of the transformer resides not in "calling the model" but in "the knowledge that fits the model to the constraints of the site," and that the source of that knowledge is the operating process itself appears as a high level on this indicator. Second, (b) physical-interface intensity — the share of the application's revenue that is inseparable from the operation of physical equipment, mechanisms and on-site work. Interfaces with the physical world such as production equipment, robotics, logistics networks and store networks lie beyond the reach of zero-marginal-cost replication of software. At the point where the output of AI is converted into physical motion or product, the defence of oil refining, the specificity of installed capital, partially revives. Third, (c) institutional embeddedness — the presence and number of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations and liability-assumption contracts that the application holds. In regulated industries such as medicine, finance and public administration, a substantial part of an application's value consists in institutional performance: auditability, the assumption of liability, relations with the supervisory authority, and remedy in the 174 event of failure. These are embedding in institutions rather than in technology, and because they take the outward form of certifications, registrations and contracts, they can be counted by a third party. Fourth, (d) linguistic-contextual specificity — the number of language- and jurisdiction-specific standards that conformity of the application's output requires. Conformity to demand specific to language, culture and legal system may give a transformer embedded in that market a persistent advantage — though it must be added that this defence is, among the four indicators, the most readily eroded, by improvements in multilingual capability. What matters here is that these four indicators, while being a one-to-one restatement of the earlier four types (domain knowledge, physical assets, institutional trust, linguistic and cultural assets), differ from them in one decisive respect. The earlier types shared the stipulation of "assets that the producer cannot replicate at low cost," but non-replicability can be judged only from the outcome of persistent value capture, and the judgement was circular. All four indicators can be measured without reference to the outcome of value capture. Nothing of the content is lost; only falsifiability is added. Furthermore, the four indicators are unified under a single theoretical principle: they all measure the endowment of assets that keep integration cost high for the producer. The cost to a producer of including general-purpose functionality as standard is nearly zero, but the cost of obtaining data that arise only from another's operating processes, the cost of entering into the operation of physical equipment and on-site work, the cost of obtaining statutory certification, taking supervisory registration and assuming liability, and the cost of continuing to conform to jurisdiction-specific standards are none of them zero. The four indicators correspond to these four kinds of integration cost. Through this unification, Proposition 4 becomes able to answer the question "why do thin wrappers die while vertical applications for regulated industries survive?" — because the former stand in a domain where the producer's cost of internalization is nearly zero and the latter in a domain where it is high. At the same time a prediction of ordering among the four indicators follows. Ranked by the degree to which they keep integration cost high, physical-interface intensity and exclusive data endowment are the most robust, institutional embeddedness follows, and linguistic-contextual specificity is the thinnest. This ordering is tested as the relative magnitudes of the coefficients that Hypothesis H2 (Section 21) estimates. In the vocabulary of Watkins's (1963) staple theory (Section 4), these complementary assets are the contemporary version of the conditions for forming linkages that keep forward linkage from ending in a "trap." The essential point of judgement running through the four indicators lies not in the scarcity of assets but in the asymmetry of integration cost. That a producer holds capability at the world's highest level does not mean that the producer knows the operating practices of a particular hospital, the equipment constraints of a particular factory, or the supervisory practice of a particular jurisdiction. Much of this knowledge, moreover, does not exist as published text and is accumulated only within on-site practice. The advantage a transforming state can hold in the C1 tier is not a difference in capability but a differ‐ 175 ence in reachability of context. This formulation is also the AI-era restatement of the way research on economic complexity (Hidalgo & Hausmann, 2009), holding that products are made from combinations of invisible capabilities, grasped national development as the accumulation of a stock of capabilities. The question for the age of AI is how to measure the complexity of a capability space consisting of data, compute, people and organizational know-how, and the measurement of transformation value forms part of it. The four indicators are not independent, and are most defensive when high simultaneously. On-site data arising from the operation of a physical interface continuously raise exclusive data endowment; a record of implementation in regulated industries accumulates institutional embeddedness; and a record of certification and assumption of liability opens access to the next body of operational data. Once this circulation begins to turn, the transformer's advantage is greater than the sum of the integration costs of the individual assets — because what the producer must overcome is no longer a bundle of assets but the circuit that reproduces the bundle. Conversely, transformation that depends on a single indicator — linguistic-contextual specificity alone, say — slides into the position of a wrapper as that indicator is eroded (in this example, by improvement in the multilingual capability of foundation models). The defensibility of transformation value should be understood not as a static holding but as a race between the speed of reproduction of the four indicators and the speed of internalization by the producer, and it is this dynamic that Hypothesis H2 (Section 21) seeks to estimate on a panel of application firms. The repetition of exogenous shocks in the form of generational change and price revision by foundation models continues to supply, quarter by quarter, a natural experiment identifying which composition of indicators defended gross margin and survival. There is only one condition for identification to hold: that the four indicators be measured before the event. If measurement after the fact is permitted, the temptation operates to look at the surviving firms and then fit the indicators to them, and the test does not hold. Institutional requirements, modes of failure, state examples. The institutional requirements of M2×C1 are (i) the preparation of domain data and rules for its use (a design balancing exclusivity and sharing), (ii) the institutionalization of quality and audit (frameworks of certification and liability that turn institutional trust into an asset), and (iii) the cultivation of transformation personnel — not researchers on models, but integrating personnel who understand both the domain and the model. The typical mode of failure is that policy mistakes an agglomeration of wrappers for "the rise of an AI industry." Support measures using the number of start-ups or the number of adopting firms as key performance indicators may subsidize the mass production of a form that structurally dies out. The criterion for support should be placed not on the apparent novelty of the business but on the ex ante level of the four indicators of Proposition 4. This replacement is easy in practice as well — the provenance of exclusive data, the share of revenue inseparable from physical equipment and on-site work, the statutory certifications and liabilityassumption contracts held, and the language- and jurisdiction-specific standards with which conformity is required, are all quantities that can be declared and verified on an application form. As state examples, India, which concentrates its budget on linguistic- 176 contextual specificity and specialization in applications (Sections 8 and 14); Singapore, which seeks an agglomeration of applications as a hub of institutional embeddedness; and Japan, which stakes on physical-interface intensity (details in Section 18), are variants of an M2×C1 strategy staking on different indicators. The findings of research on small states support this plurality of strategies within the cell. Breznitz (2007) showed that three small states achieving the same "IT growth" succeeded at entirely different positions — Israel at the far upstream of research and development, Taiwan in midstream by way of a public research institute, Ireland downstream through the attraction of foreign investment. This plurality transfers to M2×C1 as well: which of the four indicators to concentrate on (exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, or linguistic-contextual specificity) is a function of a country's existing composition of assets and of the constraint of scale, and no single optimum exists. What research on small states since Katzenstein (1985) has repeatedly shown is that the condition of survival for a small open economy is "the quality of domestic institutions of adjustment, taking dependence on the world market as given," and this is precisely of the same form as the condition of survival for a transforming state in the C1 tier — where security of procurement is given and only the formation of complementary assets is in question. A further caution is required about the mode of failure of M2×C1. The failure of turning an agglomeration of wrappers into a key performance indicator is not merely a problem of wasted subsidy but a problem in which the statistics and policy of a state misread the structure. The number of application firms established, the proportion of firms adopting AI, the amount of AI-related funding raised — all of these are easy to measure and readily adopted as indicators of policy performance. But as Proposition 4 shows, what these indicators measure in the C1 tier is, for the most part, the volume of a form that is structurally compressed. More appropriate indicators are more laborious to measure — the four indicators of Proposition 4, namely the share of exclusive data endowment, physical- interface intensity, institutional embeddedness and linguistic-contextual specificity, with, on the outcome side, gross margin sustained across a change of generation in foundation models. Laborious as they are, all are by definition measurable in advance; it is not that they cannot be measured but that they are not measured. The research agenda of Section 21 and the dependence audit protocol of Appendix C set the measurement of transformation value as an explicit task for verification because this measurement gap leads directly to the misallocation of policy. That the theory of national innovation systems (Freeman, 1987; Lundvall, 1992; Nelson, 1993), while effective as a framework for grasping the mutual linkage of institutions, has been criticized for a weak measurement framework (Section 4) is being repeated in the same form for transformation value in the age of AI. 177 7.4 M3×C1 — Commodity Utilization: The Fastest Diffusion, the Least Differentiation 7.4.1 The Tier of Least Friction in Diffusion M3 (the Utilization Model) is the type that inputs a resource into domestic processes of production and life and uses it to amplify other values (Definition 3). The C1 tier is the tier of least friction for this utilization. Because suppliers are many and price competition operates, procurement prices continue to collapse (Section 7.1); because access restrictions do not function in practice, geopolitical procurement risk is relatively small; and switching among suppliers is easy. Of the lag in the diffusion of general-purpose technologies organized in Section 4 — the dynamo lag, in which decades were required to redesign the power systems of factories under electrification, and the J-curve of complementary investment preceding effects in information technology — the part deriving from price and availability has almost vanished in the C1 tier. What remains is only the constraint of absorptive capacity, that is, complementary investment on the side of organization, institutions and people. In this sense utilization in the C1 tier is a process of diffusion exceptional in the history of general-purpose technologies in that the barriers on the technology side disappeared first, and differences in the depth of utilization across countries reflect almost purely differences in institutions and organization. 178 Proposition 5 (Compounding of the Utilization Model and the Outflow of Value) The value of M3 (the Utilization Model) compounds increasingly through the product of the rate of diffusion and absorptive capacity (complementary investment in organization, institutions and people). The lagged structure of diffusion shown by the history of general- purpose technologies (electrification, information technology) operates for AI as well: at stages where the depth of utilization is shallow the measured productivity effect is small, and it accelerates once complementary investment passes a threshold (the J-curve). Pure utilization lacking transformation capability (M2), however, reduces the value retained domestically through the following two channels. (α) The cost channel (common to C1 and C2): of the benefits of productivity improvement, the portion paid abroad as consideration for the input is not retained domestically. In a competitive market this portion equals resource cost and is not rent. (β) The rent channel (specific to C2): at levels of capability where supplier concentration is high and demand is inelastic, the consideration includes a mark-up over marginal cost, and that excess portion is a transfer of rent to the producing country. The magnitude of (β) is a function of the product of supplier concentration and the price elasticity of demand, and the deepening of utilization enlarges (β) by making demand inelastic. Falsification condition If no relation is observed between the level of complementary investment and absorptive capacity and the productivity effect, or if the effect is linear irrespective of the depth of utilization, the compounding structure is rejected. (β) is estimated as the product of the gross margin (mark-up) of foundation-model providers and cloud providers and the share of C2 capability in the procurement of the country in question. If suppliers' mark-ups have converged to competitive levels while external payments nonetheless increase, (β) is rejected and the increase in payments is explained by the cost channel (α) alone. If the price elasticity of demand is observed not to fall as utilization deepens, the claim of inelasticity is rejected. Total external payments (the digital- related balance) do not measure rent; they are an indicator of exposure (Definition 4). 7.4.2 A Capability Everyone Can Use Is No One's Advantage Another defining property of utilization in the C1 tier is non-differentiation. By definition, C1 capability can be procured by all states, firms and individuals on nearly identical terms. The "holding" of C1 capability therefore does not constitute a comparative advantage — a capability everyone can use is no one's advantage. Advantage resides not in the capability itself but in the other term of the product in Proposition 5, the difference in absorptive capacity. This difference is in fact large. According to the Stanford AI Index 2026, the rate of use of generative AI is highest in the world in Singapore at 61%, while the United States is reported at 28.3% (24th) — an observation showing that being the producing country of the most advanced models and the depth of its utilization are distinct variables. That so large a difference in rates of use arises under identical terms of 179 procurement shows that the first factor, the rate of diffusion, is not explained by the terms of procurement — that the rate of diffusion is itself a function of institutions and organization. The rate of use is not, however, an indicator of absorptive capacity (the second factor), and verifying the compounding structure of Proposition 5 requires measuring the proportion of adoptions accompanied by redesign of business processes, and the level of complementary investment, separately from the rate of use (the design of the questions in Table C-2 of Appendix C is intended for this separation). This reservation is required by this paper's own criteria. A few paragraphs below, this section states that "the adoption rate rises easily, but that is not the starting point of compounding," and sets the measurement of the depth of utilization separately from the adoption rate as a premise of M3 policy in the C1 tier. There is no reason not to apply the same criterion to the evidence. What the difference in rates of use shows is the dispersion of the first factor, not of the second. Even so, this observation indicates where the focus of national strategy in the C1 tier should lie: not in procurement (which anyone can do) but in the institutionalization of absorption — redesign of business processes, retraining of managers and front-line staff, preparation of data, clarification of regulation so as not to impede use, and procurement systems that tolerate failure. Non-differentiation has implications for domestic distribution as well. That the procurement price of C1 capability keeps collapsing means that disparities in utilization shift from disparities in ability to pay to disparities in absorptive capacity. Differences in the depth of utilization between large firms and small and medium enterprises, between cities and regions, and between generations arise in the C1 tier not as differences in access charges but as differences in the capacity to redesign, in people, and in the preparation of data. Measures to redress disparity in the C1 tier therefore place their centre of gravity on support for implementation — accompaniment of small and medium enterprises in adoption, sharing of sector-specific templates of redesign, incorporation into public vocational training — rather than on subsidizing charges. The substantive analysis of the stratification of access between and within states is conducted for the C2 tier, where rationing by price, capacity and licence operates, in Proposition 12 (Section 17); but it is worth establishing here that even in the C1 tier the equalization of utilization is not automatic. Decomposing the substance of absorptive capacity one step further gives four layers: (i) organizational capital — redesign of business processes, reallocation of authority and responsibility, procedures for verifying and taking responsibility for the outputs of AI; (ii) human capital — a broad base of user skills, and intermediate personnel able to connect the tacit knowledge of the front line to AI; (iii) data capital — that an organization's own processes are machine-readable; and (iv) institutional capital — clarity of rules that does not chill use, and a design of procurement and audit that permits learning from failure. As this decomposition shows, the greater part of absorptive capacity is a national stock accumulated before the arrival of the general-purpose technology, and it is for this reason that international differences in the depth of utilization opened widely within a few years of AI's appearance, notwithstanding nearly uniform access to the technology. Absorptive 180

capacity cannot be imported. This is the most important policy fact in utilization in the C1 tier. The J-curve structure, by which compounding begins once complementary investment in absorptive capacity passes a threshold, has a policy implication specific to the C1 tier. The adoption rate (the proportion of firms and individuals that have used the technology) rises easily, but that is not the starting point of compounding. Just as, in the history of electrification, factories that installed electric motors in the layout of the steam engine obtained no productivity improvement while only factories that went as far as physically redesigning the plant obtained the gains, utilization that merely "pastes" C1 capability onto existing processes without redesigning them produces almost no measurable productivity effect. Measuring the depth of utilization — what proportion of processes have incorporated AI with accompanying redesign — separately from the adoption rate is the premise of M3 policy in the C1 tier (the measurement framework connects to the dependence audit of Section 13 and Appendix C). 7.4.3 The Outflow of Value in Pure Utilization — The Cost Channel and the Rent Channel The latter part of Proposition 5 specifies the long-run risk specific to a purely utilizing state. Here it is essential to distinguish two channels strictly. If they are confused, this paper would be stating of the same tier both that "prices collapse to marginal cost" and that "value flows out as rent," and would fall into internal contradiction. (α) The cost channel operates in common at C1 and C2. Of the benefits of productivity improvement, the portion paid abroad as API charges, cloud charges and licence fees is not retained domestically. In a competitive market, however, this equals resource cost and is not rent. Payment of consideration for an imported good is not an outflow of income but a cost, and so long as the value added that the good generates exceeds that cost, national income rises. The C1 tier is precisely the tier in which, as Proposition 2 stipulates, suppliers are many and price competition operates, and inference prices continue to collapse by orders of magnitude annually (Section 7.1). A competitive price converged to marginal cost contains by definition no rent. What can be said about pure utilization in the C1 tier is therefore only (α), and the question is not "that there are payments" but "whether domestic value added commensurate with the payments is being formed." (β) The rent channel is specific to C2. At levels of capability where supplier concentration is high and demand is inelastic, the consideration includes a mark-up over marginal cost, and that excess portion is a transfer of rent to the producing country. The magnitude of (β) is a function of the product of supplier concentration and the price elasticity of demand, and the deepening of utilization enlarges (β) by making demand inelastic — a capability deeply embedded in business processes cannot have its procured volume reduced even as the price rises. The analysis of this channel belongs to Section 8 (M3×C2). 181 This distinction changes the design of measurement. The digital-related balance is a total of payments and does not distinguish how much of it is the supplier's mark-up and how much is consideration for the true resource costs of compute, electric power and personnel. That payments are proportional to volume of use holds equally in a competitive and in a monopolistic market, so this statistic cannot separate the rent hypothesis from the competition hypothesis. Total external payments do not measure rent; they are an indicator of exposure (Definition 4). To measure (β) it is necessary to multiply the gross margin (mark-up) of foundation-model providers and cloud providers by the share of C2 capability in the procurement of the country in question. The fact that Japan already records a permanent digital deficit — an empirical anchor for the fact that the scale of external procurement of AI inputs has reached a level of the same form as oil imports — is set out in detail in Section 18, but the standing used there is likewise "a window for observing exposure" rather than "a window for observing rent transfer." The structure to be established here is that M3×C1 alone corresponds to the position of "a country that buys oil and drives." Just as the utilizing consuming states of the oil era built on the input of oil the industrial system of the utilization side — automobiles, roads, suburbanization — and took the compounding (Section 6), a utilizing state in AI likewise divides into subordinate utilization and strategic utilization according to whether it can build domestic compounding in excess of the outflow. That the key to this division lies in complementary investment in absorptive capacity and in circuits that cultivate the complementary assets arising from the sites of utilization (on-site data, operational knowledge) into an M2′-type transformation capability is developed with Japan as the case in Proposition 13 (Section 18). The history of oil already shows the type of institutional response to this division as well. After the crisis of 1973, what Japan chose was not the acquisition of the upstream but the doubling of the efficiency of transformation — the institutionalization of energy saving that halved primary energy input per trillion yen of GDP from 70 PJ to 35 PJ (Section 6). The counterpart for a purely utilizing state in AI is the institutionalization of "efficiency in the use of AI." Investment in absorptive capacity that draws a deeper productivity effect from the same procurement expenditure is a response of the same form as energy saving, thickening the compounding term given the cost channel (α). An indicator for judging the success of this response can be constructed in the same form as the intensity measure in energy saving — domestic value added per yen of digital procurement, a ratio with digital- related payments in the denominator and the increase in domestic value added of AI-using sectors in the numerator. Whereas what Japan tracked after 1973 was energy input intensity, what a utilizing state in the age of AI should track is this procurement intensity, and what judges the success of policy is not the size of the deficit itself but the course of this ratio (Section 18). It may be added that the public sector has advantages as a testing ground for this response that the private sector lacks. Public administration, medicine, education and long-term care are areas where (a) domestic demand is large, (b) the data that arise only from operating processes and the statutory structures of certification and liability are held publicly (indicators (a) and (c) of Proposition 4 are high), and (c) 182 integration cost for the producer is high because they are regulated domains; the deepening of utilization there therefore leads readily to the formation of complementary assets — the circuit from M3 to M2′. There is this double rationale for placing the redesign of public-sector work at the centre of utilization policy in the C1 tier. Institutional requirements, modes of failure, state examples. The institutional requirements of M3×C1 are (i) broad complementary investment in absorptive capacity (education, retraining, support for implementation in small and medium enterprises), (ii) legal clarity of use (predictable rules on data protection, liability and intellectual property), and (iii) basic infrastructure (telecommunications, electric power, identity verification). The modes of failure are (a) shallow utilization that pursues only the adoption rate (stagnation short of the J-curve), (b) concentration of dependence on a single supplier (a configuration that carries the AI outage risk of the C2 tier — Section 13 — into procurement in the C1 tier), and (c) complacency in pure utilization without awareness of the cost channel (α) — a configuration that increases procurement expenditure without tracking domestic value added per yen of procurement. As state examples, Singapore, with the world's highest rate of use, is a reference case for the institutionalization of absorption, and India, which concentrates on subsidizing the procurement of compute and on multilingual applications, for access-assured utilization. The second of the modes of failure of M3×C1 — the concentration of dependence — retains substance even in the C1 tier and should therefore be made explicit here. Because suppliers are many in the C1 tier, switching is in principle possible. Yet actual organizations, notwithstanding the technical ease of switching, tend to concentrate on a single supplier, a single cloud platform and a single model lineage. Concentration may be rational for each individual actor — simplicity of operation, bargaining on price, depth of integration. But when the rational choices of individual actors converge in the same direction, the result at the level of the system is a configuration in which a single failure is correlated across sectors and across borders. This is precisely the fallacy of composition that Proposition 7 (Section 13) formalizes for AI outage. The requirement of redundancy in M3 policy in the C1 tier is therefore not "that an alternative supplier exists" but "that the procedure for actually switching to an alternative supplier is operated and practised" — what Definition 6 (Section 13) calls operational readiness. This distinction is readily overlooked precisely because procurement in the C1 tier is cheap. 7.5 Summary of Row C1 — A Floor of Participation, Not a Source of Advantage Table 4 summarizes the analysis of the three cells of row C1. Table 4. Cell-by-cell summary of row C1 (the commodity tier) 183 Item M1×C1 Commodity supplier M2×C1 Commodity transformation M3×C1 Commodity utilization Defining features Supply of capability free of charge or at low price, through open weights and the like. Value is obtained from the fact of production, but the path of realization is non-exclusive (Definition 3) Procurement of C1 capability and its transformation into applications and products. The margin depends on the four indicators of Proposition 4 Input of C1 capability into domestic processes of production and life to amplify other values Mode of value Not direct revenue but spillover gains (the standard position, the ecosystem, the formation of dependence) Transformation value (Definition 5, an accounting quantity). Attribution is a function of the four indicators of Proposition 4 (an empirical question) Compounding of the rate of diffusion × absorptive capacity (Proposition 5). Outflow abroad is by the cost channel (α) alone Success of the oil analogy The exclusive path does not transfer (production quotas and price command are undefinable through nonrivalry). The non-exclusive path is specified by Definition 3 Partially holds (the need for transformation transfers; the defensibility of the margin on the generalpurpose- functionality portion does not) Broadly holds (the compounding structure of a consuming country). But there is no rivalry in procurement, given non-rivalry Institutional requirements Research personnel, access to compute, regulation permitting publication, circuits for recovering spillovers Preparation of operatingprocess data and rules for its use, institutionalization of statutory certification and the assumption of liability, integrating personnel Complementary investment in absorption, legal clarity of use, basic infrastructure Modes of failure Production that is ignored / production without revenue / defeat by the speed of obsolescence Death of thin wrappers / turning an agglomeration of wrappers into a key performance indicator Shallow utilization (stagnation short of the J-curve) / concentration of dependence / lack of awareness of the cost channel (α) (a configuration that does not track procurement intensity) Principal state examples China (DeepSeek, Qwen, Kimi, GLM), France (Mistral), the United States (Meta) India (linguistic-contextual specificity), Singapore (institutional embeddedness), Japan (physical-interface intensity, Section 18) Singapore (rate of use 61%), India (access-assured type) What may first be read from the vertical comparison in Table 4 is that the success of the oil analogy differs by cell. At M1×C1 the inference of command over production is rejected entirely; at M2×C1 only the need for transformation transfers and the defensibility of the margin does not; at M3×C1 the compounding structure of a consuming country broadly 184 transfers. Even within the same row C1, the analogy cannot be handled wholesale — here appears empirically the reason why the discipline of analogy formalized in Section 3 must be brought down and applied at the level of the individual cell. Anticipating the horizontal comparison (the contrast with Sections 8 and 9): the institutional requirements of row C1 are all closed within domestic institutions — people, data, quality, clarity of regulation — and contain almost no variables of diplomacy, alliance or security. This stands in sharp contrast to the institutional requirements of row C2, which centre on the security of procurement and on alliance management. Table 4 sets the three cells of row C1 side by side, but it should be confirmed, in the light of the classification of Section 6.10, that the three cells are not occupied at the same density. M3×C1 is a stably occupied position — the friction of participation is minimal (Section 7.4.1) and substantially every state carries some weight there. M2×C1 and M1×C1, by contrast, are both positions on the boundary. The former, in that thin wrappers die out and the transformation that survives is limited to that equipped with one of the four indicators of Proposition 4 (Section 7.3.3), is more accurately read not as an independent stable point but as a band lying on the way to transition to the cells above and below. The latter, as graded in Section 7.2.3, is a position lacking the exclusive value-capture part of the definitional requirements. The summary of this subsection, that row C1 is "a floor of participation" and not "a source of advantage," is also another expression of this distribution of density — only M3×C1, the floor itself, is thick, and the other two cells lie on the boundary. This contrast should not be reported as an observed empirical regularity. It is deduced from the definitions. Definition 1 stipulates strategic character as the degree to which three properties of a general-purpose input hold — (ii) dependence of supply on other countries, (iii) that interruption of supply degrades the output of the national economy within a short period, and (iv) that the level of holding and of access governs capability gaps among states — and includes within the content of the definition that strategic character differs by level of capability. Proposition 2 identifies the level at which these hold, tier by tier: at C1 all three properties are low; at C2 (ii) and (iv) are high and (iii) rises as a function of dependence. From this the following follows immediately. Institutional requirements are the set of institutions necessary to relax the constraints a state faces at that tier. Variables of diplomacy, alliance and security enter the institutional requirements only where supply depends on other countries (ii), where its interruption degrades the national economy within a short period (iii), and where the level of access governs capability gaps among states (iv). At a tier where all three properties are low, there is no room for these variables to enter the institutional requirements. At C1 suppliers exist in multiple jurisdictions, already published weights are irrevocably fixed domestically, and access control measures lose their effectiveness through circumvention. Where there is no external constraint to be relaxed, no external institution is required. What remains is only the domestic con‐ 185 straints — absorptive capacity, complementary assets, clarity of regulation — and the institutional requirements of row C1 are therefore closed within domestic institutions. The same deduction operates for row C2 with the sign reversed. At a tier where (ii) and (iv) are high, that security of procurement and alliance management come to the centre of the institutional requirements is required by the definition (confirmed again in Section 8.5). The most important cross-cutting observation of this section and the next is thus not a regularity discovered by looking at a table of nine cells but a consequence of the tier-bytier pattern in which the strategic character of Definition 1 is established. Making this point explicit has implications for the framework of this paper as a whole. The objection naturally to be expected against the nine cells is that they are merely the mechanical product of two convenient trichotomies, M1/M2/M3 and C1/C2/C3, and that the product has no theoretical inevitability. If the difference in institutional requirements between rows could be spoken of only as an empirical regularity, the response to this objection could be no more than "that is how it is observed to be." But if strategic character is a function of the tier and institutional requirements are a function of strategic character, then the nine cells are the product of "the tier-by-tier pattern in which the three properties of strategic character are established × the position of value generation," and both axes are defined over the same theoretical object. Section 6.7 moved the base of Definition 3 from the strategic general-purpose resource to the general-purpose input in order to make this product hold. Without that move, the three cells of row C1 fall outside the domain of definition and the product itself cannot be constructed. With it, the closure of the institutional requirements of row C1 within domestic institutions becomes a prediction of the theory rather than a side effect of a violation of the domain. The summary of row C1 may be reduced to three points. First, row C1 is a floor of participation, not a source of advantage. C1 capability can by definition be procured by every actor, and its holding does not differentiate. But being a floor does not mean being of little importance. Failing to get onto the floor — shallow utilization, wrapper-oriented industrial policy, isolation from the open ecosystem — appears as relative retreat while other countries accumulate compounding. Failure in row C1 is not a dramatic collapse but the quiet accumulation of forgone gains. And this accumulation, unlike a collapse, does not attract political attention — nothing stops, nothing runs short, no price surges; the gap with other countries simply widens year by year. Whereas failure in row C2 appears as a visible incident of "no longer being able to use," failure in row C1 appears as a non-event. Given the general tendency of states to allocate resources towards visible risks, row C1 appears to be, if anything, the row more liable to under-investment. Second, each cell of row C1 displayed the common structure that the centre of gravity of value moves from AI capability itself to complementary elements: at M1 to the circuit of recovering spillovers, at M2 to complementary assets, at M3 to absorptive capacity. In the C1 tier, "having AI" is not even a question; the only question is "what one has around AI." Third, since row C1 keeps expanding through Frontier Descent, strength in row C1 — rapid institutionalization of absorption and thick complementary assets — is also an advance invest‐ 186 ment in the capability to turn into value, at the greatest speed, the capability that will descend from C2 in future. Conversely, as the analysis of row C2 (the next section) shows, the structure of dependence on capability currently at C2 is subject to an entirely different problem of governance — supplier concentration, export controls, and control over access. It is precisely the gap between the world of row C1, where anyone may use, and the world of row C2, where one is allowed to use, that makes the Nine-Cell Matrix incompatible with any single theory of AI policy. Finally, the position of row C1 may be formalized from the standpoint of portfolio allocation. Allocation of resources to row C1 has the properties of low dispersion of returns (the structure is known, and the conditions of success come down to the capacity to execute institutions) and large spillover to other rows (absorptive capacity and complementary assets are directly transferable to the utilization and transformation of C2 capability). In the vocabulary of finance, row C1 in a nine-cell portfolio corresponds to a base asset — a holding that generates compounding with high certainty and at the same time supplies the preconditions of other investments. Taking row C1 thickly is a no-regret allocation for any state, but taking row C1 alone is a configuration lacking insurance against changes in the structure of supply — the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6, Section 13), that is, the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability and the sensitive- processing condition, together with allied assurance and operational readiness — and, as Proposition 13 (Section 18) argues, it is the combination of depth of utilization and level of guarantee that is in question. The insurance meant here is not the domestic holding of C2-level capability itself (that formulation is incompatible with the depreciation of Proposition 8 and is rejected in Section 18.10). The next section proceeds to the world of row C2, in which this insurance is expensive and subordinate to the discretion of other states. 187 8. The Nine-Cell Matrix II — Row C2 (Frontier Tier) 8.1 The Common Logic of Row C2 — AI as a Managed Strategic Material Row C1, examined in the previous section, was a world in which suppliers are numerous, prices collapse, and access restrictions do not function in practice — a world in which "anyone can use it." Row C2 (the Frontier Tier), the subject of this section, has the opposite structure. By Definition 2 (Section 5), C2 is the frontier and the band of capability lying within a short lag width of it. Definition 2 partitions by capability distance alone; it contains neither market structure nor form of governance. That suppliers are concentrated among a small number, and that export controls and access controls are in fact applied, is not part of the definition of this band of capability distance: it is the dependent variable asserted by Proposition 2. The managed form of governance that this section confirms in each cell is therefore not a restatement of the definition but an inspection of whether the prediction of Proposition 2 in fact holds. Whereas the analysis of Row C1 was almost wholly closed within domestic institutions — talent, data, quality, absorptive capacity — the analysis of Row C2 cannot avoid including variables of diplomacy, alliance, and security from the outset. It is in this row that the covariation asserted by Proposition 2 (Section 5) — that within the threshold of capability distance supplier concentration persists at a high level, and that access-control measures in fact constrain capability on the demand side — operates in full. It should be stated here, in advance of the passages in this section that refer to C3, that Tier C3 (the Critical Tier) is an unrealized anticipatory category as of the time of writing, and that whether and when it arrives is an empirical question (Definition 2). The first structure common to Row C2 is the extreme geographic concentration of supply. On the estimates of Epoch AI, as of May 2025 approximately 75% of world AI supercomputer (GPU cluster) performance was located in the United States and approximately 15% in China, with the total for the rest of the world limited to approximately 10% (Pilz et al., 2025). Germany, Japan and France, which had been leading powers in conventional high-performance computing, are peripheral in AI clusters. As a more basal observation, Lehdonvirta, Wú & Hawkins (2024) surveyed the AI-oriented GPU regions of the public clouds of the nine largest cloud providers worldwide and showed that only approximately 30 countries in the world hold AI-oriented GPU clusters, and that the world divides in three: a "Compute North" holding chips for advanced training, a "Compute South" able to run only inference on earlier-generation chips, and a "Compute Desert" with zero public GPU infrastructure. As of that study, all eight public cloud regions holding the then most advanced H100 were held by United States firms (the study has methodological limits: government-held and privately held corporate GPUs are outside its scope, and the count is region-based). The note of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, "The 188 State of AI Competition in Advanced Economies" (6 October 2025), also confirms officially that a compute gap exists even among advanced economies. Just as petroleum reserves were geologically uneven, the frontier productive capacity of AI is geographically uneven as an accumulation of capital, electricity and talent — with the decisive difference that the latter unevenness is not a datum of nature but a consequence of investment. The second structure is that access is subject to state discretion. Whereas in Tier C1 security of procurement was very nearly given, in Tier C2 who obtains which capability on what terms is a composite function of the licensing policy of the supplying state's government and the commercial judgment of the supplying firm. In this respect AI at Tier C2 is treated not as a good in a commodity market but as a managed strategic material — a form of governance close to that applied to goods subject to strategic export controls in the Cold War period. The third structure is that the boundary of C2 itself keeps moving. Through Frontier Descent (Section 5), today's C2 capability descends to C1 within months to a few years. The open-weight frontier has closed to within an average of approximately four months of the closed frontier (Epoch AI, 2026), and the "holding" of C2 drains continuously toward the floor. A state positioned in Row C2 therefore faces a choice about time rather than the defence of a static position: either to keep creating new frontiers at a speed exceeding the speed of descent, or to wait for descent and enjoy the collapse of procurement costs. This section makes these three structures concrete in each of the cells M1×C2 (8.2), M2×C2 (8.3) and M3×C2 (8.4), and summarizes them in Table 5 in 8.5. The common questions of the analysis are identical to those of the previous section — the mode of value, whether the petroleum analogy transfers, institutional requirements, failure modes, and states that fall in the cell. 8.2 M1×C2 — Frontier-Producing States: A Bipolar Structure and Concentration Within 8.2.1 The Bipolar Structure in Fact — A 23-Fold Investment Gap Coexisting with a Near-Zero Performance Gap M1×C2 is the position of states that produce the frontier of AI capability itself. As of 2026 the developers able to release models within a few months of the capability frontier are concentrated in approximately ten firms worldwide, whose nationalities are almost confined to the United States (OpenAI, Anthropic, Google DeepMind, Meta, xAI) and China (DeepSeek, Alibaba, Moonshot AI, Zhipu/Z.ai), with Mistral AI (France) very nearly the sole European presence. As stated in the previous section, a dual structure became established in 2025–2026 in which the closed frontier is very largely occupied by the United States while the open-weight frontier is led by Chinese developers. The substantive occupants of the M1×C2 cell are therefore the two poles of the United States and China. The internal structure of these two poles is not, however, symmetric. On the compilation of the Stanford AI Index, private AI investment stood at 109.1 billion dollars for the United States against 9.3 billion dollars for China in 2024 (a gap of approximately twelvefold), 189 and widened in 2025 to approximately 285.9 billion dollars against approximately 12.4 billion dollars (a gap of approximately twenty-threefold). Over the same period, however, the performance gap between the top United States and Chinese models has continued to narrow: the gap on major benchmarks, which stood at double-digit percentage points in 2023, had very nearly disappeared by the end of 2024, and the AI Index 2026 reports the gap as of March 2026 as 2.7%. The count of notable models is 50 for the United States against 30 for China (2025, doubled from 15 the previous year). This coexistence — a twenty-three-fold gap in investment alongside a very nearly vanished gap in capability — is a central puzzle for the measurement of national strength in AI, and cannot be set aside in considering the economics of the M1×C2 cell. The interpretation of this puzzle involves at least three channels. First, through the asymmetry seen in 7.1 — the cost of building the frontier rises at approximately 2.4 times per year, while inference prices for already-attained levels fall at rates ranging from 9 times to 900 times per year depending on the task (Epoch AI) — the cost of following is far smaller than the cost of pioneering. Second, a considerable part of investment goes not to marginal advance of capability but to expansion of supply scale (inference capacity) and to capture of application markets. Third, investment on the Chinese side includes forms that are not readily captured in private investment statistics: data-centre construction financed by state funds, electricity infrastructure, and national projects. In any case the policy implication is plain: the level of investment does not guarantee a position at M1×C2, and differences in investment do not map linearly onto differences in capability. When the country profiles of Section 14 assess the attempts of individual states to move between cells, this non-linearity serves as the baseline. 8.2.2 Three Requirement Levels — Capital, Electricity, and Talent The conditions of entry to M1×C2 are made concrete here in three elements. Capital. On the central estimate of Epoch AI, the sum of amortized hardware cost and electricity cost required for the final training run of a frontier model has grown at approximately 2.4 times per year (90% confidence interval 2.0 to 3.1 times) since 2016. The breakdown of total development cost is 47–67% hardware, 29–49% research and development personnel, and 2–6% electricity. As examples of that study's estimates on an amortized compute-cost basis, GPT-4 is put at approximately 78 million dollars and Gemini Ultra at approximately 191 million dollars (the Stanford AI Index 2024 also adopts these estimates). If the trend continues, the largest training run is projected to exceed one billion dollars by 2027. As a methodological caution in citation, estimates on a cloud rental-price basis come to approximately twice the amortized estimates that assume owned infrastructure, so the method must be stated when comparisons are made (on a separate series of estimates, the training compute cost of the largest models doubles in approximately eight months). What matters here is not the level but the growth rate. Growth at 2.4 times per year means, for a state considering entry, that each year by which the moment of entry is delayed more than doubles the capital required. Whereas the development of an oil field 190

was governed by the given facts of geology and reserves, the barrier to entry at M1×C2 is self-amplifying as a function of time. Electricity. Electricity is a small share of the training-cost breakdown at 2–6%, but it operates as a physical constraint rather than as a cost. The AI supercomputer analysis of Epoch AI presents AI cluster performance growing at 2.5 times per year and power demand and cost at approximately 2 times per year, and, on extrapolation, the leading cluster reaching a scale of 2 million chips, tens of billions of dollars and 9 GW in 2030 (it should be noted that this is an extrapolation and not a forecast). This physical quantity connects directly to the problem of a state's electricity grid. The AI Index 2026 notes that China's electricity reserve margin has never fallen below 80%, whereas in the United States transmission grids are strained in regions of data-centre concentration and interconnection queues have become a growth constraint. China's installed generating capacity and its annual additions greatly exceed those of the United States. Of China's countervailing strategy set out in Section 5 — offsetting inferiority in single-chip performance by four means: clustering, electricity, an open-weight strategy, and import-side controls — clustering and electricity make use of precisely this asymmetry in physical constraints. Huawei made an unusual public release of a roadmap in September 2025, setting out a strategy of offsetting the single-chip performance gap through large-scale clustering (CloudMatrix 384 and similar). The fact that electricity is among the requirement levels of M1×C2 is the most concrete manifestation of this paper's divided analogy (Section 3), under which the resource character of AI corresponds in part not only to petroleum but also to electricity. Talent. That 29–49% of total development cost is research and development personnel indicates that M1×C2 is talent-intensive as well as capital-intensive. The distribution of talent is fluid: the AI Index 2026 reports that inflow of AI researchers to the United States fell by 89% relative to 2017 (it should be noted that the definition is an indicator of new inflow), and reports that Switzerland has come to lead on AI researcher density per head of population. Unlike capital, talent crosses borders, and the decision to move is taken at the level of the individual, so state policy instruments reach it only with difficulty. Of the three requirements of M1×C2, talent is the one a state can least directly create. 8.2.3 Concentration Within Producing States — The First Half of an AI Resource Curse For petroleum M1, Sections 4 and 6 reviewed the resource-curse literature. As a well-established finding, the present consensus is a conditionality: it is not resource endowment itself that is a curse, but the interaction of "resources × quality of institutions" that determines the branching (Mehlum, Moene & Torvik, 2006). There is also a criticism that the curse disappears when the resource variable is re-measured by endowment (Brunnschweiler & Bulte, 2008), and the curse thesis is not supported as an unconditional law (this contestedness is retained in this paper's exposition as well). Where a curse does appear, the mechanisms are: the two channels of Dutch disease — the resource-movement effect (movement of labour and capital into the booming sector) and the spending effect (real 191 appreciation through higher income) — squeezing the lagging sector, manufacturing (Corden & Neary, 1982); and the rentier-state channel, in which external rents flow directly to the government so that the circuit of accountability through taxation is lost (Mahdavy, 1970; Beblawi & Luciani, 1987), producing political pathologies. This paper formalizes whether this structure transfers to AI as two propositions, one for the producing side and one for the receiving side. Two disciplines are imposed in the formalization. First, the modality is changed from possibility to the indicative. A possibility claim that a distortion "may operate" cannot be rejected by a counterexample — "may operate" does not become false even if it is never once observed. To display a falsification condition while employing an unfalsifiable modality is a substantive breach of the methodological discipline of this series. Second, outcome variables are excluded from the control variables. An institutional condition such as "cultivation of local transformation capability" is the same construct as the outcome-side construct the proposition seeks to explain, and a regression controlling for it eliminates the association in question by definition — executed as instructed, it becomes a test that necessarily returns "no association." The two propositions below take a form in which these two points are corrected. Proposition 6a (Curse of Concentration in Producing States) The higher the concentration of capital and high-skilled talent in the AI sector in a country or region, the lower the rate at which technical personnel requirements are met in other sectors and the lower the ratio of capital investment in them (a talent version of Dutch disease). Falsification condition If, after controlling for three variables — the scale of fiscal transfers, the intensity of enforcement of competition policy, and the number of places in higher education — the above association is not estimated, this proposition is rejected. Variables concerning transformation capability must not be included among the control variables (those are outcome-side indicators). Proposition 6b (Extractive Distortion in Receiving States) The larger the scale of computing infrastructure (data centres) attracted to a region, the lower the ratio of local value added, employment and inter-firm transactions to the quantity of tax preferences, electricity, land and water granted (the "granting of drilling rights"). Falsification condition If, after controlling only for a binary variable recording whether or not a local value-capture clause is stated in the terms of attraction, the above association is not estimated, this proposition is rejected. 192 The gain from the split is plain. The former single proposition carried the reservation "depending on institutional conditions," and that reservation permitted the response "the institutional conditions were different" against any counterexample. Proposition 6b reduces that reservation to a single observable binary variable: whether or not a local valuecapture clause is stated in the terms of attraction. The presence or absence of the clause can be confirmed by a third party from the text of the attraction agreement. The escape route is closed, and in exchange the proposition is for the first time open to testing. As stated in 8.4.2, the materials for designing that test already exist. On Proposition 6a — concentration within producing states — the facts observable at present are set out here while avoiding assertion. First, geographic concentration. On the AI Index 2026, of approximately 285.9 billion dollars of private AI investment in the United States in 2025, the State of California accounted for 218 billion dollars (over 75%). While concentration between states (the United States–China bipolarity) is much discussed, a still more extreme geographic concentration exists within the producing state. Second, concentration among firms. The structure in which frontier developers number approximately ten, a majority of them United States firms, means that the strategic capability of a state depends on the judgments of a small number of private firms. Third, the drawing-in of factors. As the breakdown of training costs indicates, frontier development absorbs capital and high-skilled talent in large quantities. The conditions under which the talent version of the resource-movement effect of Dutch disease — a channel in which research and technical personnel are drawn away from other sectors and the technical capability of those sectors thins — may operate are, at least structurally, in place. These observations do not, however, demonstrate that the association stated in Proposition 6a holds. What is observed is the level of concentration, not its association with the rate at which technical personnel requirements are met and the ratio of capital investment in other sectors. Because Proposition 6a is written in the indicative, it is rejected if that association is not estimated — no response of the form "the institutional conditions were different" is available. The control variables are limited to three — the scale of fiscal transfers, the intensity of enforcement of competition policy, and the number of places in higher education — and variables concerning transformation capability are excluded from control because they are outcome-side indicators. The contrast within the petroleum period — Norway, which while at the same M1 position converted petroleum revenue into a permanent stock through the design of fiscal rules and a fund, and Venezuela, which lost production itself through institutional destruction (Section 6) — showed one thing only, that institutions are the branching condition; but that insight is incorporated into the design of the test not by weakening the modality of the proposition but by the specification of the control variables. That is, the form of the question is whether the association between concentration and the contraction of other sectors remains even after controlling for three institutional variables: fiscal transfers, competition policy, and places in higher education. At the level of policy discussion, the corresponding institutional instruments at M1×C2 are (i) circuits for distributing and reinvesting concentrated gains, (ii) a framework of competition policy and supervision addressed to the concentration of power in a small 193 number of firms, and (iii) talent policy maintaining technical capability in other sectors; these correspond almost item for item with the three control variables. Assessment of whether these instruments are in fact effective is an empirical question beyond the scope of this paper. 8.2.4 Industrial Policy in the Frontier Phase — The Limits of the Developmental- State Literature The question whether a state can organize entry to M1×C2 is a direct field of application for the knowledge accumulated over half a century by the developmental-state literature (Section 4). Johnson's (1982) "plan rationality," Amsden's (1989) formulation of "exchanging subsidies for discipline against performance standards," Wade's (1990) "governed market," and Evans's (1995) "embedded autonomy" are all historical evidence that a state can organize transformation capability. For a state designing industrial policy in the age of AI, the question takes the form: what does a developmental state of the age of AI exchange for discipline — the allocation of compute, access to data, or obligations of talent development? The same literature has, however, repeatedly demonstrated its limits. First, the developmental state is optimized for the catch-up phase and is ill-suited to exploration at the technological frontier. Callon (1995) analysed the malfunction of large consortia such as the Fifth Generation Computer project and showed that coordinative industrial policy loses effect once catch-up is complete. Second, the allocation of support does not necessarily flow to high-growth industries: Beason & Weinstein (1996) concluded that the support of the Ministry of International Trade and Industry (subsidies, low-interest lending, protection) was in fact allocated to low-growth industries, and that evidence that targeting raised total factor productivity growth is thin (this paper does not take up the individual allocation amounts and draws only the direction of the conclusion). Third, under financial liberalization and the multilateral trading system, policy instruments such as credit allocation, tariffs and restrictions on foreign capital have contracted. That discussion of a "new industrial policy" has become active in recent years in the context of economic security is a fact, but effectiveness in the frontier phase remains contested. The implication is twofold for a state considering entry to M1×C2. For following the frontier — reaching a level of capability that has already been attained — there is room for developmental- state-type mobilization of resources to function (the classical configuration of advantages of backwardness and institutional substitutes, Gerschenkron, 1962). For pioneering the frontier — reaching a capability no one has yet attained — catch-up-type institutions cannot in principle help. The coexistence of "a twenty-three-fold investment gap with a very nearly vanished performance gap" seen in 8.2.1 may also be read as the observational expression of this dichotomy: the cost of following collapses, and the cost of pioneering soars. A policy that sets "a domestically produced frontier-class model" as its objective without making explicit which of the two it is aiming at mixes two entirely different tasks into a single budget line. 194 Institutional requirements, failure modes, and state examples. The institutional requirements of M1×C2 are (i) continuous mobilization of capital growing at 2.4 times per year (whether from private capital markets or from state finances, in either case a longterm commitment), (ii) electricity policy and siting policy permitting gigawatt-class electricity supply and grid interconnection, (iii) attraction and retention of research talent at world level, (iv) access to the supply network — advanced semiconductors, manufacturing equipment, high-bandwidth memory, and (v) distributive and competition policy managing the distortions of concentration. The failure modes are (a) divergence between announced and executed amounts (the scale of the conception runs ahead alone, while construction and operation are delayed by constraints of electricity, land and talent), (b) appearance of the curse of concentration discussed in the preceding item (Proposition 6a), (c) attrition in which, through Frontier Descent, a capability attained at great expense drains to C1 within a short period so that the investment is not recovered, and (d) dependence on a single point in the supply network becoming the target of a chokepoint exercised by another state (see 8.3). The state examples centre on the two poles of the United States and China, with the Gulf states attempting entry to these poles by means of capital and electricity (8.4.3) and France, which is attempting to hold a position on the axis of a single frontier-class laboratory, each forming a peripheral case. 8.3 M2×C2 — Managed Transformation: A Structure in Which Guaranteed Access Decides Survival 8.3.1 Weaponized Interdependence and Chokepoints The theoretical framework for understanding the structure faced by transformation states at Tier C2 has already been formulated in international political economy. Farrell & Newman (2019) showed that global economic networks — the SWIFT payments network, the internet backbone, dollar clearing — converge on a hub-and-spoke structure by virtue of efficiency, and that the state with jurisdiction over the hub obtains two forms of power: the panopticon effect, an informational advantage obtained by observing the information flowing through the hub, and the chokepoint effect, coercion through cutting off access to the hub. The exercise of this power requires domestic institutions (jurisdiction and regulatory capacity), and the targeted state responds by insulation or by building alternative networks. The "overuse dilemma" — that anticipation of weaponization induces decoupling and investment in domestic substitutes — was noted by the original article itself. This framework has been widely used in analysing United States export controls on advanced semiconductors bound for China as an exercise of jurisdiction over a small number of nodes: extreme ultraviolet (EUV) lithography equipment, design software, and advanced GPUs. Specific to AI, a body of compute-governance research treating compute, cloud and foundation-model APIs as new hubs is in formation (this assessment is not settled). 195 Translated into the vocabulary of the nine-cell theory of this paper, the chokepoint effect means that another state holds condition (i) of Proposition 4 — security of procurement. As seen in the previous section, at M2 in Tier C1 condition (i) was given and the binding constraint was concentrated in condition (ii), complementary assets. At M2 in Tier C2, condition (i) itself becomes a variable. However thick the complementary assets held, if procurement stops, transformation stops. This is the fundamental difference dividing the transformation cells of Row C1 and Row C2. What transformation states of the petroleum period experienced in 1973 was precisely this structure: in fiscal 1973, Japan took an extreme producing-zero, transformation-specialized form, with petroleum accounting for 75.5% of domestic primary energy supply and dependence on the Middle East accounting for 77.5% of crude oil imports (Energy White Paper 2023). The structural vulnerability that "Transformation Models do not hold the upstream" recurs at Tier C2 of AI. 8.3.2 Three Stages of Export Control and the Turn to a Transactional Mode The exercise of the chokepoint effect is not an abstract possibility; it has unfolded as an actual policy series since 2022. This series is a typical case of a state treating compute as a strategic resource, and at the same time a case showing that the mode of governance may change fundamentally with a change of administration. The facts are set out here in chronological order. First stage (2022). On 7 October 2022 the Bureau of Industry and Security (BIS) of the United States Department of Commerce released an interim final rule on export controls toward China (87 FR 62186, published in the Federal Register on 13 October of that year). It imposed licence requirements on exports to China of advanced computing chips, supercomputer end uses, and semiconductor manufacturing equipment, and also regulated support by "United States persons" for advanced semiconductor development in China. A composite criterion of chip-to-chip interconnect bandwidth and computational performance was introduced as a performance threshold, and the NVIDIA A800/H800 were Chinabound derivatives designed so as to remain outside that threshold. On the ground that the scope of application is drawn not by end use (military diversion) but by a level of capability exceeding a specified performance threshold, this rule has been discussed as a qualitative turn in post-Cold War export controls. The motive for the measure, and its appropriateness, are not objects of judgment in this paper. Second stage (2023). On 17 October 2023 BIS revised the rule (effective in November of that year), removing the interconnect-bandwidth criterion and changing to criteria of "total processing performance (TPP)" and "performance density," thereby closing the route around the controls represented by the A800/H800 and similar parts. The set of controlled destinations was expanded to arms-embargoed countries other than China, and circumvention via third countries was also addressed. It was in response to this revision that NVIDIA developed the H20, L20 and L2 for the China market. Third stage (January 2025). On 13 January 2025, at the end of the Biden administration, BIS announced the "Framework for Artificial Intelligence Diffusion," and it was published 196 in the Federal Register as an interim final rule on 15 January of that year (90 FR 4544). It was scheduled to take effect on 15 May of that year. Its content divided the countries of the world into three tiers — Tier 1 (the United States and approximately 18 allied countries, unrestricted), Tier 2 (the great majority of other countries, with licence allocations under country-by-country and firm-by-firm quantitative ceilings), and Tier 3 (China, Russia and other arms-embargoed countries, presumption of denial) — and placed under comprehensive licensing both exports of advanced AI chips and transfers of the weights of advanced models. It was the first framework in history for the worldwide allocation and control of AI capability itself. As stated in Section 7, both the breadth of this framework's reach and the difficulty of its implementation appear in the fact that it brought model weights, a non-rival good, within the objects of control. Rescission and the turn to a transactional mode. The BIS of the Trump administration announced the rescission of the rule on 13 May 2025, two days before it was to take effect. The BIS press release criticized the rule as bureaucratic, as impeding innovation, and as treating allied countries as second-tier. On the same day BIS published three items of guidance: guidance stating that use of Huawei Ascend chips may constitute a violation of United States export controls, guidance on the risks of using United States-made AI chips for training Chinese AI models, and guidance on supply-chain due diligence. As an important qualification, the rescission removed the three-tier framework, but the controls on China under the 2022 and 2023 rules remained in place unchanged. The rescission does not signify relaxation toward China. A comprehensive single replacement rule had still not been promulgated as of August 2026, and in its place individual transactional agreements became the framework in fact. The course of events surrounding the H20 shows what this transactional mode amounts to. Around 9 April 2025 the United States government notified NVIDIA that a licence would be required for exports of the H20 to China (the AMD MI308 likewise), and NVIDIA disclosed in an SEC filing of 15 April of that year an expected charge of approximately 5.5 billion dollars (the amount actually recorded in the quarter was approximately 4.5 billion dollars). This amounted in effect to an embargo. On 14–15 July of that year, however, NVIDIA announced that it had obtained an assurance from the United States government that licences for sales of the H20 to China would be granted, and the policy turned about. In early August of that year it was reported that NVIDIA and AMD had reached an unprecedented agreement to obtain export licences in exchange for remitting 15% of revenue from sales to China to the United States government (first reported by the Financial Times, with other papers following on 10–11 August of that year), and the President himself acknowledged the existence of the agreement. In directly linking export licensing to payment into the treasury, this has been treated as emblematic of "transactional export control," and its consistency with the constitutional prohibition on export taxes has been questioned by legal scholars. Further, on 8 December 2025 a policy was stated of approving sales to China of the H200 (a higher-performance part of the Hopper generation than the H20) on condition that the 197 United States government take 25% of revenue, and on 14–15 January 2026 the Department of Commerce formalized the framework. The licensing review policy for advanced computing chips bound for China turned from a presumption of denial to case-by-case review where security and verification conditions are met, and reporting indicates that a quota on the order of 75,000 units was set (interpretations of the quota differ across reports, and it is not cited here as an aggregate). Exports of the Blackwell generation to China remain prohibited. Control from the side that withholds purchase. Between 2025 and 2026 the initiative in regulation shifted in part. The Cyberspace Administration of China summoned NVIDIA at the end of July 2025 over allegations of location-tracking and remote-shutdown functions in the H20, and thereafter Chinese authorities were reported to have directed major technology firms to halt purchases and cancel orders of the H20 and similar parts; NVIDIA was reported in late August of that year to have instructed component suppliers to suspend H20 production. Into 2026, even where the United States side has lifted restrictions on the H200, a situation has continued in which the National Development and Reform Commission on the Chinese side reviews imports case by case and requires a demonstration of the reasons why domestic substitutes cannot be used; as of 19 August 2026 it is reported that approximately 10,000 units each (approximately 13% of the quota) had been delivered to ByteDance and Tencent, with the remainder awaiting approval. The configuration is one in which the tap is held in Beijing rather than in Washington. Three lessons for transformation states at M2×C2 can be extracted from this four-and-ahalf- year series. First, conditions of access may be determined by political transaction and not by legal rule alone. That an institutional framework of three-tier licence allocations was rescinded before it took effect and replaced by individual agreements on revenue shares shows that the predictability on which a transformation state must rely lies at the level of negotiation rather than at the level of institutions. Second, chokepoints may exist in both directions. When export-side licensing and import-side review operate at the same time, the transformation state must pass through two gates. Third, the overuse dilemma has materialized. As Farrell & Newman (2019) foretold, anticipation of weaponization induced investment in domestic substitutes: China's efforts at semiconductor self-sufficiency (SMIC's demonstration of 7 nm volume production by DUV multipatterning, and the plan under which Huawei is said to double shipments of the Ascend 910C to approximately 600,000 units in 2026), and the simultaneous appearance of sovereign AI initiatives in many countries, are its consequence. The need for a sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6) discussed in Section 13 is derived from precisely this structure. 8.3.3 The Economics of In-Alliance Transformation (Friend-Shoring) The existence of chokepoints forces one structural choice on a transformation state: either to position itself within the alliance sphere of the supplying state and thereby obtain a continuing guarantee of access, or to lower the risk of cut-off by insulation and self- 198 sufficiency. The former is here called in-alliance transformation. The design of Tier 1 in the AI diffusion rule of January 2025 (the United States and approximately 18 allied countries, unrestricted) was the first attempt to define institutionally the domain of such inalliance transformation. Even after rescission, the substantive drawing of that domain is being reconstituted through individual intergovernmental agreements — the United States–UAE AI Acceleration Partnership (concluded 15 May 2025) is one example. The economics of in-alliance transformation carries two prices. The first price is policy autonomy. A continuing guarantee of access is, as a rule, conditioned on alignment with the export-control regime of the supplying state: compliance with re-export controls, restriction of transfers to third countries, exclusion of particular firms from the supply network. That the resolution of a dual United States–China posture and alignment with the United States were reported to have been conditions when the UAE's G42 received a 1.5 billion dollar investment from Microsoft in April 2024 is a concrete instance of this price. To enter in-alliance transformation is a transaction in which security of procurement is obtained in exchange for narrowing the choice set of one's own technological diplomacy. The second price is position within the hierarchy. An alliance sphere is not a community of equals; it has a hierarchy in the order and the terms of supply. That the three-tier framework placed allied countries in the unrestricted tier and imposed quantitative ceilings on the great majority of other countries itself made visible the hierarchy internal to the sphere (it is emblematic that the criticism of this design as treating allied countries as second-tier was cited among the official reasons for rescission). The benefits of in-alliance transformation are, on the other hand, clear. With condition (i) of Proposition 4 institutionally guaranteed, the transformation state can concentrate resources on condition (ii), the formation of complementary assets. As the case of Singapore in the petroleum period shows — with zero crude oil reserves it became one of the world's leading refining hubs, with refining capacity of over 1.5 million barrels per day (Section 6) — a transformation state whose procurement is secure may capture value through a logic of its own: location, institutions, agglomeration. As stated in the previous section, however, of the three bulwarks that protected the refining margin in petroleum — asymmetry of transport costs, capital specificity, and locational rent — what partially remains in AI at Tier C2 is only transformation tied to physical assets. This point explains the special character of the position of semiconductor suppliers discussed next. 8.3.4 Transformation States Within the Supply Network — Physical Process as the Remaining Bulwark The most robust position within M2×C2 is held not by transformers of AI capability itself but by transformers of the physical processes for producing AI capability. The manufacture of advanced semiconductors and the supply of high-bandwidth memory are physical processes to which the zero-marginal-cost replication of software does not extend, and they retain bulwarks resembling those of petroleum refining: specificity of installed capital, cumulative process knowledge, and the supply network of equipment and materi‐ 199 als. Of the complementary-asset indicators confirmed in Section 7, this position is the largest-scale instance of physical-interface intensity (Proposition 4(b)). The strategic implication of this position is two-sided. On one hand, holding a physical process gives a transformation state strong bargaining power. On the other hand, concentration on a small number of nodes is precisely the definition of a chokepoint, and the state concerned is placed where it may become either target or instrument. The fact that export controls have been analysed as an exercise of jurisdiction over a small number of nodes — EUV lithography equipment, design software, advanced GPUs (8.3.1) — means that transformation states within the supply network are positioned to receive pressure both from the jurisdiction of the supplying state and from the countermeasures of the demanding state. The Republic of Korea is attempting to build its own AI capability while retaining its position as a semiconductor supplier: the Lee Jae-myung administration (inaugurated in June 2025) designated becoming one of the "three great AI powers" as the highest item of national policy, pledged public and private AI investment on the scale of 100 trillion won during its term, and inaugurated a National AI Strategy Committee under the direct authority of the President on 11 September 2025. A National AI Computing Centre is being advanced in Gwangju, and the re-tender of September 2025 set out targets of securing at least 15,000 advanced GPUs by 2028 and at least 50,000 in the public and private sectors combined by 2030 (with the condition relaxed to a private share of at least 70%, establishment of a special purpose company in the first half of 2026, and a target opening in 2028). There are also reports that large-scale supply from NVIDIA to the Korean government and firms was announced at the time of APEC in October 2025, but because the timing and firmness of supply are unclear this is treated as announcementbased information. The research and development budget for domestically produced AI semiconductors is 252.8 billion won for fiscal 2025. At the same time the Republic of Korea has made "sovereign AI" development a matter of national policy, adopting a method of selecting and supporting the foundation models of several firms as national representatives. As an attempt by a transformation state within the supply network to move toward a position in capability while retaining its position in supply, this is treated in detail in Section 14. 8.3.5 Regulatory Power as a Separate Axis — A Third Path for Transformation States Without Production Among the complementary assets a transformation state at M2×C2 may hold there is, besides physical processes and domain assets, one further candidate: regulatory power and standard-setting power. The "Brussels effect" formulated by Bradford (2020) shows that, under five conditions — market size, regulatory capacity, stringent standards, inelastic targets, and indivisibility — the European Union may export global standards through de facto effects operating via firm behaviour and de jure effects operating via legislative emulation in other countries (the General Data Protection Regulation is the typical instance). As a theorization of a channel of state value capture that does not run 200

through production, this mechanism forms a second axis alongside the network-power theory of Farrell & Newman (2019). Applicability to the field of AI is contested. The EU AI Act (Regulation (EU) 2024/1689) entered into force on 1 August 2024, with the prohibitions applying from 2 February 2025, the obligations concerning general-purpose AI from 2 August 2025, and the high-risk provisions scheduled to apply in 2026–2027 (discussion of simplifying application proceeded in 2025–2026 and a partial postponement of the timing of entry into application has been proposed, so the position is fluid as of 2026). The position that a Brussels effect operates argues that requirements of risk management and transparency may have de facto effects (Siegmann & Anderljung, 2022). The sceptical position argues that divisibility, the weakness of internal industry, and regulatory competition between the United States and China will limit diffusion of the General Data Protection Regulation type. This paper does not adjudicate this dispute and confines itself to recording that applicability is contested. What can be said with more confidence is the structural fact that regulatory power is not a substitute for productive power. The European dilemma that research on digital sovereignty and strategic autonomy has repeatedly noted is a divergence between regulation and capability: regulatory power is present, but the industrial base — cloud, semiconductors, foundation models — is absent (Broeders, Cristiano & Kaminska, 2023). In the context of Row C2 this divergence has a concrete consequence. So long as access to the very capability that is the object of regulation is subject to the discretion of the supplying state, regulatory power is one card in a negotiation but is not a means of satisfying condition (i) of Proposition 4 by one's own resources. European initiatives on compute sovereignty — InvestAI, announced in Paris on 11 February 2025 (a mobilization conception on the scale of 200 billion euros in total, of which 20 billion euros is allocated to a new fund for AI gigafactories), and the AI Factories of EuroHPC (a first group of seven sites on 10 December 2024, six on 12 March 2025, and six added on 10 October 2025, for a total of nineteen) — are attempts to close this divergence. As for the AI gigafactories, however, although an expression-of-interest call in June 2025 drew 77 proposals from 60 sites in 16 member states, a funding cooperation framework between the European Commission and the European Investment Bank was put in place on 22 October 2025, and an amendment to the EuroHPC Regulation on 16 January 2026, the formal tender is scheduled for the summer of 2026 and construction of the first facility for 2027; as of August 2026 not one site has been selected. For France as well, a package of AI-related private investment totalling 109 billion euros was announced at the AI Action Summit of February 2025, but this is an announced figure representing a bundle of commitments by multiple parties, and no verification on a construction or execution basis exists. As stated in Section 14, the divergence between announced and executed amounts is large in this field, and assessment of capability must be conducted using electricity actually in operation and computational performance. The criterion for treating regulatory power as a complementary asset is identical to that of Section 7: which of the four ex ante observable indicators specified by Proposition 4 it 201 loads on, and at what level. What requires attention here is that regulatory authority itself does not load directly on any of the four indicators. Regulatory authority is a power to constrain the conduct of other parties; it is neither the exclusivity of the data used by the applications of the state concerned, nor the share of the physical interface in their revenue, nor the number of statutory certifications those applications hold, nor the number of language-specific and jurisdiction-specific standards required of them. As the note to Definition 3 states, a position that obtains value through the supply of rules and verification has no source of value in a relation to the resource, and therefore lies outside the domain over which the National Value Models quantify; it is treated not as a position on the nine cells but as a position concerning the rules of the cells. Regulatory power converts into the transformation value of M2 only where conformity with regulation generates value added as a transformation process — the processes of audit, certification, and assumption of liability. This is nothing other than the third indicator of Proposition 4, (c) institutional embeddedness: the presence and number of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations, and liability-assumption contracts held by the application concerned. That is, regulatory power converts into transformation value not in itself, but only so far as it cultivates domestically the industries — conformity assessment, audit, assurance — that raise the institutional embeddedness of the state's own application firms. Making regulation and cultivating the industry that turns regulation into value are separate policy tasks. Read against the principle that the four indicators of Proposition 4 measure the endowment of assets that keep integration cost high for the producer, the reason for this distinction is likewise plain: making a regulation does in itself raise the producer's integration cost, but who receives that raised cost is determined by where the conformity-assessment industry is located. Institutional requirements, failure modes, and state examples. The institutional requirements of M2×C2 are (i) diplomacy that institutionalizes security of procurement — alliance agreements, long-term contracts, supply-guarantee clauses; (ii) domestic legislation and enforcement capacity permitting alignment with the export-control regime (the condition on which a supplying state places another within its alliance is often the control capacity of the state so placed); (iii) complementary assets that the producer cannot readily replicate — physical processes or exclusive domain assets; and (iv) alternative routes in the event of cut-off, including a sovereign minimum guarantee level that provides for retreat to the open-weight models of Tier C1 (Definition 6, Section 13). The failure modes are (a) severance of business continuity through unilateral change in the conditions of access, (b) excessive cession of policy autonomy (narrowing the state's own industrial and diplomatic choice set more than is necessary in order to maintain standing within the alliance), (c) single-point specialization within the supply network becoming the target of a chokepoint, and (d) neglecting the formation of complementary assets in reliance on guaranteed access, and so falling into the same compression as the wrappers of Tier C1. The state examples are the Republic of Korea and Taiwan, which hold positions within the supply network; the UAE, which has positioned itself within the domain of in-alliance 202 transformation; and Europe, which holds regulatory power while lacking productive power (Section 14). 8.4 M3×C2 — Frontier-Utilizing States: The Fragility of Advanced Utilization Without Sovereignty 8.4.1 Three Vulnerabilities — Change of Conditions, Price, and Data Backflow M3×C2 is the position of states that inject frontier capability deeply into domestic processes of production and daily life while performing neither production nor transformation of that capability at home. Compared with M3 in Tier C1 (Section 7), the value of this cell is large: utilization employing the most advanced capability permits deeper transformation of operations than utilization employing C1 capability. At the same time, however, this cell structurally carries three vulnerabilities. The first is the risk of change in the conditions of access. As the policy series traced in 8.3.2 indicates, the conditions of access to C2 capability may change within a short period through policy shifts by the supplying state's government and commercial judgments by supplying firms. A three-tier licence allocation rescinded two days before taking effect, an embargo lifted after four months, and a lifting held up by review on the import side — all occurred on a time scale of several months to a year. The more deeply a utilizing state's operational processes are built into frontier capability, the more directly variation on this time scale bears on the continuity of management and of public administration. The amplification of this vulnerability into the system as a whole — dependence × supplier concentration × outage correlation — is treated in the theory of AI outage in Proposition 7 (Section 13). The second is price control. Whereas in Tier C1 prices continue to collapse, in Tier C2 suppliers are few and prices are determined not by competition but by supplier discretion and the tightness of demand. Moreover, demand for C2 capability becomes more inelastic in the short run the more it is built into operational processes. A paradox is intrinsic to this cell: deepening utilization is itself a decline in bargaining power over price. Of the two channels separated in Section 7.4.3, channel (β), the rent channel, is specific to C2. What can be spoken of in Tier C1 is only channel (α), the cost channel — that the part paid abroad as consideration for the input is not retained domestically — since a competitive price converged to marginal cost contains no rent. In Tier C2, by contrast, supplier concentration is high and demand is inelastic, so the consideration contains a markup over marginal cost, and that excess portion is a transfer of rent to the producing state. The magnitude of (β) is a function of the product of supplier concentration and the price elasticity of demand, and the paradox intrinsic to this cell — that deepening utilization makes demand inelastic and thereby enlarges (β) — is superimposed here. Measurement cannot be conducted on total external payments, since payments being proportional to volume of use holds in a competitive market as much as in a monopolistic one. (β) is estimated as the product of the gross margin (markup) of foundation-model suppliers and 203 cloud suppliers and the share of C2 capability in the state's procurement (falsification condition of Proposition 5). The third is data backflow. Usage data, operational data, and contextual information from the field, generated in the course of utilization, may flow back into the improvement of the supplier's capability. This becomes a problem because, as seen in Section 7, exclusive data endowment (Proposition 4(a)) — the share of data used by the application concerned that cannot be obtained from the public web and is generated only from the operational processes of the transformer concerned — is the first item among the complementary- asset indicators of a transformation state. If the deeper the utilization the more the state's own complementary assets are transferred to the supplier, then the deepening of M3×C2 proceeds while undermining the foundation of M2. The non-rivalry of data (Jones & Tonetti, 2020) means that this transfer is not accompanied by loss of the original asset — data do not diminish through use — but loss of exclusivity lowers the indicator of Proposition 4(a) exactly as defined, since once data flow back to the supplier they are no longer a part "generated only from the operational processes of the transformer concerned." The practical advantage of this indicator's being an ex ante observable quantity appears here. Whether data backflow has impaired complementary assets can be determined without waiting for the success or failure of the business, by examining contractual terms and the actual routes taken by data. This is why rules on cross-border data flows, contractual terms on secondary use of usage data, and institutional designs requiring processing within the state's own territory are the core policy tasks of M3×C2. These three vulnerabilities are collectively termed advanced utilization without sovereignty. This position is at the leading edge in the level of capability while being wholly subordinate, in the conditions of that capability, to the decisions of others. If a counterpart in the petroleum period is sought, it is close to the position of a country that assembled its economy on the consumption of petroleum alone, holding neither refining nor production; but the asymmetry is deeper. Petroleum could be owned once bought, whereas C2 AI capability is in many cases supplied not as ownership but as continuing access, so that the effect of cut-off is immediate. Petroleum could be stockpiled in barrels, whereas AI capability depreciates even when stockpiled (Proposition 8, Section 13). It is this asymmetry that calls for the new institutional concept of a sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6). 8.4.2 Extractive Distortion in Data-Centre Attraction — Proposition 6b The most direct means chosen by states at M3×C2 to make up for the absence of sovereignty is the domestic attraction of computing infrastructure. If data centres are built within one's own territory, physical compute exists domestically, and "sovereignty" appears to be secured at least in a geographic sense. As Proposition 6b asserts, however, the larger the scale attracted to a region, the lower the ratio of local value added, employment and inter-firm transactions to the quantity of tax preferences, electricity, land and water granted. 204 The empirical basis of this distortion has already accumulated in relation to pre-AI datacentre attraction. On a series of reports by the United States subsidy watchdog Good Jobs First, more than 30 states in the United States have established sales-tax exemptions and similar measures for data centres, and in at least 10 states the annual loss of tax revenue exceeds 100 million dollars. Many states do not even report the amount of the loss, and a survey of April 2026 also notes how many states go unreported. State subsidies have been reported to reach as much as 2 million dollars per job in some cases, which is the obverse of the fact that a data centre generates permanent post-construction employment only on the order of a few tens of positions. The structure of the distortion can be organized in four points: (1) very large capital investment and property taxation (which nonetheless tends to be reduced or exempted), (2) little permanent employment, (3) a large burden of electricity, water and land (pass-through of electricity charges to residents, cooling water), and (4) automatic accumulation of tax preferences (a sales-tax exemption swells with every server refresh). The thinness of local value capture has become a policy issue in several jurisdictions: the Commonwealth of Virginia (Loudoun County, one of the world's largest agglomerations), Ireland (where data centres consume over 20% of electricity and new construction has been restricted), and the moratoria in the Netherlands and Singapore. This accumulation supplies the design of the test of Proposition 6b directly. What Proposition 6b requires is an estimation taking the scale attracted as the explanatory variable and the ratio of local value added, employment and inter-firm transactions to the quantity of tax preferences, electricity, land and water granted as the dependent variable, controlling only for the binary variable of whether or not a local value-capture clause is stated in the terms of attraction. The contrasts Good Jobs First has compiled state by state — amounts of tax preference, employment counts, electricity burden — correspond one for one with the variable structure of this estimation: the granted side is measured as sales-tax exemption amounts, property-tax reduction amounts, and quantities of electricity and water granted; the local-capture side as permanent employment counts, amounts ordered from local firms, and value added within the region. Only one additional task is required: to read the text of each attraction agreement and code as a binary whether or not a local value-capture clause — requirements on the quality of employment, reservation of a compute-access allocation for local firms, obligations of collaboration with research institutions, obligations of joint investment in electricity infrastructure — is stated. This is work that can be carried out from published agreement documents and legislative materials, and if a corpus of attraction agreements across states and countries is built, Proposition 6b is immediately open to testing. Limiting the control variables to one is deliberate. The more control variables are added, the more available becomes the ex post explanation that "the association was not observed because the institutional conditions controlled for were doing the work," and the further the proposition moves from falsification. A variable such as "cultivation of local transformation capability" in particular is the same construct as the dependent variable of Proposition 6b, so that the moment it is controlled for the association disappears by 205 definition. Narrowing to a single binary variable is a choice that buys falsifiability at the cost of statistical refinement in the test, and this paper makes that exchange consciously. This empirical work connects to the scholarly lineage on AI extractivism. Couldry & Mejias (2019) formulated the concept of "data colonialism," arguing that human life itself is appropriated as data by a logic isomorphic with the historical colonial appropriation of land, resources and labour (the sequel, Mejias & Couldry, 2024, updates the argument for the age of AI). Crawford (2021) analysed AI as an "industry of extraction," depicting a fourfold extraction of minerals, water and electricity, low-wage labelling labour, and data. As these are a body of literature with strong normative positions, this paper uses them in combination with empirical data (Good Jobs First and similar). Reformulated in this paper's framework, extractive data-centre attraction is an arrangement that takes the outward form of M1 without obtaining the value of M1. That computing infrastructure exists on the national territory does not mean control over the output of that infrastructure, namely capability. What the attracting state obtains is construction demand, a small number of operational jobs, and tax revenue (after reductions); what it gives up is electricity, land and water, and often long-term tax preferences. Capability itself is held by the supplying firm, and the transformation value from that capability arises elsewhere. In the vocabulary of petroleum this corresponds to an arrangement that permits drilling while holding neither royalties nor refining — the condition that staple theory (Watkins, 1963) called the "staple trap," in which the formation of forward linkages and final-demand linkages fails. What Proposition 6b asserts is an average association, not a determinism under which any individual attraction must end as extractive. Seen from the policy side, the means that create the branching have already been identified: (i) whether mechanisms of local value capture — quality of employment, compute-access allocations for local firms, collaboration with research institutions, joint investment in electricity infrastructure — can be stated in the terms of attraction; (ii) whether there is fiscal discipline that measures and publishes the cost-effectiveness of tax preferences; (iii) whether there is a tariff and regulatory design under which the burden of electricity and water is not passed through to residents; and (iv) whether there is an industrial policy connecting the attracted compute to the state's own M2 (transformation) and M3 (utilization). Of these, (i) is precisely what is specified as the sole control variable of Proposition 6b, so that the theoretical position and the policy instrument coincide. The lesson of the conditionality reached by petroleum resource-curse research (Mehlum, Moene & Torvik, 2006) applies here isomorphically — but that lesson is taken up not by weakening the modality of the proposition to "may," but by reducing it to an observable variable, the presence or absence of a clause. It is the comparison between jurisdictions that wrote a local value-capture clause into the attraction agreement and those that did not that constitutes the testable form of this lesson. 206 8.4.3 Entry by Capital and Electricity — Asset Conversion in the Gulf The most explicit cases of an attempt to move from the position of M3×C2 to M1×C2 using capital and electricity as levers are the petroleum-producing states of the Gulf. This is an attempt by an M1 (Resource-Producing Model) of the petroleum period to convert its assets into an M1 (Resource-Producing Model) of the AI period, and is of theoretical interest as a cell transition in the National Value Models. In the UAE, Abu Dhabi's G42 received a 1.5 billion dollar investment from Microsoft in April 2024 (with the resolution of a dual United States–China posture and alignment with the United States reported as conditions), and on 15 May 2025 the United States–UAE AI Acceleration Partnership was concluded. It is reported that a 5 GW-class UAE–US AI Campus will be built in Abu Dhabi and that a framework will permit the UAE to import up to 500,000 advanced chips per year (the figure for the allocation is report-based, and confirmation in official documents has not been established). Stargate UAE, announced on 22 May 2025, is the first deployment of "Stargate" outside the United States, by OpenAI, Oracle, SoftBank, NVIDIA, Cisco and G42; the first phase of 200 MW (the initial portion of a 1 GW cluster) is scheduled for completion in the third quarter of 2026, and as of December 2025 the parties announced that construction was proceeding as planned. This is positioned as the flagship project of the United States-led conception of sovereign AI provision packages. In Saudi Arabia, HUMAIN was established under the Public Investment Fund by royal decree of 12 May 2025 (with the Crown Prince as chairman). It is a state-owned AI company handling data centres, cloud, an Arabic-language LLM, and applications on a full-stack basis. A strategic partnership with NVIDIA was announced on 13 May 2025, covering several hundred thousand GPUs over the following five years, with the first phase put at 18,000 GB300 Grace Blackwell units and 500 MW class. Partnerships have been concluded in parallel with AMD, Qualcomm and AWS. Reporting in August 2025 indicated that two data centres in Riyadh and Dammam (over 100 MW in total) were scheduled to enter operation between the beginning of 2026 and the second quarter, with the stated objectives of becoming "the world's third AI provider by 2030" and making "Saudi Arabia a global exporter of AI capability." The cases of these two Gulf states show three things. First, the existence of a strategy of national asset conversion from energy resources to compute. The two assets held by petroleum M1 — capital (sovereign wealth) and inexpensive electricity — directly satisfy two of the three requirements of AI M1×C2 (8.2.2). Second, that this conversion is inseparable from entry into the domain of in-alliance transformation. Under export controls, the acquisition of large volumes of advanced chips itself depends on the policy judgment of the supplying state, so that entry is not possible without diplomacy even where capital and electricity are present. The two Gulf states were the largest beneficiaries of the rescission of the AI diffusion rule in May 2025, and from the United States side they are also objects of sphere-formation through "chip diplomacy." Third, that the remaining requirement levels — talent, and the formation of transformation value within the state itself — 207 remain as unresolved tasks. The logic of extractive distortion set out in 8.4.2, under which the installation of computing infrastructure does not automatically mean the acquisition of transformation capability, operates in altered form even where, as in the Gulf, the attracting state builds with its own capital. That is, even where the facility is owned, if the design of the capability running on it and the value capture of applications remain abroad, the asset conversion is not complete. This assessment concerns matters currently in progress, and a definitive determination lies outside the scope of this paper (Section 14 organizes the constraints and positions of individual states descriptively). Institutional requirements, failure modes, and state examples. The institutional requirements of M3×C2 are (i) multiplicity of supply and switchability (avoiding concentration of dependence on a single supplier or single platform), (ii) design of contracts and regulation on cross-border data flows and secondary use, (iii) an accounting of dependence in critical processes and operational readiness of alternative procedures in the event of cut-off (the third element of Definition 6), and (iv) the design and maintenance of a sovereign minimum guarantee level (Section 13). The failure modes are (a) suspension of critical operations through unilateral change in the conditions of access, (b) entrenchment of the (β) rent channel under price control, (c) dilution of the state's own complementary assets through data backflow, (d) attraction of computing infrastructure ending as extractive (Proposition 6b), and (e) as an overreaction to these, a wholesale orientation toward selfsufficiency — "all of it domestic" does not hold on either cost or capability grounds, and as Proposition 8 (Section 13) shows, held capability depreciates without Continuous Construction. The state examples are the group of advanced economies whose utilization of frontier capability is deep while holding no production (the European states, Japan, and the utilization side of the Republic of Korea), together with the two Gulf states attempting entry through capital and electricity. 8.5 Summary of Row C2 — National Strategy as the Design of Dependence Table 5 summarizes the analysis of the three cells of Row C2. Table 5. Cell-by-cell summary of Row C2 (Frontier Tier) Item M1×C2 Frontier-producing states M2×C2 Managed transformation M3×C2 Frontier-utilizing states Defining features Produces the frontier of capability itself. Approximately ten suppliers, of United States and Chinese nationality in a bipolar structure. The realization path is exclusive (Definition 3) Procures under export controls and transforms. Guaranteed access is a precondition of the business Injects frontier capability deeply into domestic processes. Holds neither production nor transformation Mode of value Sale of capability, setting of the conditions of access, Transformation value (Definition 5, an accounting quant‐ Amplification of domestic productivity through utiliza‐ 208 Item M1×C2 Frontier-producing states M2×C2 Managed transformation M3×C2 Frontier-utilizing states rents along the supply network. In addition, influence over other states ity). Its attribution is a function of physical-interface intensity and exclusive data endowment (Proposition 4(a), (b)) tion. Outflow runs through channel (β), the rent channel, in addition to channel (α), the cost channel (specific to C2, Proposition 5) Whether the petroleum analogy holds Holds to a high degree (production of a strategic material and managed trade). But a consequence of investment rather than of reserves Holds in part (the vulnerability of transformation states in 1973 is isomorphic). Stockpilability does not transfer Holds (the dependence structure of consuming countries). But because it is continuing access rather than ownership, cut-off is immediate Institutional requirements Mobilization of capital at 2.4 times per year / GWclass electricity and grid / research talent / access to the supply network / management of concentration Diplomacy institutionalizing security of procurement / legislation and enforcement for export-control alignment / complementary assets scoring high on the four indicators of Proposition 4 / alternative routes Multiplicity of supply / rules on cross-border data flows and secondary use / accounting of dependence and operational readiness / sovereign minimum guarantee level Failure modes Divergence between announced and executed amounts / curse of concentration (Proposition 6a) / non-recovery of investment through descent / dependence on a single point in the supply network Unilateral change in the conditions of access / excessive cession of policy autonomy / becoming the target of a chokepoint / compression through reliance Suspension through change of conditions / outflow through the (β) rent channel under price control / dilution of exclusive data endowment through data backflow / attraction ending as extractive (Proposition 6b) Principal state examples The two poles of the United States and China. France at the periphery; the two Gulf states attempting entry The Republic of Korea and Taiwan (positions within the supply network), the UAE (inalliance transformation), Europe (divergence between regulatory power and productive power) The European states, Japan, the Republic of Korea (utilization side), and states attracting computing infrastructure The summary of Row C2 can be put in four points. First, the central variable of Row C2 is not capability but the conditions of access. In each cell of Row C1 the centre of gravity of value was seen to move from AI capability itself to complementary elements — the circuit for recapturing spillovers, complementary assets, absorptive capacity. In Row C2, in addition to this, the conditions of access themselves become a first-order strategic variable. This one point — that condition (i) of Proposition 4 becomes a variable — generates every difference between Row C1 and Row C2. 209 Second, Row C2 does not close within domestic policy. Whereas the institutional requirements of Row C1 were closed within domestic institutions — talent, data, quality, clarity of regulation — the institutional requirements of Row C2 include diplomacy, alliance and security in every cell. Alignment with an export-control regime, supply-guarantee clauses, position within a sphere: these cannot be handled in the vocabulary of industrial policy. As stated in Section 7.5, this contrast is not an observed regularity but is deduced from the definition. Definition 1 specifies strategic character as the degree to which three properties of a general-purpose input hold — (ii) dependence on supply from abroad, (iii) that interruption of supply degrades national economic output within a short period, and (iv) that the level of holding and access governs capability gaps between states — and includes in the definition that strategic character differs by level of capability. Proposition 2 specifies the level at which those properties hold for each tier: at C2, (ii) and (iv) are high, and (iii) rises as a function of dependence. Institutional requirements are the set of institutions needed to relax the constraints a state faces at a given tier. That (ii) is high means that supply depends on actors abroad and on jurisdictions abroad, and the means of relaxing that constraint cannot be created in domestic law — only external institutions touch this constraint: alliance agreements, longterm contracts, supply-guarantee clauses, and alignment with an export-control regime. That (iv) is high means that the level of access governs capability gaps between states as such, so that negotiation over the conditions of access becomes inseparable from a state's capability policy. That (iii) rises with dependence means that the deeper utilization goes, the greater the damage from interruption of supply, so that preparation against cut-off becomes a question of security. That the institutional requirements of Row C2 have diplomacy as their axis is a consequence of the levels at which these three properties hold, not an empirical regularity discovered by inspecting the nine-cell table. In Row C1 the signs are reversed. At a tier where all three properties are low, there is no external constraint to be relaxed, and no room for variables of diplomacy, alliance and security to enter the institutional requirements. The institutional requirements of Row C1 therefore close within domestic institutions (Section 7.5). The contrast between the institutional requirements of the two rows is thus derived in both directions from a single definition: the tier-dependence of strategic character. This is also a response to the most natural objection to the nine cells, namely that they are merely the mechanical product of two convenient trichotomies with no theoretical inevitability in the product. The two axes are defined over the same theoretical object, and the difference in institutional requirements between rows is deduced from their product. One reason for establishing Layer Zero (national structure) anew in this series is likewise that variables at this level — the external conditions a state holds at tiers where strategic character is high — distribute the operating conditions of the three layers below (Proposition 11, Section 17). Third, all three cells of Row C2 carry channels of distortion. As Propositions 6a and 6b formalize, in producing states the concentration of capital and high-skilled talent lowers 210

the rate at which technical personnel requirements are met and the ratio of capital investment in other sectors, and in receiving states the scale attracted is associated with a low ratio of local value added, employment and inter-firm transactions per unit granted. Both propositions are written in the indicative and are rejected if the association is not estimated. The conclusion reached over half a century by petroleum resource-curse research — that the curse lies not in resources but in the interaction of resources and institutions — is taken up for AI as well, but the manner of taking it up is not to weaken the modality of the proposition; it is to make the institutions explicit as control variables. In Proposition 6a three variables — fiscal transfers, competition policy, and places in higher education — play that role; in Proposition 6b the binary variable of the presence or absence of a local value-capture clause does so. The way of putting the question as "is AI production good or bad" is mistaken, but what should be put in its place is not the reservation "it depends on institutional conditions"; it is a test of which institutional variables leave the association standing when controlled for. Fourth, Row C2 is bound to Row C1 by a relation of time. Through Frontier Descent, today's C2 capability becomes tomorrow's C1 capability. This dynamic has a different implication in each cell: for M1×C2 a shortening of the window for recovering investment; for M2×C2 a prospect that present constraints on procurement will be relaxed in future; and for M3×C2 an expectation that part of present dependence will dissolve automatically in future. Policy judgment in Row C2 must therefore always include an estimate of how long a given constraint will last. A conception of holding every capability domestically may contain the error of committing resources even to capabilities that approach zero cost if descent is awaited; conversely, a posture of entrusting everything to descent leaves undefended the parts that do not descend — capability at the frontier, physical processes in the supply network, and operational dependences on which cut-off takes effect immediately. The design of the sovereign minimum guarantee level developed in Section 13 is nothing other than an attempt to institutionalize that estimate. What has become clear through this section is that national strategy in Row C2 is not "escape from dependence" but the design of dependence. Self-sufficiency in C2 capability is open only to the small number of states that satisfy all of capital, electricity, talent and supply network. For every remaining state the question is one of allocation: for which capabilities, to what degree, with whom, and under what guarantees, is dependence to be assumed. The next section examines a case in which this structure is further altered by the grade of the externalities of capability — governance in the event that Tier C3 (the Critical Tier) arrives. As is confirmed repeatedly, C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category as of the time of writing, and whether and when it arrives is an empirical question. 211 9. The Nine-Cell Matrix III — Row C3 (Critical Tier) and Critical-Tier Governance 9.1 The Discipline of Discussing an Unrealized Anticipatory Category This section treats the final row of the Nine-Cell Matrix, C3 (the Critical Tier). The descriptive discipline of this paper is stated first. C3 is, as Definition 2 (Section 5) provides, an unrealized level of capability exceeding the frontier of the time in question by more than a specified threshold. The definition is given by capability distance alone and contains neither market structure nor form of governance. What institutional treatment the governments of states accord to capability at that level — whether they keep it within the frame of market regulation and export control, or move it into the framework of a nonproliferation- type regime of verification, restriction of holders, and stabilization negotiations — is not part of the definition; it is the dependent variable asserted by Proposition 2b (Regime-Class Transition, Section 5). This distinction is maintained throughout this section. On that basis, C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category as of the time of writing (August 2026). Whether capability at the C3 level arrives, and if so when, is an empirical question to which this paper has no answer, and this section does not predict its arrival. Nor does this section motivate its argument by exaggerating capability; it does not enter at all into technical detail bearing on weaponization, and discusses matters only at the level of institutions and governance. Every claim in this section is to be read in the form of a conditional design argument: if C3 arrives, then under what institutional conditions do what consequences follow. Why discuss an unrealized category now? The answer is given by the history of nuclear control itself. As the Baruch Plan of 1946 (9.2.6) shows, the feasibility of conceptions for the international control of dangerous capabilities decays as capability diffuses. The conception of international ownership of nuclear material was on the negotiating table only for the brief period during which the technological monopoly of the United States persisted, and died with the Soviet nuclear test of 1949. An institution that begins its design only after arrival has been confirmed loses the premises of its design before the design is complete. This is the reason for discussing C3 before arrival, not as "an age that arrives" but as "a contingency that is constructed" (Proposition 10). At the same time this paper acknowledges that this manner of discussion itself carries a risk. Discourse that takes an unrealized threat as the ground of institutional design may be diverted into a self-fulfilling justification of an arms build-up. This point is left to the examination of objections in Section 20, but the fact that this section is written throughout in conditional form and contains no assertive prediction of arrival is a stylistic choice made in order to minimize such diversion. 212 The theoretical standing of this section should be made explicit here. Although Row C3 is juxtaposed with the other two rows in the composition of the Nine-Cell Matrix, its theoretical standing is not equivalent. Whereas Rows C1 and C2 are devices for classifying positions of states that are actually observed, Row C3 is a theoretical limiting value (a boundary condition) — a thought experiment for examining which of the devices used in this paper's analysis of C1 and C2 continue to hold, and which cease to hold, when the scale of capability tiers is extrapolated to its upper end. Its function as a limiting value is threefold. First, it shows how far the principal devices of this paper — the three properties of strategic character (Definition 1), the Discipline of Analogy (Proposition 1), and the Verification Anchor (Proposition 9) — withstand extrapolation. Second, it gives the contour of the upper end of the Feasible Region (Definition 18 and Proposition 29, Section 6): the claim that the set of positions a state may occupy narrows as the capability tier rises acquires content only once what remains and what does not remain at the upper end is described. Third, it supplies the limiting case of the institutional time constant (Proposition 26, Section 17), since this is the domain in which the rate of change of the object of control exceeds the rate of institutional decision by the greatest margin. The reader should therefore not read the length of this section as an indicator of importance or of probability of arrival. This section is long because treating the limit requires the comparative work of dissecting five regimes — nuclear, chemical, biological, missile, and cyber — and not because this paper suggests that the arrival of C3 is near. What this section presents is not a prediction but a conditional thought experiment at a limiting state, and its consequences are asserted only in the form: if C3 arrives, then under what institutional conditions do what consequences follow. This positioning operates again in Section 9.8, where the scope of Proposition 9 is explicitly limited. One further methodological clarification is required. Given that Row C3 differs in ontological standing from the other rows of the Nine-Cell Matrix, why place it in the same matrix? The reason is that the boundary between C2 and C3 is of the same kind as the C1/C2 boundary — not a fixed technical constant but a threshold placed on the same scale of capability distance from the frontier (Definition 2, Section 5). The boundary moves over time as a function of lag width and the level of capability that uses demands, and the same mechanism by which Frontier Descent keeps pushing the lower edge of C2 down into C1 also operates on the relation between the upper edge of C2 and C3. In this sense Row C3 is not a heterogeneous domain outside the matrix; it is the upper end of the same scale. This choice of definition has a methodological reason that this paper should make explicit. The "arrival" of C3 appears intuitively as the composite of two processes: the arrival of capability and the arrival of a treatment. The realization of a level of capability and the point at which the governments of states begin to treat that level as a security question of the same class as the nuclear — introduction of state control measures, classification as military secrets, initiation of negotiations on international control — proceed empirically at the same time and influence one another. It would be possible to take this composite 213 directly into the definition and to specify C3 as "the level of capability treated by the governments of states as of the same class as the nuclear." That specification is not, however, compatible with the discipline this paper imposes on itself. When the referent of a definition depends on institutional acts, the category loses its exogeneity as an independent variable. The moment a policy document re-classifies some capability, C3 would have "arrived" even if capability had not changed at all, and the proviso that "whether and when C3 arrives is an empirical question" would be correct as to capability but not as to the arrival of the category. Moreover, if the arrival of the category is a consequence of policy discourse, then that discourse includes papers such as this one: this paper would become a constituent of the object of its own analysis, and the analysis would close self-referentially. The purification of Definition 2 to capability distance is a measure for cutting this loop. Capability distance is defined independently of the acts of governments (Section 5 gives the indicators for its operationalization), and the treatment accorded by governments becomes a dependent variable predicted by Proposition 2b. Through this separation, (a) the reflexivity by which the discourse of this paper would constitute the "arrival" of C3 is cut; (b) the treatment accorded by governments changes from a consequence of the definition into a testable prediction; and (c) the discussion of self-fulfilment risk taken up in Section 20 obtains a clear object, confined to the side of treatment. It may be added that the capability thresholds defined by corporate frontier safety frameworks (Section 9.12) are attempts at de facto boundary-drawing by private actors; in the framework of this paper these too are not part of the definition, but belong to the objects of observation as a prior instance of the change of treatment predicted by Proposition 2b — a classification carried out by private firms rather than by states. The composition of this section is as follows. First, the nuclear management regime is dissected not as a "finished product" but as a bundle of design elements, and the conditions under which each element functioned are extracted (9.2). Critical-tier governance is then defined (9.3, Definition 7). Next, regimes for the control of dangerous capabilities other than the nuclear — chemical, biological, missile, and cyber — are compared as a control group, and the difference between regimes in which a verification mechanism was established and those in which it was not is extracted (9.4); the general proposition so obtained is applied to AI, and the transferability of each element of the nuclear regime is determined item by item (9.5, Table 7). The state of compute-governance research, which is decisive for those determinations, is examined (9.6), and the rate at which that anchor depreciates over time is formalized as the Half-Life of the Verification Anchor (Definition 9) and integrated with Proposition 8 (9.7). A failure mode distinct from depreciation over time — the possibility that the referent of the anchor is itself lost — is then examined along three paths; the scope of the AI-application part of Proposition 9 is explicitly limited; and the means of verification that would remain if the anchor were voided are examined (9.8). Next, the structural differences that arise when the stability theory of nuclear deterrence is transferred to AI are discussed through a critical examination of the recent MAIM proposal (9.9). The three cells of Row C3 — M1×C3, M2×C3, M3×C3 — are then described con‐ 214 ditionally (9.10), and Propositions 9 and 10, the theoretical core of this section, are presented (9.11). Finally, the present state of international AI governance in 2023–2026 is placed on the time axis of the history of the nuclear regime (9.12). 9.2 An Anatomy of the Nuclear Management Regime The nuclear management regime is not a single institution. It is a composite in which elements differing in period of establishment and in principle — the Treaty on the Non-Proliferation of Nuclear Weapons (NPT), a verification agency (IAEA safeguards), remote verification of a test ban (the CTBT), a supplier cartel (the NSG and others), bilateral armscontrol treaties, and a minimal norm agreed between leaders — have been layered over more than half a century. As a premise for discussing transferability to AI, each element is examined separately for why it functioned, and on which physical and political conditions its functioning depended. From this subsection onward, the evidence-grade discipline common to this series (well established, supported by evidence, contested, grey literature) is applied at the same level as in Section 4. The description of the nuclear regime mixes well-established findings that can be confirmed directly in primary sources — treaty texts, membership, the institutional composition of verification technologies — with interpretations carrying supporting evidence widely shared in the scholarship, such as the causes of the failure of the Baruch Plan or the conditions for MAD, and with findings that are contested, such as quantitative estimates of the causal effect of peaceful-use cooperation on weapons programmes, or the MAIM controversy. To discuss transferability while leaving this distinction blurred would be to misrepresent the evidentiary basis of the determinations. In what follows, the grade is stated in the prose at the head of each subsection or at the relevant passage. 9.2.1 The Bargain Structure of the NPT — The Grand Bargain and the Price of Asymmetry The first half of this subsection — the structure of the treaty text and the state of membership — is well established and can be confirmed directly in the treaty text and in published materials of the depositary states and international organizations. The "grand bargain" interpretation in the second half, and the assessment of its legitimacy costs, are interpretations carrying supporting evidence widely shared in the scholarly literature, and are not placed on the same footing as established fact. The Treaty on the Non-Proliferation of Nuclear Weapons (NPT) was opened for signature on 1 July 1968 and entered into force on 5 March 1970. Indefinite extension was decided at the Review and Extension Conference of 1995, and the states parties number 191. This is the widest membership of any arms-control treaty in history, but India, Pakistan and Israel are not parties, and North Korea declared withdrawal in 2003 (the legal validity of which is disputed). The treaty defines "nuclear-weapon States" as those that manufac‐ 215 tured and exploded a nuclear explosive device before 1 January 1967 (the United States, Russia, the United Kingdom, France and China) and all others as "non-nuclear-weapon States," making permanent a two-tier structure. The NPT is conventionally explained in terms of three pillars. First, nonproliferation (Articles I–III): nuclear-weapon States do not transfer, non-nuclear-weapon States do not acquire, and non-nuclear-weapon States accept IAEA safeguards. Second, disarmament (Article VI): all states parties undertake to negotiate in good faith on effective measures relating to nuclear disarmament. Third, peaceful uses (Article IV): peaceful use is stated to be an "inalienable right," and the exchange of equipment, materials and information is promoted. The standard interpretation understands this structure as a "grand bargain" in which non-nuclear-weapon States renounce nuclear weapons in return for the nuclearweapon States' undertaking of an obligation to negotiate disarmament and to support peaceful uses. What matters is the fact that this grand bargain has gone on paying a legitimacy cost for half a century. Against non-performance of the disarmament obligation of Article VI, the advisory opinion of the International Court of Justice in 1996 applied legal pressure by reading that article as an obligation not merely of effort but "to bring to a conclusion negotiations in good faith." The critique of "nuclear apartheid" (Singh, 1998) directed the question of legitimacy at the very structure that divides holders from non-holders by reference to a particular date, 1 January 1967 (this paper does not judge the merits of that critique, and records the fact that the regime has continued to be accompanied by controversy over legitimacy). And the adoption of the Treaty on the Prohibition of Nuclear Weapons (TPNW) in 2017 (in force 2021) is an instance in which dissatisfaction with stagnation in the disarmament pillar flowed out of the NPT as norm formation elsewhere. The structural lesson extracted from this is as follows. A regime that freezes the acquired position of prior holders and prohibits acquisition by later comers obtains wide membership only by writing into its text compensating benefits for the later side (support for peaceful uses) and obligations on the prior side (negotiation of disarmament); but non-performance of those obligations remains as a debt requiring the constant resupply of legitimacy. Any conception of an AI regime that combines a freeze on states holding frontier AI with support for the diffusion of benefits to developing countries necessarily inherits the price of this asymmetry (Section 9.10.1 and Proposition 10). 9.2.2 IAEA Safeguards — Verification Is Anchored in the Accountancy of Material The International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) was established in 1957, and the model text of the comprehensive safeguards agreement under Article III of the NPT is INFCIRC/ 153 (1972). Its statement of purpose indicates the character of the verification system directly. The objective of safeguards is the "timely detection" of diversion of significant quantities of nuclear material from peaceful uses, and "deterrence of such diversion by the risk of early detection"; the object of verification is not the intent of a state but the flow and inventory of declared nuclear material. 216 The institutional composition of the verification technologies described below is well established and can be confirmed directly in published IAEA documents (INFCIRC/153, INFCIRC/540 and others). The composition of verification technology can be organized at the institutional level into the following four layers. First, nuclear material accountancy. States submit records and reports for each material balance area, and the IAEA independently verifies them. By testing whether the difference between book inventory and physical inventory lies within a statistical tolerance, the question of diversion is reduced to an audit based on conservation of mass. This is the "measure of fundamental importance" in safeguards. Second, containment and surveillance: seals and surveillance cameras give assurance that material has not moved in the interval between one accounting and the next. Third, environmental sampling: traces of activity inconsistent with declarations are detected from trace samples inside and outside facilities. Fourth, the Additional Protocol (model INFCIRC/540, approved by the Board of Governors in May 1997): it provides for complementary access to undeclared activities and locations and for expanded declarations. The third and fourth layers were born of failure. In 1991, the discovery of the covert nuclear programme in Iraq showed that inspection of declared facilities alone cannot uncover undeclared activity. Through the "93+2 Programme" that followed, the Additional Protocol extended safeguards from verification of "the correctness of declarations" to verification of "the completeness of declarations." The verification regime was not completed in one stroke according to a blueprint; it evolved through cases of failure. The conditions under which IAEA verification functions reduce to three points: (a) that weaponization physically requires a certain quantity of a specific material; (b) that this material can be measured, sealed and tracked; and (c) that the production routes (enrichment, reprocessing) are concentrated in large-scale, observable industrial facilities. That is, "verification is anchored in the accountancy of material." It is because of this anchor that verification is not a subjective assessment of a state's good faith but a quasi-accounting, quasi-technical operation of "reconciling records with physical quantities," which makes political neutrality easier to maintain. The central question when transfer to AI is discussed is therefore: what, in AI, is the measurable anchor corresponding to nuclear material? Compute governance (9.6) can be organized as an attempt to nominate advanced semiconductors and large-scale compute as that candidate. 9.2.3 Arms Control Theory and Crisis Stability — Betting on Observability, Not Trust The theoretical basis of arms control lies in the classic formulation of Schelling & Halperin (1961). They distinguished arms control from disarmament and formulated its objectives as (1) reducing the probability of war, (2) limiting damage should war occur, and (3) reducing the burden of armaments in peacetime. The premise is the recognition that a common interest exists even between adversaries — above all, the avoidance of a war neither side wants. Schelling (1960) further formulated the mechanism of crisis instability that he 217 called "the reciprocal fear of surprise attack": the fear that the other side may strike first is itself an incentive to strike first. The stability of deterrence does not obtain automatically. Wohlstetter (1959) showed that deterrence holds only where retaliatory forces can survive a first strike, and made clear that what is at issue is not the "quantity" of armaments but their "composition" — vulnerable forces are a destabilizing factor, survivable retaliatory forces a stabilizing one. Jervis (1978) presented a framework in which the severity of the security dilemma is determined by two axes: the distinguishability of offence from defence, and whether offence or defence has the advantage. The world in which offence and defence cannot be distinguished and offence has the advantage is the most unstable. This framework serves as the baseline for the comparison with AI in Section 9.9. The conditions for the state called mutual assured destruction (MAD) are, as a well-established finding, organized in the following three points. (a) The existence of survivable retaliatory capability (second-strike capability) on both sides. (b) The limitation of defences, that is, the maintenance of mutual vulnerability — the ABM Treaty of 1972 institutionalized this. Jervis (1989) argued that acceptance of mutual vulnerability is itself the consequence of the nuclear revolution. (c) Verifiability with respect to the other side's capabilities and deployments — treaties in the SALT/START series provided for non-interference with national technical means of verification, and START institutionalized on-site inspection and data exchange. The lesson extracted from this comes to this: arms control is not an institution for "trusting the other side" but an institution for "betting on the other side's rationality and observability." If verifiability declines, arms control loses its theoretical support. That the low observability of capability in AI is the greatest obstacle to transferring this body of theory is set out in detail in Section 9.9. The institutional repertoire left by arms control is not confined to treaties and inspections. The ladder of confidence-building measures (CBMs) — direct lines of communication between leaders to reduce misperception in a crisis, advance notification of exercises and deployments, data exchange, obligations of notification in the event of accidents — has functioned as a means of raising crisis stability at levels short of binding disarmament. The implication of this ladder is that the stabilization function is not an all-or-nothing choice. Even where complete mutual verification is impossible, the institutionalized circulation of information that mitigates worst-case estimates of the other side's intent has independent stabilizing value. Candidate counterparts in AI — advance notification of largescale training, mutual notification of serious incidents, exchange of evaluation results, a standing line of communication for crises — can be conceived as a ladder whose lowest rung is the minimal-norm agreement between the United States and China seen in Section 9.12, and can be considered separately from the feasibility of a binding treaty. What the history of arms control teaches is an order: regimes did not always begin at the topmost rung (treaty plus inspection) but were layered up from confirmation of a minimal common interest. 218 9.2.4 The CTBT Verification System — Remotely Detectable Physical Signatures The treaty facts and the composition of the international monitoring system in this subsection are well established and can be confirmed in the treaty text and in published materials of the CTBTO Preparatory Commission. The Comprehensive Nuclear-Test-Ban Treaty (CTBT) was adopted by the United Nations General Assembly on 10 September 1996 and opened for signature on 24 September of that month. Entry into force requires ratification by all 44 states listed in Annex 2, and it has still not entered into force. The United States, China, Egypt, Iran and Israel have signed but not ratified; India, Pakistan and North Korea have not signed; and Russia revoked its ratification in November 2023. Nonetheless, the Preparatory Commission for the treaty organization (CTBTO PrepCom) has built and operated the verification system in advance, realizing a form rare in institutional history in which verification infrastructure is in operation before entry into force. Its International Monitoring System (IMS) will comprise, when complete, 321 monitoring stations and 16 laboratories, 337 facilities in all, of which approximately 90% were operating and transmitting data in real time as of 2026. There are four detection technologies, all remote and non-intrusive: seismic monitoring, which captures the vibrations of underground nuclear tests; hydroacoustic monitoring, which uses the propagation of sound in water; infrasound monitoring, which detects very low frequency sound in the atmosphere; and radionuclide monitoring, which detects radioactive particulates and noble gases in the atmosphere and thereby establishes the nuclear character of an explosion. Data are aggregated at the International Data Centre in Vienna and distributed to all states parties. The IMS detected all six nuclear tests conducted by North Korea between 2006 and 2017, which is taken as a demonstration of the system's effectiveness. The reason CTBT verification holds is plain. The prohibited act (a nuclear explosion) necessarily generates a large-scale signature that cannot be concealed as a matter of physical law — seismic waves and radionuclides — and this is remotely detectable from beyond national borders. The existence of a remotely detectable physical signature made multilateral verification possible without intrusive inspection. Conversely, the designability of a verification regime depends on "the physical inevitability of the signature emitted by the violating act × the sensitivity of the detection technology." Large-scale training in AI has indirect signatures — electricity consumption, data-centre construction, chip procurement — but lacks an unavoidable physical signature corresponding one to one with the act, as a nuclear explosion does. That this difference is the central difficulty of AI verification is made explicit in the determination table of Section 9.5. 9.2.5 Supplier Regimes — The Cartel That Sustained Effectiveness Outside the Treaty The effectiveness of nuclear nonproliferation has been sustained not by the treaty (the NPT) alone but by a framework of export controls operated by a small number of supplier 219 states. The Zangger Committee, established in 1971 as an informal group coordinating the interpretation of the export conditions in Article III(2) of the NPT, prepared a "trigger list" of items whose export should be conditioned on the application of safeguards (approximately 39 participating states). The Nuclear Suppliers Group (NSG) was established in 1975, with the "peaceful nuclear explosion" test conducted by India in May 1974 as its direct occasion. That India's explosive device used material derived from a Canadiansupplied research reactor and United States-supplied heavy water prompted supplier states to strengthen controls, as an instance in which support for peaceful uses had been diverted into proliferation. The NSG now has 48 participants, has guidelines in two parts covering nuclear-specific items and dual-use items, and agreed in 1992 to make acceptance of comprehensive safeguards a condition of supply to non-nuclear-weapon States. On the other hand, the exception granted for India in 2008 is an instance of the tension between the consistency of the regime and geopolitical interests. For conventional arms and dual-use items, the Wassenaar Arrangement was established in 1996 as the successor to the Cold War-era Coordinating Committee for Multilateral Export Controls (COCOM). It is non-directed, targeting no particular country; decisions are left to the national discretion of participants; and it has no legally binding force. The years of establishment, numbers of participants and composition of the guidelines of the above regimes are well-established findings confirmable in the published documents of each regime. The lessons that follow, by contrast, are interpretations carrying supporting evidence. First, the working part of proliferation control has been carried not by universal treaties but by cartel-type export controls among the small number of states holding chokepoints in the means of production. Second, this structure already has an analogue in AI. United States controls on exports of advanced semiconductors to China from October 2022 onward, and the coordination of Japan and the Netherlands, can be organized as an advance implementation of NSG-type "supply chokepoint control" in the absence of a treaty (Sections 5 and 8). It differs structurally, however, in that the NSG controlled tangible objects — materials and equipment — whereas in AI the intangibles of model weights and algorithms may be replicated and may leak. This difference is reflected in the determinations of Section 9.5. 9.2.6 The Baruch Plan and Atoms for Peace — Two Lessons The institutional history of nuclear control is best understood by referring in pairs to the consequences of two early conceptions. The first is the failure of the Baruch Plan. On the basis of the Acheson–Lilienthal Report of March 1946, the United States representative Bernard Baruch proposed to the United Nations Atomic Energy Commission on 14 June 1946 a conception in which nuclear materials and nuclear activities would be transferred to the ownership and control of an international authority (the International Atomic Development Authority), violations would be met with sanctions not subject to a veto, and the United States would thereafter dispose of its nuclear weapons — in that order. The Soviet Union refused to accept inspection first

and the surrender of the veto, and countered with a proposal requiring United States disposal first; the negotiations failed, and the Soviet nuclear test of 1949 brought the conception of international control to an end. The course of the negotiations and the fact of their breakdown are well-established findings confirmable in primary sources, but the attribution of causes of the failure is interpretation, and the following three points are presented as standard assessments carrying supporting evidence widely shared in the literature on nuclear nonproliferation history, not as established causal findings. (a) At a time when a technological monopoly is short-lived, a proposal that "the monopolist internationalizes while retaining its advantage" appears to later comers as a fixing of that advantage and is not accepted. (b) Sovereign resistance to verification and enforcement mechanisms (the veto question) is the dead point of conceptions of international ownership. (c) The later the timing of the proposal — the more capability has diffused — the lower the feasibility of international control. This is the most important historical reference point in assessing "CERN for AI"-type conceptions of international joint development and international control. The second is the twin character of Atoms for Peace. In his address to the United Nations General Assembly on 8 December 1953, President Eisenhower of the United States proposed a conception of pooling part of the world's nuclear material in an international agency and directing it to peaceful uses, and this led to the establishment of the IAEA in 1957. The United States supplied research reactors, nuclear material and training widely through bilateral nuclear cooperation agreements. What is scholarly settled as a historical assessment, however, is the recognition that support for peaceful uses simultaneously gave states a base of technology, personnel and material, and spread latent capability across the world. The Indian test of 1974 is the emblematic instance. As a quantitative study, Fuhrmann (2012) showed that recipients of peaceful nuclear cooperation have a higher probability of initiating and succeeding in weapons programmes, but this quantitative result is a contested finding. Receipt of peaceful cooperation is not determined at random: there is an endogeneity of selection, in that states with a latent interest in a weapons programme are more likely to seek cooperation, and how much of the estimated association is a causal effect of cooperation is disputed within the quantitative literature. This paper therefore treats Fuhrmann (2012) not as an established causal finding but as a contested but supported finding, and does not make the claim of twin character depend on that quantitative result — the structural fact that the diffusion of benefits and the diffusion of latent capability pass through the same channel can be confirmed independently, from the record of supply after Atoms for Peace and from the circumstances of the NSG's establishment. In a technology where the diffusion of benefits and the diffusion of dangerous capability pass through the same channel, policies promoting diffusion unavoidably generate hedging capability as a by-product. Support for the diffusion of AI capability — such as the commons conception at the New Delhi Summit of 2026 (Section 9.12) — structurally carries this twin character as well. What should be emphasized here is that pointing to the twin character does not mean opposition to diffusion support. What the nuclear history shows is that an institutional design coupling verifica‐ 221 tion (safeguards) to the channel of benefit diffusion — the path from Atoms for Peace to the IAEA — was established as a form of managing the twin character; the question is whether the coupling is present. 9.2.7 Nuclear Hedging and Latency — Regimes Operate on a Continuum The final key to understanding how the nuclear regime operates in practice is the intermediate domain that cannot be captured by a binary of holding and not holding. Levite (2002/03) formulated "nuclear hedging" as a state strategy of maintaining a technical capability to weaponize within a relatively short period while reserving the decision to hold — an intermediate strategy between holding and renunciation. Narang (2022) presented a typology of proliferation strategies and further subdivided hedging. In quantitative work on latency, datasets have been built that operationalize latency as the possession of enrichment or reprocessing capability (Fuhrmann & Tkach, 2015). Japan is cited as the representative case in this context. Japan is the only non-nuclearweapon State that holds both commercial-scale reprocessing and uranium enrichment in an internationally recognized form, and its holdings of separated plutonium amounted to approximately 44.4 tonnes at home and abroad combined as of the end of 2024. The Japanese government has stated a principle of not holding plutonium without a use, and a policy of reducing its holdings. The holdings and the existence of the facilities are established facts confirmable in published statistics, but in the scholarly discussion whether this state of affairs is to be seen as deliberate weapons hedging or as a consequence of peaceful-use policy is contested, and this paper does not enter into an assessment of intent. The scholarly formulation of the concept of hedging itself (Levite, 2002/03; Narang, 2022) is treated as an analytical framework carrying supporting evidence. What this paper uses is only the structural fact that latency as an objective capability — not holding, but a short distance to attainment by virtue of accumulated technology, material and personnel — has been the actual object of the regime's monitoring and operation. This concept transfers naturally to AI. A concept of "AI latency" holds for states and firms that do not hold a frontier model but could reach one within a short period through accumulated compute, personnel and data, and in the vocabulary of the National Value Models this can be theorized as intermediate inventory on the path from resource to transformation. If C3 arrives, the objects monitored under critical-tier governance would be not only "holders" but this entire continuum — an implication developed in Section 9.10.2 (M2×C3). 9.3 The Definition of Critical-Tier Governance From the anatomy above, the functions of the nuclear management regime can be gathered into three: verification, the independent confirmation of declared capabilities and resources (IAEA safeguards, CTBT/IMS); nonproliferation, the restriction of holders and the control of transfers (the NPT, supplier regimes); and stabilization, the reduction 222 of incentives to pre-empt (arms control theory and its implementation in treaties). Definition 7 of this paper is the generalization of these three functions to C3. Definition 7 (Critical-Tier Governance) Critical-tier governance denotes the totality of international control institutions applied to capability at C3 (the Critical Tier), and includes at least the three functions of (i) verification (independent confirmation of declared capabilities and resources), (ii) nonproliferation (restriction of holders and control of transfers), and (iii) stabilization (a structure of deterrence and confidence-building that reduces incentives to pre-empt). This definition contains no claim as to what makes these functions possible (that is the empirical content asserted by Proposition 9). The standing of the final sentence of Definition 7 should be made explicit. This definition does no more than specify by function what critical-tier governance is an institution for doing; it says nothing about under what conditions those functions may be established. This separation is decisive for the argument of this paper. The anatomy of Section 9.2 showed that all three functions of the nuclear regime worked with the support of a physical anchor — measurable nuclear material (verification), chokepoints in tangible goods (nonproliferation), remotely detectable signatures and observable deployments (stabilization). It is possible to proceed from here to the general proposition that "the establishment of verification depends on the existence of a physical correlate," but if that generalization were written into the definition, all subsequent determinations would be self-applications of the definition, and the general proposition could no longer be induced from the distribution of determinations. One cannot induce a criterion of determination from a set of determinations made by applying that criterion. This section therefore separates the claim about conditions of establishment from the definition and takes the order of verifying it independently as an empirical proposition. First, regimes for the control of dangerous capabilities other than the nuclear — chemical, biological, missile, cyber — are observed as a control group, and the difference between regimes in which a verification mechanism was established and those in which it was not is extracted (9.4). The general proposition obtained from that comparison (Proposition 9) is then applied to AI, and as its consequence the transferability of each component of the nuclear regime is determined (9.5). In this order, Table 7 is not the inductive ground of Proposition 9 but the item-by-item consequence of applying Proposition 9 to AI — each an independently falsifiable prediction. 9.4 Comparison of Control-Group Regimes — Chemical, Biological, Missile, and Cyber From the anatomy of the nuclear regime alone, no general proposition about the conditions for establishing a verification mechanism can be obtained, because the sample size 223 is one. The observation of Section 9.2.2 that "verification is anchored in the accountancy of material" is merely a description that is internally consistent within the single case of the nuclear, and does not show that a verification mechanism fails to hold when other conditions are varied. For the claim that the presence or absence of a physical correlate governs the establishment of a verification institution to have empirical content, it is necessary to observe across several regimes that differ only in the presence or absence of a physical correlate and are close in other principal conditions. Fortunately such a control group exists. The international control of dangerous capabilities was attempted not for the nuclear alone but in the chemical, biological, missile and cyber domains as well, with differing outcomes. The basic facts of the four regimes below are all well established and can be confirmed directly in treaty texts, published materials of the institutions, and United Nations documents. 9.4.1 The Chemical Weapons Convention (CWC) — Precursors and Facilities as the Anchor The Chemical Weapons Convention was opened for signature on 13 January 1993 and entered into force on 29 April 1997. The states parties number 193, and implementation is carried out by the Organisation for the Prohibition of Chemical Weapons (OPCW) in The Hague. What matters for this paper is that the CWC is one of the few multilateral armscontrol treaties equipped with a working verification mechanism. States parties declare the chemical weapons, production facilities, development facilities and transfers they hold, and the OPCW verifies the correctness of those declarations on site. On-site activities under the convention are of three kinds: routine inspections verifying declarations; challenge inspections, which may be requested with respect to any location in order to clarify questions of compliance; and investigations of alleged use. The chemicals subject to control are listed in the annex to the convention in three categories — high-risk substances with little peaceful application (Schedule 1), precursors carrying significant risk (Schedule 2), and substances traded in large quantities but retaining risk under the convention (Schedule 3) — and falling within these lists delimits the scope of declaration and inspection (these three categories are the designations of the annex to the convention and have nothing to do with the table numbers of this paper). The reason CWC verification holds is structurally identical to the nuclear case. The controlled act is accompanied by a measurable physical correlate — the quantity of identifiable precursors and the production facilities that handle them. Substances are listed in schedules, quantities are declared, facilities have locations, and inspectors can reconcile records with physical inventory. The operation corresponding to "accountancy of significant quantities of nuclear material" in the nuclear case was established in the chemical case as "verification of declared quantities of scheduled substances and of facilities." The structure of Section 9.2.2, in which verification is reduced to a quasi-accounting operation rather than a political adjudication, is repeated in a second case. 224 9.4.2 The Biological Weapons Convention (BWC) — A Case in Which Only the Treaty Was Concluded, Without an Anchor The contrast case of greatest value to this paper is the Biological Weapons Convention. The BWC was opened for signature on 10 April 1972 and entered into force on 26 March 1975. Its states parties number 187. That is, it has externalities bearing on survival as the nuclear does, an international treaty was concluded as with the nuclear and the chemical, and it entered into force 22 years earlier than the CWC. Nonetheless, to this day the BWC has no verification mechanism. Article VI of the convention provides a route for lodging complaints with the United Nations Security Council, but this route has never been invoked. The Implementation Support Unit established in 2006 provides only administrative support and the operation of confidence-building measures, and has no power of inspection. The absence of a verification mechanism is not the result of nothing having been attempted. The Special Conference of 1994 decided to establish an Ad Hoc Group to negotiate a legally binding verification protocol, and negotiations continued from 1995 to 2001. In 2001 a composite draft assembled by the chair was presented, but in July of that year the United States rejected the draft and the protocol negotiations themselves. The reasons given were that the proposed verification regime would harm legitimate biodefence research and commercial secrets while lacking effectiveness against actors intent on proliferation. The Fifth Review Conference of November–December 2001 reached no agreement over a proposal to terminate the mandate of the Ad Hoc Group, and was suspended until November 2002. After resumption, the states parties were unable to agree on any verification measure, including the protocol. The negotiations broke down, and for a quarter of a century since, no verification mechanism has been established. The immediate occasion of the breakdown was the policy judgment of a particular state, and in that sense it is a political event. What this paper notes, however, is that the content of the reasons given for the refusal points to a technical difficulty not reducible to political position. In the biological domain, militarily significant quantities do not reach the threshold of accountancy, and the equipment used in production cannot be physically distinguished from that of legitimate civilian uses. There is no physical quantity that can be declared, measured and reconciled, corresponding to fissile material in the nuclear case or to scheduled precursors in the chemical case. BWC verification therefore cannot in principle be reduced to "reconciliation of records with physical quantities," and would require of the verifier an evaluative judgment about the nature of the activity being carried out in a facility — precisely the kind of judgment that Section 9.2.2 excluded as a condition of neutrality. The absence of an anchor turns verification into political adjudication and results in an institution unacceptable to either party to the negotiation. 225 9.4.3 The Missile Technology Control Regime (MTCR) — Separating Transfer Control of Tangibles From Verification of Capability The MTCR was established in April 1987 by seven states — Canada, France, Germany, Italy, Japan, the United Kingdom and the United States — as an informal intergovernmental arrangement rather than a treaty. Participants number 35, and it operates through annual plenary meetings and technical experts meetings. The objects of control are complete systems, major subsystems and production facilities exceeding specified payload and range thresholds (Category I), and related materials, technology and components (Category II); participants regulate transfers of these through their own export-control systems. The MTCR presents a third type. The objects of control are tangible, and in that sense a physical correlate is not lacking. But what the MTCR does is only the control of transfers of tangible objects, not verification of capability itself. There is no inspection mechanism and no verification mechanism; the decision whether to permit an export is left to the discretion of each participant; and no mechanism of sanction for non-compliance is provided. The limitation drawn from this is important: the existence of tangible objects is not a sufficient condition for the establishment of a verification mechanism. For verification to hold, the measurable physical quantity must correspond to the capability that is the object of control. In the case of missile technology, the quantity of components transferred does not correspond one to one with the capability held, and so transfer control holds while accountancy of capability does not. This distinction is needed as it stands in AI, so as not to mistake export control of chips (transfer control) and accountancy of compute (verification of capability) for the same institution (the difference between determinations #1 and #3 in Section 9.5). 9.4.4 Cyber Norms — The Complete Absence of a Physical Correlate The fourth contrast case is the United Nations process of norm formation concerning the use of ICTs by states. The report of the Group of Governmental Experts (GGE) in 2015 presented 11 voluntary and non-binding norms of responsible state behaviour, and the GGE report of 2021 was adopted by consensus. The Open-Ended Working Group held in parallel (2021–2025) produced practical results such as the establishment of a directory of points of contact, and in 2025 the establishment of a successor permanent United Nations mechanism was agreed. That is, a forum for dialogue and the statement of norms are being institutionalized. But there is no verification mechanism and no complianceconfirmation mechanism. The norms are voluntary, and no procedure for confirming a violation is provided. The reason is that this domain lies at the extreme value of this paper's variable. The controlled act emits almost no physical signature, and the attribution of the actor is itself disputed both technically and legally. There is in principle no counterpart to the seismic waves of a nuclear test, the mass of nuclear material, or the quantity of a scheduled precursor. There is no physical quantity to declare, no record to reconcile, and the facilities that might be inspected do not correspond to the controlled act. The contrast with the 226 CWC is clear: the one can require declaration of the quantities of substances listed in an annex, while the other cannot even define the physical quantity that would be the object of a declaration. 9.4.5 Extracting the Difference Set side by side, the four regimes show that success or failure of a verification mechanism is not explained by the factors often adduced as explanatory variables. It is not explained by the severity of the threat: the externalities the BWC is directed at controlling bear on survival no less than the nuclear, yet no verification mechanism was established. It is not explained by the existence of a treaty: the BWC entered into force as a binding treaty with 187 states parties. It is not explained by breadth of membership: the number of BWC states parties is second only to the NPT. It is not explained by the amount of negotiating effort: a verification protocol was negotiated for seven years. It is not explained by the newness of the institution: the BWC entered into force 22 years before the CWC. One variable explains it. In the two regimes where a verification mechanism was established — the nuclear and the CWC — the object of control was accompanied by a measurable physical correlate (quantities of fissile material; quantities of scheduled precursors and production facilities). In the two regimes where it was not established — the BWC and cyber — that correlate was absent (dual-use production equipment and pathogens cannot be measured; the act emits no physical signature). The MTCR stands as an intermediate term, showing that while the existence of tangible objects makes transfer control possible, a physical quantity lacking correspondence with capability does not establish verification of capability. The difference between the success of the nuclear and the CWC and the failure of the BWC and cyber is precisely the variable asserted by Proposition 9 (Section 9.11). Through this comparison, Proposition 9 obtains empirical content as a comparative proposition over a population of four regimes, rather than as a selfapplication of the author's own criterion of determination. The limits of this comparison should also be made explicit. First, the sample size is four, which is small as a basis for statistical inference. What this paper may claim is supporting evidence that the presence or absence of a physical correlate covaries systematically with the success or failure of a verification mechanism, not an established causal finding. Second, there is an alternative explanation for the breakdown of the BWC in the domestic politics of a particular state, and this paper does not exclude it — this paper's claim extends only to the level that the difficulty invoked when the political decision was taken was technical, and that this technical difficulty occupies a consistent position across the control group. Third, both cases on the success side are products of the negotiating environment of the Cold War period, and period effects are not controlled for. Because of these limits, falsification conditions (a) and (b) of Proposition 9 are written so as to be open to the observation of further cases: if an effective third-party verification mechanism is established in a regime lacking a physical correlate, or if verification mechanisms systemat‐ 227 ically fail to be established in regimes possessing one, the general part of the proposition is rejected. 9.5 Item-by-Item Determination of Transferability What deserves particular note as the starting point of the controversy over the analogy between the nuclear and AI is a course of events without precedent in nuclear history: the analogy was put forward from the side that would be regulated. On 22 May 2023 the leadership of OpenAI (Sam Altman, Greg Brockman and Ilya Sutskever jointly) proposed, in a blog post entitled "Governance of Superintelligence," inspection, audit, testing for compliance with safety standards, and restrictions on deployment by "an international agency like the IAEA" for AI systems above a threshold, and invoked the historical precedent of nuclear energy explicitly. Secretary-General Guterres of the United Nations stated at a press conference on 12 June 2023 that he welcomed the conception of an IAEA-type AI monitoring agency, and on 18 July of that year the United Nations Security Council held its first formal debate on AI, at which the Secretary-General called for transparency, accountability and oversight. The then Prime Minister of the United Kingdom and others also referred to conceptions of an international body with reference to the IAEA, CERN and the IPCC. The nuclear regime was built from the outside by holders in order to control the danger of proliferation; in AI a reverse path has appeared in which developers themselves call for a framework of control. This course of events has been interpreted in opposite ways — by supporters as evidence of a willingness to accept regulation, by critics as a suspicion of the fixing of entry barriers (regulatory capture) — and this paper takes neither interpretation and confines itself to describing the course of events. The controversy since 2023 over the analogy between the nuclear and AI becomes most productive when read not as a wholesale opposition of for and against but as a problem of item-by-item determination. Representative of the supporting lineage are the "IAEA for AI" proposal from the developers themselves (OpenAI, 2023), compute governance taking compute as the verification anchor (Shavit, 2023; Sastry et al., 2024), and the Superintelligence Strategy, which transfers the framework of nuclear strategy explicitly (Hendrycks, Schmidt, & Wang, 2025). Representative of the critical side are the Chatham House comment holding the application of nuclear governance models to AI to be "nearly impossible" (Afina & Lewis, 2023), commentaries from nonproliferation research institutions cautioning against facile transfer by noting that the IAEA's authority is rooted in the physical properties of nuclear material, and a RAND report systematically organizing the applicability and the limits of lessons from nuclear history. Setting the arguments of the two camps in pairs, the points on which the critical side holds AI to differ from the nuclear reduce to four. First, replicability. Nuclear material diminishes when divided, whereas model weights do not diminish when copied; they are a non-rival good, irrecoverable once leaked, so that the basic safeguards concept of "accountancy of inventory" does not readily hold. Second, private-sector leadership. Nuclear development began as a state monopoly, whereas 228 frontier AI is led by private firms, and the objects of regulation extend to firms and opensource communities rather than sovereign states, which does not fit the party structure of an interstate treaty. Third, the absence of a verification signature. A nuclear test emits an unavoidable physical signature, whereas the development and training of AI lack a decisive remote signature, and electricity and chip procurement remain indirect indicators. Fourth, the breadth of dual use. In the nuclear case the military and the civilian are (imperfectly) distinguishable at the level of facilities and materials, whereas AI is a generalpurpose technology in which the same model and the same computation may be beneficial or harmful, so that drawing the line between "peaceful use" and "military use" is itself difficult. Compute governance, on the other hand, constitutes a partial rebuttal to the first and third of these points: the execution of training is physically anchored in hardware, and there is a residue of measurability there (Section 9.6). As a result of this exchange, the controversy has been refined from "is AI the same as the nuclear or different?" into a layered question: at which layer of AI (chips / training / weights / inference / applications) does nuclear-type verification hold? Table 7 takes this layered view, applies the general proposition obtained from the comparison of Section 9.4 (Proposition 9) to the layer structure of AI, and determines the transferability of ten components of the nuclear regime. Note that the table numbers follow the overall table plan of this paper, which assigns Tables 4 to 6 to the cell-by-cell summaries of Rows C1, C2 and C3 and Table 7 to the nuclear–AI transferability determinations. Because the cell-by-cell summary of Row C3 (Table 6) is placed in Section 9.10, Table 7 appears before Table 6. The determinations are analytical assessments, and an evidence grade is attached to each in a separate column. Table 7. Transferability to AI of the components of the nuclear management regime, with evidence grades (Determination: A = transferable / B = partially possible / C = difficult / D = does not hold. Evidence grades: ◎ well established, ○ supported by evidence, △ contested, ▽ grey literature, not relied upon) # Component of the nuclear regime Conditions of establishment (nuclear side) Candidate counterpart in AI Transferability Evidence grade Grounds of the determination 1 Nuclear material accountancy (IAEA safeguards) Weaponization physically requires a certain quantity of a specific material, and that material can be Accountancy of advanced chips and of large-scale training compute (compute accounting) B partially possible ○ supported by evidence Chips are tangible and measurable (Sastry et al., 2024). Trained weights are replicable, however, and the concept of "inventory" breaks down (Afina & Lewis, 2023). Possible at the chip and training layers, not possible at the weights and inference layers. The existence of the anchor is 229 # Component of the nuclear regime Conditions of establishment (nuclear side) Candidate counterpart in AI Transferability Evidence grade Grounds of the determination measured and sealed supported, but the effectiveness of an accountancy institution is unproven, and its period of validity is rate-limited by the half-life of the anchor (Definition 9, Section 9.7) 2 Remote detection (CTBT/IMS type) The violating act emits an unavoidable physical signature (seismic waves, radionuclides) Observation of data-centre electricity, heat and construction, and of chip logistics C difficult ○ supported by evidence The signatures of AI training are indirect and avoidable and do not correspond one to one with the act (the observability problem). Hardware-embedded verification (Shavit, 2023; CNAS, 2024) is an attempt to create a signature artificially 3 Supplier cartel (NSG type) Chokepoints in the means of production are concentrated in a small number of states and firms Concentration of the design, manufacture and manufacturing equipment of advanced semiconductors (United States export controls from 2022 onward, with Japanese and Dutch coordination) A transferable (already implemented) ◎ well established Semiconductor controls toward China are an advance implementation of NSGtype control without a treaty, and the existence of the measures is itself an established fact. But effectiveness may decay through autonomous technical advance, smuggling and domestic substitution, as in the nuclear case 4 Freeze on holders plus grand bargain (NPT type) Holders can be fixed at a small number, and compensation to the nonholding side (support for peaceful uses, disarmament undertakings) is writ‐ A club of frontier- developing states plus diffusion of AI benefits to developing countries (the commons conception of the New Delhi Declaration is a nascent form) C difficult ○ supported by evidence The cause of the difficulty of a freeze is not the continuity of capability but the exponential movement of the threshold. Because the compute required to attain a given capability falls at the half-life of the anchor (Definition 9, Section 9.7), a line of "holding" drawn in units of compute changes meaning as a function of time and degrades from the moment it is fixed. In addition, because development 230 # Component of the nuclear regime Conditions of establishment (nuclear side) Candidate counterpart in AI Transferability Evidence grade Grounds of the determination ten into the text is led by private firms, a freeze at the level of states does not capture its object; and where an asymmetric structure is adopted, a burden isomorphic with the legitimacy cost observed in the nuclear regime (the nuclear apartheid critique) arises, which is the prediction of the first part of Proposition 10 5 Mutual deterrence (MAD type) Survivable retaliatory capability + mutual vulnerability + observability of capability MAIM (Mutual Assured AI Malfunction, Hendrycks et al., 2025) C difficult (at the stage of theoretical proposal) △ contested The identifiability and attributability of a "destabilizing AI project" are not established. The reversibility of sabotage and the management of escalation are also unverified. The scholarly controversy is in progress (2025–) and neither side holds settled evidence 6 Scientific assessment panel (IPCC type; reference outside the nuclear) A consensual scientific synthesis separated from politics International AI Safety Report (2025, 2026); United Nations scientific panel (established February 2026) A transferable (already transferred) ◎ well established Already operating as an institution; the facts of establishment and publication can be confirmed in primary sources. There is no direct counterpart in the nuclear regime; this is in fact a transfer of the IPCC model 7 Management of the twin character of peaceful- use support (Atoms for Peace → IAEA) Institutionalizing the channel of benefit diffusion together with verification Support for the diffusion of AI capability (Global AI Impact Commons and similar) plus coupling with safety conditions B partially possible (not yet begun) △ contested Diffusion support has started (New Delhi 2026), but the nuclear structure of "coupling support with safeguards" is not implemented. The quantitative finding on which application would rest — Fuhrmann (2012), that peacefuluse cooperation raises the probability of a weapons programme — is contested within the quantitative literature and cannot be 231 # Component of the nuclear regime

# Component of the nuclear regime Conditions of establishment (nuclear side) Candidate counterpart in AI Transferability Evidence grade Grounds of the determination treated as established causation 8 Management of latency Grasping the intermediate layer through declaration and monitoring of enrichment and reprocessing capability Grasping the compute holdings, datacentre capacity and personnel of states and firms A transferable (at the conceptual level) ○ supported by evidence "AI latency" can be theorized as intermediate inventory on the path from resource to transformation (Section 9.2.7). Quantitative indicators (installed compute capacity and the like) can also be defined, but declaration and monitoring as an institution are not implemented 9 Minimal norm agreed between leaders (hotline type) The minimal common interest of avoiding mutual destruction The United States–China agreement on "human control over the decision to use nuclear weapons" (16 November 2024) A transferable (minimally established) ◎ well established (as to the fact of the agreement) The minimal unit of norm formation has been established at the AI–nuclear interface, and the fact of the agreement can be confirmed in primary sources. There is, however, no institutionalization and no verification, and because no definitive fact can be confirmed about the continuation of the dialogue thereafter, no assertion is made about it 10 Binding treaty plus a permanent verification agency (the NPT plus the IAEA proper) A party structure of sovereign states, a verification anchor in material, and more than twenty years of stepwise construction None (does not exist as of August 2026) D does not hold ◎ well established (as to the fact of absence) The present five-layer patchwork (Section 9.12) is entirely non-binding, and the absence of a binding treaty and a permanent verification agency is a confirmable fact. The three obstacles of private-sector leadership, replicability, and absence of a signature are unresolved One note on the symbols of determination. The A/B/C/D of this table express the analytical assessment of transferability, and the ◎○△▽ of the separate column express the evidence grade common to this series (◎ well established, ○ supported by evidence, △ contested, ▽ grey literature, not relied upon). The two are independent dimensions: a de‐ 232 termination of A may carry an evidence grade of △ (the assessment is positive but the support is contested), and a determination of D may carry ◎ (the fact of non-establishment is itself established). Notation using the ◎○△ family for transferability determinations is also conventional, but it collides with the series' evidence-grade symbols and creates the risk that a reader will misread a determination of "partially possible" as "△ contested." By setting the determinations as A/B/C/D and separating the evidence grade into its own column, the distinction between analytical assessment and empirical support becomes legible in the table. What should be read from Table 7 is not the individual determinations so much as the regularity running across them. The items that received a determination of A (transferable) — the supplier cartel (#3), scientific assessment (#6), management of latency (#8) and the minimal norm (#9) — are all ones in which the verification anchor lies in the physical layer (chips, electricity, facilities), or in which verification is not required at all (scientific assessment, declaratory norms). Conversely, the items receiving C or D all require verification at intangible layers: weights, intent, capability. The standing of this distribution requires care. This is not the inductive ground of Proposition 9. Proposition 9 is a general proposition obtained independently from the four-regime comparison of Section 9.4, and the distribution in Table 7 is the deductive consequence of applying that general proposition to the layer structure of AI. The ten items of Table 7 are therefore to be read as independently falsifiable predictions — if an effective third-party verification mechanism is established for an item determined as C, the AI-application part of Proposition 9 is falsified for that item — and not as evidence for Proposition 9. That the distribution of determinations agrees with the distribution predicted from the comparison in Section 9.4 is no more than one consistency check on the applicability of Proposition 9. 9.6 The State of Research on Compute Governance What supports the substance of determinations #1 to #3 in Table 7 is the body of research on compute governance that formed rapidly from 2023 onward. The structure of its claims is examined here from both sides: the grounds adduced in its support and its limits. The reference work, Sastry et al. (2024), organized the reasons why compute is superior to other inputs (data, algorithms) as a point of intervention in AI governance under four properties. Compute is detectable — large-scale computing infrastructure exists as a physical facility and involves electricity, cooling and construction; excludable — chips, being tangible, permit physical control of transfer; quantifiable — computational capacity, holdings and usage can be expressed numerically; and its supply chain is extremely concentrated — design, advanced manufacturing and manufacturing equipment are concentrated in a small number of actors. These four properties correspond almost one to one with the functional conditions of IAEA verification extracted in Section 9.2.2 (specificity, measurability, concentration of production routes), and the three functions that the paper identifies for compute governance — visibility, allocation and enforcement — 233 are the structural counterparts of accountancy, supply control and enforcement in safeguards. It can be summarized as an attempt to locate, at the chip and training layers of AI, the verification anchor corresponding to the accountancy of nuclear material. The technical skeleton of verification was set out earlier by Shavit (2023). That study proposed a framework for verifying the conduct of large-scale training at the hardware level, using on-chip logging and similar means. Whereas nuclear verification relied on "the signature of an act" (seismic waves), this proposal is characterized by building the signature in artificially — embedding verifiability into hardware after the fact — and, in contrast with the CTBT, is an attempt to construct by engineering an equivalent where AI lacks a natural physical signature. At the level of policy design, a CNAS report (January 2024) presented a framework of on-chip governance mechanisms (hardware-enabled governance mechanisms), and RAND has also published a workshop report on hardware-embedded verification and research on its application to export controls. It should be emphasized in fairness, however, that the supporting literature itself states its limits. Sastry et al. (2024) make explicit that compute governance carries risks of invasion of privacy, economic effects and concentration of power, and warn that if the design of the intervention is mistaken, control itself becomes a new source of concentration. Moreover, the whole basis on which this research line stands is the empirical premise that "the attainment of critical capability requires large-scale computation." One consistency requirement that this paper must impose on itself should be made explicit here. The fragility of this premise is often spoken of in the compute-governance literature too in the conditional — that it "would be undermined if algorithmic efficiency improves." But Section 5 of this paper presents the same phenomenon not in the conditional but in the indicative — as a fact currently in progress at a measured rate. The cost of attaining already-attained capability fell to approximately 1/208 in the not quite two years from March 2023 to February 2025 at the GPT-4 level, and to less than 1/280 over two years at the GPT-3.5 level (Section 5). The rate of decline in inference prices cited in Section 13 is 9 to 900 times per year depending on the task. The change that undermines the premise is not a hypothesis about the future but an observed fact in progress. To speak of the same phenomenon in the indicative in the section discussing capability tiers and in the conditional in the section discussing critical-tier governance would make the claims of the two sections inconsistent. This paper therefore reformulates this point, not as a conditional reservation that "the anchor may be lost," but as the question whether a verification institution can be designed on the premise that the anchor is depreciating at a known rate (Section 9.7). Further, the accountancy of compute reaches only as far as the training layer. Once trained weights leak, the subsequent replication, inference and application fall outside the compute anchor. Compute governance may supply a necessary condition for the verification function of critical-tier governance, but not a sufficient one — this is the fair summary of the state of research as of 2026. Two points should be added from the standpoint of institutional design. First, the factual basis of the claims of compute governance lies in the industrial structure in which the 234 design, advanced manufacture and manufacturing equipment of advanced AI chips are concentrated in a small number of actors. This concentration is what makes the NSG-type analogy of supply control possible; but as seen in Section 9.2.5, the effectiveness of the nuclear supplier regime too could be eroded by autonomous technical advance, circumvention and domestic substitution. The concentration of compute supply is likewise not a given constant but has an endogeneity, in that it induces investment in domestic substitution by the side being controlled (the Row C2 analysis of Section 8). The verification anchor not only exists; it also moves by virtue of the act of control itself. Second, the correspondence with IAEA safeguards has an institutional implication that is easily overlooked. Safeguards could maintain political neutrality because verification was reduced to the quasi-accounting operation of "reconciling records with physical quantities" (Section 9.2.2). Whether the same design principle — minimizing the discretion of the verifier and reducing verification to a mechanical operation of reconciliation — can be applied to the accountancy of compute will govern the neutrality and acceptability of any internationalized accountancy institution. The more the criterion of determination slides from a measured value such as "quantity of computation" toward an evaluative judgment such as "the dangerousness of a model," the more verification is transformed from a quasi-accounting operation into political adjudication, and the neutrality of the regime is lost. What should be transferred from the nuclear experience is not only the technique of accountancy but the institutional self-restraint of confining verification to accountancy. 9.7 The Half-Life of the Verification Anchor — Integrating Proposition 8 and Proposition 9 This section too is a conditional analysis that does not presuppose the arrival of C3, and the discipline stated in Section 9.1 — that C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category as of the time of writing — is maintained here as well. Section 9.6 confirmed that the basis on which compute-governance research stands is the empirical premise that "the attainment of critical capability requires large-scale computation," and that the change undermining that premise is measured in Section 5 of this paper as a fact in progress. This section resolves that inconsistency not by adding a reservation but by introducing an observable quantity. So long as the fact that the anchor depreciates is treated as an uncertainty external to institutional design, the theory of critical-tier governance remains an empty conditional: "design is possible so long as the anchor is not lost." By defining a quantity measuring the rate of depreciation and comparing it with the response rate of institutions, the question moves from "is there an anchor?" to "can institutions keep pace with the depreciation of the anchor?" 235 Definition 9 (Half-Life of the Verification Anchor) The half-life of the verification anchor is the time required for the compute needed to attain a given level of capability to fall by half from its level at first attainment. Where a verification institution uses a threshold based on quantity of computation, the effectiveness of that threshold is rate-limited by the half-life of the anchor. 9.7.1 The Level of the Half-Life and the Limits of Its Measurement The level of the half-life can be approximated from the evidence of this paper. As Section 5 shows, the cost of attaining the GPT-4 level of capability fell to approximately 1/208 over the approximately 23 months from March 2023 to February 2025, and the GPT-3.5 level fell to less than 1/280 over two years. When a quantity falls to 1/208 in 23 months, the time required for it to halve is approximately three months (208 is approximately 2 to the power 7.7; 23 divided by that). Approximately three months is likewise obtained from 1/280 over 24 months. From the rate of decline in inference prices cited in Section 13 — 9 to 900 times per year depending on the task — a range of approximately 1.2 to approximately 3.8 months follows. That is, the evidence of this paper indicates that the half-life of the verification anchor is on the order of a few months. This estimate has three limits, all of which require statement. First, what is measured is the cost of attainment based on inference prices, not the quantity of computation required for training as such. Where a threshold is drawn in units of training compute, its half-life may be longer than this estimate. Second, the fall in the cost of attainment is a composite of several factors — improvement in algorithmic efficiency, decline in hardware prices, improvement in energy efficiency — of which the part that directly erodes the effectiveness of a threshold is algorithmic efficiency. Direct measurement of the halflife with a decomposition into factors is an empirical task this paper has not been able to present. Third, there is no guarantee that the half-life will remain constant. For these reasons the estimate in this subsection is an approximation carrying supporting evidence, not an established measurement. What matters in the comparison with institutional cycles set out below, however, is not the exact value but the order of magnitude: whether the half-life is a few months or a few decades is what separates a feasible design from an infeasible one. 9.7.2 Comparison With the Institutional Cycle of Threshold Revision Falsification condition (c) of Proposition 9 requires the half-life of the anchor to be compared with the institutional cycle of threshold revision. This cycle can be observed from the record of existing control regimes. Starting from the slowest side: the NPT has never had its text amended since it entered into force in 1970. Thirty years after its adoption in 1996, the CTBT has not met the requirements for entry into force. Amendment of the text of a binding treaty takes, on the 236 record, time on the scale of a generation, or does not occur at all. For technical annexes rather than treaty texts, however, a faster route is sometimes provided. The CWC provides a procedure for technical change in Article XV, under which the schedules of chemicals may be revised by decision of the Conference of the States Parties without ratification by individual states. In an instance where this procedure was actually used, following a decision of the Conference of the States Parties on 27 November 2019 the Director-General notified the states parties on 10 December of that year, and the revision entered into force 180 days later, on 7 June 2020 — approximately six and a half months from decision to entry into force. The fastest side is a regime that is not a treaty. The annex of the MTCR is revised through annual plenary and technical experts meetings, and because it has no binding force the procedural delay is small. The result of the comparison is plain. While the half-life of the verification anchor is on the order of a few months, even the fastest route with a record of revising the technical annex of a binding treaty requires a period comparable to the half-life between the decision of the Conference of the States Parties and entry into force. And that is only the period after the decision; it does not include the negotiating period from the tabling of a proposed revision to the decision. As for a design that draws the threshold in the text of the treaty itself, the threshold loses effectiveness before entry into force. That is, falsification condition (c) of Proposition 9 — the persistence of a state in which the half-life is below the institutional cycle — is, so far as concerns designs that write a fixed computebased threshold into a treaty text, already satisfied under the evidence of this paper. To state this consequence as a present state rather than as a hedged possibility is what it means to make the measurements of Section 5 consistent with the design argument of this section. 9.7.3 Design Consequences — Two Paths and the Trade-Off Between Them What is falsified is the design of a fixed threshold, not the conception of compute as an anchor as such. Two designs may survive. The first is acceleration of revision. The threshold is moved from the treaty text to a technical annex, its revision is effected by decision of a conference of states parties or a governing council, and a route to entry into force requiring no ratification procedure is provided. The technical-change procedure of Article XV of the CWC is an existing precedent showing that this design can hold within the frame of a binding treaty, and the annual annex revision of the MTCR shows that still faster revision is possible if binding force is sacrificed. If critical-tier governance takes this path, the central issue of institutional design becomes not the level of the threshold but who revises the threshold, and on what cycle. The location of the power of revision is in substance the power to determine the intensity of control, and the asymmetric legitimacy problem discussed in Section 9.2.1 recurs — not over the level of the threshold, but over control of the revision procedure. The second is relativization of the threshold. If the threshold is drawn not by an absolute quantity of computation but by capability distance from the frontier (Definition 2, 237 Section 5), the threshold moves with the frontier by definition and does not depreciate. It is for this reason that the tier partition of this paper is itself constituted on a relative scale. This path has its price, however. As extracted in Section 9.2.2, safeguards could maintain political neutrality because verification was reduced to the quasi-accounting operation of "reconciling records with physical quantities." A relative threshold brings the measurement of the level of the frontier itself — a judgment dependent on firms' undisclosed information and on the choice of evaluation methodology as to what is the frontier — inside the verification procedure. In the vocabulary of Section 9.6, the criterion of determination slides from a measured value to an evaluative judgment. An absolute threshold is measurable but depreciates; a relative threshold does not depreciate but loses measurability — this is the trade-off facing the verification design of critical-tier governance, and this paper does not present it as a solved problem. What may be noted is that a mixture of the two — delimiting the obligation to declare by a measurable absolute quantity while indexing that level to a relative indicator and revising it periodically — exists logically as a third path. 9.7.4 Proposition 8 and Proposition 9 Are Two Manifestations of the Same Asymmetry The foregoing analysis makes clear that two propositions placed in separate sections of this paper are two manifestations of a single structure. Proposition 8 (asymmetry of stockpiling, Section 13) states that, because the capability index E₀ guaranteed domestically at time t₀ is a fixed quantity while the capability index of the frontier F(t) keeps advancing, the relative value of the guarantee level depreciates as an increasing function of F(t) − E₀. The consequence was that security of supply holds only as Continuous Construction, not as a single act of stockpiling. What the latter part of Proposition 9 states is a structure isomorphic with this. The compute threshold that a verification institution draws is likewise a fixed quantity, and the level of capability attainable under that threshold keeps rising with Frontier Descent. The effectiveness of the threshold depreciates as an increasing function of the distance between the fixed threshold and the moving frontier. The consequence is that the verification function of critical-tier governance persists only through continuous downward revision of the threshold, not through fixing it. The two are manifestations, on the side of holding and on the side of control, of a single structure: the asymmetry between a fixed quantity and a moving frontier. Proposition 8 says this of a quantity a state holds for itself; Proposition 9 says the same of a quantity an international institution sets in order to control others. The meaning of this integration becomes clearer still in contrast with petroleum: a stockpile of petroleum does not depreciate in the barrel, and a threshold based on the accountancy of nuclear material is anchored to a physical constant, the "significant quantity," and does not move. It is because physical quantities do not change meaning with time that both stockpiles and thresholds persisted once set. What depreciates in AI is not capability itself but the cor‐ 238 respondence between capability and compute. So long as this correspondence moves, institutions in AI can be designed only as institutions that continuously re-index quantities, not as institutions that fix them. This integration extends one implication of this paper. The sovereign minimum guarantee level of Definition 6, the verification threshold of Proposition 9, and the capability thresholds defined by corporate frontier safety frameworks seen in Section 9.12 are all institutions that draw a quantity of computation or a level of capability as a fixed quantity. Any quantitative threshold relating to AI that is not indexed to the frontier degrades, whatever its kind, from the moment it is set, in accordance with the half-life. Because this generalization goes beyond what the evidence of this paper supports it is not stated as a proposition, but it is worth recording as a design warning common to institutional design at Layer Zero. That determinations #1 and #4 in Table 7 are both downgraded for the same reason — the anchor exists but its period of validity is limited — is a manifestation of this structure. 9.8 The Technical Limits of the Verification Anchor — Three Paths to Its Voiding and a Limitation of Scope This section too is a conditional analysis that does not presuppose the arrival of C3, and the discipline stated in Section 9.1 — that C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category as of the time of writing — is maintained here as well. Section 9.7 treated the depreciation of the verification anchor over time: the continuing fall, at a known rate, in the compute required to attain a given level of capability. The anchor has, however, a second failure mode independent of this. Depreciation is the movement of the anchor's scale; what this section treats is the possibility that the anchor's referent is itself lost. If the acquisition of critical capability ceases to be accompanied by the physical correlates of vast facilities and large-scale electricity consumption, there is nothing left to measure. However ingeniously a threshold is re-indexed, verification does not hold if there is nothing to measure. This paper takes up this point not as a criticism to be rebutted but formally accepts it as a fact that narrows the scope of the AI-application part of Proposition 9. In what follows, the three paths to voiding are discussed at the level of governance implications (9.8.1); it is confirmed that they lie on the extension of paths already in progress rather than in a hypothetical future (9.8.2); the scope of Proposition 9 is explicitly limited (9.8.3); and the means of verification that would remain if the anchor were voided are examined (9.8.4). The last point is a question this paper raises anew. 9.8.1 Three Paths to the Voiding of the Anchor For the three paths below, no method of implementation or technical detail is entered into. What this paper discusses is what happens to the design of governance if each path holds, not how to bring it about. This is a direct application of the descriptive discipline 239 set in Section 9.1, and at the same time an acknowledgment that this paper is not competent to assess the engineering feasibility of the three paths. The first path is the dissolution of the geographic concentration of computation. The AI-application part of Proposition 9 rests on the premise that the acquisition of critical capability requires large-scale computing infrastructure accumulated in a single place. Where this premise holds, such infrastructure is accompanied by an outward form of construction, electricity contracts and cooling equipment, and the three properties organized in Section 9.6 — detectability, excludability, measurability — hold. If, however, a route by which geographically dispersed compute is bound together through communications networks and equivalent training is executed without an accumulated facility reaches a practical level, none of the three properties holds: there is no facility to be the object of detection, no concentrated transfer of tangible objects to be the object of exclusion, and consumption at any one place falls far below the threshold that would be the unit of measurement. The implication for governance is not a question of scale but a question of unit. Nuclear material accountancy held because the object of control occupies a place, has mass, and has its movements recorded (Section 9.2.2). Dispersed computation, even at the same total quantity, belongs to no single place. In a state of affairs where the question "where was the training conducted?" has no answer, none of the three elements of safeguards — declaration, inspection, accountancy — has anything to be applied to. The second path is the severing of the correspondence between the outward form of a facility and the work carried out inside it. Even if computation continues to be executed in concentrated facilities, if what is being computed in a facility cannot be confirmed from outside, verification extends no further than confirming that the facility exists. General advances in cryptographic technique make possible modes of operation that separate the provider of computing infrastructure from the party that determines the content of the computation, and may establish arrangements in which the holder of the infrastructure does not itself know the work being carried out inside it. The implication for governance is the collapse of the premise of the design principle extracted from the nuclear experience in Section 9.6 — reducing verification to the quasi-accounting operation of "reconciling records with physical quantities" and minimizing the discretion of the verifier. Reconciliation holds only where the entries in the records correspond to physical quantities. If electricity consumption and facility scale can be measured but it cannot be confirmed that the measured values correspond to the declared use, measurement does not amount to verification. This structure is isomorphic with the difficulty of the Biological Weapons Convention treated in Section 9.4.2: dual-use production equipment does not, by its existence, indicate a violation. That is, this path moves the object of AI verification from the type (i) of Proposition 9 to type (ii). The third path is a change in the correspondence between capability and compute itself. Advances in efficiency, represented by compression, distillation and quantization, are continuous with the half-life discussion of Section 9.7, but if carried far enough the implication is of a different order. What the half-life discussion said was that the level of

the threshold requires continuous revision. By contrast, if a capability comes to be obtainable without large-scale training, through derivation from already published weights and limited computation, what arises is not a question of the level of the threshold but the disappearance of the layer at which the threshold should be placed. Verification placed at the training layer does not capture capability acquired without passing through training. As confirmed in Section 7, already published open weights are irrevocable and cannot be recovered from the world either by the commercial judgment of the supplier or by control measures. The more that derivation from an irrevocable stock becomes the principal route of capability acquisition, the less the controllable flow governs the distribution of capability. The limit stated at the end of Section 9.6 — that the accountancy of compute reaches only as far as the training layer — operates on this path not in the form of a narrowing of what it reaches, but in the form of a decline in the importance of what it reaches. The three paths are not independent; they reinforce one another. Advances in efficiency lower the total computation required and thereby relax the conditions under which dispersion holds; and dispersion, by making the accumulation of facilities unnecessary, partially achieves the invisibility of content without requiring cryptography. Conversely, even if any one of the three paths does not hold, advances along the other two may bring about the same consequence in part. The voiding of the anchor should therefore be understood not as an event occurring discretely through a single technical achievement, but as continuous erosion from three directions. This understanding is inconvenient for institutional design: for a discrete event, a design that begins its response upon detecting the occurrence can hold, whereas for continuous erosion there is no clear signal telling one when a response should begin. As with the depreciation treated in Section 9.7, institutions here too are placed within a structure in which, by the time it is noticed, it is already late. 9.8.2 Falsification Condition (d) Is Not an Assumption About the Future Falsification condition (d) of Proposition 9 states that "if a technical change occurs in which dependence on compute falls sharply (attainment of critical capability with smallscale computation), the AI-application part is likewise rejected." In accordance with the consistency requirement this paper imposed on itself in Section 9.6, this condition must be read in the present tense rather than the conditional. The fall in the cost of attaining already-attained capability measured in Section 5 — approximately 1/208 over approximately 23 months from March 2023 to February 2025 at the GPT-4 level, and less than 1/280 over two years at the GPT-3.5 level — is a direct observation that the correspondence between capability and compute is loosening at a known rate. The rate of decline in inference prices cited in Section 13 (9 to 900 times per year depending on the task) points in the same direction. Further, the lag width between the open-weight frontier and the closed frontier narrowed from approximately one year on estimates for 2024–2025 to approximately three to four months on estimates for 2026 241 (Sections 5 and 7). All three series indicate that the quantity of concentrated computation needed to reach a given level of capability is falling. A leap of logic must be avoided here, however. What the above measurements show is a fall in the computation required to reproduce already-attained capability, not a fall in the computation required to advance the frontier. As cited in Section 5, there is an estimate that frontier training costs continue to rise at approximately 2.4 times per year. What is in fact observed is thus the cheapening of following, not the cheapening of first attainment of critical capability. It is the latter that falsification condition (d) of Proposition 9 requires. The evidence of this paper does not settle this point. What may be said is this: falsification condition (d) is placed on the extension of a path already in progress, not as a hypothetical future technical change. Whether it is satisfied remains an empirical question, but change in the direction of satisfaction has already been measured. This recognition should be set alongside the conclusion reached in Section 9.7.2 about falsification condition (c): so far as concerns designs that write a fixed compute-based threshold into a treaty text, the falsification condition is already satisfied under the evidence of this paper. The AI-application part of Proposition 9 is under independent pressure from each of the two falsification conditions. A word on the form of the acceptance. Three responses to this point were open to this paper. The first is rebuttal: to estimate the technical feasibility of the three paths as low and to assert the persistence of the anchor. The second is the addition of a reservation: to add to the proposition a conditional clause, "so long as the anchor is not lost." The third is the acceptance this paper adopts: to narrow the scope explicitly and to maintain the claim over the narrowed range. The first is not adopted because engineering assessment of feasibility exceeds the competence of this paper. The second is not adopted because, as stated at the head of Section 9.7, adding a reservation degrades the proposition into the empty conditional that "design is possible so long as the anchor is not lost." To narrow of one's own motion the scope of a proposition that carries falsification conditions, on the basis of a recognition that a falsification condition is moving toward satisfaction, is not an abandonment of methodological discipline but its execution. 9.8.3 An Explicit Limitation of the Scope of Proposition 9 In light of the above, this paper limits the scope of the AI-application part of Proposition 9 as follows. A design taking compute, electricity and facilities as the verification anchor holds only during the period in which the acquisition of critical capability requires large-scale and concentrated computation. The length of that period is an empirical question to which this paper has no answer. If the period ends, the verification function of critical-tier governance loses its designability, as falsification conditions (c) and (d) of Proposition 9 state. The meaning of this limitation should be made precise in three points. First, what is limited is the AI-application part, not the general part of Proposition 9. As the two-layer structure explained in Section 9.11 sets out, the evidence for the general part is the four- 242 regime comparison of Section 9.4, and its falsification conditions (a) and (b) are directed at cross-regime observation. The anchor is lost not because the general proposition that "a physical correlate makes verification possible" becomes false, but because in AI the correspondence between the physical correlate and the object of control is severed. Voiding rather confirms the correctness of the general part from another side — since the content of the general part is precisely that a regime that has lost its physical correlate cannot have a verification mechanism. The acceptance in this section therefore does not weaken Proposition 9; it clarifies the boundary between what Proposition 9 asserts and what it does not. Second, the limitation extends only to verification among the three functions of critical-tier governance (Definition 7). Nonproliferation and stabilization may have forms that operate without verification — as confirmed in Section 9.4.2, the Biological Weapons Convention subsists without a verification mechanism. But that subsection also confirmed that nonproliferation lacking verification is limited to reliance on declarations. That is, the loss of designability in verification does not nullify all three functions, but it lowers the ceiling of effectiveness the remaining two can reach. Third, the limitation does not nullify the analysis of this section. On the contrary, the recognition that the period in which the anchor is valid is itself finite strengthens the conclusion stated in Section 9.12 — that the timing at which design should begin is asymmetric toward the early side irrespective of any assessment of the probability of arrival. If the period in which the anchor is valid is finite, the loss from failing to advance the design and demonstration of verification methods within that period is twofold. Not only is the institution not built; after the physical conditions that made building possible have been lost, the same institution must be designed again under less favourable conditions. The lesson of the Baruch Plan stated in Section 9.1 — that the feasibility of a conception decays as capability diffuses — operates in AI not only through the diffusion of capability but also through the thinning of the correspondence between capability and physical quantities. 9.8.4 Means of Verification That Remain If the Anchor Is Voided Finally, to the question this section raises anew. If any of the three paths holds, do the means of verification disappear entirely, or does part remain? The anchor posited by Proposition 9 was a triad of "compute, electricity and facilities," but this triad is not lost all at once. The anchor is decomposed here into three layers in order of the ease with which the correspondence is severed. The first layer is the facility anchor. This is the correspondence between the existence of computing infrastructure accumulated in a particular place and the work executed there. Among the three paths, dispersion removes the need for the accumulation of facilities, cryptography severs the correspondence between facility and content, and efficiency permits capability acquisition requiring no facility above the threshold. The facility anchor is thus lost by any of the three paths. It is the most fragile of the three layers. 243 The second layer is the supply-network anchor. This is the record of the movement of tangible objects at each stage of manufacture, packaging and distribution of accelerators and the surrounding materials and components. Even if dispersion holds, the compute at the dispersed locations must still be manufactured, transported and installed. As organized in Section 11.2, concentration exists at each stage of manufacturing equipment, manufacturing sites and high-bandwidth memory for advanced semiconductors, supported by mechanisms of economies of scale, learning effects, capital specificity and accumulated skill, and of these only economies of scale can be dissolved in the short run by the injection of funds (Section 11.2.7). The supply-network anchor therefore remains after the facility anchor is lost. There are, however, two constraints on the manner in which it remains. First, what the supply-network anchor measures is not capability but the total quantity of means. It can measure "who may hold how much computing capacity," but not "what is being done with that capacity." In contrast with the nuclear, this corresponds not to the accountancy of fissile material but to records of transfers of tangible objects that may be diverted to sensitive uses, and is isomorphic with the structure in which the Missile Technology Control Regime had no choice but to separate transfer control of tangibles from verification of capability (Section 9.4.3). Second, the resolution of the supplynetwork anchor declines the more computing devices become general-purpose. The more the controlled items are specific to a particular use, the more information transfer records carry; the volume of general-purpose computing devices in circulation does not identify use. The third layer is the aggregate anchor. This is quantities aggregated at the level of a country or region: electricity consumption, semiconductor production capacity, installed capacity of computing infrastructure. This layer is the least readily lost — computation that is dispersed still consumes electricity, and generation does not change because content is concealed. The statistics on data-centre electricity demand treated in Section 13 show that observation at this layer is already partly institutionalized. But the resolution of the aggregate anchor is the lowest of the three layers, since an aggregate does not identify whether its composition is directed at the acquisition of critical capability. What can be verified by the aggregate anchor extends at most to an estimate of an upper bound: whether computation above a certain scale may be conducted in the jurisdiction concerned. Two consequences follow from this three-layer decomposition. First, the anchor does not disappear entirely, but it loses resolution as one moves to lower layers. The facility anchor may capture acts; the supply-network anchor captures only means; the aggregate anchor captures only an upper bound. The object of verification retreats from acts to capability, and from capability to latency. The point made in Section 9.2.7 about nuclear hedging — that regimes operate on a continuum — operates in AI more rapidly and toward the lower end of the continuum. Second, this retreat is accompanied by a qualitative change in the verification function. Verification that captures acts permits the identification of violations, whereas veri‐ 244 fication capturing only latency produces not the identification of violations but an estimate of the distribution of capability. The former may support the enforcement of nonproliferation; what the latter may support extends only to confidence-building — function (iii), stabilization, in Definition 7. That is, as the voiding of the anchor proceeds, the centre of gravity of critical-tier governance must shift from verification and nonproliferation toward stabilization. This shift changes the premises of the discussion of the stability of deterrence in Section 9.9: in a world where the other side's capability cannot be confirmed by verification, stabilization comes to depend not on observability but on declarations of mutual restraint and on indirect indicators supporting those declarations. The design principle of arms control theory extracted in Section 9.2.3 — betting on observability, not trust — loses its object of application in this phase. This paper presents this consequence not as a proposal of an alternative design but as a description of the contraction of designability. None of the three layers supports verification at the level attained by nuclear safeguards. The assessment of "partially possible" given by Table 7 in Section 9.5 to determinations #1 to #3 is an assessment for the period in which the facility anchor subsists, and is not maintained beyond that period. Making this recognition explicit weakens this paper's account of critical-tier governance, but by fixing the range over which it is weakened, the claim over the range that remains is strengthened. The policy of Section 20 — that declaring what cannot be treated strengthens the claim over what is treated — applies equally in this section. 9.9 The Stability of Deterrence — The Conditions for MAD and Incentives to Pre-empt in AI Turning to the third function of critical-tier governance, stabilization. When the three conditions that supported the stability of nuclear deterrence (Section 9.2.3) — survivable retaliatory capability, mutual vulnerability, verifiability — are mapped onto AI, a structural difference appears in each. This subsection too is a conditional analysis that does not presuppose the arrival of C3. First, the difference in observability. The deployment of nuclear forces is mutually observable by national technical means such as satellites, and arms-control treaties were built on that observability. The development of AI capability, as seen in Section 9.2.4, lacks a physical signature corresponding one to one with the act, and emits only the indirect signatures of electricity and chips. In a world where estimating the other side's level of capability is difficult, the mechanism of Schelling's (1960) "reciprocal fear of surprise attack" may operate more severely, because when the other side's attainment cannot be observed, incentives to pre-empt or to interfere on the basis of worst-case assumptions grow stronger. Second, the indistinguishability of offence and defence. In the framework of Jervis (1978), the world in which offence and defence cannot be distinguished and offence has the advantage was the most unstable. AI capability is a general-purpose technology in which the same infrastructure is used for defence and for attack, and distinguishability is lower than in the nuclear case. Third, the expectation of first-mover 245 advantage. The stability of nuclear deterrence depended on the technical fact that striking first cannot eliminate the other side's retaliation (second-strike capability survives). If capability at the C3 level carries a first-mover advantage — an expectation that the side that arrives first can prevent the other's arrival — this stability condition is reversed, and the race to arrive itself takes on crisis instability. When unverifiability and the expectation of first-mover advantage combine, deterrence may be less stable than nuclear deterrence — this is the theoretical ground of the latter part of Proposition 10. Two further differences make transfer of the nuclear theory of stabilization difficult. Fourth, the multiplicity of the subjects of deterrence. Nuclear deterrence was theorized as a binary or few-party relation among sovereign states, whereas if C3 arrives on a development path of private firms, the bearers of the "project" that would be the object of deterrence are a mixture of states and firms, and the grammar of interstate deterrence — the addressee of retaliation, the credibility of commitments, the parties to a negotiation — cannot be applied as it stands. Fifth, the absence of a political decision to accept mutual vulnerability. As Jervis (1989) argued, nuclear stability was supported not only by technical conditions but by a political decision to accept mutual vulnerability — the ABM Treaty (1972) was its institutionalization. That decision, deliberately to limit defences, was and remains a counter-intuitive act of governance, and the product of decades of learning and negotiation. What the corresponding decision would be in AI — mutual sufferance of the vulnerability of one's own information systems, or restriction on the deployment of defensive AI — has not been specified even conceptually. Of the three functions, stabilization is the least mature both theoretically and institutionally. 9.9.1 A Critical Examination of MAIM The most noted response to this set of problems as of 2025 is the Superintelligence Strategy of Hendrycks, Schmidt, & Wang (2025). That paper transfers the framework of nuclear strategy explicitly and presents three pillars. The first pillar is MAIM (Mutual Assured AI Malfunction). On that paper's supposition, no state overlooks an attempt by another to establish unilateral advantage (in that paper's term, a destabilizing AI project), and the mutual possibility of sabotage through cyber operations and similar means functions as deterrence, as the counterpart of mutual retaliatory capability in MAD. The description that follows is an account of the conception presented in that paper, and does not signify that this paper adopts the threat perception on which the conception rests. The second pillar is the nonproliferation of the most advanced chips, and the third is the strengthening of domestic competitiveness. The theoretical contribution of MAIM lies in redrawing the nuclear analogy from "control" (the IAEA type) to "deterrence" (the MAD type). The second pillar (chip nonproliferation) is consistent with compute governance, and its determination of implementability overlaps with #3 in Table 7. The problem is the first pillar. The points organized below are all contested and unsettled, and neither side holds established evidence — the controversy dates from the publication of the proposal in 2025, and there is no accumulation of 246 cases against which it can be tested. The controversy that formed during 2025 concentrated on the conditions under which MAIM holds: an examination of the conditions of deterrence by MIRI (April 2025), commentary from the standpoint of stability by RAND researchers (March 2025), and an exchange for and against in the pages of AI Frontiers — pieces supporting the deterrence argument and pieces pressing the absence of observability. The core of the criticism may be organized as follows. (a) Identifiability: MAD was retaliation for an identifiable act, "a nuclear attack," whereas no criterion for identifying a "destabilizing AI project" is given, and the boundary between ordinary development and the development supposed by that paper is unobservable. (b) Attributability: counteraction or retaliation against sabotage requires identification of the actor, and the attribution of cyber operations is inherently more difficult than the attribution of a nuclear attack. (c) Reversibility and escalation: nuclear deterrence is an equilibrium that functions by not being executed, whereas the sabotage in MAIM is executable in peacetime and is supposed to be executed, and no mechanism is given for managing the path along which sabotage and retaliation escalate. In short, MAIM would transfer the conclusion of MAD (stability through mutual deterrence) without showing that the premises of MAD (survivable retaliatory capability, mutual vulnerability, observability) hold — this is the summary of the critical side, and the observability problem shares a root with determinations #2 and #5 in Section 9.5. It should be added in fairness that the merit of the MAIM proposal lies in making explicit the consequence of leaving a C3-type capability race unattended (an unmanaged race to arrive), and in structuring the discussion in the policy vocabulary of deterrence, nonproliferation and competitiveness. Nor has the critical side presented an alternative mechanism of stabilization. It is fair to summarize the scholarly situation as of 2026 as converging on a negative consensus: the design of the stabilization function is subordinate to the design of the verification function — no conception of deterrence has theoretical support unless observability is secured. This is nothing other than a reaffirmation of the lesson of Schelling & Halperin (1961), that arms control is an institution that bets on rationality and observability. 9.10 The Three Cells of Row C3 — Production, Transformation, and Utilization at the Critical Tier On the basis of the institutional analysis above, Row C3 of the Nine-Cell Matrix is described. Whereas the cells of Row C1 (Section 7) and Row C2 (Section 8) described markets and institutions that are actually observed, all three cells of Row C3 are conditional descriptions with no instances at present. What is described here is the structure a state occupying each cell would face if C3 arrived, and the mapping from the history of the nuclear regime is carried out only within the range the determination table of Section 9.5 permits. 247 9.10.1 M1×C3 — Critical-Tier Holders: From the Logic of the Market to the Logic of Control It should first be made explicit that the description in this subsection rests on prediction rather than definition. Definition 2 delimits C3 by capability distance alone and says nothing about the treatment governments accord to such capability. What asserts a transition of treatment — from a framework of economic regulation (market regulation and export control) to a framework of a nonproliferation-type regime (verification, restriction of holders, stabilization negotiations) — is Proposition 2b (Section 5), an empirical prediction carrying falsification conditions. The description below is an analysis of the structure that would obtain if this prediction were realized; if the prediction fails — if capability above the threshold is realized but its treatment stays within the frame of export control and market regulation — the institutional environment this subsection supposes does not obtain at all. Under that condition, if M1×C3 (the production and holding of critical-tier capability) holds, the dominant logic of that cell is neither the price competition of Row C1 nor the managed oligopoly of Row C2 but state control and an international regime (Propositions 2 and 2b, Section 5). Whereas frontier production up to C2 takes commercial revenue as its objective function, the benefit of holding C3 is measured in the currency of security — deterrence, coercion, alliance formation — and monetization through sale becomes an object of suppression as proliferation. The same branching that runs between petroleum M1, which earns by export, and nuclear-weapon States, which do not (and cannot) export nuclear weapons, runs between C2 and C3. The tension specific to this cell concentrates on one point without precedent in nuclear history. Nuclear development set out from state monopoly, whereas frontier AI set out from private firms (Section 9.5, determination #4). If C3 arrives on a development path of private firms, holding states face a domestic institutional problem that the nuclear history did not encounter: how to incorporate private domestic holders into state control. Nationalization, contractual control and licensing are logically possible routes, but all of them deepen the curse of concentration within producing states observed in Row C2 (Proposition 6a, Section 8). At the same time, where holders are several, the stability problem of Section 9.9 operates; and where holders seek to freeze their acquired positions, the NPTtype asymmetric legitimacy problem operates. The institutional requirements of M1×C3 are, externally, acceptance of verification (international access to accountancy of one's own facilities) and performance of the compensating side of a grand bargain, and internally, the incorporation of private actors and the restraint of concentrated power; its failure modes are, externally, destabilization of the race to arrive, and internally, distortion of institutions by control itself. The content of the compensating side of a grand bargain is not settled by a simple mapping from the NPT, and requires care. The NPT's compensation was twofold — the obligation to negotiate disarmament (Article VI) and support for peaceful uses (Article IV) — but the candidates for the AI counterpart of the former, that is, obligations that holders bear with respect to their own capability, are logically such things as investment in safety re‐ 248 search and publication of results, adherence to capability thresholds and acceptance of third-party evaluation, and provision of benefits (access to models, support for applications) to non-holders. The commons conception of the New Delhi Summit (Section 9.12) may be placed as a nascent form of the last of these, but the lesson of Atoms for Peace (Section 9.2.6) applies directly: support that does not couple verification to the channel of benefit diffusion unavoidably carries the by-product of the diffusion of latent capability. Compensation design and verification design cannot be optimized independently — this is the most practical lesson the mapping from nuclear history gives to this cell. 9.10.2 M2×C3 — Critical-Tier Subcontractors: Transformation States as Proliferation Routes M2×C3 is the cell of transformation states that do not themselves hold critical-tier capability but supply the inputs necessary for its production and maintenance: semiconductors, manufacturing equipment, materials and components, computing infrastructure, contract training, application development. The counterpart in the history of the nuclear regime is clear. As is shown by the fact that the NSG was established on the occasion of the Indian test of 1974 — a transformation of support for peaceful uses, a Canadian research reactor and United States heavy water — what the supplier regime monitored was precisely the chain of transformation. If C3 arrives, transformation states on the AI supply chain — states manufacturing advanced chips, supplying manufacturing equipment, or hosting large-scale computing infrastructure — are redefined from the standpoint of critical-tier governance as proliferation routes. The structure of this cell is two-sided. On one hand, by holding supply chokepoints a transformation state becomes a bearer of the regime's effectiveness and obtains, in exchange for participating in control, the consideration of guaranteed access and allied standing (the position of Japan and the Netherlands in semiconductor export controls from 2022 onward is a prior instance of this structure at the C2 level). On the other hand, a transformation state also becomes an object of monitoring by virtue of its own supply capacity. Further, the concept of latency from Section 9.2.7 takes effect here. The accumulation of transformation capability shortens, by definition, the distance to critical capability. States at M2×C3 are the structural counterpart of non-nuclear-weapon States holding enrichment and reprocessing capability — not holding, but at a short distance from attainment — and just as Japan's nuclear latency at the level of objective capability has continued to be an issue in the operation of the regime, the accumulation of compute, personnel and data by AI transformation states is to be expected to become an object of declaration and monitoring under critical-tier governance. The institutional requirements of M2×C3 are the domestic implementation of export controls, cooperation with accountancy of the supply chain, and transparency about one's own latency; the failure modes are the two poles of becoming a proliferation route through failure of control, and, conversely, loss of the transformation margin through excessive acceptance of control (Proposition 4, Section 7). 249 The history of the nuclear supplier regime leaves this cell one further warning. What the NSG's exception for India in 2008 showed is a dynamic in which, when the rules of a supply- control regime are selectively relaxed in the geopolitical interest of major powers, the consistency of the regime — the expectation that rules apply equally to all parties — is impaired. In AI supply control likewise, the more that exemptions from export controls, preferences within alliances and political adjudication of individual transactions accumulate, the more control is transformed from "rules" into "discretion," and the lower the predictability for transformation states — the obverse of the security of procurement that is the condition of existence of M2 (Proposition 4, Section 7). From the standpoint of a transformation state, participation in a supply-control regime is a transaction that buys rulesbased predictability at the cost of having one's own supply conduct constrained, and the turn of a regime toward discretion erodes the consideration in that transaction. The concrete interests Japan holds in the dynamics of this cell are treated in Section 18. 9.10.3 M3×C3 — The Capability Umbrella: The Counterpart of Extended Deterrence M3×C3 is the cell of states that do not hold critical-tier capability and concentrate on utilization under guaranteed access to the capability held by an ally. The counterpart in the history of the nuclear regime is the "nuclear umbrella" (extended deterrence). States under the umbrella avoided the cost and danger of holding, but took on a different problem in its place: the credibility of the guarantee. The alliance dilemma — whether the guarantor will continue to hold out the umbrella even at the risk of its own sacrifice (the fear of abandonment), or, conversely, whether one will be drawn into the guarantor's conflicts (the fear of entrapment) — has remained the central problem of the theory of extended deterrence. If C3 arrives, a structure isomorphic with the nuclear umbrella is to be expected for a "capability umbrella": constraints on autonomy in exchange for guaranteed access, constant anxiety about the credibility of the guarantee, and the use of conditions of access by the guarantor as an instrument of discipline. Two points differ from the nuclear case, however. First, whereas the nuclear umbrella was a guarantee of deterrence that functions by not being used, the capability umbrella is a guarantee of access to a service in constant use in peacetime, and its reliability is measured not by a single decision in a crisis but by the continuous quantity of continuity of supply. This structure connects directly to the discussion of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6) in Section 13: the umbrella may be a component of an allied guarantee of the guarantee level, but does not substitute for it. Second, just as the pursuit of latent capability (hedging) was a source of alliance friction under the nuclear umbrella, the accumulation of latency under the capability umbrella (building one's own computing infrastructure and one's own models) may become a source of tension with the guarantor. The institutional requirements of M3×C3 are the codification and pluralization of guarantees of access and domestic absorptive capacity (Proposition 5, Section 7); the failure modes are defencelessness against unilateral change in the conditions of the guarantee, and the irreversibility of dependence generated by depth of utilization.

Table 6. Cell-by-cell summary of Row C3 (every cell is an unrealized, conditional description) Cell Defining features Mode of value Institutional requirements Specific failure modes Counterpart in the history of the nuclear regime M1×C3 (criticaltier holders) Produces and holds criticaltier capability. The dominant form is state control and an international regime, not the logic of the market The currency of security (deterrence, coercion, alliance formation). Commercial sale is an object of suppression as proliferation Acceptance of verification (international access to accountancy) / performance of the compensating side of a grand bargain / incorporation of private holders / restraint of concentrated power Destabilization of the race to arrive (Section 9.9) / legitimacy cost of a freeze / distortion of domestic institutions by control (deepening of Proposition 6a) Nuclearweapon States (the upper tier of the NPT's two-tier structure). But with the unprecedented difference of private-sector origin M2×C3 (criticaltier subcontractors) Transformation states supplying the inputs necessary for the production and maintenance of critical- tier capability. Defined by the regime as proliferation routes The consideration for holding supply chokepoints (guaranteed access, allied standing) and the transformation margin Domestic implementation of export controls / cooperation with accountancy of the supply chain / transparency about one's own latency Becoming a proliferation route through failure of control / loss of the transformation margin through excessive acceptance of control / alliance friction over the accumulation of latency NSG participating supplier states and non-nuclearweapon States holding enrichment and reprocessing capability (the continuum of latency) M3×C3 (utilizing states under the umbrella) Does not hold critical-tier capability; accesses it under an allied guarantee and concentrates on utilization Avoidance of the cost and danger of holding, and the compounding of utilization (Proposition 5). The consideration is constraint on autonomy Codification and pluralization of guarantees of access / domestic absorptive capacity / combination with a sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6, Section 13) Defencelessness against unilateral change in the conditions of the guarantee / irreversibility of dependence / tension with the guarantor through the pursuit of latency The nuclear umbrella (extended deterrence). But with the difference of a guarantee of a service in constant peacetime use 9.11 Propositions 9 and 10 — The Verification Anchor and the Asymmetry of a Freeze The analysis of this section is gathered into two propositions. The first is the formalization of the difference shown by the four-regime comparison of Section 9.4 — that the success 251 or failure of a verification mechanism is governed by whether the controlled act is accompanied by a measurable physical correlate — into which the dynamics of the depreciation of the anchor introduced in Section 9.7 are incorporated. The proposition consists of two layers: a comparative proposition about regimes in general, and the part applying it to AI. Proposition 9 (The Verification Anchor Hypothesis) In an international regime for the control of dangerous capabilities, whether a verification function is established as an institution is governed by whether the controlled act is accompanied by a measurable physical correlate. That is, (i) in regimes whose object is anchored to a measurable physical quantity (nuclear: accountancy of fissile material; chemical: declaration and inspection of precursors and facilities) a verification mechanism is established, and (ii) in regimes whose object lacks a measurable physical quantity (biological: dual-use production equipment and pathogens; cyber: absence of a physical signature of the act) a verification mechanism is not established, or, where established, extends only to reliance on declarations. As for AI, compute, electricity and facilities may serve as a type (i) anchor, while the layers of model weights, inference and applications belong to type (ii). The verification function of critical-tier governance is therefore designable only at the chip and training layers, and requires not a copy of the NPT but a new design taking compute as the verification anchor. This anchor is not static, however. Because Frontier Descent (Propositions 1 and 2) causes the compute required to attain any given level of capability to fall at the half-life of the anchor (Definition 9), a fixed threshold based on quantity of computation loses effectiveness over a period of a few multiples of the half-life. The verification function of critical-tier governance therefore persists only by building continuous downward revision of the threshold into the institution, and not by fixing the threshold. This is the counterpart, in a verification institution, of the fact that security of supply holds only as Continuous Construction because stockpiles depreciate (Proposition 8). Falsification condition (a) If a case is observed in which an effective third-party verification mechanism is established in a regime lacking a physical correlate, or (b) if cases are observed in which verification mechanisms systematically fail to be established in regimes possessing a physical correlate, the general part of this proposition is rejected. (c) If a state persists in which the half-life of the verification anchor is below the institutional cycle of threshold revision (the time required for treaty amendment or for updating a technical annex), a verification function based on quantity of computation loses its designability and the AI-application part is rejected. (d) If a technical change occurs in which dependence on compute falls sharply (attainment of critical capability with small-scale computation), the AI-application part is likewise rejected. The structure of Proposition 9 should be made explicit in relation to the evidence. The evidence for the general part of this proposition (the claim about regimes for the control of dangerous capabilities in general) is the four-regime comparison of Section 9.4, and its 252 falsification conditions (a) and (b) are likewise directed at cross-regime observation. The AI-application part, by contrast, is a deduction applying the general part to the present layer structure of AI, and the ten items of Table 7 are its item-by-item consequences. Falsification conditions (c) and (d) are directed only at this AI-application part, and whichever of them is satisfied, the general part remains — the anchor is lost not because the proposition that "a physical correlate makes verification possible" becomes false, but because in AI the physical correlate ceases to correspond to the object of control. This two-layer structure is a consequence of the fact that this proposition is not a generalization from a single case. One further methodological point of standing. Proposition 9 is itself an application, in Row C3, of the Discipline of Analogy (Proposition 1, Section 3), the methodology of this paper. What Section 3 did for the petroleum analogy — decomposing the analogy into a bundle of properties and mapping explicitly which properties transfer and which do not — this section has carried out for the nuclear analogy in the ten items of Table 7. Both the universal analogy that "AI is like the nuclear" and the universal denial that "AI is not the nuclear" are too coarse before the distribution of determinations in Table 7 (a mixture spanning every grade from A to D). By contrast with the discipline of Section 3, however, the step this section adds is that the watershed of the determinations — the presence or absence of an anchor in the physical layer — is obtained independently, from a comparison with three regimes outside the nuclear, rather than induced from the determinations themselves. The Discipline of Analogy is complete only when it includes not merely the work of making a correspondence table but also the work of justifying the criterion for making the table outside the table. The second proposition integrates the grand bargain of the NPT (Section 9.2.1) with the analysis of the stability of deterrence (Section 9.9). Proposition 10 (Asymmetry of a Freeze and Instability) Critical-tier governance has an incentive structure that reproduces the same "freeze on holders" problem as nuclear nonproliferation — the asymmetry by which prior holders fix their acquired positions and exclude later comers. At the same time, when the difficulty of verification (Proposition 9) combines with the expectation of first-mover advantage, deterrence may be less stable than nuclear deterrence (incentives to pre-empt and to interfere). The arrival of C3 in the absence of governance results in arms-race instability; its arrival under verifiable governance results in a managed hierarchy. A system is not an age that arrives but a contingency that is constructed (the Layer Zero version of Proposition 14 in 2026g). Falsification condition If capability at the C3 level diffuses while means of verification remain absent, and a stability persists in which no military incentive to pre-empt is observed, the claim of instability is rejected. 253 The first part of Proposition 10 states that the lesson of NPT history — that an asymmetric freeze obtains wide acceptance only through compensation and obligations written into the text, while non-performance generates a constant legitimacy cost — is inherited by an AI regime. The counterpart of the nuclear apartheid critique (Singh, 1998) is already observable in nascent form, as legitimacy objections by states of the global South to a club of frontier-holding states, within the shift in the centre of gravity of summit diplomacy (Section 9.12). Here the half-life of the verification anchor (Definition 9, Section 9.7) adds to the first part of Proposition 10 an implication that did not exist in the nuclear case. The line the NPT froze was a date — whether a nuclear explosive device had been manufactured and exploded before 1 January 1967 — and so the line itself does not move with time. The legitimacy of the freeze was disputed, but the object of the freeze remained clear. By contrast, the line frozen by a regime that delimits the C3 threshold by quantity of computation is not capability but the cost of attaining capability. And that cost keeps falling at the half-life of the anchor. Hence the very threshold that prior holders seek to fix moves downward every year. If the threshold is fixed, within a few years equivalent capability is attained with compute below the threshold and the regime is hollowed out in substance. If the threshold is lowered to follow, it appears to later comers that prior holders keep moving the line in order to protect their acquired positions, and the legitimacy cost is higher than in the nuclear case. A freeze is inherently more difficult than in the nuclear case, and the difficulty is not a problem of negotiating technique but of the physical properties of the object frozen. This implication bears on the latter part of Proposition 10 as well. That the line of the freeze moves means that for later comers the objective of "attaining and thereby entering the inside of the freeze" also moves, and the race to arrive has no endpoint defined. In the nuclear case the objective of a later comer was in principle finite: once a certain capability was obtained, the status of holder could be asserted as a fait accompli. Under a regime whose threshold moves downward every year, even this route to a fait accompli is unstable. With this non-stationarity of the objective added to the unverifiability and the expectation of first-mover advantage discussed in Section 9.9, the instability of the race to arrive is triply determined. Here too a correspondence with Proposition 8 holds: just as security of supply holds only as Continuous Construction because stockpiles depreciate, a freeze likewise can hold only as continuous renegotiation, and not as a single agreement, because the threshold depreciates. And a freeze requiring continuous renegotiation has more occasions of breakdown than a single freeze. The latter part states that the branching between two consequences depends on the design variable of the presence or absence of governance. Here Proposition 14 of (Kadowaki, 2026g) — that a system is not a given age but a contingency that is constructed — is raised to Layer Zero. The "constructedness of systems" that Redefinition Capitalism (the seventh instalment) discussed at the level of capital markets becomes, at C3, literally a problem of constructing international institutions. Predicting arrival and specifying the consequences of arrival as a function of design 254 variables are distinct intellectual operations, and this section has performed only the latter. 9.12 Where Matters Stand, 2023–2026 — A Five-Layer Patchwork and the Atoms for Peace Period Finally, the analytical framework above is applied to the actual state of international AI governance as of August 2026. Institution-building since 2023 has proceeded, without binding force and without verification, as the following five-layer patchwork. First layer: scientific assessment. The international scientific assessment report commissioned by approximately 30 countries at the Bletchley Summit of November 2023 has been published in successive editions by an expert panel chaired by Yoshua Bengio: an interim report (May 2024), the first edition (published 29 January 2025), a Key Update (October 2025), and the second edition (published 3 February 2026) (International AI Safety Report). It is framed as a consensual synthesis of scientific evidence rather than as policy recommendation, and is the first permanent institution transferring an IPCC-type science– policy interface to AI (Table 7, determination #6). Within the United Nations system as well, following the Global Digital Compact of September 2024, General Assembly resolution A/RES/79/325 of 26 August 2025 decided to establish an Independent International Scientific Panel on AI (40 members, three-year terms from 12 February 2026) and a Global Dialogue on AI Governance (the first in Geneva in July 2026), making scientific assessment and a framework for dialogue permanent within the United Nations. Second layer: summit diplomacy. The Bletchley Declaration of 1 November 2023 was signed by 28 countries and the EU, and for the first time recorded the potential for catastrophic harm from frontier AI in a multilateral document. It was a landmark in that the United States and China signed the same document. The Seoul Summit of May 2024 produced the Seoul Declaration and corporate commitments; the Paris AI Action Summit of 10–11 February 2025 produced a statement on "inclusive and sustainable AI" (signed by more than 60 countries and institutions, though the United States and the United Kingdom declined to sign). The India AI Impact Summit (New Delhi) of 16–21 February 2026 was attended by 118 countries, and the New Delhi Declaration adopted on 19 February was endorsed by 89 countries and international organizations (all commitments being voluntary and non-binding). Alongside it, frameworks such as a charter on democratic AI diffusion and the Global AI Impact Commons were announced, together with infrastructure investment pledges on the scale of approximately 250 billion dollars and a 20 billion dollar deep-tech fund. The implication of this series is twofold. On one hand a multilateral forum for discussion has become permanent over three years; on the other the centre of gravity of the agenda has moved from "safety" (Bletchley) through "action, opportunity and sovereignty" (Paris) to "impact and diffusion" (New Delhi). This movement indicates that political demand for a C3-type preventive regime is low at present, and may at the same time be read as a manifestation of the fact that the legitimacy problem of the first part of Proposi‐ 255 tion 10 — control without distribution of benefits is not accepted — already operates as a dynamic of negotiation. Third layer: voluntary corporate frameworks. On 21 May 2024, at the Seoul Summit, 16 firms (with four added subsequently) signed the Frontier AI Safety Commitments, undertaking to publish "thresholds of intolerable risk" and corresponding measures. As of the end of 2025, 12 firms in total had published safety policies, and the principal frameworks include ones defining graduated safety levels and critical capability levels (Anthropic's Responsible Scaling Policy, currently v2.2; Google DeepMind's Frontier Safety Framework, currently v3.0; OpenAI's Preparedness Framework, currently Version 2 [revised April 2025], and others). On METR's compilation (December 2025 version), the common elements extend to the definition of capability thresholds, security of model weights, conditions for halting development and deployment where a response is not possible, frequency of evaluation, and mechanisms of accountability. This is open competition in voluntary safety levels without passing through interstate treaty, and is institution formation led by private firms with no parallel in the history of the nuclear regime. Third-party verification is not established, however, and verification depends on self-declaration and voluntary evaluation by external evaluation bodies — in the vocabulary of Definition 7, it is voluntary threshold-setting lacking a verification function. Fourth layer: supply control. United States controls on exports of advanced semiconductors to China from October 2022 onward, with Japanese and Dutch coordination, are, as determination #3 of Table 7 records, an advance implementation of NSG-type supply chokepoint control without a treaty (for the details of the institutions and their evolution, including the policy shift of 2025, see Sections 5 and 8). Of the five layers, this is the only one that acts directly on an anchor in the physical layer. Fifth layer: minimal norms. On 14 May 2024 the first intergovernmental AI dialogue between the United States and China was held in Geneva. On 16 November of that year the United States–China leaders' meeting at APEC in Lima agreed that human control over the decision to use nuclear weapons should be maintained. This is the first leader-level consensual statement at the AI–nuclear interface, and the minimal unit of norm formation in the form of "identifying decisions that must not be delegated to autonomous systems." The institutional continuation of this dialogue did not, however, reach institutionalization after the change of United States administration in 2025, and the existence of a permanent dialogue mechanism cannot be confirmed as of August 2026. On how this five-layer patchwork is to be assessed, both sides must be set out. The position that sees the patchwork as a deficiency rests on the grounds that no binding treaty and no third-party verification agency exists in any of the five layers, and therefore that of the three functions of Definition 7, verification is not institutionalized at all. On this view the present state is not "institution formation" but an accumulation of declarations with the appearance of institution formation, and provides no preparation against a C3-type state of affairs. On the other hand there is a position that sees the patchwork as adaptive. At a stage where technical uncertainty is high and even the definition of a threshold of 256 "holding" is difficult (Table 7, determination #4), a binding treaty carries the risk of fixing a mistaken threshold. A polycentric set of institutions — scientific assessment supplying knowledge, summits supplying norms, corporate frameworks supplying practical thresholds, supply control supplying command of the physical layer, each with its own part — has higher adaptability to technical change than a single treaty; and since the nuclear regime itself functioned not as the treaty (the NPT) alone but as a composite of cartel, safeguards and leaders' norms (Section 9.2), compositeness is not in itself a defect. This is the counter-argument. What this paper's framework can add to this controversy is one point. The divergence between the two positions in fact reduces to a divergence in implicit assessments of the probability that C3 arrives. The higher one puts that probability, the more fatal the verification vacuum appears; the lower one puts it, the more excessive the prior imposition of binding measures appears. And the position of this paper, holding to neutrality on the probability of arrival, points out only the following: since building a verification institution took decades in the nuclear case (44 years from declaration to the Additional Protocol), and since the possibility of building it decays as capability diffuses (the lesson of the Baruch Plan), the timing at which design should begin is asymmetric toward the early side irrespective of any assessment of the probability of arrival. Beginning and binding are distinct: design research that does not fix a threshold, development of methods of measurement, and demonstration of verification techniques can be advanced independently of the merits of a binding treaty. Placing these five layers on the time axis of the history of the nuclear regime, one periodizing metaphor holds. The present state, in which scientific assessment and declaratory norms exist but a binding treaty and a permanent verification agency do not, corresponds in nuclear history to an early stage of institution formation before the establishment of the IAEA (1957), in the Atoms for Peace period (1953–57). This metaphor has two implications. First, it is not a ground for pessimism. The nuclear verification regime too was not established at a stroke; it was layered over more than 40 years, driven by failures, from declaration (1953) to agency (1957), comprehensive safeguards (1972) and the Additional Protocol (1997). Second, it is nonetheless not a ground for optimism either. What drove nuclear institution formation was the existence of a physical verification anchor, whereas the anchor in AI (the measurability of compute) is not, like the significant quantity of nuclear material, a constant that does not change meaning with time; as seen in Section 9.7 it is a quantity depreciating with a half-life on the order of months. The nuclear could be layered over 40 years because the anchor did not move for 40 years. This difference imposes one limitation on the metaphor: the time allowed for institution formation in AI is not shorter than in the nuclear case so much as qualitatively different, in the sense that an institution that cannot be revised at a rate that keeps pace with the depreciation of the anchor will not be completed however much time is spent. The design of critical-tier governance can be begun only while the anchor exists, and an institution once begun will not persist unless it has a revision cycle built into it — superimposing the lesson of the Baruch Plan (feasibility decays as capability diffuses) and the lesson of Proposition 8 (a fixed quantity depreciates against the advance of the frontier) in the vocabulary 257 of Layer Zero, this is the conclusion of this section. The examination of Row C3 closes here; the next section returns to the structure of infrastructural dependence already operating at the actual levels of C1 and C2 — price, scarcity, and AI outage. 258 10. Focal Analysis: The M2×C2 Cell — Conditions for High- Value-Added Transformation 10.1 Why This Cell Is Discussed on Its Own The preceding three sections completed one circuit of the nine cells. This section takes one of them — M2×C2, the position of procuring frontier-tier capability from outside and supplying it onward with value added through transformation — and discusses it on its own. Treating just one of the nine cells in a separate chapter carries a duty of justification. As Proposition 3 (Section 6) asserts, the nine cells are not equivalent to one another, and since a strategy optimal in one cell may be inferior or harmful in another, setting out one particular cell in detail risks tacitly recommending that cell as a normative objective. This section makes that recommendation only within a limitation stated in advance. That is, M2×C2 becomes "the only cell in which transformation value can be captured and which is also attainable" solely for states satisfying the four conditions set out below; it is not claimed that this holds for all states. For states with a different industrial structure, another cell may be optimal. What is first to be avoided is justification by elimination. The argument that "M1×C2 (frontier production) is out of reach given the requirement levels of capital, electricity and talent, and M3×C1 (simple utilization) creates no differentiation; therefore only M2×C2 remains" appears frequently in policy documents, and it is mistaken. The error has two stages. First, elimination gives no guarantee whatever that the remaining cell is attainable. The inference "because the others are impossible, the remainder is possible" does not hold — it may be that all are impossible. Second, elimination does not tell one the conditions of establishment of the remaining cell. What must be built up for it to hold, and what, if absent, causes it to collapse, cannot be derived from the impossibility of the other cells. Positive grounds mean showing the mechanism by which value arises in the cell concerned, enumerating the conditions that support that mechanism, and assessing whether those conditions can be satisfied. These three tasks are the business of this section. 10.1.1 Delimiting the Cells in Which Transformation Value Arises The starting point is accounting. By Definition 5 (Section 7), transformation value is the difference between the consideration a transformer pays for the AI capability it procures and the consideration it receives from final demanders. This definition mechanically delimits in which cells the quantity called transformation value may arise. At M3 (the Utilization Model), the actors of the state concerned stand on the side of the final demander and have no transformed output to supply externally. In M3 cells, therefore, transformation value in the sense of Definition 5 does not arise within the national economy — what 259 arises there is the effect by which AI as an input amplifies other domestic value (Proposition 5, Section 7), which is important but is a different quantity from transformation value. At M1 (the Resource-Producing Model), the actors of the state concerned stand on the supply side rather than the procurement side, and their share is realized as the procurement price itself. It is only in the three M2 cells that transformation value appears as an accounting quantity inside the national economy as a difference, and that its attribution is contested. Next, the difference between Row C1 (M2×C1, Section 7) and Row C2 (M2×C2, Section 8) among the three M2 cells is re-examined from the standpoint of transformation value. Proposition 4 (Section 7) gives three conditions of survival for the Transformation Model: (i) security of procurement, (ii) an endowment of complementary assets on at least one of the four indicators, and (iii) access to a demand market. As Section 7 showed, at Tier C1 condition (i) is very nearly given by the multiplicity of suppliers and the existence of open weights, and the binding constraint is concentrated in (ii). At Tier C2, condition (i) itself becomes a variable (Section 8). Thus far the argument has been made. The point this section adds is that this difference extends also to the level of transformation value that may be captured. Capability at Tier C1 has substitutes in multiple jurisdictions, and prices continue to fall sharply. The consideration a Tier C1 transformer receives from final demanders is therefore compressed by competition with substitute transformers — that the procurement price is equally low for competitors worldwide means that the transformer has no cost advantage. By contrast, so long as the set of actors with access to Tier C2 capability is limited, a transformer using such capability may capture part of that scarcity. Paradoxically, difficulty of procurement acts as a barrier to entry for the transformer that has succeeded in procuring. This paradox does not hold unconditionally. The scarcity of access becomes the transformer's share only where differences protected by the wall of integration cost exist among those holding access. If access is the only difference, that difference disappears overnight with a change in the conditions of access — this is the vulnerability specific to M2×C2, organized as a failure mode in 10.5. The positive grounds for M2×C2 must therefore be formulated not as "because access is scarce" but as "because it is the position where the scarcity of access and the wall of integration cost overlap." 10.1.2 The Requirement Levels of M1×C2 and Its Attainability Next, the requirement levels of the cell above, M1×C2, are assessed. The question to ask here is not "can it be reached?" but "having reached it, by what is it maintained?" As Proposition 1 (Section 3) formulates, the scarcity of AI is not the scarcity of a stock of reserves but the scarcity of productive capacity as a flow — compute, electricity, talent. In a position governed by the scarcity of a flow, attainment is a question not of state but of speed. The requirement levels are examined for four inputs in turn. As to capital, the training cost of frontier models is growing at approximately 2.4 times per year (90% confidence interval 2.0 to 3.1 times), and a single training run is estimated to exceed one billion dollars 260

by 2027 (Cottier et al., 2024). Private AI investment in 2025 was approximately 285.9 billion dollars for the United States and approximately 12.4 billion dollars for China (Stanford HAI, 2026). As to compute, as of May 2025 approximately 75% of world AI supercomputer performance was located in the United States and approximately 15% in China (Pilz et al., 2025). Only approximately 30 countries in the world have AI-oriented GPU regions in the public cloud (Lehdonvirta, Wú & Hawkins, 2024). As to electricity, the speed at which computing infrastructure can be expanded is rate-limited by the speed at which the physical layer of transmission, distribution and generation can be added — in Japan, the fiscal 2026 demand outlook of the Organization for Cross-regional Coordination of Transmission Operators incorporates an increase in demand of up to 56.8 billion kWh (6.71% of the national total) by fiscal 2035 from new and expanded data centres and semiconductor plants alone (OCCTO, 2026). As to talent, the number of frontier developers is concentrated in approximately ten firms worldwide (Section 8). It is not possible to conclude directly from these figures that attainment is impossible. Contrary evidence exists at the same time. The coexistence of a twenty-three-fold gap in investment with a performance gap between the top United States and Chinese models on the order of a few per cent (Stanford HAI, 2026) shows that attainment of the frontier is not a monotonic function of investment. The fact that the open-weight frontier has closed to within a few months of the closed frontier (Epoch AI, 2026) means that a floor of capability continues to be supplied from outside at no charge. This paper therefore does not claim that M1×C2 is unattainable. What it claims is the following asymmetry. The position of M1×C2 is not a holding but a flow, and the cost of maintaining it does not fall below the cost of establishing it. Catching up to the frontier for a single generation and remaining at the frontier are two undertakings with different cost structures. The former may be achieved by a single concentrated investment; the latter requires permanent pursuit of a trajectory on which training costs grow at approximately 2.4 times per year. Moreover, what is obtained even by successful pursuit is limited: as Proposition 1 shows, attained capability descends to C1 within months to a few years through Frontier Descent, and there strategic character (properties (ii), (iii), (iv)) attenuates. That is, the return on investment in M1×C2 derives in large part not from capability itself but from the negotiating and security position that accompanies holding capability. That return does not automatically convert into the productivity of the national economy. The structure Section 7 described for M1×C1 — producing without being able to command — changes at Tier C2 into a different form: commanding is possible, but the cost of commanding becomes permanent. The assessment derived from this is not a binary yes or no but a conditional expression of cost and effect. Full entry into M1×C2 is rational for a state only where (a) it has fiscal, electrical and human capacity sufficient to bear a permanent cost of pursuit, and (b) the opportunity cost of directing that capacity to other uses is small. The assessment of (b) is harder than that of (a), because concentrating finite high-skilled talent and electricity on frontier training may exhaust the integration personnel on the transformation side and 261 the inference demand of the field. This is the intra-national counterpart of the "curse of concentration" formulated in international comparison by Proposition 6a (Section 8), and is nothing other than the resource-movement effect of Corden & Neary (1982) operating with an advanced-technology sector rather than a resource sector as its origin. This point is taken up again in 10.6 as a design problem of minimizing engagement with the higher tier. 10.1.3 The Consequences of Remaining at M3×C1 An assessment downward is likewise necessary. Remaining at M3×C1 — the position of merely injecting commodity-tier capability into domestic processes of production and daily life — is often presented as "the realistic choice," since the friction of introduction is minimal, the cost low, and political resistance small. As Section 7 showed, diffusion in this cell is itself unquestionably beneficial. The problem lies in the consequences of remaining there. The first consequence is the widening of exposure. On the distinction of Definition 4 (Section 13), exposure is the scale and share of external procurement of AI inputs, whereas AI dependence is a quantity defined by degradation upon interruption. Deepening utilization in itself only raises exposure, and does not necessarily raise dependence — if substitutes function immediately, dependence is low. But the provision of substitutes does not advance automatically. Through channel (α), the cost channel of Proposition 5 (Section 7), that part of the benefit of productivity improvement which is paid abroad as consideration for the input is not retained domestically. The deepening of pure utilization is the widening of a state in which domestic critical processes are made a function of external supply while the state has no capacity to manage that functional relation itself. The second consequence, and the one to which this section gives more weight, is the externalization of value-definition capability. Proposition 17 (Section 17) asserts that as capability descends to C1, the competitive advantage yielded by making existing operations more efficient with that capability diminishes toward zero as the cost of imitation falls. Applied to M3×C1, this proposition entails the following: in a world where everyone performs the same efficiency improvements on the same floor, differences in the degree of efficiency narrow. What generates a residual there is the capacity to select and realize an objective (value-definition capability, Definition 12, Section 17). The position of pure utilization, however, has a structure that systematically externalizes the selection of objectives. The set of usable functions is given from outside, and the enterprise of searching for the best use within that set is the selection of means, not the selection of ends. The deepest consequence of remaining at M3×C1 is not an increase in external payments but that a state's industries come to derive the set of problems they should solve backwards from the set of functions others provide. The full development of Proposition 17 is left to Section 17; here the reference is forward only. The third consequence arises as a composite of the first two. Where an upward transition is attempted from a state of widened exposure and externalized value-definition capabil‐ 262 ity, the time constant of accumulation is on the order of years, while the frontier keeps advancing throughout (Proposition 15, Section 15). That is, the sequential strategy of "first build a footing through utilization, then move to transformation later" is slower than supposed. This point is left to the branching analysis of Section 15. 10.1.4 Formulation of the Positive Grounds Integrating the three assessments above, the positive grounds for discussing M2×C2 on its own can be formulated as the following three propositions. First, the arising of value. Only at the M2 position does transformation value in the sense of Definition 5 arise as an accounting quantity inside the national economy. At M3 it does not arise; at M1 it is realized as the procurement price. Only for the three M2 cells can retaining the attribution of transformation value domestically be set as a policy objective. Second, the mechanism of defence. At Tier C2 the scarcity of procurement and the wall of integration cost overlap. For a Tier C1 transformer, procurement is on identical terms with competitors worldwide, and difference arises only from the wall of integration cost. At Tier C2, with the scarcity of access added, the effect of the wall of integration cost is amplified — because the intersection of the set of actors able to bear the integration cost and the set of actors holding access becomes the effective population of competitors. This amplification operates, however, only while access is stable. What guarantees stability is condition (i) of Proposition 4, and its institutionalization (position within an alliance, longterm contracts, diversification) constitutes the diplomatic requirement of this cell (Section 8). Third, non-importability. The assets that constitute the wall of integration cost — the complementary assets measured by the four indicators of Proposition 4, and the national brain capital underlying them (Definition 11, 10.4) — cannot, unlike AI capability, be obtained in the short run through publication, replication or import. This asymmetry is the ultimate ground of this cell's defensibility, and at the same time the condition that limits the set of states for which this cell can be an objective. The third ground converts directly into the limiting proviso of this section. That is, M2×C2 becomes "the only cell in which transformation value can be captured and which is also attainable" solely for states that simultaneously satisfy the following four conditions. (A) A matrix of complementary assets — an agglomeration of manufacturing, professional services and regulated industries of substantial scale exists, such that at least one of the four indicators of Proposition 4 can be made thick. (B) Access to a demand market — a domestic or export market that receives the transformed output exists, and the state's transformers can conform to the standards and jurisdictional requirements of that market (Proposition 4(iii)). (C) An institutional position for security of procurement — a continuing guarantee of access to Tier C2 capability can be institutionalized through allied guarantees, long-term contracts, or diversification of suppliers (Proposition 4(i)). (D) 263 Thickness of national brain capital — a human substrate exists in the four components of Definition 11 that keeps integration cost high for the producer. For a state lacking any one of these four conditions, M2×C2 is a mistaken objective. For a state that has resource output, capital and inexpensive electricity but lacks (A) and (D), moving upstream by capital (movement toward M1) may be more attainable. For a citystate economy with a small domestic market and lacking the matrix of (A), a hub strategy specializing in institutional embeddedness, or the M1×C1 position exploiting locational conditions, may be more coherent. For a state with a vast domestic market and language area but with the institutional maturity of its regulated industries still developing, M2×C1, betting on linguistic-contextual specificity and scale, may be realistic. The non-equivalence of the nine cells asserted by Proposition 3 means not a ranking of superiority but a diversity of fit. This section is not a section recommending a particular cell; it is a section that, by making explicit the conditions under which a particular cell holds, enables each state to determine whether that cell fits its own case. 10.1.5 Three Forms of the Output of Transformation — A Forward Reference to Section 12 The three subsections above have discussed the conditions under which the position M2×C2 holds. But that a position holds and what is supplied externally from that position are separate matters. Definition 3 (Section 6) specifies M2 as "the type that procures the resource from outside and supplies it externally with value added through transformation (processing, application, integration)," but while this specification enumerates three modes of transformation, it does not distinguish the form of what is supplied. In the petroleum period this distinction did not arise — refined products were traded in physical units, and the form was univocal. In AI the form is not univocal. This paper distinguishes three forms. (a) Export of capability — supplying access to a model as such. (b) Export of products — supplying goods with AI capability embedded, in physical units. (c) Export of integrated systems — transferring to an external jurisdiction the whole body of arrangements that make capability operable in a particular field of practice. The third form is formalized in Section 12 as Definition 20, and is distinguished from the other two in that it is supplied as a bundle of five elements: access to capability, the design of its incorporation into operational processes, arrangements for the allocation of liability, demonstration of conformity, and the human capability that carries out operation and verification. The verbatim formulation is in Section 12.1.3 and is not repeated here. This distinction matters for this section because the second ground of 10.1.4 — the wall of integration cost — in fact depends on the form of supply. The three forms differ in their resistance to compression. Form (a) is the most exposed to reduction into general-purpose functions; (b) is partly protected by the physical interface; and in (c) the wall of integration cost operates most thickly. That is, different values may be realized from the same endowment of complementary assets depending on the form of supply. The 264 conditions of establishment this section identifies are necessary conditions for all three forms, but they do not determine in which form supply occurs. The choice of form, the differences among forms in resistance to compression, and the conditions of the jurisdictions to which export is possible are all sent to Section 12. Here only the limitation of scope is made explicit: this section treats the conditions under which a position holds, not the form of the output. The three forms are not an exclusive classification. Actual transactions are mixed: if the sale of equipment is accompanied by operational support it lies between (b) and (c), and if the provision of a model is accompanied by the design of its introduction it lies between (a) and (c). The three forms should therefore be used as coordinates measuring how much weight a given transaction places on each form. In addition, the boundaries move over time — as the design of an integration is repeated, a type takes shape; once a type is fixed it is productized; once productized it is absorbed into standard functionality — so the direction of movement runs from (c) toward (a). This movement is the same phenomenon that 10.5.2 treats as a failure mode, "absorption of general-purpose functions through the producer's standard inclusion," seen from the side of the form of supply. That is, the retention of value by the wall of integration cost is not a permanent guarantee but a race against the speed of standardization. Here lies the reason, on the side of form, for this section's summary characterization of this cell as "a cell under the pressure of transition" (10.10). One terminological forward reference should also be made. The configuration whose conditions this section discusses — standing at the M2×C2 position and choosing (c), export of integrated systems, as the form of output — is given a name in Section 12. It is the "AI Foundry Model" (Definition 21, Section 12.1.6), and a state adopting this type is called an "AI Foundry State." This section discusses only the conditions, without using the name: the verbatim formulation of the definition, and the determination of what transfers and what does not from the semiconductor-foundry metaphor that gives the name its origin (Section 12.1.7, Table 27), are both consolidated in Section 12 and only referred to here. One conclusion of that determination bears on how this section is to be read, however, and is stated in advance: the bargaining power of this type rests on the side of desirability, not indispensability (Definition 15, Proposition 38). The conditions this section identifies are not conditions for creating a position others cannot bypass; they are conditions for creating a position others choose voluntarily. 10.2 Structural Correspondences and Non-Correspondences With the Processing-Trade Model of the Petroleum Period There is a metaphor often used in Japanese-language discussion of M2×C2 — "the processing- trade model of the Reiwa era" — which overlays the postwar Japanese structure of importing crude oil and exporting heavy chemical products and automobiles on the structure of procuring general-purpose foundation models and supplying them onward processed into domain-specialized AI. This metaphor may be useful, but used unconditionally 265 it commits the kind of error that Proposition 1 (Section 3) prohibits. The task of this subsection is to decompose the metaphor into the parts that hold and the parts that do not. The Discipline of Analogy consists in writing a correspondence table, not in adjudicating the presence or absence of correspondence in the aggregate. 10.2.1 Structures That Transfer T1: Security of procurement is a precondition. In fiscal 1973, Japan took an extreme producing-zero, transformation-specialized form, with petroleum accounting for 75.5% of domestic primary energy supply and dependence on the Middle East accounting for 77.5% of crude oil imports (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). What this structure meant was that the whole chain of transformation — refining, petrochemicals, steel, shipbuilding, automobiles — was conditioned on a single external supply. Condition (i) of Proposition 4 is nothing other than the generalization of that experience. In M2×C2 in the AI period this structure transfers unchanged in form. Indeed, the degree to which a chain of transformation is conditioned on a single input may be higher in AI — petroleum could be procured from several producing states, whereas supplier concentration for Tier C2 capability persists at a high level (Proposition 2, Section 5). T2: The transformer's complementary assets determine attribution. In petroleum, the transformer's share was the refining margin — the crack spread — an economic variable that fluctuates independently of the crude oil price (EIA). The structure in which the producer's share and the transformer's share are separate variables is precisely what Definition 5 transferred to the AI period. And in petroleum, what supported this independence were assets on the transformer's side: installed capital located at consumption sites, the capacity to conform to product standards market by market, agglomeration. That producing states repeatedly attempted downstream integration (Saudi Aramco's taking of the Motiva Port Arthur refinery into full ownership in 2017 is a contemporary example) without being able to substitute comprehensively for the position of transformation states is historical support for the proposition that the transformer's assets determine attribution. This structure transfers — but the kinds of asset do not (N1, N2). T3: Access to a demand market is necessary. Petroleum products were many in variety and small in lot, and quality standards differed by market. It was precisely this diversity of standards that made location at consumption sites efficient and gave transformers a logic of location. In the AI period, what corresponds to this are jurisdiction-specific regulatory requirements, industry standards, and language requirements. Condition (iii) of Proposition 4 and the fourth indicator (d), linguistic-contextual specificity, stand on this correspondence. A transformer without a market that receives its transformed output does not subsist, in the petroleum period or the AI period. T4: Improvement in transformation efficiency is a means of defence. Japan's response to the crisis of 1973 was not the acquisition of the upstream but a doubling of transformation efficiency (energy saving), diversification of inputs (moving away from petroleum), and institutionalization of buffers (stockpiling). Quantitatively, the primary energy re‐ 266 quired to generate one trillion yen of GDP halved from 70 PJ in fiscal 1973 to 35 PJ in fiscal 2021, and dependence on petroleum fell from 75.5% to 36.0% (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). This type of response — not going to acquire the upstream but doubling output per unit of input — can be mapped onto the AI period. That mapping is the determination indicator "domestic value added per yen of digital procurement," which Proposition 13 (Section 18) formulates for Japan. For M2×C2 in general, improvement in transformation efficiency is the most direct means of defence in a phase where the scarcity of procurement is high. T5: Transformation may have a logic of location independent of production. That Singapore, with no crude oil reserves whatever, became one of the world's leading refining hubs with refining capacity of over 1.5 million barrels per day, with approximately 95 petroleum and chemical firms agglomerated on Jurong Island, is the purest instance of the proposition that "a state without the resource can occupy the centre of the resource value chain" (Section 6). This structure transfers — but the content of the logic of location does not. In petroleum, a maritime nodal point and a regulatory environment generated locational rent, whereas there is no physical nodal point in the application layer of AI (N1). What transfers is the proposition that "not holding production does not prevent occupying the centre of transformation," not the proposition that "standing at a nodal point allows one to occupy the centre." The logic of location in the AI period is constituted not by geography but by the density of complementary assets and the quality of institutions. 10.2.2 Structures That Do Not Transfer N1: Refining was physically defensible, whereas general-purpose functions are absorbed by standard inclusion. The first wall that protected the refining margin in petroleum was the asymmetry of transport costs — crude oil is cheap to move in bulk over long distances, whereas products are many in variety and small in lot and are efficiently located at consumption sites. In AI this asymmetry does not exist. Supply of a foundation model reaches the whole world simultaneously through an API at very nearly zero marginal cost. The producer can therefore internalize that part of the value added of the application layer which reduces to general-purpose functions, by the route of standard inclusion in the next-generation model (Proposition 4). This is the mechanism set out in detail for Tier C1 in Section 7, and it operates identically at Tier C2 — indeed at Tier C2, because the producer holds frontier capability, the internalization of general-purpose functions is faster. The equals sign placed between "refining crude oil" and "turning a foundation model into applications" does not hold on this point. N2: Capital specificity in a plant industry was a barrier to entry, whereas software has none. A refinery is a very large installed capital configured to the product standards of the market it serves, and that specificity made possible the separation of ownership from location. So long as the principal capital of the application layer is software, this barrier does not exist. There is, however, an important reservation to this non-correspondence: where the transformed output is inseparable from the operation of physical 267 equipment, mechanisms and field work (where indicator (b) of Proposition 4, physical-interface intensity, is high), the specificity of installed capital partly revives. That is, N2 fails to transfer not across the whole of M2×C2 but for the part that can be separated from the physical interface. This reservation is why 10.3 treats physical-interface intensity as the first indicator. N3: Crude oil is a rival good that is consumed, whereas a foundation model is nonrival. The non-rivalry of data and models differs from petroleum at the level of physical properties as a resource (Jones & Tonetti, 2020). This difference has two consequences for a transformer. First, inferences about exhaustion of the raw material, production quotas and reserves do not transfer at all (Proposition 1). Second, and this is decisive for the theory of M2×C2, competitors worldwide obtain the same raw material simultaneously on identical terms. In the petroleum period, differences in procurement price — long-term contract terms, transport distance, refinery yields — explained a considerable part of the differences in competitiveness among transformers. In the AI period the procurement price of C2 capability is very nearly identical among those holding access. Differences among transformers therefore cannot arise at all on the raw-material side, and arise only on the transformation side. This is a failure of the metaphor and at the same time a paradox that strengthens the grounds of the theory of M2×C2 — if difference can arise only on the transformation side, then betting on the assets of the transformation side is not elimination but an entailment. N4: The producer reaches the final demander directly. In petroleum it was logistically impossible for a producing state to sell gasoline directly to drivers worldwide. Intermediate transformation and distribution were open to independent operators as a matter of physical inevitability. In AI this inevitability does not exist. The producer can supply capability directly to final demanders, and in fact does so. A transformer holds the intermediate position not by physical inevitability but only by the asymmetry of integration cost. The structural safety enjoyed by transformers in the petroleum period does not exist in the AI period. N5: The institutional means of buffering do not transfer. The core of the institutional response to the 1973 crisis was stockpiling — the establishment of the IEA in 1974 with an obligation to hold 90 days of net imports, and the start of national petroleum stockpiling in Japan in 1978. This means does not transfer. As Proposition 8 (Section 13) formulates, the sovereign minimum guarantee level, which corresponds to a "stockpile" in AI, depreciates in proportion to the speed at which the frontier advances. What transfers is the institutional objective of "buying time against an interruption of supply," not the institutional means of physical storage (Proposition 1). For a state at M2×C2 this non-correspondence has a practical implication: preparation against cut-off is not completed by a single investment and holds only as Continuous Construction. This is treated in 10.6. N6: The cycle of specification change in the raw material and the amortization period of transformation equipment are inverted. Refinery equipment is amortized over years and decades, and the properties of crude oil were stable by grade. Foundation 268 models turn over generations on a cycle of a few months to about a year, and with each turnover capability, price and connection specifications change. The payback period of investment on the transformer's side — integration, redesign of operations, obtaining certification, developing personnel — is often longer than this cycle. This inversion of time axes has no counterpart in the petroleum period and generates a design problem specific to M2×C2. That is, a transformer must not invest in "filling the weaknesses of the current generation of models" — that investment becomes worthless in the next generation. What should be invested in is the part invariant to generational turnover: the constraints of the field, regulatory requirements, and the structure of liability. This criterion is the obverse of failure modes (a) and (b) in 10.5. Table 11. Structural correspondences and non-correspondences between the processingtrade model of the petroleum period and M2×C2 in the AI period (sorted by the Discipline of Analogy, Proposition 1) Property Processing trade in the petroleum period M2×C2 in the AI period Determination T1 Security of procurement as a precondition Petroleum 75.5% of primary energy, Middle East dependence 77.5% (fiscal 1973). The whole chain of transformation was conditioned on a single external supply Supplier concentration for C2 capability persists at a high level (Proposition 2). The degree to which the chain of transformation is conditioned on a single input may be higher Transfers (Proposition 4(i)) T2 The transformer's assets determine attribution The refining margin (crack spread) fluctuates independently of the crude oil price. Downstream integration by producing states was repeated but did not substitute comprehensively for the position of transformation states The attribution of transformation value (Definition 5) depends on the endowment of complementary assets (the four indicators of Proposition 4) Transfers (the kinds of asset do not) T3 Need for access to a demand market Product standards differed by market, and conformity to standards was a condition for the transformer Conformity to jurisdictionspecific regulatory requirements, industry standards and language requirements is the condition Transfers (Proposition 4(iii)) T4 Improvement in transformation efficiency as defence Primary energy per trillion yen of GDP: 70 PJ (fiscal 1973) → 35 PJ (fiscal 2021). The response was a doubling of efficiency, not acquisition of the upstream Domestic value added per yen of digital procurement (Proposition 13, Section 18) is its mapping Transfers T5 An independent logic of location for transformation Singapore, with zero crude oil reserves, became a refining hub of over 1.5 million barrels per day (approximately 95 firms on Jurong Island) Not holding production does not prevent occupying the centre of transformation. But the logic of location is the density Transfers in part (the proposition transfers, the content does not) 269 Property Processing trade in the petroleum period M2×C2 in the AI period Determination of complementary assets and the quality of institutions, not geography N1 Physical defensibility of the transformation process The asymmetry of transport costs (crude cheap over long distances, products located at consumption sites) protected the refining margin Simultaneous supply at very nearly zero marginal cost through APIs. The part reducible to general-purpose functions is absorbed by standard inclusion Does not transfer N2 Barrier to entry through capital specificity Very large installed capital configured to the standards of the demand market made separation of ownership and location possible The principal capital of the application layer is software. But it partly revives where physical-interface intensity is high Does not transfer (except at the physical interface) N3 Rivalry of the raw material Crude oil is a rival good that is consumed. Differences in procurement price explained differences in competitiveness among transformers Models are non-rival (Jones & Tonetti, 2020). Competitors worldwide obtain the same raw material on identical terms, and difference arises only on the transformation side Does not transfer (the grounds of the M2 argument are strengthened) N4 Physical inevitability of the intermediate position It was logistically impossible for producing states to sell directly to final consumers Producers can supply final demanders directly. The intermediate position is held only by the asymmetry of integration cost Does not transfer N5 Institutional means of buffering Physical storage (IEA established 1974, obligation of 90 days of net imports; Japan began national stockpiling in 1978) The guarantee level depreciates in proportion to the advance of the frontier (Proposition 8). Holds only as Continuous Construction Does not transfer (only the institutional objective transfers) N6 Time axes of rawmaterial specification and equipment amortization Crude properties stable; refining equipment amortized over years and decades Foundation models turn over generations in months to a year. The payback period of transformation-side investment exceeds the cycle of specification change in the raw material Does not transfer (no counterpart in the petroleum period) 10.2.3 The Correct Use of the Metaphor From the decomposition in Table 11, the range of use of the metaphor of "the processing trade of the Reiwa era" can be fixed. What this metaphor may legitimately claim is limited to four points: that transformation is the centre of value (T2), that security of procurement is the precondition of the whole (T1), that conformity to the demand market is a condition 270

for the transformer (T3), and that the response to a crisis may be improvement in transformation efficiency rather than acquisition of the upstream (T4). What this metaphor must not claim is the following six points: that the transformation process is physically defended (N1), that capital specificity constitutes a barrier to entry (N2), that differences in procurement terms generate competitiveness (N3), that the intermediate position is structurally guaranteed (N4), that stockpiling buys time (N5), and that the payback period of investment is shorter than the cycle of the raw material (N6). The proposition formulated in Section 7 — that what transfers is the need for transformation, not the defensibility of the transformation margin — holds at Tier C2 as well. What Tier C2 adds is one layer above it. At Tier C1, because security of procurement was given, the parts where the metaphor fails appeared mainly on the transformation side (N1, N2, N4). At Tier C2, because security of procurement is itself a variable, the vulnerability of the 1973 type — the structural vulnerability that Transformation Models do not hold the upstream — revives as a part where the metaphor holds. Ironically, the aspect on which the metaphor of "the processing trade of the Reiwa era" fits best is not the success of processing trade but its vulnerability. One further note on the scholarly treatment of the metaphor. The three curves of "import → domestic production → export" formulated by the flying-geese paradigm (Akamatsu, 1962) described a type in which the industries of later-developing countries rise with a time lag. Whether this type is applicable to foundation models in AI can be determined unambiguously in light of this section's decomposition: it is not applicable. For import substitution to hold, domestic production must be able to substitute for imports in price and quality, but by N3 (non-rivalry) frontier capability does not behave as an object of import substitution. Published weights continue to supply a floor of capability at no charge and irrevocably, and that floor rises independently of domestic productive effort. As for transformed outputs — domain-specialized applications — the term import substitution does not fit in the first place, since they are specific to a domestic context and no imported counterpart exists. The criticism that the unit of analysis of the flying-geese paradigm is the industry, and that this unit lapses in the GVC era because transfer occurs at the level of processes (Section 4), is carried to its limit in AI: the unit of transfer is not even a process but a layer of functionality. 10.3 Condition I — The Four Indicators of Complementary Assets Made Concrete at C2 Proposition 4 (Section 7) provides that the endowment of complementary assets is measured by four ex ante observable indicators — (a) exclusive data endowment, (b) physicalinterface intensity, (c) institutional embeddedness, (d) linguistic-contextual specificity. Section 7 developed these four indicators in the context of Tier C1. This subsection makes the same four indicators concrete for the M2 cell at Tier C2. There are three differences from Tier C1. First, because the producer holds frontier capability, the speed of internalization of general-purpose functions is faster. Second, because security of procurement is a 271 variable, complementary assets are at once a defence of transformation value and bargaining power in the event of cut-off. Third, transformed outputs at Tier C2 are often directed at regulated and critical industries, so the weight of institutional embeddedness is relatively higher. For each indicator, what makes it thick and what makes it thin, and how it raises the producer's integration cost, are examined in turn. Before entering this subsection, the provenance of the concept of complementary assets and this paper's use of it should be made explicit. Complementary assets is a concept formulated by Teece (1986). Teece showed that the party able to capture profit from technological innovation is not necessarily the innovator but the party that proprietarily holds the assets indispensable for bringing the technology to market — manufacturing facilities, distribution, complementary technologies, regulatory qualifications. Where the institutional environment makes innovation easy to imitate (a weak appropriability regime) and the complementary assets are specialized, value is attributed not to the innovator but to the holder of the complementary assets. What this paper takes over is that rule of attribution itself — the construction in which Definition 5 reserves the attribution of transformation value as "an empirical question and not part of the definition" and Proposition 4 locates its determinant in the endowment of complementary assets is nothing other than a transposition of Teece's framework to the level of the state. The two axes of appropriability regime and specificity of complementary assets that Teece subsequently organized (the lineage running to Teece, Pisano, & Shuen, 1997) are referred to in Section 17.4.1 as a theory at the level of the firm. This paper differs from Teece (1986) in three respects. First, the unit of analysis moves from the firm to the jurisdiction. Teece's complementary assets are assets an individual firm may hold or procure, and many of them can be obtained on the market. The complementary assets measured by this paper's four indicators are, as Proposition 18 states, the externalized traces or institutionalized forms of national brain capital (Definition 11), and can be neither obtained nor imported in the short run. The difference in obtainability turns a problem of corporate strategy into a problem of national structure. Second, whereas in Teece's framework the subject is the bargaining between the holder of complementary assets and the innovator, in this paper the subject is the speed at which the producer internalizes complementary assets — the standard inclusion of generalpurpose functions stated in Proposition 4 is the case not of "an innovator without complementary assets," which Teece supposed, but of "an innovator able to produce part of the complementary assets in-house at very nearly zero marginal cost," and in that case attribution leans further toward the innovator than Teece's framework predicts. Third, whereas Teece's four assets are a descriptive category identified after the fact, Proposition 4 requires in its falsification condition measurement prior to a generational-turnover event, explicitly closing off the route of ex post reclassification. The third difference is a design responding to the criticism that Teece's framework has been used to explain "why that firm captured the profit" and seldom used for ex ante prediction. 272 10.3.1 (b) Physical-Interface Intensity — The Hardest Indicator The order is changed from that of Proposition 4, beginning with physical-interface intensity, because in the ordering of coefficients predicted by Hypothesis H2 (Section 21) — physical-interface intensity and exclusive data endowment > institutional embeddedness > linguistic-contextual specificity — this indicator is placed highest. Physical-interface intensity is the share of the revenue of the application concerned that is inseparable from the operation of physical equipment, mechanisms and field work. What makes it thick. First, bearing operational responsibility for the equipment oneself. A contractual structure that assumes responsibility for utilization rates, yields and maintenance cycles, rather than offering advice, ties revenue to the physical side. Second, retaining the design and control of the mechanism. Where one designs oneself the point at which AI output is converted into actual action — control laws, safety mechanisms, mechanical interfaces — improvement in capability converts directly into improvement in the value one provides. Third, being embedded in the processes of field work themselves. A function embedded within work procedures, inspection and handover has a cost of replacement far exceeding the cost of the function on its own. What makes it thin. First, revenue composition tilting toward information processing separable from the physical. Even for a firm holding physical equipment, if AI-related revenue is closed within an informational layer of "producing reports" and "notifying anomalies," this indicator is low. Second, the equipment itself becoming a commodity, and remote operation becoming possible. Third, the control interfaces of mechanisms being standardized and published — standardization lowers maintenance costs but at the same time lowers the wall of integration cost. How it raises the producer's integration cost. For a producer to internalize a physical interface, it must install equipment, station personnel in the field, assume responsibility for safety, and above all demonstrate capacity to compensate in the event of an accident. None of these rides on a route of very nearly zero marginal cost. As a reservation specific to Tier C2, however, the possibility must be made explicit that frontier capability descends onto the physical interface itself. If foundation models handling physical action become established as a general-purpose layer, part of the wall this indicator measures is eroded from upstream. This paper does not predict this possibility — as the falsification condition of Proposition 4 specifies, this is an empirical question about the predictive power of the four indicators, and if it occurs it will be observed in the form that "the coefficient on (b) among the four indicators declines across a generational turnover." The practical implication for a state at M2×C2 is to design physical-interface intensity as "the amount of responsibility assumed for the operation of equipment" rather than "the amount of equipment held." The former may be eroded; the latter is eroded slowly because it requires the transfer of a structure of liability. 273 10.3.2 (a) Exclusive Data Endowment — Not Quantity but Unobtainability Exclusive data endowment is the share of the data used by the application concerned that cannot be obtained from the public web and is generated only from the operational processes of the transformer concerned. What makes it thick. First, data being generated continuously from operational processes. A static mountain of data accumulated in the past is a one-off asset, whereas data that keep being generated so long as operation continues are a flow, and for a producer to follow it must hold the same operation. Second, data whose removal is restricted legally or contractually — medical records, supervised transaction records, safety-related maintenance records, where regulation itself institutionally guarantees exclusivity. Third, data that carry no meaning on their own and become interpretable only in combination with the context of their generation (who recorded what, for what purpose, within which procedure). Context does not exist on the public web. What makes it thin. First, the existence of routes by which data leak onto the public web. Second, the voluntary surrender of exclusivity through the contractual structure discussed below — blanket permission for the producer to use data for training (10.5(c)). Third, standardization of data formats advancing so that others can obtain data of the same kind at equivalent cost. Fourth, the marginal value of the data falling through synthetic data or generalization from few examples. The fourth point is specific to Tier C2 — the more advanced the capability, the higher the ability to generalize from few examples, and so the advantage of "holding a large quantity" may diminish. The guidance derived from this is clear. What this indicator should measure in substance at Tier C2 is not the quantity of data but their unobtainability. Data that anyone can hold identically build no wall, however voluminous. How it raises the producer's integration cost. For a producer to obtain exclusive data, it must either enter the operational process itself or contract with the party that operates it. The former is an investment that changes the character of the business; the latter generates bargaining power on the side of the operator. The existence of this bargaining power makes exclusive data endowment not merely an asset but a relation. The implication at the level of the state lies not in the location of data but in the rules of their generation and use — who generates them, who may use them for training, and to whom the results are attributed. This rule design is taken up again in 10.5(c) and 10.6(i-c). 10.3.3 (c) Institutional Embeddedness — The Indicator Whose Weight Rises at Tier C2 Institutional embeddedness is the presence and number of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations and liability-assumption contracts held by the application concerned. As stated in Section 7, because this indicator takes the outward form of certifications, registrations and contracts, a third party can count it. Its weight rises relatively at Tier C2 because transformed outputs requiring frontier capability are directed in many cases at 274 fields where the consequences of failure are large — medicine, finance, public administration, transport, energy. Having high capability and being able to bear responsibility for the outputs of that capability are separate requirements, and the latter is supplied only by institutions. What makes it thick. First, actually holding statutory certifications and supervisory registrations. Second, contractually assuming liability for errors in output — this requires insurance, provisions and capital, and is therefore also a function of financial capacity. Third, building auditability into the design — a record structure allowing reconstruction after the fact of who judged what, when and on what basis is the foundation of a continuing relation with regulators. Fourth, holding a history of dialogue with regulators. Institutions are made not of documents alone but include the practice of interpretation. What makes it thin. First, international harmonization of regulation and mutual recognition of certifications — socially preferable, but they lower the wall this indicator measures. Second, the spread of contractual practices shifting the locus of liability onto the user. Third, revenue tilting toward uses requiring no certification. How it raises the producer's integration cost. Obtaining certifications, supervisory registration and the assumption of liability all require time, capital and local legal personality. The assumption of liability in particular is for a producer not merely a cost but the assumption of risk, and demands a change in the business model — for an operator supplying general-purpose capability worldwide, assuming outcome liability for particular uses in particular jurisdictions is difficult to reconcile with its revenue structure. This irreconcilability is the essence of the wall of institutional embeddedness. The relation to regulatory power (the Brussels effect) treated in Section 8 should be organized here. As Section 8 confirmed, regulatory authority itself does not load directly on any of the four indicators — making regulation and turning regulation into value are separate policy tasks. The interest of this section lies on the latter side. That is, for a transformer at M2×C2, regulation is not an environment but a process. The capacity to carry out oneself the processes of conformity assessment, audit, assurance and assumption of liability raises institutional embeddedness. In a state lacking this capacity, the stringency of regulation is only a cost for the transformer and does not function as a wall. Stringency of regulation and institutional embeddedness are not the same thing. 10.3.4 (d) Linguistic-Contextual Specificity — The Thinnest Indicator and Its Remedy by Design Linguistic-contextual specificity is the number of language-specific and jurisdiction-specific standards that conformity of the application's output requires. As noted in Section 7, this bulwark is the most readily eroded of the four indicators by improvement in multilingual capability. At Tier C2 this erosion is faster still, because the more advanced the capability the higher the multilingual performance. 275 What makes it thick. First, jurisdiction-specific standards, formats and terminological systems being laid down in law, with a public accumulation of interpretation. Second, the form that output must satisfy being specified as an institutional requirement rather than as linguistic expression — "being able to write in Japanese" is a thin wall, whereas "being able to write in a particular statutory format in accordance with the interpretation in particular supervisory guidance" is a thick wall. Third, holding an apparatus that keeps pace continuously with updates in that interpretation. What makes it thin. First, improvement in the multilingual capability of general-purpose models. Second, international harmonization of standards. Third, the speaker population of the language being large enough that direct support is economic for the producer — paradoxically, the larger the language area the stronger the producer's incentive to support it itself, and the thinner the wall based on this indicator may become. Remedy by design. Making this indicator the object of a bet on its own cannot be recommended at Tier C2. The available design is to convert linguistic-contextual specificity into (c) institutional embeddedness. That is, instead of placing value on "being able to produce output in that language," the centre of gravity of value is moved to "verifying conformity with standards written in that language and bearing responsibility for the result of that verification." The former is a question of capability and is eroded; the latter is a question of institutions and is eroded slowly. This conversion is also the work of connecting component (ii) of national brain capital discussed in 10.4 (judgment embedded in language, culture and aesthetic sense) to components (iii) and (iv) (professional ethics and practice, and capacity for audit and verification). 10.3.5 Interaction of the Four Indicators and a Second Role Specific to C2 As stated in Section 7, the four indicators are not independent and are most defensive when high simultaneously. Field data generated from the operation of a physical interface raise exclusive data endowment; a record of implementation in regulated industries adds to institutional embeddedness; and a record of certification and assumption of liability opens access to the next set of operational data. What this circulation means at Tier C2 differs from Tier C1 in one respect. At Tier C2, complementary assets are at once a defence of transformation value and bargaining power in the event of cut-off. This second role reconfigures the relation between conditions (i) and (ii) of Proposition 4. Condition (i), security of procurement, is usually understood as the premise of (ii) — the observation of Section 8 that if procurement stops, transformation stops even with complementary assets in hand. But there is an effect in the reverse direction as well. For a producer, a transformer that is deeply integrated, keeps generating exclusive data, and carries the certifications and liabilities of the jurisdiction concerned is not merely a customer but a route by which the producer's own capability connects to a real industry. The higher the value of that route, the more a unilateral change in access becomes a cost to the producer itself. The thickness of complementary assets may operate in the direction of lowering the probability of cut-off. 276 This effect must not be overestimated. Conditions of access change not only by commercial judgment but by geopolitical measures (Definition 4), and the deterrent power that private integration relations hold against the latter is limited. The series from 2022 onward shown in Section 8 is an instance of this limit. This paper's claim is not that complementary assets prevent cut-off, but that the thickness of complementary assets governs the residual value in the event of cut-off. A transformer protected by the wall of integration cost retains its operational processes, data, certifications and structure of liability even when the supplier changes. A transformer without a wall has nothing left the moment the supplier changes. This difference connects directly to the discussion of the guarantee level in 10.6 — since a sovereign minimum guarantee level is a design not of a level of capability but of what remains after cut-off. A third role of the interaction of the four indicators should be flagged in advance. The two roles set out so far — defence of transformation value, and residual value in the event of cut-off — are both complete within the state's own jurisdiction. Section 12 shows that the same four indicators have a third role. The complementary assets the four indicators measure are also a commodity that may be transferred to an external jurisdiction by taking the form of a system (Definition 20). This third role does not point in the same direction as the other two. Among the assets that raise defence and residual value, exclusive data endowment and linguistic-contextual specificity thicken the wall by making internalization by the producer difficult, while at the same time making transfer to an external jurisdiction difficult by fixing the system to the institutions and forms of the home jurisdiction. That is, investment that raises the four indicators does not necessarily raise exportability and may lower it. This tension cannot be handled with the apparatus of this section — this section treats the conditions under which a position holds, not the form of supply. The content of the tension, and the design that relaxes it (separation of the system), are sent to Sections 12.3.4 and 12.3.5. This tension is not, however, left unresolved. Section 12.3.7 formalizes it as Proposition 41 (The Condition Under Which Embedding and Portability Are Compatible) and resolves it conditionally. Only the conclusion is drawn here; the formulation, falsification condition and limits are sent to that subsection. The solution Proposition 41 gives is a solution about the locus of embedding, not about its quantity — defensibility and portability coexist only where a system is separated into (a) a jurisdiction-specific layer (the part depending on the legal system, language and practice of the jurisdiction concerned) and (b) a portable core (the part independent of jurisdiction, such as the operational logic of the field, verification procedures, and the structure of liability allocation), and the interface between them is explicitly defined. Applied to the four indicators of this section, the four indicators are distributed to the two sides of the interface. Indicator (b), physical- interface intensity, which 10.3.1 called "the hardest indicator," can have its core carried in the portable core so long as judgments about the physical process do not vary by jurisdiction — judgments such as detecting equipment anomalies, predicting degradation, and determining process conditions do not hold by reference to the statutes of the jurisdiction concerned. But where the specification of the equipment is specific to the home jurisdic‐ 277 tion, the part concerning conformity to it moves to the jurisdiction-specific layer. As for (a) exclusive data endowment, treated in 10.3.2, the indicator splits in two — the content of the data is bound up with the field, institutions and language of the jurisdiction concerned and so belongs to the jurisdiction-specific layer, while the procedures for generating and verifying the data (what is recorded at what granularity, how authenticity is confirmed, which deviations are detected at which thresholds) do not depend on jurisdiction and may belong to the portable core. By contrast, (c) institutional embeddedness, treated in 10.3.3, belongs by definition very nearly wholly to the jurisdiction-specific layer, and the same is true of (d) linguistic-contextual specificity, which 10.3.4 called "the thinnest indicator." Statutory certifications, supervisory registrations and liability-assumption contracts have effect only within the legal system of the jurisdiction concerned, and the style of output, document formats and forms of dialogue with users function only within the language concerned. That is, (c) and (d) are elements that should be placed outside the interface. What this distribution specifies is a design that reconciles the defence of the domestic margin with portability for export. In a system with an explicit interface, embedding proceeds by definition only on the side of (a), the jurisdiction-specific layer. Investment that raises (c) institutional embeddedness — obtaining statutory certifications, adding supervisory registrations, concluding liability-assumption contracts — is therefore an operation that thickens the bulwark outside the interface, and does not raise the cost of transplanting the portable core. What is replaced on transplantation is the whole of (a); (b) requires no modification so long as it satisfies the specification of the interface. The same holds for (d), and the "remedy by design" discussed in 10.3.4 — the technique of placing conformity to language and document formats in pre-processing and post-processing layers rather than in the model proper — may be re-read in the vocabulary of Proposition 41 as an operation placing (d) outside the interface. Conversely, in a system without an explicit interface, jurisdiction-specific dependencies are scattered throughout, and because what is transplantable cannot be identified in advance, transplantation becomes a process of exploration and its cost approaches that of rebuilding the whole system. It is in this case that the tension flagged in this subsection — that investment raising the four indicators lowers exportability — actually operates. The design guidance on this section's four indicators for a transformer oriented toward export is therefore not "to embed shallowly" but "to confine the locus of embedding to outside the interface." The former is an operation that pares away the bulwark itself, and invites the compression Proposition 4 identifies. This re-reading adds a second coordinate to the interaction of the four indicators described in this subsection. The two roles set out so far — defence of transformation value, and residual value in the event of cut-off — both ranked the indicators by the magnitude of their contribution. What Proposition 41 adds is the distinction of which side of the interface each indicator lies on. The two coordinates are independent, and an indicator with a large contribution is not necessarily outside the interface — (b) physical-interface intensity has a large contribution and may be carried inside the interface (in the portable 278 core), while (d) linguistic-contextual specificity has a small contribution and belongs outside it. The ranking of the indicators from the standpoint of defensibility and their ranking from the standpoint of portability therefore do not coincide. That coexistence is possible does not, however, mean that it is easy. Proposition 41 itself acknowledges three limits: that making the interface explicit is itself costly; that where the interface is drawn differs by field and has no general solution; and that a mistaken design of the interface loses both bulwark and portability at once. This section has no rule for fixing the locus of the interface, and supplying such a rule is beyond the scope of Section 12.3.7 as well. Coexistence is possible, but not free. In addition, the distribution in this subsection concerns the general properties of the four indicators and does not determine their assignment in any particular field — it is usual for the same indicator to be carried in the portable core in one field and to fall into the jurisdiction-specific layer in another. Section 12.4 organizes this variation across fields as two types of exporting state. Finally, a caution about aggregating the four indicators to the level of the state. All four indicators are observable quantities defined at the level of firms and applications, and using them as national indicators requires a rule of aggregation. Taking a simple average is not appropriate here — just as the falsification condition of Proposition 11 (Section 17) uses an upper envelope for transmission at Layer Zero, the capture of transformation value occurs in the upper part of the distribution. But looking only at the upper envelope is also inappropriate. For M2×C2 to generate value at the scale of a national economy, what is needed is not only a few top transformers but the density of transformers at or above the median on the four indicators. A state in which a few outstanding cases exist but the layer is thin, and a state in which the layer is thick, may have the same maximum. Measurement at the level of the state should report both the maximum and the density. Building this measurement framework is an unfinished task of this paper, and is sent to Appendix C and Appendix E. 10.4 Condition II — National Brain Capital as the Substrate What do the four indicators measure? Section 7 gave the unifying principle that the four indicators measure the endowment of assets that keep integration cost high for the producer. This subsection treats one level below that — what the assets constituting the wall of integration cost arise from in the first place. This paper's answer lies in people. 279 Definition 11 (National Brain Capital) National brain capital denotes the totality of that part of a state's human capital which cannot be replicated or transferred at low cost by AI, and consists of four components: (i) tacit knowledge of the field (embodied skills in manufacturing, maintenance, medicine, care and the like), (ii) judgment embedded in language, culture and aesthetic sense, (iii) the professional ethics and working practices that make trust in institutions possible, and (iv) the capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience (2026i). Unlike AI capability itself, national brain capital cannot be obtained in the short run by another state through publication, replication or import. Proposition 18 (The Non-Replicability of National Brain Capital) Where M2 (the Transformation Model) subsists at Tier C2, the defensibility of its transformation margin depends on the thickness of national brain capital (Definition 11). Of the four indicators of Proposition 4, exclusive data endowment and physical-interface intensity are the externalized traces of national brain capital, and institutional embeddedness and linguistic-contextual specificity are its institutionalized forms. Because what can be obtained by importing AI capability is capability and not national brain capital, a strategy that aims at the Transformation Model while lacking national brain capital reduces to transformation without complementary assets (Proposition 4). Falsification condition If it is systematically observed that transformation margins at Tier C2 are captured on a sustained basis in states where the proxy indicators of national brain capital (density of skilled labour, thickness of the layer of domain professionals, level of trust in institutions, number of language-specific technical standards) are thin, this proposition is rejected. A note on the term (prevention of misreading). The term "national brain capital" may be misread as denoting qualities based on nationality or ethnic identity, but this paper carries no such implication. What the concept denotes is the stock of practical knowledge settled in the institutions, language and field practices of the jurisdiction concerned, and the nationality of those who hold it is not part of the definition — those who take part in the practices of that jurisdiction, whatever their nationality, contribute to its formation, including migrants and the employees of the local establishments of foreign firms. This paper's editorial policy of treating states as the unit of analysis and not as the object of evaluation (Section 1) is maintained for this concept as well. 10.4.1 The Content of the Four Components (i) Tacit knowledge of the field. Embodied skills accumulated in manufacturing processes, the maintenance of equipment, and the practice of medicine and care. The decisive 280

property of this component is that it does not exist in verbalized form. The critical points of a process, the precursors of an anomaly, exception handling not written in a manual, settle into individuals and organizations through the repetition of practice. Not only are they absent from the public web; they are often absent from the organization's own documents as well. (ii) Judgment embedded in language, culture and aesthetic sense. Judgments as to what is an appropriate expression, what finish is accepted, and what level of explanation is regarded as honest are distinct from competence in operating a language. Improvement in multilingual capability does not directly substitute for this component — what is substituted is translation, not judgment. As stated in 10.3.4, however, the wall based on this component is the most readily eroded and persists only once converted into an institutionalized form. (iii) The professional ethics and working practices that make trust in institutions possible. Neither certification systems nor supervisory systems function without the working practices of the professional groups that operate them. That auditors maintain independence, that engineers report on safety matters, that professionals protect the meaning of their own qualifications, cannot be derived from statutory text. Trust in institutions is not a consequence of the design of institutions but a consequence of the practices of the people who operate them. (iv) The capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience. Being able to determine whether an AI output is correct is a capacity distinct from being able to use AI. Determination requires a feel for the distribution of cases observed over a long period in the field concerned — what can occur and what cannot. This capacity is the counterpart at the level of the state of what the ninth instalment of this series (2026i) discussed as the specific value of the layer of older professionals. 10.4.2 The Four Indicators Are Traces and Forms of National Brain Capital The correspondence asserted by Proposition 18 is now argued. The claim has two stages — that among the four indicators (a) and (b) are the externalized traces of national brain capital, and that (c) and (d) are its institutionalized forms. First the side of traces. What exclusive data endowment (a) measures was the share of data generated only from the operational processes of the transformer concerned. What is an operational process? It is a process in which people carry out practice. Equipment maintenance records are traces of the judgments of maintenance staff; clinical records are traces of clinical judgment; inspection histories are traces of the observations of inspectors. That these data cannot be obtained from the public web is not due to accidental concealment but to the fact that they arise only as a by-product of practice. Exclusive data are therefore nothing other than tacit knowledge partially externalized within operation. Similarly, what physical-interface intensity (b) measures was the share of revenue inseparable from the operation of physical equipment, mechanisms and field work. That 281 revenue is tied to the physical side means that revenue is conditioned on the work and judgment of the field. It is people who operate the equipment, and the quality of that operation determines the quality of the revenue. That both indicators are anchored in component (i) of national brain capital is the theoretical reason for the ordering of coefficients predicted by Hypothesis H2 — that (b) and (a) are the hardest. This character as trace connects directly to authentic data (Definition 16) as defined in Section 17. The accumulation and the process of generation of authentic data — data generated directly from human action or physical processes and whose provenance is verifiable — are themselves nothing other than the externalized traces of national brain capital. In a phase where the verifiability of provenance becomes relatively scarce as the share of generated artefacts rises, the marginal value of these traces therefore rises (Proposition 27, Section 17). At the same time, however, to the extent that the repetition of practice is displaced by imported cognition, the source that produces the traces itself thins (Proposition 24, Section 17). The conditions of transformation treated in this section and the discussion of the human substrate treated in Section 17 connect at this point. Next the side of forms. The statutory certifications, supervisory registrations and liabilityassumption contracts that institutional embeddedness (c) measures are all component (iii) — professional ethics and working practices — having taken the outward form of institutions. A certification documents the level that working practice must satisfy and makes it confirmable by a third party. A liability-assumption contract solidifies into a legally binding form the practice of who bears the burden in the event of failure. Institutions are the congealed form of practices, and if the practices are lost, institutions remain as an empty shell. The same holds for the number of jurisdiction-specific standards that linguistic-contextual specificity (d) measures: a standard is judgment of component (ii) set down in writing. This correspondence yields the practical consequence of Proposition 18. The four indicators are measurable, but their substrate is not the quantity being measured. Operations that raise the four indicators in the short run — obtaining certifications, aggregating data, holding physical equipment — therefore do not persist unless accompanied by accumulation of the substrate. Certifications may be obtained, but without a professional group to operate them they are not renewed; data may be aggregated, but without a practice that interprets them they generate no value; equipment may be held, but without judgment in operation it does not run. Conversely, in a state where the substrate is thick, raising the four indicators reduces to a problem of institutional design — the accumulation already exists, and what is needed is a circuit to externalize and institutionalize it. This asymmetry limits the set of states for which M2×C2 can be an objective (condition (D) of 10.1.4). 282 10.4.3 "AI Capability Can Be Imported; National Brain Capital Cannot" The central proposition of this section is stated in the form of an asymmetry. AI capability can be imported, but national brain capital cannot. This asymmetry arises from the combination of two facts. The first fact is that the floor of AI capability is supplied from outside at no charge and irrevocably. Published open weights, once published, cannot be withdrawn. The openweight frontier has closed to within a few months of the closed frontier (Epoch AI, 2026), and inference prices continue to fall rapidly at a given level of performance (Epoch AI, 2025). That is, the acquisition of capability itself moves in the direction of becoming easier as time passes. That Proposition 13 (Section 18) states that "the object of national investment is not the acquisition of capability but the construction of the conditions for executing, renewing and protecting capability" is the policy implication of this fact. The second fact is that the accumulation of national brain capital requires the time of practice. Tacit knowledge of the field settles only through the repetition of operation; professional ethics and working practices are maintained only through training and mutual supervision across generations; and the capacity for audit and verification arises only from long domain experience. These have parts that can be accelerated by the injection of capital, but acceleration has an upper bound — years of experience cannot be shortened with money. That Definition 11 provides that it "cannot be obtained in the short run by another state through publication, replication or import" points to the existence of this time constant. What follows from the combination of the two facts is an asymmetry of time constants. The time constant on the side of capability keeps shortening; the time constant on the side of the substrate does not. This asymmetry has implications in two directions. For the side that is following, it is a constraint: a shortfall in the substrate cannot be filled by importing capability — as Proposition 18 states, a strategy aiming at the Transformation Model while lacking national brain capital reduces to transformation without complementary assets. For the side that is defending, it is the fact that the substrate is the last resort of defensibility. At the same time this is a warning. Because attrition of the substrate is not compensated by importing capability, attrition appears directly as a loss of defensibility. This point is treated as a failure mode in 10.5(e). The asymmetry of transition formulated by Proposition 15 (Section 15) — that ascent requires accumulation with a time constant on the order of years, whereas descent occurs passively through the relative depreciation of accumulation alone — is the general form of this asymmetry of time constants. Restated in the context of M2×C2 it runs thus. The frontier advances independently of a state's own effort, and that advance relatively depreciates the capability the state holds. The only asset that resists this depreciation is what does not depreciate with the advance of the frontier — namely national brain capital. This asymmetry has one implication that must be carefully distinguished. That national brain capital does not transfer does not mean that what national brain capital 283 produces does not transfer. The complementary assets measured by the four indicators of Proposition 4 discussed in 10.3 — exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, linguistic-contextual specificity — are assets that remain in the home jurisdiction and at the same time assets that may be transferred to an external jurisdiction by taking the form of a system. The design of incorporation into operational processes is a product of tacit knowledge of the field; the procedure for what should be verified is a product of long domain experience; the contract assuming liability is a product of the working practices that make trust in institutions possible. These products may be transferred, separated from the practice that produced them, in the form of documents, procedures and training. The export of integrated systems formalized in Section 12 (Definition 20) is nothing other than the form in which the assets measured by the four indicators are transferred as a bundle. That form (c) among the three forms flagged in 10.1.5 has the greatest resistance to compression is because, through this bundling, it takes as its principal commodity the part the producer cannot internalize by the route of standard inclusion in the next-generation model. The boundary between what transfers and what does not should be made explicit here. What transfers is the product, not the productive capacity. The recipient receives designs, procedures and model behaviour, but does not receive the accumulation of practice that produced them — that is, national brain capital itself, as in Definition 11. That Definition 11 provides that it "cannot be obtained in the short run by another state through publication, replication or import" is therefore not in contradiction with the fact that the systems produced by that national brain capital may be exported to other jurisdictions. The asymmetry of this subsection is not dissolved by the export of integrated systems; it is rather the very condition that makes that form possible. At the same time this boundary has an implication for the recipient — receiving a system is not receiving the capacity to produce the system oneself for the next generation. What this asymmetry brings about for the recipient (the setting in which Proposition 24 operates as a direct consequence of procurement mode) is treated in Section 12.7. 10.4.4 Connection to Layer Zero of the Series The concept of national brain capital connects the discussion of the human substrate that this series has developed at Layers One through Three to Layer Zero. Brain Capital Management (2026e) presented a framework for explicitly operating as a managerial resource that part of human capital which concerns cognition, judgment and creation. Ageless Management (2026i) positioned the judgment and verification capacity held by the layer with long domain experience as a resource independent of age. Both are discussions at the level of corporate management. Definition 11 raises these to the level of the state. If brain capital is a source of competitive advantage for a firm, then for a state national brain capital is a condition for the Transformation Model position to hold — this is the claim of Proposition 18. Structurally, this connection has two meanings for the series. First, the discussion of the human substrate 284 changes role from a normative argument about "desirable management" into a structural variable governing the position of a state. Second, in the reverse direction, because the configuration at Layer Zero delimits the ceiling of AI capability available for a firm's operation of brain capital (Proposition 11(iii), Section 17), the two condition each other. In a state where national brain capital is thin, the Transformation Model does not hold; and in a state where the Transformation Model does not hold, the fields in which firms operate brain capital narrow. Design that reverses the direction of this circle is the policy task of Layer Zero. The details are left to Section 17. Figure 7. The structure of the conditions under which the M2×C2 cell holds — the four components of national brain capital (Definition 11) are externalized and institutionalized as the four indicators of Proposition 4 and constitute the wall of integration cost. Outside the wall, the producer's absorption of general-purpose functions operates. Engagement with the higher tier is confined to the three functions of Definition 6 (10.6). 10.5 Failure Modes Specific to This Cell Proposition 3 (Section 6) asserts that the nine cells are non-equivalent in their specific failure modes. This subsection classifies the failure modes of M2×C2 into five and attaches to each its observable signs. Making the signs explicit serves two purposes. First, the difficulty that failure can be determined only after the fact — the circularity that Section 7 The four pillars — the four indicators of complementary asset endowment (Proposition 4) (a) Exclusive data endowment (b) Physicalinterface intensity (c) Institutional embeddedness (d) Linguisticcontextual specificity Procurement (inflow) General-purpose foundation models (C2 capability) M2×C2 High-value-added transformation (processing into domain-specific AI) Supply (outflow) Domain-specific AI solutions The wall of integration cost Not crossed by the producer's standard bundling The basis of defensibility (Proposition 18) Foundation — national brain capital (Definition 11): the substrate that cannot be imported Externalized traces: pillars (a), (b) (i) Tacit knowledge of the field (embodied skill) (iv) Capacity to audit long domain experience Institutionalized forms: pillars (c), (d) (iii) Trust in institutions and professional ethics (ii) Judgement embedded in language and culture Securing layer — the three functions of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6) (i-a) operational capacity / (i-b) renewal capability / (i-c) sensitive-processing condition The economic engine in front is placed at M2×C2 while the guarantee level is secured behind (Section 10). The part reducible to general-purpose functions is internalized by the producer, and only the transformation margin protected by integration cost remains (Propositions 4 and 18). 285 avoided in designing the falsification condition of Proposition 4 — must be avoided here too. Second, for both policy and management, recognizing failure only once it has occurred is too late. The signs must be observable before failure is complete. 10.5.1 (a) The Path by Which Processing Degenerates Into a Thin Wrapper Section 7 discussed the die-off of thin wrappers at Tier C1. The isomorphic failure at Tier C2 proceeds more slowly and less noticeably. The reason is that a Tier C2 wrapper appears differentiated for the time being by the fact that it "uses frontier capability." In a phase where access to frontier capability is itself scarce, holding access looks like an advantage. This apparent advantage disappears once the set of actors holding access grows, or once the capability concerned descends to C1. The mechanism of degeneration runs as follows. In the early period the transformer places the centre of gravity of value in the work of connecting the constraints of the domain to the model. But those parts of the connecting work that can be generalized are successively absorbed by the next generation of models and by the peripheral functions the producer provides. The more resources the transformer allocates to keeping up with new functions, the more investment on the domain side is deferred. After a few generations, the substance of the value provided converges on "connecting the latest capability to the operational environment" — which is not a wall of integration cost but merely a time lag. Observable signs. First, a rise in the share of revenue reducible to general-purpose functions. Second, a step-wise fall in gross margin with each generational turnover of foundation models — not a temporary fall, but a level that steps down generation by generation. Third, a fall in revenue per customer and a shortening of contract terms. Fourth, the explanation of the firm's own value shifting from the customer's operations to the supplier's technology ("using the latest model" becoming the centre of the explanation). Fifth, in the allocation of development resources, keeping up with model updates permanently exceeding the deepening of operational requirements. The fifth sign appears before the others and is therefore useful as an early indicator. 10.5.2 (b) Absorption of General-Purpose Functions Through the Producer's Standard Inclusion Whereas (a) is degeneration on the transformer's side, (b) is erosion from the producer's side. The two are two aspects of the same phenomenon, but are treated separately because the policy responses differ. As Proposition 4 formulates, the producer can internalize that part of the value added of the application layer which reduces to general-purpose functions, by the very nearly zero marginal cost route of standard inclusion in the nextgeneration model. This internalization is fast at Tier C2 because the producer holds the frontier of capability and can reflect demand observed in the application layer in the design of the next generation. 286 This failure mode differs from (a) in that it may occur even where the transformer acts correctly. Even while deep integration into a domain is advancing, if part of that integration can be generalized as a general-purpose function, that part is absorbed. The response is therefore not "not being absorbed" but "managing the ratio between the part that is absorbed and the part that is not." Observable signs. First, part of the firm's own offered functionality overlapping with each product announcement by the producer, and a rise in the frequency of such overlap. Second, a fall in the revenue share of the part protected by integration cost (assumption of liability, certification, physical interface) — if this share is falling even while total revenue grows, absorption is in progress. Third, re-implementation on the firm's side being required at each model update. This is a symptom that the firm's implementation sits in a thin layer of general-purpose functionality. Conversely, where an update merely raises the ceiling of the firm's offered value without requiring re-implementation, that implementation lies outside the reach of absorption. Fourth, a route opening for customers to contract directly with the producer, and some customers in fact migrating (disintermediation). 10.5.3 (c) Failure to Enclose Domain Data The third failure mode is the path by which indicator (a) of Proposition 4, exclusive data endowment, is given away by the structure of contracts. This failure is not technical but legal, and is often completed without the parties being aware of it. The typical structure runs as follows. On concluding a contract to use the producer's capability, the transformer does not scrutinize the clauses on the handling of input data and grants blanket permission for use in training. Or, within a joint-development framework, work proceeds without clarifying the attribution of the outputs of development — finetuned weights, evaluation data, collections of failure cases. Some years later, the knowledge generated from the firm's own operational processes is being supplied to the whole world as part of a general-purpose capability. At that point the exclusivity that indicator (a) measured has vanished. The gravity of this failure lies in its irreversibility. A physical interface, once lost, can be rebuilt, but the exclusivity of data once used in training is not recovered. Moreover the harm is not confined to the transformer concerned — with the exclusive data of the domain taken into a general-purpose capability, the walls of other transformers active in the same domain are lowered at the same time. In that a contract rational for an individual actor lowers the wall of integration cost for the whole domain, this has the same structure as the fallacy of composition that Proposition 7 (Section 13) describes for AI outage. Observable signs. First, the content of the training-use clause in the usage contract — blanket permission, use-limited, or express exclusion. Second, the physical location of data and the jurisdiction in which processing occurs. Third, the presence or absence of a clause on attribution of improvements in joint-development contracts. Fourth, the clarity of attribution of outputs and of rights derived from outputs. Fifth, the technical existence 287 of a route by which customers connect directly to the producer without passing through the transformer. All five can be confirmed from contract documents and technical configurations on paper, without waiting for the success or failure of the business. As signs at the level of the state, the absence of rules on cross-border data flows and training use, and the omission of clauses of the same kind from public-sector procurement contracts, may be cited. 10.5.4 (d) Insufficient Capacity for Regulatory Compliance The fourth failure mode is insufficient capacity to raise indicator (c) of Proposition 4, institutional embeddedness. As stated in 10.3.3, stringency of regulation and high institutional embeddedness are not the same. Where regulation is stringent but the capacity to carry out conformity as a process does not exist domestically, regulation is only a cost for the transformer and does not function as a wall. This failure mode arises at two levels. At the level of the firm: being unable to bear the time and cost of obtaining certification, being unable to provide the capital and insurance necessary for assuming liability, being unable to design a record structure that withstands audit. At the level of the state: a thin industry carrying out conformity assessment, audit and assurance; the absence of technical evaluation capacity on the side of the regulator; and interpretations of regulation not being presented in a predictable form. The third point is easily overlooked — uncertainty of interpretation impedes transformers' investment more than the stringency of regulation itself. Investments with long payback periods are made only on a prospect that requirements will not change. Observable signs. First, the standard period required for applications in the field concerned to obtain statutory certification, and its variance. Second, the number of conformity assessment bodies, audit firms and insurance underwriters, and whether they have a record with AI applications. Third, the frequency with which regulators issue updates to interpretative guidance, and whether updates are applied retroactively. Fourth, whether a function specializing in regulatory compliance exists organizationally on the transformer's side — not as one function of a legal department, but as a function involved from the early stages of product design. Fifth, whether public-sector procurement specifications state requirements in terms of the structure of liability and auditability rather than the level of capability. 10.5.5 (e) Attrition of National Brain Capital The fifth failure mode lies at the substrate of the other four. As Proposition 18 asserts, the four indicators are the externalized traces and institutionalized forms of national brain capital. If the substrate thins, the four indicators therefore fall — with a lag, but certainly. This failure mode is the gravest because its progress is slow and because it does not appear on the side of the indicators for a long time: certifications remain, equipment remains, data keep accumulating. What is lost is the side that operates and interprets them. 288 The paths of attrition are divided into three. The first is the exit of the skilled layer. Through retirement, withdrawal and job change, the layer holding tacit knowledge leaves the organization. Exit is itself unavoidable; the question is whether there is succession. The second is the severing of skill transmission. When apprentice-style training — a process of observing and repeating practice alongside skilled workers over a long period — contracts, tacit knowledge does not pass to the next generation. The third is the thinning of the professional layer. A state in which the age distribution of qualification holders is skewed upward and new entry declines appears, with a lag of ten to twenty years, as the disappearance of the capacity for audit and verification in the field concerned. A point this section wishes to raise is here stated in conditional form. The deepening of AI utilization may itself have a path that causes attrition of national brain capital. Skill is formed through a process of repeating, failing at and correcting entry-level tasks. It is these entry-level tasks that automation by AI reaches first, and if they are omitted, the lower rungs of the ladder of skill formation are removed. The empirical finding that the productivity effect of generative AI is largest for novices and very nearly zero for the skilled (Brynjolfsson, Li & Raymond, 2025) has been discussed from the aspect of the compression of skill gaps, but the same result permits another reading — if the marginal value of skill falls, the incentive to invest in skill formation may fall as well. This paper does not assert that reading. What has been demonstrated is a short-run productivity effect, not a long-run effect on skill formation. What this paper asserts is that this is a question for verification. That is, the relation between the depth of AI adoption and the rate of skill formation of the mid-career layer and the rate of new entry into the professions in the occupations concerned can be estimated from panel data, and ought to be estimated. The proxy indicators specified in the falsification condition of Proposition 18 — density of skilled labour, thickness of the layer of domain professionals, level of trust in institutions, number of language-specific technical standards — constitute the starting point of that estimation. Observable signs. First, an upward shift in the age distribution of practitioners in the field concerned, and the trend in the number of new entrants. Second, the form of skill transmission — whether training including observation and repetition of practice exists as an institution, or has been replaced by classroom instruction and manuals. Third, whether judgments made in the field remain as organizational records, or belong to individuals and are lost with their departure. Fourth, changes in the number of years required for promotion to the mid-career layer in occupations where entry-level tasks have been automated. Fifth, the share of personnel able to verify AI output — not the share able to use output, but the share able to point out errors. This fifth sign is the most useful direct proxy for the capacity for audit and verification (Definition 11(iv)). The five failure modes are not independent but form a chain. (e) Attrition of national brain capital becomes manifest through (a) the thinning of processing and (d) insufficient capacity for regulatory compliance, and (c) failure to enclose data destroys exclusivity and thereby accelerates (b) absorption. In the reverse direction there is a path by which the 289 pressure on revenue from (b) cuts investment in (e). Of this chain, the one observed latest and requiring the longest to recover is (e). The priority of monitoring should therefore be set in order of difficulty of recovery, not in order of ease of observation. Table 12. Correspondence between the conditions of establishment and the failure modes of M2×C2 Condition of establishment (Proposition 4, Definition 11) Failure mode where the condition is not met Early observable signs Time constant of recovery (i) Security of procurement — continuing guarantee of access Severance of business continuity through unilateral change in the conditions of access (Section 8). And the fall into (a) of a transformer whose only advantage was the scarcity of access Supplier concentration, remaining contract term and termination clauses, records of switchover exercises to alternative suppliers Short (switching) to long (diplomatic position) (ii-b) Physical-interface intensity (a) The path by which processing degenerates into a thin wrapper. Revenue tilts toward information processing separable from the physical Rise in the share of revenue from general- purpose functions, step-wise fall in gross margin at each generational turnover, development resources permanently tilted toward keeping up with models rather than deepening operational requirements Medium (2–5 years) (ii-a) Exclusive data endowment (c) Failure to enclose domain data. Voluntary surrender of exclusivity through blanket permission for training use and unclear attribution of improvements Content of the training-use clause, jurisdiction where data are located, attribution clauses in joint-development contracts, existence of a direct connection route for customers Irreversible (exclusivity is not recovered) Management of the ratio of generalpurpose to integrated parts (b) Absorption of generalpurpose functions through the producer's standard inclusion Frequency of functional overlap with the producer's product announcements, fall in the revenue share of the part protected by integration cost, need for re-implementation at each update, disintermediation of customers Medium (change of business design) (ii-c) Institutional embeddedness (d) Insufficient capacity for regulatory compliance. Regulation becomes a cost but does not function as a wall Period to obtain certification and its variance, number of bodies carrying out conformity assessment, audit and insurance, frequency of interpretative updates and retroactive application, organizational position of the regulatorycompliance function Long (5–10 years, cultivation of an industry) (ii-d) Linguistic- con‐ Erosion through improvement in multilingual capabil‐ Whether output requirements stop at linguistic expression or extend to stat‐ Medium (remedy 290

Condition of establishment (Proposition 4, Definition 11) Failure mode where the condition is not met Early observable signs Time constant of recovery textual specificity ity. Where not converted into institutional embeddedness, a slide into the wrapper position utory formats and the interpretation of supervisory guidance; progress of international harmonization of standards through design change) National brain capital (the four components of Definition 11) (e) Attrition of national brain capital. Exit of the skilled layer, severing of skill transmission, thinning of the professional layer. The substrate of the other four modes Age distribution and new entry of practitioners, form of skill transmission, organizational recording of judgment, change in years to mid-career promotion, share of personnel able to point out errors in AI output Longest (a generation) 10.6 The Minimum Engagement With the Higher Tier Needed to Hold the Position How far should a state that places the centre of gravity of its economy at M2×C2 engage with the higher tier — M1, the production of capability? This subsection formulates the question as a structure of "placing the economic engine at M2×C2 in front, and securing the guarantee level behind." The conclusion is stated first. Full entry into M1×C2 is unnecessary, and may be harmful. What is necessary is engagement targeted narrowly on the three functions of the sovereign minimum guarantee level provided in Definition 6 (Section 13). 10.6.1 Why Full Entry Is Unnecessary The ground on which full entry is unnecessary follows directly from the mechanism by which value arises, formulated in 10.1.4. What is required for the capture of transformation value is not the holding of capability but continuing access to capability, together with the wall of integration cost. None of the three conditions of Proposition 4 requires the transformer to produce capability itself. Condition (i) is a continuing guarantee, not self-sufficiency; condition (ii) is complementary assets, not capability; condition (iii) is market access. This point is often received as counter-intuitive. The concern that "if one does not hold the upstream, one's fate is in another's hands" is legitimate, and is precisely the structure discussed in Section 8 as weaponized interdependence. But the response to that concern is not "holding the upstream." First, as stated above, holding the upstream is not a holding but a flow, and requires permanent pursuit. Second, even if pursuit succeeds, one still does not hold the upstream in the supply networks of compute, electricity and equipment — the AI supply chain is multi-layered, and self-sufficiency in one layer leaves depend‐ 291 ence in others. Carried through, the logic of self-sufficiency would demand self-sufficiency down to semiconductor manufacturing equipment, materials and power generation equipment, which is infeasible for any state. Third, and most importantly, what is actually needed as a response to cut-off is not to keep holding frontier capability but to be able to run critical processes in degraded mode under conditions of cut-off. This distinction is the design idea of Definition 6. 10.6.2 Why It May Be Harmful The ground of harm lies in the dispersion of resources. As stated in 10.1.2, concentrating finite high-skilled talent and electricity on frontier training may exhaust the integration personnel on the transformation side and the inference demand of the field. This effect operates along three paths. First, the talent path. Frontier development and the practice of transformation both require scarce high-skilled talent, but the skills required are not the same. The former requires model researchers; the latter requires integration personnel who understand both the domain and models (Section 7). In the recruitment market, however, the two compete, and the former is often at an advantage in terms of remuneration. Where the state's allocation of resources is concentrated on the former, the formation of integration personnel is deferred in both the market and education. Second, the electricity and compute path. Training and inference compete for the same computing infrastructure and electricity. Training demand is large-scale and concentrated; inference demand is distributed and continuous. In a state with severe grid constraints, giving priority in the allocation of electricity to large-scale training sites may set back the securing of the distributed inference capacity that transformers need in the field. The physical-layer constraints treated in Section 13 appear as this problem of allocation. Third, the path of locking in fiscal commitments. Once pursuit of the frontier begins, the decision to stop becomes politically difficult, since stopping crystallizes the depreciation of investments already made. The depreciation of stockpiles shown by Proposition 8 accelerates this locking-in. Against a trajectory on which training costs grow at approximately 2.4 times per year (Cottier et al., 2024), maintaining the same relative position requires spending to grow at the same rate. Public finances placed on this trajectory structurally narrow the room for allocation to the transformation and utilization sides. These three paths are the domestic version of the "curse of concentration" formulated in international comparison by Proposition 6a (Section 8), and the technology-sector version of the resource-movement effect of Corden & Neary (1982). It should be noted that this paper does not state this as a prediction. What is stated is a conditional design argument — in states with ample resources this effect is small, and in states with scant resources it is large. Harm is not an absolute property but a function of resource constraints. 292 10.6.3 What the Minimum Is — Correspondence With the Three Functions of Definition 6 What, then, is the necessary minimum? Definition 6 (Section 13) sets the components of the sovereign minimum guarantee level as three — (i) domestically held capability, (ii) allied guarantees, (iii) operational readiness — and specifies (i) not as a level of capability but as three functions: (i-a) operational capacity, (i-b) renewal capability, (i-c) the sensitive- processing condition. For a state at M2×C2, these three functions each have a different standing. As to (i-a) operational capacity. The requirement specific to the Transformation Model is inference capacity, not training capacity. The content of this function is being able to execute, on domestic computing infrastructure and electricity, the inference necessary for degraded-mode operation of critical processes under conditions where external supply has stopped. This requirement is of a different order of magnitude from the compute needed for frontier training. The starting point of design is to specify "which processes are to be maintained, for how many days, at what level of degradation," and capacity cannot be discussed without that specification. As to (i-b) renewal capability. Here lies the central finding of this subsection. Definition 6(i-b) provides for "the personnel, procedures and compute able to fine-tune, evaluate and deploy the weights of the latest published generation domestically, and to recover from the relative depreciation of capability within a specified period." This capability substantially overlaps with what a transformer at M2×C2 does routinely as economic activity. That is, standing at M2×C2 generates guarantee level (i-b) as a by-product of economic activity. The work by which a transformer adapts published weights to its own domain, evaluates them, and puts them into operation constitutes in itself the substance of renewal capability in the event of cut-off. Conversely, in a state that remains at M3×C1, (i-b) does not arise from economic activity and can be procured only as fiscal expenditure — and renewal capability procured fiscally, because it is not used in peacetime, can be maintained only through exercises. This asymmetry is a security benefit of choosing M2×C2, and a rare structure in which economic strategy and security strategy are satisfied at once by the same investment. As to (i-c) the sensitive-processing condition. The requirement of infrastructure able to process domestically data whose removal abroad is not permitted legally or contractually is the obverse of indicator (a) of Proposition 4, exclusive data endowment. As stated in 10.3.2, what institutionally guarantees exclusivity is in many cases the very regulation restricting removal. Provision for the sensitive-processing condition is therefore at once a requirement of the guarantee level and a condition for maintaining complementary assets. Here again, security requirements and economic requirements converge on the same investment. Whereas (i-b) and (i-c) among the three functions overlap with economic activity, a part of (i-a) operational capacity does not — the redundancy that is unused in peacetime. Because 293 this part generates no economic return, it can only be procured fiscally. Likewise, Definition 6(ii) allied guarantees are procured through diplomacy and (iii) operational readiness through exercises. That is, "front and back" are not two independent tracks; the structure is one in which the economic activity of the Transformation Model internalizes a considerable part of the guarantee level, and only the residue that is not internalized is carried by fiscal means, diplomacy and exercises. The formulation of this structure is the claim of this subsection. 10.6.4 Three Forms of Engagement With the Higher Tier On this basis, the forms of engagement with the higher tier are organized into three. The first form is frontier training in-house. It requires a permanent cost of pursuit and may squeeze the transformation side through the three paths of 10.6.2. The second form is engagement through equity participation, joint development or long-term contracts with actors holding the frontier. This is the corporate version of Definition 6(ii) allied guarantees, a route for securing a continuing guarantee of access by negotiation. As Section 8 showed, however, the price of this route is part of policy autonomy, and also a hierarchical position within the sphere. The third form is accepting published weights and retaining domestically the capability to renew, adapt and evaluate them. This is Definition 6(i-b) itself, and overlaps with economic activity. What follows from the logic of M2×C2 is an allocation based on the third form, using the second selectively, and limiting the first. This is not, however, a normative prescription but a conditional consequence — for a state with ample resources that judges an in-house frontier necessary on security grounds, allocation to the first form may be warranted. What this paper claims is that such a judgment should be made not from a general argument that "one ought to hold the upstream" but from an assessment of the actual competition for resources along the three paths of 10.6.2. The materials for the judgment are the cost of pursuing the frontier and the quantity of integration personnel, inference capacity and fiscal room lost thereby. Each differs by state, and no single solution exists. 10.7 A Comparison of Candidate States — Describing Differences in Conditions Against the four conditions set out in 10.1.4 — (A) a matrix of complementary assets, (B) access to a demand market, (C) an institutional position for security of procurement, (D) thickness of national brain capital — the differences in conditions among states that might aim at this cell are described; following the forward reference of 10.1.5, these are candidate AI Foundry States (Definition 21, Section 12). The word "candidate" is to be read literally — what this subsection describes is the degree to which the four conditions are met, not the appropriateness of the jurisdiction concerned adopting this type, nor a prediction of success or failure in adopting it. The purpose of this subsection is not ranking but making explicit the differences among conditions. The assessment of each state's 294 policy is descriptive, and adjudication of superiority is avoided. Detailed country-by-country analysis is sent to Section 14 (country profiles) and Section 18 (case study: Japan). Japan. As to (A), fields of manufacturing, maintenance, medicine and care exist broadly, and the matrix for physical-interface intensity and exclusive data endowment is thick. As to (D), the accumulation of component (i) of Definition 11 (tacit knowledge of the field) and component (iii) (professional ethics and working practices) is thick, but the projection that the working-age population falls from 74.06 million in 2020 to 59.78 million in 2040 (National Institute of Population and Social Security Research) means that the pressure of attrition on components (i) and (iv) is structural. At the same time, the position of 60.1 dollars in labour productivity per hour, 28th among the 38 OECD countries (Japan Productivity Center, 2025), is the obverse of substantial room for growth on the utilization side. The rate of individual use of generative AI rose sharply from 9.1% in fiscal 2023 to 58.8% in fiscal 2025, but remains the lowest among the countries compared (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, White Paper on Information and Communications 2026). As to (C), Japan holds a position within an alliance. The constraint is electricity: an increase in demand of up to 56.8 billion kWh by fiscal 2035 from new and expanded data centres and semiconductor plants alone is incorporated in the outlook (OCCTO, 2026). Details are in Section 18. Germany. As to (A), there is an agglomeration of manufacturing centred on machinery, chemicals and automobiles, and the matrix for physical-interface intensity is thick. As to (D), the investment in firm-specific and industry-specific skills and the vocational training system that the varieties-of-capitalism literature cites as characteristics of a coordinated market economy (Hall & Soskice, 2001) have operated as a mechanism reproducing component (i) of Definition 11 — though there is criticism of the empirical robustness of that theory (Taylor, 2004), and its applicability to the age of AI is contested. As to (B), access to the EU internal market and a common regulatory framework including the AI Act (Regulation (EU) 2024/1689) supply the institutional premise of institutional embeddedness. The constraints are the divergence between regulatory power and productive power common to Europe as a whole (Section 8), and the controversy over the level of energy prices. On the latter this paper does not adjudicate — what can be said with confidence is that in a Transformation Model position the cost of electricity bears directly as the cost of inference capacity. The Republic of Korea. Its distinguishing feature is that it aims at both M2×C2 and M1×C2 at the same time. Its position as a semiconductor supplier gives a composition different from that of the other candidate states, in that physical-interface intensity lies in upstream manufacturing processes rather than in the application layer (Section 8). At the same time, the administration inaugurated in 2025 has made AI investment the highest item of national policy, the National AI Computing Centre has set targets of securing at least 15,000 advanced GPUs by 2028 and at least 50,000 in the public and private sectors combined by 2030, and a method has been adopted of selecting and supporting the foundation models of several firms as national representatives (Sections 8 and 14). This compos‐ 295 ition poses the problem of resource competition discussed in 10.6.2 in its most explicit form — the problem of allocating finite high-skilled talent and electricity in three directions: maintaining upstream processes, pursuing the frontier, and transformation in the application layer. This paper does not assess the merits of that allocation. What it notes is that what the simultaneous pursuit of three directions sacrifices under resource constraints is most readily observable in this case. The Nordic states. As to (A), the scale of the domestic market and of industrial agglomeration is small, and the absolute quantity of the matrix is limited. As to (D), the advanced digitalization of the public sector and the level of trust in institutions have thickened component (iii) of Definition 11. As to (B), they have market access through the EU/EEA regulatory framework, but because the language areas are small the wall based on indicator (d), linguistic-contextual specificity, is thin. Distinctive are the electricity conditions: abundant and relatively inexpensive electricity operates as a locational condition for computing infrastructure. But this at the same time carries the danger of the extractive distortion formulated in Proposition 6b (Section 8) — granting electricity, land and tax preferences to attract computing infrastructure does not in itself guarantee local value added. The lineage of research on small states (Katzenstein, 1985; Ornston, 2012) and its creative corporatism — coordinated investment in human capital and research — may be referred to as an institutional route for avoiding this danger, but its effectiveness in the age of AI is untested. States with a different industrial structure. As stated in 10.1.4, for a state lacking the four conditions M2×C2 is a mistaken objective. For a state with resource output, capital and inexpensive electricity, moving upstream by capital (Section 15 [C]) may be an attainable route. For a city-state economy with a small domestic market and high institutional quality, a hub strategy specializing in institutional embeddedness may be coherent (Section 14). For a state with vast domestic demand and a large language area, M2×C1, betting on linguistic-contextual specificity and scale, may be realistic. The plurality of successful routes shown by Breznitz (2007) for three small states — the most upstream part of research and development, the midstream by way of public research institutions, the downstream through attracting foreign capital — transfers to M2 in the AI period as well. Which of the four indicators to bet on is a function of the existing composition of assets and of scale constraints, and no single optimum exists. Three general observations may be drawn from the comparison. First, (A) the matrix of complementary assets and (D) national brain capital are correlated but not identical. Even where an agglomeration of manufacturing exists, if its operation is outsourced and judgments are not recorded in the organization, (A) is thick and (D) thin. Second, (C) the institutional position for security of procurement is a diplomatic rather than an economic condition, and varies independently of the other three. Third, electricity appears directly in none of the four conditions, yet it rate-limits the whole through (i-a) operational capacity. This is the physical-layer problem treated in Section 13, and the conditional expression of this section is completed only when combined with the constraints of Section 13. 296 Finally, the standpoint of Section 12 should be laid over this comparison. The differences in conditions above are described in light of the question whether the position M2×C2 can be reached. Re-read in light of the question flagged in 10.1.5 — what can be supplied from the position once reached — the same differences yield a different conditional expression. Proposition 39 of Section 12 gives four conditions for the export of integrated systems (Definition 20) — field-specific national brain capital, trust infrastructure, an operational record within the home jurisdiction, and portability — and states that portability, the separability of the system from the specific legal system and practices of the home jurisdiction, is the most binding. Under that criterion, thickness in (A) the matrix of complementary assets and (D) national brain capital does not guarantee exportability of integrated systems. Rather, of the four indicators discussed in 10.3, exclusive data endowment and linguistic-contextual specificity protect the transformation margin by making internalization by the producer difficult, while by the same property fixing the system to the home jurisdiction — and linguistic-contextual specificity, which 10.3.4 called "the thinnest indicator," appears conversely as a constraint from the standpoint of exportability. The comparison of candidate states in this subsection is therefore a comparison of attainability of M2×C2, not a comparison of exportability of integrated systems. The two are delimited by different conditional expressions, and the latter can be determined only by matching the four conditions of Section 12 against each pairing of jurisdiction and field. In other words, satisfying the four conditions of this subsection means only that a state is a candidate AI Foundry State, not that it subsists as an AI Foundry State — the composition required by Definition 21 requires, in addition to the establishment of the position (the four conditions of this section), the capacity to supply the output in the form of integrated systems to external jurisdictions (the four conditions of Proposition 39). Country-by-country application is sent to Sections 14 and 18. 10.8 Consistency With GVC Theory — The Deepening of the Smile Curve and Functional Upgrading Against M2′ as discussed so far in this section — high-value-added transformation protected by complementary assets — one weighty objection is raised from the side of global value chain (GVC) theory. Because the objection uses a device this paper itself invoked, it must be met head on. Section 7.3.3 placed the structure of Proposition 4 in the vocabulary of GVCs and cited the demonstration in international input–output data of the deepening of the smile curve, on which value added is high at both ends of the process and low in the middle (Baldwin & Ito, 2021). The objection turns that citation against this paper. The objection runs as follows. What the deepening of the smile curve means is that the further commoditization proceeds, the more value added is drawn to both ends, upstream and downstream, and the more the middle (transformation) is compressed. In manufacturing GVCs, this compression struck the assembly process — the observation that of a shipment value of approximately 179 dollars, the value added attributable to the place of assembly was approximately 6.5 dollars, only approximately 3.6% (Xing & Detert, 297 2010), is emblematic. The counterpart in AI is a configuration in which the production of foundation models lies upstream, the processes of final demanders downstream, and application and integration in the middle; applying the logic of the smile curve directly, the retention of value added by M2′ in the middle does not hold in the long run. What this paper calls the "wall of integration cost" is, on this view, no more than a temporary wall of integration cost — a technical lag — which over the medium and long term disappears through vertical integration upstream (the producer absorbing the integration function) and user-led activity downstream (demanders assembling for themselves). This section, the objection concludes, has not explained its dynamic durability. This paper's response has four stages. First, what the smile curve describes is a middle that reduces to general-purpose functions. The process that was the object of compression in the empirical basis of the smile curve was one in which transactions are codifiable and supplier capability thin, and which is therefore placed in a modular or captive position in terms of governance — assembly (Gereffi, Humphrey & Sturgeon, 2005). The core proposition of GVC theory, that the capture of value is determined by position in chain governance independently of the geography of production, does not state that the middle is structurally thin; it states that positions that are codifiable and thin in capability are thin. And Proposition 4 places precisely this distinction first — what is structurally compressed is the transformation margin that reduces to general-purpose functions, not the transformation margin protected by integration cost. The smile curve is therefore not a counterexample to this paper but an independent demonstration of the first half of Proposition 4. The degeneration into a thin wrapper treated in 10.5.1 is nothing other than another name for the path of falling into the trough of the smile curve. The objection holds only if the additional claim is true that all of the transformation margin reduces to general-purpose functions, and this additional claim is tested by measurement of the four indicators of Proposition 4. A reservation about the precision of the correspondence is required, however. The horizontal axis of the smile curve is the process, whereas this paper's M axis is the mode of value generation. The two are close but not identical. What M2′ asserts is not sitting in the centre of a sequence of processes but holding a position in governance by means of integration cost, and in GVC vocabulary this is a question not of process position but of governance type — a position closer to relational than to modular. Following the Discipline of Analogy of Proposition 1, what transfers from the smile curve is the correspondence between codifiability and value capture, not implications about the geographical arrangement of processes. Second, the objection contains a correct part. The wall of integration cost is not a fixed terrain and may fall as upstream capability improves. Three paths of decline can be identified. (i) Absorption — functions that previously required integration work are internalized by the very nearly zero marginal cost route of standard inclusion in the next-generation model (Proposition 4, 10.5.2). (ii) Codification — the more the procedures and connection formats of integration are standardized, the higher codifiability rises among the three 298 GVC variables (transaction complexity, codifiability, supplier capability), and governance moves from relational to modular. In modular governance the supplier's bargaining position is weak (Gereffi et al., 2005). (iii) Downstream shift — the more the capability of demanders rises, the more integration is performed inside the demander rather than by an external transformer. All three are phenomena this paper has already treated elsewhere, and GVC theory supplies a vocabulary that binds them into a single dynamic. This paper does not dismiss the point. This vocabulary shows, at a level one step more abstract than the four indicators of Proposition 4, what determines the height of the wall. Against the three variables of GVC governance — transaction complexity, codifiability, supplier capability — what M2′ requires is the combination of high transaction complexity, low codifiability, and high supplier (transformer) capability, which corresponds to the relational type in the typology of Gereffi et al. (2005). The four indicators may be read as observable proxies for these three variables: (b) physical-interface intensity and (a) exclusive data endowment lower codifiability by making transactions depend on field conditions case by case, while (c) institutional embeddedness and (d) linguistic-contextual specificity raise transaction complexity by increasing the number of requirements to be met. And national brain capital (Definition 11) is supplier capability itself. A fall in the wall is nothing other than these three variables moving from the relational toward the modular side. The operation of holding the wall therefore consists in keeping the centre of gravity of transformation in fields of transaction that resist codification, which is another description of the same operation as the enclosure of exclusive data treated in 10.5.3 and the capacity for regulatory compliance treated in 10.5.4. Third, therefore, M2′ is not a static refuge. The conclusion of 10.8 is to reformulate M2′ not as a set of conditions of establishment but as a speed condition. That is, M2′ holds only where complementary assets keep being thickened faster than the wall falls. This is a form that recurs throughout this paper — that the three components of Definition 6 depreciate in proportion to the speed at which the frontier advances; that Proposition 8 states that security of supply holds only as Continuous Construction; that Proposition 15 (Section 15) defines an upward transition as "maintaining a period in which the speed of accumulation exceeds the speed at which the frontier advances" — and M2′ is one instance of it. Just as the end of 10.7 sent the completion of the conditional expression to the physical constraints of Section 13, the time derivative of the conditional expression closes here. M2′ read as a table of requirements is a misreading; correctly, it is a list of flows that resist depreciation (10.10). Fourth, in order to restate this dynamic in a positive form, the GVC concept of functional upgrading is introduced. Among the four types of upgrading (process, product, functional, inter-chain), functional upgrading means changing the function one performs within the chain (Humphrey & Schmitz, 2002). In this vocabulary, M2′ is reformulated not as the passive securing of a margin in the middle but as a dynamic of extending function in both directions from the middle toward the two ends. Extension upstream means un‐ 299 dertaking oneself the fine-tuning of published weights and evaluation in the application context — setting and verifying the criteria of what counts as sufficient output for the use concerned. This is the same capability as renewal capability under Definition 6(i-b), and is the description from the GVC side of the structure that 10.6.3 called "economic strategy and security strategy converging on the same investment." Extension downstream means embedding output in customers' operational processes and assuming responsibility for the consequences of those processes. This is the act of thickening indicator (c) of Proposition 4, institutional embeddedness, and its institutional premise is trust infrastructure (Definition 17 and Proposition 25, Section 11). This reformulation inverts the relation to the smile curve. The position that survives is not the trough but a position climbed from the trough onto the slopes on either side. The extension is not symmetric, however. Extension upstream has an upper bound, and that bound lies where 10.6.2 discussed it from the standpoint of resource competition — going beyond fine-tuning and evaluation to full entry into frontier production itself sacrifices other investments in the allocation of finite high-skilled talent and electricity. The functional upgrading of M2′ therefore takes an asymmetric form: deep downstream, shallow upstream. And because extension in either direction requires accumulation, the time constant is on the order of years (Proposition 15), and it does not follow the fall of the wall automatically. As to extension downstream, the relation to path (iii), downstream shift, among the paths of the wall's decline needs to be clarified. Movement by demanders to bring integration in-house appears to a transformer as a contraction of the market. But in-house provision is subject to a constraint distinct from the question of capability. The act of embedding output in critical processes cannot be carried out without allocation of liability for the consequences, conformity assessment and insurance (Definition 17 and Proposition 25, Section 11), and these are not things individual demanders can provide for themselves. This is especially so in regulated sectors. The downstream shift therefore advances first in fields where liability is rarely at issue — the fields Proposition 25 calls "peripheral operations" — while in critical processes a third party assuming liability continues to be required. It is toward this function of assuming liability that the downstream extension of M2′ should be directed. Conversely, transformation that does not assume liability — a position that merely hands over output — is the position that disappears soonest through the downstream shift. Here too, what disappears is not transformation in general but transformation that reduces to general-purpose functions. A word on inter-chain upgrading (moving to another chain) as well. The four GVC types include this option, and in this paper's vocabulary it corresponds to a recomposition of weights across the nine cells — that is, a cell transition (Definition 10, Section 15). For fields in which M2′ cannot satisfy the speed condition, it may be rational to shift weight to another cell rather than continuing to hold the wall by remaining in that field. This judgment differs by field and should not be made in the aggregate for a state's whole portfolio. 300

Here again the implication of Definition 3 takes effect: strategy is not a choice but an allocation. Finally, the case in which the conditions are not satisfied is stated plainly. If the wall keeps falling and the formation of complementary assets does not keep pace, M2′ does not hold. This is not a reservation upon this paper's claim but part of the claim. The falsification condition of Proposition 4 lays down a procedure of measuring the four indicators before a generational-turnover event in foundation models and estimating the association with gross margin and survival rate after the event, and provides in particular that Proposition 4 is rejected if it is systematically observed that application firms in the lower quantiles on all four indicators maintain gross margin across a generational turnover. What this subsection adds is the dynamic version of that procedure — if it is repeatedly observed that, even for firms in the upper quantiles on the four indicators, gross margin diminishes with each generational turnover and that this diminution is not offset by an increase in the thickness of complementary assets, then this section's claim that M2′ should be placed at the core of national strategy is rejected. The positions remaining in that case are depth of utilization (M3) and the three functions of the sovereign minimum guarantee level against a stoppage of external supply (Definition 6, Section 13), and policy design premised on the retention of value added through transformation would have to be revised. What this subsection has settled and what remains unresolved should be separated. Settled: that the deepening of the smile curve is not a counterexample to M2′ but a restatement of the first half of Proposition 4; that the wall of integration cost is nonetheless variable, so that M2′ holds only as a speed condition; and that this speed condition takes an operable form as the bidirectional extension of functional upgrading. Unresolved: that this paper gives no measurement framework for either the speed at which the wall falls or the speed at which the thickness of complementary assets increases. Appendix E presents a provisional measurement framework for national brain capital, but estimating speeds requires repeated observation at the firm level across generational-turnover events, which exceeds the scope of this paper. In addition, the demonstration of the smile curve (Baldwin & Ito, 2021) is based on international input–output data for manufacturing, and its application to the application layer of AI is an analogy subject to the discipline of Proposition 1 — what transfers is the correspondence between codifiability and value capture, not the numerical magnitude of the compression. These two points are added to the limitations in Section 20. 10.9 Verification by Contemporaneous Comparison — The Petroleum Market in 2026 The comparison with petroleum used in this section so far has been a diachronic comparison taking the crisis of 1973 as its reference. Diachronic comparison has a methodological weakness: when two observations half a century apart are set side by side, one cannot separate whether the difference between them derives from properties specific to the 301 resource or from period effects — the industrial structure, institutions and technical level of the time. The determinations of transfer and non-transfer presented as Table 11 in 10.2 carried this weakness, since many of them matched observations from 1973 against counterfactual reasoning about AI. The subsection of Section 6 on "the petroleum market in 2026 — a contemporaneous observation" supplies material that repairs this weakness. If two resources, petroleum and AI, can be observed side by side at the same point in time, period effects are controlled. This subsection uses that observation to verify this section's theory — the independence of transformation value (Definition 5) and the integration-cost framework of Proposition 4. Two procedural notes are made first. First, this subsection does not touch at all on the cause, background, parties or course of the 2026 supply disruption event. What is treated is only market facts: volumes of supply, volumes transported, prices, inventories, investment and profits. Second, every figure used below is stated with the issuing body and the point in time. 10.9.1 Empirical Confirmation of Definition 5 — Theory First, Observation After Definition 5 (verbatim in Section 7) posited transformation value as the difference between the consideration a transformer pays for the capability it procures and the consideration it receives from final demanders, as an accounting quantity fluctuating independently of the producer's share. This definition was posited a priori as an accounting identity and was not induced from observation. Since it is defined as a difference, there is no empirical content in the mere fact that two price series may move independently. Definition 5 touches empirical content where that independence is actually observed in a real market, and Definition 5 itself reserved that "the determinant of its attribution is an empirical question and not part of the definition" precisely in order to preserve this distinction. The petroleum market in 2026 supplies a contemporaneous observation bearing on that reservation. The monthly report of the IEA (Oil Market Report, July 2026 issue, 10 July 2026) records that, because crude oil prices fell on a recovery of crude supply while tightness persisted in product markets, product cracks and margins surged in early July to their highest level in four years. In that same early July, North Sea Dated had fallen by 22 dollars month on month to approximately 68 dollars per barrel. That is, in a phase where the price of production fell, the transformer's share did not. The asymmetry is clear on year-to-date changes as well: as of 23 July 2026, gasoline was up 98% year to date against WTI crude up 44%, so that the rate of increase on the product side reached more than twice that on the crude side, and the United States 3-2-1 crack spread recorded a record high (Forbes, 23 July 2026). The national average retail price of gasoline at that point was 4.06 dollars per gallon. The order in which this observation is read must be stated explicitly. Definition 5 of this paper was posited as an accounting identity before the 2026 observation was available. The above must therefore be read not as an ex post explanation constructing a definition 302 from an observation, but in the order in which a definition posited earlier is subsequently supported by a contemporaneous observation. Were the order reversed — had the definition been chosen to fit the observation — the claim of support would be circular and the definition would predict nothing. The time interval this paper placed between definition and observation is a procedural requirement for avoiding that circularity. A reservation is required in interpreting the observation, however. The height of product margins in 2026 is not attributable to demand-side factors alone; it arises together with a scarcity on the side of transformation capacity. World refinery runs were 80.9 million barrels per day in July 2026, approximately 5 million barrels per day below the same month of the previous year (IEA, Oil Market Report, August 2026 issue). The pace of capacity additions has also slowed, from approximately 1 million barrels per day per year in 2022– 2024 to 620,000 barrels per day per year in 2025–2027 (Industrial Info Resources, compilation as of December 2025), and in the United States seven major facilities are said to have been closed or converted since 2019, with a loss of approximately 1.2 million barrels per day of capacity (Forbes, 23 July 2026). This observation is therefore consistent with the content of Definition 5 — that the transformer's share may move independently of the price of production — but does not estimate the degree of that independence quantitatively. A full test of the empirical content of Definition 5 is left to the firm-panel procedure laid down by the falsification condition of Proposition 4 and Hypothesis H2 (Section 21). What the contemporaneous observation supplies is a confirmation prior to the test — confirmation that the phenomenon the definition denotes actually exists. 10.9.2 Why Downstream Integration by Producers Is Incomplete in Petroleum More important for this section is a second observation. As of 2026, petroleum producers have the capacity to refine a substantial part of their own crude themselves. Saudi Aramco's net refining capacity rose from 4.1 mmbpd in 2024 to 4.2 mmbpd in 2025, and net chemicals production capacity reached 59.3 million tonnes per year (its Results and performance 2025). On a year-to-date basis for the first half of 2026, the downstream utilization rate against its own crude production was 52% (its H1 2026 interim report, published 4 August 2026). Integration has plainly advanced at the level of capacity. Even so, the allocation of investment remains heavily tilted upstream. The company's capital expenditure in the first half of 2026 was 20.2 billion dollars upstream against 4.5 billion dollars downstream, approximately 4.5:1, with 80% of the 25.3 billion dollar total on the drilling side (ibid.). More than twenty years after integration was declared, the centre of gravity of capital allocation has not moved. Why does complete integration not come about? The framework of Proposition 4 (Section 7) supplies a vocabulary for answering this question — whether a producer internalizes the transformation position is determined by the cost of internalization, that is, by the height of integration cost. Integration cost in petroleum can be decomposed into at least three components. 303 First, capital specificity is high. A refinery is a very large installed capital configured to the properties of the crude it processes and to the product standards of the market it supplies. Conversion is difficult, and adding one unit of capacity requires an additional unit of capital. Marginal cost is not zero. Moreover, for a producer the same capital has an alternative use in the upstream. The 4.5:1 allocation in the first half of 2026 can be read as the consequence of this comparison of opportunity costs. Looking at the refining sector as a whole, capital expenditure was projected at 135 billion dollars in 2026 (Industrial Info Resources, compilation as of December 2025; it should be noted that this is an outlook made before the supply disruption event occurred), so that integration requires capital on an industrial scale. Second, location is tied to the demand market. Products are many in variety and small in lot, and standards differ by market, so it is efficient to place transformation facilities at consumption sites. For a producer to take the downstream it must therefore hold assets in jurisdictions outside its own. This constraint appears in the actual forms integration takes. Borouge International, completed on 31 March 2026, is an equal partnership in which XRG (the international investment arm of ADNOC) and OMV each hold 50%, with combined production capacity of 13.6 million tonnes per year and identified EBITDA synergies stated at over 500 million dollars per year (Borealis / OMV, 31 March 2026). The acquisition of NOVA Chemicals in North America is included in the transaction. In neither case did the producing side take command of the downstream alone; the form is either splitting capital with a transformation-side firm or acquiring an existing transformation firm. Downstream capacity can be bought, but it is not internalized. Third, optimizing operation requires long-accumulated operating knowledge. Blending of crude grades, unit-by-unit yields, maintenance cycles, conformity to product standards market by market — these are assets distinct from ownership of the equipment and do not attach automatically to purchased equipment. When a producer acquires downstream capacity by acquisition, what it acquires at the same time is the equipment and the organization that has been running it. What can be acquired is the organization, not the time that made the organization. All three components keep the cost of integration high for the producer. This is the instance in petroleum of what Proposition 4 stated: a transformation margin protected by integration cost is not compressed. And what matters is that this instance is not counterfactual. The producers of 2026 have declared the intention to integrate, hold the capital for integration, and are in fact acquiring capacity. Even so the allocation of capital tilts upstream. If integration is not completed even where intention and capital are present, then the constraint lies not in a shortage of intention or capital but in the cost structure. From this observation this subsection extracts one measurement procedure. The extent of a producer's integration is measured not by declarations but by (i) the ratio of capital allocation and (ii) the attribution of excess profit. These two are quantities observable in the same form for AI producers. When assessing the progress of the "absorption of gen‐ 304 eral-purpose functions through the producer's standard inclusion" treated in 10.5.2, the indicators this paper should use are these two, not statements of an intention to integrate. 10.9.3 This Incompleteness Does Not Transfer to AI Here begins the decisive stage of this subsection. The Discipline of Analogy of Proposition 1 (Section 3) requires decomposing a bundle of properties and determining transferability property by property. This subsection applies that discipline to the three components of integration cost decomposed in 10.9.2. Capital specificity does not transfer. In AI, the route by which a producer internalizes functions of the application layer is standard inclusion in the next-generation model. This route requires very little additional installed capital — the function is supplied on the existing facilities for training and provision, and the marginal cost of delivering one additional unit is very nearly zero (Proposition 4). The comparison of opportunity costs that kept petroleum producers upstream does not operate here, because a producer need not cut the upstream in order to carry functions of the application layer. The constraint of location does not transfer either. The supply of a foundation model reaches the whole world simultaneously through an API (10.2.2, N1). A producer need not hold installed assets in the jurisdiction of the demand market in order to provide functions of the application layer. The geographic constraint that limited integration in petroleum to joint ventures and acquisitions does not exist in AI. Only the component corresponding to operating knowledge transfers in part. Operational knowledge of business processes does not attach to purchased equipment in AI either. But whereas the operating knowledge of petroleum concerned the running of plant, its counterpart in AI concerns the customer's operational processes, and its location may be on the side of the demander rather than the transformer. The failure to enclose exclusive data treated in 10.5.3 is nothing other than the path along which that location is not secured on the transformer's side. Accordingly, the "incompleteness of producers' downstream integration" observed in petroleum does not transfer to AI. It does not transfer because two of the cost items that supported that incompleteness do not exist in AI. The methodological significance of this determination should be made explicit. In a diachronic comparison taking 1973 as reference, one could observe the fact that producing states did not take the downstream comprehensively, but could not separate whether the cause lay in period effects — the capital markets, technical level and corporate organization of the time — or in a cost structure specific to the resource. The 2026 observation makes that separation possible: the fact that contemporary producers with the intention and the capital for integration nevertheless remain upstream in their capital allocation shows that the constraint is not a period effect. And once the composition of the constraint is identified, transferability to AI can be determined item by item for each of its components. This is what is meant by transferability that could be determined rigorously 305 only by contemporaneous comparison. The non-correspondences N1 and N2 stated in 10.2.2 as counterfactual reasoning obtain observational support here. When two of the three components of petroleum's integration cost disappear in AI, what remains as integration cost for the producer? Proposition 4 makes it explicit — integration into operational processes, regulatory compliance, and the assumption of liability. And the four indicators of Proposition 4 are designed precisely as instruments for measuring this residue. (a) Exclusive data endowment and (b) physical-interface intensity measure the depth of integration into operational processes; (c) institutional embeddedness measures the substance of regulatory compliance and assumption of liability; (d) linguistic- contextual specificity measures the number of requirements to be met. The ordering of coefficients predicted by Hypothesis H2 (Section 21) — physical-interface intensity and exclusive data endowment > institutional embeddedness > linguistic-contextual specificity — is the ordering of the degree to which integration cost is kept high, and agrees with the order in which 10.3 treated the four indicators. Contemporaneous comparison has clarified, by subtraction from petroleum, what these four indicators are trying to measure. Table 24. The three components of integration cost and their transferability to AI (based on the 2026 observation of petroleum) Component of integration cost Its substance in petroleum and the 2026 observation AI (producer's integration into the application layer) Determination Capital specificity A refinery is installed capital configured to crude properties and market standards and hard to convert. Adding capacity requires additional capital. Capital expenditure in H1 2026: 20.2 billion dollars upstream against 4.5 billion dollars downstream (approximately 4.5:1) Standard inclusion in the next-generation model requires very little additional installed capital, and the marginal cost of delivering one additional unit is very nearly zero Does not transfer Location tied to the demand market Products are many in variety and small in lot and are efficiently located at consumption sites. Producers' acquisition of the downstream proceeds by joint venture and acquisition (Borouge International: XRG and OMV 50% each, combined 13.6 million tonnes per year, completed 31 March 2026) Simultaneous worldwide supply through APIs. No need to hold installed assets in the jurisdiction of the demand market Does not transfer Long-accumulated operating knowledge Optimization of crude blending, yields, maintenance cycles and standards conformity is an asset distinct from ownership of equipment and does not attach to purchased equipment The counterpart is operational knowledge of the customer's business processes. But its location may be on the demander's side rather than the transformer's (10.5.3) Transfers in part Embedding into Relatively thin, because the transformed output is a standardized product The component measured by indicators (a) exclusive data Transfers (weight 306 Component of integration cost Its substance in petroleum and the 2026 observation AI (producer's integration into the application layer) Determination operational processes endowment and (b) physicalinterface intensity of Proposition 4. Becomes the principal pillar of integration cost increases on the AI side) Regulatory compliance Conformity to product standards and environmental regulation. The diversity of standards by market supported the logic of location at consumption sites The component measured by indicators (c) institutional embeddedness and (d) linguistic- contextual specificity of Proposition 4 Transfers Assumption of liability The structure of product liability is relatively simple The component measured by indicator (c) of Proposition 4. Presupposes trust infrastructure (Definition 17 and Proposition 25, Section 11) Transfers (weight increases on the AI side) 10.9.4 The Attribution of the Transformer's Share — Holding Capability Does Not Determine Attribution The third observation concerns attribution. In the phase of record margins in 2026, who captured the excess profit? The firms whose share prices approximately doubled year to date were Marathon Petroleum and Valero, and Phillips 66 was up 66% (all independent United States refiners; Forbes, 23 July 2026). An exchange-traded fund holding refiners (VanEck Oil Refiners) recorded +21% in the single month of July. On the producing side, Aramco's downstream segment adjusted EBIT was 11.7 billion dollars in the first half of 2026 (its H1 2026 interim report; because this is a different measure from adjusted net income of 67.2 billion dollars in the same period, no ratio between the two is computed). That is, although the producer had reached the stage of holding net refining capacity of 4.2 mmbpd and chemicals production capacity of 59.3 million tonnes per year and processing a majority of its own crude itself, the principal recipients of the excess profit of transformation were independent transformers. This is one answer, in 2026, to the empirical question Definition 5 reserved — what determines the attribution of transformation value. The content of the answer takes a negative form. The transformation position is not automatically taken away merely because the producer holds capability. Holding capability does not determine attribution. This observation must, however, be read with the limitation of 10.9.3. Independent transformers could retain excess profit in 2026 because two costs — capital specificity and location — held back the producer's integration. Those two do not exist in AI. This observation therefore cannot be extrapolated to the application layer of AI. What can be extrac‐ 307 ted from the observation extends only to the negative proposition that "holding capability does not determine attribution"; the positive proposition that "therefore the application layer of AI is likewise protected" cannot be derived. What can be derived is rather the general proposition — what determines attribution is not the holding of capability but the height of integration cost, and in AI what may give that height is only the four indicators of Proposition 4 and the national brain capital underlying them (Definition 11, Proposition 18). 10.9.5 Implication — What Protects Is Different The three observations of this subsection are organized as implications for the theory of M2×C2. The organizing point is a single asymmetry. What protected the transformers of petroleum was physics and location. Both the difficulty of converting installed capital and the efficiency of location at consumption sites were given by the physical properties of the resource and by geography, independently of the transformer's intent or of institutional design. Transformers did not build this defence; they had it from the start. The defence was free, required no maintenance cost, and did not depreciate if left alone. What may protect the transformers of AI is only the four indicators of complementary assets and national brain capital. These are not given. They require accumulation, their time constant is on the order of years (Proposition 15, Section 15), and they depreciate relatively if nothing is done. As formulated in 10.8, M2′ is not a table of requirements but a speed condition, holding only where complementary assets keep being thickened faster than the wall falls. Because what protects is different, a defence of the same strength cannot be expected. This paper records this asymmetry plainly. The fact that transformers in petroleum obtained record excess profits in 2026 must not be cited as evidence that transformers in AI can likewise obtain them. What contemporaneous comparison has brought is not material favourable to M2′ but a tightening of the conditions — because it showed, with a precision impossible in diachronic comparison, that two of the conditions that generated those excess profits do not exist in AI. The transformers of petroleum had their defence; the transformers of AI must keep building theirs. One further observation should be added to this section's failure modes (10.5). Japan's crude oil processing capacity fell by approximately 41%, from a peak of 5.27 million barrels per day at the end of March 2001 to 3.11 million barrels per day at the end of April 2026, and the number of refineries very nearly halved from 36 at the end of March 1995 to 19 (Petroleum Association of Japan). The record refining margins of 2026 arise on top of this contracted capacity. Occupying the seat of transformation and maintaining the capacity for transformation are separate matters. Self-definition as a transformation state does not automatically guarantee the maintenance of capacity. The five failure modes enumerated in 10.5 all dealt with degradation on the side of complementary assets; 308 a sixth observation is added here — the divergence between the declaration of a position and the substance of capacity. This divergence is captured directly by none of the four indicators, and is detected only by monitoring independently the physical volume of transformation itself (quantities corresponding to processing capacity, number of sites, number of persons employed). Concrete examination for Japan is sent to Section 18. Finally, what this subsection has settled and what remains unresolved are separated. Settled: (i) that the content of Definition 5, that the transformer's share may move independently of the price of production, is consistent with a contemporaneous observation; (ii) that the incompleteness of producers' downstream integration in petroleum is explained by three integration costs — capital specificity, location tied to the demand market, and long-accumulated operating knowledge — of which two do not transfer to AI; and (iii) that the conditions that protected the transformers of petroleum are therefore not given to the transformers of AI. Unresolved: that the contemporaneous comparison still rests on a single year and a single resource. Observation of the one year 2026 estimates no population parameter, either for the degree of independence of transformation margins or for the level of integration cost. In addition, the object of comparison has not been observed on the AI side — what this subsection has stated about AI is a structural determination about the presence or absence of cost items, not a measurement of the actual progress of integration. Observing over time, for AI producers, the two indicators extracted at the end of 10.9.2 (the ratio of capital allocation and the attribution of excess profit) is the next step that would complete this verification, and lies beyond the scope of this paper. This limitation is added to Section 20. 10.10 Summary — A Cell Under the Pressure of Transition This section has examined the conditions under which the M2×C2 cell holds, in the order of positive grounds, the sorting of structural correspondences, complementary assets, national brain capital, failure modes, the minimum engagement with the higher tier, differences in conditions among candidate states, consistency with GVC theory, and verification by contemporaneous comparison. In summary: First, the grounds for discussing this cell on its own are not elimination but three positive facts — that only at the M2 position does transformation value arise as an accounting quantity; that at Tier C2 the scarcity of access and the wall of integration cost overlap; and that the assets constituting the wall cannot be imported. But this holds only for states satisfying the four conditions, and is not the optimum for all states (Proposition 3). Second, the metaphor of "the processing trade of the Reiwa era" holds for five structures (security of procurement as a precondition, attribution determined by the transformer's assets, access to a demand market, defence through transformation efficiency, an independent logic of location) and does not hold for six (physical defensibility, capital specificity, rivalry of the raw material, inevitability of the intermediate position, stockpiling, 309 time axes) (Table 11). Ironically, the aspect on which the metaphor fits best is not the success of processing trade but its vulnerability. Third, the conditions of establishment are given by the four indicators of Proposition 4 and the national brain capital underlying them (Definition 11, Proposition 18). The four indicators are the externalized traces (exclusive data, physical interface) and institutionalized forms (institutional embeddedness, linguistic context) of national brain capital, and operations that raise the four indicators in the short run therefore do not persist unless accompanied by accumulation of the substrate. AI capability can be imported; national brain capital cannot. Fourth, the failure modes are classified into five (Table 12), each with signs observable in advance. The hardest to recover from is (e) attrition of national brain capital; next in irreversibility is (c) loss of exclusive data. The priority of monitoring should be set in order of difficulty of recovery, not ease of observation. Fifth, the engagement with the higher tier needed to hold this cell is confined to the three functions of Definition 6. Full entry into M1×C2 is unnecessary and may be harmful under resource constraints. Because the economic activity of the Transformation Model internalizes (i-b) renewal capability and (i-c) the sensitive-processing condition of the guarantee level, there is here a structure in which economic strategy and security strategy converge on the same investment. Sixth, the deepening of the smile curve in GVC theory is not a counterexample to M2′ but an independent demonstration of the first half of Proposition 4 — that transformation margins reducible to general-purpose functions are compressed. The wall of integration cost is nonetheless variable and may fall through three paths: improvement in upstream capability, codification of integration procedures, and in-house provision on the demander's side. M2′ is therefore not a static refuge but holds only as a speed condition, that complementary assets keep being thickened faster than the wall falls; and its operable form is the bidirectional extension of functional upgrading — shallow upstream (fine-tuning and evaluation), deep downstream (embedding in customers' processes and assumption of liability) (10.8). Seventh, the contemporaneous observation of the petroleum market in 2026 gave both confirmation and limitation to this section's theory (10.9). The confirmation concerns Definition 5 — the observation that product margins reached a four-year high in a phase when crude prices fell subsequently supports the content of Definition 5, that the transformer's share may fluctuate independently of the producer's share. The limitation concerns the application of Proposition 4 — the integration costs that held back producers' downstream integration in petroleum decompose into three components (capital specificity, location tied to the demand market, and long-accumulated operating knowledge), and the first two do not exist in AI (Table 24). The conditions that protected the transformers of petroleum are therefore not given to the transformers of AI, and the integration cost that remains is only embedding into operational processes, regulatory compli‐ 310

ance and the assumption of liability — which is what the four indicators of Proposition 4 are trying to measure. Because what protects is different, a defence of the same strength cannot be expected. What contemporaneous comparison brought is not material favourable to M2′ but a tightening of the conditions. Eighth, what this section has treated is the conditions under which a position holds, not the form of what is supplied from that position (10.1.5). From the same endowment of complementary assets, the value realized differs according to which of three forms — export of capability, export of products, export of integrated systems — is chosen. In particular, a jurisdiction that thickens the four indicators while performing only the export of capability is selling assets that escape compression in a form that is compressed. In addition, the conditions under which the export of integrated systems holds are delimited separately from the four conditions of this section, and there the criterion of determination is not the height of capability but the looseness of the coupling between capability and the institutions of the home jurisdiction (Proposition 39, Section 12). Satisfying this section's conditions is a necessary but not a sufficient condition for that. Finally, the limits of this section's analysis are made explicit. What this section has described is the conditions under which the cell holds, not the persistence of its holding. M2×C2 is not maintained but is permanently exposed to the pressure of transition. From above, Frontier Descent erodes the wall and the producer's standard inclusion absorbs general-purpose functions. From below, a path lies open by which transformation that has lost its complementary assets slides into pure utilization. As Proposition 15 (Section 15) formulates, an upward transition requires accumulation with a time constant on the order of years, whereas a downward transition occurs passively through the relative depreciation of accumulation alone — that is, if nothing is done, the position falls. The conditions of establishment enumerated in this section should be read not as a static table of requirements but as a list of flows to be maintained against depreciation. In addition, the external conditions of this cell also move. Security of procurement (Proposition 4(i)) is a function of the measures of other states, and where, through the pressure of cross-axis transition (Proposition 16, Section 15), the logic governing the allocation of the capability concerned moves from the economic to the security domain, procurability is determined by political position rather than by price and quality. The physical constraints of electricity and compute tilt this branching downward. Section 15 analyses these dynamics as four transition scenarios and shows that Transformation Model states are permanently placed at the branch point between "ascent through in-house provision of the higher tier" and "fall through the deepening of dependence." The conditions of establishment in this section are the input to that branching analysis. 311 11. Geoeconomic Leverage — Indispensability and Desirability 11.1 Why Position Alone Is Not Enough From Section 7 through Section 10, this paper has described the position of states by means of the analytical device of the nine cells. What the Nine-Cell Matrix answers is the question of how a given state generates value. The Resource-Producing Model (M1) derives value from the fact of production, the Transformation Model (M2) from what it adds to resources it has procured, and the Utilization Model (M3) from inputs into domestic processes. This description yielded three results: that the institutions, investment and composition of talent required differ from position to position (Proposition 3, Section 6); that the subsistence of the Transformation Model is conditioned on complementary assets (Proposition 4, Section 7); and that the value of utilization compounds through complementary investment (Proposition 5, Section 7). The nine cells, however, do not answer a second question: when conditions are altered from outside, can the state push back? In its analysis of Row C2, Section 8 recorded as a failure mode that a unilateral change in the conditions of access may sever the continuity of a transformer's business. Section 15 goes further, formalizing the process in which the logic that disciplines the allocation of capability moves from economics to security (Proposition 16), and showing that under that logic the procurement possibilities of non-allied states cease to be a function of price and quality. What these descriptions have in common is a structure in which a state's feasible set is rewritten by a variable other than its own position. Position governs what can be done within the set after it has been rewritten; it does not govern what can be done about the rewriting itself. This deficiency becomes clear when instances in which position and leverage do not coincide are set side by side. The three types below are presented not as evaluations of any state, but as descriptions of position and constraint. The first type arises where a jurisdiction stands at the utilization or Transformation Model while occupying a critical node among the physical inputs on which producers depend. The jurisdiction that supplies advanced semiconductor manufacturing equipment, the economic zone in which advanced logic manufacturing capacity is agglomerated, and the economic zone in which the suppliers of high-bandwidth memory are located are none of them producers of frontier models. On the nine cells, since they do not produce frontier capability within their own territory, they do not sit at M1×C2. Even so, if these jurisdictions were to halt supply, the production plans of frontier producers would not hold. What Section 14 described, in its profile of the United States, as "the simultaneous holding of a chokepoint and dependence upon a chokepoint" is another aspect of this 312 non-coincidence. A state of the Resource-Producing Model may hold a weak bargaining position relative to a state that is not of the Resource-Producing Model. The second type arises where a jurisdiction has low productive strength and stands at the Utilization Model, yet is sought out by virtue of market size and rules. Even in a jurisdiction where frontier production within its territory is confined to essentially a single actor, and where states formerly strong in high-performance computing have become peripheral in AI clusters (Pilz et al., 2025), if that jurisdiction holds rules that govern the conditions of market access, then actors outside it that seek to do business in that market must conform to those rules. The channel that Bradford (2020) formalized as the Brussels effect operates independently of the geography of production. The EU profile in Section 14 described this structure as "the separation between where one stands among the nine cells and who writes the rules of the cell". This section handles that separation within the interior of the theory. The third type arises where a state is close to production yet the degree to which other states wish to engage with it is low. As Definition 3 (Section 6) states, the path by which the value of M1 is realized depends on the tier, and at levels of low strategic character it takes non-exclusive routes — ecosystem externalities and standard formation — rather than sales revenue. Along that route, the fact of production is not itself converted into bargaining power. The fact that a state produces and the fact that other states wish to engage with it are separate variables. All three types show that power in negotiation cannot be derived from position on the nine cells. This paper therefore introduces a second axis. Definition 15 (Geoeconomic Leverage) Geoeconomic leverage denotes the power of a state to realize its own preferences in international negotiation and dispute, and consists of the following two components. Indispensability: the magnitude of the cost and dysfunction that would arise were other states to attempt to bypass or exclude the state concerned. It is measured by the holding of chokepoints on the supply network, the absence of alternative suppliers, and the time required to switch. Desirability: the degree to which other states voluntarily wish to engage with the state concerned. It is measured by the attractiveness of the market, rules, technology, capital and trust that it offers. Geoeconomic leverage is a variable independent of position on the nine cells (Definition 3) — there exist states that stand at the Utilization Model and yet possess high indispensability, and states that stand at the Resource-Producing Model and yet possess only low desirability. Four points about the construction of Definition 15 should be made explicit. First, the two components run in opposite directions. Indispensability is measured by the magnitude of the loss the counterparty would suffer were it to attempt to bypass the state concerned. It is thus a power whose unit is the loss of others. Desirability is meas‐ 313 ured by the magnitude of the gain the counterparty obtains when it engages with the state concerned. It is thus a power whose unit is the gain of others. The former is a power that pushes back; the latter is a power that draws in. The two are held as two components rather than combined into a single variable because, as is shown below, they differ fundamentally in their mode of depreciation (Section 11.6). One point of terminology should be fixed here: in this paper, "desirability" denotes the observed propensity of other states to seek engagement, and carries no normative evaluation; it is a measured quantity, not a judgement that engagement is to be preferred. Second, this section places two existing theoretical lineages on a single plane. Farrell & Newman (2019) formalized the claim that global economic networks converge, by reason of efficiency, on a hub-and-spoke structure, and that the state with jurisdiction over a hub obtains a panopticon effect (informational advantage through observation of the information flowing through the hub) and a chokepoint effect (coercion through the severing of access to the hub). This is a theory of indispensability. Bradford (2020) formalized the claim that where five conditions — market size, regulatory capacity, stringent standards, inelastic targets and non-divisibility — are jointly satisfied, regulation becomes a global standard de facto by way of firm behaviour and de jure by way of legislative emulation in other jurisdictions. This is a theory of desirability. The two developed independently and have been cited independently. The contribution of this paper is to place them as two components of a state's bargaining power on a single coordinate, and to set that coordinate orthogonal to the nine cells. Third, leverage does not attach to a state automatically. As Farrell & Newman emphasized, converting a position on a network into coercive power requires domestic institutions — the legal construction of jurisdictional authority, regulatory capacity, and the practice of enforcement. In many cases it is not the state but a firm that occupies a physical critical node, and only the jurisdiction in which the firm is located can exercise it, and only through jurisdictional authority. This structure of mediation recurs throughout this section and comes to fruition in Section 11.7 in the discussion of the residual functions of the state. Fourth, the measurement framework is provisional. Definition 15 suggests how the two components are to be measured (indispensability by concentration, the number of alternative suppliers, and the time required to switch; desirability by the market, rules, technology, capital and trust components), but this paper does not offer a single index composed from them. Composition requires weights across components, and those weights depend on the context of the negotiation. This paper uses leverage only as an ordinal scale, describing the height of levels and the attribution of quadrants. This limitation is acknowledged as a limitation of this paper in Section 20, and the operational diagnostic procedure is separated out into Appendix G. 314 11.2 The Sources of Indispensability The discussion begins with the operationalization of indispensability. Definition 15 gives three ways of measuring it — the holding of chokepoints, the absence of alternative suppliers, and the time required to switch. Of these the third carries the most information. The absence of alternative suppliers is close to a binary description, whereas the time required to switch is a continuous quantity and connects directly to the temporal structure of negotiation. If, for a given input, the period a counterparty needs in order to establish an alternative route is called the switching time, then holding converts into bargaining power only where that time is longer than the cycle of the counterparty's policy decisions — the budget year, elections, the term of an industrial plan. A critical node at which switching is completed within a quarter is a critical node, but not an instrument of negotiation. Six sources are discussed below, with attention to why concentration arises and why it is hard to dissolve. 11.2.1 Advanced Semiconductor Manufacturing Equipment Advanced lithography systems have been widely analysed as the sharpest instance of a single firm being in practice the sole supplier (Miller, 2022). The mechanism by which concentration arose can be decomposed into at least four elements. First, economies of scale. The development cost of one generation of equipment is at a level recoverable only when divided across the annual worldwide demand in units, so that the minimum efficient scale of the market approaches the size of the market itself. Were two firms to stand side by side, neither would reach recovery. Second, learning effects. The performance of lithography systems improves not through design alone but through the information on defects returned from the volume-production floors of many customers, and the quantity of that information is proportional to the installed base. The first mover improves faster than later entrants. Third, capital specificity. The components built into the equipment are designed for that equipment alone, and a supply network on the order of thousands of firms has co-evolved along the generational plan of that equipment. For a later entrant to reach the same performance, it is not the equipment itself but the entire supply network that must be rebuilt. Fourth, the accumulation of skill. Installation, calibration and maintenance cannot be carried out from documented procedures alone and depend on tacit knowledge on the floor. This component is the industrial counterpart of what Definition 11 (Section 10) formalizes as national brain capital, and it cannot be replicated or transferred at low cost. The difficulty of dissolving this concentration derives from the fact that all four mechanisms are functions of time. Development cost can be filled with money, but learning effects and the accumulation of skill are functions of the installed base and of years of operation, and cannot be compressed by the injection of funds. The switching time is therefore measured not in years but in decades. This critical node is recognized on the institutional side as well. By a national export-control measure effective 1 September 2023, the Government of the Netherlands made certain advanced lithography systems subject to licensing, 315 and on 6 September 2024 expanded the scope of that measure (effective the following day). The content of the measure is not prohibition but individual licensing; the point is that a structure in which the movement of the equipment passes through a governmental determination was institutionalized. 11.2.2 Particular Manufacturing Sites Foundry capacity for advanced logic is agglomerated within a geographically narrow range. The mechanism of concentration partially overlaps that of equipment, but the weights differ. What is dominant here is yield learning. Even with identical designs and identical equipment, the rate of good product actually obtained is determined by the accumulation of fine adjustments to process conditions, and those adjustments are accumulated at the site concerned. The same structure that Section 10 discussed as the condition for the subsistence of the Transformation Model — "complementary assets that the producer cannot easily replicate" — operates here at the level of the manufacturing site. In addition, the relationship of co-design with customers forms site-specific assets. Because the design side lays out circuits on the premise of the process characteristics of that site, changing site is equivalent to redoing the design. The essence of the difficulty of dissolution lies in the fact that equipment can be transferred but learning cannot. Even where the same firm builds a new site in another country, the yield during the ramp-up period does not reach the level of the existing site. This gap may narrow within a few years, but for those few years the existing site is not substituted. Geographical dispersion of sites may therefore be proceeding, and the switching time still does not fall to zero. Here too indispensability attaches not to the state but to the site, and the state holds it indirectly through permitting, export control and investment screening. 11.2.3 High-Bandwidth Memory High-bandwidth memory has occupied the position of a bottleneck since 2023 as the input that rate-limits accelerator performance (Sections 5 and 8). There are in substance three suppliers, which is a looser concentration than in equipment or advanced logic. That indispensability is nevertheless high is because the demand side cannot switch items in the short run. Accelerator design presupposes the bandwidth and packaging scheme of the memory, so a change of supplier entails a change of product generation. That is, the existence of three suppliers and the ability to switch to a second supplier at an arbitrary point in time are two different things. This instance also shows that indispensability is layered through jurisdictional authority. By a rule of 2 December 2024, the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S. Department of Commerce made high-bandwidth memory whose bandwidth density exceeds a specified threshold subject to country-based controls, and at the same time extended the foreign direct product rule so that controls reached equipment and articles incorporating semiconductors manufactured using U.S.-origin equipment (CSIS, 2024). Under this struc‐ 316 ture, the country in which the firm holding a critical node is located is not necessarily the actor that determines the exercise of that critical node. The holding of indispensability and the right to exercise it may be separated — this is, seen from the supply side, the counterpart of the point Section 15 stated as a consequence of cross-axis transition, namely that "the dispersion of procurement must be measured by the number of jurisdictions with authority". 11.2.4 Minerals and Refining For minerals, it has repeatedly been confirmed that concentration arises in the refining and separation processes rather than in extraction. The October 2025 analysis of the International Energy Agency reports that for 19 of 20 major strategic minerals the refining share of a single country reaches an average of 70%, that for the separation and refining of rare earths it is approximately 91%, and that for the manufacture of sintered permanent magnets it is approximately 94% (IEA, 2025b). Since extraction is governed by geology while refining is governed by investment, this asymmetry requires explanation. There are three mechanisms. First, counter-cyclical investment. Refining is capital-intensive while product prices are highly volatile, and few actors are able to sustain new investment through low-price phases. Facilities in other regions exit during periods of depressed prices, and re-entry does not arrive in time during recovery. Second, differences in the degree to which externalities are internalized. Separation processes carry large costs of environmental management, and where the level of that cost differs by jurisdiction, activity concentrates in the jurisdictions where it is lower. Third, the accumulation of skill and process knowledge: the recovery rate of separation processes depends in substantial part on operating skill rather than on the configuration of equipment. None of the three mechanisms dissolves immediately upon a reversal of investment decisions. The construction and ramp-up of new separation facilities takes years, and supply during that interval depends on existing facilities. On the institutional side, a stepwise expansion of export licensing has been observed. The covered items expanded through gallium and germanium (July 2023), graphite (October 2023), antimony and superhard materials (August 2024), tungsten and tellurium (February 2025), and medium and heavy rare earths (April 2025), and on 9 October 2025 a series of public notices broadened both the covered items and the scope of application (Global Trade Alert, 2025). What matters here from the standpoint of this section is what followed. On 7 November 2025, several notices dated 9 October of the same year were suspended for a period running to 10 November 2026, and on 9 November certain provisions of a notice dated 3 December 2024 were suspended until 27 November 2026. On the other hand, the prohibitions relating to military end-use and the controls on other items introduced in 2025 remain in force (Pillsbury, 2025). What was suspended was the measure, not the legal framework that makes the measure possible. This fact carries decisive significance for the paradox of exercise discussed in Section 11.6 — indispensability that is held but not exercised does not depreciate. 317 11.2.5 Cooling Water and Siting The siting of computational infrastructure is determined by a composite of physical conditions: the point of connection to the electricity network, water rights, land, and climate. This section rereads from the standpoint of leverage the physical constraints treated in Section 13. The interconnection queue in the United States has reached approximately 2,300 GW (approximately twice the installed generating capacity), the median time from application to commencement of operation exceeds four years, and of the capacity that applied between 2000 and 2019 only 13% reached commencement of operation (LBNL, 2025). In Ireland, data centres have come to account for more than 20% of electricity consumption, and restrictions on new connections were introduced. These facts are ordinarily described as supply constraints. The same facts, however, mean that the permitting of connection and siting is in substance a right of allocation. What distinguishes this source from the other five is that concentration arises not from technical factors but from geography and law. Neither economies of scale nor learning effects operate. That it is nevertheless hard to dissolve follows from the difference in orders of magnitude between the time constant of network reinforcement, which is five to ten years, and the time constant of accelerator procurement, which is a matter of months (Sections 13 and 15). This asymmetry of time constants makes the indispensability that attaches to siting insoluble in the short run. Here too indispensability attaches not to the state but to the location, and the state holds it only through permitting. This structure connects directly to the third function of Proposition 28 (Section 11.7). 11.2.6 The Routes of Submarine Cables The physical layer of international communications is readily neglected in discussions of leverage. According to the announcement made when the International Telecommunication Union and the International Cable Protection Committee established the International Advisory Body for Submarine Cable Resilience on 29 November 2024, submarine cables carry more than 99% of international data exchange, between 150 and 200 faults occur worldwide each year, and approximately three repairs are carried out per week (ITU & ICPC, 2024). Most faults are due to incidental human activity such as fishing and anchoring, to natural disasters, to abrasion, and to equipment failure. The mechanism of concentration is twofold. First, the geographical convergence of routes. Intercontinental routes converge into limited corridors determined by straits, water depth and terrain, and the siting of landing stations likewise gathers at a limited number of coastal points. Second, the concentration of the capacity to lay and repair. The number of cable-laying and repair vessels, and the skill of the crews needed to operate them, are limited worldwide, and there is an upper bound on the capacity to handle simultaneous multiple faults. The difficulty of dissolution lies in the fact that laying an alternative route takes years from plan to entry into service and the scale of investment is not small, and in addition that repair capacity itself constitutes a separate bottleneck. That 318 is, if routes are increased without an increase in repair capacity, the restoration time of the system as a whole does not shorten. The placement of this source requires care. What a state on the route of a submarine cable holds is not the capacity to sever, but the permitting and the practice relating to landing, protection and repair. The indispensability here therefore appears less as an instrument of exercise than as the function of physical security discussed in Section 11.7. This paper does not enter into inference about the possibility of severance, and confines itself to the level of observable fact: the frequency of faults and the capacity to repair. 11.2.7 The Mechanisms Common to the Six Sources Read across the six sources above, the mechanisms that generate concentration and impede its dissolution can be organized into five kinds. Economies of scale (where the minimum efficient scale approaches the size of the market, the number of suppliers is structurally small); learning effects (because the rate of improvement of the first mover exceeds that of later entrants, an initial gap widens over time); capital specificity (the surrounding supply network and the designs of customers are optimized in a form specific to the supplier concerned, so that switching demands the reconstruction of the system as a whole); the physical conditions of siting (immovable conditions — geology, terrain, water, the electricity network — select the place); and the accumulation of skill (undocumented operating knowledge accumulates in proportion to years of operation and cannot be compressed with money). Of the five mechanisms, only the first can be shortened by the injection of funds. The second and the fifth are functions of time, the third requires coordination across the whole system, and the fourth is immovable. The durability of indispensability can therefore be predicted from which mechanism supports the critical node in question. A critical node supported by economies of scale alone dissolves within a few years if sufficient capital is injected from outside. A critical node supported by learning effects and skill does not dissolve through the injection of capital and requires the accumulation of years of operation. This distinction is used both in the discussion of the durability of the components of desirability in the next subsection and in the discussion of the speed at which the paradox of exercise operates in Section 11.6. 11.3 The Sources of Desirability Desirability is the degree to which other states voluntarily wish to engage with the state concerned. Definition 15 gives five sources: market, rules, technology, capital and trust. These are discussed in turn below, and for the last of them, trust, a definition and a proposition are set out. 319 11.3.1 Market Size The mechanism by which market size generates desirability looks simple but carries many conditions. More important than the bare proposition that a large market is attractive is that the market be inelastic — that is, that suppliers not hold exit from that market as an option. In a market from which exit is possible, a supplier on which conditions are imposed can avoid those conditions by exiting, and market size is not converted into bargaining power. In a market from which exit is impossible, the conditions must be accepted. It is for this reason that Bradford (2020), alongside market size, listed the inelasticity of the targets as a condition for the extraterritorial diffusion of regulation. Market size is also a precondition for the other components of desirability. Rules take effect when the market is large, and capital takes effect when the market is in prospect as a destination for investment. In this sense market size operates less as an independent component than as a multiplier on the other components. 11.3.2 Rules and Standards — The Creation of Desirability Through Regulatory Power The second source of desirability is rules and standards. The core of the Brussels effect as formalized by Bradford (2020) is that the structure "if you wish to do business in this jurisdiction's market, follow this jurisdiction's rules" creates a position on the value chain without production. There are two channels of diffusion. The de facto effect arises where multinational firms, avoiding the cost of dividing products and services by jurisdiction, align their worldwide operations with the standard of the most stringent jurisdiction. The de jure effect arises where other jurisdictions legislate in emulation of the rule concerned. Of the five conditions — market size, regulatory capacity, stringent standards, inelasticity of the targets and non-divisibility — the last, non-divisibility, governs whether the de facto effect succeeds. For goods that are easy to divide, firms prepare different specifications by jurisdiction, and no diffusion occurs. Whether these five conditions are satisfied for AI is academically contested. Those who answer affirmatively argue that because requirements for risk management, transparency and documentation reach into the internal structure of the product, the cost of division is high (Siegmann & Anderljung, 2022). Sceptics point to the fact that the modes in which models are supplied permit division by jurisdiction, that the industrial base within the territory is thin, and that competition among norms arises where several jurisdictions advance different regulations at the same time. Just as Section 14 treated this in its profile of the EU as an unsettled empirical question, this section too makes no determination. What this section asserts is that the position of writing rules is located within the interior of the theory as a source of desirability, not that any particular rule is in fact diffusing. Rules and standards belong among the more durable components of desirability. The reason is that the investment made in order to comply is sunk on the receiving side. The docu‐

mentation systems, testing procedures and internal controls constructed in order to conform to the requirements of one jurisdiction can be carried over only partially when transferred to another. The further compliance proceeds, therefore, the higher the switching cost rises, and desirability becomes self-reinforcing. This mechanism runs in exactly the opposite direction to the paradox of the exercise of indispensability discussed in Section 11.6 — rules grow stronger the more they are applied, and chokepoints grow weaker the more they are exercised. 11.3.3 Capital Capital is the third source of desirability. As scenario [C] of Section 15 argued, the supply of capital may open a route to moving upstream through the construction of computational infrastructure. Seen from the side that provides the capital, this is a ground for being sought out for engagement. From the standpoint of this section, however, a limitation must be placed on the range of what capital can acquire. What capital can buy is engagement, not indispensability. As decomposed in Section 11.2, of the five mechanisms that support indispensability only economies of scale can be shortened with capital; learning effects, capital specificity, siting and skill are none of them acquired immediately through the injection of funds. The acquisition of desirability through capital is therefore fast, while the acquisition of indispensability through capital is slow. This difference in speed is a rereading, from the side of leverage, of the divergence that Section 15 discussed as "the divergence between the ladder and the drilling rights". 11.3.4 Technology Technology is the fourth source of desirability, and denotes the structure in which the provision of capability itself becomes an inducement to engagement. In recent years, instances in which this structure has been explicitly designed by a state have been observed. In the United States, Executive Order 14320 of 23 July 2025 set out the promotion of exports of the American AI technology stack, and in implementation of it the American AI Exports Program was published in the Federal Register on 28 October 2025. The programme solicits from industry-led consortia "full-stack export packages" integrating five elements — infrastructure (AI-optimized hardware, data centres, cloud, networks), data systems, models, security and applications — and gives priority in public finance and diplomatic support to the packages selected (Federal Register, 2025). This paper does not evaluate the merits of this policy. Two things are to be described from the standpoint of the theory. First, packaging raises desirability and at the same time lengthens the switching time on the receiving side — the more the five elements are integrated, the harder it becomes later to replace only a part of them with another supplier. That is, what is supplied as desirability may, with the passage of time, turn into indispensability as seen from the counterparty's side. Second, this turn is, for the receiving side, an expansion of exposure (Definition 4, Section 13), and whether it turns into dependence is a function of the preparation of alternative procedures. For readers in 321 middle powers, receipt of a full stack is at once the acquisition of engagement and a design problem in switching exercises (Definition 6(iii), Section 13). 11.3.5 Trust — The Institutions That Govern the Depth of Deployment The fifth source of desirability is trust. This paper defines it not as an affective reputation but as an observable set of institutions. Definition 17 (Trust Infrastructure) Trust infrastructure denotes the totality of the institutions that, with respect to damage arising from acts performed using the outputs of AI, determine in advance where responsibility lies, compensate the damage, and have conformity certified by a third party, and consists of three elements: (i) liability-allocation rules (legal regime), (ii) conformity assessment and certification, and (iii) insurance and compensation. Trust infrastructure governs, independently of AI capability itself, the depth to which AI can be deployed in the jurisdiction concerned. The relation among the three elements is sequential. Unless liability-allocation rules are settled, conformity assessment cannot specify what conformity it is certifying. Unless conformity assessment is established, insurance has no basis on which to underwrite. Unless insurance is established, the actors able to bear the possibility of damage are few, and deployment is confined to uses in which damage can be absorbed out of one's own resources. From this sequence the following proposition is derived. Proposition 25 (The Priority of Trust Infrastructure) The depth of AI deployment in regulated sectors (medicine, finance, transport, public procurement, critical infrastructure) has its upper bound set by the level of development of the trust infrastructure (Definition 17) of the jurisdiction concerned. Even where access to capability is equal, in jurisdictions that lack liability-allocation rules, conformity assessment and insurance, deployment remains in peripheral tasks in which responsibility is unlikely to be called upon and does not reach the critical processes. Trust infrastructure is therefore a condition prior to both the depth of utilization (Proposition 5) and the margin of transformation (the institutional embeddedness of Proposition 4). Falsification condition If it is observed that, in a jurisdiction whose trust infrastructure is at a low level of development, AI deployment into the critical processes of regulated sectors proceeds to the same degree as in other jurisdictions with equivalent access to capability, this proposition is rejected. The mechanism of Proposition 25 may be made explicit. The decision whether to incorporate AI into critical processes in a regulated sector is rate-limited not by the magnitude 322 of expected benefit but by the attributability of worst-case loss. Decision-makers — the administrator of a hospital, the director of a financial institution, the safety officer of a transport operator, the officer responsible for public procurement — cannot decide on an expected-value calculation that benefit exceeds loss. Where it is not settled in advance who bears responsibility when damage occurs, the decision-maker bears the possibility that responsibility will be attributed to himself, and the most certain way to avoid that burden is to confine the uses of AI to peripheral tasks in which responsibility is unlikely to be called upon. Deployment therefore does not deepen even as capability improves. The upper bound of the depth of deployment is given by institutions, not by capability. This mechanism places an upper bound on the compounding structure of utilization stated by Proposition 5 (Section 7). At the stage where the depth of utilization is shallow, the measured productivity effect is small, and the J-curve structure in which acceleration follows once complementary investment passes a critical point presupposes that the path of deepening is institutionally open. In a jurisdiction that lacks trust infrastructure, however far complementary investment proceeds, the region of depth constituted by the critical processes of regulated sectors cannot be reached. At the same time, this mechanism also acts on (c), institutional embeddedness, in Proposition 4 (Section 7). The number of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations and liability-assumption contracts that a given application holds can take a positive value only in jurisdictions where those institutions exist in the first place. Trust infrastructure is prior both to the upper bound of utilization and to the complementary assets of transformation. This is the content of the phrase "a condition prior to both" in Proposition 25. From this the position of trust as a component of desirability follows. A jurisdiction that has put liability allocation, conformity assessment and insurance in place first holds value as a place where the deployment of AI in regulated sectors is actually possible, even if it is inferior in the production of capability itself. Regulated sectors are at once the domains in which applications of AI may carry the highest value added and the domains that carry the deepest institutional barriers. A jurisdiction able to offer a route across that barrier becomes an object with which producers of capability wish to engage — for producers need places in which to deploy their capability in deep uses, and such places are made only by institutions. That the development of the three elements is not synchronized appears as an observable set of events. In the case of the EU, as to element (ii), the European Commission adopted standardization request C(2023)3215 on 22 May 2023 with an initial deadline of 30 April 2025, but that deadline was not met, and it has repeatedly been reported that work on harmonized standards is expected to continue up to a point close to the date of application of the requirements for high-risk domains. As to element (i), the proposal for an AI Liability Directive of 28 September 2022 was marked for withdrawal in the Commission work programme for 2025 and was formally withdrawn by notice in the Official Journal of 6 October 2025 (European Parliament, 2025). Separately, revision of the framework on product liability is proceeding. What this course of events shows is that the existence of a 323 comprehensive AI regulation and the presence of all three elements of Definition 17 are different things. The enactment of a regulation gives the frame of element (ii), but the harmonized standards and the practice of conformity assessment that give content to that frame, and the settlement of the allocation of liability under element (i), require a separate institutional process. This paper presents this course of events not as an evaluation of any particular jurisdiction, but as a description of the fact that the three elements of trust infrastructure have independent time constants. This problem of time constants is the general form of the problem of the ratio between the speed of technical change and the speed of institutional decision that was treated by the half-life of the verification anchor (Definition 9, Proposition 9, Section 9), and this paper formalizes it separately as Proposition 26. As to element (iii), insurance, a chicken-and-egg structure requires explicit statement. For insurance to underwrite, statistics on the frequency and scale of damage are needed; for statistics to accumulate, deployment is needed; and for deployment, insurance is needed. What breaks this circle from outside is element (i) — if the location of responsibility is settled in advance by law, insurance can specify the object of underwriting, and the absence of statistics can be handled provisionally by a conservative setting of premium rates. Conversely, where the location of responsibility is not settled, insurance cannot delimit the object of underwriting at all, and the difficulty cannot be handled by the setting of rates. The sequence of the three elements therefore implies that element (i) is the point of departure. For a jurisdiction that aims at developing trust infrastructure, this implication serves as a design guideline concerning order (Appendix G). Finally, one channel common to the five components may be announced in advance. The sources of desirability discussed to this point have been described component by component — market, rules, technology, capital, trust — each as an independent ground. Actual desirability, however, is in some cases formed less by components acting singly than by several components being carried into an external jurisdiction as a bundle. Where one jurisdiction transfers to another, as a single whole and for a particular field of operations, access to capability, the design of the incorporation into business processes, the arrangements for the allocation of liability, the certification of conformity, and the human capability that carries out operation and verification, the receiving side comes to arrange business processes, contracts, supervisory procedures and training conformed to that system, and engagement with the jurisdiction concerned changes from a preference into a premise. This paper formalizes this form in Section 12 as Definition 20 (Export of Integrated Systems), and discusses there both that it is a channel by which desirability is formed and which jurisdictions can take that channel (Proposition 39). What should be confirmed here is that the duality of trust infrastructure stated in this subsection — that it is at once a condition governing the depth of deployment within its own jurisdiction and possibly also an asset transferable to other jurisdictions — constitutes the economic foundation of that channel. The details are deferred to Sections 12.2 and 12.3. 324 Two disciplines concerning this channel should be set out in advance. First, it does not add a sixth source to the desirability of Definition 15. What constitutes the transferred bundle are the components already enumerated in this subsection — technology (capability and the design of business processes), trust (the allocation of liability and the certification of conformity), and the human capability that carries them — and what is new is not the source but the form, namely that the components are supplied as a bundle rather than singly. Second, whether this channel is available is determined not by the will of a jurisdiction but by structure. As Section 12 formalizes in Proposition 39, where a system is inseparably bound to the legal institutions and practices proper to its own jurisdiction, that system cannot be transferred to another jurisdiction however excellent it may be. Only jurisdictions in which, for the field concerned, the binding between system and institutions is loose can therefore take this channel as a means of raising desirability. A high level in the five components enumerated in this subsection does not guarantee this condition. The implications this channel carries for the vulnerabilities of the quadrants may also be announced in advance. Section 11.5.2 derives the characteristic vulnerability of each quadrant as the obverse of its source of leverage. The second vulnerability of the Normative– Market Type — that rules can impose conditions but cannot bring capability into the territory — takes a different form with respect to the channel of the export of integrated systems. The transfer of a system is not an act of imposing conditions but an act of conferring a gain on the receiving side, and it therefore does not induce the avoidance behaviour of exit outside the territory (the condition of inelasticity that Section 11.3.1 stated with respect to rules does not apply in the same form to this channel). On the other hand, this channel requires a premise that rules do not — that a transferable system be actually in operation within one's own jurisdiction and that the record of that operation be held. Rules come into being by enactment; a system comes into being only by operation. In this respect the two sources of desirability differ in the kind of accumulation they demand. 11.4 Resolving the M4 Problem — Not Exclusion but Recovery The introduction of this section resolves the boundary of the framework that Section 6 made explicit in Definition 3. The note to Definition 3 stated the following: the position that obtains value by supplying the rules and the verification for the trading and use of a resource, without depending on production, transformation or utilization of that resource (standard setting, conformity assessment, certification), lies outside the domain of quantification of that definition. The ground the note gave was that the source of value lies not in a relation to a general-purpose input but in the constraint of the behaviour of other actors. The note then made explicit, as a matter for future work, the possibility of extending the framework by treating this position as a fourth value model (M4, a disciplining type). This exclusion may nevertheless appear as a gap in the framework — for the objection arises at once that if standard-setting power, a channel of value 325 capture that is actually in operation, falls outside the theory, then the nine cells are incomplete as a device for describing the position of states. This section resolves that. The form of the resolution is the introduction of a leverage axis rather than an extension of the M axis, and it is a recovery rather than a retraction of the exclusion. The argument is set out in four steps. First step. The ground for the exclusion itself specified where this position belongs. What the note to Definition 3 gave as the ground for exclusion was that "the source of value lies in the constraint of the behaviour of other actors". Yet the power to constrain the behaviour of other actors is precisely what Definition 15 defines as geoeconomic leverage. Indispensability constrains behaviour by imposing costs on other actors that attempt to bypass; desirability constrains behaviour by requiring conformity to conditions from other actors that wish to engage. That is, the very reason the note gave for saying that this position lies "outside the nine cells" was a description of the fact that it lies on the second axis. The exclusion was not an error; it was a correct judgement in that it declined to force a variable with a different domain of quantification into the nine cells. What was missing was an axis to receive what had not been forced in. This section supplies that axis. Second step. Adding a fourth value to the M axis entails the destruction of the principle of division. The three values of the M axis are defined as the three modes of relation to a general-purpose input — producing it, transforming it, utilizing it. This is an exhaustive division based on a single principle of division. In relation to a given input, an actor either brings it into being, receives and processes it, or receives and uses it, and there is no other mode. The position of writing rules has no value under this principle of division — not because an actor that writes rules neither produces nor transforms nor utilizes the input concerned, but because it obtains value in a relation other than the relation to the input. To place M4 here would be to create a series — production, transformation, utilization, discipline — in which the principle of division differs between the first three and the fourth. This is a confusion of categories and loses consistency as a classification. The note in Section 6 used the strong phrase "outside the domain of quantification" in reflection of this requirement of consistency. Third step. Only placement on the leverage axis yields testable consequences. If the position of writing rules is placed as a component of desirability, three predictions follow. (a) This position is distributed independently of position on the nine cells — that is, a jurisdiction that writes rules may at the same time be of the Utilization Model, and may also be of the Resource-Producing Model (Proposition 22). (b) The value of this position is proportional to the magnitude of the cost that other actors incur in complying — if compliance is costless, rules may be written but do not constrain behaviour. (c) This position depreciates when the inelasticity of the market is lost — if the targeted actors can exit that market, rules do not constrain behaviour. All three predictions are observable and falsifiable. By contrast, if the position is placed as a fourth value model M4, these predictions do not follow. A value on the M axis describes only a relation to an input, and neither the cost 326 of compliance nor the inelasticity of the market is contained in the definition. The criterion of theoretical choice is not elegance but which arrangement generates more falsifiable consequences. By this criterion, placement on the leverage axis is selected. Fourth step. Dual coordinates express simultaneity naturally. If placed as M4, a state that writes rules either has no position anywhere on the nine cells or sits in a dedicated M4 cell. In reality, however, a jurisdiction that writes rules is at the same time positioned on the nine cells as a Utilization Model, and the depth of that utilization is governed by the rules it has itself written (Proposition 25). If dual coordinates are used — position on the nine cells and quadrant on the leverage 2×2 — this simultaneity raises no problem of expression. A given jurisdiction is described as standing at M3×C1/C2 on the nine cells and in a quadrant of high desirability on the leverage coordinate. This description loses neither the description of position nor the description of leverage. The country profiles of Section 14 adopt these dual coordinates from that point on. Two limitations attending the recovery should be made explicit. First, the recovery imposes a burden of measurement. Placement on the leverage axis requires that the value of the position of writing rules be measured as "the degree to which other actors must comply in order to obtain access to the market concerned". No method for estimating this cost of compliance is established. The costs of documentation, testing and internal control undertaken for conformity are buried in firms' internal costs and are difficult to recover from public information. This paper treats this measurement framework as provisional and acknowledges it as a limitation in Section 20. Second, the position of writing rules may straddle both desirability and indispensability. Where a product cannot be placed on the market without certification, the body that grants certification possesses indispensability in the sense that it would cause dysfunction to the counterparty were it bypassed. This straddling is not an inconsistency in the theory but a consequence of the fact that the two components may arise from the same institution. The same institution generates desirability when it operates as a condition of market access, and indispensability when it operates as a possibility of severing market access. This duality is one of the institutional sources of the complementarity of the two components at high levels discussed in Section 11.5. This section should be read together with the note to Definition 3 (Section 6.7) and with Section 20 (the declaration of what this paper does not treat). The note declares an exclusion from the nine-cell coordinate and Section 20 declares what this paper does not treat, but what this section treats is neither of those: it is the destination of what was excluded — the declaration of exclusion, the declaration of what is not treated, and the argument for recovery are three separate operations. 11.5 The Non-Identity of Position and Leverage The analysis to this point is now formalized as a proposition. 327 Proposition 22 (The Non-Identity of Position and Leverage) A state's position on the nine cells (Definition 3) and its geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15) are independent variables, and neither can be derived from the other. Position expresses the mode of value generation; leverage expresses power in negotiation. National strategy therefore has two objective functions — the capture of transformation value (the optimization of position) and resistance to changes of condition imposed from outside (the maximization of leverage) — and the two do not necessarily require the same policies. Furthermore, the relation between indispensability and desirability changes with level: where both are at low levels the two are substitutes (either one alone generates bargaining power), and where both are at high levels they are complements (a state that is both indispensable and sought after does not bear the cost of damaging trust when it exercises indispensability). Falsification condition If the level of geoeconomic leverage can be systematically predicted from position on the nine cells (if no variance in leverage remains after controlling for position), the claim of independence is rejected. If the relation between indispensability and desirability is constant irrespective of level, the claim concerning the shift from substitution to complementarity is rejected. 11.5.1 The Two Objective Functions The implication that the first part of Proposition 22 carries for practice concerns the ordering of policy priorities. The policies required by the optimization of position and the policies required by the maximization of leverage frequently differ. The formation of complementary assets (the four indicators of Proposition 4) serves the optimization of position, but does not of itself generate leverage — neither exclusive data endowment nor physical-interface intensity necessarily raises the cost to other states of bypassing the state concerned. Conversely, specialization in a critical node on the supply network generates leverage but does not guarantee the capture of transformation value — occupying a critical node and obtaining a thick margin at that node are two different things. This separation gives rise to a problem of resource allocation. Are finite fiscal resources, talent and electricity to be directed to the improvement of position or to the acquisition of leverage? This paper offers no general solution. What it offers is the structural observation that where a single "AI strategy" is designed without recognizing that these are two different objective functions, it is probable that neither objective will be achieved. The accumulation of upward transitions discussed in Section 15 is investment relating to position; the holding of critical nodes discussed in Section 11.2 is investment relating to leverage. Both are met from the same budget, but the measures of their results differ. Moreover, the two objective functions are not merely independent but frequently involve trade-offs. The exercise of leverage not only induces a search for alternatives and thereby depreciates indispensability itself (Proposition 23); it may also worsen, through changes 328 by the counterparty in the conditions of procurement and investment, the conditions on which position subsists — the stability of the procurement of inputs and access to markets. "Optimization of position" and "maximization of leverage" therefore cannot necessarily be maximized simultaneously, and a state's choice becomes not the search for a single optimum but the question of which point to select on the set of efficient combinations along which improvement in one entails sacrifice in the other. 11.5.2 The 2×2 Typology Dividing indispensability and desirability each into high and low yields four quadrants. A type name is given to each. The Structurally Indispensable Type (indispensability high / desirability high). A position that holds a critical node on the supply network and is at the same time an object with which other states wish to engage in respect of market, rules, technology, capital or trust. Because both components are simultaneously high, the complementarity discussed below operates. The Normative–Market Type (indispensability low / desirability high). A position that holds no physical critical node but constrains the behaviour of other states by market size and rules. The components of desirability discussed in Section 11.3, and rules and trust above all, are the central assets. The Bottleneck-Specialized Type (indispensability high / desirability low). A position that holds a particular critical node on the supply network but offers thin grounds for other states to wish to engage with it in respect of market, capital or technology. Leverage is concentrated at a single node, and the whole depends on the durability of that one node. The Dependent–Peripheral Type (indispensability low / desirability low). A position in which both components are low and there are no means of pushing back against changes of condition imposed from outside. The state that Section 15 treated as "the problem of the group of states fixed at the Utilization Model" is described on the nine-cell coordinate as fixation at M3×C1 and on the leverage coordinate as stagnation in this quadrant. The characteristic vulnerability of each quadrant is derived as the obverse of its source of leverage. The vulnerability of the Structurally Indispensable Type lies in its being subject most strongly to the paradox of exercise (Proposition 23) and in the fact that maintaining indispensability requires continuing cost. Of the five mechanisms discussed in Section 11.2, learning effects and the accumulation of skill are maintained only by the continuation of operation. If operation stops, accumulation stops. This is the counterpart in leverage of the structure whereby the sovereign minimum guarantee level subsists only as continuous construction (Proposition 8, Section 13). The Normative–Market Type has two vulnerabilities. First, because the effectiveness of rules depends on the inelasticity of the market, once technical and commercial conditions 329 are in place that allow targeted actors to exit outside the territory, rules may be written yet cease to constrain behaviour. Second, rules cannot compel supply — they can impose conditions, but they cannot bring capability into the territory. When Section 14 raised "whether regulation can compel supply" as an unsettled question, it was formalizing this vulnerability. The vulnerability of the Bottleneck-Specialized Type is the sharpest. Because leverage is concentrated at a single node, the whole of it is lost at the point at which a design-around succeeds. In addition, low desirability makes it difficult to obtain compensation by negotiation before exercise — since the counterparty has thin grounds for wishing to engage, there is little that can be offered in return for refraining from exercise. Furthermore, as was seen in Section 11.2.3, where the actor holding the critical node is subject to another jurisdictional authority, the holding of indispensability and the right to exercise it are separated, and the holder bears the consequence of exercise (depreciation through the inducement of a search for alternatives) without being able to participate in the decision to exercise. The vulnerability of the Dependent–Peripheral Type lies, beyond having no option but to accept changes of condition, in being most deeply affected by AI outage (Definition 4, Section 13). The multiplicative amplification of dependence, supplier concentration and outage correlation stated by Proposition 7 (Section 13) is maximized in actors that hold no alternative routes. Quadrants are not fixed attributes; if the levels of the components change, attribution changes too. Among the paths of movement, the one that Section 12 identifies as operating from the side of desirability is the export of integrated systems (Definition 20) — where, for a given field, a system of operation is transferred to an external jurisdiction and the receiving side arranges business processes, contracts and supervisory procedures conformed to that system, desirability alone rises with indispensability unchanged, and movement may occur from the Bottleneck-Specialized Type to the Structurally Indispensable Type, or from the Dependent–Peripheral Type to the Normative–Market Type. Conversely, the conditions on which a jurisdiction can take this channel (Proposition 39), and the temporal structure proper to such movement, are treated in Section 12. Table 17. The 2×2 typology of geoeconomic leverage — defining characteristics, sources, vulnerabilities, and relation to position on the nine cells Type Defining characteristic Source of leverage Characteristic vulnerability Relation to position on the nine cells Structurally Indispensable Type (indispensability high / Holds a critical node on the supply network and is sought out for engagement in respect of market, The holding of a chokepoint together with the simultaneous provision of the benefits of engagement. The two com‐ The paradox of exercise (Proposition 23) operates fastest here. Maintaining indispensability requires the continuation of May coincide with M1×C2 but need not. Where the critical node lies in manufacturing, equipment or materials, a jurisdiction may stand at M2 and

Type Defining characteristic Source of leverage Characteristic vulnerability Relation to position on the nine cells desirability high) rules, technology, capital or trust ponents operate as complements operation, and cost becomes permanent yet fall in this quadrant Normative– Market Type (indispensability low / desirability high) Holds no physical critical node but constrains the behaviour of other states through market size and rules Inelasticity of the market, rules and standards (the Brussels effect), trust infrastructure (Definition 17), capital Rules are hollowed out by the exit of targeted actors outside the territory. Rules can impose conditions but cannot compel supply The typical case stands at M3×C1/C2 while falling in this quadrant. The position treated by the note to Definition 3 in Section 6 is recovered here (Section 11.4) Bottleneck- Specialized Type (indispensability high / desirability low) Holds a particular critical node but offers thin grounds for engagement in respect of market, capital or technology The absence of alternative suppliers at a single critical node and a long switching time A successful designaround costs it the whole of its leverage. Compensation is hard to obtain by negotiation before exercise. Holding and the right of exercise may be separated (Section 11.2.3) M1×C1/C2 and M2×C2 are all possible. It cannot be discriminated from position — the core case of Proposition 22 Dependent– Peripheral Type (indispensability low / desirability low) Both components are low, and there are no means of pushing back against changes of condition Substantially absent. Engagement depends on the counterparty's choice Most affected by AI outage (Proposition 7). Downward transition (Proposition 15) proceeds passively Overlaps readily with fixation at M3×C1 but is not identical to it. A state with deep utilization may also remain in this quadrant 11.5.3 The Shift from Substitution to Complementarity The second part of Proposition 22 asserts that the relation between the two components changes with level. The mechanism of that claim may be made explicit. Substitution at low levels. For a state in which both components are low, bargaining power is close to zero. To escape this state, obtaining either one of the components suffices. Holding a single critical node yields, by itself, a means of pushing back against changes of condition. Alternatively, putting rules and trust infrastructure in place yields, by itself, grounds for being sought out for engagement. In this phase the two components function as substitutes for one another — the marginal value of obtaining one is greater the lower the level of the other. The cross-partial derivative is therefore negative. Complementarity at high levels. In a state in which both components are high, the relation reverses. The mechanism is as follows. The exercise of indispensability not only in‐ 331 duces a search for alternatives on the counterparty's side; it also transmits to third parties that are not the object of the exercise the information that the state concerned is "a counterparty that may unilaterally alter the terms of a transaction". This information reduces desirability — for among the grounds for wishing to engage, the component of predictability is impaired. That is, the exercise of indispensability carries a tax on desirability. In a state whose desirability is already high, however, the relative burden of that tax is small. Where the benefits of engagement are large, engagement continues to be preferred even after the decline in predictability is priced in. It is this structure to which Proposition 22 refers when it states that "a state that is both indispensable and sought after does not bear the cost of damaging trust when it exercises indispensability". Conversely, where a state with low desirability and high indispensability alone — the Bottleneck- Specialized Type — carries out an exercise, the counterparty has no benefits of engagement to lose and therefore has an incentive to commit all its resources to a search for alternatives. At high levels, then, desirability operates as a complementary good that raises the exercisability of indispensability, and the cross-partial derivative becomes positive. This shift is testable. As the falsification condition of Proposition 22 specifies, if it is observed that the relation between the two components is constant irrespective of level, the claim of a shift is rejected. Operationally, the design would construct proxy variables for indispensability (supplier concentration, estimates of switching time) and for desirability (market size, the extraterritorial reach of rules, the level of development of trust infrastructure), take the magnitude of the counterparty's investment in the search for alternatives after an event of exercise as the dependent variable, and estimate whether the sign of the interaction term between the two variables changes across bands of level. The data constraints are severe, but the design itself can be specified. 11.5.4 Dual Coordinates By the foregoing, states are described in dual coordinates. The first coordinate is position on the nine cells (M×C) and expresses the mode of value generation. The second coordinate is the quadrant on the leverage 2×2 and expresses power in negotiation. The independence asserted by Proposition 22 is the claim that the second coordinate cannot be derived from the first, and the converse holds as well. Both are therefore needed for the description of a state. The discipline governing statements about Tier C3 (the critical tier) may be confirmed here. C3 is an anticipatory category, unrealized as of the writing of this paper (Definition 2, Section 5), and every statement about leverage relating to Row C3 must be read as a conditional design argument. If C3 were to arrive, the allocation of the capability concerned would come under pressure to move into the framework of a nonproliferationtype regime (Proposition 2b, Section 5). In that phase, what could become sources of indispensability are the compute, electricity and facilities that Proposition 9 (Section 9) identified as the verification anchor, and these overlap with the physical chokepoints discussed 332 in Section 11.2. That is, the leverage axis may connect to the discussion of critical-tier governance. This connection, however, is a conditional proposition that does not operate unless the arrival of C3 is assumed, and this paper says nothing about that arrival. Figure 11. The indispensability × desirability 2×2 and the placement of major states and regions — vertical axis = desirability, horizontal axis = indispensability. The four quadrants are the Structurally Indispensable Type, the Normative–Market Type, the Bottleneck-Specialized Type and the Dependent– Peripheral Type. The arrows show attempts at movement between quadrants (moving upstream through capital, the creation of desirability through rules, negotiation over data sovereignty). This coordinate is a variable independent of position on the nine cells (Definition 3) (Proposition 22), and the quadrant cannot be derived from position. 11.6 The Paradox of Leverage Exercise Indispensability has a temporal structure unlike that of other assets. Definition 15, Proposition 22 Desirability Indispensability High Low Low High Normative–Market Type (indispensability low / desirability high) EU Structurally Indispensable Type (indispensability high / desirability high) United States / China Dependent–Peripheral Type (indispensability low / desirability low) Many middle powers Much of the Global South Bottleneck-Specialized Type (indispensability high / desirability low) Taiwan / Korea The Netherlands Acquisition of indispensability through capital and electricity Creation of desirability through rules Negotiation over data sovereignty Dotted arrows = attempts at movement to an adjacent quadrant. Each requires accumulation measured in years, and both cannot be pursued at once (Appendix G.5). This is a coordinate independent of position on the nine cells (Definition 3) (Proposition 22). The quadrants are not a ranking but a description of where the means of pushing back lie. Countries and regions are illustrative, not exhaustive (Section 13). 333 Proposition 23 (The Paradox of Leverage Exercise) Indispensability based on the holding of a chokepoint depreciates by being exercised. Exercise induces in the party affected a search for alternatives — the development of alternative sources of supply, the building up of inventories, design-around, and investment in domestic production — and to the degree that the search succeeds, the indispensability of the chokepoint concerned declines. Indispensability is therefore an asset that does not depreciate while it is merely held, and begins to depreciate from the moment it is exercised. This paradox gives the holding state an incentive to restrain the frequency and scope of exercise, but the restraint does not operate where security requirements outweigh economic incentives. Falsification condition If no increase in the affected party's investment in the search for alternatives is observed after the exercise of a chokepoint, or if the search for alternatives repeatedly fails and the concentration at the chokepoint concerned maintains its pre-exercise level, this proposition is rejected. It is also rejected if concentration declines at the same rate whether or not exercise occurs. 11.6.1 The Temporal Structure of the Asset The structure stated by Proposition 23 is the reverse of ordinary asset depreciation. Equipment wears with use and does not wear if unused. It nevertheless becomes obsolete merely by being held. Indispensability, by contrast, not only fails to depreciate while merely held but may appreciate as the counterparty's dependence deepens — the more the counterparty's designs are optimized on the premise of the critical node concerned, the longer the switching time becomes. From the moment of exercise, however, the counterparty's adaptive behaviour begins, and depreciation starts. This structure resembles a financial option, but differs in two respects. First, it does not vanish immediately upon exercise but declines gradually in accordance with the degree of success of the counterparty's search for alternatives — if the search fails, the depreciation is small. Second, from the point at which the possibility of exercise is recognized by the counterparty, partial depreciation may begin even before exercise. The counterparty does not wait for exercise before building up inventories and beginning to evaluate alternative sources of supply. Because this point strictly speaking exceeds the verbatim claim of Proposition 23 ("begins to depreciate from the moment it is exercised"), its treatment should be made explicit. This paper does not treat the manifestation of the possibility of exercise as a form of exercise. A search induced by anticipation is therefore described as an independent effect lying outside Proposition 23. That this distinction is imprecise means that the definition of "exercise" in Proposition 23 is coarse, a limitation acknowledged in Section 20. The suspension measures of November 2025 seen in Section 11.2.4 are an instance in which this temporal structure is confirmed from the institutional side. What was suspen‐ 334 ded was the measure, not the legal framework that makes the measure possible. A state in which the framework subsists while the measure is suspended is nothing other than indispensability that is held but not exercised. If the claim of Proposition 23 is correct, this state does not depreciate. On the other hand, the search for alternatives already induced during the period in which exercise occurred is not cancelled by the suspension. Suspension therefore stops depreciation but does not restore depreciation that has already occurred. This asymmetry shows the irreversibility carried by the decision to exercise. 11.6.2 The Four Forms of the Search for Alternatives and Their Time Constants The four forms of the search for alternatives listed by Proposition 23 differ greatly in their time constants. Building up inventories is the fastest and can be carried out within months, but because it is fixed at the capability level of the time of purchase, in domains where the frontier advances it is subject to the depreciation of stockpiles (Proposition 8, Section 13). Design-around means designing products to specifications that avoid a regulatory threshold, and takes from several quarters to about a year. The property proper to this form is that it can be nullified by the regulating side revising the threshold, so that a chase between design-around and threshold revision arises. The development of alternative sources of supply means establishing a route of procurement from other existing suppliers, and takes years where such suppliers exist and does not succeed where they do not. Investment in domestic production is the slowest: of the five mechanisms decomposed in Section 11.2.7, a critical node supported by economies of scale alone takes several years, while one supported by learning effects and skill takes decades. From this distribution of time constants the following prediction about the consequences of exercise follows. Exercise reliably induces searches with short time constants and raises the probability of inducing searches with long time constants. The more exercise is repeated, therefore, the more the centre of gravity of the search shifts from inventories and design-around towards investment in domestic production. A single exercise may be absorbed by building up inventories, but repeated exercise justifies a decision to domesticate production. This implies that the frequency of exercise acts non-linearly on the speed of depreciation. 11.6.3 Reading the Evolution of Export Controls as an Instance of the Paradox The policy sequence from 2022 to 2026 recorded in the evidence notes is read here as an instance of Proposition 23. For dates and content, reference is made to the detailed accounts in Sections 5 and 15; only the essentials are followed here, from the standpoint of depreciation. The rule of 7 October 2022 imposed licence requirements on the export of advanced computing chips, supercomputer end-uses and semiconductor manufacturing equipment, and introduced as performance thresholds a composite criterion of chip-to-chip interconnect bandwidth and computational performance. The first response to this exercise was 335 design-around — derivative products designed to fall below the thresholds were supplied to the covered countries. The time constant was approximately one year. The revision of 17 October 2023 abolished the interconnect-bandwidth criterion and changed to criteria of total processing performance and performance density, closing off the design-around by derivative products, and at the same time expanded the covered countries so as to address routing through third countries. That is, it was a response of threshold revision to design-around. Against it, derivative products with further-restrained performance were again designed. This is the second round of the chase. The allocation framework announced on 13 January 2025 presented a structure dividing the countries of the world into three tiers and bringing within the licensing regime not only advanced chips but also the transfer of the weights of advanced models. This stage, at which the scope of exercise expanded from items to the worldwide allocation of capability, can be read from the standpoint of Proposition 23 as a measure that broadened the object in which a search for alternatives is induced from the covered countries to the great majority of the countries of the world. The withdrawal of 13 May 2025 took place two days before entry into force, and the reason given was criticism of treating allied countries as second-class states. The withdrawal erased the general three-tier rule, but the controls directed at the covered countries under the 2022 and 2023 rules remained in force. In April 2025, notice was given that a licence would also be required for the performancerestrained versions of products that had until then been supplied to the covered countries, which amounted in effect to a halt of exports. The supplier disclosed a substantial charge in its quarterly accounts. In July 2025, the policy shifted and it was announced that licences for sales of the products concerned to the covered countries were expected to be granted. In August 2025, an agreement was reported under which licences would be obtained in exchange for the payment to the government of a fixed share of the revenue from sales to the covered countries, and the parties concerned also referred to its existence. In December 2025, a policy of approval on the same kind of terms was stated for a higher-performance generation of products, and in January 2026 the review policy shifted from presumptive denial to conditional case-by-case review. The state of affairs as of August 2026 displays the outcome of this sequence most clearly. Even with the supply side opened, under a structure in which the authorities on the demand side review imports case by case and require a showing of the reasons why a domestic alternative cannot be used, it is reported that a quantity amounting to approximately 13% of the allocation has been delivered to two firms, with the remainder awaiting approval on the importing side. That is, one tap has been opened while the other remains closed. Reading this sequence against Proposition 23 yields the following observations. First, each exercise reliably induced a search for alternatives — design-around, the building up of inventories, and investment in domestic production. On the side of the covered countries, an expansion of shipment plans for domestic accelerators has been reported, a strategy of 336 offsetting inferiority in single-chip performance through large-scale clustering and an advantage in electricity has been made public, and it is reported that guidance promoting the use of domestic chips in computational infrastructure built with public funds has been strengthened. The assessment that the mainstay of frontier-class training remains previously procured equipment is dominant, and that requires a reservation; but that investment in the search itself increased is observed. Second, the centre of gravity of the search shifted over time from forms with short time constants to forms with long time constants — the movement from design-around to investment in domestic production. This is consistent with the prediction derived in Section 11.6.2. Third, the emergence of import controls on the demand side is the institutionalized form of the results of the search. Once an institution that gives priority to the use of domestic alternatives is established, an opening on the supply side no longer determines allocation. The search induced by exercise has reached the stage at which it conditions the efficacy of exercise itself. What requires care here is that this reading does not imply the evaluation that "the exercise failed". Proposition 23 says nothing about whether exercise is warranted. What it says is that exercise consumes the value of the asset called indispensability. Consuming an asset in order to attain an objective may be rational if the value of the objective exceeds the value of the asset. This paper does not evaluate the policies of any state; it describes the temporal structure of an asset. 11.6.4 The Relation to Cross-Axis Transition in Section 15 — Two Aspects of the Same Phenomenon Section 15.4 read the same policy sequence as an instance of cross-axis transition: that is, as a record of the process (Proposition 16) in which the logic that disciplines the allocation of capability moves irreversibly from economics (markets, trade, competition policy) to security (export control, alliances, nonproliferation). This section has read the same sequence as the depreciation of indispensability. The two readings are not in contradiction. That they are not is made explicit below. The two speak about different variables. Cross-axis transition is a change in who decides allocation and on what basis; the paradox of exercise is a change in the magnitude of the power to decide. The former is a description of where the logic of allocation resides; the latter is a description of the value of an asset. That Section 15 concluded that "the sequence from 2022 to 2026 is not consistent in the mode of allocation, but rose monotonically in the degree to which variables other than price and quality determine allocation", and that this section concludes that "in the same sequence, each exercise induced a search for alternatives and depreciated indispensability", hold simultaneously. Furthermore, the two are coupled. The mechanism of coupling runs in two directions. The first direction is that cross-axis transition raises the frequency of exercise. In domains where the logic of allocation has moved to security, decisions to exercise are made on security requirements rather than on economic cost and benefit. The condition stated at the close of Proposition 23 — that "the restraint does not operate where security require‐ 337 ments outweigh economic incentives" — becomes the normal state in domains where cross-axis transition has been completed. The second direction is that depreciation lowers the effectiveness of cross-axis transition. The further indispensability depreciates, the smaller the degree to which allocation under the logic of security actually constrains the counterparty's capability. Allocation remains politicized, but the technical advantage that sustains politicization grows thin. Intervening in this coupling is a mechanism of separation between cost and decision. What directly bears the cost of depreciation is the firm holding the critical node — it loses customers, prompts the development of substitutes, and shrinks its long-term market. What decides on exercise is the state. Where the bearer of cost and the subject of decision are separated, the frequency of exercise is higher than where cost and decision lie with the same actor. This mechanism is contained within Proposition 23 — Proposition 23 states that the incentive to restrain is given to the holding state, but says nothing about who within the holding state faces that incentive. The separation between holding and the right of exercise seen in Section 11.2.3 deepens this mechanism by a further step. Where the firm holding the critical node is subject to the jurisdictional authority of a third country, the bearer of cost and the subject of decision differ even in jurisdiction. From the coupling of the two, a connection to the identification of scenarios in Section 16 follows. The persistence of S1 (Fragmentation) depends on the speed at which leverage depreciates. If depreciation is fast, the control measures needed to maintain fragmentation progressively lose effectiveness and pressure towards S2 (Diffusion) rises. If depreciation is slow, fragmentation becomes self-sustaining. The scale of investment in the search for alternatives and the trajectory of chokepoint concentration therefore function as leading indicators of the scenarios (Definition 14, Section 16). 11.6.5 Desirability Does Not Carry the Same Paradox At the close of this section, the asymmetry of the two components is made explicit. Desirability does not depreciate through exercise. Each application of a rule increases the compliance investment of the targeted actors, and that investment is sunk in a form specific to the jurisdiction concerned. As stated in Section 11.3.2, the further compliance proceeds, the higher the switching cost rises, and desirability becomes self-reinforcing. That is, whereas indispensability depreciates through exercise, desirability may appreciate through exercise. This does not mean that desirability cannot be lost. What differs is the mode in which it is lost. Desirability depreciates when the inelasticity of the market is lost — when targeted actors become able to exit that market, or when the relative size of that market contracts, rules may be written yet do not constrain behaviour. This depreciation proceeds without relation to exercise and arises from exogenous changes of condition. This asymmetry carries design implications for the composition of leverage. Indispensability diminishes when used; desirability does not diminish when used but diminishes 338 exogenously if left idle. Indispensability is therefore an asset to be conserved, and desirability an asset to be exercised continuously. To treat the two as a single "bargaining power" and place them under a single operating policy is to overlook this asymmetry. Here lies one of the reasons why Proposition 22 holds the two components without combining them. The asymmetry stated in this subsection is, however, no more than schematic. The mechanism here has the application of rules in view, and is shown only in the form that compliance investment is sunk — which forms of supply demand which investments of the receiving side, and how far those investments are specific to the system concerned, is not specified. This paper decomposes this mechanism in Section 12 with reference to one concrete form (the export of integrated systems, Definition 20) and formalizes it as Proposition 38. What is derived there is a stronger statement of the observation made in this subsection — the claim that indispensability and desirability carry opposite signs with respect to exercise — with the consequence that the two components demand opposite actions in service of the single objective of accumulating leverage. This limitation extends to the design implications of this subsection as well. The guideline that "desirability is an asset to be exercised continuously" does not become a guide to action unless the mode of exercise is specified. The application of rules is only one form of exercise, and the export of integrated systems treated in Section 12 is another. The two forms differ in the resources they demand, in the time constants on which they operate, and in the kind of investment they generate on the receiving side. This section has proceeded without introducing that distinction, because the concern of this section was with the static asymmetry of the two components. What changes once the distinction of forms is introduced is shown in Section 12. This subsection confines itself to noting the existence of this contrast; the decomposition of the mechanism, the connection to measurable consequences, and the examination of the conditions under which self-reinforcement decays are deferred to Section 12.5. What should be confirmed here is that although Proposition 23 is the central proposition of this section, it is a proposition that holds only for one of the two components of leverage. The leverage axis introduced by this section therefore remains, at this stage, a static coordinate of the levels of the two components and the attribution of quadrants; it acquires dynamic content only in Section 12. 11.7 Non-State Actors and the Residual Functions of the State The discussion to this point has described the bearer of leverage as the state. As was confirmed repeatedly in Section 11.2, however, what holds a critical node is in many cases a firm and a site. Moreover, domains actually exist in which private actors exceed states in the scale of compute, capital and engineers. There are tabulations indicating that the top three firms account for roughly two-thirds of the world cloud infrastructure market (approximately 30%, approximately 24% and approximately 13% respectively), and although 339 approximately 75% of the world's AI supercomputer performance is located in the United States (Pilz et al., 2025), much of it is held by private actors. Private AI investment in the United States in 2025 is reported at approximately 285.9 billion dollars (Stanford HAI, 2026). In this situation, what does the state retain? Proposition 28 (Non-State Actors and the Residual Functions of the State) In domains where the compute, capital and engineers held by private actors exceed those of the state, the functions that the state still supplies and for which no substitute exists converge on three: (i) legal finality (the final resolution of disputes and the determination of rights), (ii) physical security (the monopoly of coercive force within the territory), and (iii) the permitting of siting and resources (the right to allocate land, the electricity network, water and spectrum). The bargaining power of the state in such domains therefore derives not from the quantity of capability it holds but from the exercisability of these three functions. Where the state relinquishes negotiation through these three functions, the actor that sets the discipline in that domain passes to private actors. Falsification condition If, in domains where private actors exceed the state in capability, cases in which the state exercises bargaining power on a sustained basis through routes other than the three functions above are systematically observed, the claim of convergence is rejected. It is also rejected if cases in which exercise of the three functions fails to affect the setting of the discipline are repeatedly observed. The scope of the claim should be limited. Proposition 28 makes no large claim about the dissolution of sovereignty or the end of the inter-state system. What it claims is the description that in one limited domain — that in which the capability of private actors exceeds that of the state — the set of functions that the state supplies without possible substitute converges on three. All three are traditional core functions of the state, and the convergence is not the disappearance of the state's role but a concentration of that role. It is no more than a functional answer to the question of what remains in a domain where the state has lost its role as a holder of capability. 11.7.1 Legal Finality The points at issue around AI — the lawfulness of use for training, the attribution of damage arising from outputs, rights in data, the limits of contractual liability — are all in the end determined by courts and by legislation. Private arbitration and industry self-regulation depend on the agreement of the parties, and where agreement breaks down, enforcement returns to the coercive force of the state. This function is not substituted however much compute private actors hold. What legal finality refers to concretely can be shown as a typology. Powers in judicial procedure over data, facilities and records located within the territory; powers relating to priority use of facilities and circuits in emergencies; powers to order the suspension of a

business or a change in its conditions; and the jurisdiction to determine finally the attribution of rights and the bearing of damage — the typology of powers accompanied by coercive force that a jurisdiction holds corresponds to this. This paper confines itself to describing these as a typology and offers no evaluation of the content or the merits of specific statutes in particular jurisdictions (the editorial policy of Section 1). What matters within the framework of this section is that legal finality is the foundation of element (i), liability-allocation rules, of trust infrastructure (Definition 17). As argued in Section 11.3.5, the institutions that settle in advance where responsibility lies are the precondition for conformity assessment and insurance and govern the upper bound of the depth of deployment in regulated sectors. By exercising legal finality, therefore, a state at once determines the depth of deployment within its own territory and produces one component of desirability. This function is not merely an instrument of negotiation but a source of the state's own leverage. 11.7.2 Physical Security Computational infrastructure, landing stations, substation equipment and data centres are physical facilities, and their protection depends on the monopoly of coercive force within the territory. As seen in Section 11.2.6, between 150 and 200 faults occur on submarine cables each year and approximately three repairs are carried out per week (ITU & ICPC, 2024). The practice of repair is carried out by private operators, but access of repair vessels to sea areas, the protection of landing stations and the determination of priorities in the event of faults lie under the jurisdictional authority of the state. So long as there is dependence on the physical layer, this function does not pass to private actors. 11.7.3 The Permitting of Siting and Resources The third function carries the most direct implications for the analysis of this section. As stated in Section 11.2.5, a state of affairs in which the interconnection queue reaches approximately twice the installed capacity, the median time from application to commencement of operation exceeds four years, and the historical completion rate is 13% (LBNL, 2025) means that the permitting of connection and siting is in substance a right of allocation. The same holds for water rights, land and spectrum. Even where private actors hold capital and technology, the allocation of siting and resources is subject to the determination of the state. The importance of this function lies in the fact that, among the sources of indispensability decomposed in Section 11.2, the one based on the physical conditions of siting cannot be shortened with capital. The indispensability of equipment and manufacturing sites attaches to firms, but the indispensability of siting attaches to locations, and locations lie under the jurisdictional authority of the state. Even a state that is inferior in the production of capability may therefore hold bargaining power through the permitting of siting. This carries practical implications for middle powers — of the three constraints 341 formalized by Proposition 21 (Section 14), the energy constraint is at once a constraint and a source of leverage. 11.7.4 The Direct Supervision of Suppliers as a New Form A new institutional form has been observed that does not coincide completely with any of the three functions: in the financial sector, a framework placing third parties that provide critical services under the direct supervision of financial authorities. In the United Kingdom, under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2023, HM Treasury published designations on 10 July 2026, taking effect on 13 July, and four firms were designated. In the EU, the Digital Operational Resilience Act (Regulation (EU) 2022/2554) has applied in full since 17 January 2025, and a structure has been adopted under which critical ICT third-party providers are directly supervised by the European Supervisory Authorities (Section 13). This form lies between legal finality (the making and enforcement of regulation) and the permitting of siting and resources (the conditioning of business activity). It is a structure that brings technology suppliers outside regulated industries within the direct scope of regulation from the standpoint of the stability of the system as a whole, and is one route by which a state that holds no capability exercises discipline over private actors that do. The three functions of Proposition 28 are an ex post organization and carry no guarantee of exhaustiveness — a point acknowledged as a limitation in Section 20 — but this new form does not demand a fourth function outside the three, and can be read as an extension of the modes in which the existing functions are exercised. 11.7.5 The Forms of Relinquishment The close of Proposition 28 states that where a state relinquishes negotiation through the three functions, the actor that sets the discipline passes to private actors. Relinquishment does not necessarily appear as an explicit decision. It arises rather as the accumulation of individual choices. Granting siting and network connection unconditionally; leaving the allocation of liability to contracts between the parties; leaving the final resolution of disputes to courts or arbitration outside the territory — choices that may each be rational in isolation may, cumulatively, hollow out the substance of the three functions. The structure that scenario [C] of Section 15 discussed as "the grant of drilling rights" is a form of relinquishment of the third function. The extractive distortion formalized by Proposition 6b (Section 8) — a state in which the ratios of local value added, employment and inter-firm transactions are low relative to the quantities of tax relief, electricity, land and water granted — can be described as the result of exercising the right of allocation constituted by permitting without consideration. That is, extractive distortion is at once a problem of power on the side of capital and a problem of the design of negotiation on the side of the state. The empirical work that monitoring organizations have presented on the tax revenue forgone in attracting data centres and on the magnitude of subsidy per job created (Sections 8 and 13) is nothing other than a measurement of the consequences of that design. 342 11.8 The Institutional Treatment of Military and Dual-Use Questions The discipline of this subsection is stated at the outset. This subsection follows the same discipline as Section 9 and argues only at the level of institutions and governance. It does not enter at all into technical details of weapons, methods of attack, or evaluation of the military consequences of capability. It uses no rhetoric of exaggeration of capability or of the arousal of fear. Where Tier C3 (the critical tier) is mentioned, it reconfirms that C3 is an anticipatory category unrealized as of the writing of this paper (Definition 2, Section 5). What this subsection treats is confined to the question of what the structure whereby civilian transformation capability may be diverted to defence and intelligence uses brings about for the institutional variables of leverage and alliance relations. 11.8.1 Boundaries Drawn by End-Use and Rules Written by Item General purpose technologies possess three characteristics: pervasiveness, scope for continual improvement, and the inducement of complementary innovation (Bresnahan & Trajtenberg, 1995). Pervasiveness means that the uses of the technology are not limited in advance. The boundary between civilian and security uses is therefore drawn not by the nature of the technology but by end-use. Rules, however, cannot ascertain end-use at the moment of export. What is observable at the moment of export is the performance of an item, not its use. From this mismatch an institutional consequence follows. Controls on goods for which the boundary is drawn by end-use cannot but be written in terms of item-based criteria (performance thresholds), and item-based criteria necessarily draw in civilian uses. That export controls from 2022 onwards were written in terms of performance thresholds, and that those thresholds reached general-purpose computing products, is a consequence of this structure. If thresholds are set narrowly, the controls do not attain their object; if set broadly, civilian transactions come under control on a wide scale. This antinomy arises not from the skill or want of skill in the design of rules but from the nature of the object. Another attempt to institutionalize end-use criteria has also been observed. The recast of the EU dual-use regulation (Regulation (EU) 2021/821, in force from 9 September 2021) introduced a category directed at the end-use of cyber-surveillance items and extended catch-all controls under which a licensing obligation arises where the exporter is aware, or has grounds for suspecting, that the items may be put to a specified use (Covington, 2021). This structure supplements the limits of item-based criteria with end-use criteria, but because it places the subjective element of awareness on the exporter's side, it carries a separate problem in the predictability of enforcement. This paper does not determine which design is superior, and describes the fact that the two designs allocate different costs to different actors. 343 11.8.2 The Connection Between Civilian Capability and Security Procurement — A Record of Institutional Fact The structure in which producers of civilian frontier capability are at the same time suppliers under procurement in the security domain is recorded as institutional fact. On 14 July 2025, the Chief Digital and Artificial Intelligence Office of the U.S. Department of Defense concluded contracts with four firms with a ceiling of 200 million dollars each, and gave as their object the application of commercially available solutions to integrated capability efforts (DefenseScoop, 2025). What this paper draws from this fact is not an inference about the military significance of capability but the institutional observation that the relation between state and private actors discussed in Section 11.7 is reconstituted through procurement. Proposition 28 identified three residual functions of the state in domains where private actors exceed the state in capability. The formation of a procurement relationship shows that, in addition to these three functions, there exists a route by which the state relates to private actors as a customer. The position of customer, however, is not a "function supplied without possible substitute" in the sense of Proposition 28 — for the business of a private actor may continue even if the state ceases to procure. A procurement relationship therefore supplements the three functions of Proposition 28 but does not replace them. 11.8.3 The Interdependence of Leverage Generated by Capability Sharing Within Alliances Dual-use character also acts on the internal structure of alliance relations. The sharing of capability gives capability to the recipient and at the same time generates two effects. The first effect is that the recipient becomes subject to the jurisdictional authority of the supplier. As seen in Section 11.2.3, extraterritorial application of the foreign-directproduct- rule type may reach firms located in allied countries. The deeper the sharing relationship, the more the industry on the recipient's side comes to follow the rules of the supplier's jurisdiction. Under this structure, standing within an alliance guarantees access to capability and at the same time constrains the degrees of freedom of one's own industrial and export policy. What Section 8 listed as a failure mode of M2×C2, "the excessive surrender of policy autonomy", is described as an excessive acceptance of this constraint. The second effect is that the supplier too depends on the indispensability of the recipient. Of the six sources decomposed in Section 11.2, manufacturing equipment, manufacturing sites, high-bandwidth memory, and minerals and refining are not necessarily located in the same jurisdiction as the producer of frontier capability. A relationship of capability sharing is therefore not a one-directional subordination but a mutual securing of different kinds of indispensability. The producer provides capability and the recipient provides physical inputs. So long as this exchange holds, neither side readily chooses unilateral exercise. 344 This structure explains frictions observed within alliances. Alignment on export controls is sought for the maintenance of the alliance, but alignment imposes costs on the industry of the aligning side. Negotiation over the allocation of those costs is conducted as a comparison between the value of the capability shared and the value of the physical inputs provided. An alliance thus functions not only as a sharing of values but as a mutual securing of leverage. This reading does not evaluate alliances normatively; it is a device for describing negotiation within alliances under the framework of Proposition 22. 11.8.4 The Constraint of Institutional Time Constants The institutional difficulty proper to dual-use control lies in the ratio between the speed of change of the object and the speed of revision of the rules. Item-based criteria are written on the premise of the technical level at the time of enactment, but that level moves during the interval until the procedure for revision is completed. The problem that Section 9 formalized as the half-life of the verification anchor (Definition 9) — that because the compute required to attain any given level of capability declines with a short half-life, fixed thresholds based on quantity of computation lose effectiveness within a few years — operates in the same form for the performance thresholds of export controls. The revisions of thresholds observed between 2022 and 2023 can be read as an instance of that operation. The design implication derived from this structure is a pressure towards rules that determine procedures for revision rather than content. A structure that entrusts thresholds, technical annexes and conformity criteria to subordinate procedures capable of being updated without passing through the higher legislative process is an institutional response to the mismatch of time constants, and this paper formalizes it separately as Proposition 26. The same implication extends to element (ii), conformity assessment, of trust infrastructure seen in Section 11.3.5 — in domains where the time required to prepare harmonized standards exceeds the speed of change of the object technology, it is possible that the standards do not capture their object at the moment of completion. Dual-use control and conformity assessment differ in their objects but face the same problem of time constants. In closing this subsection, the discipline is reconfirmed. The four subsections above are confined to the description of institutions — export control, procurement, alliances and standards — and contain no evaluation of the military consequences of capability. The reason this paper places that limitation is that claims about the military consequences of capability are difficult to furnish with falsification conditions and are not compatible with the methodological discipline of this paper. This judgement rests on the same criterion as the declaration of explicit exclusions in Section 20. 11.9 Summary — The Move to Dual Coordinates The content of this section is summarized in five points. 345 First, the nine cells explain position but not leverage. Whether a state can push back against changes of condition imposed from outside is determined by a variable other than the mode of value generation. Definition 15 defined this variable as two components: indispensability (the cost and dysfunction that would arise were other states to attempt to bypass) and desirability (the degree to which other states voluntarily wish to engage). The former takes the loss of others as its unit and the latter the gain of others; they are powers running in opposite directions. Second, the sources of indispensability lie in physical chokepoints, and their concentration and persistence are explained by five mechanisms. These are economies of scale, learning effects, capital specificity, the physical conditions of siting, and the accumulation of skill. Of these, only the first can be shortened by the injection of capital; the other four are governed by time, coordination and geography. This decomposition supplies a tool for predicting the switching time for any given critical node. Third, the sources of desirability include trust, and trust can be defined as institutions. Definition 17 (trust infrastructure) consists of three elements — liability-allocation rules, conformity assessment and insurance — and Proposition 25 asserts that the level of their development sets the upper bound of the depth of deployment in regulated sectors. The mechanism lies in the fact that the decision to incorporate AI into critical processes is rate-limited not by expected benefit but by the attributability of worst-case loss. The upper bound of the depth of deployment is therefore given by institutions rather than by capability. This proposition identifies a condition prior both to the depth of utilization (Proposition 5) and to the complementary assets of transformation (the institutional embeddedness of Proposition 4). Fourth, the M4 problem has been resolved. The position of standard setting and conformity assessment that the note to Definition 3 in Section 6 excluded as outside the domain of quantification is not a fourth value model but leverage on the side of desirability. The property that the note gave as the ground of exclusion — that "the source of value lies in the constraint of the behaviour of other actors" — was precisely the content of the definition of leverage. Whereas the addition of a fourth value to the M axis breaks the principle of division, placement on the leverage axis generates three falsifiable consequences. This is therefore not a retraction of the exclusion but a recovery into the interior of the theory. Fifth, the two components differ in their mode of depreciation. Indispensability does not depreciate while it is held and begins to depreciate from the moment it is exercised (Proposition 23). Exercise induces four forms of search with differing time constants — building up inventories, design-around, the development of alternative sources of supply, and investment in domestic production — and repeated exercise shifts the centre of gravity of the search towards forms with longer time constants. The sequence of export controls from 2022 to 2026 is an instance of this structure, and the emergence of import controls on the demand side marks the stage at which the induced search conditions the efficacy of exercise itself. Desirability, on the other hand, does not depreciate through exercise 346 and is if anything self-reinforced by the sinking of compliance investment. Desirability is lost when the inelasticity of the market is lost exogenously. Indispensability is an asset to be conserved; desirability is an asset to be exercised continuously. On the fifth point, a limitation on the range this section can reach should be appended. What this section has described is the difference in the mode of depreciation of the two components, and that description is schematic on the side of desirability — it shows no more than the mechanism of the sinking of compliance investment, and does not specify which forms of supply demand which investments of the receiving side. Section 12 fills this gap, decomposing the mechanism with reference to the form of the export of integrated systems (Definition 20) into four conformity investments and connecting it to the measurable consequence of a rise in switching costs (Proposition 38). What is derived there is a strengthened form of the observation of this section — the claim that the two components carry opposite signs with respect to exercise — with the consequence that a strategy relying on indispensability and a strategy relying on desirability demand opposite actions in service of the single objective of accumulating leverage. That this section presented no single index composed from the two components was for reasons of measurement; Section 12 shows that there are theoretical reasons for not composing them. This connection also changes the standing of this section. What this section has supplied is a static coordinate of the levels of the two components and the attribution of quadrants, and as to how that coordinate moves over time, this section has stated only the depreciation on the side of indispensability (Proposition 23). The temporal development on the side of desirability — what accumulates desirability and what causes that accumulation to decay — is treated in Section 12. The leverage axis therefore acquires dynamic content only in Section 12, and the account in this section is the stage preceding it. In addition to these five points, this section has obtained two auxiliary conclusions. Proposition 28 identified three residual functions of the state in domains where the capability of private actors exceeds that of the state: legal finality, physical security, and the permitting of siting and resources. This identification implies that even a state inferior in the holding of capability may possess bargaining power, and at the same time that where negotiation through the three functions is relinquished, the actor that sets the discipline passes to private actors. Section 11.8, further, described at the institutional level that dualuse character necessarily broadens the scope of export controls by way of item-based criteria, and that capability sharing within alliances functions as a mutual securing of different kinds of indispensability. The bridge to Section 14. From this point on, each state and region is described by dual coordinates — position on the nine cells (M×C) and quadrant on the leverage 2×2 (indispensability × desirability). By the independence asserted in Proposition 22, neither can be derived from the other. Country profiles must therefore record both, and where the two do not coincide, it is that non-coincidence which best characterizes the structure of the state concerned. Section 15 treats how these two coordinates each move over time — the dynamics of cell transition, and the depreciation of indispensability through exercise. Sec‐ 347 tion 16 adds leverage-related observables (chokepoint concentration, investment in the search for alternatives) to the leading indicators of the world scenarios. The operational diagnostic procedure — an inventory of the critical nodes one's own state holds, estimation of switching times, assessment of the five components of desirability, inspection of the three elements of trust infrastructure, and the conditions required for movement to an adjacent quadrant — is separated out into Appendix G. That the measurement framework of this section is provisional, that the definition of "exercise" in Proposition 23 is coarse, and that the three functions of Proposition 28 are an ex post organization are all acknowledged as limitations of this paper in Section 20. 348 12. The AI Foundry Model — Export and Procurement of Integrated Systems Section 10 discussed the conditions under which the Transformation Model subsists at Tier C2, and Section 11 the structure of a state's power to push back against changes of condition imposed from outside. What the two sections have in common is the position of the vantage point. Both are written from the supplying side — what complementary assets protect a transformation margin, what critical nodes generate bargaining power. This section fills two gaps left by that bias of vantage point. The first gap lies within the theory of the supply side. Definition 3 (Section 6) defined M2 (the Transformation Model) as "the type that procures a resource from outside, adds value through transformation (processing, application, integration), and supplies it onward". This definition enumerates three modes of transformation while drawing no distinction among the forms of what is supplied. Is what is supplied onward capability itself, a product made using capability, or a system that makes capability operable? In the case of petroleum, this distinction did not arise — refined products were traded in physical units, and their form was unambiguous. In the case of AI, the distinction is decisive. What Section 10 called "the wall of integration cost" in fact depends on the form of supply itself, and unless the forms are distinguished it cannot be said which transformation margins withstand compression. The second gap lies outside the theory of the supply side. This paper possesses devices for the decision-making of the side that imports capability: the measurement of dependence and exposure (Definition 4, Section 13), the design of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6, Section 13), and its cost (Section 19). None of these, however, supplies a rule for choosing the mode of procurement itself. For a given operational domain, is the system to be constructed within one's own jurisdiction, is capability alone to be bought with integration performed in-house, or is a completed system to be received whole? This choice is a practical decision made every year in every sector of every jurisdiction, yet neither the measurement of dependence nor the design of a guarantee level contains a rule for it. The two gaps are the obverse and reverse of a single structure. To specify what the exporting side is selling is nothing other than to specify what the importing side is buying. This section therefore places the formalization of the supply side (Sections 12.1 to 12.5) and the formalization of the procurement side (Sections 12.6 to 12.8) within one section, and shows that both are described by the same variables. The theoretical apex of this section is Section 12.5, where the consequence is derived that the two components of leverage introduced in Section 11 carry opposite signs with respect to exercise. By this consequence the leverage axis of Section 11 acquires dynamic content for the first time. 349 This section further gives this configuration a name. The type of state that imports AI capability from outside, transforms it through the complementary assets, national brain capital and trust infrastructure of its own jurisdiction, and exports it onward as integrated systems, this paper calls the AI Foundry Model (Definition 21), and a state that adopts this type it calls an AI Foundry State. The name derives from a structural correspondence with the semiconductor foundry as a form of business, but the correspondence is limited. Section 12.1.6 sets out the definition and the discipline of usage, and Section 12.1.7 sets out the verdict on which elements of the analogy transfer. The verdict is given at the same time as the naming because this paper applies to its own naming the discipline of analogy (Proposition 1) that it imposed on itself in Section 3. The naming does not change the content of the argument of this section — the structures stated by Definition 20, Proposition 38, Proposition 39 and Proposition 40 are the same whether or not a name is given. What the naming changes is the ease with which that structure can be connected to other arguments, referred to, and named as an object of criticism. Throughout this section, no evaluation of any particular state or government is made. "Exporting state" and "importing state" are both terms denoting structural positions and do not signify attribution to any particular jurisdiction. It is usual for the same jurisdiction to stand on the exporting side in one domain and on the importing side in another. The types presented in Section 12.4 are not a classification of states but a description of combinations of conditions, and whether a given jurisdiction satisfies those conditions is an empirical question domain by domain. This section further handles, by formalizing them as propositions within the section itself, two theoretical holes that this configuration carries. The first hole is that this paper imposes two conflicting demands on one and the same system — Proposition 4 and Proposition 18 state that deep institutional embedding protects the transformation margin, while Proposition 39 requires, as a condition of export, separability from the institutions of one's own jurisdiction. The more deeply a system is embedded, the better the domestic margin is protected, but the portability needed for export is lost. Unless this contradiction is resolved, Definition 21 becomes an empty type denoting an unrealizable combination of conditions. Section 12.3.7 formalizes the condition of compatibility by means of Proposition 41. The second hole is a counterargument to the core verdict of Section 12.1.7 — that the position of an AI Foundry State rests on desirability rather than on indispensability. Where an integrated system has been deeply incorporated into the counterparty's jurisdiction, the switching cost may be comparable to the cost of porting design assets in semiconductors; does it not follow that indispensability is acquired in substance? Sections 12.5.6 to 12.5.8 respond by means of Proposition 42. Both holes are problems of consistency that can be assembled from the internal resources of this paper alone. To present, rather than conceal, a contradiction that has arisen within one's own system, and to handle it as a proposition, is the method this section adopts.

12.1 What Does the Transformation Model Export? What the Transformation Model may supply to the outside is distinguished into three forms. The criterion of distinction is how what is supplied exists on the receiving side — whether it exists as replicable information, as a physical unit, or as an operation embedded within the organizations and institutions of the receiving side. 12.1.1 (a) The Export of Capability The export of capability means supplying access to a model as such. The provision of inference through an application programming interface, the provision of weights, and the provision of fine-tuned models fall under this head. The economic character of this form has already been specified in Proposition 1 (Section 3), where the discipline of analogy was applied to the asymmetries with petroleum — a model is a non-rival good and the marginal cost of replication is close to zero. The export of capability therefore does not raise unit cost as scale expands, and bears almost no cost of geographical distance. These two properties are a strong advantage for the supplying side and at the same time, as is shown below, a weakness with respect to the retention of value. In the export of capability, what the receiving side receives is a device that generates outputs, not a design for how the outputs are to be used. To speak of the medical domain: providing a model that raises candidate findings from images is an export of capability, and the design of where in the clinical process that model is to be placed, who confirms its output, who bears responsibility when an error occurs, and what must be shown to the supervisory authority, has to be carried out by the receiving side itself. 12.1.2 (b) The Export of Products The export of products means supplying, in physical units, goods with AI capability built into them. Inspection equipment, industrial robots, vehicles, medical devices and measuring instruments fall under this head. This form has the highest continuity with the processing- trade model of the petroleum period, and is the region discussed as a structural correspondence in Section 10.2. Products have physical units, incur transport costs and tariffs, and give rise to a service life and a demand for maintenance. In the export of products, what the receiving side receives is a thing that performs a particular function. Services of installation and maintenance are often attached, but these are services for maintaining the function of the thing, not services that design the receiving side's business processes themselves. The equipment is placed within the existing processes of the factory, and the design of those processes is retained by the receiving side. 12.1.3 (c) The Export of Integrated Systems The third form is defined by this paper as follows. 351 Definition 20 (Export of Integrated Systems) The export of integrated systems means the transfer to an external jurisdiction of neither AI capability as such (access to a model) nor a product produced using AI capability, but the whole of the system that makes capability operable in a particular operational domain. The system consists of at least five elements: (i) access to capability, (ii) the design of the incorporation into the business processes of the domain concerned, (iii) the arrangements for the allocation of liability, (iv) the certification of conformity (the records and procedures of certification and audit), and (v) the transfer or continuing supply of the human capability that carries out operation and verification. The export of integrated systems is distinguished from the export of capability (replicable at close to zero marginal cost) and from the export of products (traded in physical units) in that it entails embedding into the institutions, operations and personnel of the receiving side. Four points about the construction of Definition 20 should be made explicit. First, the five elements may be traded separately, but the export of integrated systems denotes the case in which they are traded as a bundle. Selling access to capability alone is (a); selling equipment alone is (b). What Definition 20 denotes is the case in which (i) through (v) are supplied under a single group of contracts with the object of bringing the operational domain of the receiving side into working order. In this respect the export of integrated systems belongs to the lineage of turnkey contracting, long practised in the field of industrial plant, in which a single responsible party undertakes design, procurement and construction and hands over the facility in operating condition. As is shown below, however, integration in AI differs in that it is not completed on handover and includes continuing supply. Second, the disjunction "transfer or continuing supply" in (v) determines the temporal structure of this form. Where human capability is transferred, the receiving side becomes able over time to operate the system itself. Where it is continuously supplied, the receiving side goes on using the system without holding the capability to operate it. The former is a transfer of technology; the latter is a continuing provision of services. Even for the export of the same system, what remains on the receiving side differs fundamentally according to this choice. Section 12.7 discusses this branching. Third, the export of integrated systems includes parts that fall outside the ordinary usage of the word "export". Some of what is transferred does not physically cross a border — the design of business processes takes the form of documents and practical instruction, the arrangements for the allocation of liability take effect under the contract law of the receiving jurisdiction, and the certification of conformity is made to the authorities of the receiving side. How this is recorded in balance-of-payments statistics differs element by element (services, charges for the use of intellectual property, income on direct investment). This paper uses the word "export" to denote the structure in which the source of value lies in a system accumulated in a particular jurisdiction and value is realized by 352 that system being used in another jurisdiction; it asserts nothing about statistical classification. One point of English terminology should be fixed here: this paper renders the form as the export of integrated systems, and adopts neither "export of integration" (an unnatural construction, the export of an abstract noun) nor "systems export" (which collides with the existing vocabulary of infrastructure export). The term stands in direct relation to integration cost (Proposition 4, Section 7): what is exported is precisely the portion of value protected by that cost. Fourth, Definition 20 is a definition of form and contains no claim of superiority. Which of the three forms is to be preferred depends on the nature of the domain concerned and the endowment of the jurisdiction concerned. What is argued below is the structure that the three forms carry different resistance to compression, and that is not the claim that the export of integrated systems is always superior. 12.1.4 The Resistance of the Three Forms to Compression — An Explanation by Proposition 4 Proposition 4 (Section 7) stated that the producer of AI can internalize, by the route of standard inclusion in the next generation of models at close to zero marginal cost, that part of the value added of the application layer which reduces to general-purpose functions. The cost of internalizing the parts constituted by integration into business processes, regulatory compliance and the assumption of liability, by contrast, is not zero. What is structurally compressed is therefore the transformation margin that reduces to general-purpose functions, not the transformation margin protected by integration cost. This proposition is now applied to the three forms. (a) The export of capability is the most vulnerable to compression. What the export of capability supplies is, by definition, the function of generating the outputs of a model. To the degree that this function can be reduced to a standard function of a general-purpose foundation model, the consideration for that export converges on the price of the foundation model. The rapid decline in inference prices recorded in Section 5 can be read as evidence that this convergence is actually proceeding. The exporter of capability can retain value only where the capability concerned holds a portion that does not reduce to general-purpose functions — a portion trained on exclusive data, or a portion containing adaptation specific to a particular language or jurisdiction — but that portion corresponds, by definition, to exclusive data endowment and linguistic-contextual specificity among the four indicators of Proposition 4. That is, the export of capability is protected to the degree that it ceases to be a pure export of capability. (b) The export of products has intermediate resistance. For goods traded in physical units, the marginal cost of replication is not zero. Manufacture, transport, installation and maintenance all involve actual outlays and cannot be internalized by the producer through standard inclusion — the housing of an inspection instrument cannot be bundled into the next generation of a foundation model. This resistance corresponds to physicalinterface intensity among the four indicators of Proposition 4. The export of products, 353 however, has a vulnerability of its own. Where the AI-function portion built into a product reduces to general-purpose functions, the AI-derived part of the product's value added is compressed and what remains is the value added of the physical part. That is, the export of products does not necessarily retain the increment of value added due to AI, and may retain only the value added of the physical component. (c) The export of integrated systems is the most resistant to compression. The reason is that what the export of integrated systems supplies is the very fact of the five elements of Definition 20 being a bundle. The producer of a foundation model can supply (i) at close to zero marginal cost. But (ii), the design of the incorporation into business processes, requires practical knowledge of the operational domain concerned. (iii), the arrangements for the allocation of liability, requires the capability to design contracts effective under the legal regime of the receiving jurisdiction and the financial strength to assume the associated risk. (iv), the certification of conformity, requires the ability to present records and procedures in a form the regulator of the domain concerned will accept, together with a history of having actually operated them. (v), the human capability that carries out operation and verification, requires a stratum of people who have practised in the domain concerned over a long period. None of these four elements can be internalized by the route of standard inclusion in the next generation of models. To internalize them, the producer would itself have to become a practitioner in the operational domain concerned. Here lies the content of what Section 10 called "the wall of integration cost". The wall is not built by the technical performance of models. What builds the wall is everything other than capability that is needed to bring capability into a usable state. And the export of integrated systems is nothing other than selling this "everything other than capability" as a commodity. Of the three forms, only the export of integrated systems takes as its principal commodity the part that escapes compression rather than the part that is compressed. This consequence carries a direct implication for the strategy of the Transformation Model. Raising the four indicators of Proposition 4 is not an end in itself but the putting in place of the conditions that make the export of integrated systems possible. Conversely, a jurisdiction that raises the four indicators while performing only the export of capability is selling a protected asset in a form that is compressed. Different values may be realized from the same endowment, and what determines the difference is the form of supply. 12.1.5 Mixtures of the Three Forms and the Mobility of the Boundary Actual transactions are mixtures of the three forms, and pure forms are rare. If operational support accompanies the sale of equipment, the transaction is intermediate between (b) and (c); if implementation consultancy accompanies the provision of a model, it is intermediate between (a) and (c). The three forms are therefore not an exclusive classification but should be used as a coordinate for measuring how much weight a given transaction places on each form. 354 The boundary moves over time. It frequently happens that work which at one point required integration comes, with the advance of standardization, to be met by the procurement of capability. The direction of this movement is generally from (c) towards (a) — as the design of integration is repeated a type settles, once a type has settled it is productized, and once productized it is absorbed into standard functions. The retention of value through the export of integrated systems is therefore not a permanent guarantee but a race against the speed of standardization. This point reappears in Section 12.5 when the limits of self-reinforcement are discussed. Movement in the reverse direction also exists. The tightening of regulation, the clarification of the allocation of liability, and the refinement of supervisory procedure move domains that had been met by the procurement of capability into the region of integration. That the Artificial Intelligence Act of the European Union (Regulation (EU) 2024/1689) imposes requirements of conformity assessment, technical documentation and post-market monitoring on high-risk uses can be read as a measure that institutionally raises the weight of (iv), the certification of conformity, in those uses. The merits of that regulation are not an object of evaluation in this paper, but the structure whereby the existence of regulation operates in the direction of raising the commodity value of the export of integrated systems is important for the argument of this section. This structure connects with the mechanism of self-reinforcement in Section 12.5. 12.1.6 The AI Foundry Model — Naming the Type Having distinguished the three forms, this paper is in a position to specify one configuration as a type. It is the configuration in which a jurisdiction does not itself produce frontier capability but procures it from outside, transforms it by means of its own complementary assets, national brain capital and trust infrastructure into an operable system for a particular operational domain, and supplies that system to external jurisdictions as (c) the export of integrated systems. This is nothing other than M2 (the Transformation Model) of Definition 3 taking as its object the capability of C2 (the frontier tier) of Definition 2 and choosing integration as the form of its output. It adds a third specification — the choice of the form of export — to the M2×C2 cell that Section 10 took as the object of focal analysis, and here the three devices of position on the nine cells (Definition 3), form of supply (Definition 20) and component of leverage (Definition 15) are bound together into a single configuration. This paper gives this type a name. 355 Definition 21 (AI Foundry Model) The AI Foundry Model denotes that configuration among the national value models (Definition 3) in which a state does not itself produce frontier capability but procures it from outside, transforms it by means of the complementary assets of its own jurisdiction (the four indicators of Proposition 4), its national brain capital (Definition 11) and its trust infrastructure (Definition 17) into an operable system in a particular operational domain, and supplies that system to external jurisdictions as an export of integrated systems (Definition 20). It is thus the type constituted where M2 (the Transformation Model) takes the capability of C2 (the frontier tier) as its object and chooses integration as the form of its output. A state that adopts this type is called an AI Foundry State. The name derives from a structural correspondence with the semiconductor foundry — the form of business that owns no designs but owns process capability, and turns the designs of others into products by means of its own processes, yield and quality assurance. The correspondence, however, is confined to the structure of "taking value at the process without holding the design", and the indispensability (Definition 15) that a semiconductor foundry retains by virtue of capital specificity and the difficulty of reproducing its processes does not transfer to an AI Foundry State. The bargaining power of an AI Foundry State rests on the side of desirability (Proposition 38). It should be noted that "AI Foundry" as used in this paper is a type name for a national model, unrelated to commercial products or services of the same or similar name in the field of information technology. Distinguishing the term from commercial names. As the closing sentence of Definition 21 notes, "AI Foundry" and terms resembling it are already in use in the field of information technology as the product names of particular firms. Specifically, one vendor's platform for AI development and operations was renamed from Azure AI Studio to Azure AI Foundry in November 2024, and subsequently renamed again to Microsoft Foundry. The terminology of this paper is unrelated to those products and services. What this paper names is a configuration of national value generation, and, as Definition 21 shows, the object over which it quantifies is the jurisdiction, not the firm. With respect to the products concerned, this paper does no more than record the fact that names of this kind are in use in the field of information technology, and makes no evaluation whatever of their content, quality, strategy or position in the market. This is the discipline of political neutrality of this paper (Section 1) applied in the same form to firms and products. Moreover, the prior existence of a commercial name neither raises nor lowers the validity of this paper's type name — the two operate at different levels of reference. The discipline of usage. To avoid confusion, this paper adheres strictly to the following usage throughout. First, where a state is denoted, the term used is "AI Foundry State". That is, where what is denoted is a jurisdiction that itself adopts the configuration of Definition 21. Second, where the model or type is denoted, the term used is "AI Foundry Model". That is, where what is denoted is the configuration as such, or the type 356 to which that configuration belongs. Third, "AI Foundry" is not used as a bare term standing alone. A form of words lacking the qualifier should, in this paper, always be read as denoting the commercial name of another party, and is not used to denote the type of this paper. This discipline extends not only to this section but to every section and appendix of the paper. Fourth, where the name of a firm or product is mentioned, the mention is confined to a statement of fact and carries no evaluation. This paper mentions the products of vendors only for the purpose of distinguishing names. This discipline of usage is not merely a formal precaution. Always carrying the qualifier makes the reader reconfirm, each time the term appears, that what this paper denotes is a configuration of a state and not a vendor's product. The danger of naming lies in the name circulating independently and coming to be used apart from the original definition. The qualifier serves as the tie that fastens the name to the definition. The division of roles with platform vendors. What Definition 21 prescribes is a configuration of jurisdictions, not a configuration of business entities. This distinction requires explicit statement because a question may arise where platform vendors that supply frontier capability integrate downstream into the application layer — the process that Proposition 4 (Section 7) formalized as the pressure of compression towards general-purpose functions — as to whether the position of an AI Foundry State does not simply disappear. The answer of this paper is that the two are not in competition but occupy different layers. What platform vendors supply is general-purpose capability that operates irrespective of jurisdiction — inference, generation, retrieval, the invocation of tools, and the substrate that combines them. What an AI Foundry State secures at the institutional layer, by contrast, is legal responsibility and the certification of conformity specific to a jurisdiction and an industry — who, under the legal regime of the jurisdiction concerned, assumes which outcomes; how conformity is certified in the form the supervisory authority of the industry concerned will accept; how compensation is executed when an accident occurs. The three elements of the trust infrastructure of Definition 17 govern, independently of the level of capability, the depth to which AI can be deployed in the jurisdiction concerned (Proposition 25, Section 11). That governing relation does not change according to who supplies the capability. The content of "occupying different layers" is the following. Even where platform vendors integrate downstream into the application layer and come to supply the design of business processes and the tooling for them, whether what they supply can be incorporated into the critical processes of the receiving jurisdiction is delimited by the level of development of that jurisdiction's liability-allocation rules, conformity assessment and insurance. Downstream integration, that is, does not substitute for the conditions of the institutional layer. Of the five elements of Definition 20, (i) access to capability and part of (ii) the design of the incorporation into business processes may be supplied by business entities. But (iii), the arrangements for the allocation of liability, takes effect under the legal regime of the receiving jurisdiction, and (iv), the certification of conformity, is made to the authorities of the receiving side. The institutional layer is 357 not something a business entity can supply across borders; it exists only on the side of the jurisdiction. The type of the AI Foundry State and the vendors that supply capability therefore occupy different layers of the same value chain — they do not stand in a relation in which one replaces the other. There is, however, a range in which the two compete. As Proposition 4 stated, the part of the value added of the application layer that reduces to general-purpose functions may be internalized by the route of standard inclusion in the next generation of models at close to zero marginal cost. For the part of the transformation process that reduces to general- purpose functions, therefore, the two contend for the same value added. The structure discussed in Section 12.1.4 as the resistance of the three forms to compression operates here too — what escapes compression is the part protected by integration cost, and its content is integration into business processes, regulatory compliance and the assumption of liability. The division of roles holds within the range protected by integration cost, and outside that range competition arises. And as Section 12.1.5 stated, the boundary of this range moves over time, and the direction of movement is generally from (c) integration towards (a) capability. The division of roles is not a permanent partition but a partition under a race against the speed of standardization. It should be added that this paper makes no evaluation whatever of the strategy, capability or market position of any particular vendor. What has been described here is the structure whereby business entities that supply capability and jurisdictions that secure the institutional layer are located in different layers of the value chain; it is not a claim that either is superior. The distinction of the unit of analysis — that what Definition 21 quantifies over is jurisdictions and not firms — is the application, on the side of content, of the fourth point stated as a discipline of usage in Section 12.1.6 (that mentions of the names of firms and products are confined to statements of fact and carry no evaluation). 12.1.7 Contrast with the Semiconductor Foundry — What Transfers and What Does Not This subsection is not an explanation of the naming. It is the subsection in which this paper applies to its own naming the discipline it imposed on itself in Section 3. Proposition 1 (Section 3) formalized as the method of this paper the decomposition of an analogy into a bundle of properties and the setting out, as an explicit correspondence table, of which properties transfer and which do not. This paper has applied that discipline to the three analogies of petroleum, electricity and the nuclear regime, and by naming the properties that do not transfer has avoided both the abuse of analogy and its abandonment. Now that this paper has itself borrowed a name from an analogy, it must apply the same discipline to its own naming. If the discipline is not applied to the analogy one adopts oneself, it remains a tool for judging the arguments of others and is a dead letter as a method. This subsection decomposes the semiconductor foundry as a form of business into a bundle of properties and delivers a verdict, item by item, on whether each transfers to the AI Foundry State. The results of the verdicts are organized in Table 27. 358 The procedure is identical to the application of Proposition 1. First, enumerate the properties of the source of the analogy. Second, deliver for each property a verdict on transfer and state the grounds. Third, name the error that arises if a property that does not transfer is transferred in error. The third step is the most important. The harm of analogy arises not from properties that do not transfer being explicitly asserted, but from their being brought in silently along with the name. It should be acknowledged in advance of the verdicts that the source of the analogy is a form of business of firms while the target is a configuration of value generation of jurisdictions: the units of analysis differ, and each of the correspondences below is a correspondence of structure and asserts no identity of actors. First structure that transfers — owning no design and owning process capability. A semiconductor foundry does not own the design of the product. The design belongs to the customer. What the foundry owns is process capability — the sequence of manufacture, the management of yield, the system of quality assurance, the operating knowledge of the equipment, and the people and records that support them. Its business consists in receiving the designs of others and turning them into products by means of its own processes. The configuration of the AI Foundry State corresponds to this. As Definition 21 makes explicit, a state of this type does not itself produce frontier capability. What it owns is the capability of transformation, whose content is the complementary assets measured as the four indicators of Proposition 4, the national brain capital of Definition 11, and the trust infrastructure of Definition 17. The reason this correspondence holds is that both face the same structural problem. An actor that does not own the design (the capability) can capture value only where there exist costs in the process of turning the design into a product that the designer cannot internalize. In semiconductors those costs are capital investment and the accumulation of yield. In AI they are the integration cost that Section 12.1.4 specified by way of Proposition 4 — the design of the incorporation into business processes, the construction of the allocation of liability, the operation of conformity certification, and the supply of human capability. In either case the capture of value arises not from ownership of the capability but from non-exclusive occupancy of the process that brings unowned capability into a usable state. Verdict: transfers. Second structure that transfers — the axis of competition lying not in "superiority of design" but in "reliability of process". Derived from the first correspondence is the location of the axis of competition. Foundries are not selected for the superiority of a design. The reasons they are selected are yield, certainty of delivery, the record of quality assurance, and the handling of customers' design information. Competition is thus conducted not in the dimension of design but in the dimension of the reliability of the process. The AI Foundry State is likewise. It is not selected for the height of its capability level — capability is procured, and in principle anyone may procure the same capability. The reasons it is selected are what Section 12.2 specifies as three establishments: the establishment of where responsibility lies, the establishment of the certification of conformity, and the 359 establishment of an account to the supervisory authority. Just as yield and quality assurance are the indicators of the reliability of a semiconductor process, operational records and the assumption of liability are the indicators of the reliability of the transformation process of an AI Foundry State. The structure that Proposition 25 and Definition 17 (Section 11) stated about trust infrastructure is nothing other than the content of this correspondence. Verdict: transfers. This transfer carries a practical implication. If the axis of competition lies in the reliability of the process, then what an AI Foundry State should invest in is not chasing the level of capability but thickening its systems of records, audit and the assumption of liability. That Proposition 39(iii) lists an operational track record within one's own jurisdiction as a condition of subsistence, and that Section 12.3.3 describes it as something that "cannot be bought and can only be made over time", means that competition on this axis cannot be short-circuited with money. It is structurally the same as the fact that a foundry's yield cannot be obtained by purchasing equipment. Third structure that transfers — the neutrality demanded by the position of handling customers' designs. A foundry transacts with several design houses, and many of those design houses are in competition with one another. The foundry therefore undertakes, as a premise of its business, not to divert design information it has received to other customers and not to design on its own account in competition with its customers. This discipline is a condition of the subsistence of the business before it is a moral requirement — the moment the discipline is doubted, the reason for customers to entrust their designs disappears. In the AI Foundry State too, a discipline of the same form becomes a premise of export. What the exporting side receives in the export of integrated systems is the substance of the receiving side's operations. To carry out (ii) of Definition 20, the design of the incorporation into business processes, one must know the segmentation of the receiving side's processes, its handling of exceptions, and its history of failures. As Section 12.2.2 states under "the establishment of an account to the supervisory authority", this knowledge includes the record of failures, and that record is a competitive asset of the receiving side in the domain concerned. A discipline of not diverting the operational knowledge received to other customers therefore becomes a premise of the export of integrated systems. The trust infrastructure required by Proposition 39(ii) is also the device that secures this discipline in the forms of contract, supervision and professional norms. Confidentiality clauses in individual contracts do not suffice for this discipline. Where the actors of export extend across several firms of the jurisdiction concerned, the discipline must operate at the level of the jurisdiction. Unless the legal regime, professional norms and supervision of that jurisdiction structurally support the non-occurrence of diversion, no reason for the receiving side to disclose the substance of its operations is established. This is the manifestation, at the moment of export, of what Section 12.4.2 lists as a source of Type (B): "the professional ethics and working practices that make trust in institutions possible" (Definition 11). Verdict: transfers, but with transformation — whereas in semi‐

conductors the object of neutrality is design information, here the object is the receiving side's operational knowledge and authentic data (Definition 16). This difference of object is also the reason Section 12.7.3 lists the retention of authentic data within the receiving jurisdiction as the second means of mitigation for the receiving side. The exporting side's discipline of neutrality and the receiving side's demand for the retention of data are two sides of the same problem. Fourth structure that transfers — yield as the source of value. In a semiconductor foundry the decisive source of value is yield. Yield denotes the reproducibility of the process and the capacity for volume production of uniform quality — the ability to produce repeatedly, from the same design, product above a certain standard. Even where the design is the same, a difference in yield directly governs unit cost and certainty of delivery. This lies at the centre of why foundries are selected, because the yield a designer could achieve by manufacturing on its own account does not reach the level of dedicated process capability. What matters is that yield is a quantity defined not by the height of the performance of the output but by the fewness of defects across repetition — making one good unit once is not yield. The counterpart in the AI Foundry State is the assurance of conformity in operational application, a low error rate, and certain compensation when an accident occurs. This is nothing other than the state in which the three elements of the trust infrastructure of Definition 17 are operating effectively. When the system is applied to the operational domain concerned, that conformity is repeatedly certified, that the rate of occurrence of errors continues to fall within the tolerance of that domain, and that where an error occurs the locus of responsibility has been settled in advance and compensation is executed — these three occupy the same position as yield in semiconductors. All of them ask not "does it go well once?" but "are defects few across repetition, and is the handling of a defect certain when one occurs?" The three establishments that Section 12.2.2 specifies as the object of purchase are precisely this content. Verdict: transfers, but with transformation of the object — from a physical rate of good product to the conformity of operational application and the certainty of compensation. This transfer carries an implication as to the object of investment. Just as in semiconductors yield is not obtained by purchasing equipment but is formed as the accumulation of simultaneous optimization of equipment, process, people and materials, so too the assurance of conformity and the low error rate of an AI Foundry State are not obtained by raising the level of capability. They are formed through the accumulation of the operational track record within one's own jurisdiction required by Proposition 39(iii) — records that include the history of failure and correction. The improvement of yield and the accumulation of operational records are both processes that take time and cannot be short-circuited with money. ★ Property that does not transfer — the indispensability derived from capital specificity. From here on is the core of this subsection. A semiconductor foundry holds a genuine chokepoint. In the language of Definition 15, it possesses high indispensability. 361 Its sources are at least three. First, the scale of capital investment. Second, the availability of manufacturing equipment. Third, the fact that the accumulation required for yield exists as the simultaneous optimization of equipment, process, people and materials and is not reproduced by procuring the elements individually. By the conjunction of these three, the emergence of substitutes is impeded over the long run. Here lies the structure discussed in Section 11.2 as a physical chokepoint. If supply stops, the recipient falls into dysfunction, and bypassing requires years of time and vast capital. The AI Foundry State does not have this. A system of transformation consists not of physical plant but of institutions, people and records. None of the four conditions listed by Proposition 39 has the property of excluding entry by the scale of capital. (i) Domain-specific national brain capital is a stratum of people; (ii) trust infrastructure is an accumulation of legal regime and practice; (iii) an operational track record within one's own jurisdiction is a record; and (iv) portability is a choice of design. Reproducing these is not easy, but the difficulty is of a different kind from the difficulty of reproducing a semiconductor process. An anticipated objection should be answered here. Section 12.3.3 states that the capability to export integrated systems "cannot be bought and can only be made over time". Is this not a barrier to entry? It is a barrier. But its nature differs. What separates actors from the capability to export integrated systems is a wall of time, not a wall of physics. A wall of time can be crossed by several jurisdictions in parallel — that one jurisdiction has crossed it does not prevent others from crossing. A wall of plant accompanied by extreme capital specificity, by contrast, limits the very number of actors that can cross. Where the minimum efficient scale is large relative to world demand, the actors able to enter are confined to a small number, and being small in number generates indispensability. This logic of scale does not operate for systems of transformation. On the contrary, because the domain-specific human stratum required by Proposition 39(i) may exist in different jurisdictions for different domains, the set of suppliers tends to be dispersed domain by domain. That Section 12.4 describes two types as combinations of conditions and states that the same jurisdiction stands in different positions in different domains (Section 12.8.3) is another expression of this dispersion. The grounds of the verdict should be stated precisely. This verdict is frequently summarized in error — in the form "the systems of an AI Foundry State have low switching costs and therefore possess no indispensability". That reasoning is not the position of this paper, and it is not supported as a matter of fact either. Switching costs may be high. The accumulation of the four conformity investments specified in Section 12.5.2 — the redesign of business processes, the conclusion of contracts and insurance, the preparation of supervisory procedures, and the training of personnel — demands, in domains such as medicine, transport and finance, years of work and considerable expense in the forms of data migration, the redefinition of the responsible actor, and the retraining of practitioners. This paper in fact asserts, by Proposition 38, that switching costs rise in pro‐ 362 portion to the depth of adoption. Reasoning grounded on the lowness of switching costs contradicts Proposition 38. The correct ground is the number of alternative suppliers. Definition 15 defines indispensability as the magnitude of the cost and dysfunction that would arise were other states to attempt to bypass or exclude the state concerned, and lists among its measures the absence of alternative suppliers. A semiconductor foundry retains indispensability not because switching is costly for its customers but because the very number of actors able to enter is limited by the logic of scale, so that alternative suppliers in the world can be counted on the fingers. For systems of transformation this logic of scale does not operate — what separates actors is a wall of time, and because a wall of time can be crossed by several jurisdictions in parallel, it does not limit the number of suppliers. In addition, because the domain-specific human stratum required by Proposition 39(i) may exist in different jurisdictions for different domains, the set of suppliers tends to be dispersed domain by domain. The ground on which indispensability does not transfer is therefore not a judgement about the level of switching costs but a judgement about supplier concentration. Because this distinction decides the life or death of the verdict of this subsection, it is formalized in Section 12.5.6 as Proposition 42(i), where the measurement rule is derived that "a high level of lock-in is not evidence of indispensability unless it is accompanied by an indicator of supplier concentration". The verdict is therefore as follows. The position of an AI Foundry State rests on desirability, not on indispensability (Definition 15). That the closing sentence of Definition 21 states that "the bargaining power of an AI Foundry State rests on the side of desirability (Proposition 38)" is the conclusion of this verdict written into the interior of the definition. Verdict: does not transfer. The consequences of this asymmetry — the source of bargaining power and the sign of strategy. That one property does not transfer does not diminish the value of the analogy. What diminishes it is a property that does not transfer being brought in silently. The place where the danger of such importation is highest is the assumption about the source of bargaining power. This asymmetry connects directly to the distinction between Proposition 23 and Proposition 38. Proposition 23 (Section 11) stated that indispensability based on the holding of a chokepoint depreciates by being exercised. Proposition 38 (Section 12.5) states that the desirability formed by the export of integrated systems appreciates the more it is adopted. The bargaining power of a semiconductor foundry belongs to the former. It is nonsubstitutability, power of the form that the counterparty is in trouble if supply is stopped. As Section 12.5.1 contrasts across four states, power of this form does not depreciate while it is held and begins to depreciate from the moment it is exercised. It is an error for an AI Foundry State to expect power of the same form. There is no non-substitutability. The bargaining power that an AI Foundry State can hold is of a kind accumulated not by cutting off but by diffusion. The four conformity investments specified by Proposition 38 363 — the redesign of business processes, the conclusion of contracts and insurance, the preparation of supervisory procedures, and the training of personnel — do not arise at all unless adoption occurs. As Section 12.5.1 states, indispensability is an asset even if left alone, whereas desirability does not become an asset if left alone. The implications for strategy are therefore likewise reversed — power comes not from closing but from being adopted. Concretely, this is as follows. Enclosing the system within one's own jurisdiction, deliberately lowering portability, keeping the interface undisclosed, and keeping the format of records proprietary all appear defensive under the logic of indispensability. Under the logic of desirability, however, these are acts that stop the very formation of the asset. That Proposition 39 lists (iv) portability among its conditions of subsistence, and moreover treats it as the most constraining of the four, is nothing other than this reversal of sign stated at the level of conditions. Whereas in a semiconductor foundry it is a strength that the process is difficult to imitate, in an AI Foundry State it is a strength that the system is easy to transfer. Difficulty of imitation and ease of transfer are different concepts (the former concerns reproduction by others, the latter supply by oneself), but the two are in tension in design. The fourth path in Section 12.3.4 — that investment raising exclusive data endowment may lower portability — is a concrete manifestation of this tension. Two errors that misuse of the analogy may generate should be named. First, the error of envisaging restriction of export as an instrument of negotiation. The conception of extracting concessions from a counterparty by throttling the export of integrated systems is an application of the logic of indispensability, but the position of an AI Foundry State does not support that logic. What is reduced by throttling is not only the counterparty's benefit but also one's own accumulation of desirability. Because the mechanism of Proposition 38 is proportional to the depth of adoption, restricting export stops the formation of one's own asset. Second, the error of assuming that an oligopoly of a small number of suppliers arises naturally. In semiconductor processes the logic of scale narrows the number of suppliers, but for systems of transformation that logic does not operate. On the contrary, as the second constraint in Section 12.5.4 states, where several systems compete the receiving side seeks to retain the possibility of switching, and pressure towards the standardization of interfaces arises. The existence of competition not only lowers prices but erodes the mechanism of self-reinforcement itself. The position of an AI Foundry State is not a position protected by oligopoly. The foregoing verdicts are now organized property by property. Table 27. Semiconductor foundries and AI Foundry States — decomposition of the bundle of properties and the verdict on transfer (a self-application of Proposition 1) 364 Property Semiconductor foundry (source of the analogy) AI Foundry State (the type of this paper) Verdict Grounds What is owned Process capability — the sequence of manufacture, the management of yield, the system of quality assurance, the operating knowledge of the equipment, and the people and records that support it The capability of transformation — complementary assets (the four indicators of Proposition 4), national brain capital (Definition 11), trust infrastructure (Definition 17) Transfers In both, an actor distinct from the owner of the design or capability bears costs proper to the process of productization or operationalization What is not owned The design of the product (belongs to the customer) Frontier capability itself (belongs to the producer; Definition 21) Transfers Not owning is not the disadvantage; the structure in which the non-owner captures value at the process is the same Axis of competition Reliability of the process — yield, certainty of delivery, the record of quality assurance, the handling of design information Reliability of transformation — operational records, the assumption of liability, certification of conformity, the account given to the supervisory authority (the three establishments of Section 12.2) Transfers The structure that Proposition 25 and Definition 17 (Section 11) stated about trust infrastructure corresponds to yield and quality assurance Yield (the decisive source of value) Reproducibility of the process and the capacity for volume production of uniform quality — the ability to produce repeatedly, from the same design, product above a certain standard The assurance of conformity in operational application, a low error rate, and certain compensation when an accident occurs (the state in which the three elements of trust infrastructure, Definition 17, operate effectively) Transfers (with transformation of the object) Both take as the source of value not the height of the performance of the output but the fewness of defects across repetition and the certainty of handling when a defect occurs. Neither can be short-circuited with money; both require accumulation (the operational records of Proposition 39(iii)). The object moves from a physical rate of good product to the conformity of operational application and the certainty of compensation Handling of the customer's assets The discipline of not diverting design information received to other customers and of The discipline of not diverting the operational knowledge and authentic data (Definition 16) re‐ Transfers (with transformation of The structure whereby a position handling the assets of several customers makes neutrality a condition of the subsistence of the business is the same. The ob‐ 365 Property Semiconductor foundry (source of the analogy) AI Foundry State (the type of this paper) Verdict Grounds not designing on one's own account in competition with customers ceived to other customers. Secured at the level of the jurisdiction the object) ject moves from design information to operational knowledge Source of bargaining power Indispensability (Definition 15) — the absence of alternative suppliers and the time required to switch Desirability (Definition 15) — conformity investment and the rise in switching costs through the accumulation of adoption (Proposition 38) ★ Does not transfer The ground is not the height of switching costs but the number of alternative suppliers. Because capital specificity and the difficulty of reproducing processes are absent on the AI side, the number of suppliers is not narrowed. Switching costs may be high, but that is lock-in, not indispensability (Proposition 42(i), Section 12.5.6) Nature of the barrier to entry A wall of capital and equipment. The minimum efficient scale is large and limits the very number of actors that can cross A wall of time (Proposition 39(iii)). Because several jurisdictions can cross it in parallel, it does not limit the number of actors ★ Does not transfer The existence of a barrier is common to both, but the resulting supplier concentration differs according to whether the logic of scale operates Behaviour with respect to exercise Depreciates when exercised (Proposition 23). Holding and restraining is rational Appreciates the more it is adopted (Proposition 38). Promoting diffusion is rational ★ Does not transfer (the sign is reversed) The dynamic consequence of the asymmetries in the source of bargaining power and the nature of the barrier to entry. The asset is formed by diffusion, not by cutting off Acknowledgement of the limits of the naming. An analogy assists understanding and at the same time misleads. This double aspect is unavoidable so long as an analogy is used. The responsibility this paper bears in naming is therefore not to avoid the analogy but to forewarn the reader of the direction of the misleading. Of the connotations the word "foundry" evokes, the strongest is probably non-substitutability. The word calls to mind a level of process attainable by only a small number of actors, a position such that broad swathes of industry halt if supply is interrupted, and the status of a geopolitical chokepoint. These connotations do not apply to the model of this paper. As the bottom three rows of Table 27 show, the AI Foundry State differs from the source of the analogy in the source of bargaining power, the nature of the barrier to entry, and the behaviour with respect to exercise. If a reader receives the word without being forewarned of this danger of misreading, the naming, far from assisting understanding, causes the sign of strategy to be mistaken — concretely, it invites a design that seeks power by closing. 366 This paper therefore makes explicit what it borrows and what it does not. What this paper borrows from the word "foundry" is confined to three things. The structure of taking value at the process without holding the design; the structure in which the reliability of the process becomes the axis of competition; and the structure in which a position handling the customer's assets demands neutrality. The other connotations — non-substitutability, oligopoly, capital intensity as a capital-equipment industry, and the status of a strategic chokepoint — are not borrowed. These are the properties adjudged in Table 27 not to transfer, and no part of the claims of this paper relies on them. To give this forewarning is the responsibility that attends naming. To give a name is an act of compressing understanding, and compression always loses information. A naming that does not simultaneously state what has been lost conceals from the reader the very fact of the compression. What Proposition 1 requires is disclosure in this sense. Only by imposing on its own analogy the standard that Section 3 imposed on the analogies of petroleum, electricity and the nuclear regime does the discipline of analogy retain its standing as a method. A discipline is a discipline only when it is applied to oneself. This paper has performed that application here. The subsections that follow are analyses of a structure that holds whether or not a name is given, and the naming remains a tool for making that structure easier to refer to. 12.2 Why It Is Bought Even Though It Costs More That the export of integrated systems obtains a higher consideration than (a) or (b) is often explained by saying "because the quality is higher". This subsection shows that this explanation is insufficient and offers another in its place. 12.2.1 The Insufficiency of the Explanation by Accuracy If the accuracy of capability were the reason for purchase, then so long as the same foundation model is used there should be no difference in accuracy between supply accompanied by integration and supply not so accompanied. In fact, cases are observed in regulated sectors in which supply accompanied by integration is traded at a consideration several times, or an order of magnitude, higher. This difference cannot be explained by a difference in capability. Furthermore, the explanation by accuracy presupposes that the purchaser can evaluate accuracy in advance. In domains where failure is not permitted, however, what the purchaser can evaluate in advance is accuracy under laboratory conditions, not effective performance after incorporation into its own business processes. The divergence between the two depends on the characteristics of the business process concerned, and those characteristics are often not fully articulated even to the purchaser itself. What von Hippel (1994) formalized as "sticky information" is the property that the information needed for problem-solving adheres to particular places and is difficult to move; here the reverse face of that property is at issue — because purchasers cannot convey the informa‐ 367 tion of their own sites sufficiently to suppliers, they cannot determine in advance whether the performance a supplier presents will be realized at their own sites. Purchase in domains where failure is not permitted therefore cannot be a selection based on the prior evaluation of performance. The same structure as transaction under the information asymmetry formalized by Akerlof (1970) is present here. In markets for goods whose quality cannot be verified in advance, what makes transactions possible is not quality itself but the institutions that guarantee quality. 12.2.2 The Object of Purchase Is Three Establishments This paper specifies the object of purchase in domains where failure is not permitted as the following three. First, the establishment of where responsibility lies when an accident occurs. Where damage arises from an act performed using the output of AI, unless it has been settled in advance who bears responsibility, the decision to incorporate AI into the business process concerned cannot be made. What is decisive here is not to whom responsibility is attributed but that the object of attribution has been settled in advance. Incorporating AI into a critical process while the locus of responsibility remains unclear cannot be done either as a matter of management judgement or as a matter of administrative judgement. The export of integrated systems supplies this settlement as part of the commodity, by way of Definition 20(iii). Second, the establishment of the certification of conformity. In regulated sectors it must be shown, in a form a third party can verify, that the business process concerned satisfies statutory requirements. What certification requires is not only a description of technical performance but a description of the procedures by which performance is measured, under what conditions it is maintained, and how deviations are detected and corrected. These procedures acquire effect only when actually operated. The export of integrated systems supplies these procedures together with a history of operation, by way of Definition 20(iv). Third, the establishment of an account to the supervisory authority. The decision to adopt in a regulated sector has accountability to the authority as a requirement. What the authority seeks is not novelty but a record of having already operated elsewhere, of problems having arisen, and of their having been corrected. In this respect, "track record" in the export of integrated systems is not a matter of commercial reputation but a substantive requirement of regulatory procedure. The three establishments all correspond to the three elements of Definition 17 (trust infrastructure, Section 11) — liability-allocation rules, conformity assessment, and insurance. Section 11 discussed trust infrastructure as a source of leverage on the side of desirability and, by Proposition 25 (Section 11), as a condition setting the upper bound of the depth of deployment in regulated sectors. What this section adds is the standpoint that trust infrastructure is not only a condition but also a commodity. Where a jurisdiction has built 368 trust infrastructure within its own territory, the fruits of that building not only raise the depth of deployment within that jurisdiction but may become an asset transferable to other jurisdictions. This duality is the economic foundation of the form called the export of integrated systems. 12.2.3 A Formalization of Purchase — A Comparison of Two Costs The foregoing is now formalized as a decision of the receiving side. For a given operational domain in a given jurisdiction, there are two routes to obtaining the system needed in order to incorporate AI into the critical processes of that domain. Route α: build the system by accumulating failures oneself. The cost of this route is the sum of (α-1) the time and resources required for trial and error in design, (α-2) the damage from failures that actually occur in the course of trial and error, (α-3) the cost of resolving disputes arising because the locus of responsibility has not been settled in advance when failures occur, (α-4) the negotiating time required to establish the form of procedure with the authority, and (α-5) the opportunity cost, over these periods, of being unable to use AI in the domain concerned. Route β: receive a completed system. The cost of this route is the sum of (β-1) the consideration for the system, (β-2) the cost of modification to fit the institutions, operations and personnel of one's own jurisdiction, (β-3) the conformity investment specific to that system (the redesign of business processes, contracts and insurance, the preparation of supervisory procedures, and the training of personnel), and (β-4) the non-price costs discussed below — the loss of the opportunity to form national brain capital in the domain concerned (Section 12.7) and the reduction in the freedom to switch (Section 12.5). The export of integrated systems is bought even though it costs more because, notwithstanding that (β-1) is high, there are cases in which the total cost of route α exceeds the total cost of route β. And this is most likely to arise in domains where (α-2) is large, that is, in domains where the consequences of failure are severe. A domain in which failure is not permitted is precisely a domain in which (α-2) is large, and there the learning route of accumulating failures oneself is closed. The "learning by doing" formalized by Arrow (1962) operates only in domains where practice is tolerated. In domains where failure in practice is not tolerated, one cannot descend the learning curve oneself and has no option but to buy a curve that another has already descended. This formalization gives the upper bound of the consideration for integration. If the consideration exceeds the total cost of route α, no purchase takes place. The price of the export of integrated systems is therefore governed not by the cost of the supplying side but by the cost to the receiving side of building the system itself. This is an instance of the general structure whereby price is determined not by cost but by the value of the alternative. And because the receiving side's cost of building rises with the severity of the consequences of failure in the domain concerned, the price of the export of integrated 369 systems is higher the more severe the consequences of failure. It is not superior because it is expensive; it is expensive because the alternative is costly. 12.2.4 What Is Transferred as a Bundled Whole — The Four Indicators and National Brain Capital The content of what the export of integrated systems transfers is now described by way of the four indicators of Proposition 4 and Definition 11 (national brain capital, Section 10). This is the core of the present subsection. Proposition 4 measures the endowment of complementary assets by four ex ante observables — exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, and linguistic-contextual specificity. Proposition 18 (Section 10) situated the first two of these as the externalized traces of national brain capital and the latter two as its institutionalized forms. Definition 11 defined national brain capital as four components that cannot be replicated or transferred at low cost by AI — tacit knowledge of the field, judgement embedded in language and culture, the professional ethics and working practices that make trust in institutions possible, and the capacity for audit based on long domain experience. A question arises here. National brain capital is by definition something another state cannot acquire in the short run by replication or import. What, then, is the export of integrated systems transferring? The answer is that what is transferred is not national brain capital itself but the system produced by national brain capital. Of the five elements of Definition 20, (ii) the design of the incorporation into business processes, (iii) the arrangements for the allocation of liability, and (iv) the procedures for the certification of conformity are all products of national brain capital. Without tacit knowledge of the field, one cannot design into which process and in what manner AI is to be incorporated. Without long domain experience, one cannot write the procedures for what is to be verified. Without the working practices that make trust in institutions possible, one cannot design contracts that assume liability. These products can be transferred, separately from the tacit knowledge that gave rise to them, in the form of documents, procedures and training. This transfer corresponds to the structure that Winter & Szulanski (2001) called "replication as strategy". The endeavour of reproducing an organization's routines in another place is carried out not by moving the whole of the knowledge that gave rise to the routines but by moving a working template. As Szulanski (1996) showed, this transfer involves friction and depends strongly on the absorptive capacity of the receiving side (Cohen & Levinthal, 1990). Element (v) of the export of integrated systems, the transfer or continuing supply of human capability, is situated as the element that absorbs this friction. Argote & Ingram (2000) organized the question of through which carriers knowledge transfer between organizations occurs, dividing them into people, tools and tasks and their combinations, and showed that it is the combination of carriers that constitutes

the unit of transfer. That Definition 20 prescribes the five elements as a bundle states the same structure at the level of the state — the transfer of individual elements is easy, but the relations among elements are embedded in the combination of carriers, and a transfer that unties the bundle does not function. What this paper adds here is the specification of the content of the bundle. The prior literature supplied a typology of carriers, but which combination of carriers is transferable was left as an empirical question domain by domain. The four conditions of Proposition 39 give an answer to that question at the level of the jurisdiction — the transferable bundle is confined to a bundle that satisfies (i) through (iii) and is, as to (iv) portability, separable from the institutions of its own jurisdiction. What the receiving side receives in the export of integrated systems is therefore a bundle of the following. First, the design of business processes produced by the exporting side's national brain capital. This is the explicit knowledge into which the accumulation of the exporting side's field practice has been condensed. Second, the template of procedures produced by the exporting side's institutional embeddedness. This is the abstraction of the exporting side's experience of certification, supervision and the assumption of liability in its own jurisdiction. Third, the behaviour of models produced by the exporting side's exclusive data endowment. This is the tendency of judgement formed by data generated only from the exporting side's operational processes. Fourth, the fit with plant and process produced by the exporting side's physical-interface intensity. This is the knowledge of adjustment formed inseparably from the operation of the exporting side's plant. None of these four is a commodity on its own. Sell the data and it is merely data; sell the procedures and they are merely documents. They function at the receiving side's site only where the four are transferred as a bundle and accompanied by a supply of human capability. The export of integrated systems is nothing other than the form in which the four indicators are transferred bundled together. And it is precisely this bundling that makes internalization by the producer difficult. The accumulation of another jurisdiction's field practice cannot be included as a standard feature of the next generation of a foundation model. There is, however, an important asymmetry here. What is transferred is the product, not the productive capability. The receiving side receives the design, the procedures and the behaviour of the models, but does not receive the accumulation of practice that gave rise to them. It does not necessarily follow, therefore, that the receiving side becomes able to produce a system of the same kind for the next generation itself. This asymmetry is the ground for the loss of the opportunity for formation discussed in Section 12.7 and for the divergence of interests between the exporting and importing sides discussed in Section 12.8. 371 12.3 Conditions for a State That Exports Integrated Systems The conditions for a jurisdiction to be able to carry out the export of integrated systems — that is, the conditions for an AI Foundry State (Definition 21) to subsist — are now formalized. Definition 21 prescribes the configuration but does not prescribe the conditions under which that configuration actually holds. Proposition 39 below gives those conditions. Proposition 39 (Conditions for a State That Exports Integrated Systems) A jurisdiction can carry out the export of integrated systems (Definition 20) only where it simultaneously satisfies the following four conditions. (i) Domain-specific national brain capital (Definition 11): the accumulation of practice in the operational domain concerned, and a stratum of people able to carry out operation and verification. (ii) Trust infrastructure (Definition 17): that the three elements of liability-allocation rules, conformity assessment and insurance are in place for the domain concerned. (iii) An operational track record within its own jurisdiction: that the system concerned is in operation within its own jurisdiction and holds records including a history of failure and correction (a system without records cannot be transferred). (iv) Portability: that the system concerned is separable from the legal institutions and practices proper to its own jurisdiction and can be re-embedded in the institutions of the receiving side. Of the four conditions, (iv) is the most constraining — several jurisdictions may satisfy (i) through (iii), but a system inseparably bound to the institutions of its own jurisdiction cannot be exported however excellent it may be. The capability to export integrated systems is therefore governed not by the height of capability in the domain concerned but by the looseness of the binding between capability and the institutions of its own jurisdiction. Falsification condition If it is systematically observed that a jurisdiction lacking any one of the four conditions carries out the export of integrated systems on a sustained basis, that condition's standing as a necessary condition is rejected. If (iv) portability is not independent of the other three conditions (if portability follows from (i) through (iii)), its standing as an independent condition is rejected. If it is repeatedly observed that jurisdictions satisfying the four conditions do not proceed to export, the claim of sufficiency is rejected. 12.3.1 (i) Domain-Specific National Brain Capital The first condition is the accumulation of practice in the operational domain concerned. That this condition is qualified as "domain-specific" is important. National brain capital does not exist as an aggregate; it exists domain by domain. That a jurisdiction holds a thick accumulation of practice in manufacturing inspection does not mean that the same jurisdiction holds a thick accumulation in credit assessment in finance. Proposition 39 is 372 therefore adjudged only for a pair of jurisdiction and domain, not for a state as a whole. This point becomes the basis of the typology of Section 12.4. The reason an accumulation of practice is required is, as stated in Section 12.2.4, that what the export of integrated systems transfers is the product of practice. In addition, (v), the supply of the human capability that carries out operation and verification, is physically impossible unless the stratum of practitioners in the domain concerned is thick. To export a system means either to send out continuously people able to operate it, or to send out people able to train the receiving side without such continuing supply. Either way, where the practice of the domain concerned in one's own jurisdiction is run by a thin stratum, there is no human margin to direct towards export. The export of integrated systems is sustained only to the extent that it does not thin out the practice of the domain concerned within one's own jurisdiction. 12.3.2 (ii) Trust Infrastructure The second condition is that the three elements of liability-allocation rules, conformity assessment and insurance are in place for the domain concerned. Proposition 25 (Section 11) stated that the level of their development sets the upper bound of the depth of deployment in regulated sectors. What Proposition 39 adds is that this development is also a precondition of export. There are two mechanisms. First, the capability to design contracts that assume liability arises only from experience in which liability-allocation rules are clear in one's own jurisdiction and contracts have been repeatedly concluded under them. In a jurisdiction where the locus of responsibility is ambiguous, the very practice of designing a commodity that assumes liability does not come into being. Second, there is underwriting capacity in insurance. The export of integrated systems includes the exporting side assuming in part the liability arising when an accident occurs. Unless an insurance market exists that evaluates and prices that risk, this assumption comes to depend solely on the financial strength of the exporting side, which constrains scale. That there is an insurance track record for the domain concerned in one's own jurisdiction means that data on the distribution of risk exist, and that itself is a transferable asset. What the supervisory frameworks for critical third-party providers in the financial sector (FSB, 2023; in the European Union, Regulation (EU) 2022/2554) show is the structure whereby outsourcing in regulated sectors comes within the scope of supervision, including the management of the party to whom work is outsourced. The procurement of integrated systems falls within the scope of that supervision. The exporting side must therefore be able to provide records and controls at the level the supervisory authority of the receiving side requires, and only actors that have been subject to supervision of the same kind in their own jurisdiction can do so. The experience of having been subject to supervision is itself the qualification for export. 373 12.3.3 (iii) An Operational Track Record Within One's Own Jurisdiction The third condition is that the system concerned is in operation within one's own jurisdiction and holds records including a history of failure and correction. Proposition 39 states parenthetically that "a system without records cannot be transferred". The content of that sentence is now unfolded. The reason records are required lies in the third establishment stated in Section 12.2.2 — the establishment of an account to the supervisory authority. What the authority of the receiving side seeks is not how the system functions in theory but what actually happened. What is sought above all is the record of failure. A system in which no failure has ever been recorded either has a shallow operational record or has incomplete records, and neither reading justifies adoption in the eyes of an authority. The history of correction is the only evidence about how a system behaves in abnormal conditions. This condition imposes a temporal structure proper to the export of integrated systems. A period of operation within one's own jurisdiction is required before export becomes possible, and that period cannot be shortened. In being incapable of compression by the injection of funds, it is structurally the same as the learning effects and accumulation of skill that Section 11.2 discussed as reasons why indispensability is hard to dissolve. The capability to export integrated systems cannot be bought and can only be made over time. This property is also the reason the position of exporting integrated systems is difficult to imitate. At the same time this condition is a constraint. Where the domain concerned within one's own jurisdiction is small, the quantity of records accumulated is likewise limited. Records of rarely occurring events are harder to obtain the smaller the scale of operation. The market size of one's own jurisdiction therefore acts directly on the speed at which the capability to export integrated systems is formed. Where Section 11.3 listed market size as a source of desirability, the logic was that of the demand side; here the same variable appears as the logic of learning on the supply side. 12.3.4 (iv) Portability — The Most Constraining Condition The fourth condition is portability. Proposition 39 makes explicit that this is the most constraining of the four conditions. This subsection argues that this claim is counter-intuitive and why it holds. One point of terminology should be fixed first: portability in this paper is a different concept from the "data portability" of data-protection law, and where confusion is possible it is limited as the portability of integrated systems. Where the counter-intuitiveness lies. The constraint naturally supposed for the export of integrated systems is the height of capability — the supposition that jurisdictions with excellent systems export and those without import. Proposition 39 does not deny this supposition: (i) through (iii) are conditions concerning capability, and a jurisdiction lacking them cannot export. What Proposition 39 adds, however, is that there are cases in which a jurisdiction cannot export even having satisfied (i) through (iii), and what separates 374 those cases is (iv). And (iv) does not correlate with the height of capability. On the contrary, as is shown below, there are even cases in which it correlates negatively with it. Why a system inseparably bound to institutions cannot be exported. There are at least five paths by which a system depends on the institutions of its own jurisdiction. First, reference to statutes. Where the design of a business process is built on the premise of the provisions, forms and deadlines of particular statutes, the design does not function as it stands in jurisdictions where that premise does not hold. This dependence looks superficial but is in fact deep — because statutes govern the segmentation of operations, a different segmentation changes the very structure of where judgement lies and where records are required. Second, the structure of professions and qualifications. Who may make a given judgement is governed by the qualification regime of each jurisdiction. Where a judgement made in one jurisdiction by a qualified occupation belongs in another to the competence of a different occupation, the arrangements for the allocation of liability (Definition 20(iii)) require redesign. That redesign reaches into the internal structure of the system. Third, tacit premises. This is the hardest to handle. The design of a business process is built upon premises that are not made explicit — how accurately records are prepared, how far instructions are executed as given, how exceptions are reported. Because these premises are self-evident in one's own jurisdiction they are not documented, and they are therefore not brought to mind at the point of transfer. As Nelson & Winter (1982) argued about organizational routines, and Polanyi (1966) about the tacit dimension of knowledge, most of the knowledge functioning within practice is not made explicit. Where transfer fails, the cause of failure often lies not in the explicit part but in the premises that were not made explicit. Fourth, the structure of data. Where the format, granularity and generative process of the data a system uses depend on modes proper to the institutions of its own jurisdiction, the system does not operate unless data of the same kind are generated on the receiving side. This dependence is stronger the higher the exclusive data endowment of Proposition 4 — that is, the asset that raises the defensibility of the Transformation Model may itself be a factor lowering portability. Fifth, response to regulation concerning the handling of data. Portability is not exhausted by technical and institutional ease of detachment. It includes whether the system can respond to the requirements the receiving side imposes on the handling of data. In some jurisdictions there exist, as institutions, requirements that particular kinds of data be retained within the territory — requirements that the data concerned be physically located inside that jurisdiction and processed there. In some jurisdictions, too, frameworks are laid down for pursuing responsibility for the processing of such data, under which actors that carry out processing may be required to submit records, accept audit, and execute corrections. This paper does not argue the merits of such requirements — the merits of the regulation of each jurisdiction are not an object of evaluation in this 375 paper (the editorial policy of Section 1). What is described is the structural fact that there are jurisdictions in which such requirements exist, and the consequences of that fact for the portability of a system. The consequence is clear. Where a system is built on the premise that data are aggregated and processed in the exporting side's jurisdiction, it cannot be transferred to a jurisdiction in which requirements of retention within the territory exist. A system that could operate technically is barred from transfer by the single point of the location of data. Likewise, where a system is so constituted that it cannot submit records to a framework for pursuing responsibility — where the history of processing remains inside the exporting side and the authority of the receiving side cannot verify it — it does not satisfy the supervisory requirements of that jurisdiction. The content of portability therefore includes the capacity to adapt to the receiving side's requirements on the retention of data within the territory and the capacity to respond to frameworks for pursuing responsibility. The "institutions" in Proposition 39(iv)'s phrase "can be re-embedded in the institutions of the receiving side" include the institutions governing the handling of data. This path is nothing other than a rereading, as a design condition for the exporting side, of the graduated treatment of data (the three criteria of confidentiality, reversibility and substitutability) handled in Section 19.6 — the principle of dividing places of processing for the receiving side appears, for the exporting side, as a constraint on the constitution of the system. Of the five paths, the fourth (the structure of data) shows the tension between capability and portability most clearly. Of the four indicators, exclusive data endowment and linguistic-contextual specificity protect the transformation margin by making internalization by the producer difficult. But the same properties fix the system to its own jurisdiction. Investment that raises the indicators of Proposition 4 may strengthen (i) through (iii) of Proposition 39 while weakening (iv). This tension is the central design problem to which this section leads. 12.3.5 Designing for Portability — Techniques of Separation The tension cannot be dissolved, but mitigation can be designed. The basic principle of mitigation is separation. It consists in building the system divided into "the part proper to one's own jurisdiction" and "the transferable part", and this can be done only at the time the system is designed. Decomposing a completed system after the fact is generally more costly than building it separated from the start. This principle corresponds to the concept of modularity as formalized by Simon (1962) for the structure of complex systems and by Baldwin & Clark (2000) as design rules: a design that confines interdependence among elements within a module and places a stable interface between modules. What corresponds to the interface here is the boundary between the parts of the system that depend on the jurisdiction and the parts that do not. The term "interface" is used in this paper in this sense and not in the sense of an application pro‐ 376 gramming interface or a user interface: it is a specification of that boundary fixed at the level of design documents. The layers that are the objects of separation are organized below along the five elements of Definition 20. (i) Access to capability. This layer is in principle portable. Where the model concerned is strongly adapted to the language and modes of its own jurisdiction, however, performance falls on the receiving side. The technique of separation is to place the adaptation to language and mode not in the model itself but in the layers of pre-processing and postprocessing. (ii) The design of the incorporation into business processes. This layer divides into a part that depends on statutes and a part that depends on the physical and logical structure of the operations. The former is replaced jurisdiction by jurisdiction; the latter is kept common. The technique of separation is to divide the design documents into a description of "what is to be achieved" and a description of "which statutory requirements are met and how", and to constitute the latter as a replaceable annex. (iii) The arrangements for the allocation of liability. This layer depends deeply on the legal regime. The technique of separation is to divide the substantive allocation of liability (who makes which judgement and who assumes which outcome) from its legal construction (by which type of contract and which clauses that allocation is realized). The former is transferable; the latter is reconstituted in the receiving jurisdiction. (iv) The certification of conformity. This layer depends on the form the authority requires. The technique of separation is to divide the content of the records that serve as evidence from the form in which they are submitted. Adopting a system of records aligned with international standards supports this separation from the institutional side. For a jurisdiction to align its own framework of conformity assessment with international standards not only reduces the burden on the firms of that jurisdiction but raises the portability of that jurisdiction's systems. (v) Human capability. This layer has the lowest portability. The technique of separation is to divide the judgements required for the operation of the system into the part transferable by training and the part requiring experience, and to design the business process so as to minimize the latter. This minimization, however, as is shown below, also operates in the direction of further reducing the receiving side's opportunity to form national brain capital — the more the part for which training suffices increases, the less the receiving side's practitioners acquire through experience. (vi) The location of data and the power of audit — encapsulation. The technique of separation corresponding to the fifth path of Section 12.3.4 is set out independently. What is required is a configuration under which data remain inside the receiving side's jurisdiction and the exporting side can verify the operation of the system, both at the same time. The two appear at first sight to conflict — verification requires access to re‐ 377 cords, and access seems to imply the crossing of borders by data. The technique is to combine execution on local facilities with the provision of remote powers of audit. That is, the execution of the system and the storage of the data arising in the course of execution are carried out on facilities within the receiving side's jurisdiction. The exporting side, on the other hand, retains in a remotely exercisable form powers of audit limited to the range needed to confirm that the system is operating as specified — inspection of settings, confirmation of the identity of versions, retrieval of aggregate performance indicators, and receipt of notification of deviation events. The essential point of this configuration is that what moves is not the raw data but the minimum quantity derived from the raw data that verification requires. The system is sealed inside the institutions of the receiving side and connects with the outside only through the interface. This configuration is called encapsulation. Encapsulation is the concretization, at the layer of data, of the design of the interface formalized in Section 12.3.7. The inside of the capsule — the raw data and their processing — belongs to the jurisdiction-specific layer, and the audit specification that governs the connection to the outside of the capsule belongs to the portable core. The same system can therefore be supplied to several jurisdictions with differing requirements of retention within the territory, replacing only the configuration inside the capsule. At the same time this configuration joins with the receiving side's means of mitigation — the retention of authentic data within the receiving jurisdiction that Section 12.7.3 lists as its second means becomes, in an encapsulated system, the default of the configuration. That is, the exporting side's requirement of portability and the receiving side's demand for the retention of data do not conflict at this point and are satisfied by one and the same design. Encapsulation, however, carries costs — the provision of local facilities, the construction and maintenance of the mechanism of remote audit, and the management of configurations jurisdiction by jurisdiction. The allocation of these costs is a matter for contractual negotiation, and this paper makes no normative claim about that allocation. This design of separation carries costs. A separated structure is less efficient in a given jurisdiction than a structure optimized for that jurisdiction alone, because placing an interface generates the cost of coordination across it. Investment in portability therefore includes a choice that sacrifices performance in one's own jurisdiction. A jurisdiction that aims at the export of integrated systems must accept this sacrifice in advance, and that decision must be made before the building of the system begins. This carries an implication for industrial policy — a system designed solely for the purpose of solving the problems of one's own jurisdiction does not become exportable however excellent it may be. Portability is not an attribute that can be added after the fact. 12.3.6 On the Independence of the Four Conditions The falsification condition of Proposition 39 states that if (iv) follows from the other three conditions, its standing as an independent condition is rejected. The position of this paper on this point should be made explicit. 378 The ground for (iv) being independent of (i) through (iii) is shown in the fourth path of Section 12.3.4 — investment raising exclusive data endowment may strengthen (i) while weakening (iv). The two, that is, do not move in the same direction. Likewise, where (ii) the development of trust infrastructure is carried out as an institutional design proper to one's own jurisdiction, that development weakens (iv). (iv) is therefore not an increasing function of (i) through (iii). It is not, however, completely independent either. Where (iii), an operational track record within one's own jurisdiction, accumulates over a long period, the system tends to adapt to the institutions of that jurisdiction. Adaptation raises performance but lowers portability. A mechanism therefore exists that generates a negative correlation between (iii) and (iv). How strong this relation actually is is an empirical question, and this paper does not adjudge it. As a framework for adjudication, one might compare several jurisdictions with respect to the same domain and examine the relation between the length of the operational track record and the presence or absence of an export record, but it is acknowledged as a limitation that the observation of export records is itself difficult (Section 20). 12.3.7 The Condition Under Which Embedding and Portability Are Compatible — Proposition 41 This subsection addresses head-on a contradiction remaining within this paper. The contradiction is the following. Proposition 4 (Section 7) listed the four indicators of complementary asset endowment as conditions of survival for the Transformation Model, and situated among them (c) institutional embeddedness — the presence and number of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations and liability-assumption contracts that the application concerned holds — as a factor impeding reduction to general-purpose functions. Proposition 18 (Section 10) reread this as the institutionalized form of national brain capital and stated that (c) and (d) linguistic-contextual specificity together constitute the rampart of the transformation margin. The supply-side theory of this paper has thus asserted that the more deeply a system is embedded in the institutions of its own jurisdiction, the better the domestic transformation margin is protected. Yet Proposition 39(iv) of this section requires, as a condition of the export of integrated systems, that a system be separable from the legal institutions and practices proper to its own jurisdiction. Embedding and separability are, by definition, quantities running in opposite directions. The more deeply a system is embedded, the better the domestic margin is protected, but the portability needed for export is lost — this paper imposes two conflicting demands on one and the same system. This contradiction is assembled from the internal resources of this paper alone. Section 12.3.4 stated it partially for the fourth path (the structure of data), noting that "the asset that raises the defensibility of the Transformation Model may itself be a factor lowering portability". Section 12.3.5 called it a "tension" and, stating that "the tension cannot be dissolved, but mitigation can be designed", enumerated techniques of separation. But an enumeration of techniques is not a formalization of the condition of compatibility. 379 Whether compatibility is possible in principle, and if so under what condition, was left unsettled. Section 18.16.5 explicitly took up this unsettled question, stating that "this paper does not adjudge whether these two designs are compatible for one and the same domain", and set out the conditional consequence that "if they are not compatible, Japan will have to choose, domain by domain, between defensibility and portability". This subsection lifts that reservation. So as not to understate the weight of the contradiction, its implication is written out. If three claims are taken to be simultaneously true — (1) the higher the degree of embedding, the better the domestic transformation margin is protected (Propositions 4 and 18); (2) the higher the separability, the more the export of integrated systems becomes possible (Proposition 39(iv)); and (3) degree of embedding and separability are quantities running in opposite directions — then the consequence is that a given system is either protected domestically or supplied to the outside, but not both. This is not a minor blemish for this paper. The AI Foundry Model of Definition 21 is precisely the configuration in which transformation capability protected by the complementary assets of one's own jurisdiction is supplied to external jurisdictions as integrated systems. Unless the contradiction is resolved, Definition 21 becomes an empty type denoting an unrealizable combination of conditions. That Proposition 39 states (iv) to be the most constraining of the four conditions is a symptom of this contradiction, not its solution. Two apparent solutions exist, but neither is a solution. The first is to make the embedding shallow. If institutional embeddedness is lowered in order to secure separability, the tension in (3) is eased. But at the same time the rampart in (1) is lost and the transformation margin of that system is exposed to reduction to general-purpose functions — the compression specified by Proposition 4 operates. Moreover, a system that is exportable but unprotected domestically simultaneously loses its value as an object of export. The object of purchase specified in Section 12.2.2 is the three establishments — of where responsibility lies, of the certification of conformity, and of an account to the supervisory authority — and all of these are products of embedding. To pare away the embedding is to pare away the very thing that is for sale. The second is to abandon export. This is a solution that removes the contradiction by removing the demand in (2), and is nothing other than the abandonment of Definition 21. What the two apparent solutions have in common is that they evade the question of compatibility by eliminating one of the demands. What this paper requires is a configuration that satisfies both demands at once while retaining both. 380

Proposition 41 (The Condition Under Which Embedding and Portability Are Compatible) The institutional embeddedness and linguistic-contextual specificity of Proposition 4 defend the transformation margin, whereas the portability of Proposition 39 requires separability from the institutions of one's own jurisdiction. The two appear to be conflicting demands on one and the same system, but they are compatible only where the system is separated into (a) a jurisdiction-specific layer (the parts that depend on the legal institutions, language and practices of the jurisdiction concerned) and (b) a portable core (the parts that do not depend on the jurisdiction, such as the operational logic of the domain, the procedures of verification, and the structure of the allocation of liability), and the interface between them is explicitly defined. In a system in which the interface is not made explicit, deeper embedding causes portability to diminish — because it cannot be specified in advance how far the system is transplantable, and each transplantation therefore requires the reconstruction of the whole system. In a system in which the interface is made explicit, embedding is confined to the outside of the interface (to the side of (a)), and the cost of transplanting the portable core becomes independent of the depth of embedding. What a transformer aiming at export should adopt is therefore not to make the embedding shallow but to confine the locus of embedding to the outside of the interface. Falsification condition If no difference is observed, between systems in which the interface is explicitly defined and systems in which it is not, in the relation (the sign or magnitude of the correlation) between degree of embedding and cost of transplantation, this proposition is rejected. If it is observed that even in systems with an explicit interface the cost of transplanting the portable core continues to rise with deeper embedding, the claim of compatibility is rejected. If it is observed that the making explicit of the interface itself lowers the domestic margin (if separation weakens the rampart), the condition of compatibility does not hold. The character of the solution. The solution Proposition 41 gives is a solution about the locus of embedding, not about its quantity. The contradiction arose from treating embedding and separability as two one-dimensional quantities defined over the system as a whole. If the system is divided into two layers and the boundary between them is defined as an explicit object of design, the two quantities are defined over separate layers and no longer compete on the same axis. The content of the two layers, and what the presence or absence of an interface separates, are stated below. What belongs to (a), the jurisdiction-specific layer. The parts that depend on the legal institutions of the jurisdiction concerned — the provisions, forms and deadlines of the governing statutes, the forms of notification and reporting to the supervisory authority, the construction of the procedures that produce legal effects; the parts that depend on language — the register and terminology of outputs, the format of documents, the form of 381 dialogue with users; the parts that depend on practice — the segmentation of processes, the allocation of competences among occupations, the granularity of record-keeping, the channels for reporting exceptions; and the parts that depend on particular standards adopted by the jurisdiction concerned. The four paths of dependence enumerated in Section 12.3.4 (reference to statutes, the structure of professions and qualifications, tacit premises, and the structure of data) can all be reread as dependencies belonging to this layer. This is the layer replaced upon transplantation, and the cost of replacement depends on the complexity of the receiving side's institutions. What belongs to (b), the portable core. The operational logic of the domain — the skeleton of what the operations concerned seek to achieve and in what order what is determined; the procedures of verification — the constitution of what is checked at what frequency, which deviations are detected at which thresholds, and how they are corrected; the structure of the allocation of liability — the substantive arrangement of who makes which judgement and who assumes which outcome, distinguished from the legal construction (the type of contract and the clauses) that realizes it; and the skeleton of the procedures of quality assurance — the matters to be recorded, the procedure for designing corrective measures, and the occasions for re-evaluation. The form in which these are expressed changes when the jurisdiction changes, but as structures they do not change. The techniques of separation that Section 12.3.5 set out for the five elements of Definition 20 are nothing other than the procedure for carrying out this assignment to the two layers element by element — dividing the design documents into "what is to be achieved" and "which statutory requirements are met and how", dividing the substantive allocation of liability from its legal construction, and dividing the content of records from the form of their submission are all manifestations of one and the same operation in different settings. Why, in a system in which the interface is not made explicit, does deeper embedding diminish portability? Proposition 41 makes the mechanism explicit — because it cannot be specified in advance how far the system is transplantable. In a system in which the two layers are not separated, jurisdiction-specific dependencies are scattered across the whole system. Where one part depends on a statutory form, another on a premise of practice, and that fact is not recorded in the design documents, the actor attempting transplantation cannot know in advance which parts need replacing. It becomes clear only on encountering the places that do not function when transplantation is attempted. Transplantation therefore becomes a process of search, and the cost approaches the reconstruction of the whole system. And because the number of scattered dependencies increases the deeper the embedding, the cost of reconstruction becomes an increasing function of the depth of embedding. This is the mechanism of the diminution. The structure acknowledged in Section 20.8(i), that "only when transfer fails does it become clear what the premises were", is nothing other than a description of systems in which the interface is not made explicit — under Proposition 41, that acknowledgement is limited from a limitation about portability in general to a limitation about systems that have no interface. 382 Why, in a system in which the interface is made explicit, do the two become independent? That the interface is defined means that which elements of the system belong to (a), which belong to (b), and through what the two connect, are fixed at the level of the design documents. In that case embedding proceeds, by definition, only on the side of (a). To deepen (a) is to thicken the domestic stock of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations and liability-assumption contracts, and thus to raise (c) institutional embeddedness of Proposition 4 — that is, the rampart of the domestic transformation margin thickens outside the interface. What is replaced upon transplantation, on the other hand, is the whole of (a), while (b) requires no alteration so long as it satisfies the specification of the interface. The cost of transplanting the portable core therefore does not depend on how deep (a) is. What it depends on is the clarity of the specification of the interface and the size of (b) itself. This is the central claim of Proposition 41 and the reason the two demands are satisfied simultaneously. The formulation as a design principle. From the foregoing, the principle a transformer aiming at export should adopt is uniquely determined. It is not to make the embedding shallow but to confine the locus of embedding to the outside of the interface. This principle is precisely the logic of modularization that Section 12.3.5 set out with reference to Simon (1962) and Baldwin & Clark (2000) — confine interdependence among elements within a module and place a stable interface between modules. What Proposition 41 adds is the verdict that at the level of the state this design principle is the only configuration that satisfies the rampart of Proposition 4 and the portability of Proposition 39 at the same time. That it is the only one means that compatibility has the making explicit of the interface as a necessary condition — that for systems in which the interface is not made explicit, the relation between deeper embedding and diminishing portability does hold. Proposition 41 is therefore not a proposition that increases the options of design but a proposition stating that, if compatibility is desired, there is only one option. Connection with the four indicators of Section 10. The two layers of Proposition 41 give a criterion for assigning the four indicators of Proposition 4 to the two sides of the interface. (b) physical-interface intensity, which Section 10.3.1 assessed as "the hardest indicator", has its core belonging to (b) the portable core so long as the laws of physics do not change with jurisdiction — that Section 12.4.1(α) lists judgements about physical processes as the exportable region of Type (A) is a consequence of this assignment. Where the specification of the plant is jurisdiction-specific, however, the part relating to that fit moves to (a) (Section 12.4.1(ε)). As to (a) exclusive data endowment, treated in Section 10.3.2, the content of the data belongs to the jurisdiction-specific layer while the procedures for generating and verifying the data belong to the portable core. (c) institutional embeddedness of Section 10.3.3 belongs almost wholly to (a) by definition, as does (d) linguistic- contextual specificity, which Section 10.3.4 assessed as "the thinnest indicator". What this assignment shows is that the four indicators do not act uniformly on portability. To the structure that Section 10.3.5 discussed as the interaction among the four indicators, this subsection adds a second coordinate — each indicator is distinguished not only by the magnitude of its contribution to defensibility but by which side of the inter‐ 383 face it lies on. And for indicators lying outside the interface, no tension arises between raising them and preserving portability. Acknowledgement of limits. Proposition 41 gives the condition of compatibility, but does not make compatibility easy. Three points are acknowledged. First, making the interface explicit itself carries costs. As Section 12.3.5 stated, a separated structure is less efficient in a given jurisdiction than a structure optimized for that jurisdiction alone. Placing an interface generates the cost of coordination across it, and that cost is incurred permanently. In addition, work is required to maintain the specification of the interface as a document and to preserve consistency at each revision of the system. Proposition 41 does not give a costless solution; it says only that compatibility is possible if the cost is paid. To declare an interface without paying the cost creates a state that has the outward form of an interface but not its substance — a state in which the two layers are divided in the design documents while in implementation the dependencies are scattered across the layers. A system in this state behaves in the same way as a system without an interface. Second, where to draw the interface differs domain by domain, and there is no general solution. A judgement that belongs to the operational logic in one domain belongs in another to the statute itself. In processes inseparable from "jurisdiction-specific legal effects", as listed in Section 12.4.2(δ), the interface can be drawn only at a very shallow position in the business process, and the portable core is thin. Conversely, in domains close to the physical processes of Section 12.4.1(α), the interface can be drawn at a deep position and the portable core is thick. This paper gives no rule for determining the position of the interface. What it gives is confined to the verdict that making the interface explicit is a necessary condition of compatibility. Determining the position of the interface belongs to the judgement of those with practical knowledge of the domain concerned, and that capacity for judgement is itself part of the content of the national brain capital of Definition 11. Third, if the design of the interface is mistaken, both the rampart and portability are lost at once. If the interface is drawn too shallow — that is, if what should belong to the jurisdiction-specific layer is included in the portable core — that part does not function upon transplantation, and portability remains nominal. If the interface is drawn too deep — that is, if what should belong to the portable core is pushed into the jurisdiction-specific layer — the object of transplantation is emaciated and nothing remains that can be exported. Furthermore, if embedding is placed by mistake inside the interface (on the side of the portable core), the situation named by the third falsification condition of Proposition 41 arises — the case in which separation weakens the rampart. Compatibility is conditional on the success of the design of the interface, and that success is not guaranteed. Proposition 41 is a proposition stating what holds when success is achieved; it says nothing about the probability of success. 384 Connection to Section 18. Section 18.16.4 adjudged, with respect to Japan, that "portability may be the greatest challenge for Japan's export of integrated systems", and Section 18.16.5 reserved judgement on whether defensibility and portability are compatible for one and the same domain. Proposition 41 gives a conditional solution to that reservation — compatibility is possible, but conditional on making the interface explicit. The branching that Section 18.16.5 described as "if they are not compatible, one will have to choose, domain by domain, between defensibility and portability" is therefore reread as a branching determined not exogenously by the nature of the domain but by whether or not an interface has been designed. Of the three tasks identified in Section 18.16.5 (the separated design of systems, the accumulation of operational records in multiple jurisdictions, and the carving out of the parts not dependent on language), the first and third are, in the language of Proposition 41, the making explicit of the interface itself. At the same time, as the first of the limits of Proposition 41 shows, this rereading does not lighten the task for Japan — making the interface explicit carries costs, and those costs appear as a sacrifice of efficiency within its own jurisdiction. The verdict of Section 18.16.4 is not cancelled by Proposition 41; rather, the locus of the challenge moves from "the nature of the system" to "the choice of design and the bearing of its cost". This movement does not make the challenge easier to solve; it specifies who must decide and when. Because portability is not an attribute that can be added after the fact (Section 12.3.5), the design of the interface must be decided at the time the building of the system begins. This subsection does not adjudge which jurisdictions have succeeded in making the interface explicit — that adjudication is an empirical question domain by domain and exceeds the range of the evidence base of this paper (Section 20.8(i)). 12.4 Types of Exporting State The combinations of conditions that can satisfy the four conditions of Proposition 39 are described as two types. Both types are sub-types of the AI Foundry State (Definition 21). What separates them is what the process of transformation is embedded in — physical plant and field work, or business processes and public infrastructure — and not the configuration prescribed by Definition 21 itself. In either type, frontier capability is not produced domestically, value is captured from the process of transformation, and the form of the output is integration. The verdicts of Section 12.1.7 — and in particular the verdict that the position rests on desirability rather than on indispensability — therefore extend equally to both types. This subsection is not a classification of states. What is presented is the structure of which combinations of endowment make the export of integrated systems possible in which domains, and whether a particular jurisdiction falls under a given type is an empirical question domain by domain. It is usual for the same jurisdiction to satisfy the conditions of Type (A) in one domain and those of Type (B) in another. No evaluation is made of the policies, intentions or international relations of any particular state. 385 12.4.1 Type (A): The Physical-Interface and Regulated-Sector Type The combination of conditions. This type is characterized by the following combination of endowments. That among the four indicators of Proposition 4, physical-interface intensity is high — that is, that the greater part of the value of the domain concerned is inseparable from the operation of physical plant, mechanisms and field work. That, in addition, institutional embeddedness is high — that is, that the domain concerned has a history of being operated under statutory certification, supervisory registration and liabilityassumption contracts. That among the four components of the national brain capital of Definition 11, tacit knowledge of the field and the capacity for audit based on long domain experience are thick. And that, as to Proposition 39(iii), long-run and high-frequency operational records exist in the form of the operating records of plant. The sources of strength. The strength of this type arises from two sources. The first is physical-interface intensity. An operational system embedded in physical plant and field work does not reduce to the standard functions of a foundation model. Variables such as individual variation between units, ageing, environmental conditions and the movements of operators do not exist in the space of public information and are observed only from the process of operating the plant concerned. The structure that Proposition 27 (Section 17) discussed as the relative scarcification of authentic data operates most directly in this type — data generated directly from physical processes and whose provenance is verifiable are held only by the operator of the plant concerned. The second is long-run operational records. Physical plant has a long service life, and records of maintenance, failure and correction accumulate over that whole period. Because these records include information about rarely occurring events, they cannot be substituted for by short-run operation. The "history of failure and correction" required by Proposition 39(iii) exists most abundantly in this type. Domains that can be exported. What this type can export are domains with the following properties. (α) That the judgements of the domain concerned are judgements about the state of physical processes and differ little across jurisdictions. Anomaly detection in plant, the prediction of degradation, the optimization of process conditions, and the drawing up of maintenance plans fall under this head. Because the laws of physics do not change with jurisdiction, the core of the judgement is portable. (β) That the regulation of the domain concerned is constituted in a form aligned with international standards. In many industrial and transport fields, safety requirements are constituted by reference to international standards, and the form of the certification of conformity is close across jurisdictions. That closeness supports the portability of Proposition 39(iv). Domains that cannot be exported. What the same type cannot export are domains with the following properties. (γ) Where the judgements of the domain concerned depend not on the state of the plant but on the operating practices of the jurisdiction concerned. Where, even for plant of the same kind, the mode of operation, the maintenance cycle, the division of work and the detail of records differ greatly across jurisdictions, the premises 386 of the system do not hold. In particular, where the operating practices of one's own jurisdiction are distant from international standards, the more a system is optimized to those practices the lower its portability. (δ) Where the domain concerned takes as its object not physical processes but human conduct. The assessment of workers' skills, safety education and labour management depend strongly on labour law, employment practice and language, and portability is low. (ε) Where the plant of the domain concerned is constituted to specifications proper to one's own jurisdiction. Where the standards, power supply, signalling scheme and connection modes of the plant are jurisdiction-specific, the system transfers only together with the plant — that is, it reduces to the form of (b) the export of products rather than (c) the export of integrated systems. What follows from this paired description is that the exportability of Type (A) depends on the purity of the physicality of the domain. The closer to physical processes, the more portable; the closer to organizations and people, the less portable. Where a jurisdiction of this type aims at export, therefore, building the system with the layer dependent on physics separated from the layer dependent on organization becomes the concrete content of the techniques of separation of Section 12.3.5. 12.4.2 Type (B): The Business-Process and Public-Infrastructure Type The combination of conditions. This type is characterized by the following combination of endowments. That among the four indicators of Proposition 4, institutional embeddedness is high — but, unlike Type (A), the object of the embedding is not plant but the business process itself. Processes constituted by the exchange and verification of information — certification, settlement, registration, application — fall under this head. That, in addition, among the four components of Definition 11, the professional ethics and working practices that make trust in institutions possible are thick. That the human stratum that carries these processes is sufficient in scale — the stratum of designers, operators and auditors of the processes, and of those able to train the receiving side. And, further, that there is an operational track record of public digital infrastructure — that is, that in the jurisdiction concerned there exist records of information infrastructure serving a broad body of users having been in operation over a long period. The sources of strength. The first is the scale of the human stratum. Unlike the export of plant, the export of business processes has people as the bearers of transfer. The work of re-embedding a process in the institutions of the receiving side is the work of reconstituting the system on an understanding of those institutions, and the number of people able to do this directly rate-limits the scale of export. Whereas in Type (A) plant can be the medium of transfer, in Type (B) the medium is people. The second is the operational track record of public digital infrastructure. Infrastructure serving a broad body of users generates records about events arising from scale — concentrations of simultaneous access, impersonation, erroneous registration, degraded operation during failures. These are information not obtainable from small-scale operation, and are of high value as the content of Proposition 39(iii). In addition, because the 387 operation of public infrastructure is carried out under supervision and accountability, the trust infrastructure of Proposition 39(ii) is formed as a matter of course. Domains that can be exported. (α) Where the process concerned has at its core the verification of the identity and authenticity of information. Confirming that an actor is the actor it claims to be, that a record has not been altered, and that an authority is valid are structurally similar across jurisdictions. (β) Where the process concerned is constituted by the order and deadlines of a procedure. The structure of application, examination, decision and notification retains its skeleton even when the object changes. (γ) Where standards of interoperability exist internationally for the process concerned. Infrastructure aligned with such standards can be designed to connect with the existing infrastructure of the receiving side. The power of rules and standards that Section 11 discussed as leverage on the side of desirability operates here in the form of raising the portability of one's own system — to stand on the side that writes the standard lowers the cost of making one's own system conform to it. Domains that cannot be exported. (δ) Where the process concerned is inseparable from jurisdiction-specific legal effects. What a given registration legally determines, and what a given certification is effective against, are fixed by the substantive law of the jurisdiction. This part does not transfer. What can transfer is the operation of the process, not the legal effects the process produces. (ε) Where the process concerned depends strongly on language and documentary form. Processes with high linguistic-contextual specificity under Proposition 4 require wholesale reconstitution on the receiving side. (ζ) Where the process concerned presupposes a level of social trust. This is the most intractable constraint. Infrastructure functions because the premises hold that users provide information to it and that authorities trust its records. These premises are a product of institutional design and at the same time a product of long history. Transferring the infrastructure alone to a jurisdiction where the premises do not hold does not make it operate. This constraint is the strongest factor setting the upper bound of the portability of Type (B). 12.4.3 A Comparison of the Two Types and the Possibility of Mixture Set side by side, the two types show that the constraint on portability appears in different places. The constraint on Type (A) lies on the physical side — the more jurisdiction-specific the specification of the plant, the more export reduces to the export of products. The constraint on Type (B) lies on the social side — the more jurisdiction-specific trust and legal effects are, the more export remains formal. Both are different manifestations of the content of Proposition 39(iv). A mixed type is structurally possible as well, and it too is a sub-type of the AI Foundry State. In domains deeply embedded in both physical plant and business processes — medicine, transport, electricity, water and sewerage — the conditions of both types are demanded simultaneously. In this case, because the constraint on portability arises from both the physical and the social sides, the exportable range is narrow. On the other hand, 388 because the wall of integration cost is highest, defensibility where export is achieved is highest. That is, the harder a domain is to export, the more solid the position where export succeeds. This relation connects with the discussion of self-reinforcement in Section 12.5. Japan is treated in detail as a case study in Section 18. This section confines itself to describing the structure of the types and defers the assessment of the endowment of any particular jurisdiction to Section 18 and to the country profiles of Section 14. 12.5 The Self-Reinforcement of Desirability — The Theoretical Apex of This Section This subsection derives a dynamic consequence for the two components of leverage introduced in Section 11. Proposition 38 (Export of Integrated Systems and the Self-Reinforcement of Desirability) The two components of geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15) carry opposite signs with respect to exercise. Indispensability based on the holding of a chokepoint depreciates by being exercised (Proposition 23). By contrast, the desirability formed by the export of integrated systems (Definition 20) appreciates the more it is adopted. The appreciation proceeds by the following mechanism: the adoption of an integrated system requires of the receiving side (i) the redesign of business processes to conform to the system concerned, (ii) the conclusion of contracts and insurance premised on the allocation of liability of that system, (iii) the preparation of supervisory procedures corresponding to the certification of conformity of that system, and (iv) the training of personnel to operate that system — conformity investments which, being specific to that system, cause switching costs to rise in proportion to the depth of adoption. Whereas a strategy resting on indispensability therefore has an incentive to restrain exercise (Proposition 23), a strategy resting on desirability has an incentive to promote diffusion. The two demand opposite actions in service of the single objective of accumulating leverage. Falsification condition If no positive relation is observed between the depth of adoption of an integrated system and the switching cost of the receiving side (the period and expense required to migrate to an alternative system), the mechanism of self-reinforcement is rejected. It is also rejected if it is observed that the desirability of the actor exporting integrated systems (a proxy indicator for the degree to which other jurisdictions wish to engage with it) does not rise with the accumulation of installations. If conformity investments are shown to be general-purpose rather than specific to the system (if the investments are preserved upon switching), no rise in switching costs occurs and this proposition is rejected. 389 12.5.1 Contrast with Proposition 23 Proposition 23 (Section 11) stated that indispensability is "an asset that does not depreciate while it is merely held, and begins to depreciate from the moment it is exercised". Section 11.6.1 argued that this structure is the reverse of ordinary asset depreciation and that, while resembling a financial option, it differs in two respects. Proposition 38 is the claim that pairs with this structure. The temporal structures of the two assets are contrasted across four states. The state of holding without exercising. Indispensability does not depreciate in this state. It may rather appreciate as the counterparty's designs are optimized on the premise of the critical node concerned. Desirability, in this state, generates nothing — unless an integrated system is exported, no conformity investment is made by the receiving side and no switching cost rises. That is, indispensability is an asset even if left alone, whereas desirability does not become an asset if left alone. The moment of exercise. Indispensability inflicts a loss on the counterparty by being exercised. For desirability, the act corresponding to "exercise" is the promotion of adoption, and it confers a gain on the counterparty. The distinction that Section 11.1 stated as the difference in direction of the two components — "a power whose unit is the loss of others" and "a power whose unit is the gain of others" — produces a decisive difference in dynamics. An act that inflicts loss raises the counterparty's incentive to leave; an act that confers gain raises the counterparty's incentive to remain. Immediately after exercise. Indispensability begins to depreciate as the counterparty's search for alternatives begins (Proposition 23). Desirability begins to appreciate as the receiving side's conformity investment begins. Both are driven by investment on the counterparty's side, but the direction of the investment is reversed — one is investment in order to leave, the other investment in order to remain. Repetition. Section 11.6.2 derived that repeated exercise shifts the centre of gravity of the search for alternatives towards forms with long time constants (investment in domestic production). Repetition accelerates depreciation. For desirability the converse holds: repeated adoption raises switching costs through the accumulation of conformity investments. Repetition is, for indispensability, the consumption of an asset; for desirability, the formation of one. This contrast is the core of Proposition 38. Section 11.6.5 had already stated that "desirability does not depreciate through exercise", but the argument there had the application of rules in view and the mechanism was shown only schematically as the sinking of compliance investment. By specifying the concrete form of the export of integrated systems, Proposition 38 decomposes that mechanism into four conformity investments and connects it to the measurable consequence of a rise in switching costs. Here for the first time the leverage axis of Section 11 acquires dynamic content — until now the account had re‐

mained a static coordinate of the levels of the two components and the attribution of quadrants. 12.5.2 The Four Conformity Investments and Their System-Specificity The four conformity investments listed by Proposition 38 are examined from the standpoint of system-specificity. System-specificity here denotes whether the investment concerned is preserved if the receiving side switches to another system. It corresponds to the concept Williamson (1985) formalized as asset specificity, but here the actor making the investment is the receiving side and the object of the specificity is the exporting side's system. One point of terminology should be fixed: conformity investment in this paper stands at a different level from the conformity assessment that is element (ii) of Definition 17 — the former is an investment made by the receiving side, the latter an institution. The rendering "compliance investment" is not adopted. Switching costs and lock-in as such are an established subject in industrial organization. Klemperer (1987) showed that in markets where purchasers bear a cost on changing supplier, ex post demand becomes inelastic and suppliers hold simultaneously an incentive to compete ex ante for adoption and an incentive to raise prices ex post. Farrell & Klemperer (2007) organized this lineage and showed that switching costs and network effects both constrain competition through the set of existing adopters, and that their welfare assessment is not uniquely determined. Shapiro & Varian (1999) formalized at a practical level the fact that in transactions in information goods the cost borne by the purchaser appears not as price alone but as the totality of learning, data formats and complementary investment. What this subsection inherits is this mechanism itself — the relation whereby the more specific conformity investments are to a system the harder ex post switching becomes uses the conclusion of the prior literature as it stands. Where this paper differs is in the actor that bears the switching cost and the level at which the consequences appear. The switching costs of the prior literature are borne by firms or by individual purchasers, and their consequences appear in the prices and entry of the market concerned. The conformity investments of Proposition 38 include, as (iii) the preparation of supervisory procedures shows, the authorities of the receiving side among those who bear them, and the consequences appear not in market prices but in the degree to which a jurisdiction can realize its own preferences in international negotiation (the desirability of Definition 15). Second, whereas the prior literature treats switching costs as a constraint on competition under a given market structure, this paper treats them as an accumulated asset and places them within a comparison of signs against indispensability (Proposition 23). Third, whereas the principal concern of the prior literature is welfare assessment and competition policy, this paper makes no assessment and moves towards specifying the conditions under which the receiving side can weaken the mechanism itself through the design of procurement (Section 12.5.4). The claim of this subsection therefore lies not in any novelty in the theory of switching costs but in what is added when that theory is moved to the level of leverage between jurisdictions. 391 (i) The redesign of business processes. The adoption of an integrated system requires the receiving side to rearrange its business processes to fit the premises of that system. Which judgements are made at which stage, which records are kept at which granularity, and how which exceptions are handled are reconstituted in accordance with the design of the system. This redesign reaches the structure of the organization, the division of duties, the content of training and the configuration of information systems. What is preserved upon switching is confined to the general effects of the redesign (the improvement arising from the tidying of processes as such); the parts that depend on the premises of the system are lost. (ii) The conclusion of contracts and insurance. On the premise of the arrangements for the allocation of liability, the receiving side re-concludes contracts with counterparties, users and insurers. As to insurance, premium rates premised on the distribution of risk under the system concerned are formed, and their formation requires several years of experience. Switching brings that experience to nothing and requires again a period of accumulating experience for the new system. Switching costs therefore include a component that is not readily brought to account directly: the uncertainty of the period until premium rates are settled. (iii) The preparation of supervisory procedures. In regulated sectors, supervisory procedures corresponding to the certification of conformity of the system concerned — the forms of report to the authority, the methods of inspection, notification upon deviation, re-evaluation upon renewal — are put in place. Because this preparation is carried out on the side of the receiving side's authority as well, switching costs arise not only for operators but for the authority. A structure in which the authority bears costs generates institutional resistance to switching. This component is a switching cost of a kind that the operators of the receiving side cannot dissolve on their own, and is the most persistent part of the mechanism of Proposition 38. (iv) The training of personnel. Personnel who carry out the operation, verification and exception-handling of the system concerned are trained. Of the content of the training, the part belonging to general knowledge of the domain is preserved, while the part belonging to the operation of the system is lost. What matters here is that as trained personnel practise on the premise of the system, their own practical knowledge comes to conform to it. This adaptation proceeds over years, and the further it proceeds the higher switching costs rise. What can be said across the four components is that switching cost is an increasing function of time. Immediately after adoption the switching cost is low, and it rises with the passage of years. This temporal structure implies that the bargaining power of the receiving side is concentrated in the early period of adoption. Section 12.8 develops this implication into a practical guideline. 392 12.5.3 The Asymmetry of Incentive Structure — Opposite Actions Towards the Same Objective The latter part of Proposition 38 states that the two strategies demand opposite actions. This implication is made explicit. Under a strategy resting on indispensability, the holder has an incentive to restrain exercise. Because exercise consumes the asset, holding without exercising is optimal from the standpoint of asset value. This strategy therefore prefers the behaviour of stockpiling capability without using it. As the close of Proposition 23 states, restraint does not operate where security requirements outweigh economic incentives, but so far as economic incentives alone are followed, restraint is rational. Under a strategy resting on desirability, the holder has an incentive to promote diffusion. Unless adoption occurs the asset is not formed, and the deeper adoption goes the larger the asset. This strategy therefore prefers behaviour that pursues adoption by more jurisdictions and at greater depth. Expanding adoption even by lowering prices, having the exporting side bear the initial costs of implementation, and committing resources to consultation with the receiving side's authorities are all rational under this incentive. The two strategies prescribe opposite actions in service of the single objective of accumulating leverage. This asymmetry carries a direct implication for the design of national strategy. The objective of raising leverage does not become a guide to action unless it is decided by which component leverage is to be raised. The objective of "possessing the power to push back" branches into two routes that differ both in the allocation of resources and in diplomatic posture — securing and conserving a critical node, and diffusing a system widely. That Section 11 presented no single index composed from the two components was for reasons of measurement; Proposition 38 shows that there are theoretical reasons for not composing them — a composed index would display opposite actions as a rise in the same number. Furthermore, a dynamic standpoint is added to the change in the relation between the two components with level stated by Proposition 22 (Section 11) — substitutes at low levels, complements at high levels. A jurisdiction holding both at high levels faces, in addition to the static complementarity whereby the accumulation of desirability mitigates the cost of exercising indispensability, the problem of temporal asymmetry. Indispensability is preserved by refraining from exercise; desirability grows by continued exercise. Operating the two assets simultaneously requires applying different principles of action domain by domain. This requirement must be reflected in the design of the organization, and it is difficult to operate as a single external economic policy. 12.5.4 Self-Reinforcement Is Not Unbounded — Three Constraints It would be an error to read Proposition 38 deterministically. The mechanism of self-reinforcement has at least three constraints, all of which operate through the behaviour of the 393 receiving side or of competitors. This subsection makes them explicit so as to avoid an excessively deterministic claim. The first constraint — where the receiving side makes portability an object of negotiation. The mechanism of Proposition 38 depends on conformity investments being specific to the system concerned. As the falsification condition makes explicit, if conformity investments are general-purpose, switching costs do not rise and no self-reinforcement occurs. The receiving side can therefore weaken the mechanism itself by requiring, at the time of procurement, a design that raises the generality of conformity investments. Concretely: aligning the interface of the system with public standards, keeping the format of records in standard form, placing the centre of gravity of training on general knowledge of the domain rather than on operations specific to the system, and placing clauses on the alteration and migration of the system in the contract. The degree to which these requirements are accepted depends on bargaining power at the time of procurement. Bargaining power is highest before adoption deepens, and once that moment has passed it does not return. This structure means, for the receiving side, that the design of procurement governs the whole of the subsequent relationship. The second constraint — where several systems compete. Where several jurisdictions are able to export integrated systems in a given domain, the receiving side has options. The existence of options has two effects. First, the price and terms at the time of adoption are governed by competition. Second, and more importantly, the existence of competition itself generates pressure towards portability — because the receiving side seeks to retain the possibility of changing over, the standardization of the interfaces of systems advances. As standardization advances, the generality of conformity investments rises and the mechanism of Proposition 38 weakens. That is, competition not only lowers prices but erodes the very structure of self-reinforcement. This mechanism points in the same direction as the movement of the boundary from (c) to (a) stated in Section 12.1.5, and reconfirms the property that the retention of value through the export of integrated systems is a race against the speed of standardization. The third constraint — the receiving side's adaptation and the obsolescence of the system. The receiving side accumulates practice in the domain concerned during the period of adoption. As Section 12.7 argues, this accumulation is greatly constrained by the procurement of integrated systems, but it does not fall to zero. Where part of the operation is performed in-house, where powers of audit are reserved, or where authentic data are retained within the receiving jurisdiction, the capability of the receiving side may rise over time. In addition, where the system itself becomes obsolete through technical change, the rise in switching costs is offset by the decline in the value of the system. That switching costs are high does not mean that switching does not occur — if the value of the incumbent system falls sufficiently, switching is carried out even at a high switching cost. This point is a relative of the structure that Vernon (1971) formalized for foreign direct investment as the "obsolescing bargain". The investing side initially holds strong bargaining power, but as the investment becomes fixed in the host country and the 394 host side accumulates operational knowledge, bargaining power moves to the receiving side. Whether the same movement occurs in the export of integrated systems depends on whether the receiving side accumulates operational knowledge, and that depends on the success or failure of the design of mitigation discussed in Section 12.7. Taking the three constraints together, Proposition 38 should be read with the following limitation. The export of integrated systems tends to self-reinforce desirability, but the strength of that tendency is governed by the receiving side's design of procurement, by the existence of competition, and by the speed of technical change. Self-reinforcement operates most strongly where the receiving side adopts without negotiating portability, where no competitor exists, and where technical change is slow. These conditions do not readily hold at the same time, and actual self-reinforcement therefore appears as an attenuated form of the mechanism Proposition 38 describes. This paper asserts the existence of the mechanism but asserts nothing about the magnitude of its consequences. 12.5.5 On the Testing of Proposition 38 The falsification condition calls for three observations. First, a positive relation between the depth of adoption and switching costs. Second, a relation between the proxy indicator of the exporting actor's desirability and the accumulation of installations. Third, the system-specificity of conformity investments. As to the first observation, there is the difficulty that switching costs are not measured unless instances of switching are observed. A state in which no switching occurs can be interpreted either as evidence that switching costs are high or as evidence that there is no need to switch. As methods of mitigating this difficulty of identification, one may consider records of the migration period and expense in cases where switching actually occurred, and the retention rate of incumbent suppliers in re-tendering, but both are difficult to observe from public information. This paper acknowledges this difficulty as a limitation and reconfirms it in Section 20. As to the second observation, the proxy indicator of desirability is itself provisional (Section 11.1). One may consider observing, domain by domain, the relation between the accumulation of installations and preference in subsequent procurements. The third observation is the most directly feasible of the three. Examining contracts and technical documents and adjudging whether the interface is aligned with public standards, whether the format of records is standard, and whether the content of training is system-specific is feasible as a case study. This adjudication functions at the same time as a practical checklist for the receiving side (Section 12.7.3). 395 12.5.6 "Is Lock-in Not Indispensability in Substance?" — The Counterargument and Proposition 42 This subsection addresses a valid objection to the core verdict of this paper. Section 12.1.7 adjudged the contrast with the semiconductor foundry property by property and concluded that "the position of an AI Foundry State rests on desirability, not on indispensability". That verdict supports the whole of Section 12 — that the sign of strategy settles on being adopted rather than on closing (Section 12.5.3), that Proposition 39 lists portability among its conditions (Section 12.3.4), and that the exporting side's bargaining power cannot be exercised by cutting off (Section 12.8.1) all depend on it. If the verdict collapses, the practical implications of this section require almost wholesale rewriting. The counterargument runs as follows. In domains such as medicine, transport and finance, where an integrated system has been deeply incorporated into the counterparty jurisdiction's business processes, supervisory procedures and structure of personnel supply, the cost of switching is not small. Data migration — converting accumulated records into another format and transferring them to a new system while preserving the continuity of history — requires years of work. The redefinition of the responsible actor — rearranging who makes which judgement and who assumes which outcome, and re-concluding contracts and insurance — requires consultation with the authorities and the re-accumulation of experience (Section 12.5.2(ii)). The retraining of practitioners — the whole stratum of practitioners in the domain newly acquiring the operation and exception-handling of a system — is accompanied by a degradation of operation in the interim. Summed together, the switching cost may be comparable to the cost in semiconductors of porting design assets to the process of another foundry. Does it not follow that an AI Foundry State too acquires indispensability in substance? Is the verdict of Section 12.1.7 not the result of underestimating the level of switching costs? This counterargument can be assembled from the internal resources of this paper alone. The accumulation of the four conformity investments that Proposition 38 itself specified — the redesign of business processes, the conclusion of contracts and insurance, the preparation of supervisory procedures, and the training of personnel — is precisely that switching cost. Section 12.5.2(iii) stated, as to the preparation of supervisory procedures, that "switching costs arise not only for operators but for the authority" and that "a structure in which the authority bears costs generates institutional resistance to switching", and assessed this component as "the most persistent part of the mechanism of Proposition 38". That is, this paper supplies, through the mechanism it has itself formalized, material capable of undermining its own core verdict. This is a problem of the internal consistency of this paper. The response therefore cannot be made by re-estimating the level of switching costs downwards — this paper has already asserted that switching costs may be high. The response can be made only by reinterrogating the relation between switching costs and indispensability itself. 396 Proposition 42 (Upper Bound of Self-Reinforcement; Lock-in Is Not Indispensability) The self-reinforcement of desirability in Proposition 38 is not unbounded and is limited in two respects. (i) The distinction between lock-in and indispensability: deep adoption of an integrated system raises the switching cost of the receiving side, but this is a binding within the relationship concerned (lock-in), not non-substitutability within the system as a whole (indispensability, Definition 15). Indispensability concerns whether third parties can bypass the actor; lock-in concerns whether an actor already engaged can leave. So long as several alternative suppliers exist, the exporting side may hold a strong position in individual relationships while remaining substitutable within the system. A high level of lock-in is therefore not evidence of indispensability unless it is accompanied by an indicator of supplier concentration. (ii) The upper bound from recipient-side counteraction: a rise in switching costs raises, for the receiving side, the cost of continuing the relationship concerned, and therefore simultaneously raises the incentive towards in-house provision, multi-sourcing, and the institutionalization of requirements of portability. Desirability therefore reaches an upper bound at the point at which the receiving side prefers to "recover autonomy even at the price of paying the switching cost". The level of the upper bound is a function of (a) the national brain capital remaining on the receiving side in the domain concerned, (b) the existence of alternative suppliers, and (c) the severity of the consequences of failure in the domain concerned. Falsification condition As to (i) — if it is observed that in domains where the level of lock-in is high supplier concentration is also systematically high, the distinction between the two is rejected. As to (ii) — if it is observed that the frequency of in-house provision, multi-sourcing and the institutionalization of requirements of portability on the receiving side does not rise as switching costs rise, the existence of the upper bound is rejected. If the level of the upper bound is not explained by the three variables (a), (b) and (c), the claim about the determinants of the upper bound is rejected. (i) Lock-in and indispensability are different properties — this is the core of the present subsection. The counterargument derives indispensability from the height of switching costs. Proposition 42(i) states that this inference does not hold. The two concepts differ in the subject of the question. Indispensability is the property of whether a third party can bypass the actor concerned. Definition 15 defines indispensability as the magnitude of the cost and dysfunction that would arise were other states to attempt to bypass or exclude the state concerned, and states that it is measured by the holding of chokepoints on the supply network, the absence of alternative suppliers, and the time required to switch. What is asked is whether, for the system as a whole, including those that do not currently transact with the actor concerned, a route exists that does not pass through that actor. 397 Lock-in is the property of whether a party already engaged can leave. What is asked is, for an individual counterparty that currently stands in a relationship with the actor concerned, how great the cost of dissolving the relationship is. What Section 12.5.2 decomposed into four conformity investments is this binding within an individual relationship. The two questions are posed over different sets. It is therefore possible, both logically and empirically, for one to stand at a high level while the other stands at a low level. Suppose an exporting side holds relationships with several jurisdictions and that in every one of them the switching cost is extremely high. Suppose at the same time that the jurisdictions able to supply a system of the same kind exceed in number the relationships already formed. That exporting side then holds a strong position in each of its existing relationships, while it is easy for jurisdictions not yet engaged with it to bypass it. Strength in an individual relationship does not imply non-substitutability within the system. The converse combination also holds — for a good for which no alternative supplier exists, if individual transactional relationships are constituted by short-term contracts and switching costs are low, indispensability is high and lock-in is low. The sources of the indispensability of the semiconductor foundry are reread in the light of this distinction. Section 12.1.7 attributed those sources to three things: the scale of capital investment, the availability of manufacturing equipment, and the simultaneous optimization of the accumulation required for yield. What the three conjointly generate is not the height of switching costs — it is the limitation of the number of actors able to enter. Where the minimum efficient scale is large relative to world demand, the actors able to enter are confined to a small number. A semiconductor foundry possesses indispensability not because switching is costly for its customers but because alternative suppliers in the world can be counted on the fingers. Even were switching costs at the same level, if several dozen alternative suppliers existed, bypassing would exist as a costly but real option, and indispensability would not hold. This distinction is the core of the defensive logic that protects the verdict of Section 12.1.7. The ground of the verdict of Section 12.1.7 is therefore made precise as follows. Indispensability does not transfer to the AI Foundry State not because switching costs are low — switching costs may be high. It does not transfer because what separates actors from entry is a wall of time, and because a wall of time can be crossed by several jurisdictions in parallel, the number of alternative suppliers is not narrowed as it is in semiconductors. When Section 12.1.7 contrasted a wall that "limits the very number of actors that can cross" with a wall that "several jurisdictions can cross in parallel", it was stating this ground. Proposition 42(i) formalizes that contrast as a rule of measurement. The consequence for measurement. From Proposition 42(i) a rule follows. A high level of lock-in is not evidence of indispensability unless it is accompanied by an indicator of supplier concentration. Even where high switching costs are observed for a given domain, that alone does not establish that the exporting side is indispensable. The adjudication requires a second observation — how many jurisdictions exist that could supply a system of the same kind for that domain. That Definition 4 (Section 13) included the HHI 398 of supplier concentration among the components of the indicator of dependence, and that Proposition 37 (Section 13) distinguished the reduction of exposure from the concentration of dependence, both correspond to this second observation. Within the framework of this section, the adjudication of indispensability always requires a pair of observations. This rule also carries an implication for the exporting side — indispensability cannot be acquired by raising the switching costs of individual receiving sides. Acquiring indispensability requires reducing the number of suppliers, and, as Section 12.1.7 adjudged, that logic does not operate for systems of transformation. 12.5.7 The Upper Bound from Recipient-Side Counteraction — Proposition 42(ii) The second limit of Proposition 42 is inherent in the mechanism of self-reinforcement itself. A rise in switching costs has two effects on the receiving side at once. The first is the effect stated by Proposition 38 — dissolving the relationship becomes difficult. The second is an effect Proposition 38 did not state — the cost of continuing the relationship also rises. That switching costs are high means that the option of leaving the relationship is expensive, and that is nothing other than one's own position in negotiation being weak. A relationship continued from a weak position may be disadvantageous in price, in terms and in renewal. A rise in switching costs therefore simultaneously gives the receiving side an incentive to recover autonomy. The incentive manifests in three ways. First, in-house provision. The in-house provision of part of the operation and the plan of staged in-house provision that Section 12.7.3 lists as means of mitigation rise in priority for execution the more switching costs are perceived to be high. Second, multi-sourcing. Operating several systems in parallel for the same domain, or dividing the domain and allocating the parts to different suppliers, weakens the binding to a single relationship. That Section 12.6.5 requires the monitoring of supplier concentration in the aggregate is a demand for institutionalizing this incentive. Third, the institutionalization of requirements of portability. Beyond negotiation in individual procurements (the first constraint of Section 12.5.4), this consists in laying down, for procurement in the domain generally, alignment of interfaces with public standards, the standardization of record formats, and the migratability of data as requirements. Unlike individual negotiation, institutionalized requirements operate even after adoption has deepened — because they apply at the next procurement and at the next renewal. From this the upper bound follows. Desirability reaches an upper bound at the point at which the receiving side prefers to "recover autonomy even at the price of paying the switching cost". This point cannot be exceeded however far switching costs rise, because the rise in switching costs itself raises the value to the receiving side of recovering autonomy. The mechanism of self-reinforcement generates, by its own operation, a component that presses down its own upper bound. This is the content of Proposition 42(ii). 399 The three variables that determine the level of the upper bound. Proposition 42(ii) states that the upper bound is a function of (a) the national brain capital remaining on the receiving side in the domain concerned, (b) the existence of alternative suppliers, and (c) the severity of the consequences of failure in the domain concerned. The direction in which each acts is made explicit. (a) The national brain capital remaining on the receiving side in the domain concerned. This acts in the direction of lowering the upper bound — the thicker what remains, the more the recovery of autonomy becomes a realistic option and the lower the upper bound of desirability. Conversely, in domains where, as Section 12.7.2 argues, the procurement of integrated systems has removed the opportunity for formation, what remains is thin and the very capability to conceive of recovering autonomy is lacking. The circularity noted at the close of Section 12.8.2 — that the capability to negotiate itself depends on what Proposition 24 erodes — operates for the level of the upper bound as well. The upper bound of Proposition 42(ii) is therefore placed at a low level only where the receiving side has designed mitigation. For a receiving side that has not designed mitigation, the upper bound is high. (b) The existence of alternative suppliers. This too acts in the direction of lowering the upper bound, because the recovery of autonomy may be achieved not only by in-house provision but by switching to another supplier. This variable connects directly with Proposition 42(i) — low supplier concentration not only fails to establish indispensability but also presses down the upper bound of desirability. The second constraint of Section 12.5.4 (where several systems compete) is another description of this action. (c) The severity of the consequences of failure in the domain concerned. This acts in the direction of raising the upper bound. As Section 12.2.3 formalized, in domains where the consequences are severe the cost of the route of accumulating failures oneself is excessive, and the cost to the receiving side of recovering autonomy is itself high. In domains where (a) among the three variables of Proposition 40 is high — precisely the domains in which the procurement of integrated systems is readily chosen — the upper bound of desirability is therefore highest. The domains in which the export of integrated systems is most readily established and the domains in which the upper bound of self-reinforcement is highest coincide. This is also a result that specifies the range within which the mechanism of Proposition 38 operates effectively. 12.5.8 Resolving a Limitation Acknowledged in Section 20, and the Implications for the Exporting Side This subsection gives a solution to one of the limitations this paper acknowledges. Section 20.9(d) acknowledged that "no upper bound has been formalized for the self-reinforcement of Proposition 38", and, while allowing that Section 12.5.4 made three constraints explicit, stated that "this paper does not formalize at what level the rise in switching costs levels off" and that "the three constraints indicate directions in which the mechanism is attenuated but do not give the degree of attenuation". Proposition 42(ii) fills this

absence. The upper bound is defined not by the absolute level of switching costs but by the point at which the receiving side's preferences turn — the point at which paying the switching cost ceases to fall below the value of recovering autonomy. And the level of the upper bound is given as a function of three variables. The extent of the resolution should not, however, be overstated. What Proposition 42(ii) gives is the existence and the determinants of the upper bound, not its magnitude. Of what Section 20.9(d) called for — "a formulation that gives an upper bound to the appreciation of desirability, with the ratio of system-specificity of conformity investments, the number of competing systems and the speed of obsolescence as variables" — what this subsection gives is the identification of the variables and the direction of their action; the functional form and the magnitude are still not given. The acknowledgement in Section 20.9(d) is therefore not resolved but narrowed in scope — from an acknowledgement that no upper bound has been formalized to an acknowledgement that the magnitude of the upper bound has not been formalized. Section 20 should be read as reflecting this narrowing. The corresponding coarseness left with respect to Proposition 23, in the coding of exercise (Section 20.9(c)), has received no corresponding narrowing. The dynamics of the two components of leverage have thus acquired, on the side of desirability alone, the structure of an upper bound in addition to a sign. The implication for the exporting side — excessive pursuit of self-reinforcement invites counteraction. Proposition 42 gives a direct guideline for the strategy of the exporting side. Read alone, Proposition 38 yields the guideline "raise the degree to which conformity investments are specific to the system" — for the more the interface is kept undisclosed, the more the format of records is made proprietary, and the more the content of training is skewed towards the operation of the system, the higher switching costs rise. Proposition 42 denies this reading. First, what is thereby obtained is lock-in, not indispensability (Proposition 42(i)). Second, because a rise in switching costs simultaneously raises the receiving side's incentives towards in-house provision, multi-sourcing and requirements of portability, counteraction grows stronger the closer the upper bound is approached (Proposition 42(ii)). That is, a strategy that pursues self-reinforcement excessively itself damages the conditions for the formation of its own asset. Unless adoption occurs, desirability does not accumulate (Section 12.5.1); but if adoption is used as an instrument of binding, the next adoption becomes less likely to occur. This counteraction may take observable forms in the jurisdiction of the receiving side. First, in the form of Proposition 6b (Section 8). Proposition 6b states the structure — extractive distortion — whereby the greater the scale of computational infrastructure attracted to a region, the lower the ratios of local value added, employment and inter-firm transactions relative to the resources granted. An assessment of the same form may arise on the receiving side in the procurement of integrated systems too. A state in which the operation of the domain concerned depends on an external system, authentic data do not remain within the receiving jurisdiction, and practitioners acquire only knowledge of the operation of components is, seen from the receiving side, a state in which little remains in 401 return for the substance of the operations given over. The structure that Section 12.7.2 describes neutrally from the exporting side's standpoint as "the loss of the opportunity for formation" may appear in the language of the receiving side's policy accompanied by a different assessment. Second, that assessment appears as a change in the procurement requirements of the domain concerned — the institutionalization of portability requirements, requirements for the retention of data within the territory, and the writing of in-house provision obligations into clauses. All of these are institutional expressions of the incentive to recover autonomy stated by Proposition 42(ii). The argument of this subsection is not about relations between particular states. As Section 12.8.3 makes explicit, exporting side and importing side are structural positions in a particular domain and not attributes of jurisdictions. Counteraction arises not because a particular state adopts a particular policy but from the structure whereby a rise in switching costs gives an actor placed in the position of the receiving side an incentive to recover autonomy. The same jurisdiction stands on the side generating counteraction in one domain and on the side receiving it in another. This paper evaluates the merits of the conduct of neither side. What is described is confined to the structure whereby the pursuit of self-reinforcement and the inducement of counteraction are the obverse and reverse of one and the same mechanism. Knowing this structure gives the exporting side grounds for a design conscious of the upper bound, and gives the receiving side grounds for treating the mitigation of Section 12.7.3 not as mere defence but as a means that actually lowers the upper bound. 12.6 The Procurement Portfolio of the Importing Side The vantage point now moves to the receiving side. The argument to this point has been an analysis of what the exporting side is selling. Seen from the importing side, the same structure is a choice of what to buy. 402 Proposition 40 (Portfolio of Procurement Modes) For the side that imports capability there are three modes of procurement — (A) construction within one's own jurisdiction, (B) procurement of capability (obtaining access to a model only and performing integration oneself), and (C) procurement of integrated systems (receiving the system of Definition 20). The domains to which the three modes are suited are governed by three variables: (a) the severity of the consequences of failure, (b) the domain-specificity of judgement (how far the judgements of the domain concerned depend on the institutions, language and practices of one's own jurisdiction), and (c) reversibility (whether errors can be recovered after the fact). That is, in domains where (a) is high, (b) is low and (c) is low, (C) is superior (because the cost of accumulating failures oneself is excessive); in domains where (a) is low, (B) is superior (because there is no reason to pay the sovereignty premium, Definition 19); and in domains where (b) is high, (A) is superior (because the system of another jurisdiction cannot substitute for the judgements of one's own). In a domain where (C) is chosen, however, the opportunity to form national brain capital in that domain is lost (Proposition 24). The choice of (C) therefore implies a decision to entrust the domain concerned to an external system into the future, and that decision must be made explicitly, domain by domain. Falsification condition If no correspondence is observed between the levels of the three variables and the procurement mode actually adopted, this proposition is rejected. If it is observed that in domains where (C) has been adopted the indicators of the formation of practitioners' capacity for judgement do not differ from those in domains where (A) or (B) has been adopted, the claim concerning the loss of the opportunity for formation is rejected. 12.6.1 The Content of the Three Modes The three modes are the three forms of Section 12.1 seen from the receiving side, but the correspondence is not one to one. (A) Construction within one's own jurisdiction scarcely exists in the pure form of procuring neither capability nor products from outside. What it actually means is that the design of integration, the allocation of liability, the certification of conformity and the core of operation are retained by actors of one's own jurisdiction, and this is compatible with procuring foundation models and equipment from outside. The distinction between (A) and (B) lies, that is, in the range of what is procured — (B) buys capability and performs integration itself, while (A) buys capability and in addition designs the integration itself and includes forming within its own jurisdiction the human stratum that carries out that design. Strictly, (A) includes (B) while adding the choice of placing the productive capability for the system within one's own jurisdiction. The choice among the three modes is the counterpart at the level of the jurisdiction of the boundary problem of "make or buy" in the theory of the firm. Coase (1937) argued that be‐ 403 cause transacting in the market carries costs, activity is taken inside the firm to the extent that those costs exceed the cost of coordinating internally, and Williamson (1985) governed that boundary by asset specificity, uncertainty and frequency of transaction. What this paper inherits is the structure whereby the boundary is determined not by technology but by a comparison of costs — the form in which Proposition 40 governs the mode by three variables is precisely the form of boundary determination by transaction costs. Where this paper differs is in the content of the costs compared. In transaction-cost theory what prompts internalization is the need to protect oneself against an opportunistic counterparty. What prompts (C), the procurement of integrated systems, in Proposition 40 is the opposite: the cost of accumulating failures oneself ((α-2) of Section 12.2.3) — it is not wariness of the counterparty but the closure of the learning route within one's own jurisdiction that becomes the reason for externalization. Second, whereas in transactioncost theory the choice of the boundary is a reversible management decision, the choice of (C) in Proposition 40 removes the opportunity to form national brain capital in the domain concerned (Proposition 24), so that the choice itself narrows the option set of the next period. Third, the actor bearing the cost and the actor receiving the benefit do not coincide — the procurement decision is made by individual actors, while the loss of the opportunity for formation accumulates at the level of the jurisdiction. This divergence is of the same form as the inter-layer conflict of interest that Proposition 31 stated about redundancy, and is not corrected if the matter is left to market choice. The three modes of this subsection are therefore not a rule of cost minimization but a rule for making explicit the exchange between cost and future options. (C) The procurement of integrated systems consists in receiving the five elements of Definition 20 as a bundle. Under this mode, the receiving side depends for the domain concerned on an external actor for the design of the system, the construction of the allocation of liability, the procedures of conformity certification, and the core of operation. 12.6.2 The Meaning and Measurement of the Three Variables (a) The severity of the consequences of failure. The magnitude of the damage that arises where an error occurs in the domain concerned. It is measured as the effect on life, body, property, rights and social functions. This variable governs (α-2) among the costs of route α in Section 12.2.3. The higher the severity, the higher the cost of the route of learning by accumulating failures oneself, and the stronger the incentive to receive a completed system. (b) The domain-specificity of judgement. How far the judgements of the domain concerned depend on the institutions, language and practices of one's own jurisdiction. It is the portability of Proposition 39(iv) seen as a variable from the receiving side. The higher the specificity, the less the system of another jurisdiction can substitute for the judgements of the jurisdiction concerned, and the less it functions when transplanted. This variable is a concept corresponding to institutional embeddedness and linguistic-contex‐ 404 tual specificity among the four indicators of Proposition 4, but the direction of measurement is reversed — the four indicators measure the defensibility of the transformer, whereas (b) measures the difficulty of transplantation for the receiving side. (c) Reversibility. Whether errors can be recovered after the fact. If an erroneous judgement can be detected, cancelled and the prior state restored, reversibility is high. In domains accompanied by irrecoverable consequences — life, body, the determination of rights, the alteration of public records — reversibility is low. Reversibility correlates with (a) but is independent of it. There are domains where the amount of damage is small but recovery is impossible, and domains where the amount of damage is large but recovery is possible. The measurement of the three variables remains in each case a qualitative assessment domain by domain. This paper presents no quantitative scale. What it presents is a rule for deriving the procurement mode from the combination of the levels of the three variables, and the application of the rule involves the judgement of each jurisdiction. This limitation is consistent with the constraint of administrative capacity stated by Proposition 36 (Section 19) — a framework demanding refined measurement is either not implemented or becomes a formality. 12.6.3 Correspondences by Domain — Table 26 The rule of Proposition 40 is applied to examples of domains. The table below assesses the levels of the three variables for each domain and shows the recommended mode and the reason for it. The assessments are illustrative, and the actual levels in each jurisdiction depend on the institutions of that jurisdiction. (b) in particular differs greatly across jurisdictions. Table 26. Levels of the three variables by domain and the corresponding procurement mode (illustrative) Domain (a) Severity of consequences (b) Domain-specificity (c) Reversibility Recommended mode Reason General drafting and translation Low Medium (depends on language) High (B) Procurement of capability Errors can be corrected after the fact and the consequences are small. There is no reason to pay the sovereignty premium (Definition 19). Linguistic adaptation can be handled in pre-processing and post-processing Search and organization of information Low Low High (B) Procurement of capability All three variables point to (B). Where sensitive information is handled, however, the constraint of the sensitive-processing condi‐ 405 Domain (a) Severity of consequences (b) Domain-specificity (c) Reversibility Recommended mode Reason tion of Definition 6(i-c) applies separately Manufacturing inspection Medium to high Low to medium (process-specific but with low jurisdiction- specificity) Medium (C) as the axis, with (B) alongside The judgements concern physical processes and differ little across jurisdictions. The consequences of defective output escaping are heavy but partially recoverable through recall. Where a physical interface exists within one's own jurisdiction, a route of ascent to (A) is opened Traffic control High Medium to high (signalling schemes and operating rules are jurisdiction-specific) Low (C) with the jurisdictionspecific parts under (A) The consequences are severe and irreversible. On the other hand, because rules and equipment are jurisdiction-specific, a division is required in which the core of the system is procured and the parts conforming to rules are constituted within one's own jurisdiction Diagnostic support in medicine High Medium (clinical guidelines and reimbursement systems are jurisdiction- specific) Medium A mixture of (C) and (A) The route of accumulating failures oneself is closed both ethically and institutionally. On the other hand, the system of clinical practice has high jurisdiction-specificity and wholesale (C) does not function Credit assessment in finance High High (depends on credit practice, legal regime and the system of debt recovery) Medium (A) as the axis, with (B)/(C) as components Judgement depends deeply on the institutions of one's own jurisdiction, and the systems of other jurisdictions do not function when transplanted. Base capability and individual components may be procured Administrative procedure Medium to high High (depends on statutes, forms and the allocation of official competences) Medium (A), with base components under (B)/ (C) The content of judgement is the statute itself and cannot be transplanted. On the other hand, the base infrastructure of authentication, form verification and connection may be procured so far as it conforms to standards Civil registration and tax infrastructure High Very high (inseparable from legal effects) Very low (A) Construction within one's own Errors in records directly determine or alter legal relations, and recovery is difficult. Judgement is inseparable from legal effects, and portability is low in principle 406 Domain (a) Severity of consequences (b) Domain-specificity (c) Reversibility Recommended mode Reason jurisdiction Processes relating to national security Highest High Lowest (A) Construction within one's own jurisdiction The consequences are irreversible, and dependence on an external system is itself incompatible with the purpose of the domain. The sensitive-processing condition of Definition 6(i-c) applies directly Three observations follow from Table 26. First, the domains in which (C) is superior are narrow. What Proposition 40 lists as the condition for (C) is the combination of (a) high, (b) low and (c) low, but this combination is in fact rare. Domains where the consequences are severe are in most cases governed by jurisdiction-specific institutions, and (b) is therefore also high. Domains where (a) is high and (b) is low are concentrated in domains close to physical processes. This coincides with the range specified in Section 12.4.1 as the exportable region of Type (A). The exportable region on the supply side and the region suited to (C) on the demand side are delimited by the same conditions. Second, many domains demand a mixture. The domains suited to pure (A), (B) or (C) lie at the two ends, and in intermediate domains a different mode suits each layer of the system. This fact means that the procurement decision is not a decision about "which mode to choose" but about "which layer of the system to procure under which mode". The separation that Section 12.3.5 discussed as a design matter for the exporting side appears for the receiving side as the design of the unit of procurement. To procure a system that is not separated is to abandon the option of mixture. Third, the choice of mode should be made independently domain by domain. The close of Proposition 40 states that the choice of (C) implies a decision to entrust the domain concerned to an external system into the future, and that this decision must be made explicitly, domain by domain. In practice, procurement decisions are often made as individual cases by comparison of cost and delivery. At that level the implication does not appear. It appears only after decisions of the same kind have accumulated across many domains. Requiring an explicit decision domain by domain therefore means raising the level of decision from the case to the domain. 407 Figure 13. The three procurement modes and the domains to which they correspond. Vertical axis = severity of the consequences of failure; horizontal axis = domain-specificity of judgement. The plane is divided into three regions — (A) construction within one's own jurisdiction, (B) procurement of capability and (C) procurement of integrated systems — and the arrows show that the boundaries move with reversibility. 12.6.4 The Connection to the Sovereignty Premium The reason Proposition 40 recommends (B) for domains where (a) is low is that "there is no reason to pay the sovereignty premium (Definition 19)". This connection is now unfolded. Definition 19 (Section 19) defined the sovereignty premium as the difference between the unit cost of using compute, data and models guaranteed domestically or within an alliance and the unit cost of procuring them from an unconstrained international market. Proposition 30 (Section 19) stated that under economies of scale this difference is larger the further the guaranteed scale falls below the minimum efficient scale; that domestic guarantee is therefore justified only as insurance and not on grounds of efficiency; and that justification as insurance holds only where the total sovereignty premium falls below the expected value of the losses avoided in the event of a supply stoppage. (A) in Proposition 40 is the choice to pay this sovereignty premium. What Section 19 treated, however, was the premium on inputs — compute, data and models — whereas Definition 20, Proposition 40 Severity of the consequences of failure Domain-specificity of judgement (dependence on the institutions, language and practice of one's own jurisdiction) High Low Low High (C) Procurement of integrated systems Repeated failure is too costly; the system is transplantable Traffic control Diagnostic support in medicine Manufacturing inspection (A) Construction within one's own jurisdiction No external system can substitute for judgement in one's own jurisdiction Processes relating to national security Civil registration and tax infrastructure Credit assessment in finance Administrative procedure (B) Procurement of capability The consequences are small; avoid a sovereignty premium there is no reason to pay Search and organization of information General drafting and translation The lower the reversibility, the further (C) extends downward Dotted = the boundary where reversibility is low. The boundaries are not fixed and move with a third variable (Proposition 40(c)). In a domain where (C) is chosen, the opportunity to form national brain capital there is lost (Propositions 24, 40). The domains are illustrative, following Table 26, and the levels of the three variables differ by jurisdiction. Domains near a boundary require different modes for different layers of the system. 408 the premium generated by (A) in Proposition 40 is a premium on systems. The two lie at different levels, but the structure is the same — the unit cost of a system built within one's own jurisdiction exceeds the unit cost of receiving a system already built elsewhere. The margin by which it exceeds is larger the smaller the scale of the domain concerned within one's own jurisdiction. Accordingly, to choose (A) in a domain where the severity of consequences is low is to pay a sovereignty premium there is no reason to pay. In the words of Proposition 30, it is to pay an insurance premium in a domain where the justification as insurance does not hold, and in that case a value greater than the value protected is destroyed. This consequence arises in procurement practice where the judgement "because important information is handled, it must be done in-house" is applied without passing through an assessment of the nature of the domain. The ground of judgement must be not the importance of the information but the severity of the consequences of failure and reversibility. The converse error arises likewise. To choose (C) in a domain where the severity of consequences is high, reversibility is low, and the domain-specificity of judgement is also high, is to fail to pay an insurance premium that ought to be paid. In that case the saving of cost appears in the current period and the cost appears in the future — in the form of the loss of the opportunity for formation discussed in Section 12.7 and the rise in switching costs discussed in Section 12.5. The practical value of Proposition 40 lies in errors in both directions being identified by the same framework. The sovereignty premium set against the erosion of brain capital. Organizing the foregoing, the choice of Proposition 40 can be rewritten as a choice between two costs. The two costs differ in kind, differ in the timing of their occurrence, and differ in how readily they are observed. If (A) construction within one's own jurisdiction is chosen, the national brain capital of the domain concerned is protected but a sovereignty premium arises. So long as the design of the system, the construction of the allocation of liability, the procedures of conformity certification and the core of operation are borne by actors of one's own jurisdiction, the practitioners of that domain judge, fail and correct. The national brain capital of Definition 11 is formed only through this repetition. At the same time, the unit cost of a system built within one's own jurisdiction exceeds the unit cost of receiving a system already built elsewhere, and that difference is the sovereignty premium (Definition 19). As Proposition 30 (Section 19) stated, this difference is larger the further the guaranteed scale falls below the minimum efficient scale, is not justified from the standpoint of efficiency, and is justified only as insurance. This cost appears in the current period, as a line item, in observable form. In a comparison of budgets, that an in-house system costs more is plain to everyone. If (C) procurement of integrated systems is chosen, the cost in the current period falls but the national brain capital of the domain concerned is eroded. As Section 12.2.3 formalized, in domains where the total cost of route α exceeds the total cost of route 409 β, procurement is rational. But as Section 12.7.2 argues, the procurement of integrated systems is the setting in which Proposition 24 (Section 17) operates most strongly, and the erosion arises not as a side effect of use but as a direct consequence of the procurement mode. The very repetition of judgement, failure and correction in the domain concerned is placed outside one's own jurisdiction. This cost appears in the future, in a form that has no line item. That in ten years' time the stratum of practitioners in that domain will hold only knowledge of the operation of components is entered in no budget. The choice by the three variables of Proposition 40 is therefore a choice made upon an opposition of cost against risk. (A) bears a determinate cost in the current period and preserves future options. (C) saves cost in the current period and bears the risk of narrowing future options. The three variables — the severity of the consequences of failure, the domain-specificity of judgement, and reversibility — are a device for adjudging which side of this opposition weighs more heavily for the domain concerned; they are not a device for dissolving the opposition itself. A cost arises whichever is chosen. The practical value of Proposition 40 lies in the two costs being compared within the same framework — look only at the sovereignty premium and (A) always costs more; look only at the erosion of brain capital and (C) is always dangerous. This opposition builds a logical bridge to Section 19. Section 19 is the section that counts the costs which the recommendations of this paper themselves incur, and treats the sovereignty premium (Definition 19, Proposition 30), the fiscal ceiling, the cost of capital for redundancy, and the consumption of administrative capacity. What this section has stated about the choice of (A) is one manifestation of those costs — a recommendation carrying the implication "build within your own jurisdiction" necessarily entails the payment of a sovereignty premium. Conversely, what this section has stated about the choice of (C) shows the existence of a kind of cost that Section 19 does not treat — a cost that has no line item, appears in the future, and accumulates through the mechanism of Proposition 24. The list of costs in Section 19 did not include costs of this kind. Section 19 should therefore be read in the light of the opposition set out in this section — counting the costs of a recommendation is important, but if the cost of not following the recommendation is not counted, the comparison stands on one side only. The three variables of Proposition 40 are the minimum device for conducting this two-sided comparison domain by domain. It should be added that the three variables of Proposition 40 and the three criteria of the graduated treatment of data presented in Section 19.6 (confidentiality, reversibility, substitutability) share reversibility and differ in the rest. The two frameworks have different objects — Section 19.6 gives a principle for dividing places of processing for data, and Proposition 40 gives a principle for choosing the procurement mode for systems. For a given domain, the combination of confining data to domestic processing while procuring the system, and the converse, are both structurally possible. Not confusing the two is important in the design of procurement. 410

12.6.5 Procurement as a Portfolio Proposition 40 is titled a portfolio because the three modes are not exclusive options but an allocation over a set of domains. The whole of a state's procurement is described as the set of choices of mode domain by domain. This description is of the same form as the structure in Definition 3 whereby the nine cells are not a single position but a weighted portfolio. Two standpoints that do not appear in the assessment of individual domains are added in the assessment of a portfolio. First, the concentration of suppliers. Where (C) is chosen for several domains and the supplier is the same, the correlation that Proposition 7 (Section 13) formalized as the structure of AI outage arises. This is a fallacy of composition, in which choices rational in individual domains raise the vulnerability of the system as a whole in the aggregate. The choice of (C) should therefore be made independently domain by domain and, at the same time, concentration in the aggregate must be monitored. The structure that Proposition 37 (Section 13) stated as the relation between the reduction of exposure and the concentration of dependence appears here for the choice of procurement mode — it can happen that external dependence is reduced in total while the dependence that remains is concentrated in a single system. Second, the movability between modes. Movement from (C) to (A) requires the formation of national brain capital in the domain concerned and therefore has a long time constant (the structure of upward transition in Proposition 15, Section 15). Movement from (A) to (C) consists in halting an existing system and receiving an external one, and can be executed in the short run. This asymmetry is of the same form as the asymmetry Proposition 15 stated about transitions on the nine cells. The assessment of a portfolio must therefore include not only the present allocation but the alterability of the future allocation. The capacity for cell movement that Section 17 lists as an element of a state's Λ (the range of future value that can be priced) appears, at the level of procurement, as the capacity to alter the mode. 12.7 The Risks Attending the Import of Integrated Systems The risks arising in a domain where (C) the procurement of integrated systems has been chosen are discussed under two heads, and a design of mitigation is set out. 12.7.1 (a) Pressure in the Direction of Institutions Being Made to Conform to the System The first risk is the reverse face of Proposition 38. Proposition 38 stated that the adoption of an integrated system requires four conformity investments of the receiving side. Conformity investment consists in fitting the business processes, contracts, supervisory procedures and personnel of the receiving side to the premises of the system. This work of fit‐ 411 ting may proceed not in the direction of the system conforming to the institutions of the receiving side but in the direction of the institutions of the receiving side conforming to the system. Progress in this direction arises by four paths. First, from the side of business processes. Where the segmentation of processes the system presupposes differs from the receiving side's existing segmentation, one or the other must be changed. Changing the system is a cost to the exporting side; changing the receiving side is a cost to the receiving side. Which is changed is determined by the disposition of bargaining power. In many cases, because the system is supplied to many jurisdictions, the incentive to change it for a single receiving side is small. Second, from the side of supervisory procedures. For an authority to accept the system's certification of conformity, the form of certification must fit the authority's procedures. For the authority to fit its own procedures to the form of the system may be rational as a reduction of its own burden. Where this fitting is repeated across several systems, the authority's procedures themselves converge on the forms of a particular group of systems. Third, from the side of standards. Where the standards the system references differ from the standards of the receiving jurisdiction, a motive arises for the receiving side to align its standards with international standards. This alignment generally has desirable effects, but at the same time the choice of which standard to align with governs which systems become easier to accept. Fourth, from the side of education and qualifications. Once the training of the personnel who operate the system is institutionalized, the content of vocational education in the domain concerned comes to include the premises of the system. At this stage, conformity is no longer the choice of individual organizations but is built into the structure of the supply of personnel in that domain. None of the four paths is more than a small change on its own. What arises when they accumulate is a state in which the institutions of the receiving side have been reconstituted on the premise of the system concerned, and in that state a change of system means a change of institutions. The rise in switching costs occurs, in this sense, at the level of institutions. What matters here is that this process need not be explained by the intention of the exporting side. Each stage of conformity is explained as cost minimization for actors on the receiving side. Attribution of intent is not based on observation and is not undertaken by this paper. What is described is the structure whereby the accumulation of cost minimization appears as a reconstitution of institutions. 12.7.2 (b) The Loss of the Opportunity to Form National Brain Capital in the Domain Concerned The second risk is the one this section weighs most heavily. Proposition 24 (Section 17) stated that the formation of national brain capital requires the repetition of human prac‐ 412 tice in the domain concerned, and that national brain capital is eroded to the degree that dependence on imported cognitive capability substitutes for that repetition. Section 17.4.5 divided the modes of substitution into displacement and hollowing-out and argued that the latter more readily escapes observation. The claim of this subsection is that the procurement of integrated systems is the setting in which Proposition 24 operates most strongly. The reason is shown by contrast with the two other settings Proposition 24 envisages. The first contrast is with (B) the procurement of capability. Where capability is procured and integration performed in-house, the practitioners of the domain concerned themselves design where to place the capability, how to verify it, and how to handle errors. In the course of that design, failures occur, corrections are made, and records accumulate. That is, the "history of failure and correction" that Proposition 39(iii) lists as a condition of export accumulates on the receiving side. That accumulation is precisely the formation of national brain capital. The procurement of capability externalizes the instrument of judgement but does not externalize judgement itself. The second contrast is with the setting Proposition 24 principally envisaged in Section 17 — the substitution of the repetition of practice that accompanies the deepening of utilization. In that setting, erosion arises as a side effect of use. It is the structure whereby, as people use assistance in the process of judgement, the occasions for unassisted judgement decrease, and its degree depends on the design of use. That Section 17 listed "protected unassisted practice" as a prescription from brain capital management (Kadowaki, 2026e) is because this side effect is controllable by design. In the procurement of integrated systems the case is different. The procurement of integrated systems means, by Definition 20, receiving from an external actor the design of business processes, the construction of the allocation of liability, the procedures of conformity certification, and the core of operation in the domain concerned. All of these are nothing other than knowledge formed by the practitioners of that domain judging, failing and correcting. To procure an integrated system is to externalize the very process of that formation. The erosion therefore arises not as a side effect of use but as a direct consequence of the procurement mode. The prescription of protecting unassisted practice does not work here — because the judgement that is the object of practice has itself been placed outside the practice of one's own jurisdiction. This difference may be restated from the standpoint of time. Under (B), in ten years' time the domain concerned holds a stratum of practitioners with ten years of experience of design and correction. Under (C), in ten years' time the domain concerned holds a stratum of practitioners with ten years of experience of operating the system concerned. The latter is not a subset of the former. Experience of operating a system does not generate the capability to design one. As Henderson & Clark (1990) distinguished architectural knowledge from component knowledge, becoming proficient in the operation of components is knowledge different from the capability to design the arrangement of components. What 413 remains on the receiving side in the procurement of integrated systems is knowledge of the operation of components, and what is lost is architectural knowledge. This consequence can be reread against the four conditions of Proposition 39. Asking, ten years on, whether the jurisdiction concerned could carry out the export of integrated systems in the same domain: (i) domain-specific national brain capital is thin, and (iii) the operational track record within its own jurisdiction is a track record of operating that system, not a track record of a system of its own. That is, the procurement of integrated systems closes off the future possibility of export in the domain concerned. It is this structure to which the close of Proposition 40 refers when it says that the choice "implies a decision to entrust the domain concerned to an external system into the future". Moreover, this loss is not confined to the domain concerned. Among the four components of the national brain capital of Definition 11, the capacity for audit based on long domain experience is the foundation of the capability to verify the outputs of AI (Section 17.4). Where this capacity is not formed in a given domain, verification in that domain depends on the verification procedures the supplier of the system provides. A state in which verifier and verified belong to the same system is a state in which independent verification does not hold. This state impairs in substance the third-party character of conformity assessment that Proposition 25 (Section 11) listed as a condition of trust infrastructure. Even where a third party formally carries out the verification, if the framework of verification is itself supplied by the side being verified, the independence remains nominal. 12.7.3 (c) Designing Mitigation Risk is the consequence of choice, and avoiding the choice is not always possible. As Table 26 showed, in domains where the consequences are severe, reversibility is low and the domain-specificity of judgement is low, (C) may be rational. What is needed is therefore not to avoid (C) but to design mitigation for the case in which (C) is chosen. Five means are set out. First, the reservation of powers of audit to one's own jurisdiction. This consists in reserving contractually a power for the receiving side to inspect independently the operation of the system. The powers to be reserved include full access to records, verification of operating conditions, prior notification of and an opportunity to evaluate updates, and an obligation to report deviation events. For this reservation to have substance, the receiving side needs a human stratum able to carry out inspection. Where the power alone is reserved without the capability to exercise it, the reservation remains formal. Second, the retention of authentic data within one's own jurisdiction. Definition 16 (Section 17) defined authentic data as data generated directly from human acts or physical processes and whose provenance is verifiable. Proposition 27 (Section 17) stated that as the proportion of generated artefacts rises, the marginal value of data whose provenance is verifiable rises. In the procurement of integrated systems, where the authentic data generated from the operation of the domain concerned belong is a matter for the design 414 of the contract. Under a configuration in which the data belong to the supplier of the system and the receiving side receives only processed outputs, the receiving side does not accumulate authentic data for the domain concerned. This absence of accumulation acts directly on future transformation capability, as an absence of the exclusive data endowment of Proposition 4. The content of the reservation is not confined to the attribution of ownership. What is substantively required is three things: (1) that the data be stored within one's own jurisdiction; (2) that the receiving side be able to use them independently (that a range of use not requiring the supplier's permission be laid down); and (3) that they be held in a form migratable even where the system is switched. The third point connects directly with the first constraint of Section 12.5.4 — the generality of conformity investments. Third, the in-house provision of part of the operation. This consists in not entrusting the whole of the operation of the system and having practitioners of one's own jurisdiction carry out some of the stages. The choice of which stages to provide in-house is important. Providing simple operational stages in-house does not form the architectural knowledge discussed in Section 12.7.2. What contributes to its formation are the stages that include judgement and verification. Concretely: the handling of exception events, the analysis of the causes of deviation, the design of corrective measures, and the evaluation and re-evaluation of performance. These are of low frequency and the incentive to entrust them externally is strongest, but precisely for that reason they are of the highest value as objects of in-house provision. Fourth, portability clauses in the contract. This consists in giving concrete form, as clauses of the contract, to what Section 12.5.4 listed as the means of negotiation of the receiving side. Alignment of the interface with public standards, the standardization of record formats, the migratability of data, the scope of the technical documentation provided, and duties of cooperation during a migration period fall under this head. These clauses can be negotiated only at the time of procurement. In negotiations after adoption has deepened, the receiving side's switching costs have already risen and the bargaining power to add clauses has been lost. Fifth, laying down at the time of procurement a plan of staged in-house provision. This is the most important of the five and the least often carried out. It consists in designing the procurement of an integrated system not as a permanent delegation but as a process of transition with a deadline. The plan includes which stages are to be brought inhouse by when, how the personnel needed for that are to be developed, how the progress of that development is to be measured, and what is to be done if the plan is delayed. There are two reasons this plan must be laid down at the time of procurement. First, laying it down later is in effect impossible. The deeper adoption goes, the higher the cost of in-house provision rises and the less the need for it is felt. Second, the existence of the plan itself governs the content of the other clauses of the contract. A contract premised on transition and a contract premised on permanent delegation differ as to the attribution of 415 data, as to the provision of technical documentation, and as to the content of training. The plan is the higher-level design that governs the clauses. Of the five means, the following three are decisive for the future position of the receiving side. The other two (the in-house provision of part of the operation and portability clauses in the contract) have the character of means that give effect to these three. The three are set out explicitly, each with its content, its cost, and what remains if the cost is not paid. (1) Retention of joint powers of audit. This consists not merely in reserving a power for the receiving side to inspect the operation of the system independently, but in placing in the contract a condition that experts of the receiving side always participate in the determinations and in the process of audit and verification itself. A power of audit held alone does not operate unless exercised. If joint participation is made a condition, participation arises at each moment of individual judgement, and the receiving side's experts come into contact with the grounds of determinations, the design of verification, and the interpretation of deviations. This contact is the only everyday route contributing to the formation of what Section 12.7.2 called "architectural knowledge". Cost: securing experts able to participate and keeping them assigned to each phase of the audit. Because participation is concentrated at the occurrence of deviation events, the cost includes the cost of standby. If the cost is not paid: the power remains as a clause in the contract but is not exercised, and the framework of verification continues in substance to be supplied by the supplier of the system — the third-party character of conformity assessment required by Proposition 25 (Section 11) remains nominal (Section 12.7.2). (2) Retention of authentic data (Definition 16) within one's own jurisdiction. This consists in reserving to the receiving side, as to the data arising in the course of operation, their attribution and the right to use them for training. The substance of the reservation consists of three points — that the data be stored within one's own jurisdiction, that a range of use not requiring the supplier's permission be laid down for the receiving side, and that they be held in a migratable form even where the system is switched. This reservation becomes a foothold for future in-house provision because (a) exclusive data endowment of Proposition 4 — the proportion of data generated only from the operational processes of the transformer concerned — directly governs future transformation capability in that domain. A receiving side that does not reserve its data holds, even after ten years of operation, no material with which to build a system of its own in that domain. Cost: the provision and maintenance of infrastructure for storing and managing the data within one's own jurisdiction, the work of keeping formats standard, and the reflection in the procurement price of making the reservation a condition. If the cost is not paid: what remains is a state in which attribution is settled by contract while neither the infrastructure for storage nor the capability to use the data is held — ownership in name, not endowment. • • 416 (3) Clauses for staged in-house provision. This is a contractual design that, while relying on an external system in the early period of adoption, obliges the transfer within a set period of the capability to operate and verify the system to the personnel of the receiving side. The clauses must include which stages are to be transferred by when, by which indicators the completion of transfer is to be adjudged, and what follows if transfer is delayed. Recalling that (v) of Definition 20 is a disjunction, "transfer or continuing supply" (Section 12.1.3), this clause is the device that fixes at the level of the contract which branch of the disjunction is taken. If it is not fixed, the default falls to the side of continuing supply — because transfer carries costs for the exporting side while continued supply carries revenue for it. Cost: investment in developing the personnel of the receiving side, duplicate operation during the period of transfer, and the reflection in price of making transfer a condition. If the cost is not paid: a plan is drawn up but no personnel are assigned, and the deadline is deferred at each renewal — a permanent delegation continues clothed in the outward form of a transition. What the three have in common is that all of them presuppose a resolve on the part of the receiving side to commit resources. The three also act directly on (a), the national brain capital remaining on the receiving side in the domain concerned, among the three variables of the upper bound identified by Proposition 42(ii) (Section 12.5.7) — that is, the design of mitigation is not only a defence within an individual relationship but also a means that actually presses down the upper bound of the self-reinforcement of desirability. For a receiving side that has not designed mitigation the upper bound is high; for one that has, it is low. Mitigation carries costs. All five means either raise the cost of procurement, lower the performance of the system, or increase the burden on the practitioners of the receiving side. To exercise powers of audit, people must be assigned. To hold authentic data within one's own jurisdiction, infrastructure must be provided. Providing part of the operation in-house is less efficient than entrusting the whole. Portability clauses raise the supplier's costs and are reflected in price. A plan of staged in-house provision requires investment in development. Accordingly, mitigation for which the cost is not paid remains formal. Writing powers of audit into a contract while carrying out no inspection, settling the attribution of data while holding no capability to use them, and drawing up a plan of in-house provision while assigning no personnel all have the outward form of mitigation without its substance. This point is of the same structure as the three failure modes that Proposition 36 (Section 19) stated about the constraint of administrative capacity — non-implementation, formalization and delay. The design of mitigation does not hold unless it is integral with the allocation of the resources that carry it out. • 417 12.8 The Asymmetry Between Exporting and Importing States The argument of this section is now viewed from both sides of the transaction at once. 12.8.1 What a Single Transaction Brings to Each Side One jurisdiction exports an integrated system and another procures it. What does this single transaction bring to each side? What is brought to the exporting side is the accumulation of desirability (Proposition 38). The further the receiving side's conformity investment proceeds, the higher switching costs rise and the greater the exporting side's desirability. As installations accumulate, the operational records of Proposition 39(iii) thicken and the conditions for the next export are strengthened. That is, export does not consume an asset; it forms one. In the language of Definition 21, this is the process by which the bargaining power of an AI Foundry State is formed, and, as Section 12.1.7 adjudged, that bargaining power derives not from non-substitutability but from the accumulation of adoption. What is brought to the importing side is a benefit in the current period and the loss of a future opportunity for formation (Proposition 24). The benefit in the current period is real — it avoids the cost of accumulating failures itself and avoids the opportunity cost of the period during which AI could not be used in the domain concerned. In the comparison of routes in Section 12.2.3, the receiving side chose route β because it was rational to do so. At the same time, because the repetition of judgement, failure and correction in the domain concerned is externalized, the opportunity to form national brain capital is lost. This asymmetry does not mean that either side is treated unjustly. The transaction rests on the agreement of both, and both obtain a gain in the current period. The exporting side obtains consideration and the importing side obtains a system. There is no coercion here. Even so, the effects the transaction has on the future position of each side do not point in the same direction. The position of the exporting side is strengthened, and the position of the importing side in the domain concerned is fixed. The two are therefore not adversaries, but their interests do not coincide. This formulation is one of the conclusions of this section. Not being adversaries means that the gain of one is not the loss of the other. Interests not coinciding means that the two do not want the same contractual terms. The exporting side wants conditions under which system- specific conformity investment deepens. The importing side wants conditions under which conformity investment is general-purpose. This opposition is not an opposition over price but an opposition over the structure of the contract. 12.8.2 The Object of Negotiation Is Not Price Alone From the foregoing, a practical guideline for the importing side follows. The objects of negotiation in the procurement of integrated systems are not confined to price, delivery and 418 performance. At least the following three govern the future position as much as, or more than, price. First, powers of audit. Who may inspect what, and when. How far does access to records extend? What may the receiving side require upon an update of the system? How are the thresholds and deadlines for reporting deviation events laid down? These look like technical details, but in substance they are the determination of whether the independence of verification in the domain concerned remains with the receiving side. As stated at the close of Section 12.7.2, a state in which the framework of verification is supplied by the side being verified makes the third-party character of Proposition 25 nominal. Second, the attribution of data. To whom do the authentic data (Definition 16) generated from the operation of the domain concerned belong, and who may use them? Are they stored within one's own jurisdiction? Are they held in a migratable form? This determination directly governs future transformation capability in the domain concerned (the exclusive data endowment of Proposition 4). The attribution of data is often handled as an annex to the contract, but under the framework of this section it is a clause with longerrun effect than price. Third, portability. Is the interface of the system aligned with public standards? Is the format of records standard? Is the content of training skewed towards operations specific to the system? To what extent does the supplier bear a duty to cooperate on migration? These are the clauses through which the first constraint on self-reinforcement stated in Section 12.5.4 is made to operate at the level of the contract. What the three have in common is that all can be negotiated only at the time of procurement. By the mechanism of Proposition 38, the deeper adoption goes the lower the bargaining power of the receiving side. Because the temporal structure of bargaining power descends monotonically, conditions not secured early in procurement cannot be secured later. This structure carries an implication for the level of decision-making in procurement practice — decisions about the structure of the contract must be made not at the level of the officer responsible for the case but at the level that determines the future position of the domain concerned. In addition, for the three to be negotiable at all, the receiving side must know what to demand. This requires knowledge of the domain concerned. That is, the capability to negotiate itself depends on what Proposition 24 erodes. In a domain where national brain capital is already thin, the capability to adjudge what should be demanded is likewise thin. This circularity shows that the self-reinforcing character of Proposition 24 operates in the setting of procurement as well. What breaks the circularity is the fifth means of Section 12.7.3 — a plan of staged in-house provision — but the capability to design that plan likewise depends on the same knowledge. This difficulty is not one the framework of this section resolves, and it is acknowledged as a limitation. 419 12.8.3 Exporting Side and Importing Side as Structural Positions The argument of this subsection is not about relations between particular states. Exporting side and importing side are structural positions in a particular domain and are not attributes of jurisdictions. Three points are made explicit. First, the same jurisdiction stands in different positions in different domains. It is usual for a jurisdiction to be on the exporting side in manufacturing inspection and on the importing side in administrative procedure. To use "exporting state" and "importing state" as a classification of states is therefore a misuse of the framework of this section. Second, positions may change over time. Because the four conditions of Proposition 39 are satisfied by accumulation, it is structurally possible for a jurisdiction currently on the importing side in a domain to move, through accumulation, to the exporting side. By the asymmetry of Proposition 15 (Section 15), however, this movement has a long time constant and does not occur passively. Movement in the reverse direction — from the exporting side to the importing side — may occur passively through the relative depreciation of accumulation. Third, this section does not evaluate the merits of transactions. Whether the export of integrated systems is to be preferred, or the procurement of integrated systems not to be preferred, is not an object of this paper. What is described is the structure whereby one and the same transaction has different effects on the future positions of the two sides, and the point that designing contractual terms in the knowledge of that structure is useful for the practice of both sides. In particular, no implication that actors on the exporting side impose unjust terms exists anywhere in this section. The divergence of interests arises not from the intentions of the parties but from the structure of the transaction. 12.9 Summary The content of this section is summarized in nine points. First, what the Transformation Model may export is distinguished into three forms, and the three differ in their resistance to compression. The export of capability (a) is exposed to compression into general-purpose functions; the export of products (b) is partially protected by the physical interface; and the export of integrated systems (c) is protected by the wall of integration cost. The export of integrated systems formalized by Definition 20 is the form that transfers as a bundle the five elements of capability, the design of business processes, the allocation of liability, the certification of conformity, and human capability, and takes as its principal commodity the part the producer cannot internalize through standard inclusion in the next generation of models. The four indicators of Proposition 4 are, in this form, assets that are transferred bundled together. Second, the reason integrated systems are bought even though they cost more is not accuracy. The object of purchase in domains where failure is not permitted is three estab‐ 420

lishments — of where responsibility lies, of the certification of conformity, and of an account to the supervisory authority — and these correspond to the three elements of the trust infrastructure of Definition 17. Price is governed by the cost to the receiving side of building the system itself by accumulating failures, and that cost is higher the more severe the consequences of failure. The consideration for integration therefore reflects not the cost of the supplying side but the cost of the receiving side's alternative route. Third, the conditions for a state that exports integrated systems are four, and the most constraining is portability (Proposition 39). Several jurisdictions may satisfy domain- specific national brain capital, trust infrastructure and an operational track record within their own jurisdiction, but a system inseparably bound to the institutions of its own jurisdiction cannot be exported however excellent it may be. Export capability is therefore determined not by the height of capability but by the looseness of the binding with institutions. Because portability cannot be added after the fact, a design that builds the system separated into "the part proper to one's own jurisdiction" and "the transferable part" must be chosen at the time the building begins. This design sacrifices efficiency within one's own jurisdiction. Fourth, the types of exporting state are described as combinations of conditions. Type (A), the physical-interface and regulated-sector type, draws on physical-interface intensity and long-run operational records and can export domains close to physical processes, but cannot export domains that depend on jurisdiction-specific operating practices, on human conduct, or on plant of proprietary specification. Type (B), the businessprocess and public-infrastructure type, draws on the scale of its human stratum and the operational track record of public infrastructure and can export domains following the verification of identity, the structure of procedures and standards of interoperability, but cannot export domains that depend on legal effects, on linguistic and documentary form, or on the level of social trust. The constraints on the two types appear at different places, the physical side and the social side, but both are the content of Proposition 39(iv). Fifth, the two components of leverage carry opposite signs with respect to exercise (Proposition 38). Indispensability depreciates through exercise (Proposition 23) and desirability appreciates through adoption. The mechanism of appreciation lies in the four conformity investments — the redesign of business processes, contracts and insurance, the preparation of supervisory procedures, and the training of personnel — being specific to the system, so that switching costs rise in proportion to the depth of adoption. A strategy resting on indispensability therefore has an incentive to restrain exercise and a strategy resting on desirability an incentive to promote diffusion, and they demand opposite actions towards the same objective. By this consequence the leverage axis introduced in Section 11 acquired dynamic content for the first time. Self-reinforcement is not unbounded, however — the mechanism is attenuated where the receiving side makes portability an object of negotiation, where several systems compete, and where the system becomes obsolete. This paper asserts the existence of the mechanism but asserts nothing about the magnitude of its consequences. 421 Sixth, procurement on the importing side is a portfolio of three modes (Proposition 40). The domains suited to construction within one's own jurisdiction (A), the procurement of capability (B) and the procurement of integrated systems (C) are governed by three variables: the severity of the consequences of failure, the domain-specificity of judgement, and reversibility. As Table 26 shows, the domains in which (C) is superior are narrow, and many domains demand a different mode for each layer of the system. To choose (A) in a domain where the severity of consequences is low is to pay a sovereignty premium (Definition 19, Proposition 30) there is no reason to pay; to choose (C) in a domain where the consequences are severe and reversibility is low is to fail to pay an insurance premium that ought to be paid. In a domain where (C) is chosen, Proposition 24 operates as a direct consequence of the procurement mode, and the very repetition of judgement, failure and correction in that domain is externalized. Mitigation may be designed through the reservation of powers of audit and of authentic data to one's own jurisdiction, the in-house provision of the stages that include judgement and verification, portability clauses in the contract, and a plan of staged in-house provision; but all of these carry costs, and mitigation for which the cost is not paid remains formal. Seventh, a name has been given to this configuration — the AI Foundry Model (Definition 21). It is the configuration that does not itself produce frontier capability, transforms it by means of complementary assets, national brain capital and trust infrastructure into a system for a particular operational domain, and exports that system as an integrated whole — that is, the type constituted where M2×C2 chooses integration as the form of its output. The naming brings three kinds of clarity. First, three devices are bound into a single configuration — position on the nine cells (Definition 3), the form of supply (Definition 20) and the component of leverage (Definition 15) have hitherto been presented as separate coordinates, but Definition 21 specifies a single type in which all three are designated at once. Second, Proposition 39 and Proposition 40 can be read as obverse and reverse propositions about the same type — Proposition 39 gives the conditions for an AI Foundry State to subsist, and Proposition 40 the rule of choice for the jurisdictions that become its customers. Third, the sign of strategy is uniquely determined — because the bargaining power of this type lies on the side of desirability (Proposition 38), power comes not from closing but from being adopted. This consequence follows from Proposition 38 even without the naming, but giving a name designates without room for misunderstanding which type the consequence concerns. It should be added that the two types of exporting state (Section 12.4) are both sub-types of the AI Foundry State. The limits of the analogy should, however, be reconfirmed. In naming, this paper applied to its own naming the discipline of analogy (Proposition 1) that Section 3 imposed on itself, and set out the verdicts on transfer as Table 27. What transfers is three things: the structure of taking value at the process without holding the design; the structure in which the reliability of the process becomes the axis of competition; and the structure in which a position handling the customer's assets demands neutrality. What does not transfer is the indispensability (Definition 15) that a semiconductor foundry retains by virtue of capital specificity and the difficulty of reproducing its processes, and the connota‐ 422 tions of non-substitutability, oligopoly and the status of a strategic chokepoint therefore do not apply to the model of this paper. What separates actors from the AI Foundry State is a wall of time, not a wall of physics that limits the number of actors able to cross — because a wall of time can be crossed by several jurisdictions in parallel, it does not limit the number of suppliers. A reading that expects the source of the bargaining power of a semiconductor foundry to carry over is a reading that overlooks the difference in sign between Proposition 23 and Proposition 38, and it invites a design that seeks power by closing. To state what is not borrowed from an analogy is as much a part of the claims of this paper as to state what is borrowed. As to usage likewise, this paper always carries the qualifier, writing "AI Foundry State" and "AI Foundry Model", and does not use a form of words lacking the qualifier to denote the type of this paper (Section 12.1.6). Eighth, embedding and portability are compatible through the design of the interface (Proposition 41). This paper imposes two conflicting demands on one and the same system — Propositions 4 and 18 state that deep embedding protects the transformation margin, while Proposition 39(iv) requires "separability from the institutions of one's own jurisdiction". This contradiction is handled not by a solution about the quantity of embedding but by a solution about its locus — the two are compatible only where the system is separated into (a) a jurisdiction-specific layer and (b) a portable core and the interface between them is explicitly defined. In a system in which the interface is not made explicit, it cannot be specified in advance how far the system is transplantable, each transplantation therefore requires the reconstruction of the whole system, and deeper embedding causes portability to diminish. In a system in which the interface is made explicit, embedding is confined to the outside of the interface, and the cost of transplanting the portable core becomes independent of the depth of embedding. The design principle is therefore not to make the embedding shallow but to confine the locus of embedding to the outside of the interface — this is the logic of modularization, and it is the only configuration that satisfies the rampart of Proposition 4 and the portability of Proposition 39 at the same time. Three limits are acknowledged, however: making the interface explicit itself carries costs; where to draw the interface differs domain by domain and there is no general solution; and if the design of the interface is mistaken, both the rampart and portability are lost at once. By this proposition, the question Section 18.16.5 reserved — whether defensibility and portability are compatible — is reread as a branching determined not exogenously by the nature of the system but by whether or not an interface has been designed (Section 12.3.7). Ninth, the self-reinforcement of desirability has an upper bound, and lock-in is not indispensability (Proposition 42). To the counterargument that where an integrated system has been deeply incorporated into the counterparty jurisdiction the switching cost may be comparable to the cost of porting design assets in semiconductors — so that an AI Foundry State too acquires indispensability in substance — this section gives two distinctions. (i) Lock-in and indispensability are different properties. Indispensability concerns whether third parties can bypass the actor; lock-in concerns whether an actor 423 already engaged can leave. So long as several alternative suppliers exist, the exporting side may hold a strong position in individual relationships while remaining substitutable within the system. A high level of lock-in is therefore not evidence of indispensability unless it is accompanied by an indicator of supplier concentration. A semiconductor foundry possesses indispensability not because switching costs are high but because alternative suppliers in the world can be counted on the fingers. By this distinction, the ground of the verdict of Section 12.1.7 is made precise — indispensability does not transfer, not because of the level of switching costs, but because the number of alternative suppliers is not narrowed as it is in semiconductors. (ii) An upper bound exists from recipient- side counteraction. Because a rise in switching costs simultaneously raises the receiving side's incentive to institutionalize in-house provision, multi-sourcing and requirements of portability, desirability reaches an upper bound at the point at which the receiving side prefers to "recover autonomy even at the price of paying the switching cost". The level of the upper bound is a function of the national brain capital remaining on the receiving side in the domain concerned, the existence of alternative suppliers, and the severity of the consequences of failure. By this formalization, the limitation acknowledged in Section 20.9(d) (that no upper bound has been formalized for the self-reinforcement of Proposition 38) is resolved as to the existence and determinants of the upper bound, and its scope narrows to an acknowledgement about the magnitude of the upper bound. The implication for the exporting side is that excessive pursuit of self-reinforcement invites counteraction — the receiving side's reaction appears as an assessment of the same form as the extractive distortion stated by Proposition 6b (Section 8), and may take the forms of the institutionalization of portability requirements, requirements for the retention of data within the territory, and the writing of in-house provision obligations into clauses. This structure is stated not as a matter of relations between particular states but about the structural positions of exporting side and importing side (Sections 12.5.6 to 12.5.8). The theory of the supply side and the theory of the procurement side are obverse and reverse of the same framework. The complementary assets that Section 10 specified as conditions of survival for the Transformation Model appeared in this section as the content of what may be exported. The trust infrastructure that Section 11 specified as leverage on the side of desirability appeared in this section as a commodity. And the portability of Proposition 39(iv) is, seen from the exporting side, a condition of export, and seen from the receiving side, the domain-specificity of Proposition 40(b), a variable governing the procurement mode. One and the same variable determines exportability on the supply side and the procurement mode on the demand side. This coincidence is no accident — what can be exported and what can be procured are one and the same set. The bridge to Section 13 and beyond. The export and procurement of integrated systems treated in this section both subsist upon the physical conditions of computational infrastructure, electricity and data. Section 13 treats those physical conditions — price, scarcity and AI outage — and formalizes, from the standpoints of supplier concentration and out‐ 424 age correlation, the fallacy of composition that this section noted about the concentration of (C). The country profiles of Section 14 can add the standpoint of this section — in which domains a jurisdiction stands on the exporting side and in which on the importing side — as a third description alongside the dual coordinates of position on the nine cells and quadrant on the leverage 2×2. The dynamics of Section 15 treat the appreciation of desirability introduced by Proposition 38 alongside the depreciation of indispensability of Proposition 23 as the temporal development of leverage. Section 17 situates the setting of the strongest operation of Proposition 24 shown in Section 12.7.2 within the connection between Layer Zero and the human foundation. Section 18 examines, taking Japan as an application, for which domains the conditions of which type of this section are satisfied and for which domains an explicit decision on the procurement mode is called for. Section 19 sums up, from the side of cost, the sovereignty premium this section noted for the choice of (A). And Section 20 acknowledges the limitations of this section — the difficulty of observing switching costs, the provisional character of the proxy indicator of desirability, the unsettled question of the independence of portability from the other three conditions, and the observability of export records themselves. As to the limitation acknowledged in Section 20.9(d) (that no upper bound has been formalized for the self-reinforcement of Proposition 38), however, because Section 12.5.7 has given the existence of the upper bound and its three determinants, the scope of the acknowledgement narrows to one about the magnitude of the upper bound. And the difficulty of measuring portability in advance acknowledged in Section 20.8(i) is, under Proposition 41 (Section 12.3.7), limited from a limitation about portability in general to a limitation about systems in which the interface is not made explicit — because for systems in which the interface is made explicit, the extent of the portable core is fixed at the level of the design documents. Section 20 should be read as reflecting these two narrowings. 425 13. AI as Infrastructure: Price, Scarcity, and AI Outage Sections 7 to 9 examined the nine cells — the product of the national value models (M1/ M2/M3) and the AI capability tiers (C1/C2/C3) — in terms of the institutional requirements and the failure modes of each cell. This section changes the angle of view and analyses AI not as a resource of competition among states but as critical infrastructure — that is, as an input to society that carries the same problem set as electricity or gas: price, scarcity, capacity constraints, and stoppage of supply. The concept at the centre here is the "AI outage." AI outage is a coinage of this paper; formed in correspondence with the power outage (the stoppage of the supply of electricity), it denotes a correlated stoppage of the supply of AI services (it is formally defined in Definition 4). The reason for introducing a coinage is simple. Large-scale failures of AI services have already occurred repeatedly (the catalogue in Section 13.4), and the structure of the damage is in part similar to that of a power outage while differing at a decisive point. Yet whereas the power outage has an institutional system of measurement, regulation, and allocation built over a century, for the stoppage of AI services not even a corresponding vocabulary exists. A phenomenon without a name does not become an object of institutional design. The composition of this section is as follows. It first sets out the input price structure of AI (compute, electricity, data) and confirms the reality that the supply of AI is operated not as continuous adjustment by price but as an economy of capacity rationing (Section 13.1). Next, it decomposes the widely circulated analogy that "AI is the new electricity" into the principal concepts of the institutional economics of electricity — natural monopoly, universal service, system reliability, the cost of an outage (VoLL), and the damage from largescale outages — and judges the transferability of each concept to AI individually, following the discipline of analogy of Section 3 (Section 13.2). On that basis it presents a theory of AI outage by way of Definition 4 and Proposition 7, and sets out that substitutability makes the realistic form of an AI outage not a "total stoppage" but a "degraded operation accompanied by a fall in the level of capability," and that the layers that give rise to it decompose into six (Section 13.3, Table 18). It then extracts lessons from a catalogue of past outage events (Section 13.4). By way of a regulatory precedent from finance for cloud concentration (Section 13.5), it proceeds to the design argument for supply guarantees — the sovereign minimum guarantee level of Definition 6, and its correspondence with, and asymmetry from, the institutions of oil stockpiling (Proposition 8) (Section 13.6) — and then discusses the institutional design of rationing and priority under conditions of scarcity (Section 13.7), the duality that data-centre electricity constraints bring about, namely that "an AI outage is also, literally, an electricity problem" (Section 13.8), and the stratification of access and the universal service question (Proposition 12, Section 17) (Section 13.9). 426 13.1 The Input Price Structure of AI — Compute, Electricity, and Data The cost of supplying AI services is largely governed by three inputs: compute (the semiconductors used for training and inference, and the cloud platform above them), electricity (power and cooling for data centres), and data (acquisition of training data and the handling of rights). What matters from the standpoint of the national value models is that the prices of these three inputs exhibit dynamics that differ from one another. First, the price of inference per unit of given performance is falling sharply. According to the compilation by Epoch AI, the inference price of the cheapest model that achieves a given level of benchmark performance is falling at annual factors ranging from 9-fold to 900-fold depending on the task, and at the level of doctoral-grade scientific questions (GPQA Diamond) a fall at an annual factor of approximately 40-fold is observed. In the example of GPT-4-class performance, the cost of achieving the MMLU level fell from 37.50 dollars per million tokens (March 2023) to 0.18 dollars (February 2025), to approximately 1/208; at the level of code generation (HumanEval) it fell from 37.50 dollars to 0.10 dollars (July 2024), to approximately 1/375. A note on notation is in order here. This paper denotes the speed of the fall as "an annual factor of N" and the cumulative factor of the fall that occurred over the whole observation period at a particular performance level as "to 1/N." The two are different presentations of the same phenomenon, and because the cumulative factor depends on the length of the observation period, it cannot be compared directly with the annual-rate notation (the same usage applies below in Section 16). The same compilation notes, however, that the fastest declines are concentrated in the most recent year and that their sustainability is uncertain. What should be noted is that this fall arises not from "price cuts on the same model" but from "overtaking at a given level of performance" — later, smaller, more efficient models achieving the performance level of an earlier generation cheaply. The price of the frontier (the highest performance) does not fall easily. This is the same measurement problem as in the economic history of lighting, where the true price change was the long-run fall in "cost per lumen" rather than in the price of lighting fixtures (Nordhaus, 1996), and it is the expression, on the price side, of the Frontier Descent of Section 5 — yesterday's C2 becomes tomorrow's C1. Second, and nevertheless, in periods of scarcity AI supply is allocated by quantity and not by price. In November 2023, OpenAI temporarily suspended new registrations for ChatGPT Plus, citing excess demand and GPU capacity constraints. In March 2025, in response to a surge in demand for image generation, the same company's CEO stated publicly that "our GPUs are melting" and introduced rate limits. In API practice, rate limits per minute on requests and tokens, priority access tiers, and capacity reservations are operated as a permanent matter, and allocation in periods of scarcity is performed by quota rather than by continuous adjustment of price. That is to say, the supply of AI is already operated not as a textbook commodity market but as an economy of capacity rationing resembling the capacity markets, supply–demand adjustment, and use restrictions of electricity. This fact is the point of departure for the design of rationing institutions discussed 427 in Section 13.7, and it also means that the "rationing by price, capacity, and permission" of which Proposition 12 speaks (Section 17; Section 13.9 in this section) is not an assumption but a description of the present state. Third, the binding constraint is shifting from compute to electricity. The supply constraint of 2023–24 was principally the availability of advanced GPUs, but from 2025 onward the recognition that electricity, substation capacity, and grid interconnection are becoming the location of the bottleneck appears both in the analysis of the International Energy Agency (IEA) and in the common view of the industry (IEA, 2025a). This point is treated quantitatively in Section 13.8, but what should be noted here is the coexistence of a sharp fall in price with a surge in demand. At the end of January 2025, following the release of a low-cost, high-performance model by China's DeepSeek, observations of a decrease in demand for AI compute spread, and on 27 January 2025 NVIDIA's share price fell approximately 17% in a single day, losing approximately 589 billion dollars of market capitalization (the largest single-day loss of market capitalization in the history of the United States equity market). Against this, Microsoft's CEO Nadella responded the same day that "Jevons paradox strikes again — as AI gets more efficient and accessible, its use will skyrocket." The unconditional application of Jevons's original observation (Jevons, 1865) — that improvements in the efficiency of the steam engine increased rather than decreased coal consumption — is not academically supported (whether the rebound effect exceeds 100% depends on the sector and the period; Gillingham et al., 2016). However, the observed fact that the sharp fall in inference prices (the first point in this subsection) and the surge in data-centre electricity demand (Section 13.8) do in fact coexist is circumstantial evidence that AI demand is in a phase of high price elasticity, and it is material against the optimism that "greater efficiency dissolves scarcity." Fourth, of the three inputs, data alone has a different character of scarcity. Compute and electricity are rival goods — if one party uses a given GPU-hour or a given kWh, another cannot — whereas data is a nonrival good, and the same data can be used simultaneously by many actors (the implications of this physical property were treated under the discipline of analogy in Section 3). The cost of data therefore appears not as a marginal cost incurred at each inference but as a fixed cost at the training stage — collection, preparation, and the handling of rights. The recent change is that within this fixed cost the weight of rights handling is rising, and the contracts and litigation over consideration for training data indicate that the price of the data input is beginning to be formed in a market. What matters from the standpoint of AI outage, however, is that the manner in which data "stops" differs from that of compute and electricity. An interruption of compute or of electricity halts services immediately, whereas a stoppage of the supply of data is limited to degrading future updates of models, while the operation of existing models continues. This section's argument about stoppage of supply therefore takes compute and electricity as its principal objects, and leaves the structure of access to data to Section 8 (data reflux) and Section 17 (the design of rights of access). Here it suffices to confirm that the substance of what Proposition 1 (Section 3) calls "scarcity not of the stock but of the flow (productive capacity)" is, in the short run, compute capacity and electricity capacity. 428 13.2 Scrutinizing the Electricity Analogy — What Transfers and What Does Not The metaphor that "AI is the new electricity" was advanced by Andrew Ng from 2016 and became widely known through his 2017 lecture at the Stanford Graduate School of Business. The claim is that "just as electricity transformed every industry a hundred years ago, AI will transform every industry." Sam Altman, from his 2024 essay onward, has repeatedly presented the prospect of "intelligence too cheap to meter." That the latter phrase originates in the 1954 statement by Strauss, Chairman of the United States Atomic Energy Commission, about "electricity too cheap to meter" — an optimism that remains in the history of science and technology policy as a prediction that was not realized — is suggestive from the standpoint of the discipline of analogy (Section 3). The discourse that repeats the metaphor of electricity itself has a failed prediction in its ancestry. Ng's metaphor is a rhetoric emphasizing the ubiquity of transformation (its character as a general-purpose technology), and it does not discuss the structure of supply — concentration, the risk of stoppage, tariff regulation, universal service. Critical examinations also already exist. Kohler (2024) sets out the points at which the electricity analogy holds (general- purpose technology character, infrastructural character, the lag of complementary investment) and the points at which it does not (electricity is a homogeneous good whereas AI has large differences of quality and task specialization; the grounds for natural monopoly differ), and Narayanan and Kapoor (2025) treat AI as a "normal technology" and argue that its rate of diffusion is limited, as with electricity and the personal computer, by organizational and institutional constraints. Taking these into account, this subsection takes up one by one the principal concepts that the institutional economics of electricity has built over a century and judges their transferability to AI. (a) Natural monopoly — does not transfer (though concentration arises by another route). Electricity, and in particular the transmission and distribution network, is a natural monopoly because economies of scale and enormous sunk costs make it socially inefficient to build overlapping distribution networks in a single region. This property has justified a set of entry regulation, tariff regulation (from rate-of-return to incentive regulation), and the obligation to supply (Kahn, 1970; Joskow, 2007). AI platform services are not a natural monopoly in this sense. There is no regional monopoly of a physical network, and multiple suppliers compete worldwide. Concentration of supply, however, does exist. The world cloud infrastructure market is accounted for as to approximately two thirds by the top three firms (AWS approximately 30%, Microsoft Azure approximately 24%, Google Cloud approximately 13%) (compilations in the Synergy Research line, 2026). That is, the concentration in AI is not a "regional monopoly within one country" but an "oligopoly of the world market," and the source of the economies of scale is not the avoidance of duplicated distribution networks but the capital intensity of data-centre investment, the marginal- cost structure of software, and ecosystem lock-in. There are therefore no grounds for transplanting the instruments of natural monopoly regulation (tariff regulation, the obligation to supply) directly; but the task of addressing the systemic risk that concentration 429 brings does transfer — and its institutional form is appearing not as tariff regulation but as the "direct supervision of critical third parties" examined in Section 13.5. (b) Universal service — does not transfer at present, but the structure of the pressure to redefine does. Telephony, electricity, and broadband have each in turn been incorporated into the scope of universal service as "the foundation that had become the premise of social participation in its era" (details in Section 13.9). No instance of legislation positioning access to AI as a statutory universal service can be confirmed as of August 2026. As a description of the present state, therefore, it does not transfer. The historical pattern of the extension of scope, however — the scope being updated through social renegotiation of what is treated as a basic requirement — is transferable, and Proposition 12 is formulated so as to predict the emergence of this pressure. (c) System reliability — the concept is transferable, but the institution does not exist. Electricity has quantitative reliability governance. In North America, following the major power outage of 2003, the Energy Policy Act of 2005 was enacted, and the reliability standards of NERC (the North American Electric Reliability Corporation) were converted from voluntary norms into mandatory standards with penalties (effective 2007). As a planning standard, the loss-of-load expectation (LOLE) criterion of "one day in ten years" is widely used in North America and Europe, and in the EU the Electricity Regulation (Regulation (EU) 2019/943) provides that national reliability standards are to be derived from the value of lost load (VoLL) and the cost of new entry. That is, the reliability of electricity is governed by a system of publicly defined indicators, target levels, mandatory standards, and outage statistics (SAIDI/SAIFI). For AI platform services there is nothing whatever corresponding to this. What exists is only the SLA (service level agreement) presented by providers as a private contract; there is neither a public framework for measuring and reporting the frequency, duration, and externalities of stoppages, nor a public standard of the reliability to be achieved. The difference between an SLA and a reliability standard is essential. An SLA is an obligation between the parties (ordinarily capped at a refund of the fee) and does not internalize the externalities that a stoppage imposes on third parties and on society. A reliability standard is set publicly on the premise of externalities, breach carries sanctions, and the state of achievement continues to be published as outage statistics. Moreover, as the course of events in North America shows — reliability standards long operated as voluntary norms were made mandatory only after the major power outage of 2003 — reliability governance is a sedimentation of ex post responses strengthened after each major accident, and AI stands at the position of beginning that institutional learning. The concept of "a reliability standard for the supply of AI" is itself capable of precise definition (it is transferable), and yet the institution is a blank — this gap is the core of this section's argument on institutional design. (d) The cost of an outage (VoLL) — the measurement method transfers as it stands. The Value of Lost Load is the monetary value of the economic loss borne by consumers per MWh of unserved energy, and it has an established system of estimation methods: customer surveys (stated preference), the production function approach, revealed prefer‐

ence (inference from investment in backup power), and ex post case studies of actual outages (Schröder and Kuckshinrichs, 2015). As a representative estimate, the Brattle Group's VoLL study for the ERCOT market in Texas (September 2024) estimated the load-weighted average for the market as a whole at approximately 35,685 dollars/MWh. Given that retail electricity tariffs are broadly 0.1 to 0.3 dollars/kWh, VoLL is some tens to some hundreds of times that level. VoLL is not confined to academic estimation but is also embedded in market operation. In ERCOT the cap on wholesale prices is set as a proxy variable for VoLL (9,000 dollars/MWh at the time of the 2021 crisis, subsequently reduced to 5,000 dollars/ MWh); in the United States the outage cost estimation tool of Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (the ICE Calculator) is used publicly; and in the EU, as noted above, VoLL is laid down in law as the basis for deriving reliability standards. Sectoral differences are also robust — losses per unit are larger for commercial and industrial users than for residential users, and VoLL is not a uniform constant but a function of sector, time, and context. The qualitative finding on which the methods agree, whatever the method, is that "the marginal value when supply stops" is larger by orders of magnitude than "the price in normal times", and this transfers to AI outage as it stands. It is precisely the divergence between the normal-time price of AI services (the unit price of API tokens — falling sharply, as seen in Section 13.1) and the marginal loss at the time of a stoppage (enormous, as the failure catalogue of Section 13.4 shows) that blocks the inference "it is cheap, therefore it is not important." The "cost of AI outage (Value of Lost AI)" can be estimated by transplanting as they stand the four classes of method in the VoLL literature — measuring willingness to pay as stated in consumer surveys; measuring value added per unit of AI input from a production function; reading the value revealed by the amount invested in backup arrangements (on-premises alternative systems, contracts with multiple suppliers); and estimating ex post damage from actual outages — and it becomes a component of the dependence audit (Table 8, Appendix C). The third, the revealed preference method, is particularly suggestive. The insurance-like expenditure that firms pay for costly redundant configurations is a market disclosure of how those firms estimate their own cost of AI outage. (e) Ex post damage estimation for large-scale outages — the method, and the lesson about the width of estimates, transfer. The major power outage of 14 August 2003 in northeastern North America affected more than 50 million people in eight states of the United States and in Ontario, Canada, and the load lost reached 61,800 MW. The cause was a cascade beginning with tree contact in Ohio and a failure of state-monitoring software (final report of the joint United States–Canada task force, 2004). Estimates of the economic damage diverged by more than a factor of two depending on the estimator: 7 to 10 billion dollars from ICF Consulting, 4.5 to 8.2 billion dollars (median approximately 6.4 billion dollars) from the Anderson Economic Group, and, in the range cited in the task force report, 4 to 10 billion dollars for the United States (ELCON, 2004). Damage on the order of at most 10 billion dollars from an outage of one to two days for the greater part is empirical support for the height of VoLL, and at the same time the divergence of estimates by more than a factor of two is the fate of ex post damage estimation. This precedent teaches in 431 advance that the same width is unavoidable in the damage estimation of an AI outage (indeed, the damage estimates for the CrowdStrike outage examined in Section 13.4 also mixed estimates with an explicit methodology and headline figures of unknown basis). In sum, what transfers from the electricity analogy is (c) the concept of a reliability standard, (d) the methods for measuring the value of lost supply, (e) the methods for ex post estimation of large-scale stoppages, and (b) the structure of the pressure of renegotiation over what is treated as a basic requirement. What does not transfer is (a) natural monopoly and the grounds it provides for tariff regulation, and the homogeneity of the good (electricity is a homogeneous good, whereas AI is highly differentiated by quality and task). This judgment gives concrete form, at the level of this section, to the electricity column of Table 1 (Section 3). 13.3 A Theory of AI Outage — Definition 4 and Proposition 7 On the basis of the foregoing preparation, the central concept of this paper is now formally introduced. Definition 4 (AI Dependence; Exposure; AI Outage) The AI dependence of a state is the proportion (and the depth of degradation) of those critical processes of the economy, administration, and society of that state in which, should an interruption of the supply of AI services occur, output or function degrades within a specified number of days. Dependence is defined neither by the rate of use nor by the amount of expenditure, but by degradation at the time of interruption. Exposure, by contrast, is the scale and proportion of external procurement of AI inputs (the rate of use, external payments, and the proportion of operations processed on external platforms); it bounds dependence from above but is not identical with it. Where exposure is high, dependence is low if substitution functions immediately; where exposure is low, dependence is high if substitution is lacking. An AI outage is a correlated stoppage of the supply of AI services caused by a technical failure, a commercial decision, or a geopolitical measure. An AI outage is the more readily amplified from a local failure into a stoppage of the system as a whole the higher is supplier concentration, and the more the dependence of each sector is correlated on the same supplier and the same platform. Definition 4 contains four design judgments. First, dependence is defined not by "the rate of use" but by "degradation at the time of interruption." Even where AI is widely used, dependence is low if manual substitution functions immediately at the time of an interruption. This is the same conception as that by which energy security is measured not by consumption but by vulnerability at the time of a supply interruption. Second, the quantity thus excluded — the rate of use, external payments, and the proportion of operations processed on external platforms — is not discarded but is explicitly incorporated into the definition as a separate observable, exposure. This is a decisive distinc‐ 432 tion for the empirical part of this paper. The observables used in the country profiles (Section 14) and in the analysis of Japan (Section 18) — the rate of use of generative AI, the rate of cloud use, the deficit on the digital-related balance — all measure "how much economic activity is carried out on external AI platforms," and do not measure "what degrades, and by how much, when supply stops." The former is exposure; the latter is dependence. To identify the two is to mistake a high-use state that has prepared substitute procedures for a low-use state that lacks them. Exposure does no more than bound dependence from above, and where within that bound actual dependence lies is determined by the degree of preparation of substitute procedures — whether degradation to manual operation is possible, the time required to switch to an alternative supplier, and the tolerable duration of a stoppage of operations. Measuring the divergence between exposure and dependence is the first purpose of the AI outage exercise (the simulated cut-off drill) of Appendix C, and what Hypothesis H1 (Section 21) tests is the existence of this divergence and the claim that its magnitude is explained by the degree of preparation of substitute procedures. Third, the causes of an AI outage are not confined to technical failure but include commercial decisions (changes to prices and terms, discontinuation of a service, refusal of access) and geopolitical measures (export controls, sanctions). Just as the interruption of oil supply arose both from accidents and from embargoes, the interruption of AI supply may arise both from breakdowns and from decisions. Fourth, the qualification "correlated" is placed. It is not the isolated stoppage of a single service but an event in which many users and sectors stop simultaneously that is the object of systemic risk. Of the three causes, one subclass must be made explicit in the case of technical failure. It is not only equipment breakdown that produces a stoppage of supply: the physical conditions on the supply side themselves — electricity, cooling, and siting — bring about the same consequence as a stoppage by bounding the upper limit of supply. As seen in Section 13.1, in periods of scarcity AI supply is allocated by quantity and not by price — temporary suspension of new registrations, tightening of rate limits, the setting of priority access tiers. None of these is a breakdown. It is a state in which equipment that has not broken down does not accept requests because it has reached the upper limit of capacity, and from the standpoint of the user it is indistinguishable from a failure in that critical processes do not run. Since an AI outage is defined as a "correlated stoppage of supply," this mode cannot be dropped from the list of causes. Supply limitation by physical conditions operates through at least three routes. First, the route by which scarcity in electricity supply and demand limits the level of activity on the consumer side. In jurisdictions where statutory allocation procedures for electricity exist, use restrictions may be invoked in periods of scarcity — in Japan there is a record of an order restricting use under Article 27 of the Electricity Business Act being invoked against large consumers in 2011 (Section 13.7), and although this procedure does not name data centres, they are not outside the scope of application, being large consumers. Second, the route by which the upper limit of heat rejection capacity suppresses computing capacity. Equipment that has reached the design limit of cooling 433 reduces its processing capacity in order to protect the machinery. This is not a breakdown but a designed degradation, yet in observation it appears as a degradation of supply. Third, the route by which the conditions of siting themselves halt expansion. Queues for grid interconnection, constraints of land and water rights, or administrative restrictions on new construction halt additions to supply even where demand exists. This route operates not by stopping existing supply but by stopping supply from following the growth of demand, and it produces as a result a permanent scarcity of capacity — that is, the normalization of rationing. Making this subclass explicit has a meaning for institutional design. Because the cause of supply limitation by physical conditions lies not in the act of a particular actor but in the state of the system, both the attribution of responsibility and the prospect of restoration differ from the other causes. A technical failure has an actor to conduct ex post analysis and prevent recurrence, and commercial decisions and geopolitical measures have an actor who decides. Shortfalls of grid capacity and heat rejection capacity, by contrast, have no deciding actor, and their resolution requires a physical construction period. Accordingly, the measurement of the speed of degradation at the time of interruption in the dependence audit (Table 8) must include in its objects of observation not only the failure history of suppliers but also the state of scarcity and the expansion plans of the grid in which those suppliers are located. Section 13.8 treats these physical conditions directly. Proposition 7 (The Structure of AI Outage) The systemic risk of an AI outage is amplified as the product of dependence (Definition 4) × supplier concentration × outage correlation. Whereas power outages are localized geographically, the concentration of AI service suppliers is global, and so an AI outage is correlated across borders and across sectors. Concentration of dependence on a single supplier and a single platform raises the vulnerability of the system as a whole even where it is rational for the individual actor (the fallacy of composition). Concretely, when the degradation at the time of failure D(s) of sector s is estimated in the form log D(s) = α + β₁·log(dependence) + β₂·log(concentration) + β₃·log(correlation) + γ·(interaction term), the proposition predicts that β₁, β₂ and β₃ are all positive and that the coefficient γ of the interaction term is positive. Falsification condition If the coefficient of any one of the three factors is significantly non-positive, or if the interaction term is not significant (that is, if the three factors act only additively), the claim of multiplicative amplification is rejected. It is also rejected if degradation of output across sectors and across borders is not observed at the time of a large-scale supply failure. Failure events of cloud services and of major AI services are available as natural experiments. 434 What Proposition 7 claims is not the self-evident matter that "failures produce damage" but the specific content that the three factors act multiplicatively and not additively. In order to make this specificity testable, the proposition brings the functional form down to the level of an estimating equation. The log-linearized formulation is in a form that permits separate estimation of the elasticity of each of the three factors (β₁, β₂, β₃) and of the coefficient γ of the interaction term representing complementarity among the factors, and the claim of multiplicativity is reduced to a single coefficient test, "γ is significantly positive." If γ = 0, the three factors merely increase degradation independently of one another, in which case this proposition's claim of multiplicative amplification is rejected and AI outage risk may be managed as the sum of three independent risks. This difference is also large in policy terms. In an additive world it suffices to lower whichever one of dependence, concentration, and correlation is the most cost-effective. In a multiplicative world, lowering any one of them sufficiently lowers the risk of the system as a whole even if the other two are high, while the state in which all three are moderately high is the most dangerous and partial improvement by a single instrument has no effect. The choice of the aggregation function in Appendix C.4 (the joint use of additive aggregation with multiplicative and minimum aggregation) is a design matter that should be settled only after the result of this test. The three factors of Proposition 7 act by multiplication. Even if dependence is high, a stoppage of the system as a whole is unlikely if suppliers are dispersed and failures are uncorrelated. Conversely, if dependence, concentration, and correlation are all high, a local failure — a single configuration file, a single race condition in DNS automation — is amplified into a stoppage of the system as a whole. The failure catalogue of Section 13.4 shows this amplification to be not a theoretical possibility but a reality repeatedly observed. The observation about the "fallacy of composition" is also important for policy. For the individual firm, concentration on the largest cloud provider and the most advanced model is a rational choice in terms of quality, cost, and operations, and the market does not generate dispersion spontaneously. The vulnerability of the system as a whole arises from the accumulation of individual rationality, not from anyone's negligence. It is precisely for this reason that it becomes an object of institutional intervention as a problem of externalities (Section 13.5). Of the three factors, concentration must be measured separately for the model layer and the cloud layer. Concentration in the model layer (a small number of frontier developers) and concentration in the cloud layer (approximately two thirds of the world market held by the top three firms) are distinct variables, and moreover the two layers are joined by capital and partnership relations. Even if a user contracts for multiple AI models, if these are operated in the same region of the same cloud, dispersion at the model layer is nullified by concentration at the cloud layer — the cluster of failures in 2025 examined in Section 13.4 demonstrated precisely this type of correlation. The difference in geographical character from power outages also deserves emphasis. The extent of damage from a power outage is bounded by the extent of physical connection, that is, the transmission network. If systems are independent, a major outage in a neighbouring country does not 435 propagate. By contrast, the "system" of AI services is a logical connection — the same supplier, the same software, the same configuration — and its extent reaches worldwide irrespective of geography. However carefully the structure of dependence within Japan is designed, if the objects of that dependence share a single point of failure abroad, an AI outage arrives from outside the reach of domestic policy. This is why measures against AI outage are at once a domestic resilience policy and inseparable from the management of the structure of external dependence in Section 8. The amplification structure of Proposition 7 and the composition and depreciation of the sovereign minimum guarantee level discussed below are presented together in Figure 5. The measurement of dependence is the subject of Hypothesis H1 (Section 21) and of the dependence audit protocol of Appendix C, but the composition of the indicators is set out in this section (Table 8). The design principle is to construct for AI a composite indicator isomorphic to the indicators of energy security — import dependence, the Herfindahl– Hirschman Index (HHI) of supplier concentration, and days of stockpile. Table 8. Composition of the AI dependence indicator (operationalization of Definition 4; correspondence with indicators of energy security) Component What is measured Candidate data sources Counterpart among energy indicators Sectoral AI input ratio The proportion of critical processes in each sector (administration, finance, healthcare, manufacturing, logistics, and so on) that take AI services as an input Extension of input–output tables; enterprise surveys Sectoral energy consumption intensity Speed of degradation at the time of interruption The proportion of processes whose output or function degrades within a specified number of days (for example 1, 7, or 30 days) from the interruption of supply, and the depth of degradation. Includes whether manual substitution and degraded operation are possible Enterprise surveys; AI outage exercises (simulated cut-off drills, Appendix C) Supply interruption scenario exercises; VoLL estimation Supplier concentration Supplier HHI for the model layer and the cloud layer respectively. Proportion of dependence on suppliers outside the country Contract data; market statistics Concentration of importing partners (HHI); import dependence Degree of shared platform (outage correlation) The degree to which the same supplier, the same region, and the same platform software are shared across sectors (common dependence in a multi-layer stack) Inventory of dependencies; ex post analysis of failure events Single-pointof- failure analysis of the grid (the N-1 criterion) 436 Component What is measured Candidate data sources Counterpart among energy indicators Buffer capacity The three components of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6): domestically held capability (the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition), alliance guarantees, and operational readiness Inventory of the operational capacity of domestic compute platforms; time elapsed since the last update; certification status of platforms for processing sensitive data; records of switching exercises Days of stockpile (the IEA 90-day standard) Exposure (reference quantity) The scale and proportion of external procurement of AI inputs: rate of use, external payments (the digital-related balance and the like), and the proportion of operations processed on external platforms Balance of payments statistics; cloud use surveys; contract data Value of primary energy imports; import ratio The final row of Table 8 is the quantity that Definition 4 explicitly separated from dependence. Exposure is not a component of dependence, but it is set out alongside in the composite indicator as a reference quantity that bounds dependence from above. The reason for not placing the two in the same column, and yet placing them in the same table, is that in practice exposure is immediately available from public statistics whereas the core of dependence — the speed of degradation at the time of interruption — cannot be observed without conducting an exercise. The temptation to read a high level of exposure as a high level of dependence arises from this asymmetry in the cost of observation. Separating and juxtaposing the two on the side of indicator design is an institutional check against that misreading. 13.3.1 Substitutability and Degraded Operation — The Realistic Form of an AI Outage The second design judgment of Definition 4 — distinguishing dependence from exposure and defining dependence by degradation at the time of interruption — has an implication that disciplines the whole of this section's description. The wording of the definition states that "where exposure is high, dependence is low if substitution functions immediately; where exposure is low, dependence is high if substitution is lacking," and thus substitutability is already built into the concept of dependence. But being built into the concept and being adequately treated in the description are different things. An account that discusses AI outage as a "correlated stoppage of supply" tends, unless it makes explicit for each layer whether substitution is available, to presuppose tacitly the total disappearance of supply and thus to portray the risk as larger than it is. This subsection corrects that tendency in advance. 437 The greatest difference between a power outage and an AI outage is not confined to the point that the bearer of correlation is physical connection in the one case and logical connection in the other (Section 13.3). A difference more important for institutional design lies in the structure of substitutability. For electricity there is no substantial substitute — consumers cannot make electrons for themselves, emergency power is limited both in capacity and in duration, and if supply stops, function stops. For AI services, by contrast, substitution exists at least at three stages. First, substitution among suppliers. In layers where providers offering equivalent functions exist in multiple jurisdictions, if contracts and switching procedures are prepared in advance the effect of an interruption is compressed into the time required for switching. Second, substitution downward through the capability tiers. As Section 7 established, open weights already released are irretrievable, and they cannot be recalled from the world either by a supplier's commercial decision or by a control measure. Even therefore where supply at the C2 level stops, capability at the C1 level remains within the country — this irreversibility is, seen from the supply side, a limit on the instruments of governance, but seen from the demand side it is insurance that supplies a floor of substitutability at no charge. Third, substitution to processes that do not use AI. In processes where the procedures that predate the introduction of AI survive and there are personnel able to execute them, productivity falls but function is maintained. What this three-stage substitution means is that the realistic form of an AI outage is not a "total stoppage" but a degraded operation accompanied by a fall in the level of capability. That Definition 6 (Section 13.6) places the object of the guarantee at "the degraded operation of critical processes" is nothing other than the expression of this recognition in institutional design. The image of degradation dismisses two errors at once. On the one hand, an account that portrays an AI outage as a total stoppage of social functions is excessive in that it ignores the second and third substitutions. On the other hand, an argument that treats AI outage as a minor problem on the ground that substitution exists is also mistaken — substitution is neither free nor immediate, and at each of the three stages there is a residue on which substitution does not act. The core of the design of degraded operation lies in deciding in advance the order of what is to be dropped and what is to be retained. Isomorphically with the way in which the institutions for allocating oil under stockpiling and supply shortage adopt the conception of priority supply to designated uses of high public character, a staged priority order can also be constructed for the degraded operation of AI — for example, three stages placing at the first priority processes directly connected with life and safety such as disaster prevention, healthcare, telecommunications, and electricity; at the second priority processes bearing on the maintenance of social functions such as payments, logistics, and administrative procedures; and at the third priority other industrial uses. This is an illustration of how a priority order may be constructed, and the actual order is a design matter to be determined by each jurisdiction on the basis of its own institutions and social consensus (the design principles of allocation institutions are in Section 13.7). 438 The range over which substitution does not act should be made explicit. First, degradation during the time required for switching does not disappear through substitution. Even where substitution among suppliers is possible, in processes where switching takes several days, degradation over those several days occurs. Definition 4 defines dependence by "degradation within a specified number of days" because it is not the presence or absence of substitution but its speed that determines dependence. Second, downward substitution leaves a difference of capability. What open weights supply is a floor of capability, and the difference of capability corresponding to the lag width from the frontier (Sections 5 and 7) remains. For processes for which this difference is fatal in relation to operational requirements — processes designed on the premise of capability inside the lag width — downward substitution is not substitution but degradation. Third, the premises of substitution may themselves be lost. Executing C1 capability requires compute capacity and electricity, and returning to processes that do not use AI requires that procedures and personnel remain. Where the former is lacking, irretrievable weights present within the country will not run (Definition 6(i-a)). The latter is lost over time through the self-erosion of brain capital of which Proposition 24 (Section 17) speaks — dependence on imported cognition substitutes for the repetition of human practice and wears away the skill grounded in that repetition. That is, the third stage of substitution contracts quietly through the deepening of utilization itself. Substitutability is not a given constant but a variable maintained by the choices of policy and management. The description that follows therefore observes the following discipline. Where the consequences of an AI outage are stated, it distinguishes so far as possible whether substitution acts in the layer concerned, on what order of magnitude the time required stands if it does, and what residue remains on which it does not. The layer-by-layer treatment is the subject of the next subsection. 13.3.2 The Layer Structure of AI Outage — Six Layers of Chokepoints and Substitutability As the failure catalogue examined in Section 13.4 shows, an AI outage is a compound risk across a four-layer stack (electricity, telecommunications, cloud, model API). This grasp of four layers is coarse, however, in that it lumps the physical constraints of the supply side together as "electricity." The physical inputs required for compute platforms to operate, and to be expanded, are not electricity alone, and even where electricity is secured, supply can neither be expanded nor maintained if other inputs are lacking. The six that Section 11.2 set out as sources of indispensability — the manufacturing equipment for advanced semiconductors, particular manufacturing sites, high-bandwidth memory, minerals and refining, cooling water and siting, and the routes of submarine cables — are, seen from the side that holds the choke point concerned, bargaining assets; seen from the side that does not hold it, they are sources of supply constraint. Section 13.8.3 states this correspondence for siting, but the same relation holds for the other sources. The same physical condition appears outward as indispensability and inward as a cause of AI outage. 439 This subsection accordingly sets out in six layers those that may be causes of an AI outage (Table 18). The criterion for dividing the layers is that the mechanism by which supply constraint arises, whether substitution is possible, and the order of magnitude of the time required for substitution differ by layer. Even for the same consequence of "AI stopping," a stoppage at the model layer and scarcity at the semiconductor and materials layer have entirely different means of substitution, response times, and design variables. Table 18. The six layers that may cause an AI outage — the structure of supply constraint, substitutability, the order of magnitude of the time required for substitution, and the effect on the three functions of Definition 6 (with the corresponding sources of indispensability from Section 11.2) Layer Structure by which supply constraint arises Substitutability Order of magnitude of time required for substitution Effect on the three functions of Definition 6 Corresponding source in Section 11 (i) Model and API layer Commercial decisions of suppliers (revision of prices and terms, discontinuation of a generation, cessation of provision), geopolitical measures, and failures on the supplier's side. The source of concentration is capital and talent, not a physical choke point All three stages act. In addition to substitution among suppliers, irretrievable weights already released provide a floor for downward substitution (Section 7) Hours to weeks (where switching procedures are already prepared) / months (where they are not) (i-b) Renewal capability restores the capability difference after downward substitution. Where renewal capability is lacking, downward substitution becomes a permanent fall in capability Not applicable (ii) Cloud and compute layer Concentration of approximately two thirds of the world market in the top three firms (Section 13.2). Outage correlation through the sharing of a single region and a single configuration Partly possible through redundancy across multiple suppliers and multiple regions. Acts only to a limited degree, however, against decision- type AI outages (Section 13.4) Hours to weeks (where designed) / months to years (where not designed) (i-a) The direct bearer of operational capacity 11.2.5 (siting) (iii) Semiconductor and materi‐ Concentration at each stage of manufacturing equipment, manufacturing sites, highbandwidth memory, and minerals and refining. Sustained by Does not hold in the short run. Substitution is limited to inventories and to extending the operation of in‐ Years to a decade (i-a) Expansion of operational capacity stops. Since installed equipment continues to operate, it appears 11.2.1– 11.2.4 440 Layer Structure by which

Layer Structure by which supply constraint arises Substitutability Order of magnitude of time required for substitution Effect on the three functions of Definition 6 Corresponding source in Section 11 als layer learning effects, capital specificity, and accumulated skill, and not shortened by the injection of funds (Section 11.2.7) stalled equipment not as a stoppage but as a constraint on expansion (iv) Electricity and cooling layer Queues for grid interconnection and construction lead times, the upper limit of heat rejection capacity, and constraints of water rights and land (Section 13.8) Partly eased by relocation of siting within the country, but the total does not increase 5 to 10 years for grid reinforcement (an order of magnitude apart from the several months for accelerator procurement) (i-a) Operational capacity. Even where equipment exists, if there is no electricity to drive it, capacity does not exist 11.2.5 (v) Telecommunications and cable layer Geographical convergence of routes and concentration of the capacity to lay and repair (Section 11.2.6). Repair capacity constitutes a further bottleneck Detour routes exist, but new construction takes years. Processing completed domestically is unaffected Days to weeks (repair) / years (construction of new detour routes) (i-a) for the part dependent on platforms abroad, and (i-c) as a routing requirement for data that may not be sent abroad 11.2.6 (vi) Data layer A stoppage of supply does not halt the operation of existing models but degrades future updates (Section 13.1). Relative scarcity of authentic data whose provenance is verifiable (Proposition 27, Section 17) Substitution by synthetic data is possible but leaves a problem of quality. Substitution for exclusive data is difficult in principle Because the effect appears with a delay of years, the very judgment of whether substitution is needed is delayed (i-b) An input to renewal capability, and the object of (i-c) the sensitive-processing condition Not applicable (exclusive data endowment belongs to the complementary assets of Proposition 4) Three implications follow from Table 18. First, the time required for substitution is longer the lower the layer. Switching at the model layer is a matter of procedure and redundancy at the cloud layer is a matter of design, whereas the constraints of the semiconductor and materials layer and of the electricity and cooling layer are matters of construction and accumulation and cannot be shortened by the injection of funds — of the five mechanisms set out in Section 11.2.7, only economies of scale can be shortened by funds. A design that confines measures against AI outage to redundancy in the upper two layers 441 therefore covers only the short part of the range of response times. Conversely, what is effective against constraints in the lower layers is not redundancy but bringing construction forward and designing degraded operation on the demand side. Second, the three functions of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6) do not depend on the model layer alone. This point bears on the centre of gravity of this paper's argument and requires explicit statement. Definition 6 replaced the object of the guarantee, from a level of capability to the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition, and that replacement rested on the fact established in Section 7 that "open weights already released supply a floor of capability irretrievably." That reliance is correct, but correct so far as the model layer is concerned. Each of the three functions depends simultaneously on several of the layers of Table 18. (i-a) Operational capacity holds as the product of the cloud and compute layer, the semiconductor and materials layer, and the electricity and cooling layer, and a constraint in any one layer becomes as such the upper limit of operational capacity. (i-b) Renewal capability requires, in addition to obtaining the published weights of the newest generation (the model layer), the compute required for fine-tuning and evaluation (the semiconductor and materials layer and the electricity and cooling layer) and the data that is the input to renewal (the data layer). (i-c) The sensitive-processing condition requires both that a processing platform exist within the country (the semiconductor and materials layer and the electricity and cooling layer) and that this processing not depend on routes to platforms abroad (the telecommunications and cable layer). That is, the three functions are not closed within the model layer but are open to the compound supply constraints of the physical layers. The conclusion deriving from Section 7 that domestic holding of capability is redundant as an object of national investment simplifies the design of the guarantee level only under the premise that the conditions for executing, renewing, and protecting capability are secured across the whole of the physical layers. Where this premise does not hold, the design of the guarantee level must be conducted layer by layer for the physical layers. Third, the mode of AI outage differs by layer. Stoppages at the model layer and the cloud layer appear as discrete events and are the objects of the failure catalogue of Section 13.4. Constraints at the semiconductor and materials layer and the electricity and cooling layer, by contrast, appear not as stoppages but as stoppages of expansion — existing supply continues, but a state in which supply does not follow the growth of demand persists, and the capacity rationing seen in Section 13.1 becomes normal. Constraints at the data layer are slower still, and their effect appears with a delay, as degradation of future model updates. The measurement of the "speed of degradation at the time of interruption" in the dependence audit (Table 8) therefore cannot rest on exercises simulating discrete events alone, and must capture the two slow modes of expansion constraint and renewal degradation by separate indicators. Candidates for the former are plans for expanding domestic compute capacity and the state of the queue for grid interconnection; for the latter, the time elapsed since the last update and the endowment of data usable for renewal. 442 One supplementary point should be made regarding the correspondence with Section 11. The relation by which the same physical condition appears outward as indispensability is not symmetric. A choke point held by a state raises that state's bargaining power, but it does not necessarily raise that state's resistance to AI outage — because what determines vulnerability to AI outage is not the layers that are held but the layers that are not held. A state that strongly holds one of the six layers of Table 18 obtains bargaining power with respect to that layer, but its dependence with respect to the remaining five layers remains as it is. Conversely, a state that holds none of the layers lacks leverage and is at the same time exposed to changes of external conditions in all six layers. In addition to the two objective functions of which Proposition 22 (Section 11) speaks — optimization of position and maximization of leverage — this section therefore requires a third perspective. Resistance to AI outage is determined not by the strength of the choke points held, but by the number of layers depended upon and the distribution of the time required for substitution in each layer. Seen from this perspective, a strategy of concentrating investment in a single choke point may be rational from the standpoint of leverage but brings no improvement from the standpoint of resistance to AI outage. It is on account of this difference that the diagnostic of Section 11 (Appendix G) and the dependence audit of this section (Table 8, Appendix C) are designed as separate diagnostics. Finally, the evidentiary limits of this subsection should be made explicit. Of the six layers of Table 18, this paper has verified quantitative evidence on the structure of supply constraint only for the concentration of the cloud layer (approximately two thirds of the world market in the top three firms), the electricity and cooling layer (the capacity held up in the interconnection queue, the median time from application to commencement of operation, the completion rate, and the IEA's demand estimates), and the frequency of failures and the repair capacity of the telecommunications and cable layer (Section 11.2.6). On the supply headroom at each stage of high-bandwidth memory and of packaging and assembly within the semiconductor and materials layer, and on quantitative scarcity in the data layer, this paper confines itself to describing the structure and makes no quantitative claim. The existence of the layers, and the ordering of the orders of magnitude of the time required for substitution, follow from this paper's framework, but estimation of the concrete supply headroom of each layer is an empirical task that this paper has not been able to present. This blank corresponds to the first item of work in extending the dependence audit to the physical layers — the present Table 8 requires supplier concentration to be measured for the model layer and the cloud layer, but has no measurement framework for the four layers below them. 13.4 A Catalogue of Past Failure Events — Natural Experiments in AI Outage As the falsification condition of Proposition 7 specifies, failure events of cloud services and of major AI services are natural experiments in AI outage. The principal events 443 whose causes and effects have been checked against primary sources or reliable secondary sources are set out below. The CrowdStrike outage (19 July 2024). A defective update to a configuration file (Channel File 291) of the Falcon sensor of security software rendered approximately 8.5 million Windows machines worldwide simultaneously unable to start (the figure is as published by Microsoft). The cause was not a cyberattack but quality control. Aviation (several thousand cancelled flights in the United States), healthcare, finance, and broadcasting stopped. The insurance analytics firm Parametrix estimated the direct losses of Fortune 500 companies at 5.4 billion dollars, of which only 540 million to 1.08 billion dollars was estimated to be covered by insurance. Losses were largest in the healthcare sector (approximately 1.9 billion dollars), followed by banking. Delta Air Lines claimed losses of approximately 500 million dollars and approximately 7,000 cancelled flights on its own, and brought suit against CrowdStrike in October of the same year. The theoretical significance of this event lies in the fact that a single update file from a single vendor stopped social functions simultaneously across borders and across industries. A major power outage cascades within the interior of a physically connected system (the North American power outage of 2003 is the typical case). The CrowdStrike outage, by contrast, occurred simultaneously across a geographically discontinuous world. The bearer of outage correlation was not physical connection but the identity of the software itself — this is the specificity of digital concentration risk that has no counterpart in power outages, and the sharpest demonstration of Proposition 7's "correlated across borders and across sectors." The AWS us-east-1 outage (7 December 2021). Automated scaling activity in the internal network induced unexpected behaviour, congesting equipment, and the management API and principal services of that region were degraded for approximately seven hours. Video distribution, household devices, and Amazon's own logistics operations stopped. Further separate failures followed on the 10th and 15th of the same month, and this became the occasion on which concentration of dependence on a single region was recognized as an industry-wide issue. The three consecutive major outages of autumn 2025. This is the period in which the vulnerability of the cloud and CDN layers was made most visible. First, at AWS (20 October 2025), starting from a race condition in the automation of DynamoDB DNS management in us-east-1, failures cascaded over approximately 15 hours to the launching of compute instances and to network load balancing, affecting several thousand services including social networks, games, cryptoasset exchanges, government services in the United Kingdom, and banks (Amazon Web Services, 2025). Estimates of insured losses range from 38 million to 581 million dollars, a wide range across estimators (the methodology is still developing and the figures should be read with that width). Next, at Microsoft Azure (29 October 2025), an erroneous configuration change to Azure Front Door propagated worldwide and business applications and the portal stopped for several hours. Further, at Cloudflare (18 November 2025), an internally generated file for the bot management function became oversized in connection with a permissions change and crashed the proxy 444 software, so that a wide range of sites including social networks, conversational AI services, and music distribution stopped intermittently for several hours (Cloudflare's official report). In addition, at Google Cloud (12 June 2025) a defect in global configuration distribution produced a worldwide outage that spread to other firms' edge services and to several AI services. Failures of AI services themselves. OpenAI reported officially that on 11 December 2024 the introduction of a new telemetry service saturated the Kubernetes management plane and that ChatGPT, the API, and other services stopped for approximately four hours. Wide-ranging failures and degradations also occurred in February 2025 and on 10 June of the same year. Other major AI suppliers have also published multiple failures on their status pages during 2024–26 (because compilations of frequency and duration differ by compiler, individual figures are not entered into here). Three lessons may be extracted from this catalogue. First, vertical propagation. The three consecutive outages of 2025 repeatedly demonstrated the structure by which failures in the platform layers (cloud and CDN) appear as stoppages of the AI services above them. AI outage risk is not a risk of AI vendors alone but a compound risk of a fourlayer stack — the power system, the telecommunications network, the cloud, and the model API. This is why the dependence audit (Table 8) treats "degree of shared platform" as an independent component. Second, diversity of causes and isomorphism of consequences. A defective configuration file, a race condition in DNS automation, propagation of a configuration change, saturation by telemetry — the causes are diverse, but the consequence is in every case "simultaneous stoppage for many users and sectors." Symptomatic treatment of individual causes does not remove correlated risk. Third, the blank in measurement. The damage from these events ranges from estimates with an explicit methodology (Parametrix's 5.4 billion dollars) to headline figures of unknown basis, and because no public framework of measurement and reporting corresponding to the power outage statistics of electricity (SAIDI/SAIFI) exists, learning across events is not institutionalized. AI services have already reached the stage at which "stopping makes the news," but they have not reached the stage at which "the effect of stopping is publicly measured." That the damage estimates for the major power outage of 2003 spanned 4 to 10 billion dollars (Section 13.2) and that estimates for the CrowdStrike outage scattered from 5.4 billion dollars (limited to the Fortune 500, with the method made explicit) to enormous headline figures of unknown method show the same lesson a quarter of a century apart — measurement of the damage from large-scale stoppages ends in ex post controversy in the absence of a measurement framework defined in advance. The bias of the catalogue also requires attention. All of the above events are technical failures. Large-scale stoppages caused by the commercial decisions and geopolitical measures that Definition 4 includes among the causes of AI outage have not been observed, as of the time of writing, in a form corresponding to an failure catalogue. The structure, however, already exists. Changes of supply by commercial decision — discontinuation of a model generation, revision of terms and prices, cessation of provision to particular users or uses 445 — are carried out by private decision as a matter of ordinary business operation, and supply management as a geopolitical measure is already implemented in the form of semiconductor export controls (Section 8). If technical failure is "AI outage that occurs by probability," commercial and geopolitical stoppage is "AI outage that occurs by decision," and preparation for the two is not the same. Preparation for the probabilistic type (redundancy spanning suppliers and regions) acts only to a limited degree against the decision type — even if contracts are held with multiple suppliers, if the group of suppliers belongs to the same jurisdiction or alliance, they are correlated in the face of a geopolitical measure. It is in order to bring this decision-type AI outage within its scope that the sovereign minimum guarantee level of Section 13.6 places "domestically guaranteed" capability first among its components. As a fourth lesson, the limits of insurance should be noted. On Parametrix's estimate, of the 5.4 billion dollars of direct losses to the Fortune 500 only 540 million to 1.08 billion dollars — 10 to 20% — is covered by insurance. The greater part of the losses from AI outage is at present borne uninsured by firms and by society. It is rational for insurance markets to be cautious about underwriting correlated risk (damage occurring simultaneously worldwide does not permit risk dispersion by the law of large numbers). But this means that the greater part of AI outage risk accumulates in the system without being priced. In contrast to electricity, where estimation of the cost of an outage (VoLL) is institutionalized as a basis for capacity planning and reliability standards, the cost of an AI outage becomes manifest only ex post — and only in the form of a dispute. The litigation between Delta Air Lines and CrowdStrike may be read as an instance in which a blank in pricing was replaced by litigation, the most expensive form of price discovery. 13.5 A Regulatory Precedent for Cloud Concentration — Critical Third Parties in the Financial Sector An institutional response to AI outage need not be designed from a blank sheet. Financial regulation provides a precedent. In 2023 the Financial Stability Board (FSB) recommended information sharing among authorities and the identification of "systemic third-party dependencies," on the ground that third-party dependence of financial institutions — and in particular concentration on a small number of cloud providers — may become a systemic risk (FSB, 2023). The Financial Policy Committee of the Bank of England has also repeatedly noted cloud concentration officially as a vulnerability for financial stability since 2021. This recognition has borne fruit in two institutions. The Critical Third Parties (CTP) regime of the United Kingdom. The Financial Services and Markets Act 2023 (FSMA 2023) created a regime under which the Treasury designates third parties that provide material services to financial institutions as "critical third parties," subject to direct supervision by the Bank of England, the PRA, and the FCA. The Treasury published the first tranche of designations on 10 July 2026, effective 13 July. The four firms designated were Microsoft, Google Cloud, AWS, and Oracle (their respective European entities). The content of supervision is the power to require information, resili‐ 446 ence assessment (scenario testing and incident reporting obligations), and the making and enforcement of rules specific to critical third parties, and the scope is limited to material services provided to the financial sector. The significance of this regime lies in bringing technology suppliers outside the regulated industry (finance) directly within the scope of regulation from the standpoint of financial stability. The supplier is not a bank, but is supervised because the functions of banks depend on that supplier — the conception that takes the structure of dependence itself as the ground of regulation. DORA (the Digital Operational Resilience Act) of the EU. Regulation (EU) 2022/2554 has applied in full since 17 January 2025, obliging approximately 20,000 financial entities to conduct ICT risk management, incident reporting, resilience testing, and third-party risk management, and providing for the designation by the European Supervisory Authorities of "critical ICT third-party service providers" for direct supervision (with powers of supervisory fees, on-site inspection, and recommendations for remediation). In 2025 the first tranche of designations, including major cloud providers, proceeded. The United Kingdom's CTP regime and DORA differ in legal form, but they stand on the same conception: that the structural answer to cloud concentration risk is direct supervision of the supplier rather than a duty of effort on the part of users. The meaning that these institutions have for this paper's theory is twofold. First, they are a policy endorsement of Proposition 7. That financial authorities have begun to treat concentration not as a "matter for individual firms" but as a "vulnerability of the system" means that recognition of the fallacy of composition has been converted into actual regulation. Second, they are a template for extension. The scope of the CTP regime and of DORA is limited to services for finance, but the institutional form — "designating platform suppliers as critical infrastructure on the ground of the structure of dependence, and imposing resilience standards and incident reporting" — has the potential to be extended to AI model suppliers and compute platforms. The first institutional component filling the blank in reliability governance identified in Section 13.2(c) is likely to come not from electricity regulation but from financial regulation — this is the design implication that follows from observation of the precedent. The limits of the precedent should also be made explicit, however. First, limitation of scope. What the CTP regime and DORA protect is the functions of the financial sector, and the greater part of the damage shown by the catalogue in Section 13.4 — aviation, healthcare, administration, retail — falls outside their reach. Finance went first because it is a field in which the concept of systemic risk and the powers of the authorities already existed, not because dependence is concentrated in finance. Second, limitation of layer. The principal object of both regimes is the cloud layer, and no regime yet exists that designates the model layer (suppliers of foundation models) as an object of dependence. Third, the limits of jurisdiction. What is designated are entities providing services to the home country or the internal market, whereas the source of a failure is, as seen in Section 13.4, a global single point of failure, and the extent to which supervision by one jurisdiction can lower the probability of an AI outage occurring at all is limited. Even so, making depend‐ 447 ence publicly visible and obliging scenario testing and incident reporting generates the data needed for the dependence audit of Table 8 — institutions have value as a first step in filling the blank in measurement even where they are incomplete. 13.6 The Sovereign Minimum Guarantee Level — Correspondence with Oil Stockpiles and the Asymmetry If the causes of an AI outage were confined to technical failure, redundancy and supervision would suffice as countermeasures. But Definition 4 included commercial decisions and geopolitical measures among the causes of an AI outage. A supplier changes the conditions of access; a supplying state imposes export controls — as seen in Section 8, these are matters of actual operation at C2 (the frontier tier). This paper defines as follows the floor that a state should retain against interruption, refusal, or change of conditions of external supply. Definition 6 (Sovereign Minimum Guarantee Level) The sovereign minimum guarantee level is the domestically guaranteed level of AI use that a state can maintain even where interruption, refusal, or change of conditions of external supply occurs. Its components are three: (i) domestically held capability, (ii) alliance guarantees (guarantees of supply by treaty or long-term contract), and (iii) operational readiness (the personnel and procedures able to execute a switch to alternative systems). Of these, (i) domestically held capability is constituted not as a level of capability but by the following three functions. (i-a) Operational capacity: the capacity to execute, on domestic compute platforms and electricity, the inference required for the degraded operation of critical processes in a situation in which external supply has stopped. (i-b) Renewal capability: the personnel, procedures, and compute able to finetune, evaluate, and deploy domestically the published weights of the newest generation, and thereby to restore the relative depreciation of capability within a specified period. (ic) The sensitive-processing condition: a platform able to process domestically the data whose removal abroad is not permitted legally or contractually. All three components depreciate in proportion to the speed of the frontier's advance (depreciation of the stockpile). One point about the drafting of Definition 6 requires explicit statement. The object of the guarantee is not the level of AI capability but the level of AI use, and (i) domestically held capability, which forms its core, is defined not by "how high-performing a model is held within the country" but by three functions: "what can be executed, what can be renewed, and what can be processed domestically when external supply has stopped." This rewriting is not an adjustment of wording but a change in the referent of the concept of a guarantee level. The reason lies in the fact established in Section 7 — open weights already released supply the floor of capability itself at no charge and irretrievably. Neither a suppli‐ 448 er's commercial judgment nor a geopolitical measure can recall weights already released from the world. The objective of "holding capability within the country" is therefore already achieved as regards the C1 level and is redundant as an object of national investment. On the other hand, the compute capacity and electricity to run those weights, the capability to fine-tune, evaluate, and deploy so as to follow new generations, and the legal and physical platform to process data that may not be sent abroad are none of them supplied by publication. What open weights distribute is capability, not the conditions for executing, renewing, and protecting capability. Here lies a third object of guarantee that is neither redundant nor infeasible. The three functions correspond to different constraints. (i-a) Operational capacity answers the question "on the day after external supply stops, are the domestic GPU-hours and electricity sufficient to run the critical processes of administration, healthcare, finance, and logistics in degraded operation?" This is a quantity that differs in order of magnitude and in kind from the compute required for frontier training, and the amount required is derived by working back from the inference load of the critical processes identified by the dependence audit (Table 8). (i-b) Renewal capability answers the question "will the same degraded operation still be meaningful a year from now?" The depreciation shown by Proposition 8 hollows out precisely a guarantee level that lacks this function. Renewal capability is not constituted by compute alone; it requires the personnel and procedures to evaluate the published weights of the newest generation, to fine-tune them to the operational requirements of the country, to confirm their safety, and to deploy them — in that the object of construction is organizational capability rather than equipment, it is the least visible of the three functions and the one for which budget is least readily obtained. (i-c) The sensitive-processing condition answers the question "even in normal times, when external supply has not stopped, how much data must be processed domestically?" This function alone is required at all times, even where no AI outage occurs. Among data in healthcare, the administration of justice, defence, and the control of critical infrastructure there is data whose transfer abroad is not permitted by law or contract, and the platform for processing it must exist within the country independently of the availability of external supply. (i-c) is therefore at once a component of the guarantee level and an institutional requirement in normal times. The content of the "degraded operation of critical processes" that the three functions are to sustain is inseparable from the design of a priority order — which processes are to be maintained in what order (the three stages illustrated in Section 13.3.1, and the allocation institutions of Section 13.7). The amount of operational capacity (i-a) required can be derived only once this priority order is settled — while the order remains unsettled, the amount required varies by an order of magnitude depending on how the scope of "critical processes" is taken. This decomposition into three functions does decisive work when the guarantee level for Japan is designed in Section 18. So long as the object of the guarantee is set as a level of capability, the design oscillates between two conclusions — "if C1 suffices, it is already 449 secured at no charge by open weights, so national investment is unnecessary" and "if C2 is required, maintaining it is infeasible under a gap of one to two orders of magnitude in compute" — and can stand on neither. If the object of the guarantee is replaced by operational capacity, renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition, this oscillation is resolved — the three functions are not redundant, because they are not supplied at no charge by open weights, and they are not infeasible, because they do not require frontierclass compute. The object of national investment is not the acquisition of capability but the construction of the conditions for executing, renewing, and protecting capability (Proposition 13, Section 18). The direct precedent for this concept is the institution of oil stockpiling. The IEA, established in 1974 following the oil crisis of 1973, obliged member countries to hold oil stocks of at least 90 days of net imports. Coordinated releases by the IEA have been invoked six times since its establishment (the 1991 supply disruption event, the hurricanes of 2005, the 2011 supply disruption event, twice at the time of the 2022 supply disruption event, and at the time of the 2026 supply disruption event). Japan's stockpiles are of three kinds — national, private, and joint stockpiling with producing countries — and the total as of the end of December 2025 reached 254 days (146 days national, 101 days private, 7 days joint with producing countries; 214 days on the IEA basis) (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026b). The United States established the Strategic Petroleum Reserve (SPR) under the Energy Policy and Conservation Act of 1975, with a maximum storage capacity of approximately 714 million barrels, and in 2022 carried out the largest release in its history, of 180 million barrels (at the time of the 2026 supply disruption event as well, a release of 172 million barrels was announced following a sharp fall in transit volumes through the Strait of Hormuz, and inventories in the week ending 10 July of that year stood at 316.5 million barrels, the lowest level since April 1983 — a recent instance showing that even physical stockpiles may be drawn down faster than they are rebuilt under repeated shocks). A stockpile is an institution by which a state without production "buys time." The international standard of 90 days is a design that bridges by physical storage the time from a supply interruption to alternative procurement or diplomatic resolution, and Japan's 254 days (214 days on the IEA basis) is an addition on top of it. As seen in Section 6, Japan's response to the crisis of 1973 was not the acquisition of upstream (production) but a set of three measures — doubling conversion efficiency, diversifying inputs, and institutionalizing buffers. The stockpile was invented as a device by which Transformation Model and Utilization Model states without resources mitigate an asymmetry of bargaining power through institutions. Here the correspondence with oil stockpiling must be separated out precisely in the light of the discipline of Proposition 1 (Section 3). Proposition 1 confines the inferences transferable from oil to "the structural theory of trade and dependence" and "the institutional objective of buying time against an interruption of supply," and explicitly asserts that "the institutional means of the buffer (physical storage) does not transfer." This distinction — the institutional objective transfers but the institutional means does not — is the very design principle of the sovereign minimum guarantee level in this section. What

transfers is the purpose of bridging with some domestic resource the time from the interruption of external supply to alternative procurement or diplomatic resolution; not the design that achieves that purpose by the means of crude oil packed in barrels. To call the sovereign minimum guarantee level "an AI version of the oil stockpile" is therefore accurate at the level of the objective and mistaken at the level of the means. Applying this separation to the three functions, the correspondence is as follows. The time that oil stockpiling purchased by the means of storage is purchased in AI by the construction of operational capacity (i-a) — the compute capacity and electricity that run critical processes in degraded operation while external supply has stopped cannot be packed into barrels and must continue to exist as operable equipment. The function that has no counterpart in oil stockpiling is renewal capability (i-b) — because crude oil does not deteriorate, there is in oil security no item corresponding to "the capability to replace stockpiled crude with crude of a new generation." This asymmetry is the content of Proposition 8, and it is the reason why the AI version of the guarantee level cannot be a simple image of the oil version. The sensitive-processing condition (i-c) likewise has no counterpart in oil — crude is the same crude whoever refines it, and the category of "crude that may not be taken abroad" does not exist. That is, the correspondence with oil stockpiling holds among the three functions only for (i-a), and (i-b) and (i-c) lie outside the analogy of oil. The image evoked by the word "stockpile" — a stock that lasts once it has been piled up — extends to only one of the three functions. This three-to-one division is the result of applying to the design of the guarantee level the discipline of analogy formulated in Section 3: judging property by property which properties transfer and which do not. The correspondence with the remaining two elements of oil security, on the other hand, is preserved. Definition 6(ii) alliance guarantees corresponds to long-term contracts with producing countries and coordination among consuming countries, and (iii) operational readiness to release procedures and the emergency response arrangements of IEA coordination. But the correspondence ends here, because a decisive asymmetry remains. 451 Proposition 8 (Asymmetry of Stockpiling) Whereas an oil stockpile can purchase time by physical storage, the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6) that corresponds to a "stockpile" in AI depreciates in proportion to the speed of the frontier's advance. Concretely, letting E₀ denote the capability index of the capability domestically guaranteed at time t₀ and F(t) the capability index of the frontier at time t, the relative value of the guarantee level depreciates as an increasing function of F(t) − E₀. Supply guarantees in AI therefore hold not as a stockpile laid down once but only as continuous construction that renews capability continuously, and their cost is a permanent commitment of finance, electricity, and personnel. Falsification condition If F(t) − E₀ remains at or below a specified threshold over a specified period (if the frontier's advance stagnates and no relative degradation of held capability arises), the claim of depreciation is rejected for that period (in which case the stockpile approaches the oil type). That Proposition 8 does not remain at the qualitative statement "depreciates in proportion" but defines depreciation as the observable difference F(t) − E₀ has two practical implications. First, depreciation can be measured. As seen in Section 5, a capability index can be constituted from two series — scores on standard benchmarks and the cost of achieving a given level of performance — and is already observed over time as the gap between the open-weight frontier and the closed frontier and as the rate of decline in the cost of achieving already-attained capability. If the index E₀ of the domestically guaranteed capability is recorded at the time the guarantee level is certified, the difference from the frontier can be computed at any time, and the residual value of the guarantee level can be verified from outside the books. Second, because depreciation can be measured, the necessary period of renewal can be derived. If the designer of a guarantee level sets a tolerance — "what fraction of impairment of relative value is acceptable" — then the time until F(t) − E₀ reaches that tolerance becomes the upper bound of the renewal period. The speed of the fall in price per unit of performance seen in Section 13.1, and the course of the gap between the frontier and the open frontier seen in Section 5, are the inputs to this derivation. The design question of Section 18.10 — "at what period is held capability to be renewed?" — can, only through this formulation, be posed as a question of numbers rather than a normative judgment. The falsification condition takes the form of "a specified period" and "a specified threshold" for the same reason — unless the threshold is fixed in advance, any observation can be reinterpreted ex post as "the frontier advanced slowly in this period," and the proposition becomes unfalsifiable. Declaring the threshold and the period at the time the guarantee level is certified is the condition that makes this proposition testable, and at the same time the condition that gives auditability to the institutional design of the guarantee level. The substance of the asymmetry may be elaborated. Oil packed in barrels does not deteriorate. The crude oil of Japan's national stockpile, begun in 1978, has today the same calor‐ 452 ific value as it had in 1978. By contrast, AI capability domestically guaranteed in 2023 is relatively obsolete before the frontier of 2025 — as seen in Section 13.1, in a world where the cost of achieving a given level of performance falls at annual factors of 9-fold to 900- fold, the relative value of a static holding of capability erodes at the same speed. It is not only (i) domestically held capability that depreciates. (ii) Alliance guarantees also depreciate in substance if the object of the guaranteed access becomes an older generation, and (iii) operational readiness cannot be maintained without continued investment in exercises and personnel, since the technical system to which one would switch continues to be renewed. Within the three functions, too, the modes of depreciation differ. (i-a) Operational capacity does not deteriorate as equipment, but becomes relatively insufficient if the scale and quality of the inference demanded by critical processes rise. (i-c) The sensitiveprocessing condition likewise faces rising requirements as the range of data and operations to be processed widens. (i-b) Renewal capability, by contrast, is not an object of depreciation but the very function that resists depreciation — of the three functions, it alone works to restore the depreciation of the other two. A guarantee level that has neglected investment in renewal capability therefore loses its substance as the frontier advances, even if operational capacity and the sensitive-processing condition have been thickly constructed. The sovereign minimum guarantee level is accordingly not a "stock that requires only maintenance costs once built," like an oil stockpile, but a "flow that exists only through continuing to be built," resembling the maintenance of shipbuilding or of air power. This difference in cost structure is of great policy consequence. If a guarantee level is designed on the premise of a stockpile-type budget (a one-off construction cost plus low maintenance costs), it will be hollowed out in substance within a few years. What is required is a permanent commitment of finance, electricity, and personnel, and the choice of its scale and scope — what is to be domestically guaranteed and to what extent — is precisely the design variable of the state (a concrete examination for Japan is in Section 18). The structure of the design variables may be decomposed one step further. The first choice is the object. What should be guaranteed is not "capability equivalent to the frontier" but the three functions that sustain the degraded operation of critical processes in a situation in which external supply has stopped — operational capacity, renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition (Definition 6(i-a) to (i-c)) — and the costs of the two differ by orders of magnitude. This identification of the object dismisses the objective of "all domestic production" in two senses. First, domestic holding of capability itself is already supplied at no charge and irretrievably by open weights as regards the C1 level (Section 7), and is redundant as an object of national investment. Second, domestic holding of capability at the C2 level is infeasible under the gap in compute inputs from the frontier and under electricity constraints. What is neither redundant nor infeasible is the construction of the conditions for executing, renewing, and protecting capability, and these are the three functions. The first question of design is therefore not "up to what level of capability is to be domestically produced?" but "which critical processes are to be sustained, at what depth of degraded operation, and for how long?", from which the 453 amount required of each of the three functions is derived. Just as oil stockpiling was designed not at the whole of normal-time consumption but at the finite level of 90 days, this derivation starts from the requirement levels of the critical processes identified by the dependence audit (Table 8). The second choice is the mix of the three components. (i) Domestically held capability is the most certain but the most expensive; (ii) alliance guarantees are inexpensive but depend on the reliability of the alliance (as seen in Section 8, guarantees of access may have their conditions changed by a single policy of the supplying state); (iii) operational readiness is the adhesive that makes the other two effective — an alternative system for which switching has never been exercised is, in a crisis, the same as one that does not exist. The lesson of oil applies here too. The IEA's coordinated releases functioned six times because, in addition to the physical quantity of the stockpile, the institutions of release procedure, allocation, and coordination were maintained in normal times. The third choice is the renewal period. The depreciation of Proposition 8 is continuous, but budgets and procurement are discrete. Here the quantitative formulation of Proposition 8 does its work. If the tolerable impairment of relative value is declared in advance as a threshold on F(t) − E₀, the time until that threshold is reached is computed as the upper bound of the renewal period. A guarantee system whose renewal period is too long relative to the speed of the frontier's advance (the inputs being the speed of the fall in price per unit of performance seen in Section 13.1 and the course of the gap between the open frontier and the frontier seen in Section 5) has, though present on the books, depreciated in substance. An audit of a guarantee level must measure not the existence of capability but the declared threshold, the time elapsed since the last renewal, and the record of switching exercises. These three are also the audit indicators of whether Definition 6(i-b) renewal capability is actually functioning. The falsification condition of Proposition 8 is, incidentally, a good example of this paper's discipline. In a world where the frontier's advance stagnates — a plateau of capability — an AI stockpile approaches the oil type, and a long-lived guarantee holds from a single act of construction. This paper does not predict that the advance will continue; it discusses the design problem in the case in which it does. Finally, it must be recorded that the asymmetry of this section extends beyond this section. The depreciation of which Proposition 8 speaks is not a phenomenon specific to the single institutional domain of supply guarantees but the general form of the effect that the Frontier Descent exerts on institutions. The same effect appears in an entirely different institutional domain — the international verification institutions of the critical tier. The verification function of critical-tier governance discussed in Section 9 rests on a design that takes compute as the verification anchor, but that anchor too is not static. Because the compute required to achieve any given level of capability decreases in accordance with the half-life of the verification anchor (Definition 9, Section 9) — the time required for the compute needed to achieve a given level of capability to halve from its level at first attainment — fixed thresholds based on quantity of compute lose their effectiveness over a period of a few multiples of the half-life. Verification institutions there‐ 454 fore likewise endure only by building into the institution not the fixing of thresholds but their continuous downward revision (Proposition 9, Section 9). That is, the depreciation of the stockpile (Proposition 8) and the depreciation of the verification anchor (Proposition 9) are two appearances of the same asymmetry. Both are processes in which an institution that fixed a level of capability at a point in time loses its referent through the frontier's advance. On the side of supply guarantees, the substance of the guarantee is lost as the fixed held capability E₀ moves away from the frontier F(t); on the side of verification institutions, the fixed compute threshold ceases to capture the objects of control as the compute required to achieve the same capability declines. The directions are opposite — the guarantee is left behind below, the threshold is left behind above — but the cause is identical and the prescription is isomorphic. Both hold not as a single act of construction or a single agreement but only as continuous construction and continuous revision. This isomorphism means that Section 13 (the argument on infrastructure) and Section 9 (the argument on critical-tier governance), while treating separate subjects, are two applications of the same structural proposition. The implication for policy design is isomorphic as well. Just as stockpile-type budgeting hollows out a guarantee level within a few years, a verification institution whose institutional cycle of treaty amendment exceeds the half-life of the anchor has already lost its effectiveness at the moment it comes into being. When the speed at which institutions are renewed falls below the speed at which technology advances, the institution survives only as a form — this is the constraint common to institutional design in the age of AI. 455 Figure 5. The structure of AI outage and the sovereign minimum guarantee level. Upper panel: the systemic risk of an AI outage is amplified as the product of dependence × supplier concentration × outage correlation (Proposition 7). Lower panel: the three components of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (domestically held capability, alliance guarantees, operational readiness) all depreciate in accordance with the speed of the frontier's advance (Definition 6, Proposition 8). Domestically held capability is further decomposed into the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition, of which renewal capability bears the restoration of depreciation. 13.7 Rationing and Priority — Designing Allocation Institutions for Periods of Scarcity If a supply guarantee is an institution for "preparing against interruption," rationing is an institution for "distributing a shortage." Electricity has a statutory multi-stage mechanism for allocation in periods of scarcity. Taking current practice in Japan as an example, the sequence has four stages: (1) price (continuous adjustment by the market), (2) request (advisories and warnings of supply–demand tightness, and requests to save electricity), (3) order (an order restricting the use of electricity under Article 27 of the Electricity Business Act), and (4) disconnection (rolling outages — the last resort). This sequence was forged in history. After the Great East Japan Earthquake of 2011, rolling outages by group were implemented in the Tokyo Electric Power service area from 14 to 28 March, and inadequacies in the treatment of medical institutions and the like became a major social issue. From this experience the policy sequence "rolling outages are in principle to be avoided; orders restricting use and requests to save electricity take priority" was established. From July to September of the same year, an order restricting the use of electricity under Article 27 of the Electricity Business Act was invoked, obliging large consumers with contract demand of 500 kW or more in the Tohoku Electric Power Amplification of AI outage risk (Proposition 7) Sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6) Dependence × Supplier concentration × Outage correlation Amplification AI outage (correlated stoppage of AI supply) Because supplier concentration is global, an AI outage correlates across borders and sectors, unlike a power outage Three components (1) Domestically held capability (domestic models, compute, electricity) (2) Alliance guarantees (supply assured by treaty or contract) (3) Operational readiness (personnel and procedures able to switch) Depreciation (speed of the frontier's advance) Stockpiles cannot be kept in barrels; continuous construction is required (Proposition 8) 456 and Tokyo Electric Power service areas to reduce peak use by 15% against the previous year, with penalties (a fine of up to 1 million yen) — the first invocation in 37 years, since the first oil crisis (1974) (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2011). Isomorphic institutions exist internationally. In the EU, the concept of "protected customers" in periods of supply–demand tightness — placing households, hospitals, and the like last in the order of disconnection — is institutionalized in the Electricity Regulation and in member-state law. By contrast, the Texas crisis of February 2021 saw the coexistence of rolling disconnection (up to approximately 20,000 MW disconnected) with a price spike in which wholesale prices remained pinned at the cap of 9,000 dollars/MWh for several days, and produced, on the state's official figures, 246 deaths and economic damage on the order of tens of billions of dollars — an instance showing the consequences of mistaking the boundary design between "allocation by price" and "allocation by physical disconnection." What exists at times of capacity scarcity in AI? As seen in Section 13.1, at present there are only (1) price and rate limits at the provider's discretion — which in terms of the sequence correspond to (4) disconnection, but whose order, objects, and priorities are all private decisions. There is no public framework corresponding to (2) request and (3) order — that is, no public priority order for "whose supply of AI is to be protected to the last." The same problem that made the treatment of hospitals, railways, and traffic signals an issue in the rolling outages of 2011 will, in a phase of AI outage or capacity scarcity, be decided inside providers' allocation algorithms without passing through public debate. To design, before scarcity occurs, a priority order for the supply of AI to healthcare, administration, education, and the control of critical infrastructure — the counterpart of the concept of protected customers in electricity — is the most concrete component to be transferred from the institutional history of electricity to the institutional design of AI outage. The design principles can also be read off from electricity. First, advance determination and public knowledge. The rolling outages of 2011 became contentious because the line of exclusion was drawn ex post and opaquely. A priority order has legitimacy only if it is determined in normal times by published criteria. Second, gradation. The sequence price → request → order → disconnection is a design that matches the intensity of intervention to the severity of the supply–demand situation and reserves the most coercive means as the last resort. For AI too, stages can be designed from public designation of priority access tiers (weak) to orders allocating by use in periods of scarcity (strong). Third, exercises. Response to electricity supply–demand tightness functions because the issuance of warnings, requests, and restrictions is practised as an institution. The counterpart for AI outage is the AI outage exercise designed in Appendix C — a simulated cut-off drill of critical processes — which is also the means of measuring the "speed of degradation at the time of interruption" of the dependence audit (Table 8). Fourth, consistency of jurisdiction. An order restricting the use of electricity could be designed as an order to domestic consumers, whereas for many countries the suppliers of AI are abroad. Implementation of a priority order will be a combination of three routes — direct regulation of suppliers (of the critical third party type of Section 13.5), incorporation of priority clauses into government procurement contracts, and underpinning by domestically held capability 457 (Definition 6(i), and in particular (i-a) operational capacity) — and that it cannot be completed by a purely domestic order is the final difference from electricity. This design as a whole presupposes, moreover, the dependence audit (Table 8). Without knowing which processes are how vulnerable to interruption, a priority order cannot be drawn. 13.8 Duality — An AI Outage Is Also, Literally, an Electricity Problem Up to this point "AI outage" has been discussed by analogy from the power outage, but the relation between the two is not confined to metaphor. The supply of AI rides physically upon the supply of electricity, and the supply constraint on AI is increasingly becoming the supply constraint on electricity itself. On the IEA's estimates, world data-centre electricity consumption was approximately 415 TWh in 2024 (approximately 1.5% of world electricity consumption) and has grown since 2017 at approximately 12% per year — more than four times the growth of total electricity demand. The regional composition is 45% United States, 25% China, 15% Europe. In the IEA's base case it more than doubles, to approximately 945 TWh, in 2030, a scale exceeding the current total electricity consumption of Japan (for 2035, approximately 1,200 TWh in the base scenario, with a range of 700 to 1,700 TWh). In the United States, data centres are expected to account for almost half of the increase in electricity demand to 2030 (IEA, 2025a). These figures are for all data centres including non-AI uses, and the IEA itself allows a range in carving out the AI-specific portion (what is certain extends to the qualitative statement that servers equipped with AI accelerators are the principal driver of growth). The response on the supply side is slower than demand. On the compilation of Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory in the United States, the generation and storage capacity awaiting connection to the transmission grid as of the end of 2024 reached approximately 2,300 GW — nearly twice the installed generation capacity of the United States (approximately 1,300 GW) — and the median time from application for connection to commencement of operation exceeds four years (double the under-two-years for projects built in 2000–07). Moreover, only 13% of the capacity applied for in 2000–19 reached commencement of operation (LBNL, 2025). Procurement of GPUs takes months, construction of a data centre takes years, reinforcement of the transmission grid takes 5 to 10 years — this mismatch of time constants is the substance of the shift from "constraint by compute to constraint by electricity" seen in Section 13.1. A multi-stage bottleneck structure can be confirmed quantitatively: the constraint on AI is electricity, and the constraint on electricity is grid interconnection and construction lead times. Japan is no exception. On the demand outlook of the Organization for Cross-regional Coordination of Transmission Operators (OCCTO) for fiscal 2026, new and expanded data centres and semiconductor plants grow from +830,000 kW and +6.7 billion kWh in fiscal 2026 to +7,620,000 kW and +56.8 billion kWh in fiscal 2035, corresponding to approximately 4.6% of national peak demand and approximately 6.7% of demand for electrical en‐ 458 ergy (within which data centres account for 6,610,000 kW and 49.4 billion kWh). While household demand continues to fall through population decline and energy saving, this digital demand is the principal factor turning Japan's electricity demand to an increasing trend for the first time in approximately 20 years (OCCTO, 2026). That is, Japan's electricity planning has already entered the stage of incorporating AI platforms as the largest new source of demand — the "supply guarantee for AI" that is the subject of this section and the "supply guarantee for electricity" treated by the Strategic Energy Plan are, at the level of demand projections, within the same document. This duality gives the argument on AI outage structural implications. First, a causal chain. An interruption of electricity supply becomes an interruption of AI supply by way of the stoppage of data centres — a power outage is one of the upstream causes of an AI outage, and the lowest layer of the four-layer stack (electricity, telecommunications, cloud, model). The reliability of AI cannot exceed the reliability of electricity. Second, competition for resources. The electricity demand of data centres competes for the same system capacity as the electricity demand of households and industry. In the sense that it becomes necessary in periods of scarcity to determine the priority relation between "supplying AI" and "supplying other uses," the rationing design of Section 13.7 connects to the rationing design on the electricity side. Third, this is the reason why (i-a) operational capacity of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6) is defined by both compute platforms and electricity. Even if compute platforms are held within the country, without securing the electricity to drive them — generation, grid, siting — there is no capacity to sustain the degraded operation of critical processes when external supply stops. Operational capacity is a quantity measured as the product of equipment and electricity, and a shortfall in either becomes as such a shortfall in the guarantee level. The supply guarantee for AI must be designed not as a policy domain independent of energy policy but as a subset of it (a concrete examination of Japan's generation mix and grid constraints is in Section 18). 13.8.1 Heat Rejection and Cooling — Heat as a Component of Electricity Demand In Section 13.1 one of the three inputs was written as "electricity (power and cooling for data centres)." The contents of that parenthesis need to be decomposed. The electricity that a data centre consumes divides into the part in which computing equipment converts electricity into work and the part that carries out of the building the heat that is the byproduct of that work. The former is the cost of computation itself; the latter is an unavoidable incidental cost accompanying computation. The higher the integration density of accelerators, the higher the heat generated per unit of floor area, and the mode of heat rejection changes in form from methods using air as the medium to methods using liquid as the medium. As IEA (2025a) attributes the principal driver of growth in data-centre electricity consumption to servers equipped with AI accelerators, demand on the heat rejection side grows in proportion as demand on the computing side grows. That is, the electricity demand of AI is at once demand for computation and demand for heat rejection. 459 What matters here from the standpoint of this section is that heat rejection is not merely a matter of efficiency but a matter of siting. The total electricity required to execute the same amount of computation differs with the climatic conditions of the site — where outside air and water temperatures are low, the electricity required for heat rejection is small; where they are high, it is large. Where there is no upper limit on the electricity obtainable from the grid, this difference remains a difference in operating cost; where there is an upper limit, it becomes a difference in the amount of computation that can actually be executed. Under the multi-stage bottleneck structure stated at the beginning of Section 13.8 — the constraint on AI is electricity, and the constraint on electricity is grid interconnection and construction lead times — the latter condition is dominant. The requirement of heat rejection must therefore be treated not as an item in the operating expenses of compute platforms but as a physical quantity that governs operational capacity (Definition 6(i-a)). This paper gives no special name to this problem of heat. To give it a name would be to let the name stand in for the explanation. Stated in observable form, the requirement of heat rejection appears in three ways and no more: (a) as part of electricity demand, (b) as the use of water, and (c) as a constraint on the choice of site. The following treats (b) and (c) in turn. 13.8.2 Water and Land — The Second and Third Conditions Governing Siting Depending on the mode of heat rejection, water is used. Methods using water as the medium can hold down the electricity required for heat rejection compared with methods using air as the medium, but they bear another resource constraint, the acquisition and discharge of water. This relation of substitution — using water instead of saving electricity — makes it impossible to evaluate a site by a single variable. Where electricity is abundant but water scarce, and where water is abundant but the grid is thin, the designs that hold are different. The lineage of empirical research treating the political economy of attracting data centres has consistently set out electricity, water, and land together as the burdens on the receiving side. On the compilation of a subsidy watchdog organization in the United States, more than 30 states have established sales tax exemptions and the like for data centres, annual revenue losses exceed 100 million dollars in at least 10 states, and cases are reported in which state subsidies reach up to 2 million dollars per job (Good Jobs First, 2024). This structure arises from four characteristics: (1) enormous capital investment together with property taxes that are readily abated, (2) the small number of permanent jobs after construction, (3) large burdens of electricity, water, and land, and (4) automatic accumulation of tax preferences that swell with each replacement of servers. The argument that reads AI as an extractive industry of minerals, water, electricity, labour, and data (Crawford, 2021) carries a normative position, but this paper refers to it not as a normative claim but as a matter of a measurable quantity — the ratio of the value accruing locally to the amount of physical resources provided (Proposition 6b, Section 8). 460

When these burdens become binding, the constraint becomes manifest in the form of restrictions on new construction. In Ireland, once data centres came to account for more than 20% of electricity consumption, new construction was restricted; the Netherlands and Singapore imposed moratoria on new construction (Singapore subsequently moved to a managed resumption under a framework with environmental requirements). These measures are often explained with electricity as the direct reason, but the substance of the judgment is a composite of electricity, water, and land. That is, the siting of compute platforms is chosen not by the market but by the composite of immovable physical conditions — points of grid interconnection, water rights, land, and climate — and the permits that allocate them. This composite gives rise to a policy instrument of geographical steering of siting. In Japan, the direction of steering the siting of data centres toward regions with spare capacity on the grid — the conception of planning the siting of electricity and of information and communications as a unity — is discussed at the level of policy documents. Steering of this kind has meaning because computing demand is geographically movable (it can be carried by telecommunications) whereas electricity, water, and land are immovable. Placing movable demand to fit immovable supply is the only short-run means of mitigation under a multi-stage bottleneck. This mitigation, however, operates only as a problem of placement within a country; placement across borders passes to the problems of access and jurisdiction of the following sections. 13.8.3 The Physical Conditions of Siting and the Sources of Indispensability — The Connection to Section 11 Section 11.2.5 lists "cooling water and siting" as one of the six sources of indispensability, and states that this source differs from the other five in that its concentration arises not from technical factors but from geography and law. The description in this subsection corresponds to the physical side of the content of that source. The relation between the two sections should be made explicit. The quantities treated in this section — the capacity held up in the interconnection queue (approximately 2,300 GW, nearly twice installed generation capacity), the median time from application to commencement of operation (over four years), the completion rate of applied capacity (13%), and the order-of-magnitude difference between the time constant of grid reinforcement (5 to 10 years) and that of accelerator procurement (several months) (LBNL, 2025) — are, in the context of this section, a description of supply constraint. Read in the context of Section 11, the same quantities become a description of the fact that the permitting of interconnection and siting is in substance a power of allocation. Measured against the criterion of Section 11.2 that holding converts into bargaining power only where the time required for switching is longer than the cycle of the counterpart's policy decision, the time constant of the grid satisfies this criterion — the indispensability that resides in siting cannot be dissolved in the short run by any injection of capit‐ 461 al. It is for this reason that Section 11.2.7 classified "the physical conditions of siting," among the five mechanisms, as a mechanism that cannot be shortened by funds. One further point, the locus of attribution, requires confirmation. What indispensability resides in here is not the state but the point. A state holds it only through the power to allocate land, the power grid, water, and spectrum, and this is nothing other than what Proposition 28 (Section 11) lists as the third of the residual indispensable functions of the state, "the permitting of siting and resources." Domestic permitting institutions concerning electricity, water, and land are therefore at once a domestic infrastructure policy and the management of an asset in external negotiation. The same physical condition appears inward as a risk of supply limitation (AI outage) and outward as indispensability in negotiation. The design variables are identical — securing generation, grid, water, and land, and the permits that allocate them — but the objective functions differ. The two objective functions of which Proposition 22 (Section 11) speaks, optimization of position and maximization of leverage, diverge in electricity policy in this concrete form. A placement that maximizes domestic resistance to AI outage (dispersing near centres of demand and lowering outage correlation) and a placement that maximizes external indispensability (concentrating at scarce physical conditions and lengthening the time required for substitution) may demand different designs while being funded from the same budget. This paper recommends neither, but notes that a design treating electricity policy as an appendage of AI policy is structurally placed to miss both of these two objectives. 13.9 Stratification of Access and the Universal Service Question At the end of this section, the distributional problem produced by the allocation of scarcity is treated. As seen in Section 13.1, the supply of AI is rationed by price, capacity, and permission (rate limits, priority access tiers, export controls), and as seen in Section 8, access to C2 (the frontier tier) is subject to the decisions of suppliers and of supplying states. This paper formulates the disparity that this rationing structure forms as Proposition 12 (Stratification of Access). Because that proposition belongs to the context of inter-layer transmission, the formulation itself is placed in Section 17 (the verbatim presentation including the falsification condition is in Section 17.2.2), and this section sets out, from the side of the argument on infrastructure, the empirical grounds for its first limb (that the disparity correlates with income disparity but is not identical with it, and is independently amplified by each of the factors of education, language, electricity, and regulation) and its second limb (that access to AI comes under pressure to be redefined at the level of basic infrastructure). Proposition 12 consists of two claims, and the first and second limbs are given independent falsification conditions — the first may be rejected according to whether the four factors explain the variance of effective levels of access after controlling for income; the second, according to whether institutionalization rises onto the policy agenda within a specified period in jurisdictions where access has become 462 a substantive premise of critical processes. The evidence set out in this section is the input to these two tests. The first limb of Proposition 12 (Section 17) — the disparity correlates with income but is not identical with it — may be elaborated. The effectiveness of C2 access is not determined by purchasing power alone. First, education: extracting value from advanced AI capability requires the capability to use it, to pose questions and verify outputs (this connects with the problem of the institutional footing of self-definition at Layer Two). Second, language: the performance of foundation models is uneven across languages, and the effective capability obtained for the same fee differs by native language. Third, electricity: as seen in Section 13.8, AI rides on electricity, and in countries and regions where electricity infrastructure is thin, the physical premise is lacking even where a right of access exists. Fourth, regulation: export controls, data regulation, and procurement institutions branch the conditions of access by nationality and location. Redress of disparities in access is therefore not completed by the single policy of fee subsidies but requires intervention in each of the four factors — this plurality makes universal-service-type institutional design more complex than simple redistribution. What the second limb of Proposition 12 rests upon is the institutional-historical fact that the scope of universal service has been extended over time. In the United States, the Communications Act of 1934 declared the provision of communications to the whole population, and section 254 of the Telecommunications Act of 1996 gave statutory form to the Universal Service Fund, institutionalizing Lifeline for low-income users (begun 1985) and E-Rate for schools and libraries (in June 2025 the Supreme Court held the funding mechanism of that fund constitutional). In electricity, the Rural Electrification Act of 1936 realized, through public credit, electrification of rural areas that was not commercially viable in the market, and the rate of farm electrification in the United States, approximately 10% in the 1930s, reached almost 100% in the 1950s. In Japan too, the obligation to supply under the Electricity Business Act remains after liberalization in the form of supplier- of-last-resort supply and universal service for remote islands. In broadband, the United Kingdom gave statutory form to a right to request a 10 Mbps connection from 2020, and the United States committed 42.4 billion dollars of deployment funds under the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act of 2021 — although the termination of the connection subsidy for low-income households (ACP) in June 2024 through exhaustion of funds is also an instance of the political fragility of universal policies. What this lineage shows is that the scope of universal service is not a static list of technologies but has been updated through political renegotiation over "the foundation that had become the premise of social participation in its era." The telephone became such; electricity became such; broadband became such. What, then, of AI? To be precise, no instance of legislation positioning access to AI as a statutory universal service of the telephone or electricity type can be confirmed as of August 2026. What exists are beginnings — the provision of public AI services to citizens by various governments, public–private agreements for free provision to education, and pub‐ 463 lic funding for models and compute in the national language (the so-called sovereign AI measures, including Japan's GENIAC). "AI universal service" is therefore at a stage at which it should be presented not as a description of current institutions but as a normative proposal — grafted onto the history of extension of the scope of universal service. Being at this stage does not mean that the second limb of Proposition 12 has no falsification condition. What the second limb asserts is not the existence of an institution but the existence of a pressure, and pressure can be tested by the observable event of institutionalization reaching the agenda. That is, if in a jurisdiction where access to AI has become a substantive premise of critical processes such as administrative procedures, educational assessment, and job applications, none of (a) a public guarantee of basic access, (b) regulation of adverse treatment on grounds of access, or (c) universal provision through public funds rises onto the policy agenda within a specified period, the claim of pressure is rejected. This formulation converts the second limb from an unfalsifiable prediction that "it will come to be so in due course" into a comparable observation of "whether agenda-setting occurs in jurisdictions where the premising has occurred." The condition is that the presence or absence of premising can be judged independently, and the criteria for that judgment — whether the process concerned can be completed without AI, and what the cost and time of an alternative route would be — are identical with the measurement procedure for the speed of degradation at the time of interruption in the dependence audit (Table 8). From this paper's framework, this proposal has two grounds. First, as Proposition 12 shows, disparities in access to AI are independently amplified by education, language, electricity, and regulation, and are therefore not dissolved by income redistribution alone — there is a role specific to the policy instrument of guaranteeing access itself. Second, as set out in detail in Section 17, access to AI is the material condition of self-definition in a self-defined society (2026f), and the design of its distribution is part of the preconditions that Layer Zero distributes to Layer Two. The option of designing the guarantee level of basic access as a two-tier structure — "guarantee the basic level universally and allocate the frontier by market" — has a structural correspondence with supplier- of-last-resort supply in electricity, although the drawing of that line must incorporate a dynamic absent in electricity, namely that the basic-level side grows richer year by year through the Frontier Descent (Section 5). 13.10 The Performance of Buffers in 2026 — A Triple Buffer and the Blank in AI Section 13.6 designed the sovereign minimum guarantee level through an analysis of correspondence with, and asymmetry from, oil stockpiling. What that analysis relied upon was an image of the buffers institutionalized from 1974 onward — how stockpiling as an institution was designed — and not a record of those buffers actually operating. The oil market of 2026 provides that record. This subsection rereads from the side of the argument on infrastructure the observations that the subsection of Section 6 set out as market 464 facts, decomposes the buffers that operated into three, and judges for each whether a counterpart exists in AI, by the discipline of Proposition 1 (Section 3). A procedural note is made in advance. This subsection makes no reference whatever to the cause, background, parties, or course of the 2026 supply disruption event. What is described is only the market facts of supply volume, transit volume, price, and inventory, and the operation of institutions in response to them. All figures below are given with the publishing institution and the point in time. 13.10.1 Observation of the Triple Buffer The scale of the event is first recorded as a change in supply volume. On the IEA's measurements, as of July 2026 world oil supply was 9.4 million barrels per day below the pre-event level, and Gulf production was 11.4 million barrels per day below the February 2026 level (IEA, Oil Market Report, July 2026 issue). Actual world supply in July 2026 was 101.5 million barrels per day, 6.3 million barrels per day below the same month of the previous year (August issue). On an annual basis, world oil supply in 2026 is put at 102 million barrels per day, 4.3 million barrels per day below the previous year (ibid.). Approximately one tenth of world supply was absent over half a year. Nevertheless, the market maintained its functions. Prices reached 144 dollars per barrel in mid-April 2026 (North Sea Dated, the high for the year), then fell to approximately 68 dollars in early July, standing at 96.80 dollars at the end of July and at 94.39 dollars for Brent on 21 August (the monthly IEA issues, and, for the quotation, Trading Economics, n.d.-a). World observed inventories stood at just under 7.9 billion barrels at the end of July 2026 (IEA, Oil Market Report, August 2026 issue). The scale of the physical absence and the scale of the effect on the market are decoupled. What made this possible was a triple buffer of inventories, detour routes, and coordinated release. The scale of each is given in figures. (i) Inventories. World observed inventories in January 2026 were 8,210 million barrels, the highest level since February 2021 (IEA). The cumulative draw from February to July 2026 was 410 million barrels, the draw in July alone was 69 million barrels, and the end- July balance was just under 7.9 billion barrels (August issue). OECD commercial oil inventories stood at 2,729 million barrels as of June 2026, with forward cover of 58.7 days, falling to a level 66.5 million barrels below the average of the most recent five years (OPEC, Monthly Oil Market Report, August 2026 issue). That is, inventories were consumed in a manner that reversed within half a year from "the most abundant in a decade" to "below the five-year average." The buffer was not preserved; it was actually used. (ii) Detour routes. A reassignment of transit volumes proceeded at the same time. Transit through the Strait of Hormuz fell 67%, from 14.9 million barrels per day in the first quarter of 2026 to 4.9 million barrels per day in the second quarter, while in the same quarters the Bab el-Mandeb Strait rose 45%, from 5.6 to 8.1 million barrels per day (EIA, Short-Term Energy Outlook, August 2026 issue). The Strait of Malacca fell 22%, from 21.3 465 to 16.6 million barrels per day, and the world total for the same quarter was 99.7 million barrels per day. As physical detour capacity, the East–West pipeline had spare capacity of 3 to 5 million barrels per day out of a nominal 7 million barrels per day, and ADCOP had up to 700,000 barrels per day (IEA, 2026g). Detour capacity did not, however, substitute for the whole of the absence — the total spare capacity amounts to approximately half the fall in transit volume. The difference is clear when set against a preceding case. From the whole of 2023 to January–August 2024, transit through the Bab el-Mandeb Strait fell 54%, from 8.7 to 4.0 million barrels per day, but routing via the Cape of Good Hope rose 53%, from 6.0 to 9.2 million barrels per day, and no physical absence of supply arose (EIA, 11 October 2024). A transport disruption and a supply interruption are events of different kinds — the former is absorbed by reassignment of routes, the latter is not. (iii) Coordinated release. The third buffer is an institution. Collective action by the IEA has been invoked only six times since its establishment in 1974 (1991, 2005, 2011, twice in 2022, and on 11 March 2026). In the sixth, the decision was taken on 11 March 2026 and member country contributions were settled on 19 March; against an announced total of 400 million barrels, contributions totalled 426 million barrels, the largest scale since establishment. The composition was 271.7 million barrels of government stocks, 116.6 million barrels of obligated industry stocks, and 23.6 million barrels of other, of which crude was 72% and petroleum products 28%. By region, the Americas contributed 195.8, Asia and Oceania 108.6, and Europe 107.5 million barrels; implementation was immediate in Asia and Oceania and from the end of March in the Americas and Europe (IEA, 2026i). The volume actually brought to market was 290 million barrels as of 22 July 2026 (approximately 68% of the contributions announced), and the remaining emergency stocks of IEA member countries were announced as 1 billion barrels (IEA announcement, Energy Connects, 22 July 2026). The three buffers were not substitutes for one another; they worked in series. Inventories bought time, detour routes secured flow, and the coordinated release allocated the release of inventories in an orderly manner. Had any one been lacking, the effects of the other two would have been diminished — it was precisely because detour capacity filled only half of the absence that the drawdown of inventories became necessary, and the drawdown was not skewed toward particular countries because the framework of coordination governed the allocation. 13.10.2 Comparison with the Buffers of AI — Sorting by the Discipline of Proposition 1 Of the triple buffer, which have counterparts in AI and which do not is judged property by property. (i) Inventories — there is no counterpart to physical storage, but there is a partial counterpart. As Proposition 8 formulates, the guarantee level in AI cannot be packed into barrels and depreciates in proportion to the speed of the frontier's advance. In this respect there is no counterpart to inventories. It would not be accurate, however, to say that 466 there is no correspondence at all. Open weights already released correspond partially to inventories, as an "irretrievable floor." The function of inventories is that, even if supply stops, operations can be run for a certain period on the quantity at hand. Published weights cannot be recovered even by a supplier's commercial judgment and continue to supply the floor of capability irretrievably (Section 13.6, Section 7). On the day after external supply stops, that floor is still at hand. In this sense, open weights perform part of the function of inventories. They differ from inventories, however, in three respects. First, they have a stronger property than inventories — inventories diminish when consumed, whereas weights are nonrival and do not diminish however often they are used. Whereas the oil buffer was thinned by a drawdown of 410 million barrels, this buffer is not thinned by use. Second, they have a weaker property than inventories — crude does not deteriorate in the barrel, whereas weights depreciate relatively (Proposition 8). Inventories have no item of "replacing stockpiled crude with crude of a new generation," whereas the AI buffer requires one. Third, they have a precondition that inventories do not — inventories are usable in themselves, whereas weights require compute platforms and electricity to execute them (Definition 6(i-a)). The correspondence therefore holds in the form that "the part of inventories that constitutes a guarantee of quantity corresponds, while the parts that constitute immediate availability and preservation of value do not." That Section 13.6 stated that "the object of national investment is not the acquisition of capability but the construction of the conditions for executing, renewing, and protecting capability" is re-derived independently from this decomposition. (ii) Detour routes — a counterpart exists, but switching requires time and operational readiness. Detour routes in AI are the switching of suppliers and the fallback to on-premises execution. The three stages of substitution shown in Section 13.3.1 — switching among suppliers, moving downward through the capability tiers, and falling back to non-AI processes — are the layered structure of detour routes themselves. There is, however, a decisive difference from oil. Oil's detour routes are physical assets laid down in advance: the spare capacity of pipelines and the route via the Cape of Good Hope both existed before the event occurred. It is for that reason that the switch was executed in a matter of weeks. The destinations of a switch in AI will not function at the same speed unless they have been prepared in advance — as Section 13.6 stated, an alternative system for which switching has never been exercised is, in a crisis, the same as one that does not exist. This is why Definition 6(iii) operational readiness is placed as a component, and it is confirmation from the side of oil of the conclusion of the six-layer analysis of Section 13.3.2 that "the time required for substitution is longer the lower the layer." Further, even in oil's detour the whole of the absence was not substituted. Against spare capacity of 3 to 5 million barrels per day and ADCOP's 700,000 barrels per day, the fall in transit volume was approximately 10 million barrels per day. This ratio — detour capacity divided by the quantity absent — is an indicator that should also be measured 467 for AI. For the critical processes identified by the dependence audit (Table 8), the proportion of load that alternative systems could take on if the principal supplier stopped can be measured in advance. In oil, this ratio was approximately one half. (iii) Coordinated release — no institutional counterpart exists in AI. No framework for the internationally coordinated sharing of capability exists as of August 2026. This is the blank that this subsection notes, and it is the object to be filled by Definition 6(ii) alliance guarantees and by condition (ii) of Proposition 19 (Section 15) on the third pole, mutual guarantees of access. The substance of the blank may be decomposed. For a coordinated release to function, oil prepared at least four things over half a century. (1) That the unit of sharing be measurable and interchangeable (the barrel). (2) That the obligation to contribute be laid down in law in normal times (90 days of net imports). (3) That the procedure for invocation and the rules of allocation be determined in advance (this is why the order of implementation in March 2026 was determined region by region). (4) That a standing body exists to decide on invocation. Asking the same four questions of AI, (4) does not exist, and (2) and (3) cannot be designed because the prerequisite (1) is not settled. The most difficult of the four is (1). The barrel was homogeneous, portable, and measurable. The unit of sharing in AI self-evidently has none of these properties. Compute capacity is not portable — data centres cannot be moved, and what can be shared is not capacity itself but the right to execute upon it. Rights of access to models are not homogeneous — how rights differing in generation, capability, and conditions of use are to be counted toward a contribution, and at what rate of conversion, is unsettled. Inference throughput depends on whether data may be transferred across jurisdictions — within the range constrained by Definition 6(i-c) the sensitive-processing condition, substitution by another country's compute is not permitted in the first place. An AI version of the coordinated release is therefore, prior to being a matter of the will to create an institution, a problem of designing the unit. What in oil could be asked as "how many barrels will you contribute?" is replaced in AI by the prior question "what is it that is contributed?" The standing of this observation should be made clear. This paper does not propose the creation of an institution — proposals carry costs and constraints, and their analysis is the subject of Section 19. What this subsection states is confined to a statement of fact. That is, the fact that the "mutual guarantees of access" that Proposition 19 requires as a necessary condition of a third pole came, in oil, through half a century of operation to possess concrete units, obligations, procedures, and institutions, whereas in AI the matter is untouched at the level of the unit. The reason that no cooperation satisfying condition (ii) of Proposition 19 exists at present may be not an absence of will among participating states but the fact that the object of contribution is undefined. This distinction bears directly on the order of institutional design. 468 Table 25. The triple buffer that operated in 2026, and the judgment on counterparts in AI (by the discipline of Proposition 1) Buffer Record in oil in 2026 Counterpart in AI Judgment (i) Inventories World observed inventories 8,210 million barrels (January 2026) → just under 7.9 billion barrels (end of July). Cumulative draw February–July 410 million barrels. OECD commercial inventories at forward cover of 58.7 days (June 2026) There is no counterpart to physical storage (Proposition 8). Open weights already released correspond, as an "irretrievable floor," only to the part that is a guarantee of quantity Partial correspondence (the guarantee of quantity corresponds; immediate availability and preservation of value do not) (ii) Detour routes Strait of Hormuz 14.9 → 4.9 million barrels per day (first to second quarter, −67%); Bab el-Mandeb 5.6 → 8.1 million barrels per day (+45%). Spare capacity of detour pipelines 3 to 5 million barrels per day + 700,000 barrels per day (approximately half the quantity absent) Switching of suppliers and on-premises execution (the three stages of substitution of Section 13.3.1). Switching, however, requires time and operational readiness (Definition 6(iii)) Corresponds (conditional on advance preparation) (iii) Coordinated release Six times since 1974. Decision of 11 March 2026; member country contributions 426 million barrels (the largest in history); actual release 290 million barrels (as of 22 July); remaining stocks 1 billion barrels No institutional counterpart exists. A blank to be filled by Definition 6(ii) alliance guarantees and by condition (ii) of Proposition 19 (Section 15), mutual guarantees of access No counterpart (the design of the unit is untouched) 13.10.3 How to Set a Design Standard Corresponding to "How Many Days" The design of oil's buffers is condensed into a single numerical standard — the stockpiling obligation of IEA member countries is 90 days of net imports. What margin did this standard afford relative to the actual duration of the supply interruption of 2026? The duration was on the order of years. The absence of supply arose from February 2026 onward, was still 9.4 million barrels per day below the pre-event level as of July, and the IEA expects supply to recover by 8.3 million barrels per day in 2027 to reach 110.3 million barrels per day, while the EIA likewise expects world production in 2027 of 109.7 million barrels per day. That is, both institutions see recovery as requiring years. Ninety days does not cover this duration. That the market was nevertheless maintained is because the standard of 90 days was designed to buy not "the time to resolution" but "the time to adaptation" — the design conception there is that it suffices to bridge the period until the reorganization of detour routes, changes in the allocation of refining, and adjustment on the demand side take effect. The design standard of the buffer was determined not by the assumed duration of the interruption but by the lag until adaptation gets under way. How, then, is a design standard corresponding to "how many days" to be set in designing the sovereign minimum guarantee level for AI (Definition 6)? Because the unit is not a 469 quantity of time, no direct mapping is possible. Three questions can be formulated. For operational capacity — for how many days is the degraded operation of critical processes to be sustained? For renewal capability — how long is the period until the difference from the frontier F(t) − E₀ reaches the tolerable threshold to be kept (Proposition 8)? For the sensitive-processing condition — up to what proportion of the processing of data that may not be sent abroad is to be met domestically? The three questions have different units and cannot be integrated into a single number. Oil could make do with the single number of 90 days because the unit of the buffer was one (the barrel). This paper does not give an answer to this question. What it states is the course of institutional formation that oil required in order to arrive at the standard of 90 days. The establishment of the IEA in 1974 and the statutory obligation to stockpile 90 days of net imports, the commencement of national oil stockpiling in Japan in 1978, and a record of six invocations over 52 years — the standard was not deduced from theory but settled through the repetition of events and operation. AI is not yet at that stage. Lacking experience corresponding to a first invocation, it has no material from which to set a standard by experience. For the time being, therefore, there is no course but to declare a standard in advance and revise it ex post. This is a prescription isomorphic with the continuous revision of which Proposition 8 speaks for the guarantee level and Proposition 9 (Section 9) for the verification anchor, and it is a restatement from the side of design standards of what Section 13.6 stated: that "an audit of a guarantee level must measure not the existence of capability but the declared threshold, the time elapsed since the last renewal, and the record of switching exercises." 13.10.4 The Record of Japan's Stockpiles In the coordinated release of March 2026, Japan's contribution was 79.8 million barrels, second after the United States' 172.2 million barrels and accounting for 18.7% of the total contributions of 426 million barrels (IEA, 2026i). Japan's total strategic stockpile is estimated at 187 million barrels as of the second quarter of 2026 (EIA, Short-Term Energy Outlook, August 2026 issue), so the contribution corresponds to approximately 43% of it. The level of the stockpile itself substantially exceeds the obligatory level. As of the end of January 2026 it was 248 days in total (146 days national, 96 days private, 6 days joint with producing countries) (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026b), and 241 days in total on an estimate as of 20 March 2026 (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2026a). Measured against the IEA member countries' stockpiling obligation of 90 days of net imports, this is a level of approximately 2.7 times. The record of releases comprises 15 days of private stocks (16 March 2026), a first tranche of one month of national stockpile crude and approximately 6 days of jointly stockpiled crude with producing countries (both 26 March 2026), and the commencement of a second tranche of the national stockpile amounting to approximately 20 days of domestic consumption (1–2 May 2026) (Min‐ 470

istry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2026b; Japan Organization for Metals and Energy Security, 2026). Two points are drawn from this record for the design of AI. First, Japan contributed to the institution as a bearer of the buffer on the second largest scale in the world. This is a consequence of having piled up the physical quantity of a stockpile, and at the same time a consequence of the unit, procedure, and allocation of contributions having been settled as an institution. If a comparable contribution is to be made in AI, what unit is to be contributed must first be determined (Section 13.10.2). Second, the thickness of the buffer rides upon a rise in concentration. Japan halved the share of oil in domestic supply of primary energy, from 75.5% in fiscal 1973 to 34.8% in fiscal 2024, while the dependence of crude oil imports on the Middle East rose from 77.5% in 1973 to 95.9% in fiscal 2024, standing at 95.1% as of January 2026 (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026a; Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026c). The quantity of exposure fell and concentration rose — this is the structure that Proposition 37 formulates, and it is a problem independent of the thickness of the buffer. A buffer compensates for a high level of concentration; it does not dissolve it. That the same structure may arise in AI is the reason why the dependence audit (Table 8) measures total quantity and concentration as separate indicators, and the concrete design for Japan is treated in Section 18. Just as Section 10 tested the theory of transformation value against the observations of 2026, what this subsection has treated is contemporaneous observation of the institutions of the buffer. 13.11 Summary This section may be summarized as follows. AI has a structure of scarcity in which a sharp fall in price coexists with capacity rationing (Section 13.1); from the electricity analogy, reliability, VoLL, damage estimation, and the pressure of renegotiation over what counts as a basic requirement transfer, while the regulatory grounds of natural monopoly do not (Section 13.2). The risk of an AI outage is amplified as the product of dependence × concentration × correlation, and its multiplicativity is reduced to a test of the interaction term (Section 13.3). The realistic form of an AI outage, however, is not a total stoppage but a degraded operation with the fall in capability left by three stages of substitution (among suppliers, downward through the capability tiers, and to non-AI processes); the layers that cause it decompose into six, from the model and API layer to the data layer, and the time required for substitution is longer the lower the layer — the three functions of the sovereign minimum guarantee level are not closed within the model layer but open to all six (Sections 13.3.1 and 13.3.2, Table 18). The amplification has been repeatedly demonstrated in the failure catalogue (Section 13.4), and there is a precedent for the institutional response in the critical third party regimes of financial regulation (Section 13.5). Supply guarantees have a counterpart in oil stockpiling at the level of the institutional objective (buying time) but not at the level of the institutional means (physical storage); the object of the guarantee is not a level of capability but the three functions of operational capacity, 471 renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition, and because of the asymmetry that a stockpile depreciates, it holds only as continuous construction — this depreciation is one of two appearances of the same asymmetry as the depreciation of the verification anchor of Section 9 (Section 13.6). In addition, rationing in periods of scarcity has a blank where a public framework corresponding to the four-stage allocation of electricity would be (Section 13.7), and all of this rests on the physical substructure of electricity constraints (Section 13.8). The structure of rationing then gives rise to the distributional problem of pressure to redefine universal service (Section 13.9). The oil market of 2026 provided contemporaneous material for testing these designs — that the market was maintained even though approximately one tenth of world supply was absent for half a year was because a triple buffer of inventories, detour routes, and coordinated release worked in series, and of these the only one with a counterpart in AI is detour routes; inventories have no more than a partial counterpart (open weights already released, as an irretrievable floor), and coordinated release has no institutional counterpart (Section 13.10, Table 25). This blank should be understood not as an absence of the will to share capability but as an untouched matter of design, in that the unit of contribution is undefined, and it is the object to be filled by Definition 6(ii) alliance guarantees and by the mutual guarantees of access of Proposition 19 (Section 15). How states choose the design variables of this section — the audit of dependence, the scope of the guarantee level, the advance design of priority, and integration with electricity — becomes the criterion for assessing where each country now stands in the country profiles of Section 14, and the concrete design for Japan is carried out in Section 18. 472 14. Country Profiles 14.1 How to Read the Profiles — The Common Format and Position on the Nine Cells This section applies the Nine-Cell Matrix — the product of the three types of national value model introduced in Section 6 (Definition 3, Section 6) and the AI capability tiers (Definition 2, Section 5) — to ten principal countries and regions: the United States, China, the EU, the United Kingdom, Japan, the Republic of Korea, Singapore, the UAE and Saudi Arabia, India, and Israel. It then places a general treatment of small-state strategy, illustrates across the ten profiles the three constraints that middle powers receive in common (Proposition 21, Section 14.13), and closes with cross-cutting observations drawn from the distribution (Section 14.14). Each profile ends with [Implications for readers in this country], showing how the same analysis may be applied to other states belonging to the same type as the country concerned — including states not covered in this section. This section is intended to be read not as commentary on particular countries but as a sample book of types by which readers may identify their own country. Its purpose is not to score countries. As Krugman (1994) noted, discourse that likens states to firms and adjudicates victory and defeat in "competitiveness" is a category error and readily results in protectionism and wasted policy. What this section performs is not a pronouncement of victory or defeat but a description of position and constraint. That is, it describes, on the basis of verifiable policy facts, where each country actually stands on the nine cells, which assets support that position, which dependencies make that position fragile, and in which direction movement is being attempted. Adjudicative adjectives such as "advanced" or "behind" are not used. Since institutions that are optimal in one cell may be harmful in another (Proposition 3, Section 6), simple comparison between states standing in different cells is theoretically meaningless. Before entering into the descriptions, the coordinate system adopted in this section is made explicit. Each country below is described in dual coordinates. The first coordinate is position on the nine cells (Definition 3, Section 6), which represents the mode of value generation treated in Sections 7 to 10. The second coordinate is geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15, Section 11), which represents power in negotiation and is composed of the two components of indispensability and desirability. As Proposition 22 (Section 11) asserts, these two are independent variables and neither can be derived from the other — there are states that stand in the Utilization Model while possessing high indispensability, and states that stand near production while the degree to which other states wish to engage with them is low. Section 11.5.4 called this "dual coordinates" and stated that the country profiles would adopt it from that point on. This section takes that up. 473 The reason for adopting dual coordinates is that there are questions a single coordinate cannot answer. The nine cells answer "by what means does this state generate value?" but do not answer "when conditions are changed from outside, can this state push back?" A profile describing only the former serves as an account of each country's industrial structure but does not reach an understanding of the negotiations actually occurring since 2022 — unilateral changes to the conditions of access, case-by-case review on the importing side, and the exchange of capital participation for conditions of alignment. Conversely, describing only leverage states which countries are strong but drops what those countries live by. This section places both side by side. That, as a result of placing them side by side, countries appear whose position and leverage diverge is precisely the content of Proposition 22's claim, and Section 14.14.1 treats this directly. Each profile is described in the following common format of eight items. In the text they are indicated by headings in square brackets. The first five items correspond to the ninecell coordinate, the next two to the leverage coordinate, and the last to the export of integrated systems (Definition 20 and Proposition 39, Section 12). First, [Current portfolio position]. A state is not classified into a single cell but described as a weighted portfolio over the nine cells (Definition 3, Section 6). The notation used is of the form "leading cell + secondary cell." For example, the United States is written as M1×C2 leading + M3×C1 deepening, which is read as "leading production at the frontier tier while deepening domestic utilization of commoditized capability." Second, [Principal assets and constraints]. The assets that support the country's position (compute platforms, talent, capital, institutions, complementary assets) are set out together with the factors that constrain the maintenance of, or movement from, that position (electricity, scale, fiscal capacity, geography). Third, [Structure of dependence]. On which external actors, and at which layers, the country's AI supply depends. This is described from the standpoint of exposure to AI outage (Section 13) and of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6, Section 13). Fourth, [Direction of policy]. Verifiable policy facts from 2022 to 2026 (laws, budgets, international agreements) are recorded with dates. Fifth, [Attempts at cell transition]. The structural wagers a state is making, either for movement from its current position to another cell or for the defence of its current position, are described. Sixth, [Indispensability]. This corresponds to the first component of Definition 15 (Section 11). The presence or absence and the kind of choke points the country holds are described, together with the time required for switching if another state were to attempt to bypass them. Which of the six sources set out in Section 11.2 — advanced semiconductor manufacturing equipment, particular manufacturing sites, high-bandwidth memory, minerals and refining, cooling water and siting, and the routes of submarine cables — the country is involved in is identified, and the mechanism sustaining that choke point (economies of scale, learning effects, capital specificity, the physical conditions of siting, or accumulated skill; Section 11.2.7) is indicated. Identification of the mechanism matters because it permits the order of magnitude of the time required for substitution to be predicted — a choke point sustained by economies of scale alone takes a few years given the 474 injection of capital, whereas one sustained by learning effects and skill takes a decade. Where a choke point is held not by the state but by a firm or a site, the possible separation between the holder and the right of exercise is also noted (Section 11.2.3). Seventh, [Desirability]. This corresponds to the second component of Definition 15. Where the grounds on which other states voluntarily wish to engage with the country lie, among the five components of market, rules, technology, capital, and trust (Section 11.3), is described. As to the fifth component, trust, the state of development of the three elements of Definition 17 (trust infrastructure) — rules of liability allocation, conformity assessment, and insurance — bounds from above the depth of deployment in the jurisdiction concerned (Proposition 25, Section 11), so this standpoint is made explicit. On that basis, it is made explicit for each country which quadrant of the 2×2 presented in Section 11.5.2 it occupies — the Structurally Indispensable Type (indispensability high / desirability high), the Normative–Market Type (low / high), the Bottleneck-Specialized Type (high / low), or the Dependent–Peripheral Type (low / low). Two limitations on this attribution are stated in advance. First, the attribution of a quadrant is a relative placement on an ordinal scale, not a measurement by a composite indicator. As Section 11.1 made explicit, this paper presents no single indicator combining the two components — combination requires weights between the components, and those weights depend on the context of negotiation. The attributions below are therefore relative placements within the limited set of ten profiles, not judgments of an absolute level. Second, the quadrants are not a grading of countries as superior or inferior. A reading on which the Structurally Indispensable Type is preferable and the Dependent– Peripheral Type is not is not the intention of this section. As Section 11.5.2 assigned a vulnerability specific to each quadrant, every quadrant has its own failure mode — the Structurally Indispensable Type is subject fastest to the paradox of exercise (Proposition 23), and the Bottleneck-Specialized Type loses all its leverage upon the success of a design that bypasses it. The quadrants are a description of where the means of pushing back lie, not a report card on states. The operable self-diagnostic procedure is placed in Appendix G. Eighth, [Exportability of integrated systems]. As regards the export of integrated systems formulated in Section 12 (Definition 20), this item briefly describes what this paper is able to state about each of the four conditions of Proposition 39 — (i) domain-specific national brain capital (Definition 11), (ii) trust infrastructure (Definition 17), (iii) an operational record within the home jurisdiction, and (iv) portability — for the jurisdiction concerned. Three limitations are stated in advance. First, this item is not a scoring of export capability but a description of facts about each of the four conditions. No assertion is made that a jurisdiction can or cannot be an exporter. Second, because Proposition 39 is judged not for a jurisdiction as a whole but for a pair of jurisdiction and domain (Section 12.3.1), a description that does not specify a domain does not settle the matter — it is usual for the same jurisdiction to satisfy the conditions in one domain and not in another (Section 12.8.3). Third, where a condition is not supported by evidence, 475 this is recorded as "the evidence of this paper does not permit a judgment," and not filled in by supposition. In particular, (iv) portability is the most constraining of the four conditions, and yet this paper has no indicator by which to measure it in advance (Section 20.8(i)). The descriptions in this item therefore reach the state of being undeterminable more frequently than the other three conditions. One point on which the description in this item differs in character from the other seven should be stated. The first seven items are descriptions of states observed of the jurisdiction concerned. The eighth item is a description of a relation, that of transferability, and is not completed by observation of the interior of the jurisdiction alone — whether a system can be re-embedded in the institutions of the receiving side depends also on which jurisdiction the receiving side is. Section 12.4 took the form of presenting exportable and non-exportable domains in pairs for the same reason. The descriptions in this item are therefore to be read not as a list of the attributes of a jurisdiction but as a list of which conditions can be stated, on what evidence, and for which domains. The ten profiles were selected not for exhaustiveness but on the criterion of placing at least one case in each region of the nine cells: frontier production (the United States, China), standard setting and construction of public compute platforms (the EU), the evaluation interface (the United Kingdom), the asymmetry between utilization and transformation (Japan), supply of inputs (the Republic of Korea), the small-state hub (Singapore), conversion of assets (the UAE and Saudi Arabia), utilization specialization with scale (India), and upstream specialization at the military–civil interface (Israel). This selection is intended not as a ranking of the importance of countries but as securing the coverage of the theory. It therefore carries no implication that the positions of states left out of the selection — Taiwan, Canada, Australia, Brazil, Indonesia, Nigeria and others — reduce to one of the types of this section. In particular, as regards the group of states belonging to the Compute Desert (Section 14.12), the very fact that [Direction of policy] and [Attempts at cell transition] in this section's common format may be blank is a fact to be described, and it is treated in Section 14.14 as a limit of the range of application of the nine-cell theory. Three disciplines of description are made explicit in advance. (1) Policies and figures are confined to those checked as of August 2026 against primary sources or multiple independent reports, and are dated. Government self-reported figures and estimates from a single report are identified as such. (2) C3 (the critical tier) is an unrealized anticipatory category as of the time of writing (Definition 2, Section 5). The plots of this section therefore cover the two rows C1 and C2, and conditional analysis of row C3 is left to Section 9. Positioning bearing on C3 is confined to mention at the level of monitoring indicators for countries that have a military-technology interface. (3) Through the Frontier Descent (Section 5), the C1/C2 boundary itself moves. Figure 3 is a snapshot as of 2026 and not a permanent ranking. Yesterday's C2 is tomorrow's C1, and the position of each country changes through movement of the boundary alone. Finally, the distance of this section from the discourse it treats is fixed. National "AI strategy" documents adopted the term "sovereign AI" rapidly over 2024 to 2026. This dis‐ 476 course has a long lineage. "Techno-nationalism" as an ideology that regards technology as central to the security, autonomy, and prestige of the state was formulated by Samuels (1994) from Japanese studies, and its AI version originates in Hogarth's (2018) essay "AI Nationalism." At the same time, criticism of this discourse exists to the effect that it is an "illusion" concealing actual dependence on global value chains (Luo, 2022), together with the observation that the discourse of sovereign AI has co-evolved with the marketing of compute vendors. This section's common format establishes [Structure of dependence] as an independent item in order to build this criticism into its method — placing each country's declarations of "sovereignty" and the actual state of its dependence on the same page. The weighting of each cell in the plots of Figure 3 is, moreover, a qualitative judgment based on verified policy facts and measured indicators (supplier concentration, location of compute platforms, scale of investment, rate of use, balance of payments), and no combination into a single index is performed. A composite index would erase the non-equivalence of the cells (Proposition 3, Section 6), and the practical apparatus for self-diagnosis is left to Appendix D. Figure 3. The Nine-Cell Matrix (M1–3 × C1–3) and the portfolio plots of principal countries. The leading cell (dark) and secondary cells (light) of each country are placed on the basis of policy facts as of 2026. Row C3 is excluded from the plot because it is an unrealized anticipatory category. National Value Model (M) AI Capability Tiers (C) M1 Resource-Producing M2 Transformation M3 Utilization C3 Critical Tier C2 Frontier Tier C1 Commodity Tier (unrealized anticipatory category) United States, China Korea (semiconductors), Taiwan Japan, EU, Singapore Japan Movement toward M2′ Open-weight suppliers Application transformation Broad diffusion Japan's present position (centred on M3×C2). The dashed arrow shows movement toward M2′ (transformation resting on complementary assets). Row C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category at the time of writing (Definition 2). 477 14.2 The United States — Dominance of M1×C2 and Internal Concentration [Current portfolio position] M1×C2 leading + M3×C1 deepening. The United States is the only state on the nine cells that stably leads production at the frontier tier (M1×C2). The three models that define the frontier in mid-2026 on Epoch AI's capability index (ECI) — GPT-5.2, Claude Opus 4.6, and Gemini 3 Pro — are all the output of firms in the United States (Epoch AI, 2026), and closed models at the frontier are almost exclusively of United States origin. At the same time, approximately 75% of the world's ascertainable AI supercomputer performance is located in the United States (Pilz et al., 2025). It is a structure in which the exclusivity of production and the concentration of compute platforms reinforce one another. [Principal assets and constraints] The first asset is the scale of mobilization of private capital. Private AI investment in the United States moved from 109.1 billion dollars in 2024 (Stanford HAI, 2025) to approximately 285.9 billion dollars in 2025 (Stanford HAI, 2026), reaching approximately 23 times that of China (approximately 12.4 billion dollars) in the same year. Second is the concentration of frontier developers — of the approximately ten development entities in the world able to produce frontier-class models as of 2026, five (OpenAI, Anthropic, Google DeepMind, Meta, xAI) are located in the United States (Epoch AI, 2026). The constraints appear on the reverse side of concentration. Of private AI investment in 2025, California accounted for 218 billion dollars (more than 75%), and extreme geographical concentration is proceeding within the country as well (Stanford HAI, 2026). In regions where data centres are concentrated, scarcity in the transmission grid and interconnection queues are publicly confirmed as constraints on growth (Stanford HAI, 2026), and at the state level the fiscal burden of attracting data centres — more than 30 states establishing sales tax exemptions and the like, annual revenue losses exceeding 100 million dollars in at least 10 states, and cases in which subsidies reach up to 2 million dollars per job — is reported by watchdog organizations (Good Jobs First, 2024). The structure in which capital, talent, and electricity are concentrated in a small number of regions and a small number of firms within a producing country makes the United States itself the case most readily observed for the "curse of concentration" on the producing side that Proposition 6a (Section 8) notes. [Structure of dependence] Dominance of M1×C2 does not mean self-sufficiency. The physical inputs for building the frontier — the manufacture of advanced logic semiconductors and extreme ultraviolet lithography equipment — depend on a small number of nodes in Taiwan, the Netherlands and elsewhere, and the export controls of the United States have been analysed precisely as an exercise of jurisdiction over those few nodes (Farrell & Newman, 2019; Miller, 2022). That is, the position of the United States is the simultaneous holding of a choke point and dependence on a choke point, and, as the theory of weaponized interdependence predicts, the counteraction by which anticipation of exercise induces investment in domestic substitution by the counterpart state (Farrell & Newman, 2019) is actually operating (see Section 14.3). Domestically, electricity is the largest physical dependence, and the electricity demand of AI supercomputers is growing at approxim‐ 478 ately a factor of two per year (Pilz et al., 2025). Further, there are leaks in the effectiveness of the choke point approach itself. Epoch AI has published interval estimates of the scale of outflows (resale, circumvention) of controlled chips to China, and although the estimated range is wide, several studies and enforcement cases report that export controls do not function completely as a physical blockade. Since the object of control is not a "barrel" but a highly integrated small article, blockade at the same level as an oil embargo cannot be expected for advanced chips — this shows that the discipline of analogy (Proposition 1, Section 3) should be applied to the design of export controls as well. [Direction of policy] The course of export controls toward China since 2022 forms the skeleton of policy. The interim final rule of BIS of 7 October 2022 imposed licence requirements on exports of advanced compute chips and semiconductor manufacturing equipment to China, and delimited the scope not by use but by capability levels exceeding specified performance thresholds. This manner of delimiting scope is discussed in the literature as a formulation of the "choke point strategy" (the motivation and appropriateness of the measures are not objects of judgment in this paper). The revision of 17 October 2023 changed the performance criterion to a basis of total processing performance and closed off circumvention products (A800/H800). The "AI Diffusion Rule" (Framework for Artificial Intelligence Diffusion) announced on 13 January 2025 was the first framework in history to divide the world into three tiers and place even transfers of chips and model weights under comprehensive licensing, but it was withdrawn on 13 May 2025, two days before entry into force, after the change of administration. Thereafter the United States moved to transactional export control without a comprehensive rule — an agreement under which 15% of revenue from sales of H20 to China is paid to the government (reported in August 2025 and acknowledged by the President himself), and a policy of approving sales of H200 to China on condition of taking 25% of sales (stated on 8 December 2025, formalized as a shift to "case-by-case review" on 14–15 January 2026). This mode of linking export licences directly to payments to the treasury is a form of governance that monetizes the dominant position of M1×C2 directly as a source of rent, and it shows that the mode of managing a "managed strategic material" discussed in Section 8 may swing from the multilateral regime type to the bilateral transactional type. [Attempts at cell transition] The characteristic of the bundle of measures observed with respect to the United States is that they act not on movement of its own position but on conditioning the cell placement of other states. The withdrawn AI Diffusion Rule had a structure that set the quantity of compute and model weights each country could procure as a licensing allowance. Even after withdrawal, large-scale supplies of chips to the Gulf states (Section 14.9) carry a structure in which those states' shift to M3×C2 and their hosting of compute platforms are conditioned on supply from the United States. All of these are descriptions of the structural consequences of measures, and do not infer the intent of the measures. Domestically, the rate of personal use of generative AI is reported at 28.3% (24th among the countries surveyed) (Stanford HAI, 2026); the depth of utilization (M3) is thus not outstanding relative to the dominance of production, which also makes this a 479 case showing that dominance of M1×C2 and deepening of M3 are not automatically linked. This absence of linkage is an important observation for the nine-cell theory. The Resource- Producing Model (M1) and the Utilization Model (M3) bear on the same resource but require different institutions — the former requires extreme concentration of capital, electricity, and research talent; the latter requires broad and thin complementary investment in organizations, operations, and education (Proposition 5, Section 7). The position of the United States shows that these two do not automatically connect within the same country, that is, that dominance of M1×C2 does not guarantee the absorptive capacity of the national economy as a whole. It is isomorphic with the fact that in the oil era producing countries did not automatically obtain domestic motorization. In addition, the domestic distributional problems that concentration of production brings about — concentration of more than 75% of investment in the single state of California, and the passing on of electricity charges to residents and the loss of tax revenue in regions where data centres are sited (Good Jobs First, 2024) — suggest that the relation Proposition 6a (Section 8) stated for the producing-country side may also operate as a relation among regions within a producing country. The United States may be more accurately read not as a single position on the nine cells but as a composite standing in different cells state by state — a point that connects, as a resolution problem specific to describing the position of large states, with the design of monitoring indicators in Appendix A. [Indispensability] The choke points the United States holds are not a single physical site but jurisdiction over several choke points. As regards the design of advanced semiconductors, design automation software, principal components of equipment, and the supply of accelerators held by its own firms, the United States is in a position able to condition transfers through the legal framework of export controls (Farrell & Newman, 2019; Miller, 2022). The mechanism sustaining this indispensability is a composite of economies of scale and capital specificity, and in the classification of Section 11.2.7 it includes both components that may be shortened by the injection of capital and components that may not. On the other hand, this indispensability is not asymmetric — the capacity to manufacture advanced logic and the lithography equipment are outside the territory, and the United States itself depends on choke points in other jurisdictions. In terms of the time required for switching, the search for alternatives to the constraints the United States can impose is already under way (import-side management in Section 14.3, and investment in domestic substitution as noted below), and the depreciation by exercise of which Proposition 23 speaks is actually operating. Of the six sources of Section 11.2, what the United States directly holds as a point is part of cooling water and siting; the remainder is held indirectly by way of jurisdiction. [Desirability] It is thick in all five components. There is market size, capital (private AI investment of approximately 285.9 billion dollars in 2025), technology (the concentration of frontier-class development entities), and engagement on security through alliance relations. In the rules component, in place of a comprehensive AI regulatory law it prescribes

the conditions of market access in the form of export controls, and this measure operates from the side of indispensability rather than of desirability. As regards trust infrastructure (Definition 17), liability allocation is formed by ex post litigation rather than by ex ante legislation, and the development of the three elements differs greatly by field. The attribution of quadrant is the Structurally Indispensable Type. Of the ten cases in this section, this is the one in which position on the nine cells (M1×C2 leading) and attribution on the leverage coordinate correspond most straightforwardly, and for that reason it does not serve as an illustration of Proposition 22 — a case of agreement is neither a refutation nor a proof of independence. What Proposition 22 requires is the existence of cases that do not agree, and those appear in the profiles below. [Exportability of integrated systems] Of the four conditions of Proposition 39 (Section 12), the facts described in this item correspond directly to (ii) trust infrastructure — liability allocation is formed by ex post litigation rather than ex ante legislation, and the level of development of the three elements differs greatly by field. In which direction this mode acts on (iv) portability — whether as a thickness of practice that composes liability by contract, or in the direction of building premises specific to the home jurisdiction into the system — may divide by domain, and the evidence of this paper does not permit a judgment. [Implications for readers in this country] What the profile of the United States shows is that dominance of production does not guarantee the absorptive capacity of the national economy, and that concentration of production produces distributional problems among regions within the country. This reading may be applied in the same way to other states that hold producing entities within their own territory — China, and states that come in future to hold large-scale compute platforms and development entities domestically (France, the Republic of Korea, the UAE and others). What readers in a producing position should measure about their own country is not the volume of production but the degree of linkage between production and domestic utilization, and what the concentration of production leaves to regions in terms of electricity, taxation, and employment (Propositions 6a and 6b, Section 8). 14.3 China — Construction of a Self-Sufficient Sphere and Dual Circulation [Current portfolio position] M1×C1 leading + M1×C2 pursuit + M3×C1/C2. China's position is dual. First, the world frontier of open-weight models came to be led by Chinese entities in 2025–2026. The leading open weights as of 2026 are Kimi K2.5, DeepSeek-V3.2, Qwen3-235B, and GLM-4.7, all of Chinese origin, while Meta (the Llama line), formerly the bearer of the open frontier, has fallen back considerably (Epoch AI, 2026). Since the supply of open weights has a C1-like mode of circulation in which access restrictions do not function in practice, this is the position of "a world supplier of M1×C1." Second, in the closed frontier (C2) it is a pursuer of the three United States models, and the performance gap between the top models of the United States and China is reported to have narrowed to 2.7% as of March 2026 (Stanford HAI, 2026). 481 [Principal assets and constraints] The largest assets are the lower two layers of inputs — electricity and the base of diffusion. China's electricity reserve margin is reported never to have fallen below 80% (Stanford HAI, 2026), in contrast with the regions of data-centre concentration in the United States that face scarcity in the transmission grid. New installations of industrial robots number 295,000 units, approximately nine times those of the United States (34,000 units) (Stanford HAI, 2026), and the receiving base for implementing AI in the physical world is thick. The rate of personal use of generative AI is 93.6% (fiscal 2025), the highest in the four-country comparison of Japan, the United States, Germany and China (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2026). The constraint lies in the unit performance of advanced chips. The domestically produced Huawei Ascend 910C retains a performance gap from the most advanced products of the United States, and SMIC's advanced logic is reported to be at a standstill at the 7 nm generation (mass production demonstrated with the Mate 60 Pro in August 2023). The assessment that the mainstay of frontier training remains NVIDIA chips procured before controls were tightened is dominant, and this point indicates that the self-sufficient sphere is incomplete. What deserves attention is the non-linearity between investment and capability — against a gap of approximately 23 times in private AI investment between the United States and China (2025), the performance gap between top models is 2.7% (Stanford HAI, 2026). This divergence may be read as the manifestation at national scale of the asymmetry of Section 5 — that the cost of late pursuit is lower by orders of magnitude than the cost of building the frontier (the cost of building the frontier rises at approximately an annual factor of 2.4, while the inference price of already-attained capability falls at annual factors of 9-fold to 900-fold). [Structure of dependence] External dependence for advanced chips, semiconductor manufacturing equipment, and high-bandwidth memory is the core, and it is precisely at this dependence that the exercise of the United States choke point (Section 14.2) was directed. China's response is not the dissolution of dependence but the management of dependence. Even after the lifting of restrictions on H200 sales to China in January 2026, the National Development and Reform Commission (NDRC) has reviewed imports case by case and required an explanation of "the reasons why domestic substitutes cannot be used," and as of 19 August 2026 only approximately 13% of the permitted allowance (approximately 10,000 units each for ByteDance and Tencent) is reported to have been delivered. Against a "United States that does not let goods be sold" there is a "China that does not let goods be bought" — a partial transfer of the initiative to inducement of domestic substitution through import-side management. Decomposing the structure of dependence more finely, there are three points of severance. First, the manufacture of advanced logic (foundries and lithography equipment abroad); second, procurement of high-bandwidth memory (HBM); third, design software. As regards the first and second, internalization of supply is set as a national priority, as shown by Huawei's publication in September 2025 of a multi-year roadmap including HBM of its own development. Including the third, the design environment, the answer to "what stops if it is cut" is not the same for each — the provision of inference and applica‐ 482 tions on existing clusters may continue for a considerable period on inventories and domestic chips even if supply stops completely, whereas training runs for the next-generation frontier depend directly on continued additional procurement of advanced chips. That is, China's exposure to AI outage shows a layered asymmetry: relatively low at the C1 tier (broad domestic use) and high at the C2 tier (renewal of the frontier). This is a concrete instance of the point that the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6, Section 13) should be designed not at a single level but separately for each capability tier. [Direction of policy] It is twofold, with both regulation and diffusion under national management. On the regulatory side, the Interim Measures for the Management of Generative AI Services (in force 15 August 2023, the world's first regulation dedicated to generative AI) and the Measures for Labelling AI-Generated Content (in force 1 September 2025). On the diffusion side, the State Council's "Opinions on Deepening the Implementation of the 'Artificial Intelligence Plus' Initiative" (promulgated 26 August 2025) set out three-stage targets: a penetration rate of new-generation intelligent terminals, agents and the like exceeding 70% in 2027, exceeding 90% in 2030, and a full transition to an intelligent economy and intelligent society in 2035. On the supply side, Huawei published in September 2025 an unusual multi-year roadmap (950PR/950DT through 970, with HBM of its own development), and a plan to double shipments of the Ascend 910C in 2026 to approximately 600,000 units was reported (Reuters, 2025). A strategy of offsetting the disadvantage in single-chip performance by large-scale clustering such as CloudMatrix 384 — compensating with scale at the expense of electricity — is made explicit. [Attempts at cell transition] The four groups of measures observed with respect to China — (1) pursuit of C2 through clustering and electricity, (2) supply through the publication of weights, (3) import-side management, and (4) national mobilization of diffusion — may be organized on the nine cells as the coexistence of expansion of supply capacity within the territory and supply to outside it. The supply through publication of weights in particular has a distinctive meaning in nine-cell theory. Supplying models of domestic origin as published weights forgoes direct sales revenue while carrying the structural consequences of lowering the dependence of users on access to particular closed models and of causing the developer ecosystem to form upon that line of models. This consequence is observed; as to the motive for publication, this paper makes no judgment. The event in which the release of DeepSeek-R1 on 20 January 2025 caused a single-day loss of approximately 589 billion dollars of NVIDIA's market capitalization on 27 January (the largest in the history of the United States market) was a market demonstration that expansion of C1 supply strikes directly at the expected rents of holding C2. The technical claims of that model passed peer review for the first time for a mainstream LLM as the cover paper of Nature on 17 September 2025, disclosing that the additional training cost of the reinforcement learning stage was 294,000 dollars (the final training run of the base model being approximately 5.576 million dollars on a rental-equivalent basis — both being limited figures excluding personnel and experimental costs). This sequence of publications shows that entities of that country stand in a position to generate the Frontier Descent (Section 5) — the rapid 483 cheapening of capability near the frontier — from the supplying side rather than the waiting side. [Indispensability] The choke points China holds lie not in AI capability itself but in the materials upstream of it. As regards minerals and refining — concentration in the refining and separation stages — treated in Section 11.2.4, the scope of export licensing expanded from gallium and germanium in July 2023 to graphite (October 2023), antimony and superhard materials (August 2024), tungsten and tellurium (February 2025), and medium and heavy rare earths (April 2025), and on 9 October 2025 an announcement was issued widening both the objects and the scope of application (Global Trade Alert, 2025). In November of the same year several of the announcements dated 9 October were suspended until 10 November 2026, but the legal framework that makes the measures possible remains in force (Pillsbury, 2025). As Section 11.6.1 stated, this is a state of indispensability held but not exercised. The mechanism sustaining this choke point is a composite of economies of scale, learning effects, and the siting condition of acceptance under environmental regulation, and development of alternative sources of supply takes years while rebuilding refining capacity takes a decade. In addition, the case-by-case review on the import side described in Section 14.3 is a symmetric measure from the demand side against indispensability on the supply side, and may be described as a third mode of leverage — pushing back by not buying. [Desirability] Market size is large, and in the technology component it takes the distinctive form of world supply of open-weight models. Here, however, the structure that Section 11.1 raised as "the third type" appears — supply of open weights is a structural means of eroding other states' dependence on C2 by publishing the weights, a non-exclusive route that forgoes direct sales revenue. The fact of producing does not automatically convert into the fact that other states wish to engage. Since the weights are published, users can use them without holding a continuing relationship with the supplier. In the rules component, the Interim Measures for the Management of Generative AI Services (in force 15 August 2023) and the Measures for Labelling AI-Generated Content (in force 1 September 2025) prescribe conditions within the territory, but their operation as a route constraining the conduct of actors outside the territory — Brussels-effect-type diffusion — cannot be confirmed on this paper's evidence base. The attribution of quadrant is a position that is high on the indispensability side and, on the desirability side, varies by component. That is, it lies between the Structurally Indispensable Type and the Bottleneck- Specialized Type, and which it inclines toward depends on the course of each component of desirability. What deserves attention here is that the source of indispensability (minerals and refining) resides in an industry other than the leading cell on the nine cells (M1×C1) — an instance of divergence in the sense that position and leverage do not arise from the same industry. [Exportability of integrated systems] As regards the part of (i) domain-specific national brain capital that bears on physical processes, the thickness of the receiving base for physical implementation indicated by new installations of 295,000 industrial robots (Stanford 484 HAI, 2026) can be described as a fact showing the existence of a base on which operational records are generated. As to the remaining three conditions, and in particular (iv) portability — whether a system is separable from the institutions and practices of the home jurisdiction — the evidence of this paper does not permit a judgment. [Implications for readers in this country] What China's profile shows is that a route exists by which a state, while holding external dependence in the inputs of the upper tiers, becomes a world supplier at the lower tiers using electricity and the scale of its domestic market, and that dependence may be designed through "management on the import side" rather than "dissolution." This analysis may be applied as a type to populous states that have a large domestic market and their own electricity while depending externally for advanced inputs — India, Brazil, Indonesia and others. Because the scale of capital mobilization and the mode of executing industrial policy differ greatly by country, however, a country should measure itself not by the availability of the route but by the degree to which it satisfies the three conditions of electricity, domestic demand, and capacity for import management. 14.4 The EU — Divergence Between Regulatory Power and Productive Power [Current portfolio position] M3×C1/C2 leading + standard-setting power (a variable outside the cells) + M1×C2 at the periphery. The greatest characteristic of the EU's position is the separation between "where one stands on the nine cells" and "who writes the rules of the cells." The latter is a position that the note to Definition 3 (Section 6) placed outside the domain of quantification — a position in which the source of value lies not in a relation to the general-purpose input but in constraints on the conduct of other actors — and it is this theoretical exclusion that this section denotes by "a variable outside the cells" (elaborated in Section 14.14). Frontier production within the territory is almost limited to Mistral AI (France) (Epoch AI, 2026), and Germany and France, formerly strong in HPC, have become peripheral in AI clusters (Pilz et al., 2025). In the geography of production, then, it is a utilization country (M3). On the other hand, through the AI Act (Regulation (EU) 2024/1689, in force 1 August 2024) the EU has the world's first comprehensive AI regulatory law and occupies the position of a standard setter prescribing the conditions of market access. The Brussels effect formulated by Bradford (2020) — the route by which market size and regulatory capacity export global standards by way of corporate conduct (de facto) and legislative emulation (de jure) — is a channel of value capture that does not proceed by production, and is the regulatory version of the finding of global value chain research that "capture of value is determined by governance position within the chain" (Gereffi, Humphrey & Sturgeon, 2005). Whether GDPR-type diffusion arises for the AI Act is, however, academically contested (Siegmann & Anderljung, 2022 on the affirmative side; on the sceptical side, arguments noting the weakness of industry within the territory and divisibility), and this paper treats it as an unsettled empirical question. 485 [Principal assets and constraints] The assets are the size of the single market, regulatory capacity, and the capacity to build public compute platforms. The AI Factories connected to the existing EuroHPC network grew from the first tranche of seven sites on 10 December 2024 to 19 sites selected by 10 October 2025. The constraint is the divergence between the speed of regulation and the speed of capability building. InvestAI, announced on 11 February 2025, is a scheme for mobilizing investment on a scale of 200 billion euros in total, of which 20 billion euros is allocated to a new fund for AI gigafactories equipped with chips on the order of 100,000 units. The call for expressions of interest in June 2025 drew 77 proposals from 60 sites in 16 member states, but the formal tender is set for the summer of 2026 and construction of the first facility is scheduled for 2027; as of August 2026 not a single gigafactory has been selected. The AI Act itself is likewise in flux: staged application of the prohibitions (2 February 2025) and of the obligations for general-purpose AI (2 August 2025) has begun, while discussion of simplification of application (the digital omnibus) proceeds and postponement of some dates of entry into application has been proposed. Regulation is already in force and compute platforms are not yet under construction — this time difference itself governs the EU's position. [Structure of dependence] Dependence outside the territory (principally on the United States) for cloud and foundation models is the keynote, and this is the material background of the EU's discourse of "digital sovereignty." What the academic accounts (Floridi, 2020; Broeders, Cristiano & Kaminska, 2023) note in agreement is a "divergence between regulation and capability": regulatory power is present but the industrial base — cloud, semiconductors, foundation models — is lacking. In addition, there is within the territory a precedent of extractive distortion (Proposition 6b, Section 8). In Ireland, data centres came to consume more than 20% of electricity, leading to restrictions on new construction, which demonstrates within the territory that attracting compute platforms does not necessarily bring local transformation value. Rereading dependence in terms of "what stops if what is cut," the EU's exposure is concentrated on cloud providers and foundation model providers in the United States. Since the workloads of firms and administrations ride on a small number of hyperscalers outside the territory, changes in the conditions of supply through commercial decisions (revision of prices or service terms) or geopolitical measures may act simultaneously across sectors — the typical structure in which AI outage is correlated across borders (Proposition 7, Section 13). The EU's response is a twofold strategy of fixing conditions by regulation (the obligations of data protection and the AI Act) and building a partial alternative system through public compute platforms, but the former is not a means of securing supply and the latter is pre-construction. During this time difference, the EU's sovereign minimum guarantee level may be said to depend on regulatory bargaining power rather than on domestically held capability. Whether regulation can compel supply is an unsettled question specific to the EU's design. [Direction of policy] Centred on the "AI Continent Action Plan" of April 2025, a turn from regulation alone to regulation plus investment in compute sovereignty is proceeding. At 486 the member state level, France announced at the Paris AI Action Summit of February 2025 a package of AI-related investment totalling 109 billion euros (a bundle of private commitments from the UAE, Brookfield of Canada and others, not a government budget; it is an announced figure and no verification on an execution basis exists). Mistral AI raised 1.7 billion euros in a Series C led by ASML in September 2025 (post-money valuation approximately 11.7 billion euros), and the French government and armed forces have contracted with the firm, positioning it as "the flagship of European sovereign AI." [Attempts at cell transition] The EU's wager is on two fronts. First, movement from M3 in the direction of M1×C2 through public capital (the gigafactories). This is pre-construction, however, and the success of the movement is an empirical question from 2027 onward. Second, capture of the rules of the cells through standard-setting power. This is not movement on the cells but an attempt to write the rules applicable to all nine cells; if it holds, it constitutes value capture without production, but whether the conditions for it to hold (inelasticity of the market for firms outside the territory, and indivisibility of the regulation) are satisfied for AI is contested. Whether regulation can substitute for capability — the EU is one of the most important natural experiments for nine-cell theory. [Indispensability] As regards the EU's indispensability, a frequently overlooked fact must be placed first. The supplier of advanced lithography equipment, which Section 11.2.1 listed as the sharpest source of indispensability, is located in a member state of the EU. That is, although the EU has almost no frontier production within its territory, it holds within its territory a choke point in the physical inputs on which frontier producers depend. The mechanisms sustaining this choke point are, as Section 11.2.1 decomposed, four — economies of scale, learning effects, capital specificity, and accumulated skill — of which only the first can be shortened by the injection of funds. The time required for substitution is estimated on the order of a decade. A limitation on the locus of attribution is required, however — this indispensability resides in the jurisdiction of the member state rather than of the Union, and the licensing authority for export controls is exercised by the member state. This is a form of the separation between holding and the right of exercise stated in Section 11.2.3, and there is no structure by which it is exercised in a unified manner as the EU. In addition, the landing and protection of submarine cables, and the siting conditions of grid and land within the territory, are also choke points held at the level of the member state. [Desirability] Of the five components, market and rules are the central assets. The size of the single market and the prescription of conditions of market access by the AI Act (Regulation (EU) 2024/1689) plainly satisfy the first three of the five conditions of the Brussels effect formulated by Bradford (2020) — market size, regulatory capacity, stringent standards, an inelastic target, and indivisibility. Whether the last two are satisfied for AI is contested, and this paper treats it as an unsettled empirical question. As regards trust infrastructure (Definition 17), the development of the three elements is not synchronized. In element (ii) conformity assessment, work on harmonized standards under the standardization request C(2023)3215 of 22 May 2023 did not meet the original deadline (30 April 487 2025) and continues; in element (i) liability allocation, the proposed AI Liability Directive of 28 September 2022 was formally withdrawn by publication in the Official Journal on 6 October 2025 (European Parliament, 2025). The existence of a comprehensive AI regulatory law and the presence of all three elements of Definition 17 are different things — this sequence should be read not as an evaluation of a particular jurisdiction but as a description of the fact that the three elements have independent time constants (Section 11.3.5). The attribution of quadrant requires a two-layer description: principally the Normative– Market Type, with a component of the Structurally Indispensable Type at the level of the member state. This composite of position on the nine cells (M3×C1/C2 leading) and the leverage coordinate is a direct illustration of the independence asserted by Proposition 22 — standing in the Utilization Model while holding within the territory the most durable of choke points, lithography equipment. As Section 11.4 argued under "the resolution of the M4 problem," the position of writing the rules is not a fourth value model but leverage on the desirability side, and the standard-setting power that Section 14.14 has denoted as "a variable outside the cells" is here recovered into the interior of the theory. [Exportability of integrated systems] As regards (ii) trust infrastructure, the non-synchronization of the three elements is recorded under [Desirability] — work on harmonized standards continues, and as to liability allocation the proposed AI Liability Directive was formally withdrawn by publication in the Official Journal on 6 October 2025 (European Parliament, 2025). As regards (iv) portability, two effects of opposite direction may be observed simultaneously — a design that aligns proof of conformity with international standards corresponds to what Section 12.3.5 listed among the techniques of separation and works to raise portability, whereas the parts that depend on modes specific to the territory work in the opposite direction. Which way the balance of the two tips cannot be judged on the evidence of this paper. [Implications for readers in this country] What the EU's profile shows is that the position of writing rules may bring value and influence independently of the position of production, and at the same time that, because regulation cannot compel supply, the time difference in capability building remains as such a vulnerability. This configuration may be applied to jurisdictions in general in which the capacity to put in place frameworks of norms, standards, and certification runs ahead of the industrial base — the United Kingdom, and groups of states putting in place common frameworks as regional integration bodies. What readers whose countries aim at the position of rules should measure is not the completeness of the regulation but the length of the time difference between regulation and capability building, and the presence or absence of an alternative system during that period. 14.5 The United Kingdom — A Hub Strategy in Safety Research [Current portfolio position] M3×C2 leading + a transformation niche in the evaluation and inspection interface. The United Kingdom does not produce the frontier domestically 488 (private AI investment was 4.5 billion dollars in 2024, approximately 4% of that of the United States (Stanford HAI, 2025)) and is a country of advanced utilization of the United States frontier (M3×C2). What distinguishes it from a simple utilization country, however, is that it has institutionalized the scarce position of evaluation access to frontier models. In November 2023 it established the world's first governmental AI safety evaluation body, the AI Safety Institute (renamed the "AI Security Institute" in February 2025 — a shift of centre of gravity from safety to security), and as of 2025 it states that it holds more than 100 researchers and has evaluated 30 frontier models. To hold an interface for inspecting producers' models without Resource-Producing Models — this is a transformation niche specific to AI with no counterpart in the oil analogy. Looking ahead to the verification function of critical-tier governance discussed in Section 9, the accumulation of evaluation capability may also be read as advance investment in a position within a future international verification regime. [Principal assets and constraints] The assets are the research base, the evaluation body, and the consistent documentation of policy. The "AI Opportunities Action Plan" of 13 January 2025 had all 50 of its recommendations accepted in full by the government and set out a policy of expanding public AI compute capacity (AIRR) twentyfold by 2030. The spending review of June 2025 committed 2 billion pounds to compute platforms (of which 250 million pounds to the AIRR cloud expansion) and 240 million pounds to the AI Security Institute, and the national supercomputer Isambard-AI (Bristol) entered operation in July 2025. Five AI Growth Zones had been designated as of the "One Year On" report of January 2026, and the government announced that they had induced 28.2 billion pounds of private investment and more than 15,000 jobs (a government self-reported figure with no independent verification). The Sovereign AI Unit invests in domestic AI firms and data assets with government funding of up to 500 million pounds. The constraint is scale. In an environment in which the cost of frontier training grows at approximately an annual factor of 2.4 and a single training run is predicted to exceed 1 billion dollars by 2027 (Cottier et al., 2024), the total of the above public commitments is orders of magnitude short of entry into frontier production (M1×C2), and the United Kingdom itself does not set that as an objective. [Structure of dependence] It depends on the United States for both compute and models. Expansion of the AIRR presupposes procurement of chips made in the United States, and the frontier models evaluated are also of United States origin. The position of the evaluation interface itself depends on frontier developers continuing to grant evaluation access, and that grant rests not on a treaty but on a voluntary relation of cooperation. As a design of dependence, it places its centre of gravity heavily on alliance guarantees (Definition 6(ii), Section 13). Making the scenarios of severance concrete: (i) if chip procurement stops, expansion of the AIRR stops; (ii) if evaluation access to models is withdrawn, the position of evaluation hub itself is lost; and (iii) changes in the conditions of commercial cloud directly constrain utilization in administration and industry. Of the three, (ii) is specific to the United Kingdom and is the dependence with the lowest degree of institutionalization — being based on voluntary cooperation — which is the structural fragility 489 of this position. A design that replaces evaluation access with treaty-based or statutory powers is worth discussing as a precursor of the verification function of critical-tier governance (Proposition 9, Section 9). [Direction of policy] It is threefold: selective expansion of compute platforms, strengthening of the evaluation body, and attraction of siting through the Growth Zones. As a footnote in the history of concepts, the course by which Ian Hogarth, author of the 2018 essay that brought the term "AI Nationalism" to AI, became the first chair of the United Kingdom's AI Safety Institute (Hogarth, 2018) is worth recording as an instance of the traffic between discourse and institutions. In the lineage of policy documents as well, the yearby- year updating — establishment of the evaluation body in November 2023, adoption of the action plan in January 2025, renaming of the body in February 2025 (from safety to security), allocation of spending in June 2025, and the implementation report in January 2026 — shows that institutional continuity is itself operated as an asset. Since position on the nine cells depends on the accumulation of institutions (Proposition 3, Section 6), frequent reversals of policy themselves destabilize position — set against the reversal of United States export controls in 2025 (Section 14.2), the conditions under which predictability of rules functions as a national asset can be read off. [Attempts at cell transition] The United Kingdom's wager is to avoid the scale competition of production explicitly and to maintain the position of "the non-producing country closest to the frontier" through a combination of (1) a hub for evaluation and safety research, (2) selective public compute platforms, and (3) attraction of investment. This is a mid-sized-country version of "export of regulation and trust" and "niche specialization" in the menu of small-state strategy discussed below (Section 14.12), and may be organized as a variant that applies the small-state route of upstream R&D specialization shown by Breznitz (2007) to the upstream of evaluation and governance knowledge. [Indispensability] As regards none of the six sources listed in Section 11.2 can it be described from this paper's evidence base that the United Kingdom holds a non-substitutable choke point. It holds a geographical position with respect to the landing and protection of submarine cables, but as Section 11.2.6 stated, what a state holds in this source is not the capacity to sever but the permits and practice concerning landing, protection, and repair, and it appears as a function of physical security (Proposition 28(ii)) rather than as an instrument of exercise. The position of the evaluation interface is also weak measured against the definition of indispensability — the cost and dysfunction that would arise for another party were it to bypass the country concerned. If frontier developers stopped granting evaluation access, it is the United Kingdom that would bear the cost, and not the reverse. That this grant rests not on a treaty or statutory power but on a voluntary relation of cooperation is as stated under [Structure of dependence], and from the standpoint of leverage this is nothing other than the institutional content of low indispensability. [Desirability] The institutional asset of evaluation and inspection is central. For producers of the frontier, having a venue in which their own models are evaluated by an independent third party may have value both for deployment into regulated sectors and for extern‐ 490

the conditions of market access in the form of export controls, and this measure operates from the side of indispensability rather than of desirability. As regards trust infrastructure (Definition 17), liability allocation is formed by ex post litigation rather than by ex ante legislation, and the development of the three elements differs greatly by field. The attribution of quadrant is the Structurally Indispensable Type. Of the ten cases in this section, this is the one in which position on the nine cells (M1×C2 leading) and attribution on the leverage coordinate correspond most straightforwardly, and for that reason it does not serve as an illustration of Proposition 22 — a case of agreement is neither a refutation nor a proof of independence. What Proposition 22 requires is the existence of cases that do not agree, and those appear in the profiles below. [Exportability of integrated systems] Of the four conditions of Proposition 39 (Section 12), the facts described in this item correspond directly to (ii) trust infrastructure — liability allocation is formed by ex post litigation rather than ex ante legislation, and the level of development of the three elements differs greatly by field. In which direction this mode acts on (iv) portability — whether as a thickness of practice that composes liability by contract, or in the direction of building premises specific to the home jurisdiction into the system — may divide by domain, and the evidence of this paper does not permit a judgment. [Implications for readers in this country] What the profile of the United States shows is that dominance of production does not guarantee the absorptive capacity of the national economy, and that concentration of production produces distributional problems among regions within the country. This reading may be applied in the same way to other states that hold producing entities within their own territory — China, and states that come in future to hold large-scale compute platforms and development entities domestically (France, the Republic of Korea, the UAE and others). What readers in a producing position should measure about their own country is not the volume of production but the degree of linkage between production and domestic utilization, and what the concentration of production leaves to regions in terms of electricity, taxation, and employment (Propositions 6a and 6b, Section 8). 14.3 China — Construction of a Self-Sufficient Sphere and Dual Circulation [Current portfolio position] M1×C1 leading + M1×C2 pursuit + M3×C1/C2. China's position is dual. First, the world frontier of open-weight models came to be led by Chinese entities in 2025–2026. The leading open weights as of 2026 are Kimi K2.5, DeepSeek-V3.2, Qwen3-235B, and GLM-4.7, all of Chinese origin, while Meta (the Llama line), formerly the bearer of the open frontier, has fallen back considerably (Epoch AI, 2026). Since the supply of open weights has a C1-like mode of circulation in which access restrictions do not function in practice, this is the position of "a world supplier of M1×C1." Second, in the closed frontier (C2) it is a pursuer of the three United States models, and the performance gap between the top models of the United States and China is reported to have narrowed to 2.7% as of March 2026 (Stanford HAI, 2026). 481 [Principal assets and constraints] The largest assets are the lower two layers of inputs — electricity and the base of diffusion. China's electricity reserve margin is reported never to have fallen below 80% (Stanford HAI, 2026), in contrast with the regions of data-centre concentration in the United States that face scarcity in the transmission grid. New installations of industrial robots number 295,000 units, approximately nine times those of the United States (34,000 units) (Stanford HAI, 2026), and the receiving base for implementing AI in the physical world is thick. The rate of personal use of generative AI is 93.6% (fiscal 2025), the highest in the four-country comparison of Japan, the United States, Germany and China (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2026). The constraint lies in the unit performance of advanced chips. The domestically produced Huawei Ascend 910C retains a performance gap from the most advanced products of the United States, and SMIC's advanced logic is reported to be at a standstill at the 7 nm generation (mass production demonstrated with the Mate 60 Pro in August 2023). The assessment that the mainstay of frontier training remains NVIDIA chips procured before controls were tightened is dominant, and this point indicates that the self-sufficient sphere is incomplete. What deserves attention is the non-linearity between investment and capability — against a gap of approximately 23 times in private AI investment between the United States and China (2025), the performance gap between top models is 2.7% (Stanford HAI, 2026). This divergence may be read as the manifestation at national scale of the asymmetry of Section 5 — that the cost of late pursuit is lower by orders of magnitude than the cost of building the frontier (the cost of building the frontier rises at approximately an annual factor of 2.4, while the inference price of already-attained capability falls at annual factors of 9-fold to 900-fold). [Structure of dependence] External dependence for advanced chips, semiconductor manufacturing equipment, and high-bandwidth memory is the core, and it is precisely at this dependence that the exercise of the United States choke point (Section 14.2) was directed. China's response is not the dissolution of dependence but the management of dependence. Even after the lifting of restrictions on H200 sales to China in January 2026, the National Development and Reform Commission (NDRC) has reviewed imports case by case and required an explanation of "the reasons why domestic substitutes cannot be used," and as of 19 August 2026 only approximately 13% of the permitted allowance (approximately 10,000 units each for ByteDance and Tencent) is reported to have been delivered. Against a "United States that does not let goods be sold" there is a "China that does not let goods be bought" — a partial transfer of the initiative to inducement of domestic substitution through import-side management. Decomposing the structure of dependence more finely, there are three points of severance. First, the manufacture of advanced logic (foundries and lithography equipment abroad); second, procurement of high-bandwidth memory (HBM); third, design software. As regards the first and second, internalization of supply is set as a national priority, as shown by Huawei's publication in September 2025 of a multi-year roadmap including HBM of its own development. Including the third, the design environment, the answer to "what stops if it is cut" is not the same for each — the provision of inference and applica‐ 482 tions on existing clusters may continue for a considerable period on inventories and domestic chips even if supply stops completely, whereas training runs for the next-generation frontier depend directly on continued additional procurement of advanced chips. That is, China's exposure to AI outage shows a layered asymmetry: relatively low at the C1 tier (broad domestic use) and high at the C2 tier (renewal of the frontier). This is a concrete instance of the point that the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6, Section 13) should be designed not at a single level but separately for each capability tier. [Direction of policy] It is twofold, with both regulation and diffusion under national management. On the regulatory side, the Interim Measures for the Management of Generative AI Services (in force 15 August 2023, the world's first regulation dedicated to generative AI) and the Measures for Labelling AI-Generated Content (in force 1 September 2025). On the diffusion side, the State Council's "Opinions on Deepening the Implementation of the 'Artificial Intelligence Plus' Initiative" (promulgated 26 August 2025) set out three-stage targets: a penetration rate of new-generation intelligent terminals, agents and the like exceeding 70% in 2027, exceeding 90% in 2030, and a full transition to an intelligent economy and intelligent society in 2035. On the supply side, Huawei published in September 2025 an unusual multi-year roadmap (950PR/950DT through 970, with HBM of its own development), and a plan to double shipments of the Ascend 910C in 2026 to approximately 600,000 units was reported (Reuters, 2025). A strategy of offsetting the disadvantage in single-chip performance by large-scale clustering such as CloudMatrix 384 — compensating with scale at the expense of electricity — is made explicit. [Attempts at cell transition] The four groups of measures observed with respect to China — (1) pursuit of C2 through clustering and electricity, (2) supply through the publication of weights, (3) import-side management, and (4) national mobilization of diffusion — may be organized on the nine cells as the coexistence of expansion of supply capacity within the territory and supply to outside it. The supply through publication of weights in particular has a distinctive meaning in nine-cell theory. Supplying models of domestic origin as published weights forgoes direct sales revenue while carrying the structural consequences of lowering the dependence of users on access to particular closed models and of causing the developer ecosystem to form upon that line of models. This consequence is observed; as to the motive for publication, this paper makes no judgment. The event in which the release of DeepSeek-R1 on 20 January 2025 caused a single-day loss of approximately 589 billion dollars of NVIDIA's market capitalization on 27 January (the largest in the history of the United States market) was a market demonstration that expansion of C1 supply strikes directly at the expected rents of holding C2. The technical claims of that model passed peer review for the first time for a mainstream LLM as the cover paper of Nature on 17 September 2025, disclosing that the additional training cost of the reinforcement learning stage was 294,000 dollars (the final training run of the base model being approximately 5.576 million dollars on a rental-equivalent basis — both being limited figures excluding personnel and experimental costs). This sequence of publications shows that entities of that country stand in a position to generate the Frontier Descent (Section 5) — the rapid 483 cheapening of capability near the frontier — from the supplying side rather than the waiting side. [Indispensability] The choke points China holds lie not in AI capability itself but in the materials upstream of it. As regards minerals and refining — concentration in the refining and separation stages — treated in Section 11.2.4, the scope of export licensing expanded from gallium and germanium in July 2023 to graphite (October 2023), antimony and superhard materials (August 2024), tungsten and tellurium (February 2025), and medium and heavy rare earths (April 2025), and on 9 October 2025 an announcement was issued widening both the objects and the scope of application (Global Trade Alert, 2025). In November of the same year several of the announcements dated 9 October were suspended until 10 November 2026, but the legal framework that makes the measures possible remains in force (Pillsbury, 2025). As Section 11.6.1 stated, this is a state of indispensability held but not exercised. The mechanism sustaining this choke point is a composite of economies of scale, learning effects, and the siting condition of acceptance under environmental regulation, and development of alternative sources of supply takes years while rebuilding refining capacity takes a decade. In addition, the case-by-case review on the import side described in Section 14.3 is a symmetric measure from the demand side against indispensability on the supply side, and may be described as a third mode of leverage — pushing back by not buying. [Desirability] Market size is large, and in the technology component it takes the distinctive form of world supply of open-weight models. Here, however, the structure that Section 11.1 raised as "the third type" appears — supply of open weights is a structural means of eroding other states' dependence on C2 by publishing the weights, a non-exclusive route that forgoes direct sales revenue. The fact of producing does not automatically convert into the fact that other states wish to engage. Since the weights are published, users can use them without holding a continuing relationship with the supplier. In the rules component, the Interim Measures for the Management of Generative AI Services (in force 15 August 2023) and the Measures for Labelling AI-Generated Content (in force 1 September 2025) prescribe conditions within the territory, but their operation as a route constraining the conduct of actors outside the territory — Brussels-effect-type diffusion — cannot be confirmed on this paper's evidence base. The attribution of quadrant is a position that is high on the indispensability side and, on the desirability side, varies by component. That is, it lies between the Structurally Indispensable Type and the Bottleneck- Specialized Type, and which it inclines toward depends on the course of each component of desirability. What deserves attention here is that the source of indispensability (minerals and refining) resides in an industry other than the leading cell on the nine cells (M1×C1) — an instance of divergence in the sense that position and leverage do not arise from the same industry. [Exportability of integrated systems] As regards the part of (i) domain-specific national brain capital that bears on physical processes, the thickness of the receiving base for physical implementation indicated by new installations of 295,000 industrial robots (Stanford 484 HAI, 2026) can be described as a fact showing the existence of a base on which operational records are generated. As to the remaining three conditions, and in particular (iv) portability — whether a system is separable from the institutions and practices of the home jurisdiction — the evidence of this paper does not permit a judgment. [Implications for readers in this country] What China's profile shows is that a route exists by which a state, while holding external dependence in the inputs of the upper tiers, becomes a world supplier at the lower tiers using electricity and the scale of its domestic market, and that dependence may be designed through "management on the import side" rather than "dissolution." This analysis may be applied as a type to populous states that have a large domestic market and their own electricity while depending externally for advanced inputs — India, Brazil, Indonesia and others. Because the scale of capital mobilization and the mode of executing industrial policy differ greatly by country, however, a country should measure itself not by the availability of the route but by the degree to which it satisfies the three conditions of electricity, domestic demand, and capacity for import management. 14.4 The EU — Divergence Between Regulatory Power and Productive Power [Current portfolio position] M3×C1/C2 leading + standard-setting power (a variable outside the cells) + M1×C2 at the periphery. The greatest characteristic of the EU's position is the separation between "where one stands on the nine cells" and "who writes the rules of the cells." The latter is a position that the note to Definition 3 (Section 6) placed outside the domain of quantification — a position in which the source of value lies not in a relation to the general-purpose input but in constraints on the conduct of other actors — and it is this theoretical exclusion that this section denotes by "a variable outside the cells" (elaborated in Section 14.14). Frontier production within the territory is almost limited to Mistral AI (France) (Epoch AI, 2026), and Germany and France, formerly strong in HPC, have become peripheral in AI clusters (Pilz et al., 2025). In the geography of production, then, it is a utilization country (M3). On the other hand, through the AI Act (Regulation (EU) 2024/1689, in force 1 August 2024) the EU has the world's first comprehensive AI regulatory law and occupies the position of a standard setter prescribing the conditions of market access. The Brussels effect formulated by Bradford (2020) — the route by which market size and regulatory capacity export global standards by way of corporate conduct (de facto) and legislative emulation (de jure) — is a channel of value capture that does not proceed by production, and is the regulatory version of the finding of global value chain research that "capture of value is determined by governance position within the chain" (Gereffi, Humphrey & Sturgeon, 2005). Whether GDPR-type diffusion arises for the AI Act is, however, academically contested (Siegmann & Anderljung, 2022 on the affirmative side; on the sceptical side, arguments noting the weakness of industry within the territory and divisibility), and this paper treats it as an unsettled empirical question. 485 [Principal assets and constraints] The assets are the size of the single market, regulatory capacity, and the capacity to build public compute platforms. The AI Factories connected to the existing EuroHPC network grew from the first tranche of seven sites on 10 December 2024 to 19 sites selected by 10 October 2025. The constraint is the divergence between the speed of regulation and the speed of capability building. InvestAI, announced on 11 February 2025, is a scheme for mobilizing investment on a scale of 200 billion euros in total, of which 20 billion euros is allocated to a new fund for AI gigafactories equipped with chips on the order of 100,000 units. The call for expressions of interest in June 2025 drew 77 proposals from 60 sites in 16 member states, but the formal tender is set for the summer of 2026 and construction of the first facility is scheduled for 2027; as of August 2026 not a single gigafactory has been selected. The AI Act itself is likewise in flux: staged application of the prohibitions (2 February 2025) and of the obligations for general-purpose AI (2 August 2025) has begun, while discussion of simplification of application (the digital omnibus) proceeds and postponement of some dates of entry into application has been proposed. Regulation is already in force and compute platforms are not yet under construction — this time difference itself governs the EU's position. [Structure of dependence] Dependence outside the territory (principally on the United States) for cloud and foundation models is the keynote, and this is the material background of the EU's discourse of "digital sovereignty." What the academic accounts (Floridi, 2020; Broeders, Cristiano & Kaminska, 2023) note in agreement is a "divergence between regulation and capability": regulatory power is present but the industrial base — cloud, semiconductors, foundation models — is lacking. In addition, there is within the territory a precedent of extractive distortion (Proposition 6b, Section 8). In Ireland, data centres came to consume more than 20% of electricity, leading to restrictions on new construction, which demonstrates within the territory that attracting compute platforms does not necessarily bring local transformation value. Rereading dependence in terms of "what stops if what is cut," the EU's exposure is concentrated on cloud providers and foundation model providers in the United States. Since the workloads of firms and administrations ride on a small number of hyperscalers outside the territory, changes in the conditions of supply through commercial decisions (revision of prices or service terms) or geopolitical measures may act simultaneously across sectors — the typical structure in which AI outage is correlated across borders (Proposition 7, Section 13). The EU's response is a twofold strategy of fixing conditions by regulation (the obligations of data protection and the AI Act) and building a partial alternative system through public compute platforms, but the former is not a means of securing supply and the latter is pre-construction. During this time difference, the EU's sovereign minimum guarantee level may be said to depend on regulatory bargaining power rather than on domestically held capability. Whether regulation can compel supply is an unsettled question specific to the EU's design. [Direction of policy] Centred on the "AI Continent Action Plan" of April 2025, a turn from regulation alone to regulation plus investment in compute sovereignty is proceeding. At 486 the member state level, France announced at the Paris AI Action Summit of February 2025 a package of AI-related investment totalling 109 billion euros (a bundle of private commitments from the UAE, Brookfield of Canada and others, not a government budget; it is an announced figure and no verification on an execution basis exists). Mistral AI raised 1.7 billion euros in a Series C led by ASML in September 2025 (post-money valuation approximately 11.7 billion euros), and the French government and armed forces have contracted with the firm, positioning it as "the flagship of European sovereign AI." [Attempts at cell transition] The EU's wager is on two fronts. First, movement from M3 in the direction of M1×C2 through public capital (the gigafactories). This is pre-construction, however, and the success of the movement is an empirical question from 2027 onward. Second, capture of the rules of the cells through standard-setting power. This is not movement on the cells but an attempt to write the rules applicable to all nine cells; if it holds, it constitutes value capture without production, but whether the conditions for it to hold (inelasticity of the market for firms outside the territory, and indivisibility of the regulation) are satisfied for AI is contested. Whether regulation can substitute for capability — the EU is one of the most important natural experiments for nine-cell theory. [Indispensability] As regards the EU's indispensability, a frequently overlooked fact must be placed first. The supplier of advanced lithography equipment, which Section 11.2.1 listed as the sharpest source of indispensability, is located in a member state of the EU. That is, although the EU has almost no frontier production within its territory, it holds within its territory a choke point in the physical inputs on which frontier producers depend. The mechanisms sustaining this choke point are, as Section 11.2.1 decomposed, four — economies of scale, learning effects, capital specificity, and accumulated skill — of which only the first can be shortened by the injection of funds. The time required for substitution is estimated on the order of a decade. A limitation on the locus of attribution is required, however — this indispensability resides in the jurisdiction of the member state rather than of the Union, and the licensing authority for export controls is exercised by the member state. This is a form of the separation between holding and the right of exercise stated in Section 11.2.3, and there is no structure by which it is exercised in a unified manner as the EU. In addition, the landing and protection of submarine cables, and the siting conditions of grid and land within the territory, are also choke points held at the level of the member state. [Desirability] Of the five components, market and rules are the central assets. The size of the single market and the prescription of conditions of market access by the AI Act (Regulation (EU) 2024/1689) plainly satisfy the first three of the five conditions of the Brussels effect formulated by Bradford (2020) — market size, regulatory capacity, stringent standards, an inelastic target, and indivisibility. Whether the last two are satisfied for AI is contested, and this paper treats it as an unsettled empirical question. As regards trust infrastructure (Definition 17), the development of the three elements is not synchronized. In element (ii) conformity assessment, work on harmonized standards under the standardization request C(2023)3215 of 22 May 2023 did not meet the original deadline (30 April 487 2025) and continues; in element (i) liability allocation, the proposed AI Liability Directive of 28 September 2022 was formally withdrawn by publication in the Official Journal on 6 October 2025 (European Parliament, 2025). The existence of a comprehensive AI regulatory law and the presence of all three elements of Definition 17 are different things — this sequence should be read not as an evaluation of a particular jurisdiction but as a description of the fact that the three elements have independent time constants (Section 11.3.5). The attribution of quadrant requires a two-layer description: principally the Normative– Market Type, with a component of the Structurally Indispensable Type at the level of the member state. This composite of position on the nine cells (M3×C1/C2 leading) and the leverage coordinate is a direct illustration of the independence asserted by Proposition 22 — standing in the Utilization Model while holding within the territory the most durable of choke points, lithography equipment. As Section 11.4 argued under "the resolution of the M4 problem," the position of writing the rules is not a fourth value model but leverage on the desirability side, and the standard-setting power that Section 14.14 has denoted as "a variable outside the cells" is here recovered into the interior of the theory. [Exportability of integrated systems] As regards (ii) trust infrastructure, the non-synchronization of the three elements is recorded under [Desirability] — work on harmonized standards continues, and as to liability allocation the proposed AI Liability Directive was formally withdrawn by publication in the Official Journal on 6 October 2025 (European Parliament, 2025). As regards (iv) portability, two effects of opposite direction may be observed simultaneously — a design that aligns proof of conformity with international standards corresponds to what Section 12.3.5 listed among the techniques of separation and works to raise portability, whereas the parts that depend on modes specific to the territory work in the opposite direction. Which way the balance of the two tips cannot be judged on the evidence of this paper. [Implications for readers in this country] What the EU's profile shows is that the position of writing rules may bring value and influence independently of the position of production, and at the same time that, because regulation cannot compel supply, the time difference in capability building remains as such a vulnerability. This configuration may be applied to jurisdictions in general in which the capacity to put in place frameworks of norms, standards, and certification runs ahead of the industrial base — the United Kingdom, and groups of states putting in place common frameworks as regional integration bodies. What readers whose countries aim at the position of rules should measure is not the completeness of the regulation but the length of the time difference between regulation and capability building, and the presence or absence of an alternative system during that period. 14.5 The United Kingdom — A Hub Strategy in Safety Research [Current portfolio position] M3×C2 leading + a transformation niche in the evaluation and inspection interface. The United Kingdom does not produce the frontier domestically 488 (private AI investment was 4.5 billion dollars in 2024, approximately 4% of that of the United States (Stanford HAI, 2025)) and is a country of advanced utilization of the United States frontier (M3×C2). What distinguishes it from a simple utilization country, however, is that it has institutionalized the scarce position of evaluation access to frontier models. In November 2023 it established the world's first governmental AI safety evaluation body, the AI Safety Institute (renamed the "AI Security Institute" in February 2025 — a shift of centre of gravity from safety to security), and as of 2025 it states that it holds more than 100 researchers and has evaluated 30 frontier models. To hold an interface for inspecting producers' models without Resource-Producing Models — this is a transformation niche specific to AI with no counterpart in the oil analogy. Looking ahead to the verification function of critical-tier governance discussed in Section 9, the accumulation of evaluation capability may also be read as advance investment in a position within a future international verification regime. [Principal assets and constraints] The assets are the research base, the evaluation body, and the consistent documentation of policy. The "AI Opportunities Action Plan" of 13 January 2025 had all 50 of its recommendations accepted in full by the government and set out a policy of expanding public AI compute capacity (AIRR) twentyfold by 2030. The spending review of June 2025 committed 2 billion pounds to compute platforms (of which 250 million pounds to the AIRR cloud expansion) and 240 million pounds to the AI Security Institute, and the national supercomputer Isambard-AI (Bristol) entered operation in July 2025. Five AI Growth Zones had been designated as of the "One Year On" report of January 2026, and the government announced that they had induced 28.2 billion pounds of private investment and more than 15,000 jobs (a government self-reported figure with no independent verification). The Sovereign AI Unit invests in domestic AI firms and data assets with government funding of up to 500 million pounds. The constraint is scale. In an environment in which the cost of frontier training grows at approximately an annual factor of 2.4 and a single training run is predicted to exceed 1 billion dollars by 2027 (Cottier et al., 2024), the total of the above public commitments is orders of magnitude short of entry into frontier production (M1×C2), and the United Kingdom itself does not set that as an objective. [Structure of dependence] It depends on the United States for both compute and models. Expansion of the AIRR presupposes procurement of chips made in the United States, and the frontier models evaluated are also of United States origin. The position of the evaluation interface itself depends on frontier developers continuing to grant evaluation access, and that grant rests not on a treaty but on a voluntary relation of cooperation. As a design of dependence, it places its centre of gravity heavily on alliance guarantees (Definition 6(ii), Section 13). Making the scenarios of severance concrete: (i) if chip procurement stops, expansion of the AIRR stops; (ii) if evaluation access to models is withdrawn, the position of evaluation hub itself is lost; and (iii) changes in the conditions of commercial cloud directly constrain utilization in administration and industry. Of the three, (ii) is specific to the United Kingdom and is the dependence with the lowest degree of institutionalization — being based on voluntary cooperation — which is the structural fragility 489 of this position. A design that replaces evaluation access with treaty-based or statutory powers is worth discussing as a precursor of the verification function of critical-tier governance (Proposition 9, Section 9). [Direction of policy] It is threefold: selective expansion of compute platforms, strengthening of the evaluation body, and attraction of siting through the Growth Zones. As a footnote in the history of concepts, the course by which Ian Hogarth, author of the 2018 essay that brought the term "AI Nationalism" to AI, became the first chair of the United Kingdom's AI Safety Institute (Hogarth, 2018) is worth recording as an instance of the traffic between discourse and institutions. In the lineage of policy documents as well, the yearby- year updating — establishment of the evaluation body in November 2023, adoption of the action plan in January 2025, renaming of the body in February 2025 (from safety to security), allocation of spending in June 2025, and the implementation report in January 2026 — shows that institutional continuity is itself operated as an asset. Since position on the nine cells depends on the accumulation of institutions (Proposition 3, Section 6), frequent reversals of policy themselves destabilize position — set against the reversal of United States export controls in 2025 (Section 14.2), the conditions under which predictability of rules functions as a national asset can be read off. [Attempts at cell transition] The United Kingdom's wager is to avoid the scale competition of production explicitly and to maintain the position of "the non-producing country closest to the frontier" through a combination of (1) a hub for evaluation and safety research, (2) selective public compute platforms, and (3) attraction of investment. This is a mid-sized-country version of "export of regulation and trust" and "niche specialization" in the menu of small-state strategy discussed below (Section 14.12), and may be organized as a variant that applies the small-state route of upstream R&D specialization shown by Breznitz (2007) to the upstream of evaluation and governance knowledge. [Indispensability] As regards none of the six sources listed in Section 11.2 can it be described from this paper's evidence base that the United Kingdom holds a non-substitutable choke point. It holds a geographical position with respect to the landing and protection of submarine cables, but as Section 11.2.6 stated, what a state holds in this source is not the capacity to sever but the permits and practice concerning landing, protection, and repair, and it appears as a function of physical security (Proposition 28(ii)) rather than as an instrument of exercise. The position of the evaluation interface is also weak measured against the definition of indispensability — the cost and dysfunction that would arise for another party were it to bypass the country concerned. If frontier developers stopped granting evaluation access, it is the United Kingdom that would bear the cost, and not the reverse. That this grant rests not on a treaty or statutory power but on a voluntary relation of cooperation is as stated under [Structure of dependence], and from the standpoint of leverage this is nothing other than the institutional content of low indispensability. [Desirability] The institutional asset of evaluation and inspection is central. For producers of the frontier, having a venue in which their own models are evaluated by an independent third party may have value both for deployment into regulated sectors and for extern‐ 490

al explanation. From the standpoint of trust infrastructure (Definition 17), the United Kingdom's position takes a form specialized in element (ii) conformity assessment, while for element (i) liability allocation and element (iii) insurance the state of development of frameworks specific to AI cannot be settled from this paper's evidence base. Market size is medium, and in the rules component it adopts a mode of allocating matters to existing sectoral regulators rather than a comprehensive statute, so that the route of extraterritorial diffusion of the Brussels-effect type is designed not to depend on the inelasticity of the internal market. The attribution of quadrant is the Normative–Market Type. On the nine cells it stands at M3×C2, and on the leverage coordinate it inclines to the desirability side — in that position and leverage are both consistent with "the non-producing side," it is a type different from the EU. From this the vulnerability that Section 11.5.2 assigned to the Normative–Market Type can be read. Rules and institutional assets cannot compel supply, nor can they bring capability into the country. If the models to be evaluated cease to be granted, the very ground of desirability disappears. [Exportability of integrated systems] That there is an institutional asset specialized within (ii) in conformity assessment, and that the record of its operation is accumulating within the home jurisdiction, can be described as facts. What Definition 20 requires, however, is the transfer of five elements as a bundle, and the supply of the single function of evaluation and inspection remains a part of it. As to the other conditions, and in particular (iv) portability, the evidence of this paper does not permit a judgment. [Implications for readers in this country] What the United Kingdom's profile shows is that a route may hold in which a country explicitly avoids the scale competition of production and takes position at the scarce interface of inspection and evaluation, and that where the subsistence of that position depends on a voluntary relation of cooperation there is a structural fragility. This type may be applied in the same form to states that have a research base and institutional trust but do not enter frontier production on account of scale — Canada, Australia, Switzerland, the Netherlands, the Nordic countries and others. What should be measured is not the quantity of evaluation capability but the degree to which evaluation access is institutionalized (by treaty or statutory power). 14.6 Japan — Overview (Details Carried Forward to Section 18) Detailed analysis of Japan — the structure of the digital-related balance, the concrete form of M2′ (transfer of transformation value to physical interfaces, institutional trust, and linguistic and cultural assets), sectoral design of the deepening of M3, and the Japanese design of the sovereign minimum guarantee level — is treated separately in Section 18 (the case study) as a development of Proposition 13. This section, for the sake of comparability with other countries, records only a summary of the position in the common format, matching the length of the other profiles. Section 18 devotes a long analysis to Japan not because its position is more important than that of other countries but because it is the country to which the author can come closest to primary sources, and that section 491 should be read as an instance of "what happens when the common format of this section is developed to the end for a single middle power." [Current portfolio position] M3×C1 expanding rapidly + M2×C1 (applied transformation) + selective M1 investment. The first fact that governs Japan's current position is the coexistence of rapid expansion in utilization with thinness in transformation. The rate of personal use of generative AI rose sharply in two years, from 9.1% in fiscal 2023 to 26.7% in fiscal 2024 and 58.8% in fiscal 2025, yet it remains last in the four-country comparison of Japan, the United States, Germany and China (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2025; 2026). Among firms, those using generative AI in some operation reached 86.4% in fiscal 2025 (55.2% the previous year) (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2026). The second fact is the manifestation in the balance of payments of the fact that this expansion of utilization has proceeded while the transformation layer (M2) remains dependent on outside the country. The deficit on the digital-related balance widened from approximately 2.0 trillion yen in 2014 to approximately 6.7 trillion yen in 2024 (the largest on record), and the deficit in computer services (cloud usage fees and the like), the principal factor, grew approximately 3.3-fold in ten years (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2025). It is a structure in which the expansion of AI use directly raises external payments by way of the cloud, and it is the empirical anchor of the "already emergent balance-of-payments structure of an AI-importing country" stated in the core thesis of Section 2. The character of the indicators must here be stated precisely. What the rate of generative AI use and the deficit on the digital-related balance measure is not the AI dependence of Definition 4 (Section 13) but exposure — the scale and proportion of external procurement of AI inputs, that is, the rate of use, external payments, and the proportion of operations processed on external platforms. As Definition 4 makes explicit, dependence is defined neither by the rate of use nor by expenditure but by degradation at the time of interruption, and exposure does no more than bound it from above. Where exposure is high, dependence is low if substitution functions immediately; where exposure is low, dependence is high if substitution is lacking. High exposure in Japan therefore does not permit a direct reading of high dependence, and separate measurement of the divergence between the two — measurement of the speed of degradation at the time of interruption by simulated cut-off of critical processes (Appendix C) — is required. Exposure indicators are used in the descriptions below because they are the only quantity obtainable from public statistics in an internationally comparable form, and not as a substitute for dependence. [Principal assets and constraints] The assets are interfaces with the physical world in manufacturing, robotics, and on-site data; institutional trust; and linguistic and cultural assets — that is, the candidate set of complementary assets that producers cannot replicate at zero marginal cost (the four indicators of Proposition 4, Section 7). The constraints are the difference in compute inputs from the frontier (it is a common understanding in the industry that there is a gap of one to two orders of magnitude in training GPU inputs between domestic foundation model developers and frontier developers in the United States), the decline in the working-age population (74.06 million in 2020 → 59.78 million in 492 2040, a decrease of 14.28 million on the medium-variant projection), and electricity. The population constraint at the same time means that the marginal value of labour-saving utilization of AI (M3) is structurally high. [Structure of dependence] External procurement of foundation models and cloud has become permanent in a form measurable as a digital deficit. The deficit for January–June 2025 was approximately 3.4 trillion yen, remaining high at an annualized pace of approximately 7 trillion yen (Nihon Keizai Shimbun, 2025). What this figure indicates is the level of exposure (Definition 4, Section 13), not the level of vulnerability to AI outage. That exposure is proceeding as a combination of high utilization and low sovereignty is certain, but whether it has converted into dependence — how much, and how fast, the critical processes of administration, healthcare, finance, and manufacturing would degrade if supply stopped — is unmeasured for Japan. Section 18 treats this absence of measurement as the first blank in policy design. [Direction of policy] On the institutional side, the AI Promotion Act (enacted 28 May 2025, promulgated 4 June, fully in force 1 September) was enacted as a comprehensive "promotion- type" statute without penalties, establishing an AI Strategy Headquarters in the Cabinet (headed by the Prime Minister), and on 23 December 2025 Japan's first statutory AI Basic Plan was adopted by the Cabinet. It is a third type of "promotion statute plus soft law," different from both the EU's regulatory-law type and the United States' market-andlitigation type. On the platform side, the Economic Security Promotion Act (2022) designated semiconductors and cloud programs as specified critical materials (Cabinet Order of 23 December 2022), and within this framework subsidies were provided to domestic AI compute platforms (2024: up to approximately 50.1 billion yen for Sakura Internet, up to 42.1 billion yen for SoftBank, and others). In semiconductors, Rapidus confirmed operation of a 2 nm GAA transistor in July 2025 and targets mass production in the second half of fiscal 2027 (government support on a cumulative scale of approximately 1.8 trillion yen). Across government, the "Framework for Strengthening the AI and Semiconductor Industrial Base" (November 2024) sets out public support exceeding 10 trillion yen through fiscal 2030. In public compute platforms, ABCI 3.0 (6,128 H200 units) began general provision in January 2025, and support for domestic foundation model development under GENIAC continues to the fourth round (selections in June 2026). [Attempts at cell transition] The strategies of the domestic model developers (NTT tsuzumi, SB Intuitions Sarashina, Preferred Networks PLaMo, Sakana AI and others) converge not on frontal competition at the frontier but on lightweight, compute-efficient, Japanese- language and domain-specialized, and confidentiality-preserving (on-premises) systems, which may be read as a wager not on movement to M1×C2 but in the direction of M2′ — transformation resting on complementary assets. The conditions for this wager to hold, and its design, are set out in detail in Section 18. Three points only are added as comparative positioning. First, Japan is the country among the ten profiles of this section in which the simultaneous advance of the expansion of utilization and the external dependence of transformation is mapped most plainly onto a 493 single public statistic, the balance of payments. In other countries, outflows of the same kind are buried in the breakdown of the services balance or the statistical definition is not established. The very existence of the indicator of the digital-related balance makes the description of Japan's position more verifiable than that of other countries. Second, Japan is one of the few countries with a completed instance of "external resource shock → national redefinition." At the time of the oil shock of 1973 it depended on oil for 75.5 to 77% of primary energy (of which nearly 80% was of Middle Eastern origin), the crude oil price rose approximately fourfold, and consumer prices rose 23.2% in 1974; but through the Petroleum Stockpiling Act (1975), the Energy Conservation Act (1979), and the transformation of industrial structure, oil dependence was reduced to 40.3% by fiscal 2010. The implications of this precedent — what transfers and what does not — are the subject of Proposition 13 and are treated in Section 18. Third, Japan's institutional type (promotion statute plus soft law) occupies a place in the comparison of this section as a third type distinct from the EU's regulatory-law type and the discipline of market and litigation in the United States. A promotion statute is not, however, a statute that obliges investment in resources (M1) or transformation (M2), and its effectiveness depends on budgetary measures — this structure too is examined in Section 18. [Indispensability] Japan's position is one of the sharpest illustrations of Proposition 22 in this section. Although its centre of gravity on the nine cells is in the Utilization Model (M3×C1 expanding rapidly) and it maps onto the balance of payments a structure of external dependence in the transformation layer, the indispensability component of the leverage coordinate is not low. The implication stated for the Republic of Korea in Section 14.7 — "states occupying a choke point of the supply chain in advanced manufacturing, equipment, or materials — Taiwan, the Netherlands, Japan (manufacturing equipment and materials) and others" — applies to Japan itself. Of the mechanisms decomposed in Section 11.2.1, those operating in the domains of materials and equipment components are learning effects and accumulated skill, together with capital specificity, and none of these can be shortened by the injection of funds (Section 11.2.7). The time required for substitution is therefore long. Three limitations are required, however. First, this indispensability resides not in the state but in firms and sites, and the state holds it only through the jurisdiction of export controls. Second, the choke points are not a single point but are dispersed over many items, and the time required for substitution differs greatly item by item. Third, this paper has not measured the level of this indispensability — as Section 11.1 stated, the measurement framework is provisional, and the description here remains a placement on an ordinal scale. Details are left to Section 18. [Desirability] Of the five components, technology and trust are thick, the market is medium, and extraterritorial diffusion of rules is limited. From the standpoint of trust infrastructure (Definition 17), as regards element (i) liability allocation there is no comprehensive legislation specific to AI, and because the AI Promotion Act (enacted 28 May 2025, fully in force 1 September) is of the promotion type without penalties, the locus of liability is left to interpretation of existing civil and administrative law. For element (ii) conformity assessment and element (iii) insurance likewise, the state of development of frameworks 494 specific to AI cannot be settled from this paper's evidence base. As Proposition 25 (Section 11) states, the level of development of these three elements bounds from above the depth of deployment of AI in regulated sectors, so this belongs to the design tasks of Section 18 as a problem of institutions rather than of capability. On the other hand, the accumulation of institutional trust with respect to sites in manufacturing, healthcare, and administration is itself an asset that may contribute to the trust component of the five, and it overlaps with the candidate set of complementary assets listed under [Principal assets and constraints]. The attribution of quadrant is a position in which indispensability is relatively high and desirability is medium, on the boundary between the Structurally Indispensable Type and the Bottleneck-Specialized Type. The divergence between position (Utilization Model) and quadrant (the higher-indispensability side) is treated as a type in Section 14.14.1. [Exportability of integrated systems] As regards (i), the practice accumulated at sites in manufacturing, healthcare, and administration, and the professional ethics and working practices that support it, are listed under [Principal assets and constraints] as candidates for domain-specific national brain capital. As regards (ii), the state of having no comprehensive legislation specific to AI and of leaving the locus of liability to interpretation of existing civil and administrative law can be described as a fact bearing on the second condition of Proposition 39. Evaluation of (iii) and (iv) requires examination by domain and is carried forward to Section 18. [Implications for readers in this country] What Japan's profile shows is that rapid expansion of utilization and external dependence of the transformation layer may proceed simultaneously, and that where that simultaneous advance is mapped onto a single public statistic such as the balance of payments, a country can observe its own position in a more verifiable form than others. This configuration may be applied as a type to industrial countries that hold as assets on-site data in manufacturing and the institutionalization of quality — Germany, the Republic of Korea, Taiwan, economies holding the industrial agglomerations of northern Italy and the like. The first task for readers with respect to their own country is not international comparison of rates of utilization but decomposition of whether the expansion of utilization is proceeding at the same rate as the expansion of external procurement (Section 18 carries this decomposition through to the end for Japan). 14.7 The Republic of Korea — The Position of a Semiconductor Supplier [Current portfolio position] Upstream of M2×C2 (supplier of frontier inputs) + M3×C1 + a state-led orientation toward M1×C2. Korea's position requires an auxiliary line to be drawn on the nine cells. Korea is not a producing country of frontier models, but as a principal supplying country of memory semiconductors, a physical input for building the frontier, it stands upstream of row C2. That is, it is "a supplier to producers"; in the oil analogy it corresponds not to an oil-producing country but to a country supplying drilling equipment and pipe materials. This position is a distinctive composite of dependence and 495 opportunity: demand is guaranteed so long as frontier competition continues, while capture of value is subordinate to the investment cycle of producers. [Principal assets and constraints] The assets are semiconductor manufacturing capacity and the industrial agglomeration around it, together with the institutional experience of the developmental state. It was Amsden (1989) who formulated Korea's late industrialization as "industrialization through learning" — a mode in which the state exchanges subsidies for the discipline of performance criteria — and current AI policy explicitly attempts a contemporary version of this mode. The R&D budget for domestic AI semiconductors (Samsung, SK, Rebellions, FuriosaAI) is 252.8 billion won (fiscal 2025). The constraints are the size of domestic demand and the capital requirements of the frontier. Under growth in training costs at an annual factor of 2.4 (Cottier et al., 2024), the cost for a mid-sized economy to enter frontal competition at the closed frontier is rising rapidly. Moreover, coordinated industrial policy of the developmental-state type has been demonstrated in pairs as effective in the catch-up phase and ineffective at the frontier (Beason & Weinstein, 1996; Callon, 1995), and whether "discipline in exchange for support" functions in frontier exploration, where there is no clear pursuit target, is an unsettled question for which Korea itself is the test bed. [Structure of dependence] External dependence for design, manufacturing equipment, and advanced logic, and dependence on both the United States and China as export markets. United States export controls toward China propagate directly to the China business of Korean firms, and the position of supplier is exposed from both sides to policy changes by the United States and by China. Being a supplier of frontier inputs does not mean being a holder of the frontier — the models and cloud used for its own utilization (M3) depend in the main on outside the territory. The dependence of this position runs in two directions. Upstream, there is external dependence for manufacturing equipment, design environments, and materials, and if these stop, production as a supplier itself stops. Downstream, demand is subordinate to the investment cycle of the frontier — if producers' capital expenditure decelerates, the supplier's revenue contracts irrespective of its own policy. It is a structure isomorphic with the subordination of drilling equipment supplying countries to the crude oil price cycle in the oil era. In addition, the position of supplier may become both the object and the instrument of export controls. Where a country is used as an instrument of control (alignment with United States controls toward China), it loses the China market; where a country becomes the object of control, the position of supplier itself becomes a bargaining chip. The power of the hub that the theory of weaponized interdependence (Farrell & Newman, 2019) indicates appears, for states located near the hub, not as power but as being caught between — Korea is the clearest case of this. [Direction of policy] The Lee Jae-myung administration, inaugurated in June 2025, set "the three great AI powers (AI G3)" as the highest priority of state affairs, pledged public and private AI investment on a scale of 100 trillion won during its term, and inaugurated a National AI Strategy Committee under the President on 11 September 2025. In compute plat‐ 496 forms, the re-tender of September 2025 for the National AI Computing Center in Gwangju set targets of "more than 15,000 advanced GPUs by 2028 and more than 50,000 by 2030 in public and private together" (establishment of an SPC in the first half of 2026, target opening in 2028). At APEC in October 2025 it was announced that NVIDIA would supply a total of 260,000 GPUs to the Korean government, Samsung, SK, Hyundai and others, but this is on an announcement basis and the timing and certainty of supply are unconfirmed. For proprietary LLMs, a "national representative AI" selection scheme supports LG (Exaone), SKT, Naver (HyperCLOVA X), Upstage and others. [Attempts at cell transition] Korea is one of the few mid-sized states that explicitly sets as a national objective the movement from supplier of inputs (upstream of M2×C2) to holder of its own frontier (M1×C2). The distance this movement attempts is among the longest on the nine cells — because it is movement to the opposite side of supplier concentration, that is, to the side of the few producers. The set of three — public securing of compute platforms, domestic chips, and national representative models — is a design that transposes the institutional assets of the developmental state to AI, and its outcome stands in the position of being the most direct empirical test of the distinction between catch-uptype and frontier-type transformation (Section 4). [Indispensability] Korea is directly involved in the choke point of high-bandwidth memory treated in Section 11.2.3. This component, required in pairs with accelerators for frontier-class training and inference, has few suppliers and its specifications are settled in co-evolution with the generation plans of accelerators, so that in the classification of Section 11.2.7 capital specificity and learning effects are the dominant mechanisms. Cultivating alternative suppliers takes years, and including the time to reach the level of mass-production yield the time constant is longer still. In this respect Korea's indispensability is among those with the longest time required for switching in the ten profiles. At the same time, it is also the position in which the separation between holding and the right of exercise noted in Section 11.2.3 appears most sharply — because the firms holding the choke point are within a net of regulation subject to other jurisdictions in respect of both their supply destinations and their equipment procurement, the holder bears the consequences of exercise (depreciation through the inducement of a search for alternatives) without participating in the decision to exercise. The state described as "being caught between" under [Structure of dependence] is, in the vocabulary of leverage, formulated as the separation between the holding of indispensability and the right of its exercise. [Desirability] It is thick in the technology component, but market size is medium and a route of extraterritorial diffusion in the rules component cannot be confirmed on this paper's evidence base. In the capital component the public and private AI investment pledges are large, but these are expenditure directed at improving the country's own position rather than grounds on which other states wish to engage — of the two objective functions stated in Section 11.5.1, it is accurate to read them as resources allocated to optimization of position. As regards trust infrastructure (Definition 17), the state of development of the three elements specific to AI cannot be settled from this paper's evidence 497 base. The attribution of quadrant is the Bottleneck-Specialized Type. This cannot be derived from position on the nine cells (upstream of M2×C2) — for there may be states standing in the same M2×C2 that incline to the desirability side, and states that have no indispensability. It is this structure that Table 17 of Section 11 denotes in recording of the Bottleneck-Specialized Type that "it may be M1×C1/C2 or M2×C2. It cannot be discriminated from position — the core case of Proposition 22." The vulnerabilities that Section 11.5.2 assigned to this quadrant — losing all leverage upon the success of a design that bypasses it, and finding it hard to obtain compensation in negotiation before exercise because desirability is low — become as such design tasks specific to Korea's position. [Exportability of integrated systems] What the position on the nine cells (upstream of M2×C2) points to is the supply of inputs, which in the classification of Section 12.1 is (b) the export of products. Which of the four conditions are satisfied for (c) the export of integrated systems cannot be judged on the evidence of this paper, since the state of development specific to AI of (ii) trust infrastructure cannot be settled from this paper's evidence base. [Implications for readers in this country] What Korea's profile shows is that the position of supplier of frontier inputs brings both a guarantee of demand and two-sided exposure to policy change. This analysis may be applied in the same form to states occupying a choke point of the supply chain in advanced manufacturing, equipment, or materials — Taiwan, the Netherlands, Japan (manufacturing equipment and materials) and others. What readers in a supplier position should measure is not the width of their technological advantage but the duration for which production could continue if upstream external dependence stopped, and the sensitivity of revenue to the investment cycle on the demand side. 14.8 Singapore — A Small-State Hub Strategy [Current portfolio position] The leading edge of M3×C1 deepening + hub-type M2×C1. Singapore's rate of generative AI use is 61%, the highest among the countries surveyed (Stanford HAI, 2026), and it is a representative case of a state that defines its position by the depth of utilization. At the same time, through regional headquarters functions, datacentre agglomeration, and the export of governance frameworks, it doubles as a transformation hub for Southeast Asia (M2×C1). It does not orient itself toward entry into frontier production. [Principal assets and constraints] The assets are institutional trust and the capacity for coordination. The National AI Strategy 2.0 (announced 4 December 2023) sets out "AI for the Public Good, for Singapore and the World"; the budget speech of February 2024 stated AI investment of more than 1 billion Singapore dollars over five years (compute, talent, industry), and in January 2026 an additional 1 billion Singapore dollars for public AI research through 2030. The domestically produced multilingual model SEA-LION (AI Singapore) rests on the linguistic and cultural asset of Southeast Asian languages — a comple‐ 498 mentary asset that producers find hard to replicate (linguistic-contextual specificity among the four indicators of Proposition 4, Section 7). The constraints are physical scale, and in particular electricity and land. A moratorium on new data centres was in place from 2019 to 2022, after which it moved to a managed resumption under a green DC framework. For a small state, attracting compute platforms appears most sharply as a problem of the balance between the opportunity cost of electricity and land and local transformation value (Proposition 6b, Section 8). [Structure of dependence] It is a complete importing country, depending on outside the territory for chips, foundation models, and cloud alike. Its position as a hub, however — a regional base and node of re-export for suppliers outside the territory — makes dependence partly bidirectional, and the structural consequence is observed that the cost of severance arises for the severing side as well (this paper makes no judgment as to whether this structure is a product of design or an outcome). The composition of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6, Section 13) is of the small-state type, placing its centre of gravity on alliance guarantees and operational readiness rather than on domestic holding. What is particularly notable in Singapore's design is that it operates as a policy of siting a diversification of suppliers that does not concentrate dependence on a single supplier but causes multiple suppliers from outside the territory to coexist on the same national territory. Since the amplification factor of an AI outage is the product of dependence × supplier concentration × outage correlation (Proposition 7, Section 13), reducing concentration and correlation is the only means of attenuation available to a state that has no domestically held capability. The sovereignty of a small state may be approximated not by holding but by placement — this is a new proposition that the theory of small-state strategy (Section 14.12) has obtained in the age of AI. [Direction of policy] Regulatory sandboxes, the development and export of governance evaluation frameworks such as AI Verify, expansion of the national supercomputer (NSCC), and managed attraction of data centres — consistently, investment in "positions that do not require scale." The formulation "AI for the Public Good, for Singapore and the World" set out in the second edition of the National AI Strategy (4 December 2023) places domestic utilization and the supply of institutions outside the territory under the same objective, and is also an expression of the fact that the strategy of a small state does not distinguish between domestic and external policy. There is consistency in the mode of budget allocation as well — the more than 1 billion Singapore dollars over five years of February 2024 was allocated across the three points of compute, talent, and industry, and the additional 1 billion Singapore dollars through 2030 of January 2026 was directed to public research. It is a design of continuous allocation to the components of absorptive capacity, not lump-sum investment in frontier production. [Attempts at cell transition] The essence of Singapore's strategy lies in the explicit choice not to attempt cell transition. It relinquishes movement to production (M1) and specializes in the depth of utilization in row C1, the function of a transformation hub, and the export of the institutional assets of trust and governance. From the standpoint of nine-cell 499 theory it is an attempt to reverse the property of row C1 that "capability everyone can use is no one's advantage" (Section 7) by getting ahead in absorptive capacity — the product of the penetration rate and complementary investment (Proposition 5, Section 7) — and it is the most fully composed instance of a combination of ① application specialization and ② export of trust in the menu of small-state strategy (Section 14.12). [Indispensability] Of the six sources of Section 11.2, those in which Singapore is involved are the routes of submarine cables and siting. Under the mechanism of concentration by which the physical layer of international communications converges into limited corridors and the siting of landing stations gathers at a limited number of coastal points (Section 11.2.6), being located at a geographical node constitutes part of a choke point. As Section 11 emphasized, however, what a state holds in this source is not the capacity to sever but the permits and practice concerning landing, protection, and repair, and it appears as a function of physical security rather than as an instrument of exercise. As regards the siting of compute platforms too, because the physical upper limits of electricity and land arrive early (the moratorium on new data centres from 2019 to 2022 and the managed resumption thereafter), the very quantity of indispensability residing in siting is constrained. The precedent from the oil era by which a refining hub was established without holding crude reserves (Section 4) was a demonstration that transformation has a logic of siting independent of production, but the logic of siting in AI is more strongly ratelimited by the immovable physical conditions of electricity and land. [Desirability] Of the five components, rules, trust, and market (market access as a node to outside the territory) are central. From the standpoint of trust infrastructure (Definition 17), the development and export of governance evaluation frameworks, the operation of regulatory sandboxes, and legal predictability may be read as a design that gives thickness on the side of element (ii) conformity assessment. The attribution of quadrant is the Normative–Market Type. Position on the nine cells (M3×C1 deepening + hub-type M2×C1) and quadrant are both consistent with "positions that do not require scale," and this agreement is not accidental — as stated under [Attempts at cell transition], Singapore's strategy makes the same choice (not to fight on scale) for both position and leverage. From this an observation is obtained about the relation between the two objective functions stated in Section 11.5.1. That the two objective functions require different policies is the general case and is not something that must hold, and in a state that has chosen a position not requiring scale, optimization of position and maximization of leverage may converge on the same policy — investment in institutional trust. This convergence is a favourable condition under limited fiscal means. At the same time, the vulnerability that Section 11.5.2 assigned to the Normative–Market Type — hollowing out of rules through the exit of the actors concerned from the territory — has the same structure as what Section 14.12 calls "pass-through" as the failure mode of the hub type. [Exportability of integrated systems] The development and external provision of governance evaluation frameworks, the operation of regulatory sandboxes, and the operational record of public digital platforms covering a broad body of users correspond in part 500

to the content that Section 12.4.2 listed as the combination of conditions of type (B). On the other hand, as that subsection also stated, the parts that depend on legal effect and on the level of social trust do not transfer. For which domains the four conditions are complete is a matter for each domain, and cannot be judged on the evidence of this paper. [Implications for readers in this country] What Singapore's profile shows is that even a state without domestically held capability may lower the amplification factor of an AI outage through placement — diversification of suppliers and reduction of outage correlation (Proposition 7, Section 13) — and that institutional trust may itself become an exportable asset. This type may be applied to states that lack scale and hold legal predictability and coordination capacity as their principal assets — Ireland, Estonia, Luxembourg, New Zealand, emirates bearing hub functions in the Gulf and others. What should be measured is not the quantity of compute platforms but the three quantities of supplier concentration, outage correlation, and switching time. 14.9 The UAE and Saudi Arabia — An Attempted Conversion from Oil M1 to AI M1 [Current portfolio position] In the course of conversion from oil M1 to hosting AI compute platforms and capital participation. The two Gulf states are the most explicit case for observing the dynamics of the nine cells — because states of the Resource-Producing Model (M1) of the oil era are declaring as national strategy a conversion, using their capital and electricity, to the production side of the AI age (M1×C2). The actual state as of 2026, however, is not in-house model development but (1) hosting of large-scale compute platforms (provision of siting, electricity, and capital) and (2) capital participation in development entities outside the territory, and in terms of position it is closer to platform contracting within M2×C2 — providing compute capacity as an extension of the United States frontier. [Principal assets and constraints] The assets are the speed of mobilization of national capital (sovereign wealth funds), energy, land, and unity of regulation. In the UAE, "Stargate UAE" — the first deployment of Stargate outside the United States, by OpenAI, Oracle, Soft‐ Bank, NVIDIA, Cisco, and G42 — was announced on 22 May 2025, and the parties have stated (as of December 2025) that the first phase of 200 MW (the initial portion of a 1 GW cluster) is scheduled for completion in the third quarter of 2026. In Saudi Arabia, the state-owned AI company HUMAIN was established under PIF by royal decree on 12 May 2025 (chaired by Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman), and on the following day a strategic partnership with NVIDIA was announced (several hundred thousand GPUs over the coming five years; the first phase 18,000 GB300 units, on the 500 MW class), with parallel partnerships with AMD (on a scale of 10 billion dollars) and AWS (more than 5 billion dollars), setting the objective of becoming "the world's third-largest AI provider by 2030" (CNBC, 2025). The constraints lie on the side of complementary assets. As research on economic complexity shows, the productive capacity of a state is a combination of accumulated non-tradable capabilities (Hidalgo & Hausmann, 2009), and the stock of capabilities for frontier production — research talent, development organizations, and applica‐ 501 tion ecosystems — cannot be purchased immediately with capital. Chips can be bought; the accumulation of organizational capability that turns chips into models at the frontier is the rate-limiting factor of the conversion. [Structure of dependence] The conversion itself holds on condition of alignment with the United States. Microsoft's investment in G42 in April 2024 (1.5 billion dollars) was conditioned on the ordering of relations with Chinese technology, and the "US–UAE AI Acceleration Partnership" of 15 May 2025 placed within a framework under United States management the construction of a 5 GW-class AI campus in Abu Dhabi and an allowance for imports of advanced chips (reported as up to 500,000 units per year, though confirmation in an official document has not been verified). The two Gulf states are on the side for which quantitative allowances were removed by the withdrawal of the AI Diffusion Rule (Section 14.2), and at the same time the contents of those compute platforms — chips, models, operations — depend on firms in the United States; it is entry in a form in which dependence is institutionalized. It may also be described as a configuration in which leverage toward the United States obtained from oil exports is exchanged for a new dependence on the United States in chip imports. In oil there existed an asymmetry by which a producing country could apply pressure to consuming countries by restricting supply. In the hosting of AI compute platforms the asymmetry is reversed — what the host state provides is land, electricity, and capital, whereas the chips, models, and operational knowledge required for operation all lie on the supplier's side. The host can stop the facility but cannot keep the facility running on its own. This asymmetry means that the bargaining position the Gulf held in the oil era is not automatically reproduced in AI, and it is also the reason why holding equity through capital participation was chosen as a design that partly fills this asymmetry. [Direction of policy] Vertical construction of a full stack (data centres, cloud, Arabic LLMs, applications) by national capital (HUMAIN), flagship participation in the United States-led "OpenAI for Countries" initiative (Stargate UAE), and export of electricity-intensive compute capacity making use of an advantage in energy prices — an explicit making of "from exporter of energy to exporter of compute" into a national creed. There are characteristics in the mode of implementation as well — the actors are not attracted private firms but state-owned companies in which sovereign wealth funds hold equity (HUMAIN) and conglomerates in the national security line (G42), and partnerships with foreign firms are concluded in parallel with intergovernmental agreements (the US–UAE AI Acceleration Partnership of 15 May 2025). That industrial policy and diplomacy are conducted in the same decision is a third mode, capital-led, differing both from the plan-rational bureaucracy depicted by the theory of the developmental state (Johnson, 1982) and from the distributive politics of the rentier state. [Attempts at cell transition] The Gulf attempt is a re-enactment in the AI version of the lesson of oil-era M1 discussed in Section 6 — that even within the same Resource-Producing Model, outcomes diverge according to institutions (the Gulf type and the Norwegian type). The risks are isomorphic as well. Even if compute platforms are built, unless they 502 are accompanied by transformation value (Definition 5, Section 7) they remain an advanced version of "the granting of drilling rights" (Proposition 6b, Section 8), providing electricity and land. What distinguishes the two Gulf states from simple data-centre-attracting countries, however, is the design by which their own capital holds equity in the platforms and captures value as a return on capital rather than as hosting fees, and the fact that investment in the complementary asset of models in their own language (Arabic) proceeds in parallel. Whether the institutional distortion of the rentier state (Section 4) is reproduced in the AI conversion, or whether a capital-participation-type conversion becomes a new route that avoids the distortion, is one of the empirical questions of highest observational value in the second half of the 2020s. [Indispensability] The choke point that the two Gulf states may hold is cooling water and siting of Section 11.2.5. The physical conditions of electricity, land, and solar irradiance are abundant, and the constraint of the interconnection queue is looser than in other regions. This source differs from the other five in that its concentration arises not from technical factors but from geography and law; neither economies of scale nor learning effects operate, but in exchange it cannot be dissolved in the short run, owing to the order-ofmagnitude difference between the time constant of grid reinforcement (5 to 10 years) and that of accelerator procurement (several months) (Section 11.2.5, Section 13.8.3). This indispensability has a limit of its own, however. A choke point of siting becomes indispensability only where what is executed there cannot be executed elsewhere. Because electricity and land exist at other points in the world as well, the number of alternative candidates is greater than for the other five sources. The asymmetry stated under [Structure of dependence] — that the host can stop the facility but cannot keep the facility running on its own — is another expression of this limit. The bargaining position of producing countries in the oil era was protected by the natural endowment of reserves, whereas siting, though an endowment, is not exclusive. [Desirability] Of the five components, capital is outstanding, while technology, market, rules, and trust are relatively thin. The speed of mobilization of sovereign wealth funds and the unity of regulation constitute grounds on which external producers wish to engage. As regards trust infrastructure (Definition 17), the state of development of the three elements specific to AI cannot be settled from this paper's evidence base. The attribution of quadrant is accurately described at present as in the course of movement from the Dependent–Peripheral Type toward the Bottleneck-Specialized Type. The attempt at inter-quadrant movement that Figure 11 of Section 11 indicated as the arrow of "moving upstream through capital" corresponds precisely to this case. What is important here is that movement on the nine cells (from oil M1 to hosting AI platforms) and movement on the leverage coordinate (acquisition of indispensability through funds and electricity) are attempted simultaneously by the same investment. Section 11.5.1 stated that the two objective functions may require different policies, but in this case the same policy is directed at both objectives simultaneously. It therefore becomes decisive for the verification of this route to separate ex post which objective is achieved and which is not — for there is a possible outcome in which facilities are built, transformation value does not accrue, and 503 yet the indispensability of siting alone remains. The conditions of this branching are treated in Section 15.5. [Exportability of integrated systems] As regards (ii) trust infrastructure, the state of development of the three elements specific to AI cannot be settled from this paper's evidence base. (iii) An operational record within the home jurisdiction is a function of the duration of operation and, as Section 12.3.3 states, cannot be compressed by the injection of funds — the fact that the speed of capital mobilization is outstanding is not a ground for expecting earlier satisfaction of this condition. [Implications for readers in this country] What the profile of the two Gulf states shows is that a route of moving upstream through capital and electricity is actually open, and at the same time that, because chips, models, and operational knowledge lie on the supplier's side, the bargaining asymmetry held in the oil era is not automatically reproduced. This analysis may be applied as a type to states that have resource revenues and cheap electricity and are converting them into AI compute platforms — Norway, Qatar, Kazakhstan, and states with large-scale hydropower or geothermal resources. What should be measured is not the capacity attracted but the transformation value accruing to the country from that capacity (Definition 5, Section 7) and the proportion of equity returns obtained through capital participation. 14.10 India — From the Export of Talent to Domestic Utilization [Current portfolio position] M3×C1 leading (multilingual, applications, administration) + supply of talent. The characteristic of India's position is that, notwithstanding its scale — or perhaps on account of its scale — it does not explicitly choose to contend with frontier production and places its centre of gravity on the socialization of access and specialization in applications. The five-year budget of the IndiaAI Mission (approved by the Cabinet on 7 March 2024) is 1.0372 trillion rupees (approximately 1.35 billion dollars), which is less than 1% of private AI investment in the United States (approximately 285.9 billion dollars in 2025). This very choice of budget scale indicates that India uses the term "sovereign AI" in a sense different from that of the United Kingdom and France — not holding its own frontier, but guaranteeing access for its own people and its own languages. [Principal assets and constraints] The assets are domestic demand on the scale of its population, the layer of software talent accumulated through supplying the world IT industry, and multilingualism including 22 scheduled languages. Multilingualism is at once a constraint and a candidate complementary asset (linguistic-contextual specificity among the four indicators of Proposition 4, Section 7) — demand for linguistic and contextual adaptation that producers in the English-speaking world find hard to replicate at low cost exists domestically on a large scale. The constraints are compute platforms, electricity, and the preparation of data. Shared GPU procurement with public subsidy is reported to have made approximately 38,000 units available as of 2026 (substantially exceeding the initial 504 target of 10,000), and expansion is rapid, but in absolute terms it is a scale below even a single frontier cluster in the United States. [Structure of dependence] External dependence for chips, cloud, and foundation models is the keynote. India's design is not the dissolution of dependence but its dispersion and the management of its conditions, with the state intervening as a "redistributor of access" that leases compute capacity from private data-centre operators through public procurement and allocates it to domestic developers. This mode of intervention offers one suggestion from the standpoint of nine-cell theory — the state's entering into the allocation of access may be regarded as an early institutional response, directed domestically, to the anticipation that rationing of C2 capability by price, capacity, and permission forms a new axis of inequality (Proposition 12, Section 17). A design in which the state treats compute access as a quasi-public good connects with the lineage of universal service in electricity and telecommunications, and India is the largest laboratory in terms of scale. On the other hand, scenarios of severance arise from the same structure — since what is leased is the domestic regions of operators outside the territory, a change in the conditions of supply contracts the very resource of redistribution. [Direction of policy] The IndiaAI Mission is composed of seven pillars: compute platforms, foundation models, datasets, applications, talent, startups, and safe AI. In domestic foundation models, Sarvam AI was selected in April 2025 as the first "sovereign LLM," and support for around 20 sovereign model developments including BharatGen is reported (2026). The direction is consistently "procurement subsidy plus multilingual and application specialization." [Attempts at cell transition] India's wager is a shift of centre of gravity "from the export of talent to domestic utilization." Read theoretically, this is an AI version of Gerschenkron's (1962) advantages of backwardness — borrowing the technology of earlier countries while mobilizing capital through institutional substitutes corresponding to the degree of backwardness — and the institutional substitute is "socialization of compute access through public procurement subsidy." The Frontier Descent (Section 5) and the sharp fall in inference prices are tailwinds for this strategy, and the cost of acquiring capability sufficient for following is falling rapidly. On the other hand, as Proposition 5 (Section 7) shows, in pure utilization lacking transformation capability the portion of the benefits of productivity improvement that is paid abroad as consideration for inputs is not retained domestically. The layered character of this outflow requires a distinction — in the C1 tier, where prices collapse toward marginal cost, the outflow is a (α) cost route and contains no excess return, whereas in the C2 tier, where supplier concentration is high and demand inelastic, the consideration contains a mark-up and that excess portion is transferred to producing countries as a (β) rent route. Which tier India's procurement is weighted toward determines the character of the outflow. Whether the complementary asset of multilingualism suffices to defend the transformation margin — India is an important test case for nine-cell theory as an outcome for a utilization-specialized country with scale. 505 The constraints on the movement are also clear. First, the speed of expansion of public compute platforms is fast, but the level is separated by orders of magnitude from the scale required for frontier production, and this distance does not close so long as costs rise year by year (Proposition 8, Section 13). Second, the outflow and inflow of talent — being an international supplier of software talent means at the same time that a route is established by which advanced domestic talent is absorbed by producers outside the territory. Whether the centre of gravity is placed on supplying or on retaining talent affects directly the speed of deepening in utilization. Third, the physical and institutional base conditions of electricity and the preparation of data. That India's strategy converges on "procurement subsidy plus multilingual and application specialization" is a choice of allocation taking these constraints as given, and it is accurate to read it not as an abandonment of frontier entry but as a rational ordering of priorities in a situation where the cost of entry differs by orders of magnitude. [Indispensability] As regards none of the six sources of Section 11.2 can it be described from this paper's evidence base that India holds a non-substitutable choke point. The supply of talent constitutes a thick flow to the world IT industry, but measured against the definition of indispensability — the cost and dysfunction arising for the counterpart if bypassed — individual personnel are substitutable and the time required for switching is short compared with the other five sources. Supply of talent may operate as an asset on the desirability side, but it operates poorly as a force for pushing back. In the siting component, electricity and the preparation of data are on the constraint side as base conditions for expanding compute platforms, and it is not at the stage of constituting a choke point on which other states depend. [Desirability] Market size is the central asset, and it operates in large part not as present purchasing power but as the expectation of future demand. The scale of population, multilingualism including 22 scheduled languages, and the breadth of applications have value for producers as a place in which to deploy their capability. In this sense part of desirability overlaps with the problem of depth of deployment of which Proposition 25 (Section 11) speaks — the breadth of places in which deployment is possible is bounded by the development of trust infrastructure (Definition 17). The state of development of the three elements cannot be settled from this paper's evidence base, but the institution itself of allocating compute access through public procurement may be read as a form of public involvement that is a precondition of element (ii) conformity assessment. The attribution of quadrant is a position with medium desirability and low indispensability, described as a weak form of the Normative–Market Type. Position on the nine cells (M3×C1 leading) and quadrant are both consistent with "the non-producing side." This agreement differs in content, however, from that of the United Kingdom and Singapore — whereas the desirability of the former two derives from institutional assets, the desirability here derives from scale. Desirability deriving from scale does not convert into bargaining power until the scale is realized. This time difference is, seen from the leverage side, the constraining condition on the choice of "socialization of access" stated under [Attempts at cell transition]. 506 [Exportability of integrated systems] As regards the human layer within (i), the thickness of software talent accumulated through supply to the world IT industry is a describable fact, and it stands in a position corresponding to "the bearer of transfer being people," which Section 12.4.2 listed as the first source of type (B). On the other hand, multilingualism including 22 scheduled languages may act in both directions on (iv) portability — a design that places adaptation to language in the layers of pre-processing and post-processing raises portability, whereas a design in which the mode itself depends on language lowers it (Section 12.3.5). The levels of (ii) and (iii) cannot be judged on the evidence of this paper. [Implications for readers in this country] What India's profile shows is that a route may hold in which a country does not choose frontier entry and concentrates resources on the socialization of access and on multilingual and application specialization, and that a design in which the state intervenes as a redistributor of compute access may become an early domestic response to the axis of inequality anticipated by Proposition 12 (Section 17). This type may be applied to states that have a large domestic market and multilingualism while the cost of frontier entry differs by orders of magnitude — Indonesia, Nigeria, Brazil, Egypt, the Philippines and others. What should be measured is not the number of GPUs procured but whether procurement is weighted toward the C1 tier or the C2 tier (that is, whether the outflow is a cost route or a rent route). 14.11 Israel — The Military-Technology Interface As regards Israel, because this paper's evidence base is thin in verified policy figures since 2022, quantitative description is withheld and the description is confined to a theoretically established positioning. [Current portfolio position] Upstream specialization within M2×C1/C2 (security and applied R&D). Israel is not a producing country of its own frontier but a transformation country specialized in the upstream of the application layer — and in particular applied development related to cybersecurity and defence. Breznitz (2007), comparing the IT growth routes of small states, characterized the Israeli type as "state involvement at the most upstream of R&D" — support for research and development by the Office of the Chief Scientist, and the creation of a venture capital market by the Yozma programme (1993). It is a representative case of the upstream-specialized small-state route, in contrast with Taiwan (midstream by way of public research institutes) and Ireland (downstream through the attraction of FDI). [Principal assets and constraints] The greatest structural asset is the military-technology interface. The route by which the technical units of the armed forces function as an apparatus for selecting and training advanced technical talent, and by which personnel after discharge flow back into private security and AI application firms, may be organized as a military version of what Porter (1990) calls "created advanced factors" — a structure in which the military sector performs the creation of both demand conditions and factor 507 conditions. The constraints are scale and geopolitical risk, and against the capital requirements of frontier training (Cottier et al., 2024) the scale of the domestic market and of capital is closed. [Structure of dependence] Access to compute and foundation models depends on the United States, and alliance relations are the basis of the guarantee of access. It belongs to the cases of the small-state type of sovereign minimum guarantee level — a centre of gravity on alliance guarantees and operational readiness rather than on domestic holding. The characteristic of dependence common to upstream-specialized transformation countries is an asymmetry: depending externally for the object of transformation (platform capability) while holding internally the subject of transformation (talent and organizations). So long as the supply of platform capability continues, this asymmetry works as an asset — because suppliers find the content of the transformation hard to replicate. If the conditions of supply change, the same asymmetry turns into vulnerability. Israel's position belongs to the type in which this double-sidedness appears most sharply. [Direction of policy and attempts at cell transition] The upstream-specialized position is expected to be maintained for the time being, but what deserves special note from the standpoint of nine-cell theory is that the position of a transformation country with a military– civil interface has a specific connection to the discussion of C3 (the critical tier). If C3 arrives (to repeat, C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category), states with transformation capability in military applications may become objects of international monitoring indicators from the standpoint of M2×C3 (Section 9) as a route of diffusion of critical capability. This is a description of position, not an evaluation — the observation is confined to a double-sidedness: the military-technology interface is in normal times a source of the formation of talent and of transformation value, and in the context of critical-tier governance it becomes an interface on which the design of verification and nonproliferation (Proposition 9, Section 9) fixes its attention. More generally, the type of a transformation country with a military–civil interface indicates one branching specific to row M2 of the nine cells. Transformation into civilian applications has its value measured in the market, whereas transformation into security applications realizes value outside the market and may become an object of an international management regime. In the oil era, refining capacity in itself was not an object of security, whereas in AI transformation capability may itself become a route of transfer of capability — this is a consequence of the near-zero cost of replication, which Proposition 9 (Section 9) lists among the elements of low transplantability. It is on account of this structure that upstream-specialized transformation countries such as Israel occupy a special position in the design of monitoring in the case where C3 arrives. To repeat, C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category, and the description in this section is confined to foresight in institutional design. [Indispensability] This item too withholds quantitative description on account of the constraints of the evidence base. As regards none of the six sources of Section 11.2 can it be described from this paper's evidence base that Israel holds a non-substitutable choke 508 point. What an upstream-specialized transformation country holds is not a choke point but the subject of transformation (talent and organizations), and, as stated under [Structure of dependence], the object of transformation, platform capability, depends externally. This composition may be rewritten in the vocabulary of Section 11 as follows — the holding of transformation capability is the formation of complementary assets (Proposition 4) and not indispensability. As Section 11.5.1 made explicit, the formation of complementary assets contributes to optimization of position, but it does not in itself necessarily raise the cost to other states of bypassing the country. This distinction is the hardest part to grasp of Proposition 22's claim that a technically advanced country does not necessarily possess high indispensability. [Desirability] The centre of gravity is in the technology component, supported by engagement on security through alliance relations. Market size is small, and a route of extraterritorial diffusion of rules cannot be confirmed on this paper's evidence base. Trust infrastructure (Definition 17) likewise cannot be settled. The attribution of quadrant is a position in which desirability is concentrated in the technology component and indispensability is low. This attribution cannot be derived from position on the nine cells (upstream specialization within M2×C1/C2) — for while standing upstream in the same M2, the Republic of Korea is placed in the Bottleneck-Specialized Type and Japan on the higher-indispensability side. That three different positions on the leverage coordinate stand side by side upon the same row M2 is itself this section's most direct evidence for Proposition 22's claim of independence. The description concerning the military– civil interface follows the same discipline as Section 11.8, remaining at the level of institutions and governance, and no evaluation is made of the military consequences of capability. [Exportability of integrated systems] A position specialized in the upstream of applications is, in the classification of Section 12.1, close to (a) the export of capability and (b) the export of products. Because the state of development of (ii) trust infrastructure cannot be settled, and because the market size of the home jurisdiction is small — Section 12.3.3 states that the scale of operation acts directly on the speed at which operational records accumulate — satisfaction of the four conditions for (c) the export of integrated systems cannot be judged on the evidence of this paper. [Implications for readers in this country] What Israel's profile shows is that the asymmetry of depending externally for the object of transformation (platform capability) while holding internally the subject of transformation (talent and organizations) works as an asset so long as the conditions of supply are stable and turns into vulnerability if the conditions change. This type may be applied as a type to states that combine a technological base in defence and security with routes of return flow of talent into civilian applications — Sweden, Finland, the Republic of Korea, Singapore and others. What should be measured is not the height of transformation capability but the institutional form (treaty, longterm contract, or voluntary cooperation) by which the guarantee of access to the platform capability on which that transformation depends is supported. 509 14.12 Small-State Strategy in General — Value Strategy Under Constraints of Scale Last among the ten profiles, national strategy under the constraint of scale is set out in general terms. Katzenstein (1985), a classic of small-state research, showed that the small states of Europe (Switzerland, Austria, the Nordic countries, the Benelux) accepted dependence on the world market as given and, by operating "international liberalization plus domestic compensation" through democratic corporatism — social partnership and continuous political adjustment — achieved flexible industrial adjustment. The positive correlation between openness and the size of government (Cameron, 1978; Rodrik, 1998) has been read as quantitative support for this small-state strategy of the state insuring the risks of openness. Research in the era of the knowledge economy updated this. Breznitz (2007) demonstrated the plurality of successful small-state routes by showing that Israel, Taiwan, and Ireland achieved the same "IT growth" through different specializations — upstream, midstream, and downstream. Ornston (2012) analysed the transposition by the Nordic countries and Ireland of traditional compensation-type corporatism into "creative corporatism" — coordinated investment in human capital, research, and venture capital. The core of small-state strategy lies not in refusing to fight on scale but in getting ahead, through institutional capacity for coordination, into positions that do not require scale. The age of AI deforms this strategic space in two directions at once. First, entry into frontier production (M1×C2) has in effect closed for small states. The cost of frontier training grows at approximately an annual factor of 2.4, and a single training run is predicted to exceed 1 billion dollars by 2027 (Cottier et al., 2024). This is a domain in which economies of scale "bite to an extreme degree," and the late-developer route of the flying-geese kind — from import through domestic production to export — which held at the level of industries in the oil era and the electrical machinery era, does not function at the frontier tier. Second, and at the same time, the cost of acquiring the commodity tier (C1) is collapsing. The inference price for a given level of performance is falling at annual factors of 9-fold to 900-fold (Epoch AI, 2025), and open-weight models have closed to within approximately three to four months of the closed frontier (Epoch AI, 2026). Holding the frontier is closed off while utilization near the frontier is opened up — this asymmetry is the basic condition governing the strategic space of small states in the age of AI. Under this condition the menu of strategies available to small states may be organized into at least the following four types. ① Application and domain specialization: placing the locus of transformation value in complementary assets that are hard to replicate — the industrial, linguistic, and institutional context of the country (Singapore's SEA-LION, Israel's security applications). ② Export of regulation and trust: supplying the institutional assets of governance frameworks, evaluation, and certification outside the territory and taking a position of standard setting that does not proceed by production (Singapore's AI Verify, the United Kingdom's evaluation hub — the United Kingdom is not a small state, but the strategy is of the same type). ③ Provision of niche compute and siting: becoming a host of compute capacity by making use of electricity, cooling, land, and unity of reg‐

ulation — although this type is an ambivalent choice that degenerates into "the granting of drilling rights" (Proposition 6b, Section 8) unless accompanied by transformation value, and, as Ireland's electricity constraint and Singapore's moratorium show, the physical upper limit arrives early. ④ Becoming a talent hub: making the concentration of research talent itself the asset (Switzerland, reported first in 2026 in the concentration of AI researchers relative to population, is close to this type (Stanford HAI, 2026)). The four types are not exclusive, and the actual form is a portfolio bundling ①②③ in managed proportions, as in Singapore. Rebundling these four menus along a more abstract axis, that of the design of dependence, the strategies actually available to small states may be organized into the following three types. The hub type. A type that makes dependence bidirectional by becoming a node at which suppliers, demanders, and capital from outside the territory gather. Causing the cost of severance to arise for the severing side as well becomes the means of managing dependence. Singapore is typical, and the requirements are institutional trust, legal predictability, geographical position, and unity of regulation permitting the coexistence of multiple suppliers. The constraint is that the physical limits — electricity, land, cooling — arrive early, and the route of a moratorium followed by resumption under a green framework is its manifestation. The hub type does not lower dependence itself, but lowers the amplification factor of an AI outage by lowering supplier concentration and outage correlation (Proposition 7, Section 13). The specialization type. A type that places the locus of transformation value not in territory or scale but in complementary assets that are hard to replicate — domain knowledge, physical interfaces, language and culture, the military–civil interface (Definition 5, Section 7). Israel's upstream specialization, Singapore's Southeast Asian language model, and the M2′ that Japan aims at (Section 14.6, Section 18) belong to this type. The requirement is actually to hold assets that producers cannot replicate at zero marginal cost, and the necessary condition (ii) of Proposition 4 (Section 7) becomes as such the condition of survival. The constraint is that the thickness of complementary assets may be eroded over time — through the Frontier Descent, the speed at which domains that formerly required specialization are absorbed into general-purpose capability determines the shelf life of this type. The alliance-dependent type. A type that places at the centre of the sovereign minimum guarantee level not domestically held capability but guarantees of access through treaties, long-term contracts, and alliance relations (Definition 6(ii), Section 13). The United Kingdom's evaluation hub, the Gulf's United States-aligned platform construction, and the actual condition of many small and mid-sized states fall here. The requirement is the institutional strength of the guarantee, and the difference between a guarantee based on voluntary cooperation and a guarantee with legal binding force is invisible in normal times and becomes manifest all at once when the conditions of supply change. The risk specific to this type is that the grantor of the guarantee is at the same time the setter of the condi‐ 511 tions of access, so that the design of dependence becomes inseparable from the design of negotiation. The three types are not exclusive choices but a matter of proportions. What matters is that none of them is a strategy of "reducing dependence" but a strategy of "designing dependence." Since entry into frontier production is closed, self-sufficiency is not an option for a small state. The same logical structure by which the small states of Europe depicted by Katzenstein (1985) accepted dependence on the world market as given and then built institutions of domestic compensation is repeated in AI in the form of "accepting dependence on access as given and then designing concentration, correlation, and the strength of guarantees." What differs is that the object of compensation may be not the pain of industrial adjustment but access to cognitive resources itself (Proposition 12, Section 17). The failure modes of each of the three types may likewise be organized symmetrically. The failure of the hub type is pass-through — a state in which suppliers and demanders merely pass through the country and transformation value does not settle domestically. Cases in which the attraction of data centres provides electricity, land, and tax while not being accompanied by local capture of value (Good Jobs First, 2024) are the physical version of this failure. The failure of the specialization type is erosion — a state in which the complementary asset that was the ground of specialization becomes unnecessary through the advance of general-purpose capability. The faster the Frontier Descent, the shorter the shelf life of specialization. The failure of the alliance-dependent type is change of conditions — a state in which the guarantee is withdrawn or revised and no corresponding alternative system is held. The reversal of export controls in 2025 (Section 14.2) was an event that made the political variability of guarantees visible to all dependent states. Since these three failure modes differ, policy evaluation for small states also requires different indicators by type — the accrual of domestic value added against passthrough, the speed of renewal of complementary assets against erosion, and the switching time to alternative systems (operational readiness, Definition 6(iii), Section 13) against change of conditions each become the monitoring indicator. This correspondence is carried over into the design of the national diagnostic checklist in Appendix D. A limitation on the range of application of the theory of small-state strategy must be made explicit, however. This is a theory of "small states that can choose." Only approximately 30 countries in the world have GPUs for AI on public clouds, and the world divides into three: a "Compute North" holding advanced training chips, a "Compute South" able only to perform inference on older-generation chips, and a "Compute Desert" lacking public GPU infrastructure (Lehdonvirta, Wú & Hawkins, 2024). For the great majority of states, the only cell of the nine actually reachable is M3×C1, and even the institutional capacity for coordination, the talent, and the electricity that are the premises of the four menus above are constrained. This configuration is the international version of a new axis of inequality among states — disparity of access to cognitive resources (Proposition 12, Section 17) — and it is recorded here as a description of Layer Zero that, outside the theory of smallstate strategy, there lies a problem of allocation prior to strategy. 512 14.13 Common Constraints on Middle Powers — Three Constraints That Operate Independently of Region, Income, and Political System The ten profiles to this point differ greatly from one another in region (North America, East Asia, Europe, the Middle East, South Asia, Southeast Asia), in income level, and in political system. Nevertheless, as descriptions of position and constraint accumulate, three constraints appear in common among states that do not belong to the two poles of the Resource-Producing Model. This subsection formulates them as a proposition and illustrates them across the profiles already given. The terminology is fixed in advance — what is called a "middle power" below is a designation of position, not of size. The magnitude of population, territory, or GDP is not in question. India, a populous state; Singapore, a city-state; the two Gulf states, oil producers; and Japan and the Republic of Korea, industrial states, all belong in this sense to the same set. What does not belong is only the two poles that produce frontier-class capability within their own territory. Proposition 21 (Three Constraints on Middle Powers) States that do not belong to the two poles of the Resource-Producing Model (hereafter, middle powers) receive in common the following three constraints, irrespective of differences of region, income level, and political system. (i) The energy constraint: expansion of compute platforms is rate-limited by electricity supply and grid development, and a state that cannot procure these domestically cannot maintain the upper capability tiers of the production or Transformation Models (the physical route of downward transition in Proposition 15). (ii) The data sovereignty constraint: a state that cannot itself design the conditions on which the data of its own language, industry, and administration is handed over to platforms abroad is structurally impeded in the formation of complementary assets (Proposition 4). (iii) The value-definition constraint: a state that confines the purpose of introducing AI to efficiency will, within a structure in which the competitive advantage of efficiency diminishes (Proposition 17), be maximizing a diminishing variable. All three constraints are independent of the level of technological capability, and both cases in which a technically advanced state fails on one of the three constraints and cases in which a technically late-developing state satisfies the three constraints are possible. Falsification condition If it is systematically observed that middle powers not satisfying one of the three constraints sustainably maintain a position of the Transformation Model or the Resource-Producing Model, the commonality of that constraint is rejected. If the operation of the constraints is observed to differ systematically by region, income level, or political system, the claim of commonality is rejected. (i) The cross-cutting appearance of the energy constraint. Rearranging the profiles from the standpoint of electricity, it is immediately apparent that the constraint corresponds neither to region nor to income level. Scarcity in the transmission grid and inter‐ 513 connection queues in regions where data centres are concentrated are publicly confirmed as constraints on growth in the United States, which dominates production (Section 14.2). Within the EU, in Ireland data centres came to consume more than 20% of electricity, leading to restrictions on new construction (Section 14.4). Singapore imposed a moratorium on new data centres from 2019 to 2022 and thereafter moved to a managed resumption under a green DC framework (Section 14.8). On the other hand, in China, whose electricity reserve margin is reported never to have fallen below 80% (Section 14.3), and in the two Gulf states, which set out as a national creed the conversion of an advantage in energy prices into compute capacity (Section 14.9), the same variable appears as an asset rather than a constraint. In India, electricity and the preparation of data are made explicit as base conditions for expanding compute platforms (Section 14.10). That is, a high-income island city-state and a high-income European member state reach the same physical limit first, while a middle-income populous state and oil producers are each governed by the same variable for different reasons. The energy constraint is not a matter of preference but the physics of the grid, and its time constant is longer than the time constant of policy decision. This is the physical route of downward transition in Proposition 15, and the route treated by scenario [D] (downward transition through physical constraints) in Section 15 — if electricity and the grid do not grow, maintenance of the upper tiers becomes impossible irrespective of the will of the state. (ii) The cross-cutting appearance of the data sovereignty constraint. This constraint is often misread as "not letting data leave the country." What Proposition 21 states is not that but whether the conditions of handing over can be designed by the state itself. The EU has the world's first comprehensive AI regulatory law, yet the structure in which the workloads of firms and administrations ride on a small number of hyperscalers outside the territory has not changed, and regulation can fix conditions but cannot compel supply (Section 14.4). India adopts a design in which the state intervenes as a "redistributor of access," leasing capacity from the domestic regions of operators outside the territory through public procurement and redistributing it to domestic developers, but since what is leased is the equipment of operators outside the territory, a change in the conditions of supply contracts the very resource of redistribution (Section 14.10). By contrast, designs that place assets on the side of the design of conditions are also observed — Singapore's Southeast Asian language model SEA-LION (Section 14.8), the Gulf's Arabic LLMs (Section 14.9), the convergence of Japan's domestic model developers on lightweight, Japanese-language and domain-specialized, and confidentiality-preserving (on-premises) systems (Section 14.6), and the Republic of Korea's "national representative AI" selection scheme (Section 14.7) are all attempts to secure a position of deciding for oneself where, and on what conditions, the data of one's own language, industry, and administration is processed. As regards China, a route of handling this constraint domestically through expansion of supply capacity within the territory is observed (Section 14.3). Where the capacity to design conditions is lacking, what is impeded in formation are, among the four indicators of complementary assets (Proposition 4, Section 7), above all exclusive data endowment and lin‐ 514 guistic-contextual specificity — these two lose the exclusivity of the country's own transformers at the moment they are processed on platforms abroad. (iii) The cross-cutting appearance of the value-definition constraint. This constraint is the least visible. It appears neither in budgets nor in compute, but in how the purpose is written in policy documents. Rereading the profiles at the level of purpose, descriptions that position AI as a means of making existing operations more efficient can be distinguished from descriptions that first perform the selection of what the purpose is to be. Singapore's National AI Strategy 2.0 fixes in advance, at the level of national strategy, the purpose "AI for the Public Good, for Singapore and the World," and allocates budget continuously to the components of absorptive capacity (Section 14.8). India uses the term "sovereign AI" in a different sense — guaranteeing access for its own people and its own languages rather than holding its own frontier — which is itself a redefinition of purpose (Section 14.10). The United Kingdom first defined the purposes of evaluation and safety and then took position at that interface (Section 14.5). The EU chose as its purpose the position of writing rules (Section 14.4), and the Gulf made explicit a rewriting of national creed, "from exporter of energy to exporter of compute" (Section 14.9). None of these is a judgment of success or failure; they are descriptions of the fact that a purpose has been selected. The value-definition constraint operates as binding where AI policy is designed solely as one means of raising productivity, in which case, as Proposition 17 (Section 17) shows, resources are concentrated on a diminishing residual. It is not that efficiency is itself an error — it is that placing efficiency alone as the purpose amounts to maximizing a diminishing variable. The independence of the three constraints — non-correspondence with region, income, and political system. The three axes are confirmed in turn. First, region. Middle powers of Europe and industrial states of East Asia are distant both geographically and institutionally, but they face isomorphic problems in each of the energy constraint (the speed of grid reinforcement), the data sovereignty constraint (the conditions of processing their own language and industrial data), and the value-definition constraint (how the purpose of policy is written), and in fact the two may stand in the same cell on the nine cells. Region does not partition the commonality of the constraints. Second, income level. Highincome Ireland and Singapore reach the physical limits of energy first (Sections 14.4 and 14.8), while a middle-income populous state may act first on language data and the setting of purpose (Section 14.10). Income changes the order in which constraints are reached, but not the set of constraints. Third, political system. Under each of the regulatory-law type (the EU), the promotion-statute-plus-soft-law type (Japan), the developmental-state type (the Republic of Korea), the capital-led type (the Gulf), and the state-managed type (China), the three constraints operate isomorphically. What the system changes is not the presence of the constraints but the speed and mode of response to them — who decides, how fast it is decided, and whether decisions may be reversed. Independence from the level of technology — illustration in both directions. What the second limb of Proposition 21 asserts is that the degree of satisfaction of the three con‐ 515 straints cannot be read off a ranking of technological capability. First, cases in which a technically advanced state is bound by one of the three constraints. The EU has regulatory capacity and long accumulation in HPC, yet as of August 2026 not a single AI gigafactory has been selected, the formal tender is set for the summer of 2026 and construction of the first facility for 2027, while regulation has already entered staged application (Section 14.4). The divergence between the speed of regulation and the speed of capability building itself signifies that the data sovereignty constraint is unresolved — the power to write conditions is present, but a period remains in which the base for enforcing those conditions is lacking. The United States dominates production, and yet scarcity in the transmission grid in regions of data-centre concentration is publicly confirmed as a constraint on growth (Section 14.2). Conversely, there are cases in which a state regarded as technically late-developing satisfies one of the three constraints. India is separated by orders of magnitude in the absolute quantity of compute platforms from the scale required for frontier production, yet it rests on the data asset specific to its own country of multilingualism including 22 scheduled languages, and built an institution for allocating compute access first (Section 14.10). The two Gulf states lack accumulation in development organizations and application ecosystems, while being structurally exempt from the energy constraint and running investment in models in their own language in parallel with the construction of compute platforms (Section 14.9). What this illustration in both directions means is that the three constraints are not the result of technology policy but its premise. To repeat, the foregoing is not an adjudication of the superiority or inferiority of countries but a description of the positions at which the constraints operate as binding. Application by the reader to their own country. The three constraints can be brought into a form in which readers can measure them for their own country or firm. For the energy constraint, the interconnection queue against plans for expanding compute platforms, and the annual consistency of plans for procuring additional electricity. For the data sovereignty constraint, the proportion of the country's language, industrial, and administrative data that is processed on platforms abroad, and the presence or absence of contracts and laws prescribing those conditions. For the value-definition constraint, whether the statements of purpose in policy documents and management plans consist solely of indicators of efficiency. The diagnostic procedures for these three items are placed in Appendix D (the national diagnostic checklist), and the measurement framework in Appendix E (the cell-transition matrix and a measurement framework for national brain capital). Proposition 21 is not, incidentally, a claim of sufficiency to the effect that satisfying the three constraints establishes the Transformation Model or the Resource- Producing Model — they are necessary conditions, and the remainder of the conditions of establishment are treated by Proposition 4 (complementary assets), Proposition 18 (national brain capital), and Proposition 19 (the three conditions of a third pole). What Proposition 21 asserts is a commonality in negative form: a strategy that aims at an upper position while lacking one of the three constraints is not rescued by region, income, or political system. 516 The relation between the three constraints and leverage. The three constraints of Proposition 21 are constraints concerning the nine-cell coordinate — all of them govern "whether the upper position can be maintained." Each constraint has, however, a mapping onto the leverage coordinate as well, and that mapping differs by constraint. Setting out this correspondence is necessary in order to connect the dual coordinates adopted in this section to practice. (i) The energy constraint acts on both position and leverage through the same variable. Electricity and the grid are a condition of position in that they make maintenance of the upper tiers possible, and at the same time they are the very content of the physical side of "cooling water and siting," which Section 11.2.5 listed as the fifth source of indispensability. Because the time constant of grid reinforcement is longer by an order of magnitude than that of accelerator procurement, the indispensability residing in siting cannot be dissolved in the short run (Section 13.8.3). A state that cannot procure electricity domestically therefore not only cannot maintain its position but also cannot hold the indispensability deriving from siting. That it acts on both, however, does not mean that the same policy is optimal for both — as stated in Section 13.8.3, a placement that maximizes resistance to AI outage (dispersing to lower outage correlation) and a placement that maximizes external indispensability (concentrating at scarce physical conditions to lengthen the time required for substitution) may demand different designs from the same budget. (ii) The data sovereignty constraint is one of the few policy domains that moves position and desirability at the same time. What Proposition 21 stated was "whether the conditions of handing over can be designed by the state itself." The capacity to design conditions is a condition of position in that it makes possible the formation of exclusive data endowment and linguistic-contextual specificity among complementary assets, and it is at the same time the minimum unit of the position of writing rules. And the trust infrastructure (Definition 17) that Proposition 25 (Section 11) identified is nothing other than the institutional substance of this design of conditions — a jurisdiction that has put in place rules of liability allocation, conformity assessment, and insurance can not only decide on what conditions its own data is processed but also has value for producers as a place where deployment of AI in regulated sectors is actually possible. That is, investment in trust infrastructure advances improvement of position and acquisition of desirability at the same time. Even granting the separation of the two objective functions stated in Section 11.5.1, on this single point the two converge. (iii) The value-definition constraint acts directly on position and only indirectly on leverage. What a state that confines the purpose of introducing AI to efficiency loses is a degradation of position through maximizing a diminishing variable (Proposition 17, Section 17). This constraint does not correspond directly to either of the two components of leverage. An indirect route exists, however — in a policy system whose purpose is confined to efficiency, the acquisition of leverage is not itself set as an objective, so that neither an inventory of the choke points the country might hold nor the design of the components of desirability arises as a policy task. That Section 11 separated the diagnostic 517 procedure into Appendix G rests on the practical recognition that this work does not readily arise within the framework of existing AI policy. What matters here is that there is no relation of implication between the three constraints and leverage. The three constraints are necessary conditions of a strategy aiming at an upper position, not sufficient conditions for generating leverage. There may be a state that satisfies all three constraints and yet holds not a single source of indispensability — there is no contradiction in a state having abundant electricity, being able to design the conditions of its data, and having an explicit purpose, while holding no choke point that raises the cost to others of bypassing it. Conversely, there may be a state that lacks one of the three constraints and yet has high indispensability through a single choke point. That is, the leverage of a middle power cannot be read off a ranking of the degree of satisfaction of the three constraints. This is a consequence of Proposition 21 and Proposition 22 being independent claims, and in practice it is the reason why the diagnostic of Proposition 21 (Appendix D) and the diagnostic of leverage (Appendix G) must be juxtaposed as separate procedures. What a middle power should hold is not a single "AI strategy" but two objective functions, one concerning position and one concerning leverage, and their allocation differs according to each country's initial conditions. 14.14 Cross-Cutting Observations — Structure Visible in the Distribution When the ten profiles are superimposed on the nine cells, a clear bias appears in the distribution. The crowded cells and the empty cells are described in turn below. For convenience of organization, the positions plotted in this section are listed as follows. United States = M1×C2 leading + M3×C1 deepening. China = M1×C1 leading + M1×C2 pursuit + M3×C1/C2. EU = M3×C1/C2 leading + standard-setting power (outside the cells) + M1×C2 at the periphery. United Kingdom = M3×C2 leading + a transformation niche in the evaluation interface. Japan = M3×C1 expanding rapidly + M2×C1 + selective M1 investment (Section 18). Republic of Korea = upstream of M2×C2 + M3×C1 + an orientation toward M1×C2. Singapore = M3×C1 deepening + hub-type M2×C1. UAE/Saudi Arabia = in the course of conversion from oil M1 to hosting AI platforms (M2×C2). India = M3×C1 leading + supply of talent. Israel = upstream specialization within M2×C1/C2. The structure that can be read from this distribution is set out below in five points. This list is a snapshot as of August 2026 and is a provisional description that may be rewritten both by movement of the boundary and by reversals of policy. First, M3×C1 is the most crowded. Japan, India, Singapore, the EU, the United Kingdom, the Republic of Korea, and the Gulf all stand here to varying degrees, and since the cost of acquiring C1 has collapsed, the entrance to utilization has in effect been opened to every country. As Section 7 stated, capability everyone can use is no one's advantage. The branching within this cell therefore shifts from the presence or absence of access to absorptive capacity — the level of complementary investment and the depth of redesign of operations (Proposition 5, Section 7). Among the profiles, the coexistence of the highest 518 rate of utilization (Singapore, 61%; Stanford HAI, 2026) with the rate of utilization in the country that dominates production (United States, 28.3%; ibid.) shows plainly that this branching is a variable independent of productive power. The same configuration appears in international comparisons of the rate of personal use — the distribution in the fiscal 2025 survey of China 93.6%, the United States 75.6%, Germany 75.6%, and Japan 58.8% (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2026) does not correspond one to one either with position in production or with the level of GDP. The implication of Proposition 5 (Section 7) that the factor of branching within a crowded cell is neither access nor income but the absorptive capacity of organizations and institutions appears here in observational form. Second, M1×C2 is extremely empty. What stands stably in this cell is the United States, with China in pursuit. Other states, even where they have declared entry through public funds (the EU's gigafactories, the Republic of Korea's AI G3, the Gulf's full-stack construction), had not as of August 2026 reached production of frontier models. The reason for the emptiness is the discontinuity of capital — in a situation in which training costs grow at approximately an annual factor of 2.4 and a single run is predicted to exceed 1 billion dollars by 2027 (Cottier et al., 2024), the cost of entry rises year by year, and the estimate at the time entry is decided is obsolete by the time it is begun. This is a mode of entry barrier different from the development of an oil field: the barrier is not the presence or absence of reserves but the capacity to maintain a permanent speed of construction (Proposition 8, Section 13). Third, M2×C2 — managed transformation — is a structurally unstable cell. The Republic of Korea (supply of inputs), the Gulf (platform hosting), and Israel (application upstream) are involved here, and none of them can set the conditions of its own position for itself. Since a continuing guarantee of access is the condition of subsistence of transformation (Proposition 4, Section 7), states standing in this cell are permanently exposed to policy changes by producing countries. The reversal of export controls that occurred in 2025 — from the announcement of the three-tier licensing scheme (13 January) to its withdrawal (13 May) and the shift to transactional licensing — showed that for states standing in this cell the predictability of the institutional environment is itself the largest risk variable. Fourth, M1×C1 — commodity production — is led by China and is otherwise almost empty. As a result of the open-weight frontier moving to Chinese entities in 2025–2026 and Meta falling back (Epoch AI, 2026), this cell is oligopolistic. What matters is that occupancy of this cell does not bring direct sales revenue. That national resources are committed although one cannot dominate by producing (Section 7) is because the objective is not revenue but the structural effect of eroding other states' dependence on C2 and drawing in the developer ecosystem. Of the nine cells, it is the one in which the mode of value diverges furthest from "revenue," and it is a domain in which cost-benefit evaluation is difficult in the vocabulary of existing industrial policy. Whether the state in which the openweight frontier has closed to within approximately three to four months of the closed 519 frontier (Epoch AI, 2026) persists governs the meaning of this cell and the survival of the C1/C2 distinction itself (the falsification condition of Proposition 2, Section 5). Fifth, the distribution leaves two important facts outside the nine cells. One is the value positions independent of the geography of production: standard-setting power (the EU) and the capacity for evaluation and verification (the United Kingdom). As the finding of global value chain research that "capture of value is determined by governance position within the chain" (Gereffi, Humphrey & Sturgeon, 2005) indicates, the position that writes rules and the position that inspects may capture value and influence without producing or transforming. What matters here is that this position lies outside the nine cells not as an oversight of the framework but as a theoretical exclusion. Definition 3 (Section 6) defines a national value model as "the composition by which a state generates national value in its relation to the general-purpose input," and in its note makes explicit that positions that obtain value by supplying the rules and the verification of the transaction and use of the resource (standard setting, conformity assessment, certification) are outside the domain of quantification. The ground of exclusion is not classificatory convenience but the locus of the source of value — whereas the value of M1, M2, and M3 arises in every case from a relation to the general-purpose input itself (production, transformation, utilization), the value of the position that supplies rules and verification arises from constraints on the conduct of other actors. The two cannot be placed on the same domain of quantification. The EU's standard-setting power and the United Kingdom's evaluation and verification interface are therefore not "a residue that did not fit into the nine cells" but positions belonging to a domain of quantification other than the nine cells, and this paper has described them separately, as positions concerning the rules of the cells rather than positions on the cells. This separate treatment does not impair the exhaustiveness of the nine cells; it delimits their range of application. Exclusion, however, is not the same as neglect. The note to Definition 3 makes explicit as a future task the possibility of extending the framework by positing this position as a fourth value model (M4, the disciplinary type). If M4 were posited, the EU's standardsetting power, the United Kingdom's evaluation interface, Singapore's AI Verify, and the institutionalization of quality that Japan's M2′ lists as its third series (Section 18) could be treated in a unified way as the same type. Counterparts existed in the oil era as well — classification societies, insurance markets, quality standards, and international accounting standards were institutional suppliers that prescribed the conditions of the resource economy without producing, transforming, or utilizing the resource. It is also to be expected that extension to the twelve cells of M1–M4 × C1–C3 would raise rather than lower the discriminating power of Proposition 3 (the non-equivalence of the cells). That this paper does not carry out this extension and leaves it as a future task is because the mode of value capture of M4 — how, for how long, and how much value the position that writes rules may capture — cannot be derived, as it can for M1 to M3, from a physical or accounting relation to the resource, and requires an independent theory. Section 20 acknowledges this non-extension as one of the limits of this paper's framework.

This position has not, however, been left outside the theory. Section 11.4 recovered into the interior of the theory the positions of standard setting and conformity assessment that the note to Definition 3 placed outside the domain of quantification — not as a fourth value model but as leverage on the desirability side. The argument for that recovery has four steps — (a) the property that the note gave as the ground of exclusion, that "the source of value lies in constraints on the conduct of other actors," was precisely what Definition 15 defined as leverage; (b) adding a fourth value to the M axis would create a series with a principle of division different from the first three, losing consistency as a classification; (c) only when placed on the leverage axis do three falsifiable consequences follow (that it is distributed independently of position, that its value is proportional to the cost of compliance, and that it depreciates when the inelasticity of the market is lost); and (d) dual coordinates can describe, without generating a problem of expression, the simultaneity of a jurisdiction standing at M3×C1/C2 on the nine cells and in a high-desirability quadrant on the leverage coordinate. Accordingly, the EU's standard-setting power and the United Kingdom's evaluation and verification interface, which this subsection has denoted as "a variable outside the cells," do have a position on the second coordinate — the [Desirability] items of Sections 14.4 and 14.5 are that description. That extension to the twelve cells of M1–M4 × C1–C3 remains a future task, and that the position of standard setting is treated within this paper's theory, are compatible. The other fact remaining outside the nine cells is the existence of the great majority of states that enter into none of the ten profiles. Only approximately 30 countries have GPUs for AI on public clouds (Lehdonvirta et al., 2024), and for states belonging to the Compute Desert, access to C1 itself is the issue, prior to any strategic choice on the nine cells. The nine cells are a theory of choice, and the set of states for which choice is possible is itself the most basic configuration of Layer Zero. Finally, this distribution is not a still picture. Through the Frontier Descent (Section 5), the C1/C2 boundary moves upward every year. If the boundary moves, a state's position changes even if the state itself does not move — if capability that was C2 last year becomes C1 this year, the relative position of the country that held it is automatically diluted, and the options of the country that was utilizing it automatically widen. The plots of Figure 3 are therefore at once the consequence of each country's strategy and the consequence of movement of the boundary. In evaluating national strategy it is indispensable to distinguish one's own movement from movement of the boundary, and self-evaluation lacking this distinction — the kind of error that reads the fact that a higher-performing model has become usable compared with last year as an achievement of one's own policy — is a pitfall specific to policy evaluation at Layer Zero. Sixth, as a methodological caution, this distribution should be read by type and not by region. The ordering of the profiles broadly follows geography for convenience, but position on the nine cells does not correspond to geography. Middle powers of Europe and industrial states of East Asia differ in continent, institutions, and language, but they may stand in the same cell in that they procure frontier capability from outside and perform 521 transformation resting on complementary assets specific to their own industries, institutions, and language. Similarly, oil producers of the Gulf and Nordic states with large-scale hydropower may belong to the same type in that they attempt to convert resource revenues and cheap electricity into compute capacity, and a city-state hub and one metropolitan area of a continental state may adopt the same strategy of placement. Conversely, there are several instances in this section of states belonging to the same region standing in different cells — within East Asia, the position of a supplier of inputs (Section 14.7) and a position in which rapid expansion of utilization coexists with external dependence in transformation (Section 14.6) are different types, and within Europe, the position of writing rules (Section 14.4) and the position of standing at the interface of inspection and evaluation (Section 14.5) are different types. What a reader searching for the case closest to their own country should therefore refer to is not proximity on the map but agreement in the three items [Current portfolio position], [Principal assets and constraints], and [Structure of dependence]. Analogizing on the basis of region is an error of replacing the nonequivalence of the nine cells (Proposition 3, Section 6) with the unrelated variable of geography, and it is also the theoretical cause of the kind of failure in which a neighbouring country's policy is imported as it stands. As the preceding subsection (Section 14.13) showed, the three constraints that middle powers receive in common operate independently of region, income level, and political system, and therefore comparison of the same type across regions gives far more information than comparison across types. 14.14.1 Divergence Between Position and Leverage — An Illustration of Proposition 22 The five points above were structures readable from the distribution on the nine-cell coordinate. This subsection superimposes the [Indispensability] and [Desirability] entries attached to the ten profiles and treats what becomes visible when the second coordinate is set against the first. Proposition 22 (Section 11) asserts that position on the nine cells and geoeconomic leverage are independent variables and that neither can be derived from the other. Its falsification condition provides that "if the level of geoeconomic leverage can be systematically predicted from position on the nine cells (if no variance of leverage remains after controlling for position), the claim of independence is rejected." What this subsection performs is, in correspondence with that falsification condition, to set out cases in which leverage is not aligned when position is held constant. Given the smallness of a sample of ten, the following does not claim satisfaction of the falsification condition statistically — it remains negative evidence that configurations that would not be observed if position uniquely determined leverage are in fact observed in several types. The types of divergence are described in four groups. The first type — standing in the Utilization Model while possessing high indispensability. Japan has its centre of gravity on the nine cells at M3×C1 expanding rapidly and maps external dependence in the transformation layer onto the balance of payments, yet it is involved in choke points in the domains of materials and equipment components that require a long time for substitution (Section 14.6). The EU has frontier production within 522 its territory limited almost to a single entity, and yet it holds within its territory the supplier of advanced lithography equipment, which Section 11.2.1 listed as the sharpest source of indispensability (Section 14.4). What these two cases have in common is that the source of indispensability resides in an industry other than the industry constituting the leading cell on the nine cells. Position on the nine cells describes the centre of gravity of the national economy, whereas indispensability resides in a position on the supply chain of a particular item; there is therefore nothing that requires the two to arise from the same industry. Although outside the scope of this section, "the economic zone in which the capacity to manufacture advanced logic is agglomerated," which Section 11.1 gave as the first type, belongs to the same structure. The second type — standing near production while desirability is limited. China leads the world frontier of open weights and stands on the nine cells as a world supplier of M1×C1 (Section 14.3). The mode of supplying by publishing weights, however, is a non-exclusive route that forgoes direct sales revenue, and users can use it without holding a continuing relation with the supplier. The fact of producing does not automatically convert into the fact that other states wish to engage. This is the concrete instance in this section of the structure that Section 11.1 formulated as the third type — "the fact of production itself is not converted into bargaining power" — and of the point stated in Definition 3 (Section 6) that at low levels of strategic character the route of value realization for M1 takes the non-exclusive routes of ecosystem externalities and standard formation. What this type shows is not confined to the difference between a high value on the M axis and high desirability. It has the stronger implication that the choice of the route of value realization itself governs the level of desirability. The third type — dominating production while depending on choke points in other jurisdictions. The United States stably leads M1×C2 on the nine cells, while the physical inputs for building the frontier — the manufacture of advanced logic, lithography equipment, high-bandwidth memory — depend on a few nodes outside its territory (Section 14.2). That [Structure of dependence] recorded this as "the simultaneous holding of a choke point and dependence on a choke point" is the reverse side of the first type. As Section 11.1 stated as a consequence of the first type, a state of the Resource-Producing Model may hold a weak bargaining position vis-à-vis a state that is not of the Resource-Producing Model. The hierarchy of position and the hierarchy of indispensability do not face in the same direction. The fourth type — different quadrants standing side by side upon the same row. This is the most direct evidence obtainable from the descriptions in this section. The three countries involved in row M2 of the nine cells — the Republic of Korea (upstream of M2×C2), Japan (a portfolio including M2×C1), and Israel (upstream specialization within M2×C1/C2) — are placed respectively, on the leverage coordinate, in the Bottleneck-Specialized Type, on the boundary between the Structurally Indispensable Type and the Bottleneck- Specialized Type, and in a position in which desirability is concentrated in the technology component and indispensability is low. Similarly, the countries standing at 523 M3×C1 — the United Kingdom, Singapore, India, the EU, Japan, the Republic of Korea, the Gulf — are scattered on the leverage coordinate over almost the whole of the four quadrants, from the Normative–Market Type to being in the course of movement from the Dependent–Peripheral Type. That is, variance of leverage remains even when position is controlled for. That Table 17 of Section 11 records of the Bottleneck-Specialized Type that "it cannot be discriminated from position — the core case of Proposition 22" is the theoretical counterpart of this observation. Here the sense of the word "divergence" needs to be limited. Divergence is not an inconsistency of the theory but the ordinary consequence of two variables being independent. When height and eyesight are independent, calling it "divergence" that a tall person does not necessarily have good eyesight smuggles in the premise that the two ought to correspond. The same holds for the nine cells and leverage, and this paper uses the word "divergence" because previous discussion has tacitly identified the two — presupposing a hierarchy in which producing countries are strong and utilizing countries weak. With the introduction of the second axis in Section 11 this premise has been explicitly denied. Henceforth the question whether a country is "strong" has no answer unless it specifies which component on which coordinate is being asked about. 14.14.2 The Two Distributions Are Not Congruent — Implications for Description and Comparison The four types of the preceding subsection were observations concerning individual cases, but when the ten are aggregated it can be read that the distribution on the nine cells and the distribution on the leverage coordinate differ in shape. Four implications follow from this non-congruence. First, the locations of crowding differ. In the distribution on the nine cells the most crowded position is M3×C1, where 7 of the 10 stand to varying degrees (the first observation). Yet these seven are scattered over the four quadrants on the leverage coordinate. That is, the cell that is most crowded on the first coordinate is the most dispersed on the second. This fact adds a further factor of branching to the first observation of this section — that the factor of branching within a crowded cell is absorptive capacity. The reason states standing in the same cell obtain different outcomes is not only the depth of complementary investment and redesign of operations (Proposition 5) but also whether they can push back against changes of conditions from outside. Conversely, states falling in the same quadrant on the leverage coordinate may be far apart on the nine cells — the United Kingdom, Singapore, and the EU, placed in the Normative–Market Type, differ from one another in the composition of their desirability (institutional assets, node status, rules and market size) and do not agree in position on the nine cells. Second, the meaning of emptiness differs. That M1×C2 is extremely empty on the nine cells is due to the discontinuity of capital, whereby the cost of entry rises year by year (the second observation). That there are few cases falling in the Structurally Indispensable Type (indispensability high / desirability high) on the leverage coordinate is due to a dif‐ 524 ferent reason — the origins of the two components differ. Indispensability resides in a particular item on the supply chain, whereas desirability arises from the national economy and institutions as a whole: market, rules, capital, and trust. For the two to reach high levels simultaneously, two different kinds of accumulation must be present together in the same state. The emptiness on the first coordinate is therefore a problem of cost, and the emptiness on the second a problem of composition. The former may be filled by the injection of funds, whereas the latter has two objects to be filled, and moreover, as Section 11.6.5 stated, the two have opposite operating policies — indispensability is an asset to be conserved, and desirability an asset to be exercised continuously. Third, the manner of comparison changes. The sixth observation of this section stated that the distribution should be read by type and not by region, and that what a reader searching for the case closest to their own country should refer to is agreement in the three items [Current portfolio position], [Principal assets and constraints], and [Structure of dependence]. The introduction of dual coordinates updates this manner by one step. What should be referred to is not agreement of cell alone but agreement of both cell and quadrant. The policy of a country standing in the same cell but located in a different quadrant is instructive as to position but not as to leverage — for if the quadrant differs, the vulnerability that Section 11.5.2 assigned to each quadrant differs, and therefore the failure mode to be prepared against differs. Even if a country of the Bottleneck-Specialized Type imitates the institutional export strategy of a country of the Normative–Market Type, it cannot address the vulnerability specific to it of losing all its leverage upon the success of a design that bypasses it. This additional step is a repetition, on the leverage side, of the statement in Section 14.12 that the three types of small-state strategy "require different indicators by type." Fourth, the time constants of movement differ. Movement on the nine cells requires accumulation, and ascent is slower than descent (Proposition 15, Section 15). Movement on the leverage coordinate has a different rate-limiting factor. Acquisition of indispensability takes, among the five mechanisms decomposed in Section 11.2.7, a few years given the injection of capital if the choke point is sustained by economies of scale alone, a decade if it is sustained by learning effects and skill, and is immovable if it is sustained by the physical conditions of siting. Acquisition of desirability lies outside the will of the state as regards market size, which is a function of population and income, and requires accumulation in the design and operation of institutions as regards rules and trust infrastructure. More decisive still is that indispensability depreciates through exercise (Proposition 23), whereas position on the nine cells has no concept of exercise. Position does not diminish through use, but indispensability diminishes when used. The two coordinates differ not only in their static configuration but in the very mode of their dynamics. This relation of dynamics — and in particular the fact that cross-axis transition (Proposition 16) treated in Section 15 and the paradox of exercise (Proposition 23) are different aspects of the same phenomenon — is treated consistently in Section 15.4.6. 525 14.14.3 The Export of Integrated Systems as a Third Distribution — An Axis Distinct from the Height of Capability The export of integrated systems formulated in Section 12 (Definition 20) brings a third axis into this section's descriptions. Setting side by side the [Exportability of integrated systems] entries attached to the ten profiles, the distribution that appears there is congruent neither with the distribution on the nine cells nor with the distribution on the leverage 2×2. The reason lies in the structure of Proposition 39 — the most constraining of the four conditions is (iv) portability, and portability is not an increasing function of the height of capability. As Section 12.3.4 showed, among the four indicators of Proposition 4, exclusive data endowment and linguistic-contextual specificity protect the transformation margin by making internalization by producers difficult, while by the same property they fix the system to the institutions of the home jurisdiction. That is, assets that raise the defensibility of the Transformation Model may also act in the direction of lowering the exportability of integrated systems. Jurisdictions with high capability in a given domain and jurisdictions able to export the integrated systems of that domain therefore do not coincide. Reading this non-congruence from the descriptions in this section, it appears in three forms. First, for jurisdictions standing on the M3 side of the nine cells — the side that bears neither production nor upstream transformation — facts bearing on (ii) trust infrastructure and (iii) operational record may nonetheless be describable. Institutional assets and the operational records of public platforms accumulate independently of position on the nine cells. Second, for jurisdictions standing upstream in M2 on the nine cells, the conditions of (c) the export of integrated systems may be undeterminable. Upstream supply of inputs is, in the classification of Section 12.1, (b) the export of products, a form distinct from the export of integrated systems. Third, for jurisdictions placed on the higher-indispensability side of the leverage coordinate, the item that is the source of that indispensability and the domain of operations in which the export of integrated systems is at issue may belong to different industries. All three are manifestations of the fact that the third axis is derivable from neither of the two preceding coordinates. Two limitations on how this non-congruence is read accompany it. First, this subsection is an observation of the shape of a distribution, not a ranking of jurisdictions. There is nowhere in this section an implication that it is preferable to export integrated systems and not preferable to import them — as Section 12.8.3 states, the exporting and importing sides are structural positions specific to each domain, and are neither attributes nor grades of a jurisdiction. It is usual for the same jurisdiction to satisfy the conditions in one domain and not in another. Second, the distribution this subsection observes is composed for the most part of undeterminable entries. None of the ten profiles permitted facts to be described across the whole of the four conditions, and many recorded "the evidence of this paper does not permit a judgment" as to (ii) or (iv). This blank is not a judgment about the capability of the jurisdiction concerned but a description of the state of this paper's evidence base. Section 20 acknowledges as limitations the sources of this blank — the 526 thinness of accumulated cases of the export of integrated systems in AI (Section 20.10(g)), and the absence of a framework for measuring portability in advance (Section 20.8(i)). The third axis is nonetheless placed in this section because there exist in practice questions that the two coordinates of position and leverage cannot answer. For a given domain, can one's own jurisdiction construct a system and supply it outward, or does it receive a system from outside; and if it receives, on what conditions does it negotiate? To this question, position on the nine cells answers "by what means does one live," and the leverage coordinate answers "can one push back," but neither answers "can it be transferred." The third axis corresponds to this blank. The diagnostic procedure will take the form of checking the four conditions of Proposition 39 domain by domain, as an extension of Appendix G; but since the measurement framework for portability is undeveloped, what can be given at present extends to the items of the check and not to a judgment of level. Finally, the further step that the third axis adds to the manner of comparison is stated. The third implication of Section 14.14.2 stated that what a reader searching for the case closest to their own country should refer to is agreement not of cell alone but of both cell and quadrant. Adding exportability of integrated systems makes the unit of reference finer by one further step — what should be referred to is not a country but a pair of jurisdiction and domain. Because Proposition 39 is judged only for a pair of jurisdiction and domain (Section 12.3.1), and because among the three variables of Proposition 40 the variable (b) domain-specificity of judgment differs greatly by jurisdiction (Section 12.6.3), construction within the home jurisdiction may be appropriate for one domain and procurement of integrated systems for another, within the same country. The vocabulary of a country-level "AI strategy" cannot express this granularity. It is in order to correspond to this granularity that this section, while adopting the form of ten profiles, has described each item decomposed by domain. Where a reader repeats the procedure of this section for their own country, the unit should likewise be placed not on the country but on the pair of country and domain. The diagnostic sheet of Appendix D has entry fields by sector for the same reason. 14.14.4 Conclusion of This Section What the ten profiles and the general treatment of small states in this section show is the fact that the responses of states to a single technological shock differentiate systematically according to the initial conditions of scale, resources, institutions, and alliances. Under the same name of "national AI strategy," the United States is managing placement, China is constructing a self-sufficient sphere, the EU is capturing rules, the Gulf is converting assets, Singapore is deepening position, and India is socializing access — this is nothing other than observational support for Proposition 3 (Section 6), that if the cell differs, the optimal institutions and the failure modes differ. The next section (Section 15) places the static configuration depicted in this section on the axis of time and discusses which movements from which positions to which positions become possible, and on what accumula‐ 527 tion. That section also treats directly, in Section 15.4.6, the problem this subsection raised as the difference in the dynamics of the two coordinates — how the transition of position (including cross-axis transition in Proposition 16) and the depreciation of indispensability (Proposition 23) are to be reconciled. What the configuration of Layer Zero distributes to the three layers below it — capital allocation, the institutional footing of society, and the redefinition of the enterprise — is treated in Section 17. 528 15. The Dynamics of National Value Models 15.1 From Static Classification to a Field of Transition Sections 7 through 9 analysed, row by row, the nine cells that are the product of the three types of national value model (Definition 3, Section 6) and the AI capability tiers (Definition 2, Section 5). Section 14 placed the present positions of ten major countries and regions on those nine cells. What was given there was a classification of positions. A classification, however, does not guarantee that what has been classified stays where it is. The statement that the United States is located at M1×C2, the statement that Japan aims at M2×C2, and the statement that the Gulf oil-producing states are attempting to move upstream from M3×C1 are all cross-sections taken at a single point in time, August 2026, and not descriptions of a steady state. This section places that cross-section back onto the axis of time. What this section does and does not do is stated first. This section is not a prediction but an analysis of conditional paths. The four scenarios set out below are not forecasts of which state moves to which cell. Each scenario takes the form of a conditional: "if a given set of conditions obtains, which consequence follows." All statements in this section are accordingly written in the form "if X obtains, then Y follows," and no assertion about the future in the form "X is going to happen" is used. This discipline is not rhetorical caution; it is required by the methodology of this paper (Section 3). The time constants of transition are not estimated here (the limitation is acknowledged in Section 20), and none of the exogenous conditions that govern transition — the measures of other states, the rate of advance of technology, physical constraints — is under the control of this paper. In addition, where C3 (the critical tier) is mentioned, one point is stated in advance. C3 is at the time of writing an unrealized anticipatory category (Definition 2, Section 5). Where this section touches on vertical transition into Row C3, that is not a forecast of arrival but a conditional description of the character of the transition should it arrive. On that basis, the nine cells are redefined as a field of transition. 529 Definition 10 (Cell Transition) Cell transition is the movement of the centroid of a state's portfolio weights from one cell of the nine to another. Transition decomposes into three directions. Horizontal transition (the M axis): movement of the locus of value generation (from utilization to transformation, from transformation to production, and the reverse). Vertical transition (the C axis): movement of the capability tier addressed. Cross-axis transition: movement from a state in which the capability in question is allocated by the logic of economics (market, trade) to a state in which it is allocated by the logic of national security (control, alliance, nonproliferation), and the reverse. Transition is not determined by a state's choices alone; it is a function of exogenous conditions including the measures of other states, the advance of technology, and physical constraints (electricity, compute). Four points are elaborated in respect of Definition 10. First, the subject of transition is not the state itself but the centroid of portfolio weights. As Definition 3 stated, an actual state is described not as a single type but as a weighted portfolio over the nine cells. A transition therefore means that the distribution of weights moves, not that a country undergoes a discrete conversion in which it "stops being a Transformation Model and becomes a Resource-Producing Model." That the United States is led by M1×C2 while deepening M3×C1 utilization, and that Japan places weight on both transformation and utilization, are consequences of a portfolio description and not exceptions to it. The expression "centroid" is used in order to make explicit that observing a transition is observing "in which direction the weights have moved," not "which cell an entity belongs to." This point matters for measurement as well: the observable quantities for cell assignment specified in the falsification condition of Proposition 3 — distance of productive capability from the frontier, net exports and imports of AI-related goods and services, supplier concentration in procurement, whether access-control measures apply — are all continuous quantities or binary variables, and their change over time is the observed value of a transition. Second, horizontal transition (the M axis) is movement of the locus of value generation. In the oil era, instances of this transition were abundant. Moves by oil-producing states to integrate downstream into refining and petrochemicals (the acquisition by Saudi Aramco of full ownership of a large refinery in the United States is one instance) constituted a partial horizontal transition from the Resource-Producing Model to the Transformation Model; conversely, that Singapore, holding no crude reserves whatever, became a node of transformation with refining capacity of more than 1.5 million barrels per day shows that the position of transformation can be established independently of the position of production (evidence note A). The same three directions can be defined for AI — from utilization to transformation (turning to supply domain-specific applications using one's own operating data and field knowledge), from transformation to production (turning to supply, to transformers and users in other states, the specialized models, evaluation criteria and

datasets built for those applications), and the reverse. What requires care here is not to identify M1 (the Resource-Producing Model) with "a state that develops general-purpose frontier models." M1 in Definition 3 is "the type that produces the resource itself and derives value from the fact of that production," and it imposes no condition on the degree of generality. A state that produces foundation models, evaluation criteria and datasets confined to a domain, upon which actors in other states then depend, is M1 within a restricted domain of definition. This distinction plays a decisive role in Section 15.3. Third, vertical transition (the C axis) is movement of the capability tier addressed. It must be noted that vertical transition has two modes of wholly different character. One is the mode of climbing under one's own power — the process of accumulating computing infrastructure, people and data so that capability closer to the frontier can be handled domestically. The other is the mode of standing still and falling. As Definition 2 states, the boundaries of the tiers move over time as a function of the lag width and of the requirement level of the use (Frontier Descent). Hence even where the absolute level of the capability held and operated domestically does not change, the tier to which that capability belongs moves from C2 to C1 as the frontier advances. The former requires accumulation; the latter requires nothing. This asymmetry is the content of Proposition 15 and the subject of Section 15.2. Fourth, cross-axis transition differs in logical type from the other two. Whereas horizontal and vertical transition are movements of position on the nine cells, cross-axis transition is a change in the allocation rule that surrounds a position. When a capability moves from a state of being allocated in the market to a state of being allocated by export control, alliance and nonproliferation, the cell position of the state in question may not change at all. This paper nonetheless treats it as a transition because a change in the allocation rule changes the feasible set of a state's portfolio. If what could be procured in the market can no longer be procured, cells that were previously reachable become unreachable. Cross-axis transition therefore rewrites the set of possibilities of the other two transitions. Unless this difference in type is made explicit, the analysis of Section 15.4 appears to confuse "a matter of policy" with "a matter of national types." Fifth — and this is the most important implication of Definition 10 — transition is not determined by a state's choices alone. Definition 10 states this expressly: it "is a function of exogenous conditions including the measures of other states, the advance of technology, and physical constraints (electricity, compute)." This sentence is a restraint upon the ordinary use of the term national strategy. Strategy ordinarily means a plan of action chosen by an agent. But cell position is a composite function of chosen action and unchosen exogenous conditions. The allocation framework announced in January 2025 and withdrawn in May of the same year (Section 5.3.3) was the result of the choices of none of the countries it covered. The rate of advance of the frontier is not a function of the efforts of the states that follow it. The grid interconnection queue is not a function of AI policy. What this section analyses is therefore not "what a state chooses" but "under which conditions the composition of a state's choices and exogenous conditions produces which con‐ 531 sequence." The importance of value-definition capability (Definition 12), the subject of Section 17, arises precisely out of this structure — when the range of what can be chosen is strongly constrained by exogenous conditions, the value of choice concentrates in the part that "decides what to take as the objective." Below, Section 15.2 states the asymmetry of transition as a general proposition; Sections 15.3 through 15.6 analyse four principal transition scenarios; Section 15.7 treats the conditions for a third pole; Section 15.8 treats the problem of the group of states fixed in the Utilization Model; and Section 15.9 gathers the results into a transition matrix. 15.2 The Asymmetry of Transition — Ascent Requires Accumulation, Descent Does Not Before the four scenarios, a general proposition that runs through all of them is set down. Proposition 15 (Asymmetry of Cell Transition) Cell transition (Definition 10) is asymmetric in cost and in time required as between ascent and descent. Upward transition (from the Utilization Model to the Transformation Model, from the Transformation Model to the Resource-Producing Model, from a lower tier to a higher tier) requires the accumulation of complementary assets (the four indicators of Proposition 4), national brain capital (Definition 11), computing infrastructure and electricity, and the time constant of that accumulation is on the order of years, longer than the time constant of policy decision. Downward transition requires no accumulation and occurs passively, through nothing more than the relative depreciation of existing accumulations (Proposition 8). A state therefore descends if it does nothing, and to ascend it must sustain a period in which the rate of its accumulation exceeds the rate of advance of the frontier. Falsification condition If, among states that have accomplished an upward transition, no accumulation of complementary assets, national brain capital and computing infrastructure preceding the transition is observed (that is, if ascent occurs without accumulation), the claim of asymmetry is rejected. It is likewise rejected if no decline in relative position is observed among states that do not accumulate. 15.2.1 The Four Kinds of Accumulation Ascent Requires, and Their Time Constants The accumulations that Proposition 15 names are of four kinds. For each, the order of magnitude of the time required for its formation is fixed so far as the evidence allows. It is noted in advance that what follows is not a statistical estimate of time constants but an estimate of orders of magnitude drawn from the physical and institutional formation periods of the objects of accumulation. 532 First, complementary assets (the four indicators of Proposition 4, Section 7). All four indicators are stocks and flows at once. (a) Exclusive data endowment is defined as "the share generated only from the operating processes of the transformer in question," so its rate of accumulation is rate-limited by the scale and duration of operation — data cannot be purchased; it builds up in proportion to the years of operation. (b) Physical-interface intensity is "the share inseparable from the operation of physical equipment, mechanisms and on-site work," and the manufacturing and maintenance equipment and the sites that underpin it require time for capital investment and for the formation of skills. (c) Institutional embeddedness is "the presence and number of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations and liability-assumption contracts," and obtaining certification and supervisory registration requires the time of institutional procedure — on the order of years in medical devices, automobiles and finance alike. (d) Linguistic-contextual specificity is "the number of language- and jurisdiction-specific standards," and the establishment and diffusion of standards likewise takes years. Of the four indicators, only (c) can be moved in the short run as a policy variable; the other three require the accumulation of operation. Second, national brain capital (Definition 11, Sections 10 and 17). The four components of Definition 11 — tacit knowledge of the field, judgment embedded in language, culture and aesthetic sense, the professional ethics and working practices that make trust in institutions possible, and the capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience — are all formed on the time scale of an individual working life. Training skilled technicians, building up the thickness of a professional stratum, and cultivating trust in institutions are matters of a decade or of a generation. As Proposition 18 states, what can be obtained by importing AI capability is capability and not national brain capital. Of the four kinds of accumulation, this is the one with the longest time constant and the one least susceptible to being shortened by purchase. Third, computing infrastructure. Here time constants that differ by stage are stacked upon one another. Procuring the semiconductors themselves is on the order of months to a year, but constructing the data centres to house them takes several years, and substation equipment and grid interconnection take longer still. Measurements of the United States grid interconnection queue show this stacking most clearly: in the LBNL compilation (data as of end-2024), generation and storage capacity awaiting interconnection reached approximately 2,300 GW, nearly twice the installed generating capacity of the United States (approximately 1,300 GW); the median time from application to commercial operation exceeded four years (double the under-two-years of projects built in 2000–2007); and of the capacity that applied between 2000 and 2019, 13% reached commercial operation while 77% was withdrawn. The expansion of computing infrastructure is thus rate-limited not by the availability of GPUs but by grid interconnection, an institutional and physical procedure. Fourth, electricity. Building generation and reinforcing the grid, including environmental impact assessment, land acquisition and construction, is on the order of five to ten years. The demand projection of Japan's Organization for Cross-regional Coordination of 533 Transmission Operators (OCCTO) for fiscal 2026 (published 21 January 2026) incorporates, for new and expanded data centres and semiconductor plants, an increase by fiscal 2035 of 7.62 million kW in peak demand and 56.8 billion kWh in electricity demand (6.71% of national electricity demand). This outlook addresses a horizon ten years ahead — that even the incorporation of demand is discussed on a ten-year horizon reflects that the response on the supply side requires at least as much time. The Seventh Strategic Energy Plan (Cabinet decision of February 2025) sets out indicative figures for the generation mix in fiscal 2040 for the same reason. 15.2.2 Comparison with the Time Constant of Policy Decision The core of Proposition 15 lies in the comparison that these time constants of accumulation are "longer than the time constant of policy decision." This comparison can be confirmed directly from the evidence this paper handles, and not merely as an abstract argument about bureaucracy. The series of United States measures governing the conditions of access to AI-related inputs — the rule of 7 October 2022, the amendment of 17 October 2023, the allocation framework announced on 13 January 2025, its withdrawal on 13 May of the same year, individual licences accompanied by a revenue share in August of that year, and the conditional reopening and the change in review policy between December of that year and January 2026 — revised the mode of allocation fundamentally on several occasions within three and a half years (dates and content are set out in detail in Section 5.3.3). By contrast, even the fastest of the four accumulations above (grid interconnection for computing infrastructure) has a median requirement of more than four years. The difference between the two time constants has the following practical consequence. A decision by a Transformation Model or Utilization Model state to invest in computing infrastructure is taken in a state of ignorance about the conditions of access to inputs that obtain at the moment the investment enters service. This is not the general observation that investment carries high uncertainty; it is a specification of the kind of uncertainty — its source lies not in market fluctuation but in the policy decisions of other states. The same asymmetry appears on the side of accumulation. The single-year budget cycle, the term of an administration, and the revision cycle of policy documents are all shorter than the time constant of the formation of national brain capital. The accumulation required for upward transition is therefore subject to judgments of budgetary allocation before its effects can be observed. This structure implies that accumulation-type policy is politically disadvantaged, but this paper does not treat that as a matter of the quality of any government — the difference in time constants is a structure inherent in institutions, and not the consequence of the choices of any particular government. 15.2.3 Descent Requires No Accumulation — The Same Structure as Proposition 8 Having fixed the time constants on the side of ascent, the side of descent is now examined. Downward transition requires no accumulation whatever. Proposition 15 states its 534 mechanism: it "occurs passively, through nothing more than the relative depreciation of existing accumulations (Proposition 8)." Proposition 8 (asymmetry of stockpiling, Section 13), referred to here, states that the relative value of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6) depreciates as an increasing function of the difference F(t) − E₀ between the capability index E₀ guaranteed domestically at time t₀ and the capability index of the frontier F(t) at time t. Proposition 15 and Proposition 8 are the same structure applied to different domains. Making this identity explicit is the purpose of this subsection. Set them side by side. The object of Proposition 8 is a stock, the AI capability a state has guaranteed. The object of Proposition 15 is a position, the centroid of a state's portfolio weights. But the mechanism governing them is the same — in both, value or assignment is determined not by absolute level but by relative distance from the frontier, and so long as the frontier advances, merely maintaining the absolute level leaves the relative distance to keep widening. The source of this identity is that Definition 2 defines the boundaries of the tiers by "capability distance from the frontier." Since tier assignment is defined by relative distance, maintaining an absolute level does not mean maintaining a tier. This identity can be summarized in the following formulation. The rate of change of a state's relative position is determined by the sign of the difference between the rate of its own accumulation and the rate of advance of the frontier. If the difference is positive, ascent; if zero, maintenance; if negative, descent. What must be noted here is that "doing nothing" does not mean that the difference is zero. If nothing is done, the rate of one's own accumulation is zero, and so long as the rate of advance of the frontier is positive the difference is negative and the position descends. The consequence of Proposition 15 — "a state descends if it does nothing" — is thus not a pessimistic forecast but a statement close to an identity about a quantity defined by relative distance. What Proposition 8 stated, that "in AI, security of supply is established not as a single act of stockpiling but only as continuous construction," holds for position in just the same way. Cell position too is not a state that is held but a state that is continuously constructed. That the rate of advance of the frontier is in fact positive is observed in several series. The amortized hardware cost and electricity cost of the final training run of frontier models have grown since 2016 at an annual factor of approximately 2.4 (90% confidence interval 2.0–3.1), and it is estimated that if the trend continues the largest training run exceeds one billion dollars by 2027 (Epoch AI). The performance of AI supercomputers grows at 2.5 times a year, and their power demand and cost at approximately twice a year (Pilz et al., 2025). The minimum inference price at which a given performance level is achieved has been falling at annual factors ranging from 9 to 900 depending on the task (Epoch AI), which means that the relative value of capability already attained is diluted at the same rate. That said, as the falsification condition of Proposition 8 makes explicit, if F(t) − E₀ remains at or below a stipulated threshold over a stipulated period — that is, if the advance of the frontier stalls — the claim of depreciation is rejected for that period. That the rate of advance is positive is an empirical premise, not an axiom. 535 15.2.4 Three Consequences of the Asymmetry Three consequences follow from the asymmetry of Proposition 15, and they are the premises of the remaining analysis in this section. All are stated as conditional claims. (1) Maintaining the status quo is not in the set of options. For a position defined by relative distance, so long as the rate of advance of the frontier is positive, a policy of "maintaining the status quo" is coextensive with a policy of "descending." The options of policy are therefore not the three of "ascend, maintain, or descend" but the two of "secure the rate of accumulation required for ascent, or do not." As Section 20 acknowledges, this paper does not give quantitatively the threshold rate of accumulation required for transition between each pair of cells. But even without knowing the value of the threshold, its existence and its sign follow from Proposition 15. (2) The decision to ascend precedes the observation of results. Since the time constant of accumulation is longer than the time constant of policy decision, accumulation-type policy is subject to evaluation and reallocation before its results can be observed. Under this structure, what is used as the indicator of results becomes decisive. That Proposition 4 stipulates that complementary asset endowment is measured by ex ante observable quantities (the four indicators) independent of the outcome of value capture, and that Hypothesis H2 stipulates that the four indicators are measured before an event of generational change in foundation models, are demands of methodological rigour and at the same time answers to this practical problem — the progress of accumulation can be measured as the quantity of the accumulation itself, before results appear. (3) Descent has low visibility. Whereas ascent is accompanied by visible construction, procurement and institutional reform, descent is accompanied by no event at all. The absolute level of capability operated domestically does not fall; external payments do not surge (as Proposition 5 states, an increase in external payments can arise from either the cost path or the rent path); and no discontinuity appears in the statistics. Descent becomes visible only at the moment when interruption, refusal or a change of conditions in external supply actually occurs and a switch to an alternative system is attempted. That is an event of AI outage (Definition 4, Section 13), and by then the descent is already complete. That this paper defined dependence "not by utilization rate and not by expenditure but by degradation at the moment of interruption" (Definition 4), and that it posed the divergence between exposure and dependence as Hypothesis H1, are measurement responses to this low visibility. 536 Figure 8. The dynamics of cell transition — four scenarios on the nine cells. [A] the branching of the Transformation Model (ascent from and fall out of M2×C2), [B] cross-axis vertical integration (shift of allocation logic), [C] moving upstream through capital (the attempt from M3×C1 to M1×C2), [D] downward transition through physical constraints. Ascent requires accumulation and is drawn as a solid, heavy line; descent requires no accumulation and occurs passively, and is drawn as a dashed line (Proposition 15). 15.3 Scenario [A] The Branching of the Transformation Model — Ascent and Fall At the centre of this section stands the branching of the states that occupy, or aim at, M2×C2 — the position of procuring capability at the frontier tier and adding value by transformation. Whereas Section 10 analysed the conditions for the viability of this cell statically, this subsection treats how those conditions move in time. 15.3.1 The Two Paths of the Branch There are two principal transition paths out of M2×C2. Path (i): ascent to a domain-specific sovereign foundation. This is the path of turning to supply, as products in themselves rather than keeping them inside applications, the ex‐ National Value Model (M) AI Capability Tiers (C) M1 Resource-Producing M2 Transformation M3 Utilization C3 Critical Tier C2 Frontier Tier C1 Commodity Tier [B] Cross-axis vertical integration economic to security logic (unrealized anticipatory category) M1×C2 Resource-Producing M2×C2 Transformation M3×C2 Utilization M1×C1 M2×C1 M3×C1 [A] Branching of transformation Fall (deepening dependence) [D] [D] [C] Moving upstream through capital [A] Branching of the transformation model — ascent from M2×C2 to M1×C2 and fall to M3×C1 [B] Cross-axis vertical integration — allocation logic moves to security (solid; Proposition 16) [C] Moving upstream through capital — attempted ascent to M1 on capital and cheap power (dotted) [D] Downward transition through physical constraints — limits of electricity and compute (dashed) Heavy solid = ascent (requires accumulation, in years) Dashed = descent (passive) Ascent requires accumulation; descent arises from the relative depreciation of accumulation alone (Proposition 15). Row C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category (Definition 2). 537 clusive data, physical interfaces, evaluation criteria and jurisdiction-specific requirement specifications accumulated in the course of transformation. As stated in Section 15.1, M1 in Definition 3 imposes no condition of generality. For a given industrial domain — process control in manufacturing, diagnostic support in medicine, credit assessment in finance, the processing of administrative procedures — a state that produces the foundation models, evaluation criteria, benchmarks and datasets of that domain, upon which transformers and users in other states then depend, is at M1×C2 within a restricted domain of definition. Where this path holds, the state in question obtains, in addition to the transformation margin (Definition 5), the value arising from the fact of production — the setting of conditions of access, the formation of standards, ecosystem externalities. Path (ii): the fall through deepening dependence. This is the path in which the substance of transformation is replaced by calls to an external foundation, the portion of the transformation margin reducible to general-purpose functionality is internalized by the producer (Proposition 4), and the residual activity converges on a thin layer atop the external foundation. The position that results is M3×C1 — utilization that merely feeds capability at the commodity tier, procured externally, into domestic processes — and this paper calls that state a digital tenant farmer, as a metaphor for a structure in which crops are obtained on another's foundation without holding the means of production. It is stated expressly that this term is a metaphor, and that a metaphor is not by itself an argument. The substance is not metaphorical but the mechanism identified by Proposition 4 — that the producer can internalize the portion of the value added of the application layer that is reducible to general-purpose functionality, through the path of standard inclusion in the next generation of the model at nearly zero marginal cost. The two paths leave from the same starting point. What determines which is taken are the four variables below. 15.3.2 Branch Variable (1) The Rate of Accumulation of National Brain Capital The first variable is the rate of accumulation of national brain capital (Definition 11). As Proposition 18 states, where M2 subsists at the C2 tier the defensibility of its transformation margin depends on the thickness of national brain capital. What matters here is that the branch variable is not thickness (a stock) but rate (a flow). On the formulation of Proposition 15, change in position is determined by the difference between the rate of accumulation and the rate of advance of the frontier; hence however thick the existing stock, if the rate of accumulation falls below the rate of depletion the position descends. The factors depleting national brain capital differ by each of the four components of Definition 11. (i) Tacit knowledge of the field is depleted by the retirement of those who hold it and by the contraction of the very sites through which skills are transmitted. Japan's working-age population (15–64) is projected to fall from 74.06 million in 2020 to 59.78 million in 2040, a decrease of approximately 14.28 million over twenty years (National Institute of Population and Social Security Research, 2023 projection, medium variant). This decrease means a decrease in the absolute number of those who hold tacit 538 knowledge. (ii) Judgment embedded in language, culture and aesthetic sense is maintained so long as professional practice in the language in question continues, but if the site of practice moves onto an external foundation and the records of judgment accumulate externally, the circuit that forms it thins. (iii) The professional ethics and working practices that make trust in institutions possible, and (iv) the capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience, both presuppose that the work of the domain in question continues to be performed domestically. There is a confound here that must be noted. A decline in the working-age population reduces, on the one hand, the holders of national brain capital; on the other hand it raises the marginal value of labour-saving technology and enlarges the compounding of utilization (M3) (Proposition 5). These two effects do not cancel — the former acts on the defensibility of transformation and the latter on the profitability of utilization. They act on different axes of the nine cells, and the inference that one compensates for the other does not hold. From the observation that the effect of utilization is large under population decline, the conclusion that the defensibility of transformation is preserved does not follow. 15.3.3 Branch Variable (2) The Movement of the Four Indicators of Complementary Assets The second variable is the movement of the four indicators of Proposition 4. The four indicators are not a static endowment; they increase and decrease over time. (a) Exclusive data endowment is defined as "the share that cannot be obtained from the public web and is generated only from the operating processes of the transformer in question." The numerator of this share increases so long as operation continues, but it may be depleted along two paths. One is where operation itself moves onto an external foundation and the rights of control and use over the data generated pass contractually to the outside. The other is where the object the data describes comes to be sufficiently well approximated from public information. The former is a matter of contract design; the latter is a function of the advance of model capability. (b) Physical-interface intensity is "the share of the application's revenue that is inseparable from the operation of physical equipment, mechanisms and on-site work." This indicator is rate-limited by the domestic share of manufacturing, maintenance and on-site work in the state in question. That new installations of industrial robots in 2025 are reported at 295,000 units in China and 34,000 units in the United States (AI Index 2026) shows that the geographical distribution of the holders of the physical interface is itself moving — physical-interface intensity is a function of industrial structure, not of AI policy. (c) Institutional embeddedness is "the presence and number of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations and liability-assumption contracts," and is the only one of the four indicators that can be moved directly as a policy variable. In medical devices, automobiles, finance and public administration alike, the institutions of certification and supervisory registration are designed by the state. This indicator is, however, double-edged 539 — a certification regime keeps the transformer's integration cost high for the producer and at the same time constitutes a cost of entry for domestic transformers themselves. Operating this variable therefore involves a trade-off between defence and the suppression of entry. (d) Linguistic-contextual specificity is "the number of language- and jurisdiction-specific standards that conformity of the application's output requires." Of the four indicators, this is the most easily depleted, because improvement in the multilingual capability of foundation models directly lowers barriers to entry founded on language. Hypothesis H2 makes an explicit prediction about the order of the predictive power of the four indicators — the order of the degree to which they keep integration cost high, namely "physical-interface intensity and exclusive data endowment > institutional embeddedness > linguistic-contextual specificity." Placing this predicted order on the axis of time yields the following conditional claim. If this order is correct, the defensive power of the four indicators is eroded from the bottom upward. Defence by language is lost first, defence by institution then thins, and what remains at the last are the physical interface and exclusive data. This order has direct implications for the priorities a Transformation Model state applies in choosing the objects of accumulation. It is stated expressly, however, that Hypothesis H2 is a matter for testing, and that the order has not been empirically confirmed. 15.3.4 Branch Variable (3) The Constraints of Electricity and Computing Infrastructure The third variable is the physical constraints treated in Section 13. Ascent along path (i) requires at least (i-a) operational capacity and (i-b) renewal capability of the three functions of Definition 6(i) — because domain-specific production requires the computing infrastructure and electricity to train or fine-tune, evaluate and deploy models domestically. The effect on the branch of the closing gap of open-weight models must be examined here. According to the Epoch AI compilation, since January 2026 the strongest open-weight models have followed the closed frontier at an average lag of approximately four months (broadly three to four months depending on the indicator; estimates as of 2024–25 put it at approximately one year, so the gap is trending downward). This fact is often cited as evidence that "anyone can use capability close to the frontier." Within this paper's framework, however, the effect of this fact as a branch variable is asymmetric. For a state that possesses renewal capability (Definition 6(i-b)), the narrowing of the lag width lowers the cost of the ascent path substantially. If the weights of the newest published generation can be fine-tuned, evaluated and deployed domestically, then capability some four months behind the frontier can be taken as a basis and specialized with the state's own domain data. The feasibility of path (i) rises considerably under this condition. For a state that does not possess renewal capability, by contrast, the narrowing of the lag width changes nothing. The logic that Proposition 13 stated in respect of Japan 54

generalizes here — already published open weights supply the lower bound of capability itself at no charge and irrevocably, but they do not supply the compute capacity and electricity to execute it, the renewal capability to follow new generations, or the conditions for processing sensitive data domestically. What is supplied at no charge is the lower bound of capability, not the conditions for executing, renewing and protecting capability. Hence the narrowing of the lag width widens the branch. The difference between states that possess operational capacity and renewal capability and those that do not appears not as a difference in access to the frontier but as a difference in the capacity to translate published capability into one's own conditions. This acts on the distribution over the nine cells in the direction of thinning the middle. This conditional claim is testable — it can be tested by whether the interaction of the use of published weights with domestic compute capacity explains the movement of transformation margins. 15.3.5 Branch Variable (4) Exogenous Change in the Conditions of Access The fourth variable is exogenous change in the conditions of access to inputs. As stated in Section 15.2.2, between October 2022 and January 2026 the conditions of access to advanced compute chips and advanced model weights were revised on several occasions, in the form of export control rules, their amendment, the announcement and withdrawal of a global allocation framework, individual licences accompanied by a revenue share, and conditional reopening with case-by-case review. None of these revisions resulted from the choices of the Transformation Model states affected. The effect of this variable bears directly on necessary condition (i) of Proposition 4, "security of procurement (a continuing assurance of access)." Proposition 4 imposes three necessary conditions on the viability of the Transformation Model, and if (i) is absent the Transformation Model is not viable however fully (ii) complementary asset endowment and (iii) access to the demand market are satisfied. Exogenous change in the conditions of access is therefore a severing variable, capable of forcing path (ii) irrespective of the values of the other three variables. This asymmetry is also the theoretical ground on which the falsification condition of Proposition 11 names the changes in the conditions of access of October 2022, October 2023, January 2025 and May 2025 as objects of event study — these dates are identified in advance as candidate exogenous shocks. Change in the conditions of access is not, however, unidirectional. The conditional reopening from December 2025 into January 2026 was a revision in the direction of expanding access. And even where a revision expands access, so long as it is conditioned on individual negotiation, revenue shares and case-by-case review, the predictability of access is not restored. For a Transformation Model state, what matters is not the level of access but the predictability of access over the time constant of investment (four to ten years); from this standpoint, a revision in the direction of relaxation lowers predictability just as one in the direction of tightening does. This point connects to the analysis of crossaxis transition in Section 15.4. 541 15.3.6 The Mechanism of the Path of Fall — Black-Boxing Joined to AI Outage What happens when the composition of the four variables leads to path (ii) is described here as a mechanism. The fall proceeds not as an accounting event of increased external payments but as a loss of capability inside organizations. The first stage of the mechanism is black-boxing. When the substance of the transformation process is replaced by calls to an external foundation, three losses arise. First, causal understanding of the interior of the process is lost from the organization — no actor remains within the organization who can explain why a given output was obtained. Second, accountability for quality can no longer be discharged independently — judgment of the validity of outputs comes to depend on the evaluation metrics the supplier provides. Third, changes in the supplier's specification directly move the quality of one's own outputs — generational change in models, changes in fine-tuning policy, revisions of safety measures move quality outside one's own control. These three losses directly erode component (iv) of Definition 11, the capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience. Black-boxing is therefore a form of depletion of national brain capital. Here the branch variable of Section 15.3.2 and the mechanism join — the path of fall carries a positive feedback that reinforces itself by lowering the rate of accumulation of national brain capital. The second stage of the mechanism is the joining with AI outage (Definition 4). A blackboxed process is in principle difficult to switch to an alternative system, because the operational readiness of Definition 6(iii) — "the personnel and procedures able to execute a switch to an alternative system" — presupposes causal understanding of the interior of the process. A black-boxed state therefore occupies a distinctive position in the relation between exposure and dependence that Definition 4 distinguishes. Exposure can be measured, but dependence cannot. The amount of external payments appears in the balance-of-payments statistics, but what degrades, and by how much, at the moment of interruption is not known until a switch is attempted. That Hypothesis H1 states that "dependence diverges systematically from exposure, and the magnitude of that divergence is explained by the degree of preparedness of alternative procedures," and that its testing includes measurements from simulated cut-off exercises, is a response to this unmeasurability. The third stage of the mechanism is fixation into the stratification of access. As Proposition 12 (Section 17) states, rationing of C2 capability by price, capacity and permission forms new axes of inequality both between states and within them. A state that has followed the path of fall is fixed on the receiving side of that rationing. What matters here is that Proposition 12 names four amplifying factors of disparity — education, language, electricity and regulation. These are formulated as domestic axes of disparity, but they operate isomorphically between states as well. A state lacking electricity cannot hold operational capacity; a state whose language is in a minority loses the defence of linguisticcontextual specificity early; a state whose regulatory type differs from that of the major 542 jurisdictions loses access to the demand market for what it transforms. Stratification within states and stratification between states are driven simultaneously by the same four factors. 15.3.7 Formulation of the Branching Point and the Structure of Feedback Arranging the four variables and the mechanism, the branching point can be formulated as follows. If the composition of the four variables keeps the state's own relative rate positive against the rate of advance of the frontier, path (i) holds. If it is negative, path (ii) follows. This is nothing other than the general proposition of Proposition 15 specialized to the M2×C2 cell. The four variables are not, however, independent. The structure of their interaction must be made explicit. As positive feedback there is the following circuit: depth of utilization generates exclusive data (the link between the compounding of Proposition 5 and (a) of Proposition 4); exclusive data and the physical interface thicken the externalized traces of national brain capital (Proposition 18); thick national brain capital protects the transformation margin; and the protected margin supplies the funds for investment in computing infrastructure. As negative feedback there is the self-reinforcement of the path of fall described in Section 15.3.6 — black-boxing erodes the capacity for audit and verification, the eroded capacity makes switching impossible, and the impossibility of switching rationalizes further external dependence. That feedback of both signs exists means that the branch is critical. That is, in states whose composition of the four variables lies near some threshold, a small change in conditions may determine the choice of path. As Section 20 acknowledges, this paper does not give this threshold quantitatively. But the existence of a threshold, and path dependence in its neighbourhood, follow from the structure set out above. The conclusions of this subsection are stated explicitly in conditional form. First, if the rate of accumulation of national brain capital exceeds the rate of depletion, and if the top two of the four indicators of complementary assets (physical-interface intensity and exclusive data endowment) are maintained, and if operational capacity and renewal capability are secured, and if the predictability of access is preserved over the time constant of investment, path (i) may hold. Second, if any of these four conditions is absent, path (ii) follows — though the time from the absence of the four conditions to path (ii) depends on the rate of advance of the frontier and is not estimated in this paper. Third, the conditions of access (the fourth variable) are logically asymmetric with the other three conditions, and where they are absent this cannot be substituted for by satisfying the other three (necessary condition (i) of Proposition 4). Fourth, the cost of the return path once path (ii) has proceeded is greater than the cost of the outward path — because rebuilding the capacity for audit and verification lost through black-boxing requires the time constant of the formation of national brain capital (Section 15.2.1). This fourth consequence is this paper's principal claim about the irreversibility of transition, and it is reflected in Table 13 in Section 15.9. 543 15.4 Scenario [B] Vertical Integration Across the Axes — From Market Allocation to Allocation Within Alliances The second scenario is not movement of position on the nine cells but movement of the allocation rule that surrounds a position. As stated in Section 15.1, cross-axis transition differs in logical type from the other two transitions and rewrites the feasible set of a state's portfolio itself. Proposition 16 (Pressure Toward Cross-Axis Transition) As the level of capability belonging to a given capability tier rises, the logic governing the allocation of that capability comes under pressure to shift irreversibly from the logic of economics (market, trade, competition policy) to the logic of national security (export control, alliance, nonproliferation). This shift operates independently of the preferences of private actors, and appears on the producing side as intervention by the state (export control, investment screening, procurement priority) and on the demand side as the confinement of procurement within alliances (friend-shoring). For a capability in which cross-axis transition has occurred, availability to non-allied states becomes a function of the political position of the state in question and ceases to be a function of price and quality. Falsification condition If, notwithstanding a rise in the level of capability, the international allocation of that capability continues to be determined solely by price and quality, and no discrimination by political position is observed, this proposition is rejected. If transition in the reverse direction (a return from the logic of national security to the logic of economics) is observed repeatedly, the claim of irreversibility is rejected. 15.4.1 The Dissolution of the Boundary — Three Stages on the Producing Side The process that Proposition 16 describes as "appearing on the producing side as intervention by the state" is not a single event but a process in which the boundary between the state and private actors dissolves by stages. From the existing record, at least the following three stages can be distinguished. The first stage is the regulation of transactions. The state stands outside the transactions of private actors and requires a licence for particular transactions. This is the classical form of export control, and the boundary between regulator and regulated is clear. The second stage is the state's participation in the terms of the transaction. Where the state takes a portion of the economic proceeds of a transaction as the consideration for a licence, the state is no longer outside the transaction. The third stage is the transposition of allocation itself into negotiation between states. Where the quantities allocated by country and by actor are determined by agreement between states, the allocation of that capability is decided outside the market. At this stage, private actors are not the deciders of allocation but the executors of an allocation already decided. 544 This paper presents these three stages not as a normative evaluation but as a description of where the actors and rules that determine allocation are located. At the first stage, price and quality determine allocation and regulation supplies only boundary conditions. At the third stage, political agreement determines allocation and price and quality become adjustment variables inside that agreement. The claim of Proposition 16 is that a rise in the level of capability generates pressure that moves these three stages in one direction. 15.4.2 Rereading the Course of Export Controls as Cross-Axis Transition Section 5.3.3 described, with dates, the policy series of United States export controls from 2022 to 2026, as an illustration that the C1/C2 boundary is a dynamic line continuously constructed by policy. The same series is often read as "policy drift" — a process in which direction reverses with each change of administration and which lacks a consistent design. This subsection rereads that series as an instance of cross-axis transition. The claim of the rereading is that the assessment that the series is inconsistent holds only when attention is directed to the mode of allocation (general rule or individual negotiation), and does not hold when attention is directed to the logic that determines allocation. Each stage is read below from the standpoint of allocation logic. Dates and content are as set out in detail in Section 5.3.3; only the essential points are noted here, to avoid duplication. The rule of 7 October 2022. This rule was written in the vocabulary of export control, an economic regulation, but its scope was delimited not by use (military diversion) but by levels of capability exceeding stipulated performance thresholds. That is, while taking the form of the first stage (regulation of transactions), the variable delimiting the object of regulation was already the level of capability of the other state itself. What is read here is the observable fact of how the scope was delimited; no judgment is made about the motive of the measure. From the standpoint of allocation logic, at this point a variable other than price and quality — the level of capability attained by the other state — had entered into the determinants of allocation. The amendment of 17 October 2023. A technical amendment of performance thresholds looks, in the sense of a chase between regulation and product design, to be internal to the logic of economics. The same amendment, however, expanded the scope of regulation to arms-embargoed countries and others besides China, and addressed circumvention via third countries. This means that the geography of alliance and non-alliance was written into the allocation rule. Thresholds are a technical variable, but the set of countries covered is a political variable. The allocation framework announced on 13 January 2025. The framework dividing the countries of the world into three tiers — a group of allied states without limit, the great majority of countries subject to quantitative ceilings, and arms-embargoed countries and others subject to a presumption of denial — and bringing within the licensing requirement the transfer not only of advanced chips but of the weights of advanced models, is the point at which the shift of allocation logic was documented most explicitly. A structure 545 in which the quantity of capability a country can obtain is determined neither by its technical need nor by its ability to pay but by its assignment to a tier is nothing other than the codification, as a rule, of the consequence Proposition 16 states: "availability to non-allied states becomes a function of the political position of the state in question and ceases to be a function of price and quality." The withdrawal of 13 May 2025. This event is the strongest candidate counter-example to the claim of irreversibility in Proposition 16. Withdrawal two days before entry into force looks at first sight like a return from the logic of national security to the logic of economics — that is, a cross-axis transition in the reverse direction. Viewed from the standpoint of allocation logic, however, three things are observed. First, what the withdrawal erased was the general rule of the three tiers, while the China-directed controls based on the 2022 and 2023 rules remained in force as they were. Second, with no comprehensive replacement rule promulgated, what became the framework in fact was a set of individual transaction-type agreements. Third, the mode of determining allocation moved from "allocation by rule" to "allocation by individual negotiation." The question to ask here is whether individual negotiation is closer to the logic of economics than a general rule. A general rule at least rests on criteria published in advance, and the countries covered can read the criteria and know their own position. Individual negotiation has no criteria, and allocation becomes a function of the political relations of the negotiating parties. The withdrawal therefore did not reduce the political character of allocation; it moved the mode of that political character from rule to negotiation. Transaction-type licences from August 2025. The agreement under which export licences were obtained in exchange for remitting a fixed share of the revenue from sales to China to the government (August 2025, confirmed by reporting and by the President's own remarks), and the policy of approving higher-performance products on the same kind of terms (December 2025), are instances of the second stage of Section 15.4.1 — the state's participation in the terms of the transaction. The direct linking of an export licence to a payment into the treasury was questioned by legal scholars for its consistency with the constitutional prohibition on export taxes. This paper makes no legal evaluation, but from the standpoint of allocation logic the essential point is that the state moved from being a regulator outside the transaction to being a party to it. The two-way character in 2026. Even after case-by-case review of China-directed licences shifted in January 2026 from a presumption of denial to conditional case-by-case review, deliveries have remained limited by review on the importing side — as of 19 August 2026 it is reported that a quantity corresponding to approximately 13% of the quota had been delivered to two firms, the remainder awaiting approval on the importing side (Section 5.3.3). Cross-axis transition has thus arrived at a structure in which measures on the supply side are matched by symmetrical measures on the demand side, rather than being a unilateral measure by the supply side. Where control over what may be sold confronts control over what may be bought, the allocation of that capability is the product of two political decisions. 546 The observation drawn from this rereading is as follows. The series from 2022 to 2026 is not consistent in the mode of allocation, but in the degree to which variables other than price and quality determine allocation it rose monotonically. To read the inconsistency of mode as "drift" is to miss the monotonicity of allocation logic. This paper advances Proposition 16 because the latter monotonicity is observable and, moreover, falsifiable. 15.4.3 The Claim of Irreversibility and Its Testability The danger that the rereading of the previous subsection hollows out the falsification condition of Proposition 16 must now be faced directly. The falsification condition of Proposition 16 states that "if transition in the reverse direction (a return from the logic of national security to the logic of economics) is observed repeatedly, the claim of irreversibility is rejected." Yet Section 15.4.2 interpreted the leading candidate for a reverse transition, the withdrawal of May 2025, as "a change of mode and not a return of logic." If such an interpretation is made after the fact, falsification can be evaded by redescribing every relaxation event as "a change of mode." That would impair the standing of the proposition as one carrying a falsification condition. The criterion for judging a reverse transition must therefore be specified in advance. This paper proposes the following criterion. A reverse cross-axis transition is judged to have occurred when, in the international allocation of the capability in question, the quantity available becomes statistically independent of the political position of the procuring state. As an operationalization: with indicators of the procuring state's political alignment with the United States and with China (concordance of votes in the United Nations General Assembly, the presence of security treaties, the state of alignment in export controls) as explanatory variables and the quantity available or the quantity actually procured as the dependent variable, and controlling for ability to pay and technical demand, the condition is that the coefficient on political alignment ceases to be significantly non-zero. Under this criterion, whether the rule is withdrawn or allocation moves to individual negotiation, the judgment is made on the record of allocation. Conversely, even if the rules are strengthened, if the record of allocation is unrelated to political alignment the claim of irreversibility is not supported. Making this criterion explicit serves two purposes. First, it keeps Proposition 16 a testable proposition. Second, it warrants that the rereading of Section 15.4.2 is not an after-the-fact reinterpretation — the claim of the rereading is that "the record of allocation continued to depend on political position," and that claim can be tested by the criterion above. 15.4.4 Cross-Axis Transition on the Demand Side — Confining Procurement Within Alliances Proposition 16 states that cross-axis transition "appears on the demand side as the confinement of procurement within alliances (friend-shoring)." Whereas measures on the supply side appear as rules of high visibility, measures on the demand side take more dis‐ 547 persed forms: procurement policies, investment conditions, siting requirements. From the existing record, at least the following three types can be distinguished. First, the type that designates the objects of procurement as statutorily critical materials. Japan's Economic Security Promotion Act (enacted May 2022) makes securing the stable supply of critical materials one of four pillars, and by cabinet order in December 2022 designated an initial eleven items as specified critical materials. These eleven include semiconductors (semiconductor elements and integrated circuits) and cloud programs. The designations expanded, by way of the addition of advanced electronic components in February 2024, to a reported sixteen items as of December 2025. The designation of cloud programs is an institutional judgment that treats the supply of a service — computing infrastructure — within the framework of "materials," and is an explicit instance of cross-axis transition seen from the demand side. Under the framework of the same Act, subsidies for the development of domestic AI computing infrastructure were decided in 2024 (up to a total on the order of 72.5 billion yen across several operators, together with the separate certification of a large-scale plan), and through the certification of supply-securing plans the state became a party to private investment in computing infrastructure. Second, the type that attaches geographical conditions to the allocation of public funds. The EU's AI Factories (AI-optimized sites connected to the existing EuroHPC supercomputer network; seven selected in December 2024, six in March 2025 and six in October 2025, nineteen in all) and the AI Gigafactories initiative of roughly four times that scale (20 billion euros allocated under the InvestAI framework announced in February 2025; the June 2025 call for expressions of interest received 77 proposals covering 60 sites in 16 member states, with the formal tender due in the summer of 2026 and construction of the first facility planned for 2027, no selection having been made as of August 2026) both make construction within the bloc a condition of funding. That geography enters the criteria for the allocation of funds means that the siting of computing infrastructure is made a function of political boundaries rather than of market optimization. Third, the type in which the provision of capability is constituted as part of a bilateral political agreement. The United States–UAE AI cooperation framework concluded during President Trump's Gulf tour of May 2025, together with the large-scale computing infrastructure construction plan announced at the same time (a first phase of 200 MW, scheduled for completion in the third quarter of 2026); and the establishment of a state-owned AI company in Saudi Arabia (royal decree of 12 May 2025, under the sovereign wealth fund) with a strategic partnership with a major semiconductor firm (18,000 advanced GPUs and 500 MW in the first phase), are all instances in which access to capability was constituted as the content of a bilateral relationship. That, when a major cloud company invested 1.5 billion dollars in a UAE AI company in April 2024, the arrangement was reported to have been accompanied by conditions of alignment with the United States, shows the same structure. 548 What the three types have in common is that variables other than price and quality are institutionally built into the decision to procure. In the first type a statutory designation, in the second the conditions of funding, in the third a bilateral agreement each delimit the set of procurement sources in advance. The demand-side claim of Proposition 16 is supported by the existence of these three types. 15.4.5 Implications — A World in Which Factor Conditions Are Allocated Politically The implications of this subsection for a capability in which cross-axis transition has occurred are set out in three points. First, the market for inputs ceases to be a market. Porter (1990) emphasized, in respect of the factor conditions that govern a state's competitive advantage, that they are "created rather than given as natural resources are," and theorized the upgrading of factors as an endogenous process of the state. Cross-axis transition adds one more variable to that scheme — factors are not only created but allocated politically from outside. For Transformation Model and Utilization Model states, the availability of the factor that is AI capability is a function of their own creative efforts and at the same time a function of the political decisions of other states. This structure is the manifestation, in the factor market, of the chokepoint effect that Farrell & Newman (2019) formulated — the structure in which the state with jurisdiction over a hub obtains coercive power by cutting off access to the hub. Second, diversification of procurement means political diversification. Lowering supplier concentration in procurement is one means of reducing AI outage risk, as Proposition 7 states. For a capability in which cross-axis transition has occurred, however, dispersion of suppliers does not automatically mean dispersion of risk — where several suppliers fall under the same political jurisdiction, a political decision acts on all of them at once. Risk dispersion under cross-axis transition must therefore be measured not by the number of suppliers but by the number of jurisdictions. This standpoint becomes a basic condition in designing the alliance-based guarantees of Definition 6(ii), and connects to the analysis of the third pole in Section 15.7. Third, cross-axis transition induces attempts at horizontal transition. As Farrell & Newman themselves noted, the exercise of network-based coercion carries an "overuse dilemma," inducing the target state to build alternative networks — decoupling, investment in domestic production. The existing record shows that this inducement is in fact occurring. The construction of a self-sufficient semiconductor sphere in China, and the "sovereign AI" initiatives of various states (the United Kingdom's policy of expanding public AI compute capacity and the designation of AI growth zones; large investment in the only frontier-class laboratory in Europe, in France; India's procurement subsidies and support for sovereign models centred on multilingual and application-specific work; South Korea's national AI computing centre initiative), are all observed as a covariation in which upstream- directed investment increased over the same period in which cross-axis transition advanced. This paper makes no judgment about the motives with which these states de‐ 549 cided upon such investment, but the timing of investment and the composition of its destinations are consistent with the hypothesis that cross-axis transition strengthens the inducement to move upstream. Cross-axis transition (Scenario [B]) thus strengthens the inducements both to moving upstream through capital (Scenario [C]) and to the ascent of the Transformation Model (Scenario [A], path (i)). This relation of inducement binds the four scenarios into a single set of dynamics that are not mutually independent. 15.4.6 Consistency with the Paradox of Leverage Exercise — Two Sides of the Same Phenomenon Section 11.6 read the same policy series that this subsection has read as an instance of cross-axis transition — the course of export controls from 2022 to 2026 — as an instance of Proposition 23 (the paradox of leverage exercise). Since two readings of the same series of facts stand side by side, the relation between them must be made explicit, or both propositions appear to be after-the-fact redescriptions. Section 11.6.4 stated this consistency from the side of theory. This subsection restates it in the vocabulary of the dynamics of Section 15. The conclusion is placed first. The two readings are not in contradiction. They speak of different variables and are two sides of the same phenomenon. What Proposition 16 (cross-axis transition) states is a change in who decides allocation, and on what basis: it is a description of where allocation logic resides. What Proposition 23 (the paradox of exercise) states is a change in the magnitude of the power to decide: it is a description of the value of an asset. The former claims that "the series is not consistent in the mode of allocation, but in the degree to which variables other than price and quality determine allocation it rose monotonically" (Section 15.4.2); the latter claims that "each exercise induced a search for alternatives, and indispensability depreciated." These two claims hold simultaneously of the same series — because the movement of the deciding actor into politics, and the thinning of the degree to which that political decision actually constrains the other party's capability, can be observed separately. This point becomes clearest by reading the course of export controls twice over. The same measure on the same date carries different meaning under the two readings. The rule of 7 October 2022. As cross-axis transition, it is the point at which the object of regulation moved from the prevention of military diversion to the level of capability of the other state itself, the first stage at which a variable other than price and quality entered into the determinants of allocation (Section 15.4.2). As the paradox of exercise, it is the point at which retained indispensability was exercised for the first time, and the starting point of depreciation. The first response induced was circumvention by design, with a time constant of approximately one year (Section 11.6.3). The amendment of 17 October 2023. As cross-axis transition, it is the point at which a political variable — the set of countries covered — was written into the allocation rule. As the paradox of exercise, it is a threshold revision responding to circumvention by design, the opening of the second round of the chase. The allocation framework announced on 13 January 2025. 55

As cross-axis transition, it is the point at which the shift of allocation logic was documented most explicitly, in that the quantity of capability a country could obtain was determined by its assignment to a tier. As the paradox of exercise, it is a measure extending the object inducing a search for alternatives from the targeted state to the great majority of the world's countries, and thus an extension of the scope of depreciation. The withdrawal of 13 May 2025. As cross-axis transition, it is, as Section 15.4.2 argued, an event that did not reduce the political character of allocation but moved its mode from rule to negotiation. As the paradox of exercise, it is a suspension of exercise and not a recovery from depreciation — as Section 11.6.1 stated, suspension halts depreciation but does not undo searches already induced. The state of affairs as of August 2026. As cross-axis transition, it is the stage at which control on the supply side and control on the demand side confront one another and allocation becomes the product of two political decisions (the "two-way character" of Section 15.4.2). As the paradox of exercise, it is the stage at which induced searches have been institutionalized and now condition the efficacy of exercise itself. The single fact that, under a structure in which the demand-side authorities require a showing of why domestic substitutes cannot be used, only part of the quota is delivered even when the supply side reopens is described under one reading as the completion of the politicization of allocation logic and under the other as the point reached by the depreciation of indispensability. The two not only hold independently; they are also coupled to one another. The mechanism of coupling runs in two directions. The first direction is that cross-axis transition raises the frequency of exercise. The closing clause of Proposition 23 states that "where the requirements of national security exceed economic inducements, restraint does not operate." In a domain where cross-axis transition is complete, decisions of allocation are made not by economic cost and benefit but by the requirements of national security, so the condition in that proviso becomes not the exception but the normal case. The process Proposition 16 describes therefore systematically nullifies the inducements to restraint that Proposition 23 would otherwise give the holding state. The second direction is that depreciation lowers the efficacy of cross-axis transition. The more indispensability depreciates, the smaller the degree to which allocation by the logic of national security actually constrains the other party's capability. Allocation remains politicized, but the technical advantage that sustains politicization thins. This second direction gives an important caution regarding the criterion for a reverse transition specified in Section 15.4.3 — whether the quantity available has become statistically independent of the procuring state's political position. Where the coefficient on political alignment shrinks as a result of advancing depreciation, that is not a reversal of cross-axis transition but the operation of the paradox of exercise. Because the two yield the same observation under the criterion, distinguishing them requires also observing whether the shrinkage of the coefficient is accompanied by an increase in investment in the search for alternatives. If it is, the case is depreciation; if it is not, it is a return of allocation logic. Making this auxiliary criterion explicit is necessary to keep the falsification condition of Proposition 16 from being hollowed out. 551 A mechanism of separation between cost and decision intervenes in the coupling. Those who bear the cost of depreciation directly are the firms that hold the choke points — they lose customers, prompt the development of substitutes, and shrink long-term markets. The actor that decides upon exercise is the state. Where the bearer of the cost and the subject of the decision are separate, the frequency of exercise is higher than where cost and decision reside in the same actor. This mechanism corresponds to the three stages of Section 15.4.1 — the separation is greatest at the first stage (regulation of transactions); at the second stage (the state's participation in the terms of the transaction) it is partially narrowed by the state taking a portion of the economic proceeds; and at the third stage (the transposition of allocation into negotiation between states) the meaning of separation itself changes. The dissolution of the boundary is thus also a variable that changes the speed at which the paradox of exercise operates. Moreover, where the firms holding the choke points are subject to the jurisdiction of a third country, the bearer of the cost and the subject of the decision differ even in jurisdiction (Section 11.2.3) — the position that Section 14.7 described as being "caught between" in respect of South Korea corresponds to this structure. Finally, what this consistency hands to Section 16 is stated. The durability of S1 (Fragmentation) depends on the rate of depreciation of leverage. If depreciation is fast, the control measures maintaining fragmentation gradually lose efficacy and pressure toward S2 (Diffusion) rises. If depreciation is slow, fragmentation becomes self-sustaining. The movement of chokepoint concentration and the scale of investment in the search for alternatives therefore function as leading indicators of the scenarios (Definition 14, Section 16). Section 16.5.2 takes up this connection and adds leverage-related indicators to the set. 15.4.7 Proposition 35 — The Hysteresis of Securitization and the Asymmetry of the Return Path Section 15.4.3 specified in advance a criterion for judging that a reverse cross-axis transition has occurred. Specifying the criterion was necessary to keep Proposition 16 testable, but a problem remains untreated by it: what becomes of the control framework that had been applied to a capability when that capability descends a tier. Proposition 16 states that a rise in the level of capability generates pressure moving allocation logic from economics to national security. To the corresponding contrapositive question — if the level of capability descends, does allocation logic return to economics — Proposition 16 gives no answer. This subsection answers that question, and formulates as a proposition that the answer is no. The term used in the name of the proposition, "securitization," is used here in the security-studies sense — the movement of an issue into the logic of national security — and not in the financial sense of turning assets into securities. 552 Proposition 35 (Hysteresis of Securitization) After a capability has been placed under the logic of national security, the control framework applied to it is not relaxed at the rate corresponding to the descent of the capability, even where that capability descends a tier. Because a control framework is accompanied by organizations, procedures and interests that have been established, its removal requires political cost at least equal to that of its establishment. Cross-axis transition (Proposition 16) is therefore an asymmetric process whose outward and return paths differ in speed, and a descent of capability is not automatically accompanied by a relaxation of control. This asymmetry produces a state in which the form of control remains after its object has lost its substance. Falsification condition If, in cases where a capability has descended a tier, control frameworks are systematically observed to be relaxed at a rate comparable to the descent, the claim of hysteresis is rejected. It is likewise rejected if cases in which relaxation of control precedes the descent of capability are observed repeatedly. The mechanism of the asymmetry. The mechanism Proposition 35 specifies lies in the point that a control framework is not composed of the text of rules alone. When control is applied to a capability, at least three things come into being at the same time. First, organizations — implementing bodies are established to review licences, identify objects and detect violations. Second, procedures — the forms of application, review and reporting are settled, and internal systems for compliance are built on the side of the actors covered. Third, interests — actors that have framed their business plans, procurement structures and siting on the premise that the control exists arise both inside and outside the perimeter of control. All three impose cost on the side of removal. As to organizations, the reduction or abolition of an implementing body itself requires a decision, and a decision requires that grounds be presented. The ground "control is no longer needed" is harder to present than the ground "control is needed" — because the former involves proving an absence. As to procedures, the systems built for compliance are sunk on the receiving side. The mechanism that Section 11.3.2 gave as the ground of the durability of desirability — that the investment made for compliance is sunk on the receiving side, so that the more it is applied the higher switching costs become — operates not only on the side of desirability but on the side of control as well. Internal systems once built are not dismantled immediately upon relaxation. As to interests, the consequences of relaxation are asymmetric. If, after relaxation, the capability that had been controlled gives rise to a problem, those who decided upon relaxation are held to account. The cost of not relaxing is diffuse; the cost of having relaxed is concentrated. This asymmetry in the structure of consequences systematically delays decisions to relax. The political costs of establishment and of removal are therefore not equal. Establishment can be justified on the ground of external events; removal must be grounded 553 on the absence of external events. When Proposition 35 states that "its removal requires political cost at least equal to that of its establishment," it refers to this asymmetry. The difference in speed between the outward and return paths. It follows that crossaxis transition differs in speed on the outward and return paths. The outward path — from the logic of economics to the logic of national security — occurs, prompted by a rise in the level of capability or by an external event, at the time constant of policy decision (months to years). The series from 2022 onward reread in Section 15.4.2 proceeded at that speed. The return path — from the logic of national security to the logic of economics — does not occur at the same speed even where capability descends a tier. This is because the descent of capability is a physical and technical process, whereas the relaxation of control is a political decision. The two have separate time constants, and there exists no mechanism by which the former drives the latter. The persistence of form that has lost substance. The state described in the closing clause of Proposition 35 — a state in which the form of control remains after its object has lost its substance — takes on concrete content when joined with other propositions of this paper. Proposition 2 (Section 5) states that at C1, measures lose efficacy through circumvention even where they are applied. By the Frontier Descent stated in Definition 2, a capability that was at C2 at one point descends over time to C1. Control established at the C2 stage therefore loses efficacy at the point at which its object descends to C1, but by Proposition 35 the loss of efficacy is not accompanied by removal of the framework. What results is a state in which control that has lost efficacy persists while generating costs of compliance. Two records in the light of the evidence base. This paper's evidence base contains two records bearing on this structure. In neither case does this paper evaluate the propriety of the measures — what is recorded is only the structural fact that the persistence of a framework and change in its substance can come apart. First, a record of a framework persisting beyond a change in the definition of its object. As Section 9 treated, the Cold War-era Coordinating Committee for Multilateral Export Controls (COCOM), after the international premises that sustained the definition of its object had changed, did not disappear as a framework but was reorganized in 1996 into the Wassenaar Arrangement, which is non-directed and does not target a particular country. It is a record of a control framework persisting in altered form after losing its original definition of object. This paper makes no evaluation of the propriety of that reorganization, nor of the content of the successor framework. Second, a record in which the substantive suspension of measures and the persistence of the legal framework came apart. As Section 11.2.4 recorded, several notices dated 9 October 2025 were suspended in November of that year until 10 November 2026, while the legal framework itself persisted (Pillsbury, 2025). This is not a case of relaxation following a descent of capability, but it is isomorphic with the structure Proposition 35 describes in that it shows the substance and the form of a measure can 554 move separately. The design by which Section 16.5.2 separates indicator 7 (efficacy) from indicator 12 (scope) was precisely to make this separation observable. The evidence base also contains a record in the opposite direction. The withdrawal of 13 May 2025 treated in Section 15.4.2 is a case in which an announced framework was withdrawn before entry into force, a record of form disappearing in advance of substance. Proposition 35 does not claim that control frameworks are never relaxed. What it claims is a difference in speed, and that a descent of capability is not automatically accompanied by relaxation. Relaxation may occur through a political process distinct from the descent of capability — the case of May 2025 was relaxation by precisely such a distinct process. Three consequences. Proposition 35 has three implications elsewhere in this paper. First, cell position cannot be inferred from the observation of control measures. The fact that control applies to a capability is not evidence that the capability is at C2 — because by hysteresis, control may remain on a capability that has descended to C1. It is for this reason that Section 16.5.2 states, in respect of indicator 7, that "what is to be observed is not the number of measures but where on capability distance the objects of the measures lie." Proposition 35 supplies the theoretical ground for that observational rule. Second, compliance costs continue to be incurred after substance is lost. The compliance costs treated in Section 11.4 arise independently of the efficacy of control. Under control that has lost efficacy, the costs of application, review, reporting and internal control are unchanged. Those who bear this cost are the actors that procure the capability in question and perform transformation — that is, the firms of states in the position of the Transformation Model (M2). Hysteresis therefore imposes a cost specific to the position of the Transformation Model. This cost is added to the compression of the transformation margin that Proposition 4 describes. Part of the cost of sovereignty treated in Section 19 arises here. Third, the criterion of Section 15.4.3 is robust to hysteresis. Section 15.4.3 provided that a reverse cross-axis transition is judged by the record of allocation and not by the presence or absence of rules. Since what Proposition 35 describes is the persistence of form, a criterion that looks to form is systematically biased by hysteresis — so long as the form remains, a reverse transition continues to be judged not to have occurred. A criterion that looks to the record is not subject to that bias. The design of the criterion in Section 15.4.3 therefore already contained a response to hysteresis, before Proposition 35 was introduced explicitly. Put the other way, Proposition 35 adds one further reason for adopting the criterion of Section 15.4.3. The design of a test. The falsification condition of Proposition 35 requires a comparison of the speed of the descent of capability with the speed of the relaxation of control. Two time series are needed to make that comparison possible. The first is a series of where, on the capability distance of Definition 2, the level of capability subject to control lies. As an 555 operationalization, the gap between the level of capability specified by the threshold of a measure and the open-weight frontier at that time is tracked — when the gap narrows and the threshold eventually falls below the level of published capability, the object has substantively descended to C1. The second is a series of the amendment and repeal of the measure in question. Setting the two against one another, the lag from the descent of the object to relaxation is measured. If this lag is systematically close to zero, Proposition 35 is rejected. This paper has not carried out this measurement and does no more than set out the design of the test — this limitation is included in the non-estimation of the time constants of transition that Section 20 acknowledges as a limitation of this paper. Finally, what this subsection does not do is stated expressly. This paper does not evaluate, for any control measure of any jurisdiction, its propriety, its adequacy or the propriety of its continuation. What Proposition 35 states is the general structure that, because a control framework is accompanied by organizations, procedures and interests, its removal does not proceed at the same speed as its establishment. This structure holds in the same form for any actor that establishes control. Neither evaluating a particular measure as excessive nor evaluating it as insufficient is a purpose of this paper. 15.5 Scenario [C] Moving Upstream Through Capital — The Ladder and the Drilling Right The third scenario is the path by which a Utilization Model state possessing funds and inexpensive electricity attempts to ascend to the Resource-Producing Model by attracting data centres, recruiting talent and taking equity stakes. Whereas Section 14.9 described the present position of the Gulf oil-producing states, this subsection formulates the conditions of success and failure of that path as a branching point in relation to Proposition 6b (extractive distortion in receiving states, Section 8). 15.5.1 The Content of the Path and Its Structural Distinctiveness The content of this path can be specified concretely from the existing record: the attraction of large-scale computing infrastructure (the large AI campus initiative in the UAE announced in May 2025, and the 200 MW-class facility of its first phase scheduled for completion in the third quarter of 2026); the establishment of state-owned full-stack companies (the state-owned AI company established in Saudi Arabia under the sovereign wealth fund by royal decree of 12 May 2025, covering all layers of data centres, cloud, Arabic-language models and applications); long-term partnerships with major semiconductor firms (GPUs on the order of hundreds of thousands of units over the coming five years, with 18,000 units and 500 MW in the first phase); and equity investment in foreign companies together with the acceptance of investment from abroad. This path has a structural distinctiveness not found in the other three scenarios. It is a transition between resources, from oil as an M1 to AI as an M1. Whereas the ascent of Scenario [A] (from M2 to M1) and the descent of Scenario [D] (from M1 or M2 to M3) are 556 movements of the locus of value generation, this path is an attempt to change resources while holding the position. A state that was a Resource-Producing Model in the oil era attempts to be a Resource-Producing Model in the AI era as well. Historically this type of transition is rare — because it is a strategy that seeks to avoid the state of failing to form linkages from production to transformation and utilization that staple theory formulated (Watkins, 1963) as the staple trap, not by forming the linkages but by changing to a different staple. This change of staple, however, involves a decisive asymmetry. As Proposition 1 states, the scarcity of oil is the scarcity of a stock, of reserves, whereas the scarcity of AI is the scarcity of productive capacity (a flow) — compute, electricity and people. Entry into M1 in oil was determined by geology — reserves are a natural endowment, and holders do not lose their position through competition. Entry into M1 in AI is determined by four inputs: capital, electricity, people and access. Of these, capital and electricity can be purchased or supplied, but people and access have low purchasability. People can be recruited, but their retention is a function of institutions; and access, as seen in Section 15.4, is a function of political position. "Moving upstream through capital" therefore takes the form of meeting two of four inputs from within and depending on external conditions for two. This asymmetry extends to the consequences should the path hold. Oil rents were protected by the natural endowment of reserves, and the position of production did not depreciate through competition. The position of production in AI, by contrast, is exposed to the depreciation Proposition 8 describes — so long as the frontier advances, the relative value of the computing infrastructure and models held falls continuously. What is obtained if this path succeeds is therefore not a permanent rent of the same type as an oil rent, but a position accompanied by a standing obligation to reinvest. The structure that rentier state theory described (Mahdavy, 1970; Beblawi & Luciani, 1987), in which external rents flow directly to the government and the circuit of accountability through taxation thins, is not necessarily reproduced in the same form for AI rents, because the need to keep funding the cost of continuous construction changes the character of the rent. This is the most important non-correspondence with the oil era in assessing this path. 15.5.2 Condition (1) Local Value-Capture Clauses The first condition for the path to hold is the contractual structure of attraction. Proposition 6b asserts a relation whereby "the larger the scale of computing infrastructure (data centre) attracted to a region, the lower the ratio of local value added, employment and inter-firm transactions to the volume of tax preferences, electricity, land and water granted," and provides as its falsification condition that "if, controlling only for the binary variable of whether local value-capture clauses are stated expressly in the terms of attraction, the above relation is not estimated, this proposition is rejected." The formulation of this falsification condition is not merely the specification of a statistical procedure. By limiting the control variable to one, Proposition 6b names 557 where the branching point lies. That is, what divides whether attraction ends in extractive distortion is neither the scale of attraction, nor the amount of investment, nor the level of technology, but the presence or absence of the clauses. The content envisaged for such clauses includes the equity and governance of the local entity, obligations of technology transfer, floors on the share of local procurement, requirements as to the quality and number of jobs, limits and ceilings on tax preferences, the level of consideration for electricity, water and land, and the location of data and the rights to use it. The consequences of attraction lacking such clauses are confirmed in existing empirical work. According to a series of reports by the United States subsidy watchdog Good Jobs First, more than 30 states have established sales tax exemptions and the like for data centres; in at least 10 states annual revenue losses exceed 100 million dollars; and many states do not even report the amount of the loss. Cases have been reported in which state subsidies reach as much as 2 million dollars per job — because data centres generate permanent employment after construction only on the order of a few dozen positions. This structure arises from four characteristics: (1) enormous capital investment together with property taxes that tend to be abated; (2) little permanent employment; (3) large burdens of electricity, water and land; and (4) the automatic accumulation of sales tax exemptions, which swell with each server refresh. That Ireland restricted new construction once data centres came to account for more than 20% of electricity consumption, and that the Netherlands and Singapore imposed moratoria on new construction, are instances in which this burden became manifest as a constraint on the receiving side. This line of empirical work can be connected to strongly normative arguments such as data colonialism (Couldry & Mejias, 2019) and the critique of AI as extractivism (Crawford, 2021), but this paper refers to them not as normative claims but as theoretical antecedents of the mechanism of Proposition 6b. What determines whether extraction is occurring is not a normative position but a measurable quantity: the ratio of local value capture to the resources granted. 15.5.3 Condition (2) The Retention of Talent The second condition is whether the talent recruited does more than reside, and is incorporated into a circuit that trains domestic personnel. Recruitment can be achieved by purchase, but retention is a function of institutions — the presence of educational and research institutions, career paths as professionals, the design of residence status and citizenship, conditions of family life, and organizational structures in which knowledge remains after departure. That the geographical distribution of talent can move is shown by existing indicators. AI Index 2026 reports that Switzerland ranks first in the concentration of AI researchers relative to population, and that the indicator of researcher inflow to the United States fell sharply (this indicator depends on the definition of new inflow, so its interpretation requires reservation). Talent, that is, moves. But mobility runs both ways, and it also means 558 that recruited talent may depart. What recruitment obtains is a flow of talent, not a stock of national brain capital. 15.5.4 Condition (3) The Formation of National Brain Capital The third and most constraining condition is the formation of national brain capital (Definition 11). Of the four components of Definition 11, what can be obtained by recruitment extends only to part of (iv), the capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience. Components (i) tacit knowledge of the field, (ii) judgment embedded in language, culture and aesthetic sense, and (iii) the professional ethics and working practices that make trust in institutions possible all arise only from the accumulation of operation in the society in question and cannot be imported. As Proposition 18 states, what can be obtained by importing AI capability is capability and not national brain capital, and a strategy that aims at the Transformation Model while lacking national brain capital reduces to transformation without complementary assets (Proposition 4). This condition imposes a concrete requirement on the path of moving upstream. Moving upstream is sustained only where operating processes of domestic industry, administration, medicine and education form around the physical facility that is a data centre, and exclusive data (Proposition 4(a)) and the physical interface (Proposition 4(b)) are generated from them. Conversely, if the facility does no more than process the computational demand of foreign actors, the existence of the facility forms no national brain capital. This distinction is judged not by the scale of attraction but by what the attracted computation is processing. Orientations such as the development of Arabic-language foundation models, implementation in domestic administration and medicine, and the supply of applications to the regional language sphere are meaningful in this judgment. 15.5.5 Formulation of the Branching Point Arranging the three conditions, the branching point can be formulated as follows. The same attraction of a data centre becomes a ladder for moving upstream where it is accompanied by the three conditions of local value-capture clauses, the retention of talent, and the formation of national brain capital, and ends in "the grant of a drilling right" where any of the three is absent. What decides the branch is neither the scale of attraction, nor the amount of investment, nor the performance of the equipment — this is the theoretical implication of the fact that the falsification condition of Proposition 6b limits the control variable to the single binary variable of the clauses. The conditions specific to the Gulf oil-producing states are described within this framework (as a description of position and constraint, not as an evaluation). There are two favourable conditions. First, electricity: generation resources based on oil, gas and insolation are abundant, and the physical constraints treated in Section 15.6 are looser than in other regions. Second, capital: capital concentrated in sovereign wealth funds can adopt a long horizon not rate-limited by quarterly results — against the difficulty stated in Propos‐ 559 ition 15, that the time constant of accumulation is longer than the time constant of policy decision, this structure gives partial relief. There are also two constraining conditions. First, the size of the domestic demand market. Small population means that access to the demand market for what is transformed (necessary condition (iii) of Proposition 4) must be sought outside the region, and at the same time constrains the volume of exclusive data generated from domestic operating processes. Second, the political conditioning of access. As seen in Section 15.4, access to frontier capability is a function of political position, and in the existing record it is reported that conditions of alignment accompanied equity investments and cooperation frameworks. Whether moving upstream is possible at all is thus subordinate to the outcome of the cross-axis transition of Scenario [B]. 15.5.6 The Leverage Perspective — An Attempt to Acquire Indispensability Through Capital and Electricity To this point the subsection has described moving upstream through capital as movement on the coordinates of the nine cells. Superimposing the second set of coordinates introduced in Section 11, another aspect of this path appears. The same investment attempts at once a movement on the nine cells (from oil as M1 to a host of AI foundations) and a movement on the leverage coordinates (the acquisition of indispensability through capital and electricity). The inter-quadrant movement that Figure 11 in Section 11 showed as the arrow of "moving upstream through capital" refers to this case. The source of the indispensability being sought can be identified. It is cooling water and siting, listed in Section 11.2.5. That the physical conditions of electricity, land and insolation are abundant, and that the constraint of the grid interconnection queue is looser than in other regions, is a favourable condition in respect of this source, as the [indispensability] entry in Section 14.9 recorded. What distinguishes this source from the other five is that concentration arises not from technical factors but from geography and legal systems, and that neither economies of scale nor learning effects operate — it is therefore also one of the few sources that can be acquired in the short run through the injection of capital. This is the converse implication of Section 11.2.7's statement that, of the five mechanisms, only economies of scale can be shortened by funds. The physical conditions of a site cannot be made with money, but converting physical conditions that already exist into computing infrastructure is a function of funds. This acquisition has two limits, however. First, a chokepoint of siting becomes indispensability only where what is executed there cannot be executed elsewhere. Because electricity and land exist at other points on the globe, the number of substitute candidates is larger than for the other five sources. The time required to switch is the period needed to secure a new site and connect it to the grid, and although it is rate-limited by the time constant of the grid (five to ten years), it is not as long as for choke points underpinned by lithography equipment or accumulated skill. Second, because the chips, models and operational knowledge needed to run the facility lie with the supplier, 560

the facility can be stopped but cannot be kept running independently (Section 14.9). In the vocabulary of Section 11 this is a form of separation between holding indispensability and being able to exercise it — if the exercise of an asset one holds presupposes the other party's continuing cooperation, using that asset as an instrument of negotiation means stopping one's own operations. From this structure follows the relation between the three conditions of this subsection and leverage. Local value-capture clauses (Section 15.5.2) are a condition on the side of position and at the same time bear, on the side of leverage, on the acquisition of desirability. Where the attracted computation processes domestic operating processes, and exclusive data and the physical interface are generated from them, the state may acquire value as "a place where AI can in fact be deployed in regulated sectors" — the desirability that Proposition 25 (Section 11) identified as a consequence of trust infrastructure. Conversely, if the facility does no more than process the computational demand of foreign actors, what is acquired is only the indispensability of siting, and desirability does not increase. The vulnerability that Section 11.5.2 assigned to the bottleneck-specialized type — leverage concentrated at a single point, with low desirability making it difficult to obtain compensation through negotiation before exercise — is the consequence in this case. The branching point formulated in this subsection therefore operates in the same form on the leverage coordinates as well. Attraction accompanied by the three conditions brings the acquisition of desirability together with an ascent in position, and becomes movement in the direction of the structurally indispensable type. Attraction lacking the three conditions leaves only the indispensability of siting without moving position, and becomes movement toward the bottleneck-specialized type. An outcome in which facilities are built, transformation value is not captured, and yet the indispensability of siting alone remains would be described as "failure" if only the nine-cell coordinates were consulted, but superimposing the leverage coordinates it is described as "a state in which only one of the objectives has been achieved." The observation of Section 11.5.1, that where the two objective functions are not recognized and a single "AI strategy" is designed instead, there is a high possibility that neither objective is achieved, has its most concrete content along this path. Both are funded from the same budget, but the measures of success differ — capture of transformation value in one case, time required for substitution in the other. The conclusions of this subsection are stated in conditional form. First, if local valuecapture clauses are stated expressly, if recruited talent is incorporated into domestic training circuits, and if the attracted computation processes domestic operating processes, moving upstream through capital may hold. Second, if these are absent, the extractive distortion Proposition 6b describes follows: the facilities remain but cell position does not move. Third, even where moving upstream holds, the position obtained is not of the same type as an oil rent but a position of continuous construction exposed to the depreciation of Proposition 8. Fourth, whether this path is pos‐ 561 sible at all may be severed, independently of the other three conditions, by external conditions of access (Section 15.4). 15.6 Scenario [D] Downward Transition Through Physical Constraints — A Path That Operates Independently of Intention The fourth scenario is the path in which the physical constraints of electricity, grid interconnection and compute make maintenance of the producing and Transformation Models impossible and push a state down into the Utilization Model. What decisively distinguishes this transition from the other three is that it operates independently of political intention. Scenario [A] depends on domestic choices of accumulation, Scenario [B] on the political decisions of other states, Scenario [C] on the contractual design of attraction. Scenario [D], by contrast, is rate-limited by quantities that no political decision can shorten: the construction period of generation, the reinforcement period of the grid, and the physical duration of construction works. 15.6.1 The Structure of the Multi-Stage Bottleneck As Section 13 set out in detail, the constraints on AI are composed as a multi-stage bottleneck. That the locus of the constraint is shifting from the phase of advanced GPU shortage in 2023–24 to electricity, substations and transmission interconnection from 2025 onward is the analysis of the International Energy Agency and the common understanding of the industry. This shift is arranged here as a hierarchy of time constants. Procurement of semiconductors is on the order of months to a year. Construction of data centres takes several years. For substation equipment and grid interconnection, measurements in the United States show a median of more than four years from application to commercial operation, with the completion rate of applied capacity at 13% (LBNL, data as of end-2024). New generation and grid reinforcement are on the order of five to ten years. That is, the more the upstream constraints are relieved, the more binding the downstream constraints with their longer time constants become. Under this structure, compute capacity does not increase in proportion even where the supply of GPUs improves. The scale on the demand side can be confirmed from several primary sources. World data centre electricity consumption was approximately 415 TWh in 2024 (approximately 1.5% of world electricity consumption) and has grown at approximately 12% a year since 2017 — a rate more than four times the growth of total electricity demand. It is expected to more than double to approximately 945 TWh by 2030, with a base case for 2035 of approximately 1,200 TWh (scenario range 700–1,700 TWh) (IEA, 2025a). The regional composition (2024) is 45% United States, 25% China, 15% Europe. For the United States, data centres are expected to account for nearly half the increase in electricity demand to 2030, and by the end of the decade data centre electricity consumption is expected to exceed the combined manufacturing of aluminium, steel, cement, chemicals and other energy-intensive 562 goods. It should be noted that the 945 TWh figure is for data centres as a whole including non-AI uses, and that the same agency gives a range for any AI-specific portion. For Japan, the OCCTO demand projection (fiscal 2026, published 21 January 2026) incorporates, for new and expanded data centres and semiconductor plants, an increase by fiscal 2035 of 7.62 million kW in peak demand (4.63% of the national total) and 56.8 billion kWh in electricity demand (6.71% of the national total) (of which data centres account for 6.61 million kW and 49.4 billion kWh, and semiconductor plants for 1.01 million kW and 7.4 billion kWh). National electricity demand reaches 887.1 billion kWh in fiscal 2035, growing at an annual average of 0.5%, turning from a long-term declining trend driven by population decline and energy conservation to a rising basis. That the principal cause of Japan's electricity demand turning upward for the first time in approximately twenty years is digital demand is the clearest manifestation in demand statistics of AI becoming critical infrastructure. On the supply side, the Seventh Strategic Energy Plan (Cabinet decision of February 2025) sets out as indicative figures for the generation mix in fiscal 2040 approximately 40–50% renewables, approximately 20% nuclear and approximately 30–40% thermal, whereas the nuclear share in fiscal 2023 was 8.5%. For states with slack on the side of supply capacity, by contrast, this constraint is loose. China's installed generating capacity and annual additions greatly exceed those of the United States, and AI Index 2026 notes that China's electricity reserve margin did not fall below a stipulated level throughout the survey period. The strategy of offsetting a disadvantage in single-chip performance with large-scale clustering and electricity (Section 5.3.4) rests on this physical base. The endowment of electricity thus reorders the ranking of reachability on the nine cells. 15.6.2 Three Stages of Downward Transition The mechanism by which physical constraints bring about a descent of cell position is described in three stages. The first stage is the impossibility of maintaining the Resource-Producing Model. In a system in which the training cost of frontier models grows at an annual factor of approximately 2.4 (Epoch AI), and the performance of AI supercomputers at 2.5 times a year with their power demand at approximately twice a year (Pilz et al., 2025), a state whose electricity and grid do not grow even linearly sees its relative position in production decline automatically. What operates here is the general mechanism of Proposition 15 — when the rate of accumulation falls below the rate of advance of the frontier, position descends — and the electricity constraint imposes a physical ceiling on that rate of accumulation. This descent is not a failure of policy but a consequence of a difference in rates. That Germany, Japan and France, formerly powers in high-performance computing, have become peripheral in AI clusters (Section 5.3.4) can be read as a record of this mechanism already having operated. 563 The second stage is the difficulty of maintaining the Transformation Model. For the Transformation Model to subsist, the operational capacity of Definition 6(i-a) is required — capacity sufficient to run, on domestic computing infrastructure and electricity, the inference needed for degraded operation of critical processes. Inference requires less computation per unit than training, but the total required increases as utilization deepens. As Proposition 5 states, the deepening of utilization makes demand inelastic. Inelastic demand means that quantity does not fall when price rises, so the operational capacity required does not fall. In addition, a sharp fall in inference prices and an increase in total demand are observed simultaneously (the minimum inference price achieving a given performance level falls at annual factors ranging from 9 to 900 depending on the task, while data centre electricity consumption has grown at approximately 12% a year). It cannot be asserted that a Jevons-type dynamic in which efficiency gains increase total demand holds for AI — the demand elasticity of efficiency gains is context-dependent, and rebound does not always exceed 100% — but at the least the inference that price declines relieve the electricity constraint is not supported by existing observation. The third stage is being pushed down into the Utilization Model. Processing that cannot be executed domestically is executed on external foundations. This means an expansion of the exposure of Definition 4 (the scale and share of external procurement of AI inputs, the share of work processed on external foundations). An expansion of exposure does not mean a rise in dependence where alternative procedures are in place, but where the black-boxing described in Section 15.3.6 proceeds in parallel it is accompanied by a rise in dependence. And a rise in dependence amplifies the systemic risk of AI outage that Proposition 7 describes, as the product of dependence, supplier concentration and outage correlation. Downward transition through physical constraints is therefore at once a descent of cell position and a rise in vulnerability to AI outage. 15.6.3 Three Properties Specific to This Transition First, it operates independently of political intention. The time required to build generation and reinforce the grid comprises physical processes — environmental impact assessment, land acquisition, equipment and materials, construction — and the portion that can be shortened by policy decision is limited. Measurements of the United States interconnection queue (applied capacity nearly twice installed capacity, a completion rate of 13%, a median exceeding four years) show that this process operates as the rate-limiting factor of the system as a whole, independently of any particular policy intention. For this scenario, therefore, the question "what does a state choose" has a narrow range of application — what can be chosen is the timing of commencement, not the time required. Second, it is in effect unidirectional. A state of insufficient grid capacity persists for several years until reinforcement is complete. During that period, the expansion of the state's computing infrastructure is pinned at its ceiling. So long as the frontier continues to advance, those several years of stagnation accumulate as a widening of relative distance, and recovery requires a period of high accumulation exceeding the period of stagnation. 564 Third, it operates as a constraint on the other three scenarios. The ascent path of Scenario [A] requires operational capacity and renewal capability (Definition 6(i-a), (i-b)); the move upstream of Scenario [C] requires electricity; and investment in domestic production as a counter to Scenario [B] likewise requires computing infrastructure and electricity. Physical constraints thus constitute the precondition of every other ascent path. Put the other way, a state with slack in electricity has, other conditions being equal, higher feasibility for ascent paths. That the first favourable condition of the Gulf oil-producing states noted in Section 15.5 was electricity is a consequence of this structure. 15.6.4 The Politics of Siting — A Domestic Allocation Problem Turning into an Interstate One Physical constraints appear not only as a problem of position between states but also as a problem of allocation within a state. Policies steering the siting of data centres toward regions with spare grid capacity (in Japan discussed as the coordination of the power grid with communications), restrictions on new construction on grounds of concentrated electricity consumption (Ireland), and moratoria on new construction with subsequent conditional resumption (in Singapore, resumed under a framework with environmental conditions after a moratorium from 2019 to 2022) are all domestic allocation problems. Demand that cannot be sited domestically does not, however, disappear; it moves to grids abroad. Domestic constraints on siting therefore bring about a cross-border reallocation of exposure — if one state restricts siting, its processing demand is processed on facilities in jurisdictions without such restrictions. Domestic environmental and electricity policy becomes an exogenous condition governing a state's cell position. This path is an instance of the structure in which policies not designed as AI policy determine position in AI, and can also be read as an instance in the reverse direction of the inter-layer transmission of policy (Proposition 11) treated in Section 17. The conclusions of this subsection are stated in conditional form. First, if the rate at which generation and the grid are reinforced falls below the rate at which computational demand increases, the expansion of the state's computing infrastructure is physically rate-limited and the relative position of the producing and Transformation Models declines. Second, this decline occurs independently of political intention, and what can be chosen is the timing of commencement, not the time required. Third, under such rate-limiting, processing that cannot be executed domestically moves to external foundations and exposure expands. Fourth, where alternative procedures are absent, the expansion of exposure is accompanied by a rise in dependence, and vulnerability to AI outage rises. Fifth, the endowment condition of electricity is a higher-order constraint governing the feasibility of the other three scenarios, and reorders the ranking of reachability on the nine cells. 565 15.7 Conditions for a Third Pole — As an Analysis of Conditions, Not an Advocacy All four scenarios concerned the dynamics of the position of individual states. This subsection treats the question whether an alignment of several states can constitute a third pole vis-à-vis the two poles (the two actors located at M1×C2). The character of this subsection is stated in advance. This subsection does not advocate the formation of a third pole; it analyses the conditions for one. Stating what follows if the conditions are not met is the main part of the analysis, and judgments of desirability are outside the scope of this paper. Proposition 19 (Conditions for a Third Pole) A group of states other than the two poles of the Resource-Producing Model (the two actors located at M1×C2) can constitute an independent third pole only where the following three conditions are satisfied simultaneously. (i) Complementarity: that the participating states occupy not the same position but different cells (production, transformation, utilization, and computing infrastructure, energy, national brain capital), and in aggregate cover the set of functions necessary for autonomy. (ii) Mutual guarantees of access: that there exist among the participating states legally binding arrangements to supply one another with capability and resources in the event of a stoppage of supply from outside (the multilateral version of Definition 6(ii)). (iii) Shared discipline: that the frameworks of standards, evaluation and certification are shared, and that what the participating states transform is accepted in one another's markets. An alignment lacking any of the three conditions is not a pole but a subordinate attachment to one of the two poles. Falsification condition If it is systematically observed that an alignment lacking one of the three conditions has in fact preserved the capability of participating states against a change in the conditions of access from outside, the claim that the conditions are necessary is rejected. If, even where an alignment satisfying the three conditions is established, the procurement of participating states continues to depend on the two poles, the claim of sufficiency is rejected. 15.7.1 The Proposed Alignment to Be Evaluated The object of evaluation examined concretely in this paper is the following proposed combination — combining the industrial data and field knowledge held by Transformation Model states, the hardware and semiconductor manufacturing capability held by states occupying particular strategic positions, and the independent foundation models held by middle-sized Resource-Producing Models so as to constitute a set of capabilities subordinate to neither pole. This proposal is evaluated against each of the three conditions. 566 15.7.2 Condition (i) Complementarity — Partially Satisfied Complementarity requires that the participating states not overlap in the same position and that in aggregate they "cover the set of functions necessary for autonomy." The set of functions must first be specified. From this paper's framework, at least the following six functions are derived as elements — (a) advanced computing infrastructure, (b) electricity, (c) semiconductor manufacturing, equipment and materials, (d) an independent capability to produce foundation models, (e) national brain capital and industrial data (the basis of the four indicators of Proposition 4), and (f) the demand market for what is transformed. The three functions of Definition 6 (operational capacity, renewal capability, sensitive- processing condition) are supplied from the combination of (a), (b) and (d). Against these six functions, the proposed combination shows considerable coverage. As to (c), the division of labour in semiconductor manufacturing, equipment and materials is already geographically dispersed, and principal holders exist outside the two poles. As to (e), it is endowed in Transformation Model states possessing operating processes in manufacturing, medicine and administration. As to (d), the only frontier-class laboratory in Europe exists, and several states support independent foundation model development as national policy — the United Kingdom with the expansion of public AI compute capacity and the operation of an AI safety and security evaluation body, France with a laboratory that has received large investment and with domestic data centre development, India with procurement subsidies and support for sovereign models centred on multilingual and application-specific work, South Korea with its national AI computing centre initiative and R&D on domestic AI semiconductors, and Japan with support for foundation model development and subsidies for computing infrastructure under the economic security framework (Section 14). As to (f), the markets of the participating states in aggregate come to a considerable scale. The parts not covered are, however, equally clear. As to (a) advanced computing infrastructure, approximately 75% of world AI supercomputer performance is located in the United States and approximately 15% in China, with all the rest of the world at approximately 10% (Pilz et al., 2025). For the EU's AI Gigafactories initiative the formal tender is due in the summer of 2026 and construction of the first facility is planned for 2027, and as of August 2026 selection has not been completed. As to (b) electricity, Europe, Japan and South Korea are all on the constrained side described in Section 15.6. The asymmetry of capital is large as well — private AI investment in 2025 is reported at approximately 285.9 billion dollars for the United States and approximately 12.4 billion dollars for China (AI Index 2026), and the scale of states other than the two poles differs from these by an order of magnitude. The assessment of condition (i) is therefore that it is partially satisfied. For (c), (d), (e) and (f) a complementary division of labour does exist, but for (a) and (b) it cannot be said that the aggregate covers the level necessary for autonomy. This assessment is static, and since, as stated in Section 15.6, (a) is rate-limited by (b), coverage of (a) is not achieved without improvement in (b). 567 15.7.3 Condition (ii) Mutual Guarantees of Access — Absent Condition (ii) requires that there exist among the participating states "legally binding arrangements to supply one another with capability and resources in the event of a stoppage of supply from outside." This is the multilateral version of the alliance-based guarantees of Definition 6(ii). At the time of writing, no arrangement satisfying this condition can be confirmed. The character of existing frameworks is examined. The EU and Japan, at the fourth Digital Partnership Council on 5 May 2026, agreed on a new stage of deepened regulatory, research and industrial cooperation on data, AI, quantum, semiconductors, digital infrastructure and online platforms, setting out improvement of cross-border data flows, promotion of interoperable digital identity, and coordination of research cooperation with platform regulation (European Commission announcement). This is a framework of cooperation, not an obligation of mutual supply in the event of a stoppage. The same observation applies to other bilateral and interregional frameworks of digital cooperation — they include the objects of cooperation, funding, research and regulatory coordination, but not arrangements with obligations of supply in an emergency and procedures for their performance. The gravity of this absence becomes clear by contrast with the oil precedent. The International Energy Agency, established in 1974 in response to the crisis of 1973, imposed on member states an obligation to hold stocks equal to 90 days of net imports and institutionalized procedures for coordinated release (coordinated releases have been carried out several times since its establishment). In oil, that is, mutual insurance with obligations and procedures was established the year after the crisis. In AI there exists no institution corresponding to this. The difficulties specific to AI must be identified here. What is to be supplied? For oil it suffices to release physical stocks. In AI, the object of supply decomposes into the following three, each with obstacles of its own. (a) Mutual opening of inference capacity. Compute capacity cannot be transported — like electricity, facilities are fixed to their sites. Supply must therefore take the form not of physical transport but of the mutual grant of priority access rights. This is a problem isomorphic with the institutions of interconnectors and international transfers in electricity systems, and the existing institutional vocabulary is available (capacity reservation, priority in emergencies, calculation of consideration). For AI, however, no instance of an arrangement of this type can be confirmed. (b) Mutual escrow of model weights. Weights are a transferable information good, and the institutional design of escrow is in principle possible. But as the inclusion by the January 2025 allocation framework of the transfer of advanced model weights within the licensing requirement shows, the transfer of weights may itself become an object of export control. There is thus a recursive obstacle: an arrangement to prepare against a stoppage of supply from outside becomes an object of external control measures. 568 (c) Mutual certification of sensitive-processing conditions. As to the sensitive-processing condition of Definition 6(i-c) — a foundation able to process data whose removal abroad is not permitted legally or contractually — mutual certification among the participating states would make it legally possible to process on another state's foundation in an emergency. This is a task directly linked to the shared discipline of condition (iii). Since for none of the three decompositions can an instance of a legally binding arrangement be confirmed, condition (ii) is assessed as absent. 15.7.4 Condition (iii) Shared Discipline — Absent Condition (iii) requires that the frameworks of standards, evaluation and certification be shared and that what the participating states transform be accepted in one another's markets. At present, the very types of regulation diverge. The EU adopts comprehensive regulation of the risk-tier type through the AI Act (in force 1 August 2024), with prohibitions applying from 2 February 2025, general-purpose AI obligations in stages from 2 August 2025, and high-risk provisions scheduled to apply in 2026–2027, though discussion of simplification of application and of postponing some parts is under way. Japan adopts a combination of a comprehensive promotion-type statute without penalties, the AI Promotion Act (enacted 28 May 2025, promulgated 4 June, fully in force 1 September), and soft law in the form of the AI Guidelines for Business (version 1.1, 28 March 2025). China combines the Interim Measures for the Administration of Generative AI Services (in force 15 August 2023) and labelling rules with state management of diffusion through the "AI Plus" initiative (26 August 2025). The purpose, the means and the legal bindingness of regulation thus all differ across jurisdictions. A difference in the type of regulation does not by itself mean that condition (iii) fails, because what condition (iii) requires is not the unification of standards but mutual acceptance. If the type of mutual recognition agreement used in trade — an institution treating the results of another state's conformity assessment as conformity with one's own requirements — were applicable to AI, what is transformed would be accepted in one another's markets even where regulatory types differ. The substantive question of condition (iii) is therefore whether conformity assessment for AI is established to a degree that permits mutual recognition. The answer to this question is at present negative. Government bodies conducting evaluation of frontier models have been established (in the United Kingdom, a body established in November 2023 was renamed an AI security institute in February 2025 and has a record of evaluating several frontier models), and research on evaluation methods has accumulated. But no framework of mutual recognition linking evaluation results to legal effect — under which a model passing evaluation in one jurisdiction is deemed conforming in another — can be confirmed. Whether the Brussels effect (Bradford, 2020) extends to AI is contested in the scholarship as well (Siegmann & Anderljung, 2022 take the affirmative side; scepticism grounded in divisibility and the weakness of domestic industry stands 569 against it), and the prospect that mutual acceptance is achieved through unilateral regulatory spillover is not established either. Condition (iii) is therefore also assessed as absent. 15.7.5 Overall Assessment and What "Subordinate Attachment" Consists In The assessments of the three conditions are gathered. (i) Complementarity is partially satisfied; (ii) mutual guarantees of access and (iii) shared discipline are absent. Proposition 19 states that "an alignment lacking any of the three conditions is not a pole but a subordinate attachment to one of the two poles." The proposed alignment at the time of writing is therefore not a pole in the sense of Proposition 19. What the consequence of "subordinate attachment" consists in must be made concrete rather than left as an abstract term. At least the following three follow. First, the procurement of inputs continues to depend on one of the two poles. For advanced computing infrastructure and frontier capability, the uncovered part of condition (i) is procured from outside. Second, exogenous changes in the conditions of access propagate simultaneously across the interior of the alignment. At each of the points named as objects of event study in the falsification condition of Proposition 11 — October 2022, October 2023, January 2025, May 2025 — the change of conditions acted simultaneously on all candidate participants. An alignment lacking mutual guarantees of access (condition (ii)) has no means of mitigating that simultaneity — this is the substantive function of condition (ii). Third, because discipline is not shared, mutual acceptance of what is transformed does not advance even inside the alignment, and access to the demand market (necessary condition (iii) of Proposition 4) does not expand. The path by which an alignment would strengthen the conditions of viability of participating states as Transformation Models is thereby closed. What would be the prior tasks for satisfying the conditions is stated as a description of conditions rather than as a norm. As to condition (ii), narrowing the object of supply to (a) the mutual grant of priority access rights to inference capacity is the most practicable starting point — because (b) escrow of weights carries the recursive obstacle of being potentially subject to external export controls, and (c) mutual certification of sensitive-processing conditions depends on condition (iii). Item (a) is an institutional problem isomorphic with international transfers of electricity, and the existing institutional vocabulary of capacity reservation, priority and calculation of consideration is available. As to condition (iii), the prior task is not the unification of standards but mutual recognition of evaluation and certification, which presupposes the methodological establishment of conformity assessment for AI. Finally, it is noted that movements concerning the formation of a pole are not confined to the alignment treated in this subsection. State media reported that on 16 July 2026, in Shanghai, 29 countries signed an agreement establishing a World Artificial Intelligence Cooperation Organization (this rests on reporting; the content of the agreement text has 570

not been confirmed at the time of writing). For this organization too, whether the three conditions of Proposition 19 — in particular (ii), legally binding mutual guarantees of access — are satisfied cannot be determined from public information. What Proposition 19 requires is not a declaration of alignment but the existence of arrangements with obligations and procedures for performance, and this requirement applies identically without regard to the political character of the alignment. The conclusion of this subsection is stated in conditional form. Where the three conditions are satisfied simultaneously, a third pole is established. Where any is absent, the alignment is not a pole but a subordinate attachment to one of the two poles. At the time of writing, (ii) and (iii) are not satisfied. 15.8 The Problem of States Fixed in the Utilization Model — Formulated as a Vulnerability of the System as a Whole The analysis so far has addressed states capable of moving in one direction or the other, upward or downward. This subsection treats the group of states that lack the very accumulations required for upward transition — states possessing no means of accumulation in respect of the four indicators of complementary assets, the thickness of national brain capital, computing infrastructure, or electricity. 15.8.1 The Problem of Fixed Position The geographical distribution of compute shows extreme concentration. Only some 30 countries worldwide have public cloud GPU clusters for AI, and the world divides into a "Compute North" holding chips for advanced training, a "Compute South" able only to perform inference on older-generation chips, and a "Compute Desert" with no public GPU infrastructure (Lehdonvirta, Wú & Hawkins, 2024). To the group of states in the third division, the transition analysis of this section scarcely applies — because the accumulations that would be the starting point of a transition do not exist. Applying Proposition 15 to this group yields a paradoxical conclusion. The problem of this group is not descent but fixation. States already at M3×C1 have no room to descend further. The problem is that, lacking the means for any of the four kinds of accumulation required for upward transition, their position becomes permanent. And as Proposition 12 (Section 17) states, rationing of C2 capability by price, capacity and permission forms new axes of inequality between states, and this disparity is correlated with but not identical to income disparity, being amplified independently by each of the factors of education, language, electricity and regulation. Fixation of position is synonymous with fixation of the disparities in these four factors. 15.8.2 A Distinctive Form of Vulnerability to AI Outage This group's vulnerability to AI outage (Definition 4, Section 13) takes a form different from that of advanced states. Definition 4 draws a clear distinction between exposure and 571 dependence, stating that "where exposure is high but substitution functions immediately, dependence is low; where exposure is low but substitution is lacking, dependence is high." States fixed in the Utilization Model can take the combination of low exposure and high dependence. Exposure is low because both the absolute amount and the share of external procurement of AI inputs are small. Dependence is high because substitution is lacking. Where a state has no domestic operational capacity (Definition 6(i-a)), no renewal capability (Definition 6(i-b)), and no personnel or procedures able to execute a switch (Definition 6(iii)), an interruption of external supply brings about an immediate cessation of function. And in domains where critical processes — the administrative procedures, educational assessment and job applications named in the falsification condition of Proposition 12 — have begun to take AI as a substantive premise, a stoppage of supply, a change of price or a termination of service all appear as a cessation of those processes. Further, as Proposition 7 states, because the concentration of suppliers of AI services is global, AI outages correlate across borders and sectors. As past incidents show — the simultaneous worldwide failure of endpoints caused by a defect in a single configuration file in July 2024, and the succession of large-scale failures at the foundation layer in the autumn of 2025 with vertical propagation from there to AI services (Section 13.4) — failures can occur simultaneously across a geographically discontinuous world. Under this property, a state in the Compute Desert may have the operation of its critical processes stopped by a failure of another state's facilities, despite holding no facilities of its own. 15.8.3 An International Framework of Access Guarantees — Not Charity but a Reduction of the Vulnerability of the System as a Whole The need for an international framework of access guarantees is often argued in the context of development assistance or the correction of disparities — that is, as a benefit to the side receiving the guarantee. This paper formulates it as a reduction of the vulnerability of the system as a whole. The ground of that formulation is Proposition 7. Proposition 7 states that the systemic risk of AI outage is amplified as the product of dependence, supplier concentration and outage correlation, and predicts, for degradation in sector s at the time of an outage, that the coefficients on the three factors of dependence, concentration and correlation are all positive and that the coefficient on the interaction term is positive. This formulation implies that there are three means of reducing risk — lower dependence, lower concentration, lower correlation. Access guarantees to states fixed in the Utilization Model in the first instance lower the dependence of those states (by the provision of alternative procedures and conditions of execution, reducing degradation at the time of interruption). What this paper weights more heavily, however, is the third path. A state of affairs in which the great majority of the world's countries depend on the same small number of suppliers and the same foundations maximizes outage correlation, the third factor of Proposition 7. If a 572 framework of access guarantees institutionally maintains alternative paths — supply routes spanning several jurisdictions, domestic environments for executing open weights, regionally shared computing infrastructure — correlation falls. A fall in correlation lowers the expected loss not only of the states receiving the guarantee but of every state that shares those suppliers. The essential point of this argument lies in the fallacy of composition that Proposition 7 makes explicit — concentration of dependence on a single supplier and a single foundation raises the vulnerability of the system as a whole even where it is rational for individual actors. A fallacy of composition is by definition not corrected by the rational choices of individual actors. The corrective agent must therefore lie outside individual actors, and here lies the structural reason an international framework is called for. This argument holds independently of arguments grounded in the benefit to the state in question, and would hold even if that benefit were zero. The correspondence and non-correspondence with the oil precedent are also made explicit. The stockholding obligation and coordinated release of the International Energy Agency were mutual insurance among member states and at the same time supplied a public good, the moderation of price volatility in the market as a whole. The counterpart in AI, however, cannot take the form of stockpiling — because, as Proposition 8 states, the guarantee level corresponding to a "stockpile" in AI depreciates in proportion to the rate of advance of the frontier. A framework in AI must therefore take the form not of stockpiling but of the standing maintenance of alternative paths. The principle of continuous construction (Proposition 8) holds equally for multilateral guarantee frameworks and not only for the guarantee level of a single state. 15.8.4 Existing Beginnings and Their Character Beginnings of an international framework already exist. On 26 August 2025 the United Nations General Assembly adopted by consensus resolution A/RES/79/325, establishing an Independent International Scientific Panel on AI and a Global Dialogue on AI Governance. The mandate of the Panel is the preparation of annual reports containing evidence-based scientific assessment of the opportunities, risks and impacts of AI, and its scope is confined to non-military domains. The Global Dialogue is a forum in which all member states participate; its first session was held in Geneva on 6–7 July 2026 (the Panel's preliminary report was published on 1 July of that year). The second session is scheduled for New York in May 2027. One of the themes of the Dialogue is set as "bridging the AI divides — capacity building, access, and digital infrastructure," and explicitly includes access to highperformance computing and capacity building in related skills in developing countries, together with the development of open-source software, open data and open models. Describing the character of this framework accurately is important. This is a framework of dialogue and scientific assessment; it does not impose obligations of guaranteed supply. The Panel conducts assessment and the Dialogue shares practice and understanding. The "legally binding arrangements to supply one another with capability and re‐ 573 sources in the event of a stoppage of supply from outside" required by condition (ii) of Proposition 19 are not included in this framework. The present position is therefore a stage at which the problem has been institutionalized as an item on the international agenda, and not a stage at which guarantees have been institutionalized. Unresolved issues are also stated expressly. First, who bears the cost of the framework and on what criteria. Second, which capability tier is to be the object of guarantee. Third, whether guarantees impair the investment incentives of suppliers. This paper offers no solution to these. On the second issue, however, one specification follows from this paper's framework. For capability at the C1 tier, already published open weights supply the lower bound of capability itself at no charge and irrevocably, so the object of guarantee is not capability itself but the conditions for executing, renewing and protecting capability — compute capacity, electricity, and the personnel and procedures able to execute a switch. This specification is structurally identical with the specification Proposition 13 made for Japan's sovereign minimum guarantee level (that the object of guarantee is not the frontier of capability but the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability and the sensitive-processing condition). The design of a state's guarantee level and the design of an international framework of guarantees can be treated consistently as different domains of application of the same principle. 15.9 The Transition Matrix and Summary The analysis of this section is arranged by type of transition. Table 13 sets out, for the principal transitions, the driving factors, the accumulation required, an indication of the time constant, and irreversibility. The column of time constants gives indications of order of magnitude derived from the physical and institutional formation periods of the objects of accumulation; it is not a statistical estimate of the time constants of transition. This paper does not estimate the time constants of transition, and the limitation is acknowledged in Section 20. Table 13. The transition matrix — driving factors, accumulation required, indication of time constant, and irreversibility for the principal transitions Transition Direction / scenario Accumulation required Indication of time constant Irreversibility M3×C1 → M2×C1 Horizontal, ascent Complementary assets (a) and (b), national brain capital (i) and (iv), operational capacity Several years Low (maintained so long as accumulation continues) M3×C1 → M3×C2 Vertical, ascent Procurement contracts and conditions of access, operational capacity, operational readiness One to several years Low (reverses passively upon a change in the conditions of access) 574 Transition Direction / scenario Accumulation required Indication of time constant Irreversibility M2×C1 → M2×C2 Vertical, ascent Renewal capability (ib), computing infrastructure, specialist personnel Several years Medium (reverses passively upon an interruption of renewal) M2×C2 → M1×C2 (domain-specific) Horizontal, ascent [A] path (i) The four indicators of complementary assets, the four components of national brain capital, computing infrastructure, electricity 5–10 years Medium (exclusive data and institutional embeddedness are difficult to transfer) M2×C2 → M3×C1 Simultaneous horizontal and vertical descent [A] path (ii) None (passive) Follows the rate of advance of the frontier High (the return path requires the time constant of the formation of national brain capital) M3×C1 → M1×C2 (moving upstream through capital) Simultaneous horizontal and vertical ascent [C] Capital and electricity (procurable), talent and access (difficult to procure), national brain capital (not importable) 5–10 years or more Low (where clauses and retention are absent, the facilities remain and the position does not) Any cell → same M, lower C (physical constraints) Vertical, descent [D] None (passive) Rate-limited by the time constant of generation and grid (5–10 years) High (requires a period of high accumulation exceeding the period of stagnation) Cross-axis transition (economics → national security) Cross-axis [B] Not applicable (exogenous) Time constant of policy decision (months to years) High (Proposition 16; criterion of judgment in Section 15.4.3) Return path of cross-axis transition (national security → economics) Cross-axis [B], return path Not applicable (political decision) Independent of the descent of capability. Requires political cost at least equal to that of establishment High (Proposition 35. A descent of capability is not automatically accompanied by relaxation, and form that has lost substance persists) Row C2 → Row C3 Vertical, ascent Outside the domain quantified in this paper Outside the domain quantified in this paper Outside the domain quantified in this paper (Proposition 2b, Section 5) 575 The final row of Table 13 is made explicit once more. C3 is at the time of writing an unrealized anticipatory category (Definition 2, Section 5), and whether transition into Row C3 is possible, its time constant and its irreversibility are outside the domain quantified in this paper. The claim that, should C3 be realized, the institutional treatment of that capability shifts into the framework of a nonproliferation-type regime (Proposition 2b) is a conditional proposition premised on the existence of the transition, and not a forecast of its arrival. 15.9.1 Summary — Five Points First, the nine cells are not a static classification but a field of transition (Definition 10). The centroid of a state's portfolio weights moves in three directions — horizontal (the M axis), vertical (the C axis) and cross-axis — and that movement is not determined by a state's choices alone; it is a function of exogenous conditions including the measures of other states, the advance of technology and physical constraints. Second, transition is asymmetric between ascent and descent (Proposition 15). Ascent requires the accumulation of complementary assets, national brain capital, computing infrastructure and electricity, and its time constant is on the order of years, longer than the time constant of policy decision. Descent requires no accumulation and occurs passively through nothing more than the relative depreciation of existing accumulations. This asymmetry is a manifestation, in a different domain of application, of the same structure as Proposition 8 (the depreciation of a stockpile) — both follow from the fact that value or assignment is defined by relative distance from the frontier. Hence "doing nothing" is not "maintaining" but "descending." For cross-axis transition too, the outward and return paths are not equal in speed (Proposition 35, Section 15.4.7) — even where a capability descends a tier, the control framework is not relaxed at the same speed, and form remains after the object of control has lost its substance. Third, the four scenarios are not mutually independent. [B] cross-axis vertical integration strengthens the inducements both to the ascent of [A] and to the move upstream of [C] (the overuse dilemma), while at the same time constraining their conditions of access in a severing manner. [D] physical constraints constitute the precondition of every ascent path in [A], [B] and [C], and reorder the ranking of reachability on the nine cells. The dynamics are thus not four independent paths but a single coupled system. Fourth, a third pole is established only by the simultaneous satisfaction of three conditions (complementarity, mutual guarantees of access, shared discipline) (Proposition 19). At the time of writing, complementarity is partially satisfied, while mutual guarantees of access and shared discipline are absent. An alignment lacking the conditions is not a pole but a subordinate attachment to one of the two poles. Fifth, access guarantees to states fixed in the Utilization Model are formulated as a reduction of the vulnerability of the system as a whole (Proposition 7). The fallacy of composition — that concentration of dependence on a single supplier and a single founda‐ 576 tion raises the vulnerability of the system as a whole even where it is rational for individual actors — is not corrected by the choices of individual actors. For the C1 tier, the object of guarantee is not capability itself but the conditions for executing, renewing and protecting capability — structurally identical with the specification Proposition 13 made for Japan's guarantee level. 15.9.2 Bridge to Sections 16, 17, and 18 Finally, the questions this section hands to the following three sections are made explicit. The first handover is to Section 16. What this section treated is the question which path an individual state follows; but which path is advantageous depends on the exogenous state of the world — the mode of advance of AI capability, the structure of supply, physical constraints. Section 16 identifies this higher-order branch as three states, [S1] Fragmentation, [S2] Diffusion and [S3] Stagnation (Definition 13), and supplies leading indicators (Definition 14) for reading the branch before its consequences appear, together with the set of no-regret actions carrying positive expected value in all three states (Proposition 20). The exogenous conditions this section has taken as given become explicit variables there. The second handover is to Section 17. All four scenarios of this section involved a choice of what to accumulate. Which of the four indicators of complementary assets to prioritize (Section 15.3.3); what clauses to attach to attraction (Section 15.5.2); what to narrow the object of mutual supply to (Section 15.7.5). None of these is a problem of efficiency — they are not problems of achieving a given objective more cheaply and quickly, but problems of selecting what to take as the objective. As Proposition 17 (Section 17) states, as capability descends to C1 the competitive advantage produced by making existing work more efficient diminishes with the fall in the cost of imitation, and the residual that produces differences between states and between firms moves to value-definition capability (Definition 12). The capability to choose the direction of transition is itself the subject of Section 17. The structure of the four scenarios shown in this section indicates that this subject is not an abstract ideal but a set of concrete decisions about the objects of accumulation. The third handover is to Section 18. Japan is assumed to be in a position aiming at M2×C2 (Sections 10 and 14.6). Japan is therefore permanently placed at the branching point of Scenario [A] of this section. By Proposition 15, unless a period is sustained in which the rate of accumulation exceeds the rate of advance of the frontier, the position descends. Section 18 applies this general branch to Japan's concrete conditions — the scale of exposure appearing in the digital-related balance, the rapid diffusion of utilization together with disparities in its depth, the state of computing infrastructure, the electricity constraint, and the substance of national brain capital — and discusses what the three-part set (M2′, deepening M3, and a guarantee level for the three functions) requires under this branch. 577 16. World Scenarios and Leading Indicators 16.1 Why Scenarios Section 15 showed that national value models are not a static classification but a field of transition, and analysed four paths — the branching of the Transformation Model, crossaxis vertical integration, moving upstream through capital, and downward transition through physical constraints — in conditional form. What was treated there was the question how an individual state moves. The branch variables identified were the rate of accumulation of national brain capital, the movement of complementary assets, electricity and computing infrastructure, and exogenous change in the conditions of access, of which the first three were functions of the policy of the state in question. What this section treats is the question standing above that one — which world one is in at all. This distinction is not formal. Take Scenario [A] of Section 15 (the branching of the Transformation Model) as an example. Whether a Transformation Model state ascends or falls is determined by whether its rate of accumulation exceeds the rate of advance of the frontier (Proposition 15, Section 15). But the denominator of that comparison — the rate of advance of the frontier itself — lies outside the policy of that state. In a world where the frontier continues to advance while demanding enormous compute year after year, in a world where the following of open-weight models narrows to a lag width negligible in practice, and in a world where the advance itself meets diminishing returns and halts, the same state pursuing the same policy meets different consequences. What Section 15 gave was the endogenous path taking exogenous conditions as given; what this section gives is the branch on the side of those exogenous conditions. 16.1.1 The Discipline of Making No Predictions, and the Demand for Practical Use This paper makes no predictions. This discipline is required by the methodology of this paper (Section 3) and is acknowledged as a limitation in Section 20. All statements in this paper accordingly take, as a rule, the conditional form "if X obtains, then Y follows," and no assertion about the future in the form "X is going to happen" is used. There are reasons for this discipline. The rate of advance of AI capability depends on the arrival of technical discovery, a process intrinsically difficult to predict; the structure of supply depends on the commercial judgments of a small number of actors and the policy decisions of a small number of governments; and physical constraints depend on processes with long time constants — generation, grid, construction. To make point predictions about a system in which these three lines of uncertainty interact would lack methodological grounding. This discipline, however, has a price. Policymakers cannot act on conditionals alone. Handed a set of propositions of the form "if A, then B follows," they cannot arrive at an investment decision without themselves judging whether A obtains. A theory that refuses to 578 predict may, through that refusal, lose its practical use. Section 20 acknowledges this tension as "the price of being a conditional design theory," but acknowledgment alone does not dissolve it. Scenario planning resolves this tension as a method that supplies identifiability without prediction. Its essential point is that, rather than trying to hit the future as a single number, it sets several qualitatively distinct worlds side by side, describes internally consistently what happens in each, and then prepares a device for discriminating, by observable quantities, which world is in fact now unfolding. This method reconciles the abandonment of prediction with the possibility of action. There is no need to say which world is realized. What is needed is only two things: that the consequences in each world are known, and that the identification of the world is possible ex ante rather than ex post. 16.1.2 The Lineage of the Method The lineage of scenario planning is confirmed briefly. The method of describing the longterm future not as a single prediction but as several internally consistent narratives has its origin in the futurological work of Kahn & Wiener (1967), but what established it as a method in corporate strategic practice was the work of Pierre Wack and others in the Group Planning department of Royal Dutch/Shell. Wack (1985a, 1985b), looking back on the experience of presenting to senior management, in the early 1970s, several scenarios including a sharp rise in the price of oil, stated that the purpose of scenarios is not to hit the future but to change the mental map of decision-makers. Rather than retreating into a cautious single forecast for fear of being wrong, presenting qualitatively different worlds allows decision-makers to become conscious of their own premises so that recognition is not delayed when an unanticipated event occurs — this is the core of the method. Schwartz (1991) and van der Heijden (1996) systematized this practice as a methodology, the latter formulating the function of scenarios as a framework for "strategic conversation." As a more quantitative line there is robust decision making, developed by Lempert, Popper & Bankes (2003) at RAND. This method holds that under deep uncertainty — a situation in which there is no agreement on the probability distribution itself — policy should be chosen not by maximizing expected utility but by robustness across many possible futures (not producing intolerable consequences in any of them). The concept of no-regret actions treated in Section 16.6 belongs directly to this line. The discussion of "no-regrets options" in climate policy — measures with net benefits regardless of the magnitude of the consequences of climate change — has the same structure (Rothman & Robinson, 1997; in lineage it goes back to the integrated assessment literature of the 1990s). This section applies the method to national strategy in the age of AI. In doing so, this paper imposes three disciplines. First, the number of scenarios is limited to three. Increasing the number raises the comprehensiveness of description but lowers identifiability. A coarseness at which policymakers can make a judgment each quarter suits this paper's purpose. Second, each scenario is defined as a combination of three variables 579 — the mode of advance of AI capability, the structure of supply, and physical constraints (Definition 13). Political events — a particular conflict, a particular change of administration — are not included in the definition of a scenario. They are outside the domain quantified in this paper, and the moment they are included the scenarios turn into predictions. Third, no probabilities are assigned. This point is treated in the following subsection. 16.1.3 Definition 13 Definition 13 (World Scenarios) A world scenario is an exogenous state of the world, determined by the combination of the mode of advance of AI capability, the structure of supply and physical constraints, that governs the consequences of national strategy. This paper identifies the following three states. S1 (Fragmentation): a state in which the advance of the frontier continues to depend on large-scale compute, supplier concentration is maintained, the allocation of capability is taken up into the logic of national security, and electricity and compute operate as rate-limiting factors. S2 (Diffusion): a state in which open-weight and smallscale models come to meet the requirement level of uses at the edge, the effective significance of capability distance (Definition 2) contracts, and supplier concentration moves toward dissolution. S3 (Stagnation): a state in which the advance of capability meets diminishing returns, the increment of capability per unit of additional investment falls below the opportunity cost of that investment, and AI capability is levelled into a generalpurpose tool. The three states are neither exclusive nor exhaustive, and different states may obtain simultaneously in different sectors and uses. The closing sentence of Definition 13 is a reservation that governs the whole of this section. The three states are neither exclusive nor exhaustive. The content of this reservation is made explicit. Not exclusive means that several states may obtain simultaneously. More precisely, states obtain not of countries or of moments in time but of sectors and uses. In some uses — summarizing documents, answering routine enquiries, searching internal documents — small open-weight models already meet the requirement level, and so far as those uses are concerned the world is at S2. At the same time, in other uses — design support requiring long chains of reasoning, analysis spanning several specialist domains — the capability gap relative to the frontier continues to matter in practice, and so far as those uses are concerned the world is at S1. In yet other domains, an increment of capability commensurate with additional investment may already not be observed, and the aspect may be that of S3. The statement "the world is at S1" should therefore be reduced, strictly, to the statement "the features of S1 are dominant at the centre of gravity of the uses with which this paper is concerned."

This non-exclusivity changes the practical implication of this section. The judgment a policymaker must make is not the single determination "which world is it?" but the domainby- domain determination which state is dominant in the domain of uses in which the state seeks to capture value. Diagnostic support in medicine, front-office response in public administration, and anomaly detection on a production line may yield different determinations. This problem of granularity is a weakness of this paper (Section 20), and this section does not dissolve it. What this section gives is the framework and the indicators for the determination, not the determination itself. Not exhaustive means that worlds falling under none of the three states are possible. A world in which the advance of the frontier continues while supplier concentration dissolves (a world in which many actors run abreast at the frontier), or a world in which open-weight models meet the requirement level while the electricity constraint continues to bind, corresponds purely to none of this paper's three states. The three states are not a partition of the world but an extraction of the principal directions of branching of observed trends. The reason these three directions were chosen is that they most strongly determine the validity of this paper's theoretical apparatus — the capability tiers (Definition 2), transformation value (Definition 5), the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6), critical-tier governance (Definition 7) — and not that they exhaust the diversity of the world. 16.1.4 Why No Probabilities Are Assigned This section assigns no probabilities to the three scenarios. Nor does it state which scenario is most possible. There are three reasons for this choice. First, there is no ground for it. Assigning probabilities requires either a frequentist ground or the explicit assumption of subjective probabilities. For the mode of advance of AI capability there is no frequentist basis — the unfolding of a general-purpose technology is a one-off process, and no reference class can be constituted. Assuming subjective probabilities is possible, but in that case the character of this paper's statements changes from analysis to forecast. This paper chooses to remain analysis. Second, assigning probabilities changes the quality of action. Once the statement "S1 at 70%" is presented, decision is steered toward the maximization of expected value. Maximizing expected value is optimal where the estimate of probability is correct, but where the estimate is mistaken it systematically leads to mistaken investment. Under deep uncertainty, the criterion should be robustness rather than expected value (Lempert et al., 2003). When Proposition 20 states that "the priority of investment should be determined not by the height of expected value but by cross-scenario robustness," it expresses this methodological position. Not presenting probabilities is not the withholding of information but a design intended to avoid steering toward a mistaken procedure of decision. 581 Third, assigning probabilities is bound up with this paper's structure of conflict of interest. The author of this paper is a practitioner conducting business and investment in the domains this paper recommends (front matter and Section 20). Attaching a high probability to a particular scenario means making a claim capable of affecting the prices of assets whose value rises under that scenario. Separating the presentation of analysis from the assertion of probability is the minimum discipline against this structural conflict of interest. 16.1.5 Contemporaneous Evidence of the Failure of Prediction — The 2026 Oil Market Supports the Restraint on Probabilities The three reasons given in Section 16.1.4 are all arguments from principle. The absence of ground, the steering of decision procedure, discipline against conflict of interest — these are sufficient as reasons for not assigning probabilities, but it is the reader who bears the price of not assigning them. A set of scenarios unaccompanied by probabilities is awkward as an input to decision. Section 20 (20.5, 20.12(g)) acknowledges this awkwardness as a limitation of this paper. What this subsection does is to add one argument from observation to the arguments from principle. What is used is the contemporaneous comparison with the 2026 oil market, introduced as a method in Section 3 and described as an observation in Section 6. The reason for using a contemporaneous comparison rather than a diachronic one (1973) lies in the character of the question, which concerns predictive capability. How well a field's predictions perform depends on the volume of data the field holds, the degree of standardization of measurement, and the number and resources of forecasting institutions. Comparing the 1973 record of oil forecasting with the predictability of AI would mix the difference between two resources with half a century of difference in statistical technique. With observations at the same point in time, this mixing does not arise. Oil in 2026 is a market equipped with the best modern conditions in statistics, measurement and institutions alike, and its record of prediction is material for gauging the upper bound of predictability for AI. The first observation — the outlooks of public institutions about one year ahead diverged widely from the outturn. The Short-Term Energy Outlook of the United States Energy Information Administration (EIA) as of July 2025 forecast an annual average WTI price for 2026 of 54.82 dollars per barrel, and saw OECD commercial oil inventories building to 66 days of cover by the end of 2026 — that is, moving toward oversupply. The grounds then given were relatively weak demand and firm growth in world supply (EIA Short-Term Energy Outlook, July 2025 issue; the figures are as compiled by Aegis Hedging, 2025). The outturn was as follows. OECD commercial oil inventories stood at 2,729 million barrels as of June 2026, 58.7 days of forward cover, 66.5 million barrels below the trailing five-year average (OPEC, 2026c). On the EIA's own compilation as of August 2026, world liquid fuels production in 2026 was 100.8 million barrels per day and consumption 102.7 582 million barrels per day, a difference of −1.9 million barrels per day, an inventory draw (EIA, 2026a). On inventories, that is, the direction came out inverted. Against an outlook of building, what actually occurred was drawing. On price, observed values in 2026 spanned at least the range from 68 to 144 dollars within the year, and the North Sea Dated price at the end of July was 96.80 dollars per barrel (IEA, 2026e). Saudi Aramco's average realized crude price for the first half of 2026 was 90.1 dollars per barrel (Saudi Aramco, 2026). This comparison has limits, and they are made explicit. The forecast value is WTI while the observed values are North Sea Dated and a company's realized price, so the benchmarks do not match. This is therefore not a strict comparison on an identical scale but a comparison of magnitudes as to level and direction. Even so, the difference between a forecast of 54.82 dollars and an outturn moving broadly in a band from 70 to 140 dollars through the year is of a size that the difference in benchmarks does not explain. Moreover, the inversion in the direction of inventories was observed on the same indicator (days of forward cover of OECD commercial inventories), and there the question of scale does not arise. The forecasting apparatus not only missed the level; it missed the sign. The second observation — the major international institutions do not even agree on the sign of the change in demand for the same year. On 12 August 2026 the IEA reported world oil demand for 2026 at −1.6 million barrels per day year on year (a decrease) (IEA, 2026e). On the same day, OPEC reported world oil demand for the same year 2026 at +0.6 million barrels per day year on year (an increase) (OPEC, 2026c). The difference is 2.2 million barrels per day, equivalent to roughly 2% of world demand. Both are institutions with access to primary statistics, and the year covered and the month of reporting are the same. This paper does not determine which is correct — it is not in a position to do so. What is used here is the fact of the disagreement itself. The argument this paper draws from these two observations is as follows. Oil is a market with more than a century of trading history, standardized units of measurement, internationally maintained daily price series and monthly inventory statistics, and several coexisting public and quasi-public specialist institutions publishing outlooks independently. It is difficult to name a general-purpose input better endowed with the conditions for prediction. Even in oil, the outlook for the annual average price about one year ahead came to some 60% of the outturn level, the direction of inventories came out inverted, and two institutions disagreed on the sign of the change in demand for the current year. The conditions for performing the same exercise for AI are no better than these. AI has no century of history, no agreement on the unit of measurement of capability (Definition 2, Section 5), and not even a settled unit in which to count demand — volume of processing, number of tasks completed, hours of labour substituted. There is therefore no reason to think that assigning probabilities in AI is easier than doing so in oil. This argument adds a fourth reason to the three of Section 16.1.4. That this paper gives no probabilities to its scenarios is not an expression of caution but a consequence derived 583 from the predictive record of a mature market. Not presenting probabilities is not a situation in which one who could present them refrains from doing so. Under an observation in which even the best forecasting apparatus of a mature market may err in sign about one year ahead, presenting probabilities for AI is not information but ornament — the attachment of a number creates an appearance of precision, and that appearance changes the procedure of decision. The second reason of Section 16.1.4 (steering toward the maximization of expected value) changes in character, under this observation, from a methodological preference to a judgment supported by evidence. At the same time, this observation positively supports the design of this paper's substitute — leading indicators (Definition 14). That prediction is impossible does not mean that nothing can be said. In oil in 2026, what missed was the prediction, not the observation. The inventory draw was observed monthly, supply was measured monthly, and prices were recorded daily. What missed was a statement about a level twelve months ahead, not an observation of what is now under way. The difficulty of prediction and the possibility of identification are separate problems — this asymmetry is the ground of the method by which this paper puts identification in the place of prediction. The leading indicators given in Section 16.5 are all constructed in a form that asks not "what will things be like a year from now" but "in which direction are they moving now," and the frequency of determination is quarterly as a base. That prediction is impossible does not make identification unnecessary; it makes identification necessary. Oil in 2026 is a contemporaneous instance of the correctness of this ordering. That identification functioned can also be confirmed on the side of quantities. For the oil market in 2026, the monthly reports in fact captured the following quantities — world supply moved to −4.3 million barrels per day year on year, and the outturn for July alone was 101.5 million barrels per day, −6.3 million barrels per day against the same month of the previous year. World observable inventories were drawn down by a cumulative 410 million barrels over the six months from February to July 2026, standing at just under 7.9 billion barrels at the end of July (IEA, 2026e). All of these were observed as directions in progress, before the consequences of events were settled. In the same period in which prediction erred, observation did not err. Of the three conditions this paper imposes on leading indicators (Definition 14), (i) repeated observability and (iii) leadingness are, in oil, already satisfied as institutions — the monthly supply-and-demand reports and the weekly inventory statistics are precisely that. What this paper attempts in Section 16.5 for AI is nothing other than to conceive, for another resource, the institution of observation that was built up for oil over half a century. The second observation can likewise be translated into a requirement on the design of indicators. That the IEA and OPEC reported opposite signs for the change in demand in the same year shows that institutional differences can enter on the side of observation as well. The difference between the two institutions is a difference in outlook about the future and at the same time a difference in method of estimating the outturn. Those who operate leading indicators must therefore not entrust determination to the series published 584 by a single institution. Several series covering the same object should be set side by side, and the widening of divergence between series should itself be treated as information — a widening divergence may be a symptom that the structure of the object observed is changing and that existing estimation methods are not keeping pace. This requirement weighs especially heavily on those of the indicators listed in Section 16.5.2 for which there is in substance only one publishing body (the series of capability indices and of inference prices). Oil has several independent measuring bodies, and even so the signs diverged. The bodies measuring the capability and price of AI are fewer than that. This contrast adds one concrete requirement to this paper's design of indicators. In oil in 2026, what invalidated the forecasts was an event arriving from outside the set of premises. The quarterly review of indicators (Appendix F) must therefore include a step that not only reads changes in the values of indicators but asks whether the set of premises itself is still valid. Confirming that indicators are moving as anticipated is not confirmation that the premises have not failed — where premises fail, indicators lose their meaning before they move. That Section 16.5.3 warns against determination on a single indicator, and that Section 16.5.4 designs discrimination by combinations of indicators, is a partial response to this danger, but only partial. Events from outside the set of premises are, by definition, not captured by combinations of indicators. It may be added that this observation also reinforces the significance of Proposition 20 (no-regret actions). In an environment where prediction may err in sign, a procedure that sets the priority of investment by expected value converts errors in the estimate of probability directly into errors of investment. Selection by cross-scenario robustness, by contrast, does not require estimates of probability as an input. Oil in 2026 showed that the input demanded by selection on expected value — reliable probabilities — is not supplied even in a mature market. This paper's choice of robustness as the criterion is not a compromise with the inconvenience of not obtaining probabilities but the choice of the correct procedure in an environment where probabilities are not obtainable. Excessive generalization must nonetheless be avoided. That predictions missed does not mean that prediction is without value. Three reservations are attached. First, the outlooks of public institutions are not unconditional forecasts but conditional outlooks. The outlooks of the EIA, the IEA and OPEC are published together with a set of premises about demand growth, supply capacity and inventory levels. It is precisely because the premises are made explicit that, when the outturn diverges, it is possible to identify after the fact which premise failed. This identifiability is the principal value of an outlook, and being right or wrong is its by-product. Second, a substantial part of the 2026 divergence derives from supply-side events not contained in the set of premises as of July 2025 — the large-scale shortfall in supply observed from February 2026 onward. This paper does not enter into the causes of events, but it can record the fact that the event arrived from outside the set of premises. A forecasting apparatus functions inside its premises and does not function outside them. What this subsection has shown is therefore not that "forecasting institutions have low capability" but that "events arriving from outside the set of 585 premises can occur even in a mature market at a frequency of about once a year." Third, the claim of this paper that follows from the above is not "do not make outlooks" but "do not give outlooks the appearance of probability." That the IEA and OPEC published outlooks of opposite sign in the same month while both continued to publish outlooks is also a statement by the parties themselves that conditional outlooks have value. The limits of the observations in this subsection — that they treat an event still in progress, that the observation period extends only to a single year, and that the sample of comparison is only two resources — are recorded as limitations at 20.10(h), (i) and (j). Below, Sections 16.2 through 16.4 describe the three scenarios in turn. The order of description is not an order of likelihood. S1 is placed first only because it is the extrapolation of the trends currently observed and because describing the other two scenarios as "departures from it" is efficient in exposition. Figure 10. The branching of the three world scenarios and the leading indicators — three paths, S1 (Fragmentation), S2 (Diffusion) and S3 (Stagnation), extend from the branching point, and the leading indicators for identification are attached to each path. As a band common to all paths, the no-regret actions (national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, operational readiness) are placed along the bottom. Definitions 13 and 14, Proposition 20 Present (branch point) [S2] Diffusion Open-weight and edge execution meet the requirements of use Narrowing of the lag width Diffusion of edge inference chips [S1] Fragmentation (base case) Compute dependence, supplier concentration, cross-axis transition, power limits Wider use of access-control measures Longer grid-connection queues [S3] Stagnation Diminishing returns; levelling of AI capability Smaller gains between generations Worse returns on frontier investment The nine cells degenerate to three; value moves to data and implementation The nine cells operate most strongly; cross-axis transition and power limits dominate C3 does not arrive; Section 9 remains a counterfactual No-regret actions (Proposition 20) Marginal value is positive in every world National brain capital / exclusive domain data / value-definition capability / operational readiness This figure is a branching for identification, not a prediction. The three states are neither exclusive nor exhaustive, and different states may obtain simultaneously by sector and by use (Definition 13). 586 16.2 [S1] The Fragmentation Scenario (Base Case) 16.2.1 The Content of This World S1 is, as Definition 13 states, the state in which the advance of the frontier continues to depend on large-scale compute, supplier concentration is maintained, the allocation of capability is taken up into the logic of national security, and electricity and compute operate as rate-limiting factors. Its content is given in four components. Component (a) The persistence of the capital intensity of the frontier. A state in which the resources required to renew capability at the frontier continue to increase and the number of actors able to enter does not increase. On the estimates of Epoch AI, the amortized hardware cost and electricity cost required for the final training run of frontier models have grown since 2016 at an annual factor of approximately 2.4 (90% confidence interval 2.0–3.1), and if this trend continues it is projected that a single training run exceeds one billion dollars by 2027 (Cottier, Rahman et al., 2024). This projection is not a claim of this paper; it is cited as the extrapolation of that study. S1 is the world in which the extrapolation is realized. Component (b) The maintenance of supplier concentration. A state in which the number of actors able to supply models within a lag width of the frontier that is negligible in practice remains small. As of 2026, the development actors able to supply models qualifying as "frontier" are concentrated in some ten firms worldwide, and among them those that define the frontier are a small number of actors in the United States (evidence note B). There is concentration on the side of the execution foundation as well. The world cloud market is accounted for as to approximately two-thirds by the top three firms (rounded expression is used because definitions differ between compilers). S1 is the world in which this double concentration — the model layer and the foundation layer — does not move toward dissolution. Component (c) The advance of cross-axis transition. A state in which the cross-axis transition described by Proposition 16 (Section 15) — pressure moving the logic governing the allocation of capability from the logic of economics to the logic of national security — advances. From the export control rule of October 2022, by way of the amendment of October 2023, the "AI diffusion framework" announced in January 2025 expanded the object of regulation from chips to the global allocation of capability. That framework was withdrawn on 13 May 2025 before entry into force, and since then the arrangement has shifted to transaction-type control not resting on a comprehensive rule (evidence note B). S1 is the world in which this transaction-type control settles as an institution and the state of affairs in which availability to non-allied states is a function of political position rather than of price and quality persists. What must be noted here is that the controlling actor is not single. As of August 2026 it is reported that only a limited proportion of the quota of reopened high-end chips directed to China has actually been delivered, and that review on the importing side operates as a constraint (evidence note B, ○ supported by evidence). 587 S1 is not "a world in which one party controls another" but a world in which both control one another. Component (d) Rate-limiting by electricity. A state in which the expansion of computing infrastructure is rate-limited by the physical constraints of generation and grid. World data centre electricity consumption was approximately 415 TWh in 2024 (approximately 1.5% of world electricity consumption) and is projected to more than double to approximately 945 TWh by 2030 (IEA, 2025a). In the United States, data centres are projected to account for nearly half the increase in electricity demand to 2030. The locus of the constraint lies further upstream. Approximately 2,300 GW of projects (about twice the installed generating capacity of approximately 1,300 GW) are held up in the United States grid interconnection queue; the median time from interconnection application to commercial operation exceeds four years; and of the capacity that applied between 2000 and 2019, 13% reached commercial operation (LBNL, 2025). In Japan too, new and expanded data centres and semiconductor plants are projected to add by fiscal 2035 7.62 million kW in peak demand (approximately 4.6% of the national total) and 56.8 billion kWh in electricity demand (approximately 6.7%), and are the principal cause of Japan's electricity demand turning upward for the first time in approximately twenty years (Organization for Cross-regional Coordination of Transmission Operators, 2026). S1 is the world in which this multi-stage bottleneck — the constraint on AI is electricity, and the constraint on electricity is the grid and construction lead times — is not relieved. 16.2.2 Why It Is Called the Base Case This paper calls S1 the "base case." Because this label invites misreading, its content is stated precisely. The base case means the world obtained by extrapolating currently observed trends, and it does not mean the most probable world. The four components above are all constructed as continuations of facts observed as of August 2026 — the annual factor of 2.4 in training cost growth is the extrapolation of an observed series; supplier concentration is the observed present state; the course of export controls is observed institutional history; and the electricity constraint is observed grid data. To extrapolate is to assume that a known trend continues without structural change. Nowhere is there any guarantee that this assumption is correct. If anything, in the history of the unfolding of general-purpose technologies, cases in which the extrapolation of a trend was betrayed by structural change are the more numerous (Section 4). The reasons for using the label are methodological. First, a reference point for comparison is needed. S2 and S3 are described more concisely and clearly as departures from S1 — S2 can be described as the world in which components (a) and (b) break down, S3 as the world in which component (a) breaks down in another mode. Second, it functions as the counterfactual benchmark in policy design. To ask whether a given investment "has meaning only under S1" or "has meaning even if not under S1" requires S1 as a benchmark. 588 What the label does not assert is also made explicit. This paper does not state that the probability of S1 is higher than that of the other two scenarios. Nor does it state that S1 is an "undesirable" world or one "to be avoided" — the normative evaluation of each scenario depends on the position of the evaluating party and is outside the domain quantified in this paper. Under S1 there are groups of states that are disadvantaged and groups that are advantaged. This section describes that distribution. 16.2.3 Consequences for Each Cell in This World The consequences on the nine cells if S1 obtains are stated by row and by column. M1×C2 (Resource-Producing Model × frontier tier). The position of this cell is strengthened. Because the capital requirements of the frontier increase and the number of entering actors does not, the relative position of actors already standing in this cell rises without additional effort. But the pressure of the producing state's curse of concentration described by Proposition 6a (Section 8) also intensifies — the possibility that the drawing of enormous capital and electricity into this one domain distorts allocation to other sectors. In addition, under S1 the problem of recovering investment becomes structurally severe. While training costs grow at annual factors of more than two, the inference price of capability levels already attained falls at annual factors ranging from 9 to 900 depending on the task (Epoch AI, 2025). The asymmetry by which construction costs rise at an accelerating rate while the marginal cost of already attained capability collapses means, for frontier suppliers, a structure in which investment cannot be recovered unless new capability is continually sold. S1 guarantees this actor a dominant position, but not a comfortable one. M1×C1 (Resource-Producing Model × commodity tier). This position — producing openweight or general-purpose lower-tier models and deriving value not from sales revenue but from ecosystem externalities and the formation of standards (Definition 3) — subsists under S1 as well. Indeed, in a world where access to the frontier is allocated politically, the relative value of capability supplied without political conditions rises. The double structure observed under S1 — frontier closed models concentrated in one country while the frontier of open weights is led by actors of another country (evidence note B) — shows that this position carries geopolitical significance. M2×C2 (Transformation Model × frontier tier). The cell this paper regards as most important (Section 10) becomes, under S1, the position of highest tension. There are two reasons. First, security of procurement becomes the point at issue. This cell is the position of procuring frontier capability externally and transforming it, and under S1 the conditions of procurement are a function of politics, so the first condition of Proposition 4 (Section 7) becomes directly the condition of survival. Second, pressure on the transformation margin from both sides intensifies. From upstream, the standard inclusion of general-purpose functionality by producers, and from downstream, the bargaining power of the demand side, compress the margin. Survival of this cell under S1 depends on whether the locus of value can be moved to the transformation margin protected by integration cost — 589 that is, to the domain protected by complementary assets and national brain capital (Definition 11, Section 10). M2×C1 and M3×C1. For transformation and utilization at the commodity tier, obtaining the capability itself presents no difficulty under S1 either. The difficulty lies elsewhere — in the foundation of execution. Open weights supply the lower bound of capability itself irrevocably, but they do not supply the compute capacity and electricity to execute it, the renewal capability to follow new generations, or the conditions for processing sensitive data domestically (Proposition 13, Section 18). Because electricity and computing infrastructure are rate-limiting under S1, a situation may arise in which capability is obtainable at no charge but cannot be executed. The observation that only some 30 countries worldwide have public cloud GPU regions for AI, and that the world divides into "Compute North / Compute South / Compute Desert" (Lehdonvirta, Wú & Hawkins, 2024), shows the geographical distribution of this constraint. M3×C2 (Utilization Model × frontier tier). The position of feeding frontier capability into domestic processes of production and living so as to amplify other value is the most vulnerable under S1. The reasons are set out in detail in Section 16.2.5. Row C3. One point is made explicit in advance here. C3 (the critical tier) is at the time of writing an unrealized anticipatory category (Definition 2, Section 5). Where C3 is mentioned below, that is not a forecast of arrival but a conditional description of its character should it arrive. S1 is constructed as the world in which, should C3 arrive, its arrival is most apt to occur — because a structure in which the advance of the frontier continues to depend on large-scale compute and a small number of actors carry it is consistent with the path of attainment to "a level of capability exceeding the frontier of the time in question by at least a stipulated threshold" stated in Definition 2. S1 is therefore the world in which the critical-tier governance argument of Section 9 has the highest relevance. This point is treated in Section 16.2.6. 16.2.4 The Winning Path for the Transformation Model The path by which a Transformation Model state retains value under S1 is stated, taking the analysis of Section 10 as given. The conditions of viability identified in Section 10 were the four indicators of complementary assets (exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, linguistic-contextual specificity) and, as their substrate, national brain capital (Definition 11). S1 changes which of these conditions becomes relatively more important. First, the relative value of physical-interface intensity rises. Because under S1 access to AI capability itself is allocated politically, it is not easy for the side holding capability to substitute for the physical processes of the side that does not. Transformation embedded in manufacturing, maintenance and on-site operation is not displaced by the export of capability. This means that what Section 10 assessed as "the hardest indicator" is reinforced further under S1.

Second, the diversification of procurement itself becomes part of transformation value. Under S1, a transformer depending for procurement on a single supplier and a single jurisdiction loses the premise of its business upon a change in the conditions of supply. The capability to procure across several suppliers and several jurisdictions and to execute a switch — the operational readiness of Definition 6(iii) — therefore becomes not an item of crisis management but a component of transformation value in ordinary times. What customers pay a transformer includes not only the quality of transformation but consideration for supply not stopping. Third, the importance of institutional embeddedness rises. Under S1, regulation, certification and procurement requirements take on the logic of national security. The capability to comply with regulation itself becomes a barrier to entry, and a transformer standing inside that barrier holds an advantage over external actors of higher capability that are not connected to the institutions. This is double-edged, however — as Section 10 noted as failure mode (d), a deficiency in the capability to comply with regulation becomes fatal by the same logic. Fourth, a minimum engagement with the higher tier becomes indispensable. The structure Section 10 formulated as "placing the visible economic engine at M2×C2 while securing a guarantee level behind it" becomes, under S1, not a choice but a requirement. What is to be guaranteed is not the frontier of capability but the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability and the sensitive-processing condition that sustain degraded operation of critical processes in a situation where external supply has stopped (Definition 6(i-a) to (i-c), Section 13). 16.2.5 The Vulnerability of the Utilization Model The most disadvantaged position under S1 is that of states performing no transformation and only utilization. The structure of the vulnerability is set out in four points. First, exposure converts into dependence. Definition 4 (Section 13) distinguishes exposure from dependence — exposure is the scale of external procurement of AI inputs, dependence is degradation at the moment of interruption. Where exposure is high but substitution functions immediately, dependence is low. Under S1, this condition that "substitution functions immediately" is difficult to satisfy. In a world where suppliers are concentrated and allocation is a function of politics, either there is no destination to switch to, or the destinations that exist are subject to the same political conditions. S1 is therefore a world with a high coefficient converting exposure into dependence. Second, the outflow of income becomes structural. In a state performing only utilization, consideration for AI inputs is paid abroad, and whether value added commensurate with that consideration is retained domestically depends on the depth of utilization. That the deficit on Japan's digital-related balance widened from approximately 2.0 trillion yen in 2014 to approximately 6.7 trillion yen in 2024 (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2025), with the principal cause being the expansion of corporate cloud use, is 591 the empirical anchor of this structure. What matters is not the amount of the deficit itself — as the Ministry of Finance's study group and private analyses note, the digital deficit is not in itself an evil; the substance is whether it can be recovered through productivity gains from utilization. The determining indicator is, as Proposition 13 (Section 18) states, domestic value added per yen of digital procurement. S1 is a world in which this indicator is apt to deteriorate, because procurement prices may rise politically while the depth of utilization does not rise automatically. Third, the consequences of AI outage are heaviest. "AI outage" (this paper's coinage, Definition 4, Section 13) is a correlated stoppage of the supply of AI services caused by technical failure, commercial judgment or geopolitical measures. Under S1, the probability that the third of these causes — geopolitical measures — operates is structurally high. In addition, because supplier concentration is maintained, the path by which a local failure is amplified into the system as a whole remains. The case in the autumn of 2025 in which successive large-scale failures at the cloud and CDN layers propagated vertically into higher AI services (evidence note D) illustrates one form of vulnerability under S1. And states fixed in the Utilization Model have no domestic operational capacity to sustain degraded operation against such a stoppage. Fourth, the externalization of value-definition capability advances. This is the deepest vulnerability. A state performing only utilization entrusts the design of the purposes to which AI is put to the shape of the products the supplier of capability provides. As Proposition 17 (Section 17) states, as capability descends to C1 the competitive advantage of making work more efficient diminishes and the residual moves to value-definition capability (Definition 12). Under S1, a state fixed in the Utilization Model is placed in a structure of maximizing the diminishing variable (efficiency) while externalizing the variable in which the residual arises (definition). This is precisely the (iii) value-definition constraint of Proposition 21 (Section 14). 16.2.6 The Relevance of Critical-Tier Governance It is stated once again. C3 is at the time of writing an unrealized anticipatory category. Whether and when it arrives is an empirical question, and this paper makes no claim about either. On that basis, it is stated that the relevance of the critical-tier governance argument of Section 9 is not uniform across the three scenarios. S1 is the world in which the relevance of the argument of Section 9 is highest. There are three reasons. First, where component (a) of S1 persists, the frontier of capability remains anchored to large-scale compute. As Proposition 9 (Section 9) states, whether a verification function is established as an institution in an international regime for the management of dangerous capability is governed by whether the object of management is accompanied by a measurable physical correlate. In AI, only compute, electricity and facilities can serve as an 592 anchor of type (i). S1 is the world in which this anchor remains effective, and therefore the only world in which critical-tier governance is technically designable. Second, as component (c) of S1 indicates, the allocation of capability is already being taken up into the logic of national security. This institutional path — export control, access control, allocation within alliances — may function as an institutional precursor of critical- tier governance. When Section 9 stated that "critical-tier governance is a constructed contingency, and to wait for its arrival before designing it is too late," it presupposed the existence of such a precursor. Third, under S1 the depreciation of the anchor may be fastest. As Definition 9 (the half-life of the verification anchor, Section 9) formulates, by Frontier Descent the compute required to attain any given level of capability decreases with a half-life. Under S1, at the same time, the frontier advances at an accelerating rate. The composition of these two movements — the advance of the frontier and the decrease in the compute requirement of known capability — determines the difficulty of designing thresholds for critical-tier governance. The need to build continual downward revision of thresholds into the institution (Proposition 9) is most acute under S1. 16.3 [S2] The Diffusion Scenario 16.3.1 The Content of This World S2 is the state in which open-weight and small-scale models come to meet the requirement level of uses at the edge, the effective significance of capability distance (Definition 2) contracts, and supplier concentration moves toward dissolution. Its content is given in three components. Component (a) The substantive disappearance of the lag width. A state in which the capability gap between the strongest open-weight models and the closed frontier narrows to a length negligible in practice. On the estimates of Epoch AI, since January 2026 the strongest open-weight models have followed the closed frontier at an average lag of several months. Estimates vary by indicator, with the principal 2026 estimates giving broadly three to four months. Compared with estimates of approximately one year across 2024 and 2025, the lag width is trending downward (evidence note B). In addition, the actors at the open-weight frontier have themselves changed — where United States firms once led, from 2025 into 2026 several Chinese actors have come to occupy the leading positions. S2 is the world in which this narrowing continues and the lag width becomes meaningless from the standpoint of the requirement level of uses. Component (b) The fall in inference costs, and executability at the edge. The minimum inference price at which a given performance level is achieved has been falling at annual factors ranging from 9 to 900 depending on the task (Epoch AI, 2025). More concretely, the inference cost corresponding to GPT-3.5-class performance fell by a factor of more than 280 between November 2022 and October 2024 (Stanford HAI, 2025). The 593 former is a rate of decline and the latter a cumulative multiple over the whole observation period, and the two notations are not directly comparable (the distinction of notations is at Section 13.1). Hardware costs are falling at approximately 30% a year and energy efficiency improving at approximately 40% a year. S2 is the world in which this decline continues, so that practical levels of capability become executable on the compute of end devices without requiring large-scale cloud computing infrastructure. That the group of Japanese domestic models has converged on "lightweight, compute-frugal, on-premises execution" and "domain specialization" (evidence note F) shows that a technical wager in this direction has already been made. Component (c) The dissolution of supplier concentration. A state in which, as a consequence of components (a) and (b), the need to route access to capability through particular suppliers and particular jurisdictions is lost. Already published open weights supply the lower bound of capability itself at no charge and irrevocably — a property that, as Section 13 noted, cannot be recovered retroactively even by export controls. S2 is the world in which this irrevocably supplied lower bound comes to lie above the requirement level of uses. 16.3.2 This World Is One in Which the Falsification Conditions of This Paper's Framework Are Met The most important work of this section begins here. S2 is the world in which the falsification conditions of this paper's core propositions are met. This fact is stated without reservation and in concrete terms. The falsification condition of Proposition 2 (covariation of tier and governance, Section 5) is that if supplier concentration and the efficacy of access control are observed to vary continuously and monotonically with capability distance — that is, if no step-like discontinuity is detected — the description "tiers" is rejected and AI capability is to be described as a single continuous market. When components (a) and (c) of S2 obtain, this falsification condition is met. If the open-weight frontier reaches, on a standing basis and at a short lag, capability practically indistinguishable from the closed frontier, and if access-control measures lose efficacy through circumvention, there is no point of discontinuity dividing C1 from C2. In that case, this paper's nine cells degenerate into three cells. If the capability tiers converge into a single commodity tier, only the three types M1, M2 and M3 remain and the C axis loses its meaning as a unit of description. The row-by-row analysis constituting Sections 7, 8 and 9 does not thereby lose significance outright, but the disappearance of the distinction between rows contracts it substantially. What Section 20 acknowledges as "the world in which the nine cells degenerate into three" is precisely this world. This section does not repeat that acknowledgment but describes that world squarely as an independent scenario, thereby raising the acknowledgment into analysis. What is lost is enumerated. 594 First, the capability tiers (Definition 2) lapse as a unit of description. The three-tier division C1, C2, C3 presupposed the observation that forms of governance respond in steplike fashion to a single continuous quantity, capability distance. Under S2, the steps disappear. Definition 2 does not thereby become erroneous — the definition states only a division by capability distance — but the substantive significance of the division is lost. The greater part of the construction of Section 5 was devoted to arguing that significance. Second, the first condition of Proposition 4 (conditions for the survival of the Transformation Model, Section 7) ceases to be at issue. In a world where anyone can procure equivalent capability without restriction, security of procurement drops out of the strategic variables. Likewise, the structure that Section 10 formulated as "the minimum engagement with the higher tier necessary for retention" largely loses the ground of its necessity. Third, Definition 6 (the sovereign minimum guarantee level) and the greater part of the design argument of Section 13 become unnecessary. Stockpiling is needed because supply is constrained, and if capability is replicable without restriction and no one rations it, the problem of designing a guarantee level contracts. The "depreciation in proportion to the rate of advance of the frontier" described by Proposition 8 (asymmetry of stockpiling, Section 13) likewise loses its object in a world where the gap relative to the frontier has no significance. Fourth, the C3 governance argument of Propositions 9 and 10 loses its ground. The verification function of critical-tier governance is designable only by taking compute as an anchor (Proposition 9). If capability can be attained on dispersed, small-scale compute, compute ceases to be detectable, excludable or quantifiable and does not function as an anchor. As the falsification condition of Proposition 9 states expressly, this deprives the whole of Section 9 of its ground. Fifth, the operating range of Proposition 16 (pressure toward cross-axis transition, Section 15) narrows. Pressure moving the allocation of capability into the logic of national security presupposes that there is a scarcity to be allocated. If scarcity disappears, the pressure remains only as institutional inertia, and the claim of irreversibility becomes meaningless without being tested. This is no small loss for this paper. Of this paper's nineteen substantive sections, the principal parts of Section 5, Sections 7 through 9, and Section 13 — a considerable share by volume — remain under S2 only as a historical record. Describing carefully, and by one's own hand, a world unfavourable to one's own thesis is the core of this section's honesty. This paper states neither that this world is "impossible" nor that it is "undesirable." It admits that a world in which its framework lapses is in fact possible, and describes what that world is like with the same precision as the other scenarios. 595 16.3.3 What Remains Nonetheless What of this paper remains under S2 is stated. What remains is in fact the part this paper regards as most important. First, the three types M1, M2 and M3 and the concept of transformation value (Definition 5, Section 7) remain. Whatever the structure of the supply of capability, the distinction between the position that produces a resource, the position that transforms it, and the position that utilizes it holds. Indeed, in a world where the tiers collapse and AI capability is completely commoditized, the second condition of Proposition 4 — holding complementary assets that the producer cannot replicate — comes to the fore as the only branching condition. In a world where everyone has the same capability, only complementary assets, and not capability, produce differences. Second, value moves wholly to domain data and implementation capability. This is the central consequence of S2. When general-purpose capability is obtainable by anyone, only three reasons remain why one actor generates more value than another — (i) holding data that others do not hold, (ii) holding the implementation capability to embed that data and that capability into actual work processes, and (iii) holding the capability to decide what should be implemented. Of the content Section 10 identified as the four indicators of complementary assets, (a) exclusive data endowment and (b) physical-interface intensity correspond to (i) and (ii), (c) institutional embeddedness to (ii), and (d) linguisticcontextual specificity to (i). S2 is a world that nullifies part of the analysis of Section 10 and at the same time reinforces its core. Third, the relative importance of national brain capital (Definition 11, Section 10) in fact rises. This point requires particular emphasis. As Proposition 18 (Section 10) states, what can be obtained by importing AI capability is capability and not national brain capital. Under S2, capability is supplied wholly at no charge and universally. Differences between states that had been explained by the acquisition of capability therefore become entirely a residual to be explained by national brain capital and complementary assets. Tacit knowledge of the field, judgment embedded in language and culture, the professional ethics and working practices that make trust in institutions possible, and the capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience — these four components become the only factor of differentiation under S2. When Proposition 20 states that marginal value is positive under S2 "as the only factor of differentiation converting dispersed capability into value," it refers to this structure. Fourth, Proposition 5 (the compounding of the Utilization Model, Section 7) is unaffected. The structure of the product of diffusion rate and absorptive capacity is independent of the structure of the supply of capability. If anything, under S2 the fall in the cost of obtaining capability raises the ceiling on the diffusion rate and enlarges the basis of compounding. What is rate-limiting here is absorptive capacity — that is, the side of organizations, institutions and people — which is another expression of national brain capital. 596 Fifth, Proposition 17 (diminishing returns to efficiency and the residual of valuedefinition capability, Section 17) operates most sharply under S2. Proposition 17 states that as capability descends to C1 the competitive advantage of making work more efficient diminishes toward zero with the fall in the cost of imitation. S2 is the world in which all capability has descended to C1. Under S2, therefore, competitive advantage through efficiency gains disappears almost entirely and the whole of the residual moves to valuedefinition capability (Definition 12, Section 17). S2 is the world in which the claim of Section 17 of this paper holds most strongly. This is paradoxical — the world that nullifies much of this paper's framework is the world that most strongly corroborates the claim of its deepest layer. 16.3.4 The Fall in AI Outage Risk, and the Concentration That Remains Under S2, the risk of AI outage (Definition 4, Section 13) falls substantially. Each of the three causes is treated. The risk of stoppage through geopolitical measures nearly disappears. If capability is published irrevocably and can be obtained and executed from any jurisdiction, accesscontrol measures lose efficacy. The state described in Proposition 2(i), that "access-control measures lose efficacy through circumvention even where they are applied," extends across the whole range of capability. The risk of stoppage through commercial judgment also falls, because several alternatives exist against a change of price, a change of terms or a termination of service by a single supplier. Switching to an alternative, however, requires procedures and personnel. The operational readiness of Definition 6(iii) does not lose value under S2 — if anything, it is precisely in a world where many alternatives exist that whether a switch can be executed produces differences. The risk of stoppage through technical failure falls only partially. This is an important reservation under S2. Even if open weights diffuse, the execution foundation for largescale inference may remain concentrated in cloud providers. Uses executable at the edge and uses still requiring a large-scale execution foundation exist simultaneously. The problems of supplier concentration and outage correlation therefore persist, having moved from the model layer to the foundation layer. The structure in which the top three firms account for approximately two-thirds of the world cloud market may be maintained independently of dispersion at the model layer. The successive cloud and CDN layer failures of the autumn of 2025, propagating vertically into higher services, are a form of failure that may recur under S2 as well. This reservation carries a policy implication. What becomes unnecessary under S2 is "the stockpiling of capability," not "redundancy of the execution foundation." The formulation of Proposition 13 (Section 18), that "the object of state investment is not the acquisition of capability but the construction of the conditions for executing, renewing and protecting 597 capability," is maintained as it stands under S2. If anything, because only the latter half of that formulation remains under S2, the focus of policy becomes clearer. 16.3.5 Who Is Advantaged in This World Those relatively advantaged under S2 are states holding assets outside capability. Concretely: (i) states able to protect exclusive domain data institutionally while making use of it, (ii) states holding a thick physical interface — the sites of manufacturing, maintenance, medicine, care and logistics, and (iii) states holding the organizational capability to carry out the introduction of AI as a redesign of work processes. Conversely, those disadvantaged are actors that have made the supply of capability itself their principal source of value, and states that have placed the assurance of access to capability at the centre of national strategy. For the latter, S2 is a world in which the premise of their investment to date is lost. It must be avoided, here, simply to state that S2 is "a world desirable for middle powers." That barriers of capability disappear under S2 means that barriers to entrants disappear as well. Where a state's manufacturing industry derives high value from domain-specific AI, under S2 the cost for actors of other states to imitate that specialized AI falls likewise. What is protected is not capability but data and the field. For a middle power holding neither data nor field, S2 is not a rescue. The (ii) data-sovereignty constraint of Proposition 21 (Section 14) operates most severely under S2 — a state unable to design for itself the conditions on which the data of its own language, industry and administration are handed to external foundations has, even in a world where capability has become free, no basis for differentiation. 16.4 [S3] The Stagnation Scenario 16.4.1 The Content of This World S3 is the state in which the advance of capability meets diminishing returns, the increment of capability per unit of additional investment falls below the opportunity cost of that investment, and AI capability is levelled into a general-purpose tool. The distinction from S2 is made clear — S2 is the world in which "following becomes fast," S3 the world in which "the leader ceases to advance." The two overlap in part in their consequences (in both, the gap in capability loses significance), but the mechanisms differ, and the movements of observed indicators therefore differ as well. Its content is given in three components. Component (a) Diminishing increments of performance across generations. A state in which the increment of performance a new generation of models brings over the previous generation diminishes relative to the increment of resources put in. When this diminution proceeds to the level at which the marginal capability of additional investment falls below its opportunity cost, a rational actor stops investing. What matters here is that S3 is 598 defined as "the halt of investment" and not "the halt of technology." Even where further advance is technically possible, if the resources required for that advance yield less than they would in other uses, the advance does not occur. Component (b) The breakdown of investment recovery. A state, following from component (a), in which investment in frontier development is not recovered. The asymmetry described in Section 16.2.3 — construction costs rising at an annual factor of 2.4 while the inference price of already attained capability collapses by orders of magnitude per year — takes on decisive significance under S3. For investment to be recovered under this asymmetry, new capability must continually keep selling. At the point at which the increment of performance across generations no longer exceeds the willingness to pay on the demand side, this path of recovery closes. Component (c) Levelling into a general-purpose tool. A state in which AI is treated not as a special strategic resource but as ordinary business software on a par with spreadsheets and databases. In this state, the property of Definition 1(iv), that the level of holdings of and access to AI governs the gap in capability between states, ceases to hold. As Definition 1 makes explicit, strategic character is determined not by the physical properties of a resource but by its relation to the economic structure of its era. S3 is the world in which the strategic character of AI declines. It may be noted that examining the possibility of S3 is consistent with the breadth of the empirical range of estimates of AI's economic impact. Estimates of the macroeconomic effect of AI span roughly an order of magnitude, from a cautious estimate raising total factor productivity by 0.53–0.66% over ten years (Acemoglu, 2024) to an optimistic estimate raising world GDP by 7% (Goldman Sachs, 2023) (evidence note F). This breadth is itself an expression of the fact that S3 is not excluded. In addition, the delay of productivity effects in the history of the unfolding of general-purpose technologies — the approximately forty years from the commercialization of the central power station (1882) to the appearance of productivity effects in factories (the 1920s) (David, 1990), and apparent stagnation caused by intangible investment in the early phase of adoption going unmeasured (Brynjolfsson, Rock & Syverson, 2021) — gives the caution in the reverse direction that an observation of S3 does not mean the existence of S3. It is difficult to distinguish ex ante whether observed stagnation is diminishing returns or the trough of a J-curve caused by a lag in complementary investment. This difficulty of discrimination is taken up again in Section 16.5.3. 16.4.2 The Non-Arrival of C3 and the Standing of Section 9 It is stated once again. C3 (the critical tier) is at the time of writing an unrealized anticipatory category (Definition 2, Section 5), and whether and when it arrives is an empirical question. If S3 obtains, C3 does not arrive. C3 in Definition 2 is "an unrealized level of capability exceeding the frontier of the time in question by at least a stipulated threshold," and if the 599 frontier ceases to advance the path of attainment to that level closes. Under S3, therefore, the critical-tier governance argument of Section 9 remains as a counterfactual. This paper must here put a question to itself. Was it nevertheless worth writing Section 9? To evade this question would be contrary to the purpose of this section. The answer is given in three points. First, partially yes. The core contribution of Section 9 lies not in argument specific to C3 but in comparison across regimes. Proposition 9 (the verification anchor hypothesis) extracted, across the four regimes of nuclear, chemical, biological and missile, the structure that verification mechanisms were established only in regimes whose object of management was accompanied by a measurable physical correlate. This extraction is an empirical claim holding independently of whether C3 arrives in AI, and it is applicable to the international management of new technologies other than AI. In addition, the structure formulated by Definition 9 (the half-life of the verification anchor) — that because thresholds depreciate with technical progress, fixed thresholds lose efficacy within a few years — applies directly, independently of the arrival of C3, to the threshold design of existing export controls. Regulatory methods delimiting capability by amount of computation are already in use, and the obsolescence of their thresholds is an ongoing problem. Second, it is nevertheless limited. A considerable part of Section 9 — the design of the nonproliferation function, the design of the stabilization function, the asymmetry of a freeze and instability (Proposition 10) — presupposes the existence of C3. Under S3 these remain as a record of preparation against a state of affairs that did not occur. As to this part, this paper should admit that the cost was wasted. Third, the reason for writing it nonetheless lies in an asymmetric cost structure. What Section 9 asserted was that "critical-tier governance is a constructed contingency, and to wait for its arrival before designing it is too late." The cost if C3 does not arrive is that the analysis written remains as a counterfactual. The cost if C3 arrives and institutions are not prepared is far greater. Under this asymmetry, the expected value of preparation may be positive even where the probability of arrival is low. This line of argument has a limit, however. The same argument can be used to justify preparation for any lowprobability, high-impact event, and so does not serve as a guide to the allocation of resources. That the analysis of Section 9 occupies a considerable share of this paper's volume is not justified by this argument alone. This paper records the point as one to be added to the acknowledgment of limitations in Section 20. 16.4.3 The Sources of Value Return to the Physical and the Human Under S3, where do the sources of value move? As Definition 1 states, the strategic character of a general-purpose input is determined by its relation to the economic structure of its era. When the strategic character of AI declines, what rises in relative strategic character are elements not substituted by AI and constrained in supply. Three are named. 600 First, physical assets and physical processes. In a world where AI is levelled into a gen

First, physical assets and physical processes. In a world where AI is levelled into a general- purpose tool, the difference made by having AI disappears and the difference is made by whether one has the object to which AI is applied. Manufacturing equipment, logistics networks, energy facilities, medical and care facilities — these require time and capital to replicate and are constrained by location. Physical-interface intensity, which Section 10 assessed as "the hardest indicator," converts most directly into value under S3. Second, human beings. Under S3, AI settles not as "a technology that substitutes for human beings" but as "a tool of human beings." In this world, what determines outcomes is not the performance of the tool but the capability of the human beings using it. The four components of national brain capital (Definition 11) — tacit knowledge of the field, judgment embedded in language and culture, the professional ethics that sustain trust in institutions, the capacity for audit based on long domain experience — all become elements that generate value directly. That Japan's labour productivity per hour stands in a relatively low position among OECD countries, while its working-age population is projected to fall from 74.06 million in 2020 to 59.78 million in 2040 (evidence note F), suggests that under S3 the constraint of human resources becomes most directly a constraint on growth. Third, the field. At the intersection of physical assets and human beings lies the design and operation of work processes themselves. Under S3, because efficiency gains from introducing AI are equally available to all, what produces differences is not the extent of the efficiency gain but how work processes are redesigned. This is the problem of value-definition capability described by Proposition 17 (Section 17), and under S3, as under S2 — though by a different mechanism — value-definition capability absorbs the residual. Under S2 through the universalization of capability, and under S3 through the stagnation of capability, in both cases the competition over "how to achieve a given objective more cheaply and quickly" comes to an end. 16.4.4 Large-Scale Computing Infrastructure as a Stranded Asset Under S3, state investment in large-scale computing infrastructure becomes a stranded asset. The concept of stranded assets has been used in the context of environmental and climate policy to denote assets suffering unanticipated early write-downs, amortization or conversion into liabilities (Carbon Tracker Initiative, 2011; Caldecott, 2018). The structure is borrowed here. The mechanism is stated. Investment in large-scale computing infrastructure rests on three premises: (i) that the capability of the frontier continues to advance and demand for larger compute persists; (ii) that the willingness to pay for that capability exceeds the depreciation and operating costs of the infrastructure; and (iii) that the rate of technical obsolescence of the infrastructure is slower than the payback period of the investment. Under S3, (i) does not hold. If (i) does not hold, neither does (ii). And (iii) is severe whether or not S3 obtains — generational change in accelerators is fast and energy efficiency im‐ 601 proves at approximately 40% a year, so older-generation equipment becomes disadvantaged relative to new construction in operating cost. What matters here is that stranding under S3 arises not from the physical obsolescence of the equipment itself but from the disappearance of demand. Stranding therefore appears in the form of falling utilization rates, falling unit prices, and accelerated amortization. Where the state invested directly, this becomes a fiscal loss. Where the state drew in private investment through attraction, the loss falls on the private side, but the costs of the tax preferences, grid reinforcement and land preparation used to attract remain with the state. The estimates in United States state-level empirical work that more than ten states lost over 100 million dollars a year in revenue to attract data centres, with subsidies reaching as much as 2 million dollars per job (Good Jobs First, 2024), suggest the scale of the costs left behind should S3 be realized. Further, stranding under S3 has a second layer. Investment in electricity and the grid may be stranded at the same time. Where generation and transmission have been reinforced on the premise of data centre demand, if the demand does not appear the cost of reinforcement is passed on to other customers' tariffs or to public burdens. This structure is a recurrence of a problem long known in the regulatory economics of electricity — the problem of capital investment based on demand forecasts becoming "used and useless" plant when demand fails to materialize. That in Japan the principal cause of electricity demand turning upward for the first time in approximately twenty years is new and expanded data centres and semiconductor plants (Organization for Cross-regional Coordination of Transmission Operators, 2026) means that the scale of this second layer is not small. 16.4.5 Who Loses Most in This World Those suffering the greatest loss under S3 are actors that allocated resources intensively on the premise that the strategic character of AI is high. These include private actors that invested in frontier development, states that committed fiscal resources to attracting computing infrastructure, and states that placed AI-related industrial policy at the centre of national strategy. Conversely, those relatively advantaged are actors that limited the allocation of resources to AI and continued to allocate resources to physical assets, human capital and the improvement of existing industries. Here lies an asymmetry in contrast with S1 and S2. Under S1 underinvestment is punished, under S3 overinvestment is punished, and under S2 both are punished moderately. And none of the punishments is known in advance. This structure is precisely the reason the discussion of no-regret actions in Section 16.6 is required. 16.5 Leading Indicators Having described the three scenarios, a device is now given for identifying which is under way. 602 Definition 14 (Leading Indicators) A leading indicator is an observable quantity by which it can be identified, before the consequences of the scenario in question appear, which of the world scenarios (Definition 13) is coming to obtain. Leading indicators are confined to those satisfying three conditions: (i) that they are repeatedly observable from public information; (ii) that they move in different directions across the three scenarios (discriminating power); and (iii) that the time from observation to a change of policy or investment is shorter than the time until the consequences of the scenario in question are realized (leadingness). 16.5.1 The Two Conditions of Selection Of the three conditions of Definition 14, (i) is a practical requirement, and (ii) and (iii) are the substantive conditions of selection. Discriminating power (condition (ii)) is that the indicator moves in different directions across the three scenarios. This condition is stricter than it appears. Many intuitively important indicators do not satisfy it. "AI-related capital expenditure," for example, may increase under S1 and under S2 alike — under S1 in pursuit of the frontier, under S2 for the development of dispersed execution infrastructure — while decreasing only under S3. This indicator therefore separates S3 from the rest but does not separate S1 from S2. Discriminating power does not require a complete three-way partition; it requires that which pair is separated can be made explicit. This paper makes explicit in Table 16 the direction in which each indicator moves under the three scenarios, making visible the pairs of scenarios in which it moves in the same direction. Making the directions explicit does not, however, by itself satisfy the condition of discriminating power — the problem remains that the inverse mapping from observation to scenario is not unique. This problem is treated squarely in Section 16.5.4, and discrimination by combinations of indicators is given as Table 19. Leadingness (condition (iii)) is that the time from observation to action is shorter than the time until the consequences are realized. This condition too is strict. "Impairment charges on data centre investment," for example, is strong evidence of S3, but at the point at which impairment is charged S3 has already been realized and a change of policy cannot come in time. That is a lagging indicator, not a leading one. Similarly, "the deficit on the digital-related balance" is useful as an indicator of exposure, as Proposition 13 (Section 18) states, but by the time the deficit has widened the structure of dependence has already formed — it is effective as a diagnosis but lacks leadingness for the identification of scenarios. The indicators remaining after selection by these two conditions are the thirteen items listed below. For each, the object of observation, the method of observation, the frequency of observation, and the anticipated direction of movement under the three scenarios are stated. Indicators 1 through 9 observe the structure of AI capability itself, and indic‐ 603 ators 10 through 13 are observable quantities corresponding to the leverage coordinates (Definition 15) introduced in Section 11. The reason for adding the latter is given at the end of Section 16.5.2, but to put the essential point first, the branching of the three scenarios depends on the dynamics of leverage — as Section 15.4.6 showed, the durability of S1 (Fragmentation) is a function of the rate of depreciation of indispensability: if depreciation is fast, control measures gradually lose efficacy and pressure toward S2 rises; if depreciation is slow, fragmentation becomes self-sustaining. Observing only the side of capability leaves the driving variable of this branch out of view. 16.5.2 The Set of Indicators Indicator 1: the lag width of the capability gap between the open-weight frontier and the closed frontier. The object of observation is the time taken for the strongest openweight model to reach the level of capability attained by the closed frontier. The method of observation is comparison of published capability indices or of the timing of benchmark attainment. The series of capability indices published by Epoch AI conducts this observation on a continuing basis; the 2026 estimates give broadly three to four months, while estimates for 2024 and 2025 gave approximately one year (evidence note B). Frequency: quarterly. Anticipated movement — S1: flat or widening. S2: continued narrowing. S3: narrowing, but with the frontier itself not advancing, in the direction in which the concept of a gap loses meaning. Of the indicators in this section, this bears most directly on the validity of Definition 2, but as noted below it cannot support a determination on its own. Indicator 2: the rate of decline of inference price per unit of performance. The object of observation is the time series of the minimum inference price at which a given benchmark attainment level is achieved. The method of observation is the matching of published price lists against public benchmarks, and Epoch AI publishes a series constructed by this method. Present observation shows declines at annual factors ranging from 9 to 900 depending on the task, with the decline steeper at higher performance thresholds (Epoch AI, 2025). Frequency: quarterly. Anticipated movement — S1: decline continues, but the price at the frontier does not fall and the dispersion of prices widens. S2: the decline spreads across all performance bands, in the direction in which the price at practical levels falls below the cost of execution on the device. S3: the rate of decline slows and prices become downwardly rigid (with no new generations, competitive pressure to lower the price of existing generations weakens). This indicator has strong power to separate S2 from S3, because under S2 prices keep falling and under S3 they stop falling. Indicator 3: the growth rate of frontier training cost. The object of observation is the time series of estimates of the amortized hardware cost and electricity cost required for the final training run of frontier models. The method of observation is estimation from published amounts of computation, chips used and training duration; Epoch AI and others publish estimates with their methodology. The current central estimate is an annual factor of approximately 2.4 (90% confidence interval 2.0–3.1) (Cottier, Rahman et al., 2024). 604 As a caution in observation, estimates based on cloud rental prices come to approximately twice those based on amortization premised on owned infrastructure, so comparison is impossible unless the method of the series is held fixed. Frequency: half-yearly. Anticipated movement — S1: continuation of a high growth rate. S2: the growth rate may be maintained, but the expenditure ceases to generate a gap (this indicator alone does not separate S1 from S2). S3: slowing or halting of the growth rate. Indicator 4: the diffusion of inference semiconductors for the edge. The object of observation is shipments of inference accelerators built into devices, vehicles and industrial equipment, and the movement of the scale of models executable on them. The method of observation is disclosure by semiconductor firms by shipment category, matched against the published performance and resource requirements of small-scale models. Frequency: half-yearly. Anticipated movement — S1: increase, but with frontier uses remaining in the cloud, appearing as a bifurcation of uses. S2: the increase reaches the core of practical uses, and business uses move from the cloud to devices. S3: increase, but with no rise in the ceiling of capability, appearing as cost reduction rather than displacement. This indicator observes component (b) of S2 directly; whereas the lag width (indicator 1) measures a necessary condition of S2, this measures the side of sufficiency — because even if the gap narrows, S2 does not obtain unless execution is possible on the device. Indicator 5: the movement of electricity supply constraints and grid interconnection queues for data centres. The object of observation is the capacity held up in interconnection queues, the time required from application to commercial operation, and the completion rate of interconnection applications. The method of observation is data on interconnection queues published by grid operators and regulators; in the United States an annual compilation is published by a research institution (LBNL, 2025). In Japan, the demand projections and supply plans of the wide-area organization correspond to this. Frequency: annual. Anticipated movement — S1: continuation or worsening of the backlog, lengthening of the time required. S2: because demand disperses to the device side, the increase in demand originating from data centres falls short of projections. S3: demand does not appear, and reinforcement plans are postponed or cancelled. This indicator has strong power to separate S1 from the other two scenarios, but leadingness requires care — the time constant of the grid is five to ten years, and the backlog observed reflects applications made several years earlier. What is to be observed is therefore not the level of the backlog but the first derivative, the increase or decrease of new applications. Indicator 6: the gross margin (markup) of major suppliers. The object of observation is the gross margin in AI-related business of actors supplying frontier capability, and its movement. The method of observation is, for listed companies, segment disclosure in published financial statements; for unlisted actors it extends only to estimation from disclosures at the time of fundraising and from the disclosures of counterparties. The observability of this indicator is therefore limited, and it does not fully satisfy condition (i) of Definition 14. It is nonetheless listed because it is the most direct theoretical consequence of market structure. In a competitive market, markups are compressed to‐ 605 ward marginal cost; in a concentrated market they are maintained. Frequency: quarterly (following disclosure). Anticipated movement — S1: maintenance at a high level, or increase. S2: compression. S3: compression, but, unlike S2, with growth in revenue itself slowing, so that the mode of compression differs (S2 is compression accompanied by increasing volume, S3 compression accompanied by stagnant volume). Indicator 7: the expansion or contraction of the scope of application of export control and access-control measures. The object of observation is the scope of application of transfer restrictions on capability, chips and model weights, the countries covered, and the operation of exceptions. The method of observation is the tracking of the promulgation and amendment of rules, which can be observed reliably from public information. What is important in observation is to observe not the existence of measures but their efficacy. As Proposition 2 (Section 5) states, at C1 measures lose efficacy through circumvention even where they are applied. What is to be observed is therefore not the number of measures but where on capability distance the objects of the measures lie, and whether transfer is in fact constrained under them. Frequency: as they occur (upon amendment of rules) and in a quarterly summary. Anticipated movement — S1: expansion, or a deepening of institutionalization as transaction-type control. S2: measures remain but lose efficacy, becoming a dead letter in substance. S3: the objects of measures contract, and AI moves outside control as a general technology. This indicator has the strongest power to separate S1 from the rest, but it is sensitive to political fluctuation and a change over a single year should not be read as a trend. The course by which a comprehensive framework announced in January 2025 was withdrawn in May of the same year (evidence note B) is a concrete instance of the magnitude of this indicator's fluctuation. Indicator 8: the capital raising and investment recovery indicators of frontier laboratories. The object of observation is the scale and terms of the fundraising of actors conducting frontier development, and the ratio of revenue to investment. The method of observation is published disclosure of raises and the terms of those raises (valuation, preferences, the structure of commitments). Frequency: as they occur and in a quarterly summary. Anticipated movement — S1: continuation and enlargement of raises. S2: raises continue, but terms deteriorate as the ground of differentiation thins. S3: raises become difficult, terms deteriorate, or plans are scaled back. This indicator is the most powerful leading indicator of S3, because the halt of investment appears in advance of the stagnation of capability — capital markets price in the non-recovery of increments of capability before increments of capability cease to appear. Because the judgment of capital markets can also be mistaken, however, using this indicator alone is particularly dangerous. Indicator 9: the increment of performance across generations on benchmarks. The object of observation is the increment in performance on public benchmarks that a new generation of models brings over the previous generation. The method of observation is comparison of benchmark scores by generation; frequency: as new models are released. Anticipated movement — S1: increments maintained. S2: increments may be maintained, with the open-weight side following the closed side. S3: diminishing increments. This 606 indicator has a serious observational problem. Benchmarks saturate. Once a high score is attained on a benchmark, that benchmark can no longer distinguish subsequent generations, and diminishing increments are observed. Whether this is a diminution of capability or a saturation of the benchmark cannot be distinguished on that benchmark alone. Unless accompanied by continual migration to new, unsaturated benchmarks, this indicator therefore generates large numbers of false positives for S3. Indicator 10: the movement of chokepoint concentration. The object of observation is, for each of the sources of indispensability identified in Section 11.2 — advanced semiconductor manufacturing equipment, particular manufacturing sites (advanced logic), highbandwidth memory, minerals and refining, cooling water and siting (the location of largescale computing infrastructure), and the routes and repair capability of submarine cables — the supplier concentration and the estimated time required to establish an alternative route (time required to switch). The method of observation is published shipment, production and market statistics, compilations by regulators and international organizations, and academic estimates; for the location of computing infrastructure an annual compilation by a research institution exists (Pilz et al., 2025). Frequency: annual. Anticipated movement — S1: maintenance at a high level, or increase. Under fragmentation, the cultivation of alternative suppliers is confined within alliance blocs, so concentration viewed worldwide is slow to fall and separate concentrations form within each bloc. S2: decline. The growth of open weights and of execution on devices lowers relative dependence on frontier-class computing infrastructure and makes part of the choke points bypassable. S3: decline, but for a different reason — the scarcity of the choke points themselves thins as demand stagnates. This indicator has strong power to separate S1 from the rest, but leadingness requires care. Because changes in concentration appear with a lag, as a consequence of investment, what is to be observed is not the level but the first derivative, the announcement and commencement of construction by new alternative entrants. This is the same structure as indicator 5. Indicator 11: the level of investment in the search for alternatives. The object of observation is the scale of each of the four forms of the search for alternatives listed in Proposition 23 (Section 11) — building inventories, circumvention by design, developing alternative sources of supply, and investment in domestic production. The method of observation is inventory turnover days and corporate disclosure for the items concerned, changes in product specification made with regulatory thresholds in view, the publication of budgets and progress of publicly funded domestic-production plans, and the publication of changes in procurement sources. Frequency: quarterly. Anticipated movement — S1: increase, and a shift of the centre of gravity of search from forms with short time constants to forms with long time constants. As Section 11.6.2 derived, a single exercise may be absorbed by building inventories, but repeated exercise justifies decisions to invest in domestic production. S2: increase, but with a different composition of forms, since the motive is not response to control measures but the development of dispersed execution infrastructure — investment centres on execution environments at the device side rather than on inventories. S3: decrease. Because the capability that is the object of search 607 does not advance, the inducement to hasten substitution weakens. This indicator must be read as a pair with indicator 10. Proposition 23 states that exercise induces search and that concentration falls in proportion to the success of that search. What theory predicts is therefore the ordering in which indicator 11 moves first and indicator 10 moves later. Where this ordering is not observed — where search investment rises but concentration does not move, or where concentration falls at the same rate irrespective of exercise — the case falls under the falsification condition of Proposition 23. This is a rare indicator in this section in which value as a leading indicator and value as a test of a proposition coincide in the same observation. Indicator 12: the expansion or contraction of the scope of application of accesscontrol measures. The object of observation is the items, countries and threshold levels covered by transfer restrictions, and the suspension and revival of measures. The relation to indicator 7 is made explicit. What indicator 7 observes is the efficacy of measures — whether transfer is in fact constrained under them — while what this indicator observes is their scope, that is, the breadth and frequency of exercise. What separates the two is that "exercise" in Proposition 23 is a quantity on the side of scope. A state in which efficacy is lost while scope continues to expand (measures becoming a dead letter while the objects of application widen) is in fact conceivable, and in that case the two indicators move in opposite directions. The method of observation is the tracking of promulgation, amendment and suspension of rules, which can be observed reliably from public information. Frequency: as they occur and in a quarterly summary. Anticipated movement — S1: expansion, or high-frequency change accompanied by suspension and revival. S2: scope remains but contracts, and thresholds diverge from effective levels of capability. S3: contraction, with objects returning to the frame of general technology. Its discriminating power is moderate in the direction of separating S1, and because it correlates with indicator 7 its independent information content is limited; but it has a distinctive value in that, paired in time series with indicator 11, it permits the chain exercise → search → depreciation to be tracked. The course recorded in Section 11.2.4, in which several notices dated 9 October 2025 were suspended in November of that year until 10 November 2026 while the legal framework persisted (Pillsbury, 2025), is a concrete instance showing that "contraction of scope" and "continued retention" should be recorded separately in this indicator. Indicator 13: international progress in the development of trust infrastructure (Definition 17). The object of observation is the state of development of each of the three elements of Definition 17 — (i) as to rules for the allocation of liability, the enactment, amendment and withdrawal of liability law specific to AI; (ii) as to conformity assessment, the issuance and scope of application of harmonized standards and certification schemes, and the presence or absence of mutual recognition between jurisdictions; and (iii) as to insurance, the existence and underwriting terms of products expressly assuming losses arising from AI outputs. The method of observation is the tracking of legislation, official gazettes and publications by standardization bodies; for element (iii) it depends on market disclosure, so observability is relatively low. Frequency: half-yearly. Anticipated move‐ 608 ment — S1: progress diverging by jurisdiction. Mutual recognition does not advance, and a state in which the same conformity assessment is not valid across several jurisdictions becomes fixed. S2: because execution disperses, pressure rises for the focus of liability allocation to move from suppliers to implementers and users, and the design of the three elements is itself forced into rearrangement. S3: progress is slow, because if the depth of deployment does not rise, demand for institutional development is weak as well. As to indicator 13, it must be made explicit that it differs in character from the other twelve. What this indicator observes is not the structure of capability but institutions, and its power to identify scenarios is therefore indirect. It is nevertheless added to Table 16 for two reasons. First, as Proposition 25 (Section 11) states, the level of development of trust infrastructure delimits the ceiling on the depth of deployment of AI in regulated sectors, so this indicator leads the record of deployment — it is one of the indicators that most clearly satisfies condition (iii) of Definition 14. Second, and more importantly, the variable this indicator represents governs one's own depth of deployment whichever scenario is realized. It is at once an indicator observed for the identification of scenarios and an object whose development should be pursued regardless of the outcome of scenario determination. This dual character is close to the character of the noregret actions discussed in Section 16.6 — indeed, the development of trust infrastructure operates as an institutional precondition for both the use of domain data and operational readiness among the no-regret set enumerated in Section 16.6 (national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, operational readiness). For this indicator, therefore, treatment as a variable to be monitored independently of determination is more appropriate than a contribution to determination. Why four leverage-related indicators identify scenarios. The reason for adding indicators 10 through 13 is now stated squarely. The branching of the three scenarios is not determined by the mode of technical advance of capability alone. Whether S1 (Fragmentation) persists depends on whether the control measures that maintain fragmentation retain their efficacy, and that is a function of the rate of depreciation of indispensability. As Section 15.4.6 formulated, if depreciation is fast, control measures gradually cease to constrain the other party's capability, execution environments bypassing the choke points spread, and pressure in the direction of S2 rises. If depreciation is slow, fragmentation becomes self-sustaining. This driving relation is not observed directly by any of indicators 1 through 9 — what those measure is the level, price and investment of capability, not the magnitude of the force pushing back. A system of indicators lacking observables on the leverage coordinates therefore sees, as regards the branch between S1 and S2, only the consequences and not the driving variable. The four indicators correspond to the stages of this driving relation. Indicator 12 observes exercise, indicator 11 the search induced by exercise, and indicator 10 the change in concentration as the consequence of search. The three carry an ordering in time, and that ordering is itself evidence of the operation of Proposition 23. Indicator 13 corresponds to a different path — the mechanism of Proposition 25, that depth of deploy‐ 609 ment differs by jurisdiction even where access to capability is equal, appears under S1 as divergence by jurisdiction, under S2 as a shift in the focus of liability allocation, and under S3 as stagnation in demand for institutional development, in each case in a different form. That is, whereas the indicators on the side of capability measure "what becomes possible," the indicators on the side of leverage measure "who can condition it" and "where it can be used deeply." Since the three scenarios have different answers to both questions, the device of identification must contain both. Limits are also made explicit. The measurement framework of these four indicators is more provisional than that of the other nine. As Section 11.1 stated, this paper presents no single composite indicator combining the two components of leverage, and neither the proxies for indispensability (supplier concentration, estimates of the time required to switch) nor those for desirability (market size, the extraterritorial reach of rules, the level of development of trust infrastructure) have established methods of estimation. Estimating the time required to switch, and estimating compliance costs (Section 11.4), are particularly difficult to reconstruct from public information. This limitation is acknowledged as a limitation of this paper in Section 20. They are placed in Table 16 nonetheless because dropping variables from the system on the ground of coarse measurement would issue in the error of composing the system only of what is easy to measure. Table 16. The leading indicators — object of observation, anticipated movement under the three scenarios, discriminating power, and leadingness. Indicators 1–9 observe the structure of AI capability; indicators 10–13 observe geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15, Section 11). The development into an operable monitoring table is placed in Appendix F Indicator Object and frequency of observation S1 (Fragmentation) S2 (Diffusion) S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power Leadingness 1 Lag width of the capability gap Months for the open frontier to follow the closed frontier / quarterly Flat or widening Continued narrowing Concept of a gap lapses Medium (separates S1 from S2) High 2 Rate of decline of inference price per unit of performance Annual rate of decline of the minimum price achieving a given performance / quarterly Decline continues, dispersion widens Spreads across all performance bands Slows, downwardly rigid High (separates S2 from S3) High 3 Growth rate of frontier training cost Estimated amortization plus electricity cost of the final training run / half-yearly High growth continues Growth continues but generates no gap Slows, halts Medium (separates S3) Medium Medium 610

Indicator Object and frequency of observation S1 (Fragmentation) S2 (Diffusion) S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power Leadingness 4 Diffusion of inference semiconductors for the edge Shipments of accelerators for devices, vehicles and industrial equipment, and executable model scale / half-yearly Bifurcation of uses Spreads to the core of business uses Increases only as cost reduction High (separates S2) 5 Electricity supply constraints and grid interconnection queues Capacity held up, time required, completion rate, and especially the increase or decrease of new applications / annual Backlog continues and lengthens DC-originated demand growth falls short of projections Demand does not materialize, plans postponed High (separates S1) Low (observed via the first derivative) 6 Gross margin of major suppliers Gross margin in AI-related business / quarterly (following disclosure) Maintained high, rising Compression with increasing volume Compression with stagnant volume High (may separate all three) Medium (constrained by observability) 7 Scope and efficacy of export and access controls Promulgation and amendment of rules, position of objects on capability distance, actual constraint on transfer / as they occur and quarterly summary Expansion, institutionalization of the transaction type Persist but become a dead letter Contraction of objects High (separates S1) High (sensitive to political fluctuation) 8 Capital raising and investment recovery of frontier laboratories Scale and terms of raises, ratio of revenue to investment / as they occur and quarterly summary Continuation, enlargement Continues but terms deteriorate Becomes difficult, plans scaled back Medium (separates S3) Highest (leads the stagnation of capability) 9 Increment of performance across generations on Score increment of a new generation over the previous one / as they occur Maintained Open side follows Diminishing Low (false positives through saturation) Medium 611 Indicator Object and frequency of observation S1 (Fragmentation) S2 (Diffusion) S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power Leadingness benchmarks 10 Movement of chokepoint concentration (leveragerelated) Supplier concentration and estimated time required to switch by choke point; announcements and commencement of construction by new alternative entrants / annual Maintained high or rising (separate concentrations by bloc) Decline (more choke points become bypassable) Decline (scarcity thins as demand stagnates) High (separates S1) Low (observed via the first derivative) 11 Level of investment in the search for alternatives (leveragerelated) Scale by each of the four forms — inventory building, circumvention by design, development of alternative sources, investment in domestic production / quarterly Increase, centre of gravity shifting to forms with long time constants Increase but with a different composition of forms (toward execution at the device side) Decrease (the inducement to hasten substitution weakens) High (separates S1 from S3) High (leads changes in concentration) 12 Expansion or contraction of the scope of accesscontrol measures (leveragerelated. Indicator 7 is efficacy; this indicator is scope) Items, countries and thresholds covered by transfer restrictions; suspension and revival of measures / as they occur and quarterly summary Expansion, or highfrequency change accompanied by suspension and revival Scope contracts and thresholds diverge from effective levels Contraction, return to the frame of general technology Medium (separates S1; correlates with indicator 7) High 13 International progress in the development of trust infrastructure (Definition Development by each of the three elements — rules for the allocation of liability, conformity assessment and mutual recognition, insurance underwriting Diverges by jurisdiction, mutual recognition does not advance Pressure for the focus of liability allocation to move to implementers and users Progress is slow (demand for development is weak) Medium (indirect; not usable alone) High (leads the record of deployment) 612 Indicator Object and frequency of observation S1 (Fragmentation) S2 (Diffusion) S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power Leadingness 17) (leveragerelated) of AI-caused losses / half-yearly 16.5.3 Against Judgment on a Single Indicator For none of the indicators in Table 16 may a determination be made on that indicator alone. This is not an expression of caution but a consequence of the fact that each indicator structurally admits of several explanations. Below, for each indicator, an example is given of an explanation other than the scenario that also holds. Even if indicator 1 (the lag width) narrows, it is not necessarily S2. A narrowing lag width arises both from a rise in capability on the open-weight side and from a slowing of advance on the closed side. The former is evidence of S2 and the latter evidence of S3. The two cannot be distinguished by the single quantity of the lag width. Distinguishing them requires reading it together with the movement of the absolute level on the closed side (indicator 9) and the movement of investment in frontier development (indicators 3 and 8). There is a third explanation as well — where the publication of open weights is undertaken for regulatory or strategic rather than competitive reasons, the lag width is a function of suppliers' choices and not of the structure of capability. Even if indicator 2 (the decline in inference prices) slows, it is not necessarily S3. Besides the stagnation of capability, there are at least three reasons why price declines slow. First, where supply is tight, prices do not fall. The fact that the supply of AI services is allocated in tight periods by quantity (rate limits, priority access tiers, capacity reservation) rather than by price (evidence note D) means that there are periods in which price does not correctly reflect supply and demand. Second, where electricity prices are rising, the marginal cost of inference rises and may offset improvements in model efficiency. Third, where the tasks covered by the price series are saturated, price declines on those tasks can no longer be measured. Even if indicator 3 (the growth of training cost) slows, it is not necessarily S3. The growth of training cost also slows through improvements in algorithmic efficiency. Where the same capability comes to be attained with less computation, the growth of cost slows while capability advances. This is not S3 but rather an acceleration of the Frontier Descent described in Definition 2, and may even be a movement in the direction of S2. In addition, because estimates of cost depend strongly on method (rental-price basis or amortization basis), a change of method in the series may be confused with a substantive change. Even if indicator 4 (the diffusion of semiconductors for the edge) advances, it is not necessarily S2. Improvement in inference capability on devices also advances through factors unrelated to the structure of capability, such as privacy requirements, latency requirements and reductions in communication costs. A two-layer structure in which the 613 frontier continues to advance in the cloud while lightweight uses are executed on devices is fully consistent with S1. Even if indicator 5 (the electricity constraint) eases, it is not necessarily S3. Besides the disappearance of demand, a decrease in the interconnection backlog also arises from institutional reform of interconnection procedures, changes in the generation mix, and the steering of data centre siting. That policies steering data centre siting toward regions with spare grid capacity are under discussion in Japan (evidence note F) is a concrete instance showing that institutional easing can occur without the disappearance of demand. Even if indicator 6 (the gross margin) compresses, it is not necessarily S2. Compression of markups arises, besides from intensified competition, from a supplier's deliberate strategy of taking market share at low prices, and from investment in computing infrastructure beginning to be charged as depreciation. The latter is, if anything, a consequence of expanding investment under S1. Even if indicator 7 (control measures) contracts, it is not necessarily S2. Contraction of control measures also arises from a change of administration, a trade bargain or a change in alliance relations, independently of the structure of capability. The course by which a comprehensive framework announced in 2025 was withdrawn soon afterwards and control shifted to the transaction type shows that this indicator is extremely sensitive to political fluctuation. Conversely, even if measures expand, where their objects are directed at levels of capability at which they have no efficacy, they do not constitute evidence of S1. Even if indicator 8 (capital raising) becomes difficult, it is not necessarily S3. Deterioration in the terms of fundraising also arises from the interest-rate environment, the risk appetite of the market as a whole, and fluctuations in valuation caused by particular events. The case in January 2025 in which the market capitalization of related stocks moved sharply in a single day on the occasion of the release of a certain open-weight model (evidence note B) shows that the assessment of capital markets may price in changes in the structure of capability excessively, or mistakenly. Even if indicator 9 (the increment of performance across generations) diminishes, it is not necessarily S3. As already noted, a measured diminution caused by benchmark saturation and a substantive diminution of capability cannot be distinguished on that benchmark. In addition, as a problem intrinsic to the unfolding of general-purpose technologies, there are periods in which capability advances but effects do not appear because complementary investment lags (David, 1990; Brynjolfsson, Rock & Syverson, 2021). It is difficult to distinguish ex ante whether observed stagnation is diminishing returns or the trough of a productivity J-curve caused by a lag in complementary investment. This difficulty of discrimination is the reason for making the determination of S3 more cautious than the determination of any other scenario. 614 16.5.4 The Identification Problem in Discrimination, and Discrimination by Combination Section 16.5.3 enumerated ambiguities in the form "this movement is not necessarily this scenario" for each indicator. That enumeration states only half the problem. The remaining half is that the condition of discriminating power imposed on leading indicators by Definition 14 (condition (ii)) cannot be confirmed as satisfied unless it is accompanied by a procedure of discrimination. Definition 14 requires that a leading indicator "move in different directions across the three scenarios," but to determine whether the requirement is met, a function mapping observed movements to scenarios — a discriminant function — must be specified. What each row of Table 16 shows is the direction of movement anticipated under each scenario, that is, the mapping from scenario to observation. What determination requires is the inverse mapping, and inverse mappings are in general not unique. What non-uniqueness consists in is stated precisely. A state in which the same observed value points simultaneously to several scenarios arises not exceptionally but structurally. This paper calls this the identification problem of scenario discrimination. The name follows the econometric usage in which a state in which several structures can be recovered from the same reduced-form observation is called non-identification; in this paper's case, however, what is at issue is not the recovery of coefficients but the assignment of states, and the correspondence is one of terminology only. Below, it is first shown that the identification problem is one of principle (a); the design of discrimination by combination is then given (b); an order of determination is presented (c); and finally it is admitted that observed patterns exist which no combination can identify, and the response in such cases is stated (d). (a) Single indicators cannot identify in principle. The ambiguities listed in Section 16.5.3 are not of a kind that is dissolved by raising the precision of observation. What each indicator measures is a lower-level change common to several scenarios — capability gap, price, investment, concentration — while the scenarios are defined as combinations of those lower-level changes. Rereading Definition 13, this structure is already written into the definition. S2 (Diffusion) is "a state in which open-weight and small-scale models come to meet the requirement level of uses at the edge, the effective significance of capability distance contracts, and supplier concentration moves toward dissolution," and S3 (Stagnation) is "a state in which the advance of capability meets diminishing returns, the increment of capability per unit of additional investment falls below the opportunity cost of that investment, and AI capability is levelled into a general-purpose tool." Both contain "a contraction in the significance of capability distance." What differs is whether that contraction arises from a rise on the following side or from a halt on the leading side. That indicator 1, which measures capability distance alone, cannot separate the two is therefore not a defect of the indicator but a consequence of the definitions. Overlaps of the same type are enumerated below. First, a narrowing of the lag width (indicator 1) is a core mark of S2 and at the same time a consequence of a slowing in the rate 615 of advance of the frontier under S3. Whether the following side is fast or the leading side slow is not settled by looking only at the lag width, which is the difference between them. Second, the spread of inference price declines across all performance bands (indicator 2) is a mark of S2, but is also consistent with a phase under S3 in which, the capability of the frontier having ceased to move, only price competition among existing generations remains. Third, a slowing in the growth of training cost (indicator 3) is a mark of S3, but as Section 16.5.3 stated it also arises where improvements in algorithmic efficiency achieve the same capability with less computation, which may even be a movement in the direction of S2. Fourth, the diffusion of inference semiconductors for the edge (indicator 4) measures the side of sufficiency for S2, but is also consistent with the bifurcation of uses under S1 — a two-layer structure in which the frontier advances in the cloud while lightweight uses are executed on devices. Fifth, compression of the gross margin (indicator 6) arises both from intensified competition under S2 and from stagnant demand under S3. Sixth, a decline in chokepoint concentration (indicator 10) arises both from increased bypassability under S2 and from the thinning of scarcity through stagnant demand under S3. Seventh, a contraction in the scope of control measures (indicator 12) appears both as the process under S3 by which objects return to the frame of general technology and as the consequence under S2 of thresholds diverging from effective levels of capability. The seven overlaps share a common structure. All take the form in which S2 and S3 generate observations in the same direction from different mechanisms. This is no accident. S1 is the state in which "advance continues and concentration is maintained," S2 the state in which "advance continues and concentration dissolves," and S3 the state in which "advance halts." If the three states are spanned by two binary axes, the continuation of advance and the maintenance of concentration, then S3 separates from the other two on the axis of advance, and S1 and S2 separate on the axis of concentration. Many indicators, however, measure quantities corresponding to the difference or the ratio of the two axes, and not the axes themselves. A difference or a ratio moves both through an increase in the numerator and through a decrease in the denominator. Here lies the cause of the identification problem. (b) Discrimination by combinations of indicators. Discrimination must therefore be defined not on the value of a single indicator but on a pattern shown simultaneously by two or more indicators. The principle of design is simple — an indicator measuring a difference or a ratio is paired with an indicator measuring its numerator or denominator independently. To the lag width (a difference) is paired an indicator measuring absolute advance on the leading side. To concentration (a structure) is paired an indicator measuring the quantity of action eroding concentration. To a price decline (a ratio) is paired an indicator measuring whether that decline is accompanied by an increase in volume. This principle is applied to the overlaps just enumerated. A narrowing of the lag width (indicator 1) points to S2 where advance on the frontier side continues, and to S3 where it is accompanied by a slowing of advance on the frontier side. The continu‐ 616 ation of advance on the frontier side cannot be measured by a single indicator — indicator 9 (increment of performance across generations) generates false positives through saturation, indicator 3 (growth of training cost) is ambiguous through efficiency improvements, and indicator 8 (capital raising) fluctuates with market sentiment. The continuation of advance itself must therefore be read as a set of three indicators. Discrimination is thus nested — the "continuation of advance" used in discriminating indicator 1 is itself a quantity discriminated by the combination of indicators 3, 8 and 9. This nesting is the reason the order of determination (below, (c)) has a structure that is not a simple binary tree but requires the simultaneous reading of several indicators at each stage. Similarly, a decline in inference prices (indicator 2) points to S2 where accompanied by an increase in volume, and to S3 where accompanied by stagnant volume. The same pair operates for compression of the gross margin (indicator 6), and this is what Section 16.5.2 already stated in describing indicator 6 — "S2 is compression accompanied by increasing volume, S3 compression accompanied by stagnant volume." What that sentence indicated was the structure in which indicator 6 gives no discrimination on its own and contributes to discrimination only when accompanied by a second observation, that of volume. This subsection states that the structure is not peculiar to indicator 6 but extends to most of the set of indicators. A decline in concentration (indicator 10) points to S2 where accompanied by an increase in investment in the search for alternatives, and to S3 where accompanied by a decrease in search investment. This pair is also an observation of the operation of Proposition 23 (Section 11) — if the causal chain in which exercise induces search and concentration falls in proportion to the success of search is operating, then an increase in search should precede a decline in concentration. A state in which search decreases while concentration falls is explained not by that chain but by the disappearance of demand. The same pair is therefore used simultaneously for the discrimination of scenarios and for the testing of a proposition. When Section 16.5.2 stated of indicator 11 that "value as a leading indicator and value as a test of a proposition coincide in the same observation," it referred to this duality. As to control measures, the pair of scope (indicator 12) and efficacy (indicator 7) gives the discrimination. A state in which scope expands and efficacy is maintained points to S1; a state in which scope is maintained or expands while efficacy is lost — measures becoming a dead letter while the objects of application widen — points to S2; and a state in which scope itself contracts and objects return to the frame of general technology points to S3. The reason Section 16.5.2 separated indicator 12 from indicator 7 was precisely this discrimination. Had the two been merged into a single "control measures" indicator, the pattern most clearly pointing to S2 — expansion accompanied by becoming a dead letter — could not have been observed. The logic of discrimination for the principal pairs of indicators is arranged in Table 19. Whereas Table 16 gives "the mapping from scenario to observation," Table 19 gives "the mapping from a set of observations to a discrimination." The two tables are complement‐ 617 ary descriptions of the same set of indicators, and in the practice of determination they are used in the order: record the movement of each indicator in Table 16, then read the simultaneous patterns of pairs in Table 19. Table 19. The identification problem in discrimination and discrimination by combination — simultaneous patterns and discriminations for the principal pairs of indicators. The first indicator of each pair is ambiguous alone, and identification is established only by simultaneous reading with the second. No probabilities or weights are given Pair of indicators Ambiguity of the first indicator alone Simultaneous pattern → discrimination Patterns that remain unidentifiable Indicator 1 (lag width of the capability gap) × [the set of indicators 3, 8 and 9] (advance on the frontier side) Narrowing is consistent both with S2 (a rise on the following side) and with S3 (a slowing on the leading side) Narrowing + advance continues → S2 / narrowing + advance slows → S3 / flat or widening + advance continues → S1 Flat + advance slows (consistent with both S1 and S3: fragmented stagnation) Indicator 2 (rate of decline of inference price) × indicator 4 (diffusion of inference semiconductors for the edge) The spread of decline is consistent both with S2 and with price competition among existing generations under S3 Spread across all performance bands + diffusion into the core of business uses → S2 / slowing + diffusion only as cost reduction → S3 / widening dispersion + bifurcation of uses → S1 Decline continues and diffusion advances, but both slowly (consistent with all three scenarios) Indicator 6 (gross margin of major suppliers) × movement of sales volume Compression is consistent both with S2 (intensified competition) and with S3 (stagnant demand) Compression + rising volume → S2 / compression + stagnant volume → S3 / maintained high → S1 Compression + flat volume (below the resolution of discrimination) Indicator 3 (growth rate of frontier training cost) × indicator 9 (increment of performance across generations) A slowing of growth is consistent both with S3 and with improvements in algorithmic efficiency (toward S2) High growth + increments maintained → S1 / slowing + increments maintained → efficiency improvement (toward S2) / slowing + increments diminishing → S3 Slowing + measurement of increments impossible through benchmark saturation (false positives for S3 cannot be excluded) Indicator 5 (electricity supply constraints and interconnection queues) × indicator 8 (capital raising of frontier laboratories) An easing of the backlog is consistent both with S3 (disappearance of demand) and with institutional reform or the steering of siting Backlog continues + raises enlarge → S1 / backlog eases + raises become difficult → S3 / backlog eases + raises continue → S2 (dispersion of demand to the device side) Backlog eases + raises continue, but where the easing originates in institutional reform (does not separate S1 from S2) Indicator 12 (scope of control measures) × indicator 7 A contraction of scope is consistent both with S2 (divergence of Scope expands + efficacy maintained → S1 / scope maintained or expands + Scope contracts + efficacy unobservable (does not separate contraction from 618 Pair of indicators Ambiguity of the first indicator alone Simultaneous pattern → discrimination Patterns that remain unidentifiable (efficacy of control measures) thresholds) and with S3 (return to general technology) efficacy lost → S2 / scope contracts + objects return to the frame of general technology → S3 political fluctuation from structural contraction) Indicator 10 (chokepoint concentration) × indicator 11 (investment in the search for alternatives) A decline in concentration is consistent both with S2 (increased bypassability) and with S3 (thinning of scarcity through stagnant demand) Maintained high + search increases (centre of gravity toward long time constants) → S1 / decline + search increases → S2 / decline + search decreases → S3 Maintained high + search does not move (includes the possibility that the mechanism of Proposition 23 does not apply to the choke point in question; not used for scenario discrimination) Three limitations of Table 19 are made explicit. First, Table 19 is a logic of discrimination and not a set of thresholds for discrimination. This paper does not specify numerically the magnitude of change denoted by the words "narrowing," "slowing" and "maintained." Calibration of thresholds cannot be performed at this paper's stage, which has not passed through backtesting of the indicators — as Appendix F.5.1 acknowledges. Second, Table 19 gives neither probabilities nor weights. As Section 16.1.4 stated, this paper holds to the discipline of assigning no probabilities to the three scenarios. This discipline extends to discrimination as well — a design in which the discrimination of each pair is scored numerically and the scenario with the highest total is selected is not adopted. Aggregating scores would implicitly assign weights to each indicator, and weights are another name for probabilities. Third, the rows of Table 19 are not independent. Because the same lower-level change appears in several pairs, the fact that several pairs point to the same scenario does not by itself mean an accumulation of independent evidence. Where agreement among several pairs is required in a determination, it must be confirmed that there is no overlap of observations between the pairs. (c) The order of determination — presented as a decision tree. To bring discrimination by combination into practice, an order is needed for which pair to read first. This paper presents the following order. This order is arranged not by placing pairs with strong discriminating power first but in accordance with the dependency by which later discriminations presuppose earlier ones. Stage 0 — specify the unit of determination. As Definition 13 states, different states may obtain simultaneously in different sectors and uses. Determination therefore begins after specifying the domain of uses in which the state seeks to capture value. Determining the whole world and all uses together artificially increases ambiguity at every stage below. Stage 1 — look at whether the frontier is advancing. What is looked at first is the set of indicators 3, 8 and 9. There are two reasons. First, since S3 separates from the other two states on the axis of advance while S1 and S2 separate on the axis of concentration, fixing the axis of advance first allows later discrimination to deal only with the axis of concen‐ 619 tration. Second, where S3 obtains, the distinction between S1 and S2 largely loses practical significance — as Section 16.4 stated, under S3 the level of capability itself does not move, so how access to capability is allocated becomes a secondary matter for national strategy. At this stage it is confirmed at the same time whether migration to unsaturated benchmarks is being carried out, so as to exclude false positives from saturation in indicator 9. Stage 2 — where advance continues, look at whether capability distance is narrowing. The pair of indicator 1 and indicator 4 is read. Where the lag width narrows and practical uses become executable on devices, the direction of S2 is supported. Where the lag width narrows but execution on devices has not reached the core of business, the necessary condition of S2 is met but the sufficient condition is not — this distinction is as already stated in the description of indicator 4 in Section 16.5.2. Stage 3 — where capability distance is not narrowing, look at whether concentration is maintained. The pair of indicators 10 and 11, and the pair of indicators 12 and 7, are read. Where concentration is maintained at a high level, the scope of control measures expands, and their efficacy is preserved, the direction of S1 is supported. Reading at the same time the centre of gravity of indicator 11 — whether search is shifting from forms with short time constants (inventories) to forms with long time constants (domestic production) — gives information about the durability of S1. Where the centre of gravity is shifting toward long time constants, the present S1 can be read as moving, through the operation of Proposition 23, in a direction that is not self-sustaining. Stage 4 — where advance is slowing, separate the cause of the slowing. The pair of indicators 3 and 9 is read. Where the growth of training cost slows while increments of performance across generations are maintained, that is not stagnation of capability but improvement in efficiency, an acceleration of the Frontier Descent described in Definition 2. In that case, return to Stage 2. Where a slowing of growth and diminishing increments occur simultaneously and the terms of capital raising deteriorate, the direction of S3 is supported. At this stage the caution repeatedly stated in Sections 16.4.1 and 16.5.3 — that it is difficult to distinguish ex ante whether observed stagnation is diminishing returns or the trough of a productivity J-curve caused by a lag in complementary investment — operates most strongly. Two points are made explicit about this order. First, the branch at each stage is not binary. The answer to the question "is it advancing" often takes the form "in some uses it is advancing and in others it is slowing." In that case, return to Stage 0 and subdivide the unit of determination further. Second, this order does not replace the design of determination (Section 16.5.5). The order settles only which observations are read in which sequence; the procedural requirements — setting asymmetric thresholds for changes of determination, making determination a collegial matter among several actors, and recording the grounds of determination — are imposed independently of the order. (d) Unidentifiable observed patterns and the response to them. Even with the design above, observed patterns exist that are consistent with all three scenarios. Admitting

this existence is not an expression of the weakness of the framework but the framework making explicit its own range of application. The fourth column of Table 19 sets out, for each pair, the patterns that remain unidentifiable. Of these, three that arise particularly often in practice are named. First, a period in which every indicator moves only slightly. Over a quarterly observation interval, it is not unusual for lag width, prices and concentration alike to show no change exceeding the resolution of discrimination. This state is consistent with all three scenarios — because in any scenario, transition between states takes time. Second, a period in which indicators point in mutually contradictory directions. A combination in which, for example, the lag width narrows while concentration is maintained at a high level, and the scope of control measures expands while their efficacy is lost, is in fact conceivable. This state may be a manifestation of S1 and S2 obtaining simultaneously in different domains of use, but that can be confirmed only by returning to the specification of the unit at Stage 0. Third, fragmented stagnation. A state in which the advance of the frontier slows while control measures and concentration are maintained as they are is consistent with both S1 and S3. This is the pattern set out in the fourth column of the first row of Table 19, and it is the most concrete consequence of Definition 13's express statement that the three states are "neither exclusive nor exhaustive." The response where an unidentifiable observed pattern is detected is to suspend determination. Suspension is neither maintaining the previous determination nor leaving the matter without a determination. Suspension consists in doing three things at once. First, record the fact that determination has been suspended. Which indicators moved in which directions, and in which pairs identification failed, are left in a form that can be carried forward to the next determination. That Appendix F.3.4 places "a record where determination is not changed" as its fourth stage responds to this requirement. Second, do not fire the triggers of staged investment. The stages of investment designed in Section 16.7.3 to start upon a determination do not start where no determination has been issued. Filling an unidentifiable observation with an extrapolation of the most recent trend in place of a determination is contrary to this discipline. Third, continue the no-regret actions alone. The no-regret set shown in Section 16.6 — national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, operational readiness — is the set argued to carry positive expected value in all three scenarios. Investment in this set is therefore justified even in a state in which it cannot be identified which scenario obtains. The fact that periods of non-identification exist shows most clearly the practical significance of having derived the no-regret set. Had this paper given only scenario-dependent prescriptions, there would be no prescription for periods of non-identification. Finally, it is confirmed, in connection with the discussion of Section 16.7.2, that suspension is not "wait and see." Suspension is not stopping action; it is stopping scenario-dependent action. Investment in the no-regret set continues through the period of suspension, and those are moreover variables whose accumulation requires time constants on the order of years (Section 17.4.4). To stop investment in the no-regret set during a period of suspen‐ 621 sion is equivalent to losing the very capacity to begin acting at the point at which identification is established. The asymmetry of upward transition shown by Proposition 15 (Section 15) — accumulation takes time, and that time is longer than the time constant of policy decision — operates in the design of suspension as well. 16.5.5 The Design of Judgment From the above, judgment should follow the design below. First, require movement of several indicators in the same direction. To determine a transition to a given scenario, it is required that several of the indicators with power to separate that scenario from the rest are moving in the same direction. The discriminating power column of Table 16 shows which indicators contribute to which separation. Indicators 5, 7, 10 and 12 are central to the determination of S1; indicators 1, 2 and 4 to that of S2; and indicators 2, 3, 8 and 11 to that of S3. "The same direction" here must be read not as the direction of a single indicator but as the simultaneous pattern of the pairs of indicators established in Table 19 — because, as Section 16.5.4 showed, the direction of a single indicator is in principle consistent with several scenarios. Of the four leverage- related indicators, indicators 10 through 12 enter as inputs to determination, but indicator 13 does not. As already stated, what indicator 13 measures is institutions and not the structure of capability, and its value is better used, independently of determination, to monitor the ceiling on one's own depth of deployment than to determine a scenario. In addition, indicators 10 through 12 should be read not singly but in order — where the ordering is observed in which the movement of indicator 12 (exercise) is followed by indicator 11 (search) and indicator 11 in turn by a lagged movement of indicator 10 (concentration), the durability of S1 can be read as being eroded by depreciation. Where the ordering breaks down — where, for example, exercise expands but search investment does not increase — S1 should be read as more self-sustaining, or alternatively as a case in which the mechanism Proposition 23 envisages does not apply to the choke point in question; which interpretation is adopted depends on identifying the mechanism sustaining that choke point (one of the five mechanisms of Section 11.2.7). Second, set asymmetric thresholds for changes of determination. The level of evidence required in moving from one determination to another should differ according to the direction of the move. The reason is that the cost of reversing the actions triggered by a change of determination differs by direction. This point is treated in Section 16.7.4. Third, do not entrust determination to a single actor. The interpretation of indicators involves discretion, and discretion reflects interests. In particular, there is a danger that determination is biased in the direction of justifying investment already made. It is a requirement that the procedure of determination be designed as a collegial matter among several actors and that the grounds of determination be recorded. Appendix F reduces this procedure to an operable form as a quarterly review. 622 Fourth, determine by sector and by use. As Definition 13 states, different states may obtain simultaneously in different sectors and uses. A single worldwide determination collapses this structure. Determination should be carried out for each domain of use in which the state seeks to capture value. 16.6 No-Regret Actions Proposition 20 (The Existence of No-Regret Actions) The set of investments carrying positive expected value irrespective of which world scenario (Definition 13) is realized is not empty, and that set is composed of national brain capital (Definition 11), exclusive domain data, value-definition capability (Definition 12), and the securing of substitutability (operational readiness, Definition 6(iii)). These are cross-scenario because their marginal value is positive in every world: under S1 as a complement that becomes scarce, under S2 as the only factor of differentiation converting dispersed capability into value, and under S3 as the receptacle when the sources of value return to the physical world and to human beings. Conversely, owning frontier-class computing infrastructure outright is scenario-dependent: it has high value under S1, but under S2 it is overinvestment and under S3 a stranded asset. At a stage where the identification of scenarios is difficult, therefore, the priority of investment should be determined not by the height of expected value but by cross-scenario robustness. Falsification condition If, for any of the four components, marginal value is shown to be non-positive under any of the scenarios, that component is removed from the no-regret set. If, further, owning frontier-class computing infrastructure outright is shown to carry positive expected value under all three scenarios, the claim of scenario dependence is rejected. 16.6.1 The Concept of No Regret The concept of no regret derives from the literature on policy choice under deep uncertainty. No-regrets options in climate policy have been used to denote measures with net benefits regardless of the magnitude of the consequences of climate change — typically improvements in energy efficiency. Robust decision making (Lempert, Popper & Bankes, 2003) generalizes this idea, holding that where there is no agreement on the probability distribution itself, the criterion should be not the maximization of expected utility but the avoidance of intolerable consequences across many possible futures. The claim of Proposition 20 applies this concept to national investment in the age of AI and states two things: that the no-regret set is not empty, and that its content can be specified. The former is not self-evident — if the requirements of the three worlds were 623 completely opposed, the no-regret set could be empty. The latter is the stronger claim, and the remainder of this section is devoted to arguing it. The method of the argument is made explicit. Proposition 20 states that "these are crossscenario because their marginal value is positive in every world: under S1 as a complement that becomes scarce, under S2 as the only factor of differentiation converting dispersed capability into value, and under S3 as the receptacle when the sources of value return to the physical world and to human beings." The argument therefore takes the form of showing, scenario by scenario, that the marginal value of each of the four components is positive. As the falsification condition states, if any one component has non-positive marginal value under any one scenario, that component is removed from the set. The argument below is the work of filling in this 3×4 grid. 16.6.2 The Argument Under S1 — As a Complement That Becomes Scarce S1 is the world in which access to capability is concentrated, allocated politically, and physically constrained. In this world the marginal value of all four components is positive, and moreover rising. National brain capital (Definition 11). Under S1, because the procurement of capability is constrained, the capability on the side that draws the greatest value from limited capability becomes decisive. As Proposition 18 (Section 10) states, what can be obtained by importing AI capability is capability and not national brain capital. Under S1 it is the side of capability that is scarce, so at first sight value appears to gather on the side of capability. But precisely because capability is scarce, the actor able to apply that scarce capability most effectively obtains the greatest value. Tacit knowledge of the field and the capacity for audit based on long domain experience are themselves the capability to choose correctly where limited capability is applied. Marginal value is positive, and rises in proportion to the degree of scarcity of capability. Exclusive domain data. Under S1, general-purpose capability is concentrated in particular suppliers. In that situation, holding data the supplier does not hold becomes a source of bargaining power against the supplier. The "failure to enclose domain data" that Section 10 identified as failure mode (c) carries the highest cost under S1 — because a transformer that has lost bargaining power cannot secure the transformation margin protected by integration cost (Section 10). Marginal value is positive. Value-definition capability (Definition 12). Under S1, suppliers of capability hold the power to prescribe uses through the shape of their products. In this world, a state without the capability to select its own objectives and translate them into resource allocation acts only within the frame of objectives designed by the supplier. This is the structure described by (iii) the value-definition constraint of Proposition 21 (Section 14). Marginal value is positive, and rises in proportion to supplier concentration. Operational readiness (Definition 6(iii)). Under S1, this has the most direct value. In a world where, of the three causes of AI outage (Definition 4, Section 13), the probability of 624 stoppage through geopolitical measures is structurally high, and where supplier concentration makes failures highly correlated, the personnel and procedures able to execute a switch to an alternative system are not an item of crisis management but a premise of business continuity. As stated in Section 16.2.4, under S1 the diversification of procurement itself becomes part of transformation value. Marginal value is positive, and among the four components the rise under S1 is greatest for this one. 16.6.3 The Argument Under S2 — As the Only Factor of Differentiation S2 is the world in which capability becomes universally obtainable and supplier concentration dissolves. In this world the marginal value of all four components is positive, and for three of them it may be higher than under S1. National brain capital. As stated in Section 16.3.3, under S2 all differences between states that had been explained by the acquisition of capability disappear, and the residual can only be explained by national brain capital and complementary assets. In a world where capability is obtainable by anyone, only the side that converts capability into value produces differences. Marginal value is positive, and among the four components the rise in relative importance under S2 is greatest for this one. Exclusive domain data. By the same logic, marginal value is positive and rising. What is protected under S2 is not capability but data and the field (Section 16.3.5). There is, however, a condition — for data to be exclusive, it must be protected legally, contractually or physically. For a state that hands its data unconditionally to foreign foundations, S2 is a world in which the basis of differentiation is already lost. This is the reason (ii) the datasovereignty constraint of Proposition 21 (Section 14) operates most severely under S2. Value-definition capability. As stated in Section 16.3.3, S2 is the world in which Proposition 17 (Section 17) operates most sharply. Because all capability descends to C1, competitive advantage through efficiency gains disappears almost entirely and the whole of the residual moves to value-definition capability. Marginal value is positive, and higher than under S1. Operational readiness. Under S2 the marginal value of this component is positive, but its content changes. What under S1 was "the capability to switch when supply stops" becomes under S2 "the capability to choose the appropriate option among many, deploy it rapidly, and move on to the next generation." It takes on a character close to the renewal capability of Definition 6(i-b). What matters in relation to the falsification condition is that marginal value does not become non-positive. Even where capability is universalized, the cost of deploying and maintaining it in one's own work processes does not become zero. Marginal value is therefore positive — though the rise is not as dramatic as under S1. 625 16.6.4 The Argument Under S3 — As the Receptacle for Returning Value S3 is the world in which the advance of capability halts and AI is levelled into a generalpurpose tool. In this world the marginal value of all four components is positive, but the grounds differ from those under S1 and S2. National brain capital. As stated in Section 16.4.3, under S3 the sources of value return to physical assets, human beings and the field. In this world the four components of national brain capital become elements that generate value directly — because in a world where tools do not differ in performance, the capability of the human beings using them determines outcomes. Marginal value is positive, and among the four components the standing under S3 is clearest for this one. Exclusive domain data. Under S3 the marginal value of this component is positive but smaller than under S1 and S2. The reason is that in a world where the capability of AI stagnates, the ceiling on the value extractable from data likewise stagnates. It does not, however, become non-positive. Data has value independently of the performance of AI, as statistical analysis, as the visualization of operations, and as support for decisions. S3 does not reduce the value of data to zero; it only halts its rise. Value-definition capability. As stated in Section 16.4.3, value-definition capability absorbs the residual under S3 as well. The mechanism differs, however — under S2 through the universalization of capability, under S3 through the stagnation of capability, in both cases the competition over "how to achieve a given objective more cheaply and quickly" comes to an end. Under S3, the question of how to redesign work processes depends more strongly on the design capability of human beings, to the extent that the range of AI support available is limited. Marginal value is positive. Operational readiness. Under S3 the assessment of the marginal value of this component requires the greatest caution. In a world where capability stagnates and supply is stable, the need for switching decreases. In the narrow sense of "the capability to execute a switch to an alternative system," marginal value is therefore smaller than under S1 and S2. It is not, however, non-positive. There are two reasons. First, the risk of stoppage through technical failure does not disappear under S3 either — concentration of the execution foundation may persist independently of the stagnation of capability. Second, the operational readiness of Definition 6(iii) is in substance "the personnel and procedures able to understand a system, evaluate alternatives, and execute a migration," and this is a capability required for the operation of any information system independently of the performance of AI. Under S3 this capability keeps its marginal value positive while changing in character from "crisis management specific to AI" to "general capability in the operation of information systems." By the foregoing, it has been argued that marginal value is positive in all cells of the 3×4 grid. This argument is not, however, a deduction. Each item is an inference from propositions established in other sections of this paper and from facts verified in the evidence notes, and each is capable of empirical falsification. In particular, for exclusive 626 domain data and operational readiness under S3, the grounds for positive marginal value are thinner than for the other items. As the falsification condition states, if these are shown to be non-positive, the no-regret set contracts to three components or to two. This paper does not exclude that possibility. 16.6.5 Why Owning Frontier-Class Computing Infrastructure Outright Is Scenario- Dependent The latter part of Proposition 20 gives, as an example of what is not no-regret, owning frontier-class computing infrastructure outright. Making this contrast explicit fixes the outline of the no-regret set. It has high value under S1. In a world where access to capability is allocated politically and electricity and compute are rate-limiting, one's own computing infrastructure is an irreplaceable asset. The further the cross-axis transition described by Proposition 16 (Section 15) advances, the more availability from outside becomes a function of one's own political position rather than of price and quality. In this world, one's own infrastructure is at once insurance and bargaining power. It becomes overinvestment under S2. In a world where capability is universally obtainable and execution at practical levels is possible on devices, demand for concentrated frontier-class computing infrastructure falls far short of the original projections. Capital already committed is not recovered and utilization rates languish. What matters here is that not all computing infrastructure becomes valueless under S2. Infrastructure at a scale supporting operational capacity (Definition 6(i-a)) and renewal capability (Definition 6(i-b)) is required under S2 as well. What becomes overinvestment is the holding of frontier- class infrastructure — that is, of a scale able to train frontier models in-house. This distinction is decisive for policy and is at the centre of the design of staging treated in Section 16.7. It becomes a stranded asset under S3. As stated in Section 16.4.4, under S3 facilities are stranded through the disappearance of demand. The difference from S2 is that under S2 part of the infrastructure may be redeployed to another use (dispersed execution), whereas under S3 demand itself contracts so that destinations for redeployment are scarce as well. The loss under S3 is therefore greater than the loss under S2. From this the practical implication of Proposition 20 follows. Investment in frontierclass computing infrastructure has high value in only one of the three scenarios and generates losses in two. This distribution governs the character of the investment even without assigning probabilities — it is a wager, not a foundation. Making the wager is not itself an error. The error is to mistake the wager for a foundation and to execute it ahead of the no-regret actions. 16.6.6 This Section Is a Robustness Check on the Conclusions of Sections 10 and 17 The role this section plays within the paper as a whole is now made explicit. 627 Section 10 derived theoretically the conditions of viability of the M2×C2 cell. Its conclusion was that the defensibility of the transformation margin depends on the four indicators of complementary assets and, as their substrate, on national brain capital (Definition 11). Section 17 formulates as Proposition 17 that as the commoditization of capability advances the competitive advantage of efficiency gains diminishes and the residual moves to value-definition capability (Definition 12). Both conclusions were derived deductively within this paper's theoretical apparatus — starting from definitions, stacking propositions, and reaching conclusions inside the structure of the nine cells. This section answers the same question by an entirely different method. This section does not use the structure of the nine cells. What it uses is only three exogenous worlds and the marginal value of investment in each — an argument about cross-scenario expected value. And the no-regret set derived by that method — national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, operational readiness — is in substance identical with the substrate that Sections 10 and 17 identified theoretically. National brain capital and exclusive domain data are the conclusion of Section 10; value-definition capability is the conclusion of Section 17; and operational readiness is what Section 13 gave as the third component of Definition 6. This is a double confirmation. A substrate derived theoretically yields the same answer by an entirely different method — cross-scenario robustness. The two methods do not share premises. The derivation of Section 10 depends on the structure of the nine cells and the theory of complementary assets; the derivation of this section depends on neither. Indeed, although S2 is described as the world in which the structure of the nine cells itself lapses, the marginal value of the same four components was positive there as well. The significance of this double confirmation should not be overstated. The claim that the two methods are independent has limits. The argument of this section assesses the marginal value under each scenario by relying on propositions established in other sections of this paper (Propositions 17, 18, 21 and others). The two are therefore not completely independent. More precisely, what this section has shown is that "the conclusions of Sections 10 and 17 hold across several exogenous worlds, including the case in which the structure of the nine cells lapses," and not that two independent proofs have agreed. Even so, the confirmation has value, because it shows that the most important part of this paper's conclusions does not depend on this paper's most fragile apparatus — the tier division of the nine cells. Finally, it may be added that the no-regret set of this section is not specific to the state. The four components — national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, operational readiness — are isomorphic no-regret actions for securing the option of redefinition at Layer Three (the enterprise) as well; the points treated at the level of the firm by Enterprise Redefinition (2026b) and Brain Capital Management (2026e) are nothing other than the counterparts of the four components of this section at a different layer. The decision rule of this section — that robustness takes priority at a stage 628 where scenarios cannot be identified — therefore applies in the same form both to the design of national policy and to the investment judgments of firms. 16.7 The Ordering of Cross-Scenario Policy Design 16.7.1 The Principle of Ordering From Proposition 20 follows a principle of ordering for policy design. Execute the no-regret actions first, and stage the scenario-dependent investments after confirmation of the leading indicators. This principle is decomposed. The no-regret actions — the formation of national brain capital, the institutional protection and use of exclusive domain data, the cultivation of value-definition capability, and the securing of operational readiness — are executed immediately and in full, without waiting for the identification of a scenario. Since they carry positive marginal value in every world, there is no reason to delay execution. If anything, because all of these elements require accumulation with time constants on the order of years (Proposition 15, Section 15), a delay in starting cannot be recovered. Scenario-dependent investments — of which owning frontier-class computing infrastructure is the representative — await determination by the leading indicators (Table 16) and are executed in stages according to the determination. The content of "awaiting" matters here. What is awaited is execution, not preparation. Of the preparations — securing land, applying for electricity connection, training people, examining designs — those with low cost of reversal and redeployable to other uses may proceed without awaiting determination. This is precisely the logic of real options (Dixit & Pindyck, 1994) — an irreversible investment carries value in being deferred until uncertainty is resolved, but that value of deferral is realized only where the cost of holding the option is low. 16.7.2 This Ordering Is Not Wait-and-See This principle is often confused with waiting and seeing. To prevent the confusion, the difference between the two is made explicit. Waiting and seeing is deferring all investment until determination. The principle of this section has exactly the opposite structure. The no-regret actions are executed now, and what is awaited is only the scenario-dependent investments. If this distinction is lost, Proposition 20 turns into a justification for inaction on the ground that "matters are uncertain, so nothing should be done." Such a reading is the reverse of the content of Proposition 20. The difference is stated in three points. First, the objects differ. Waiting and seeing takes investment as a whole for its object. The principle of this section divides investment into two sets and assigns immediate exe‐ 629 cution to one and staging to the other. The criterion of division is the sign of cross-scenario marginal value. Second, the use of time differs. The waiting time in waiting and seeing is a blank that generates nothing. The waiting time under the principle of this section is time in which the accumulation of the no-regret actions proceeds. As Proposition 15 (Section 15) states, upward transition requires accumulation on the order of years, and downward transition occurs passively through nothing more than the relative depreciation of accumulation. If nothing is done, position descends. "Waiting" therefore stands as an option only where some other accumulation is proceeding while one waits. Third, the role of determination differs. In waiting and seeing, determination is a determination whether action may begin. Under the principle of this section, determination is a determination of which stage to proceed to. The former is binary, the latter multistage. 16.7.3 The Design of Staging — Triggers and Their Corresponding Investments The staging of scenario-dependent investment has the following structure. Stage 0 (unconditional). The minimum level required under any scenario. Of the three functions of Definition 6 (Section 13) — operational capacity (i-a), renewal capability (i-b), the sensitive-processing condition (i-c) — up to the level required for degraded operation of critical processes. This stage is included in the no-regret actions and does not await determination. What Section 10 formulated as "the minimum engagement with the higher tier necessary for retention" corresponds to this. What matters is that the object of guarantee at this stage is not the frontier of capability (Proposition 13, Section 18). Stage 1 (where several indicators in the direction of S1 are confirmed). The stage of raising the levels of operational capacity and renewal capability, fixing the diversification of procurement institutionally, and giving concrete form to arrangements for alliancebased guarantees (Definition 6(ii)). The triggering indicators are indicator 7 (expansion of the scope of control measures) and indicator 5 (worsening of the electricity constraint) in Table 16, with indicator 1 (lag width flat or widening) and indicator 6 (gross margin maintained high) read as auxiliary. The investment at this stage retains part of its value even if S2 or S3 is realized — operational capacity and renewal capability are required under S2 as well (Section 16.6.5), and the diversification of procurement is not wasted under S3. Stage 1 is therefore not a wholly scenario-dependent investment but has an intermediate character. Stage 2 (where indicators in the direction of S1 persist and one's own position requires maintenance of the higher tier). The stage of proceeding to hold computing infrastructure at a scale close to frontier class. This stage is a wholly scenario-dependent investment, becoming overinvestment under S2 and a stranded asset under S3. Proceeding to this stage therefore requires the persistence of the indicators over several years and presupposes an assessment of the cost of reversal (Section 16.7.4).

Staging in the reverse direction. Where indicators in the direction of S2 are confirmed, the centre of gravity of investment moves from concentrated computing infrastructure to dispersed execution infrastructure, institutions for the protection of data, and implementation personnel. Where indicators in the direction of S3 are confirmed, the centre of gravity moves further to physical assets, human capital and the improvement of existing industries. What matters is that in either direction the no-regret actions are not subject to review. Even where the determination changes, investment in national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability and operational readiness continues. 16.7.4 Assessment of the Cost of Reversal In the design of staging, it is a requirement to assess in advance the cost of reversal of the investment at each stage. The cost of reversal is the cost required to withdraw from the investment, or to redeploy it to another use, should the determination prove to have been mistaken. For the assessment, investments are classified by whether the cost of reversal is high or low. Investments with a low cost of reversal include the training of people, the preparation of procedures, the securing of contractual options, and equipment redeployable to other uses. These may proceed without awaiting determination — even if the determination is mistaken, the loss is limited. Investments with a high cost of reversal include large-scale facilities optimized for a particular use, long-term dedicated contracts, and investment in locations difficult to redeploy. These are executed only where the confidence of the determination is high. It should also be admitted that investments exist whose cost of reversal is difficult to assess. In particular, changes of institution — regulatory frameworks, law on the handling of data, procurement requirements — once introduced carry political rather than technical costs of withdrawal. This cost is difficult to assess in advance. In the design of institutions, therefore, building the procedure for reversal into the institution in advance — including the timing and procedure of review in the provisions — is the only means of lowering the cost of reversal. This design philosophy has the same structure as the requirement Section 9 stated for critical-tier governance, that "continual downward revision of thresholds be built into the institution." In addition, the cost of reversal is asymmetric. Recovery from underinvestment takes the time constant of accumulation, while recovery from overinvestment takes fiscal amortization. The former requires time on the order of years; the latter can be resolved with money. This asymmetry suggests that, at a stage where determination is uncertain, error on the side of underinvestment is the harder to recover from — though this suggestion holds only for the no-regret actions. For scenario-dependent investment, the fiscal loss of overinvestment may be converted indirectly into a loss with a time constant, by squeezing the room available for other policies. 631 16.7.5 The Modes in Which This Ordering Fails Finally, three modes in which this design fails are named. Making the limits of a design explicit is part of the design. Failure mode (a) No-regret actions are misread as costless actions. No regret means that marginal value is positive in every world; it does not mean that there is no cost. The formation of national brain capital requires long-term allocation of resources to education, training and remuneration; the protection and use of exclusive domain data require institutional design and the cost of operating it; the cultivation of value-definition capability requires changes in organization and personnel; and the securing of operational readiness requires exercises and the cost of maintaining redundancy. That no-regret actions are reinterpreted as "the things easiest to start with" and turn into a list of measures without substance is the most likely failure of this design. Failure mode (b) Determination becomes subordinate to the justification of prior investment. Where large-scale investment has already been made, determination is biased in the direction of justifying that investment. An actor that has invested in the direction of S1 has an inducement to read the indicators of S1 too generously. This bias is mitigated only by separating the procedure of determination from the actor executing the investment, by recording and publishing the grounds of determination, and by making explicit in advance the indicators that would prompt a change of determination. It is for this reason that Appendix F treats the design of collegial determination. Failure mode (c) Staging turns into the fixing of stages. The design of staging presupposes movement both upward and downward. In actual policy processes, however, there is a tendency for a stage once set to become fixed as an acquired level, with no downward movement taking place. To prevent this tendency, a design is required in which the continuation of each stage is itself subject to periodic redetermination and positive grounds are demanded for continuation. This is close to the conception of budgeting that builds up from zero rather than presupposing incremental growth. 16.8 Summary The content of this section is summarized. First, this section made no predictions. It described three world scenarios (Definition 13) but did not state which is realized, and assigned no probabilities. The reasons are as stated in Section 16.1.4: the absence of ground, the avoidance of steering toward the maximization of expected value, and discipline against this paper's structural conflict of interest. What this section gave is not prediction but identifiability. Second, the three scenarios stand in different relations to this paper's framework. S1 (Fragmentation) is the world in which this paper's framework holds most strongly, and in which the critical-tier governance argument (Section 9) has the highest relevance — though C3 is at the time of writing an unrealized anticipatory category. S2 (Diffusion) is 632 the world in which the falsification condition of this paper's core proposition (Proposition 2) is met, and in which the nine cells degenerate into three cells. Under S3 (Stagnation), C3 does not arrive and the argument of Section 9 remains as a counterfactual. This section described the two worlds unfavourable to its own thesis with the same precision as the world favourable to it. Third, in all three scenarios, nonetheless, the substrate this paper identified remains. Under S1 as a complement that becomes scarce, under S2 as the only factor of differentiation converting dispersed capability into value, and under S3 as the receptacle when the sources of value return to the physical and the human, the marginal value of national brain capital (Definition 11), exclusive domain data, value-definition capability (Definition 12) and operational readiness (Definition 6(iii)) is positive in every world (Proposition 20). This is a robustness check by an entirely different method on the conclusions derived theoretically in Sections 10 and 17, and constitutes a double confirmation. Fourth, owning frontier-class computing infrastructure outright is scenario-dependent. It has high value under S1, becomes overinvestment under S2, and becomes a stranded asset under S3. A distribution in which it has high value in only one of the three worlds and generates losses in two governs the character of the investment even without assigning probabilities — it is a wager, not a foundation. Fifth, thirteen leading indicators for identification were arranged in Table 16. Nine of them observe the structure of AI capability and four observe geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15). Selection proceeded by the two conditions of discriminating power and leadingness. And it was shown, with a concrete example for each indicator, that no indicator on its own excludes another explanation. Determination should require movement of several indicators in the same direction, should be made collegially among several actors, and should be carried out by sector and by use. The operable monitoring table is placed in Appendix F. Sixth, the ordering of policy design is: no-regret actions first, scenario-dependent investment staged thereafter. This is not waiting and seeing — the no-regret actions are executed immediately without awaiting determination, and what is awaited is only the dependent investment. Since position descends if nothing is done (Proposition 15, Section 15), the condition on which this ordering stands is that the waiting time is filled with some other accumulation. The bridge from this section to the next is stated. Section 17 relocates this paper's Layer Zero within the four-layer architecture and, by way of Proposition 17 (diminishing returns to efficiency and the residual of value-definition capability) and national brain capital (Definition 11), connects it to the other layers of the series — capital allocation (Layer One), the institutional footing of self-definition (Layer Two), and enterprise management (Layer Three). Of the four components identified in this section as constituting the no-regret set, two — value-definition capability and national brain capital — are precisely what Section 17 develops as the points of connection between Layer Zero and the three lower 633 layers. That the conclusion this section reached from cross-scenario expected value and the conclusion Section 17 reaches from the structure between layers point to the same components is the focus in reading the next section. The bridge to Section 18 is also stated. Section 18 applies this paper's theory to the case of Japan. Viewed from the standpoint of this section, Japan is a state that aims at the cell of highest tension under S1 (M2×C2), that holds the data and the field that should be the basis of differentiation under S2, and that faces the constraint of human resources earliest under S3. In all three scenarios, the content of the no-regret actions for Japan does not change. What changes is only the judgment about scenario-dependent investment — the scale and stage of public investment in computing infrastructure. Of the three-part set treated in Section 18 (M2′, deepening M3, and a guarantee level for the three functions), the first two correspond to the no-regret set of this section and the third to Stage 0. This section is the device for making explicit, before entering the discussion of Japan, which world that discussion presupposes. And at the same time, the same device applies to any middle power other than Japan. The meaning of this paper's being a general theory lies in that applicability (Proposition 21, Section 14). 634 17. Layer Zero and the Four-Layer Architecture — Value- Definition Capability and National Brain Capital 17.1 The Layer That Distributes Preconditions — The Task of This Section From Section 3 through Section 15, this paper has analysed the state as such: the discipline of analogy (Proposition 1, Section 3), differentiation into capability tiers (Proposition 2, Section 5), the non-equivalence of the nine cells (Proposition 3, Section 6), the conditions of viability and the failure modes of each cell (Sections 7 to 9), the focal analysis of the most important cell (Section 10), AI as critical infrastructure and AI outage (Propositions 7 and 8, Section 13), country profiles (Section 14), and the dynamics of cell transition (Propositions 15 and 16, Section 15). This section reverses the direction of view. The position a state occupies does not determine only that state's own fortunes. It distributes from above the conditions that each layer of the three-layer architecture built over the nine papers of this series — Layer One (the structure of the era: capital allocation), Layer Two (the structure of society: the institutional footing of self-definition), and Layer Three (enterprise management: redefinition and value creation) — has tacitly presupposed. To make this structure of distribution explicit, and thereby to extend the series from three layers to four, is the task of this section. The definition of Layer Zero itself was given in Definition 8 (Section 2). The content of the expression "distributes preconditions" should be fixed at the outset. The theory of each layer of the series is built upon its own tacit givens. Redefinition Capitalism (Kadowaki, 2026g) discussed the existence and verifiability of the generative capability Λ that capital ought to price, but presupposed that the AI capability required for that generative capability to operate is procurable within the jurisdiction concerned. Self- Defined Society (Kadowaki, 2026f) designed the institutional footing that protects authorship over value definition and the making of decisions, but presupposed access to the means required for the cognitive labour of self-definition. Enterprise redefinition and the body of management theory surrounding it (Kadowaki, 2026b, 2026c, 2026e, 2026h, 2026i) presupposed the AI capability that can be committed to executing redefinition, and the continuity of its supply. From the standpoint of firms and individuals, these presuppositions are givens that cannot be moved. From the standpoint of Layer Zero, however, they are variables that move as functions of the state's cell position, access conditions, and guarantee level. To add to the architecture an analytical level at which givens can be treated as variables — that is the methodological significance of establishing Layer Zero. This section does not, however, end with making the channels of transmission explicit. The work of extending three layers to four requires, in addition to a description of the channels, a theory of the joint. Without a mediating variable showing that the upper and lower layers are different levels of the same theory, Layer Zero remains a discourse of an‐ 635 other kind placed on top of the existing three layers — that is, an international political economy grafted onto a system of management theory. The mediating variables this section presents are two. The first is value-definition capability (Definition 12), which is formalized in Proposition 17 as the residual that generates differences between states and between firms under a structure in which the competitive advantage of efficiency gains diminishes (17.3). The second is national brain capital (Definition 11, Section 10), which rereads the arguments about the human substrate that the series has conducted at the level of the firm — Brain Capital Management (2026e) and the audit value of experience (2026i) — as the substrate of defensibility at the level of the state (17.4). These two mediating variables are two expressions, from the side of ends and from the side of the substrate, of one and the same asymmetry: AI capability itself can be imported, but what one aims at by using it, and the layer of people who can verify it, cannot. Only when both are introduced are the human brain on the floor of Layer Three (2026e) and the state strategy of Layer Zero connected as the two ends of a single theory. At this point a note common to the series must be applied to this section as well. The arrangement of layers is architectural and is not a claim of logical dependence (Definition 8, Section 2). It is not asserted that Layer Zero is "cause" and the three lower layers "effect" in a one-directional causality. As discussed below, the reverse channels — the thickness of the transformation assets of a country's firms sustaining the state's cell position, capital allocation making possible the construction of the guarantee level, and the absorptive capacity of individuals governing the depth of utilization — are in fact in operation, and the mutual complementarity of the three-part set discussed by Proposition 13 (Section 18) stands precisely upon this bidirectionality. What the ordering of layers declares is not the direction of causation but a declaration of exogeneity — which variables are treated as given in the analysis of which layer. In the decision-making of a firm, the state's cell position is given in the short run; in the decision-making of a state, the positions of other states and the structure of suppliers are partly given. This nested exogeneity is the precise content of the metaphor of "layers." The note is raised again, in stronger form, in 17.5 — the claim that redefinition at the macro, meso, and micro levels runs through on a single axis is not the claim that redefinition at an upper layer determines redefinition at a lower one. Why is Layer Zero needed now? In the age of oil, it was obvious that a state's energy policy and trade regime distributed the givens of corporate strategy. Nevertheless, most of the management theory and capital-market theory developed in the latter half of the twentieth century could be constituted with the state abstracted away. This was because the supply of oil, the bottleneck input, reached anyone in principle through the market, price fluctuations notwithstanding — that the supply crises of 1973 and 1979 brought analysis at the level of the state temporarily to the surface precisely as exceptions is the obverse of the fact that in normal times it could remain submerged. With AI the situation differs. As Sections 5 and 8 showed, the supply of frontier capability is concentrated in a small number of states and firms, and access conditions have become a permanent policy variable through export controls, terms of use, and the allocation of capacity. Layer Zero, 636 which in the oil period surfaced only in exceptional times, operates permanently in the case of AI. That the conditions of an era in which management theory could abstract away the state are being lost — this is the reason a series that is a system of management theory requires a layer of the state. Finally, the discipline of self-citation should be confirmed. Because this section takes connection within the series as its very subject, self-citation is structurally concentrated here. Following the series' discipline, the context makes explicit which of the three classes each citation falls into — foundational axiom (citation as an axiom of the system), structural correspondence (correspondence between levels of an isomorphic structure), and forward reference (referral to future empirical work or design) — and no decorative selfcitation that does not fall within the classification is made. Among the citations in this section, the reference to Future Value Theory (2026a) in Proposition 17 (17.3) and in the discussion of the state's Λ (17.9) is citation as foundational axiom; the greater part of the remainder is structural correspondence; and the passages that refer implementation and verification elsewhere are forward references. The substance of making the classification explicit lies not in reducing the total volume of self-citation but in enabling the reader to judge the argumentative work each citation performs — a decorative self-citation being precisely one that, when put to this test, is revealed to perform none. 17.2 Proposition 11 — Three Channels of Inter-Layer Transmission Transmission from Layer Zero to the three lower layers is formalized by this paper in the following proposition. 637 Proposition 11 (Inter-Layer Transmission) The position of Layer Zero distributes the operating conditions of the three lower layers through the following channels. (i) Toward RCap (Layer One): the state's cell position and access conditions govern the range of future value that capital can price (the Λ of 2026g) and the bottleneck price of AI complements (2026g, Proposition 7). (ii) Toward SDS (Layer Two): the stratification of AI access governs the distribution of the cognitive means required for self-definition, and the design of access rights (universal basic access or market allocation) becomes part of the institutional footing of a self-defined society. (iii) Toward the ER group (Layer Three): the state's cell position delimits the set of redefinition options attainable by firms (2026b) and the upper bound of the AI capability available for oversight architecture (2026h) and for the management of brain capital (2026e/2026i). Falsification condition Because Layer Zero delimits the upper bound of the lower layers but does not guarantee a lower bound, testing is conducted not against the mean but against the upper envelope of the distribution. In a country × firm panel, if the upper quantile (for instance the 90th percentile) of indicators of firms' redefinition behaviour does not vary with the access conditions of the jurisdiction concerned, the transmission channel is rejected. In addition, in an event study taking as events the exogenous changes in access conditions of October 2022, October 2023, January 2025, and May 2025, if the upper bound of redefinition behaviour among the firms of affected jurisdictions does not change relative to jurisdictions that were unaffected, it is likewise rejected. The form of this falsification condition is required by the logical form of Proposition 11's claim. What Proposition 11 asserts is not a relation of determination — that the position of Layer Zero determines the behaviour of the lower layers — but a relation of upper bound: that the position of Layer Zero delimits the outer perimeter of the range attainable by the lower layers. As set out below in 17.2.3, Layer Zero delimits the upper bound but does not guarantee a lower bound — firms in jurisdictions favoured by access conditions retain the freedom not to redefine. This asymmetry has direct consequences for the design of the test. A claim about an upper bound generates no average association in samples in which the upper bound is not in fact binding. If a jurisdiction with permissive access conditions contains many firms operating far below the upper bound, a comparison of means may return "no association"; but that is not a falsification of the proposition, merely the consequence of the bound not having been binding. A falsification condition that tests the association of means therefore does not cover the proposition — the proposition would retain in advance the escape of answering an observation of "no association" with "the bound was not binding." The only way to close this escape is to test an upperbound claim as an upper bound. 638 Two concrete forms of test are available. The first is quantile regression. With an indicator of firms' redefinition behaviour as the dependent variable and the jurisdiction's access conditions as the explanatory variable, the 90th percentile (or the upper envelope obtained by stochastic frontier estimation) is estimated rather than the mean. If the upperbound relation holds, the upper envelope should lie lower the more constrained a jurisdiction's access conditions are; if the envelope is flat with respect to access conditions, the transmission channel is rejected. Quantile regression and stochastic frontier estimation are established methods for testing upper-bound claims, and the feasibility of this test is a matter of data preparation rather than of method. The second is the event study. In Sections 5 and 8 this paper has set out, with dates, the exogenous changes in access conditions — the export controls on advanced semiconductors of October 2022, their strengthening in October 2023, the announcement of a three-tier licensing scheme in January 2025, and its rescission and the shift to transaction-based licensing in May of the same year. These are events that moved, discontinuously and independently of circumstances on the firms' side, the access conditions of particular groups of jurisdictions alone. Comparing how the upper bound of redefinition behaviour moved before and after each event, between the firms of affected jurisdictions and those of unaffected jurisdictions, approaches causal identification of the upper-bound relation. If the upper bound does not move, the transmission channel is rejected. That Sections 5 and 8 set out the dates of policy changes with precision was at once an enrichment of description and the preparation of material for Proposition 11's identification strategy. 639 Figure 6. Channels of transmission from Layer Zero to the three lower layers (the three channels of Proposition 11). The position of Layer Zero (cell position, access conditions, guarantee level) distributes to Layer One the range of future value that can be priced, to Layer Two the distribution of cognitive means, and to Layer Three the outer perimeter of the set of attainable redefinition options. The arrows are a declaration of exogeneity and coexist with the reverse channels of construction (dashed). The structure common to the three channels should be grasped first. First, the Layer Zero variable transmitted is the same in each case: the position, that is, "in which cell the state stands and what access conditions and guarantee level it holds." The same position appears in different forms according to the receiving layer — to capital markets as the range of future value that can be priced, to social institutions as the distribution of cognitive means, and to firms as the outer perimeter of the set of attainable options. Second, what is transmitted is not resources themselves but a range of possibility. Layer Zero does not determine the behaviour of the lower layers. What it determines is the boundary of the set from which the agents of the lower layers may choose. In this sense all three channels are formalized as constraints on the opportunity set, and it is for this reason that the falsification conditions take the form of "the association between differences in position and differences in behaviour or opportunity." Third, the three channels are not mutually independent. If capital cannot price, firms cannot obtain funds for redefinition; if firms do not redefine, the occupational routes for individual self-definition narrow. Inter-layer transmission operates not only in parallel but also in series. The framework of this section adds a fourth common structure to these three channels. In each of the three, what is transmitted is not only access to capability but also where the authority to define is placed. In the channel toward RCap, what is at issue is the authority to define what capital prices as future value. In the channel toward SDS, what is at Layer Zero — National Structure (this paper, No. 10) The state's cell position (M×C) and conditions of access Channel 1 Conditions for the pricing of capital Channel 2 Material conditions of self-definition Channel 3 Upper bound on redefinition options Layer One — RCap (7) The range of future value that capital can price Layer Two — SDS (6) Distribution of AI access required for self-definition Layer Three — ER group (1)–(5), (8), (9) Upper bound on the set of enterprise redefinition options The three channels of Proposition 11. The arrangement is architectural and is not a claim of logical dependence (a note common to the series). 640

issue is the authorship by which individuals may define what they are. In the channel toward the ER group, what is at issue is the setting of a firm's Purpose — what it exists for. Layer Zero distributes the range within which these acts of definition may be performed, and at the same time receives its own capacity to define from the totality of those acts. In the three subsections that follow, each channel is rewritten from this dual standpoint — the distribution of capability and the distribution of definition. Proposition 17 (17.3) and national brain capital (17.4) are the theoretical warrant for this rewriting. 17.2.1 Toward RCap (Layer One) — The Range of Future Value That Capital Can Price Redefinition Capitalism (Kadowaki, 2026g) decomposed enterprise value into V = A + G + Λ — assets held, visible growth options, and unpriced generative capability — and discussed the three conditions of a regime in which capital is allocated to verified Λ (legibility, time defence subject to renewal conditions, and bottleneck-oriented allocation) (citation as structural correspondence). That paper's argument, however, stood upon one tacit presupposition. Generative capability Λ is the capability to produce new option sets, but in the age of AI a substantial part of those options becomes executable only through the commitment of AI capability. The effective magnitude of a firm's Λ is thus conditioned upon which level of AI capability the firms of the jurisdiction concerned can access, and on what terms. The state's cell position and access conditions are that condition itself. The mechanism is twofold. The first is a level effect. In jurisdictions where Tier C2 access is constrained, redefinition options premised on frontier capability drop out of the feasible set, and the very range of Λ that capital ought to price contracts. The definition of generative capability (2026g) was "an option on the creation of options," but if the inputs required to exercise a created option cannot be procured, the value of that option is thinned by the fall in the probability of exercise. The second is an uncertainty effect. Even where access is presently assured, if that assurance may be altered by the policy decisions of other states or the commercial judgment of suppliers (the structural vulnerability of M3×C2 discussed in Section 8), the valuation of Λ carries a discount for the risk of altered conditions. Two firms with the same generative capability may differ in the future value that capital markets can rationally price, if the reliability of the access assurance in the jurisdictions where they are located differs. In the vocabulary of RCap, before the problem of legibility (can a firm's Λ be observed?) lies the problem of possibility (is a firm's Λ executable at all?), and it is Layer Zero that distributes the latter. However far the infrastructure of legibility is built out, if the range of possibility is narrow, what ought to be read is thin. This channel can also be described as a change in the composition of country risk. Capital markets have long priced the institutional, currency, and political risk of each jurisdiction as country risk. What the Layer Zero framework adds is a new component of it — access risk, that is, the probability that the supply of AI capability on which the firms of a jurisdiction depend is interrupted, refused, or subjected to altered conditions. AI outage 641 (Definition 4, Section 13) shows that this risk is not idiosyncratic to individual firms. An interruption of supply is a non-diversifiable factor that acts in correlated fashion on the Λ of all firms within a jurisdiction that depend on the same supplier or the same platform, and cannot be eliminated by the efforts of individual firms. From the standpoint of capital markets, therefore, the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6, Section 13) may be read as a downside put on the future value of all domestic firms — a guarantee of the minimum executive capacity that is not lost even under interruption scenarios. The perspective that accounts for fiscal expenditure on the guarantee level not as "a subsidy to a particular industry" but as "tail-risk insurance on the Λ of the national economy" connects to the measurement dimension of Proposition 14 (17.6). To this a third mechanism is added: the location of the authority to define. Capital allocation is, in the end, a declaration of which futures are deemed worth realizing, and that declaration is observed as a flow of funds. Value-definition capability (Definition 12) is defined as the capability to make this declaration and to realize it by translating it into resource allocation — that is, the capacity to define is a capacity on the deciding side of capital allocation. The claim of Proposition 11's first channel, that the state's cell position governs the range of what capital prices, therefore has a two-layer structure. At the surface, access conditions delimit the feasible option set (the level effect and the uncertainty effect). At depth, the very ordering of values — which ends deserve to attract capital — is determined as a function of the capacity to define held by the state, society, and firms. Where Layer Zero lacks that capacity, a country's capital flows toward following the ends defined elsewhere — belated allocation to fields already declared valuable in other places. Such following may be rational, but the return arising from such allocation diminishes with the progress of imitation, isomorphically with the advantage of efficiency gains in the sense stated by Proposition 17. Whereas RCap's third condition (bottleneck-oriented allocation) was the discipline of "invest in the constraint that is binding," what the argument about value-definition capability adds is a question one step prior: which constraint is regarded as binding at all depends on the selection of ends. The channel also operates in reverse. When RCap's third condition (bottleneck-oriented capital allocation) is implemented at the level of the state — that is, when capital is allocated over long horizons to the construction of slow complements such as compute infrastructure, electricity, and people — the state's cell position and access conditions themselves move. Layer Zero distributes a range to Layer One, and Layer One's allocation constructs Layer Zero's position. That this circulation may become either virtuous or vicious (a failure of allocation fixing the position, and a fixed position removing the objects of allocation) is also why Proposition 11's falsification condition demands verification of channels rather than mere correlation. The discipline of the circulation is supplied by the national version of the bottleneck theorem formalized in 17.7. 642 17.2.2 Toward SDS (Layer Two) — The Distribution of Cognitive Means Self-Defined Society (Kadowaki, 2026f) designed the institutional footing that protects authorship over value definition and the making of decisions, in an era in which individuals' constitution of the meaning of their lives shifts from "belonging" to "self-definition" (structural correspondence). That paper's footing was designed chiefly at the level of institutions internal to a single society — disclosure, contract, and transition support. What this paper adds is the material floor on which that footing stands. Self-definition is a cognitive labour. Conceiving one's own value definition, setting it against the definitions of others, and translating it into the form of an occupation, a business, or a life depends on capacities for searching, organizing, and trying out information. As AI becomes the principal amplifier of these cognitive tasks, the structure by which AI access is distributed becomes the structure by which the substantive possibility of self-definition is distributed. What Layer Zero distributes to Layer Two is the initial condition of that distribution. Here the distinctions of the capability tiers (Definition 2, Section 5) take effect. Tier C1 (commodity tier) capability is by definition under price competition among multiple suppliers, and its universalization works as a raising of the floor of the possibility of selfdefinition — the competitive proposition that "a capability everyone can use is no one's advantage" (Section 7) inverts, at the level of society, into the welfare proposition that "a capability everyone can use is everyone's floor." What makes a difference is Tier C2. The rationing of frontier capability by price, capacity, and permission produces a twofold stratification, between states (those assured of access and those not) and within states (differences by ability to pay, language, region, and regulation). That this stratification is not a mere reflection of income inequality but an independent axis of inequality is formalized by this paper in the following proposition. 643 Proposition 12 (Stratification of Access) The rationing of Tier C2 capability by price, capacity, and permission forms a new axis of inequality between states and within states — disparity in access to cognitive resources. This disparity correlates with income disparity but is not identical to it, and is independently amplified by each of the factors of education, language, electricity, and regulation. Isomorphically with the way a power outage came to be socially redefined as the suspension of a basic service, AI access comes under pressure to be redefined at the level of basic infrastructure (universal service). Falsification condition As to the first limb (formation of the disparity) — if, after controlling for income, none of the four factors of educational attainment, mother tongue, access to electricity, and jurisdiction explains the variance in the effective level of Tier C2 access, the claim of an independent axis of inequality is rejected. As to the second limb (pressure toward universal service) — in a jurisdiction in which AI access has become a substantive precondition of critical processes (administrative procedures, educational assessment, applications for employment), if within five years none of (a) a public guarantee of basic access, (b) regulation of detrimental treatment on grounds of access, or (c) universal provision through public funds reaches the policy agenda, the claim of pressure is rejected. Proposition 12 consists of two claims, and the two are claims of different kinds — the first limb is a descriptive claim about a present distribution, the second a conditional prediction about the movement of institutions. The two cannot be covered by a single falsification condition. This proposition therefore gives an independent falsification condition to each limb. The falsification condition of the first limb reduces to a regression question: do the four factors have explanatory power over the residual after controlling for income? The falsification condition of the second limb, by contrast, is adjudicated by reference to the observable event of institutional agenda-setting. What the second limb asserts is not the existence of institutions but the existence of pressure, and pressure can be tested not by "does the institution already exist?" but by "in a jurisdiction where presupposition has occurred, does institutionalization reach the policy agenda within a stated period?" As of August 2026, no legislative instance placing AI access as a statutory universal service of the telephone or electricity type can be confirmed (Section 13). This fact is not a falsification of the second limb — at a stage where presupposition has not yet occurred, the second limb predicts nothing. The second limb is falsified where, in a jurisdiction in which presupposition has occurred, none of (a), (b), or (c) reaches the agenda even after a period of five years. By this formulation, the second limb changes from an unfalsifiable prediction that "it will happen eventually" into a comparable observation that first adjudicates independently whether presupposition has occurred and then contrasts the presence or absence of agenda-setting. That the criteria for adjudicating presupposition — can the process concerned be completed without AI, and what are the cost and time of altern‐ 644 ative routes? — are identical to the procedure for measuring the rate of degradation upon interruption in the dependence audit (Definition 4, Section 13) is no accident. Pressure toward universal service is pressure that arises when dependence on the side of society passes a threshold. Proposition 12's claim that this stratification is an independent axis of inequality takes testable form through the specification of four amplifying factors. Education implies that formal equality of access does not mean equality of outcome, because the value extractable from the same access depends on the user's prior knowledge and capacity to structure tasks — here the structure of the second-level digital divide, repeatedly observed in relation to information technology, whereby the diffusion of a technology rather widens existing gaps in knowledge, is reproduced. Language implies that users outside the anglophone world receive different quality at the same price, because the linguistic distribution of learning resources appears as an asymmetry of capability across languages — this is an axis independent of income, and the direction of the disparity may cross between highincome non-anglophone and low-income anglophone settings. Electricity implies that the absence of stable power and telecommunications disables access prior to any question of ability to pay. Regulation implies that restrictions on the regions served, data disciplines, and restrictions on use cut the level of capability available on a jurisdictional basis. All four factors correlate with income, yet all should be observable as independent sources of variation remaining after income is controlled for, and the presence or absence of this "residual after income control" constitutes the substantive test of Proposition 12. To this channel an aggregation relation in the reverse direction is explicitly added. Selfdefinition is nothing other than the exercise of value-definition capability at the level of the individual — Definition 12 places "states, societies, and firms" side by side as the subjects of this capability precisely because the capability is isomorphic across levels. The aggregate of individuals' capacity for self-definition therefore forms part of national brain capital. The aggregation here is not an arithmetic sum. Among the four components of Definition 11 (Section 10), tacit knowledge of the field and judgment embedded in language and culture accumulate through individuals choosing their own occupational position and remaining in that position over long periods. The professional ethics that make trust in institutions possible arise not from individuals following the instructions of those they belong to, but from a state in which those who hold their own occupational value definition are able to raise objections in the light of that definition. As for the capacity for audit based on long domain experience (2026i), the accumulation of experience is itself a consequence of the self-definition by which a person continues to remain in that field. In a society where the institutional footing of self-definition (2026f) does not function — where the choice of occupation is left to the inertia of belonging and redefinition mid-course is institutionally penalized — all four components of national brain capital become thin. The stratification of access is therefore at once a question of fairness and a question of damage to the substrate of the state's defensibility. This duality is taken up again in 17.4.4 as a path of attrition. 645 A second aspect of the reverse direction of this channel — construction from Layer Two to Layer Zero — should also be stated. The distribution of individuals' absorptive capacity governs the upper bound of the state's depth of utilization (M3) (Proposition 5, Section 7). A society in which the institutional footing of self-definition (2026f) functions, and in which individuals can translate their own value definitions into the form of occupations and businesses, constitutes, as the totality of those translations, the state's absorptive capacity. The stratification of access is therefore a question of capability as well, in the sense that a state which confines access to cognitive resources to a part of its population is itself cutting away its own capacity to construct slow complements (17.7). This coincidence — that fairness and capability depend on the same design variable — makes the design of access rights (17.8) justifiable from either the normative or the strategic side; but it also makes necessary a judgment in cases where the two diverge, that is, where shortrun efficiency demands concentrated allocation. That judgment exceeds the scope of this paper and is referred back to the institutional design of SDS (2026f) (forward reference). The implications of Proposition 12 — how access rights are to be designed — are discussed separately in 17.8. Here only the point relevant to transmission is confirmed. The institutional footing of SDS acquires substance only once access to cognitive means is secured. The design of the footing (Layer Two) and the design of access (Layer Zero) are problems of different layers, but the former without the latter remains formal. Borrowing the vocabulary of the capability approach (Sen, 1999), the freedom of self-definition is not sufficient as formal freedom and requires the material conditions of the capability to exercise it — in the age of AI, AI access is a new component of that condition, and Layer Zero distributes its structure of supply. 17.2.3 Toward the ER Group (Layer Three) — The Set of Attainable Redefinition Options Layer Three is a body of management theory centred on the framework of enterprise redefinition (Kadowaki, 2026b) and surrounded by the theory of value (2026a), empirical work (2026c), role design (2026d), brain capital (2026e), oversight architecture (2026h), and the temporal theory of management (2026i). Transmission to this layer is the most concrete of the three channels. Enterprise redefinition is the rewriting of value definition across five dimensions — purpose, boundary, time, agency, and measurement (2026b) — but although the conception of the rewriting may be completed within cognition, its execution requires the commitment of AI capability. The state's cell position and access conditions draw the line between redefinitions a firm can conceive but not execute and those it can both conceive and execute. That is, Layer Zero delimits the outer perimeter of a firm's set of redefinition options. There are at least three concrete points of transmission. First, the option set itself. Firms in jurisdictions lacking assured access must treat business redefinitions premised on frontier capability as options unexecutable at the time of evaluation, and prune them at an early stage of search. Extending the argument about observational asymmetry set out by 646 the empirical work on enterprise redefinition (2026c), this pruning is indistinguishable from the outside from "an omission to redefine" — the observational problem in which constraints originating with the state are misattributed to firms' conservatism arises at the level of international comparison. The methodological implication, that differences in redefinition rates across countries must be controlled for differences in Layer Zero position before being read as differences in managerial culture, is reflected directly in the design of Proposition 11's falsification condition. Second, oversight architecture. The oversight architecture of Human on the Loop (2026h), which discussed the conditions under which human oversight breaks down and how it should be designed, depends on the level and reliability of the AI capability that can be committed to oversight. That the oversight system is itself subject to access conditions is invisible in normal times but becomes manifest, in an AI outage, as the correlation whereby operational and oversight systems dependent on the same supplier halt simultaneously (Proposition 7, Section 13). Third, the management of brain capital. The complementary investments on the human side designed by Brain Capital Management (2026e) and Ageless Management (2026i) — learning, recovery, and the redefinition of roles irrespective of age — are conducted upon the state's educational and labour institutions, and upon electricity and compute infrastructure. The external conditions presupposed by an organization's management of brain capital are distributed by Layer Zero. A reverse relation attaches to this channel too. A firm's setting of Purpose — the declaration of what it exists for, and the translation of that declaration into role design (2026b, 2026d) — is the actual bearer of the state's capacity to define. A state's specification of ends (the purpose dimension of Proposition 14, 17.6) is written in strategy documents, but written ends are realized as actual resource allocation and organizational structure chiefly at the level of firms and individuals. In the light of Definition 12's definition of value-definition capability as "the capability to select, and to realize the selection by translating it into resource allocation, institutional design, and organizational structure," the translation and realization portions of a state's capacity to define cannot be held by the state alone — the organ of realization is the firm. Two consequences follow. First, in a country where enterprise redefinition remains rare (the asymmetry observed by 2026c), however ambitious a state's specification of ends may be, it remains a declaration. Second, conversely, even where a state's specification of ends is blank, if firms set and realize their own Purposes, the state's capacity to define exists as a matter of fact — though it exists in dispersed form and does not thereby possess an aggregated direction. The policy question about a state's capacity to define is therefore not "should the state decide the ends?" but "does there exist, as an institution, a forum in which the acts of definition performed by firms and individuals are aggregated, brought into collision, and endowed with resources?" This question is taken up again in 17.5 as a problem of the coupling of layers and in 17.6 as a problem of the agency dimension of Proposition 14. Here too the asymmetry of transmission should be stated. Layer Zero delimits the upper bound but does not guarantee a lower bound. Firms in jurisdictions favoured by cell position and access conditions retain the freedom not to redefine, and that observed redefini‐ 647 tions remain few is what the empirical work on enterprise redefinition (2026c) shows. Layer Zero is not a sufficient condition for redefinition. The precise content of the verb "distribute" is therefore the setting of an upper bound of possibility, not the distribution of outcomes. If the state moves cell but firms do not move, there is no fruit; if firms seek to move but the state has narrowed the outer perimeter, they do not reach it. The four-layer architecture should be read as a design problem that is completed by the optimization of no single layer, and it is precisely this reading that grounds the treatment, later in this section, of the state itself as a subject of redefinition. This asymmetry corresponds exactly to the form of the falsification condition stated at the head of 17.2. If Layer Zero delimits only an upper bound, then the claim must be tested against the upper bound — a design testing the association of means is nullified from the outset by the presence of samples in which the bound is not binding. Proposition 11's falsification condition takes the two forms of quantile regression and event study in order to take on, at the level of testing, the asymmetry this expository passage describes; conversely, as the price of having described Layer Zero's transmission correctly as "the setting of an upper bound and not the distribution of outcomes," this paper relinquishes the convenient test of an association of means. Upper bounds are harder to measure than lower bounds. But testing a quantity because it is easy to measure does not test the proposition. 17.3 Diminishing Returns to Efficiency and the Residual of Value-Definition Capability — Proposition 17 Thus far, what Layer Zero distributes to the lower layers has been described with "access to AI capability" at the centre. This subsection shows that the description is incomplete. Access to AI capability ceases to make a difference over time. Through Frontier Descent (Definition 2, Section 5), a capability at the frontier at one moment descends within a few years to a level procurable from multiple jurisdictions. Efficiency gains using the descended capability become attainable by anyone. Whence, then, do differences between states and between firms arise? The answer to this question is the point at which this section connects to the foundational axiom of the series. 17.3.1 Why the Competitive Advantage of Efficiency Gains Disappears Section 7 had already shown one face of this structure in its analysis of row C1 (the commodity tier). Tier C1 capability is by definition capability at a level for which substitutes meeting the required standard of the use in question exist in multiple jurisdictions. Holding Tier C1 capability therefore does not constitute a comparative advantage — "a capability everyone can use is no one's advantage" (Section 7). That section developed this proposition across the three cells of M1×C1 (producing without being able to dominate), M2×C1 (the extinction of the thin wrapper), and M3×C1 (the fastest diffusion, the least differentiation). What this subsection does is to extend that observation from a static remark about non-differentiation to the dynamics of the dissipation of advantage over time. 648 Dissipation proceeds in three stages. At the first stage, the capability is at the frontier (C2). Here differences in access generate advantage — who can use the capability determines who can do what. The structure of managed transformation and the power of life and death held over assured access, discussed in Section 8, is a description of this stage. At the second stage, the capability descends to C1. Differences in access disappear, but differences in implementation remain. Embedding the same capability in operational processes, training people, preparing data, and completing regulatory compliance require organization- specific investment and time. This cost of implementation works as a barrier to imitation and confers a temporary advantage on the first mover. At the third stage, the cost of implementation itself falls. The further AI diffuses, the shorter the distance from a description of an operational process to its implementation, and the shorter the time required to observe and reproduce the configuration of efficiency gains achieved by others. As the barrier thins, the advantage dissipates. That sustained competitive advantage depends on the height of imitation costs — that resources easy to imitate generate no sustained advantage even where they are valuable — is an established formulation in the theory of corporate strategy (Barney, 1991). Proposition 17 is nothing other than that formulation placed on the temporal axis of the tier descent of AI capability. An important distinction should be made here. That the competitive advantage of efficiency gains diminishes is not that efficiency gains become valueless. As Section 7 stated in its summary of row C1, Tier C1 capability is "the floor of participation," not "a source of advantage." A floor is decisively important in that whoever does not stand on it falls behind, and yet standing on it confers no differentiation. This asymmetry is a repetition of the classical point by which strategy has been distinguished from operational effectiveness in strategic management (Porter, 1996); what is new in the age of AI lies in the speed of convergence. The time required for the level of operational effectiveness to converge among competitors is shortened simultaneously along two channels: the descent of capability to C1 and the fall in implementation costs. When a convergence that once required several to a dozen or more years is shortened, the present value of the advantage obtained from investment in efficiency gains contracts by the amount of the shortening of the period to convergence. At the level of the state this structure appears in the following form: even where a country leads in raising operational effectiveness, that lead is converted into a relative position for the national economy only for the period until convergence is complete. This paper formalizes the foregoing structure as the following proposition. 649 Proposition 17 (Diminishing Returns to Efficiency and the Residual of Value- Definition Capability) As capability descends to C1, the competitive advantage yielded by efficiency gains in existing operations using that capability diminishes toward zero through the fall in imitation costs. Accordingly, the further the diffusion of AI capability proceeds, the more the residual that generates differences between states and between firms shifts to the capability to select and realize what is to be aimed at, rather than the efficiency with which given ends are achieved (value-definition capability, Definition 12). This shift is the consequence, at the level of the state, of Future Value Theory (2026a), which reverses the origin of value from past performance to future conception. Falsification condition If, in sectors and countries with a high degree of diffusion of Tier C1 capability, it is observed that disparities in outcome between firms and between states according to the degree of efficiency gains do not narrow, the claim of diminishing returns is rejected. Further, if proxy indicators of value-definition capability (the distinctiveness of the specification of ends, the consistency of long-term resource allocation, and the rate of creation of new markets) do not explain disparities in outcome, the claim regarding the attribution of the residual is rejected. A qualification bearing on the whole of the discussion that follows is placed here in advance. Proposition 17 is not complete as it stands above. The claim that the residual shifts to value-definition capability tacitly presupposes that the value defined is accepted outside the jurisdiction concerned; where that presupposition does not hold, a high capacity to define generates no difference in national value. The work of making this presupposition explicit and rewriting Proposition 17 as a qualified claim is performed in 17.3.7 as Proposition 32. The discussion from 17.3.1 to 17.3.6 must therefore be read as a discussion of the case in which the conditions of propagation hold. The qualification is placed last because its content presupposes the whole of 17.3, not because it is incidental. 17.3.2 Where Does the Residual Go? — Value-Definition Capability The first limb of Proposition 17 (diminishing returns) and its second limb (the shift of the residual) are logically independent. Even if the first limb is correct, the possibility that the second is mistaken — that after the advantage of efficiency gains has dissipated, disparities in outcome themselves disappear — is not excluded. What the second limb asserts is an empirical supposition that disparities do not disappear, together with the identification of where the persisting disparity is to be attributed. The capability this paper designates as that locus of attribution is the following. 650

Definition 12 (Value-Definition Capability) Value-definition capability denotes the capability of a state, a society, or a firm to select for itself the future state to be attained, and to realize that selection by translating it into resource allocation, institutional design, and organizational structure (an extension of 2026a to the level of the state). Value-definition capability is distinguished from the efficiency with which existing ends are achieved (how cheaply and quickly a given end is attained), and is a capability on the side that decides what is to be aimed at. Two components are contained in the syntax of Definition 12. The first is selection — choosing for oneself the future state to be attained — and the second is realization — translating that selection into resource allocation, institutional design, and organizational structure. The specification of the two components is not ornamental. An act that performs selection alone without accompanying translation is a conception, not a capability. Writing ambitious ends in a strategy document is selection; only when multi-year budgets move in accordance with those ends, regulations are enacted or repealed, and the allocation of authority within organizations changes has the capability of Definition 12 been exercised. Conversely, where only the machinery of translation is refined and selection extends no further than the acceptance of others' ends — a regime that efficiently implements goals defined by other states — what obtains is high executive capacity, not a capacity to define. The requirement of these two components is reflected directly in the design of the proxy indicators discussed below (17.3.5), and is also part of the reason why the measurement of the capacity to define is difficult. The content of the term "residual" should likewise be made clear. When differences in outcome between states and between firms are divided into the part explained by differences in efficiency and the part not so explained, the latter is the residual. What Proposition 17 asserts is a dynamic of this decomposition: that with the passage of time the explanatory power of the former contracts and the share of the latter grows. This claim requires two observations — that the explanatory power of differences in efficiency does in fact contract (the first limb), and that the disparity as a whole does not contract even as it does so (the presupposition of the second limb). Only when both hold simultaneously does the problem of attributing the residual arise. And the attribution itself cannot be derived from observation of the size of the residual — what the residual is is verified only by measuring independently the variable claimed to explain it. This logic is taken up again in 17.3.6 as a response to an objection. 651 Figure 9. The shift of the residual from efficiency to definition (Proposition 17). Upper panel: as capability descends from C2 to C1, the advantage due to differences in access, and then the advantage due to differences in implementation, dissipate in turn. Lower panel: in the decomposition of disparities in outcome, the part explained by differences in efficiency contracts and the share of the residual attributed to value-definition capability (Definition 12) grows. The figure is a schematic of structure; its scale and speeds are not estimates. 17.3.3 The National Version of Future Value Theory — The Reversal of the Origin The closing sentence of Proposition 17 is the point at which this section connects to the foundational axiom of the series. The operation performed by Future Value Theory (Kadowaki, 2026a) was a reversal of the origin of value — measuring the value of a firm not from the cash flows of past performance and the assets accumulated, but from what it may create in the future. This reversal is not a technical refinement of measurement but a change in the answer to the question of where value comes from (citation as foundational axiom). At the level of the firm, the reversal issued in the decomposition V = A + G + Λ (2026g), and the frontier of pricing was shown to lie in unpriced generative capability Λ. What Proposition 17 asserts is that this same operation is compelled at the level of the state. So long as the value of a national economy is measured from the flow of value added realized over some past period (GDP), what is being measured is the degree of attainment of ends already defined. Within a structure in which the advantage of efficiency gains diminishes, this measurement amounts to the measurement of a diminishing variable. Future value at the level of the state is whether the national economy concerned can generate new value under the next technological regime, and one core component of that Proposition 17 Descent of capability into C1 (time) Contribution to competitive advantage Advantage from efficiency gains Approaches zero Advantage from value-definition capability Shift of the residual Proxy indicators for value-definition capability (Definition 12) Distinctiveness in the setting of objectives Consistency of long-term resource allocation Rate of creation of new markets (provisional; the measurement framework is not yet in place) The advantage of efficiency gains from capability that has descended into C1 diminishes as the cost of imitation falls, and the residual that generates differences moves to value-definition capability (Proposition 17). 652 is the capability to define for itself what is to count as new value. That Definition 12 annotates itself as "an extension of 2026a to the level of the state" indicates this lineage. The composition of the state's Λ and its measurement are discussed again in 17.9. The discipline of analogy (Proposition 1, Section 3) must, however, be applied reflexively. It is necessary to distinguish the properties that transfer from the level of the firm to the level of the state from those that do not. What transfers is (i) the operation itself, by which the origin of value is reversed from past realization to future conception, and (ii) the diagnosis, as a consequence of the reversal, that existing systems of measurement fail to capture the principal part of value. What does not transfer is at least the following three points. First, the possibility of exit. A firm that cannot redefine itself may exit through extinction or acquisition; a state does not exit — a state that fails at definition does not disappear but continues under the definitions of others. At the level of the state, therefore, the consequence of a lack of capacity to define is not selection but subordination, and this difference is the same thing that the closing sentence of Proposition 14 states (passive adaptation is equivalent to leaving the choice of cell position to the decisions of other states). Second, the singularity of ends. A firm's Purpose may in principle be selected by a single decision-making mechanism, whereas a state's ends are the aggregate of the definitions of multiple agents, and the procedure of aggregation is itself a political process. Third, the mechanism of pricing. A firm's Λ has the pricing mechanism of the capital market, whereas no market exists that prices a state's Λ (there are only the prices of government bonds, currency, and direct investment as partial proxies). The third point is one reason why measurement of the capacity to define at the level of the state is more difficult than at the level of the firm, and it connects directly to the acknowledgment of limits in 17.3.5 and 17.9. 17.3.4 Implication — The Error of Designing AI Policy as Efficiency Policy Proposition 17 is at once a descriptive proposition and one with a direct implication for policy design. This paper states that implication in the following form: to design AI policy as efficiency policy is a systematic error. The structure of the error is simple. When AI policy is evaluated solely by indicators of productivity improvement, adoption rates, and cost reduction, the policy is maximizing a diminishing variable within a structure in which the competitive advantage of efficiency gains diminishes. This shows results in the short run — adoption rates rise and sectoral productivity improves. But the same improvement occurs, in turn, in every other country with access to the same capability, in step with the fall in implementation costs. The end point reached if the effort at maximization succeeds is therefore the point of convergence. To reach the point of convergence is not a failure — whoever does not stand on the floor falls behind, so standing on the floor is necessary. The error lies in mistaking the attainment of a necessary condition for the objective of a strategy. Section 7's summary of row C1 — "the floor of participation, not a source of advantage" — may be transposed at the level of policy into "a necessary condition, not an objective function." 653 This error produces three concrete consequences. First, a distortion of the temporal structure of evaluation. The results of efficiency gains are measurable in the short run, while the results of exercising the capacity to define appear only in the long run. If both are placed in the same evaluation framework, the difference in measurability operates as a difference in priority, and expenditure requiring the capacity to define is always subordinated. This has the same structure as the problem of mismeasurement identified by the national version of the bottleneck theorem discussed in 17.7 — investment in slow complements is also slow to manifest results and is under-measured during the period of construction — and is likewise the reason a redefinition of time (the time dimension of Proposition 14, 17.6) is required. Second, the externalization of ends. Efficiency gains are an activity premised on ends being given. To remove the selection of ends from the objects of policy is to acquiesce in ends being defined elsewhere, and that elsewhere is ordinarily the technical and industrial agenda formed on the producing side of frontier capability. The "externalization of the capacity to define" identified in Section 10 as a consequence of simple utilization (M3×C1) is a description of this channel. Third, stagnation through success. So long as an efficiency policy succeeds and indicators keep improving, the policy framework is self-justifying. Only when indicators deteriorate is the framework questioned; but by then convergence is complete, and the accumulation of the capacity to define requires a time constant (17.4.4). The asymmetry of upward transition stated by Proposition 15 (Section 15) — accumulation requires time on the order of years, longer than the time constant of policy decision — operates here as well. The leap from identifying the error to prescribing a remedy requires caution. The prescription "let the state define the ends," taken at face value, approaches a recommendation of a regime in which the state defines value on behalf of its citizens and firms. This collides head-on with the claims of Layer Two (Self-Defined Society) and may aggravate the problem of the stratification of access discussed in Proposition 12. This paper's position is as stated in 17.2.3 — the actual bearers of a state's capacity to define are firms and individuals, and what a state may hold is the design of the forums in which acts of definition are performed, aggregated, and endowed with resources. Concretely, the policy content of a state's capacity to define consists of three things: (i) mechanisms of long-term resource allocation for undertakings that involve the selection of ends, (ii) institutions for processing collisions of ends (the enactment and repeal of regulation, testbeds, and the design of procurement), and (iii) the conditions under which those who bear definition are formed (national brain capital, 17.4). None of the three is visible as valuable within the evaluation framework of efficiency policy. Section 17.3.7 shows that a fourth must be added to these three — the design of channels by which defined value is accepted outside. The three are conditions that generate definitions; the fourth is the condition that converts definitions into value. 654 17.3.5 A Provisional Set of Proxy Indicators, and the Absence of a Measurement Framework The second limb of Proposition 17 names three proxy indicators of value-definition capability — the distinctiveness of the specification of ends, the consistency of long-term resource allocation, and the rate of creation of new markets. Since the falsification condition names them, there is an obligation to make their content and limits explicit in the text. What follows is provisional; this paper does not present these as verified instruments of measurement. (a) Distinctiveness of the specification of ends. This corresponds to the first component of Definition 12 (selection). The direction of operationalization is measurement of how far the specification of ends in national strategy documents and industrial policy documents differs from the specification of ends in documents of the same kind of other states (computable as similarity between documents). This indicator has two weaknesses. First, distinctiveness is not correctness — to set out ends differing from those of other states is not by itself a superior definition, and a mistaken definition may also be distinctive. Second, the distinctiveness of a document is the distinctiveness of a declaration and does not necessarily entail realization — the second component of Definition 12 is not being measured. Indicator (a) is therefore not used alone and has meaning only in combination with (b). (b) Consistency of long-term resource allocation. This corresponds to the second component of Definition 12 (realization). The direction of operationalization is measurement of the correspondence between declared ends and actual resource allocation, and of the degree to which that correspondence is maintained across multiple fiscal years. Divergence between declaration and allocation, or reversals in the objects of allocation with each change of administration or each budget year, are symptoms that the machinery of translation is not working. The weakness lies in the difficulty, at the level of the indicator, of distinguishing consistency from rigidity — consistent allocation to mistaken ends is not a high capacity to define but an absence of renewal capability. This distinction has the same structure as the discipline RCap established for time defence, namely "not unconditional protection but protection subject to renewal conditions" (2026g), and the measurement of (b) must be read together with the presence or absence of renewal conditions. (c) Rate of creation of new markets. This is an indicator on the consequence side of Definition 12. The direction of operationalization is measurement of the rate at which goods and services that do not fit within existing industrial classifications appear, and of the position occupied by agents of the country concerned in that appearance. The weaknesses are lag and difficulty of attribution. The creation of markets is observed with a lag of years after the exercise of definition, and moreover whether that creation is attributable to the capacity to define of the country concerned, or is merely the implementation within that country of ends defined elsewhere, cannot be discriminated from the fact of creation alone. 655 Problems common to the three indicators should be stated. First, all are exposed to Goodhart's problem — the moment an indicator is adopted as a policy target, it may be manipulated by writing distinctive language, dressing up the appearance of allocation, and creating new classifications. Second, for all three, no internationally comparable data source exists. Systems of documents, budget classifications, and industrial classifications all differ by country, and a common framework must first be constructed for comparison. Third, on this paper's position, the three indicators should not be composed into a single score — for the same reason that Brain Capital Management (2026e) established the discipline of "not aggregating different layers into a single score" in its three-layer disclosure. Composition gives the appearance that the weaknesses of the indicators mutually compensate one another, whereas in fact it merely conceals them. Accordingly, the measurement framework for value-definition capability is not in place, and this paper does not paper over that absence with proxy indicators but discloses it as a gap. Examination of the detailed specification of the three indicators is referred to Appendix E (forward reference). This limitation is treated again in the acknowledgment of limits in Section 20, alongside the non-estimation of the time constants of the dynamic scenarios and the absence of a measurement framework for national brain capital. 17.3.6 A Response to an Objection — The Danger of Being a Residual Concept The strongest objection to be anticipated against Proposition 17 is the following: "the capacity to define" is a residual concept difficult to measure, and every difference not explicable by efficiency can be attributed to it. On this structure, Proposition 17 is not falsified by any observation. If a disparity not explicable by differences in efficiency is observed, one may say "it is a difference in the capacity to define"; if no disparity is observed, one may say "the capacity to define was equivalent." This repeats the circumstance in which total factor productivity was called "a measure of ignorance" in the explanation of economic growth, and the danger of reifying a residual is a problem economics has long been aware of. This paper acknowledges the danger. The capacity to define is at present not a construct measured directly, but a quantity identified as the part not explained by other explanatory variables. So long as it remains in that status, it is not an explanation but the name of the absence of one. The check against this danger is the structure of Proposition 17's falsification condition itself. The falsification condition is in two stages, and the second stage forbids the residual from becoming a dustbin. The first stage is a falsification condition for the claim of diminishing returns — if, in sectors and countries with a high degree of diffusion of Tier C1 capability, it is observed that disparities in outcome according to the degree of efficiency gains do not narrow, diminishing returns is rejected — and this guarantees that the first limb is tested independently before the discussion of the residual is entered. The second stage is a falsification condition for the claim of attribution — if proxy indicators of valuedefinition capability do not explain disparities in outcome, the claim regarding the attri‐ 656 bution of the residual is rejected. The requirement of the second stage is demanding. It states that in order to call the residual "the capacity to define," a variable measuring the capacity to define independently must explain the residual. If the proxy indicators do not explain the disparity, the residual is something other than the capacity to define — it may be a difference in unmeasured complementary assets, and it may be mere error. In that case what this paper can retain is only the first limb (diminishing returns to efficiency); the second limb is rejected. To strengthen the check further, two disciplines are added. First, the ex ante fixing of proxy indicators. In testing the second limb of Proposition 17, the proxy indicators are fixed before the test, and the manufacture of explanatory power through ex post selection or addition of indicators is prohibited. This discipline is identical to the one by which Hypothesis H2 (Section 21) requires that the four indicators of complementary assets be "measured prior to the event," excluding the route of ex post reclassification. Second, the explicit statement of competing explanations. As candidates for a disparity not explained by efficiency, this paper's own framework supplies variables other than the capacity to define — complementary asset endowment (Proposition 4, Section 7), national brain capital (Definition 11, Section 10), the guarantee level (Definition 6, Section 13), and cell position itself (Proposition 3, Section 6). The claim attributing the residual to the capacity to define is supported only if a residual remains after these are controlled for and the proxy indicators explain that residual. The weakness that remains is stated frankly. While the proxy indicators are coarse, the second-stage test is weak — that a coarse indicator fails to explain is not proof that the capacity to define is not the substance of the residual, and may equally be a consequence of the indicator's coarseness. This asymmetry does not dissolve until the measurement framework is in place. Proposition 17 is therefore, at present, a testable proposition as to its first limb (diminishing returns) and remains at the status of a hypothesis with a specified testing procedure as to its second limb (attribution). Not blurring this difference in status is the minimum discipline in handling a residual concept. 17.3.7 Proposition 32 — Conditions for the Propagation of Value-Definition Capability, and the Qualification of Proposition 17 Section 17.3.6 dealt with the danger that the capacity to define is a residual concept. What this subsection deals with is a problem of a different kind, and one that may well be heavier. The capability to define value and the power to circulate that definition are separate requirements. Proposition 17 treated only the former and said nothing about what becomes of a definition that lacks the latter. This gap makes the reach of Proposition 17's claim appear excessive. The content of the gap may be stated concretely. Suppose an agent in some jurisdiction selects a future state that no one else has selected, and translates that selection into resource allocation and institutional design. The two components of Definition 12 are satisfied. Yet if the value defined is not accepted outside the jurisdiction concerned, the goods, services, 657 standards, and institutions built in accordance with that definition do not connect with external markets, supply networks, and regulatory systems. What arises is a configuration internally coherent yet disadvantaged in exchange with the outside. This paper calls it a local optimum. A local optimum is not a failure of definition — definition itself has been performed. What has failed is the conversion from definition into national value. The locus of attribution of the residual designated by the second limb of Proposition 17 is therefore, as it stands, not an explanation of national value. The capacity to define is a candidate for explaining the residual, but a high capacity to define does not guarantee that the definition converts into value. This paper makes the qualification explicit in the following proposition. Proposition 32 (Conditions for the Propagation of Value-Definition Capability) For value-definition capability (Definition 12) to convert into national value, the value defined must be accepted outside the jurisdiction concerned, and that acceptance proceeds by one of the following channels: (i) compulsion of acceptance through market size, (ii) incorporation into standards and specifications, or (iii) connection with existing international frameworks. A definition lacking these channels remains a local optimum valid only within the jurisdiction concerned. The capability to define and the power to circulate a definition (leverage on the desirability side, Definition 15) are therefore separate requirements, and raising only the former carries the danger of arriving at a local solution disconnected from the outside. Falsification condition If it is systematically observed that value defined by an agent possessing none of the three channels is accepted on a sustained basis in external jurisdictions, the claim that the conditions of propagation are necessary is rejected. If it is repeatedly observed that definitions by agents possessing the three channels are not accepted outside, the claim of sufficiency is rejected. The content of the three channels. The channels enumerated by Proposition 32 are, in each case, the appearance from the side of the capacity to define of variables Section 11 analysed as sources of desirability. The first channel is compulsion of acceptance through market size. Where the scale of demand in a jurisdiction is sufficiently large, external agents comply with that jurisdiction's definitions in order to do business there. That Section 11.3.1 listed market size as the first source of desirability, and that 11.3.2 analysed its mechanism of operation in terms of the cost of partitioning, is a description of this channel. Where the power to circulate a definition depends on this channel, the magnitude of the power is a function of the scale of demand and is independent of the merits of the content of the definition — however superior a definition may be, where scale is lacking, compulsion does not operate. 658 The second channel is incorporation into standards and specifications. Where the value defined is written into the content of technical standards, criteria of conformity assessment, or industry specifications, that definition propagates as a design constraint upon those who adopt the specification. As Section 11.3.2 stated, this channel is highly durable — because the investment required for compliance is sunk on the recipient side, switching costs rise the more it is applied. For a jurisdiction lacking market size, this channel is the most realistic substitute for the first. It does, however, require the capability to participate in the forums where specifications are drawn up, to set the agenda, and to write the drafts. That capability partly overlaps with the fourth component of national brain capital (Definition 11) — the capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience. Specifications can be written only by those who know the practice of the field concerned. The third channel is connection with existing international frameworks. Where the value defined connects with the content of an already established treaty, the agenda of an international organization, or a multilateral framework of coordination, acceptance arises among the participants in that framework. The lineage of international frameworks treated by Section 9 in its examination of critical-tier governance, and the forums of international coordination treated by Section 11, are alike candidates for this channel. The character of this channel differs from the other two — the range of propagation is limited to the participants in the framework, but among those participants it may carry legal or political binding force. What arises where the three channels are lacking. Where an agent possessing none of the channels defines value, the definition is valid only internally. This state has two structural features. First, internal coherence conceals external incoherence. The more the institutions, specifications, and practices built in accordance with the definition fit one another internally, the less the absence of external connection is recognized as a problem. Second, the cost of exit rises over time. The investment made by internal agents in conforming to the definition can be only partly redeployed in moving to an external definition — the mechanism Section 11.3.2 stated as the ground of the durability of desirability operates here inwardly. A local optimum becomes harder to escape over time. The qualification of Proposition 17. It follows that Proposition 17, the central proposition of 17.3, is not complete as it stands. Proposition 17 states that "the further the diffusion of AI capability proceeds, the more the residual that generates differences between states and between firms shifts to value-definition capability," but this shift converts into a difference in national value only where one of the three channels of propagation holds. Where the propagation conditions are lacking, a high capacity to define does not explain the residual and may rather appear as investment in a local solution — since the more resource allocation proceeds in accordance with the definition, the more a configuration disconnected from the outside is reinforced. The second limb of Proposition 17 must therefore be read with the following qualification. The locus of attribution of the resid‐ 659 ual is not "value-definition capability" but "value-definition capability accompanied by conditions of propagation." That this amendment weakens one of this paper's principal propositions must be stated explicitly. Proposition 17 is the point at which this paper connects to the foundational axiom of the series (2026a), and is also the theoretical ground of the capability that 17.6 designates as the substance of the purpose dimension of Proposition 14. To attach a condition to that proposition narrows the range of the claim. Yet weakening it is correct. There are three reasons. First, an unconditioned Proposition 17 would derive the conversion from a high capacity to define into national value unconditionally, and this is not empirically supported — a configuration internally coherent yet lacking external connection is an observable state. Second, attaching the condition increases the falsifiability of Proposition 17. Proposition 32's falsification condition states that the claim that the conditions of propagation are necessary is rejected if the definitions of agents without the three channels are accepted outside on a sustained basis, and this supplies an independent test of the second limb of Proposition 17. Third, an unconditioned Proposition 17 leads to policy error. A policy aiming solely at the cultivation of the capacity to define would multiply definitions without designing channels of propagation, reinforcing local solutions. Where stating a proposition strongly misleads those who use it, the proposition must be weakened. Connection with Section 11 — the capacity to define is an asset on the desirability side. The closing sentence of Proposition 32 identifies the power to circulate a definition with "leverage on the desirability side (Definition 15)." This identification ties together the two axes of this paper. Desirability in the sense of Definition 15 is the degree to which other states voluntarily seek engagement with the state concerned, and Section 11 listed five sources of it: market size, rules and standards, capital, technology, and trust. Of the three channels of Proposition 32, the first corresponds to market size, the second to rules and standards, and the third to capital or trust in the form of participation in existing frameworks. That is, the device that converts the capacity to define into national value lies not on the side of position on the nine cells (Definition 3) but on the desirability side of the leverage coordinates. This is the same operation as the recovery Section 11.4 described as "the resolution of the M4 problem" — the position of writing the rules is not a fourth value model but leverage on the desirability side — repeated for the capacity to define. This connection carries an implication unwelcome for this paper. As Section 11.3.2 showed, the channel of rules and standards has the property of "growing stronger the more it is applied," and the position of an agent already writing rules is self-reinforcing. For an agent lacking channels of propagation, therefore, newly acquiring a channel belongs among the improvements of position with the longer time constants. The asymmetry Proposition 15 (Section 15) stated for upward transitions holds for the acquisition of channels of propagation as well. For a mid-sized economy, the first channel (market size) is not a design variable in the short run, so what can actually be designed are the

second and third channels. Participation in the drawing up of specifications, and connection with existing international frameworks, are objects of policy alongside — or ahead of — the cultivation of the capacity to define. Here lies one reason this paper placed Section 11 in parallel with the analysis of position. Finally, what this subsection does not treat should be stated. The present distribution of influence — which agents hold how much influence in which standards forums — and the adjudication of whether the rules of a particular jurisdiction are propagating to other jurisdictions are questions on which Section 11.3.2 reserved judgment as "academically contested," and this subsection likewise does not adjudicate them. What this subsection asserts is the structure that propagation is a necessary condition for the conversion of the capacity to define into value, not the merits of any particular agent's strategy of propagation. 17.4 National Brain Capital — Connecting Layer Zero to the Human Substrate What Proposition 17 showed was a structure in which, the further the diffusion of AI capability proceeds, the more the difference shifts to the side of ends. What this subsection treats is its obverse — the structure whereby differences also remain on the side of the substrate. AI capability can be imported. But tacit knowledge of the field, judgment embedded in language and culture, the professional ethics that make trust in institutions possible, and the capacity for audit based on long domain experience cannot be imported. This paper calls the whole of this non-importable portion national brain capital (Definition 11, Section 10). The verbatim text of Definition 11, and of Proposition 18 (that the defensibility of the Transformation Model depends on the thickness of that stock), belongs to Section 10. The task of this subsection is not transcription but connection — to show that the theory of the human substrate the series has built at the level of the firm (2026e, 2026i) and the discussion of state strategy at Layer Zero form a single theory. 17.4.1 Why the Human Substrate Becomes a Variable of State Strategy At the far end of Layer Three, this series argued that the human brain lies on the floor of a firm's capability to redefine (2026e). That argument took as its object the internal design of the firm — attribution that prevents silence, a base that dissolves economic anxiety, and building that prevents the atrophy of thought through dependence on AI — and was written as a problem at a level distinct from state strategy. The introduction of Layer Zero connects the two levels. The logic of the connection is obtained by rereading the content of the four indicators of Proposition 4 (Section 7). Proposition 4 stated that the complementary asset endowment required for the Transformation Model to subsist is measured by four indicators: exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, and linguistic-contextual specificity. At first sight these four indicators are descriptions of firms' assets. Trace their 661 substance, however, and each is a trace of the collective capability of human beings. Exclusive data is generated from records of people judging and operating in the field. The intensity of the physical interface is sustained by embodied skills that run and maintain equipment. Institutional embeddedness is the consequence of the professional ethics and working practices that make certification and the assumption of responsibility possible. Linguistic-contextual specificity depends on the existence of a layer of people able to operate standards specific to a language and a jurisdiction. That Proposition 18 (Section 10) states that "of the four indicators of Proposition 4, exclusive data endowment and physical- interface intensity are the externalized traces of national brain capital, and institutional embeddedness and linguistic-contextual specificity are its institutionalized forms" is the formalization of this rereading. To discuss the defensibility of the Transformation Model and to discuss the human substrate are therefore descriptions of one and the same object from without and from within. This connection is coherent at the level of the theory of resources as well. The formulation that sustained advantage depends on the height of imitation costs (Barney, 1991) and the lineage of dynamic capabilities holding that the source of advantage lies in the capacity to reconfigure resources (Teece, Pisano, & Shuen, 1997) were both built as theories at the level of the firm, but in that the source of imitation costs lies in "what can be accumulated only over time," they share a structure with this paper's argument about slow complements (17.7). National brain capital is the resource with the highest imitation cost at the level of the state — because it cannot be bought with capital, cannot be imported, and requires generations to accumulate. 17.4.2 The National Version of Brain Capital Management (2026e) — The Three Bs and Three-Layer Disclosure Brain Capital Management (Kadowaki, 2026e) defined brain capital as the stock of cognitive capability a firm can commit to future redefinition, and presented three constraints governing it — Belonging (preventing silence), Base (releasing the occupation of cognitive bandwidth by economic anxiety), and Build (preventing the atrophy of capability through dependence on AI). The three act multiplicatively, and the weakest link governs the whole (citation as structural correspondence). Transfer to the level of the state holds in the following three respects. First, the national version of Belonging is the presence or absence of channels by which expert dissent passes beyond organizations and institutions. Isomorphically with the way silence at the level of the firm renders brain capital unmeasurable by halting the transmission of cognitive contributions that already exist, at the level of the state a condition may arise in which the judgment held by skilled workers, professionals, and researchers in the field does not reach the decision-making of policy and management. From the standpoint of Layer Zero, the absence of these channels appears as a divergence between the stock of national brain capital that exists and the amount actually put to use — capital held but not used contributes nothing to defensibility. Second, the national version of 662 Base is the discharge of unresolved material claims upon attention. What 2026e established is the asymmetry that what works is a change in material circumstances rather than the provision of information or voluntary programmes, and this asymmetry transfers to policy design at the level of the state — among measures aimed at raising cognitive capability, those that do not actually discharge claims upon attention do not raise brain capital even when implemented. Third, the national version of Build is, in the context of this paper, the most important. One of the core findings of 2026e was that what determines whether the adoption of AI raises or erodes capability is not the quantity of adoption but its design — unlimited assistance erodes unaided capability, whereas under designs accompanied by guardrails no erosion occurs. Transposed to the level of the state, this finding establishes the error of evaluating AI policy by adoption rates for a reason different from the error of efficiency policy identified by Proposition 17. Maximizing adoption rates is, on the efficiency side, the maximization of a diminishing variable; on the braincapital side, it is a policy that may accelerate attrition while leaving it unmeasured. The same indicator misleads through two different channels. A fourth element that transfers is the mode of measurement. Against the diagnosis that brain capital cannot be priced from public information, 2026e prescribed an architecture of three-layer disclosure — hard anchors, states shown as distributions, and mechanisms verifiable against systems of record (and mechanisms certified by third parties). That the measurement framework for national brain capital is not in place is acknowledged in Section 20, but as a direction for putting it in place this three-layer structure can transfer. Two points in particular matter. First, the discipline of showing distributions. Mean values do not capture the substance of national brain capital, which is the thickness of the layer of the highly skilled — even where the average level of skill is maintained, defensibility changes if the distribution of the top and bottom changes. This discipline is isomorphic with Proposition 11's falsification condition prescribing that the upper envelope rather than the mean be examined, and repeats the consistent methodological position that variables whose upper bound is at issue are measured at the upper bound. Second, the discipline of not aggregating into a single score. To construct a "national brain capital index" by composing the four components (Definition 11) conceals the fact that the components have different rates of attrition and different policy instruments. A sketch of the measurement framework is referred to Appendix E (forward reference). 17.4.3 The National Version of Ageless Management (2026i) — The Capacity for Audit as a Bulwark Ageless Management (Kadowaki, 2026i) derived the value of experience in the age of AI not from chronological age but from the interaction of long domain experience, crystallized intelligence, and metacognition, and formalized it as the capacity for experiential audit (structural correspondence). That paper's central claim is that the capability to verify AI outputs is not substituted by AI's own self-verification — where generator and verifier share a distribution of errors, verification is not independent (2026h). What remains as a source of independent verification is a layer of human beings with experience different 663 from that of the generator and with different tendencies toward error, and the value of that layer accumulates only through long residence in the field concerned. The national version of this theory corresponds directly to the fourth component of Definition 11 (the capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience). What is at issue at the level of the state is the following question: in a given country, how thick is the layer of people able to verify without mediation the validity of judgments, designs, diagnoses, and calculations generated by AI? The thickness of this layer is the substrate of the defensibility of the Transformation Model (M2). There are two reasons. First, transformation is the work of fitting procured general-purpose capability to the requirements of a domain, and where the fit cannot be adjudicated, transformation cannot be performed — a transformer unable to adjudicate cannot assert its own value added against the producer's standard bundling. Second, the institutional embeddedness of Proposition 4 (statutory certification, supervisory registration, assumption of responsibility) presupposes that the agent assuming responsibility is able to discharge the responsibility assumed; but an agent unable to verify the validity of AI outputs may assume responsibility yet cannot discharge it. Institutional embeddedness subsists only upon a layer with the capacity for audit. Two limits should be made explicit. First, the boundary conditions 2026i built into itself — that where AI outputs conform to prior successful experience or industry conventions, through the interaction of confirmation bias and automation bias, experience may rather impede detection; and that in fields of rapid technical change the audit effectiveness of experience may decline through the half-life of knowledge — transfer to the level of the state as they stand. That the layer with the capacity for audit is thick does not guarantee that the layer will adjudicate correctly. Second, the supply-side condition identified by that paper — that the independence of verification may be lost at the level of the channel (if all auditors share summarization and prior filtering by the same AI, decorrelation disappears) — appears at the level of the state as the problem arising where the information environment of administration and the professions is consolidated onto a single platform. Isomorphically with the way the structure of AI outage (Proposition 7, Section 13) made the supplier correlation of operational and oversight systems a problem, the audit function of national brain capital functions only so far as diversity of information channels is preserved. 17.4.4 Paths of Attrition — How National Brain Capital Lowers Cell Position National brain capital is not only accumulated; it also wears away. The law of motion Brain Capital Management (2026e) formalized at the level of the firm — the stock is the previous period's stock less attrition plus gross investment, and unstructured adoption of AI may raise measured output while raising the rate of attrition — operates isomorphically at the level of the state. Three paths of attrition are identified here, together with the route by which they lead to a descent in cell position (Proposition 15, Section 15). 664 The first path is the exit of the skilled layer. The first component of Definition 11 (tacit knowledge of the field) and the fourth (the capacity for audit based on long domain experience) are both embodied in individuals who have remained long in the field concerned. Where, through changes in the composition of the population and the design of retirement institutions, the speed at which this layer exits from work exceeds the speed of accumulation by the succeeding layer, the stock declines. That Ageless Management (2026i) discussed the redefinition of roles irrespective of age was a response to this attrition at the level of the firm, and its national version is the recognition that the institutions governing the timing of exit (pensions, employment, and the legal framework of non-employee work) effectively set the rate of attrition of national brain capital. The second path is the rupture of skill transmission. Tacit knowledge is not completely transferred by documentation and is transmitted through junior practitioners obtaining opportunities for judgment accompanied by responsibility in the course of practice (what 2026i calls cognitive apprenticeship). Where the adoption of AI substitutes first for those opportunities — the entry-level judgment tasks that junior practitioners used to carry — short-run efficiency improves while the channel of transmission thins. At the level of the firm this structure is a consequence of the proposition that "design, not the quantity of adoption, determines the sign" (2026e); at the level of the state it appears as a trade-off across time in which the future supply of the capacity for audit may be destroyed by present efficiency gains. The third path is the degradation of institutional trust. The third component of Definition 11 is trust in institutions sustained by professional ethics and working practices, and this may be eroded by the repetition within institutions of automated judgments that go unverified — if a condition persists in which judgments no one has verified are issued in the name of an institution, trust in the institution loses its ground while only its form remains. The consequence of the three paths is a descent in cell position. As Proposition 18 (Section 10) states, the thickness of national brain capital is the substrate of the defensibility of the Transformation Model, and its attrition takes external form as a degradation of the four indicators of Proposition 4 — as judgment in the field thins, the quality of exclusive data falls; as skills are lost, the intensity of the physical interface falls; as the capacity for audit is lost, institutional embeddedness becomes an empty form; and as the layer of specialist language use is lost, linguistic-contextual specificity ceases to be a bulwark. And as Proposition 15 (Section 15) shows, a downward transition requires no accumulation and occurs passively through the mere relative depreciation of existing accumulations. The attrition of national brain capital is precisely one of the principal mechanisms of this passive descent — it proceeds without anything being done, and, since measured efficiency may actually improve while it proceeds, it issues no warning. The time constant of attrition is long, as is that of accumulation. Rebuilding the skilled layer requires as much time as the years of practical experience in the field concerned, and if the rupture of transmission extends to a generation, recovery requires a generation. This is why national brain capital cannot be treated as "an asset that can be bought later." What the asymmetry of stockpiling (Proposition 8, Section 13) stated about AI cap‐ 665 ability — that the guarantee level subsists only as continuous construction and not as a single purchase — holds in stronger form for national brain capital. AI capability may be procured where funds are available; a lost layer of experience cannot be procured with funds. This asymmetry becomes a central variable in discussing Japan's position (Proposition 13, Section 18). 17.4.5 Proposition 24 — Self-Erosion as a Mechanism The three paths of attrition identified in 17.4.4 each involved a change of conditions from outside. The exit of the skilled layer is a function of population composition and retirement institutions; the rupture of skill transmission takes the event of AI adoption as its origin; the degradation of institutional trust presupposes the repetition of unverified automated judgments. What this subsection formalizes is a single, more general mechanism running beneath all three paths in common. That mechanism requires no change of conditions from outside — it has the structure whereby the very fact that a strategy is working erodes the substrate for moving from that strategy to the next stage. This paper calls it self-erosion and formalizes it as the following proposition. That this proposition forms the theoretical keystone of this section follows from the fact that, among the paths of descent discussed thus far, it alone requires no exogenous event whatsoever. Proposition 24 (Self-Erosion of Brain Capital) The formation of national brain capital (Definition 11) requires the repetition of human practice in the field concerned. To the degree that dependence on imported cognitive capability substitutes for that repetition, national brain capital wears away. The wearing away of national brain capital reduces the four indicators of complementary assets of Proposition 4 (in particular exclusive data endowment and physical-interface intensity) and lowers the defensibility of the Transformation Model. Accordingly, a strategy that deepens utilization while lacking transformation capability causes, through the deepening of utilization itself, the loss of the substrate for a later ascent to the Transformation Model. This is a self-reinforcing path toward the downward transition of Proposition 15, and requires no exogenous change of conditions. Falsification condition If, in sectors and countries with a high depth of AI use, it is systematically observed that the formation of skill in the field concerned (the distribution of years of experience within an occupation, the level of passes in skill certification, and the proportion of practitioners able to judge independently) does not decline, the claim of wearing away is rejected. If wearing away is observed but the four indicators of complementary assets do not decline, the claim of the transmission channel is rejected. The content of the proposition is confirmed in three stages. The first stage is the condition of accumulation. None of the four components of national brain capital (Definition 11) is an asset maintained by being held; each is an asset maintained by being exercised. 666 Tacit knowledge of the field exists so long as judgments continue to be made in the field; judgment embedded in language and culture exists so long as specialist discussion continues to be conducted in that language. Trust in institutions exists so long as responsibility continues to be assumed and actually discharged, and the capacity for audit exists so long as verification continues actually to be performed. This property is not a coinage of this paper but the transposition, from the level of the individual to the level of the aggregate, of the known finding that the formation and retention of skill depend on repetition. One consequence follows: the input to the production function of accumulation is not the amount of investment but the quantity of repetition of practice. Education budgets, hours of training, and numbers of certificate holders are all proxies for repetition rather than repetition itself, and the divergence between proxy and substance widens precisely when repetition is substituted for. The second stage is the path of substitution. Imported cognitive capability may substitute for the repetition of practice in two modes. The first is displacement, where the process of judgment formerly performed by people is itself removed. The second is hollowing, where the process institutionally remains but what people actually do contracts to ratification of a conclusion presented to them. The latter is far harder to observe than the former — the post continues to exist, the qualification is renewed, and statistically the number of persons employed in the occupation and their working hours are maintained, and yet the content of the practice being repeated has altered. The wearing away of Proposition 24 escapes measurement most readily where this second mode predominates. And in regulated sectors, so long as responsibility formally remains with people, an incentive operates to preserve the form of the process, so substitution tends to take the form of hollowing rather than of displacement. The structure of trust infrastructure formalized by Section 11 as Proposition 25 may here operate in the direction of concealing the wearing away — the more the rules of responsibility allocation require confirmation by a person, the more the form of confirmation remains while room arises for only its substance to be drained away. The third stage is transmission. How does the wearing away reach the four indicators of Proposition 4? For exclusive data endowment the route is direct. Since records of people judging and operating in the field are the source of exclusive data, if judgment contracts into ratification, what remains in the record is the output of the system and its ratification, not independent judgment. Data continues to be generated, but the distinctiveness of its content — the property of not being held by others and not being reproducible from the outputs of others' systems — thins. What occurs here is not a decrease in quantity but a decrease in information content, and it is not captured by statistics on the volume of data. For physical-interface intensity, as the embodied skills that run and maintain equipment thin, the physical interface falls from a state of "being held" to a state of "being operable." Stock statistics such as the number of units of equipment and productive capacity remain unchanged while the layer of people able to control the interface under nonsteady conditions grows thin. For institutional embeddedness, as stated in 17.4.3, assuming responsibility and being able to discharge the responsibility assumed are different 667 things, and where responsibility is assumed by an agent unable to verify, only the form remains. For linguistic-contextual specificity, as the layer of people able to operate standards specific to the language and jurisdiction concerned thins, specificity contracts from a bulwark into a mere cost of translation — a cost of translation can be surmounted if an external agent pays it, whereas the thickness of a layer of people able to operate cannot be surmounted by payment. Transmission to the first two of the four indicators is particularly strong because they are the externalized traces of national brain capital rather than its institutionalized forms (Proposition 18, Section 10). Traces, once the acts that leave them cease, go stale without renewal. Taken together, the three stages yield the second limb of Proposition 24 — a strategy that deepens utilization while lacking transformation capability causes, through the deepening of utilization itself, the loss of the substrate for a later ascent to the Transformation Model. The qualification "while lacking transformation capability" is essential here. In an economy that holds the bearers of transformation domestically, the deepening of utilization may be accompanied by the accumulation of the domain knowledge that is the object of transformation. What Proposition 24 describes is the case in which utilization deepens on its own, cut off from transformation — the case in which the structure of the externalization of the capacity to define, discussed by Section 10 for the M3×C1 position, is repeated on the side of the human substrate. The respects in which this path differs from the other downward paths of Proposition 15 (Section 15) should be made explicit. Proposition 15 stated that a downward transition requires no accumulation and occurs passively through the relative depreciation of existing accumulations alone. The principal causes of that depreciation cited by Section 15 were changes external to the country concerned — the advance of the frontier, changes in supply structure, and physical constraints. The path described by Proposition 24 requires none of these. Even if the frontier stagnates (S3 of Definition 13), supply structures are stable, and electricity constraints ease, this path continues to operate. Each step of the loop is the consequence of the previous step and requires no input from outside: the deepening of utilization, the substitution of the repetition of practice, the wearing away of national brain capital, the decline of the four indicators of Proposition 4, the compression of the transformation margin, the exit of the bearers of transformation, and a further deepening of dependence on utilization. The loop is closed, and with each circuit the initial conditions worsen. This is the content of the term "self-reinforcing." An apparent contradiction with Proposition 5 (Section 7) must be resolved here. Proposition 5 stated that the depth of utilization takes effect at compound rates once complementary investment passes a critical point. Proposition 24 states that the same deepening erodes the substrate for ascent. The two are not contradictory. Proposition 5 is a claim about returns within the mode of utilization; Proposition 24 is a claim about mobility between modes. The same behaviour may improve outcomes measured in the current period while reducing element (i) of the state's Λ enumerated in 17.9 — the capacity to move cell, that is, the holding of real options for moving to adjacent cells. This duality is 668 the most important instance of the structure stated in 17.4.2, that "the same indicator misleads through two different channels." When the improvement of a flow and the impairment of a stock proceed simultaneously and only the flow is measured, policy evaluation errs systematically. Moreover, this error arises not when policy is failing but precisely when policy is succeeding on short-run indicators. The setting in which Proposition 24 operates most directly should be identified here. It is the procurement of integrated systems. Proposition 40, formalized in Section 12, divides the procurement of the importing side into three modes — (A) construction within one's own jurisdiction, (B) procurement of capability, and (C) procurement of integrated systems — and states that in fields where (C) is chosen, the opportunity to form national brain capital in that field is lost. In the light of the mechanism of wearing away set out in this subsection, (C) differs in kind from the other two modes. Under (B), procurement of capability, practitioners in the field concerned themselves design where in the operational process the procured capability is placed, who confirms it, and how errors are corrected when they arise. In the course of that design failures occur, corrections are made, and records remain — this is precisely the "repetition of practice" stated at the first stage of this subsection, and accordingly the formation of national brain capital proceeds. Under (C), procurement of integrated systems, by Definition 20 (Section 12) the design of incorporation into the operational process, the arrangements for allocating responsibility, the procedures for demonstrating conformity, and the human capability to operate and verify are all supplied from outside as a bundle. Each of these is nothing other than knowledge formed by practitioners in the field judging, failing, and correcting. That is, the procurement of integrated systems is the externalization of the process of formation itself. This difference changes the character of the wearing away. The wearing away described in this subsection thus far arises as a side effect of use — the structure whereby, as people use assistance in the process of judgment, the opportunities for unaided judgment diminish, and whose degree depends on the design of use. The "protected unaided practice" that 17.4.2 stated as the prescription of Brain Capital Management (2026e) has meaning because this side effect is controllable by design. With the procurement of integrated systems the situation differs. The erosion is not a side effect but a direct consequence of the mode of procurement. This is because the opportunities for judgment in the field are themselves placed outside the practice of one's own jurisdiction by the procurement, and since there is no object of practice, a prescription of protecting unaided practice does not take. Under (B), after ten years a layer of practitioners remains holding ten years of experience of design and correction, whereas under (C) what remains is ten years of experience of operating the system in question; the two do not stand in a relation of inclusion. The detailed argument — the distinction between knowledge of the architecture and knowledge of the components, and the consequences for the question whether after ten years the jurisdiction concerned could export integrated systems in the same field — is placed in Section 12.7.2. 669 This identification also bears on the design of Proposition 24's falsification condition. The falsification condition prescribes that "if, in sectors and countries with a high depth of AI use, it is systematically observed that the formation of skill in the field concerned does not decline, the claim of wearing away is rejected." Once the procurement of integrated systems is distinguished, it becomes clear that this observation must be stratified by mode of procurement rather than by depth of use. Even at the same depth of use, the level of wearing away predicted by Proposition 24 differs between fields that adopted (B) and fields that adopted (C). An observation that does not stratify mixes two mechanisms and makes either sign harder to detect. This stratification is identical in design to the observation required by Proposition 40's falsification condition — whether there is a difference in indicators of the formation of practitioners' judgment capability between fields that adopted (C) and fields that adopted (A) or (B) — and the two propositions may be tested simultaneously on the same data. The design of mitigation is a design task of Layer Zero. Section 12.7.3 listed five instruments of mitigation where (C) is chosen — reservation of audit powers to one's own jurisdiction, reservation of authentic data to one's own jurisdiction, in-house performance of processes including judgment and verification, portability clauses in contracts, and a plan for staged in-house transition. These appear to be items of contract design in the practice of procurement, but under the framework of this section they are positioned as design tasks of Layer Zero. There are three reasons. First, audit powers remain formal unless exercised, and exercise requires a human layer able to carry out verification in the field concerned. The capacity for audit that 17.4.3 discussed as the national version of Ageless Management (2026i) is precisely this layer. A circularity arises here — the capability that gives substance to audit powers is the same thing that Proposition 24 wears away. Whether reservation is possible is therefore, before it is a question of contract negotiation, a question of the human substrate in the field concerned, and thus a Layer Zero variable. Second, the reservation of authentic data connects the variable treated by Definition 16 and Proposition 27 (17.11) to the level of the procurement contract. Whether data with verifiable provenance generated from operations in the field concerned belongs to one's own jurisdiction, can be used independently, and is retained in a transferable format directly governs the future level of the exclusive data endowment of Proposition 4. Clauses on the attribution of data are often treated as annexes; under this section's framework they are clauses determining the allocation of complementary assets. Third, a plan for staged in-house transition amounts to a design that preserves, at the level of the field, the capacity to move cell that 17.9 lists as element (i) of the state's Λ. Movement from (C) to (A) requires the formation of national brain capital and therefore has a long time constant (Proposition 15), while movement in the opposite direction can be executed in the short run. Under this asymmetry, the possibility of movement is lost if left alone — fixing the plan at the time of procurement is the only means of leaving the option open for the future. 670

Common to the three points is that the substance of mitigation depends on the allocation of resources. Writing audit powers while conducting no inspections, stipulating the attribution of data while lacking the capability to use it, and formulating a plan for in-house transition while assigning no personnel all have the outward form of mitigation without its substance. This is isomorphic with the three failure modes Proposition 36 (Section 19) stated for constraints on administrative capacity — non-implementation, formalization, and delay — and, in the context of this subsection, it means that the second mode of wearing away, which 17.4.5 described as hollowing, is repeated on the side of mitigation as well. The structure in which the form is preserved and the substance drained operates in the same way on the side of practice and on the side of those who supervise practice. Finally, what this connection adds to the theory of Layer Zero should be stated. Proposition 24 has thus far been described as a mechanism internal to a single country — a closed loop in which the deepening of utilization substitutes for the repetition of practice, national brain capital wears away, and the four indicators of Proposition 4 decline. Seen through the procurement of integrated systems, the same mechanism is placed within the relation between two jurisdictions. As formalized in Section 12.8, a single transaction brings the accumulation of desirability (Proposition 38) to the supplying side and the loss of the opportunity for formation (Proposition 24) to the procuring side. The two are not adversarial — the transaction rests on the agreement of both parties, and both obtain gains in the current period. Nevertheless, the effects the transaction has on the future positions of the two sides do not point in the same direction. The implication for the theory of Layer Zero is that the variable of national brain capital is not only a domestic policy variable of education and skill formation but also a design variable of external procurement. When this section asked in 17.4.1 why the human substrate becomes a variable of state strategy, the answer was given from the side of domestic accumulation. The procurement of integrated systems opens a second entrance to the same variable — the entrance of what is accepted from outside as a bundle and what is left to the practice of one's own jurisdiction. Because the design of this entrance is carried out on a cycle shorter than the time constant of education policy (Proposition 34), and moreover in dispersed fashion as individual procurement cases, it is for the governance design of Layer Zero (17.10) the channel hardest to apprehend and to aggregate. 17.4.6 Connections Within the Series — The Problem of Skill Formation Becomes a Precondition of Strategy Proposition 24 raises two themes this series has treated at the level of the firm into preconditions of strategy at the level of the state. This raising is the subject of this subsection (citation as structural correspondence). The first is the theme of Build in Brain Capital Management (Kadowaki, 2026e). What that paper derived is that what determines whether the adoption of AI raises or erodes capability is not the quantity of adoption but its design, and that the core of a design that prevents erosion lies in protected unaided practice — a structure that institutionally 671 protects, at a given frequency, opportunities to make judgments with assistance switched off. Unlimited assistance erodes unaided capability, whereas under designs accompanied by guardrails no erosion occurs. The national version of this prescription lies outside a firm's personnel system. It consists in the design of practice requirements within certification systems, the boundary between in-house performance and externalization of judgment processes in the public sector, the position of unaided assessment within curricula of education and training, and the choice in industrial policy whether to retain operating activity domestically. This paper offers no concrete proposals on these. What it offers is a rereading — these are ordinarily classified as "human resource development policy," but under Proposition 24 they are policies that effectively set the rate of attrition of national brain capital, and therefore strategic variables governing the defensibility of the Transformation Model. If the classification changes, so do the competent authority, the evaluation indicators, and the priority relative to other policies. The second is the theme of the capacity for experiential audit in Ageless Management (Kadowaki, 2026i). As seen in 17.4.3, the capability to verify AI outputs requires an independent source that does not share a distribution of errors with the generator, and what remains as that source is a layer of human beings with long domain experience. What Proposition 24 adds is a temporal condition on the supply of that layer. The capacity for experiential audit is a function of flow rather than of inventory, and the degree to which opportunities for judgment are protected within present practice determines the thickness of the layer with the capacity for audit ten and twenty years hence. The cognitive apprenticeship that Ageless Management discussed at the level of the firm — the structure whereby tacit knowledge is transmitted only through junior practitioners obtaining opportunities for judgment accompanied by responsibility — takes at the level of the state the form of the future supply of the capacity for audit being governed by the design of present efficiency gains. Here it should be repeated that the boundary conditions built into 2026i transfer at the same time — since in fields of rapid technical change the audit effectiveness of experience may decline through the half-life of knowledge, protecting the repetition of practice does not always raise the capacity for audit. Sorting between the repetitions that should be protected and those that should not is an empirical question field by field. In these two transfers there is one important asymmetry between the level of the firm and the level of the state. A firm may make good the wearing away of its own brain capital by hiring from the external labour market. Even if one firm ceases to develop people, it may be rational for that firm to stop developing them so long as it can hire people developed by others. For a state this solution does not in principle exist — the higher the level of aggregation, the more the solution of "recruiting from elsewhere" disappears. Immigration policy is an exception to this, but it is an act of transferring the national brain capital of another state, not of generating it (and what Proposition 24 makes an issue of is a phase in which the repetition of practice is being substituted for worldwide, in which phase the place of origin lies under the same mechanism). The choice of "not developing but hiring," which may be rational at the level of the firm, therefore does not hold at the 672 level of the state if all firms adopt it. This is a form of the fallacy of composition, and is the reason why skill formation, a problem seemingly belonging to the internal design of firms, turns into a problem of state strategy. The structure of Proposition 11, by which Layer Zero distributes conditions to the lower layers, operates here in reverse — the aggregate of choices rational for each agent at the lower layers moves a Layer Zero variable. The note on bidirectionality stated in 17.1 has its most concrete content in this setting. 17.4.7 Presentation of Both Sides and Evidence Grade — Wearing Away Is Not an Automatic Consequence Proposition 24 is not the claim that the use of AI necessarily erodes skill. This paper makes explicit that channels in the opposite direction exist, and on that basis limits the range of the proposition's claim. The first opposing channel is scaffolding. Complementation by AI may promote the formation of skill. Obtaining immediate counter-examples and refutations, the easing of the constraint of scarcity of instructors, the ability to increase the quantity of repetition in an environment where the cost of failure is low, and increased occasions to put into words the grounds of one's own judgment — all of these work in the direction of accelerating learning. That appropriately designed assistance accelerates learning stands at the level of an established finding in educational research. Under Proposition 24 this channel is not denied. What is denied is the unconditional claim that "with assistance, acceleration necessarily follows," not the possibility of acceleration itself. The second opposing channel is a raising of the point of attainment. Where the substitution of routine processes shifts the content of the practice people repeat toward higherorder judgment, the quality of the practice being repeated may rise even as the number of repetitions falls. In that case quantitative proxies for national brain capital (such as the sum of years of experience within an occupation) may decline while the components contributing to defensibility — judgment under non-steady conditions, the detection of anomalies, the discharge of responsibility — actually increase. Whether this channel is in fact operating can be adjudicated only by verifying the correspondence between proxy indicators and defensibility, not at the level of the proxy indicators themselves. Wearing away is therefore not an automatic consequence but a conditional path depending on the degree to which the repetition of practice is substituted for. The finding of 2026e that design, not the quantity of adoption, determines the sign holds here as it stands. What Proposition 24 asserts is not "using AI causes wearing away" but the conditional causation that "wearing away occurs to the degree that repetition is substituted for, and where it occurs it is transmitted to cell position by way of Proposition 4." To read Proposition 24 with this conditionality dropped does not strengthen this paper's claim but weakens it, by converting it into an unfalsifiable statement. The check on this conditionality is the falsification condition attached to Proposition 24. Its structure is in two stages. The first stage is the rejection condition for the wearing 673 away itself: if, in sectors and countries with a high depth of AI use, it is systematically observed that the formation of skill does not decline, the claim of wearing away is rejected. The second stage is the rejection condition for the transmission channel: if wearing away is observed but the four indicators of complementary assets do not decline, the claim of transmission is rejected. The substance of dividing it in two is to make explicit that the proposition is a conjunction of two independently verifiable claims, and to settle in advance what remains if one holds and the other does not. The three observable quantities specified at the first stage — the distribution of years of experience within an occupation, the level of passes in skill certification, and the proportion of practitioners able to judge independently — can all be approximately constructed from existing administrative and industry statistics, and are feasible in that they do not require a new survey design. The discipline stated in 17.4.2 applies here too, however — these must be observed as distributions and not as means. Even where the average number of years of experience is maintained, if practitioners able to judge independently remain only thinly at the top while the middle is hollowed out, the substance of national brain capital has been lost. The evidence grade should be made explicit. Proposition 24 is, as at the time of writing, △ (contested). Research on the relation between assistance and capability at the level of individuals and tasks, and studies of adoption at the level of firms, are accumulating, but verification at the level of aggregation across a state has not been carried out. At least three factors make verification difficult. First, adoption is not random — there is a high possibility that sectors with a high depth of AI use had a different structure of skill to begin with, and separating selection effects from treatment effects is required. Second, the criteria for measuring skill differ by sector, and no common scale exists that withstands international or time-series comparison. Third, the time constant is long — if the principal path of wearing away is hollowing, the time required before its consequences become observable corresponds to a generational turnover within the occupation concerned. The structure in which the sign is not settled by short-run observation, and by the time the sign is settled the opportunity for intervention has been lost, is itself the reason Proposition 24 is difficult to handle in policy. This paper presents this proposition not as an established finding but as a proposition to be verified. A sketch of the design for verification is referred to the research agenda of Section 21 (forward reference). Finally, one point is added about allocation under uncertainty. The cost of recovery if Proposition 24 is true and the cost of prevention if it is false are not symmetrical — the former is governed by the time required to rebuild skill (on the order of a generation, as stated in 17.4.4), while the latter extends only to the cost of institutional designs that protect the repetition of practice. This asymmetry is one reason national brain capital enters the set of no-regret actions of Proposition 20 (Section 16). It should be made explicit, however, that this is an argument about allocation in a state where truth or falsity is undetermined, not an argument about the truth or falsity of the proposition. A shortfall of evidence cannot be made good by an asymmetry of cost structure. What the asymmetry justifies is precautionary allocation, not an upgrading of the proposition's evidence 674 grade. To blur this distinction would violate the discipline this paper imposed upon itself in Section 3. 17.4.8 Proposition 33 — Asymmetry in the Mobility of National Brain Capital Section 17.4.4 identified three paths of attrition, but all concerned changes on the side of bearers who remain within the country — exit, rupture of transmission, and degradation of trust. What this subsection adds is the case in which bearers do not remain within the country, and the case in which they remain within the country while the destination of their output lies abroad. This path is the obverse of Definition 11's stipulation that national brain capital is something "another state cannot obtain in the short run by import." That it cannot be imported does not imply that it cannot flow out. Proposition 33 (Asymmetry in the Mobility of National Brain Capital) National brain capital (Definition 11) cannot be obtained by import, but can be lost by outflow. This asymmetry between acquisition and loss derives from the fact that the bearers of national brain capital are human beings, and human beings can move. The level of national brain capital is therefore determined by the net increase obtained by subtracting the rate of outflow from the rate of formation, and a design that takes only formation as its object of policy and not outflow does not guarantee a net increase. Outflow includes not only emigration abroad but also the form in which, while residing within the country, knowledge and judgment are absorbed as inputs into the processes of agents abroad (remote work, and the continuing provision of knowledge to external systems). Falsification condition If proxy indicators of national brain capital are explained by inputs relating to formation alone (education, training, opportunities for practice), and explanatory power does not improve when variables relating to outflow (international movement of highly skilled personnel, the proportion of services provided to agents abroad) are added, the claim of asymmetry is rejected. The origin of the asymmetry. The ground of the asymmetry specified by Proposition 33 lies in the composition of Definition 11 itself. The four components of Definition 11 — tacit knowledge of the field, judgment embedded in language and culture, professional ethics and working practices, and the capacity for audit based on long domain experience — are each embodied in individuals. Because they are embodied, they do not transfer in the form of documents, data, or models, and therefore cannot be imported. Yet for the same reason, if the individual in whom they are embodied moves, the capability moves as well. The property that impedes transfer and the property that makes movement possible are one and the same property. That replication is difficult does not prevent the location of the original from changing. 675 This asymmetry becomes clear when contrasted with the mobility of AI capability itself. Model weights transfer by replication, and the original remains after replication. National brain capital does not transfer by replication but transfers through the movement of its bearers, and where it transfers it is lost from its former place. The former is non-exclusive; the latter is exclusive. This difference produces an asymmetry in policy design — whereas for AI capability "another state's acquisition" does not lower one's own level, for national brain capital the movement of bearers lowers one's own level directly. The level as a net increase. The level of national brain capital is therefore determined, for any given period, by the net increase obtained by subtracting the rate of outflow from the rate of formation. To the law of motion of Brain Capital Management (2026e) cited in 17.4.4 — the stock is the previous period's stock less attrition plus gross investment — a second deduction, outflow, is added. What follows immediately from this formulation is the consequence that a policy addressed to formation alone does not guarantee a net increase. However much input into education, training, and opportunities for practice is increased, if the rate of outflow exceeds it, the level falls. And since the time constant required for formation is long (17.4.4) while outflow occurs on the time constant of an individual's decision, the two speeds are asymmetrical in principle. Two forms of outflow. Proposition 33 divides outflow into two forms. The first form is emigration abroad, where both the residence and the place of work of the bearer move abroad, and which existing statistics — aggregates on the international movement of highly skilled personnel — partly capture. The second form is the form in which, while residing within the country, knowledge and judgment are absorbed as inputs into the processes of agents abroad. Proposition 33 gives as concrete instances of this remote work and the continuing provision of knowledge to external systems. There are three reasons why the second form is theoretically important. First, it does not appear in existing statistics. Residence does not change, and no movement arises in population statistics. Depending on the form of work, it may be captured only partly, if at all, as a transaction in services in the balance of payments. Outflow of this form is therefore hard to observe while it is in progress — it possesses in the strongest degree the property 17.4.4 stated of attrition in general, that "since measured efficiency may actually improve while it proceeds, it issues no warning." Second, formation and outflow may occur simultaneously within the same activity. Participating in the processes of agents abroad is, for the bearer, an accumulation of experience, and in that sense is formation. The same activity is, from the standpoint of where judgment is directed, outflow. Formation and outflow cannot be distinguished by the kind of activity; what can be distinguished is only the attribution of the output. Third, this form may act concentratedly on the fourth component of national brain capital. The capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience is maintained only through continuing contact with the practice of the field concerned. Where that practice is constituted as part of the process of an agent abroad, the judgment accumulated contributes to the improvement of that process and does not remain on the side of domestic institutions and industry. 676 What this paper does not state through this proposition. This paper's editorial policy is applied explicitly here. This paper does not include in its analysis which country or which agent is the counterparty of an outflow. What Proposition 33 states is a structural asymmetry deriving from the fact that the bearers are human beings; it does not treat movement toward any particular jurisdiction as a matter of concern. Outflow holds with the same structure in every direction — an outflow for one country is an inflow for another. This paper merely describes one side of this symmetrical structure, seen from the country selected as the unit of analysis. Nor does Proposition 33 imply any restriction on individuals' choices of movement or of work. The movement of a bearer is that individual's choice, and the merits of that choice are not an object of evaluation in this paper. What Proposition 33 identifies is an incompleteness in policy design — a design that looks only at formation describes only half of the law of motion of the very variable it takes as its object. Distinction from Proposition 24. Self-erosion (Proposition 24), formalized in 17.4.5, and outflow, treated in this subsection, are both mechanisms that reduce national brain capital, but they are different mechanisms. Self-erosion is a process in which the capability of bearers who remain within the country itself wears away through dependence on imported cognition. Outflow is a process in which the capability of bearers does not wear away while their location or the destination of their output moves abroad. The two operate independently and may also operate simultaneously. The distinction matters in practice because the responses differ — the response to self-erosion is the design of guardrails following the finding cited in 17.4.2 that "design, not the quantity of adoption, determines the sign," while the response to outflow is the design of conditions under which bearers remain connected to domestic processes. The former is a design problem of adoption; the latter is a design problem of demand. Implications for measurement and design. Proposition 33's falsification condition requires a comparison between an explanation using inputs relating to formation alone and an explanation with outflow variables added. To make this test possible, proxy indicators are required for both forms of outflow. For the first form, existing aggregates on international movement provide a starting point; for the second, this paper cannot offer an established proxy indicator. The proportion of services provided to agents abroad is the variable named by the falsification condition, but its measurement framework, like the measurement framework for value-definition capability (17.3.5), is not in place. This gap is added to the acknowledgment of limits in Section 20. The implication on the design side connects with the national version of Belonging stated in 17.4.2. Capability not used domestically is a latent supply for outflow. Section 17.4.2 stated that a condition in which expert judgment does not reach the decision-making of policy and management appears as a divergence between the stock of capability and the amount used, but that divergence is not merely a static loss — for a bearer whose capability is not used, seeking a destination for judgment in processes abroad may be a rational choice. Formation, use, and retention are therefore not separate policies but a single 677 design problem. This point must be read together with Proposition 18's (Section 10) grounding of the defensibility of the Transformation Model in the thickness of national brain capital — the substrate of defensibility is not the amount formed but the amount that continues to be connected to domestic processes. 17.4.9 Proposition 34 — The Mismatch of Time Scales as a Structural Risk Section 17.4.4 stated that the time constants of the accumulation and attrition of national brain capital are long, and presented that length as "the reason it cannot be treated as an asset that can be bought later." There, length operated as a ground of defensibility — what takes time to replicate is not readily replicated. What this subsection shows is that the same length simultaneously constitutes a structural risk to the very foundation of this paper's framework. Proposition 34 (Mismatch of Time Scales) National brain capital (Definition 11), which this paper made the substrate of the defensibility of the Transformation Model, has a time constant of formation exceeding by more than an order of magnitude the time constant of change in the capability tiers. That is, the speed at which a complement is formed is structurally slower than the speed at which the object it complements changes. This mismatch generates both (i) the danger that the object of complementarity changes before the formation of the complement is complete, and (ii) the difficulty of fixing, in the course of change, the content of the complement to be formed. Investment in national brain capital therefore withstands the mismatch of time constants only where it is directed to the portion redeployable across generational turnover — judgment, evaluation, contextual understanding, and audit — rather than to skills specific to a particular technological generation. Falsification condition If it is observed, across a change in the capability tiers, that investment in skills specific to a particular technological generation exhibits persistence equal to that of investment in redeployable capabilities, the claim regarding the object of investment is rejected. If the time constant of the formation of national brain capital is observed to be of the same order as the time constant of change in the capability tiers, the mismatch itself is rejected. The content of the mismatch. What Proposition 34 compares are two time constants. One is the time constant of change in the capability tiers. Frontier Descent as stated by Definition 2 — the boundaries of the tiers moving over time as a function of the lag width and the required standard of the use — proceeds, as observed in Sections 5 and 16, at speeds on the order of a year or less. The other is the time constant of the formation of national brain capital. As stated in 17.4.4, rebuilding the skilled layer requires as much time as the years of practical experience in the field concerned, and if the rupture of transmission extends to a generation, recovery requires a generation. Proposition 34 678 claims that the latter exceeds the former by more than an order of magnitude. This claim is not a figure estimated by this paper but a structural consequence of the properties of the two time constants already stated in the text, and its correctness is tested empirically in the form specified by the falsification condition. The mismatch may be restated in the language of complements. The national version of the bottleneck theorem formalized in 17.7 states that the more abundant AI capability becomes, the more the marginal value of slow complements that are not automated rises. National brain capital is the core of those slow complements. Yet the object the complement complements — the level, the mode, and the interface of AI capability — is a fast variable. The speed at which a complement is formed is therefore structurally slower than the speed at which the object it complements changes. This is the appearance, in this paper's context, of a general problem treated by the economics of complementarity — complementary elements produce their effect only if moved as a bundle, yet the speeds of adjustment of the individual elements differ. Difficulty (i) — the object changes before formation is complete. The first difficulty is direct. The work of embedding one technological generation of AI in operational processes and of training a layer of people able to oversee and verify that embedding is overtaken during the training period by the replacement of the object. At the point at which training is complete, the interface, output modes, and failure modes to which the skills trained corresponded are already not those of the current generation. Under this structure, a situation in which the payback period of the investment exceeds the lifetime of the object arises repeatedly. An investment whose payback period exceeds the lifetime of its object is not rational for the individual agent. The mismatch of time constants therefore not only reduces the effect of investment but weakens the incentive to invest at all. This weakening of the incentive operates in combination with the rupture of transmission stated in 17.4.4 — in the form of routes by which junior practitioners obtain opportunities for judgment accompanied by responsibility not being designed, precisely because the incentive to invest is weak. Difficulty (ii) — the content to be formed cannot be fixed. The second difficulty is harder to handle than the first. To begin formation, what is to be formed must be settled. Curricula, requirements for qualifications, courses of training, and deployment within practice can all be designed only once the content of the capability at issue is specified. Yet the object is in the course of change, and the direction of change is, as this paper stated in Section 16, not discriminated among the three scenarios. Fixing the content to be formed presupposes discrimination among the scenarios, but discrimination among the scenarios takes time, and during that time formation does not proceed. This structure has the same form as the problem treated by the institutional time constant (Proposition 26, 17.10) — an institution designed only after the object to be regulated has stabilized comes too late, while one designed before stabilization fails to capture the object. The formation of national brain capital carries the same dilemma as institutional design, under a longer time constant. 679 The two difficulties are not independent. Because difficulty (ii) is unsolved, the start of formation is delayed, and to the extent of the delay difficulty (i) deepens. Conversely, if the object of formation is revised frequently in order to avoid difficulty (i), the periods of formation are fragmented, and the components requiring long practical experience — the first and fourth components of Definition 11 — do not accumulate. That is, neither a design that tracks the change of the object nor one that does not resolves the mismatch. The direction of response — investment in the redeployable portion. The response specified at the close of Proposition 34 is not to raise the speed of tracking. Speed cannot win. What is specified is selection among objects of investment — directing investment to the portion redeployable across generational turnover rather than to skills specific to a particular technological generation. Proposition 34 names that portion as judgment, evaluation, contextual understanding, and audit. Why these four are redeployable should be stated. Skills specific to a particular technological generation are knowledge about the interface, operating procedures, and output modes of that generation. These lapse once the generation turns over. By contrast, what judgment, evaluation, contextual understanding, and audit take as their object is not the specification on the AI side but the structure on the side of the domain — knowledge of what counts as a correct result in the field concerned, what constitutes a symptom of error, and what judgment is appropriate in what context. The structure on the side of the domain does not change with the generational turnover of AI capability. The structure of pathology in medicine, physical processes in manufacturing, and the forms of legal reasoning in law do not change when the tools that handle them change. A capability grounded on the side of the object rather than on the side of the tool is therefore retained across the generational turnover of tools. Connection with Ageless Management (2026i) — the capacity for experiential audit is the redeployable portion. The capacity for experiential audit developed in 17.4.3 as the national version is precisely this redeployable portion. When 2026i derived the value of experience from the interaction of long domain experience, crystallized intelligence, and metacognition, what was specified as the source of that value was not knowledge about a particular technology but knowledge about the distribution of errors, accumulated only through long residence in the field concerned. As the obverse of the claim that where generator and verifier share a distribution of errors verification is not independent (2026h), the source of independent verification is sought in a layer of human beings with experience differing from that of the generator. The value of this layer does not depend on which generation the generator belongs to — it depends on how long the person has been in contact with the practice of the field concerned. This connection has a twofold significance for this paper. First, an existing theory within the series gives concrete content to the direction of response specified by Proposition 34. The instruction "invest in the redeployable portion" cannot be operationalized on its own, but through the formulation of the capacity for experiential audit the

objects of investment are specified — the design of opportunities to accumulate long domain experience, the maintenance of cognitive apprenticeship, and the redefinition of roles irrespective of age. Second, what 17.4.3 stated about the position of the fourth component of national brain capital is here justified again from the standpoint of time constants. The fourth component is the substrate of the defensibility of the Transformation Model not only because it cannot be imported. It is so also because it is one of the few components retained across changes in the capability tiers. The boundary conditions built into 2026i transfer here too, however. As stated in 17.4.3, in fields of rapid technical change the audit effectiveness of experience may decline through the half-life of knowledge. Redeployability is a matter of degree, not an absolute guarantee. In fields where the structure on the side of the domain is itself changed by AI — for instance, fields in which the adoption of AI rewrites the procedures of practice and the criteria of results — the redeployability of experience also declines. That Proposition 34's falsification condition specifies rejection in the case where "investment in skills specific to a particular technological generation exhibits persistence equal to that of investment in redeployable capabilities" is intended to open this matter of degree to empirical testing. Position as a fundamental structural risk of Layer Zero. Finally, the position Proposition 34 occupies within this paper's system should be made explicit. This paper grounded the defensibility of the Transformation Model (M2) in the thickness of national brain capital (Proposition 18, Section 10). The four indicators of complementary assets listed by Proposition 4 also, as stated in 17.4.4, degrade in the form of the attrition of national brain capital. The national version of the bottleneck theorem in 17.7 derived the rise in the marginal value of slow complements. That is, no small part of this paper's prescriptions rests upon the single variable of national brain capital. Proposition 34 states that the formation of that variable structurally fails to keep pace with the change of what it complements. This is not one proposition within the framework but a risk bearing on the foundation of the framework. This risk is isomorphic with the temporal asymmetries treated elsewhere in this paper, yet deeper than they are. The depreciation of stockpiles stated by Proposition 8 (Section 13) implied that the guarantee level subsists only as continuous construction, but the object of construction was compute infrastructure procurable with funds. The asymmetry of upward transition stated by Proposition 15 (Section 15) took as its problem that the time constant of accumulation is longer than the time constant of policy decision, but accumulation itself was possible. What Proposition 34 states is a more fundamental mismatch: the object of accumulation may change during the period of accumulation. A stockpile depreciates because the relative value of what is stockpiled falls. In the case of national brain capital, what falls is not only relative value but the identity of the object of accumulation itself. This paper does not dissolve this risk. What Proposition 34 supplies is not a dissolution but a criterion for selecting objects of investment under the risk. Concentration on the redeployable portion is not a prescription that dissolves the mismatch but the 681 minimum condition for withstanding it. This self-limitation is added to the acknowledgment of limits in Section 20 — at the foundation of this paper's prescriptions lies a structural risk that the formation of that foundation itself fails to keep pace with the change of its object, and this paper does no more than point it out. There is a difference between doing no more than pointing it out and not pointing it out. A structural risk that has been pointed out may be taken into account in the design of investment; a risk not pointed out is not. 17.5 The Coupling of Redefinition at the Macro, Meso, and Micro Levels This section has thus far treated in turn the transmission from Layer Zero to the three lower layers (17.2), the mediating variable on the side of ends (17.3), and the mediating variable on the side of the substrate (17.4). This subsection organizes these into a single structure. The claim is as follows: the four layers run through on a single axis, as settings in which one and the same operation, "definition," is performed upon different objects. And this running through is not a claim that upper layers determine lower ones. 17.5.1 A Single Axis — What Is Defined at Each Layer Rearranged from the single standpoint of the object of definition, the central activity of each layer is as follows. At Layer Zero (the state), what is defined is what shall count as national value — the national redefinition of Proposition 14, whose five dimensions are purpose, boundary, time, agency, and measurement. At Layer One (RCap), what is defined is what capital prices as future value — the judgment of which generative capabilities are entrusted with resources on which time horizon, functioning as a declaration of "the future worth realizing." At Layer Two (SDS), what is at issue is what individuals define themselves as — the shift from definitions given by belonging to definitions selected for oneself. At Layer Three (the ER group), what is defined is what a firm exists for — the setting of Purpose and the design that translates it into roles, authority, and measurement (2026b, 2026d). The four activities differ in object and in subject, but as operations they are isomorphic. Each has the three-stage structure of (i) releasing the givenness of existing ends, (ii) selecting new ends, and (iii) translating the selection into resource allocation, institutional design, and organizational structure. That Definition 12 specifies (ii) and (iii) of these three stages as the content of a capability, and places "states, societies, and firms" side by side as its subjects, is precisely on account of this isomorphism. Value-definition capability is therefore not a concept peculiar to Layer Zero but a variable running through all four layers. It is by this running through that Proposition 17 can speak of "differences between states and between firms" at both levels at once. The substance of the running through may be confirmed in two directions. From above downward, the definitions of an upper layer supply the vocabulary and the givens of the definitions of a lower one. If a state redefines national value, the candidate set of futures 682 capital takes as objects of pricing changes, the types of occupation and business individuals may refer to in defining themselves change, and the range of legitimacy of the Purposes firms may set out changes. From below upward, the accumulation of the definitions of lower layers constitutes the substance and the bearers of the definitions of an upper one. That firms' setting of Purpose is the organ of realization of a state's capacity to define (17.2.3), and that the aggregate of individuals' capacity for self-definition forms national brain capital (17.2.2), are both relations in this direction. 17.5.2 Running Through Is Not Determination — Four Kinds of Evidence of Independence This description of running through must not, however, be read as a claim that upper layers determine lower ones. The common note laid down by Definition 8 (Section 2) — the arrangement is architectural and is not a claim of logical dependence — must be applied most strictly in this subsection. The expression "runs through on a single axis" states that the four layers are different applications of the same operation; it does not state that the upper application derives the lower. Independence is observed in at least four forms. First, the upper defines and the lower does not. Layer Zero delimits an upper bound but does not guarantee a lower bound (17.2.3). Even if a state declares an ambitious redefinition, nothing happens unless firms redefine — the empirical finding that enterprise redefinition remains rare (2026c) is a direct observation of this independence. Second, the lower precedes the upper. A firm's setting of Purpose may be, and in fact is, performed without waiting for a state's specification of ends. The same holds for individual self-definition. The fact of precedence shows that the definitions of lower layers are not derived from those of upper ones. Third, contradictions across layers may persist. A state may declare long-term construction of the substrate as its end while the time of capital markets remains quarterly, firms optimize for short-run efficiency gains, and individuals define themselves as efficient performers of routine tasks — this fourfold incoherence is a contradiction logically, yet may persist stably in reality. If the layers were logically dependent, such persistent incoherence would not arise. Fourth, construction in the reverse direction is in fact in operation, as stated in each part of 17.2. Stated precisely, the coupling of the layers is neither determination nor independence but a mutual supply of constraints and vocabulary. Upper layers supply the outer perimeter of the possibilities of lower layers, and the vocabulary in which definitions are spoken. Lower layers supply the bearers of the definitions of upper layers, and the organs by which those definitions are realized. Neither supply determines the other's behaviour. Under this relation, the condition for the system as a whole to function is that each layer performs the definitions of its own layer, not that upper layers define on behalf of lower ones. 683 17.5.3 A Failure Mode — Redefinition at One Layer Only From the foregoing structure a failure mode peculiar to the four-layer architecture is derived. It is redefinition at one layer only. Four cases may be given. (i) Layer Zero only: the state redefines its ends, but the time of capital remains short, firms' option sets do not move, and no route opens for individual self-definition. The declaration remains in the strategy document and resource allocation proceeds as before. (ii) Layer One only: capital shifts to the pricing of future value, but because the state lacks a guarantee level, the executability presupposed by that pricing is unstable, and because firms do not redefine, the objects of pricing are scarce. (iii) Layer Two only: individuals shift to selfdefinition, but no redefined roles are prepared at firms, and self-definition lacking an outlet for translation remains only as a burden upon individuals. (iv) Layer Three only: firms redefine Purpose, but capital evaluates on quarterly time, the state narrows the outer perimeter of access, and on the side of individuals there is no accumulation of the capability to bear definition. All four failures share the feature that from within the layer concerned they appear to have been "carried out." The declaration, the framework of pricing, the individual's decision, and the firm's Purpose document are each recorded as observable results at their own layer. As a system, however, nothing has moved. The proposition stated in 17.2.3 — "the four-layer architecture is a design problem completed by the optimization of no single layer" — is the general form of this failure mode. And this paper's addition of a layer of the state does not itself dissolve that incompletability — the addition of Layer Zero merely makes explicit one condition for the system to close, and does not close it. The expression in 17.15 that the four layers close means that the description of the system has come full circle, not that the design problem has been solved. 17.6 National Redefinition — Proposition 14 and the Correspondence with the Five Dimensions Thus far the state has been treated as "the subject that distributes." Yet if the framework of this series is applied consistently to the state, one unavoidable step remains. Just as a firm is a subject that rewrites value definition, so too is a state a subject that rewrites its own value definition — what shall count as national value. The history of Japan after the oil shock, in which the priorities of the state were rewritten from a line of energy-intensive heavy and chemical industry toward resource conservation and higher value added (Sections 4 and 18), shows that redefinition at the level of the state is not an abstract possibility but an actual occurrence. The transformation of resource structure by AI compels an isomorphic rewriting once more. This paper formalizes it as the following proposition. 684 Proposition 14 (National Redefinition) The transformation of resource structure by AI compels a redefinition of the state's value definition itself — what shall count as national value. The five dimensions of enterprise redefinition (2026b) have counterparts at the level of the state: purpose (a re-examination of national principles and national strategy) / boundary (from territorial boundaries to boundaries of capability, data, and alliance) / time (long-term commitment to electricity, people, and compute infrastructure) / agency (a reallocation of the roles of state, firms, and individuals) / measurement (from GDP to national accounts including AI dependence, transformation value, and the guarantee level). Passive adaptation lacking national redefinition is equivalent to leaving the choice of cell position to the decisions of other states. Falsification condition If no difference is observed between the group of states that do not carry out redefinitional policy shifts and the group that do, in the evolution of cell position, transformation value, and structure of dependence, this proposition is rejected. The core of Proposition 14 is the structural-correspondence claim that the five dimensions of enterprise redefinition (2026b) have counterparts at the level of the state. The correspondence is not a metaphor: it is concrete enough that for each dimension one can specify what is rewritten, what the central question is, and by which indicator the presence or absence of rewriting is observed. Table 9 sets out this correspondence. Table 9. The five dimensions of national redefinition — correspondence with enterprise redefinition (2026b) Dimension Content in enterprise redefinition Counterpart at the level of the state Central question at the level of the state Observable indicators (examples) Purpose Rewriting the reason for existence (what one exists for) Re-examination of national principles and national strategy: which dependences are accepted, and which capabilities are kept within the country. The substance of this dimension is value-definition capability (Definition 12) What shall count as national value Revision of the specification of ends in strategy documents / explicit statement of targets for the guarantee level / proxy indicators of the capacity to define (17.3.5, provisional) Boundary Resetting the boundaries of business and organization (how far is internal) From territorial boundaries to boundaries of capability, data, and alliance Which superimposed spheres constitute the effective border Changes in the sphere of export controls, the sphere of data discipline, alliance guarantees, and the composition of supply networks 685 Dimension Content in enterprise redefinition Counterpart at the level of the state Central question at the level of the state Observable indicators (examples) Time Time defence against quarterly time (2026c) Long-term commitment to electricity, people, and compute infrastructure. Includes the time constants of the accumulation and attrition of national brain capital (17.4.4) How to institutionalize the mismatch between political time and the time of the substrate Multi-year binding fiscal frameworks / long-term plans for power sources, compute infrastructure, and the training of people Agency Reallocation of roles and decision- making (2026d) Reallocation of the roles of state, firms, and individuals. Includes that the organs of realization of the capacity to define are firms and individuals (17.2.3) Who governs, and how, the capabilities held by private firms Design of the agents assuring access / division of investment between public and private / design of rationing and priority allocations Measurement From measuring past realization to measuring future value (2026a) From GDP to national accounts including AI dependence, transformation value, and the guarantee level How to measure a state's capability to create future value Dependence indicators (Hypothesis H1) / accounts attributing transformation value / the balance and rate of depreciation of the guarantee level / the four components of national brain capital (Appendix E) Redefinition of purpose. Just as the redefinition of purpose in a firm was not a product choice of "what to sell" but a rewriting of "what one exists for," the redefinition of purpose in a state does not stop at the industrial choice of "in which industries to earn foreign currency." It is a rewriting of the ordering of values — which dependences are accepted, which capabilities are kept within the country, and which risks the population bears. Just as Japan's redefinition of purpose in the oil period was executed as a declaration of the priorities of "securing stable supply and conserving resources," the redefinition of purpose in the AI period is a selection of priorities accompanied by a discipline of attainability — for instance, taking as national principle not "complete self-sufficiency in frontier capability" but "a selective guarantee level compounded with depth of utilization" (Proposition 13, Section 18). A state that does not redefine its purpose leaves its positioning on the nine cells to the inertia of existing industries, and that is the first form of the passive adaptation stated in the closing sentence of Proposition 14. This paper's framework gives theoretical substance to this dimension. The substance of the purpose dimension is value-definition capability (Definition 12). Purpose occupies a privileged position among the five dimensions because the remaining four are all routes of translation of purpose — the resetting of boundaries is the judgment of what to keep internal in the light of purpose; the reconstruction of time is the adaptation of finance and 686 institutions to the time constants required for the realization of purpose; the reallocation of agency is the designation of the organs that realize purpose; and the extension of measurement is the construction of accounts by which the degree of attainment of purpose can be read. It is possible to rewrite the four dimensions while purpose remains blank, but that is an updating of means and not a redefinition — it is the activity of selecting more efficient boundaries, time, agency, and measurement in relation to ends set by someone else. And as Proposition 17 showed, advantage on the side of efficiency diminishes. Of the rewritings of the five dimensions, therefore, the one that generates a non-diminishing residual is the dimension of purpose, and the other four are routes by which that residual is realized. In this sense Proposition 14 and Proposition 17 are different aspects of the same structure — the former is a decomposition of the dimensions of redefinition, the latter the dynamics of the allocation of value among those dimensions. The qualification set out by 17.3.7 as Proposition 32 extends to this dimension as it stands, however. A rewriting of the purpose dimension converts into national value only where it is accompanied by channels through which the rewritten purpose is accepted outside. A redefinition that defines purpose distinctively while lacking channels of propagation arrives at a state in which only purpose among the five dimensions has been rewritten — the counterpart, on the side of dimensions, of the "redefinition at one layer only" treated by 17.5.3 as a failure mode. Redefinition of boundary. Just as the boundary of a firm is a choice of "how far is internal and from where matters are entrusted to markets and alliances," so too does the effective boundary of a state lift off from territorial map lines in the AI period. What actually delimits the possibilities of a national economy is the superimposition of the sphere of export controls (as the agent of which state one's access is treated), the sphere of data (to which jurisdiction's data discipline one is subject and which data are allowed to leave the country), the sphere of compute (on which supply network's compute resources and foundation models one depends), and the sphere of alliance (whose guarantees of supply and security extend to one). The economics of intra-alliance transformation (friend-shoring) discussed in Section 8 shows that this redefinition of boundary is already in progress. Territory cannot be moved, but each of these spheres is a design variable — the redefinition of national boundaries is the shifting of the focus of strategy from immovable boundaries to movable ones. Redefinition of time. The time dimension in enterprise redefinition was the design of structures defending the time of redefinition against quarterly time (2026c). The national version of temporal redefinition is the institutional overcoming of the mismatch between political time (electoral cycles, single-year budgeting) and the time of the substrate (power systems, the training of people, and the construction of compute infrastructure all run to a decade from plan to result). The asymmetry of stockpiling (Proposition 8, Section 13) sharpens this mismatch. Because the sovereign minimum guarantee level depreciates at the speed of the advance of the frontier, it cannot be "bought" with a single large budget and subsists only as a permanent commitment of finance, electricity, and people. The time constants of national brain capital (17.4.4) extend this mismatch by a further stage — the 687 skilled layer and the channels of transmission are variables on a longer time scale than power systems. The redefinition of time at the level of the state is therefore a rewriting of temporal structure spanning finance, energy, and education, from single-year discretion to multi-decade commitment; and isomorphically with the fact that a firm's time defence was justified only as "protection subject to renewal conditions" rather than "unconditional protection" (2026g), the side of long-term commitment likewise requires the discipline of verification of results and of withdrawal clauses. Redefinition of agency. Whereas nuclear technology began under state monopoly, frontier AI capability is in the hands of private firms (Proposition 9, Section 9). This reversal of the starting point compels a reallocation of the roles of state, firms, and individuals. The state is redefined less as an agent of production than as a guarantor of access, a builder of the guarantee level, and a designer of rationing. Firms are redefined not as mere objects of regulation but as holders of the transformation assets that substantively constitute the state's cell position — that is, as co-producers of the Layer Zero position. Individuals too, as the ultimate bearers of the depth of utilization (M3), become components of the state's absorptive capacity. The point added by 17.2.3 and 17.5 is that this reallocation is not merely a division of capability but also a division of definition — the state can declare ends but lacks the organs of realization, and firms and individuals can realize but lack the machinery of aggregation. The failure modes where the redefinition of agency is lacking are symmetrical. The fallacy of self-sufficiency, in which the state attempts to bear everything, and the fallacy of laissez-faire, in which the market is held to solve everything, are isomorphic failures in that both lack the cell-by-cell role design required by the non-equivalence of the nine cells (Proposition 3, Section 6). Redefinition of measurement. The last of the five dimensions, and from the standpoint of this series the deepest. The measurement dimension in enterprise redefinition was the extension from financial statements measuring past realization to the measurement of future value and the generative capability behind it (2026a, 2026b). Its counterpart at the level of the state is an extension of national accounts centred on GDP. GDP is a flow measure of value added realized over a fixed past period, and the person who took part in its design stated early on that the measurement of national income is not a measurement of national welfare (Kuznets, 1934). What falls systematically outside the national accounts of the AI period includes at least AI dependence (Definition 4) and its structure of concentration, the attribution of transformation value (Definition 5), the balance and depreciation of the guarantee level (Definition 6), and the four components of national brain capital (Definition 11). The proposal to develop these as satellite accounts to the national accounts is positioned as an extension to the age of AI of the existing lineage of measurement reform seeking to correct the limits of GDP (Stiglitz, Sen, & Fitoussi, 2009). The redefinition of measurement is the deepest point of connection with the foundational axiom of this series, and is discussed separately in 17.9. The closing sentence of Proposition 14 — passive adaptation is equivalent to leaving the choice of cell position to the decisions of other states — is a summary of this paper's 688 design-theoretic character. On the nine cells there is no neutral option of "not choosing a position." A state that does not choose is assigned a position by the export controls of other states, the commercial judgment of suppliers, and Frontier Descent (Section 5). The passivity of the downward transition shown by Proposition 15 (Section 15) is the dynamic warrant for this claim — not choosing is not the maintenance of the status quo but descent. National redefinition is a choice between internalizing the assignment of position and leaving it exogenous, and this choice is itself observable. As the falsification condition indicates, states may be divided by the presence or absence of redefinitional policy shifts and the subsequent evolution of cell position, transformation value, and structure of dependence compared. The design of the verification is carried forward to the research agenda of Section 21. 17.6.1 The Limits of Conceptual Transfer from the Theory of Enterprise Management to the Theory of the State — An Explicit Statement of Theoretical Premises Table 9 showed that the five dimensions of enterprise redefinition have counterparts at the level of the state. But the presentation of a correspondence does not imply that the correspondence is complete. This subsection states explicitly, as theoretical premises, the limits this paper presupposes in applying the enterprise theory of the series (2026a, 2026b) to the state. This statement is a self-limitation bearing on the legitimacy of this paper's connection to the series — a structural correspondence whose limits are not made explicit cannot be distinguished from a metaphor, because the reader cannot confirm the range within which the correspondence holds. Three grounds of non-correspondence. Between a firm and a state there are three structural differences that act in the same way upon all five dimensions. First, the asymmetry of inclusion. A firm may withdraw from a business, replace its members, and select the markets it addresses. A state includes its entire population, does not select its members, and cannot remove anyone from the scope of inclusion. Second, the permanent maintenance of public goods from which there is no withdrawal. A firm may halt unprofitable functions, whereas a state bears an obligation to maintain permanently, irrespective of profitability, such functions as justice, public safety, basic medical care and education, and disaster response. Third, redistributive responsibility and the cost of building consensus. Resource allocation within a firm is executed as a decision of management, whereas a state's resource allocation has the character of redistribution, and its decision is accompanied by procedures of consensus building and by the cost of those procedures themselves. Applying the vocabulary of enterprise management to the state while ignoring these three points leads to a specific error: the error of treating a state as a single business entity. The form of this error is clear — concepts such as "redefinition," "value-definition capability," and "portfolio" all presuppose selection and concentration. Selection and concentration acquire meaning only when accompanied by withdrawal from what is not selected. 689 In a state, withdrawal from unselected sectors, regions, and generations is either impossible or, where possible, leaves a cost in the form of redistributive responsibility. Recommendations that use the vocabulary of the firm as it stands are therefore either unexecutable prescriptions or prescriptions that do not account for their costs. That this paper placed "the cost of sovereignty" in Section 19, providing a section in which it calculates the costs of its own recommendations, is a response to this structure. The range within which each of the five dimensions holds. Below, for each dimension of Table 9, the part in which the correspondence holds and the part in which it does not are set out separately. The purpose dimension. What holds is the isomorphism of the operation of rewriting the reason for existence. That a state rewrites "what shall count as national value," as the same operation by which a firm rewrites "what it exists for," is an occurrence actually observed (the rewriting of priorities after the oil shock treated in Section 4 is an example). What does not hold is the singularity of the selecting subject. A firm's Purpose may in principle be selected by a single decision-making mechanism. A state's ends are the aggregate of the definitions of multiple agents, and the procedure of aggregation is itself a political process — this point was already stated in 17.3.3. Two further points may be added. First, a firm may withdraw from businesses that do not fit its purpose, whereas a state cannot exclude members who do not fit its purpose. The redefinition of a state's purpose is therefore carried out under the constraint that it must hold simultaneously for all included members. Second, the rewriting of a firm's purpose may be completed within the relation between owners and management, whereas the rewriting of a state's purpose itself requires the cost of building consensus. The difficulty of the national version in the purpose dimension is therefore not the difficulty of choosing ends but the difficulty of the chosen ends holding across the whole scope of inclusion. The boundary dimension. What holds is the transfer of the recognition that boundaries are design variables. Isomorphically with the fact that a firm's boundary is an object of choice, a state's effective boundaries — the spheres of export controls, data, compute, and alliance — can be designed. What does not hold is the range over which the boundary can be moved. A firm may move its boundary substantially by taking on or shedding businesses in its portfolio, whereas a state cannot move the boundaries of its territory and its population. What can be moved is only the superimposed spheres, and outside them remains a domain from which there is no withdrawal. The consequence of this asymmetry is that the resetting of boundaries is at once an operation of "choosing what to keep internal" and one in which what is not chosen also remains internal. Whereas the contraction of a firm's boundary means the externalization of its object, the resetting of a state's boundary presupposes the existence of objects that are not externalized. The time dimension. What holds is the isomorphism of the design problem of defending long-term commitment against short-run time. Isomorphically with a firm defending the time of redefinition against quarterly time (2026c), a state must defend the time of the substrate against electoral cycles and single-year budgeting. What does not hold is the

means of defence. A firm's time defence may be executed through the design of ownership structure, compensation, and disclosure — the source of short-run pressure itself can be reduced by institutional design. In a state, the electoral cycle, which is the source of short-run pressure, is not a constraint that can be removed as an object of defence. It is the very ground of legitimacy, and its removal would mean the impairment of legitimacy. A state's time defence therefore subsists only as a design that creates long-term commitment in a manner compatible with the pressure, not as a design that reduces the source of the pressure. Multi-year binding fiscal frameworks and the placing of longterm plans on a statutory footing are forms of this, and they are always accompanied by a problem that does not arise for a firm: how the legitimacy of the binding is to be procured. The agency dimension. What holds is the problem setting of a reallocation of roles and decision-making. The reallocation of roles among state, firms, and individuals may be posed as a design problem isomorphic with the reallocation of roles within a firm (2026d). What does not hold is the mobility of members. A firm may replace the subject itself through turnover of personnel, whereas a state cannot replace its members. Reallocation is carried out only among existing members. This constraint has two consequences. First, reallocation necessarily involves a contraction of someone's role, and a redistributive responsibility toward the contracting side remains. Second, the speed of reallocation is limited by the speed at which members adapt — a state cannot shorten the period of adjustment that a firm may shorten through hiring and exit. This is one reason the mismatch of time constants stated by Proposition 34 (17.4.9) becomes more serious at the level of the state than at the level of the firm. The measurement dimension. What holds is the direction of extension from measuring past realization to measuring future value. That the extension of national accounts is an operation isomorphic with the extension of measurement in a firm is discussed again in 17.9. What does not hold is two things: the mechanism of pricing and the recipient of the measurement. As to the former, as stated in 17.3.3, a firm's Λ has the pricing mechanism of the capital market, whereas no market exists that prices a state's Λ. The latter is a point this subsection adds — a firm's measurement is a report to owners, and the framework of reporting may be revised within the relation between owners and management. A state's measurement is an account rendered to the sovereign people, and a change in the system of measurement is itself an object of the political process. To change what is measured is to change what counts as a result, and that is inseparable from a rewriting of the purpose dimension. At the level of the state, therefore, purpose and measurement among the five dimensions are more strongly coupled than at the level of the firm. The character of the qualification — not a denial of the correspondence. The foregoing limits do not deny the correspondences of Table 9. The conclusion of this subsection is that the correspondence in each dimension is an isomorphism of operation and not an identity of constraint conditions. The operation of rewriting, the operation of treating 691 boundaries as design variables, the operation of defending the long term, the operation of reallocating roles, and the operation of extending measurement — all of these transfer to the level of the state. What does not transfer are the constraint conditions under which those operations are executed, namely the possibility of withdrawal, the mobility of members, the mechanism of pricing, and the singularity of decision-making. What this paper presupposes in advancing Proposition 14 is this distinction. Applying the discipline of analogy (Proposition 1, Section 3) reflexively to this paper's own connection to the series, what has been written here is a table of correspondence stating that what transfers is the operation and what does not transfer are the constraint conditions. What this self-limitation imposes upon this paper should be stated. First, a prohibition on speaking of the state in the vocabulary of efficiency. Whereas a firm's redefinition may be executed as a selective concentration of resources, a state's redefinition may be executed only after accounting for the costs of inclusion, permanent maintenance, and redistribution. Recommendations that do not account for these costs are merely transcriptions of a firm's prescriptions onto the state. Second, an examination of the executability of prescriptions. The prescriptions this paper presents — construction of the guarantee level, investment in national brain capital, and the design of channels of propagation — all compete fiscally with the maintenance of public goods from which there is no withdrawal. This competition is treated in Section 19. Third, confirmation of consistency with Layer Two (2026f). The claim that the state is a subject that defines value may stand in tension with Layer Two's claim that citizens and firms are subjects that define for themselves. As stated in 17.2.3 and 17.3.4, this paper's position is that what a state may hold is the design of the forums in which acts of definition are performed, aggregated, and endowed with resources, and not the content of the definitions themselves. This position is also required by the asymmetry of inclusion stated in this subsection — for a subject that cannot select its members to define ends on behalf of those members would be an imposition of a definition upon all included members. 17.7 The National Version of the Bottleneck Theorem — The More Abundant AI Becomes, the Dearer the Slow Things Grow The first channel of Proposition 11 (toward RCap) contained, alongside the delimitation of range, a second specification — the bottleneck price of AI complements. This subsection formalizes it at the level of the state. RCap Proposition 7 (Kadowaki, 2026g) formalized a transfer of the bottleneck: where the elasticity of substitution among complements is low, the return on AI investment is governed by the level of the scarcest complement, so that the more abundant and cheap AI becomes, the more the marginal value of slow complements that are not automated — at the level of the firm, human absorptive capacity and social trust — rises instead (structural correspondence). Its theoretical basis lies in the result of growth theory that in production structures with an elasticity of substitution below one, growth is governed by the essential input that is hardest to improve (Aghion, 692 Jones, & Jones, 2019), and in the economics of complementarity, in which the optimal configuration of complementary systems moves as a bundle (Milgrom & Roberts, 1990). Let the slow complements at the level of the state be identified. AI capability itself is, as the whole of this paper shows, a fast variable. Generational turnover of models proceeds on the order of a year, the unit cost of inference falls, and the frontier descends (Section 5). The complements a state requires in order to convert AI capability into national value are, by contrast, slower by orders of magnitude. Institutions (the quality of regulation, the reliability of enforcement, data discipline, and the machinery of procurement) are variables on the order of years to decades, and that institutions are formed historically and change only incrementally is an established finding of the economics of institutions (North, 1990). Trust (trust in institutions, trust in transactions, and social acceptance of technology) is a generational variable. Electricity (generation, transmission, and agreement on siting) requires on the order of a decade from plan to operation, and human absorptive capacity and the physical interface (manufacturing, field data, robotics) likewise have long periods of construction. And the elasticity of substitution is low — abundant compute cannot substitute for a deficient transmission grid, and a high-performing model cannot substitute for contracts that are not enforced or administrative services that are not accepted. Hence the easier the acquisition of AI capability becomes, the more a state's creation of value from AI comes to be governed by its slowest complement. This is the national version of the bottleneck theorem. It should be noted here that the list of slow complements overlaps substantially with the four components of national brain capital (Definition 11). Trust in institutions is the third component itself, and human absorptive capacity and the physical interface are externalized forms of the first component (tacit knowledge of the field). The bottleneck theorem and the argument about national brain capital arrive at the same object from different starting points — the former from the elasticity of substitution in the production function, the latter from non-replicability. That two routes point to the same object is corroborating evidence that the object is a central variable of state strategy. And the residual of the capacity to define shown by Proposition 17 is a third slow variable to be added to this list — the capability to select and realize ends likewise cannot be purchased with capital and requires time to accumulate. Three consequences follow from this formalization. First, a reinterpretation of the competition for position. Competition on the nine cells appears on the surface as competition for the acquisition of AI capability — which country holds the most advanced models — but the more the price of capability falls and diffusion proceeds, the more differences between states in equilibrium shift to differences in complements. That even in frontierproducing states the binding constraint is shifting from capital and people toward electricity for data centres is as seen in Sections 8 and 13, and the observation that the bottleneck has already transferred to "the slow things" at the apex of production is supportive evidence for the national version of the theorem. 693 Second, a theoretical foundation for transformation value. Proposition 4 (Section 7) stated that a transformation margin lacking complementary assets is structurally compressed. The national version of the bottleneck theorem supplies its obverse. What a producer can replicate at near-zero marginal cost is only the fast variables — the general functions of a model and the thin application layer above it — and what cannot be replicated are the slow variables: domain tacit knowledge, the capability to transform the physical world, institutional trust, and language and culture. Hence the defensible locus of transformation value (Definition 5) exists, by definition, only upon slow complements. That Japan's M2′ conception (Proposition 13, Section 18) places manufacturing, robotics, institutional trust, and linguistic and cultural assets at the anchor of transformation is not an expression of industrial preference but a deduction from this theorem. Third, the priority of allocation. Where follow-on investment in the variable that is becoming abundant (the acquisition of model capability) and advance investment in the slow variables (institutions, trust, electricity, people, the physical interface) compete fiscally, the logic of the bottleneck gives priority to the latter — an allocation that invests in the abundant variable and starves the slow ones optimizes a constraint that is not binding (2026g). Two qualifications are attached, however. First, the construction of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6) is tail-risk insurance rather than growth investment, and should be treated as a separate account outside this comparison of priorities — if insurance is assessed by the logic of growth, it will always be judged insufficient in normal times. Second, investment in slow complements is also slow to manifest results, and by the productivity J-curve (Proposition 5, Section 7) theory predicts that results during the construction period will first be under-measured. Possessing fiscal and political structures that can withstand this mismeasurement is part of the redefinition of time stated in 17.6; where they cannot be withstood, a failure mode peculiar to this situation arises, in which a premature verdict that "AI investment was a failure" interrupts the construction of slow complements. 17.8 The Design of Access Rights — The Material Conditions of Self- Definition Proposition 12 (17.2.2) stated that the rationing of Tier C2 capability forms a new axis of inequality and that AI access comes under pressure to be redefined at the level of basic infrastructure. This subsection expands the design problem. It is the point within the discussion of Layer Zero that touches most directly upon the lives of individuals. First, the discipline of analogy (Proposition 1, Section 3) should be applied reflexively. What transfers from the history of the universalization of electricity as a service to AI is not the cost structure but the structure of the change of definition: namely, the sequence whereby, once an input has been incorporated into the critical processes of production and of life, its absence is socially redefined not as "a shortfall of purchasing power" but as "the absence of a precondition of civic participation." Isomorphically with the way electric light, a luxury in the early period of electrification, gave way after the 694 completion of electrification to power outages being treated as the suspension of a basic service, AI access comes to be spoken of in the vocabulary of universal service in proportion to the degree to which AI has become the standard interface of administration, education, medicine, and employment. This is, before it is a normative demand, a predictable route by which political pressure arises. What does not transfer, on the other hand, is the cost structure of natural monopoly. Whereas the inefficiency of duplicative construction of electricity networks governed the institutional form of universal service (regional monopoly plus an obligation to supply), the C1 tier of AI admits of competitive supply, and the scarcity of the C2 tier derives not from duplication of networks but from concentration of compute and capability. The design problem is therefore posed not as "the regulation of monopoly" but as "the choice of guarantee levels tier by tier." The design space is spanned by three components. First, universal basic access — a guarantee of access to capability at the C1 level irrespective of ability to pay, language, or region, which sets the floor of the possibility of self-definition. Second, market allocation — the scarce capacity of C2 capability is in principle allocated by price and contract. Third, public priority allocations — machinery for allocating capacity preferentially to administration, medicine, education, and critical infrastructure at times of AI outage or capacity stringency, the counterpart of priority supply and the design of the order of planned outages in electricity (Section 13). The choice of the proportions and boundaries among the three components defines each country's regime of access rights. Failure modes exist on both sides. If the level of universal guarantee is set too high, it presses upon finance and capacity and impairs the efficiency of market allocation. Conversely, if the floor and priority allocations are lacking, a dual society of cognitive resources forms in normal times, and in an AI outage the conditions of self-definition and of life are stripped away in order from the socially weakest — from individuals with low ability to pay, from regions without alternative means, and from public services without priority contracts. That this choice is part of the institutional footing of SDS is the design-theoretic content of Proposition 11's second channel. To the design of access rights, a fourth consideration is added from the arguments of Proposition 17 and national brain capital. A guarantee of access does not by itself generate the capacity to define. In a society where universal basic access is guaranteed, if people use that capability exclusively for the efficient performance of given ends, then society as a whole has raised a variable on the efficiency side — the diminishing side. Access as a material condition of self-definition acquires substance where access can be used for the purpose of "conceiving and translating one's own value definition," and what makes that use possible is not access itself but the institutional footing of self-definition (2026f) and the design of Build (2026e, 17.4.2). The finding that unlimited assistance may erode unaided capability applies as it stands to the design of universal basic access — whether guaranteed access is designed in such a way as to accelerate the attrition of national brain capital through the externalization of judgment is an item in the evaluation of a regime of access rights. This is not an argument against universal guarantee. It is the 695 addition of an item of design — the floor is necessary, and the design of the floor determines the sign of the change in capability. The inter-state version is another face of the same proposition. The stratification of access among states — states with alliance-based guarantees, states dependent on market procurement, and states subject to control measures — is the international distribution of the M3×C2 vulnerability discussed in Section 8, and it distributes the premises of each country's domestic design of access. However much a state may wish to guarantee universal basic access to its own population as an institution, if the state's own access is not guaranteed externally, that guarantee is an empty note. Here lies the connection between the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6) and the design of access rights. The guarantee level is the backing asset of domestic access guarantees, and the credit of domestic universal service is ultimately secured by the Layer Zero position. The content of the backing is concrete — whether a guarantee of universal basic access can be discharged even during an AI outage depends on how much operational capacity under Definition 6(i-a) exists domestically; whether that guarantee will still mean the same thing several years hence depends on the renewal capability of (i-b); and whether the guarantee can be executed in processes handling sensitive data such as administration and medicine depends on the sensitive-processing condition of (i-c). The design of access rights is not completed by the declaration of a right and requires the construction of the physical and organizational conditions under which that right can be discharged even when external supply stops. 17.9 The Future Value of a State — Connection to Future Value Theory The last connection is to the foundational axiom of the series. Future Value Theory (Kadowaki, 2026a) reversed the origin of value from past realization — the cash flows of performance and accumulated assets — to the capability to create future value. Every layer of this series may be read as an application of that reversal at its own level (citation as foundational axiom). At the level of the firm, the reversal issued in the decomposition V = A + G + Λ (2026g), and the frontier of pricing was shown to lie in generative capability Λ. This paper formalizes the counterpart at the level of the state as follows. GDP is a measurement of part of a state's A and G — the flow of realized value added. It answers what was produced over a fixed past period, but does not answer whether the national economy concerned can generate new value under the next technological regime — the state's Λ. The history of the oil period illustrates this blind spot. On the eve of the oil crisis, flow statistics recorded the wealth of oil-producing states and the growth of processing- trade states in the same units, but what divided their subsequent paths was not the flow of the current period but the capability to rewrite the mode of value creation — whether dependence on production could be converted into institutions, and whether industrial structure could be shifted toward resource conservation and higher value added (Sections 6 and 18). That the national accounts of the AI period are reproducing the same blind spot is already visible. An excess of payments related to digital services is recorded 696 as a deficit of the current period, but whether that deficit is a leading indicator of pure import and utilization lacking complementary assets (Proposition 13, Section 18) or a transitional cost accompanying the construction of transformation assets cannot be discriminated from flow accounts. What discrimination requires is measurement of the state's Λ. The components of a state's Λ may be sketched from this paper's framework. (i) Capacity to move cell — the holding of real options for moving from the present position on the nine cells to adjacent cells. Its thickness depends on transformation assets, the guarantee level, and institutional plasticity, and the possibilities and time constants of transition are organized by the transition matrix of Appendix E. (ii) Absorptive capacity — the balance of complementary investment in people, organization, and institutions that compounds the depth of utilization (M3) (Proposition 5, Section 7). (iii) The balance and rate of depreciation of the guarantee level (Definition 6) — the executive capacity that is not lost even under interruption scenarios. (iv) The quality of the structure of dependence — not the level of dependence itself (Definition 4) but the dispersion of its suppliers and its substitutability. (v) The balance and rate of attrition of national brain capital (Definition 11, 17.4) — the four components of the human substrate that cannot be replaced by import. (vi) Value-definition capability (Definition 12, 17.3) — the capability to select for oneself and to realize what is to count as new value. None of these is a flow of the current period; all are variables of stock and capability, and all lie outside GDP. The extension of national accounts demanded by the measurement dimension of Proposition 14 is nothing other than the development of these six elements as satellite accounts. It is necessary to distinguish frankly that the measurement maturity of the six elements is not uniform. Elements (iii), the guarantee level, and (iv), the quality of the structure of dependence, are at a level at which this paper can specify concrete measurement procedures — the accounts of dependence constitute the first implementable step, as Hypothesis H1 and the dependence audit protocol of Appendix C. Element (ii), absorptive capacity, may be approximated by reorganizing existing productivity and investment statistics. By contrast, for (i) the capacity to move cell, (v) national brain capital, and (vi) value-definition capability, the measurement framework is not in place — for (v) and (vi) Appendix E organizes provisional proxy indicators, but that they are provisional is made explicit in both the text and the appendix (17.3.5, 17.4.2). To average across this difference in maturity and construct a "state Λ index" is, on this paper's position, not to be done. Dissolving what can and what cannot be measured into the same number is a failure that measurement reform has repeated, and is also why Brain Capital Management (2026e) refused aggregation into a single score. Measurement of a state's Λ remains, in this paper, a sketch of a design. Implementation is referred to the research agenda of Section 21 (forward reference). 697 17.10 The Institutional Time Constant — Governance Design at Layer Zero The four subsections beginning here treat four topics connected to the subject of this section. They are arranged in order of distance from evidence — Proposition 26 in this subsection and Proposition 27 in the next are presented as propositions equipped with falsification conditions; the rescarcification of the human in 17.12 is presented as a corollary of the argument about the capacity to define; cognitive sovereignty in 17.13 as a limited treatment accompanied by a referral to Layer Two; and the Compute-Dollar in 17.14 as a speculative suggestion. The arrangement itself indicates the weight with which the reader should receive each topic. Section 9 formalized, as Definition 9 (the half-life of the verification anchor), that the physical correlates on which the verification machinery of critical-tier governance may rely — compute, electricity, and facilities — are not static anchors. Because the compute required to attain any given level of capability decreases with a short half-life, fixed thresholds based on quantities of computation lose effectiveness within a few years, and critical-tier governance is sustained only once continuous downward revision of thresholds is built into institutions (Proposition 9). Section 11 noted that an isomorphic difficulty appears in the item criteria of dual-use control (11.8.4) and in the conformity assessment of trust infrastructure (11.3.5), and referred the formalization of the general form to this section. This subsection supplies it. Proposition 26 (Institutional Time Constant) The effectiveness of governance depends on the ratio of the time an institution requires to make a decision to the time the capability under control requires to change substantively. In fields where the former exceeds the latter, rules with fixed content are already obsolete at the moment of enactment, and governance based on static rules fails systematically. What can retain effectiveness in this field is limited to rules that prescribe a procedure of revision rather than content — a structure in which thresholds, technical annexes, and criteria of conformity can be updated by a subordinate procedure not requiring amendment of a treaty. This is the general form of the half-life of the verification anchor (Definition 9, Proposition 9). Falsification condition The observable quantity is the ratio of the time an institution requires for decision to the time the capability under control requires to change (hereafter the time-constant ratio). If, in fields where the time-constant ratio exceeds one, cases are systematically observed in which rules with fixed content maintain effective control, this proposition is rejected. It is likewise rejected if rules with a builtin procedure of revision prove no more effective than rules without one. The time-constant ratio is measured by contrasting the actual period from the drafting of a rule to its entry into force with the actual period required for a significant change in indicators of capability in the field concerned. 698 The numerator and denominator of the ratio should be fixed. The numerator is the time an institution requires for decision, the time required for the whole process from agenda-setting through drafting, deliberation, adoption, and entry into force until enforcement actually begins. Enforcement rather than adoption is taken as the end point because it is at the stage of enforcement that a rule with content captures its object. The denominator is the time required for capability to change, the time required for the object to change to the point of falling outside the technical description the rule names. Both are observable quantities — the numerator can be measured as elapsed months from the public records of legislation and administration, and the denominator can be estimated from time series of performance indicators in the field concerned. Proposition 26 therefore has a form that can be tested after measuring the value of the ratio itself field by field. This matters. The statement that institutions cannot keep pace with technology is in most cases rhetoric; it becomes a falsifiable claim only once a form is given that measures separately the two quantities constituting the ratio. What happens in fields where the ratio exceeds one must be stated precisely. What happens is not the lapse of the rule. The rule remains formally valid and fails to capture its object. A static rule designates its object by "the technical description as at the time of enactment." If the description moves, the rule's designated object falls outside what ought in fact to be regulated, while the rule itself continues validly in force, and the machinery of enforcement, its budget, and its reporting obligations remain. Here appears a structure isomorphic with the hollowing described in 17.4.5 — because the form is preserved, the failure is not made visible. When a failure of governance takes not the form of "the rule is not being observed" but the form of "the rule is being observed but what ought to be regulated is not there," the failure does not appear in enforcement statistics. When Proposition 26 states that governance "fails systematically," it refers not to individual rules being poorly made but to the structural futility of the form of the static rule in the field concerned. There are only two responses to this structure. The first is to lengthen the denominator, that is, to slow the change of capability itself. The range within which this response is feasible within this paper's framework is narrow — those able to discipline the advance of capability are limited to the small number of agents holding the physical correlates identified by Proposition 9, and moreover, as Proposition 16 (Section 15) states, a rise in the level of capability generates pressure moving the logic of allocation toward security, so that agreement on delay collides at the same time with the incentives of competition. The second is to shorten the numerator, and this is the direction indicated by the second limb of Proposition 26. Shortening the numerator does not, however, mean conducting deliberation hastily. It means decomposing a rule into two layers, placing purpose, powers, procedure, and the conditions triggering revision in the upper layer and thresholds, technical annexes, and criteria of conformity in the lower, and then making the updating of the lower layer possible without passing through the upper legislative process — a rule that prescribes a procedure of revision rather than content refers to this structure. Existing institutional forms have counterparts: the technical annex method in treaties, delegated 699 legislation, and the reference method for standards (a structure in which the body of a rule sets requirements abstractly while the concrete level of requirement is carried by referenced standards). The relation between standardization requests and harmonized standards recorded by Section 11 as an institutional fact, and the revision of performance thresholds in export controls, may both be read as settings in which this two-layer structure is actually at work or is required to work. The price must be made explicit. Building in a procedure of revision weakens the predictability of the norm and legal stability. Those addressed by the rule are placed in a condition in which the level of requirement they must satisfy may be altered by a subordinate procedure, and lose the basis for long-term investment decisions. Further, the removal of the power of revision from the upper legislative process thins the channels of democratic control. The two-layer structure therefore does not solve the problem of time constants; it moves where the problem lies. The question "what shall be prescribed?" is replaced by the question "who may revise it, and by what procedure?", and the latter becomes the new point of contention. This paper does not present this replacement as progress. What it presents is the structure whereby, in fields where the ratio exceeds one, answering the former question does not yield effectiveness, and the consequence that answering the latter is therefore unavoidable. The substance of design moves to the design of the procedure of revision — objectification of the conditions of trigger, channels for objecting to a revision, and the frequency of revision and transitional measures. That Proposition 26 is the general form of Definition 9 and Proposition 9 should be confirmed. Definition 9 is the case in which the denominator is specified with great concreteness as "the half-life of the compute required to attain a particular level of capability." Proposition 26 replaces that denominator with "the time the capability under control requires to change substantively" in general. The conclusion Section 9 derived for criticaltier governance — that it is sustained only once continuous downward revision of thresholds is built into institutions — is therefore reread as one application of Proposition 26. This rereading has a substantive implication. The difficulty of critical-tier governance is not a difficulty peculiar to C3, an unrealized field, but the most extreme appearance of a difficulty common to every field in which a fast-changing object is to be regulated by static rules. Even in a world where C3 does not arrive (S3 of Definition 13), Proposition 26 continues to operate in export controls, conformity assessment, professional regulation, and data protection alike. The implications for governance design at Layer Zero are three. First, differentiation by field. Since the ratio — the time required for decision divided by the time required for capability to change — differs by field, a uniform design is erroneous. In fields where the denominator is long, such as the basic principles of rules on the allocation of responsibility, rules with fixed content are appropriate, and building in a procedure of revision brings only the price of impaired predictability. In fields where the denominator is short, such as performance thresholds and technical specifications, only procedural rules can be effective. The three elements of trust infrastructure in Proposition 25 (Section 11) are a 700

good example of this differentiation — element (i), rules of responsibility allocation, has a long denominator, whereas element (ii), conformity assessment, has a short one. Building trust infrastructure therefore does not mean arranging the three elements in the same form but selecting a different form of rule for each element. Second, the measurement of the ratio is itself a state capability. A state that does not measure how long its own institutions require for decision in each field cannot identify in which fields static rules are being futile. This is isomorphic with Section 5's positioning of the observation of the tier structure as a state capability. Third, the ratio may be a candidate leading indicator (Definition 14). A lengthening of the time required for decision, or a shortening of the time required for capability to change, is in either case observed in advance of a decline in the effectiveness of static rules in the field concerned. Whether this indicator satisfies all three conditions of Definition 14 — repeated observability, discriminating power among scenarios, and precedence — requires verification. This paper does no more than record it as a candidate, and selection follows the framework of Section 16. An evidence grade is attached. The mechanism by which the ratio governs effectiveness is ○ supported by evidence — the obsolescence of static rules in individual fields has been observed as an institutional fact for both export controls and conformity assessment (Section 11). On the other hand, the formulation placing the threshold of the ratio at one is an analytical device and not a value calibrated empirically, and the second-limb claim that "rules with a built-in procedure of revision are more effective" remains △ contested, in that no systematic comparison taking the form of the rule as the explanatory variable has been carried out. That the second sentence of the falsification condition makes this second limb independently rejectable is intended to institutionalize the fact that the evidence grades of the two claims differ. 17.11 The Relative Scarcification of Authentic Data — Rereading the First Indicator of Proposition 4 Exclusive data endowment, the first indicator of Proposition 4 (Section 7), has thus far been treated as "holding data that others do not hold." The rise in the proportion of public information space occupied by the outputs of generative models changes the content of this indicator. This subsection formalizes that change. First, a definition for the purpose of distinction is laid down. Definition 16 (Authentic Data) Authentic data denotes data generated directly from human action or a physical process, whose provenance is verifiable. It is distinguished from data derived from the outputs of generative models (synthetic data). The scarcity of authentic data is determined not by the total volume of what is generated but by the verifiability of provenance. 701 The last sentence of Definition 16 governs the whole of this subsection's argument. The source of scarcity is not volume. Neither human action nor physical processes have diminished, nor has the volume of data they generate. What is becoming scarce is the condition of being able to show, of some data, that "this was generated directly from human action or a physical process." If this distinction is dropped, the proposition below will be read as the mistaken claim that "data of human origin is decreasing." A technical note. As technical infrastructure supporting the "condition of being able to show," specifications have already been drawn up that record the provenance of content and make alterations to the history of creation and editing detectable by means of signatures (Coalition for Content Provenance and Authenticity, 2024). The verifiability of provenance is thus not an impossibility in principle but a matter of a property that may be secured by cryptographic signatures and provenance records. Its diffusion and effectiveness are, however, conditional, and this point is discussed below in relation to the second sentence of the falsification condition. Proposition 27 (Relative Scarcification of Authentic Data) As the proportion of public information space occupied by the outputs of generative models rises, the marginal value of authentic data whose provenance is verifiable (Definition 16) rises. This arises not from a decrease in the absolute volume of authentic data but from the scarcification of the verifiability of provenance. Accordingly, an agent that holds within its operations a point of contact with human practice and with physical processes, and can prove the provenance of the data generated there, stands in a structurally advantageous position with respect to the exclusive data endowment of Proposition 4. Falsification condition If, notwithstanding a rise in the proportion of generated outputs, it is observed that the gap in price and terms of use between data whose provenance is verifiable and data whose provenance is not does not widen, this proposition is rejected. If a technology making verification of provenance possible universally and at low cost becomes widespread, the premise of scarcity is lost. The mechanism has two stages. The first stage is admixture. As the proportion of generated outputs admixed into data collected indiscriminately from public information space rises, the provenance of the collected data set becomes, as a set, unknown. This is because the cost of adjudicating provenance for each item of data exceeds the cost of collection. The second stage is discounting. Data of unknown provenance is discounted in two uses. The first use is its value as training material, where the degradation of self-referential learning is at issue. The second use is its value as evidence, and this has the wider reach in the context of this paper — in audit, adjudication, insurance, regulation, and research alike, data whose provenance cannot be shown does not support an assertion of fact. Taking the two stages together, the marginal value of data whose provenance can be proved rises in relative terms. 702 As to the first use, there is a body of research on the consequences of recursive training on generated data. Shumailov, Shumaylov, Zhao, Papernot, Anderson, & Gal (2024) reported a phenomenon in which, in a replacement-type loop that trains each generation on the outputs of the preceding one, the tails of the distribution are lost and generation converges toward the principal modes of the distribution (Nature, 631(8022), 755-759; note that an author correction to this paper was published in March 2025). Alemohammad et al. (2024) showed that in self-consuming loops of generative models, unless a sufficient quantity of new real data is supplied to each generation, either quality (precision) or diversity (recall) declines progressively, and called this model autophagy disorder (MAD). Gerstgrasser et al. (2024), on the other hand, showed that where real data is accumulated alongside synthetic data rather than replaced by it, collapse is not inevitable. The relation among these three is organized in accordance with the discipline of evidence grades. That degradation occurs in replacement-type loops stands at the level of ○ supported by evidence, in that multiple independent studies report it under different settings. By contrast, whether the actual practice of data collection and training is closer to the replacement type or the accumulation type, and what the proportion of generated outputs in public information space actually is, are both △ contested, and no reliable estimate exists as at the time of writing. This paper therefore makes no claim that "model collapse is in progress." What Proposition 27 uses is only the far weaker implication common to this body of research — the implication that the marginal value of real data remains positive. What should be noted here is that the result of Gerstgrasser et al. does not weaken Proposition 27 but rather supports it. The conclusion that collapse is avoidable is conditioned on "continuing to retain real data," and this is nothing other than a reconfirmation, from the side of the condition, that the marginal value of real data is positive. Whether collapse is inevitable or avoidable, real data is required in either case. Proposition 27 relies on this point alone and does not depend on which side of the collapse controversy is correct. Making this manner of reliance explicit is this paper's discipline in using a contested literature. Next, the meaning of the second sentence of the falsification condition — if verification of provenance becomes possible universally and at low cost, the premise of scarcity is lost — should be confirmed. Proposition 27 is a proposition conditioned on technology and institutions and not a claim about a permanent structure. Frameworks proving provenance by signatures of history already exist (Coalition for Content Provenance and Authenticity, 2024). For such a framework to dissolve the premise of scarcity, however, three conditions are required: (i) that the affixing of signatures is universal on the generating and recording sides, (ii) that signatures are not stripped in the course of processing and redistribution, and (iii) that verification is low in cost. As at the time of writing none of the three conditions is satisfied — the affixing of signatures depends on voluntary action, stripping is easy, and the infrastructure of verification is in the course of diffusion. Proposition 27 is therefore a proposition holding under present conditions and is rejected if the conditions change. This paper presents this time-limited character not as a defect but as an explicit statement of the proposition's range of application. 703 The implication at the level of the state may now be drawn. What the second limb of Proposition 27 points to is an agent that holds a point of contact with human practice and physical processes within its operations. The qualification "within its operations" is essential: to hold a point of contact means not that records of the process concerned can be obtained incidentally, but that one is in a position to prove provenance because one operates that process oneself. Economies that satisfy this condition are those holding domestically the operation of manufacturing, maintenance, medicine, logistics, agriculture, forestry and fisheries, construction, energy, and public infrastructure. From this a structural consequence follows — the first indicator of Proposition 4 (exclusive data endowment) and the second (physical-interface intensity) arise from the same root. To hold a physical interface is itself to hold a source of data whose provenance can be proved, and the two indicators are not independent assets but two aspects of a single asset. This rereading is a refinement of Section 10's parallel treatment of the four indicators as conditions for M2×C2, and gives an additional ground to the M2′ conception of Section 18 — moving the locus of transformation value to manufacturing, robotics, and field data. M2′ is not an expression of industrial preference; under Proposition 27 it is the choice of retaining domestically the apparatus that generates data whose provenance can be proved. The discussion of this subsection must here be connected with that of 17.4. Proposition 24 stated that national brain capital wears away to the degree that the repetition of practice is substituted for, and that the information content of the exclusive data that is its trace thins. Proposition 27 states that the same points of contact with practice carry a higher marginal value than before in a phase where the proportion of generated outputs is rising. Superimposing the two, the following structure appears — points of contact with practice may have the very repetition that generates their value substituted for, in the phase in which that value is rising. The self-erosion described by Proposition 24 may proceed simultaneously with the scarcification described by Proposition 27, and moreover the two make each other harder to see. The volume of data keeps increasing (records increase the more they are automated), and that increase in volume may be read as evidence that the exclusive data endowment is thickening; but what is increasing is records of ratification, not records of independent judgment. This section places Propositions 24 and 27 adjacent to each other in order to make this overlap visible. The two propositions are independently verifiable, but in policy they constitute a single design problem — retaining the practices that generate data whose provenance can be proved, in a form in which the repetition of those practices is not substituted for. The policy implication may be stated as a shift in the focus of data policy. It is a shift from securing volume — how much data can be accumulated — to securing flows whose provenance can be proved — from which processes, with what proof, data is generated continuously. This shift widens the object of data policy from the sites of accumulation (data centres, databases) to the sites of generation (operations in the field and the design of records). This paper does not, however, make proposals on concrete institutional design — the mandating of provenance signatures, recording requirements in the public sector, 704 or the design of sectoral data spaces. All of these face the problem of time constants identified by Proposition 26 and must be designed at the level of the procedure of revision rather than of content. A sketch of the design is referred to the research agenda of Section 21 (forward reference). 17.12 The Rescarcification of the Human — As a Corollary of the Argument on Value-Definition Capability This subsection records one short topic as a corollary of the argument about value-definition capability (Definition 12). The claim is this: in a world where the marginal cost of intellectual production falls, the relative value of goods that derive from human beings and of goods requiring physical presence rises. This claim is not advanced as a proposition in this paper. The reason is given at the close of the subsection. First, why this claim is a corollary of the argument about the capacity to define. Proposition 17 stated that as capability descends to C1, the competitive advantage of efficiency gains diminishes through the fall in imitation costs, and the residual that makes a difference shifts to "the capability to select and realize what is to be aimed at." Seen from the side of goods, this structure yields the following: a good whose cost of replication approaches zero makes no difference by being suppliable. What makes a difference is a good that is not replicated. By the same logic through which the capacity to define is identified as a residual, non-replicability is identified as a residual of value. That is, if value-definition capability is "the residual on the side of capability," then goods deriving from human beings and requiring physical presence are "the residual on the side of goods." The two are consequences derived, respectively, for the capability of agents and for the properties of goods, from the single premise of a fall in the cost of replication. Next, that this claim has the same structure as Proposition 27. In Proposition 27 what was becoming scarce was not the volume of authentic data but the property of being able to show provenance. What is rising in this subsection is likewise not the volume of experiences deriving from human beings — conversation face to face, live performance, handwork, and going to a place in person have not diminished in absolute volume. What is rising is the relative price of the property that what was done was actually done by a human being and is not substitutable. The two topics are two appearances of one and the same structure — a fall in the cost of replication makes the very property of not being replicated an object of pricing. On the side of data, that property appears as the verifiability of provenance. On the side of experience, it appears as non-substitutability. In both cases scarcity arises not from absolute volume but from being able to show a property. That this unified explanation holds is a mark that the two topics are not separate intuitions but corollaries of a single structure. The observable form should be specified. If this claim has empirical content, it should appear in relative prices — the movement of relative prices between goods requiring faceto- face presence, live performance, handwork, or being on site and goods that can be rep‐ 705 licated, and the degree to which an indication that "a human being did this" is reflected in price. All of these are in principle measurable, but measurement faces two difficulties. First, many of these goods do not constitute independent items in the classifications of price indices, and their correspondence with replicable substitutes is not defined statistically. Second, since changes in relative prices may also arise from supply-side factors (stagnation of productivity in the sector concerned), additional assumptions are required to discriminate them from rescarcification on the demand side — this is the classical structure of cost disease, and the possibility that this subsection's claim is no more than a redescription of cost disease cannot be excluded. Two disciplines are confirmed. First, this paper makes no claim of ethical superiority for what derives from human beings. The word "the human" readily carries normative overtones, but this subsection's claim is limited to an empirical claim about relative prices. The claim that something is good because a human being did it and the claim that something is expensive because a human being's having done it is scarce are statements of entirely different kinds. Second, this subsection's implication for Layer Zero is limited. As a variable of state strategy it bears on the relative position of sectors such as tourism, culture, skills, performance, and education, but it does not rewrite this paper's central instruments — the nine cells (Definition 3), geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15), and the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6). This subsection is placed here in order to record that the structure of Propositions 17 and 27 also holds on the side of goods, not in order to introduce a new strategic variable. The evidence grade is ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (speculative). The rise in relative prices remains at the level of anecdotal observation, and verification with systematic price data has not been carried out. Discrimination from cost disease has not been begun. This paper therefore does not advance this as a proposition and does no more than record it as a corollary of the argument about the capacity to define. The criterion for the judgment not to advance it as a proposition is the same criterion this paper applies throughout — a claim for which a falsification condition cannot be specified by concrete observable quantities is not given the form of a proposition (the same criterion as in the declaration of explicit exclusions in Section 20). For this subsection's claim, a falsification condition can be written in the form "rejected if the gap in relative prices does not widen," but since the statistics constituting those relative prices do not exist, the specification misses its mark. Should this circumstance improve, this subsection's claim could be formalized in the same form as Proposition 27. 17.13 Cognitive Sovereignty — A Treatment Limited to the Standpoint of Layer Zero As AI mediates the intake of information, learning, and decision-making, the process by which what one knows and what one wants is formed comes to depend on the design of the mediating system — this paper calls this topic cognitive sovereignty. This subsection treats it only in a limited way. The content of the limitation is declared first. 706 Within this series, cognitive sovereignty is a subject of Layer Two. Self-Defined Society (Kadowaki, 2026f) is a paper built around the institutional footing that protects authorship over value definition and the making of decisions, and the influence of mediating systems on self-definition, together with institutional responses to it, are central objects of that paper. This paper is a paper of Layer Zero and does not treat this subject frontally. In addition, as to "the post-truth condition and the redesign of democracy" and "algorithmic consensus formation," which lie in the vicinity of this topic, this paper declares an explicit exclusion in Section 20 — they are independent and vast fields of research, and require a unit of analysis different from this paper's (national models of value generation). What this subsection treats is therefore only the two points of this topic that connect to instruments this paper already possesses. The first is an implication for the stratification of access (Proposition 12). Proposition 12 stated that the rationing of Tier C2 capability by price, capacity, and permission forms a new axis of inequality. What was at issue there was a quantitative disparity — the presence and level of access. What the topic of cognitive sovereignty adds is a qualitative difference. That is, even at the same level of access, the composition of the information taken in and of the options presented differs according to the design of the system through which access passes. This difference may operate independently of any of the four factors specified by Proposition 12's falsification condition (educational attainment, mother tongue, access to electricity, and jurisdiction). To the design of a regime of access rights (17.8), therefore, an item is added alongside the level of the floor: the diversity of the systems through which access passes. This item has the same structure as the argument about the independence of channels stated in 17.4.3 — the proposition that if all auditors share summarization and prior filtering by the same AI the decorrelation of verification disappears (2026h, 2026i) holds isomorphically for the information environment of citizens. The same observable quantity by which the structure of AI outage (Proposition 7, Section 13) made the supplier correlation of operational and oversight systems a problem — supplier concentration — is here reread as an indicator of the homogeneity of the information environment. This is the only substantive point at which the topic of cognitive sovereignty connects to this paper's instruments. That is, supplier concentration (the observable quantity of Proposition 2, Section 5) is not only an indicator of economic dependence but also an indicator of the independence of judgment. The second is an implication for national brain capital (Definition 11). The path of wearing away described by Proposition 24 was stated for fields of expert judgment. The same mechanism — the wearing away of capability through the substitution of the repetition of practice — may operate for general judgment outside a field of expertise as well. A boundary must, however, be made explicit here. National brain capital denotes by definition the capabilities bearing on the defensibility of the Transformation Model, that is, the four components of tacit knowledge of the field, judgment embedded in language and culture, trust in institutions, and the capacity for audit based on long domain experience. Effects on general judgment capability lie outside Definition 11. The substance of making this boundary explicit lies in preventing unlimited extension of the concept — if the 707 concept of national brain capital were extended to "the cognitive capability of the population in general," it would become a concept that explains anything, and the falsification conditions of Propositions 18 and 24 would lose their meaning. This paper does not extend it. The discipline of rhetoric is made explicit. This subsection uses no vocabulary of exaggeration or of the arousal of fear. The topic of cognitive sovereignty is by its nature a field in which unverified claims are easily stated in strong terms, and such exposition would be incompatible with the discipline of evidence in the rest of this paper. The observable range is narrow. What can at present be observed repeatedly from public information extends only to (a) the proportion of mediation in the intake of information and (b) the supplier concentration of mediating systems. As to (c), the divergence of judgment according to the presence or absence of mediation, this can be measured only in experimental settings, and no aggregation at the level of the state exists. Identification of causation is more difficult still — since the choice of a mediating system itself depends on existing preferences, separating selection effects from treatment effects requires an identification strategy beyond the range this paper can handle. The evidence grade is accordingly △ contested, and this paper advances no proposition on this topic. Its implication for Layer Zero is exhausted by the single point of the dual reading of supplier concentration stated above. Full development is referred to the paper of Layer Two (2026f) and to research subsequent to it (forward reference). The significance of placing this subsection lies not in treating the topic but in making explicit where in this series the topic is treated, and declaring that it lies outside the scope of this paper. As Section 20 states, declaring the range not treated strengthens the claims about the range treated. 17.14 The Compute-Dollar — A Speculative Suggestion in the Connection to RCap The evidence grade of this subsection is ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (speculative). This subsection advances no proposition and draws no conclusion. What it does is solely to sort, by putting it to Proposition 1 (the discipline of analogy, Section 3), one association that is frequently raised — that rights of access to compute and electricity may become linked with a measure of value or a settlement platform. This paper makes no claim whatever as a theory of currency. Why treat it at all? This paper treats AI at Layer Zero as a general-purpose input (Definition 1), uses the analogy with oil in a partitioned manner (Proposition 1), and connects with the layer of capital allocation (2026g). For a reader who sets these three side by side, it is a natural association to think that something corresponding to the linkage of oil and the dollar may hold for AI as well. If left untreated, readers will make the connection themselves and derive conclusions this paper does not support. To treat and to sort is the discipline. This rests on the same logic as the declaration of explicit exclusions in 708 Section 20 — to state the reason for not treating something is not the same as not treating it. First, the observable range is fixed. RCap (Kadowaki, 2026g) argued that the frontier of pricing lies in generative capability Λ. In phases where access to compute is the rate-limiting factor in the realization of Λ, the right of access itself takes on a character close to a claim on future value creation. This character already appears in the form of financial contracts — long-term reservation contracts for computing capacity, power purchase agreements, prepayment for the use of compute, and financing backed by these. That these possess the character of assets and may be treated as objects of collateral and credit stands at the level of observed fact (○ supported by evidence). The constraints of electricity and siting discussed in Section 13 and the physical chokepoints discussed in Section 11 are the physical conditions governing the value of this asset. Thus far the matter lies within this paper's framework. The speculative leap arises at the step from here to "compute becomes a measure of value or a settlement platform." This leap is put to the discipline of analogy of Proposition 1 — sorting the properties that transfer from those that do not, and making the latter explicit. As to the linkage of oil and the dollar that serves as the object of comparison, the level of institutional fact must first be fixed. What is observed is that the currency of denomination for international transactions in oil was principally the dollar, and that the current account surpluses of oil-producing states were recycled into dollar-denominated assets (○ supported by evidence). On the other hand, accounts that attribute this linkage to a particular bilateral agreement and hold that the agreement had a legal term are not supported by the public record and contain much that is apocryphal (△ contested). This paper does not enter into the identification of this causation. What it extracts is only the structural side of the question of what was a necessary condition in the phase in which the linkage held. Three properties transfer. First, the character of a basic input — that the good in question enters the production functions of a wide range of sectors of the economy. This is the very property Definition 1 laid down for a general-purpose input, and it holds for AI as well (Section 13). Second, concentration of supply — that production is skewed toward a small number of suppliers and jurisdictions. This too holds (Sections 5 and 8). Third, the repetition of large transactions — that the repetition of transactions of great magnitude creates room for conventions of denomination to form. For long-term contracts for computing capacity this condition is partly coming to hold. Four properties do not transfer. First, homogeneity and a unit of trade. Oil is standardized by grade and has the barrel as a unit of trade, upon which futures markets were established. Compute is non-homogeneous — with the generation of semiconductors, the bandwidth of interconnects, the quality and price of electricity, siting, the assured level of availability, and when it can be used, the same "compute" becomes a different good. Moreover its quality becomes obsolete rapidly (Frontier Descent, Section 5). The difficulty 709 of forming a standardized unit of trade is a decisive obstacle to the function of a measure of value — a measure requires that what is measured not move by reason of the measure's own change. Second, storability. Oil can be stored. Compute cannot be stored — capacity is a flow tied to time, and time not used disappears. The asymmetry of stockpiling (Proposition 8, Section 13) operates here as well. The storing of value is one of the three functions of currency, and a good that cannot be stored cannot directly discharge that function. Third, the non-establishment of a single benchmark price. For oil a worldwide benchmark price was established. The price of compute differs greatly by form of contract, priority, siting, and supplier, and forms no single benchmark. The absence of a benchmark price means the absence of the premise on which conventions of denomination form. Fourth, the direction of the chain of demand. The mechanism of the linkage of oil and the dollar depended on a chain of demand in which "dollars are needed in order to buy oil." The procurement of compute is completed in existing major currencies and requires no new unit of account. A unit that is not required does not come into being. Three of the four — the unit of trade, storability, and the benchmark price — are core conditions for the functions of a measure of value and a settlement platform. Under the discipline laid down by Proposition 1, an analogy in which core conditions do not transfer may function as rhetoric but must not be used as an instrument of analysis. This paper therefore does not advance the Compute-Dollar as a proposition. As a residue of the sorting, one weaker suggestion remains. The degree to which rights of access to compute and electricity are treated as objects of collateral and credit is observable and may rise. This is an argument about an asset class, not about a measure of value. Distinguishing the former from the latter has been the principal work of this subsection — the former is a claim of currency theory, and this paper makes none. The latter is an observable quantity that may be recorded as a candidate leading indicator (Definition 14) for Section 16 — the degree to which long-term contracts for computing capacity are used as backing for financial transactions may be expected to move consistently with the progress of S1 (fragmentation). Whether this observable quantity satisfies the three conditions of Definition 14 has not, however, been sorted. To repeat in closing. The foregoing extends no further than a suggestion, and this paper does not advance it as a proposition. The evidence grade is ▽. The significance of this subsection lies not in presenting an association but in showing what does not survive when the association is put to the discipline. This paper's instruments — the nine cells, leverage, and the guarantee level — do not require this topic. 17.15 Summary — The Four Layers Close The points of this section are as follows. First, Layer Zero distributes the operating conditions of the three lower layers through three channels (Proposition 11): to capital, the range of future value that can be priced; to society, the material conditions of self-defini‐

tion; and to firms, the outer perimeter of the set of redefinition options. What is transmitted is not outcomes but a range of possibility, and the channels form a circulation together with construction in the reverse direction — capital allocation and the transformation assets of firms sustaining the state's position. Second, the further the diffusion of AI capability proceeds, the more the residual that generates differences between states and between firms shifts from efficiency to definition (Proposition 17). Because the advantage of efficiency gains using capability that has descended to C1 dissipates with the fall in imitation costs, the difference shifts from "how cheaply and quickly a given end is achieved" to "the capability to select and realize what is to be aimed at" (Definition 12). This shift is the consequence at the level of the state of Future Value Theory (2026a), and its direct policy implication is that to design AI policy as efficiency policy is a systematic error. Value-definition capability is, however, at present a concept identified as a residual, its proxy indicators are provisional, and its measurement framework is not in place — this limitation is checked by the two-stage structure of Proposition 17's falsification condition, but it is not dissolved. Third, the substrate of the defensibility of the Transformation Model is national brain capital (Definition 11 and Proposition 18, both in Section 10). AI capability can be imported, but tacit knowledge of the field, judgment embedded in language and culture, trust in institutions, and the capacity for audit based on long domain experience cannot. Brain Capital Management (2026e) and Ageless Management (2026i), built by the series at the level of the firm, become at Layer Zero variables of state strategy, and their attrition — the exit of the skilled layer, the rupture of skill transmission, and the degradation of institutional trust — constitutes a path of descent in cell position (Proposition 15, Section 15) that issues no warning. Here the series' argument about the human substrate and the argument about state strategy become one theory. Fourth, the four layers run through on a single axis as different applications of one and the same operation, "definition," but running through is not determination. Upper layers supply the outer perimeter of the possibilities of lower layers and the vocabulary; lower layers supply the bearers of the definitions of upper layers and the organs of realization — neither determines the other's behaviour. The failure mode peculiar to the system is therefore redefinition at one layer only, and the four-layer architecture is a design problem completed by the optimization of no single layer. Fifth, the state is at once the subject that distributes and a subject of redefinition, and the five dimensions of enterprise redefinition — purpose, boundary, time, agency, and measurement — have concrete counterparts at the level of the state (Proposition 14, Table 9). The substance of the purpose dimension is value-definition capability, and the remaining four dimensions are its routes of translation. Not choosing a position is itself a choice, and it is the outsourcing of choice. And at the deepest point of these connections lies the reversal of measurement — the value of a state lies not in the sum of past GDP but in the capability to create future value, and of its six elements half lack a measurement frame‐ 711 work. Here the foundational axiom of the series (2026a) connects with this paper's empirical agenda (Section 21). Sixth, the wearing away of national brain capital has a self-reinforcing path requiring no exogenous change of conditions (Proposition 24). The formation of national brain capital requires the repetition of practice; wearing away occurs to the degree that dependence on imported cognitive capability substitutes for that repetition; and the wearing away reduces the four indicators of Proposition 4 — in particular exclusive data endowment and physical-interface intensity — and lowers the defensibility of the Transformation Model. Hence a strategy that deepens utilization while lacking transformation capability causes, through the deepening of utilization itself, the loss of the substrate for ascent. Its coexistence with Proposition 5 (the compounding of utilization) creates the practical difficulty of this proposition — when the flow of the current period improves while the stock of the capacity to move cell is impaired, and only the flow is measured, policy evaluation errs precisely when it is succeeding. Wearing away is not, however, an automatic consequence. The opposing channels of scaffolding and of a raising of the point of attainment exist, and design rather than the quantity of adoption determines the sign. The evidence grade of this proposition is △, and this paper presents it as a proposition to be verified. Seventh, the effectiveness of governance depends on the ratio of the time an institution requires for decision to the time capability requires to change; in fields where the former exceeds the latter, rules with fixed content are obsolete at the moment of enactment, so that what can retain effectiveness is limited to rules prescribing a procedure of revision rather than content (Proposition 26). This is the general form of the conclusion Section 9 derived for critical-tier governance as the half-life of the verification anchor (Definition 9, Proposition 9), and it operates isomorphically in export controls, conformity assessment, and professional regulation alike. The two-layer structure does not solve the problem of time constants but moves the question "what shall be prescribed?" to the question "who may revise it, and by what procedure?" — the substance of governance design at Layer Zero lies on the side of the question so moved. Eighth, the rise in the proportion of public information space occupied by the outputs of generative models raises the marginal value of authentic data whose provenance is verifiable (Definition 16, Proposition 27). What is becoming scarce is not volume but the property of being able to show provenance. From this follows the rereading that the first indicator of Proposition 4 (exclusive data endowment) and the second (physical-interface intensity) arise from the same root, and the M2′ conception is reformulated as the choice of retaining domestically the apparatus that generates data whose provenance can be proved. Superimposing Propositions 24 and 27, one structure appears — points of contact with practice may have the very repetition that generates their value substituted for, in the phase in which that value is rising. The two are independently verifiable, but in policy they constitute a single design problem. Ninth, this section recorded three topics as limited treatments. The rescarcification of the human is a corollary of the argument about the capacity to define, having the same struc‐ 712 ture as Proposition 27 in that a fall in the cost of replication makes the very property of not being replicated an object of pricing; but for want of measurement it cannot be advanced as a proposition (▽). Cognitive sovereignty is in this series a subject of Layer Two (2026f), and this paper treated it only in the limited standpoint of Layer Zero — the single point that supplier concentration is at once an indicator of economic dependence and an indicator of the independence of judgment (△). The Compute-Dollar is not advanced as a proposition, because when put to the discipline of analogy of Proposition 1 the core conditions of the unit of trade, storability, and the benchmark price do not transfer (▽). The arrangement of the three topics is in order of distance from evidence, and the arrangement itself indicates the weight with which the reader should receive each. Tenth, what these additions have given this section should be stated frankly. The addition of Propositions 24, 26, and 27 has widened the explanatory range of this section and at the same time widened the distance from evidence. The second limbs of Propositions 24 and 26 are △, and Proposition 27 is a time-limited proposition conditioned on technology and institutions. To see only the widening of range and not the widening of distance is the misreading most readily made by the readers of this section. All three propositions are equipped with falsification conditions specified by concrete observable quantities, and to that extent stand under the same discipline as the other propositions of this paper; but standing under the discipline is not being verified. The map of verification is supplied by Section 21 (Table 10). What the addition of Layer Zero to a system that was complete with three layers gives to the system as a whole — this question is discussed in the conclusion (Section 21). Before that, this paper applies the framework to Japan, its own position of observation (Section 18), and then examines the objections that may be directed at this paper — in particular the fragility of measurement of the two mediating variables introduced by this section, and the structural conflict of interest involved in a practitioner recommending policies that correspond to his own business opportunities (Section 20). 713 18. Case Study: Japan — Generalization to Middle Powers This section applies the nine-cell theory and the Layer Zero framework built up in Sections 6 through 17 to a single state, Japan. The core of the application lies in two sections. Section 10 analysed statically the conditions under which the M2×C2 cell (the position that procures capability at the frontier tier and adds value added by transformation) subsists, and Section 15 [A] identified that the transition of a state occupying that position branches into two paths, ascent and fall, and specified the four variables that decide the branch. This section is the section that applies these two to the particular facts of a single state, Japan. The general theory of the cell is in Section 10 and the general theory of transition in Section 15, and this section does not repeat them. The verbatim texts of Definition 11 (national brain capital), Proposition 15 (asymmetry of cell transition), Proposition 18 (the non-replicability of national brain capital) and Proposition 19 (conditions for a third pole) are likewise in Sections 10 and 15 respectively, so that this section confines itself to references to them. What this section undertakes is to settle what those general propositions denote in Japan — what can be said, and what cannot be said, upon Japan's verified figures. The order is as follows. First, the historical fact that Japan has already once undergone a national redefinition occasioned by an external resource shock — the oil shock of 1973 and the structural transformation that followed — is confirmed with verifiable figures (Section 18.2). Second, Japan's present position with respect to AI, the new strategic general- purpose resource, is settled empirically through four series: the balance of payments, rates of adoption, computing infrastructure, and electricity (Section 18.3). Third, the correspondence between "the processing trade of the Shōwa era (crude oil → heavy and chemical industry and automobiles)" and "the processing trade of the Reiwa era (generalpurpose foundation models → domain-specialized AI)" is developed in the Japanese context on the basis of the decomposition into what corresponds and what does not that Section 10 performed, and both the parts that hold and the parts that do not are made explicit (Section 18.4). Fourth, what national brain capital (Definition 11) consists of in Japan is made concrete component by component, and the risk of its attrition is shown with population projections (Section 18.5). Fifth, Proposition 15 (asymmetry of cell transition) is applied to Japan's present position and the implication that, absent action, the position declines is drawn (Section 18.6). This much constitutes the analytical part of this section, and Section 18.6 is the strongest point of argument in this section. Sixth, these are brought together and Proposition 13 is presented (Section 18.7); the three elements of that portfolio — M2′, the deepening of M3, and the sovereign minimum guarantee level — are developed in turn (Sections 18.8 to 18.10), and their mutual complementarity is confirmed (Section 18.11). Seventh, this three-part set is reread as a branching analysis under the four variables of Section 15 (Section 18.12). What it means to call the present conjuncture "a response to a second oil shock" is delimited as a design problem rather than a predic‐ 714 tion (Section 18.13). Eighth, the conclusions reached about Japan are placed back under the three world scenarios of Section 16, and the part robust across scenarios is separated from the part that depends on S1 (Section 18.14). Finally, the country-independent lessons extracted from the analysis of Japan are formulated for middle powers in general (Section 18.15). Of these, the parts most directly transferable for readers in other countries are Sections 18.1 and 18.15; the analytical part placed between them is a demonstration, upon the single instance of Japan, of the procedure by which the transfer is made. 18.1 The Standing of This Section — A Case Study as an Application The standing of this section is settled at the outset. This section is not the purpose of this paper's theory but an application of it. What this paper built in Sections 4 through 17 is a set of instruments that do not specify any country: the nine cells that are the product of the three types — producing, transformation and utilization — with the three tiers of capability, the dynamics of transition between cells, the governance of the critical tier, and the movement of the residual from efficiency to definition. These instruments are designed to apply equally to every state not belonging to the two poles of the United States and China — middle powers in Europe, oil-producing states of the Gulf, industrial states of East Asia, hub states of Southeast Asia, populous states of the Global South. This section treats Japan in order to run those instruments to the end upon verifiable figures and thereby show how they work in one particular country; reaching conclusions about the country called Japan is not itself the purpose. There are three reasons for choosing Japan as the application. First, it is the country to which the author can come closest to detailed primary sources. The series this section uses — the long-run series of the share of oil in primary energy and of the share of the Middle East in crude oil imports, the halving of energy intensity, the composition of oil stockpiles by days of supply, the item-by-item composition of the digital-related balance, the international comparison of rates of AI use by individuals and firms, the amounts of subsidy to computing infrastructure case by case, and the composition of the increment in projected electricity demand — all exist as public statistics, white papers, or published materials of the competent ministries and agencies, and can be cross-checked against one another. An application of theory has meaning only where the result of the application can be supported or refuted by figures. What should come first as a criterion for selecting an application is not the importance of the country concerned but the density of the sources. A description of comparable density for another country lies outside the author's access to sources. This selection contains no claim that Japan is representative of middle powers. Second, Japan exhibits all three constraints that middle powers receive in common (Proposition 21) simultaneously and in sharp form. The energy constraint is observable at the level of the figures of the demand projection, as a structure in which the expansion of computing infrastructure is rate-limited by additions to generation and to the grid (Section 18.3.4). The data-sovereignty constraint appears in both the rate of cloud use 715 and the balance of payments, as a state in which the greater part of firms' core business data and of the processing itself is handled on the platforms of foreign suppliers (Section 18.3.1). The value-definition constraint appears as a structure in which policy evaluation of AI adoption concentrates on rates of adoption and gains in productivity, while the selection of ends itself does not enter the axis of evaluation. Countries in which the three constraints are observed simultaneously, and in mutually reinforcing form, are not numerous, so that Japan is a suitable object for observing, in a single country, how the three constraints operate throughout. Conversely, for a country in which any one of the three constraints is weak — a country where electricity is inexpensive, one with a large language area, one able to design for itself the conditions of data transfer — the description in this section does not apply as it stands. Third, Japan possesses a historical precedent of having once carried out a national response to an external resource shock. In the quarter-century following the oil shock of 1973, Japan executed a response along three series — the institutionalization of buffers, the doubling of transformation efficiency, and the transformation of industrial structure — and left the results as figures (Section 18.2). This precedent supplies, for the question of what a state may do about dependence on a strategic general-purpose resource held by outsiders, and of how long the effects of what it may do take to appear, a record of measurement rather than a thought experiment. States with a precedent of the same form are limited in number, and a conjuncture in which a problem of the same structure recurs in a country that has such a precedent carries a large quantity of information as an application of theory. The existence of a precedent does not, however, guarantee the success of a response — this section does not predict whether the same country will succeed a second time in a response of the same type. All three reasons concern sources, observability, and the character of the record; none is a claim that Japan's position is more important than that of other countries, or that Japan's choices are a model for others. The same procedure applies to any middle power. The procedure has five stages: (i) assigning one's own present position on the nine cells by means of four quantities that use no institutional variables; (ii) measuring the arrangement, in one's own country, of the four components of national brain capital (Definition 11); (iii) confirming the endowment of complementary assets (the four indicators of Proposition 4) and the order in which they are eroded; (iv) working back to the sovereign minimum guarantee level not from a level of capability but from the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability and the sensitive-processing condition (Definition 6(i-a) to (i-c)); and (v) confirming the present state, in one's own country, of the four variables that decide the branch of transition (Section 15 [A]). This paper has separated this procedure out of the main text and set it in a form that can be read independently, as Appendix D (National Diagnostic Checklist), Appendix E (The Cell-Transition Matrix and a Measurement Framework for National Brain Capital), and Appendix F (Scenario Monitoring Indicator Table). Appendix D handles (i) and (v), Appendix E handles (ii) and (iii), and Appendix F handles the review cycle for (iv) onward by means of the leading indicators of Section 16. Beginning from the appendices without reading this 716 section, and reading this section as a demonstration before proceeding to the appendices, are both intended ways of reading. The request to the reader is accordingly as follows. This section should be read not as "conclusions about Japan" but as "a demonstration of how to conduct the same analysis for one's own country." The figures this section settles for Japan — 6.7 trillion yen, 77.7%, 254 days of supply, a gap of one to two orders of magnitude in compute — do not transfer to other countries as they stand. What transfers is not the figures but the procedure: which quantities to measure, in what order to set them against one another, and where to hold a conclusion to a conditional. The value of the demonstration lies not in the correctness of the conclusion but in showing that the procedure runs to the end. Even if this section's analysis were mistaken about Japan, the theory would not be damaged provided that the procedure yields a different conclusion in another country. Conversely, if the procedure yielded the same conclusion in every country, that would be a symptom that the theory does not capture the differences between countries. In this sense, this section is not a test of the theory but an exhibition of the theory in operation. 18.2 1973 as a Precedent — An External Resource Shock and National Redefinition In fiscal 1973, the share of oil in Japan's domestic supply of primary energy was 75.5%, and the share of the Middle East within its crude oil imports reached 77.5% (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). The energy self-sufficiency ratio had fallen sharply from 58.1% in fiscal 1960 during the period of high growth, and Japan took, in the terms of this paper, an extreme form of "zero production, specialization in transformation" — a pure M2 without M1. When, following the supply disruption event of October 1973, OPEC raised the posted price of crude oil, the international price of crude rose approximately fourfold in approximately three months, and the rate of increase of consumer prices reached 11.7% in 1973 and 23.2% in 1974 (Federation of Electric Power Companies of Japan, 2023). That the real growth rate in fiscal 1974 turned negative for the first time in the postwar period is Japan's own historical demonstration of the infrastructural criticality of Definition 1(iii) — that a change in the conditions of supply degrades the output of a national economy within a short period. What matters is that Japan's response to this shock was not acquisition upstream (movement to the Resource-Producing Model). The response can be organized into three series. First, the institutionalization of buffers. The Petroleum Supply and Demand Optimization Act of 1973 established a framework for governmental intervention when supply was insufficient; the Petroleum Stockpiling Act of 1975 made private stockpiling obligatory; and national oil stockpiling began in 1978 (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). This stockpiling system has been maintained and reinforced to the present, reaching, as of the end of December 2025, a total of 254 days of supply — 146 days national, 101 days private, and 7 days of joint stockpiling with oil-producing states (214 days on the IEA basis) (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026b). In the same period internation‐ 717 ally, the IEA was established in 1974 following the crisis of 1973, and member states were placed under an obligation to hold stockpiles equivalent to at least 90 days of net imports (IEA). Second, the doubling of transformation efficiency. Through the Energy Conservation Act of 1979 (Act on the Rational Use of Energy), the Alternative Energy Act of 1980 (Act on the Promotion of the Development and Introduction of Petroleum Alternative Energy), and, on the side of technological development, the Sunshine Project (1974, new energy) and the Moonlight Project (1978, energy conservation), the primary energy required to generate one trillion yen of GDP halved from 70 PJ in fiscal 1973 to 35 PJ in fiscal 2021 (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). Third, the transformation of industrial structure. The centre of gravity moved from energy-intensive materials industries such as steel and petrochemicals toward the processing-and-assembly type centred on automobiles and electrical machinery, and the competitiveness of energy-efficient products became the source of export competitiveness in the 1980s. What deserves attention is that this transformation, having begun as a response to a resource constraint, turned as a result into an exportable asset. The technologies of fuel economy and efficiency that had been honed under the constraint of domestic energy prices became, as they stood, a competitive advantage in a world market facing the same constraint. This type of transformation, in which adaptation to a constraint becomes an exportable capability, is the historical antecedent of the design of M2′ discussed from Section 18.8 onward — the path by which adaptation to domestic constraints (population decline, requirements of quality, requirements of confidentiality) is turned into an exportable transformation asset. As a result of the composition of the three series, the share of oil in primary energy fell from 75.5% in fiscal 1973 to 36.0% in fiscal 2021 (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). This response along three series also returned consequences to the supply side. OPEC, the cartel on the producing side, stood at the height of its price-setting power in the 1970s, but continued to lose share through the energy conservation, development of alternative energy and increase in non-OPEC supply that high prices induced on the side of the consuming states; and when Saudi Arabia, which had supported prices as swing producer by cutting its own output, relinquished that role at the end of 1985, oil prices collapsed in 1986 (Section 7). That is, the "resource weapon" exercised in 1973 depreciated within little more than a decade through adaptation on the demand side — precisely Japan's energyconservation revolution and the IEA stockpiling network. This general structure, by which the bargaining power of resource holding depreciates at the speed of the demand side's adaptation, carries a double significance for the subject of this section. First, for a dependent state, investment in adaptation is not merely defensive but an active act that erodes the bargaining power of the supply side itself. Second, the fact that adaptation took time on the order of a decade indicates the cost of waiting for a shock to occur before beginning to design. That the IEA's collective releases have numbered six since its establishment (the 1991 supply disruption event, the 2005 hurricane, the 2011 supply disruption event, twice at the time of the 2022 supply disruption event, and at the time of the 2026 supply disruption event [a sharp fall in transit volumes on a principal maritime transport 718 route]) indicates that the buffer institution has become a standing instrument exercised repeatedly across half a century (IEA, n.d.). Reread within this paper's framework, this experience yields three points. (i) Dependence on a strategic general-purpose resource held by outsiders was first made politically visible by the occurrence of a price and supply shock, which then opened a window for institution- building. Neither the stockpiling act nor the energy conservation act existed before the shock. (ii) The core of the response was not the internalization of the resource but a redesign of the dependence — the three-part set of buffers (institutions that buy time), efficiency (reduction of dependence per unit of output), and structural transformation (movement away from an industrial composition vulnerable to the dependence). (iii) These three worked complementarily. Energy-conservation technology turned into the competitiveness of exports, export revenue supported stockpiling and investment in alternative energy, and the transformation of industrial structure accelerated the deepening of energy conservation. That is, the response of 1973 is Japan's already-completed precedent of the national redefinition that Proposition 14 (Section 17) formulates — the resetting of ends, boundaries, time, agents and measurement. It should be added, however, that the transformation was not complete. The share of the Middle East in crude oil imports fell to 68.8% in fiscal 1985 and then rose again, remaining high at 94.7% in fiscal 2023 (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). A national redefinition is not completed by a single achievement; it can slacken. It is a precedent in this respect as well. 18.2.1 The Institutional Preconditions That Made the Response of 1973 Possible — Those That Still Hold, and Those That Do Not The preceding subsection presented the three series of 1973 as a precedent. A precedent does not, however, imply that a response of the same form remains executable now. The three series of 1973 were executable only upon the institutional configuration of the time. In transferring from precedent to present, therefore, the same operation that Proposition 1 performed for resource analogies — the operation of judging item by item what transfers and what does not — must also be performed on the institutional side. This subsection performs that judgement. A discipline should be confirmed in advance. What this subsection treats is structural change in institutional preconditions, not an evaluation of the capacity of any particular administrative body or any particular government. In accordance with this paper's editorial policy (Section 1), states are the unit of analysis and not the object of evaluation, and each of the descriptions below is confined to the form of a judgement as to "whether a condition that held at the time still holds." The preconditions that made the response of 1973 possible can be organized into at least the following six. (P1) Measurability of the object — oil could be measured as a quantity, and procedures of reporting and inspection could be standardized at each stage of import, inventory and consumption. A single quantity, days of stockpile, became both the objective of the institution and the object of monitoring. (P2) Concentration of the objects of regulation — energy-intensive industry was concentrated in a small number of 719 large operators, so that a substantial part of the whole economy could be covered by approaching a limited number of agents. (P3) Slack in administrative implementation capacity — the new institutions of the Petroleum Stockpiling Act and the Energy Conservation Act each required standing operations of reporting, inspection and guidance, and it was possible to place newly the personnel and expertise to carry those operations. (P4) Fiscal slack and the prospect of growth — long-term commitments entailing standing costs, such as the construction and maintenance of national stockpiles and programmes of technological development, could be undertaken under the prospect of a trend increase in tax revenue. (P5) In-firm formation of skills — the skills the institutions required (measurement, reporting, maintenance, improvement) could be assumed to be formed internally within firms under long-term employment, and the institutions did not need to design the pathway of skill formation. (P6) Political visibility — visible events, the sharp rise in prices and a rate of price increase of 23.2%, opened a window for institution-building within a short period. Of these, what still holds is limited to a part of (P1). Electricity consumption, installed capacity of computing equipment, and the receiving capacity of data centres are measurable, and possess the property that Proposition 9 (Section 9) called "the type that can be anchored to a measurable physical correlate." Confined to the physical layer, therefore, procedures of reporting and inspection can still be designed. As Proposition 9 states at the same time, however, the layers of model weights, inference and application belong to the type that lacks a measurable physical quantity, and do not possess the measurability that oil possessed in 1973. That is, (P1) transfers only for the physical layer, and does not transfer for the layers that make up the substance of AI use. That Section 18.3.1 delimits the digital-related balance as an indicator of exposure and not of dependence, and the limits on measurability of the determination indicator stated in Section 18.3.1.2, are further manifestations of this same asymmetry. The remaining five conditions do not hold in the same form as at the time. As to (P2) — the use of AI is not concentrated in a particular equipment industry but is distributed thinly and widely across operators of all sectors and all sizes. The breadth of adoption confirmed in Section 18.3.2 means that the number of objects differs by an order of magnitude, and no path exists by which a substantial part of the economy can be covered by approaching a small number of agents. As to (P3) — as Section 19.7 formulates in Proposition 36, the implementation of frameworks of diagnosis and audit consumes administrative capacity, and administrative capacity is a constraint distinct from fiscal capacity that does not increase in the short run. The premise that held in 1973, that standing operating structures could newly be placed for new institutions, is not self-evident now. This is not a judgement about the quality of operations but a judgement that a structural variable — the magnitude of the room available for adding new standing operations — has changed. As to (P4) — the capacity to undertake long-term commitments entailing standing costs was treated in Section 19.3 as the problem of the fiscal ceiling stated by Proposition 30. This paper does not calculate a figure for the ceiling, but since the structure of the standing fiscal balance differs from that of the time, it cannot be assumed that the ceiling

stands in the same place. As to (P5) — to the extent that labour mobility has risen, the premise that long-term employment within firms forms internally the skills the institutions require cannot be laid down in general. To the extent that the locus of skill formation has moved partly from firms to individuals and the labour market, institutions must themselves design the pathway of skill formation. This point connects with Proposition 33 (asymmetry in the mobility of national brain capital) and Proposition 34 (mismatch of time scales). As to (P6) — as Section 18.3.1 has already stated, dependence with respect to AI is proceeding not as a sharp rise in prices but as a gradual accumulation of external procurement, and lacks the occasion for visibility of the 1973 type. Accordingly, recommendations that presuppose institutionalization of the top-down type of 1973 — comprehensive mobilization across all ministries and the broad establishment of new standing operating structures — would transfer the form alone while lacking preconditions (P2) through (P5). This paper detaches the recommendations presented from Section 18.7 onward from that premise and recasts them into a reduced and distributed model of implementation suited to present implementation capacity. The principles of the recasting are four. (1) Concentration — the monitoring maintained on a standing basis is concentrated in a limited number of specialized organizations. Rather than imposing the comprehensive versions of Appendices C, D, F and G on several organizations at once, the part maintained on a standing basis is confined to the minimum indicator set required by Proposition 36, and its operation is concentrated in a single or a small number of specialized organizations. Rather than increasing the number of organizations, the demands are fitted to the volume that one existing organization can carry. (2) Sampling — comprehensive reporting is replaced by fixed-point observation of a representative sample and by intermittent direct measurement. Since the number of objects differs by an order of magnitude (the failure of (P2)), comprehensiveness cannot in principle be chosen. The divergence between exposure and dependence is measured not by reports from all operators but by intermittent direct measurement in the form of AI outage exercises (Appendix C) conducted on a representative sample. (3) Riding on existing channels — no new reporting institution is created; items are added to existing statistical surveys, supervisory reports and procurement procedures. Minimizing the addition of new standing operations is the direct response to the failure of (P3). The judgement that (P1) transfers only for the physical layer implies that the objects of this riding-on should be placed by preference on quantities for which reporting channels already exist — electricity, equipment, receiving capacity. (4) Reliance on voluntary provision by the private sector — the requirements of redundancy, switching capability and domestic processing are entrusted to voluntary provision on the private side through the design of incentives, rather than to case-by-case inspection by the administration. The three channels of incorporation into procurement requirements, disclosure, and insurance are the means. As Proposition 31 states, however, the passing-on of requirements appears as a decline in the capital efficiency of Layer Three agents, so that this channel 721 does not subsist unless it is joined with a design for bearing the cost (Sections 19.4.4 and 18.10.4). This paper acknowledges that this model of implementation is weaker than the three series of 1973. Reduced and distributed implementation will not reproduce the point reached in an era when comprehensive mobilization was possible. What this subsection asserts is not the height of the point reached but the order of priority — holding out a design that cannot be implemented is not necessarily superior to holding out a design that can. On the formulation of Proposition 36, comprehensive demands exceeding administrative capacity issue in non-implementation, formalization or delay, and in none of these cases is the purpose of monitoring achieved. Recasting into the reduced and distributed form is therefore not a retreat from the recommendations but a determination of the range within which the recommendations operate (Section 19.8.3). Whether this recasting is sufficient, however — whether the combination of the minimum indicator set and sample observation yields the same judgements as the comprehensive version — is not verified in this paper. This point is acknowledged as a limitation in Section 20. 18.3 Establishing the Present Position Empirically — Japan's Position With Respect to AI as a Resource 18.3.1 The Digital-Related Balance — The Balance-of-Payments Structure of an "AIImporting Country" The hardest empirical evidence of where Japan stands with respect to AI as a strategic general-purpose resource is the balance of payments. According to the series in which the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications aggregates the services balance of digital- related items on the basis of the Balance of Payments Statistics of the Ministry of Finance and the Bank of Japan, the deficit on the digital-related balance widened from approximately 2.0 trillion yen in 2014 to approximately 3.7 trillion yen in 2020, approximately 5.8 trillion yen in 2023, and approximately 6.7 trillion yen in 2024, a record high (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2025). That is more than a threefold increase in ten years. Into 2025 as well, the deficit for January to June alone was approximately 3.4 trillion yen, reported as remaining high at an annualized pace of 7 trillion yen (Nihon Keizai Shimbun, 2025). The "digital deficit" is not a formal item of the balance of payments statistics but an estimated concept grouping five digital-related items within the services balance (telecommunications services, computer services, information services, charges for the use of intellectual property, and professional and management consulting services), and the amount varies with the scope of aggregation. This paper fixes its source to the figures on the basis of the Information and Communications White Paper (on the five-item basis, including telecommunications services and information services, the figure for 2024 is approximately 6.8 trillion yen). To gain a sense of scale, a contrast with 1973 may be placed: whereas Japan's external vulnerability at that time was expressed as a "dependence in quantity," 75.5% of the supply of primary energy, its present dependence 722 on AI and digital services is expressed as an "outflow of consideration" in the upper 6-trillion- yen range annually. The former became manifest all at once through a shock; the latter accumulates quietly, but at an accelerating pace, in the current account year by year. It is this quietness that constitutes a form of difficulty different from 1973 — dependence deepening while the window of political visibility does not open. The composition tells the structure. The three largest items of the deficit are (1) computer services, such as fees for cloud use; (2) charges for the use of intellectual property, such as OS licences and distribution; and (3) professional and management consulting services, the greater part of which is inferred to be internet advertising fees. Of these, the deficit in computer services widened approximately 3.3-fold between 2014 and 2024 and charges for the use of intellectual property approximately 2.1-fold. Payments for computer services in 2023 were approximately 3.2 trillion yen, moving in step with the expansion of the rate of cloud use among firms from 38.7% in 2014 to 77.7% in 2023 (InfoCom Research, 2025). Laying this paper's framework over these facts, the implication is direct. Since the use of generative AI is for the most part recorded as an import of services by way of the cloud, the more AI is used, the larger the scale of external procurement of AI inputs becomes, under a structure in which the transformation layer depends on outside the country. A balance-of-payments structure isomorphic to that of Japan in 1973 as an importer of a physical resource, crude oil, has already emerged with respect to the new resources of compute and foundation models. This is the substance of the statement, made since Section 2, that the digital deficit is an empirical anchor; but what this anchor anchors requires one further degree of precision in its placement. What the digital-related balance measures is exposure (Definition 4) — the scale and proportion of external procurement of AI inputs — and not a transfer of rent. External payments do not distinguish how much of the amount is the supplier's excess return (mark-up) and how much is consideration for genuine resource costs of compute, electricity and personnel. Proposition 5 (Section 7) separates the (α) cost channel from the (β) rent channel and places the measurement of rent not in total payments but in the gross margin of the supplier precisely in order to settle this distinction at the level of a proposition. What an amount in the upper 6-trillion-yen range annually indicates is the fact of exposure — that the scale of external procurement of AI inputs has already reached a level isomorphic to that of oil imports in 1973 — and not a claim that the whole of that amount leaves the country as rent. The interpretation of this figure requires discipline, however. While the report of the Ministry of Finance's study group (2 July 2024) records the digital deficit as a structural issue, the position that condemns the deficit as such as an "evil" is not dominant in policy discussion either, and the account that what is essential is whether value exceeding the outflow can be generated domestically through gains in productivity from utilization carries weight (Ministry of Finance, 2024). In this paper's terms, the digital deficit is evidence of "lacking M2 (transformation)" and not evidence that "M3 (utilization) is impossible." Payment of consideration for imported inputs is a cost and not an outflow of income, and so long as the value added those inputs generate exceeds the cost, national income increases. In terms of the two channels separated by Proposition 5 (Section 7), the (α) cost channel — 723 that the portion paid abroad as consideration for inputs is not retained domestically — is common to C1 and C2 and, in a competitive market, equals resource cost and is not rent. The (β) rent channel — that where supplier concentration is high and demand inelastic, consideration includes a mark-up over marginal cost — is specific to C2, and its magnitude is a quantity to be estimated as the product of the gross margins of foundation model and cloud suppliers and the share of C2 capability in Japan's procurement. Total payments do not yield this decomposition. The question is neither the existence of the deficit nor, still less, the size of the deficit, but whether the depth of utilization matching the deficit, and transformation assets that mitigate the outflow, are being formed. This standpoint runs through the empirical series that follow and through Proposition 13. It should be added that the digital-related balance and the rate of cloud use are indicators not of the dependence of Definition 4 but of exposure, which bounds it from above. Where exposure is high, dependence is low if substitution functions immediately; where exposure is low, dependence is high if substitution is lacking. A level of 77.7% for the rate of cloud use means that the greater part of domestic firms' core business data and processing is handled on the platforms of foreign suppliers, but it does not by itself indicate which processes would degrade, and by how much, at the time of an interruption. Definition 4 distinguishes dependence from exposure explicitly in order to block this leap of inference. Measuring the divergence between exposure and dependence is the first purpose of the AI outage exercise of Appendix C. Until the full construction of the dependence indicator envisaged by Hypothesis H1 (Appendix C), this balance-of-payments series is the most readily obtainable window of observation on Japan's AI exposure, and is not a proxy for dependence. 18.3.1.1 A Determination Indicator for Policy — "Domestic Value Added per Yen of Digital Procurement" An indicator of exposure does not by itself determine the success or failure of policy. That the figure of 6.7 trillion yen is large means no more than that Japan procures a great deal of AI; it says nothing about whether that procurement is good or bad. What determination requires is the ratio of output to input — efficiency per unit. This paper calls this domestic value added per yen of digital procurement. It is a ratio with digital-related payments (or, by sector, the amount of AI and cloud procurement) in the denominator and the increase in domestic value added of the AI-using sector in the numerator; the formula and the measurement procedure are set out in Appendix C (C.3.1). The significance of this indicator lies in its being an exact mapping of Japan's response after 1973 confirmed in Section 18.2. The quantity that Japan measured, improved, and turned into an international advantage after the oil shock was not the amount of oil imports itself but energy intensity — the primary energy required to generate one trillion yen of GDP. This quantity halved from 70 PJ in fiscal 1973 to 35 PJ in fiscal 2021 (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). Import volumes and import values are governed by the terms of trade and the size of the economy and say nothing about the success or 724 failure of policy; intensity does. The same logic transfers to AI. The deficit on the digitalrelated balance fluctuates with the price of AI, the yen exchange rate and domestic economic conditions, and cannot itself be a target for improvement. Rather, it is normal for the amount of procurement to increase as utilization deepens, and setting a reduction of the deficit as a policy objective amounts to setting the suppression of utilization as an objective. What is to be determined is how much value added is generated domestically from the same one yen of external procurement, whether that ratio is rising over time, and where it stands in international comparison. This indicator has three practical properties. First, it is internationally comparable. The denominator can be composed from existing items of the services balance and the numerator from the joining of input-output tables with ICT investment statistics, and in both cases a re-editing of statistics that the principal countries possess suffices. Second, it is traceable over time, and, like intensity, can be read as a long-run trend. Third, it determines the success or failure of policy directly. If M2′ (Section 18.8) functions, the numerator rises; if the deepening of M3 (Section 18.9) is accompanied by absorptive capacity, the numerator rises; if pure import and utilization lacking both continue, the denominator alone rises. It is for this reason that the falsification condition of Proposition 13 adopts as its determination indicator not "improvement in the digital balance" but "improvement in domestic value added per yen of digital procurement." This ratio is the quantitative expression of what Section 7 called "the institutionalization of the efficiency of AI use," and it would also serve as the basis of measurement for designing an AI counterpart to the Energy Conservation Act of 1979, which institutionalized improvement in energy intensity as an obligation of business operators. 18.3.1.2 Limits on the Measurability of the Determination Indicator — Separating the Annual Structural Indicator from the Quarterly Provisional Indicator The indicator formulated in the preceding subsection is simple as a formula. When one attempts actually to compute it upon the existing statistical system, however, two obstacles are met. This subsection accepts these two as limits and divides the indicator into two layers. Not writing that what cannot be measured can be measured is the first discipline borne by the party that presents an indicator. The first obstacle — the composite character of the denominator. The digital-related balance is, as stated in Section 18.3.1, an estimated concept grouping five items — telecommunications services, computer services, information services, charges for the use of intellectual property, and professional and management consulting services — and is not a formal item of the balance of payments statistics. Of the five items, those corresponding to external procurement of AI inputs are chiefly computer services and a part of charges for the use of intellectual property, while the greater part of professional and management consulting services is inferred to be internet advertising fees (Section 18.3.1). Placing this series in the denominator therefore means including in the denominator external procurement other than AI inputs. There is leakage in the opposite direction as well — 725 part of AI inputs is recorded as imports of goods in the form of computing equipment, or as transactions routed through domestic corporations, and so does not appear in the relevant items of the services balance. The digital-related balance is therefore noisy as a proxy for the amount of external procurement of AI inputs proper, and this paper has not estimated the magnitude of that noise. Under the present statistical classifications, the amount of external procurement specific to AI cannot be separated from other digital services, and this paper does not claim that it is measurable. The reason this series has been called an "empirical anchor" since Section 2 is that it indicates the order of magnitude of exposure, not that it yields the amount of external procurement of AI inputs itself. The second obstacle — the time axis of the numerator. The induced amount of domestic value added placed in the numerator is computed using the sectoral input-output structure. Settling a level that is internationally comparable requires international input-output tables, and tables of this kind take some years from the fixing of the base year to publication, so that what is available for the most recent years is confined to extended estimates. The monitoring table presented in Appendix F, on the other hand, presupposes quarterly updating. That is, an attempt to use this indicator as a quarterly monitoring indicator as it stands gives rise to a contradiction of time axes, in which the updating cycle of the numerator falls short of that of the denominator by some years. This contradiction derives from the operation of the statistical system and is not of a kind that can be resolved by contriving the formula of the indicator. Where a figure for "domestic value added per yen of digital procurement" is presented as a quarterly value, its numerator is not a definitive figure but an estimate, and the error of the estimate may exceed the magnitude that can be read as a change in the indicator. A two-layer composition. The two obstacles above are not reasons for abandoning the indicator, but they do rule out a design that operates it as a single indicator. This paper separates the indicator into the following two layers and uses them as distinct indicators. The first layer — an annual structural indicator (grasp of level). This is "domestic value added per yen of digital procurement" computed on an input-output basis, settled retrospectively at the point at which definitive figures become available. What this layer answers is the question of level — how much value added is generated domestically from the same one yen of external procurement, where that level stands in international comparison, and in which direction it has moved as a long-run trend. The role that energy intensity, the object of the mapping in Section 18.3.1.1, has played corresponds to this layer. Intensity too has been a quantity settled retrospectively by definitive figures, and settlement some years later is not fatal to a grasp of level. The determination of the success or failure of policy — the determination of the falsification condition of Proposition 13 — is made by this layer alone. The second layer — a quarterly provisional indicator (grasp of direction). This consists of a series from the balance of payments narrowed by item (payments for computer 726 services), together with series of AI and cloud procurement and of depth of use obtainable on the basis of enterprise surveys. Narrowing by item partially mitigates the composite character of the denominator, the first obstacle — the portion inferred to be advertising fees can be excluded from the denominator. What this layer answers is the question of direction — over the most recent several quarters, which has been faster, the growth of external procurement or the deepening of domestic utilization, and whether the relation between them has turned. It is this layer that connects to the quarterly monitoring of Appendix F. The discipline of separation. The second layer is not a proxy for the first. Level must not be inferred from the series of the second layer, and a turn of direction in the second layer does not mean that the level of the first layer has changed. What the second layer yields is confined to a provisional indication of direction while settlement by definitive figures is awaited. Combining the two layers into a single composite indicator would either lower the accuracy of the definitive figures to the frequency of the provisional ones, or give the provisional ones a meaning that the definitive ones do not carry; both are to be avoided. This discipline is isomorphic to the one Section 18.3.1 imposed with respect to exposure and dependence — a discipline that forbids the silent use of a readily obtainable quantity as a proxy for one that is hard to obtain. A note forward to Appendix C. The formula and measurement procedure set out in Appendix C (C.3.1) should be revised to reflect the two-layer separation of this subsection. The content of the revision has three points: (i) narrowing the items of the denominator to the range whose correspondence with AI inputs can be explained, and making explicit what falls out and what remains through that narrowing; (ii) distinguishing definitive figures from extended estimates for the numerator, and writing into the procedure that values from extended estimates are not to be used in determining level; and (iii) making explicit in a table the updating cycle, the use, and the admissibility for determination of the first and second layers. Until this revision is complete, the determination indicator this paper presents is incomplete as an instrument for settling level, and may be used provisionally only as an instrument for reading direction. This limit is acknowledged in Section 20. 18.3.2 International Comparison of Rates of AI Adoption — The Rapid Narrowing of the Lag in Access, and the Gap in Depth The series on rates of adoption must be read in two stages. According to the international questionnaire survey of the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, the rate of use of generative AI by individuals in Japan rose sharply in two years, from 9.1% in fiscal 2023 to 26.7% in fiscal 2024 and 58.8% in fiscal 2025. In the same fiscal 2025 survey, however, the figures were 75.6% for the United States, 75.6% for Germany and 93.6% for China, so that Japan remains last among the four countries compared (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2025; 2026). The picture is of the same form on the enterprise side: Japanese firms with a policy for the use of generative AI rose from 49.7% in the 727 fiscal 2024 survey to 68.9% in the fiscal 2025 survey, and firms using generative AI in some operation rose sharply from 55.2% to 86.4% (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2026). Given that firms in the United States, China and Germany were already at levels above 70 to 80% as of fiscal 2023 (84.7% for the United States, 84.4% for China and 72.7% for Germany, against 42.7% for Japan), the accurate account of the present state is that the gap in access narrowed rapidly between 2024 and 2026, and the description as of 2023 that "Japan is isolated with a single-digit rate of adoption" no longer fits the facts. Within the composition, the rate of use among those in their twenties was 44.7% as of fiscal 2024, running well ahead of the whole, and the principal axis of the gap is shifting from the international to the generational and the organizational (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2025). The gap that remains is in the depth of use. In the framework of Proposition 5 (Section 7), the value of utilization compounds as the product of the rate of diffusion and absorptive capacity (complementary investment in organization, institutions and people). Japan's present position may be organized as one in which the factor of the rate of diffusion has risen rapidly while complementary investment in the factor of absorptive capacity — redesign of business processes, data platforms, redeployment of people — remains thin. On the logic of the J-curve exhibited in the history of the diffusion of general-purpose technologies, it is not anomalous for measured productivity effects to be small at this stage. The same logic, however, also implies the existence of a path on which the rate of diffusion alone rises while complementary investment is lacking — a path on which only imports of services by way of the cloud increase and only the external procurement of Section 18.3.1 runs ahead. A sharp rise in the rate of adoption does not by itself mean that compounding has begun. 18.3.3 The Present State of Provision of Computing Infrastructure — Institutions Ahead, a Gap in Scale The state of provision on the supply side is described without either exaggeration or selfdeprecation. On the institutional side, Japan, under the Economic Security Promotion Act (enacted 2022), designated semiconductors (semiconductor elements and integrated circuits) and cloud programs as specified critical materials by Cabinet Order of December 2022 (eleven items initially, sixteen as of the end of 2025), and put in place, early among the principal countries, a legal framework treating AI computing infrastructure as "materials whose stable supply is to be secured" (Cabinet Office, 2022–2025). Under this framework, subsidies to domestic AI computing infrastructure were decided in 2024. In April 2024, a total of up to 72.5 billion yen was allocated to five companies — up to approximately 50.1 billion yen for Sakura Internet, up to approximately 10.24 billion yen for KDDI, up to approximately 7.7 billion yen for Highreso, approximately 2.56 billion yen for RUTILEA and AI Fukushima, and approximately 1.93 billion yen for GMO Internet Group — followed in May of the same year by up to 42.1 billion yen for SoftBank, which set out a plan to expand its AI computing infrastructure from approximately 0.7 EFLOPS to 25 EFLOPS, an approximately 37-fold expansion (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry; 728 SoftBank, 2024). In public infrastructure, ABCI 3.0 of the National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology, carrying 6,128 NVIDIA H200 units with a capability of 6.2 exaFLOPS at half precision, began general provision in January 2025 (National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology, 2024). On the model development side, GENIAC of the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry and NEDO has continued subsidies for compute usage fees and the like since February 2024, and in its fourth round in June 2026 selected sixteen development themes (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2026c). Upstream in semiconductor manufacturing, Rapidus — established in August 2022 with investment from eight companies including Toyota, NTT, Sony and Kioxia — brought its pilot line in Chitose, Hokkaido (IIM-1) into operation in April 2025 under the next-generation semiconductor project of NEDO's Post-5G Fund Project, and in July of the same year achieved confirmation of operation of a 2 nm generation GAA (Gate-All-Around) transistor. The implementation plan submitted to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry sets out the start of mass production in the second half of fiscal 2027, with subsequent development to the 1.4 nm and 1.0 nm generations. Government support reached a cumulative scale of approximately 1.8 trillion yen through an additional decision of up to 802.5 billion yen in fiscal 2025; a government capital contribution of approximately 100 billion yen was also decided during fiscal 2025, and further support of approximately 1 trillion yen is planned for fiscal 2026 and 2027 (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry; National Diet Library, 2025). Across government, the "Framework for Strengthening the AI and Semiconductor Industrial Base" was adopted in November 2024, setting out public support exceeding 10 trillion yen over the seven years to fiscal 2030 and inducement of public and private investment exceeding 50 trillion yen over ten years (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2024). On the side of inward attraction, TSMC's first plant in Kumamoto (12 to 28 nm generations) began mass production in December 2024, and a second plant covering the 6 nm generation is reported to be scheduled for operation in December 2027 (Nihon Keizai Shimbun, 2025). In the light of the "extractive" distortion of datacentre attraction discussed in Section 8 (Proposition 6b, Section 8), these manufacturing sites should be evaluated by whether they possess the character of transformation assets that accumulate process knowledge and people domestically, rather than of a grant of drilling rights that merely supplies electricity and land; and that determination requires observation of the formation of a supporting base after operation begins. The present state of domestic foundation models can be described, with exaggeration excluded, as follows. NTT's "tsuzumi" is characterized by a lightweight architecture capable of inference on a single commercial GPU; it entered commercial use in March 2024, and its successor, tsuzumi 2, began provision in October 2025. "Sarashina" of SB Intuitions, of the SoftBank group, is an MoE model of the 460-billion-parameter class developed from scratch, with lightweight versions deployed by knowledge distillation (training used compute on the scale of approximately 6,000 H100 units). Preferred Networks' "PLaMo" takes a course of independent development rather than fine-tuning of foreign models; ELYZA, which originated in the Matsuo Laboratory of the University of Tokyo (and came under 729 KDDI in 2024), takes a course of Japanese-specialized tuning based on the Llama family; and Sakana AI, established in 2023, takes compute-efficient approaches such as evolutionary model merging, is reported at a corporate value on the scale of approximately 400 billion yen, and is advancing partnerships with major financial institutions. What is common is a strategic convergence, not on frontal competition with the frontier, but on (1) lightweight, compute-efficient and on-premises systems, (2) Japanese-language and domain specialization, and (3) sovereignty and confidentiality (demand from government, finance and healthcare). Two disciplines govern the evaluation of this provision. First, the direction is clear. Policy elements structurally corresponding to the three series of the 1973 type seen in Section 18.2 — stockpiling (domestic holding of computing infrastructure), energy conservation (lightweight, compute-efficient models), and structural transformation (securing practical levels in specialized types) — are already in motion in legislation, budget and implementation alike. Second, the gap in scale has not been closed. That there is a gap of one to two orders of magnitude in the volume of training compute inputs between domestic developers and frontier developers in the United States is a common understanding in the industry, and the gap in general-purpose peak performance had not been closed as of 2026. On the other hand, GENIAC and the provision of domestic GPUs have thickened the layer of "specialized and lightweight systems at a practical level." That is, Japan's provision of computing infrastructure becomes coherently intelligible only when read not as entry into M1×C2 (a state producing at the frontier) but as the construction of the sovereign minimum guarantee level discussed below — the building not of the frontier of capability but of the conditions that execute, renew and protect capability. This rereading is the subject of Section 18.10, where it is shown that, under this reading, the gap of one to two orders of magnitude in compute is not a defect but a design. 18.3.4 The Electricity Constraint — Rate Limitation by the Physical Layer Finally, the structure by which the expansion of AI infrastructure is rate-limited by the physical layer is confirmed. According to the demand projection (fiscal 2026) of the Organization for Cross-regional Coordination of Transmission Operators (OCCTO), national demand for electricity (at the sending end) has turned from a long-run declining trend to a rising trend, reaching 887.1 billion kWh in fiscal 2035. The principal cause of the increase is new construction and expansion of data centres and semiconductor plants, with an increase of up to 7.62 million kW in peak demand (4.63% of the national total) and 56.8 billion kWh in demand for electricity (6.71% of the national total) expected by fiscal 2035 on an individually incorporated basis. The composition is 6.61 million kW and 49.4 billion kWh for data centres and 1.01 million kW and 7.4 billion kWh for semiconductor plants (Organization for Cross-regional Coordination of Transmission Operators, 2026). On the generation side, the Seventh Strategic Energy Plan (Cabinet decision of February 2025) sets indicative figures for the fiscal 2040 generation mix of approximately 40 to 50% renewables, approximately 20% nuclear and approximately 30 to 40% thermal, but the actual share of nuclear was 8.5% in fiscal 2023, a large distance from the target. There are

movements such as the restart of Unit 6 of the Kashiwazaki-Kariwa nuclear power station in January 2026 and the start of commercial operation in April of the same year; but the gap between the curve of the increment in demand and the curve of additions on the generation and grid side is expected to remain a rate-limiting factor for the expansion of computing infrastructure at least through the 2030s. As a response on the grid side, a policy direction of guiding the siting of data centres toward regions with spare grid capacity (Hokkaido, Kyushu and the like) — what is termed watt–bit coordination — has also been set out, but this is a measure that relaxes the constraint rather than dissolving it. Since the electricity constraint governs the siting and scale of computing infrastructure, the feasibility of the plans for capacity expansion through subsidy seen in Section 18.3.3 — including SoftBank's 25 EFLOPS conception — depends in the last resort on connectable grid capacity and on the price of electricity. The provision of domestic AI computing infrastructure is a problem of additions to generation and grid at the same time as it is a problem of procuring semiconductors and GPUs. The duality of the "power outage of AI" discussed in Section 13 — that AI outage is a metaphor and at the same time a literal problem of electricity — holds in a particularly sharp form in Japan. The design of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Section 18.10) must be a design that takes this electricity constraint as given. Here too there is continuity with 1973. Whereas the constraint at that time was an upstream physical constraint, "the import of fuel," the present constraint is a domestic physical constraint, "the domestic supply of electricity," and national design concerning AI appears in the end as inseparably one with energy policy — generation mix, grid reinforcement, siting guidance. In terms of the Layer Zero framework, electricity is, as the national version of the bottleneck theorem of Proposition 11 (Section 17) predicts, a typical slow complement whose marginal value rises the more abundant AI becomes. 18.3.5 The Reduction of Exposure and the Concentration of Dependence — An Instance of Definition 4 Shown by Half a Century of Statistics This subsection treats the empirical finding that weighs most heavily for this paper's treatment of Japan. Applying to Japan's energy statistics the contemporaneous comparison introduced as a method in Section 3, the divergence between the two quantities that Definition 4 (Section 2) separated conceptually — exposure and dependence — can actually be observed as two time series spanning half a century. The indicators of AI exposure treated up to the preceding subsection (the digital-related balance, the rate of cloud use) still have a length of only about ten years as series. The oil series exceeds fifty years. The difference in length affords an opportunity to read what may happen with respect to AI hereafter as what has already happened with respect to oil. The first observation — exposure in the aggregate fell by more than half. The share of oil in Japan's domestic supply of primary energy fell from 75.5% in fiscal 1973 to 34.8% in fiscal 2024 (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026a). The decline is 40.7 percentage points, a ratio of approximately one to 2.2. In fiscal 2024 alone, the supply of oil was −3.7% against the previous year, and the share of non-fossil fuels rose to 19.9%. This contraction is the cumulative result of the response after 1973 confirmed in Section 18.2 — 731 energy conservation, fuel switching, and change in industrial structure — and, paired with the halving of energy intensity (Section 18.3.1.1), is one of the clearest successes in Japan's policy history. The second observation — the supplier concentration of the remaining portion rose above the level of the time. The share of imports from the Middle East region within crude oil imports rose from 77.5% in 1973 to 95.9% in fiscal 2024 (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026a). The monthly provisional figure for January 2026 is 95.1% (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026c). Turning to the composition by country, import shares in 2025 were 43.3% for the UAE, 39.4% for Saudi Arabia and 6.2% for Kuwait (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2026a); in the single month of January 2026, Saudi Arabia was 54.1% and the UAE 34.2%, the top two together accounting for 88.3% (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026c). Concentration is observed for transit routes as well: 93.0% of Japan's crude oil imports in 2025 passed through a single strait (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2026a). The corresponding Middle East shares for 2024 are 8.1% for the United States and 13.6% for OECD Europe. Japan's selfsufficiency ratio in crude oil has for many years remained below 0.5%. The scope of description in this subsection is made explicit. The above is a description of a statistical fact, the degree of concentration of the structure of supply. How that concentration arose, what the circumstances of the region concerned may be, and how it ought to be handled in security or diplomacy are none of them within this paper's object (the editorial policy of Section 1; Section 20.13). What this subsection uses is only the observed quantity of the degree of concentration, and the relation between it and this paper's theory that the higher the concentration, the deeper the degradation at the time of an interruption (Proposition 7, Section 13). The third observation — transformation capability itself contracted. Japan's crude oil refining capacity fell from a peak of 5.27 million barrels per day at the end of March 2001 to 3,110,400 barrels per day (approximately 3.11 million barrels per day) at the end of April 2026, a decrease of approximately 41% against the peak. The number of refineries fell from 36 at the end of March 1995 to 19, and the number of service stations from 60,421 to 27,009 over the same period (Petroleum Association of Japan, 2025; Petroleum Association of Japan, 2026). Japan redefined itself after 1973 as a "transforming country" of resources, but the substance of that transformation capability has continued to contract since its peak in 2001. Occupying the seat of transformation and maintaining the capability of transformation are distinct matters — this point connects directly to the discussion of M2′ in Section 18.8. The fourth observation — on the other hand, the buffer was built up thickly. Japan's oil stockpiles at the end of January 2026 totalled 248 days of supply — 146 days national, 96 days private and 6 days of joint stockpiling with oil-producing states — and are estimated at 241 days as of 20 March of the same year (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026b; Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2026a). Set against the stockpiling obligation of IEA member states of 90 days of net imports, this is a level of approximately 732 2.7 times. Further, in the IEA collective action decided on 11 March 2026 — the sixth since that organization's establishment in 1974 — Japan's contribution was 79.8 million barrels of the 426 million barrels contributed in total by member states, 18.7% of the whole and the second largest after the United States (IEA, 2026i). A country that had no such institution in 1973 stands, half a century later, on the side of the principal bearers of the institution. What makes this finding weigh heavily for this section is that it appears in a place inconvenient for this paper. Section 18.2 treated Japan's response after 1973 positively, as a precedent of national redefinition in the face of an external resource shock. That treatment does not change in this subsection — the halving of exposure, the construction of the stockpiling institution, and the improvement in intensity were all achievements actually attained. Yet within that success was contained a type of failure against which this paper's theory warns. Over the same half-century, concentration rose and transformation capability contracted. Had only a diachronic comparison with 1973 been made, the finding of this subsection would not have been obtained — a diachronic comparison asks "what has become of things compared with the time," but does not ask, dividing into four series, "what has improved and what has deteriorated compared with the time." Only when the contemporaneous statistics of 2026 are set alongside them is the composition of the success decomposed. The utility of introducing contemporaneous comparison as a method in Section 3 appears first of all in this decomposition. The contraction of transformation capability connects with the third element of Proposition 13 (Section 10; Section 18.7). What Proposition 13(c) makes the object of guarantee is not the frontier of capability but the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability and the sensitive-processing condition (Definition 6(i-a) to (i-c)) that sustain the degraded operation of critical processes in a situation in which external supply has stopped. What corresponds to operational capacity in oil is nothing other than the capacity to transform imported crude domestically into products. Even with 241 to 248 days of stockpile, if the capability to transform it into products has fallen by 41% against the peak, the level of degraded operation that can be maintained at the time of an interruption is lower to that extent. Days of stockpile is an indicator on the input side, not on the output side. This asymmetry transfers to AI as it stands — even if access to compute is secured by treaty or long-term contract (Definition 6(ii)), the guarantee is not converted into output if the operational capacity, operating personnel and procedures of renewal to run it domestically are lacking. It is for this reason that Section 18.10.3 recast the design variables of the guarantee level along the three functions. Japan's half-century of oil teaches that thickening institutions on the input side while thinning capability on the output side can actually occur. These four observations each point in a different direction. Exposure fell, concentration rose, transformation capability contracted, and the buffer thickened. The very fact that the four quantities did not move in the same direction is the subject of this subsection. 733 Proposition 37 (Reduction of Exposure and Concentration of Dependence) A policy that reduces aggregate exposure (Definition 4) to a given resource does not lower dependence where the supplier concentration of the remaining portion rises. This is because reduction of the aggregate tends to proceed in order from the uses for which substitution is available, so that the residual is skewed toward uses for which substitution is not available, and because the fixed costs required to diversify sources of procurement become relatively heavier as the aggregate declines. Accordingly, reduction of exposure and reduction of concentration are distinct policy objectives, and a design that pursues only the former may produce the consequence of improving in the aggregate while deteriorating in degradation at the time of an interruption. Falsification condition If, in countries or sectors that have reduced aggregate exposure to a resource, it is not systematically observed that the supplier concentration of the residual portion either fails to fall or rises (HHI or the like), this proposition is rejected. If it is observed that, even where concentration rises, the depth of degradation and the time to recovery at the time of an interruption do not deteriorate, the transmission to dependence is rejected. The theoretical implication — this is the clearest instance of Definition 4. Definition 4 defined dependence neither by the rate of use nor by expenditure but by degradation at the time of an interruption, defined exposure as the scale and proportion of external procurement, and then stated that exposure bounds dependence from above but is not identical with it. Japan's half-century is a textbook case of this non-identity. Exposure in the aggregate fell by more than half, but because the concentration of the residual rose, dependence in the sense of degradation at the time of an interruption has not fallen in the same proportion as exposure. In the light of the form given by Proposition 7 (Section 13) — a structure that amplifies the degradation of a sector at the time of an outage as the product of dependence, supplier concentration and outage correlation — a fall in the term of dependence may be offset by a rise in the term of concentration. "Reducing the quantity used" is not the same as "reducing dependence." Proposition 37 indicates two mechanisms. First, since reduction of the aggregate proceeds in order from the uses for which substitution is available, the residual is skewed toward uses for which substitution is not available. Second, diversification of sources of procurement carries fixed costs — maintaining long-term contracts, adapting receiving facilities, adjusting refining equipment to the properties of the crude — and the smaller the aggregate, the relatively heavier the fixed cost per unit. This second mechanism has the same structure as the sovereignty premium formulated in Section 19 (Definition 19, Proposition 30) — the smaller the scale, the higher the unit cost of diversification or of domestic guarantee. Whether these two mechanisms actually operated in Japan, however, or whether some other factor brought about the concentration, is not verified in this paper. The work of measuring substitutability by use and the fixed costs of procurement 734 would be required, and this paper has not performed it. What can be observed is the result that the two series moved in opposite directions. Identification of the mechanism is a task for future verification. The observation of the buffer adds an important qualification to this implication. If there is a portion in which the rise in concentration did not translate directly into a rise in dependence, it is because the institutions of stockpiling and collective release mitigated degradation at the time of an interruption. Since Definition 4 defines dependence by degradation at the time of an interruption, it is possible, where devices that mitigate degradation are in place, for dependence not to rise even though concentration rises. What Japan's case shows is therefore not "concentration necessarily brings vulnerability" but "a rise in concentration is absorbed only by the construction of devices that offset it." The character of the buffer has its limits, however — a stockpile is a device that buys time, not one that creates substitutes. Days of stockpile have meaning only where the duration of the interruption falls below them; where the interruption is structural and prolonged, a stockpile delays degradation but does not prevent it. This distinction corresponds to the distinction in AI between "switching drills" and "securing alternative suppliers" (Definition 6(ii) and (iii)). The mapping onto AI — that Japan's AI policy may enter the same trap. The observations to this point are now carried over into the AI context that this section treats. Where Japan's AI policy sets as its objective "reducing the deficit on the digital-related balance," the same consequence as that stated by Proposition 37 may arise. If the total is reduced while the residual is concentrated on a single supplier, a single platform or a single region, the indicator of exposure improves and dependence deteriorates. Section 18.3.1.1 stated that setting a reduction of the deficit as a policy objective amounts to setting the suppression of utilization as an objective. That was an argument from the standpoint of efficiency. This subsection adds a second, and probably weightier, reason — reduction of the total may be achieved while dependence deteriorates. If internalization proceeds first in the domains where domestic substitution comes more readily (routine clerical processing, general-purpose document generation), leaving as residual the domains where substitution is difficult (frontier foundation models, large-scale training compute, inference in particular specialized domains), the concentration of the residual rises. This is structurally isomorphic to the path observed in oil. The policy objective must therefore be the management of dependence, including concentration and substitutability, rather than the reduction of the total. The practical consequence appears in the composition of the monitoring indicators. "Domestic value added per yen of digital procurement," formulated in Section 18.3.1.1, should be maintained as an indicator measuring the efficiency of procurement. But that alone is not enough. On the same table, the concentration of the residual should be monitored alongside it. Three series are listed as a minimum. (i) Supplier concentration — the share of top suppliers and the HHI in the amount procured for foundation models and cloud. (ii) Concentration of platforms and sites — the distribution of the platforms and 735 regions on which the processing of domestic agents is executed, and estimates of outage correlation spanning multiple suppliers. (iii) Time required to switch — measured values of the time required to move critical processes to alternative procedures where the principal supplier becomes unavailable (the operational readiness of Definition 6(iii); the AI outage exercise of Appendix C). Even if the first indicator is improving, policy is not improving if the latter three are deteriorating. This juxtaposition should be built into the diagnostic forms of Appendices C and D. The problem of the layer at which concentration is to be measured has also been exposed first by the case of oil. The concentration of crude can be measured at the level of the counterpart country, of the firm, or of the transit route, and the three do not coincide — even if counterpart countries are diversified, if the route is the same, concentration exists at the level of the route. The same multi-layered character exists in AI. Even if the suppliers of foundation models are diversified, if they run on the same cloud platform, concentration exists at the level of the platform; and even if clouds are diversified, if the supply of computing devices is single, concentration exists at the level of the device. Monitoring of concentration must therefore be conducted independently for each of the layers of model, platform, computing device, electricity and network route, and to read diversification at any one layer as a fall in dependence is equivalent to ignoring the outage correlation term of Proposition 7. It is to meet this need that Section 13 organizes the causes of AI outage by layer. This design requirement is accompanied by an administrative asymmetry. The aggregate of the digital-related balance is published annually, reported, and politically visible. By contrast, supplier concentration, outage correlation and time required to switch are either not published or have no institution of measurement at all. The general consequence that only what is measured becomes an objective operates here too. Under the constraint of administrative capacity stated by Proposition 36 (Section 19), comprehensive monitoring issues either in formalization or in non-implementation. Whether the series on concentration are included in the minimum indicator set for monitoring is therefore not a technical choice but a design choice that divides whether or not the trap identified in this subsection is entered. There is a condition that should be stated in verifiable form regarding this mapping. The claim that the divergence observed in oil will also arise with respect to AI is at present not a prediction but a conditional warning. The AI exposure series has a length of only about ten years, and the concentration series is not published, so that the divergence between the two has not yet been observed for Japan. If the dependence indicator envisaged by Hypothesis H1 (Section 4) — an indicator synthesized from the sectoral share of AI inputs, the speed of degradation at the time of an interruption and supplier concentration — is actually constructed, this divergence becomes measurable. What this subsection asserts is not that the divergence has already arisen, but that it is dangerous to set the aggregate alone as an objective while lacking a device to detect the divergence. Half a century of oil indicates that, without such a device, a divergence can proceed unnoticed 736 for fifty years — the series on the Middle East share was published every year, and yet the theoretical framework by which it might be read as a deterioration in dependence had not been built into the side of policy objectives. Cross-references are placed. The mechanism by which a rise in concentration is transmitted to degradation at the time of an interruption is treated in Section 13 (the structure of AI outage) — the amplifying structure of Proposition 7, and the point that, because supplier concentration is global, outages correlate across borders and sectors, supply theoretical backing for the observation of this subsection. The cost required to lower concentration is treated in Section 19 (the cost of sovereignty) — the fixed cost of diversification has the same structure as the sovereignty premium, so that the objective of lowering concentration likewise requires justification as insurance rather than as efficiency. What this subsection has shown is that the problems treated in these two sections have already occurred once in Japan. The implication for middle powers in general is also made explicit (Section 18.15). The combination of a reduction in exposure with a rise in concentration is not an event peculiar to Japan but a structure that may arise in common in countries that possess the capability to reduce the aggregate of a resource while lacking the bargaining power to choose suppliers. Reduction of the aggregate can be achieved by a country's own technology and investment, whereas a reduction in concentration requires the existence of the other side — if no alternative supplier exists, no amount of effort can diversify. The consequence of Proposition 37 therefore appears with particular strength in countries not positioned on the producing side. Of the three that Proposition 21 (Section 14) formulates as the common constraints on middle powers, the exogeneity of the space of options appears here in concrete form. A policy design that confuses the quantity a country can move by its own effort (the aggregate) with the quantity it cannot (the number of suppliers) follows a path of setting only the movable quantity as the objective, reporting its achievement, and not recording the deterioration of the immovable one. A note on this subsection. The figures used in this subsection are an instance from Japan. Readers in other countries can take out, as four independent series, their own primary energy composition, the concentration of their import counterparts, their transformation capability, and their buffer, and set them against one another in the same order. What deserves attention is not the figures but the procedure of inspection: separating the series for the aggregate from the series for concentration, placing them side by side, and asking whether the two are moving in the same direction. Where the four are not moving in the same direction, a policy evaluation that looks only at the aggregate may be issuing a mistaken verdict of compliance for that country. 737 18.4 The Processing Trade of the Shōwa Era and the Processing Trade of the Reiwa Era — Correspondence and Non-Correspondence in Japan At the point of departure for the work of setting the precedent of Section 18.2 against the present position of Section 18.3 stands a metaphor. It is the metaphor of "the processing trade of the Reiwa era," which lays the structure of the Shōwa processing trade — importing crude oil and exporting it as heavy and chemical industry products and automobiles — over a structure that procures general-purpose foundation models and supplies them, processed into domain-specialized AI. Section 10 (10.2) decomposed this metaphor for the M2×C2 cell in general into correspondence and non-correspondence, and determined the structures that transfer (T1 to T5) and those that do not (N1 to N6). This subsection does not repeat that decomposition but applies it to the particular facts of Japan. That is, it confirms, upon the figures settled in Sections 18.2 and 18.3, how far the conditions that actually held in Japan's Shōwa era correspond to the conditions of Japan's Reiwa era, and from where they do not. Adjudicating the merits of the metaphor as a general matter is not the task here. 18.4.1 The Parts Where Correspondence Holds That the security of procurement is a precondition of the whole chain of transformation. Japan in fiscal 1973 carried the whole chain of transformation — refining, petrochemicals, steel, shipbuilding, automobiles — upon a structure in which oil accounted for 75.5% of the domestic supply of primary energy and the Middle East for 77.5% of crude oil imports (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). If a single external supply changes its conditions, the whole chain is affected at once. This structure appears in the Reiwa era without change of form. The rate of cloud use among firms expanded from 38.7% in 2014 to 77.7% in 2023 (InfoCom Research, 2025), and firms using generative AI in some operation reached 86.4% in the fiscal 2025 survey (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2026). That is, the greater part of Japan's business processes is being reorganized on the premise of processing on external platforms. The difference from the Shōwa era lies in the fact that the concentration of the dependence may in fact be higher — oil could be procured from several producing countries, whereas the supplier concentration of capability at the C2 tier persists at a high level (Proposition 2, Section 5). In this respect the metaphor of "the processing trade of the Reiwa era" maps accurately the side of the Shōwa era's vulnerability. That the assets on the transformer's side determine the share. In the Shōwa era, what sustained the share of Japan's transformers was the installed capital of refining, materials and assembly, together with the organizational capability of quality control that operated it. That oil-producing states repeatedly attempted downstream integration yet could not comprehensively substitute for the position of the transforming countries (Section 6) is the historical support for the structure in which the attribution of transformation value is determined by the transformer's assets. This structure transfers. What may sustain the share of Japan's transformers in the Reiwa era are the complementary assets measured by 738 the four indicators of Proposition 4 (Section 7), whose concrete series are developed in Section 18.8. The kind of asset does not transfer, however — that the specificity of installed capital does not exist for software is N2 of Section 18.4.2. That adaptation to the market of demand is a condition for the transformer. Oil products in the Shōwa era were of many varieties in small lots, and quality standards differed by market. This diversity of standards made siting near consumption efficient and gave Japan's refineries their logic of location. What corresponds to this in the Reiwa era is adaptation to the Japanese language and to Japan's statutes, administrative procedures and industry standards. This correspondence is not, however, as set out later among the non-corresponding items, equal in the strength of its defensive power to conformity with standards in the Shōwa era. That the response to a crisis may be improvement in transformation efficiency rather than acquisition upstream. Japan's response after 1973 was not the acquisition of production interests in crude oil but the doubling of transformation efficiency. The primary energy required to generate one trillion yen of GDP halved from 70 PJ in fiscal 1973 to 35 PJ in fiscal 2021, and oil dependence fell from 75.5% to 36.0% (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). This type of response can be mapped onto the Reiwa era, and that mapping is domestic value added per yen of digital procurement, formulated in Section 18.3.1.1. For Japan this correspondence is not a mere analogy. The institutional form of the Energy Conservation Act (1979), which institutionalized improvement in energy intensity as an obligation of business operators, already exists domestically, and the experience of operating it remains within organizations. The reusability of an institutional form deserves to be recorded as an element of correspondence peculiar to Japan. 18.4.2 The Parts Where Correspondence Does Not Hold The parts that do not correspond are more numerous than those that do, and they touch the core of Japan's success in the Shōwa era. They are stated in turn. That the physical defensibility of the transformation process is lost. The first wall that protected the refining margin in the Shōwa era was the asymmetry of transport costs — crude oil is cheap to transport in bulk over long distances, whereas products are of many varieties in small lots and siting near consumption is efficient. Here lies the economic reason why Japan's refineries were located domestically. In the Reiwa era this asymmetry does not exist. The supply of foundation models reaches the whole world simultaneously through APIs at nearly zero marginal cost, and the portion of the value added of the application layer that reduces to general-purpose functions is internalized by the producer through standard inclusion in the next generation of the model (Proposition 4, Section 7). That Japan's application businesses are "close to the Japanese market" constitutes no barrier against this channel. That there is no barrier to entry from capital specificity. A refinery is a vast body of installed capital configured to the product standards of the market it serves, and that spe‐ 739 cificity restricted entry and made the separation of ownership from location possible. So long as the principal capital of the application layer is software, this barrier does not exist. There is, however, a qualification to this non-correspondence — where the object of transformation is inseparable from the operation of physical equipment, mechanisms and onsite work, the specificity of installed capital partially revives. For Japan this qualification is decisive, and it is the reason Section 18.8 places the physical interface in the first series. That differences in the conditions of procurement do not generate differences in competitiveness. In the Shōwa era, part of the competitiveness of Japan's transformers lay on the procurement side — differences in the terms of long-term contracts, in transport distance and in refinery yields appeared as cost differences among transformers. In the Reiwa era, the procurement price of C2 capability is nearly identical among agents that have access (Propositions 1 and 4). Differences between Japan's transformers and those of other countries therefore cannot arise at all on the input side and arise only on the transformation side. This non-correspondence is at once a failure of the metaphor and a reversal of its implication for Japan — if differences can arise only on the transformation side, then wagering on the assets of that side (the national brain capital of Section 18.5 and the complementary assets of Section 18.8) is not a residual choice but the sole point of divergence. That the intermediate position is not physically guaranteed. In the Shōwa era it was logistically impossible for an oil-producing state to sell gasoline directly to Japanese consumers, and intermediate transformation and distribution were open to domestic operators as a matter of physical inevitability. In the Reiwa era this inevitability does not exist. Producers of foundation models can supply capability directly to Japan's firms, government and individuals, and do so in fact. The expansion of external payments for cloud use and the like shown in Section 18.3.1 is the accounting manifestation of this direct supply. Japan's transformers can hold the intermediate position not by physical inevitability but only through the asymmetry of integration cost. That the institutional means of the buffer does not transfer. The core of Japan's response after 1973 was stockpiling, and that system reached, as of the end of December 2025, a total of 254 days of supply — 146 days national, 101 days private and 7 days of joint stockpiling with oil-producing states (214 days on the IEA basis) (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026b). This means does not transfer. As Proposition 8 (Section 13) formulates, the sovereign minimum guarantee level that corresponds to a "stockpile" of AI depreciates in proportion to the speed of the frontier's advance. For Japan this non-correspondence means that, of the existing institutional assets — the stockpiling legislation and the operational experience of release — only the institutional objective (buying time) transfers, while the institutional means (physical storage) does not. The consequence of this recasting is Section 18.10. That the payback period of investment exceeds the cycle of change in the specification of the input. The equipment of a refinery is amortized over years and decades, and the properties of crude were stable by grade. Foundation models change gener‐

movements such as the restart of Unit 6 of the Kashiwazaki-Kariwa nuclear power station in January 2026 and the start of commercial operation in April of the same year; but the gap between the curve of the increment in demand and the curve of additions on the generation and grid side is expected to remain a rate-limiting factor for the expansion of computing infrastructure at least through the 2030s. As a response on the grid side, a policy direction of guiding the siting of data centres toward regions with spare grid capacity (Hokkaido, Kyushu and the like) — what is termed watt–bit coordination — has also been set out, but this is a measure that relaxes the constraint rather than dissolving it. Since the electricity constraint governs the siting and scale of computing infrastructure, the feasibility of the plans for capacity expansion through subsidy seen in Section 18.3.3 — including SoftBank's 25 EFLOPS conception — depends in the last resort on connectable grid capacity and on the price of electricity. The provision of domestic AI computing infrastructure is a problem of additions to generation and grid at the same time as it is a problem of procuring semiconductors and GPUs. The duality of the "power outage of AI" discussed in Section 13 — that AI outage is a metaphor and at the same time a literal problem of electricity — holds in a particularly sharp form in Japan. The design of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Section 18.10) must be a design that takes this electricity constraint as given. Here too there is continuity with 1973. Whereas the constraint at that time was an upstream physical constraint, "the import of fuel," the present constraint is a domestic physical constraint, "the domestic supply of electricity," and national design concerning AI appears in the end as inseparably one with energy policy — generation mix, grid reinforcement, siting guidance. In terms of the Layer Zero framework, electricity is, as the national version of the bottleneck theorem of Proposition 11 (Section 17) predicts, a typical slow complement whose marginal value rises the more abundant AI becomes. 18.3.5 The Reduction of Exposure and the Concentration of Dependence — An Instance of Definition 4 Shown by Half a Century of Statistics This subsection treats the empirical finding that weighs most heavily for this paper's treatment of Japan. Applying to Japan's energy statistics the contemporaneous comparison introduced as a method in Section 3, the divergence between the two quantities that Definition 4 (Section 2) separated conceptually — exposure and dependence — can actually be observed as two time series spanning half a century. The indicators of AI exposure treated up to the preceding subsection (the digital-related balance, the rate of cloud use) still have a length of only about ten years as series. The oil series exceeds fifty years. The difference in length affords an opportunity to read what may happen with respect to AI hereafter as what has already happened with respect to oil. The first observation — exposure in the aggregate fell by more than half. The share of oil in Japan's domestic supply of primary energy fell from 75.5% in fiscal 1973 to 34.8% in fiscal 2024 (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026a). The decline is 40.7 percentage points, a ratio of approximately one to 2.2. In fiscal 2024 alone, the supply of oil was −3.7% against the previous year, and the share of non-fossil fuels rose to 19.9%. This contraction is the cumulative result of the response after 1973 confirmed in Section 18.2 — 731 energy conservation, fuel switching, and change in industrial structure — and, paired with the halving of energy intensity (Section 18.3.1.1), is one of the clearest successes in Japan's policy history. The second observation — the supplier concentration of the remaining portion rose above the level of the time. The share of imports from the Middle East region within crude oil imports rose from 77.5% in 1973 to 95.9% in fiscal 2024 (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026a). The monthly provisional figure for January 2026 is 95.1% (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026c). Turning to the composition by country, import shares in 2025 were 43.3% for the UAE, 39.4% for Saudi Arabia and 6.2% for Kuwait (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2026a); in the single month of January 2026, Saudi Arabia was 54.1% and the UAE 34.2%, the top two together accounting for 88.3% (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026c). Concentration is observed for transit routes as well: 93.0% of Japan's crude oil imports in 2025 passed through a single strait (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2026a). The corresponding Middle East shares for 2024 are 8.1% for the United States and 13.6% for OECD Europe. Japan's selfsufficiency ratio in crude oil has for many years remained below 0.5%. The scope of description in this subsection is made explicit. The above is a description of a statistical fact, the degree of concentration of the structure of supply. How that concentration arose, what the circumstances of the region concerned may be, and how it ought to be handled in security or diplomacy are none of them within this paper's object (the editorial policy of Section 1; Section 20.13). What this subsection uses is only the observed quantity of the degree of concentration, and the relation between it and this paper's theory that the higher the concentration, the deeper the degradation at the time of an interruption (Proposition 7, Section 13). The third observation — transformation capability itself contracted. Japan's crude oil refining capacity fell from a peak of 5.27 million barrels per day at the end of March 2001 to 3,110,400 barrels per day (approximately 3.11 million barrels per day) at the end of April 2026, a decrease of approximately 41% against the peak. The number of refineries fell from 36 at the end of March 1995 to 19, and the number of service stations from 60,421 to 27,009 over the same period (Petroleum Association of Japan, 2025; Petroleum Association of Japan, 2026). Japan redefined itself after 1973 as a "transforming country" of resources, but the substance of that transformation capability has continued to contract since its peak in 2001. Occupying the seat of transformation and maintaining the capability of transformation are distinct matters — this point connects directly to the discussion of M2′ in Section 18.8. The fourth observation — on the other hand, the buffer was built up thickly. Japan's oil stockpiles at the end of January 2026 totalled 248 days of supply — 146 days national, 96 days private and 6 days of joint stockpiling with oil-producing states — and are estimated at 241 days as of 20 March of the same year (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026b; Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2026a). Set against the stockpiling obligation of IEA member states of 90 days of net imports, this is a level of approximately 732 2.7 times. Further, in the IEA collective action decided on 11 March 2026 — the sixth since that organization's establishment in 1974 — Japan's contribution was 79.8 million barrels of the 426 million barrels contributed in total by member states, 18.7% of the whole and the second largest after the United States (IEA, 2026i). A country that had no such institution in 1973 stands, half a century later, on the side of the principal bearers of the institution. What makes this finding weigh heavily for this section is that it appears in a place inconvenient for this paper. Section 18.2 treated Japan's response after 1973 positively, as a precedent of national redefinition in the face of an external resource shock. That treatment does not change in this subsection — the halving of exposure, the construction of the stockpiling institution, and the improvement in intensity were all achievements actually attained. Yet within that success was contained a type of failure against which this paper's theory warns. Over the same half-century, concentration rose and transformation capability contracted. Had only a diachronic comparison with 1973 been made, the finding of this subsection would not have been obtained — a diachronic comparison asks "what has become of things compared with the time," but does not ask, dividing into four series, "what has improved and what has deteriorated compared with the time." Only when the contemporaneous statistics of 2026 are set alongside them is the composition of the success decomposed. The utility of introducing contemporaneous comparison as a method in Section 3 appears first of all in this decomposition. The contraction of transformation capability connects with the third element of Proposition 13 (Section 10; Section 18.7). What Proposition 13(c) makes the object of guarantee is not the frontier of capability but the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability and the sensitive-processing condition (Definition 6(i-a) to (i-c)) that sustain the degraded operation of critical processes in a situation in which external supply has stopped. What corresponds to operational capacity in oil is nothing other than the capacity to transform imported crude domestically into products. Even with 241 to 248 days of stockpile, if the capability to transform it into products has fallen by 41% against the peak, the level of degraded operation that can be maintained at the time of an interruption is lower to that extent. Days of stockpile is an indicator on the input side, not on the output side. This asymmetry transfers to AI as it stands — even if access to compute is secured by treaty or long-term contract (Definition 6(ii)), the guarantee is not converted into output if the operational capacity, operating personnel and procedures of renewal to run it domestically are lacking. It is for this reason that Section 18.10.3 recast the design variables of the guarantee level along the three functions. Japan's half-century of oil teaches that thickening institutions on the input side while thinning capability on the output side can actually occur. These four observations each point in a different direction. Exposure fell, concentration rose, transformation capability contracted, and the buffer thickened. The very fact that the four quantities did not move in the same direction is the subject of this subsection. 733 Proposition 37 (Reduction of Exposure and Concentration of Dependence) A policy that reduces aggregate exposure (Definition 4) to a given resource does not lower dependence where the supplier concentration of the remaining portion rises. This is because reduction of the aggregate tends to proceed in order from the uses for which substitution is available, so that the residual is skewed toward uses for which substitution is not available, and because the fixed costs required to diversify sources of procurement become relatively heavier as the aggregate declines. Accordingly, reduction of exposure and reduction of concentration are distinct policy objectives, and a design that pursues only the former may produce the consequence of improving in the aggregate while deteriorating in degradation at the time of an interruption. Falsification condition If, in countries or sectors that have reduced aggregate exposure to a resource, it is not systematically observed that the supplier concentration of the residual portion either fails to fall or rises (HHI or the like), this proposition is rejected. If it is observed that, even where concentration rises, the depth of degradation and the time to recovery at the time of an interruption do not deteriorate, the transmission to dependence is rejected. The theoretical implication — this is the clearest instance of Definition 4. Definition 4 defined dependence neither by the rate of use nor by expenditure but by degradation at the time of an interruption, defined exposure as the scale and proportion of external procurement, and then stated that exposure bounds dependence from above but is not identical with it. Japan's half-century is a textbook case of this non-identity. Exposure in the aggregate fell by more than half, but because the concentration of the residual rose, dependence in the sense of degradation at the time of an interruption has not fallen in the same proportion as exposure. In the light of the form given by Proposition 7 (Section 13) — a structure that amplifies the degradation of a sector at the time of an outage as the product of dependence, supplier concentration and outage correlation — a fall in the term of dependence may be offset by a rise in the term of concentration. "Reducing the quantity used" is not the same as "reducing dependence." Proposition 37 indicates two mechanisms. First, since reduction of the aggregate proceeds in order from the uses for which substitution is available, the residual is skewed toward uses for which substitution is not available. Second, diversification of sources of procurement carries fixed costs — maintaining long-term contracts, adapting receiving facilities, adjusting refining equipment to the properties of the crude — and the smaller the aggregate, the relatively heavier the fixed cost per unit. This second mechanism has the same structure as the sovereignty premium formulated in Section 19 (Definition 19, Proposition 30) — the smaller the scale, the higher the unit cost of diversification or of domestic guarantee. Whether these two mechanisms actually operated in Japan, however, or whether some other factor brought about the concentration, is not verified in this paper. The work of measuring substitutability by use and the fixed costs of procurement 734 would be required, and this paper has not performed it. What can be observed is the result that the two series moved in opposite directions. Identification of the mechanism is a task for future verification. The observation of the buffer adds an important qualification to this implication. If there is a portion in which the rise in concentration did not translate directly into a rise in dependence, it is because the institutions of stockpiling and collective release mitigated degradation at the time of an interruption. Since Definition 4 defines dependence by degradation at the time of an interruption, it is possible, where devices that mitigate degradation are in place, for dependence not to rise even though concentration rises. What Japan's case shows is therefore not "concentration necessarily brings vulnerability" but "a rise in concentration is absorbed only by the construction of devices that offset it." The character of the buffer has its limits, however — a stockpile is a device that buys time, not one that creates substitutes. Days of stockpile have meaning only where the duration of the interruption falls below them; where the interruption is structural and prolonged, a stockpile delays degradation but does not prevent it. This distinction corresponds to the distinction in AI between "switching drills" and "securing alternative suppliers" (Definition 6(ii) and (iii)). The mapping onto AI — that Japan's AI policy may enter the same trap. The observations to this point are now carried over into the AI context that this section treats. Where Japan's AI policy sets as its objective "reducing the deficit on the digital-related balance," the same consequence as that stated by Proposition 37 may arise. If the total is reduced while the residual is concentrated on a single supplier, a single platform or a single region, the indicator of exposure improves and dependence deteriorates. Section 18.3.1.1 stated that setting a reduction of the deficit as a policy objective amounts to setting the suppression of utilization as an objective. That was an argument from the standpoint of efficiency. This subsection adds a second, and probably weightier, reason — reduction of the total may be achieved while dependence deteriorates. If internalization proceeds first in the domains where domestic substitution comes more readily (routine clerical processing, general-purpose document generation), leaving as residual the domains where substitution is difficult (frontier foundation models, large-scale training compute, inference in particular specialized domains), the concentration of the residual rises. This is structurally isomorphic to the path observed in oil. The policy objective must therefore be the management of dependence, including concentration and substitutability, rather than the reduction of the total. The practical consequence appears in the composition of the monitoring indicators. "Domestic value added per yen of digital procurement," formulated in Section 18.3.1.1, should be maintained as an indicator measuring the efficiency of procurement. But that alone is not enough. On the same table, the concentration of the residual should be monitored alongside it. Three series are listed as a minimum. (i) Supplier concentration — the share of top suppliers and the HHI in the amount procured for foundation models and cloud. (ii) Concentration of platforms and sites — the distribution of the platforms and 735 regions on which the processing of domestic agents is executed, and estimates of outage correlation spanning multiple suppliers. (iii) Time required to switch — measured values of the time required to move critical processes to alternative procedures where the principal supplier becomes unavailable (the operational readiness of Definition 6(iii); the AI outage exercise of Appendix C). Even if the first indicator is improving, policy is not improving if the latter three are deteriorating. This juxtaposition should be built into the diagnostic forms of Appendices C and D. The problem of the layer at which concentration is to be measured has also been exposed first by the case of oil. The concentration of crude can be measured at the level of the counterpart country, of the firm, or of the transit route, and the three do not coincide — even if counterpart countries are diversified, if the route is the same, concentration exists at the level of the route. The same multi-layered character exists in AI. Even if the suppliers of foundation models are diversified, if they run on the same cloud platform, concentration exists at the level of the platform; and even if clouds are diversified, if the supply of computing devices is single, concentration exists at the level of the device. Monitoring of concentration must therefore be conducted independently for each of the layers of model, platform, computing device, electricity and network route, and to read diversification at any one layer as a fall in dependence is equivalent to ignoring the outage correlation term of Proposition 7. It is to meet this need that Section 13 organizes the causes of AI outage by layer. This design requirement is accompanied by an administrative asymmetry. The aggregate of the digital-related balance is published annually, reported, and politically visible. By contrast, supplier concentration, outage correlation and time required to switch are either not published or have no institution of measurement at all. The general consequence that only what is measured becomes an objective operates here too. Under the constraint of administrative capacity stated by Proposition 36 (Section 19), comprehensive monitoring issues either in formalization or in non-implementation. Whether the series on concentration are included in the minimum indicator set for monitoring is therefore not a technical choice but a design choice that divides whether or not the trap identified in this subsection is entered. There is a condition that should be stated in verifiable form regarding this mapping. The claim that the divergence observed in oil will also arise with respect to AI is at present not a prediction but a conditional warning. The AI exposure series has a length of only about ten years, and the concentration series is not published, so that the divergence between the two has not yet been observed for Japan. If the dependence indicator envisaged by Hypothesis H1 (Section 4) — an indicator synthesized from the sectoral share of AI inputs, the speed of degradation at the time of an interruption and supplier concentration — is actually constructed, this divergence becomes measurable. What this subsection asserts is not that the divergence has already arisen, but that it is dangerous to set the aggregate alone as an objective while lacking a device to detect the divergence. Half a century of oil indicates that, without such a device, a divergence can proceed unnoticed 736 for fifty years — the series on the Middle East share was published every year, and yet the theoretical framework by which it might be read as a deterioration in dependence had not been built into the side of policy objectives. Cross-references are placed. The mechanism by which a rise in concentration is transmitted to degradation at the time of an interruption is treated in Section 13 (the structure of AI outage) — the amplifying structure of Proposition 7, and the point that, because supplier concentration is global, outages correlate across borders and sectors, supply theoretical backing for the observation of this subsection. The cost required to lower concentration is treated in Section 19 (the cost of sovereignty) — the fixed cost of diversification has the same structure as the sovereignty premium, so that the objective of lowering concentration likewise requires justification as insurance rather than as efficiency. What this subsection has shown is that the problems treated in these two sections have already occurred once in Japan. The implication for middle powers in general is also made explicit (Section 18.15). The combination of a reduction in exposure with a rise in concentration is not an event peculiar to Japan but a structure that may arise in common in countries that possess the capability to reduce the aggregate of a resource while lacking the bargaining power to choose suppliers. Reduction of the aggregate can be achieved by a country's own technology and investment, whereas a reduction in concentration requires the existence of the other side — if no alternative supplier exists, no amount of effort can diversify. The consequence of Proposition 37 therefore appears with particular strength in countries not positioned on the producing side. Of the three that Proposition 21 (Section 14) formulates as the common constraints on middle powers, the exogeneity of the space of options appears here in concrete form. A policy design that confuses the quantity a country can move by its own effort (the aggregate) with the quantity it cannot (the number of suppliers) follows a path of setting only the movable quantity as the objective, reporting its achievement, and not recording the deterioration of the immovable one. A note on this subsection. The figures used in this subsection are an instance from Japan. Readers in other countries can take out, as four independent series, their own primary energy composition, the concentration of their import counterparts, their transformation capability, and their buffer, and set them against one another in the same order. What deserves attention is not the figures but the procedure of inspection: separating the series for the aggregate from the series for concentration, placing them side by side, and asking whether the two are moving in the same direction. Where the four are not moving in the same direction, a policy evaluation that looks only at the aggregate may be issuing a mistaken verdict of compliance for that country. 737 18.4 The Processing Trade of the Shōwa Era and the Processing Trade of the Reiwa Era — Correspondence and Non-Correspondence in Japan At the point of departure for the work of setting the precedent of Section 18.2 against the present position of Section 18.3 stands a metaphor. It is the metaphor of "the processing trade of the Reiwa era," which lays the structure of the Shōwa processing trade — importing crude oil and exporting it as heavy and chemical industry products and automobiles — over a structure that procures general-purpose foundation models and supplies them, processed into domain-specialized AI. Section 10 (10.2) decomposed this metaphor for the M2×C2 cell in general into correspondence and non-correspondence, and determined the structures that transfer (T1 to T5) and those that do not (N1 to N6). This subsection does not repeat that decomposition but applies it to the particular facts of Japan. That is, it confirms, upon the figures settled in Sections 18.2 and 18.3, how far the conditions that actually held in Japan's Shōwa era correspond to the conditions of Japan's Reiwa era, and from where they do not. Adjudicating the merits of the metaphor as a general matter is not the task here. 18.4.1 The Parts Where Correspondence Holds That the security of procurement is a precondition of the whole chain of transformation. Japan in fiscal 1973 carried the whole chain of transformation — refining, petrochemicals, steel, shipbuilding, automobiles — upon a structure in which oil accounted for 75.5% of the domestic supply of primary energy and the Middle East for 77.5% of crude oil imports (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). If a single external supply changes its conditions, the whole chain is affected at once. This structure appears in the Reiwa era without change of form. The rate of cloud use among firms expanded from 38.7% in 2014 to 77.7% in 2023 (InfoCom Research, 2025), and firms using generative AI in some operation reached 86.4% in the fiscal 2025 survey (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2026). That is, the greater part of Japan's business processes is being reorganized on the premise of processing on external platforms. The difference from the Shōwa era lies in the fact that the concentration of the dependence may in fact be higher — oil could be procured from several producing countries, whereas the supplier concentration of capability at the C2 tier persists at a high level (Proposition 2, Section 5). In this respect the metaphor of "the processing trade of the Reiwa era" maps accurately the side of the Shōwa era's vulnerability. That the assets on the transformer's side determine the share. In the Shōwa era, what sustained the share of Japan's transformers was the installed capital of refining, materials and assembly, together with the organizational capability of quality control that operated it. That oil-producing states repeatedly attempted downstream integration yet could not comprehensively substitute for the position of the transforming countries (Section 6) is the historical support for the structure in which the attribution of transformation value is determined by the transformer's assets. This structure transfers. What may sustain the share of Japan's transformers in the Reiwa era are the complementary assets measured by 738 the four indicators of Proposition 4 (Section 7), whose concrete series are developed in Section 18.8. The kind of asset does not transfer, however — that the specificity of installed capital does not exist for software is N2 of Section 18.4.2. That adaptation to the market of demand is a condition for the transformer. Oil products in the Shōwa era were of many varieties in small lots, and quality standards differed by market. This diversity of standards made siting near consumption efficient and gave Japan's refineries their logic of location. What corresponds to this in the Reiwa era is adaptation to the Japanese language and to Japan's statutes, administrative procedures and industry standards. This correspondence is not, however, as set out later among the non-corresponding items, equal in the strength of its defensive power to conformity with standards in the Shōwa era. That the response to a crisis may be improvement in transformation efficiency rather than acquisition upstream. Japan's response after 1973 was not the acquisition of production interests in crude oil but the doubling of transformation efficiency. The primary energy required to generate one trillion yen of GDP halved from 70 PJ in fiscal 1973 to 35 PJ in fiscal 2021, and oil dependence fell from 75.5% to 36.0% (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2023). This type of response can be mapped onto the Reiwa era, and that mapping is domestic value added per yen of digital procurement, formulated in Section 18.3.1.1. For Japan this correspondence is not a mere analogy. The institutional form of the Energy Conservation Act (1979), which institutionalized improvement in energy intensity as an obligation of business operators, already exists domestically, and the experience of operating it remains within organizations. The reusability of an institutional form deserves to be recorded as an element of correspondence peculiar to Japan. 18.4.2 The Parts Where Correspondence Does Not Hold The parts that do not correspond are more numerous than those that do, and they touch the core of Japan's success in the Shōwa era. They are stated in turn. That the physical defensibility of the transformation process is lost. The first wall that protected the refining margin in the Shōwa era was the asymmetry of transport costs — crude oil is cheap to transport in bulk over long distances, whereas products are of many varieties in small lots and siting near consumption is efficient. Here lies the economic reason why Japan's refineries were located domestically. In the Reiwa era this asymmetry does not exist. The supply of foundation models reaches the whole world simultaneously through APIs at nearly zero marginal cost, and the portion of the value added of the application layer that reduces to general-purpose functions is internalized by the producer through standard inclusion in the next generation of the model (Proposition 4, Section 7). That Japan's application businesses are "close to the Japanese market" constitutes no barrier against this channel. That there is no barrier to entry from capital specificity. A refinery is a vast body of installed capital configured to the product standards of the market it serves, and that spe‐ 739 cificity restricted entry and made the separation of ownership from location possible. So long as the principal capital of the application layer is software, this barrier does not exist. There is, however, a qualification to this non-correspondence — where the object of transformation is inseparable from the operation of physical equipment, mechanisms and onsite work, the specificity of installed capital partially revives. For Japan this qualification is decisive, and it is the reason Section 18.8 places the physical interface in the first series. That differences in the conditions of procurement do not generate differences in competitiveness. In the Shōwa era, part of the competitiveness of Japan's transformers lay on the procurement side — differences in the terms of long-term contracts, in transport distance and in refinery yields appeared as cost differences among transformers. In the Reiwa era, the procurement price of C2 capability is nearly identical among agents that have access (Propositions 1 and 4). Differences between Japan's transformers and those of other countries therefore cannot arise at all on the input side and arise only on the transformation side. This non-correspondence is at once a failure of the metaphor and a reversal of its implication for Japan — if differences can arise only on the transformation side, then wagering on the assets of that side (the national brain capital of Section 18.5 and the complementary assets of Section 18.8) is not a residual choice but the sole point of divergence. That the intermediate position is not physically guaranteed. In the Shōwa era it was logistically impossible for an oil-producing state to sell gasoline directly to Japanese consumers, and intermediate transformation and distribution were open to domestic operators as a matter of physical inevitability. In the Reiwa era this inevitability does not exist. Producers of foundation models can supply capability directly to Japan's firms, government and individuals, and do so in fact. The expansion of external payments for cloud use and the like shown in Section 18.3.1 is the accounting manifestation of this direct supply. Japan's transformers can hold the intermediate position not by physical inevitability but only through the asymmetry of integration cost. That the institutional means of the buffer does not transfer. The core of Japan's response after 1973 was stockpiling, and that system reached, as of the end of December 2025, a total of 254 days of supply — 146 days national, 101 days private and 7 days of joint stockpiling with oil-producing states (214 days on the IEA basis) (Agency for Natural Resources and Energy, 2026b). This means does not transfer. As Proposition 8 (Section 13) formulates, the sovereign minimum guarantee level that corresponds to a "stockpile" of AI depreciates in proportion to the speed of the frontier's advance. For Japan this non-correspondence means that, of the existing institutional assets — the stockpiling legislation and the operational experience of release — only the institutional objective (buying time) transfers, while the institutional means (physical storage) does not. The consequence of this recasting is Section 18.10. That the payback period of investment exceeds the cycle of change in the specification of the input. The equipment of a refinery is amortized over years and decades, and the properties of crude were stable by grade. Foundation models change gener‐

ation on a short cycle, and each time, capability, price and connection specifications change. The payback period of investment on the side of Japan's transformers — integration, redesign of operations, obtaining certification, developing people — is often longer than that cycle. This inversion of the time axis has no counterpart in the Shōwa era. The practical criterion is clear — one must not invest in filling the weaknesses of the current generation of models, but should invest in the parts invariant to generational change, that is, in on-site constraints, regulatory requirements and structures of liability. The experience of Japanese manufacturing in undertaking long-horizon investment in process improvement in an organized way is consistent with this criterion, but there is no guarantee that this experience transfers automatically to the domain of application software. 18.4.3 Where the Metaphor Fits Best Is Not the Side of Success From the above decomposition, one asymmetry emerges with respect to Japan. What the metaphor of "the processing trade of the Reiwa era" maps accurately is not the conditions of the success of the Shōwa processing trade but the conditions of its vulnerability. Of the conditions of success — a physically defensible transformation margin, a barrier to entry from installed capital, an advantage from differences in the conditions of procurement, a structural guarantee of the intermediate position — none transfers to the Reiwa era. The conditions of vulnerability, on the other hand — that the whole chain of transformation is conditioned upon a single external supply, that there is no upstream, that a change in the conditions of supply reaches all domestic sectors at once — transfer as they stand, or in strengthened form. When Proposition 13 (Section 18.7) states that "nothing transfers unmodified," it is speaking of the side of the conditions of success. What should therefore be asked in evaluating policy discourse that uses this metaphor is not whether the metaphor is apt but which part of the metaphor is being used. In the light of this section's decomposition, the following four questions may be used in determination. First, by what does that discourse say the transformation margin is protected — a general statement such as "Japan's technological capability" ignores the non-correspondence N1 unless it specifies assets that keep integration cost high for the producer. Second, how is the payback period of investment designed against the cycle of generational change in foundation models. Third, what does it presuppose about the security of procurement (Proposition 4(i)) — the guarantee corresponding to what the Shōwa transformers obtained through long-term contracts and transport routes does not exist automatically in the Reiwa era. Fourth, how far can the demand market for the object of transformation that the discourse envisages withstand fragmentation at the layers of language, regulation and platform. Use of the metaphor without answering these questions amounts to the kind of misuse of analogy that Proposition 1 (Section 3) prohibited. Table 14. The processing trade of the Shōwa era and the processing trade of the Reiwa era — correspondence and non-correspondence in Japan (application to Japan of the general determination of Section 10.2) 741 Condition Shōwa (crude oil → heavy and chemical industry, automobiles) Reiwa (general-purpose foundation models → domain- specialized AI) Determination Security of procurement as a precondition of the whole chain The chain from refining to automobiles rested on oil dependence of 75.5% and Middle East dependence of 77.5% (fiscal 1973) Rate of cloud use 77.7% (2023); firms using generative AI 86.4% (fiscal 2025). Supplier concentration persists at a high level Corresponds (in a strengthening direction) The transformer's assets determine the share Installed capital and the organizational capability of quality control sustained the refining margin Complementary assets measured by the four indicators of Proposition 4 determine the attribution of transformation value (Section 18.8) Corresponds (the kind of asset does not) Adaptation to the market of demand Conformity with product standards differing by market Conformity with the Japanese language, statutes, administrative procedures and industry standards Corresponds (defensive power is not equal) Improvement in efficiency as a means of defence Energy intensity 70 PJ → 35 PJ (fiscal 1973 → 2021); institutionalized by the Energy Conservation Act Domestic value added per yen of digital procurement (Section 18.3.1.1) Corresponds (the institutional form already exists domestically) Physical defence of the transformation process The asymmetry of transport costs protected the refining margin and made siting near consumption efficient Simultaneous supply by API. The portion reducing to general- purpose functions is absorbed by standard inclusion Does not correspond Barrier to entry from capital specificity Vast installed capital matched to the standards of the market served Software has no specificity. It revives only partially where a physical interface is involved Does not correspond (except at the physical interface) Differences in procurement conditions generate competitiveness Differences in contract terms, transport distance and yields became cost differences Procurement price is nearly identical among agents with access. Differences arise only on the transformation side Does not correspond (the weight of assets on the transformation side rises) Physical inevitability of the intermediate position It was impossible for oilproducing states to sell directly to Japanese consumers Producers supply Japan's firms, government and individuals directly. The intermediate position depends solely on the asymmetry of integration cost Does not correspond Institutional means of the buffer Oil stockpiles of 254 days of supply (end of December 2025). Physical storage bought time The guarantee level depreciates in proportion to the frontier's advance (Proposition 8). It subsists only as continuous construction Does not correspond (only the institutional objective does) 742 Condition Shōwa (crude oil → heavy and chemical industry, automobiles) Reiwa (general-purpose foundation models → domain- specialized AI) Determination Payback period of investment and the cycle of the input Crude properties were stable; refining equipment amortized over years and decades Foundation models change generation on a short cycle. Investment in integration, certification and people requires a longer payback period Does not correspond (no counterpart in the Shōwa era) 18.5 What National Brain Capital Consists of in Japan — Four Components and Their Attrition As Section 18.4.2 showed, in the Reiwa era differences between Japan's transformers and those of other countries cannot arise on the input side and arise only on the transformation side. From what, then, does the difference on the transformation side arise? Section 10 (10.4) placed national brain capital (Definition 11) at the base of the complementary assets measured by the four indicators of Proposition 4, and through Proposition 18 formulated the asymmetry that "AI capability can be imported, but national brain capital cannot." The task of this subsection is to state what this asymmetry denotes concretely in Japan, and by what that substance is now being eroded. The verbatim texts of Definition 11 and Proposition 18 are in Section 10 and are not repeated here. 18.5.1 What the Four Components Consist of in Japan (i) Tacit knowledge of the field. The centre of this component in Japan is the embodied skill accumulated in manufacturing processes, the maintenance of equipment, and the practice of medicine and care. The critical points of a process, the detection of the precursors of an anomaly, and the handling of exceptions not written in the manuals are formed only through the repetition of practice. The reason this component becomes a variable of national strategy is that it constitutes the substance of indicator (b) physicalinterface intensity and indicator (a) exclusive data endowment of Proposition 4. Maintenance records are traces of the judgement of maintenance personnel, and the records of medical treatment and care are traces of clinical judgement and of judgement about the support of daily life. That labour productivity per hour in Japanese manufacturing is 80,411 dollars, twentieth among 35 principal countries, and 18% below its peak in 2018 (Japan Productivity Center, 2025), does not directly indicate a decline in the level of this component — labour productivity is a ratio of input to output and not a measure of skill — but it can be read as one symptom that the efficiency of the circuit by which this component is converted into value has fallen. (ii) Judgment embedded in language, culture and aesthetic sense. This is judgement as to what is an appropriate expression, what degree of finish is accepted, and what level of explanation is regarded as candid. In Japan this component is widely distributed across dealings with customers, criteria for the acceptance of quality, the forms of documents, 743 and the procedures of consensus formation. This paper does not, however, overvalue this component. As Section 10 (10.3.4) states, the wall based on this component is the most readily eroded of the four indicators. Improvement in the multilingual performance of foundation models lowers the wall of language directly. This component becomes a durable asset only where it is converted into an institutionalized form — standards, certification, criteria of inspection. (iii) The professional ethics and working practices that make trust in institutions possible. Neither certification systems nor systems of supervision function without the working practices of the occupational groups that operate them. In Japan this component exists as the practice of quality assurance, inspection and supervision, and as the working conventions of administrative procedure. That Section 18.8 lists "the institutionalization of quality" as the third series of M2′ points to the externalization of this component. Since trust in institutions is a consequence not of institutional design but of the practices of the people who operate the institutions, if the practices are lost, only the form of the institution remains. (iv) The capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience. Being able to judge whether the output of AI is correct is a capability distinct from being able to use AI. Judgement requires a sense of the distribution of cases observed over a long period in the domain concerned. In Japan this component is distributed among the professional strata of medicine, finance, manufacturing and administration. It is this component on which Section 18.10 relies when it names the people who bear the third element of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (operational readiness), and on which Section 18.8 relies when it lists the industrialization of quality assurance, audit and certification as a candidate for transformation value. 18.5.2 What Proposition 18 States About Japan Proposition 18 (Section 10) states that, of the four indicators, exclusive data endowment and physical-interface intensity are externalized traces of national brain capital, while institutional embeddedness and linguistic-contextual specificity are its institutionalized forms. Applied to Japan, this correspondence has the following two practical consequences. First, operations that raise the four indicators in the short run do not persist unless accompanied by accumulation in the substrate. Certification once obtained is not renewed if there is no occupational group to operate it; data once aggregated generate no value if there is no practice to interpret them; equipment once held does not operate if there is no operational judgement. In Japanese policy discussion, "provision of a data-linkage platform" and "creation of a certification system" are often proposed as independent measures, but under Proposition 18 these do not substantially move the four indicators unless paired with accumulation in the substrate. 744 Second, there is an implication in the opposite direction. In countries where the substrate is relatively thick, raising the four indicators reduces to a problem of institutional design, because the accumulation already exists and it suffices to build the circuit that externalizes and institutionalizes it. So long as Japan possesses a substantial accumulation of practice at the sites of manufacturing, maintenance, medicine and care, Japan's task is not the fresh formation of the substrate but the design of a circuit that externalizes the substrate into exclusive data and institutional embeddedness. This is also the reason, seen from the side of national brain capital, why the M2′ of Section 18.8 and the deepening of M3 of Section 18.9 are mutually complementary (Section 18.11). That the judgement "relatively thick" is itself not based on internationally comparable measurement, however, is made explicit in Section 18.5.5. 18.5.3 The Risk of Attrition — Decline in the Number of Bearers National brain capital is not only accumulated but also subject to attrition (Section 17.4.4). In Japan the first channel of attrition is the decline in the absolute number of its bearers. The working-age population (aged 15 to 64) is projected to fall from 74.06 million in 2020 to 68.75 million in 2030 (5.31 million fewer than 2020), 59.78 million in 2040 (14.28 million fewer) and 52.76 million in 2050 (21.30 million fewer) (National Institute of Population and Social Security Research, 2023 projection, medium variant). A private estimate puts the shortfall in labour supply at approximately 11 million in 2040 (Recruit Works Institute). What this projection means for national brain capital is that the base of bearers of components (i) and (iv) of Definition 11 — both of which are embodied in individuals who have remained long in the domain concerned — declines by approximately 20% in twenty years. One discipline is imposed here. A population projection is a projection of numbers of persons, not of the quantity of skill. The inference from a decline in the working-age population to attrition of national brain capital requires the premise that the level of skill per person is unchanged. This premise is not verified. What this subsection may assert is therefore that a decline in the base of bearers is not a necessary condition of, but a substantial channel for, attrition of national brain capital, and not that the quantity of attrition can be estimated. So long as the measurement framework for national brain capital is not in place (Section 18.5.5), the speed of attrition is at present unobserved. 18.5.4 The Risk of Attrition — Rupture of Transmission, and a Trade-off Across Time with Improvement in Efficiency The second channel is the rupture of transmission. As Section 17 (17.4.4) states in general form, tacit knowledge is not fully transferred by documentation, and is transmitted through junior staff obtaining, within practice, opportunities for judgement accompanied by responsibility. Where the introduction of AI substitutes first for those opportunities — the elementary judgement tasks that junior staff carried — short-run efficiency improves while the channel of transmission thins. This structure is particularly problematic in Ja‐ 745 pan because two conditions overlap. First, as stated in Section 18.9, in Japan the primary motive for adopting AI may be the filling of labour shortages rather than concern about the substitution of employment. This is a condition that makes adoption politically easier, but it means at the same time that the objects of substitution are not necessarily selected from "labour that is in short supply" — that is, from work that junior staff do not in fact carry, or where the number of bearers is declining. Second, the empirical finding that the effect of generative AI is greatest among low-skilled and new entrants (Brynjolfsson, Li & Raymond, 2025) suggests that the objects for which the benefit of adoption is largest coincide precisely with the stratum in which the opportunities for transmission are located. If adoption proceeds in order of the size of the benefit, the channels of transmission may be substituted for first. This structure can be formulated as a trade-off across time. Present improvements in efficiency may reduce the future supply of the capacity for audit and verification (component (iv) of Definition 11). Of the complementary assets listed in Section 18.8, the institutionalization of quality and institutional trust rest directly on this component. The design problem of AI adoption in Japan therefore includes, in addition to "which tasks to substitute for," the question "which opportunities for judgement to preserve." Because this question appears from the standpoint of efficiency only as a cost, it is invisible from within the evaluative framework of efficiency policy (Section 17.3.4). This paper has not estimated the magnitude of this trade-off. Estimation would require a framework measuring the correspondence between the tasks substituted for and the channels of transmission, and no such framework exists. 18.5.5 Making Confounding Explicit, and the Absence of Measurement Regarding population decline, this section places two claims side by side. Section 18.9 states that the structural decline in labour supply raises the marginal value of AI utilization (M3), while this subsection states that the same decline causes attrition of national brain capital. The two do not contradict each other. As Section 15 (15.3.2) states in general form, they act on different axes of the nine cells — the former acts on the profitability of utilization, the latter on the defensibility of transformation. From the observation that the effect of utilization is large under population decline, therefore, it does not follow that the defensibility of transformation is preserved. In Japanese policy discussion, the promotion of AI adoption on the ground of labour shortage and the building of transformation capability are sometimes spoken of on the same ground, but the two require different grounds. Finally, a limit bearing on this subsection as a whole is made explicit. No indicator exists that measures Japan's level on the four components of national brain capital in an internationally comparable form. What this subsection has used is the base of bearers (population projections) and a symptom of the efficiency of the circuit of conversion into value (the international ranking of labour productivity), and neither directly measures the four components of Definition 11. Provisional proposals for proxy indicators are carried for‐ 746 ward to Appendix E, and the absence of a measurement framework is acknowledged as a limitation in Section 20. The description in this subsection is therefore not a claim that Japan's national brain capital is thick, but a specification of what ought to be measured if thickness is the substrate of the defensibility of the Transformation Model. Turning this specification into verifiable measurement belongs to the long-run research agenda of Section 18.7. 18.6 Applying Proposition 15 to Japan — Absent Action, the Position Declines This subsection treats the strongest point of argument in this section. Proposition 15 (Section 15) states that ascent and descent in cell transition are asymmetric in cost and in time required: ascent requires the accumulations of complementary assets, national brain capital, computing infrastructure and electricity, and its time constant is measured in years, whereas descent requires no accumulation and arises passively merely through the relative depreciation of existing accumulations. A state therefore declines if it does nothing. This subsection applies this general proposition to Japan's present position — the four series settled in Section 18.3 — and states what follows for Japan. The verbatim text of Proposition 15 is in Section 15 and is not repeated here. 18.6.1 The Four Series as Pressures Toward Descent Section 18.3 settled Japan's present position through four series: the digital-related balance, the rate of AI adoption, computing infrastructure, and electricity. Reread within the framework of Proposition 15, all four are found to belong to the side of relative depreciation rather than of accumulation. First, the expansion of exposure. The deficit on the digital-related balance widened more than threefold in ten years, from approximately 2.0 trillion yen in 2014 to approximately 6.7 trillion yen in 2024, and remained high into 2025 at approximately 3.4 trillion yen for January to June alone (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2025; Nihon Keizai Shimbun, 2025). The rate of cloud use expanded from 38.7% (2014) to 77.7% (2023) (InfoCom Research, 2025). What this series shows is the fact that the scale of external procurement of AI inputs (exposure, Definition 4) is expanding, and, as stated in Section 18.3.1, that fact is not in itself evidence of a transfer of rent. From the standpoint of Proposition 15, however, a further reading is added — exposure is a flow, not an accumulation. An increase in the amount procured does not mean that anything accumulates domestically. Accumulation arises only where the AI capability procured is converted into an increase in domestic complementary assets, national brain capital, computing infrastructure or electricity. The quantity that measures whether that conversion occurs is the domestic value added per yen of digital procurement of Section 18.3.1.1. Second, the international position of the rate of AI adoption. The rate of use of generative AI by individuals rose sharply in two years, from 9.1% in fiscal 2023 to 26.7% in fisc‐ 747 al 2024 and 58.8% in fiscal 2025, but in the same fiscal 2025 survey the figures were 75.6% for the United States, 75.6% for Germany and 93.6% for China, so that Japan remains last among the four countries compared (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2025; 2026). On the enterprise side too, firms using generative AI in some operation rose sharply from 55.2% to 86.4% (Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications, 2026). As stated in Section 18.3.2, the gap in access narrowed rapidly. What must be added from the standpoint of Proposition 15 is that this narrowing is not an upward transition. As Section 17 (17.3.4) formulates, gains in efficiency from capability that has descended to C1 arise in turn in every country with access to the same capability. Reaching the floor is the attainment of a necessary condition, not the acquisition of an advantage. A rise in the rate of adoption mitigates the pressure toward descent but does not reverse it. Third, the gap in compute. As confirmed in Section 18.3.3, there is a gap of one to two orders of magnitude in the volume of training compute inputs between domestic developers and frontier developers in the United States, and the gap in general-purpose peak performance had not been closed as of 2026. Two readings must here be distinguished. From the standpoint of the guarantee level, as stated in Section 18.10.2, since the object of guarantee is not the frontier, this gap is not a defect but a design. From the standpoint of transition, however, the same gap carries a different meaning — as Section 15 (15.3.4) states, the path of ascent (movement to production of the domain-specialized type) requires at least operational capacity and renewal capability among the three functions of Definition 6(i), and where renewal capability is absent, no degree of narrowing of the lag width of published weights alters the conditions of ascent. The two readings do not contradict each other, because the level of compute required as a guarantee level and the level required for an upward transition are distinct quantities. What is asked about Japan is whether provision satisfying the former satisfies the latter, and that question is treated in Section 18.12. Fourth, the electricity constraint. According to OCCTO's demand projection, new construction and expansion of data centres and semiconductor plants are expected to increase demand for electricity by 56.8 billion kWh (6.71% of the national total) and peak demand by 7.62 million kW (4.63% of the national total) by fiscal 2035 (Organization for Cross-regional Coordination of Transmission Operators, 2026). On the generation side, against the Seventh Strategic Energy Plan's indicative figure of approximately 20% for nuclear in fiscal 2040, the actual share was 8.5% in fiscal 2023. The path stated by Section 15 [D] (downward transition through physical constraints) is not an abstract possibility in Japan. If additions to generation and grid do not keep pace with the increment in demand, the expansion of computing infrastructure is constrained, and that constraint operates independently of the will of the state. 18.6.2 The Consequence of the Asymmetry — Descent as the Default Path Composing the four series, the following can be said about Japan. Series on the side of accumulation (the provision of computing infrastructure, the specialization strategy 748 of domestic foundation models) do exist, but there is at present no observation showing that their speed exceeds the sum of the speed of the frontier's advance and the speed of attrition of national brain capital. On the side of depreciation, by contrast, the series — the expansion of exposure, the diminishing advantage from efficiency as capability descends to C1, and the decline in the base of bearers — are all in progress. In the light of the asymmetry of Proposition 15, the default path of this state is descent. The end point of descent is the position formulated as path (ii) in Section 15 (15.3.1) — a state in which the substance of transformation is replaced by calls to external platforms and the remaining activity converges on a thin layer on top of those platforms. What this path means concretely for Japan can be derived from the non-corresponding parts of Section 18.4.2. Since the intermediate position is not guaranteed by physical inevitability (N4), the intermediate position itself disappears once the asymmetry of integration cost thins. Since the portion reducing to general-purpose functions is absorbed by standard inclusion (N1), the asymmetry of integration cost moves in the direction of thinning over time. What remains of the defence is confined to the parts of the five series of Section 18.8 supported by the physical interface and on-site data, and that part is conditioned upon the attrition of national brain capital shown in Section 18.5. 18.6.3 Why This Descent Issues No Warning Of the implications Proposition 15 carries for Japan, the most important in practice is that the descent is not made visible. There are three reasons. First, there is no occasion for visibility of the 1973 type. As stated in Section 18.3.1, the present dependence proceeds not as a sharp rise in prices but as a gradual accumulation of external procurement. In 1973 the rate of consumer price increase reached 23.2% in 1974 and the real growth rate in fiscal 1974 turned negative for the first time in the postwar period, so that the structure of dependence was made politically visible all at once. This time no occasion of the same form has arisen. Second, measured efficiency may in fact improve while attrition is in progress. As Section 17 (17.4.4) states, unstructured adoption of AI may raise measured output while raising the rate of attrition. The trade-off of Section 18.5.4 — a structure in which the opportunities for transmission may be substituted for first — appears in short-run productivity indicators as an improvement. That is, the principal mechanism of descent, far from issuing a warning while in progress, may be accompanied by symptoms of success. Third, exposure is visible but dependence is invisible. The deficit on the digital-related balance is published every year, but dependence in the sense of Definition 4 — which processes would degrade, and by how much, at the time of an interruption — is measured only by exercises (Appendix C). Managing against a visible indicator (the amount of the deficit) as a target therefore makes the suppression of utilization the objective, while the invisible indicator (dependence) is left unattended. It was in order to block this mistaken 749 setting of objectives that Section 18.3.1.1 established domestic value added per yen of digital procurement as the determination indicator. 18.6.4 Delimiting the Claim — A Conditional, Not a Prediction What this subsection's claim is not is made explicit. First, this is not a prediction that Japan will decline. Proposition 15 is a conditional, and states no more than that descent occurs during periods in which the speed of accumulation falls below the speed of depreciation. The speed of accumulation is a function of policy and private investment, and includes variables outside this paper's framework. Second, neither is this an adjudication that Japan's present policy is insufficient. As confirmed in Section 18.3.3, policy elements structurally corresponding to the three series of the 1973 type are in motion in legislation, budget and implementation. What this subsection states is that the observation determining whether those elements act as accumulation has not yet been carried out. Third, this paper has not estimated the time constant of transition. It possesses no figures for how many years it takes for descent to become settled, or what level of accumulation would suffice for reversal. This limit is acknowledged in Section 20. That said, the claim this subsection leaves is the following single sentence. Descent requires no choice; ascent requires choice. What should be asked about Japan is therefore not "how to utilize AI" but "whether a circuit has been designed by which utilization is converted into accumulation." The form that answers this question is the three-part set of Section 18.7 onward and the branching analysis of Section 18.12. 18.7 Proposition 13 — A Viable Portfolio for Japan The analysis from Section 18.2 to Section 18.6 is now brought to convergence in a single proposition. Section 18.4 settled at the level of a correspondence table that the conditions of success of the Shōwa processing trade do not transfer to the Reiwa era; Section 18.5 showed that the substrate generating differences on the transformation side lies in national brain capital and that this substrate is placed on a channel of attrition; and Section 18.6 derived that, under the asymmetry of Proposition 15, Japan's default path is descent. Proposition 13 below is a conditional stating, on these three premises, what form the acquisition of value by Japan's M2 type must take if it is nevertheless to subsist. To the question whether the experience of success of 1973 can simply be repeated — whether the processing trade that turned imported resources into export value through high-quality transformation can be reproduced — the analysis of Sections 6 through 8 answered in the negative. The refining margin of oil was physically defensible through the asymmetry of transport costs, capital specificity, and locational rent (Section 6), whereas the portion of the applied margin of AI that reduces to general-purpose functions is structurally compressed, because the producer can internalize it through the nearly zero marginal cost channel of standard inclusion in the next generation of the model (Proposition 4, Section 7). What escapes the compression is the transformation margin protected by integration cost, and the endowment of the assets that keep that integration cost high for the produ‐

cer is what the four indicators of Proposition 4 measure (exclusive data endowment, physical- interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, linguistic-contextual specificity). This understanding becomes more precise when checked against the three conditions of Proposition 4 (Section 7). The first condition, the security of procurement, was attained in the oil era by long-term contracts and the securing of transport routes; with AI, unilateral change of the conditions of access, changes in API specifications, and the application of export controls all lie within the discretion of the supplier or of the supplying state, so that the stability of contract is structurally low. The second condition, complementary assets, was borne in Japan in the oil era by the installed capital of refining, materials and assembly together with the organizational capability of quality control; the application of software has no such quality of installed capital, and the assets must be respecified. The third condition, access to the market of demand, was guaranteed in the oil era by the trading system, whereas in the global market for AI applications fragmentation may proceed at the layers of language, regulation and platform. None of the three conditions is satisfied automatically — this is the substance of "nothing transfers unmodified." Upon this understanding, this paper places a proposition concerning Japan's position. 751 Proposition 13 (Japan's Position) Of the conditions of success of postwar Japan's processing-trade model (M2 in the oil era) — a defensible margin from physical transformation, the institutionalization of quality, and access to export markets — none transfers unmodified to the age of AI (Proposition 4). Japan's viable portfolio is a set of three: (a) an M2′ that places the locus of transformation value in interfaces with the physical world (manufacturing, robotics, on-site data) and in institutional trust and linguistic and cultural assets; (b) an M3 that takes compounding returns from the depth of utilization in administration, healthcare, manufacturing and care; and (c) maintenance of a sovereign minimum guarantee level against AI outage; and these are mutually complementary (the depth of utilization generates the complementary assets of transformation, and transformation capability supports the guarantee level). The object of guarantee in (c) is not the frontier of capability but the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability and the sensitiveprocessing condition (Definition 6(i-a) to (i-c)) that sustain the degraded operation of critical processes in a situation in which external supply has stopped. Already published open weights supply the floor of capability itself without charge and irrevocably, but they do not supply the compute capacity and electricity to run it, the renewal capability to keep pace with new generations, or the conditions for processing sensitive data domestically. The object of national investment is therefore not the acquisition of capability but the construction of the conditions that execute, renew and protect capability. C2 capability is covered not by holding it but by guarantees of access through treaty or long-term contract (Definition 6(ii)) and by switching drills (Definition 6(iii)). The now permanent deficit on the digital-related balance is an indicator of the scale of external procurement of AI inputs (exposure, Definition 4), and a leading indicator that gives ground for suspecting a consequence of pure import and utilization lacking (a) and (b). Falsification condition If, under a strategy of pure utilization lacking complementary assets (the four indicators of Proposition 4), domestic value added per yen of digital procurement, productivity, and the acquisition of transformation value improve, the portfolio claim of this proposition is rejected. If none of the three functions is related to the depth of degradation or the time to recovery at the time of an AI outage event, the specification of the object of guarantee in (c) is rejected. The concrete form of each element of the three-part set is developed below. What should be emphasized is that Proposition 13 is neither a prediction that "Japan will become thus" nor a bare normative claim that "Japan ought to do thus," but a specification of the conditions of viability derived from the structural analysis of Sections 6 through 11. That is, it is a bundle of conditionals: "if the acquisition of value by the M2 type is to subsist in the age of AI, it can take only the form of (a)"; "if the compounding of M3 is to be realized, it will be only where the conditions of depth in (b) are satisfied." 752 18.8 The Concrete Form of M2′ — Movement of the Locus of Transformation Value M2′ is the type of transformation in which the locus of transformation value (Definition 5) has been moved out of the domain that producers can internalize through standard inclusion in the next generation of the model (application reducible to general-purpose functions, simple wrappers) and onto the domain protected by integration cost — upon the endowment of complementary assets measured by the four indicators of Proposition 4 (Section 7). Because Definition 5 is specified as a purely accounting quantity and the mechanism of attribution is unified into Proposition 4, the discussion in this section is connected not to a term that readily becomes circular, "assets that cannot be replicated," but to four indicators observable in advance (exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, linguistic-contextual specificity). For Japan, at least the following five series of such complementary assets can be identified. By way of premise, it is worth recalling that pressure for downstream integration by producers existed in the oil era too. In 2017 Saudi Aramco made one of the largest refineries in the United States, at Port Arthur, a wholly owned subsidiary, creating a configuration in which a national oil company of a producing state directly held the transformation assets of a consuming country (Section 6). That the position of the transforming countries in oil was nevertheless not easily substituted for was because assets difficult to replicate — location, conformity with standards, market access — lay on the transformation side. In AI, the part of this defensive wall belonging to software disappears. The design principle of M2′ therefore comes to one thing. Stand outside software — rebuild the transformer's share upon assets that a producer must pay physical, institutional or temporal costs to replicate. First, interfaces with the physical world. What the producer of a foundation model can replicate at zero marginal cost is software; plants, equipment, materials and mechanisms cannot be replicated. Japan's accumulation in production machinery, precision components, materials and robotics constitutes physical assets that defend the share of transformation value at the points where the capability of AI is connected to work in the physical world — inspection, conveyance, assembly, maintenance. In the analogy of the oil era, this corresponds to the installed capital of a refinery. The applied margin of software is thin because there is no capital specificity (Proposition 4, Section 7); the physical interface is precisely what restores that specificity. Second, on-site data. The work data, defect data and sensor data generated at the sites of manufacturing, logistics, medicine and care are exclusive resources that cannot be collected from the web and cannot be accumulated without a continuing relationship with the site. In the terms of Hypothesis H2 (Section 21) this is the exclusivity of domain data, an asset that does not readily depreciate even when foundation models change generation. Here the observation of Section 18.3.2 connects. If the depth of utilization (M3) is shallow, on-site data are not formed; if it is deep, data accumulate and turn into transformation assets. This is the first link in the complementarity of Proposition 13, by which M3 generates the input to M2′. 753 Third, the institutionalization of quality. Part of postwar Japan's export competitiveness lay not in the products themselves but in the institutions that assured quality — standards, certification, process control, reliability of delivery. What corresponds to this in AI application is the institution of verification and assurance of safety, robustness and explainability. Where quality assurance, audit and certification of AI systems arise as an industry, the institutionalization of trust there is transformation value obtainable even by a country that does not produce models itself. If the institutions of verification discussed in Section 9 have the character of an international public good, then the position of their supplier is also a candidate position for a Transformation Model state. Fourth, institutional trust and confidentiality. In domains of demand such as government, finance and healthcare, where sovereign control of data and confidentiality of operation are required, the decision variable in procurement is not "the model of highest performance" but "operation that can be trusted." That the domestic model developers converge on lightweight, on-premises and confidentiality-preserving systems (Section 18.3.3) may be read as an adaptation to this structure of demand. This promises no scale in the world market, but it is a corner of transformation in which a defensible margin exists. Fifth, linguistic and cultural assets. Conformity with the Japanese language and with Japan's institutional context (statutes, commercial practice, administrative procedure) is one of the few domains in which the cost of entry is positive for global producers. It should be recorded without exaggeration, however, that this defensive wall is thinning. The multilingual performance of frontier models continues to improve, and linguistic conformity alone has low long-run defensibility. Linguistic and cultural assets become durable complementary assets only when combined with the first through fourth assets — as a composite of on-site data × the Japanese language × institutional context. The discipline of M2′ is not to celebrate these as "winning lines" but to keep asking, for each asset, "what would it cost a producer to replicate this?" Margins are compressed in order, beginning with the assets whose cost of replication has fallen. M2′ is not a static position but a dynamic one requiring maintenance investment in complementary assets. Arranging the five series in order of defensibility, the physical interface and on-site data are the hardest, the institutionalization of quality and institutional trust come next, and linguistic and cultural assets are the thinnest. This ordering is an ordering of the degree to which integration cost is kept high for the producer, and it yields an order of priority for the allocation of investment. What matters is that this ordering is not rhetoric but a testable prediction — Hypothesis H2 (Section 21) predicts that the relative magnitudes of the coefficients follow the ordering of integration cost (physical-interface intensity and exclusive data endowment > institutional embeddedness > linguistic-contextual specificity), and the ranking of the five series is the Japanese version of that prediction. This dynamic is measurable. Hypothesis H2 (Section 21) supplies a design that takes generational change and price revision of foundation models as exogenous shocks and estimates the relation between the four indicators measured before the event and the gross margins and survival rates of application firms (the route of reclassifying ex post that "com‐ 754 plementary assets were in fact present" is blocked by this ex ante measurement), and a panel of Japanese application firms would be a first-class site for that verification. The success or failure of an M2′ strategy should be evaluated ex post not by rhetoric but by an observed quantity, the rate at which margins are defended across a model-transition event — securing this verifiability is itself the AI version of what postwar Japan did in institutionalizing quality (defining quality as an inspectable standard). 18.9 The Concrete Form of the Deepening of M3 — Why Compounding Is Particularly Large in Japan Proposition 5 (Section 7) stated that the value of utilization compounds as the product of the rate of diffusion and absorptive capacity. That the expected value of this compounding is structurally large in Japan follows from the overlap of three conditions. First, the size of the room for improvement. Japan's labour productivity per hour is 60.1 dollars (2024, at purchasing power parity), twenty-eighth among the 38 OECD member countries, and per person 98,344 dollars, approximately 54% of the United States and lowest in the G7 (Japan Productivity Center, 2025). Even in manufacturing it is 80,411 dollars, twentieth among 35 principal countries and 18% below the peak of 2018. A low absolute level of productivity means that the room for marginal improvement through task automation and complementarity is large. Second, the structural decline in labour supply. The working-age population falls by 14.28 million in twenty years, from 74.06 million in 2020 to 68.75 million in 2030 and 59.78 million in 2040 (National Institute of Population and Social Security Research, 2023 projection, medium variant). A private estimate puts the shortfall in labour supply at approximately 11 million in 2040 (Recruit Works Institute). In an economy in which labour becomes structurally scarce, the marginal value of labour-saving technology is high, and the calculation of opportunity cost for AI utilization tilts more toward utilization than in other countries. The difference in political-economic conditions — that whereas in many advanced countries the political point of contention over AI adoption is concern about the substitution of employment, in Japan the filling of labour shortages may be the primary motive for adoption — is in this context also an asset. Third, the sharp rise in the rate of adoption seen in Section 18.3.2: the first factor of compounding (the rate of diffusion) has already risen. As to the quantitative expectation of the effect, the range of estimates is stated honestly. Before the range is stated, however, the units must be aligned. The three representative macro estimates are often set side by side as differing by "approximately an order of magnitude," but the three differ in object of measurement, in unit and in period, and cannot be compared as they stand. Acemoglu (2024), on a cautious task-based estimate, puts the rate of increase of total factor productivity (TFP) over the coming decade at an upper bound of 0.66% (more conservatively, below 0.53%). Goldman Sachs (2023) holds that generative AI may raise the level of world GDP by approximately 7% over ten years. McKinsey Global Institute (2023) estimates economic value of 2.6 to 4.4 trillion dollars as an absolute annual flow. Rates of increase, level effects and annual amounts are non- 755 commutable, and to call these directly a difference of "an order of magnitude" is a category error. Converted approximately onto a common axis — the level effect on GDP after ten years (%) — the picture is as follows. First, since Acemoglu's estimate is an increment of TFP in growth accounting, if one simply supposes that the ten-year rate of increase of TFP translates as it stands into an uplift in the level of output, the level effect on GDP after ten years is of the order of approximately 0.7% (approximately 0.5% on the conservative side). Second, Goldman's 7% is by definition already a level effect after ten years and requires no conversion. Third, McKinsey's 2.6 to 4.4 trillion dollars per annum, divided by the scale of world GDP (of the order of 100 trillion dollars in the mid-2020s), corresponds to an annual flow of the order of several per cent. This figure differs in meaning, however, from the "level effect after ten years" of Acemoglu and Goldman, and should be read as a steady-state level effect after the point at which value of that scale is realized every year. Since the premises used in conversion (translation of the TFP increment into the level of output, the base value of world GDP, the year of attainment) all carry ranges, the converted values may be used only for comparison of orders of magnitude, and this paper does not present them as a precise comparison. What remains after conversion is still a difference of several times to just under an order of magnitude: approximately 0.7% (Acemoglu) and approximately 7% (Goldman), with McKinsey falling in an intermediate order. Even after conversion a difference of several times remains, and its principal cause is whether organizational redesign and the creation of new tasks are incorporated. Acemoglu's estimate identifies narrowly the range of tasks that current AI can actually automate and accumulates only the cost-reduction effects within that range. The estimates of Goldman and McKinsey incorporate increases in output from the redesign of business processes and the creation of new tasks and occupations. This difference is not measurement error but a difference of judgement about structure — whether to include in the estimate the factor of absorptive capacity formulated by Proposition 5 (Section 7). This spread is therefore, for this paper's framework, at once an uncertainty and the verification task of Proposition 5 itself, and which estimate the expected value of Japan's deepening of M3 approaches is a function of the level of complementary investment discussed below in this subsection. Micro evidence supports the effects at sites where adoption is deep. Staged introduction at a call centre raised issues resolved per hour by an average of approximately 15%, and the effect was greatest among new entrants and the low-skilled (Brynjolfsson, Li & Raymond, 2025). An RCT on document preparation found time required reduced by approximately 40% and quality raised by approximately 20% (Noy & Zhang, 2023), and a field experiment with 758 consultants found completions +12.2% and quality ratings +40% on the tasks covered, though performance deteriorated on tasks outside the range of application (Dell'Acqua et al., 2023). This divergence between macro and micro is precisely evidence of the compounding structure of Proposition 5 — that the effect depends not on whether adoption has occurred but on the thickness of absorptive capacity. At the same time, the "deterioration outside the range of application" shown by Dell'Acqua and colleagues indicates that the 756 deepening of M3 involves not merely an expansion of use but organizational learning that discerns the boundary of AI's capability, and it may be added that the objects of investment in absorptive capacity include the capacity to judge "where not to use it." Where, then, should Japan's deepening of M3 take its returns? The logic of the four domains listed in Proposition 13 is as follows. Administration has high technical suitability because the degree of standardization of procedure is high and the weight of text processing large, and because government, by itself becoming a purchaser, can form initial demand for the institutional-trust type of M2′ of Section 18.8. Healthcare and care are the domains in which the pressure of the declining working-age population appears most directly, and possess a structure in which automating record-keeping, summarization and coordination recovers the time professionals spend with people. At the same time, the onsite data generated there are the strongest candidates for complementary assets that are difficult to replicate. Manufacturing is where the joining of existing productivity assets (process control, quality control) with AI connects directly to the M2′ of the physical interface. Small and medium-sized enterprises account for the greater part of Japan's employment while having the least capacity of their own for complementary investment, and are the place where, if left unattended, the stratification of access of Proposition 12 (Section 17) is reproduced domestically. To make administration more concrete: the core administrative operations of benefit administration, licensing and permission, and responses to inquiries overlap substantially with the capability profile of current AI in recording, classification, collation and document generation; and since government as purchaser can impose requirements of confidentiality and domestic operation through procurement specifications, this may become the starting point, on the demand side, for the guarantee level of Section 18.10 and the institutional-trust type of M2′ of Section 18.8. As to healthcare and care, this is a domain in which the high share of professionals' working time occupied by record-keeping and paperwork has been noted internationally, and the recovery of time here will be positioned, in the 2030s when maintaining the volume of services becomes demographically difficult, as a means of maintaining supply rather than of raising productivity. Conversely, the empirical finding that the effect of generative AI was greatest among the low-skilled and new entrants (Brynjolfsson, Li & Raymond, 2025) suggests that AI, where appropriately introduced, may work to compress gaps between firm sizes and between levels of skill, so that support for adoption by small and medium-sized enterprises admits of justification on grounds both of efficiency and of distribution. A structure common to the four domains should also be noted. All contain many non-market and quasi-public areas that do not readily appear in productivity statistics, and all are domains in which Japan's demographic constraint appears most sharply. The benefits of deepening M3 therefore appear both in the part measured by GDP and in the part that is hard to measure, the maintenance of the supply of services. That Proposition 14 (Section 17) lists measurement — from GDP to national accounts including AI dependence, transformation value and the guarantee level — as the fifth dimension of national redefinition is because this mismatch of measurement must be resolved institutionally. Determining 757 the success or failure of the deepening of M3 by existing productivity statistics alone risks overlooking a substantial part of the benefits. The policy implication of deepening M3 is not to "make people use it" but to "make people invest in absorptive capacity." So long as the substance behind the 86.4% rate of adoption (Section 18.3.2) remains trial use, compounding does not begin, only the denominator increases, and domestic value added per yen of digital procurement (Section 18.3.1.1) falls. Measuring separately adoption accompanied by complementary investment in the redesign of operations, data platforms and the redeployment of people, and adoption not so accompanied — which is possible on the same basis of measurement as the dependence audit of Hypothesis H1 (Appendix C) — is the point of departure for managing the deepening of M3. 18.10 The Japanese Design of the Sovereign Minimum Guarantee Level — "Everything Domestic" Is Both Impossible and Unnecessary The third element of the three-part set is the maintenance of a sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6, Section 13) against AI outage (Section 13). As a point of departure for the design, two symmetrical errors are excluded. The first error is "everything domestic." A conception of supplying domestically the whole series of frontier models, computing infrastructure and semiconductor manufacturing lacks feasibility under the gap of one to two orders of magnitude in compute seen in Section 18.3.3 and the electricity constraint of Section 18.3.4; and even if partially realized, since the stockpile depreciates in proportion to the speed of the frontier's advance (Proposition 8, Section 13), it would require investment at the world's highest level on a standing basis. In the contrast with oil, Japan never once aimed at "everything domestic" in oil. What it aimed at was 254 days of time and a redesign of the dependence. The second error is "leave everything to the market." In an economy in which AI dependence in the sense of Definition 4 continues to rise, having no guarantee against interruption, refusal or change of conditions of external supply is a reproduction of the state of no stockpiles before 1973. As Proposition 7 (Section 13) shows, dependence on a single supplier that is rational for an individual agent raises the vulnerability of the system as a whole, so that the design of the guarantee level cannot be left to the market. The design problem is therefore not "domestic or imported" but what, how far, and in what composition to guarantee. Before answering this question, however, the antinomy that arises where the object of guarantee is set as a level of capability must be presented explicitly and resolved. It is a contradiction of the kind that arises precisely because this paper's theory is correct. 18.10.1 The Antinomy — "Selective C2 Capability" Is Either Redundant or Infeasible Consider a formulation that specifies the object of guarantee in (c) as "selective C2 capability, computing infrastructure and electricity." If Proposition 2 (Section 5), Proposition 8 758 (Section 13) and Section 7 are held true simultaneously, this specification falls into the following antinomy. Branch (α): where the object of guarantee is genuinely at the C1 level. As this section has stated, what should be guaranteed is not "capability equivalent to the frontier" but "capability sufficient for the continuation of critical processes," and for processes such as the continuation of administration, the record-keeping and coordination of healthcare and care, financial settlement, and the operation of critical infrastructure, lightweight and specialized models with computing infrastructure that can be run on premises are in many cases sufficient. Under Definition 2 (Section 5), however, a level of capability for which suppliers exist in multiple jurisdictions and substitutes meeting the required level for the use concerned are obtainable is C1, not C2. And the floor of C1 is, as Section 7 established, supplied by already published open weights without charge and irrevocably — weights already published are never recovered by a supplier's commercial judgement or by geopolitical measures. If that is so, national investment in the form of GENIAC, domestic foundation models and subsidies for cloud programs is redundant as a securing of capability. The term "selective C2 sovereignty" would be mistaken, and the reality would be no more than "domestic execution of C1 capability." Branch (β): where the object of guarantee is genuinely at the C2 level. C2 is the level of capability at the frontier and within a short lag width of it. By Proposition 8 (Section 13), held capability depreciates in proportion to the speed of the frontier's advance, so that maintaining domestic holdings at the C2 level requires standing fiscal, electricity and personnel commitments. Yet, as confirmed in Section 18.3.3, there is a gap of one to two orders of magnitude in the volume of training compute inputs between domestic developers and frontier developers in the United States, and, as confirmed in Section 18.3.4, the electricity constraint will remain a rate-limiting factor for the expansion of computing infrastructure at least through the 2030s. Under a scale of investment rising at an annual factor of approximately 2.4, maintaining a gap of one to two orders of magnitude while carrying an electricity constraint is infeasible. At the level of description, this antinomy appears as an oscillation between the two branches. If the text of the proposition uses the vocabulary of (β) ("selective C2 capability") while the explanation speaks the content of (α) ("lightweight and specialized systems suffice"), then the same policy recommendation is being stated in the proposition in an infeasible form and in the explanation in a redundant one. The discipline this section has held up, that "everything domestic is both impossible and unnecessary," does not resolve this antinomy either — "impossible" is the negation of (β) and "unnecessary" is the assertion of (α), and the two carry exactly opposite implications as to the level of the object of guarantee. This is not a criticism that Japanese policy discussion is lax. It is that, so long as the object of guarantee is set as a level of capability, a more serious situation arises: the theory negates its own policy conclusion. 759 18.10.2 The Resolution — Recasting the Object of Guarantee from a Level of Capability into Three Functions The resolution lies in how the question is put. The antinomy arises from setting the object of guarantee as a level of capability (C1 or C2). What open weights supply without charge and irrevocably is the weights of a model, and not the compute capacity to run them, nor the capability to adapt them to a new generation, nor the legal and physical conditions for processing sensitive data domestically. Here lies a third object. It is for the sake of this recasting that Definition 6(i) is specified not as a level of capability but as the following three functions. (i-a) Operational capacity — the capacity to execute, on domestic computing infrastructure and electricity, the inference required for the degraded operation of critical processes in a situation in which external supply has stopped. (i-b) Renewal capability — the personnel, procedures and compute able to fine-tune, evaluate and deploy domestically the published weights of the newest generation, and thereby to restore the relative depreciation of capability within a specified period. (i-c) The sensitive-processing condition — a platform able to process domestically the data whose removal abroad is not permitted legally or contractually. None of the three is supplied without charge by open weights, so none is redundant; and since none requires frontier-class compute, none is infeasible either. An object that falls into neither branch (α) nor branch (β) is thereby specified. The object of national investment is therefore not the acquisition of capability but the construction of the conditions that execute, renew and protect capability (Proposition 13). This recasting brings this section's empirical description into consistency in four respects. First, it is consistent with Proposition 8. Proposition 8 states that supply security "subsists only as continuous construction and not as a single stockpiling," but had not been able to say what was to be continuously constructed. It is (i-b) renewal capability that is that object of construction. Second, the description of domestic developers in Section 18.3.3 can be read as it stands. That NTT tsuzumi, Sarashina, PLaMo and others converge on "lightweight, compute-efficient, on-premises and confidentiality-preserving" systems forces a strained rereading if it is read as "holding selective C2 capability," but is consistent as it stands as investment in (i-a) operational capacity and (i-c) the sensitive-processing condition. Third, it becomes possible to write that the gap of one to two orders of magnitude in compute is not a defect but a design. Since the object of guarantee is not the frontier, the gap from the frontier is not an axis on which the guarantee level is evaluated. The gap becomes a problem on the side of (i-b) renewal capability, and what is asked there is not the absolute volume of training compute but whether the published weights of the newest generation can be fine-tuned, evaluated and deployed domestically within a specified period — a requirement smaller by orders of magnitude. Fourth, the connection with the electricity constraint (Section 18.3.4) becomes quantitative. The increment of 56.8 billion kWh by fiscal 2035 shown in OCCTO's demand projection (49.4 billion kWh for data centres and 7.4 billion kWh for semiconductor plants) admits of a calcula‐

tion back to scale only when positioned as a quantity required not for frontier training but for (i-a) operational capacity — by accumulating the volume of inference required for degraded operation of critical processes and dividing it by inference efficiency and equipment utilization to convert it into electricity, a lower bound for the electricity that the guarantee level requires can be produced as a figure. This calculation back exceeds the scope of this paper, but that the question has been put in a form in which the calculation is possible is the substance of the recasting. 18.10.3 Japan's Design Variables Along the Three Constituent Elements of Definition 6 On this basis, identifying Japan's design variables along the three constituent elements of Definition 6 yields the following. (i) Domestically held capability: the three functions above. That the processes of the continuation of administration, the record-keeping and coordination of healthcare and care, financial settlement, and the operation of critical infrastructure can continue at a degraded level even when external supply is cut off is the content of (i-a); that the country can keep pace with generational change in published weights is (i-b); and that data which cannot be sent abroad can be processed domestically is (i-c). The specialization strategy of the domestic developers and the provision of GENIAC, the cloud program and ABCI 3.0 confirmed in Section 18.3.3 can, when read as investment in these three functions, be coherently evaluated not as defeat in frontier competition but as an implementation of guarantee design. (ii) Alliance guarantees: C2 capability not covered by the three functions is covered not by holding but by the institutionalization of supply guarantees — long-term contracts, treaty-level guarantees of access, and diversification of suppliers across jurisdictions. Here the institutional precedence noted in Section 18.3.3 becomes an asset. The framework in which the Economic Security Promotion Act treats semiconductors and cloud programs as specified critical materials is a legal footing that makes supply guarantees for AI capability an explicit object of negotiation in trade and alliance policy. (iii) Operational readiness: holdings and contracts are guarantees on paper without the personnel and procedures able to execute a switch. Just as oil stockpiles come as a set with release exercises, the AI guarantee level must include switching drills to alternative systems — the simulated cut-off drills designed in Appendix C — as part of the institution. The institutional footing partly exists already. At the level of regulation, the AI Promotion Act enacted in May 2025 (Act on the Promotion of Research and Development and Utilization of Artificial Intelligence-Related Technologies) is a comprehensive statute of the "promotion type" without penalties, and it established in the Cabinet an AI Strategy Headquarters headed by the Prime Minister with all ministers as members. In December 2025, Japan's first statutory AI Basic Plan was adopted by the Cabinet, and the AI Guidelines for Business of the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications and the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry (version 1.1, March 2025) supply, as soft law, guidance for the conduct of developers, providers and users (Cabinet Office, 2025; Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications and Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, 2025). This com‐ 761 position of "promotion statute plus soft law" is a third type, distinct from the EU, which governs by comprehensive regulatory statute, and the United States, which governs by litigation and the market; but what matters from this section's standpoint is recognition of its limits. A promotion statute does not oblige investment in resources (M1) or transformation (M2′), and the substance of the guarantee level lies not in law but in budgetary measures — the cloud program, GENIAC and semiconductor support seen in Section 18.3.3 — and in the design of their allocation. The discipline here is not to confuse the existence of a legal framework with attainment of the guarantee level. Making the design questions concrete, the series Japan must answer is as follows. Through the recasting into the three functions, each of these has become a question answerable in figures. (1) Enumeration of the objects of guarantee — which critical processes must be guaranteed continuity at the time of an AI outage? The counters and benefit administration of government; medical records and prescriptions; settlement and clearing; grid operation and logistics management? This enumeration is itself an output of the dependence audit of Hypothesis H1 (Appendix C). (2) Specification of the level of guarantee — for each process, "continuation at full function," "continuation in degraded operation," or "guarantee of a safe stop"? Just as an oil stockpile does not cover the whole of consumption but buys 90 days of time, the AI guarantee level too should be defined not by equivalence with the frontier but by duration of continuation and depth of degradation. Once (1) and (2) are settled, the volume of inference required for degraded operation can be accumulated, and the required level of (i-a) operational capacity expressed in units of computing capacity and electricity. (3) Determination of the composition — with what combination of domestic holding (the three functions), alliance guarantees and readiness is each object of guarantee to be covered? Here (i-c) the sensitive-processing condition, being determined by the range of data whose removal abroad is not permitted legally or contractually, includes a part given as a consequence of the legal system rather than as a choice of composition. (4) Management of depreciation — against the depreciation of Proposition 8 (Section 13), at what cycle is (i-b) renewal capability to be exercised, and who bears its standing cost? The "days" corresponding to oil's 254 days are expressed in AI not as a static inventory in days but as the cycle of renewal that keeps pace with generational change in published weights, and as the number of years over which investment sustaining that cycle continues. The work of entering actual figures into these questions exceeds the scope of this paper; settling the form of the questions is the first step of design, and that is the purpose of this subsection. This design takes the electricity constraint (Section 18.3.4) as given. The increment of 56.8 billion kWh by fiscal 2035 shown in OCCTO's demand projection marks the physical upper bound of the guarantee level and is at the same time, as stated in Section 18.10.2, the reference quantity from which the scale of (i-a) operational capacity is calculated back. That the composition of the increment is 49.4 billion kWh for data centres and 7.4 billion kWh for semiconductor plants indicates that the greater part of the increment goes to operational capacity for inference and training, and the share of that which is to be secured domestically as a guarantee level is determined by the answers to (1) to (3) above. Prioritiza‐ 762 tion among the objects of guarantee — the ex ante design of priority allocation at the time of an AI outage, corresponding to priority supply at the time of a power outage — can only be carried out consistently with grid planning for electricity. The duality stated in Section 13 becomes a practical problem here. 18.10.4 Applying the Cost of Sovereignty to Japan — The Sovereignty Premium, the Friction of the Cost of Capital, and Tiering The preceding three subsections stated the design of the guarantee level. Design, however, has costs. Section 19 counts the costs entailed by this paper's recommendations under five types, and of these three act directly in the Japanese context — the sovereignty premium, the friction of the cost of capital, and the tiering of the handling of data. This subsection places these three upon the design variables identified in Section 18.10.3. As in Section 19, this subsection too does not present the level of costs in figures. What it presents is on which design variable, and in which direction, the costs act. The sovereignty premium (Definition 19) is not uniform across the three functions. As Section 19.2.5 showed, the way economies of scale operate differs across the three functions of Definition 6. (i-a) Operational capacity consists of equipment-intensive inputs — computing infrastructure, electricity, cooling — and economies of scale operate most strongly. The further the capacity guaranteed domestically falls below the minimum efficient scale, therefore, the more the unit price of use exceeds the level of an unconstrained international market. It is in this function that the sovereignty premium appears at its largest in Japan's design, and it is here that the condition of justification as insurance laid down by Proposition 30 — that the total premium fall below the expected value of the losses avoided at the time of a supply stoppage — is tested most severely. The electricity constraint confirmed in Section 18.3.4 acts as a second channel raising this cost difference, because constraints on the grid limit siting and the price of electricity at the limited sites is passed through into unit prices. (i-b) Renewal capability, having personnel and procedures as its principal inputs, is subject to relatively weak economies of scale, and its premium does not become as large as that for capacity. What governs its cost instead is the scarcity of personnel, and this is another manifestation of the same constraint as the thickness of national brain capital treated in Section 18.5. (i-c) The sensitive-processing condition appears not as a problem of scale but as the cost of a design that separates processing abroad from processing at home. So long as the three functions are called "domestic guarantee" in the aggregate, these differences in cost structure remain invisible. That Section 18.10.2 recast the object of guarantee from a level of capability into three functions therefore also has significance on the cost side — the function whose cost is heaviest and the one whose cost is lightest can now be judged separately. The friction of the cost of capital (Proposition 31). The third element of the guarantee level, operational readiness (Definition 6(iii)), requires the maintenance of multiple sources of supply and switching drills. For Layer Three agents — domestic operators — this appears as a decline in capital efficiency, since using only the cheapest and highest- 763 performing source is rational for each individual agent, and maintaining redundancy demands a departure from that rationality. In the Japanese context, this demand reaches the regulated sectors first (finance, healthcare, critical infrastructure) — because the further the provision of trust infrastructure (Definition 17) advances, the more the requirements are made concrete along with the locus of liability. As Proposition 31 states, the benefits of redundancy extend to the system as a whole while the costs are borne by individual agents, and this mismatch is not resolved by the market. A design that imposes requirements must therefore be placed together with a design for bearing the cost — public bearing, incorporation into procurement requirements, insurance schemes (Section 19.4.4). Where the two are not placed together, the consequence is either formal compliance with the requirements or contraction of the activity concerned. This paper does not state which channel of bearing Japan should adopt. The allocation of the burden is a question of distribution, and this paper's analysis is not qualified to decide which allocation is right. What this paper states is that a design that imposes requirements without deciding the allocation does not operate. Tiering (Section 19.6). The deepening of M3 discussed in Section 18.9 rests on the structure by which compounding arises from the depth of utilization. A uniform requirement of domestic processing impairs that depth, and so would itself reduce the compounding stated by Proposition 5. The three-tier division by the three criteria presented in Section 19.6 — confidentiality, reversibility and substitutability — operates as follows in the Japanese context. Routine processing containing neither personal information nor trade secrets may be placed in the first tier (the domain in which processing abroad is permitted), and the quantitative bulk of utilization belongs here. Processing that contains personal information or trade secrets but where errors are correctable after the fact is placed in the second tier (the conditional domain), and the content of the conditions depends on the level of provision of trust infrastructure in the jurisdiction concerned. Processing with irrevocable consequences — administrative processes that determine the rights and obligations of persons, control acting directly on life and body — is placed in the third tier (the domain confined to domestic processing). Assigning individual processes to tiers requires domain-specific knowledge, and this paper does not perform the assignment (Section 19.6.6). What this subsection states is a chain — the design of the tiers determines the scale of (i-c) the sensitive-processing condition of the guarantee level, and that scale determines the total of the sovereignty premium. Tiering is at once an operation that protects the depth of utilization and an operation that governs the level of cost. The wider the third tier is drawn, the greater the price paid in both depth and cost; the narrower it is drawn, the thinner the meaning of the sensitive-processing condition. This paper supplies the location of the choice, not the choice itself. A note on this subsection. The breakdown of costs and the design variables used in this subsection are an instance from Japan; readers in other countries can, by entering their own figures into Appendix D (diagnosis of position) and Appendix E (measurement framework), assemble their own cost structure in the same order. What deserves atten‐ 764 tion is not the figures but the procedure of translation: to which design variable, and in which direction, costs are assigned. 18.11 The Complementarity of the Three-Part Set, and Japan on the Leverage Coordinates A note on this section. The figures and determinations stated below about Japan on the leverage coordinates are all an instance from Japan. Readers in other countries can, by entering their own figures into Appendix D (diagnosis of position) and Appendix G (diagnosis of geoeconomic leverage), apply the identical procedure of this section to their own country. The request stated in Section 18.1 is repeated here — what deserves attention is not the figures but the procedure by which figures are translated into a position and a standing in negotiation. Even if this section's determinations about Japan were mistaken, the procedure would not be damaged provided that the same procedure yields a different determination for another country. 18.11.1 The Complementarity of the Three-Part Set The point of Proposition 13 is that (a) M2′, (b) the deepening of M3, and (c) the guarantee level are not three independent policy menus but a single composition in which each makes the others possible. Three links of complementarity can be identified. First, utilization generates transformation. The greater the depth of M3, the more on-site data and operational knowledge accumulate, and these become the raw material for the complementary assets of M2′ seen in Section 18.8 (exclusive domain data, institutions of quality). Shallow utilization does not turn this link. Second, transformation supports the guarantee. Those who bear M2′ — the operators and personnel who run models, build specialized types, and connect to physical interfaces — are the same as those who bear the third element of the guarantee level (operational readiness). A "domestic platform" in a country lacking transformation capability is equivalent to a stockpile tank with no one able to execute a switch. Third, the guarantee makes the deepening of utilization possible. Deep embedding of AI into critical processes — administration, healthcare, finance — cannot be justified without a guarantee of continuity at the time of an AI outage. The guarantee level is a precondition for deepening M3 from "efficiency gains in peripheral operations" into "an input to critical processes." Reverse rotation holds in the same form. If utilization is shallow, data are not generated; if transformation does not grow, the guarantee is hollowed out; and without the guarantee, utilization does not reach the depths. The three-part set has a structure in which the absence of any one lowers the rate of return of the remaining two, and in this sense the word portfolio is not a metaphor. That the three series of 1973 had the same complementary structure was confirmed in Section 18.2. Energy conservation (efficiency) turned into the competitiveness of exports (structural transformation), export revenue supported stockpiling (the buffer), and the existence of the stockpile gave industry a stable environment for investment. There is one point of difference from that time. The three-part set for oil had positive value in each 765 element even if each was undertaken independently. In the three-part set for AI, since, as seen in Section 18.3.1, the expansion of utilization itself entails an expansion of external procurement, pursuit of (b) alone while lacking (a) and (c) may operate also in the direction of lowering domestic value added per yen of digital procurement. That sequence and combination matter more than in the oil era is the design caution the Layer Zero framework adds. 18.11.2 Assessing Japan's Indispensability — The Choke Points Held, and the Domains Not Held The analysis so far has described Japan as a position on the nine cells. Placing Japan on the second coordinate introduced in Section 11 — geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15) — brings to light matters that cannot be derived from position. From this subsection through Section 18.11.6, this work is carried out in the same order as Section 11 — indispensability, desirability, attribution of quadrant. First the scope is settled. Section 11.2 stated that, of the three ways of measuring that Definition 15 lists, the time required to switch carries the most information, and that holding converts into bargaining power only where that time exceeds the cycle of the counterpart state's policy decision. This paper's evidence base contains neither measured values of the concentration of the items in which Japan is involved nor estimates of the time required to switch by item. What can therefore be done below is confined to two things: (i) confirmation of facts that can be settled as to whether holding exists, and (ii) inference by mechanism as to which of the five mechanisms of Section 11.2.7 — economies of scale, learning effects, capital specificity, the physical conditions of location, and accumulated skill — are operating. It is not measurement of level. Candidate (a) Semiconductor manufacturing equipment, materials and components. This is the domain Section 14.6 recorded as "Japan (manufacturing equipment and materials)." Of the mechanisms Section 11.2.1 decomposed for advanced lithography equipment, those extending to the domain of materials and equipment components, rather than of the equipment itself, are learning effects, capital specificity and accumulated skill, and of the five mechanisms only economies of scale can be shortened by funds (Section 11.2.7). The inference that the time required to substitute for this group of items is not short is supported by the mechanisms. Three qualifications are required, however. First, "equipment and materials" as a bundle is not the unit of negotiation. What Definition 15 requires is the time required to switch for a single item, and the greater the dispersion across items, the less bargaining power can be derived from the average of the bundle. Second, the holder is firms and sites, not the state. The state holds this only through the jurisdiction of export controls, and for the portion whose production sites lie abroad and the portion subject to the jurisdiction of other legal orders, holding and the right of exercise are separated (Section 11.2.3). Third, this paper has not carried out, item by item, a comparison of the time required to switch with the cycle of the counterpart state's policy decision. What can be settled is confined to a determination on an ordinal scale, that in‐ 766 dispensability is on the not-low side, and its level, range and duration cannot be determined on this paper's evidence. Candidate (b) Industrial machinery and robotics. Here the direction of the evidence requires care. Under the Economic Security Promotion Act (2022), the Japanese government designated an initial eleven items as specified critical materials by cabinet order of 23 December 2022. Among them are machine tools and industrial robots, permanent magnets, semiconductors, cloud programs, and critical minerals. This list is often read as a list of Japan's industrial strengths, but the purpose of the institution is to secure the stable supply of the materials concerned to Japan. That is, it is not an inventory of indispensability but an inventory of dependence, and not a list of the choke points Japan holds over other countries. Confusing the two is the error most readily made in leverage diagnosis, and it is for this reason that Appendix G separates them into distinct items. The concentration of the position Japan occupies on the supply side in robotics cannot be determined on this paper's evidence. What can be determined is confined to the point that robotics and on-site data are complementary assets contributing to the physical-interface intensity of Proposition 4 (Sections 18.5 and 18.8) — and this is an argument about position, not about indispensability. Candidate (c) Manufacturing sites for advanced logic — a domain in which indispensability is not high. Section 11.2.2 showed that the substance of the indispensability residing in a site is the learning of yield, and that equipment can be transferred while learning cannot. In the light of this mechanism, the situation within Japan does not constitute indispensability. A foreign firm's site began mass production of the 12 to 28 nm generations in December 2024, and its second plant, covering the 6 nm generation, is reported to be scheduled for operation in December 2027. Among domestic firms, confirmation of operation of a 2 nm GAA transistor was achieved in July 2025, with the start of mass production targeted for the second half of fiscal 2027. A site before mass production is not even a candidate alternative supplier, and yields in the start-up phase do not reach the level of existing sites. To describe this domain as one in which "Japan holds a choke point" would exceed the level of the evidence. Candidate (d) Computing infrastructure and foundation models — a domain in which there is no indispensability. The general provision of ABCI 3.0, the subsidies to domestic computing infrastructure under the cloud program category, and the continuation of GENIAC are all provision directed inward, and do not create a structure that other countries cannot bypass. The strategies of the domestic foundation model developers converge on lightweight, compute-efficient, Japanese-language and domain-specialized, and confidentiality-preserving systems, and there is a gap of one to two orders of magnitude from frontier developers in the volume of training compute inputs (Section 18.3.3). The deficit on the digital-related balance shown in Section 18.3.1 is the expression, in public statistics, of the fact that with respect to this layer Japan is not a holder of indispensability but a bearer of exposure. 767 Candidate (e) Siting and permitting, and two sources on which no determination is made. Section 11.2.5 showed that permitting for connection and siting is in substance a right of allocation, and Proposition 28 identified this as the third of the state's residual indispensable functions. Japan has this function. The electricity constraint treated in Section 18.3.4, however — an increment of 56.8 billion kWh (6.7% of the national total) in demand for electricity from data centres and semiconductor plants by fiscal 2035 — acts in the direction of raising the cost of choosing Japan as a site. That a residual function may become an object of negotiation is distinct from its constituting the indispensability of Definition 15. The latter holds only where the site concerned is not substitutable, and whether that holds cannot be determined on this paper's evidence. As to the refining of minerals (Section 11.2.4) and the routing of submarine cables (Section 11.2.6), the evidence notes contain no record concerning Japan's position. This paper makes no determination on these two — and making no determination is distinct from determining that they are low. The result of the inventory is not uniform. It is only for part of (a) that a not-short time required to substitute can be inferred on mechanism; (c) and (d) are unambiguously low; and (b) and (e) cannot be determined. Japan's indispensability can be described not as a single level but only in the form "for some groups of items a long time required to substitute is inferred on mechanism, but its range and level are unmeasured." This is a finer division of what Section 14.6 stated as "the indispensability component is not low," and does not contradict it. 18.11.3 Assessing Japan's Desirability — Five Components Market. Japan is a market that actually pays. Use of generative AI by firms reached 86.4% in fiscal 2025 and the rate of use by individuals 58.8% (Section 18.3.2), and the deficit on the digital-related balance indicates the scale of that payment (Section 18.3.1). Seen from the supplier's side, this is a ground for wishing to engage. The condition of Section 11.3.1 is required, however — market size converts into bargaining power only where the market is inelastic and conditions are imposed. Japan's AI Promotion Act is of the promotion type without penalties and has no structure for imposing conditions on suppliers (Section 18.3.3). The market component exists as purchasing power and scarcely operates as bargaining power. This divergence is not an omission but a consequence of institutional design. Rules and standards. For this component, avoiding exaggeration is itself the substance of the assessment. Section 11.3.2 listed five conditions for the extraterritorial diffusion of regulation — market size, regulatory capacity, stringent standards, inelasticity of the object, and indivisibility. Japan's institutional type is a combination of a promotion statute and soft law (the AI Guidelines for Business), and by design it does not satisfy the condition of stringent standards. De facto diffusion arises through multinational firms aligning their worldwide operations with the standards of the most stringent jurisdiction. A standard without penalties is therefore not an object of that channel so long as more strin‐ 768 gent standards exist in other jurisdictions. As to de jure diffusion — other jurisdictions legislating in imitation of Japan's standards — this paper possesses no evidence showing the extent to which Japan's standards are referred to in other jurisdictions. This paper therefore does not claim that Japan possesses influence equivalent to the Brussels effect. What can be claimed is confined to the point that the promotion type becomes an object of comparison as a third type alongside the regulatory-statute type and discipline by market and litigation (Section 14.6) — which is a claim about type, not about influence. Technology and capital. The position of the domestic foundation model developers (lightweight, specialized, on-premises operation, with a gap of one to two orders of magnitude in compute from the frontier) does not generate desirability in the form of the provision of general-purpose capability. What may generate desirability is the physical interface and the institutionalization of quality that Section 18.8 placed in the upper series of M2′ — process knowledge, criteria of evaluation and datasets in particular domains — and these have the same origin as the accumulation inferred in Section 18.11.2(a) to support indispensability. Japan's technology component is concentrated not in general-purpose capability but in particular domains. This paper possesses no measurement showing how much inducement to engage that thickness actually generates. As to capital, as Section 11.3.3 stated, what can be bought is engagement, not indispensability. Japan has a record of moving the siting decisions of foreign firms through public funds (Section 18.3.3). This is evidence that the capital component actually operates, but the extractive distortion of Proposition 6b is a mode of failure specific to this channel, and unless judged by the ratio of domestic value added to the capital, electricity and land provided, the acquisition of desirability through capital may remain a transfer of cost (Section 18.3.1.1). Trust. Two kinds of trust must here be distinguished. The first is component (iii) of national brain capital — the professional ethics and working practices that make trust in institutions possible (Definition 11; Section 18.5) — and for Japan this exists as an accumulation. The second is the trust infrastructure of Definition 17, that is, the three elements of (i) rules of liability allocation, (ii) conformity assessment and (iii) insurance. Examined for Japan: (i) lacks comprehensive legislation specific to AI, and because the AI Promotion Act is of the promotion type without penalties, the locus of liability is left to interpretation of existing civil and administrative law. For (ii), the soft law of the AI Guidelines for Business exists, but the level of institutionalization of third-party certification of conformity cannot be settled from this paper's evidence base. The same holds for (iii). In the light of the sequentiality shown in Section 11.3.5 — unless (i) is settled, (ii) cannot specify conformity with what; and unless (ii) holds, (iii) has no basis for underwriting — the state in which the starting point (i) is unsettled implies that all three elements are unestablished. By Proposition 25, this state bounds from above the depth of deployment of AI in regulated sectors (healthcare, finance, transport, public procurement, critical infrastructure). That is, the compounding of the deepening of M3 discussed in Section 18.9 does not turn beyond the level of provision of trust infrastructure. The relation between the two kinds of trust should also be made explicit. What Proposition 25 states is an effect of institutions, not an effect of reputation. That the first trust is thick 769 does not substitute for the absence of the second — accumulated working practices do not settle in advance who bears liability when damage occurs. In summary, three components have positive values — the market as purchasing power, technology concentrated in particular domains, and capital capable of moving siting — while for the extraterritorial diffusion of rules there is no evidence, and trust in the sense of Definition 17 is unestablished. On an ordinal scale, desirability is assessed as medium. This is consistent with what Section 14.6 recorded, that "technology and trust are thick, the market is medium, and extraterritorial diffusion of rules is limited" — the "trust" of Section 14.6 refers to the first trust, and as to the second, Section 14.6 itself records that the three elements are unestablished. 18.11.4 Placement on the Leverage 2×2, and the Uncertainty of the Determination The foregoing is now placed on the 2×2 of Section 11.5 — the Structurally Indispensable Type (indispensability high / desirability high), the Normative–Market Type (low / high), the Bottleneck-Specialized Type (high / low), and the Dependent–Peripheral Type (low / low). Combining the determination of Section 18.11.2 (indispensability is on the not-low side, but its level is unmeasured) with that of Section 18.11.3 (desirability is medium), Japan's attribution is the boundary between the Structurally Indispensable Type and the Bottleneck-Specialized Type. This is identical with the attribution recorded in Section 14.6, and this subsection does not change it but subdivides it. The assessment here does not contradict the placement of Japan in Section 14.14.1 under the first cross-cutting type (positioned in the Utilization Model while possessing high indispensability) and the fourth type (three countries involved in the M2 row standing in different quadrants on the leverage coordinates). The uncertainty of the determination is stated explicitly under four points. First, the measurement framework is provisional. As stated in Section 11.1, this paper does not present a single indicator synthesizing the two components, and uses them only as an ordinal scale. "Being on the boundary" is not a quantitative claim of lying at a midpoint but a description that attribution to either quadrant cannot be made uniquely. Second, the determination on the indispensability side is inference by mechanism and not measurement. If concentration were measured item by item and it were shown that several alternative suppliers exist and that the time required to switch is on the scale of a quarter, the determination would move toward the Dependent–Peripheral Type — a choke point at which switching is completed within a quarter is not, even as a choke point, an instrument of negotiation (Section 11.2). Third, quadrants disperse upon decomposition. Attribution of a quadrant with the state as the unit is a description of a centre of gravity, and upon decomposition by item or by sector, different quadrants stand side by side within the same country. This carries into the leverage coordinates the problem that Section 20 acknowledges as the coarseness of the unit of description. Fourth, being on the boundary is not obtaining the advantages of both sides. Of the vulnerabilities organized in Section 11.5, those of the Structurally Indispensable Type (maintenance re‐

quires continued operation, and costs become permanent) and those of the Bottleneck- Specialized Type (it is difficult to obtain compensation in negotiation before exercise, and the success of a design that routes around it costs the whole of the leverage) may operate simultaneously on the boundary. 18.11.5 Japan as an Illustration of Proposition 22 — That Position and Quadrant Do Not Coincide Setting the two coordinates side by side, Japan becomes an illustration of Proposition 22. The position on the nine cells is a composition of rapidly expanding M3×C1 accompanied by M2×C1 and selective M1 investment (Section 14.6), and the condition of viability derived by Proposition 13 requires movement of the centre of gravity from the Utilization Model toward the Transformation Model (M2′). The position on the leverage coordinates is, as in Section 18.11.4, the boundary on the higher-indispensability side. On the side of position, Japan is in a state requiring movement; on the side of leverage, it already occupies a certain position. The two do not coincide. There are three mechanisms of non-coincidence. First, the sources reside in different industries. The centre of gravity on the nine cells describes the centre of gravity of the national economy, whereas indispensability resides in a position on the supply chain of particular items. It is not necessary that the two arise from the same industry (Section 14.14.1). Second, the direction of time is reversed. The problem of position is a problem about the future acquisition of transformation value, and is unattained. The mechanisms that support indispensability — learning effects and accumulated skill — are functions of past years of operation, and are attained. High leverage does not compensate for weakness of position. They are separate accounts, and the balance in one cannot fill the deficit in the other. Third, the directions of movement do not coincide. Movement toward M2′ requires the formation of complementary assets, and part of these (the physical interface, on-site data) overlaps with the accumulation that supports indispensability; but the deepening of M3 does not overlap with it, nor does the construction of the guarantee level. The greater part of the policies that move position do not move leverage. From this structure, two inferences are alike prohibited. The inference "since Japan possesses indispensability, the problem of position is not serious" and the inference "since Japan is fixed in the Utilization Model, it has no leverage either." The former is mistaken by the second mechanism, the latter by the first. When Proposition 22 states that "one cannot be derived from the other," it means that both directions of derivation are prohibited, and Japan is an illustration of that prohibition. 18.11.6 Implications of Proposition 23 (The Paradox of Leverage Exercise) for Japan The absence of a record is stated at the outset. This paper's evidence notes contain no verified record of a case in which Japan exercised export controls or other measures with respect to a choke point it holds. This subsection is therefore not an analysis of 771 cases but a conditional applying Proposition 23 to Japan's position. What is stated is what would be induced if exercise were to occur, not a claim that exercise has occurred. (a) The speed of depreciation depends on the mechanism, and repetition acts nonlinearly. Section 11.6.2 separated the time constants of the four forms of search for substitutes — building up inventory takes months; designs that route around take from several quarters to a year; the development of alternative sources of supply takes years; and investment in domestic production takes several years for a choke point supported only by economies of scale, and a decade or more for one supported by learning effects and skill. If the inference of Section 18.11.2(a) is correct, depreciation against a single exercise is slow. The more exercise is repeated, however, the more the centre of gravity of the search moves from inventory and routing-around designs toward investment in domestic production. A single exercise may be absorbed by building up inventory; a repeated exercise justifies the decision to produce domestically. (b) That desirability remains at a medium level makes the price of exercise heavier. The complementarity at high levels formulated in Section 11.5 — that a state which is both indispensable and desired can exercise without bearing the price of damage to trust — does not operate sufficiently at a position where desirability is medium. Exercise entails a tax on desirability, and the room to absorb that tax is proportional to the magnitude of the benefits of engagement. The boundary position determined in Section 18.11.4 is therefore a position not suited to exercise. This implication holds independently of the fact that the level of indispensability is unmeasured — because it is derived from the determination on the desirability side alone. In addition, through the separation of holding from the right of exercise shown in Section 11.2.3, for the portion of items held by Japanese firms that falls under the jurisdiction of other legal orders, Japan's industry may bear the consequences of depreciation alone, without Japan participating in the decision to exercise. This cannot be avoided by a Japanese judgement to refrain from exercise. (c) What follows is therefore preparation not for exercise but for maintenance. Indispensability that is held and not exercised does not depreciate (Sections 11.2.4 and 11.6.1). Maintenance is not free, however. As Section 11.5 stated of the vulnerability of the Structurally Indispensable Type, learning effects and accumulated skill are maintained only by continued operation, and if operation stops, so does accumulation. This is isomorphic to the fact that, because stockpiles depreciate, supply security subsists only as continuous construction (Proposition 8; Section 18.10). Indispensability too is not a requirement to be attained but a flow to be maintained. The decline in the number of bearers and the rupture of transmission treated in Sections 18.5.3 and 18.5.4 are, in this context, at once attrition of national brain capital and passive depreciation of indispensability — even without exercise, it declines if operation and transmission thin. (d) The implication in the reverse direction. Japan is at once a side that exercises and a side that is exercised upon. The level of exposure shown in Section 18.3.1 means that, for the layers of computing infrastructure and foundation models, Japan may become the object of exercise by other countries. Proposition 23 can be read from this side too — the 772 questions of what forms of search for substitutes Japan could execute if subjected to exercise, and what their time constants would be, are precisely the design problem of the guarantee level treated in Section 18.10. The switching drills of Definition 6(iii) are nothing other than a procedure for measuring in advance the time constants of one's own search for substitutes. 18.11.7 Leverage Assessment of the Three-Part Set — Two Objective Functions Do Not Require the Same Policy Proposition 22 states that national strategy has two objective functions — the acquisition of transformation value (optimization of position) and resistance to changes of condition imposed from outside (maximization of leverage) — and that the two do not necessarily require the same policy. The three-part set is a composition Proposition 13 derived for position, and not one derived for leverage. Assessed from the standpoint of leverage, the three items do not perform uniformly. (a) M2′ — the only item that acts on both coordinates. The physical interface, on-site data and the institutionalization of quality that Section 18.8 placed in the upper series of M2′ are complementary assets of Proposition 4 and at the same time depend on the same accumulation as the mechanisms inferred in Section 18.11.2(a) to support indispensability — learning effects and accumulated skill. Investment in M2′ therefore acts positively on both position and leverage. The speeds at which it appears differ, however. What capital can buy is engagement, not indispensability, and of the five mechanisms only economies of scale can be shortened by capital (Section 11.3.3). Investment in M2′ appears more slowly in the maintenance of indispensability than in position. (b) The deepening of M3 — acts on position, does not act on leverage, and depending on design acts negatively. There are two negative channels. First, the expansion of utilization expands exposure (Section 18.3.1). Expansion of exposure widens the surface on which the other side's indispensability acts, and raises the other side's leverage. Second, by Proposition 24 (self-erosion of brain capital), national brain capital wears away to the extent that dependence on imported cognition substitutes for the repetition of human practice. What wears away is the same accumulation of skill inferred in Section 18.11.2(a) to support indispensability. This is the sharpest manifestation in Japan of the implication of Proposition 22 that the optimization of position and the maximization of leverage do not require the same policy. The sign depends on design, however. What Proposition 24 states is a consequence not of deepening as such but of the degree to which dependence substitutes for the repetition of practice. Deepening in a form that substitutes for practice on the ground generates wear, while deepening in a form that records, verifies and improves practice generates exclusive data endowment — and the latter, under the relative scarcification of authentic data of Proposition 27, raises the value of that data as a complementary asset. The sign of (b) in the three-part set is not determined unless these two designs are distinguished. 773 (c) The guarantee level — it does not raise one's own leverage but lowers the other side's. Here precision of terminology bears on substance. Definition 15 defines leverage as the power of the state concerned to realize its own preferences, and confines its two components to indispensability and desirability. The guarantee level raises neither — resistance to AI outage neither raises the cost to other countries of bypassing Japan nor creates a reason for other countries to wish to engage with Japan. That the guarantee level nevertheless belongs to the discussion of leverage is because it lowers the other side's leverage by reducing the damage that the other side's exercise of indispensability inflicts on Japan. To describe investment in the guarantee level as "raising Japan's leverage" is therefore mistaken under Definition 15; the correct description is "lowering the other side's leverage and raising Japan's reservation value in negotiation." This distinction is not a detail of usage — if the former description is adopted, investment in the guarantee level is entered in the same account as the acquisition of indispensability, inviting a return to the "domestic holding of selective C2 capability" that Section 18.10.1 rejected. (d) Trust infrastructure as a precondition of the three-part set. Proposition 25 states that trust infrastructure (Definition 17) is a condition prior to both the depth of the Utilization Model and the institutional embeddedness of the Transformation Model. At the same time, trust infrastructure is itself the fifth component of desirability. That is, it acts simultaneously on both (a) and (b) of the three-part set and on the desirability side of leverage. This paper does not revise the three-part set of Proposition 13. What it states is that all three items operate with the level of provision of trust infrastructure as their upper bound, and that this bound is, as in Section 18.11.3, unestablished for Japan. If there is work to be added to the three-part set from the standpoint of leverage, it is not the addition of a fourth item but the inspection of the preconditions of the existing three. (e) Implications for budget allocation, and the priority of measurement. Rendered in the language of allocation: allocation to the deepening of M3 acts on position; allocation to the transmission of skill in equipment, materials and manufacturing acts on leverage; and allocation to the three functions of the guarantee level lowers the other side's leverage. The three belong to different objective functions and cannot be evaluated by a single indicator — a synthesized single figure loses its power to discriminate where the signs of the components differ. This separation is the same operation as that by which the intensity- type indicator of Section 18.3.1.1 separated the amount procured from domestic value added. Finally, it is reaffirmed that the whole of this subsection's assessment precedes measurement. The measurement framework for leverage is provisional (Section 11.1), and the level of Japan's indispensability is unmeasured (Section 18.11.2). What Sections 18.11.2 through this subsection have settled is not a determination but a list of the measurements that a determination requires — the time required to switch item by item, the extent of the separation of holding from the right of exercise, the levels of the five components of desirability, and the state of provision of the three elements of trust infrastructure. This is a blank of the same character as the one Section 18.3.1 treated as the first blank in policy design, the absence of measurement of dependence, and it is acknow‐ 774 ledged as a limitation of this paper in Section 20. An operable diagnostic procedure is set out in Appendix G. A note on this subsection. The "list of the measurements that a determination requires" enumerated in this subsection is at once a list of items unmeasured for Japan and a list of items that any middle power should complete for its own country. The diagnostic form of Appendix G is composed with this list as its entry fields — what transfers is not Japan's determination but the composition of the fields to be completed and the procedure leading from completion to determination. 18.12 Branching Analysis — Reading the Three-Part Set Under the Four Variables of Section 15 Sections 18.7 through 18.11 developed the three-part set specified by Proposition 13 — M2′, the deepening of M3, and a guarantee level constituted by three functions — as static conditions of viability. This section rereads it dynamically. Section 15 [A] (the branching of the Transformation Model) identified that the transition of a state standing at, or aspiring to, M2×C2 branches into two paths, and that the variables deciding the branch are four — the rate of accumulation of national brain capital, the movement of the four indicators of complementary assets, electricity and computing infrastructure, and exogenous change in the conditions of access. Read as a bundle of instruments acting on each of these four variables, the three-part set becomes not an enumeration of policy menus but a design of the branch. 18.12.1 The Two Paths for Japan The two paths of Section 15 (15.3.1) are redrawn for Japan. Path (i) is the path on which the exclusive data, physical interfaces, criteria of evaluation and jurisdiction-specific requirement specifications accumulated in the course of transformation are not retained within applications but supplied as output, placing the country on the producing side. In the Japanese context, this corresponds to the position of supplying, for particular domains such as process control in manufacturing, record-keeping and decision support in healthcare and care, the processing of administrative procedures, and the maintenance of equipment, the foundation models, criteria of evaluation, benchmarks and datasets of the domain concerned. Since the M1 of Definition 3 does not require general-purpose character as a condition, this position is an M1×C2 within a delimited domain of definition. Path (ii) is the path on which the substance of transformation is replaced by calls to external platforms, the portion reducing to general-purpose functions is internalized by the producer, and the remaining activity converges on a thin layer on top of external platforms. As stated in Section 18.6.2, Japan's default path is the latter. This paper does not state, as a bare claim, the normative proposition that Japan ought to take path (i). What it states is a conditional of the same form as Proposition 13 — if the acquisition of value by Japan's M2 type is to subsist in the age of AI, it will be only where 775 the conditions of path (i) are satisfied. Choosing path (ii) is not in itself irrational. Procurement costs are low, investment risk is avoided, and it is faithful to comparative advantage. The reason this paper does not positively recommend that option lies in the externalization of value-definition capability stated in Section 17 (17.3.4) — a structure that acquiesces in the selection of ends being made elsewhere; but that this evaluation is not independent of the position of this paper's author is treated as a conflict of interest in Section 20. 18.12.2 Branch Variable (1) The Rate of Accumulation of National Brain Capital, and the Action of the Three-Part Set As Section 15 (15.3.2) emphasizes, the branch variable is not thickness (stock) but rate (flow). However thick the existing stock, if the rate of accumulation falls below the rate of attrition, the position declines. The present state of this variable in Japan is as stated in Section 18.5: the channels of attrition — decline in the base of bearers and rupture of transmission — are in progress, but the rate of accumulation is unmeasured. Of the three-part set, what acts on this variable is chiefly (b) the deepening of M3 and (a) M2′. The deepening of M3, where the use of AI at the site is accompanied by the redesign of operations, generates records of judgement and accumulation of operational knowledge. By the trade-off of Section 18.5.4, however, depending on the design of adoption it may act with the opposite sign — if the opportunities for transmission are substituted for first, the rate of accumulation falls. The action of policy on this variable is therefore signed by the design of adoption, not by the volume of adoption. M2′ acts through the channel by which the practice of transformation is itself the site of formation of national brain capital. If those who bear transformation do not exist domestically, tacit knowledge and the capacity for audit lose their site of formation. The third element of (c) the guarantee level (operational readiness) also acts positively on this variable in so far as switching drills cause the practice of audit and verification to be repeated. 18.12.3 Branch Variable (2) The Movement of the Four Indicators of Complementary Assets, and the Order of Erosion Section 15 (15.3.3) placed the ordering of coefficients predicted by Hypothesis H2 (physical- interface intensity and exclusive data endowment > institutional embeddedness > linguistic- contextual specificity) on a time axis, and derived the conditional statement that, where this ordering is correct, defensive power is eroded in order from the bottom — defence by language is lost first, then defence by institutions thins, and what remains at the last are the physical interface and exclusive data. Rereading the five series of Japan listed in Section 18.8 under this ordering yields implications for the allocation of investment. The fifth, linguistic and cultural assets, are eroded soonest on their own. The third, the institutionalization of quality, and the fourth, institutional trust and confidentiality, are in the middle range and are, as institutional embeddedness, the only indicator that policy variables can move directly, while carrying the ambivalence noted in Section 15 (15.3.3) — 776 a certification system raises integration cost for the producer and at the same time constitutes a cost of entry for domestic transformers themselves. The first, interfaces with the physical world, and the second, on-site data, remain last. Here the consequence of Section 18.5.2 takes effect. Since the physical interface and exclusive data are externalized traces of national brain capital, the movement of variable (2) is conditioned upon variable (1). The structure in which the two indicators that survive longest among the four depend on the least-measured substrate lies at the centre of Japan's branching analysis. Hypothesis H2 is, however, a task for verification, and the ordering has not been empirically confirmed. If the ordering differs, the order of erosion differs and the implications for the allocation of investment change. The implication of this subsection is therefore a conditional implication holding where the predicted ordering is correct. That a panel of Japanese application firms would be a first-class site for verifying this prediction was stated in Section 18.8. 18.12.4 Branch Variable (3) Electricity and Computing Infrastructure — Does Provision for the Guarantee Level Satisfy the Conditions of Ascent? This subsection returns to the question raised in the third series of Section 18.6.1. Section 18.10.2 showed, by recasting the object of guarantee into three functions, that the gap of one to two orders of magnitude in compute is not an axis on which the guarantee level is evaluated. Ascent along path (i), however, requires, as Section 15 (15.3.4) states, operational capacity (i-a) and renewal capability (i-b). The question therefore takes the following form — are the operational capacity and renewal capability provided as a guarantee level sufficient for domain-specialized production? This question has a form that admits of a quantitative answer. As to operational capacity, the calculation back described in Section 18.10.2 — accumulating the volume of inference required for degraded operation of critical processes and dividing it by inference efficiency and equipment utilization to convert it into electricity — yields the lower bound on the guarantee-level side. The requirement on the production side must be accumulated separately, and the difference between the two decides whether provision for the guarantee level satisfies the conditions of ascent. As to renewal capability, the required level is not the absolute volume of training compute but whether the published weights of the newest generation can be fine-tuned, evaluated and deployed domestically within a specified period. The asymmetry noted in Section 15 (15.3.4) — that a narrowing of the lag width of published weights greatly lowers the cost of the path of ascent for a country with renewal capability but changes nothing for a country without it — means, for Japan, that the presence or absence of this capability is a branch variable. GENIAC, the provision of domestic GPUs and ABCI 3.0 confirmed in Section 18.3.3 can be read as investment in this capability, but whether they achieve keeping pace within a specified period is not observed within the scope of this paper. As to electricity, the fourth series of Section 18.6.1 acts as a constraint as it stands. The path of downward transition stated by Section 15 [D] operates independently of intention. 777 In Japan, the means of relaxing this path are additions to generation and grid and the guidance of siting, and both are variables of energy policy rather than of AI policy. What the Layer Zero framework stated — that "national design concerning AI appears in the end as inseparably one with energy policy" (Section 18.3.4) — appears in the branching analysis in the form that variable (3), unlike the other three variables, lies outside AI policy. 18.12.5 Branch Variable (4) Exogenous Change in the Conditions of Access, and the Second Element of the Guarantee Level The fourth variable is exogenous change in the conditions of access to inputs. As Section 15 (15.2.2 and 15.3.5) treats, the conditions of access to advanced computing chips and advanced model weights have been revised on several occasions, and these revisions are not the result of choices by the Transformation Model states affected. Under the pressure toward cross-axis transition stated by Proposition 16 (Section 15), the procurement possibilities of non-aligned states become a function of political position rather than of price and quality. Of the three-part set, what acts on this variable is the second element of (c) the guarantee level (alliance guarantees). As stated in Section 18.10.3, C2 capability not covered by the three functions is covered not by holding but by the institutionalization of supply guarantees — long-term contracts, treaty-level guarantees of access, and diversification of suppliers across jurisdictions. The framework in which the Economic Security Promotion Act treats semiconductors and cloud programs as specified critical materials (Section 18.3.3) is a legal footing that makes supply guarantees for AI capability an explicit object of negotiation in trade and alliance policy. The portion of this variable that Japan can control is limited, however. The conditions of access are exogenous, and what negotiation may influence is confined to the degree of participation in the process by which the conditions are set. The three conditions of a third pole (Proposition 19) treated in Section 15 (15.7) constitute a framework for evaluating attempts to compose that participation multilaterally, but, as that section concludes, existing forms of cooperation do not satisfy the three conditions. 18.12.6 The Correspondence Between the Four Variables and the Three-Part Set, and the Indicators to Be Observed in Advance Organizing the above, the three-part set is arranged against the four variables as follows. (a) M2′ acts on variables (1) and (2); (b) the deepening of M3 acts on variables (1) and (2); and (c) the guarantee level acts on variables (3) and (4). That is, the three-part set covers nearly the whole of the portion of the four variables that Japan can control, but the coverage is not even. The electricity part of variable (3) and the exogenous change of variable (4) have controlling factors outside the three-part set. This asymmetry does not negate the complementarity of the three-part set stated in Section 18.11 — complementarity is a rela‐ 778 tion internal to the three-part set, and the existence of external variables does not alter that relation. In order to determine whether the branch has occurred in advance rather than after the fact, the indicators to be observed are specified. For variable (1), these are the time series of proxy indicators for the four components of Definition 11 (Appendix E), together with indicators concerning the design of AI adoption — whether the opportunities for transmission are being preserved. The operationalization of the latter is not supplied in this paper. For variable (2), these are the values of the four indicators of Proposition 4 measured for Japanese application firms before an event of generational change in foundation models, and gross margins and survival rates after the event (Hypothesis H2, Section 21). For variable (3), these are the difference between the value calculated back for operational capacity on the guarantee-level side and the requirement on the production side, and the record of keeping pace within the specified period on renewal capability. For variable (4), this is how the upper quantile of the redefining behaviour of the group of Japanese application firms changes in an event study taking revisions of the conditions of access as events (the falsification condition of Proposition 11, Section 17). None of these indicators has been constructed at present. The absence of indicators means that the branch is not observed, not that the branch has not occurred. Table 15. The four variables of Section 15 [A] and their correspondence with the three-part set (application to Japan) Branch variable Present state in Japan (Sections 18.3, 18.5, 18.6) Elements of the threepart set that act Indicators to be observed in advance (1) Rate of accumulation of national brain capital The channels of attrition (decline in the base of bearers, rupture of transmission) are in progress. The rate of accumulation is unmeasured (a) M2′; (b) the deepening of M3 (the design of adoption decides the sign); (c) operational readiness Proxy indicators for the four components of Definition 11 (Appendix E). An indicator measuring the preservation of opportunities for transmission is not in place (2) Movement of the four indicators of complementary assets The ranking of the five series has been identified. The order of erosion is conditioned upon the ordering predicted by Hypothesis H2 (a) M2′ (allocation of investment across the four indicators); (b) the deepening of M3 (generation of on-site data) The four indicators measured before an event of generational change, and gross margins and survival rates after the event (Hypothesis H2) (3) Electricity and computing infrastructure A gap of one to two orders of magnitude in compute. An increment of 56.8 billion kWh in demand for electricity expected by fiscal 2035 (c) The three functions of the guarantee level (operational capacity, renewal capability). The electricity part lies outside the three-part set The difference between the value calculated back for operational capacity and the requirement on the production side. The record of keeping pace within the specified period on renewal capability 779 Branch variable Present state in Japan (Sections 18.3, 18.5, 18.6) Elements of the threepart set that act Indicators to be observed in advance (4) Exogenous change in the conditions of access Revisions have occurred on several occasions. They are not the result of Japan's choices (c) The second element of the guarantee level (alliance guarantees). The Economic Security Promotion Act as a legal footing Changes in the upper quantile of the group of Japanese firms in an event study taking revisions of the conditions of access as events 18.13 "A Response to a Second Oil Shock" — As a Design Problem, Not a Prediction Finally, this section's framework is compressed into a single table of correspondence. Japan in 1973 met a price and supply shock upon a structure of 75.5% dependence on an essential resource held by outsiders, and redefined the state through three series: the institutionalization of stockpiles, the doubling of transformation efficiency, and the transformation of industrial structure. Japan in the 2020s has already recorded its dependence on the new strategic general-purpose resources of compute and foundation models in the form of a deficit on the digital-related balance of approximately 6.7 trillion yen a year. The counterparts have already been identified. To stockpiles corresponds the sovereign minimum guarantee level (which, unlike barrels, depreciates, and therefore becomes continuous construction rather than a single act of stockpiling — Proposition 8, Section 13). To energy conservation corresponds compute conservation — lightweight models, specialized types, efficient inference — and to energy intensity corresponds domestic value added per yen of digital procurement (Section 18.3.1.1). To the shift toward processing and assembly corresponds M2′ plus the deepening of M3. The asymmetries are also recorded in the table of correspondence. First, as stated in Section 18.3.1, this shock is proceeding not as a sharp rise in prices but as a gradual accumulation of external procurement, and lacks the occasion for political visibility of the 1973 type. Moreover, while that accumulation is visible as an amount of deficit, it is invisible as dependence — the divergence between exposure and dependence (Definition 4) is measured only by exercises (Appendix C). Second, by the asymmetry of depreciation of Proposition 8 (Section 13), the guarantee level corresponding to stockpiles is not completed by a single construction. Third, whereas energy conservation in oil was an approach toward a limit of efficiency set by physical law, compute conservation is a problem of pursuit in which the required level itself moves with the advance of the frontier. The correspondence is a correspondence of structures, not a copying of prescriptions. This paper explicitly refuses, however, to have this correspondence read as a prediction that "a second oil shock is coming." Whether a correlated stoppage of supply amounting to an AI outage occurs, or whether a geopolitical change in the conditions of access arises, are contingencies outside this paper's framework. What this paper asserts is a conditional. That is: given that dependence in the sense of Definition 4 is in fact rising (Hypothesis H1),

that supplier concentration is in fact high (Section 5), and that the balance-of-payments consideration for the dependence has in fact become permanent (Section 18.3.1), the consequences should a change in the conditions of supply occur would be isomorphic to the structure of 1973 — and, unlike in 1973, there is still time now to design before the shock. The three-part set of 1973 was constructed after the shock, at the tuition of a 23.2% rise in prices. Where the same structural understanding is available in advance, there is no need to pay the same tuition. National redefinition (Proposition 14, Section 17) is either compelled by crisis or anticipated by design, and which of the two it is, is an object not of prediction but of choice. This is why this section uses the term "a response to a second oil shock" as the name of a design problem rather than as a warning. Finally, the standpoint that the Layer Zero framework adds to this section is confirmed by way of conclusion. On the channel of transmission of Proposition 11 (Section 17), where Japan stands on the nine cells is not a matter for the Japanese state alone. The cell position and conditions of access of the state bound from above the set of redefinition options reachable by domestic firms (Kadowaki, 2026b), prescribe the range of future value that capital markets can price (Kadowaki, 2026g), and determine the distribution of the cognitive means available to individuals for self-definition (Kadowaki, 2026f). The 6.7 trillion yen of digital deficit is at once a figure in the balance of payments and an expression of the degree to which the operating conditions of the three lower layers are exposed to the prices, specifications and continuation decisions of foreign suppliers. Conversely, where the three-part set of M2′ plus M3 plus the guarantee level is constructed, it widens the options for redefinition by firms, justifies the allocation of capital to domestic complements, and supplies the material basis for the domestic universalization of access to AI (Proposition 12, Section 17). National redefinition is not an end in itself but an act of distributing the possibility of redefinition to the three lower layers — firms, capital and individuals. In this sense, the design problem of this section is nothing other than the design of the preconditions of this series as a whole. 18.14 The Three-Part Set Under the Three World Scenarios — The Robust Part and the Part That Depends on S1 The analysis to this point has tacitly presupposed a single world. In the terms of Definition 13, that world is S1 (fragmentation): a state in which the advance of the frontier continues to depend on large-scale compute, supplier concentration is maintained, the allocation of capability is drawn into the logic of security, and electricity and compute operate as rate-limiting factors. Section 16 took this state as the base case while making explicit that it is not the only world. The verbatim texts of the other two that Section 16 identifies — [S2] diffusion (a state in which open weights and small models come to meet the required levels for particular uses at the edge, the effective meaning of capability distance (Definition 2) contracts, and supplier concentration moves toward dissolution) and [S3] stagnation (a state in which the advance of capability meets diminishing returns, the increment of capability per additional investment falls below the opportunity cost of that 781 investment, and AI capability is levelled as a general-purpose tool) — are in Section 16 as Definition 13. This section evaluates the three-part set derived for Japan under each of these three states and separates the part robust across scenarios from the part justified only if S1 obtains. This separation is an exercise in calibrating the strength of this section's conclusions; it is undertaken not to weaken them but to identify which parts should await confirmation by leading indicators. Under [S1] fragmentation. In this world, all three elements of the three-part set carry the meanings stated in this section. (a) M2′ operates as a strategy that places a transformation margin protected by integration cost upon procured C2 capability, and since the absorption of general-purpose functions by the producer's standard inclusion continues, the allocation of investment across the four indicators of complementary assets decides defensive power. (b) The deepening of M3 becomes, under the condition that the expansion of utilization entails an expansion of external procurement, the work of raising domestic value added per yen of digital procurement from the side of the numerator. (c) The guarantee level has the highest value of the three elements in this world. Since supplier concentration is maintained, cross-axis transition (Proposition 16) proceeds, and the procurement possibilities of non-aligned states become a function of political position, the combination of the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability and the sensitive- processing condition with alliance guarantees becomes a precondition for maintaining position. The subsidies to computing infrastructure confirmed in Section 18.3.3 and the electricity constraint confirmed in Section 18.3.4 are both variables that govern the scale of investment in this world. Under [S2] diffusion. In this world the weights within the three-part set are exchanged. First, the importance of (a) M2′ rises. If the effective meaning of capability distance contracts and everyone can execute equivalent capability at the edge, holding capability generates no difference. What generates difference is only what that capability is connected to — exclusive domain data, the operation of physical equipment and on-site work, jurisdiction- specific requirement specifications, and the institutional position that assumes liability. The structure stated in Section 20.2, that "in a world in which the tiers collapse and AI capability is fully commoditized, the importance of this paper's discussion of the locus of transformation value increases," applies to Japan as it stands. Of the five series of M2′ listed in Section 18.8, the upper two — interfaces with the physical world and on-site data — act relatively more strongly in this world. Second, the requirement of keeping pace with the frontier falls. Since the renewal capability of Definition 6(i-b) is defined as the capability to fine-tune, evaluate and deploy domestically the published weights of the newest generation, its required level itself falls in S2 — because the distance to be kept pace with contracts. Likewise, the requirement for operational capacity moves from largescale centralized inference toward distributed execution at the edge, and the binding force of the electricity constraint (Section 18.3.4) also weakens relatively. Third, (c) does not thereby disappear. As Section 20.2 notes, even where open weights spread, the platforms executing large-scale inference may still be concentrated in cloud operators, so that the problem of supplier concentration persists, having moved to the platform layer. What 782 loses value in S2 is therefore not the guarantee level as a whole but the part of it directed at keeping pace with frontier-class capability. Under [S3] stagnation. In this world the source of value returns toward the physical world and toward the human side. If AI capability is levelled as a general-purpose tool and the marginal capability from additional investment falls below the opportunity cost, AI capability itself loses its attraction as an object of investment, and what remains is the thickness on the side of those who handle the tool. The value of national brain capital (Definition 11) and of the physical interface becomes relatively highest in this world. The four components identified for Japan in Section 18.5 — tacit knowledge of the field, judgment embedded in language and culture, the professional ethics and working practices that make trust in institutions possible, and the capacity for audit based on long domain experience — come to the fore as the residual that is not levelled, the further levelling proceeds. At the same time, in this world the channel of relative depreciation through the frontier's advance, one of the pressures toward descent derived in Section 18.6, weakens. If depreciation is slow, the condition that the speed of accumulation exceed the speed of depreciation becomes easier to satisfy. S3 is therefore the world with the least demanding conditions for Japan among the three scenarios. Being less demanding is not, however, the same as being advantageous — since the same relaxation extends to all other middle powers, there is no guarantee that relative position improves. Moreover, in this world the part of the investment in computing infrastructure confirmed in Section 18.3.3 whose purpose is keeping pace with the frontier remains as accumulation that is not recovered. Separation. Setting the above against one another, this section's conclusions divide into two layers. The part robust across scenarios consists of: the part of (a) M2′ resting on the four indicators of complementary assets and on national brain capital; the part of (b) the deepening of M3 accompanied by the redesign of operations and accumulation of operational knowledge; the part of (c) the guarantee level consisting of operational readiness (Definition 6(iii)), that is, the personnel and procedures able to execute a switch; and the determination indicator of domestic value added per yen of digital procurement formulated in Section 18.3.1.1. These have positive marginal value in every world — in S1 as complements that become scarce, in S2 as the sole differentiating factor converting diffused capability into value, and in S3 as the receptacle when the source of value returns toward the physical world and the human side. This composition coincides with what Proposition 20 identified as the set of no-regret actions — national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, and operational readiness. That the core of the three-part set, built up by this section from Japan's particular facts, coincides with the set derived independently by Section 16 from robustness across scenarios can be read as passing a robustness check on this section's conclusions. By contrast, the part that depends on S1 is as follows. First, the scale of operational capacity within the guarantee level — the capacity calculated back from the volume of inference required for degraded operation of critical processes justifies its present level only in 783 a world in which the probability of a supply stoppage is high. Second, that part of the level of investment in renewal capability whose purpose is to close the distance from the frontier within a specified period. In S2 the required level falls, and in S3 the advance to be kept pace with itself slows. Third, that part of the domestic construction of computing infrastructure confirmed in Section 18.3.3 whose purpose is to approach general-purpose peak performance. As Proposition 20 makes explicit, owning frontier-class computing infrastructure outright is scenario-dependent: it has high value in S1, becomes over-investment in S2, and becomes a stranded asset in S3. Fourth, the negotiating value of alliance guarantees (Definition 6(ii)) — only in a world in which supply is a function of politics does a supply guarantee have meaning as an object of negotiation. One design-related order follows from this separation. Execute the no-regret part first, and stage the part that depends on S1 through confirmation by leading indicators (Definition 14). What this section enumerated in Section 18.12.6 as "indicators to be observed in advance" were indicators for observing Japan's branch; in addition to those, a set of indicators is needed for observing which world is coming into being. The latter are selected by Section 16 on the two conditions of discriminating power and precedence, and are put by Appendix F into an operable form as a quarterly monitoring table. The threepart set of this section operates as an order of policy only when it is connected to both kinds of observation — observation of one's own branch and observation of the world's branch. None of the evaluations in this section involves any judgement about the probability of realization of the scenarios. Since Section 16 adopts the discipline of assigning no probabilities, this section likewise states not "which world will come" but only "what is not lost in any world." The burden this restraint imposes in practice is acknowledged as a limitation in Section 20. 18.15 Generalization to Middle Powers — Country-Independent Lessons Extracted from the Analysis of Japan In closing this section, the country-independent lessons extracted from the analysis of the single instance of Japan are formulated explicitly. The description to this point has been closely tied to Japan's particular figures and institutions and does not transfer to other countries as it stands. What transfers is the distinction between which structures operate irrespective of country and which change sign according to a country's configuration. The following four points are the general forms that can be extracted from this section's analysis, and each corresponds to a proposition of this paper. Lesson (a): The success of a utilization policy is not by itself proof of success. The expansion of exposure (Definition 4) proceeds together with the deepening of utilization. The more AI is put into a country's processes of production and daily life, the more the external procurement of that input increases. That the rate of adoption has risen, that use has spread, and that cases of utilization have increased are therefore none of them indicators of the success of national strategy — for they are also indicators that exposure has expanded. In Japan this structure appeared in the form of the simultaneous observation 784 of a sharp rise in the rate of individual use over two years (Section 18.3.2) and a more than threefold widening of the deficit on the digital-related balance over ten years (Section 18.3.1). In general form, since quantitative indicators of utilization and quantitative indicators of external procurement move in the same direction, the success or failure of policy cannot be determined by either. Determination requires a ratio — the value added generated domestically per unit of external procurement, that is, the intensity-type indicator formulated in Section 18.3.1.1. The design of this indicator differs with each country's statistical system, but the composition of placing external procurement in the denominator and domestic value added in the numerator transfers. Conversely, setting a reduction in the amount procured as an objective amounts to setting the suppression of utilization as an objective, and this is an error in any country. Lesson (b): The configuration of the four components of national brain capital differs by country, and where the configuration differs, the effective strategy differs. Definition 11 constitutes national brain capital from four components — (i) tacit knowledge of the field, (ii) judgment embedded in language, culture and aesthetic sense, (iii) the professional ethics and working practices that make trust in institutions possible, and (iv) the capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience. Japan's configuration is one in which (i) and (iii) are thick, (ii) is supported by a language area of medium size, and (iv) is concentrated in particular industrial domains (Section 18.5). It is because of this configuration that Japan's M2′ took a composition placing the physical interface and the institutionalization of quality in its upper series (Section 18.8). But a country with a different configuration arrives from the same theory at a different strategy. Three types are given by way of illustration. First, in countries with a large language area, the value of component (ii) is structurally high. Where the speaker population is large, the volume of data in the language concerned, the criteria of evaluation and the size of the downstream market are all large, and linguistic-contextual specificity may possess defensive power on its own. In this case the ranking of the four indicators of Proposition 4 differs from Japan's, and it is possible that linguistic-contextual specificity is no longer lowest. The ranking predicted by Hypothesis H2 (physical-interface intensity and exclusive data endowment > institutional embeddedness > linguistic-contextual specificity) is a theoretical inference from the degree to which integration cost is kept high, and whether the ranking reverses where the size of the language area exceeds a threshold is a task for verification. Second, in countries where institutional trust is thin but people are abundant, the configuration is one in which component (iii) is weak while the latent quantity of components (i) and (iv) is large. Here the path of using institutional embeddedness as a complementary asset is costly, and priority instead goes to the path of connecting the thickness of the human stratum to exclusive data and the physical interface — concentrating the operation of particular domains domestically and designing in advance the conditions under which the data generated from that operation are not handed over abroad. Trust in institutions is an accumulation that takes time to build (the upward transition of Proposition 15) and cannot be placed at the base of a short-run strategy. Third, in countries where energy is inexpensive, the energy constraint of Pro‐ 785 position 21(i) is relaxed. Here, because the cost of building operational capacity is low, holding the first element of the guarantee level thickly becomes rational, and further, the move upstream through capital treated in Section 15 [C] — the path of attempting to ascend to the Resource-Producing Model by attracting computing infrastructure and people — enters the set of options. The extractive distortion stated by Proposition 6b is, however, a mode of failure specific to this path, and should be judged by the ratio of local value added to the quantity of electricity, land and tax preference granted. What is common to the three illustrations is the structure that, while which component takes effect changes with the configuration, the list of components and the way they are measured do not change. What is therefore asked of readers in other countries is not to import Japan's conclusions but to measure their own four components along the measurement framework of Appendix E and to derive from that configuration the ranking of their own complementary assets. This paper recognizes as theory that the ranking may differ by country, and does not present Japan's ranking as a general solution. Lesson (c): The implication that, absent action, the position declines is universal. The asymmetry of transition asserted by Proposition 15 contains no attribute of any country. An upward transition requires the accumulations of complementary assets, national brain capital, computing infrastructure and electricity, and its time constant is measured in years, longer than the time constant of policy decision. A downward transition requires no accumulation and arises passively merely through the relative depreciation of existing accumulations (Proposition 8). This asymmetry depends on neither income level, technological level, nor political system. The conclusion derived for Japan in Section 18.6, that "the default path is descent," is not a pessimism peculiar to Japan but holds in the same form for every country that does not accumulate. Conversely, this conclusion is not an evaluation of Japan's present state but merely the form of a comparison between the speed of accumulation and the speed of depreciation. Whether readers in other countries derive the same conclusion for their own country is decided only by measuring their own speed of accumulation. And as Section 18.6 acknowledged for Japan, the speed of accumulation is at present scarcely measured in any country. The absence of measurement does not mean that descent is not occurring. Lesson (d): No-regret actions should be executed first irrespective of country. Proposition 20 asserts that the set of investments with positive expected value irrespective of which world scenario is realized is not empty, and that this set is composed of national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, and operational readiness. The composition of this set does not depend on the country. What depends on the country is only the problem of allocation — at what level one's own country presently stands on each of the four elements, and which element has the highest marginal value. The order of investment at a stage where the scenarios are difficult to discriminate therefore takes the same form in every country — the no-regret set first, and scenariodependent investment staged through confirmation by leading indicators (Definition 14). The separation performed for Japan in Section 18.14 is one application of this general 786 rule. Readers in other countries can compose the monitoring table of Appendix F to suit their own statistical system and perform the same separation for their own investment items. Behind these four lessons stand the three constraints that middle powers receive in common. This section's analysis followed how these three constraints operate simultaneously in Japan, but what Proposition 21 asserts is that these three constraints are independent of region, income level and political system. Proposition 21 (common constraints on middle powers) is set out verbatim in Section 14.13. Its three constraints — (i) the energy constraint (the expansion of computing infrastructure is rate-limited by the supply of electricity and the provision of the grid, and a country unable to procure these domestically cannot maintain the upper tiers of the producing or Transformation Models), (ii) the data-sovereignty constraint (a country unable to design for itself the conditions on which the data of its own language, industry and administration are handed over to external platforms is structurally impeded in the formation of complementary assets), and (iii) the value-definition constraint (a country that confines the purpose of adopting AI to efficiency gains will, within a structure in which the competitive advantage of efficiency diminishes, be maximizing a diminishing variable) — are all independent of the level of technological capability, and both cases in which a technologically advanced country fails on one of the three constraints and cases in which a technologically later-developing country satisfies the three constraints are alike possible. For the verbatim formulation, including the falsification condition, see Section 14.13. The final sentence of Proposition 21 states the standing of this section most succinctly. Both cases in which a technologically advanced country fails on one of the three constraints and cases in which a technologically later-developing country satisfies the three constraints are alike possible. Japan is an instance for examining the former possibility, not an instance that denies the latter. The figures this section has settled for Japan are Japan's; the procedure this section has demonstrated is that of middle powers in general. When readers run the same procedure for their own country, the same conclusion as this section's will not necessarily follow, nor would its failure to follow constitute a refutation of the theory. What the theory demands is not agreement in conclusions but a shared set of quantities to measure and a shared order in which to set them against one another. Finally, the limits of this generalization itself are stated. Japan possesses a particular combination — high income, high technology, and an energy-importing country — and there are limits to extrapolation to countries not possessing that combination. Proposition 21's claim that the three constraints are independent of region, income level and political system concerns whether the constraints operate, and does not state that the capacity to respond to them is independent. Fiscal slack, administrative capacity, the depth of capital markets, and position in international negotiation are all variables that govern the capacity to respond, and this section takes them as given at Japan's levels. This section's demonstration therefore shows how the procedure runs in a country possessing to some 787 degree the resources for a response, and for countries where the resources themselves are the constraint, only the earlier stage of the procedure — what to measure and what to prioritize — transfers. This limit is acknowledged in Section 20. Finally, the route for rereading this section for one's own country is made explicit. Readers with different industrial structures — middle powers in Europe, oil-producing states of the Gulf, hub states of Southeast Asia and others — can likewise produce a comparative analysis in the same form as this section by entering their own figures into Appendix D (diagnosis of position), Appendix E (measurement framework) and Appendix G (diagnosis of geoeconomic leverage). The three appendices are the separated form of the procedure this section ran upon Japan's figures, put into a shape that operates once the country name and the figures are replaced. The names of regions and types listed here are given in order to illustrate types of industrial structure, and contain no evaluation of the policies or positions of any country. 18.16 Applying the Conditions for an AI Foundry State to Japan — Assessment by the Four Conditions of Proposition 39 Section 12 distinguished three forms of what the Transformation Model may supply outward — the export of capability, the export of products, and the export of integrated systems — and, for the export of integrated systems (Definition 20), formulated the conditions under which an exporting state subsists as the four conditions of Proposition 39. It also formulated, as Proposition 40, the rule of selection among procurement modes for the side that imports. That section further gave a name to this composition — the composition that does not itself produce frontier capability but procures it from outside, transforms it by the complementary assets, national brain capital and trust infrastructure of its own jurisdiction into a system that can be operated, and supplies it as an integrated system to external jurisdictions. It is the AI Foundry Model (Definition 21; Section 12.1.6), and a state that adopts this type is called an AI Foundry State. This section applies that framework to Japan. What Section 18.15 extracted were country-independent lessons; what this section performs is the work in the reverse direction — applying the framework in general form to a single jurisdiction and separating, condition by condition, the domains in which it is satisfied from those in which it is not. The verbatim formulations of Definition 20, Definition 21 and Propositions 38 to 40 are in Section 12 and are not repeated here. The question this section addresses accordingly takes the following form — for which domains, in the light of the four conditions of Proposition 39, might Japan adopt the type of an AI Foundry State? The form of this question constrains the direction of the answer in two respects. First, this is a question of conditions, whether it might adopt, and not a descriptive attribution that it is such. Second, the determination is made not for the jurisdiction as a whole but domain by domain. This section does not state that Japan is an AI Foundry State, or that it ought to become one. What it states is how far each of 788 the four conditions can be confirmed for which domains of Japan; where confirmation is not possible, that is recorded as such. Three disciplines are imposed on the application. First, Proposition 39 is determined not for a jurisdiction as a whole but only for a pair of jurisdiction and domain (Section 12.3.1). The question "can Japan be an AI Foundry State?" is therefore unanswerable as put. What is answerable is the question "does Japan satisfy the four conditions for domain X?" Second, this section does not exceed the range of this paper's evidence base — in addition to the difficulty of observing export records themselves (Section 12.3.6), this paper has measured neither concentration by domain nor time required to switch (Section 18.11.2). What can be done is therefore confirmation of facts that can be settled and inference by mechanism, condition by condition, and not measurement of level. Third, the determinations are not tilted toward what favours Japan. At least two of the conclusions below are unfavourable to Japan. 18.16.1 (i) Domain-Specific National Brain Capital — The Domains That Are Thick, and Those That Are Not The first condition is the accumulation of practice in the business domain concerned, together with a human stratum able to carry operation and verification. As Section 18.5 confirmed with respect to the four components of Definition 11, the domains in Japan for which this accumulation can be confirmed are manufacturing processes and the maintenance of equipment, the practice of medicine and care, and the practice of quality assurance, inspection and supervision. It is with respect to this range that Section 18.5.1 recorded component (i) (tacit knowledge of the field) and component (iii) (the professional ethics and working practices that make trust in institutions possible) as thick. Component (iv) (the capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience) is distributed among the professional strata of medicine, finance, manufacturing and administration, but it is concentrated in industrial domains and is not thick across domains. The domains without thickness must be stated with the same precision. For the layers of computing infrastructure and foundation models, Japan is on the side of exposure and not of accumulation. The deficit on the digital-related balance widened from approximately 2.0 trillion yen in 2014 to approximately 6.7 trillion yen in 2024 (Section 18.3.1); the strategies of the domestic foundation model developers converge on lightweight, compute-efficient, Japanese-language and domain-specialized, and confidentialitypreserving systems; and there is a gap of one to two orders of magnitude from frontier developers in the volume of training compute inputs (Section 18.3.3). As to manufacturing sites for advanced logic likewise, a site before mass production does not constitute accumulation, as stated in Section 18.11.2(c). In addition, the discipline shown in Section 18.11.2(b) is repeated here — the list of specified critical materials under the Economic Security Promotion Act is an inventory of dependence, not a list of Japan's strengths. Confusing the two is the error most readily made in determining Proposition 39(i). 789 Condition (i) is also subject to the qualification attached in Section 12.3.1. The export of integrated systems means either continuously sending out people able to operate the system, or sending out people able to train the receiving side without themselves remaining, and it therefore subsists only within a range that does not thin the practice of the domain concerned in the home jurisdiction. Under a situation in which the workingage population is projected to fall from 74.06 million in 2020 to 59.78 million in 2040 (Section 18.5.3), this qualification operates strongly for Japan. How much human slack can be turned toward export in domains where the base of bearers is contracting is a quantity this paper has not measured. The discipline of Section 18.5.3 extends here as well — a projection of numbers of persons is not a projection of the quantity of skill. 18.16.2 (ii) Trust Infrastructure — Examination by Domain The second condition is that the three elements of rules of liability allocation, conformity assessment and insurance (Definition 17) are in place for the domain concerned. What Section 18.11.3 examined as the fifth component of Japan's desirability is here reread as a condition of export. For systems incorporating AI, the determination is clear. As to (i) rules of liability allocation, Japan has no comprehensive legislation specific to AI, and because the AI Promotion Act is of the promotion type without penalties, the locus of liability is left to interpretation of existing civil and administrative law. As to (ii) conformity assessment, the soft law of the AI Guidelines for Business exists, but the level of institutionalization of third-party certification of conformity cannot be settled from this paper's evidence base. The same holds for (iii) insurance. In the light of the sequentiality shown in Section 11.3.5 — unless the starting point (i) is settled, (ii) cannot specify conformity with what; and unless (ii) holds, (iii) has no basis for underwriting — it can only be determined that, for systems incorporating AI, Proposition 39(ii) is at present satisfied for no domain. Section 12.3.2 stated that the capability to design contracts assuming liability arises only from experience in which rules of liability allocation are clear in the home jurisdiction and contracts have been repeated under them. So long as the site of that repetition is not institutionally provided, the formation of this capability does not proceed either. This is the clearest deficiency for Japan among the four conditions. This paper does not evaluate the merits of Japan's institutional type — what it describes is the structural consequence that the institutional choice of the promotion type has for the determination of Proposition 39(ii). For domains not involving AI, on the other hand, Japan has an example in which the three elements have been in place over a long period. The supply security of oil is such a case. The Petroleum Stockpiling Act (1975) and the Energy Conservation Act (1979) laid down in statute the allocation of responsibilities and obligations; conformity with an internationally common standard, the stockpiling obligation of IEA member states (90 days of net imports), is continuously confirmed; and the procedures and apportionment of release are institutionalized. Japan's stockpiles stand at a total of 241 to 248 days as of 2026, approx‐ 790

imately 2.7 times the obligatory level; in the IEA collective action of March 2026 it contributed 79.8 million barrels (18.7% of the total); and in May of the same year it began releasing national stockpiles equivalent to approximately 20 days of domestic consumption. This paper evaluates neither the merits of these measures nor the background of the collective action. What it describes is the institutional fact that, for this domain, the three elements are complete and a record exists of their having actually operated. The significance of this example for this section is not a claim that Japan could export this system — that lies outside this paper's object domain — but that it shows condition (ii) differs greatly by domain for Japan, and that whether the elements are in place is a consequence of institutional process rather than of the level of capability. 18.16.3 (iii) Operational Records Within the Home Jurisdiction — Domains With Accumulation, and Domains That Are Thinning The third condition is that the system concerned operates within the jurisdiction's own territory and possesses records including a history of failures and corrections. Section 12.3.3 located the content of the parenthetical "a system without records cannot be transferred" in the fact that what the authorities of the receiving side seek is not theoretical function but what actually happened. What is sought above all is the record of failures, and the history of corrections is the sole evidence of how a system behaves in abnormal conditions. What can be confirmed as accumulated records for Japan are the records of operation, maintenance, failure and correction of equipment with long service lives, and these are nothing other than component (i) of Section 18.5.1 in its form externalized into value (Proposition 18). The domain of supply security stated in the preceding subsection is likewise an example satisfying this condition, in that it possesses records of operation including release, an event outside ordinary operation. Two facts require attention with respect to this condition, however. First, records of the operation of systems with AI incorporated into critical processes are thin. This is a consequence of the determination in the preceding subsection — by Proposition 25, in a jurisdiction lacking trust infrastructure, deployment remains confined to peripheral operations where liability is unlikely to be at issue. That the rate of individual use of generative AI rose sharply from 9.1% in fiscal 2023 to 58.8% in fiscal 2025 while remaining the lowest among the countries compared (Section 18.3.2) shows a narrowing of the lag in access, but does not show accumulation of records of failure and correction in critical processes. The two are distinct quantities. Second, and more fundamentally, there are domains in which the base of operational experience is itself contracting. Oil refining capacity fell approximately 41%, from its peak of 5.27 million barrels per day in 2001 to 3.11 million barrels per day at the end of April 2026, and the number of refineries halved from 36 in 1995 to 19. The self-definition as a "transforming country" treated in Section 18.4 concerned occupying the seat of transformation, not maintaining the capability of transformation. What Section 12.3.3 stated — 791 that "where the domain concerned is small in the home jurisdiction, the volume of records accumulated is also limited" — is, for this domain in Japan, not an assumption but an observed process. Since records of rarely occurring events are harder to obtain the smaller the scale of operation, contraction of the base weakens condition (iii) over time. This structure is isomorphic to what Section 18.5.3 stated of the base of bearers, and the two act in the same direction. 18.16.4 (iv) Portability — The Most Binding Condition for Japan Proposition 39 states that, of the four conditions, portability is the most binding, and that the capability to export integrated systems is governed not by the height of capability in the domain concerned but by the looseness of the coupling between that capability and the institutions of the home jurisdiction. This claim carries the heaviest implication for Japan. This section states that implication without steering it either favourably or unfavourably. Section 12.3.4 divided into four the channels by which a system depends on the institutions of its home jurisdiction — reference to statutes, the structure of occupations and qualifications, tacit premises, and the structure of data. Reading these four channels for Japan, the following can be said. First, the practice that Section 18.5.1 listed as the centre of component (i) — the critical points of a process, the detection of the precursors of an anomaly, the handling of exceptions not written in the manuals — subsists by definition upon premises that are not made explicit. It is precisely with respect to accumulation of this kind that the third channel (tacit premises) operates most strongly. Section 12.3.4's observation that, where transfer fails, the cause of the failure often lies not in what was made explicit but in what was not, applies directly to this component. Second, the practice of quality assurance, inspection and supervision, and the working conventions of administrative procedure, which Section 18.5.1 listed as component (iii), are coupled with Japan's statutes, forms and allocation of official authority, so that the first and second channels operate directly. Third, as to indicator (d) linguistic-contextual specificity of Proposition 4, Section 10.3.4 assessed it as the most readily eroded of the four indicators, but from the standpoint of portability the sign is reversed — even an indicator that is readily eroded requires, so long as the system depends on language and documentary form, wholesale reconstruction on the receiving side (Section 12.4.2(ε)). Fourth, as to the structure of data, the relation stated in Section 12.3.4 — that the higher the exclusive data endowment of Proposition 4, the lower the portability — operates the more strongly the thicker the substrate that Section 18.5.2 described as "relatively thick." The determination that follows is not agreeable for Japan. Japan's operating systems are strongly coupled with the institutions, conventions and language of its own jurisdiction in proportion to how good they are, and that coupling may become an obstacle to export. The situation Section 12.3.4 described as one that "may even correlate negatively with the height of capability" is, for Japan, not a hypothetical possibility but something directly to be anticipated from the content of conditions (i) and (iii). Section 18.5.2 792 stated that in countries where the substrate is relatively thick, raising the four indicators reduces to a problem of institutional design; but under Proposition 39 the content of that institutional design must include a design of separation. The description in Section 18.5.2 did not contain this element. Portability may be the greatest task for Japan's export of integrated systems — that is, of the four conditions that decide whether Japan might adopt the type of an AI Foundry State (Definition 21), it is this condition that operates most bindingly. To avoid steering, the possibility in the reverse direction is also made explicit. That portability is low does not immediately mean that the export of integrated systems is impossible. As Section 12.4.1(β) stated, where the regulation of the domain concerned is constituted in a form consistent with international standards, the form of proof of conformity becomes close across jurisdictions and portability is supported. The domain of supply security stated in Section 18.16.2 occupies a position that is an exception because it is constituted as conformity with an internationally common standard (a stockpiling obligation of 90 days of net imports) and possesses a record of having operated in the form of collective action in which many jurisdictions participate simultaneously. What decides the height of portability is not the level of capability but which standards the system was built by reference to. This contrast yields a design guideline for Japan's other domains. 18.16.5 Treating Portability as a Design Problem — What Is Required Section 12.3.5 stated that portability is an attribute that cannot be added after the fact, and that a design dividing a system into "the part specific to the home jurisdiction" and "the transferable part" must be chosen at the point at which construction begins. Making this requirement concrete for Japan, at least three tasks can be identified. None is newly proposed by this paper; each is the general form of Section 12.3.5 with Japan's conditions substituted in. First, the separation design of the system. Dividing the design documents of a business process into a description of "what is to be achieved" and a description of "which statutory requirements are satisfied and how," and composing the latter as a replaceable annex. As to liability allocation, separating the substantive allocation (who makes which judgement, and who bears which outcome) from its legal construction (by which type of contract and which clauses it is realized). As to proof of conformity, separating the content of the records that serve as evidence from the form in which they are submitted, and aligning the system of records with international standards. This last point is, as Section 12.3.5 stated, support from the institutional side that reduces the burden on the home jurisdiction's own operators while at the same time raising the portability of the system. To add a point about Japan: the non-fulfilment of condition (ii) stated in Section 18.16.2 has an implication for the order of this work — at a stage where rules of liability allocation are not settled, the "legal construction" side that is to be separated is not determined, so that the separation design itself cannot be begun. The provision of condition (ii) is also a precondition for investment in condition (iv). 793 Second, accumulation of operational records across multiple jurisdictions. What Proposition 39(iii) requires is records of operation within the home jurisdiction, but what serves as evidence of portability is a record that the same system operated under different institutions as well. The two are distinct, and no degree of thickening of the former yields the latter. As confirmed in Section 18.16.3, the greater part of the records Japan possesses are within its own jurisdiction. To obtain evidence of portability, it is necessary to operate in several jurisdictions from a small scale onward and to leave a history of failures and corrections for each. This process sacrifices efficiency in the home jurisdiction, as Section 12.3.5 stated — because providing an interface generates the cost of coordination across that interface. Third, carving out the parts that do not depend on language. Section 12.3.5 indicated the technique of placing conformity with language and documentary form in layers of pre-processing and post-processing rather than in the model itself. To do this for Japan's systems is an operation in the opposite direction from the "design-side remedy" that Section 10.3.4 discussed for indicator (d) — whereas Section 10.3.4 treated a design that thickens linguistic-contextual specificity as a wall, what is required here is a design that distinguishes the part made to function as a wall from the part detached and not so made to function. This paper does not determine whether these two designs are compatible for one and the same domain. Where they are not compatible, Japan will have to choose, domain by domain, between defensibility and portability. This is the concrete Japanese form of the tension arising between Proposition 4 and Proposition 39 (Section 12.3.4). This choice carries costs, and a profession of portability for which no cost is paid remains a form. Section 12.3.7 releases this reservation. From this paragraph onward, Proposition 41 (the condition under which embedding and portability are compatible) is substituted into Japan's conditions; the formulation, falsification condition and limits of the proposition are in Section 12 and are here confined to reference. What Proposition 41 states is that defensibility and portability are not determined exclusively by the nature of a system — they are compatible only where the system is separated into (a) a jurisdiction-specific layer (the part depending on the legal institutions, language and conventions of the jurisdiction concerned) and (b) a portable core (the part not depending on jurisdiction, such as the business logic of the domain, the procedures of verification, and the structure of liability allocation), with the interface between them explicitly defined. The reservation placed in the preceding paragraph — that this paper does not determine whether the two designs are compatible for one and the same domain — is therefore released, conditionally. They are compatible; but on the condition that the interface is made explicit. And the branch stated as "where they are not compatible, Japan will have to choose, domain by domain, between defensibility and portability" is reread as a branch decided not exogenously by the nature of the domain but by whether an interface has been designed. The direction this rereading specifies for Japan is single. Against the structure confirmed in Section 18.16.4 — that Japan's operating systems are strongly coupled with the 794 institutions, conventions and language of its own jurisdiction in proportion to how good they are — the design principle Proposition 41 supplies is not to weaken the coupling. What is to be adopted is not shallower embedding but the explicit definition of an interface and the confinement of the locus of embedding outside that interface. The reason the route of shallower embedding is not the solution is as Section 12.3.7 stated in general form, and it is the same for Japan — the accumulation of condition (i) confirmed in Section 18.16.1 and the operational records of condition (iii) confirmed in Section 18.16.3 both subsist by being embedded in institutions and in the field, so that cutting away the embedding cuts away the very object of purchase identified in Section 12.2.2 (the establishment of three things: the locus of liability, proof of conformity, and account to the supervisory authority). Which parts, then, of Japan's operating systems belong to the jurisdiction-specific layer, and which parts might become the portable core? This is stated only within the range confirmable on this paper's evidence base. The parts of which it can be said with certainty that they belong to the jurisdiction-specific layer are on the institutional side. Japan's institutions concerning AI are composed chiefly of a comprehensive promotion- type statute without penalties (the Act on the Promotion of Research and Development and Utilization of Artificial Intelligence-Related Technologies, enacted 28 May 2025 and promulgated 4 June, with Chapters 3 and 4 in force on 1 September of the same year) and non-binding guidance (the AI Guidelines for Business, version 1.1, of the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications and the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, published 28 March 2025), to which the framework of specified critical materials under the Economic Security Promotion Act (2022) connects (Sections 18.3.3 and 18.11.2). All of these have effect or serve as reference points only within Japan's jurisdiction, and do not transfer as they stand to a receiving jurisdiction. Likewise, the practice of quality assurance, inspection and supervision and the working conventions of administrative procedure listed as component (iii) in Section 18.5.1 are coupled with Japan's statutes, forms and allocation of official authority (Section 18.16.4), and the register of outputs, documentary forms and modes of dialogue with users likewise function only within the Japanese language. In terms of the indicators of Proposition 4, (c) institutional embeddedness and (d) linguistic-contextual specificity are the typical members of this layer (Section 10.3.5). As to the parts that might become the portable core, the statement is made as structural inference rather than as settled fact. The range Section 18.16.6 organizes as "the side on which the conditions may be assembled" — domains in which the core of judgement concerns the state of a physical process and differences by jurisdiction are small (anomaly detection in equipment, prediction of degradation, optimization of process conditions, planning of maintenance) — is, on the coordinates of Proposition 41, the side that may be carried on the portable core. In addition, of the capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience listed as component (iv) in Section 18.5.1, the skeleton of the verification procedure — what is confirmed at what frequency, which deviations are detected at which thresholds, and how they are corrected — includes parts that, 795 though their form of expression varies by jurisdiction, do not vary as structure. A similar division is possible for data as well — the recorded content itself belongs to the jurisdiction- specific layer, while the procedures for generating records and confirming their authenticity may belong to the portable core (Section 10.3.5). All of these are, however, structural determinations that they "might be carried" on the portable core, and not determinations that the systems of the domains concerned in Japan are in fact portable. This paper possesses no indicator measuring portability by domain in advance of transfer (Section 20.8(i)), and does not determine which jurisdictions have succeeded in making the interface explicit (Section 12.3.7). What can be stated here is what the criterion of assignment directs with respect to Japan's conditions, not the result of the assignment. And this rereading does not lighten the task for Japan. Three points are confirmed. First, making the interface explicit itself carries costs. A separated structure is less efficient in the jurisdiction concerned than a structure optimized for a single jurisdiction alone, and the cost of coordination across the interface arises on a standing basis (Section 12.3.7). What Section 18.10.4 stated about the cost of sovereignty holds isomorphically here — a declaration of an interface for which no cost is paid has the outward form of an interface but not the substance. Second, the design of the interface is constrained by the timing of commencement. Because portability is an attribute that cannot be added after the fact (Section 12.3.5), the interface must be decided at the point at which construction of the system begins. Third, and most weightily for this section's determination, the non-fulfilment of condition (ii) rate-limits the design of the interface itself. As stated in this section under the first task (the separation design of the system), at a stage where rules of liability allocation are not settled, the "legal construction" side that is to be separated is not determined. Proposition 41 therefore does not cancel the determination of Section 18.16.4 but moves the locus of the task from "the nature of the system" to "the choice of design and the bearing of its cost, together with the institutional provision that is its precondition." What the move identifies is who must decide, and when. A note on this subsection. Here too the note of Section 18.16.10 extends by anticipation — what deserves attention is not the figures but the procedure. What this subsection has shown is not an answer as to where the interface should be drawn for each of Japan's domains, but the order: assigning the four indicators of Proposition 4 to either side of the interface, identifying the parts belonging to the jurisdiction-specific layer, and estimating the size of the part remaining in the portable core. When readers run the same order for their own country, the result of the assignment will differ. What transfers is not the result but the order. 796 18.16.6 Domains That May Be Exported, and Domains That Cannot The determination of the four conditions is organized in paired form. The organization is illustrative, and the actual level for each domain cannot be settled on this paper's evidence. The side on which the conditions may be assembled. These are domains in which the core of judgement concerns the state of a physical process, differences by jurisdiction are small, and the regulation of the domain concerned is constituted by reference to international standards (Section 12.4.1(α) and (β)). Anomaly detection in equipment, prediction of degradation, optimization of process conditions, and planning of maintenance have this character. The conditions on this side are relatively more readily assembled for Japan because the accumulation of condition (i) and the equipment operation records of condition (iii) exist precisely within this range. Condition (ii), however, is unfulfilled for systems incorporating AI (Section 18.16.2). Even for this side, therefore, it cannot be determined that the four conditions are assembled at present. Whether they come to be assembled depends not on improvement in capability but on the institutional process of providing trust infrastructure. The side on which the conditions are not assembled. These are domains in which judgement depends not on the state of equipment but on the operating conventions of the jurisdiction concerned (Section 12.4.1(γ)); domains whose object is human conduct rather than a physical process — evaluation of workers' skills, safety education, labour management and the like, which depend strongly on labour legislation, employment conventions and language (same, (δ)); and domains in which the equipment is configured to specifications proprietary to the home jurisdiction (same, (ε)). In the last case the system transfers only together with the equipment, and the export of integrated systems reduces to the export of products. On the side of business processes, processes inseparable from jurisdiction- specific legal effects (Section 12.4.2(δ)) and processes depending strongly on language and documentary form (same, (ε)) fall here. That administrative procedures and the platforms of family registration and taxation fall within this range corresponds to Table 26 (Section 12.6.3) having rated (b) the domain-specificity of judgement as "high" or "very high" for these domains. For these domains, whether Japan's systems are good does not enter into the determination of exportability. What Proposition 39 states is that the height of capability is not the criterion of determination. 18.16.7 The Standing of the Formula "Exporting Not Goods but Doings" What has been said so far is often spoken of in the formula "exporting not goods but doings" (mono no yushutsu de wa naku koto no yushutsu). This formula can be made to correspond to the distinction among the three forms in Section 12 — (b) the export of products corresponds to "goods" and (c) the export of integrated systems to "doings." This paper does not, however, hold it up as a slogan. Holding it up as a slogan carries two errors. 797 The first error is to make the choice of form read as though it were a matter of the height of capability or of aspiration. What Proposition 39 states is the reverse: the export of integrated systems becomes possible only where the four conditions are satisfied simultaneously, and the most binding of them is portability, a structural attribute. A declaration of a policy to "export doings" moves not one of the conditions. What moves them is the provision of trust infrastructure, the design of separation, and the accumulation of operational records across multiple jurisdictions. The second error is to place the "goods" side in an inferior position. As stated in Section 12.1.4, (b) the export of products has intermediate resistance to compression and is partially protected by the physical interface. As Section 12.4.1(ε) stated, in domains where the equipment is configured to specifications proprietary to the home jurisdiction, the export of integrated systems reduces to the export of products; but this is not a failure — it is a consequence following from the nature of the domain concerned. Which of the three forms is preferable depends on the nature of the domain concerned and on the endowment of the jurisdiction concerned (Section 12.1.3). This paper therefore uses this formula as a determination and not as a slogan. Whether "the export of doings" holds for a given domain can be answered only by confirming the four conditions of Proposition 39 one by one for that domain. The work of Sections 18.16.1 through 18.16.4 is that confirmation, and the answer at present for Japan is that, owing to the non-fulfilment of condition (ii) and the constraint of condition (iv), it is unestablished for every domain as regards systems incorporating AI. This is not a pessimistic determination but a determination that identifies what would have to be put in place for the determination to change. Conversely, where the formula is held up as a slogan while conditions (ii) and (iv) are not addressed, the determination does not change. 18.16.8 Domains in Which Japan Stands on the Procuring Side — Application of Proposition 40 This section has been written thus far from the side of export, but that is an order of exposition and not a claim about Japan's position. As Section 12.8.3 stated, the export side and the import side are structural positions within a particular domain, and not attributes of a jurisdiction. It is usual for the same jurisdiction to stand in different positions in different domains, and Japan is no exception. To discuss Japan solely as an exporting country would be a misuse of the framework of Section 12. Proposition 40 governs the domains suited to the three modes of procurement — (A) construction within the home jurisdiction, (B) procurement of capability, and (C) procurement of integrated systems — by three variables: (a) the severity of the consequences of failure, (b) the domain-specificity of judgement, and (c) reversibility. Applied to Japan, three things can be said. First, Japan already stands largely on the side of (B). That Japan is a bearer of exposure for the layers of computing infrastructure and foundation models (Sections 18.11.2(d) and 18.3.1) is nothing other than the fact that, for this layer, (B) procurement of capability has 798 in fact been chosen. Under Proposition 40, for domains in which (a) is low this is the correct choice — because there is no reason to pay a sovereignty premium (Definition 19). What the intensity-type indicator formulated in Section 18.3.1.1 asks is not the volume of this procurement but the value added generated domestically per unit of procurement. Lesson (a) of Section 18.15, that setting a reduction in the amount procured as an objective is an error, can be restated in the language of Proposition 40 as: choosing (A) in a domain where (a) is low is paying a sovereignty premium there is no reason to pay (Section 12.6.4). Second, domains in which (C) the procurement of integrated systems may be rational exist for Japan as well. The conditions Proposition 40 lists for (C) are the combination of (a) high, (b) low and (c) low. In domains satisfying this combination in which Japan itself does not satisfy the conditions of Sections 18.16.1 to 18.16.3 — that is, domains in which there are no operational records of the system concerned within its own jurisdiction and trust infrastructure is not in place for that domain — the cost of the path of constructing a system by accumulating failures oneself (path α of Section 12.2.3) becomes excessive. In domains where failure is not permitted, the learning path of accumulating one's own failures is closed. This paper does not rate individual domains — because it does not possess evidence sufficient for rating by domain. What can be stated is the procedure of determination: in accordance with the format of Table 26 (Section 12.6.3), rating (a), (b) and (c) for each of Japan's domains and assigning a mode to each layer of the system. The second observation of Section 12.6.3 — that the procurement decision is not a decision of "which mode to choose" but of "which layer of the system to procure by which mode" — holds for Japan as it stands. Third, for domains in which (C) is chosen, a design of mitigation must be decided at the same time. As Section 12.7.2 stated, the procurement of integrated systems is the setting in which Proposition 24 operates most strongly, and erosion arises not as a side effect of use but as a direct consequence of the mode of procurement. The decline in the number of bearers and the rupture of transmission treated in Sections 18.5.3 and 18.5.4 operate here in overlapping fashion from a different channel — if integrated systems are procured in a domain where the base is contracting, the repetition of judgement, failure and correction in that domain thins doubly. The five means of mitigation shown in Section 12.7.3 (retention of audit rights, retention of authentic data within the home jurisdiction, in-house performance of processes including judgement and verification, portability clauses in contracts, and a plan of staged internalization) can each be negotiated only at the time of procurement. As Section 18.10.4 stated about the cost of sovereignty, mitigation carries costs, and mitigation for which no cost is paid remains a form — writing audit rights into a contract while not placing people to conduct inspections has the outward form of mitigation but not its substance. In addition, where the choice of (C) extends across several domains, the concentration of suppliers must be monitored at the aggregate level (Section 12.6.5). The structure Section 18.3.5 drew from half a century of statistics — that the concentration of the dependence that remains may rise while aggregate expos‐ 799 ure contracts (Proposition 37) — holds isomorphically for the choice of procurement mode as well. 18.16.9 Generalization to Other Middle Powers — Description as a Combination of Conditions Lesson (b) of Section 18.15 stated that the configuration of the four components of national brain capital differs by country and that, where the configuration differs, the effective strategy differs. The same holds for the four conditions of Proposition 39. This section's determination concerns Japan's configuration, and jurisdictions with a different configuration obtain a different determination from the same four conditions. The combinations of conditions that Section 12.4 described as two types are reread from this standpoint. The conditions confirmed for Japan in this section have parts corresponding to the combination of Type (A), the physical-interface and regulatedsector type — high physical-interface intensity, the existence of long and high-frequency records of the operation of equipment, and thick tacit knowledge of the field together with the capacity for audit based on long domain experience. By contrast, a combination of conditions whose strengths are the scale of the human stratum and long-run operational records of public digital infrastructure (Type (B), the business-process and public-infrastructure type) may satisfy the four conditions for other domains — processes whose core is the verification of the identity of subjects and the authenticity of records, processes constituted by the sequence and deadlines of procedures, and processes for which standards of interoperability exist internationally (Section 12.4.2). A jurisdiction with this combination may become an exporting country of integrated systems in domains different from Japan's. As Section 12.4 makes explicit, both types are subtypes of the AI Foundry State (Definition 21), and what divides them is what the process of transformation is embedded in, not the composition that Definition 21 prescribes. The determinations of Section 12.1.7 — in particular the determination that the position rests on desirability — therefore extend equally to both types. The places where the constraints of portability appear also differ between the two types — in Type (A) on the physical side, in Type (B) on the social side (Section 12.4.3). A discipline is here made explicit. This section does not name particular jurisdictions and assign them to these types. Which jurisdictions satisfy the conditions of which type is an empirical question by domain (Section 12.4), and this paper's evidence base does not possess the observation by domain required to make that determination. Moreover, the description of a type is a description of a combination of conditions, and contains no evaluation of the policies, institutions or international position of a jurisdiction possessing those conditions. The note attached at the end of Section 18.15 concerning the names of regions and types extends to this section as it stands. The structure that can be generalized is, on the other hand, clear. First, of the four conditions, (i) to (iii) are problems of accumulation, whose time constant is measured in years (Proposition 15). Second, (iv) portability is not a problem of accumulation but of design,

and cannot be added after the fact (Section 12.3.5). Third, from the combination of these two properties follows the consequence that whether the type of an AI Foundry State may be adopted for a given domain is to a considerable extent decided, long before the accumulation is complete, by the choice of design made at the point at which the accumulation begins. This consequence contains no attribute of a jurisdiction, and is therefore not peculiar to Japan. Any jurisdiction can run this determination for each of its own domains. As with what Section 18.15 stated about the three constraints of Proposition 21, here too what transfers is not the determination but the procedure. 18.16.10 Where the Bargaining Power That May Be Expected Lies — Desirability, Not Indispensability Finally, one misreading that the naming may import is explicitly excluded with respect to Japan. Section 12.1.7 decomposed the business form of a semiconductor foundry into a bundle of properties and determined item by item which structures transfer and which properties do not (Table 27). What transfers is the structure of "not owning the design but owning process capability," and the structure in which the axis of competition lies not in the superiority of design but in the reliability of the process — operational records and the assumption of liability. What does not transfer is the indispensability (Definition 15) that a semiconductor foundry holds through extreme capital specificity and the difficulty of reproducing its processes. This determination extends to Japan without exception. Even if Japan were to satisfy the four conditions of Proposition 39 for some domain, what would arise from that is not non-substitutability — a system of transformation consists not of physical equipment but of institutions, people and records, and what separates it is a wall of time, not a wall of physics that limits the number of jurisdictions that may enter (Section 12.1.7). The expectation that the position of an AI Foundry State brings bargaining power as a strategic node in a supply network therefore amounts to importing, along with the name, the part of the analogy that does not transfer. This asymmetry governs to which component the bargaining power that may be expected belongs. Proposition 23 states that indispensability based on holding a chokepoint begins to depreciate from the moment it is exercised, and Proposition 38 states that the desirability formed by the export of integrated systems appreciates the more it is adopted. The two carry exactly opposite signs with respect to exercise. If there is bargaining power that Japan may expect, it lies on the side of desirability — a kind of power accumulated not by cutting off but by being adopted. What Section 18.11.2 stated about the indispensability side, that the list of specified critical materials under the Economic Security Promotion Act is an inventory of dependence and not a list of strengths, is consistent with this consequence. The practical implication appears as a difference of direction as to which generates power, a closing design or an open one — a design that encloses a system within the home jurisdiction lowers portability and worsens condition (iv), as Section 18.16.4 showed, and thereby blocks the very channel through which desirability is accumulated. 801 This implication cannot, however, be read as a conclusion favourable to Japan. Unlike indispensability, desirability does not become an asset if left alone (Section 12.5.1) — if adoption does not occur, none of the four conformity investments that Proposition 38 identifies arises, and no switching costs accumulate either. This channel therefore does not open unless the two determinations settled in this section — the non-fulfilment of condition (ii), trust infrastructure, and the constraint of condition (iv), portability — are first resolved. The conclusion of Section 18.16.4 that portability is the greatest task is not mitigated by this subsection; rather it gains in weight — since desirability accumulates only through adoption, portability, the precondition of adoption, becomes a rate-limiting condition from the standpoint of bargaining power as well. This section does not predict that these conditions will be resolved. What it states is the conditional relation that, unless they are resolved, bargaining power by neither component holds for Japan. Against this determination there is a counter-argument that can be assembled from this paper's internal resources alone. The counter-argument runs thus — where an integrated system is deeply embedded in the receiving jurisdiction's business processes, supervisory procedures and structures of personnel supply, the switching cost may rival the cost, in semiconductors, of porting design assets to another process; and if so, is not indispensability acquired in substance? Sections 12.5.6 to 12.5.8 respond to this by Proposition 42 (upper bound of self-reinforcement; lock-in is not indispensability). Since the formulation and falsification condition are in Section 12, only the implications for Japan are stated here. First, what Japan would obtain were it to adopt the position of an AI Foundry State for some domain is lock-in in the relation with individual receiving parties, not indispensability across the system as a whole. Indispensability is the property of "whether a third party can bypass the agent concerned," and lock-in is the property of "whether a party already engaged can leave." The two are questions posed about different sets, and it can hold both logically and empirically that one stands at a high level while the other stands at a low one. Even if it were observed, for some domain, that the cost of switching away from a Japanese system is high, that would not be evidence that Japan is indispensable in that domain — determination requires a second observation, namely observation of supplier concentration: how many jurisdictions exist that could supply a system of the same kind for the domain concerned (Proposition 42(i)). As stated in Section 18.11.2, this paper has measured neither concentration by domain nor time required to switch. This second observation lies outside this paper's evidence base. Second, the self-reinforcement of desirability has an upper bound, and excessive pursuit invites counteraction from the receiving side. By Proposition 42(ii), a rise in switching costs also raises the cost to the receiving side of continuing the relation, and therefore simultaneously raises the incentives toward internalization, multi-sourcing, and the institutionalization of portability requirements. The level of the upper bound is a function of the national brain capital remaining in the receiving side for the domain concerned, the existence of alternative suppliers, and the severity of the consequences of failure in that domain. This structure inverts the guidance for a party standing in the exporting position — a strategy of raising switching costs by keeping the interface undisclosed, 802 making the form of records proprietary, and skewing the content of training toward the operation of the system yields only lock-in while carrying the consequence that the next adoption becomes less likely to occur. Since desirability accumulates only through adoption (Section 12.5.1), a strategy that uses adoption as a means of binding damages the conditions for forming its own asset. Counteraction may take the form of institutionalization of portability requirements in the receiving jurisdiction, requirements to retain data within its territory, and the writing of internalization obligations into clauses (Section 12.5.8). This implication is not peculiar to Japan and holds isomorphically for any jurisdiction standing in the exporting position. This paper evaluates the merits of the conduct of neither the exporting nor the receiving side — what it describes is confined to the structure by which the pursuit of self-reinforcement and the inducement of counteraction are the obverse and reverse of the same mechanism. The same jurisdiction stands, in one domain, on the side that generates counteraction, and in another on the side that receives it. The above is summarized as a conditional policy implication in a single sentence. What Japan may aim at is not a position of holding frontier models itself but the acquisition of leverage on the desirability side, resting on trust infrastructure and the national brain capital of the field — provided that this channel does not open unless the two determinations settled in this section, the unprovided state of condition (ii) trust infrastructure and the constraint of condition (iv) portability, are resolved, and that what is obtained if it does open remains within the upper bound laid down by Proposition 42. This sentence neither states that Japan will reach that position nor that it ought to. What it states is the structure of on which of the two components of leverage a channel exists, and the determination that this channel is at present rate-limited by two conditions. What deserves attention is not the figures but the procedure — when other jurisdictions examine the same two conditions, the rate-limiting condition may be a different one. A note on this subsection. The note of Section 18.11 is repeated here. The determinations this subsection has settled for Japan — the non-fulfilment of condition (ii), the constraint of condition (iv), and the fact that conditions (i) and (iii) differ greatly by domain — are Japan's, and the procedure this subsection has demonstrated is that of middle powers in general. What deserves attention is not the figures but the procedure. When readers run the same procedure for their own country, the same determination as this subsection's will not necessarily follow, nor would its failure to follow constitute a refutation of the theory. What transfers is not the determination but the list of conditions and the order leading from conditions to determination. The examination of the four conditions used in this subsection should be used together with the examination of the two components of leverage treated by the diagnostic form of Appendix G; the two pose different questions about the same jurisdiction — the former asks "what may be supplied," the latter "what may be pushed back." 803 19. The Cost of Sovereignty — Scale, Fiscal Capacity, Cost of Capital, and Institutional Coherence 19.1 Why a Section That Counts Costs Is Required From Section 10 through Section 18, this paper has argued what states ought to do. Section 10 identified the conditions under which the cell where transformation value is appropriable (M2×C2) holds, by means of the four indicators of complementary asset endowment (Proposition 4, Section 7) and national brain capital (Definition 11, Proposition 18), and formalized the minimum involvement of the upper tiers required to hold that cell. Section 13 recast the sovereign minimum guarantee level against AI outage (Definition 6) into three functions — operational capacity, renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition — and stated as Proposition 8 that its maintenance holds not as a single act of stockpiling but only as continuous construction. Section 18 brought these down to the design problem of a single state and fixed four design questions: enumerating what is to be guaranteed, specifying the guarantee level, deciding the composition, and managing depreciation. Every one of these is a recommendation that demands the commitment of resources. This paper has not discussed how much of that resource is required. More precisely, the existence of costs has been mentioned throughout — Proposition 8 spoke of a "standing fiscal, electricity, and personnel commitment," and Section 17.7 stated that the guarantee level should be placed in a separate account as tail-risk insurance — but a section that treats head-on what structure those costs have, under what conditions they allow the recommendations to hold, and under what conditions they do not, was missing. This section fills that gap. The reason the gap must be filled is not rhetorical. If the party making recommendations does not count costs, the recommendation follows one of two paths. The first path is not being implemented. A policy recommendation makes its costs visible only when it passes through the processes of budgeting, legislation, and procurement. If costs become apparent at that stage and it emerges that the party recommending had not examined them, what is lost is not only the proposal at hand. A recommendation whose costs have not been counted is unusable for the actor that bears responsibility for implementation — because a recommendation that does not say what must be given up in order to realize it cannot be entered into a decision about the allocation of resources. In this case the recommendation survives as a document and never reaches practice. The second path is being implemented and doing harm. If a recommendation is partly implemented without costs having been counted, and the scale is fixed at a level that does not satisfy the conditions of justification, then, as Proposition 30 states, the guarantee in 804 question destroys more value than it protects. Moreover, once an institution has been established, it survives as form after it has lost substance, by the asymmetry stated in Proposition 35 (the hysteresis of securitization). Bringing to a proper level a guarantee begun at an excessive or an insufficient scale requires costs equal to or greater than those of establishing it. The harm of not counting costs therefore does not stop at wasted resources; it takes the irreversible form of a lost opportunity for correction. The reason this paper places this section here is to avoid both of these paths. That the party making a recommendation should itself compute the cost of that recommendation is a condition of the recommendation's credibility. This is not an expression of modesty but a methodological requirement. This series has adopted the discipline of constituting theory through propositions accompanied by falsification conditions; at the level of policy recommendation, what corresponds to a falsification condition is an explicit statement of the conditions under which the recommendation does not hold. To exhibit the structure of costs is nothing other than to give the recommendation the boundary at which it breaks. 19.1.1 The Five Kinds of Cost This Section Counts Cost is not of one kind. This section counts the costs generated by this paper's recommendations under five types. Each type differs in who bears it, in its visibility, and in its time structure, and each therefore demands a different design. (1) Unit cost (19.2). The unit price of use for compute, data, and models guaranteed domestically exceeds the unit price of procurement from an unconstrained international market. Definition 19 calls this difference the sovereignty premium. For inputs subject to economies of scale, the difference grows larger the further the guaranteed scale falls below the minimum efficient scale. It is borne by domestic users, and in that sense appears as an effective cost increase. (2) Fiscal capacity (19.3). The cost of continuous construction (Proposition 8, Section 13) is standing, and it competes with other policy objectives. There is therefore a ceiling on the level that can be sustained. It is borne by taxpayers, and its visibility differs greatly according to the path taken. (3) Cost of capital (19.4). The redundancy required by Layer Zero appears to actors at Layer Three as a decline in capital efficiency. It is borne in the first instance by those actors, but its incidence may fall on users, investors, or employees alike. This cost is not entered in any budget and is therefore the least visible of all. (4) The cost of examining institutional coherence, and the uncertainty of remaining undetermined (19.5). Examining whether requirements concerning domestic guarantees, the handling of data, and procurement cohere with existing international trade and investment commitments has a cost as a stage of design. The cost of neglecting that examination appears later, in the form of corrections that are subsequently compelled, and it appears larger. 805 (5) Administrative capacity (19.7). Implementing the frameworks of diagnosis and audit this paper has presented (Appendices C, D, F, and G) consumes the administrative capacity of the implementing actor. Administrative capacity is a constraint distinct from fiscal capacity, and it does not increase in the short run even if budgets are increased. In addition to these five types, this section treats one design variable for reducing cost — the graduated treatment of data (19.6). Graduation is at once a design for protecting the depth of utilization (Proposition 5, Section 7) and a cost policy that, through the scope of the sensitive-processing condition (Definition 6(i-c)), determines the level of the sovereignty premium. This duality is the reason for placing graduation in this section. 19.1.2 Why This Section Gives No Figures This section discusses the structure of costs but gives no amounts. This choice requires explanation, because an argument that claims to discuss costs while giving no figures is often another name for an argument that does not discuss costs. There are three reasons this paper gives no figures. First, the level of cost is a function of what is guaranteed and at what level, and neither has been fixed. What Section 18.10.3 fixed was the form of the design questions, not their answers — only once the questions are answered (which critical processes must be guaranteed continuity during an AI outage; and for each process, full function, degraded operation, or safe shutdown) can the required volume of inference be summed and the cost computed. That work requires the output of a dependence audit (Appendix C) and lies beyond the scope of this paper. Second, the inputs required to estimate unit prices — the unit prices of equipment, electricity, and personnel, utilization rates, and renewal cycles — are specific to a country and a point in time and lie outside the evidence available to this paper. Third, determining the ceiling requires comparison with other policy objectives, and that comparison requires information about social preferences. That is information supplied not by analysis but by the political process. To these reasons one negative reason may be added. If this paper were to write a figure for "how much is possible," that figure could be cited detached from its grounds. A cost estimate is a bundle of assumptions, and a figure severed from its assumptions carries the appearance of a false precision. This section makes explicit, as a discipline, that it does not invent figures. To the question whether an argument about cost without figures has value, the answer is as follows. Where the structure of costs is misunderstood, putting in the right figures still yields the wrong design. For example, a design that understands the sovereignty premium as "waste that can be dissolved by correcting inefficiency" commits resources in the direction of enlarging scale so as to lower unit cost; but as 19.2.5 shows, for the sensitive-processing condition among the three functions, enlarging the scope means enlarging the cost, and the direction is the reverse. Grasping the structure precedes the estimation of figures, and makes that estimation possible. What this section gives is the mechanism by 806 which costs arise, the conditions under which costs operate as a constraint, and the location of the design variables that lower costs. 19.1.3 This Section Is Not a Withdrawal of the Recommendations Finally, the standing of this section should be made explicit. This section does not withdraw the recommendations of Sections 10, 13, and 18; it fixes the range within which those recommendations hold. What is withdrawn is not the recommendations themselves but the tacit premise that they hold without the constraint of cost. The distinction is substantive. What this section rejects, as a result of counting costs, are three conceptions — comprehensive domestic guarantee, uniform domestic isolation, and full implementation of comprehensive monitoring — and none of these is what this paper has recommended. Section 18.10 explicitly rejected "all-domestic production" as both impossible and unnecessary, and Section 13 recast the object of the guarantee from a level of capability into three functions. What this section does is to reinforce the logic of that limitation from the side of cost, and to formalize the boundary of the limitation as a condition. As 19.8 shows, a part remains justified even after the costs have been counted. That remaining part is the implementable core of this paper's recommendations. 19.2 Diseconomies of Scale and the Sovereignty Premium The first type of cost is unit cost. The unit price of use for compute, data, and models guaranteed domestically exceeds the unit price of procurement from an unconstrained international market. This paper defines that difference as follows. Definition 19 (Sovereignty Premium) The sovereignty premium is the difference between the unit price of use for compute, data, and models guaranteed domestically or within an alliance, and the unit price of use where these are procured from an unconstrained international market. For inputs subject to economies of scale, the sovereignty premium grows larger the further the guaranteed scale of supply falls below the minimum efficient scale. For the domestic actors that use them, the sovereignty premium is an effective cost increase, and it has the character of an insurance premium. The last sentence of Definition 19 — that it has the character of an insurance premium — sets the register of this whole section. The difference is not evidence of inefficiency but the price paid for protection purchased. The proposition that follows gives the conditions under which that reading is legitimate. 807 Proposition 30 (The Sovereignty Premium and the Lower Bound of Scale) Where a domestic guarantee is provided for an input subject to economies of scale, the sovereignty premium (Definition 19) grows larger the further the guaranteed scale of supply falls below the minimum efficient scale, and this appears as a cost increase for domestic users. A domestic guarantee is therefore not justified from the standpoint of efficiency, and is justified only as insurance against a stoppage of supply. Justification as insurance holds only where the total sovereignty premium falls below the expected value of the losses avoided in the event of a stoppage of supply. A domestic guarantee at a scale that does not satisfy this condition destroys more value than it protects. Furthermore, because the cost of continuous construction (Proposition 8) competes with other uses of fiscal capacity, there is a ceiling on the level that can be sustained. Falsification condition If no negative relation is observed between guaranteed scale and unit cost (that is, if economies of scale do not operate), the scale-dependence of the sovereignty premium is rejected. If, in cases where the total sovereignty premium exceeds the expected value of the losses avoided, the guarantee in question is sustained over time and the attainment of other policy objectives is not impaired, the existence of the ceiling is rejected. 19.2.1 Which Inputs Are Subject to Economies of Scale Proposition 30 carries the condition "for an input subject to economies of scale." The first task is therefore to identify which components of the guarantee level satisfy that condition. First, compute infrastructure. The cost structure of data centres has at least four scaledependencies. (a) Indivisibility of facilities — buildings, substation equipment, cooling equipment, and network connections can only be installed in certain minimum units, and their fixed cost is divided by capacity. (b) Procurement power — long-term contracts for equipment and electricity depend on volume. (c) Utilization — the larger the demand pool, the more load-levelling operates, and the more effective capacity is obtained from the same facilities. (d) The fixed cost of operating personnel — the staff required for round-the-clock operation, maintenance, and security is not proportional to capacity and has a floor. All of these work in the direction of lowering unit cost as capacity increases. Second, the training, fine-tuning, and evaluation of models. Here the cost structure is dominated by fixed costs. The marginal cost of copying and distributing a model once made is close to zero (the non-rivalry that Proposition 1, Section 3, noted as an asymmetry with oil), and the unit cost divided by the number of users therefore depends strongly on the scale of use. Applying the same fine-tuning and evaluation procedures to a small number of uses and to a large number of uses may yield costs per use that differ by an order of magnitude. 808 Third, data. Collection, curation, rights clearance, and quality control all have a strongly fixed-cost character, and are divided by the number of uses that draw on the data in question. Fourth, learning effects. The decline in unit cost that accompanies cumulative operation — procedures for handling failures, demand forecasting, skill in electricity procurement — is a function of cumulative experience rather than of scale; but because the accumulation of experience per unit time depends on scale, it acts in effect in the same direction as economies of scale. Among these, the indivisibility of facilities and the magnitude of sunk costs correspond to the combination that regulatory economics has discussed as the conditions for natural monopoly (Kahn, 1970; Joskow, 2007). As Section 13.2 determined, however, AI infrastructure services are not a natural monopoly in this sense — there is no regional monopoly over a physical network, and multiple suppliers compete worldwide. What this subsection borrows is therefore not the instruments of natural-monopoly regulation (rate regulation, obligations to supply) but a single concept employed by that analysis — minimum efficient scale. The determination of transferability property by property, required by Proposition 1 (Section 3) as the discipline of analogy, is applied here as well. What transfers is the description of a cost structure in which unit cost falls as capacity increases and the fall effectively stops at some scale; what does not transfer is the inference that derives from that cost structure the necessity of monopoly and the justification of rate regulation. Minimum efficient scale is the scale at which unit cost effectively ceases to fall. What Proposition 30 asserts is that in the region where the guaranteed scale falls below this scale, unit cost rises in proportion to the extent of the shortfall. Economies of scale do not, however, operate uniformly across all components. Differences among the three functions of Definition 6(i) are decomposed in 19.2.5. What should be confirmed here is the fact that at least the principal part of the cost of the guarantee level is built upon scale-dependent inputs. 19.2.2 Why Domestic Guarantees Are Prone to Fall Below Minimum Efficient Scale The next question is why domestic guarantees are prone to fall below minimum efficient scale. This is neither an accident nor a failure of design; it arises from the structure of the purpose of guaranteeing. There are three reasons. First, the demand pool is cut at the border. Where procurement is from an international market, suppliers build facilities on the basis of demand aggregated worldwide, and realize their unit costs at that scale. A domestic guarantee, by definition, serves only the demand of the jurisdiction concerned. The smaller the ratio of one state's demand to world demand, the larger the difference in scale. Where a middle power designs a guarantee, this ratio is structurally small. 809 Second, demand is highly correlated and there is little room for levelling. The loads of domestic critical processes are prone to correlate across times of day, business days, seasons, and disasters. Where a worldwide demand pool is levelled by time-zone differences and by diversity of use, demand within a single jurisdiction cannot enjoy that levelling. A difference in utilization is directly a difference in unit cost. Third, and most importantly, the very purpose of the guarantee works to lower utilization. Operational capacity, (i-a) of the sovereign minimum guarantee level, is capacity that sustains the degraded operation of critical processes in a situation where external supply has stopped. That this capacity is not being used in normal times is precisely the state in which the guarantee is functioning. Standby capacity, by definition, sits idle in normal times. The design of a guarantee therefore collides head-on with economies of scale — economies of scale lower unit cost by raising utilization, whereas a guarantee secures availability by lowering utilization. This third reason determines the character of the sovereignty premium. The sovereignty premium is not principally a correctable inefficiency arising from poor management or technological lag; its principal part is an unavoidable price derived logically from the purpose of guaranteeing. It is not that a correctable part (skill in procurement, optimization of design, improvement in utilization) does not exist; but correcting all of it does not bring the difference to zero. A design that mistakes this point — a design that treats the sovereignty premium as inefficiency and seeks to dissolve it through efficiency gains — commits one of two errors. Either the maintenance of the guarantee itself comes into question at the point where efforts at efficiency are exhausted; or standby capacity is diverted to use in normal times in order to raise utilization, with the result that the capacity supposed to be secured at the time of a stoppage is in fact not secured. The latter is the typical path by which a guarantee becomes nominal. 19.2.3 How It Appears as an Effective Cost Increase Definition 19 defined the sovereignty premium as a difference in the unit price of use. The difference is necessarily borne by someone. The paths of incidence divide into three. The first path is direct bearing by the user. Where a particular actor is obliged to use domestically guaranteed infrastructure, or where in substance there is no other option, the difference appears as an increase in that actor's procurement cost. The second path is fiscal bearing. Where the difference is filled by a subsidy, the incidence falls on taxpayers. The third path is pass-through via procurement requirements. Where the use of domestically guaranteed infrastructure is imposed as a requirement of public procurement, the difference is reflected in procurement prices and ultimately falls on taxpayers, though along the path it appears as a supplier's price. Whichever path is taken, there is no sovereignty premium that no one bears. This simple fact is easily overlooked in practice because, on the first and third paths, the differ‐ 810

ence does not appear as a line item in a budget. As 19.3.3 states, this difference in visibility distorts the judgment about the fiscal ceiling. Where the first path is taken, the sovereignty premium is a price difference produced by an obligation imposed by an institution; it is not recorded as a tax, but as regards the distribution of the burden it has the same character as a tax — the questions of who bears it, whether the burden is regressive, and to what range of actors it extends arise in the same form. When this paper calls this an effective levy, the term is a classificatory one, not an evaluative one. It means that the burden requires the same examination as a tax; it does not mean that the burden is unwarranted. The collection of an insurance premium has the same structure, and whether it is unwarranted is determined only by comparison with the value of the protection purchased. The next subsection formalizes that comparison. 19.2.4 Conditions for Justification as Insurance Proposition 30, having made explicit that a domestic guarantee is not justified from the standpoint of efficiency, states that it is justified only as insurance against a stoppage of supply. And it locates the condition for that justification as insurance in the requirement that the total sovereignty premium fall below the expected value of the losses avoided in the event of a stoppage of supply. Writing this condition as P < E[L], both sides may be decomposed. The left-hand side, P (the total sovereignty premium), is the difference in unit price multiplied by the guaranteed capacity and the period, to which the standing cost of renewal is added. As Proposition 8 (Section 13) showed, the guarantee level is a flow that exists only by being constructed continuously, and P must therefore be recorded not as a one-time construction cost but as an integral over a period. The under-estimation that recurs here is the treatment that records only the initial construction cost in P and does not record the standing cost of renewal capability (i-b). Under that treatment the condition appears easily satisfied, and additional costs appear as "unforeseen" some years later, at the point where the guarantee has lost its substance. The right-hand side, E[L], requires a more careful decomposition. For sectors s, it can be written E[L] = Σs πs · Ls · ρs. Here πs is the probability that the sector in question is exposed to a stoppage of supply, Ls is the loss if a stoppage occurs, and ρs is the proportion of that loss actually avoided by the guarantee. What is most often overlooked in practice is the third factor, ρ. What the guarantee level guarantees is the degraded operation of critical processes, not function equivalent to that of normal times. Even where a guarantee exists, therefore, only part of the loss is avoided. A computation that treats ρ as 1 — the premise that "if there is a guarantee, no loss occurs" — systematically over-estimates the value of the guarantee, and thereby justifies guarantees at scales that do not satisfy the condition P < E[L]. What the AI outage exercise of Appendix C (the simulated cut-off drill) measures is precisely this ρ — the ex‐ 811 ercise gives, by measurement rather than by self-report, the level of function actually maintained in the presence of the guarantee. This is why the design of the exercise should be integral to the design of the guarantee level. For none of the three factors does this paper give figures. There is, however, a precedent in which a computation of this form has been implemented as an institution. It is the electricity sector. Deriving a target for security of supply from the Value of Lost Load (VoLL) and the Cost of New Entry (CONE) is laid down country by country in Europe by the electricity regulation (Regulation (EU) 2019/943). Methods for estimating VoLL have been organized into four families — stated-preference customer surveys, the production-function approach, revealed preference from investment in backup power, and ex post estimation from actual outages — and critical reviews have accumulated (Schröder & Kuckshinrichs, 2015). As a representative estimate, a value of approximately 35,685 dollars per MWh has been reported for the ERCOT region as a market-wide load-weighted average (Brattle Group, 2024). The qualitative finding on which this literature agrees regardless of method is that VoLL lies at an order of magnitude some tens to hundreds of times retail electricity prices — that is, the marginal value when supply has stopped differs by orders of magnitude from the price in normal times. What matters here is not the level but the process. In electricity there exists, as an institution, a process of estimating the value of a stoppage, deriving a reliability target from that estimate, and working back from the target to the required level of facilities. As Section 13 noted, AI has no counterpart to this process — there are only SLAs, which are private contracts, and their compensation caps are smaller by orders of magnitude than the damage from a system-wide stoppage. The condition of Proposition 30 therefore cannot be computed at present. But the process by which it could be made computable is known. The dependence indicators of Appendix C (the D series) and the AI outage exercise are designed to produce the inputs required to estimate L and ρ, and within the framework of this paper, making this condition computable is work that precedes the design of the guarantee level. Two limitations should be added regarding the formalization of the condition. First, the severity of the expected-value criterion. The economics of insurance has long formalized the point that insurance with a negative expected value may still be justified for a risk-averse actor (Arrow, 1963). Self-insurance, which reduces losses ex post, and self-protection, which reduces the probability of the event, moreover have different incentive structures (Ehrlich & Becker, 1972). The tendency of states to make insurance-like expenditures against external risk is consistent with the observation that more open economies, more exposed to external risk, have larger government sectors (Rodrik, 1998). Proposition 30 nonetheless writes an expected-value criterion because, once risk aversion is invoked, a guarantee of any scale can be justified. Where a guarantee exceeding the expected- value criterion is provided on the ground of risk aversion, the condition of discipline is that the degree of risk aversion be declared in advance and that the declared level be applied consistently in other policy domains as well. Applying extreme risk aversion in 812 one domain only and not in others is not risk aversion but the ex post rationalization of a preference. Second, the treatment of irreversible losses. The losses from a stoppage of supply include a part recoverable ex post (delayed transactions, postponed processing) and a part not recoverable (business closures, loss of data, effects on persons, damage to trust in institutions). Where irreversible losses are present, it is known that valuation by expected value under-estimates the value of an option (Dixit & Pindyck, 1994). At the level of design this theoretical finding appears as the following requirement — in estimating Ls, reversible and irreversible losses should be recorded separately. An aggregation that does not separate them averages irreversibility away. It is for the same reason that the graduation of 19.6 places reversibility among its criteria of classification. 19.2.5 Decomposing the Three Functions of Definition 6 — The Effect of Economies of Scale Is Not Uniform Treating the sovereignty premium as a single quantity conceals the design variables that lower cost. The three functions of Definition 6(i) differ greatly in how they are affected by economies of scale. (i-a) Operational capacity is most strongly affected by economies of scale. All four scaledependencies listed in 19.2.1 (indivisibility of facilities, procurement power, utilization, and the fixed cost of operating personnel) operate, and in addition the third reason of 19.2.2 — the more standby-like the capacity, the lower the utilization — works doubly against it. The greater part of the sovereignty premium therefore arises in this function. There are three means of mitigation. The first is diversion to other uses in normal times. Directing standby capacity to routine research, education, and administration in normal times raises utilization and lowers unit cost. This means has a limit, however — if use in normal times becomes deep, so that the guarantee cannot be executed without stopping that use, the guarantee becomes nominal. Diversion is effective only within the range where "immediate surrender at the time of a stoppage" is institutionally assured, and the methods of assurance (pre-set orders of priority, explicit subordination clauses in use contracts, demonstration through exercises) must be included in the design. The second is joint holding within an alliance, which enlarges the demand pool. Definition 19 writes "guaranteed domestically or within an alliance" because there is no necessity that the unit of guarantee coincide with a border. Joint holding restores economies of scale, but it imports the same vulnerability as alliance-based guarantees (Definition 6(ii)) — the effectiveness of the guarantee depends on performance by the counterparty. The third is avoiding the ownership of facilities. A configuration that does not hold standby capacity itself but substitutes standby contracts with suppliers (priority reservation of capacity) avoids the indivisibility of facilities. Since it loses effectiveness where the contractual counterparty is correlated with the cause of the stoppage, however, dispersion of the jurisdictions and the infrastructures of the contracting parties is a condition. 813 (i-b) Renewal capability is affected to a moderate degree. As Section 18.10.2 confirmed, the compute required to fine-tune, evaluate, and deploy domestically the published weights of the latest generation differs by orders of magnitude from that of frontier training. The principal part of the cost is not compute but organizational capability in the form of personnel and procedures. Organizational capability exhibits indivisibility in the form of an effective minimum team size, but scale-dependence above that is gentle. That is, for renewal capability a cost structure is to be expected in which "too small does not work, but making it larger does not greatly lower unit cost." What constitutes the true constraint on this function is not scale but continuity — if it is interrupted, what has accumulated is lost. This point is treated as a fiscal question in 19.3.4. (i-c) The sensitive-processing condition is subject to economies of scale, but the required level of scale is determined by the legal system. The wider the range of data that may not lawfully or contractually be taken outside the jurisdiction, the greater the volume to be processed and the larger the infrastructure required. The principal means of lowering unit cost for this function is therefore not enlarging scale but bringing the scope to a proper level. Widening the scope increases cost and narrowing it reduces cost — notwithstanding that economies of scale operate, the direction that reduces cost is the reverse of that for (i-a). This asymmetry is important. The graduated treatment of data in 19.6 is at once a design for protecting the depth of utilization and the principal control variable for the cost of (i-c). The consequence that follows from this decomposition should be made explicit. "Lowering the sovereignty premium" is not a single task. The three functions each have different means, and the uniform prescription "enlarge the scale" works only for (i-a), leaves the problem of continuity for (i-b), and is positively harmful for (i-c). Unless the discussion of cost is decomposed function by function, this difference is invisible. Table 20. Sources of the sovereignty premium and the means of mitigating it, by the three functions of Definition 6(i) Function Effect of economies of scale Principal source of cost Principal means of lowering unit cost Limits of the means (i-a) Operational capacity Strong (indivisibility of facilities, procurement power, utilization, and the fixed cost of operating personnel all operate at once) Low utilization of standby capacity; fixed costs of facilities and power intake Raising utilization by diversion to other uses in normal times / enlarging the demand pool by joint holding within an alliance / avoiding the ownership of facilities through standby contracts Deep diversion makes the guarantee nominal / joint holding depends on performance by the counterparty / standby contracts are vulnerable to correlation between the contracting party and the cause of the stoppage (i-b) Renewal capability Moderate (only the indivisibility of an effective Cost of maintaining organizational capability in the form of Securing the minimum team size and maintaining that size continuously Enlarging scale does not greatly lower unit cost. The true constraint is continuity, and interruption causes 814 Function Effect of economies of scale Principal source of cost Principal means of lowering unit cost Limits of the means minimum team size) personnel and procedures what has accumulated to be lost (19.3.4) (i-c) Sensitive- processing condition Operates, but the required level is determined by the legal system Infrastructure scale proportional to the range of data that cannot be taken outside the jurisdiction Bringing the scope to a proper level (the graduated treatment of data, 19.6) The scope should be drawn from the purpose of protection; drawing it for the purpose of reducing cost impairs protection 19.2.6 What a Guarantee at a Scale That Does Not Satisfy the Condition Destroys Proposition 30 states that a domestic guarantee at a scale that does not satisfy the condition P < E[L] "destroys more value than it protects." The paths of destruction may be stated under three heads. The first path is the offsetting of the competitiveness of the Transformation Model. As Section 10 showed, the transformation margin in the M2×C2 cell exists only within the range defended by complementary assets (the four indicators of Proposition 4), and the part reducible to general-purpose functions is structurally compressed. That is, the profitability of the Transformation Model is thin. Where the sovereignty premium is added on top of this thin margin as an increase in procurement costs, a state that seeks to support the Transformation Model in accordance with the logic of Section 10 may, by placing the cost of the guarantee level on the same actors, offset the support it has provided. This offsetting is hard to detect where the two policies are designed by separate bureaus — the one as industrial policy, the other as security policy, each independently rational, yet cancelling each other out on the income statement of the same actor. The second path is pressure on other fiscal uses. This is treated in 19.3. The third path is the entrenchment of institutions. As Proposition 35 (the hysteresis of securitization) states, an institution once established survives after its object has lost substance, by virtue of the organizations, procedures, and interests established with it. Reducing a guarantee begun at an excessive scale requires political costs equal to or greater than those of establishing it. The choice of scale is therefore in effect partly irreversible. From this irreversibility one design consequence follows. A design that begins small within the range satisfying the condition and then expands is more robust than a design that begins large and then contracts. Expansion can be effected by re-determining the condition, whereas contraction meets the resistance of hysteresis. This consequence carries a symmetric limitation, however. A guarantee that is too small likewise fails to satisfy the condition. In the decomposition of 19.2.4, ρ — the proportion of loss actually avoided by the guarantee — approaches zero rapidly once the guaranteed capacity falls below the threshold that sustains the degraded operation of critical pro‐ 815 cesses. A guarantee that secures only half the capacity required for degraded operation may not halve losses but scarcely reduce them at all (because many critical processes cease to function altogether once they fall below a given level). In that case P is incurred while the contribution to E[L] is close to nil, and the condition is not satisfied. That is, the condition P < E[L] implies not only an upper bound on scale but a lower bound as well. A nominal guarantee — one that exists as a guarantee level in the budget but is at a scale that does not in fact sustain degraded operation — is a configuration that generates cost without generating protection, and it is excluded explicitly by the condition. The scale of a guarantee therefore has a range within which it holds. The lower bound is given by the threshold that sustains the degraded operation of critical processes. The upper bound is given by whichever is the more severe of the condition P < E[L] and the fiscal ceiling discussed in 19.3. That this range is non-empty is a premise of the justification of a guarantee, and it is not self-evident. Where the range is empty — where the cost of the minimum scale that sustains degraded operation exceeds the expected value of the losses avoided — other means (alliance-based guarantees, dispersion of suppliers, reduction of dependence itself) should be chosen instead of a domestic guarantee. The substantive implication of Proposition 30's statement that a guarantee is "justified only as insurance" is the requirement that this determination always be made. 19.3 The Fiscal Ceiling The second type of cost is fiscal. The closing sentence of Proposition 30 states that, because the cost of continuous construction (Proposition 8, Section 13) competes with other fiscal uses, there is a ceiling on the level that can be sustained. This section does not compute the level of that ceiling. The reason for not computing it was given in 19.1.2 and is not repeated here. What this section treats is two things: what it is to place the structural fact that a ceiling exists among the premises of design, and what happens where the ceiling is exceeded. 19.3.1 The Character of a Standing Cost The starting point is the time structure of costs fixed by Proposition 8. The sovereign minimum guarantee level is not a stock of the kind of oil stockpiles — "build it once and only maintenance remains" — but a flow that exists only by being constructed continuously. The cost is therefore standing. A standing cost has an intractability of its own within fiscal processes. First, it looks small in a single-year budget process and is large in the aggregate. A one-time construction cost is presented as a total and is therefore judged as to its magnitude, whereas a standing cost is presented as an amount for each year, is compared only with the other items of that year, and is unlikely to be judged as a total over the whole period. Second, a standing cost sits poorly with the instrument of a fund. A fund is effective for smoothing a temporary expenditure, but as a source for an indefinite standing expenditure it amounts, absent a 816 design for the rate of drawdown and for replenishment, to no more than a time-limited reprieve. Third, a standing cost is continuously subject to pressure for reduction. A one-off expenditure is executed once decided, whereas a standing expenditure is put to comparison with other uses in every fiscal year. This third property connects directly to the risk of interruption discussed in 19.3.4. Items of standing cost are more readily cut than one-off investments in phases of fiscal stringency — because the effect of the cut appears immediately in the following year, and because cutting produces no visible loss of function in the short run. Loss of function in the guarantee level proceeds gradually as the frontier advances (the depreciation of Proposition 8), and is not detected until external supply actually stops. Undetected degradation is the object that offers least resistance to a decision to cut. 19.3.2 What the Assertion That a Ceiling Exists Contains The ceiling asserted by Proposition 30 is not a "limit of fiscal space" in the sense of public finance. It is a relative ceiling determined by competition with other policy objectives. The level of the ceiling is therefore determined not by the fiscal position of the state alone, but as a function of the urgency of other policy objectives, of social preferences, and of the ordering of priorities among existing institutions. Two states in identical fiscal positions may have different ceilings. This formulation has two implications. First, the ceiling is not a figure given exogenously but an output of the political process. The question "what is the ceiling?" therefore cannot be answered by analysis alone. Second, that the ceiling is an output of the political process does not mean that it can be moved at will. As 19.3.4 states, an allocation that exceeds the ceiling is adjusted — without the excess being declared — either by pressure on other objectives or by interruption of the guarantee level itself. Adjustment necessarily occurs. To place the ceiling among the premises of design is to design that adjustment in advance rather than leave it to the course of events. There is in addition one implication specific to this paper's framework. By the state-level version of the bottleneck theorem set out in Section 17.7, the more abundant AI capability becomes, the more a state's AI value creation is rate-limited by the slowest complement — institutions, trust, electricity, personnel, and physical interfaces. Yet the three functions of the guarantee level are all built upon these slow complements. Operational capacity is built on electricity and land, renewal capability on personnel, and the sensitive-processing condition on the legal system. Where, therefore, the construction of the guarantee level exceeds the fiscal ceiling and squeezes investment in the slow complements, the construction of the guarantee level cuts away its own premises. This possibility of a self-contradictory squeeze is the only one among the reasons for placing the ceiling among the premises of design that follows directly from this paper's theory. 817 19.3.3 What It Is to Place the Ceiling Among the Premises To place the existence of the ceiling among the premises of design is, concretely, to include the following four tasks in the design. (1) Ordering what is to be guaranteed. The first of the design questions fixed by Section 18.10.3 was the enumeration of the critical processes whose continuity is to be guaranteed during an AI outage. To place the ceiling among the premises is to construct this enumeration not merely as a set but as an ordered sequence. What is to be cut when the ceiling is reached is decided before the phase of cutting arrives. Where the ordering is not done in advance, reductions are made starting from the costliest items, or from those meeting least political resistance. Neither criterion has any relation to the purpose of the guarantee. (2) Declaring in advance the conditions for withdrawal or reduction. There is no way of resisting the hysteresis of Proposition 35 other than writing the conditions of release into the institution at the moment of its establishment. The conditions of release must be tied to observable facts rather than to political judgment — for example, that the suppliers of the capability in question have dispersed across a stipulated number of jurisdictions or more, or that the switching time to an alternative has fallen below a stipulated level. The same discipline that led Proposition 8 to define depreciation as the observable difference F(t) − E0 is required here as well. (3) Treatment as a separate account, and recognition of the limits of that treatment. Section 17.7 stated that the construction of the guarantee level should be positioned not as growth investment but as tail-risk insurance, and treated as a separate account outside comparisons of priority with growth investment. This positioning exists in order to separate the criteria of assessment — because insurance assessed by the logic of growth is always judged insufficient in normal times. But separating the account does not dissolve the competition for funds. Under one and the same fiscal constraint, resources come from the same place even where accounts are separate. To read "separate account" as "no ceiling" is a misreading, and that misreading causes the discussion of the ceiling itself to be avoided. (4) Estimating and recording the total irrespective of path. As 19.2.3 stated, the fiscal visibility of the sovereignty premium differs greatly according to whether the path taken is subsidy, procurement requirement, or regulatory obligation. Subsidies are entered in a budget, whereas price increases due to procurement requirements are dispersed within procurement costs, and costs due to regulatory obligations arise in the private sector and do not appear in a budget. If a path of low visibility is chosen, the cost drops out of the judgment about the ceiling — yet it has arisen in the economy. Including in the institution a process that estimates and records the total sovereignty premium irrespective of path is therefore the substantive content of placing the ceiling among the premises. Absent this process, the judgment about the ceiling is made only for the part that appears in the budget, and the part that does not appear may expand without limit. This point connects 818 directly to 19.4, which treats the design of who bears the cost — the choice of the path of incidence is at once a choice of who bears the cost and a choice of visibility. 19.3.4 What Happens Where the Ceiling Is Exceeded Where an allocation exceeding the ceiling is made, or where allocation continues without its exceeding the ceiling being recognized, adjustment appears in one of the following three forms. (a) Pressure on other policy objectives. This is the most direct form. Education, research, social security, disaster preparedness, and other objectives are cut. As 19.3.2 stated, where what is cut is the formation of slow complements — the training of personnel, the development of electricity networks, the operating capacity of institutions — the pressure cuts away the premises of the guarantee level itself. In that case a state arises in which the indicators of the guarantee level improve in the short run while its sustainability declines in the long run: indicators and substance move in opposite directions. (b) Loss of accumulation through interruption. Where standing expenditure is reduced amid fiscal stringency, the reduction in many cases appears not as discontinuation but as interruption — it takes the form of "deferred this year, to be resumed when conditions improve." This form does damage that is not uniform across the three functions. Facilities survive an interruption. Interrupting the construction of operational capacity (ia) for a year does not make already installed facilities disappear (depreciation proceeds, but that is a process independent of interruption). Renewal capability (i-b), by contrast, is organizational capability, and it disappears when interrupted. A team of personnel that maintains the procedures of fine-tuning, evaluation, and deployment disbands when the budget lapses. What is required upon resumption is not budget alone but the re-assembly of personnel and the reconstruction of procedures, and the time required for that is often longer than for re-procuring facilities. In addition, as Proposition 34 (the mismatch of time scales) states, the time constant required to form capability of this kind exceeds the time constant of change in the capability tiers. During the period of interruption, the very object to be resumed changes. From this asymmetry a consequence for fiscal allocation follows. Even where the average amount is the same, a smoothed allocation produces a larger guarantee level than a volatile one. An allocation of "much in years when there is budget and nothing in years when there is not" is not merely inefficient; for functions having the character of a standing cost, it fails to realize a level commensurate with the average amount. The problem of a standing cost is a problem of level and at the same time a problem of stability. (c) Degradation in advance because interruption is anticipated. The third form operates before an interruption actually occurs. Personnel do not gather to a construction whose continuation is not believed in. The personnel who form the core of renewal capability — those able to evaluate the latest generation of weights, fine-tune them to opera‐ 819 tional requirements, confirm their safety, and deploy them — have other options. There is little reason for such people to stake a long career on an undertaking expected to end within a few years. The credibility of continuation therefore operates as an input in its own right. The ceiling has effect not only when it is exceeded but from the moment its being exceeded is anticipated. This consequence, (c), adds one implication to the design tasks (1) to (4). To make the ceiling explicit, to order what is to be guaranteed within the ceiling, and to publish that order is not work undertaken solely for the restraint of cost. It is also work that creates, for the part placed within the ceiling, a state in which continuation is believed in. A design that does not make its range explicit cannot supply credibility of continuation for any part of that range. A declaration that "everything will be guaranteed" has, in the judgment of personnel, the same effect as a declaration that nothing will be. 19.4 Frictions in the Cost of Capital and the Inter-Layer Conflict of Interest The third type of cost is the cost of capital. This is where the theoretical core of this section lies. The cost that Layer Zero's requirements generate for actors at Layer Three has, unlike the two preceding types, the structure that the actor making the requirement and the actor bearing the cost are different. This structure raises not a question of the level of cost but a question of its attribution. Proposition 31 (Inter-Layer Conflict of Interest and the Need for Compensation) The redundancy required by Layer Zero (maintenance of multiple sources of supply, domestic guarantees, switching capability) appears to actors at Layer Three as a decline in capital efficiency. While it is rational for each individual actor to use only the cheapest and highest-performing source of supply, concentration of supply raises the vulnerability of the system as a whole (Proposition 7). This mismatch is not resolved by the market — because the benefits of redundancy accrue to the system as a whole while the costs are borne by individual actors. A policy that leaves Layer Zero's requirements passed through to Layer Three therefore lowers the capital efficiency of the actors concerned and induces the exit of capital and activity from the jurisdiction in question. A requirement of redundancy does not hold unless it is integral with a design of who bears its cost (public bearing, incorporation into procurement requirements, insurance arrangements). Falsification condition If, among the group of actors subject to a requirement of redundancy, no difference in capital efficiency or in location and investment behaviour is observed relative to the group not subject to it, the claim of a conflict of interest is rejected. If a requirement unaccompanied by a design of who bears the cost is observed to be complied with over time, the need for compensation is rejected.

19.4.1 How Redundancy Appears in Layer Three's Accounts Proposition 31 lists three forms of redundancy — maintenance of multiple sources of supply, domestic guarantees, and switching capability. How each appears in a firm's accounts may be decomposed. Maintenance of multiple sources of supply generates three costs. First, the direct cost of procuring the same function twice. Second, the cost of integration and verification — and here lies the decisive difference from the duplication of a homogeneous good such as electricity. Models from different suppliers have different output characteristics and do not return identical outputs to identical inputs. Duplication therefore entails verifying the fit of both lines with operational requirements and bringing differences in quality at the moment of switching within an acceptable range. This work is continuous and must be redone each time either line is updated. Third, an increase in unit price through the dispersion of bargaining power — dividing procurement forfeits volume-based price advantages. Use of domestic guarantees appears as the increase in procurement cost equal to the sovereignty premium analysed in 19.2. Retention of switching capability generates two costs. One is the fixed cost of exercises, procedures, and personnel, and this is visible. The other is a constraint on design, and this is not visible. In order to maintain switchability, a design must be chosen that does not depend deeply on functions specific to a particular supplier. Interposing a layer of abstraction and building within the range of commonly available functions means delaying the adoption of the newest functions and relinquishing part of performance. This relinquishment is not recorded as a line item; it appears as performance forgone. Of the three forms, this item is the least visible and, in some circumstances, the largest. All of these either increase the denominator or reduce the numerator of return on invested capital. Redundancy appears as a decline in capital efficiency — this is the content of the first sentence of Proposition 31, and from the side of the firm, Layer Zero's requirement is received not as a requirement of cost but as a requirement of capital efficiency. The difference matters. An increase in cost can be passed on in prices, whereas a decline in capital efficiency lowers the ranking of the jurisdiction concerned in comparisons of where to allocate capital. 19.4.2 Individual Rationality and System-Wide Vulnerability — Two Kinds of Externality Proposition 7 (Section 13) formalized as a fallacy of composition the fact that concentration of dependence on a single supplier or a single infrastructure raises the vulnerability of the system as a whole while being rational for individual actors. Proposition 31 rereads that consequence as a relation between layers. 821 A point easily confused in practical discussion should be made explicit here. Firms do not lack redundancy through short-sightedness or negligence. In a firm's objective function, the benefit of redundancy is limited to the reduction of losses from its own stoppage, and does not include the reduction of losses from the propagation of its own stoppage to other actors. A firm therefore chooses a level of redundancy that is below the social optimum but privately optimal. This is the standard structure of an externality, identical in form to what the theory of public goods (Samuelson, 1954) and the theory of externalities (Pigou, 1920) have treated as the under-supply, under private incentives, of goods whose benefits accrue non-excludably. A design that explains this state as carelessness on the part of actors and seeks to correct it by drawing attention to the problem has therefore mistaken the mechanism. In the context of this paper, however, the externality is not of one kind. Distinguishing two kinds is the theoretical point of this subsection. The first externality concerns the level of redundancy. Each actor's redundancy, by lowering the probability of its own stoppage, reduces propagation to counterparties, users, and other sectors. That benefit does not accrue to the actor concerned. The level of redundancy is therefore below the social optimum. The second externality concerns the placement of redundancy. Here the significance of outage correlation being placed as an independent factor, alongside dependence and concentration, among the three amplification factors formalized in Proposition 7 connects to practice. Because each actor individually chooses the best supplier, choices concentrate on the same supplier and the same infrastructure, and outage correlation rises. Individual choices carry no intention of producing correlation, but correlation arises in the aggregate. This correlation is not dissolved even where each actor raises its own redundancy — if every actor chooses the same first supplier and the same second supplier, then even in a state where duplication is complete the system as a whole remains vulnerable to a simultaneous failure of the two suppliers, and a new path of correlation arises in that a simultaneous switch to the second supplier exceeds the second supplier's capacity. The design implication of this distinction is clear. What institutions should address is not only the quantity of redundancy but the placement of dispersion. A requirement to "secure two or more lines" acts on the first externality but not on the second, and in some cases worsens it — the more uniform the requirement, the more actors have an incentive to choose the same combination (the combination that is cheapest, most widely used, and easiest to explain to a supervisory authority converges on one). A design that acts on the second externality requires a structure that observes the aggregated placement and differentiates requirements according to the skew of that placement. This is not executable by individual actors and can be executed only by an actor holding aggregate information — that is, a public supervisory actor. It is for this function that Appendix C calls for the measurement of concentration by stratum and of shared-supplier exposure. 822 19.4.3 Why the Market Does Not Resolve It Proposition 31 states that "this mismatch is not resolved by the market." The grounds for that assertion may be given under five mechanisms. (1) Non-excludability of the benefit. The reduction of system-wide vulnerability accrues also to actors that have not borne the cost of redundancy. Each actor therefore has an incentive to rely on the redundancy of others and bear nothing itself. This structure is of the same form as what has been formalized as the problem of collective action (Olson, 1965). (2) Incompleteness of insurance markets. The standard path for internalizing an externality into prices is insurance — as actors with low redundancy pay higher premiums, the private optimum approaches the social optimum. But an AI outage (Definition 4) is by its definition a correlated stoppage of supply. Correlated risk sits poorly with the principle of insurance, which relies on the law of large numbers over independent events — risk that an insurer cannot diversify runs into constraints on underwriting capacity. In addition, methods for estimating the damage are not established (19.2.4). Where the loss distribution required to set premium rates cannot be estimated, an insurer chooses either to refrain from underwriting or to set a high rate that prices in the uncertainty. In either case, internalization through price does not function adequately. (3) Information asymmetry. System-wide concentration and outage correlation cannot be observed from an individual actor's position. The fact that the actor a firm has chosen as its second source of supply is in fact the first source of supply of its competitors cannot be discerned from public information. Actors therefore cannot evaluate how much dispersion their own redundancy actually delivers. The direct reason why the second externality of 19.4.2 is not resolved by the market lies in this absence of information. (4) Limits of contract. Protection through private contract with a supplier (an SLA) has compensation caps that are smaller by orders of magnitude than the damage. As Section 13 confirmed, estimates of damage in a large-scale outage event and the level of contractual compensation differ by orders of magnitude. Contract therefore does not function as a means of causing suppliers to internalize system-wide vulnerability. (5) Time inconsistency. The cost of redundancy is visible in normal times and the benefit is visible only at the time of a stoppage. Where the evaluation horizon of managers and investors is shorter than the return period of stoppage events, investment in redundancy appears as an expenditure that yields no benefit within the horizon of evaluation. This structure means that a manager who chooses redundancy is ranked below one who does not, unless the event occurs. The five mechanisms are not independent but reinforce one another. The absence of information in (3) impedes the setting of premium rates in (2), and the absence of insurance markets in (2) removes the means of mitigating the time inconsistency in (5). This is therefore not a structure that is dissolved by addressing any one of them. 823 19.4.4 Designing Who Bears the Cost — Four Paths and Their Incidence Proposition 31 states that a requirement of redundancy "does not hold unless it is integral with a design of who bears its cost," and lists in parentheses three items: public bearing, incorporation into procurement requirements, and insurance arrangements. This subsection compares four paths — these three plus regulatory designation — from five standpoints: who bears the cost, visibility, scope of application, fineness of adjustment, and pressure to exit. (a) Public bearing. A design in which the public sector bears the additional cost of redundancy through subsidies, tax measures, or public holding of standby capacity. The incidence is on taxpayers. Its advantage is that, because the actor making the requirement and the actor bearing the cost coincide, the decision about scale is made visible in the budget process — the visibility required by 19.3.3(4) is automatically secured on this path. There are two disadvantages. First, it runs directly into the fiscal ceiling (19.3). Second, because expenditure directed at particular actors may take on the character of conferring a benefit, there is a difficulty specific to designing the criteria of selection and the conditions of expenditure. (b) Incorporation into procurement requirements. A design that imposes redundancy, switching capability, and domestic processing as requirements of public procurement and reflects their cost in procurement prices. The incidence is on taxpayers (through higher procurement prices). Its advantage is that, being contract rather than regulation, the scope of application is clear and phased introduction and fine adjustment of requirements are possible. In addition, because the requirements appear in prices, the cost is estimable. Its disadvantage is that it acts only within the reach of public demand — concentration in the private sector is not directly changed on this path. Where suppliers use redundancy built for public procurement for private customers as well, however, indirect spillover is possible. (c) Insurance arrangements. A design that fills the difference between the private and the social optimum by price, through differences in premiums according to the level of redundancy, and through public reinsurance to make the underwriting of correlated risk possible. The incidence is on those who bear the premiums. Its advantage is that continuous adjustment of the level is possible, and that by pricing rather than prohibiting the choice not to comply with a requirement, incentives can be changed while preserving actors' freedom of choice. Its disadvantage lies in the two constraints stated in 19.4.3(2) — the absence of damage estimation and the problem of who underwrites correlated risk — and unless these are resolved, this path, though coherent as a design, cannot be implemented. (d) Regulatory designation. A design that acts directly on system-wide vulnerability by designating suppliers of infrastructure services as significant suppliers and placing them under supervision, and by imposing minimum standards of redundancy on the user side. The incidence is on the regulated actors and ultimately on users. On this path, Section 13.5 has already examined the precedent in the financial sector — arrangements that place 824 critical third-party providers under supervision (FSB, 2023) and their implementation. Its advantage is that it is the only path that may act directly on system-wide concentration. There are two disadvantages. First, because the cost is not entered in a budget, grasping the total required by 19.3.3(4) becomes difficult and the judgment about the ceiling is distorted. Second, where the requirement is excessive relative to actors' capacity to bear it, this is also the path on which the pressure to exit stated in Proposition 31 appears most strongly. Table 21. Four paths for bearing the cost of redundancy (the design options required by Proposition 31) Path Incidence of the cost Fiscal visibility Scope of application Fineness of adjustment of level Principal constraint (a) Public bearing Taxpayers (directly) High (entered in the budget) The range designated as the object of expenditure Moderate (depends on the coarseness of the expenditure unit) Runs directly into the fiscal ceiling. Designing the criteria of selection is difficult (b) Incorporation into procurement requirements Taxpayers (through procurement prices) Moderate (dispersed within procurement costs but estimable) The reach of public demand High (requirements can be adjusted contract by contract) Does not act directly on concentration in the private sector (c) Insurance arrangements Those who bear the premiums Low (arises as a private cost) The range covered by insurance Highest (continuously adjustable as a rate) Underwriting capacity for correlated risk and the absence of damage estimation. Requires public reinsurance (d) Regulatory designation Regulated actors, ultimately users Lowest (does not appear in the budget) The reach of designation and regulation (may act system- wide) Low (tends to be applied as stepped standards) Grasping the total is difficult and the judgment about the ceiling is distorted. Pressure to exit is strongest What should be read from the comparison of the four paths is not superiority but complementarity. Path (d) is the only one that acts system-wide but its visibility is lowest; (a) has the highest visibility but runs directly into the fiscal ceiling; (c) permits the finest adjustment but lacks the premises for implementation; and (b) is limited in scope. Real designs will therefore be combinations. The implication of Proposition 31 is not that one of these should be chosen, but that a design that chooses none of them and imposes only the requirement does not hold. 825 19.4.5 Where the Requirement Is Left Passed Through Proposition 31 states that a policy that leaves Layer Zero's requirements passed through to Layer Three lowers the capital efficiency of the actors concerned and induces the exit of capital and activity from the jurisdiction in question. The forms of exit should be made explicit. Exit does not appear only as the explicit relocation of a site. What appears more frequently is (i) a change in where new investment is allocated — existing operations continue while the next investment is placed in another jurisdiction; (ii) placement of some functions outside the jurisdiction — development, data processing, and research functions are placed where the requirement does not reach; and (iii) reduction in the provision of products and services for that jurisdiction — withdrawal where the cost of meeting the requirement is not commensurate with the size of that jurisdiction's market. Every one of these forms appears in existing statistics with a lag, and is hard to separate from other factors. Exit is therefore hard to detect while it is occurring, and by the time it is detected it has already accumulated. The falsification condition of Proposition 31 gives a design answer to this problem of detectability — in the form of estimating the difference in capital efficiency and in location and investment behaviour between the group of actors subject to the requirement and the group not subject to it. This has the form of a quasi-experimental estimate treating the introduction of the requirement as an exogenous event, and it is testable by comparison across the moment of introduction. Building into an institution, when designing one that imposes a requirement, the form that makes this estimation possible — a clear line demarcating the scope of application, and preservation of data before and after application — makes later evaluation possible at almost no additional cost. A limitation grounded in this paper's editorial policy should be made explicit here. This paper does not judge which requirement of which country is excessive or insufficient. What is stated is the structure that operates where the design of the requirement and the design of the burden are separated; whether that structure is in fact operating in a particular measure of a particular country is a matter to be determined empirically by the estimation described above. 19.4.6 Connection to Layer One — The Divergence Between System-Wide Benefit and Individual Cost Is a Problem of Capital Allocation This subsection constitutes the theoretical core of this section. The argument to this point — the divergence between benefits that accrue system-wide and costs borne by individual actors, the fact that this divergence is not resolved by the market, and the necessity of designing who bears the cost — has been presented as an argument internal to Layer Zero. But this divergence is the very problem that Layer One of this series (the structure of the era: capital allocation) has treated. 826 The first path of Proposition 11, transcribed verbatim in Section 17.2, formalized the conditions that Layer Zero distributes to Layer One as the range of future value that capital can price (the Λ of 2026g) and the bottleneck prices of AI complements (Proposition 7 of 2026g). That formalization was a description of placement and had not descended to the level of policy design. The problem treated in 19.4 is the same relation seen at the level of policy design. In this subsection, Layer Zero and Layer One connect for the first time in the series at the level of concrete policy design. The connection takes three forms. First, redundancy is an unmeasured asset. In a firm's accounts, expenditure on redundancy is recorded as a cost and not as an asset. From the standpoint of the system as a whole, however, redundancy is an asset that reduces losses at the time of a stoppage. This asymmetry is of the same form as the problem surrounding the measurement of intangibles — that intangible investment is expensed and not recognized as an asset (Corrado, Hulten, & Sichel, 2005; Haskel & Westlake, 2017). This isomorphism is not merely a figure of speech but carries a design implication. That is, the problem raised by Redefinition Capitalism (Kadowaki, 2026g) as "the extension of the range Λ that capital can price" takes here the concrete form of designing the accounting and disclosure that recognize redundancy as an asset. If the level of redundancy — dispersion of suppliers, demonstrated switching times, records of exercises — becomes disclosed and comparable, it becomes an object of investors' evaluation, and the difference between the private and the social optimum narrows in part through price rather than through regulation. The information asymmetry noted in 19.4.3(3) includes a part that may be mitigated by the design of disclosure. Second, redundancy is one of the "slow complements" to which the bottleneck theorem points. By the state-level version of the bottleneck theorem formalized in Section 17.7, the more abundant and cheaper AI capability becomes, the more value creation is rate-limited by the scarcest complement, and the higher the marginal value of the slow complements that are not automated. Switching capability — exercises, procedures, personnel, and slack in design — is precisely a slow complement. It cannot be obtained instantaneously by purchase, it requires time to accumulate, and it does not admit of substitutes. The bottleneck theorem therefore predicts that investment in redundancy has value in the long run. This value, however, is not realized until a stoppage event occurs. Redundancy has the character of an option, and its value depends on the probability of the event and the magnitude of the loss. The reason the time inconsistency of 19.4.3(5) arises lies in this time structure — capital cannot price redundancy not because redundancy has no value, but because the point of realization lies outside the horizon of evaluation and the probability of realization has not been estimated. The first connection (recognition through disclosure) and the second (estimation of option value) are therefore two aspects of the same problem. As the estimation of damage (19.2.4) advances, the option value of redundancy becomes in principle estimable. 827 Third, internalization through insurance is the point at which Layer Zero and Layer One meet upon one and the same institutional design. The insurance path of 19.4.4(c) is in substance a design that transfers to insurance markets the correlated risk that capital markets cannot price. But correlated risk is difficult for insurance markets to underwrite as well (19.4.3(2)), and its underwriting requires the involvement of public reinsurance. The institutional formation that reinsurance for natural catastrophes has followed — a structure that places a layer in which the public sector is the ultimate underwriter for correlated risk beyond private underwriting capacity — supplies an existing type for this design problem. Here Layer Zero (the state as the ultimate underwriter of risk) and Layer One (capital pricing risk) appear as different layers of one and the same institution. Two limitations attach to this connection. First, this paper does not present the concrete institutional design of the connection — the items of disclosure, the rate structure of the insurance, the design of reinsurance layers. Those are the subject matter of Layer One and lie beyond the scope of this paper. What this paper presents is the structure that the cost of Layer Zero's requirements can be formalized as a problem of capital allocation at Layer One. Second, that this formalization is possible is itself one verification that the fourlayer architecture of this series is not a mere juxtaposition. When Section 17 formalized inter-layer transmission as Proposition 11, transmission was described as the distribution of conditions from upper to lower. What 19.4 has shown is the converse relation — that the requirements of an upper layer do not hold without the design of capital allocation at a lower layer. Layers do not only distribute conditions; they receive the feasibility of those conditions from the layers below. 19.5 The Process of Examining Institutional Coherence The fourth type of cost is the cost required to examine institutional coherence, and the cost of correction that arises later where that examination is neglected. Unlike the other items in this section, this subsection begins with a declaration of discipline. Its object is adjacent to legal judgment, and precisely because it is adjacent, unless what this paper does not do is fixed first, there is a danger that the description will unintentionally be read as a legal conclusion. 19.5.1 The Discipline of This Subsection — What This Paper Does Not Do This subsection makes explicit the following three points as discipline. (i) Legal judgment about the interpretation of particular agreements and about whether particular measures conform to them exceeds the competence of this paper and is not undertaken. The interpretation of international trade and investment commitments is specialist work carried out by taking together the text of the provisions, the negotiating history, the practice of dispute settlement, and the relation to the domestic law of the jurisdiction concerned, and this paper has neither the competence nor the standing to 828 carry out that work. This subsection contains no judgment that any particular measure does, or does not, cohere with any particular commitment. (ii) This paper is not legal advice. This paper is a description of the process of institutional design, and does not provide legal evaluation of any particular design. The description in this subsection cannot be used as a substitute for legal examination. Designing actors must separately obtain examination by actors with legal expertise, in light of the legal system of the jurisdiction concerned and the text of the specific commitments that apply. (iii) No comment is made on the lawfulness or unlawfulness of the measures of particular countries. This is an application of the editorial policy of this paper set out in Section 1. States are for this paper a unit of analysis and not an object of evaluation, and this discipline takes precedence over all other disciplines of this paper. Accordingly, this subsection does not state, of any country's current or planned measures, whether they contravene a commitment or whether they are warranted. Under these three points of discipline, what this subsection states is limited to the following three things. That the examination of coherence is a mandatory stage of design. The structure by which a design that neglects the examination is later compelled to make corrections. And the types of issue that should be examined at the design stage. All are requirements as to process, not particular judgments. 19.5.2 Why the Examination Is a Mandatory Stage The designs this paper has recommended include imposing requirements in three domains — domestic guarantees (the construction of the three functions of Definition 6 and their use), the handling of data (the graduation of 19.6), and procurement (the design that incorporates redundancy, switching capability, and domestic processing into the requirements of public procurement, 19.4.4(b)). These three domains are domains that may overlap with those that international trade and investment commitments have addressed. Whether they overlap, and what consequences arise where they do, this paper does not judge. But the fact that design is being carried out in a domain where overlap is possible is itself not a judgment but a premise. What follows is a simple proposition, but one easily overlooked in practice. The state of not having examined is not the state of cohering. The state of not having examined is neither coherence nor incoherence; it is the state of not having been determined. A design that has not been determined is operated carrying uncertainty until a determination is supplied from outside. And that uncertainty is itself a cost. Investing actors do not make long-term investments on the basis of requirements that may later be corrected — more precisely, they apply a discount that prices in the possibility of correction. Among the design questions fixed in Section 18.10, both the construction of operational capacity and the maintenance of renewal capability are long-term investments, and the investing actors include the private sector. The undetermined state of coherence therefore erodes the effectiveness of the in‐ 829 stitution from a stage before any legal consequence arises. In this mechanism the cost appears not as the cost of legal dispute but as a delay in construction caused by investment not being made. Under the time constants shown by Proposition 34 (the mismatch of time scales), delay is not mere postponement but brings about a change in the object to be constructed. 19.5.3 The Structure by Which a Design That Neglects the Examination Is Later Compelled to Make Corrections What happens where the examination of coherence is not carried out at the design stage may be described as a time structure. The time from the design of an institution to its entry into force, the time from entry into force to the execution of investment, and the time from the execution of investment to the point at which coherence becomes manifest as a problem all have different lengths. Manifestation is the slowest. By the stage at which coherence becomes an issue, therefore, the institution has already entered into force and investment has already been executed. The cost of correction at this stage appears not as the cost of changing a design but as the cost of assets already committed losing the use for which they were intended. Correction at the design stage is a matter of rewriting documents, whereas correction after entry into force entails stranded assets. In addition, both Proposition 26 (the institutional time constant, Section 17) and Proposition 35 (the hysteresis of securitization) narrow the options available at this stage. An institution once established carries organizations, procedures, and interests with it, and its release requires costs equal to or greater than those of establishing it. Where the problem of coherence becomes manifest later, the options are therefore in substance narrowed to two — maintain the institution and continue to carry the uncertainty, or correct the institution and waste the existing investment. Both cost more than examination at the design stage. From this structure the standing of the examination of coherence is fixed. It is at once the management of legal risk and a process that creates predictability for investment. The latter aspect is the important one for this paper's framework — the construction of the guarantee level is a standing investment, and a standing investment requires predictability (the point stated in 19.3.4(c), that "the credibility of continuation operates as an input in its own right," operates here in the same form). 19.5.4 Types of Issue to Be Examined at the Design Stage This subsection indicates not the conclusions of examination but its objects. The issues to be examined at the design stage may be organized into the following three types. Type (1): Whether there is differential treatment by origin. The issue of whether the requirement provides for different treatment according to the nationality, location, or capital relations of suppliers. The form of examination is as follows — does the require‐ 830

ment in question provide for different treatment according to attributes of the supplier? Can the same purpose be attained by a requirement that does not turn on attributes (technical and procedural requirements applied irrespective of location)? Where a form involving a distinction by attribute is chosen, can its necessity be explained in documentary form? The substance of this examination lies in making explicit the correspondence between purpose and means. In the context of this paper, the fact that Definition 6 recast the object of the guarantee from a level of capability into three functions (Section 13, Section 18.10.2) works in favour of this examination — as between the requirement "use what domestic actors supply" and the requirement "demonstrate that a stipulated level of processing can be continued in a situation where external supply has stopped," the latter has a clearer correspondence with the purpose and is written in terms of capability rather than attribute. Whether the latter form coheres, however, this paper does not state. What is stated is that the effort to write in a form corresponding to the purpose clarifies the object of examination. Type (2): Requirements concerning the handling of data. The issue of what the conditions on domestic processing, domestic storage, and transfer outside the jurisdiction are set in order to protect, and whether the purpose of protection and the reach of the requirement correspond. Here the graduation of 19.6 connects directly with the examination of coherence. Graduation is at once a design for protecting the depth of utilization and a process for exhibiting the correspondence between purpose and scope. Uniform domestic isolation is a state in which the scope is set at its maximum without the purpose of protection being specified, and it cannot exhibit a correspondence between purpose and scope. Graduation by the three criteria (confidentiality, reversibility, substitutability) leaves, as a record of determination, which purpose of protection each band's requirements were derived from. That record clarifies the object of examination. Type (3): Procurement requirements. The issue of how far the requirements imposed on public procurement extend, in the objects of procurement, the thresholds of value, and the range of institutions covered. Procurement requirements are contract rather than regulation, and therefore raise different issues from regulation. The form of examination divides in two — demarcation of scope (to which institutions, above which value, and to which kinds of procurement does it apply) and the content of the requirement (what is required, and what counts as satisfying it). The form of examination common to the three types has the following five stages. (1) Specification of purpose — describe as concretely as possible what the requirement in question seeks to protect. (2) Demarcation of the scope of the requirement — make explicit to whom, in respect of what, and from when it applies. (3) Confirmation of the correspondence between purpose and scope — examine whether the scope is excessive relative to the purpose. (4) Examination of alternative means — examine whether means exist that attain the same purpose with a narrower scope, or that do not turn on attributes. (5) Documentation — leave the foregoing examination as a record. 831 The order of these five stages is not itself a legal judgment. It is an internal discipline of design, a process for handing the design over to those who will conduct legal examination in a form that can be examined. Where a design has not passed through (1) to (5), those conducting legal examination must begin by reconstructing the purpose and scope of the design, and that work requires the involvement of the designing actor. Reversing the order of the process — completing the design and then seeking legal confirmation — pushes this work of reconstruction into a later stage and raises the cost of correction. One point may be added about who carries out the examination. The cost of correction differs greatly between a configuration that places a legal examination function inside the designing actor from an early stage and one that seeks confirmation after the design is complete. In the former, corrections are absorbed within the design; in the latter, they appear as backtracking on the design. This difference is a scaled-down version, internal to an organization, of the time structure stated in 19.5.3. 19.5.5 Restating the Limitation What this subsection has stated should be restated together with its limitation. This subsection has not stated which requirements cohere with existing commitments. What it has stated is three things: (1) that the examination of coherence is necessary as a stage of design; (2) that the absence of examination generates later costs of correction, and that those costs are higher than the costs of examination at the design stage; and (3) that the issues subject to examination can be organized into three types and handled in a fivestage form. Individual judgments are matters for actors with legal expertise, in light of the legal system of the jurisdiction concerned and the text of the specific commitments that apply. This paper does not make those judgments, and it acknowledges that were it to make them, the ground of its own credibility — the discipline of constituting theory through empirically testable propositions — would not hold for that part. 19.6 Graduated Treatment of Data Where the other items of this section count costs, this subsection treats a design variable that lowers cost: the staging — the graduated treatment — of the handling of data. The choice of how far the handling of data is confined to within the jurisdiction determines the scope of the sensitive-processing condition (Definition 6(i-c)), and that scope determines the level of the sovereignty premium (19.2.5). At the same time it determines the depth of utilization (Proposition 5, Section 7), and it is also the process that exhibits the correspondence between purpose and scope in the examination of coherence (19.5.4, type (2)). At this position, where three issues intersect, this section places a principle of classification. 832 19.6.1 Two Uniform Failures As the starting point of design, two symmetric errors are excluded. The first error is uniform domestic isolation. By Proposition 5 (Section 7), the value of the Utilization Model compounds increasingly through the product of diffusion and absorptive capacity; at shallow depths of utilization the measured effect is small, and it accelerates once the threshold of complementary investment is passed. Uniform isolation restricts the use of the best instruments in every domain, and so lowers the starting point of this compounding across all domains. In addition, as decomposed in 19.2.5, if the scope of the sensitive-processing condition widens, the required infrastructure scale grows and the sovereignty premium grows with it. That is, uniform isolation reduces the benefits of utilization and increases costs at the same time. It is unfavourable in both directions. The second error is uniform openness. As Definition 4 shows, exposure marks the upper bound of dependence. To permit processing outside the jurisdiction irrespective of sector is to raise exposure without examining whether substitutes exist, and in domains where substitution does not function, exposure becomes dependence directly. In addition, since data exist that cannot be taken outside the jurisdiction at all under law or contract, uniform openness is not even feasible. Drawing a boundary is therefore unavoidable. The question is not where to draw the boundary but on what principle to draw it. A boundary drawn without a principle moves case by case, has no predictability, and ends by being both excessive and insufficient — and excess and insufficiency may occur at the same time. Unless a principle is stated, determinations are pulled by the strength of particular concerns. The contribution of this subsection lies not in specifying the position of the boundary but in stating the principle by which it is drawn. 19.6.2 The Three Criteria of Classification This paper places the criteria of classification at the following three. (a) Confidentiality — the character of the harm if there is a leak. What matters is not the quantity of harm but its character. Even for the same quantity of data, the character differs as between harm reaching the life, body, or liberty of individuals, harm reaching the competitive position of a legal person, and harm reaching judgments concerning national security. Criteria by quantity (number of records, volume) place harms of different character on the same scale and therefore do not function as criteria of classification. (b) Reversibility — whether an error is recoverable ex post. This criterion has two aspects. The first is the reversibility of a leak. Leaked data cannot physically be retrieved, but there are cases where the effect can be cancelled and cases where it cannot — identifiers that can be revoked and reissued, and information about the body or records of past conduct, differ in the possibility of ex post remedy. The second is the reversibility of an error in processing. Processes in which an error in output can be recovered by ex post 833 correction (recommendation, generation of drafts, presentation of candidate classifications) and processes in which it cannot (irreversible physical control, a disposition once made final, a transaction that cannot be reversed) give the same error rate different consequences. What 19.2.4 stated about the treatment of irreversible losses in expected-value assessment is made concrete here as a criterion of classification. (c) Substitutability — whether a substitute exists if supply stops. Can the processing in question be substituted, within a stipulated period, by domestic infrastructure or by another supplier? For processing that can be substituted, permitting processing outside the jurisdiction does not raise dependence (Definition 4) — a direct consequence of Definition 4's defining dependence neither by rate of use nor by expenditure but by degradation at the time of interruption. For processing that cannot be substituted, exposure becomes dependence immediately. The three criteria are not mutually independent, but they are easily confused, and confusion is the principal cause of failure in practice. There is processing of high confidentiality that is reversible and substitutable. There is also processing of low confidentiality that is irreversible and non-substitutable — for example, where processing that uses data unremarkable from the standpoint of confidentiality has irreversible consequences in logistics or the control of equipment and has no alternative supplier. That earlier discussion has drawn boundaries by confidentiality alone is the cause of boundaries becoming both excessive and insufficient. If the line is drawn by confidentiality alone, irreversibility and non-substitutability in domains of low confidentiality are overlooked, while at the same time domains of high confidentiality that are reversible and substitutable are excessively restricted. There is an order in which the three criteria are applied. First, (c) substitutability applies. Non-substitutable processing becomes, irrespective of the level of confidentiality, an object of domestic processing or of a guarantee of supply from the standpoint of dependence — this determination is an argument about continuity, not about protection, and therefore precedes the argument about confidentiality. Next, (b) reversibility applies. Because irreversible harm cannot be recovered by ex post correction, prior restriction is the only means. For reversible harm, the means of ex post correction exists in addition to prior restriction, and so the necessity of prior restriction is comparatively lower. Last, (a) confidentiality determines the level. Applying the three criteria in this order, rather than simultaneously, leaves the reasons for a determination as a record — which criterion placed each process in which band is identified, and in later review it can be discerned which change in which criterion requires a change of band. 19.6.3 The Three Bands The output of determination by the three criteria is constituted as three bands. Band I (the domain in which processing outside the jurisdiction is permitted). Processing that is low on all three criteria — substitutable within a stipulated period, with 834 errors correctable ex post, and with limited harm from a leak — falls here. "Permitted" does not mean "unconditional." Even in Band I, monitoring of dependence in the aggregate (Appendix C) applies — because even where each individual process is substitutable, concentration on the same supplier raises the correlation factor of Proposition 7. A wide Band I is desirable for the compounding of utilization stated in Proposition 5, and it also restrains the cost of (i-c) discussed in 19.2.5. Half the purpose of staging lies in not narrowing this band unnecessarily. Band II (the domain permitted subject to conditions). Processing that is intermediate on any of the three criteria falls here. The types of condition may be organized as follows — limitation of the place of processing (processing within specified jurisdictions), technical conditions (encryption, access control, application of privacy-preserving processing techniques), contractual conditions (audit rights, restrictions on subcontracting, obligations of return and erasure on termination), prior securing of an alternative line (switchability demonstrated), and recording and reporting (the record of processing being verifiable ex post). What is decisive in the design of Band II is that conditions be designed to include not only "who observes them" but "who confirms, and how, that they are being observed." A condition unaccompanied by a method of confirmation is nominal. And confirmation costs, and that cost consumes administrative capacity (19.7). Setting Band II widely is therefore attractive as a design that obtains protection while preserving the depth of utilization, but it collides most strongly with the constraint of administrative capacity. The design of the bands must be carried out in correspondence with that constraint — imposing conditions that cannot be confirmed is in substance to operate Band II as Band I, and produces a state in which only the record of determination remains while substance does not accompany it. Band III (the domain confined to domestic processing). Processing that is high on any of the three criteria falls here. The extent of this band defines the scope of the sensitiveprocessing condition of Definition 6(i-c). As stated in 19.2.5, the breadth of the scope directly determines the cost of (i-c). The demarcation of Band III is therefore at once a design of protection and a design of cost. 19.6.4 The Bands Are Not Fixed — Include a Procedure of Review in the Design Of the three criteria, (a) confidentiality is comparatively stable, while (b) reversibility and (c) substitutability are functions of external conditions. Substitutability moves with changes in the structure of supply — the appearance of an alternative supplier lowers (c) and provides grounds for moving processing placed in Band III to Band II. Conversely, if concentration among suppliers advances, processing placed in Band II moves to Band III. Reversibility moves with changes in technology as well — if means enabling ex post correction (verification of outputs, preservation of records, mechanisms of reversal) are put in place, processes determined to be irreversible become reversible. 835 The assignment of bands is therefore not work done once and for all; it must be integral with a procedure of periodic review. Including the cycle and procedure of review in the design is what separates classification by principle from ad hoc classification — classification by principle has the property that if the inputs to the principle change, the outputs change too, and the procedure of review is that property implemented in an institution. A classification without a procedure of review is frozen at the moment of the initial determination and diverges from reality over time. The hysteresis stated in Proposition 35 operates here as well — returning a domain once placed in Band III to Band II carries a higher political cost than movement in the opposite direction. The only means of resisting this asymmetry is to establish review as a standing procedure and to tie the grounds of movement to changes in the criteria. Table 22. Staging the handling of data — the three criteria of determination and their correspondence with the three bands Criterion Form of the question Order of application Conditions working to raise the band External factors that move the criterion (c) Substitutability If supply stops, can the processing in question be substituted by domestic infrastructure or another supplier within the stipulated period? First (determination of continuity precedes determination of protection) No alternative supplier exists / switching time exceeds the stipulated period / the capacity of the destination is insufficient Dispersion or concentration of suppliers, standardization of switching technology, prior construction of alternative lines (b) Reversibility If a leak or an error in processing occurs, can the effect be cancelled by ex post correction? Second (for irreversible harm, prior restriction is the only means) Identifiers cannot be revoked and reissued / outputs are used for irreversible physical control or for dispositions once made final Technical provision of means of correction (verification, preservation of records, mechanisms of reversal), design of human involvement in operational processes (a) Confidentiality What character does the harm have if there is a leak (character, not quantity)? Third (determines the level of the band) Harm reaches the life, body, or liberty of individuals / reaches judgments concerning national security Comparatively stable. Note that the character may change through the combination of data (19.6.6) 19.6.5 Three Secondary Consequences of Staging Beyond its principal purpose of protecting the depth of utilization, staging has three secondary consequences. First, it is a control variable for the sovereignty premium. The extent of Band III determines the scale of (i-c), and scale determines unit price (19.2.5). Staging is therefore at once a policy of utilization and a policy of cost. This duality has an implication for the 836 design of the actor that makes the determinations — where determinations are made from the standpoint of protection alone, the consequences for cost are not reflected in them. Placing in the design a process by which the record of a determination also states the effect of that determination on the scale of (i-c) is the minimum way of reflecting the duality in an institution. Second, it connects to the examination of coherence. The process required by type (2) of 19.5.4, of "exhibiting the correspondence between purpose and scope," is staging itself. The record of determination by the three criteria leaves, in a form that can be reconstructed ex post, the purpose of protection from which each requirement was derived. Third, it connects to the conditions under which the Transformation Model holds. Exclusive data endowment, the first indicator of Proposition 4 (Section 7), is defined as the share of the data used by the application in question that cannot be obtained from the public web and is generated only from the operational processes of the transformer concerned. Data placed in Band III are, by definition, unobtainable by actors outside the jurisdiction. Staging therefore has the aspect of institutionally creating exclusive data endowment. On this third consequence, however, this paper places a clear self-discipline. Setting the bands for the purpose of creating exclusive data endowment is not the claim of this subsection. The boundary should be drawn from the purpose of protection; if it is drawn from the purposes of industrial policy, the scope widens beyond the level required for protection. Excessive widening of the scope increases the costs analysed in 19.2, impairs the correspondence between purpose and scope discussed in 19.5.4, and erodes the compounding of utilization stated in Proposition 5. There is no assurance that all three losses fall on the same actor as the benefit of the exclusivity obtained. That staging produces exclusive data endowment as a by-product, and making that its purpose, must be distinguished. 19.6.6 What the Framework of Staging Does Not Handle The framework of this subsection has three limitations. First, the three criteria are a framework for determination, not the determination itself. Determining in which band to place each individual process requires domain-specific knowledge. Irreversibility in medicine, substitutability in finance, and confidentiality in public administration can each be determined only from the practice of the domain concerned. The actor making determinations therefore differs by domain, and what the framework supplies is only the form of determination and the format in which the reasons for determination are recorded. Second, the combination of data changes the band. Two data sets that individually fall in Band I may, when combined, come to have properties equivalent to Band III. This phenomenon is most marked in the criterion of confidentiality, but it arises in substitutability as well (where combined processing comes to have a configuration that no supplier can 837 substitute). The management of combination is a part that the framework of this subsection does not handle. So long as determination is made by unit of processing, properties arising from combination do not enter the object of determination. Third, the frequency of determination collides with the constraint of administrative capacity. Determining every item of data individually exceeds administrative capacity (19.7). Real determination must therefore be designed to proceed by type of processing as the unit, with what does not fit a type handled individually. Determination by type averages away the heterogeneity within a type — where part of the processing belonging to one type requires a higher band than the rest, the determination for the type is either insufficient for that part or excessive for the type as a whole. This error is reduced by making the granularity of types finer, but a finer granularity increases the number of determinations and approaches the constraint of administrative capacity. The choice of granularity is a choice between these two errors. 19.7 Administrative Capacity Constraints and the Minimum Indicator Set The fifth type of cost is administrative capacity. This type occupies a special position for this paper — the cost counted here is at once the cost generated by implementing this paper's recommendations and the cost generated by implementing the framework this paper has itself presented. Counting the costs of the policies recommended in Sections 10 through 18 is an analysis directed outward; counting the costs of the frameworks of diagnosis and audit presented in Appendices C, D, F, and G is an analysis directed at itself. 838 Proposition 36 (Administrative Capacity Constraints and the Minimum Set for Monitoring) Implementing the frameworks of diagnosis and audit presented by this paper (Appendices C, D, F, and G) consumes the administrative capacity of the implementing actor. Where administrative capacity is constrained, a requirement of comprehensive monitoring leads to one of the following: (i) it is not implemented; (ii) it resolves into the generation of formal reports; or (iii) it delays the very activity that is monitored — and in none of these cases is the purpose of monitoring attained. A framework of diagnosis therefore has no implementability unless, in addition to the comprehensive version, it is accompanied by a minimum set of indicators to be maintained as a priority under constraints of administrative capacity. The minimum set is composed not of the indicators that individually carry the most information, but of the indicators that supply information for which no other indicator can substitute. Falsification condition If comprehensive monitoring is observed to be implemented irrespective of the level of administrative capacity, and neither formalism nor delay arises, this proposition is rejected. If determinations by the minimum set diverge systematically from determinations by the comprehensive version, the design of the minimum set is rejected (a rejection of the design, not of the framework). 19.7.1 The Volume of Work This Paper's Framework Requires The scale of what Proposition 36 says "consumes administrative capacity" may be confirmed against this paper's own appendices. The national diagnostic checklist of Appendix D consists of 56 items in seven blocks, and each item requires a three-valued determination — in place, partial, not in place — together with confirmation of the documents, records, and results on which the determination rests. The geoeconomic leverage diagnostic of Appendix G consists of five tables with 77 items in total, and for the diagnosis of indispensability applies 16 items to each candidate chokepoint. The scenario monitoring indicator table of Appendix F requires quarterly updating of 18 indicators and a five-stage review procedure. The AI dependence audit protocol of Appendix C requires the construction of exposure and dependence indicators by sector, the securing of data sources, the operation of a reporting system, and the design and conduct of AI outage exercises (simulated cut-off drills). Summing these, a considerable volume of standing work arises for the implementing actor. This paper has presented these as "desirable" without examining their feasibility. More precisely, it has tacitly assumed the administrative capacity of the implementing actor to be an unconstrained resource. Proposition 36 makes that assumption explicit and withdraws it. That administrative capacity is a constraint distinct from fiscal capacity should be confirmed. Increasing budgets does not increase administrative capacity in the short run — 839 recruiting and training the personnel who operate an institution, accumulating the expertise required for determinations, and establishing channels of coordination with other bodies all take time. In this respect administrative capacity is one of the "slow complements" formalized in Section 17.7. The constraint of administrative capacity is therefore harder to relieve than the fiscal constraint, and the time constant before the effects of relief appear is long. 19.7.2 Three Modes of Failure Proposition 36 lists three modes to which a requirement of comprehensive monitoring leads where administrative capacity is constrained. The content of each, and the differences in their detectability, may be stated. (i) Non-implementation. Where the requirement exceeds administrative capacity, it is not implemented. This mode looks the most harmless but is the hardest to detect — because the fact that something has not been implemented leaves no record. That no report has come up is outwardly indistinguishable from there being no event to report. Non-implementation therefore takes hold quietly unless a separate mechanism for detecting it (an audit of the state of implementation itself) is put in place. (ii) Formalism. The forms of reporting are filled in, but what is entered has no substance. Appendix D wrote its guides to determination in the verifiable form of "the existence of documents, records, and results" precisely so that statements of policy or the existence of intentions would not serve as grounds for determination; this was a precaution against formalism. But the precaution itself may become formal — because documents can be produced. Formalism is the most harmful of the three modes. Under non-implementation, decisionmakers know that they do not have the information. Under formalism, decision-makers mistakenly believe that they do. Decision-making under formalized monitoring may therefore be worse than decision-making where monitoring does not exist — confidence founded on information that does not exist is more dangerous than awareness of the absence of information. In terms of this paper's framework, a formalized dependence audit gives the false signal that dependence is grasped, and causes the design of the guarantee level to diverge from the actual structure of dependence. (iii) Delay of the activity monitored. The burden of reporting and review delays the very activity that is monitored. In the context of this paper, the construction of the guarantee level, the deployment of the Transformation Model, and the determination of data bands (19.6) are delayed by the procedures of monitoring. Under Proposition 34 (the mismatch of time scales), delay is not mere inefficiency — because the object of construction itself changes during the period of delay, delay may turn into failure. One property common to the three modes should be noted. None of them is solved by "strengthening monitoring." In a situation where administrative capacity is the constraint, increasing requirements merely deepens one of the three modes. Adding require‐

ments produces improvement only where there is slack in administrative capacity. The first judgment in the design of monitoring must therefore be not the content of the requirement but an assessment of the level of the implementing actor's administrative capacity. 19.7.3 The Design Principle of the Minimum Indicator Set Proposition 36 states the design principle of the minimum set in a single sentence — the minimum set is composed not of the indicators that individually carry the most information, but of the indicators that supply information for which no other indicator can substitute. Because this principle is counter-intuitive, its content should be developed. The intuitive way of choosing is to rank indicators by information content and take a stipulated number from the top. This way of choosing ignores correlation among indicators and therefore builds a set that measures the same information redundantly. In an extreme case, the five indicators that rank highest by information content may all be measuring nearly the same phenomenon from different angles. In that case the cost of maintaining five is paid while the information obtained is close to that of one. Moreover, this redundancy is invisible from the ranking table of information content — because the information content of each indicator is evaluated individually. The correct way of choosing is a determination of non-substitutability. For a given indicator, ask whether, if it were removed, its value could be estimated from the remaining indicators. If it can be estimated, that indicator may be dropped from the minimum set (even if its information content is large). If it cannot be estimated, it must be retained (even if its information content is small). Under this criterion, the minimum set may have a composition different from the ranking table of information content. The form of the procedure may be given in four stages. (1) Take the comprehensive set of indicators as the starting point. The minimum set is constructed not independently but as a contraction of the comprehensive version — this is in order to assure that the minimum set supports the same judgments as the comprehensive version. (2) For each indicator, determine whether it can be estimated from the others. The determination rests not on statistical correlation alone but includes determination by mechanism — where two indicators derive from the same cause, they move in the same direction in response to a change on the side of the cause even where no correlation has been observed. Determination by correlation alone wrongly certifies independence where the cause did not move during the period of observation. (3) Retain the indicators that cannot be estimated. (4) Confirm that the remaining set supports each of the framework's principal judgments — determination of cell position, grasp of the structure of dependence, confirmation that the guarantee level is met, determination of the direction of transition, and identification of scenarios. If any judgment is not supported, return an indicator that supplies information specific to that judgment. 841 To this procedure secondary criteria are added: low cost of observation, constructibility from existing statistics, and feasibility of maintaining the frequency of updating. These, however, are applied after the determination of non-substitutability. If the order were reversed and easily measured indicators were selected first, the framework would be defined by ease of measurement — information that is hard to measure would drop out structurally, and the framework would fall silent on what had dropped out, while silence would be read as "no problem." That Appendix E stated expressly that the measurement frameworks for national brain capital and value-definition capability are not yet in place while nonetheless erecting items for them in the blocks of Appendix D, was a judgment under the same discipline. In addition, a third criterion should be placed: difficulty of manipulation. The minimum set becomes the indicators most attended to by those subject to monitoring. The pressure for an indicator to turn into a target concentrates more strongly the fewer the indicators — because where few items are measured, effort concentrates on them. This pressure induces behaviour that improves the indicator itself rather than the substance the indicator measures (Goodhart, 1975). Appendix F.5.4 states the same caution, but for the minimum set the caution applies more strongly. Among several candidates of comparable non-substitutability, therefore, indicators that are difficult to manipulate — observable from outside and not movable at the discretion of the implementing actor — should be chosen. 19.7.4 The Minimum Set Is Not Single but Graduated The level of the minimum set depends on the level of administrative capacity. Defining a single set called "the minimum set" therefore amounts to assuming that administrative capacity is at a single level. The correct design is a graduated series corresponding to levels of administrative capacity — a configuration that places three grades (a minimal set, a standard set, and the comprehensive version) and allows implementing actors to choose according to the level of their own capacity. This configuration rests on the same logic by which Proposition 21 (the common constraints on middle powers) distinguished the operation of a constraint from the possibility of responding to it — the content of measurement the framework requires may be common, while the volume that can be implemented differs by actor. What is indispensable in the design of the grades is making explicit the correspondence between them. Unless it is shown which items of the comprehensive version are contracted into which indicators of the standard set, and into which indicators of the minimal set, users of the minimal version cannot know what they are not seeing. Holding a list of what is not seen is as important as holding a list of what is seen — because monitoring that lacks the former misreads what lies outside its field of view as "nothing abnormal." 19.7.5 The Validity of the Minimum Set Is Testable The latter part of the falsification condition of Proposition 36 states that if determinations by the minimum set diverge systematically from determinations by the comprehensive 842 version, the design of the minimum set is rejected. And it makes explicit, in parentheses, that this is a rejection of the design and not of the framework. This distinction is necessary in order to treat the minimum set as a testable object — whether the minimum set is valid as a contraction of the comprehensive version can be tested by implementing both in parallel and confirming the agreement of their determinations. Conducting this test is possible only for actors with slack in administrative capacity. But for an actor with slack to implement both the comprehensive and the minimal version and report whether they diverge is a public good for actors without slack. Once the validity of a minimum set has been confirmed, actors using that set obtain grounds for reaching determinations equivalent to those of the comprehensive version without implementing it. One of the substantive benefits of sharing frameworks of diagnosis internationally is that the cost of this testing can be shared. 19.7.6 The Standing of the Comprehensive Version, and Where Concrete Candidates Are Sent The introduction of a minimum set is not a negation of the comprehensive version. The comprehensive version retains three roles after the introduction of a minimum set. First, it is the standard for actors with slack in administrative capacity. Second, it is the reference system for the test described in 19.7.5. Third, it is a map for identifying the domains the minimum set does not capture — the list of items dropped by contraction functions, for users of the minimal version, as a map of what lies outside their field of view. This paper's framework of diagnosis is therefore completed by three elements: "the comprehensive version + the minimal version + the correspondence between them." At present this paper possesses only the first element; the second and third require work in the appendices. This section sends the specification of concrete candidates for the minimum set to the appendices. There are two reasons. First, specifying candidates requires the actual cost of observation for each indicator and an evaluation of the mutual estimability of indicators, and that is work to be carried out item by item across the tables of Appendices C, D, F, and G. Second, this section is a section that discusses the structure of costs, and the concrete work of selecting indicators is not at the level of this section. What this section gives is the principle for carrying out the selection — take non-substitutability as the first criterion, take cost of observation and difficulty of manipulation as secondary criteria, construct the whole as a graduated series corresponding to levels of administrative capacity, and make the correspondence between grades explicit — and the execution of selection in accordance with the principle is left to work in the appendices. 843 19.8 The Total Cost, and the Part That Remains Justified 19.8.1 The Total of the Costs Counted The costs counted in this section may be organized by their character. Unit cost (19.2) arises from the scale of a domestic guarantee falling below minimum efficient scale, and appears as a cost increase for domestic users. Its principal part is not a correctable inefficiency arising from poor management but an unavoidable price arising from the structure of the purpose of guaranteeing. Decomposition into the three functions revealed that the means of lowering cost differ function by function — for operational capacity, utilization and enlargement of the demand pool; for renewal capability, securing continuity; for the sensitive-processing condition, bringing the scope to a proper level. Fiscal capacity (19.3) arises from the standing character of the cost of continuous construction, and competes with other policy objectives. The ceiling is not determined by fiscal space but is a relative ceiling determined by comparison with other objectives. Adjustment where the ceiling is exceeded appears in three forms — pressure on other objectives, loss of accumulation through interruption, and degradation in advance because interruption is anticipated — and all are left to the course of events unless handled in advance by design. Cost of capital (19.4) arises from the fact that the benefits of redundancy accrue systemwide while the costs attach to individual actors. This divergence is not resolved by the market, and a requirement does not hold unless it is integral with a design of who bears the cost. In the form of a divergence between system-wide benefit and individual cost, this issue is the very problem of capital allocation at Layer One, and it is the place in this paper where Layer Zero and Layer One of the series connect at the level of policy design. Institutional coherence (19.5) consists of the cost of examination as a stage of design and the cost of correction that arises later where examination is neglected. The latter is larger than the former and appears with a lag. Administrative capacity (19.7) is the resource consumed by implementing this paper's own framework. It is a constraint distinct from fiscal capacity, and the time constant of its relief is long. Viewing the five types along the three axes of who bears them, visibility, and time structure, a common difficulty emerges. The visibility of a cost and the clarity of where it falls stand in an inverse relation. Public bearing is the most visible but runs directly into the fiscal ceiling; a regulatory requirement acts most widely but does not appear in a budget and makes the total hard to grasp. This inverse relation is what makes the work of counting costs a problem of design rather than mere aggregation — the choice of what is borne by which path is at once a choice of who bears it and a choice of whether a judgment about the ceiling is possible at all (19.3.3(4)). 844 19.8.2 The Part That Remains Justified As a result of counting costs, the part of this paper's recommendations that remains justified may be separated into four points. First, the minimum guarantee justified as insurance. A guarantee at a scale that satisfies the condition P < E[L] of Proposition 30 and exceeds the threshold that sustains the degraded operation of critical processes. What is guaranteed is not frontier-level capability but the three functions of Definition 6(i) — operational capacity, renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition — and this recasting places the level of cost outside the binary of "redundant or infeasible" (Section 18.10.2). This part remains even after costs have been counted. Confirming that the condition is satisfied is, however, work for the designing actor and not for this paper. Second, the design of who bears the cost. A requirement of redundancy does not hold unless the incidence of the cost is made explicit through one of the four paths — public bearing, incorporation into procurement requirements, insurance arrangements, and regulatory designation — or through a combination of them (Proposition 31). The four paths are complementary; the question is one of combination, not of superiority. This design must be carried out at the same time as the requirement — an order that places the requirement first and defers the design of the burden sets in motion the pressure to exit stated in Proposition 31 before the design is complete. Third, the staged handling of data. A design that applies the three criteria of confidentiality, reversibility, and substitutability in the order substitutability, reversibility, confidentiality, and assigns processing to three bands: the domain in which processing outside the jurisdiction is permitted, the domain permitted subject to conditions, and the domain confined to domestic processing. By rejecting both uniform isolation and uniform openness, it obtains protection while preserving the compounding of utilization. In addition, staging controls the sovereignty premium through the scope of the sensitive-processing condition, and doubles as the process that exhibits the correspondence between purpose and scope in the examination of coherence. Fourth, monitoring by a minimum indicator set. A set of indicators to be maintained as a priority under constraints of administrative capacity, constructed as a contraction of the comprehensive version with non-substitutability as the first criterion (Proposition 36). It is accompanied by grades — comprehensive, standard, and minimal — and by an explicit correspondence between them. These four points are the implementable core of this paper's recommendations. The recommendations of Sections 10, 13, and 18 should be reread under the constraints of these four points. What falls away as a result of that rereading are three things — comprehensive domestic guarantee, uniform domestic isolation, and full implementation of comprehensive monitoring — none of which this paper has recommended, though room existed for this paper's recommendations to be read in that direction. This section closes that room. 845 19.8.3 This Section Is Not a Withdrawal but a Fixing of Range The standing stated in 19.1.3 may be confirmed from the point at which the counting of costs is complete. This section has not withdrawn the recommendations of Sections 10, 13, and 18. What has been withdrawn is the tacit premise that those recommendations hold without the constraint of cost. As a result of withdrawing the premise, the recommendations have changed into a form that carries a range — a guarantee has an upper and a lower bound, a requirement is accompanied by a design of who bears its cost, isolation has bands, and monitoring has versions matched to administrative capacity. A recommendation that carries a range is not weaker than one that does not. A recommendation that carries no range is given its range by the course of events at the moment of implementation, and there is no assurance that this course coincides with the intent of the recommendation. To fix one's own range is to keep the implementation of a recommendation in the hands of the one who makes it. This is the content of one of this paper's central theses — that the party making a recommendation should itself compute the cost of that recommendation is a condition of the recommendation's credibility. The content of credibility may be decomposed in two. First, credibility before the actors that bear responsibility for implementation. A recommendation that does not exhibit the structure of costs cannot be entered into a decision about the allocation of resources. Second, credibility before critical readers. A writer who does not count the costs of his own recommendations is read as arguing from a position that need not count costs, and in many cases that reading is correct. In addition, counting costs has a substantive effect distinct from credibility. Once the structure of costs becomes clear, the design variables that lower costs can be identified. The means of mitigation by the three functions in 19.2.5, the staging in 19.6, and the minimum set in 19.7 are all design variables that emerged as a result of counting costs, and none would have been visible without it. In particular, the asymmetry shown in 19.2.5 — the reversal of direction whereby enlarging scale lowers cost for operational capacity while narrowing scope lowers cost for the sensitive-processing condition — is invisible so long as cost is treated as a single quantity. Counting costs is at once the work of confirming constraints and the work of discovering degrees of freedom in design. 19.8.4 The Limitations of This Section Itself Five things this section has not achieved should be made explicit. All are reconfirmed as limitations in Section 20. (1) This section gives no figures. Whether the condition of Proposition 30 is satisfied for a particular design in a particular country therefore cannot be determined from this section. What this section has given is the form of the condition; substitution into the condition takes place outside this paper. The reasons for the choice not to give figures were 846 stated in 19.1.2, but that the reasons are sound and that no limitation arises from the absence of figures are two different things. (2) No claim of comprehensiveness is made for the types of cost. This section has counted five types, but there may be types it has failed to count. In particular, political costs (the costs of building consensus required to establish and maintain institutions), costs in international relations, and the part of opportunity cost this section has not treated — the loss from personnel committed to the construction of the guarantee level not being used for other purposes — are not included among the five types of this section. (3) The formalization of externalities in 19.4 does not derive the optimal level of internalization. What this section has shown is that the divergence exists, that it is not resolved by the market, and that the design of the burden can be organized into four paths. Deriving the optimal level of internalization requires estimation of a loss function, and that, as stated in 19.2.4, is not established. The argument of this section therefore stops at the form "a requirement unaccompanied by a design of internalization does not hold," rather than "how much should be internalized." (4) The three criteria of 19.6 are a framework for determination, not the determination itself. Assigning individual processes to bands requires domain-specific knowledge, and this paper does not undertake it. In addition, that the framework does not handle the phenomenon in which the combination of data changes the band, and that determination by type forces a choice between granularity and error, are as stated in 19.6.6. (5) The minimum set of 19.7 gives only a principle and does not specify candidates. The specification of candidates has been sent to work in the appendices, and at present the framework possesses only the first of the three elements "comprehensive version + minimal version + correspondence." The implementability required by Proposition 36 therefore at present extends only to the presentation of the condition and does not reach its satisfaction. These five points do not negate the value of this section's argument, but they limit the character of what it supplies. What this section gives is the structure of costs and the conditions under which costs operate as a constraint; it does not give the level of costs. Estimating the level is work to be carried out by each designing actor, under its own premises, using this paper's framework. The role of this section is to establish that this work must be carried out, and to give the order in which to carry it out. 847 20. Objections and Limitations This section reconstructs, in as strong a form as possible, the principal objections that may be raised against this paper, and for each makes explicit "the conditions under which this objection is correct" and "which of this paper's claims falls under those conditions." Defence is not the purpose. Following the discipline of this series, it avoids summarizing objections weakly and dismissing them, and places first a description of the world in which the objection holds. After examining seven items, it states the limitations this paper acknowledges, divided by subject into five groups — the absence of a measurement framework (20.8), incomplete formalization (20.9), the absence of opportunities for falsification and the thinness of the evidence (20.10), failure to reach design (20.11), and the limitations arising from the choice of framework, the unit of description, and the observational position (20.12). It then states the price borne by political neutrality, this paper's editorial policy, in itself (20.13), and, as work of a different character within this section, declares the range this paper does not cover, together with the reasons for not covering it (20.14). It then treats the structural conflict of interest involved when a practitioner recommends policies that bear on his own business opportunities (20.15), and closes with five weaknesses (20.16) and the limitations of this section itself (20.17). The seven items fall into three groups of different character. The first group (20.1, 20.2) questions the validity of this paper's very construction, and is directed at two foundations: the methodology and the tier distinction. If the objections here are correct, the skeleton of this paper requires reconstruction. The second group (20.3, 20.4) questions the consequences of writing this paper and of its implications circulating, and concerns not the truth of the content but its effects. It is criticism from the position that claims may exist which, though true, ought not to be written. The third group (20.5, 20.6, 20.7) questions this paper's epistemic standing — what counts as verification, from whose position it is written, and which interests are at work. Since the three groups differ in character, the forms of response differ as well. To the first group the response is by making conditions and consequences explicit; to the second, by presenting the reasons for accepting them; to the third, by disclosure. None of these is a nullification of the objection. The account in this section has one premise. This paper's definitions do not contain the mechanism of the conclusion they are meant to explain — Definitions 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, and 7 none of them carry the mechanism of a conclusion, and claims about mechanism are consolidated on the side of the propositions. Were the mechanism of a conclusion embedded in a definition, the corresponding proposition would be analytically true, and its falsification condition would be a matter of form only. Each item below states the limitations that remain even given this design. One thing should be added. What the end of this section (20.17) states is that "the objections an author can anticipate are limited to those visible from inside the author's own 848 framework" and that "there is no assurance that the most destructive objection is contained in this section." Given the design of this paper, the gravest defect may appear not in any of the seven items below but in a place of a kind this section does not treat: the design of the relation between definitions and propositions. This structure is itself an instance of the claim that a section of self-criticism has an upper bound, and this section records that instance without concealing it. This section refers repeatedly to Tier C3 (the critical tier). As Definition 2 (Section 5) makes explicit, C3 is an unrealized, anticipated category as of the time of writing (August 2026), and whether and when it arrives is an empirical question. Every passage below that touches on C3 should be read not as a description of an existing level of capability but as a conditional description of "if C3 arrives." 20.1 Over-Use of Analogy — The Conditions Under Which the Discipline Itself Turns into Misuse The most fundamental objection is directed at this paper's method itself. In Section 3 this paper set out the "discipline of analogy" and presented a method of dividing the bundles of properties of oil, electricity, and nuclear weapons and assigning them across the AI capability tiers. But declaring a discipline does not guarantee that the discipline functions. The objection runs thus — the sorting of "properties that transfer" from "properties that do not transfer" may be carried out by working backwards from the correspondence the sorter wishes to obtain as a conclusion. Is the sorting in Proposition 1 — transferring "the structure of strategic dependence" from oil while not transferring "the mode of scarcity" — justified by an independent criterion, or is it chosen by a prior intention to borrow the three types of national value model from the history of oil? If the latter, the discipline is a device for concealing arbitrariness. This objection stands on the lineage of research into the misuse of historical analogy. The use of analogy in foreign policy often functions not as an instrument of analysis but as rhetorical ornament for a conclusion already fixed, and the choice of analogy itself determines the framing of the problem (Section 3). The discourse of "data is the new oil" is precisely such an example, and the way in which Humby's original sense (data has no value unless refined) was lost while the misreading "data is precious like oil" circulated shows that an analogy operates independently of its proposer's intention (Section 3). That this paper uses three analogies together may treble this danger. A single mistaken analogy is easy to falsify, but a construction that assigns different analogies to different tiers permits ex post reassignment — "that tier is governed by a different analogy" — even where a prediction fails at one tier. This is a slide into unfalsifiability. The conditions under which this objection is correct can be stated precisely. (i) Where the decomposition of the bundles of properties may be changed ex post — that is, where this paper's framework permits reclassifying a property as "in fact a property that does not transfer" after an observation has been obtained. (ii) Where the assignment of the 849 three analogies to C1/C2/C3 is settled by the analyst's judgment alone rather than by independently observable indicators (supplier concentration, the effectiveness of access controls, the treatment of the matter by governments in security terms). (iii) Where the list of properties in Table 1 (Section 3) is not exhaustive, and inconvenient properties never enter the table in the first place. The claim that falls under those conditions is this paper's claim of methodological contribution (the first of its three contributions). Unless the divided assignment of the three analogies is operationalized in independent indicators, Section 3 remains not a presentation of method but an ordering of rhetoric. It should be noted, however, that even in this case the substantive claims from Proposition 3 (the non-equivalence of the nine cells) onwards remain independently verifiable. The non-equivalence of the nine cells is verified or falsified, irrespective of whether the analogies are correct, by observation of structural differences in institutions and outcomes across cells. That is, this paper is so constructed that the empirical part survives the collapse of the methodology. Conversely, the legitimacy of the methodology is held hostage to the success or failure of the empirical part and has no independent justification. This asymmetry is acknowledged as a weakness of this paper (Weakness 1, 20.16). This paper adopts only three precautions. First, fixing the list of properties in Table 1 and making no subsequent additions or deletions. Second, operationalizing the boundary between C1 and C2 solely by capability distance, an observable quantity (Definition 2), so as to reduce the analyst's discretion. Third, attaching a falsification condition to each proposition, so that evaluation turns on whether the propositions survive rather than on whether the analogies are correct. No claim is made that these are sufficient. The determination of sufficiency lies outside this paper. The second of these precautions has a reason in the design of the definitions. If Definition 2 were to divide C1/C2/C3 by supply structure and mode of governance, then Proposition 2 would contain a restatement of Definition 2 and would be analytically true — "at a level where the price competition of many suppliers operates, the price competition of many suppliers is the dominant form" is not rejected by any observation. This paper's Definition 2 contains neither market structure nor mode of governance and divides the tiers by capability distance alone, making the differentiation of modes of governance a dependent variable of Propositions 2 and 2b. This means that the concern of this subsection (condition (ii)), that the assignment of tiers is settled by the analyst's judgment alone, is avoided at least at the level of definition. Similarly, Proposition 1 carries an explicit tier index, "as regards Tier C2 (frontier tier) capability," and refines the unit of transfer into the form "the institutional objective of buying time against an interruption of supply transfers; the institutional means of the buffer (physical storage) does not" — because the coarse formulation "the structure of stockpiling transfers" conflicts head-on with property 9 of Table 1 and with Proposition 8. Of the danger this subsection notes, that "the discipline becomes a device for concealing arbitrariness," the part most likely to arise in the first proposition is thereby blocked.

A part nonetheless remains. The decomposition of the bundles of properties — which properties are placed in Table 1 — remains the analyst's judgment, and the defence against condition (iii) (that the table may not be exhaustive) is no more than the procedural one of "fixing the table." As for the assignment of the three analogies, the operationalization of tiers by capability distance has objectified the object of the assignment, but the justification of the assignment itself — "oil and electricity to C1, controlled strategic materials to C2, nuclear weapons to C3" — still depends on the persuasiveness of the property correspondences in Table 1. Weakness 1 (20.16) is therefore narrowed but not extinguished. This objection has a more moderate but equally important variant. The joint use of three analogies creates the danger that readers will receive this paper as the claim that "AI is oil and electricity and nuclear weapons." This paper's claim is precisely that "specific properties at a specific capability tier of AI correspond in part to specific properties of oil, electricity, and nuclear weapons," and all three qualifiers (specific, in part, properties) are loadbearing. But these qualifications are easily lost in the course of summary and citation. Given that the reception history of "data is the new oil" is precisely a record of that loss, there are thin grounds for expecting that this paper will not follow the same path. Section 3 adopted the form of a correspondence table in order to preserve the qualifications as the structure of a table and to prevent them from circulating in the form of a proposition; but this measure works only for readers who read the body of the text. The recursive failure in which a paper that uses analogy reproduces the misuse of analogy while criticizing it is one realistic consequence for this paper. 20.2 Collapse of the Tier Distinction — A World in Which the Nine Cells Degenerate into Three The second objection is the point that the 3×3 lattice at the core of this paper's construction may not hold at all. The falsification condition of Proposition 2 (the covariation of tier and governance) is stated by this paper itself. Where supplier concentration and the effectiveness of access controls are observed to change continuously and monotonically with capability distance — that is, where no step-like discontinuity is detected — the description "tier" is rejected, and AI capability should be described as a single continuous market. The same holds where the variance in concentration and in the effectiveness of controls is not explained after capability distance is controlled for. If open-weight models reach, at short lag and as a standing matter, capability practically indistinguishable from the frontier, and if export controls and access controls persist in losing their effectiveness, the discontinuities vanish and the C1/C2 distinction collapses. This world is not a thought experiment. The capability of open-weight models continues to track the frontier, and the lag width of the capability gap is in the direction of contraction. If the tracking lag contracts to a length practically negligible and the fall in inference costs continues, the very premise that "access to the frontier determines competitive advantage" lapses. 851 What would be lost of this paper in that world may be stated concretely. First, the nine cells degenerate into three. If the capability tiers converge on a single commodity tier, only the three types M1/M2/M3 remain, and the significance of the row-by-row analysis constituted by Sections 7, 8, and 9 is greatly reduced. Second, "security of procurement," the first condition of Proposition 4 (the conditions for the survival of the Transformation Model), ceases to be at issue. If anyone can procure equivalent capability without constraint, guaranteed access falls out of the set of strategic variables. Third — and this is the gravest — Definition 6 (the sovereign minimum guarantee level) and most of the design theory of Section 13 become unnecessary. Stockpiles are needed because supply is constrained; if capability is replicable without constraint and no one rations it, the problem of designing a guarantee level vanishes. Of Japan's three-part set in Section 18, item (c) drops out and only (a) and (b) remain. Fourth, the C3 governance argument of Propositions 9 and 10 loses its grounds where compute as a verification anchor loses its meaning (as the falsification condition of Proposition 9 makes explicit). What would remain of this paper in that world should also be stated. First, the three types M1/M2/M3 and the concept of transformation value (Definition 5) remain. Indeed, in a world where the tiers collapse and AI capability is fully commoditized, the second condition of Proposition 4 — holding complementary assets that the producer cannot replicate — comes to the fore as the sole condition of divergence, and the importance of this paper's argument about the locus of transformation value increases. In a world where everyone has the same capability, only complementary assets, not capability, generate differences. Second, Proposition 5 (the compounding of the Utilization Model) is unaffected. The structure of the product of diffusion and absorptive capacity is independent of the supply structure of capability. Third, Proposition 7 (the structure of AI outage) partly remains. Even if open weights diffuse, the execution infrastructure for large-scale inference may still be concentrated in cloud providers, so the problems of supplier concentration and outage correlation move to the infrastructure layer and persist there. The condition under which this objection is correct is the falsification condition of Proposition 2 itself. In addition, the possibility of an intermediate world in which the condition is partly satisfied — a world in which open models suffice for some uses while controls remain for some frontier uses — should be acknowledged. In that intermediate world the nine cells do not collapse, but the C1/C2 boundary comes to be drawn use by use, and this paper's unit of description, the cell position of a state, becomes too coarse. This coarseness is a weakness of this paper (Weakness 2, 20.16). The only defence this paper offers against this objection is to say that the maintenance or collapse of the distinction of Proposition 2 should be observed continuously through three indicators: supplier concentration, the lag width of the capability gap, and the effectiveness of control measures. This paper does not claim that the distinction is permanent. It analyses the consequences of the distinction for the period in which it actually exists. The scenario of collapse in the opposite direction should be treated with equal fairness. What was discussed above is a world in which the tiers converge downwards (C2 melts 852 into C1); but a world in which the tiers diverge upwards is equally possible — a world in which the capital requirements of the frontier increase at an accelerating rate, the number of C2 suppliers falls further, and the gap with open models widens. In this world the nine cells do not collapse, but the three cells of row C1 lose substantive meaning and the analysis contracts in effect to six cells. And the implications of Proposition 12 (the stratification of access) become graver than this paper's description, and Proposition 6a (the curse of concentration for producing states) is strengthened as well. This paper treated the divergence scenario within the frame of Proposition 2, but has not given it as explicit a falsification condition as the convergence scenario. That the collapse of the distinction is operationalized only in the downward direction, and that there is no criterion for determining an extreme in the upward direction, is a defect in this paper's construction. This paper does not deny the possibility that its having taken Frontier Descent (Section 5) as a keynote itself contained an implicit expectation in the direction of convergence. 20.3 Self-Fulfilment and the Risk of Alarmism in Discussing Tier C3 The third objection is an ethical criticism directed at Section 9 of this paper. As Definition 2 makes explicit, C3 (the critical tier) is an unrealized, anticipated category as of the time of writing. Discussing an international control regime for an unrealized category may be harmful along three paths. First, self-fulfilment. If the expectation that "acquiring critical capability confers decisive advantage" comes to be widely shared, states act on that expectation, and competition is thereby realized. In security studies, the cycle in which threat perception creates threats is a structure that has been observed repeatedly. Second, alarmism. The comparison with nuclear weapons is rhetorically powerful and may generate fears detached from the actual state of capability. Third, misallocation. Directing governance resources at unrealized dangers may defer responses to problems that are actually occurring — the access disparities of Proposition 12, the extractive distortion of Proposition 6b, and the AI outage risks of Proposition 7. All of these criticisms are legitimate. The reason this paper nevertheless discusses C3 lies in an offsetting asymmetry. As Proposition 10 states, critical-tier governance is "a constructed contingency," and to design it only once it arrives is too late. The design of means of verification, an international framework of accounting and control, and structures of confidence-building all require years to construct. If C3 does not arrive, Section 9 of this paper bears the cost of having conducted an unnecessary argument. If C3 arrives and no one has designed anything in advance, the cost may be larger than that. This asymmetry is the ground for choosing to discuss it. This argument, however, depends on the estimate of the asymmetry being correct. The conditions under which this objection is correct are as follows. (i) Where the probability of C3's arrival is sufficiently low and the self-fulfilment effect of discussing it is sufficiently large. In that case the computation of expected costs reverses, and not discussing it becomes optimal. (ii) Where the argument about C3 governance takes resources from governance problems that actually exist to a large degree. (iii) Where this paper's account is, 853 contrary to intention, received as an exaggeration of capability. As to the third condition, this paper imposed a discipline of description — making explicit at the opening of each section that mentions it that C3 is an unrealized, anticipated category; using no rhetoric of exaggerated capability or of fear-arousal; making no reference whatever to technical detail of weaponization; and arguing only at the level of institutions and governance — but how it is received lies outside the author's control. The design of this paper's definitions structurally severs part of this objection. Consider the case in which C3 were specified as "a level of capability whose possession or exercise is treated by governments as of the same class as nuclear weapons in its security externalities." Under that specification, the fact that constitutes C3's arrival is the change in governments' treatment itself, and even if nothing about capability changed, C3 would "arrive" the moment a policy document rated some capability as of the same class as nuclear weapons. That is, the proviso "whether and when C3 arrives is an empirical question" would be correct only as regards capability and incorrect as regards the arrival of the category. The arrival of the category would be a consequence of policy discourse, and policy discourse includes papers such as this one — what this subsection treats is psychological and strategic self-fulfilment, but the recursion generated by that specification would be more direct still. This paper's Definition 2 specifies C3 solely on the side of capability (an unrealized level of capability exceeding the frontier of the time in question by at least a stipulated threshold), and severs governments' treatment of C3 capability from the definition, making it the prediction of Proposition 2b (regime-class transition). By this: (a) the definitional recursion by which this paper's discourse would constitute C3's "arrival" is cut; (b) governments' treatment becomes a falsifiable prediction rather than a definitional consequence; and (c) the self-fulfilment risk discussed in this subsection also acquires a clear object confined to the side of treatment. That the monitoring indicator of Table A-7 in Appendix A is "changes in the rating of AI capability in national security documents" is likewise positioned as a verification indicator for Proposition 2b, rather than as the circularity of making the definition itself a monitoring indicator. What has been severed, however, is the definitional recursion, not the psychological and strategic self-fulfilment. The path by which the sharing of an expectation realizes competition remains however the definition is written. And Proposition 2b carries the limitation that its verification must await the realization of the threshold (20.10(a)). The claim that falls under those conditions is the legitimacy of Section 9 as a whole. The analytical content of Section 9 itself, however — the determination of the transplantability of each element of the nuclear control regime — is partly usable for the design of C2 control measures (export controls, the accounting of compute) even if C3 does not arrive. That is, in a world where C3 does not arrive, Section 9 can be reread as "an analysis of a strict version of C2 governance" and does not become entirely wasted. This possibility of rereading lowers the cost of discussing the matter. 854 The comparison with the option of not undertaking it should also be made explicit. Had this paper chosen not to discuss C3, the nine cells would become six (M×C1, M×C2), the construction would be more concise, and the risk of alarmism would be zero. What would be lost is the finding that Proposition 9 identifies — "the transplantability of the physical basis of verification" — and the analysis of the asymmetry of a freeze in Proposition 10. The former is useful for compute governance generally, and the latter concerns an issue already realized in relation to C2 export controls (the fixing of incumbents' acquired positions). The judgment that these two findings outweigh the risk of alarmism is this paper's judgment, and readers are under no obligation to share it. Relatedly, the distortion that discussing C3 works upon other parts of this paper is also acknowledged. That Section 9 occupies a large share of the body of the text and was positioned as the theoretical summit of this paper means that the allocation of space was decided by analytical interest rather than by the probability of arrival. A construction that devotes the largest space to an unrealized category itself operates as a non-verbal claim to the reader that arrival is highly probable. Rhetoric may be controlled by a discipline of description, but the centre of gravity of the construction has not been controlled. Were this paper to be reconstructed, an option would have been to maintain the analytical content of Section 9 while compressing its length, and to shift the centre of gravity to structures that are actually operating — Proposition 7 (AI outage) and Proposition 12 (the stratification of access). The reason this option was not taken is the asymmetry described above, the length of time required to design C3 governance; but whether that reason fully justifies the distortion in construction is a matter on which judgments differ. 20.4 The Techno-Nationalism Objection — Distinguishing a Design Theory of Dependence from a Counsel of Closure The fourth objection is directed at this paper's policy implications. Vocabulary such as the sovereign minimum guarantee level and national redefinition (for the reason this paper does not use the term "selective C2 sovereignty," see Section 18) is directly appropriable as vocabulary that justifies economic fragmentation and bloc formation. The criticism runs thus — the international division of labour in AI capability and its free circulation raise welfare worldwide. For each state to commit resources to building its own infrastructure in the name of "sovereignty" is inefficient duplicative investment, a denial of comparative advantage, and ultimately generates a spiral of mutual distrust. This paper's framework may function as theoretical embellishment for AI nationalism. This paper's position is not a counsel of closure but a design theory of dependence. This distinction is formulated clearly within this paper. Definition 6 defines the sovereign minimum guarantee level by three components, of which the second is "alliance-based guarantees (guarantees of supply by treaty or long-term contract)." That is, this paper's concept of a guarantee does not require domestic self-sufficiency. That Section 18 states expressly that "all-domestic production is impossible and unnecessary," and confines what is guaranteed not to a level of capability but to the three functions of operational capa‐ 855 city, renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition (Definition 6(i-a) to (ic)), is the concretization of this position. This limitation has a secondary effect that matters for this subsection — because what is guaranteed is defined not as "a level of capability" but as "the conditions for executing, renewing, and protecting capability," a rereading into "fostering domestic industry" incurs the burden of explaining which of the three functions — operational capacity, renewal capability, or the sensitive-processing condition — it corresponds to. The criterion that fixes the boundary is more objective than the specification "capability sufficient for the continuity of critical processes." The comparison with oil states the point most plainly — Japan never once sought self-sufficiency in oil, and designed its dependence through 254 days of stockpiles, energy saving, and the transformation of its industrial structure (Section 18). A stockpile is not self-sufficiency. The conditions under which this objection is correct should be stated without defence. (i) Where the design of the guarantee level expands in practice into a demand for self-sufficiency. This is not a normative possibility but a predictable dynamic in political processes. The limitation "capability sufficient for the continuity of critical processes" is readily reread in the budget-allocation process of industrial policy as "fostering domestic industry." Because the objective criterion fixing the boundary is weak, this paper's framework is vulnerable to expansive interpretation. (ii) Where several states pursue guarantee levels simultaneously, the accumulation of individually defensive behaviour generates fragmentation of supply and mutual distrust. This is a structure isomorphic with the security dilemma, and because this paper treats each state's design problem independently, it does not handle this interaction. (iii) Where this paper's very description of each country's cell position in Section 14 invites a competitive reading of position — a reading as a ranking table. This paper imposed a discipline of describing each country's policies descriptively, but the expressive form of plotting on the nine cells readily carries an implication of ordering. The claims that fall under those conditions are item (c), the legitimacy of the guarantee level, among the three-part set of Proposition 13, and the normative neutrality of the design theory of Section 13. Condition (i) is weakened by the confinement to the three functions but does not disappear — because any of the three functions may be reread in the budget-allocation process as "the operational capacity of domestic industry" or "the renewal capability of domestic firms." That is, if the design of a guarantee level promotes bloc formation in practice, then this paper's implication in recommending that design will have operated not as the intended "design of dependence" but as an actual "severance of dependence." This paper cannot exclude that consequence. What this paper can place is only the weak claim that the guarantee level should be minimal, that alliance-based guarantees are one of its components, and that "what is guaranteed and how far" should be treated as an explicit design question — that the only means of preventing tacit expansion is explicitness. The weakness of this claim is acknowledged (Weakness 3, 20.16). 856 The symmetrical objection — the criticism that this paper under-estimates the dangers of dependence — should also be recorded. The position that defends an open international division of labour and the position that emphasizes the dangers of dependence may direct diametrically opposed criticisms at the same account in this paper. From the former this paper is an embellishment of nationalism; from the latter this paper's "minimal" qualification is an under-estimation of the crisis. That two criticisms are directed at the same account is in itself only weak evidence that this paper occupies a middle position, and it does not exclude the possibility that both are correct — that this paper's framework is appropriable in either direction according to circumstance. The neutrality of a design theory is determined not by the designer's intention but by the political context in which the design is used. This paper cannot control that context. 20.5 Unpredictability — The Price of Being a Conditional Design Theory The fifth objection is directed at the form of this paper's claims. This paper has consistently avoided prediction and constituted its claims in the form of conditionals, "if X holds, then Y follows." Section 18 explicitly refused the prediction that "a second oil shock is coming," and presented a portfolio as a bundle of conditionals. This method is honest; but the criticism runs thus — a conditional claim is not tested if the condition is not satisfied, and if the consequence is not observed where the condition is satisfied, one may respond that "satisfaction of the condition was insufficient." That is, conditional design theory is a form that can defer falsification indefinitely. A strong theory makes predictions and is discarded by being wrong. This paper does not take that risk. This criticism goes to the essence. This paper's response takes the form of asking how far the statement of falsification conditions proposition by proposition prevents this danger. The examination is conducted separately by type of proposition. Propositions equipped with a testable form may be listed first. First, Proposition 4 (the conditions for the survival of the Transformation Model). If Proposition 4(ii) merely made "holding complementary assets that the producer cannot replicate at low cost" a necessary condition, then, since there would be no procedure for determining "not replicable at low cost" independently of the outcome of sustained value appropriation, any counter-example could be reclassified ex post as "there were in fact complementary assets." This paper operationalizes complementary asset endowment through four ex ante observables (exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, linguistic- contextual specificity), and sets the falsification condition as "rejected where the four indicators are measured before a generational-change event and firms in the lower quantiles are systematically observed to maintain gross margins across that generational change." The path of ex post reclassification is blocked by ex ante measurement. Second, Proposition 3 (the non-equivalence of the nine cells). If the features used for cell assignment (institutional requirements) and the outcome to be tested (the relation between institutions and outcomes) were the same, the falsification condition would be circular. This paper separates assignment from testing, and states in the falsification condition that cell 857 position is determined solely by four supply-side and dependence-side observables that use no institutional variable at all (capability distance from the frontier, net exports and imports of AI-related goods and services, supplier concentration in procurement, and whether access-control measures apply). Third, Proposition 11 (inter-layer transmission). If the claim "it marks an upper bound but does not guarantee a lower bound" were tested by average association, an escape route would remain whereby an observation of "no association" could be met with "the upper bound was not binding" — and writing an escape route into the exposition of a proposition is nothing other than nullifying its falsification condition. This paper places the test in quantile regression at an upper quantile (the 90th) and in an event study taking exogenous changes in access conditions (October 2022, October 2023, January 2025, May 2025) as events. Fourth, Proposition 6. A possibility claim that a distortion "may operate" cannot be rejected, and if the "institutional conditions" to be controlled for included an outcome variable (the fostering of local transformation capability), the falsification condition would return "no association" whenever executed as instructed. This paper erects two indicative propositions, Proposition 6a (producing states) and Proposition 6b (recipient states), and excludes outcome variables from the controls. Fifth, Propositions 5, 7, 12, and 13. Proposition 5 places the measurement of rents not in total external payments but in suppliers' gross margins (total payments measure not rents but exposure); Proposition 7 makes multiplicativity explicit as a test of the coefficient on an interaction term; Proposition 12 gives an independent falsification condition to its latter part (pressure towards universal service) as well; and Proposition 13 places its determination indicator not in "the digital balance of payments" but in "domestic value added per yen of digital procurement." The propositions this nonetheless fails to guard should be listed frankly. First, Proposition 10 (the asymmetry of a freeze and instability). Its falsification condition gives rise to no occasion for verification at all unless C3 arrives. Second, Proposition 14 (national redefinition). Its falsification condition requires a classification of "states that have carried out redefinitional policy shifts and states that have not," and the operationalization of this classification is still not given in this paper. Third, Proposition 2b (regime-class transition). As the price of removing the mechanism of the conclusion from the definition, this has become a prediction that cannot be verified until the threshold is realized (20.10(a)). For these three propositions, this paper accepts the criticism that the conditional form exempts them in substance from falsification. The condition under which this objection is correct is that the share of testable elements among this paper's propositions is low. In the examination above, this paper judges that, of all 42 numbered propositions comprising 44 sentences, those with clearly testable falsification conditions account for 16 sentences; but the possibility that this judgment is itself lenient is not excluded. The composition of the remaining 28 sentences may be stated. The two sentences of Propositions 41 and 42 are testable as a matter of the wording of their falsification conditions, yet the observables that wording names (whether an interface is made explicit, supplier concentration, the three variables of the upper bound) have not been constructed, and so they are not included among the 16 sentences (20.11(e), 858 20.9(h), 20.9(e), 20.8(j)). Of the five propositions concerning transition and the human foundation, those with testable falsification conditions are three sentences — Propositions 15 and 16 and the first part of Proposition 17 — while the latter part of Proposition 17 and Proposition 18 await the construction of proxy indicators, and the sufficiency claim of Proposition 19 awaits the appearance of instances (20.9(a), 20.10(b), 20.8(a), 20.8(c)). As for the two propositions on scenarios and the constraints on middle powers, Proposition 21 has a test design using a panel of middle powers, whereas the falsification of Proposition 20 presupposes the identification of scenarios by leading indicators, and since the discriminatory power of those indicators has not been backtested, it does not operate at present (20.8(e)). As for the seven propositions on leverage and the institutional foundation, all have falsification conditions, but because the observables their falsification conditions name have not been constructed on the observation side, none can be entered into testing at present (20.8(g), 20.8(h), 20.9(b), 20.9(c), 20.10(e), 20.10(f), 20.12(d)). As for the eight propositions treating the costs of the recommendations, all have falsification conditions, but Proposition 30 lacks a method of computing either side of its condition of justification, Proposition 36 lacks candidates for the minimum set to be compared, and for the remaining six the observables their falsification conditions name have not been constructed, so none can be entered into testing at present (20.9(f), 20.9(g), 20.11(d)). The same holds for the three propositions on the export and procurement of integrated systems (38 to 40) — the observation of switching costs in Proposition 38 depends on actual instances of switching, Proposition 39 lacks an indicator that measures portability ex ante, and the rating of the three variables of Proposition 40 remains qualitative (20.10(g), 20.8(i), 20.9(d), 20.9(i)). That is, the breadth of this paper's explanatory range and the low share of testable sentences within that range are two aspects of the same choice — because this paper erects propositions in domains chosen not for the existence of prior observation but precisely because theory there is blank owing to the absence of prior observation. The determination is left to readers' scrutiny of the map of verification in Section 21 (Table 10). The claim that falls under that condition is the claim that this paper satisfies the series discipline (construction from a body of falsifiable claims; a falsification condition for each proposition). Were the mechanism of the conclusion embedded in a definition, the corresponding proposition would be analytically true and its falsification condition a matter of form only — this is why this paper excludes the mechanism of conclusions from its definitions, but the determination of whether that exclusion is sufficient lies outside this paper. What does not fall is the content of the testable partial propositions themselves. There is a deeper criticism as well. Conditional design theory tacitly presupposes an actor that determines whether the condition is satisfied. If it is not specified who makes the determination of "if X holds," the design theory does not operate in practice. The design questions of the sovereign minimum guarantee level in Section 18 (enumerating what is to be guaranteed, specifying the level, deciding the composition, managing depreciation) go no further than placing the determining actor generically as "the state," and do not treat which function within government bears this determination, at what cycle it is re‐ 859 viewed, or who is accountable when the determination is wrong. The completeness of the work as a design theory is limited by this absence of governance design. This paper has argued the necessity of institutions, but has not entered into the design of the organizations that operate them — who measures, who decides, and who is accountable. This gap is only partly filled by Appendices C and D and is a principal unfinished part of this paper. 20.6 Bias of Observational Position — That This Paper Is Written from Japan The sixth objection is directed at this paper's standpoint. This paper is written by a Japanese researcher and practitioner, in Japanese, on the basis of a Japanese company. Even though Section 14 adopts a form that treats ten country profiles in parallel, the possibility cannot be excluded that the analytical axes selected are themselves a framing of the problem seen from a particular position. This paper does not conceal that position. Rather, stating concretely how the position has affected the shape of the theory has value as disclosure. The effects can be identified in at least three places. First, a strong interest in transformation value. That Definition 5 was erected as an independent definition, that Proposition 4 was devoted to the conditions for the survival of the Transformation Model, and that a considerable part of the cell analysis in Sections 7 and 8 was allotted to the Transformation Model, is not unrelated to Japan's having been a representative instance of M2 (the Transformation Model) in the oil period and holding the memory of both its success and its limits. Had the theory been written from an M1 (producing) country, the centre of gravity would have been placed on the institutional design of production — the allocation of rents, the operation of funds, diversification. That this paper treated the contrast between Norway and Venezuela (Section 6) only once, as an illustration of "divergence through institutions," and did not develop the internal institutional design of producing states in detail, is a consequence of that centre of gravity. Second, a strong interest in the guarantee level. That this paper devoted large space to Definition 6, Proposition 8, and the design theory of Section 13 is because it is written from a country that holds the history — the stockpiling regime from 1973 onwards — in which a state without resources mitigated an asymmetry of bargaining power by "an institution for buying time." That Japan's oil stockpiles reach 254 days, far above the international standard of 90 (Section 18), is the institutional expression of that interest, and this paper's argument about AI outage is an extension of that mode of thought. Had the theory been written from a frontier-producing state, a stoppage of supply would have been treated as a measure that one's own state imposes, and guarantees would have been marginalized as other states' problem. Third, the reflection of the position M3×C2. Japan is at present in the position of conducting advanced utilization while depending on external sources for frontier capability — M3×C2 in the terms of Section 8 — and that the structures visible from there are the

risk of changes in access conditions, price dominance, and the backflow of data accords with the content of the account of the corresponding cell in Section 8. This accord may be evidence that the theory has correctly grasped reality, and it may equally be evidence that the author's position has been projected onto the theory. This paper has no method of separating the two. The same holds for the fact that Section 18, as an independent section, occupies the greatest length in the body of the text. The construction in which the other nine countries are treated in parallel as profiles while Japan alone has a dedicated section can be explained by the readership of the series and the author's practical interests, but as the construction of a paper claiming generality of theory it lacks balance. This paper does not conceal this asymmetry, and stated in Section 14 that the details on Japan are carried forward to Section 18; but stating it is not dissolving it. The condition under which this objection is correct is that the very construction of the nine cells — the choice of the M axis and the C axis, and the claim of non-equivalence across cells — appears from other observational positions as a different partition. For example, from a standpoint that places data sovereignty and regulatory power on its axes (the EU), a lattice of regulatory power × market size rather than M×C could be the natural partition. From a standpoint that takes the divergence between the export of personnel and domestic utilization as its central problem (India), the international division of labour could be required as a third axis. This paper does not claim that its two-axis construction is the only partition. The claim that falls under that condition is the generality of the nine cells. What does not fall is the usefulness of the three conceptual instruments — transformation value, the guarantee level, and depth of utilization — which are usable upon other partitions as well. The bias of observational position also manifests in the form of questions not selected. Because this paper set the state as its unit of analysis, the positions of actors not integrated into states — low-income countries, states with scant administrative capacity, groups not represented by states — are marginalized. The ten profiles of Section 14 consist of producing states, transforming states, states of advanced utilization, and hub states, all of them states with a certain administrative capacity and capacity to mobilize capital. Groups of states that cannot deploy sufficient resources anywhere on the nine cells were confined within a "general discussion of small-state strategy." The problems raised by the discussions of digital colonialism and extractivism (Section 4) — the structure in which attracting compute infrastructure ends as a bargain in which only electricity, land, and water are handed over (Proposition 6b) — are incorporated into this paper, but this paper is not written from the standpoint of the countries that suffer that problem most gravely. That Proposition 12 (the stratification of access) treats disparities among states while lacking an account from the side of the actors placed at the lower end of those disparities is a limit of narration from Japan's position, which is intermediate but privileged. 861 20.7 The Conflict of Interest in Series Self-Citation The seventh item is a disclosure of the structural conflict of interest concerning this paper's citation structure. This paper is No. 10 in the working paper series of VURA Capital Innovation Holdings, Inc., and has a structural incentive to cite the nine prior papers (2026a to 2026i). Because self-citation raises citation counts and has the effect of asserting the systematic character of the series to outside readers, its appropriateness is not a matter for the author himself to determine. What this paper can do is to classify and disclose the roles of self-citation, and thereby put readers in a position to determine it. Following the series discipline, self-citations are classified in three. The first class is citation as foundational axiom — claims of prior papers that this paper's argument requires as premises in order to hold. In this paper the instances are the passages in Section 17 on inter-layer transmission where the framework of future-value distribution and the bottleneck theorem of Layer One, RCap (2026g), the institutional footing of self-definition of Layer Two, SDS (2026f), and the five dimensions of redefinition of Layer Three, ER (2026b), were used as premises. These are claims this paper premised without re-argument, and if the premises are mistaken, the correspondences of Propositions 11 and 14 collapse. This dependence is a weakness of this paper (Weakness 5, 20.16). The second class is citation as structural correspondence — passages where the structure of a prior paper is mapped onto this paper's object (the state). The instances are Proposition 14's mapping of the five dimensions of enterprise redefinition onto the level of the state, and the statement that Proposition 10 is the Layer Zero version of Proposition 14 of 2026g (a regime is a constructed contingency). Citations of this class admit of replacement by external literature so long as the validity of the correspondence is argued within this paper. The third class is citation as forward reference — passages that announce future empirical work, the instance being the statement (Section 21) that the dependence audit protocol of Appendix C will be implemented by VURA. The condition under which this objection is correct is that citations of the first class depend on original claims not replaceable by external literature, and that those original claims have not received independent verification. In this paper's case, 2026g, 2026f, and 2026b are all unrefereed working papers by the same author and the same organization, and have not received independent verification. This condition is therefore actually satisfied. The claims that fall under that condition are the inter-layer transmission of Section 17 (Proposition 11) and the five-dimensional correspondence of national redefinition (Proposition 14), and these should be read as conditional claims that hold only where the framework of the prior papers is valid. The core of this paper — Definitions 1 to 7 and Propositions 1 to 10, 12, and 13 — does not depend on self-citation and is constituted solely from external literature and primary sources. A reader can read this paper with the parts containing self-citation removed, and even then the nine-cell theory and the analysis of critical-tier governance hold. This separability is this paper's only substantive response to the conflict of interest. The claim of separability calls for caution, however. The structural fact that the paper can be read with Section 17 removed does not mean that the 862 self-citations are ornamental. So long as this paper, as No. 10 of the series, holds out the standing of establishing Layer Zero and extending the architecture to four layers, it is unavoidable that the validity of the series as a whole shares in part the fate of the validity of this paper's framework as a whole. Reading this paper as an independent paper and reading it as part of the series require different ranges of verification. In the former, the selfciting parts may be held in reserve; in the latter, the validity of the nine prior papers is put in question as a premise. Which reading this paper asks of its readers is, honestly stated, both, and this duality does not dissolve the conflict of interest of self-citation. There is one further conflict of interest to be added. The author's organization is a company whose business is the utilization of AI, and it structurally has incentives to rate the importance of AI utilization highly and to wish for the expansion of AI-related policy in Japan. The argument for deepening M3 and the three-part policy set of Section 18 accord in direction with those incentives. Because this paper cannot deny that accord, it has attempted to reduce the claims of Section 18 to a form verifiable independently of the author's interests — determination by observables such as domestic value added per yen of digital procurement, productivity, and the trajectory of transformation-value appropriation (the falsification condition of Proposition 13). Whether the attempt succeeds is left to the reader's determination. Since the position this paper recommends is identified as M2×C2, the accord with the author's business opportunities is likewise identifiable. This issue should therefore be treated not as an incident of the conflict of interest in selfcitation but as an independent section. Section 20.15 does that. 20.8 The Absence of a Measurement Framework — Erecting Concepts Without Constructing Observables The five subsections beginning here differ in character from the preceding ones. Whereas the preceding subsections reconstructed objections that might be directed at this paper, what follows are limitations this paper acknowledges of itself. The arrangement follows subject matter — deficiencies of the same kind are gathered in one place irrespective of which proposition they arise in relation to. The reason for this arrangement is that most of this paper's limitations are not specific to individual propositions but arise repeatedly from this paper's choice to place theory in domains where prior observation does not exist. A repeating structure is visible only when gathered in one place. One thing must be said in advance here. Turning something into a proposition is not the dissolution of a limitation. To turn something into a proposition is to rewrite a limitation in the form of a falsifiable claim; it is not to remove the limitation. What is obtained by the rewriting is an explicit statement of what observation could settle that limitation, not the settlement itself. Each item below includes both what has been formalized as a proposition and what remains not so formalized. For the former the form used is "Proposition N gives the structure, but the limitation that remains is …". This form is adopted so that readers do not mistake formalization for solution. 863 What this subsection treats is the type of limitation in which this paper erects concepts without constructing the observables that measure them. Ten items are acknowledged. All are in a state where, though testable as a matter of the wording of the falsification condition, the falsification condition does not operate because the observables the wording names do not exist. (a) The measurement framework for national brain capital (Definition 11) is not in place. Definition 11 constitutes national brain capital from four components — tacit knowledge at the site of work, judgment embedded in language, culture, and aesthetic sense, the professional ethics and practical customs that make trust in institutions possible, and the capacity for audit and verification based on long domain experience — and Proposition 18 placed it at the base of the defensibility of the Transformation Model. Sections 10, 17, and 18 conduct a considerable amount of description using this concept. But proxy indicators for the four components go no further than provisional proposals in Appendix E, and internationally comparable data do not exist. The proxy indicators named by the falsification condition of Proposition 18 (the density of skilled labour, the thickness of the stratum of domain professionals, the level of trust in institutions, the number of language-specific technical standards) each differ across countries in definition and method of collection, and a common framework must first be constructed for comparison. The absence of measurement is bound up with the structure of the definition itself. Definition 11 demarcates national brain capital by negation, as "the part that cannot be replicated or transferred at low cost by AI." Demarcation by negation requires, in order to fix the extension of the object, a determination that something "cannot be replicated at low cost," and that determination can be made only after replication has been attempted. That is, Definition 11 carries the danger that its extension is fixed only ex post, in the same form in which the coarse formulation of Proposition 4 ("complementary assets that the producer cannot replicate at low cost") carries it. For Proposition 4, operationalization through four ex ante observables removes this danger; for Definition 11 there is as yet no equivalent operationalization. The substance of this danger is as follows. A definition of "what cannot be imported" makes something unmeasurable into an all-purpose explanatory variable. If a country's transformation margin persists one can say "national brain capital was thick," and if it does not one can say it was thin. So long as this structure is permitted, Proposition 18 is falsified by no observation. This paper places two checks. First, that the falsification condition of Proposition 18 names proxy indicators in advance, and stipulates rejection if transformation margins at Tier C2 are appropriated persistently in countries where those indicators are thin. Second, that because Proposition 18 asserts a correspondence with the four indicators (trace and form), the claim about national brain capital is, so long as the four indicators are observable ex ante, exposed in part to testing through those four indicators. But the checks do not operate until proxy indicators are constructed. It is therefore more accurate to position Proposition 18 at present as an interpretation of the structure 864 lying behind the four indicators rather than as a testable hypothesis. That Section 18 did not claim that Japan's national brain capital is "thick" but confined itself to "specifying what ought to be measured" is a consequence of this limitation. (b) The criticism of a conceptual escape route — that this paper cannot at present fully rebut the absence of measurement stated in the preceding item. The absence of a measurement framework stated in the preceding item makes possible one of the strongest criticisms of this paper. Definition 11 (national brain capital) is one of the bases of this paper's theory. Proposition 18 founds the defensibility of the Transformation Model on this concept, Proposition 20 places it as the first element of the no-regret set, and Propositions 24, 33, and 34 take this concept as their object. Nevertheless, the measurement framework for Definition 11 is provisional. The proxy indicators for the four components presented in Appendix E — the composition of employment by occupation and the distribution of length of service, the number of language-specific technical standards and certifications, the number of registrations under supervision by occupation and the presence or absence of qualification-renewal systems, and the age composition and years of practical experience of the professional stratum — have feasibility in that they can be constructed from existing statistics, but they do not withstand standardized international comparison. The correspondence of occupational classifications differs by country; the presence or absence of a qualification system is a difference in institutional design rather than in capability; and the distribution of length of service reflects labourmarket custom and so does not directly measure the thickness of brain capital. That is, the proxy indicators may have meaning as a time series for a single country, but cannot be used for comparison of levels across states. From this follows one of the strongest criticisms of this paper. To place an unmeasurable concept at the base of a theory is to build into the theory a device that absorbs unexplained differences, and this is not explanation but a conceptual escape route — so runs the criticism. This paper cannot at present fully rebut this criticism. The materials this paper can offer in rebuttal extend only to three points. (i) That Definition 11 is decomposed into four components, and independent observation is specified for each component. (ii) That the falsification condition of Proposition 18 explicitly opens a route to rejection, in the form "where transformation margins at Tier C2 are systematically observed to be appropriated persistently in countries where the proxy indicators are thin." (iii) That Proposition 24 (self-erosion) and Proposition 33 (outflow) generate independent predictions about this concept, so that the concept does not remain a redescription of a single phenomenon. But all three are, until proxy indicators are constructed in an internationally comparable form, the design of falsification and not the possibility of carrying it out. That the research agenda of Section 21 places this construction among long-term tasks means, conversely, that this criticism will remain valid until then. This paper records it not as a gap to be filled by rhetoric but as an unresolved limitation. (c) The proxy indicators for value-definition capability (Definition 12) are provisional and carry the danger of a residual concept. Proposition 17 claims that the 865 further the diffusion of AI capability proceeds, the more the residual that generates differences among states and among firms moves to value-definition capability. As Section 17 (17.3.6) acknowledged, the strongest objection to this claim is that value-definition capability is a residual concept difficult to measure, to which any difference not explicable by efficiency may be attributed. The danger of reifying a residual is a repetition of the circumstance in which total factor productivity was called "a measure of our ignorance" in the explanation of economic growth. This section does not repeat that acknowledgment but states what the checks are and how far they operate. The check lies in the two-stage structure of the falsification condition of Proposition 17. The first stage is a falsification condition for the claim of diminishing returns, which assures that the first part is tested independently before entering the argument about the residual. The second stage is a falsification condition for the claim of attribution, stipulating that the claim of attribution is rejected where the proxy indicators of value-definition capability do not explain the disparities in outcome. The requirement of the second stage is that, in order to call a residual "value-definition capability," a variable that measures value-definition capability independently must explain the residual. So long as this two-stage structure exists, Proposition 17 is in principle falsifiable. The parts that are not operating should be stated. First, the proxy indicators (distinctiveness of purpose-setting, consistency of long-term resource allocation, the rate of creation of new markets) are provisional proposals, all exposed to Goodhart's problem and lacking internationally comparable data sources. That a coarse indicator does not explain something is no proof that value-definition capability is not the substance of the residual; it may equally be a consequence of the indicator's being coarse. This asymmetry is not dissolved until a measurement framework is in place. Second, confirmation that a residual remains after controlling for the competing explanations that this paper's own framework supplies — complementary asset endowment (Proposition 4), national brain capital (Definition 11), the guarantee level (Definition 6), cell position (Proposition 3) — is not performed in any section. Proposition 17 is therefore a testable proposition as to its first part (diminishing returns) and remains at the standing of a hypothesis with a specified testing procedure as to its latter part (attribution). (d) The conditions for the propagation of value-definition capability — Proposition 32 confines the paths, but the danger of a residual concept is not removed. The very path by which value-definition capability (Definition 12) is converted into national value must be put in question. In Proposition 32 (the conditions for the propagation of valuedefinition capability) this paper confined this path to three — compelled acceptance through market size, incorporation into technical standards, and connection with existing international frameworks — and stated that definitions lacking these remain local optima valid only within the jurisdiction concerned. As a result of this limitation, Proposition 17 becomes a claim conditioned on propagation — the claim that the difference remaining after the diminishing returns to efficiency is attributable to value-definition capability has 866 come to be confined to cases where that value-definition capability has a path of propagation. The limitation is an improvement, but it does not dissolve the core of the problem. The core lies in the fact that the residual concept of value-definition capability may function as a sink for unexplained differences. Proposition 32 narrows the range of absorption; it does not close it. The reason is as follows. The conditions of propagation are conditions for value-definition capability to be converted into national value; they do not supply a measurement of value-definition capability itself. Accordingly, where a country's outcome is unexplained, the ex post explanation "value-definition capability was high and it also had paths of propagation" can still be constructed. Since possession of the three paths can be measured by observable quantities — market size, the number of references by standards outside the jurisdiction, and participation in frameworks — it may even be said that the materials usable for ex post explanation have increased. As 20.8(c) acknowledged, the only means of removing this danger is the ex ante fixing of proxy indicators, and the three proxy indicators of Proposition 17 (distinctiveness of purpose-setting, consistency of long-term resource allocation, the rate of creation of new markets) are specified but not constructed. Until they are constructed, Proposition 32 does no more than narrow the range of absorption; it does not stop value-definition capability from being a residual concept. (e) The discriminatory power of the leading indicators has not been verified. Definition 14 demarcates leading indicators by three conditions: (i) repeated observability from public information; (ii) moving in different directions across the three scenarios (discriminatory power); and (iii) that the time from observation to a change in policy or investment is shorter than the time until the consequences of the scenario in question are realized (leading character). The indicators presented in Section 16 and Appendix F are selected as satisfying these three conditions theoretically. But results of backtesting condition (ii), discriminatory power, against past data are absent from this paper. That is, whether the indicators actually separate the three scenarios, and with what lag if they do, has not been confirmed. The character of this limitation is isomorphic with the limitation of 20.8(a) concerning the proxy indicators of Proposition 18, but its position is weaker. The proxy indicators of Proposition 18, once constructed, make the proposition falsifiable. Leading indicators, by contrast, cannot be used in determination even once constructed unless the discriminatory power of the indicators themselves is tested. If an indicator used in determination in fact lacked discriminatory power, the staging of investment on the basis of that indicator operates as groundless waiting. The design of a backtest is possible in principle — reconstruct the indicators for some past period and collate them with the state that actually unfolded in that period. The reason this paper did not do so is that this paper lacks a criterion for encoding, in the vocabulary of scenarios, "the state that actually unfolded" in the progress of AI capability. To backtest without such a criterion would be to anticipate the conclusion at the stage of encoding. This limitation is therefore not a shortfall in volume of work but 867 a measurement problem inherent in the instrument of scenarios. This paper confines itself to placing the backtest in the research agenda of Section 21. (f) The identification problem — a discrimination by combinations was designed, but no backtest has been performed. Section 16 presented a framework using leading indicators (Definition 14) to identify which of the three world scenarios (Definition 13) is unfolding. As 20.8(e) has already acknowledged, the discriminatory power of the indicators is given theoretically and has not undergone verification against past data. The design response this paper placed against this point is that, since a single indicator may produce the same movement under several scenarios (the identification problem), determination is entrusted not to a single indicator but to combinations of indicators and is made by the concurrence of several indicators (Appendix F). This response does not dissolve the identification problem in principle. Discrimination by combination functions where sets of indicators generate different patterns under the three scenarios, and it has not been verified that the patterns actually differ. In addition, because determination by combination has more degrees of freedom than determination by a single indicator, it increases the room for choosing ex post "which combination one ought to have looked at" — and unless the criteria of determination are fixed in advance, this degree of freedom operates not as discriminatory power but as room for ex post rationalization. And this paper has not performed a backtest against past data. The work required is, as 20.8(e) and Section 21.7 stated, in three stages, and the greatest obstacle is that this paper lacks a criterion for encoding "the state that actually unfolded" in the vocabulary of scenarios. The design of discrimination by combination is a device on the near side of this obstacle; it does not surmount the obstacle itself. The identification framework of Section 16 has, until a backtest is performed, no assurance of operating as an instrument of determination. Of this paper's statement that it "does not make predictions but supplies an instrument of identification," the latter half is at present the presentation of a design, not the supply of an instrument. (g) The measurement framework for the two components of leverage is provisional, and the diagnostic of Appendix G remains qualitative. Definition 15 decomposes geoeconomic leverage into the two components of indispensability and desirability, and suggests how each is measured — indispensability by the holding of chokepoints on supply networks, the absence of alternative suppliers, and the time required to switch; desirability by the attractiveness of the market, rules, technology, capital, and trust supplied. But this paper presents no single indicator composing these. Composition requires weights between the components, and those weights depend on the context of the negotiation — what is at issue, and over what horizon it is settled. It is for this reason that this paper uses leverage only as an ordinal scale and confines itself to describing whether the level is high or low and to which quadrant of the 2×2 a case belongs. The price of this limitation should be written honestly. Description by an ordinal scale coarsens comparison. One may say "country A has higher indispensability than country B," but not "by how much" or "whether that difference offsets B's advantage in desirabil‐ 868 ity." That the country profiles of Section 14 adopted dual coordinates is an improvement in that it describes position and leverage separately, but this paper gives no procedure for combining the two coordinates so as to assess a state's negotiating standing. The diagnostic of Appendix G likewise stops at qualitative steps — inventory, enumeration, and assignment to a quadrant — and produces no score. This is a deliberate restraint — composing without grounds for the weights means that the conclusion is manufactured at the stage of composition — but that it is a restraint does not mean that it is not a limitation. In particular, although placement on the leverage axis requires that "the value of the position of writing the rules," a component of desirability, be measured as the degree to which other actors must comply in order to obtain access to the market in question, methods for estimating that cost of compliance are not established. The costs of documentation, testing, and internal controls for conformity are buried in firms' internal costs and are hard to reconstruct from public information. This absence of measurement repeats at the level of leverage the same structure as the limitation stated at 20.8(a) about national brain capital — the concept comes first and measurement follows after. (h) As regards the quantification of geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15), this paper has no principle of composition. Item (a) stated that the measurement framework for leverage is provisional; the core of that provisionality can be identified more narrowly. Definition 15 gives the two components of indispensability and desirability, and Sections 11.2 and 11.3 enumerate sub-items for each component — for indispensability, the geographical concentration of supply, the number of alternative suppliers, and the time required to switch; for desirability, the size of final demand, references by standards outside the jurisdiction, the volume of capital and technology supplied, and the level of development of trust infrastructure. But this paper has no principle for how to weight these sub-items within each component, or how to compose the two components into a single quantity. The diagnostic of Appendix G likewise goes no further than supplying steps for inventorying items and assigning them to a quadrant of the 2×2, and gives no rule for producing a single score from the items entered. The work of comparing the leverage of two countries, and the work of measuring the change in one country's leverage over time, are therefore at present left to judgments made by readers outside the diagnostic sheet. What should be stated here is the character of the choice not to compose. This paper has justified this restraint on the ground that composing without grounds for the weights means the conclusion is manufactured at the stage of composition (item (a) and Section 21.7). This ground is sound, but a justified restraint is not a solution but a provisional avoidance. That the avoidance remains provisional appears in two respects. First, so long as leverage is used as an instrument of comparison, composition takes place somewhere — if this paper does not perform it, readers will perform it with weights that are not made explicit. Avoidance does not remove composition; it moves composition to a place where it is not observed. Second, Proposition 22 states that the relation between indispensability and desirability shifts from substitutive to complementary according to the band of levels, and this claim itself presupposes treating the two components on a single scale. So long as 869 one remains at an ordinal scale, the band of levels at which the relation shifts cannot be identified. The construction of a principle of composition — at least, a procedure for setting weights as a function of the context of negotiation, and a method of sensitivity analysis with respect to those weights — is therefore a task this paper leaves to subsequent work, and until it is supplied, the leverage axis operates as a framework of description but not as a framework of measurement. (i) That this paper supplies no framework for measuring portability ex ante. Proposition 39 makes explicit that, of the four conditions, (iv) portability is the most binding. That is, the centre of gravity of this paper's claim is placed on the condition, among the four, that is most difficult to measure. Section 12.3.4 identified four paths by which a system depends on the institutions of its own jurisdiction (references to laws and regulations, the structure of occupations and qualifications, tacit premises, and the structure of data), but this is an enumeration of paths, not a scale. This paper has no indicator for determining, before transfer is attempted, how portable a given system is. The third path in particular — premises that are not made explicit — escapes ex ante inspection by definition. The structure in which what the premises were becomes apparent only once transfer has failed implies the possibility that portability is observed only ex post. This limitation is isomorphic with the difficulty of measuring national brain capital acknowledged at 20.8(a), but it is deeper — whereas for national brain capital candidate proxy indicators could be indicated, for portability the level of candidates has not been reached. The scope of this limitation is, however, narrowed by Proposition 41. Under Proposition 41 (12.3.7), ex ante measurement is difficult in principle only for systems that do not make their interface explicit; for systems with an explicit interface, the extent of the portable core is fixed at the level of design documents. That is, the structure in which "what the premises were becomes apparent only once transfer has failed" is not a limitation about portability in general but is confined to a limitation about systems without an interface. Two parts nonetheless remain. First, this paper supplies no procedure for determining from outside whether an interface is made explicit (a state in which two layers are separated in design documents while in implementation dependencies are scattered across the layers is indistinguishable from the outside — 12.3.7). Second, this paper does not determine which jurisdictions or domains succeed in making an interface explicit. The ex ante measurement of portability therefore amounts only to a conditional narrowing: it becomes possible only where the presence or absence of an explicit interface can first be determined. (j) That the measurement framework for the three variables of the upper bound in Proposition 42(ii) is not in place. The level of the upper bound is said to be a function of (a) the national brain capital in the domain in question remaining on the recipient side, (b) the existence of alternative suppliers, and (c) the severity of the consequences of failure in the domain in question; but for none of the three variables is the procedure of measurement within this paper. The first variable inherits directly the difficulty of measuring national brain capital acknowledged at 20.8(a), and moreover demands measurement at a finer unit — the part "remaining for the domain in question." The second

variable is identical with the absence of measurement of supplier concentration stated at 20.9(e). The third variable is identical with (a) of the three variables of Proposition 40, and, as 20.9(i) acknowledges, remains a qualitative rating. The upper bound is therefore in a state where its existence and determinants are formalized while its level cannot be computed for any domain. This state is the obverse of the acknowledgment left after the narrowing at 20.9(d); the two state the same absence, the one from the side of formalization and the other from the side of measurement. In addition, the falsification condition itself — whether the three variables explain the upper bound — presupposes a procedure for observing the upper bound independently, yet the procedure for observing the upper bound is likewise unspecified — observation of the turning point at which the recipient side prefers "to recover autonomy even at the cost of paying the switching costs." The turning point is a statement about preference and can be observed only after a choice has been executed, and so escapes ex ante determination. Setting out (a) through (d) side by side, a structural danger this paper has taken on becomes visible. This paper has two sinks for unexplained differences — national brain capital and value-definition capability. Neither is measured directly, and both are demarcated by negation, as "cannot be imported" and "not explained by efficiency." Used together, they can explain almost any observation ex post. This danger is individually blocked by the falsification conditions of the respective propositions, but for accounts that use the two in combination — which is exactly what Sections 10, 17, and 18 do — this paper has no check at the level of the combination. Readers must determine individually, for passages where this paper invokes both national brain capital and value-definition capability, whether the invocation rests on observation or is merely a restatement of attribution. Setting the ten items side by side, a common structure becomes visible. This paper selected its issues by the criterion of whether they would combine with existing instruments to generate new falsifiable propositions, but many of the propositions generated have falsification conditions that can be written and no measurement framework. The four components of national brain capital, the proxy indicators of value-definition capability, the discriminatory power of the leading indicators and their combinations, the two components of leverage and the weights of their composition, portability, and the three variables of the upper bound — all appear in the statements of propositions, while the procedures of observation lie outside this paper. The repetition is not accidental. This paper erects propositions in domains chosen not for the existence of prior observation but precisely because theory there is blank owing to the absence of prior observation. The price of that choice is distance from evidence. 20.9 Incomplete Formalization — Signs Given, Magnitudes Not What this subsection treats is a second type of limitation, to be distinguished from the preceding one. Whereas the preceding subsection concerned the deficiency that what is to be measured is settled but has not been measured, this subsection concerns the 871 deficiency that the formalization of the quantity to be measured is incomplete. Direction, sign, and existence are shown, while magnitude, level, threshold, and functional form are not given. Nine items are acknowledged. (a) The dynamic scenarios are conditional paths rather than predictions, and the time constants of transition have not been estimated. Section 15 presented four scenarios of transition — [A] the divergence of the Transformation Model, [B] vertical integration across axes, [C] moving upstream through capital, and [D] downward transition through physical constraints — and organized for each the driving factors, the accumulation required, and the irreversibility. But this paper does not state which scenario occurs with what probability. In addition, this paper has not estimated the quantity at the core of the asymmetry asserted by Proposition 15 — the time constant required for an upward transition. The "orders of magnitude for time constants" in Table 13 goes no further than showing an ordering derived from the nature of the accumulation (institutional design is fast, the formation of a stratum of people is slow); it is not an estimate in years. When Section 18 stated of Japan that "doing nothing means descent," it likewise did not state in how many years descent becomes settled, or what level of accumulation suffices for reversal. This restraint is this paper's discipline. Estimating time constants requires instances of states that have accomplished upward transitions, and data measuring levels of accumulation retrospectively. The former is scarce in sample and the latter does not exist. To present an estimate of a quantity that cannot be estimated would contradict this paper's form as a conditional design theory (20.5). At the same time, it must be admitted that this restraint lowers this paper's practical utility. For a policymaker, the statement "doing nothing means descent" does not become material for setting priorities in resource allocation unless it says whether the descent occurs in three years or in twenty. The absence of time constants means that, even where this paper's claims are correct, they stop partway in being translated into the design of policy. This limitation is isomorphic with the gap discussed at 20.5 — that the actor determining satisfaction of the conditions is not specified — and is a problem that recurs at the point where conditional design theory is connected to practice. The estimation of time constants has been placed in the long-term research agenda of Section 21 (21.7). (b) There is no estimate of a threshold for the "time-constant ratio" of Proposition 26. Proposition 26 asserts that the effectiveness of governance depends on the ratio of the time an institution requires to make a decision to the time the capability under management requires to change substantially, and states that in domains where the former exceeds the latter, rules with fixed content are already obsolete at the moment of enactment. The structure of this claim is the general form of Definition 9 (the half-life of the verification anchor) and of the AI-applied part of Proposition 9. But this paper has not estimated at what level of this ratio the effectiveness of rules is lost. It is not specified whether the condition "exceeds" refers to the ratio exceeding 1 or to its exceeding a threshold that includes some margin. 872 This absence has two consequences. First, Proposition 26 cannot be used immediately as an instrument of determination. To determine for a domain "whether decision time exceeds capability-change time," both must be measured on the same scale; but institutional decision time differs by orders of magnitude according to the kind of procedure (amendment of a treaty, amendment of a statute, amendment of subordinate rules, and updating of technical annexes each have distinct time constants), and capability-change time likewise differs by use. Which procedure is paired with which use may reverse the determination. Second, this paper does not state what cycle of revision the prescription of Proposition 26 — rules that stipulate a procedure of revision rather than content — requires. Building in a procedure of revision may itself be a necessary condition, but if the cycle of the built-in procedure is longer than capability-change time, effectiveness is not restored. That the falsification condition of Proposition 26 stipulates that "it is also rejected where rules with a built-in procedure of revision prove no more effective than rules without one" corresponds to this possibility; but absent an estimate of the cycle, this falsification condition too does not operate at present. What 20.9(a) stated about the time constants of transition — that the discipline of not presenting estimates of quantities that cannot be estimated at the same time lowers practical utility — applies in the same form to the institutional time constant. (c) The definition of "exercise" in Proposition 23 is coarse, and the treatment of partial exercise and of threat alone is unsettled. Proposition 23 asserts that indispensability based on the holding of a chokepoint "depreciates through being exercised," and places its falsification condition in whether investment in searching for alternatives increases after exercise. This formulation tacitly presupposes that exercise is a binary event. But actual exercise is a continuous quantity and is in many cases composite. Measures directed at particular items only, measures directed at particular destinations only, measures that permit performance of existing contracts while stopping only new ones, measures that move to a licensing system while in practice granting nearly all licences — each of these can be described either as "exercised" or as "not exercised." Further, even without exercising, merely showing that one could exercise causes those who may be affected to begin searching for alternatives. In practice, investment decisions on searching for alternatives in many cases begin not with the invocation of a measure but with the recognition of the possibility of a measure. The effect of this coarseness on Proposition 23 is twofold. First, the operation of the falsification condition becomes uncertain. The condition "rejected where no increase in investment in searching for alternatives is observed after exercise" cannot separate the effect of exercise where the search has begun before exercise. To design this as an event study, one must decide whether to place the date of the event at the publication of the measure, at its pre-announcement or its reporting, or at the point when the direction of policy became public, and this choice governs the estimate. Second, the strength of the "incentive to restrain the frequency and scope of exercise" that Proposition 23 says is conferred on the holder depends on the definition of exercise. If depreciation occurs from threat alone, the incentive to restrain begins to operate earlier than the holder supposes, 873 and the policy implications of the proposition change. This paper confines itself to mentioning this distinction in Section 11.6 and does not formalize how the forms of partial exercise, threat, and pre-announcement are to be treated within the function of depreciation. Proposition 23 is therefore testable as a claim about direction but incomplete as a claim about magnitude. (d) The upper bound of self-reinforcement in Proposition 38 — the existence and determinants of the upper bound are formalized, but its magnitude has not been estimated. The scope of the acknowledgment in this item is narrowed by Proposition 42(ii). What follows first records the acknowledgment that would arise if the upper bound were not formalized, and then states what is narrowed and what nonetheless remains. Proposition 38 states that the adoption of an integrated system raises switching costs through conformity investment and appreciates desirability. Section 12.5.4 made explicit that this mechanism is not unbounded, as three constraints — where the recipient side makes portability an object of negotiation, where several systems compete, and where a system becomes obsolete. But this paper does not formalize at what level the rise in switching costs plateaus. The three constraints indicate the direction in which the mechanism is attenuated but do not give the degree of attenuation. This absence weakens the check against a reading on which Proposition 38 implies unbounded self-reinforcement. What is theoretically required is a formalization that gives an upper bound to the appreciation of desirability, with the share of conformity investment specific to a system, the number of competing systems, and the speed of obsolescence as variables. This paper does not have it. This limitation is the counterpart of the limitation this section acknowledges regarding Proposition 23 (the depreciation of indispensability through exercise) — the coarseness of the definition of exercise (20.9(c)). For the dynamics of both components, the sign is shown but the magnitude is not. The narrowing by Proposition 42(ii). Proposition 42(ii) in Section 12.5.7 closes part of this acknowledgment. What has been dissolved should be stated explicitly — the existence of the upper bound, and its determinants, have been formalized. The upper bound is defined not by the absolute level of switching costs but by the turning point in the recipient side's preference: that is, the point at which paying the switching costs ceases to fall below the value of recovering autonomy. The mechanism is likewise identified — because a rise in switching costs also raises the cost to the recipient side of continuing the relationship, it simultaneously raises the incentives towards in-house development, multi-sourcing, and the institutionalization of portability requirements. The mechanism of self-reinforcement, by operating, generates a component that presses down its own upper bound. And the level of the upper bound is given as a function of three variables — (a) the national brain capital in the domain in question remaining on the recipient side, (b) the existence of alternative suppliers, and (c) the severity of the consequences of failure in the domain in question — and the direction in which each variable acts is specified as well ((a) and (b) lower the upper bound, (c) raises it). The check against the reading that "Proposition 38 implies unbounded self-reinforcement" is therefore placed inside the theory. 874 The part that nonetheless remains. The extent of the dissolution should not be overstated. What Proposition 42(ii) gives is the existence and the determinants of the upper bound, not its magnitude. Of the formalization that the preceding paragraph stated to be theoretically required — a formalization that gives an upper bound to the appreciation of desirability with the share of conformity investment specific to a system, the number of competing systems, and the speed of obsolescence as variables — what Proposition 42(ii) gives is the identification of variables and the direction of their action; neither the functional form nor the level is yet given. In addition, for none of the three variables does a framework of measurement exist (20.8(j) of this section). The scope of the acknowledgment in this item therefore narrows from "the upper bound is not formalized" to "the magnitude of the upper bound has not been estimated" — the limitation has not vanished but has become narrower. The counterpart side, Proposition 23 (the coarseness of the encoding of exercise, 20.9(c)), has received no corresponding narrowing. The dynamics of the two components of leverage have thus acquired, for the side of desirability alone, the structure of an upper bound in addition to a sign. (e) That this paper gives no threshold of supplier concentration separating lock-in from indispensability. Proposition 42(i) states that lock-in and indispensability are questions posed about different sets, and that a high level of lock-in is not evidence of indispensability unless accompanied by an indicator of supplier concentration. Lock-in asks whether a party already engaged can leave; indispensability asks whether a third party can bypass. The distinction is conceptually clear, and this clarity protects this paper's core determination (12.1.7). But this paper does not give the threshold required to translate the distinction into an empirical determination. That is, it is not formalized at what level of supplier concentration lock-in in an individual relationship turns into indispensability in the system. Section 12.5.6 stated that "if some tens of alternative suppliers exist, bypassing exists as a costly option and indispensability does not hold," and recorded for semiconductors that they are "a handful in the world," but these are illustrations and not thresholds. Unless a threshold is given, the observation named by the falsification condition of Proposition 42(i) — whether supplier concentration is also systematically high in domains where the level of lock-in is high — is testable as a matter of correlation but cannot be used for determination about an individual domain. Further, it is not specified in what unit concentration is to be measured — whether the unit is the jurisdiction or the supplying entity, and at what granularity a domain is demarcated. That Definition 4 in Section 13 included HHI among the components of the dependence indicator gives a type of measurement, but this paper has not measured concentration by domain itself (18.11.2). (f) The sovereignty premium and the fiscal ceiling — Section 19 and Proposition 30 give the structure of costs but do not compute a figure for the ceiling. Section 19 conceptualized as the sovereignty premium (Definition 19) the fact that domestic guarantees run counter to economies of scale, formalized the condition of justification as insurance as Proposition 30, and stated that a sustainable ceiling exists on the cost of continuous construction. But this paper does not compute a figure for that ceiling. As Section 875 19.1.2 stated, computation requires data and premises this paper does not have. Obtaining the level of the sovereignty premium requires a function of unit cost by scale of domestic guarantee (including the location of minimum efficient scale), and this requires access to the cost structure on the supplier side. Obtaining the expected value of avoided losses requires estimates of the probability distribution of stoppages of supply and of the depth of degradation in output during a stoppage, the former being the probability of a contingency outside this paper's framework and the latter a quantity that can be measured only once the dependence indicators of Hypothesis H1 are constructed. Obtaining the fiscal ceiling requires comparison with the marginal value of other policy objectives, and this exceeds this paper's unit of analysis. What Section 19 gives is therefore the structure of costs and the conditions under which costs operate as a constraint, not the level of costs. This limitation genuinely reduces the practical utility of Section 19. What designers most want to know is "how far one may go," and this paper does not answer that question with a figure. What this paper answers is only "what must be measured in order to produce an answer." This limitation stands in tension with calling Section 19 "the section that computes the costs of its own recommendations" — that section enumerated costs but did not compute them. Readers should read Section 19 as a schedule of cost items rather than as an estimate of costs. (g) The trade-off between economies of scale and domestic provision — Proposition 30 gives a condition of justification but no method of estimating expected losses. Proposition 30 stated that a domestic guarantee is not justified from the standpoint of efficiency and is justified only as insurance, and that justification as insurance holds only where the total sovereignty premium falls below the expected value of the losses avoided in the event of a stoppage of supply. This formalization functions as a response to the point at issue in that it moves the question of domestic provision from the binary of "do it or not" to the quantitative question of "up to what scale is it justified." But this paper gives no method of estimating the expected value of avoided losses. Estimating the expected value requires (i) the distribution of the probability of a stoppage of supply, and (ii) the distributions of the depth of degradation in output and of the time to recovery if a stoppage occurs. As to (i), this paper adopts the position that it does not predict the occurrence of AI outages (Section 18.13), and has no framework for supplying probabilities. As to (ii), the depth of degradation is a quantity to be measured by the dependence indicators of Hypothesis H1 and the AI outage exercise of Appendix C, and neither has been carried out. The condition of justification of Proposition 30 is therefore clear as a condition, while at present neither its left-hand side nor its right-hand side can be computed. In this state, the instruction Proposition 30 gives to practice extends only to the procedural one, "estimate both sides before deciding the scale." In addition, as Section 19.2.4 stated, justification as insurance is written as a comparison of expected values presupposing risk neutrality. Where a stoppage of supply has consequences bearing on the survival of the state, a higher premium may be justified under risk-averse preferences, but this paper has no framework for deciding what level is then 876 admissible. The structure of the trade-off — that following economies of scale favours aggregation, while preparing against a stoppage of supply requires dispersion and domestic guarantees — has been made explicit, but the location of the solution is not given. Of the five types in Section 19, this type displays most sharply this paper's general limitation of having shown a structure without showing a level (20.9(f)). (h) That this paper has not estimated the cost of making an interface explicit in itself. Proposition 41 does not give a costless solution; it states that the two may be made compatible if a cost is paid. Section 12.3.7 divided that cost in three — that a separated structure is less efficient in the jurisdiction concerned than a structure optimized for that jurisdiction alone; that the cost of coordination across the interface arises as a standing matter; and that work is required to maintain the interface specification as a document and to keep coherence at each revision of the system. But this paper has computed neither the level of this cost nor how much of the transformation margin it consumes. This absence leaves undecided whether Proposition 41 operates as practical guidance — in domains where the cost exceeds the benefit obtained from compatibility, not making an interface explicit may be rational, and this paper gives no such point of divergence. This limitation is isomorphic with the limitation acknowledged at 20.9(f) about the sovereignty premium (that Section 19 enumerated costs but did not compute them). In addition, this paper has no procedure for detecting from outside a state that has the outward form of an interface without the substance — a state in which two layers are separated in design documents while in implementation dependencies are scattered across the layers. The detectability of declaring an interface without paying the cost has the same root as the difficulty of measuring portability ex ante (20.8(i)). (i) That the operationalization of the three variables of Proposition 40 remains qualitative. Proposition 40 makes the choice of procurement mode a function of three variables: (a) the severity of the consequences of failure, (b) the domain-specificity of judgment, and (c) reversibility. Section 12.6.2 made explicit that the measurement of all three variables remains a qualitative rating by domain, and limited the levels in Table 26 to illustration. But this limitation acts directly on the testability of Proposition 40. The falsification condition calls for rejection "where no correspondence is observed between the levels of the three variables and the procurement mode actually adopted," yet so long as the levels of the three variables are qualitative ratings, the determination whether a correspondence exists depends on the judgment of the rater. In particular, since (b) the domain- specificity of judgment is variable (iv) portability seen from the recipient side, the difficulty of measuring Proposition 39(iv) is directly the difficulty of measuring (b). For (a) and (c) among the three variables there is room to borrow proxy indicators from existing frameworks of regulatory impact assessment and risk assessment, but this paper has not carried out that work. Items (d), (e), and (h) of this subsection, together with 20.11(e) and 20.8(j), share one structure. Propositions 41 and 42 do not widen this paper's explanatory range; they narrow the conditions under which this paper's existing claims hold. Proposition 41 877 states that the compatibility of embedding and portability holds only under the condition of an explicit interface, and Proposition 42 states that the self-reinforcement of desirability operates only inside an upper bound. Both are propositions in the direction of weakening this paper's claims, and in this respect this paper's general structure — that breadth of explanatory range is accompanied by distance from evidence (20.16) — does not apply to these two. But narrowing conditions is also an addition of new empirical content — because quantities this paper has not previously observed, namely whether an interface is made explicit, supplier concentration, and the three variables of the upper bound, are newly introduced as observations required for determination. The five acknowledgments come down to the single point that this new side of observation has not been constructed. The research agenda of Section 21 places this construction as two items: refinement of the design principles of the interface, and estimation of thresholds. 20.10 The Absence of Opportunities for Falsification, and the Thinness of the Evidence What this subsection treats is a third type of limitation. It is the deficiency that, although a proposition possesses a falsification condition and observables are specified, the opportunity for falsification itself does not at present exist, or the opportunity exists but the sample and the period of observation are thin. Whereas the preceding two subsections state incompleteness on this paper's side, what this subsection states is a deficiency on the side of the world, and much of it will not be filled by any amount of work by the author. Ten items are acknowledged. (a) Capability and treatment for C3 have been separated, but the verification of Proposition 2b must await the realization of the threshold, and it is at present an unverifiable prediction. As stated at 20.3, this paper specifies the C3 of Definition 2 solely on the side of capability and places governments' treatment in the prediction of Proposition 2b (regime-class transition). This separation cuts the definitional recursion and makes governments' treatment a falsifiable prediction rather than a definitional consequence. But as its price, Proposition 2b becomes a conditional whose antecedent is unrealized. The proposition "if AI capability exceeds the C3 threshold of Definition 2, the institutional treatment of that capability by governments moves from the framework of economic regulation to the framework of a nonproliferation regime" is neither supported nor rejected unless capability exceeding the threshold is realized. Moreover, the "stipulated threshold" in the threshold itself ("exceeding the frontier of the time in question by at least a stipulated threshold") is not given by this paper as a figure. Owing to this double indeterminacy — an unrealized antecedent and an unspecified threshold — Proposition 2b is at present unverifiable. This paper accepts it as the price of discussing C3. What can be said once that price is accepted is that Proposition 2b has a form verifiable in the future, and that its epistemic standing differs from that of a proposition true as a definitional consequence. A limitation of the same form extends to Proposition 10 (20.5). Propositions relating to C3 remain the furthest from evidence in this paper. 878 (b) The three conditions for a third pole (Proposition 19) are an ex post ordering, and the sufficiency of their fulfilment has not been verified. Proposition 19 lists three conditions — complementarity, mutual guarantees of access, and shared discipline — as conditions under which a group of states other than the two producing poles may constitute an independent third pole. These three conditions function as a framework for evaluating existing conceptions of cooperation — Section 15 (15.7) identified which condition each existing arrangement lacks. But the derivation of the three conditions is an ex post ordering from observation of past alliances and economic partnerships, and the sufficiency claim, that a pole forms if the three conditions are met, has not been verified. More serious is the absence of an opportunity for falsification. The falsification condition of Proposition 19 stipulates that necessity is rejected where cases are systematically observed in which an arrangement lacking one of the three conditions actually preserved participants' capability against external changes in access conditions, and that sufficiency is rejected where, even after an arrangement satisfying the three conditions is formed, participants' procurement continues to depend on the two poles. As to the latter, however, no instance of an arrangement satisfying the three conditions exists at present. The sufficiency claim can therefore be neither supported nor rejected. Proposition 19 belongs, along with Propositions 2b and 10, to the group of propositions that at present have no opportunity for falsification because their antecedents are unrealized. The reason this paper advances this proposition is of the same form as that stated at 20.3 about Proposition 10 — because the design of an arrangement is work of a kind that is too late to begin once the arrangement becomes necessary — and it is likewise of the same form in depending on the estimate of that asymmetry being correct. A danger should be added. The three conditions are easily used as an instrument for determining that an existing arrangement is "not a pole." That determination is easy may be a consequence not of the strength of the proposition but of the conditions having been set at a high level of requirement. This paper has no independent ground justifying the height of that requirement itself. (c) Proposition 9 is a comparison of four regimes, but the sample number remains four, and the selection of regimes may carry selection bias. If Proposition 9 were erected as an induction from a sample of one, the nuclear regime, and if the criterion of that induction (verification depends on a physical correlate) were written into Definition 7, the proposition would become a restatement of the definition. This paper removes that judgment from Definition 7 and erects Proposition 9 as a comparative proposition whose population is four regimes — nuclear, chemical, biological, and missile (together with cyber norms). The contrast between the Biological Weapons Convention, which has come down to today without a verification mechanism owing to the breakdown of negotiations on a verification protocol, and the Chemical Weapons Convention, which established a verification mechanism through declaration and inspection of precursors and facilities, exhibits the effect of the variable Proposition 9 asserts as a fact of institutional history rather than as a self-application of the author's criterion. This is substantive progress. But the sample 879 number is only four. With a sample of four, and in a set of cases where the regimes are not independent (the CWC was designed with the failure of the BWC as a lesson, and the NSG is a subordinate institution of the NPT) and were formed with historical cross-reference to one another, there are limits to the discriminatory power of the claim that a single variable — the presence or absence of a measurable physical correlate — governs the success or failure of a verification mechanism. Further, the selection of regimes may itself carry selection bias — this paper chose the four regimes because they constitute the most informative contrast for this paper's hypothesis, and the criterion of selection is not independent of the hypothesis. Were the Convention on the Physical Protection of Nuclear Material, the Comprehensive Nuclear-Test-Ban Treaty, the Ottawa Convention (anti-personnel mines), the Convention on Cluster Munitions, or the various export-control regimes added to the population, the distribution of determinations could change. Proposition 9 is "a comparison with a sample of four" rather than "an induction from a sample of one," but it is not a sample that withstands statistical inference and remains at the level of the identification of structure through case comparison. (d) Technical limits of the verification anchor — that the AI-applied part of Proposition 9 is a claim limited in time. Section 9 argued that only compute, electricity, and facilities can serve as verification anchors, and built into the latter part of Proposition 9 the fact that the anchor is not static — that Frontier Descent causes a fixed threshold to lose effectiveness within a few years. But the limitation Section 9 accepted does not stop at the movement of the threshold. There are at least three paths by which the anchor itself is voided. First, dispersion. To the extent that training is executed dispersed geographically and organizationally, the observable of the compute capacity of a single facility loses its correspondence with the level of capability attained. Second, encryption and concealment. To the extent that means of concealing the content of computation from external confirmation diffuse, declarations of the existence and capacity of facilities cease to give information about what was done there. Third, efficiency gains. As falsification condition (d) of Proposition 9 makes explicit, if technical change occurs that sharply reduces the compute required to attain a given level of capability, verification based on volume of computation loses the very possibility of being designed. The AI-applied part of Proposition 9 — the claim that a verification function anchored in compute can be designed — is therefore not an unconditional claim but a claim limited in time, holding only for the period in which none of the three paths above is decisively operative. This paper has not estimated the length of that period. Estimation requires three series — the efficiency of dispersed execution, the cost of concealed computation, and a time series of compute used to attain given capability — and this paper has none of them. Whereas the general part of Proposition 9 (the comparative proposition that the presence or absence of a physical correlate governs the establishment of a verification mechanism) is supported by observation of four regimes, the AI-applied part is not deduced from that general part but depends on the factual judgment that a measurable physical correlate does at present exist in AI, and that factual judgment may be overturned by the three paths above. Readers should read the design proposals of Section 9

under this time-limited condition. To call critical-tier governance "a constructed contingency" does not mean that this paper knows the length of the period during which the window for construction is open. (e) Proposition 24 (the self-erosion of brain capital) has little direct empirical support, and because a countervailing path also exists, it remains at present contested (△). Proposition 24 asserts that national brain capital (Definition 11) wears away to the extent that dependence on imported cognitive capability substitutes for the repetition of human practice, and that this wear reduces the four indicators of complementary assets in Proposition 4. This claim is an important reinforcement for this paper's dynamics in that it supplies, for the downward transition of Proposition 15, a self-reinforcing path that requires no change in exogenous conditions. But its importance and the thickness of the evidence do not correspond. There are two problems. First, direct empirical support is scarce. The observables named by the falsification condition of Proposition 24 — the distribution of years of experience within occupations, pass levels in skills testing, and the share of practitioners able to judge independently — are not systematically collected in any country in a form joined to the depth of AI use. What can be said at present is therefore a description of a mechanism by which wear may arise, not an observation that wear is arising. Second, and what this subsection weighs more heavily, a path in the opposite direction is equally strong. Imported cognitive capability may not only substitute for the repetition of practice but also hasten arrival at practice. If the judgments of the skilled are put into language, if beginners approach work of a high level sooner, and if the portion of repetition that does not contribute to learning is cut away, then the same adoption promotes the formation of skill. In research on skill formation, whether the advance of tools deprives people of skill or shifts the content of skill has long been contested, and this paper has no grounds for stating that the matter is settled for AI. The evidence grade of Proposition 24 is therefore △ (contested), and this paper records it as such in Table 10 as well. Which of the two paths prevails is likely to depend on sector, occupation, and the design of adoption, and identifying that dependence is precisely the task of verification. What should be noted here is the way Proposition 24 connects with this paper's other claims. Proposition 24 carries the implication that the deepening of utilization itself deprives one of the foundation for ascent, and this implication accords with the direction this paper recommends (investment in transformation capability). The onedirectional bias named at 20.15 — the direction of rating high the expected return on investment in the Transformation Model and low the expected return on the option of committing to utilization alone — may operate in Proposition 24 as well. Readers should check, in accounts that invoke Proposition 24, whether only the path of wear is discussed and the path of promotion omitted. (f) Proposition 25 (the priority of trust infrastructure) lacks a design for identifying the direction of causation. Proposition 25 states that the depth of AI deployment in regulated sectors is bounded above by the level of development of the trust infrastructure 881 (Definition 17) of the jurisdiction concerned, and Table 10 entrusts its verification to international comparison across jurisdictions and to an event study using differences in the timing of institutional adoption. But two competing explanations attend this claim. First, a common cause. Jurisdictions in which trust infrastructure is developed often also possess, in income level, the enforcement capacity of regulators, and industrial structure (the weight of regulated sectors in the economy), conditions that make deployment easier. In that case the correlation between the two arises from a third variable, and the development of trust infrastructure is a concomitant of, rather than a condition for, depth of deployment. Second, reverse causation. The path in which deployment proceeds first, whereupon disputes over the location of responsibility, demand for insurance, and the need for proofs of conformity appear, and institutions are developed in response — that is, the direction in which institutions were put in place because deployment advanced — cannot be denied at the level of cases. That institutional development proceeds following the deployment of practice is an order observed in other technological domains as well. There is room for use as an identification strategy. The dates on which institutional amendments take effect differ across jurisdictions, and where those dates are determined by circumstances distinct from the progress of deployment in the jurisdiction concerned — the amendment schedule of a superior body of law, package amendments together with institutions in other fields, the ordering of a legislative programme — a difference-in-differences estimate taking those exogenous dates as events is possible, and controlling for capability access (distance from the procurable frontier and price) and industrial structure would separate part of the common cause and the reverse causation. This paper, however, has not carried out this estimation. Since it has not, what this paper can state about Proposition 25 extends only to the observation of a correspondence between depth of deployment and level of development of trust infrastructure, and priority — which is the condition for which — is stated only in the form of a claim. Section 21.3 incorporates this identification into the empirical protocol as an additional analysis item for Hypothesis H2. The substance of the evidence grade of △ for Proposition 25 in Table 10 lies, in addition to the absence of an estimate controlling for capability access, in this unidentified direction of causation. (g) That the accumulation of instances in AI is thin as regards the export of integrated systems. Propositions 38, 39, and 40 all speak about the export of integrated systems in AI. But the accumulation of instances in which the five elements required by Definition 20 — access to capability, the design of embedding into operational processes, arrangements for the allocation of responsibility, proof of conformity, and the human capability to operate and verify — have been transferred as a bundle across jurisdictions is thin as of the time of writing (August 2026). This paper's formalization therefore relies principally on analogies from other fields — the export of plant in which equipment and operating regime are transferred as one, the export of infrastructure accompanied by operating rules and maintenance regimes, and the transfer of certification systems accompanied by records and procedures — and on inference from existing theory (transaction 882 costs, switching costs, the stickiness of knowledge transfer). The use of analogy is itself the object that Proposition 1 disciplines, and this paper stated in Section 12, property by property, which transfer and which do not; but the fact remains that the case side against which those determinations of transfer would be verified is thin. This thinness means that opportunities for falsification are at present scarce. Propositions 38 to 40 carry falsification conditions, but the observations those conditions name remain, for AI, at the level of case study for the time being. The remaining three items of this subsection are limitations borne by the contemporaneous comparison with the oil market of 2026 (as method in Section 3, and as observation in Section 6). The utility of this operation lies in being able to control for period effects and in grounding determinations of transfer in observation of a process now in train rather than in a counterfactual; Section 16 (16.1.5) used it as evidence of the failure of prediction, Section 18 (18.3.5) used it as an instance of the divergence between exposure and dependence, and Proposition 37 is erected from it. The limitations that arise in exchange for that utility should be stated. (h) That, because an event in train is treated, its consequences are unsettled. The observations about the oil market of 2026 are observations of a process now in train. The figures this paper used — the level of prices, the drawdown of stocks, the trajectory of supply volumes, and the divergence of outlooks among institutions — are all published values available as of the time of writing (August 2026) and may be corrected by later revised values. Supply and demand statistics of international institutions customarily carry retrospective revisions, and the range of revision to estimates for the current year is not small. In addition, the consequences of the event itself are not settled. Both the IEA and the EIA present outlooks in which supply recovers in 2027, but that is an outlook and not an outturn — and as this paper stated at 16.1.5, the one-year-ahead outlooks of both institutions may be wrong. That is, this paper uses, as evidence of the failure of prediction, a series that includes predictions not yet verified. This circularity cannot be entirely removed. It is likely that this paper's reading will be corrected with hindsight. (i) That the period of observation is short. The observations on the oil side used by this paper for contemporaneous comparison fit in substance within a window of one year, or a few. Reading structure from a single year's observation carries two dangers. First, the danger of mistaking conditions specific to that year for structure. The inelasticity of supply, the size of the share taken by the transformation sector, and the failure of prediction observed in 2026 were all observed under the same conditions in the same year and are not mutually independent observations. Second, in a market that has periodicity, the danger of reading one phase of a cycle as a trend. The oil market is known to have long time constants in investment and productive capacity, and the relation among price, margin, and investment is known to reverse by phase. This paper has not controlled for the possibility of this reversal. The determinations of transfer drawn from the observations of 2026 are therefore provisional and should be updated by observation over several years. 883 (j) That the comparison of two resources is a sample of two. This is the heaviest of the three limitations borne by contemporaneous comparison. Contemporaneous comparison controls for period effects, but because the resources compared are only two, oil and AI, it cannot identify whether an observed difference is "the difference between oil and AI" or "the difference between these two resources as it happens to be". For example, the observation that the AI resource is concentrated almost entirely in electricity and has no chokepoint on transport routes (Section 13) is sharp in contrast with oil, but whether that is a property specific to AI or a property of resources in general whose principal input is a non-tradable good cannot be determined with two resources. The same holds for the inelasticity of supply, the attribution of the share to the transformation sector, and the extent of producers' downstream integration. What is properly required is a multi-resource contemporaneous comparison adding other general-purpose inputs — electricity, semiconductors, grain, fertilizer, shipping capacity, and the like — treating the properties of the resource as variables and identifying AI's position within a space of properties. This paper has not done that. Proposition 1 (the discipline of analogy) gives a procedure for sorting properties that transfer from those that do not, but in a state where there are only two objects of comparison on which the sorting rests, part of the sorting remains dependent on the author's judgment. This limitation is not dissolved by contemporaneous comparison making up for the weakness of diachronic comparison; the axis of comparison merely moves from time to resource, and as a problem of sample size it remains. The same problem extends to Proposition 37. Proposition 37 requires in its falsification condition that something be "systematically observed," whereas what this paper actually presents is two series for one country (Japan), and the requirement of systematicity is not met. Proposition 37 is at present a formalized hypothesis, not an empirically established proposition. Of the ten items above, (g), (h), and (i) may be partly dissolved with the passage of time — as cases and observations accumulate, opportunities for falsification arise and the distinction between conditions specific to a single year and structure becomes possible. Item (j) may be dissolved by work adding other general-purpose inputs to the comparison, but that work greatly exceeds the scope of this paper. Items (a) and (b) can only await the realization of their antecedents. Items (c), (d), (e), and (f) depend on conditions that advance outside this paper — the extension of samples, the course of technology, and the carrying out of identification designs. 20.11 Failure to Reach Design — Where the Paper Stops at Noting a Need What this subsection treats is a fourth type of limitation. Six items are acknowledged in which this paper shows that a design is necessary while not presenting the design itself. This type differs from the preceding three in its implications for practice — whereas deficiencies of measurement and formalization are incompleteness of theory, the absence of design means that, even where the theory is correct, it does not connect to implementation. 884 (a) The inter-layer conflict of interest — Proposition 31 shows the necessity but does not present a design for who bears the cost. Proposition 31 states that the redundancy required by Layer Zero appears to actors at Layer Three as a decline in capital efficiency; that this mismatch is not resolved by the market because the benefits of redundancy accrue system-wide while the costs attach to individual actors; and that a requirement of redundancy therefore does not hold unless it is integral with a design of who bears the cost. Section 19.4.4 classified the paths of incidence in four — public bearing, incorporation into procurement requirements, insurance arrangements, and regulatory requirements — and discussed the incidence of each. But this paper presents no design as to which path should be taken in what proportion. What it presents is the observation that a design is necessary, and a list of paths. This deficiency is not accidental; it has two reasons. First, the allocation of the burden is a question of distribution and includes the normative question of who ought to bear the cost. This paper refrains as a matter of editorial policy from normative judgments (20.13), and that abstention extends to the design of the allocation of burdens. Second, which path is feasible depends on the fiscal system, the procurement system, and the structure of insurance markets of each jurisdiction, and cannot be settled in general terms. Proposition 31 therefore stops at noting a necessity and does not reach a design for satisfying it. So long as this state continues, the requirements of Layer Zero will continue to appear to Layer Three as requirements without cost backing, and will bring about the very consequences Proposition 31 itself predicts — formal compliance, or the exit of activity from the jurisdiction concerned. Of this paper's recommendations, this is the part at greatest distance from implementation. (b) The outflow of brain capital — Proposition 33 formalizes the asymmetry but designs no response to outflow. Proposition 33 formalizes the asymmetry that national brain capital cannot be acquired by import while it can be lost by outflow, and stated that outflow includes not only emigration abroad but also the form in which knowledge and judgment are absorbed as inputs into the processes of actors abroad while the person remains resident domestically. This formalization improves this paper's account in showing that a design that makes only formation an object of policy and not outflow does not guarantee a net increase. But this paper designs no response to outflow. The variables that govern the speed of outflow extend over the structure of the labour market (the thickness of demand, the design of jobs, the level of remuneration), career paths and the allocation of discretion, and institutions (mutual recognition of qualifications, the conditions of cross-border provision of services, contractual practice concerning knowledge transfer), and this paper presents no design for any of them. What it presents is only the observation that these bear on the net increase. This deficiency severely limits the practical implications of Proposition 33 — the instruction "measure outflow as well" amounts, unless accompanied by means of reducing outflow, to no more than adding one indicator to be monitored. In addition, since much of the response to outflow touches institutions bearing on the move‐ 885 ment of persons and freedom of occupational choice, it may include normative judgments. That this paper does not enter this domain is also a consequence of the editorial policy stated at 20.13. Proposition 33 therefore gives the structure of the problem, while the design of policy lies outside this paper. (c) The mismatch of time scales — Proposition 34 names a structural risk, but the response goes no further than an indication of direction. The complementary good this paper takes as the base of the defensibility of the Transformation Model (national brain capital) is formed with a slower time constant than the object it complements (the AI capability tiers). In Proposition 34 this paper formalized this mismatch, stating that the time constant of formation exceeds the time constant of change in the capability tiers by more than an order of magnitude, and that this mismatch generates both (i) the danger that the object of complementarity changes before the formation of the complement is complete and (ii) the difficulty of fixing, mid-change, the content of the complement to be formed. It then showed that the mismatch is withstood only where investment is directed at the parts transferable across generational change — judgment, evaluation, contextual understanding, and audit. This instruction is an indication of direction, not a solution. There are three reasons. First, the distinction between which skills are transferable and which are generation-specific is not fixed ex ante. Transferability depends on the properties of the next generation of technology, and those properties are unknown at the time the decision to form is made. Second, the formation of the capabilities said to be transferable — judgment, evaluation, and audit — is itself carried out through the repetition of practice with a particular technological generation, and is therefore not physically separable from the formation of generation- specific skills; it is separable only in ex post description. Third, the "more than an order of magnitude" difference stated by Proposition 34 is not a quantity this paper has estimated but an estimate constructed from the time constants of transition in Proposition 15 (in years) and from existing accounts of Frontier Descent in Proposition 2. If this estimate is wrong, the gravity of the mismatch changes. Proposition 34 therefore makes this paper's account more precise in naming a structural risk, but gives no response to that risk. The part of this paper's policy implications that recommends investment in national brain capital rests upon this unresolved structural risk. Readers should read that recommendation as a choice to "bet on a slow complement," and read it in the awareness that it is a bet. (d) Administrative capacity — Proposition 36 requires a minimum indicator set, but its sufficiency has not been verified. Proposition 36 stated that implementing this paper's framework of diagnosis consumes the administrative capacity of the implementing actor; that under constraints a requirement of comprehensive monitoring leads to nonimplementation, formalism, or delay; and that a framework therefore has no implementability unless accompanied by a minimum indicator set. Section 19.7 set out the design principle of the minimum set — that it be composed not of the indicators that individually carry the most information but of those that supply information for which no other indic‐ 886 ator can substitute. Section 18.2.1 applied this principle to Japan's context as a reduced, distributed model of execution in place of the top-down institutionalization of the 1973 type. But the sufficiency of the minimum set has not been verified. Sufficiency means, as the falsification condition of Proposition 36 specifies, that determinations by the minimum set do not diverge systematically from determinations by the comprehensive version. This test requires applying both versions in parallel to the same objects and measuring the rate of agreement of determinations. This paper has not carried out that work. Further, as Section 19.7.6 states, even the specification of concrete candidates for the minimum set has been sent to work in the appendices. That is, what this paper possesses at present is only the comprehensive version and the design principle of the minimal version; the minimal version itself and the correspondence between the two versions are lacking. The condition of implementability required by Proposition 36 has therefore only been presented as a condition and is not satisfied. In addition, this paper has no indicator measuring administrative capacity itself — the mapping of which version is appropriate under which level of administrative capacity cannot be made without measurement of that capacity. Owing to this double deficiency, the reduced, distributed model of execution presented at Section 18.2.1 is coherent as a principle, but whether it yields the same determinations as the comprehensive version is unknown. To hold out a design that can be executed is not the same as holding out a design that is meaningful when executed. (e) That this paper gives no general solution for where to draw the interface. Proposition 41 states that separating a system into a jurisdiction-specific layer and a portable core, and defining the interface between them explicitly, is a necessary condition of compatibility. But where the interface should be drawn differs by domain, and this paper has no rule for deciding that position (12.3.7). A judgment that belongs to operational logic in one domain belongs to the law itself in another. In processes inseparable from legal effects specific to a jurisdiction, the interface can be drawn only at a very shallow position in the operational process, whereas in domains close to physical processes it can be drawn at a deep position — the existence of this difference can be noted, but no procedure is given for deriving the boundary for an arbitrary domain. That is, what this paper has shown is a principle, not a design. This limitation directly constrains the practical implications of Proposition 41, because the success or failure of the design decides the success or failure of compatibility, and this paper has no procedure for the design. The two directions of failure can be identified — draw the interface too shallow and portability remains nominal; draw it too deep and nothing remains that can be exported — but where between the two the correct position lies cannot be identified. That 12.3.7 stated that "the decision on the position of the interface belongs to the judgment of those with practical knowledge of the domain in question" is an account that consigns this absence to the side of national brain capital (Definition 11); it is not the presentation of a rule. Delegation is not a solution but an explicit statement of where the limitation lies. 887 (f) Institutional coherence — that this paper makes no legal judgments. Section 19.5 stated that examining whether requirements concerning domestic guarantees, the handling of data, and procurement cohere with existing international trade and investment commitments is a mandatory stage of design, and at the same time made explicit that it makes no legal judgment about the interpretation of particular agreements or about whether particular measures conform to them. This limitation has two origins, and both must be stated honestly. First, this is a limit of competence. The interpretation of international economic law is specialist work based on the totality of texts, negotiating records, precedents of dispute settlement, and the implementing legislation of each jurisdiction, and the author of this paper is not qualified to carry out that work. To state neither that something coheres nor that it does not is not to reserve judgment but to lack the competence to judge. Those who would implement this paper's design proposals therefore require separate specialist legal examination. This paper is not legal advice, and it cannot be taken on the basis of this paper that coherence has been confirmed. This deficiency means that, of the five types of cost counted in Section 19, for the type of institutional coherence alone this paper does not even give the structure of the cost — for the other four types it showed structure without showing level, whereas for this type even the description of structure lies outside its competence. Second, this is also a consequence of editorial policy. Arguing whether a particular measure conforms to a particular agreement readily involves evaluation of the measures of the actors that concluded and operate that agreement, and coheres poorly with the political neutrality this paper places as its highest discipline (Section 1). That is, this paper does not treat this issue both because of what it cannot do as a matter of competence and because of what it does not do as a matter of policy. The two reasons are independent, and if one were dissolved the other would remain — even if specialist examination were possible, this paper would still not write a judgment about whether particular agreements are conformed to. Owing to this double limitation, what Section 19.5 supplies is only the types of issue that ought to be examined, not answers to those issues. How large this blank is in practice, this paper is not in a position to assess. 20.12 Limitations Arising from the Choice of Framework, the Unit of Description, and the Observational Position What this subsection treats is a fifth type of limitation. Whereas the preceding four subsections stated incompleteness in this paper's content, what this subsection states are limitations arising from this paper's having chosen a particular framework at all. The choice of definitions, the granularity of classification, the unit of description, the adoption or non-adoption of instruments, and the author's observational position — every one of these could have been otherwise, and under a different choice this paper's account would take a different shape. Twelve items are acknowledged. 888 (a) Even with the mechanism of conclusions removed from the definitions, a theoretical commitment remains in the choice of definitions itself. This paper removes the mechanism of conclusions from Definitions 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, and 7 and consolidates claims about mechanism on the side of the propositions. This is an operation that cuts circularity. But that circularity is cut does not mean that the definitions have become theoretically neutral. That Definition 2 decided to divide the AI capability tiers by capability distance itself contains the theoretical claim that "distance from the frontier is the most important axis governing the tiers." Taking as the axis the level of requirement of a use, modality, inference cost, or reliability in a particular domain could yield a different tier structure. Likewise, that Definition 3 divides national value models into the three positions of production, transformation, and utilization, that Definition 4 defines dependence by "degradation at the time of interruption," and that Definition 6 decomposes the guarantee level into three components, are all choices among competing formulations. What is prevented by removing conclusions from definitions is "a definition making a proposition analytically true," not "the choice of definitions anticipating the consequences of the theory." The latter remains in principle so long as definitions are used. All this paper can do is to make explicit that the choice of definitions could have been otherwise, and to enable readers to consider how this paper's propositions would change under different definitions. In this respect the design of this paper's definitions makes this paper falsifiable but does not make it framework-neutral. (b) A theoretical ground was given for the judgment not to erect M4 (the discipline model) and to maintain the nine cells, but it entails the sacrifice of comprehensiveness. As Section 14 observed, the value positions of standard-setting power (the EU) and evaluation and verification capability (the United Kingdom) have no coordinates on the nine cells. That 2 of the 10 profiles fall outside the framework is a want of comprehensiveness in a framework of classification. Two options were available for this problem. Either erect a fourth value model, M4 (the discipline model, the institution-supplying model — a type that obtains value not by producing, transforming, or utilizing a resource but by supplying the rules and verification for its transaction and use) and extend to twelve cells, or maintain the nine cells and give a theoretical ground for the exclusion. This paper took the latter and placed a note on Definition 3 — that this position lies outside the domain of quantification of that definition because the source of its value lies not in a relation to a general-purpose input but in constraints on the conduct of other actors. This ground is theoretically coherent. Both axes of the nine cells (the position of value generation × the tier-specific pattern by which strategic character holds) are grounded in a relation to a general-purpose input, and so a value position not resting on a relation to a general- purpose input cannot be placed on the same lattice. But giving a ground is not restoring comprehensiveness. Had M4 been erected, the EU's standard-setting power, the United Kingdom's evaluation interface, Singapore's AI Verify, and "the institutionalization of quality" that Section 18 lists as the third series of Japan's M2′ would have been unified as one type, the counterparts of the oil period (classification societies, insurance markets, quality standards, international accounting standards) would have been added to Section 889 6, and the objects to which the discipline of analogy applies would have increased. The reasons this paper did not erect M4 are two — that extension to twelve cells exceeds this paper's length and range of evidence, and that because M4's source of value is heterogeneous with the other three types, the homogeneity of the lattice as a "product" would be lost — but this judgment traded comprehensiveness for homogeneity of analysis, and whether that trade was correct is not for this paper to decide. Extension to a fourth value model is made explicit as a future task in the note to Definition 3. It should be added that Section 11 recovers the position that this note excludes as outside the domain of quantification — standard-setting and conformity assessment — into the interior of the theory not as a fourth value model but as leverage on the side of desirability. But what the recovery addresses is the problem that there are positions falling outside the framework; it does not mean that the framework covers the world — recovery merely gives coordinates to an object that had been excluded, and measurement upon those coordinates has not yet been carried out (20.8(g)). (c) Non-orthogonality of the axes — Proposition 29 admits non-uniformity, but part of the explanatory power of the matrix is lost. The M axis and the C axis of the nine cells are not orthogonal — the higher the capability tier, the narrower the set of positions that can be occupied. In Proposition 29 (Definition 18, the feasible region) this paper admitted this, and admitted that the nine cells are not a uniform lattice but a non-uniform space in which the feasible region changes by tier. But this formalization does not dissolve the problem. As a result of taking non-orthogonality into the body of the text, it relinquishes part of the explanatory power of the matrix. What has been lost should be identified. If the nine cells were a uniform lattice, then for any cell the question "what should a state standing in that cell do?" would have equal meaning, and comparison across cells could be conducted on the same scale. Once nonuniformity is admitted, this homogeneity does not hold — one cell is a stable occupiable point, another lies on a boundary, and yet another satisfies the definitional requirements only in part. The meaning of the operation "assigning a cell position" therefore differs by cell, and the non-equivalence across cells asserted by Proposition 3 has come to include not only differences in institutional requirements, modes of value, and modes of failure but also differences in the degree to which a cell holds as a cell. Between the apparent homogeneity that the form of nine cells conveys to readers and the substantive non-homogeneity stated by Proposition 29, there is a distance that has not been closed. The grounds for nonetheless retaining the nine cells as a coordinate system are two. First, the role of a coordinate system is not classification but making it possible to treat simultaneously two independently measurable quantities, position and tier, and the existence of sections with narrow feasible regions does not impair the usefulness of the coordinate system — just as the existence of uninhabited sections on a map does not invalidate the map's coordinates. Second, because the feasible region itself moves over time (Frontier Descent moves the boundaries of the tiers), removing from the coordinates a cell that at present lacks instances would be to lose in advance the vocabulary for describing future

instances. The conditions under which this judgment may be wrong can also be made explicit. Where the density of instances is observed not to differ systematically across cells (the falsification condition of Proposition 29), the claim of non-uniformity is itself rejected and the retention of the coordinate system has grounds. Conversely, where cells outside the feasible region remain permanently empty and it is shown that the reasons for their emptiness differ by tier, then an account enumerating a different set of positions for each tier would be simpler than a coordinate system, and the form of nine cells would have nothing beyond expository convenience. This paper has not made that determination. (d) The three functions of Proposition 28 are an ex post ordering, not derived deductively. Proposition 28 asserts that, in domains where the compute, capital, and engineers held by private actors exceed those of the state, the functions the state still supplies irreplaceably converge on three: legal finality, physical security, and the licensing of siting and resources. These three functions are not derived deductively from a list of state functions; they are an ex post ordering extracting, from actually observed negotiations between states and private actors, the elements private actors cannot procure by themselves. The criterion of the ordering is "what the private sector cannot substitute for," but this criterion is time-dependent. Part of dispute resolution is handled privately through arbitration and choice of governing law; part of physical security is substituted by private security and insurance; and as for siting and resources, paths that reduce dependence on licensing through self-generation, independent networks, and acquisition of private land are actually being pursued. All three functions may be substituted in degree. What Proposition 28 asserts is therefore not an absolute boundary of irreplaceability but the identification of functions whose cost of substitution is relatively high. Even under this limitation the proposition is useful — because it identifies the grounds on which a state inferior in the possession of capability may nonetheless hold bargaining power. But that the number of the functions is three, and that these three cover the state's residual exhaustively and without overlap, is not something this paper has demonstrated. The falsification condition stipulates that "the claim of convergence is rejected where cases are systematically observed of bargaining power being exercised persistently through paths other than the three functions"; but determining this condition requires that the extension of "paths other than the three functions" be fixed, and this paper does not give that extension. What 20.12(a) stated about the choice of definitions — that cutting circularity is not making the framework neutral — is repeated here about the granularity of classification. (e) Transfer from a theory of firms to a theory of states — properties specific to states are not captured. Section 17 mapped the five dimensions of enterprise redefinition (2026b) — purpose, boundary, time, subject, and measurement — onto the level of the state, and formalized national redefinition (Proposition 14). This transfer suits this paper's constructional purpose of extending the series' conceptual instruments to Layer Zero. But 891 in the course of transfer, properties specific to states that the concepts of the firm cannot capture have been dropped. At least three may be listed. First, inclusiveness. A firm can select its members and may terminate relations with members who do not fit. A state as a rule does not do this, and designs institutions while including all of its objects. The resetting of "boundary" in enterprise redefinition therefore becomes an entirely different operation for a state — a firm's redrawing of boundaries includes the replacement of objects, whereas a state's redrawing of boundaries means recomposing relations while the objects remain fixed. When Proposition 14 describes a state's boundary as moving "from territorial boundaries to boundaries of capability, data, and alliance," this difference is not expressed. Second, responsibility for redistribution. A firm's value creation handles the distribution of results within the contractual relations of shareholders, employees, and counterparties. A state bears distribution among actors that are not in contractual relations. Both the stratification of access treated by Proposition 12 and the allocation of cost burdens treated by Proposition 31 belong to this domain of responsibility, but the five dimensions of the theory of the firm have no dimension corresponding to it. As a result, this paper has come to scatter issues concerning distribution as individual propositions outside the five dimensions. Third, the cost of building consensus. A firm's decision-making may be shortened by the structure of authority, whereas a state's decision-making requires procedural costs in order to be carried out while maintaining legitimacy. The institutional time constant treated by Proposition 26 is one manifestation of this cost, but the five-dimensional framework goes no further than including the speed of decision-making within the dimension of "time," and does not treat the structure in which speed is exchanged for legitimacy. What is at issue when Section 18.2.1 lists the precondition of 1973 (P6, political visibility) is likewise this structure of exchange. Not treating these three generates a tendency in the account of Section 17 to depict the redefinition of a state as an enlarged version of the redefinition of a firm. This tendency is a result of this paper's giving priority to the conceptual consistency of the series, and had a theory of the state been constituted independently, other dimensions might have come to the fore. This paper does not exclude that possibility. The benefit that Layer Zero brings to the four-layer architecture (Section 21.6) is accompanied by a price in this form. (f) The three scenarios are neither exclusive nor exhaustive, and a single scenario determination is necessarily coarse. Definition 13 identifies three states — S1 (fragmentation), S2 (diffusion), and S3 (stagnation) — and states expressly at its close that "the three states are neither exclusive nor exhaustive, and different states may hold simultaneously by sector and by use." This proviso is accurate, but that a proviso is accurate does not mean that the instrument is easy to use. What may actually arise is, for example, a state in which S2 holds for general-purpose text generation, S1 for particular scientific 892 computing and large-scale training uses, and S3 for uses at industrial sites, all at once. In such a state the question "which scenario is the world in?" has no answer. Nevertheless, the separation of no-regret actions from scenario-dependent investment given in Section 16 tacitly presupposes a single determination. Where different determinations are made by sector and by use, investment items too must be divided by sector, but this paper gives no procedure for that division. This is Weakness 2 of 20.16 (the coarseness of the unit of description) repeated at the level of scenarios. Just as a description taking the state as its unit conceals dispersion within sectors, a scenario description taking the world as its unit conceals dispersion across uses. In addition, the number three itself requires grounds. Definition 13 took three states because it divided the world along a single axis, the mode of the frontier's advance (continuation / diffusion / slowdown); take another axis — the convergence and divergence of regulation, say, or the tightness and easing of energy supply — and a different branching appears. Although this paper admits that the three states are not exhaustive, it does not make explicit the axes it did not take. A branching diagram that claims no exhaustiveness says nothing about paths not drawn on it, so readers must supply for themselves the possibility that a world exists outside this diagram. (g) The price of not assigning probabilities. This paper does not state which of the three scenarios will be realized, and gives no probabilities. There are reasons for this restraint. First, as discussed at 20.5, this paper has consistently avoided prediction and adopted the form of a conditional design theory, and attaching probabilities to scenarios alone would break the consistency of that form. Second, this paper does not have the basis for giving probabilities — a prior distribution over the modes of capability advance. Presenting a quantity one does not have is rejected for the same reason stated about time constants at 20.9(a). But the burden this restraint places on practice must be written honestly. Policymakers need some set of weights in order to allocate resources. To decide which of several investment items to undertake first requires comparing the expected value of each item, and comparing expected values requires weights over scenarios. What this paper gives is only the identification of a subset independent of the weights (the no-regret set of Proposition 20). This identification is useful, but this paper says nothing about allocation after the no-regret set has been executed. Further, as to the ordering within the no-regret set — which of national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, and operational readiness to thicken first — this paper gives no ranking either. That is, this paper's framework is responsible only up to the entrance of the allocation problem, and from there readers have no choice but to place weights themselves. The moment readers place weights, those weights come from outside this paper, and this paper no longer guarantees the validity of its conclusions beyond that point. The price of the restraint lies here — as the price of honesty, the framework stops short of the most difficult part of practice. (h) "No-regret" is relative, and nothing is no-regret if opportunity cost is ignored. Proposition 20 calls the four components no-regret actions on the ground that their mar‐ 893 ginal value is positive under all three scenarios. This mode of argument has a premise that should be made explicit. That marginal value is positive does not mean that the investment in question is superior to every other use. No-regret means that the sign does not reverse according to which scenario is realized; it does not mean that the value is positive after deducting opportunity cost. Take opportunity cost into account and no investment is justified unconditionally. This point has practical significance in countries under severe resource constraints. The construction of the four components of national brain capital — the formation of skills, the maintenance of a professional stratum, the cultivation of trust in institutions, and the accumulation of audit capability — all draw on the same funds as the budgets for education, health care, and public administration. The development of exclusive domain data competes with investment in the institutions of statistics, registration, and records. Securing operational readiness requires exercises and slack in personnel, and competes with efficiency in normal times. Under extreme resource constraints, these four elements too may be placed lower in priority in comparison with other uses. What Proposition 20 asserts is that these are robust across scenarios, not that they are prioritized among all uses. A reading that conflates the two arises readily where this paper's framework is used as grounds in the pursuit of budgets. This paper has no means of preventing this conflation other than this note. (i) Exogenous constraints on the space of options — that the degree to which the possibility of choice itself is determined exogenously has not been estimated. This paper formalized national strategy as the design of a portfolio on the nine cells. This formalization presupposes that a state can choose its own portfolio. But this paper has not estimated the degree to which the very latitude of choice is governed by exogenous conditions. Stated structurally, the point is as follows. Occupying a cell requires access to the capability, compute infrastructure, data, and personnel of the tier in question. The accessibility of these is a function of the supply structure (who can supply) and the conditions applied to procurement (under what conditions transactions are concluded), both of which lie outside the state's choice. Which sections of the nine cells are actually open as options therefore includes a part determined not by the state's will but by external conditions. Proposition 16 (the pressure of cross-axis transition) states that where the logic governing the allocation of capability moves to the logic of security, procurability for non-allied states ceases to be a function of price and quality, and Proposition 35 (the hysteresis of securitization) states that this state is not automatically eased even by a descent of capability through the tiers. These two propositions describe paths by which the space of options narrows exogenously, but they give no framework for measuring the degree of narrowing. There are two reasons this paper does not carry out this estimation. First, estimation requires data encoding, by jurisdiction, the scope of application, the timing of application, and the effectiveness of application of procurement conditions, and this paper does not 894 have such data. Second, this paper adopts the discipline of describing this issue as a structural constraint without referring to the measures or intentions of particular states (Section 1). Measures can be observed but intentions cannot, and accounts that attribute intentions are forbidden by this paper's editorial policy. Even under this discipline, measuring the narrowing of the space of options from observations of supply structure and scope of application is in principle possible, but this paper has not carried out that measurement. This paper therefore presents a theory of choice while not estimating the degree to which the possibility of choice itself is determined exogenously. This deficiency acts on all of this paper's policy implications — because where a recommended portfolio is not actually open as an option, the recommendation becomes an infeasible design. The three-part set derived for Japan in Section 18 likewise presupposes, in this sense, that the space of options is open in its present form. (j) There are limits to the generalizability of the case of Japan. Section 18 placed the reasons for selecting Japan as its application case in three — the density of materials, the simultaneous observation of the three constraints, and the historical precedent — and stated that the same procedure can be applied to any middle power. As to the generality of the procedure, this paper maintains that. But that a procedure is general and that the output of the procedure is general are different things. Japan has a particular combination of high income, high technology, and energy importation, and extrapolation to countries without that combination — low- and middle-income countries, countries with a thin technological base, energy-exporting countries — has limits. Three locations of that limit may be identified. First, the resources for response. Proposition 21 asserts that the three constraints operate independently of region, income level, and political system, but does not state that the possibility of responding to the constraints is independent. Fiscal space, administrative capacity, the depth of capital markets, and position in international negotiation all bear on the possibility of response, and Section 18 takes these as given at Japan's levels. Second, industrial structure. The M2′ series derived in Section 18 is a construction placing physical interfaces and site-level data at the top, and this is a configuration specific to an economy with a manufacturing base. Third, the statistical system. The demonstration of Section 18 presupposes that intensitytype indicators can be constructed by re-editing existing statistics, but the countries in which input–output tables and ICT investment statistics can be joined are limited. What Section 18 hands to middle powers in general is therefore neither a conclusion nor levels of indicators, but only a list of quantities to be measured and an order of collation. This limitation was stated expressly in both 18.1 and 18.15, but stating it is not dissolving it. What 20.6 stated about the bias of observational position remains here in a changed form — calling Japan an "application case" does not erase the role Japan played in the generation of the theory. That the centre of gravity of this paper's instruments lies in transformation value and the guarantee level is not changed by the specification of standing. (k) A tilt towards the exporter's standpoint. This is the heaviest of the acknowledgments concerning this paper's observational position. Section 20.6 acknowledged the bias 895 of observational position arising from this paper's being written from Japan, and 20.15 acknowledges the structural conflict of interest whereby the author may rate as promising the domains corresponding to his own business opportunities. Treating the export of integrated systems as a subject generates a bias combining the two. The author of this paper is a practitioner in a jurisdiction positioned as a Transformation Model on the nine cells, and there may be a bias in the direction of rating the export of integrated systems highly as a promising position. That Section 12 presented the export of integrated systems as "a form that withstands compression" and stated that it is defended by the wall of integration cost is a claim in that direction. This paper has placed two corrections against this bias. First, that Proposition 39 confines the conditions of export to four and states that the most binding of them does not correlate with the height of capability — a structure that does not affirm exportability unconditionally. Second, that the standpoint of the importing side is established independently — Proposition 40 and Section 12.7 describe the risks accompanying the procurement of integrated systems and the design of mitigation from the interests of the recipient side. Section 12.8 makes explicit that the interests of the exporting and importing sides do not coincide, and identifies what the importing side should negotiate over. But whether these corrections are sufficient is not a matter the author can determine. The determination is left to readers. In reading Section 12 of this paper, readers should inspect which is written in greater detail and more concretely, the account on the supply side or the account on the procurement side — an asymmetry of detail is an observable trace of a bias the author cannot acknowledge. This acknowledgment is also placed at 20.15 as an eighth item. (l) The price of an editorial policy that does not analyse causes. Following the discipline of political neutrality (Section 1, 20.13), this paper described the 2026 supply disruption event solely as market facts — changes in supply volumes, prices, and stocks — and did not enter at all into causes or background. This policy is one this paper accepted for the reasons stated at 20.13, and this subsection does not argue its merits. But the analytical constraint arising from the policy must be recorded. Because it does not enter into causes, this paper cannot determine whether the event in question is structural and liable to recur or is a one-off. This determination would properly be the premise of at least three claims — first, the determination whether the vulnerability of supply the event exhibited may be transferred to the supply structure of AI (the application of Proposition 1); second, the determination of the duration and frequency of interruption that the design of buffers (stockpiles, coordinated releases) ought to assume (Section 18.3.5, Section 19); and third, the estimation of the frequency of occurrence of what 16.1.5 called "events arriving from outside the set of premises." This paper leaves all three in the form of conditionals. That is, the discipline of neutrality deprives this paper of the capacity to assess the recurrence of the event, and to that extent weakens the conclusions that can be drawn from contemporaneous comparison. The structure of which 20.13 speaks in saying that "neutrality presses this paper's account into a set of conditionals" operates in the same form for the observations that contemporaneous comparison intro‐ 896 duces. This constraint exists independently of the merits of the policy, and is information readers should hold when reading this paper's contemporaneous comparison. Of the twelve items above, (k) will not be dissolved — because the author's position does not change. Disclosure, and establishing the standpoint of the importing side independently, are the whole of the response this paper can make. Item (l) will likewise not be dissolved — so long as this paper maintains its editorial policy, the constraint remains. These two are treated from different angles in what follows: the next subsection (20.13) from the side of editorial policy, and 20.15 from the side of the conflict of interest. 20.13 The Limitations of the Editorial Policy Itself — The Price Borne by Political Neutrality This paper states political neutrality expressly as its highest editorial discipline (Section 1). Its content is that states are treated as a unit of analysis and not as an object of evaluation. Observed institutions, measures, statistics, and concentration in supply structures, the content of published policy documents, and the structural consequences these have for states' options are described. On the other hand, approval or disapproval of particular countries' policies, the attribution of motive or intent, value judgments about states, governments, or leaders, support for particular camps or alliances, commentary on the legitimacy of conflicts, territories, or political systems, and prediction of future political events are not undertaken. This discipline takes precedence over all other disciplines of this paper. This position is not an expedient posture of neutrality but an explicit choice. And the choice has a price. There are at least two prices, and both genuinely constrain this paper's explanatory power. Unless they are stated here, this paper will have failed to perform, for its own editorial policy, the very operation it performed in Section 19 — computing the costs of its own recommendations. The first price: normative questions cannot be treated. This paper does not argue "which configuration is desirable." But the design of national strategy includes domains that cannot be constituted while avoiding judgments of desirability. The stratification of access treated by Proposition 12 connects directly to the question whether the distribution of cognitive resources is fair. The allocation of cost burdens treated by Proposition 31 includes the question who ought to bear them. The response to the outflow of brain capital treated by Proposition 33 includes a balancing of freedom of movement of persons against the interests of the state. This paper treats these at the level of the description of structures and not at the level of judgment. As a result, this paper's recommendations remain in the form "this design carries these costs" and do not reach the form "therefore this design should be chosen." For readers seeking a judgment, this paper is a document that leaves the last step. The absence of design acknowledged at 20.11(a) and 20.11(b) is also a concrete manifestation of this price. 897 The second price: because motives cannot be analysed, explanatory power is constrained. Measures can be observed but intentions cannot — from this epistemic fact this paper forbade the attribution of intent. But some international measures do not take the form of an explanation of their consequences unless the structure of the acting subject's purposes is referred to. For example, Proposition 23 (the paradox of leverage exercise) states that exercise induces the search for alternatives and depreciates indispensability, but what decides the frequency and scope of exercise is the structure of the holder's purposes, and this paper can treat that only in the form of a conditional clause: "where security needs exceed economic incentives, restraint does not operate." Whether the condition is satisfied is placed outside this paper's framework. Likewise, the cross-axis transition of Proposition 16 and the hysteresis of Proposition 35 are described only as structures, without reference to the purposes of the actors that drive transition or maintenance, and so have no predictive power as to when and within what scope they operate. The same structure works for the exogenous constraints on the space of options stated at 20.12(i). That is, neutrality presses this paper's account into a set of conditionals and deprives this paper of the capacity to explain the process by which the conditional clauses are satisfied. The issue stated at 20.5 as "the price of being a conditional design theory" is not only a methodological choice but also a choice of editorial policy. There are nonetheless two reasons for bearing this price. First, credibility as a work written by a practitioner. As Section 1 and 20.15 disclose, the author of this paper is in a position to conduct business and investment in the domains to which this paper's recommendations correspond. If someone in this position were to evaluate particular countries' policies and write accounts that include support for particular camps, the analysis would become indistinguishable from a statement of interest. The discipline of neutrality is a procedure for making that distinction possible on the reader's side — it creates a state in which the observations and inferences can be verified independently even where the analysis does not accord with a reader's own political position. Since a structural conflict of interest cannot be dissolved by disclosure (20.15), the remaining means is, in addition to disclosure, to remove evaluation from the account. Second, the separation of analysis from advocacy. What this paper supplies is a framework by which readers may make determinations themselves, not a substitute for their determinations (Section 21.8). An account that includes evaluation mixes the supply of a framework with the substitution of determinations — readers receive the author's judgments along with the framework, and have no purchase for separating the two. Neutrality is the operation for handing over the framework detached from judgment. That Section 21.8 states that "what this paper should place last is not a recommendation but a procedure" is nothing other than the consequence of this operation. These two reasons justify the price; they do not remove it. The normative questions this paper cannot treat remain untreated. This paper acknowledges that a broad domain exists outside it that other writers should treat under a different discipline. What the declaration of exclusions at 20.14 does at the level of subject matter, this subsection does 898 at the level of the manner of description — both are declarations that, by stating what this paper does not do, enable readers to determine what this paper is doing. And as 20.17 states about this section itself, this declaration too is confined to the range visible from inside the author's framework. This paper has no assurance that the discipline of neutrality is not biasing its account in ways invisible to the author. 20.14 What This Paper Does Not Cover — A Declaration of Explicit Exclusions This subsection performs work different in character from the acknowledgment of limitations. Whereas the preceding subsections stated "the insufficient parts of what has been treated," this subsection declares what has not been treated, together with the reasons for not treating it. The subjects listed below were all examined in the course of conceiving this paper, are all regarded by the author as important questions, and were deliberately placed outside this paper. They were neither forgotten nor unknown. Why place this declaration in the section on limitations? The reason is stated at the end of this subsection, but to anticipate: because declaring the range one does not treat strengthens the claims about the range one does treat. A claim without boundaries is weaker than a claim with boundaries. (i) The post-truth condition and the redesign of democracy (algorithmic consensus formation). The rising share of generative models in the information space is changing the very conditions under which public argument is possible. Conceptions of redesigning the process of consensus formation through information technology — attempts to use algorithms for the support of deliberation, the aggregation of preferences, and the structuring of issues — are actually under experiment in several jurisdictions. The reason this paper does not treat this subject is not its low value but a difference in the unit of analysis. This paper's unit of analysis is the national value generation model, and its domain of quantification lies in how a state generates national value in its relation to a generalpurpose input (Definition 3). What the post-truth condition and the design of consensus formation treat, by contrast, is the machinery of the formation and aggregation of preferences in domestic political processes, not the mode of value generation. Placing the two in the same framework would assign coordinates to an object for which both axes of the nine cells (the position of value generation × the capability tier) have no meaning, and would generate a category confusion isomorphic with the M4 problem stated at 20.12(b). In addition, this subject is an independent and vast field of research. Deliberative democratic theory in political science, empirical research on the information environment and polarization, social choice theory on the aggregation of preferences, and the law of platform regulation — each has decades of accumulation, and were this paper to touch on it in a few pages, the result would hold neither as a summary of existing research nor as a new contribution. This paper's criterion of sorting is "whether it combines with existing instruments to generate new falsifiable propositions," and for this subject the propositions 899 generated combine with none of this paper's instruments (the nine cells, leverage, the tiers), so the criterion is not met. Within this series, this subject is a subject of Layer Two (social structure). What Self- Defined Society (Kadowaki, 2026f) treats is the institutional footing on which individuals may redefine themselves, and the quality of the information environment, the diversity of expression, and cognitive autonomy are nothing other than components of that footing. This paper connects with this subject only where Section 17 discusses the distribution of cognitive means through Proposition 12 (the stratification of access), and even there the connection is handled as a reference to Layer Two. The fields readers of this paper should consult if they pursue this subject are the theory of deliberative democracy and the public sphere, quantitative research on the information environment and political polarization, the design of preference aggregation in social choice theory, and the law of platform regulation and freedom of expression. (ii) The subject of the state as a provider of existential purpose and meaning. In a world where AI substitutes for a considerable part of labour, does the state become an actor that supplies citizens not only with income and security but with a framework of purpose and meaning in life? This question was examined longest in the course of conceiving this paper, and was in the end excluded for the clearest of reasons. The reason is incompatibility with methodological discipline. Following the discipline of the series, this paper has attached a falsification condition to every proposition. A falsification condition is the writing into the proposition itself of "what a referee who wishes to reject this paper's claim should observe." But for the claim that "the state ought to supply existential purpose" or "will become an actor that supplies it," it is not possible to specify what observation would reject the claim. No observable exists that measures whether meaning in life is fulfilled, and proxy indicators (life satisfaction, the density of social ties, suicide rates) each measure a construct distinct from the fulfilment of meaning. Even if a proxy indicator were adopted, there is no criterion decided in advance for whether, when the indicator does not move, one should conclude "meaning is not being supplied" or "the indicator does not capture meaning." This is a stronger form of the danger stated at 20.8(a) about national brain capital, that "a concept demarcated by negation becomes an all-purpose explanatory variable" — whereas national brain capital becomes falsifiable once proxy indicators are constructed, the supply of existential purpose faces a difficulty in principle in the very construction of proxy indicators. Were this paper therefore to treat this subject, it would exempt part of its subject matter alone from the discipline this paper imposes on propositions. An exemption does not merely weaken the claims in the exempted part. Once a claim without a falsification condition enters the framework, that claim survives even when all the other propositions have been falsified — and there arises a structure in which the surviving claim appears to underwrite the survival of the framework as a whole. This is the structure this paper most wishes to avoid. This paper acknowledges that it is a question of value. But not every 900

question of value can be handled with the same instrument. This paper's instruments cannot handle it — that is this paper's answer. The fields readers pursuing this subject should consult are the sociology of the meaning of work and professional ethics, the political philosophy of recognition and self-realization, the concept of welfare in the capability approach, and normative theory on income security and the decentring of labour. (iii) The multipolarity of intelligence and civilizational-historical arguments about the species. How the position of the human species changes in a situation where non-human intelligent agents increase persistently — this subject is likewise excluded for the same reason as (ii). In addition, there is a second reason absent from (ii). It is that it lacks an observable referent at present. The discipline this paper imposed in discussing C3 (the critical tier) was to make explicit at the opening of each section that mentions it that C3 is an unrealized, anticipated category, to use no rhetoric of exaggerated capability or fear-arousal, and to argue only at the level of institutions and governance (20.3). Even with this discipline imposed, 20.3 acknowledges the distortion whereby devoting space to an unrealized category itself operates as a non-verbal claim conveying a high probability of arrival. Civilizational-historical arguments about the species have a referent still more distant than C3. For C3, at least a path connecting to physical anchors — compute, electricity, and facilities — is identified (Proposition 9), and it can be translated into an observable question in the form of setting a threshold. By contrast, claims arguing the multipolarity of intelligence cannot at present specify what observation would show that it is under way. To connect a system of propositions carrying falsification conditions to a subject lacking a referent damages the system. This exclusion is not a judgment that the subject is empty. It is a judgment that treating a question lacking a referent in the same paper as questions possessing referents is inappropriate. The fields readers should consult if they pursue this subject are science and technology studies on the co-evolution of technology and society, philosophical arguments about long-term risk, and the lineage of ethics that includes the critique of anthropocentrism. (iv) The development of the Compute-Dollar as a theory of money. There is a conception on which compute partly takes on the functions of money — a measure of value, a medium of exchange, and a store of value. Compute is scarce, measurable as a quantity, and exchangeable across uses, and contracts for its procurement may be composed as long-term obligations. This conception is confined to a suggestion in Section 17 of this paper, in the passage discussing the connection with RCap (Kadowaki, 2026g), and is there made explicit as evidence grade ▽ (speculative). The reasons for confining it to a suggestion and not erecting it as a proposition should be stated. First, for something to hold as money requires conditions this paper's instruments do not treat — finality of settlement, stability of the unit, mechanisms of issuance and withdrawal, and the institutions that underwrite them. These are central issues in the theory of money, and neither the nine cells nor leverage has any distinctive implication for 901 them. Second, to erect it as a proposition would require writing a falsification condition, but the falsification conditions that could be written — whether long-term contracts denominated in compute are concluded at some scale, whether price quotation in units of compute spreads — are not even necessary conditions for holding as money. A proposition that entrusts falsification to observations that are not necessary conditions gives the theory no information whether it is supported or rejected. Third, and this is the weightiest reason, this conception does not combine with this paper's other claims. Even if compute did take on monetary functions, this paper's claims about position on the nine cells, the two components of leverage, the asymmetry of transition, and the verification anchor of critical-tier governance would all be unchanged. To erect a conception that does not combine as a proposition would appear to widen the explanatory range while in fact only adding one more claim that is not verified. This paper therefore confines it to a speculative suggestion of one or two pages in Section 17 and makes no claim as a theory of money. The fields readers pursuing this subject should consult are the economics of the functions and institutions of money, the law of payment systems and finality, and historical research on commodity-backed currencies. And as to comprehensiveness itself. In addition to the four subjects above, this paper makes no claim to have "covered every standpoint from which to discuss the state in the age of AI." Because this point is more important than any of the individual excluded subjects, it is stated separately. There are three reasons for rejecting a claim of comprehensiveness. First, it is unverifiable. No procedure exists for showing that a paper has covered every standpoint on its subject, because the non-existence of uncovered standpoints cannot in principle be demonstrated. A claim of comprehensiveness can therefore have no falsification condition, and is incompatible with the discipline this paper imposes on all its propositions — the reason for excluding (ii) comes to be applied to the framework as a whole. Second, it makes the treatment of each subject shallow. In the course of conceiving this paper, more than a dozen additional issues were examined. Were all of them incorporated into the body of the text, each would degenerate into a sketch of a few pages and would fail the criterion "does it combine with existing instruments to generate new falsifiable propositions?" Sorting is the operation that gives sufficient depth to the subjects treated. Third, a theory that explains anything predicts nothing. A framework that can explain any observation ex post forbids no observation and therefore has no empirical content. The danger stated at the end of 20.8 about the joint use of national brain capital and valuedefinition capability — that combining the two can explain almost any observation ex post — strengthens as the number of instruments increases. The expansion of explanatory range is not in itself an improvement. This paper is therefore a limited set of instruments. The nine cells treat the mode of value generation; the 2×2 of leverage treats power in negotiation; the dynamics of transition treat the change of position over time; critical-tier governance treats institutional design for unrealized capability; and value-definition capability and national brain capital 902 treat the connection with the lower layers. What these do not treat, they do not treat. It is for this reason that, for each of the subjects above, the fields of research to be consulted have been named, so that readers may supplement what lies outside this paper with other literature. Finally, what this declaration does should be stated. Declaring the range one does not treat strengthens the claims about the range one does treat. There are two reasons. First, a claim with explicit boundaries can be falsified inside those boundaries. What this paper states "about national value generation models" may be rejected by observations concerning value generation models; but if this paper also spoke about existential purpose and consensus formation, then even where observations concerning value generation models rejected this paper, other parts would appear to survive. The absence of boundaries dilutes the force of falsification. Second, a declaration of exclusions calibrates the expectations readers place on this paper. A reader who reads this paper as "a conspectus of what should be known about AI and the state" will record as a gap in this paper every subject encountered that is not treated; a reader who reads this paper as "an attempt to give falsifiable answers to a limited set of questions" will assess this paper by the depth of the subjects treated. The latter reading is the harsher for this paper — because there is less room to escape. It is the latter reading that this paper asks for. This declaration, however, has its own limitation. The author can say that a subject was "deliberately not treated" only of subjects the author examined. Subjects not examined do not appear even in the list of exclusions. The structure 20.17 states as a limitation of this section itself — that the objections an author can anticipate are limited to those visible from inside the author's framework — operates in the same form for the declaration of exclusions. This paper makes no claim that the list of exclusions is exhaustive. 20.15 The Conflict of Interest When a Practitioner Recommends Policies That Bear on His Own Business Opportunities Section 20.7 treated the conflict of interest in series self-citation and touched at its close on the business of the author's organization. This subsection develops that closing paragraph as an independent section. The reason is that, since the focus of this paper's claims is identified, the outline of the conflict of interest is likewise identifiable. The facts should be stated first. This paper places the core of Japan's viable portfolio at M2×C2 — the position of procuring frontier-tier capability and adding value through transformation supported by complementary assets and national brain capital (Section 10, Proposition 13). The author is a practitioner in an investment holding company and is in a position to conduct business and investment in this domain. That is, the domain in which business opportunities would expand were this paper's recommendations realized coincides with the domain this paper recommends. This coincidence cannot be explained as accidental. The order is the reverse — it is because the author reached this judgment in practice that he wrote the grounds of that judg‐ 903 ment as theory, and that is this paper. This paper's framework was not built independently of the judgment made in practice and then found to coincide with practice by chance. The claim that "the author is neutral" therefore does not hold, and this paper does not make it. What follows from this is a change in how the question is posed. What should be asked is not the purity of motive but whether the claims are verifiable independently of motive. Purity of motive can be determined neither by the author nor by readers. What can be determined is whether the claims are written in a falsifiable form, whether procedures of falsification are specified, and whether the specified procedures lie outside the author's control. One reason this paper attaches falsification conditions proposition by proposition (Table 10, Section 21), specifies ex ante observation indicators (the four indicators of Proposition 4; the ex ante measurement of Hypothesis H2), and entrusts the determination of falsification to observations outside the author's control, lies here. These devices do not prove the author's honesty. They are devices that put readers in a position to evaluate this paper without trusting the author. On that basis, the author himself names the concrete places at which readers should doubt this paper's recommendations. What follows is not self-defence. It is presented as an instrument of doubt that readers can use. Place to doubt 1: over-estimation of the promise of the Transformation Model. Section 10 (10.1.4) declared that M2×C2 is erected on positive grounds rather than by elimination, and offered as one of those grounds the structure that, because no difference arises on the raw-material side (N3), differences arise only on the transformation side. This inference is formally sound, but that differences arise only on the transformation side does not mean that the differences on the transformation side are large. Even in a world where differences arise only in transformation, if those differences are small, the expected return on betting on transformation is low. This paper has not estimated the magnitude of the differences. The author's interests work in the direction of rating that magnitude highly. Readers should check, at the passage where Section 10's positive grounds move from the claim "no differences arise other than in transformation" to the claim "one should bet on transformation," whether the magnitude of the differences has been argued. Place to doubt 2: under-estimation of the rationality of the option of committing to utilization alone. The strategy of remaining at M3×C1 — putting commodity-tier capability procured externally into domestic processes and making no investment in transformation — has a rationality this paper does not adequately assess. Procurement costs are low, investment risk is avoided, it is faithful to the principle of comparative advantage, and sunk costs in the event of failure are small. This paper assesses this option negatively as "the externalization of value-definition capability" (Section 17, 17.3.4) and as a fall into "digital tenancy" (Section 15, 15.3.1), but both assessments depend on the premise that the cost of externalized value-definition capability is large, and that cost has not been measured. The author's interests work in the direction of rating the expected return on pure 904 utilization low. Readers should check, at the passages where this paper rejects pure utilization, whether the grounds for rejection are measured quantities or merely positions within the framework. Place to doubt 3: the ordering of the four indicators of complementary assets. Hypothesis H2 predicts that the predictive power of the four indicators follows the order physical- interface intensity and exclusive data endowment > institutional embeddedness > linguistic- contextual specificity. This ordering is favourable to an economy with a manufacturing base and site-level data, and favourable also to actors involved in such an economy. The grounds for the ordering are the theoretical inference of "the degree to which integration cost is kept high for the producer," not empirical evidence. Readers should read the passage that derives implications for investment allocation (Section 18, 18.12.3) before this ordering is verified as a conditional implication. Place to doubt 4: national investment in the three functions of the guarantee level. That Definition 6(i) was recast into the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition, and that the object of national investment was formalized as "the construction of the conditions for executing, renewing, and protecting capability," generates demand for firms that may be involved in that construction. The techno-nationalism objection treated at 20.4 is the general form of this configuration. That the recasting into three functions is theoretically justified (Section 18, 18.10.2) and that its consequence produces benefits for particular actors are compatible. Readers should check whether the required level of the three functions is summed from "the quantity necessary for the degraded operation of critical processes," or whether instead it takes the form of an ex post justification of existing development plans. Place to doubt 5: the coincidence of the methodology of audit with the actor implementing it. As 20.7 states, the actor proposing the methodology of the dependence audit protocol (Appendix C) is also the actor implementing that audit. This structure is a weakness from the standpoint of independence, and this paper cannot dissolve it. The mitigations available are to publish the protocol and the format of the raw data in a form that permits third parties to re-implement it, and to state several methods of composing the indicators so as to avoid convergence on a single score. Place to doubt 6: the content of the cross-scenario no-regret actions. Proposition 20 identifies national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, and operational readiness as the set of investments having positive expected value under all three world scenarios. The content of this set coincides with the direction favourable to the author's business opportunities — namely, investment in national brain capital and domain data. That this paper introduced the instrument of scenarios is formally a robustness check on its conclusions, but in substance it has produced the conclusion that the objects of investment the author has recommended are justified in every world. This coincidence too is a place readers should doubt. What should be checked is whether the four elements of the no-regret set were derived from the criterion "marginal value is positive under every scenario," or whether the set came first and the description of the 905 scenarios was constructed to fit it. The clues for determination are that the falsification condition of Proposition 20 makes explicit as a criterion of rejection that marginal value becomes non-positive for any of the four components, and that the domestic holding of frontier-class compute infrastructure is explicitly excluded from the set as scenario-dependent. The latter takes the form of excluding an item that does not coincide with the author's business opportunities, and were the set derived backwards from business opportunities this exclusion would be hard to explain. But this is weak indirect evidence, not proof. Place to doubt 7: objects of investment relating to the institutional foundation. This paper places to the fore, as objects of investment required by the framework, the development of trust infrastructure (Definition 17, Proposition 25), the maintenance of national brain capital (Proposition 24), and the accumulation of domain data whose provenance can be verified (Definition 16, Proposition 27). That this paper recommends investment in trust infrastructure, national brain capital, and domain data is a direction coinciding with the author's business opportunities. Proposition 25 states that the development of rules for allocating responsibility, conformity assessment, and insurance bounds above the depth of deployment in regulated sectors, and Proposition 27 states that actors able to prove provenance stand in a structurally advantageous position as regards the exclusive data endowment of Proposition 4; both claims work in the direction of generating demand for actors doing business in those domains. Readers should check, in accounts that invoke these propositions, whether the claims are presented as empirical claims accompanied by falsification conditions, or whether they have slid into statements of the desirability of objects of investment. Place to doubt 8: the promise of the export of integrated systems. Section 12 states that, of the three forms the Transformation Model may export, only the export of integrated systems (Definition 20) is defended by the wall of integration cost, and formalized its conditions as Proposition 39. The author is a practitioner in a jurisdiction positioned as a Transformation Model on the nine cells, and has an interest in the direction of rating the promise of that position highly. Two things should be inspected by readers. First, that the grounds for the claim that the export of integrated systems withstands compression rest on analogy from other fields and theoretical inference rather than on instances in AI (20.10(g)). Second, whether the limitation that (iv) portability in Proposition 39 is the most binding functions as a substantive check — that is, whether the account in Section 12 that pairs exportable domains with non-exportable domains actually narrows the claim of promise, or possesses only the outward form of narrowing it. If the former, the limitation is functioning; if the latter, this paper is tilted in the direction of its own interests. The structure common to the eight points above should be stated. The direction in which this paper's claims may be biased is one and the same — the direction of rating high the expected return on investment in the Transformation Model and low the expected return on the option of committing to utilization alone. What readers should doubt first is therefore not whether there is an error somewhere in this paper, but at which 906 nodes of this paper's inference this one-directional bias may enter. The counter-measure this paper supplies is that the falsification conditions of Propositions 13, 4, 17, and 18 all explicitly specify observations contrary to this paper's recommendations. If firms in the lower quantiles of the four indicators of complementary assets maintain gross margins across generational change, Proposition 4 is rejected; if domestic value added per yen of digital procurement improves under a pure utilization strategy lacking complementary assets, Proposition 13 is rejected; if the proxy indicators of value-definition capability do not explain disparities in outcome, the latter part of Proposition 17 is rejected; and if transformation margins at Tier C2 are appropriated persistently in countries where the proxy indicators of national brain capital are thin, Proposition 18 is rejected. Every one of these is an observation unfavourable to the author's business. That this paper states them expressly as falsification conditions is not proof of honesty; it is the minimum condition for creating a state in which readers can verify without trusting the author. Finally, what disclosure does not dissolve should be stated. Disclosure of a conflict of interest does not remove the conflict itself. If a reader adopts this paper's recommendations after reading it, the author cannot distinguish whether that adoption is due to the force of this paper's argument or to the appearance of persuasiveness conferred by the author's position. All this paper can do is to leave materials for that distinction. This section is those materials, and nothing more. 20.16 Acknowledgment of Five Weaknesses Following the discipline of this series, five weaknesses of this paper are acknowledged in the author's own words. What follows rebundles the limitations enumerated by subject at 20.8 to 20.12, the price of the editorial policy (20.13), and the structural conflict of interest attending the author's position as a practitioner (20.15), by the type of their effect on this paper's claims. Whereas the enumeration shows "where the deficiencies lie," the five points below show "what those deficiencies constrain in this paper's claims." Weakness 1: the absence of an independent justification of the methodology, and the theoretical commitment remaining in the choice of definitions. The discipline of analogy in Section 3 involves two stages of judgment: the decomposition of the bundles of properties and the assignment of the three analogies. By operationalizing Definition 2 solely through capability distance, the object of the assignment is severed from the analyst's discretion; but the decomposition of the bundles of properties — which properties are placed in Table 1 — remains the analyst's judgment, and the defence is no more than the procedural one of "fixing the table." The legitimacy of the methodology is held hostage to the verification results of the substantive propositions obtained by using it (Proposition 3 onwards) and lacks an independent foundation (20.1). In addition, removing the mechanism of conclusions from the definitions cuts circularity, but the theoretical commitments contained in the choice of definitions themselves — taking capability distance as the axis, dividing value generation into the three positions of production, transformation, and utilization, defining dependence by degradation at the time of interruption — remain. 907 This paper is falsifiable but not framework-neutral (20.12(a)). Commitments of the same kind extend across the whole of this paper's definitions — decomposing cell transition into the three directions of horizontal, vertical, and cross-axis (Definition 10), constituting the hard-to-replicate part of human capital from four components (Definition 11), and specifying value-definition capability by the two components of selection and realization (Definition 12). All are choices among competing formulations, and under different formulations the accounts of Sections 15 and 17 would take different shapes. Because Definitions 11 and 12 in particular are demarcated by negation, the degree to which the choice of definition anticipates the consequences of the theory is greater than in the division of tiers by capability distance (20.8(a), (d)). There are two more — dividing the state of the world into three states along the single axis of the mode of the frontier's advance (Definition 13), and demarcating leading indicators by the three conditions of observability, discriminatory power, and leading character (Definition 14). The former involves the choice of not taking other axes such as the convergence and divergence of regulation or the tightness and easing of energy supply; the latter involves the choice of determining the eligibility of indicators by theoretical conditions alone and not including backtesting among the requirements (20.12(f), (b)). There are three more — decomposing power in negotiation into the two components of indispensability and desirability (Definition 15), demarcating authenticity not by the content of data but by the verifiability of provenance (Definition 16), and defining trust as an institution consisting of three elements, rules for allocating responsibility, conformity assessment, and insurance (Definition 17). The two-component decomposition of Definition 15 in particular involves the choice of placing explicitly outside the domain of quantification other factors that may govern bargaining power — the history of alliance relations, relations among leaders, domestic political stability, and differences in time preference. This paper justifies this choice by the theoretical reason that the two components differ fundamentally in their mode of depreciation (Section 11.6), but under a different decomposition the accounts of Sections 11 and 14 would take different shapes (20.8(g)). There are two more — demarcating the set of occupiable positions as a function of the capability tiers (Definition 18), and aggregating the cost of sovereignty into the single quantity of the difference in unit price between domestic guarantees and use of the international market (Definition 19). The former involves the choice of gathering under the single vocabulary of "feasible region" the different reasons why a cell is hard to establish (that the definitional requirements cannot be met; that it is not permitted under the grade of externality; that instances are lacking). The latter involves the choice of placing outside the domain of quantification the parts of cost that do not appear in unit price — delay in decision-making, complexity of design, and the opportunity cost of personnel. Both are choices among competing formulations, and under different formulations the accounts of Sections 6 and 19 would take different shapes (20.12(c), 20.9(f)). The last one differs in character from the preceding items — the division into the two layers of the jurisdiction-specific layer and the portable core, and their interface, introduced by Proposition 41, is a theoretical instrument of this paper and yet has been given no definition number. That is, this paper uses a concept that governs the success or failure of the condition of compatibility while leaving it outside the list of definitions (21 in all). 908 This choice is a measure corresponding to the fact that the position of the interface differs by domain and has no general solution (20.11(e)), but as a result that concept has not received fixing at the level of a definition. In addition, the very choice of dividing a system into two layers is a theoretical commitment — under a formulation adopting a division into three or more layers (a jurisdiction-specific layer, a regionally common layer, and a portable core, say), the "interface" of Proposition 41 would be plural rather than singular, and the claim about the dependence of transplantation costs on embedding would take a different shape. This paper adopts this choice on the ground that it is the minimum division corresponding to the two requirements of the defensive wall of Proposition 4 and the portability of Proposition 39(iv), but other divisions are not thereby excluded. Weakness 2: the coarseness of the unit of description. This paper treats the state as the unit of cell position, but in reality the C1/C2 boundary differs by sector and by use within the same country, and access conditions differ by firm. The representation of plotting states on the nine cells (Figure 3) averages away and conceals this internal dispersion. In an intermediate world where the tracking of open models proceeds at different speeds by use, this coarseness directly impairs the validity of the analysis (20.2). The analysis of transition (Section 15) extends this coarseness along the time axis. Making the state the subject of transition means describing as the movement of a single centre of gravity changes of position that in reality proceed at different speeds by sector and by firm, and it cannot express a state in which ascending and descending sectors coexist within the same country. When Section 18 stated of Japan that "the default path is descent," what is stated is the trajectory of the centre of gravity, not the trajectories of individual sectors and firms. Coarseness of the unit of analysis conceals dispersion in a static classification, but in dynamic analysis it may render divergence itself invisible. This coarseness extends to a third level as well. The three states of Definition 13 are a description taking the world as the unit, but as Definition 13 itself admits, different states may hold simultaneously by sector and by use. The determination "which scenario?" therefore performs at the level of the world the same averaging as the determination of cell position taking the state as the unit (20.12(f)). The separation Section 18.14 made, for Japan's three-part set, of the robust part from the S1-dependent part likewise inherits this coarseness so far as it presupposes a single scenario determination. The same coarseness appears at a fourth level. Geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15) is defined as a variable taking the state as its unit, but much of the substance of indispensability, the critical points, is held by firms, and a state can exercise it only through jurisdiction, as the jurisdiction in which those firms are located (Section 11.1). This structure of mediation implies that a state's indispensability cannot be mobilized by the state's will alone, yet this paper proceeds by an account that attributes indispensability to the state. Likewise, the "exercise" of Proposition 23 is described as an act of the state, whereas actual measures are divided by item, destination, and timing and include many intermediate forms of partial exercise and threat (20.9(c)). Just as a description taking the state as its unit conceals dispersion within sectors, a description attributing leverage to the state conceals the separation of the holding actor from the exercising actor. The fifth level concerns implementing actors and jurisdictions. 909 The administrative capacity treated by Proposition 36 is described as a variable taking the implementing actor as its unit, but actual implementing capacity differs by agency and by bureau, and there is no assurance that it can be aggregated as a single quantity. Likewise, the sovereignty premium of Definition 19 is defined as a difference in unit price taking the jurisdiction as its unit, but actual unit prices are dispersed by use, scale, and form of contract. Just as a description taking the state as its unit conceals dispersion within sectors, a description taking the implementing actor as its unit conceals dispersion among agencies, and a difference in unit price taking the jurisdiction as its unit conceals dispersion across uses. The reduced, distributed model of execution presented at Section 18.2.1 is a design that narrows requirements to a minimum set on the premise of this dispersion, but this paper does not identify which part of the dispersion the narrowing discards (20.11(d)). Weakness 3: vulnerability of the policy implications to expansive interpretation. By confining what is guaranteed to the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition, a rereading into a demand for self-sufficiency incurs the burden of explaining "which function it corresponds to," and the criterion fixing the boundary has been objectified. But because all three functions may be reread as "the operational capacity of domestic industry" and "the renewal capability of domestic firms," the effect in preventing expansion in political processes is limited. This paper's framework may, contrary to the author's intention, be appropriated as the vocabulary of techno-nationalism. This paper also does not treat the interaction of several states' pursuit of guarantee levels (a structure isomorphic with the security dilemma) (20.4). This vulnerability extends in two directions. First, the three conditions for a third pole (Proposition 19) are directly appropriable as vocabulary justifying bloc formation — the three conditions of complementarity, mutual guarantees of access, and shared discipline are presented as descriptive conditions of establishment, but in policy processes they may be read as a schedule of requirements for the normative claim that "a pole ought to be created." Second, the confinement of procurement to within an alliance treated by Section 15 [B] (vertical integration across axes) is described as a prediction of Proposition 16, yet a description of a prediction is readily received as a description of a prescription. This paper cannot control that reception (it is isomorphic with the recursive failure at the end of 20.1). The vulnerability extends in two further directions. First, the no-regret actions of Proposition 20 are no-regret only in so far as opportunity cost is not deducted (20.12(h)), yet in budget-allocation processes the phrase "investment justified in every world" may be used as a claim of priority that bypasses comparison with other uses. Second, the three constraints of Proposition 21 — the data-sovereignty constraint in particular — are presented as descriptive constraints, yet may be read as a schedule of requirements for policies restricting the cross-border transfer of data. The claim that the three constraints are independent of region, income level, and political system is not the claim that the means of responding to them are independent. There are two more. First, the indispensability of Definition 15 is presented as a descriptive variable, yet may be read as grounds for the normative claim that this state too should hold a chokepoint. Against this reread‐

ing this paper places as checks that Proposition 23 (depreciation through exercise) works in the direction of lowering the expected return on acquiring indispensability, and that the diagnostic of Appendix G goes no further than an inventory of critical points and gives no score; but both are weak checks. Second, because the trust infrastructure of Definition 17 is a concept requiring the development of three elements — rules for allocating responsibility, conformity assessment, and insurance — it is directly appropriable as vocabulary justifying the creation and expansion of regulation. What Proposition 25 asserts is that in jurisdictions lacking trust infrastructure deployment remains at peripheral operations; it is not that the more regulation there is, the deeper deployment becomes. This distinction was stated in the body of the text (Section 11.3), but the effect in preventing rereading in policy processes is limited. Section 19 both narrows this vulnerability on one side and widens it on the other. To state the narrowing side first. That Section 19 formalized the sovereignty premium and made explicit that domestic guarantees are justified only as insurance and that justification requires comparison with expected losses reduces the room for this paper's framework to be read as an unconditional recommendation of domestic provision. The widening side is twofold. First, the concept of the sovereignty premium is equally appropriable as vocabulary opposing domestic provision ("domestic guarantees are expensive") and as vocabulary promoting it ("if it is insurance it is justified"). Since neither side of the condition of justification can be computed (20.9(g)), neither appropriation is excluded by this paper's account. Second, the reduced, distributed model of execution presented at Section 18.2.1 is a design that recomposes the form of requirements on the ground of constraints in administrative capacity, but this may be appropriated as a general justification for the conclusion that implementation will not be undertaken because capacity is lacking. What this paper stated is a recomposition of the mode of execution, not a licence not to execute. This distinction too was stated only in the body of the text, and the effect in preventing rereading is limited. Proposition 42 narrows the scope of this weakness at a single point. Because Proposition 42(ii) gives an upper bound to the self-reinforcement of desirability, Section 12 of this paper does not become grounds supporting the reading that "the export of integrated systems accumulates bargaining power without limit" — because the existence of the upper bound and the mechanism by which it is pressed down by recipient-side counteraction are placed on the side of the body of the text. Likewise, because Proposition 42(i) explicitly denies the inference that "if switching costs are high, one is indispensable," the expansive interpretation that cites the level of lock-in as evidence of bargaining power does not hold within this paper. The narrowing is limited, however — since the level of the upper bound is not computed (20.8(j)), the expansive interpretation in the form "the upper bound is still far off" remains unblocked by this paper. What this paper has given is the existence of an upper bound, not an estimate of how far the present position is from it. Weakness 4: the substantive difficulty of falsifying some propositions, and the absence of governance design. This paper removed institutional variables from the falsification condition of Proposition 3 so as to separate assignment from testing, gave Proposition 4 four ex ante observable indicators, placed the test of Proposition 11 in an upper 911 quantile and an event study, and divided Proposition 6 into 6a and 6b. By these means, most of the propositions in forms that would substantively escape falsification have been opened to testing. But for Proposition 10 (which takes the arrival of C3 as a precondition), Proposition 14 (which lacks criteria for classifying redefinitional policy shifts), and Proposition 2b (which cannot be verified until the threshold is realized, and whose threshold is itself not given as a figure), the structure in which the conditional form exempts them from falsification remains. It is more accurate to position these three propositions at present as descriptions of an analytical framework rather than as testable hypotheses. In addition, this paper as a conditional design theory does not enter into the design of the organizations that determine satisfaction of the conditions and operate the design — who measures, who decides, and who is accountable — and its completeness as a design theory is limited in this respect (20.5, 20.10(a)). Several further propositions belong to this group. Proposition 19 (the conditions for the establishment of a third pole) has no opportunity for falsification of its sufficiency because no instance exists of an arrangement satisfying the three conditions (20.10(b)). Proposition 18 (the non-replicability of national brain capital) has a falsification condition that does not operate until proxy indicators are constructed, and at present remains an interpretation of the structure lying behind the four indicators (20.8(a)). Proposition 17 differs in epistemic standing between its first part (diminishing returns) and its latter part (attribution), the latter standing at the level of a hypothesis with a specified testing procedure (20.8(c)). Further, the quantity at the core of the asymmetry asserted by Proposition 15 — the time constant of upward transition — has not been estimated, and this absence operates at the point where this paper's policy implications are translated into practice (20.9(a)). That is, the propositions substantively difficult to falsify are not limited to Propositions 10, 14, and 2b but extend to Proposition 15 (time constants), the latter part of Proposition 17, and Propositions 18 and 19. Of the two propositions on scenarios and the constraints on middle powers, Proposition 20 has a falsification condition — if marginal value is shown to be non-positive for any of the four components under any scenario, that component is removed from the set — but scenarioby- scenario estimation of marginal value has not been carried out, and this paper does not specify a procedure for such estimation either. Proposition 21 has a design for testing the commonality of the three constraints through a panel of middle powers, but that panel has not been constructed. In addition, the leading indicators of Section 16 lack any assurance of operating as an instrument of determination because their discriminatory power has not been backtested (20.8(e)). The group furthest from evidence therefore also includes three items: Proposition 20 (the absence of estimation of marginal value), Proposition 21 (the absence of a panel), and the leading indicators (unverified discriminatory power). The seven propositions on leverage and the institutional foundation widen this group further. Of the seven, not one possesses a measurement framework such that it can be entered into testing. The test of independence in Proposition 22 requires an indicator measuring the level of leverage, and this paper gives no weights for its composition (20.8(g)). Proposition 23 is open to an event study as a claim about direction, but it is undetermined whether the date of the event is placed at the publication, the pre-announcement, or the reporting of a measure, and as a claim about magnitude it is incomplete 912 (20.9(c)). Proposition 24 remains at present at △ (contested) because both the path of wear and the path of promotion are equally strong (20.10(e)). Proposition 25 has a design for comparison across jurisdictions, but internationally comparable indicators exist for neither depth of deployment nor level of development of trust infrastructure. For Proposition 26, the threshold of the time-constant ratio has not been estimated, and its falsification condition does not operate (20.9(b)). Proposition 27 is, of the seven, the closest to observation in that it specifies as an observable the price difference between data whose provenance can be verified and data whose provenance cannot, but the markets in which such a price difference can be observed in isolation are at present limited. For Proposition 28, the falsification condition of convergence does not operate because the extension of "paths other than the three functions" is not fixed (20.12(d)). That is, all seven have falsification conditions and no measurement framework. The eight propositions treating the costs of the recommendations (29 to 36) belong to the same group. Proposition 29 takes as its falsification condition a systematic difference in the density of instances, but the density has not been measured. Proposition 30 lacks a method of computing both the lefthand side (the total sovereignty premium) and the right-hand side (the expected value of avoided losses) of its condition of justification (20.9(g)). Proposition 31 stops at a claim of necessity and is unaccompanied by a design for bearing the cost, so the state its falsification condition points to may hold as a standing matter owing to the very absence of the design (20.11(a)). Proposition 32 imposes conditions of propagation but supplies no measurement of value-definition capability itself, and so does not close the room for ex post explanation (20.8(d)). Propositions 33 and 34 name respectively outflow and the mismatch of time constants, but are unaccompanied by a design of response (20.11(b), 20.11(c)). Proposition 35 requires the measurement of a quantity, the speed of easing, but this paper does not specify a basis of comparison. Proposition 36 leaves even the concrete candidates for the minimum indicator set unspecified (20.11(d)). That is, these eight too have falsification conditions and no measurement framework. The three propositions on the export and procurement of integrated systems (38 to 40) belong to the same group — the switching costs of Proposition 38, the portability of Proposition 39, and the three variables of Proposition 40 all name observables and are unaccompanied by measurement frameworks (20.10(g), 20.8(i), 20.9(d), 20.9(i)). That, although Section 19 was a section that counts costs, the propositions that section placed are precisely the furthest from measurement, is a repetition of this paper's general property — that it has erected propositions in domains chosen because theory there is blank owing to the absence of prior observation. Propositions 41 and 42 also belong to this weakness. The falsification condition of Proposition 41 asks whether a difference is observed in the relation between degree of embedding and transplantation cost as between systems with an explicit interface and systems without, but this paper has no procedure for determining from outside whether an interface is made explicit (20.9(h)). The falsification condition of Proposition 42 requires simultaneous observation of the level of lock-in and supplier concentration, but this paper has not measured concentration by domain and gives no threshold separating the two (20.9(e)). That is, the two new propositions both have falsification conditions whose wording is testable while awaiting the construction of the observables that wording 913 names. This structure has been repeated consistently across this paper's new propositions and has not been dissolved. Weakness 5: partial dependence on unrefereed self-citation, bias of observational position, and the sacrifice of the framework's comprehensiveness. The inter-layer transmission and the correspondence of national redefinition in Section 17 presuppose a body of working papers by the same author that has not received independent verification. And the centre of gravity of this paper's conceptual instruments — the strong interest in transformation value and the guarantee level — is a reflection of its being written from a country positioned at M3×C2, and from other positions a division along different axes could be required. In particular, this paper lacks an account from the side of the groups of states that cannot deploy sufficient resources anywhere on the nine cells, and of the actors placed at the lower end of the disparities (20.6, 20.7). In addition, as regards the value positions of regulatory power and evaluation and verification capability, this paper made the judgment not to erect a fourth value model (M4, the discipline model) and to maintain the nine cells, and made explicit in the note to Definition 3 the theoretical ground for the exclusion; but that judgment traded comprehensiveness for homogeneity of analysis (20.12(b)). Likewise, the population of Proposition 9 has widened to four regimes, but the sample number remains four, and the selection of regimes is not independent of the hypothesis (20.10(c)). The dependence on self-citation is not confined to Section 17 — Definition 11 (national brain capital) presupposes as foundational axioms the frameworks of Brain Capital Management (2026e) and Ageless Management (2026i), and Definition 12 (value-definition capability) that of Future Value Theory (2026a). A considerable part of the account in Section 17 is conditioned on the validity of these three papers. The dependence is not localized to Section 17 (inter-layer transmission and national redefinition) but extends to Sections 10 and 18 as well — because Proposition 18 is the core of Section 10, and its underlying concept derives from 2026i. The separability stated at 20.7 — that even with the parts containing self-citation removed the nine-cell theory and the analysis of critical-tier governance hold — still obtains, but the range lost upon removal is not confined to Section 17. In addition, since the position this paper recommends is identified, the accord with the author's business opportunities is likewise identified. This structural conflict of interest is not dissolved by disclosure, and readers must determine individually at which nodes of this paper's inference a one-directional bias may enter (20.15). This weakness extends in two further directions. First, positioning the section treating Japan as a "case study" does not dissolve the bias of observational position. A positioning is a specification of how to read, not a description of the process by which the theory was generated. That the centre of gravity of this paper's instruments lies in transformation value and the guarantee level, and that it lacks an account from the groups of states that cannot deploy sufficient resources anywhere on the nine cells, are not changed by the positioning (20.12(j)). Second, the content of the no-regret set identified by Proposition 20 — national brain capital and exclusive domain data — lies in a direction coinciding with the author's business opportunities. The structure whereby the instrument of scenarios is formally a robustness check while in substance it produces a reconfirmation of the author's recom‐ 914 mendations is placed at 20.15 as a place readers should doubt. Section 11 both narrows this weakness on one side and widens it on the other. To state the narrowing side first. The item that "not erecting a fourth value model for the value positions of regulatory power and evaluation and verification capability, and maintaining the nine cells, sacrifices comprehensiveness" (20.12(b)) is closed by Section 11's recovering this position as leverage on the side of desirability — standard-setting power is not a position falling outside the framework but a position on the second axis. The widening side is threefold. First, the dependence on self-citation is unchanged, but the external theoretical lineages on which Section 11 relies (hubs and chokepoint effects on networks; de facto standards through market size and regulatory capacity) are not re-argued by this paper, and a considerable part of the account in Section 11 is conditioned on the validity of those formulations. Second, the bias of observational position operates in the account of leverage as well. The set of physical critical points this paper enumerated as sources of indispensability reflects the distribution of materials accessible to the author, and from other positions different critical points might come to the fore. Third, as regards the structural conflict of interest, this paper's including investment in trust infrastructure, national brain capital, and domain data among its recommendations increases the surface of coincidence with the author's business opportunities (place to doubt 7 at 20.15). On the whole, Section 11's recovery closes one item, the sacrifice of comprehensiveness, and widens by one degree each the items of dependence, bias, and conflict of interest. Section 19 likewise narrows on one side and widens on the other. The narrowing side is that placing in the body of the text a section that counts the costs of the recommendations reduces the room for reading the investments this paper recommends as though they were free. The widening side is threefold. First, of the five types of cost counted in Section 19, for institutional coherence this paper does not even provide the description of the structure, as lying outside its expertise (20.11(f)). The item of the sacrifice of comprehensiveness is closed by one through Section 11's recovery, but here one is added. Second, stating political neutrality expressly as the highest discipline moves normative questions outside this paper (20.13). This is an intended exclusion, but an exclusion is an exclusion, and it remains that one more reason has been added why this paper does not cover the whole of the discussion of national strategy. Third, as regards the structural conflict of interest, Section 19.4.4's enumeration of public bearing, incorporation into procurement requirements, insurance arrangements, and regulatory requirements as paths for bearing costs further increases the surface in contact with the author's business opportunities. Placing a section that counts costs raises the credibility of the recommendations, but so long as that section also enumerates the paths of incidence, the interests concerning the choice among those paths are likewise not placed outside this paper. These five points do not withdraw this paper's claims; they demarcate the range within which the claims hold. Section 21 gives a map of what may be verified inside that range (Table 10 organizes, for all 42 numbered propositions comprising 44 sentences, the testable implications, the data required and the identification strategy, and the evidence grade). Seen through the five points, the breadth of this paper's explanatory range is 915 the obverse of the magnitude of its distance from evidence. To see the former and not the latter is the misreading most likely to arise for readers of this paper. In particular, there is a danger of reading the widening of the readership to middle powers in general as raising the generality of this paper's claims, and a danger of reading the introduction of the second axis and the recovery of the M4 problem as meaning that this paper has covered every aspect of national strategy. A declaration of the range of application is not the carrying out of verification within that range. The commonality of the three constraints asserted by Proposition 21 remains, until tested by a panel of middle powers, an ordering from the observation of cases, and the seven propositions 22 to 28 do not enter a state in which they may be rejected until measurement frameworks are constructed. These five weaknesses are acknowledgments about the range that has been treated. As to the range that has not been treated, 20.14 declares separately — the list of weaknesses and the list of exclusions are two documents of different character, and neither substitutes for the other. 20.17 The Limitations of This Section Itself Finally, this section closes by stating the limitations of this section itself. The form in which a section of objections and limitations is written by the author himself has a structural upper bound. The objections an author can anticipate are limited to those visible from inside the author's own framework. That this section has treated seven items shows only that the author judged those seven to be important; there is no assurance that the most destructive objection is contained in this section. Rather, a fatal defect in a theory ordinarily resides in premises the author does not recognize as problems. This upper bound is not an abstract possibility. Given the design of this paper, the gravest defect may appear outside the seven items this section treats — in places belonging to the design of the relation between definitions and propositions: the mutual coherence of the domains of Definitions 1, 2, and 3; the intrusion of the mechanism of conclusions into definitions; the compatibility of the rent claim of Proposition 5 with the C1 price competition of Proposition 2; the connection between the descent of Section 5 and the verification anchor of Section 9; and the compatibility of the depreciation of Proposition 8 with the specification of the guarantee level. None of these is an "objection visible from inside the author's framework"; they are the kind of defect that resides in premises the author does not recognize as problems. This paper has handled them on the side of the body of the text, and acknowledges that defects of the same kind may nonetheless remain. Two things should be drawn from this. First, the richness of a section of self-criticism is no substitute for verification from outside. That this section is detailed does not move the location of the defects. Second, there is nonetheless value in writing this section — because the problems this section acknowledges (insufficiency of falsification conditions, coarseness of the unit of description, vulnerability to expansive interpretation) can all be handled in the same process as that which puts in order the relation between definitions and propositions. Acknowledgment is not solution, but it is preparation for solution. That 916 this series holds out a discipline presupposing adversarial verification is in order to break this upper bound from outside the author. This section is a record of acknowledgment, not a substitute for verification from outside. And for each of the points acknowledged at 20.8 to 20.12 as well, the possibility remains that defects residing in premises the author does not recognize lie outside them. In particular, Definitions 11 and 12, Propositions 15 to 19, Definitions 13 and 14, Propositions 20 and 21, and the seven propositions of Section 11 have all been inspected only from inside the author's framework. This asymmetry is information readers should hold when reading those parts. In addition, that this paper widens its readership to middle powers in general makes the upper bound of this section operate in a new form — because the structure whereby the objections an author can anticipate are limited to those visible from inside the author's framework applies all the more strongly to objections that might be raised from the positions of countries and regions to which the author has no access. Two further points may be added. First, the judgment to recover standard-setting power into the leverage axis is a response to the problem that there are positions falling outside the framework, but the form of the response is one the author chose, and that form itself has not undergone external verification. Second, the declaration of exclusions made at 20.14 holds only for subjects the author examined. Subjects not examined appear neither in the list of exclusions, and readers can therefore know what this paper did not treat only up to the limit of this paper's own account. The declaration of exclusions does not break the upper bound of this section; it is work carried out inside that upper bound. Finally, a passage of a different character may be added. This paper adopts a procedure of sorting the issues that may be directed at its framework into those to be turned into propositions, those for which reinforcement in the body of the text suffices, and those to be acknowledged as limitations. This sorting is useful, but it carries one danger at the same time — the more the handling of issues is repeated, the more the form of the handling becomes formulaic, and the more issues come to be read in the shape that fits the formula. Issues of a kind that fit none of the categories are overlooked under this procedure. In particular, because writing "this has been formalized as a proposition" has the form of indicating that handling is complete, it readily invites the conflation of formalization with solution, as 20.8 to 20.12 stated repeatedly. This section declines that conflation explicitly at each item because the author considers himself the most likely to commit it. And as 20.13 states, the discipline of political neutrality also acts upon the upper bound of this section — this paper has no assurance that the discipline is not biasing its account in ways invisible to the author. 917 21. Conclusion and Research Agenda 21.1 The Core Theses After Argument This paper set out from the widely shared intuition that AI is reorganizing the structure of relations among states, and attempted to translate that intuition into a verifiable theory. The seventeen theses set out in the introduction can now be restated as a body of propositions that have passed through argument. The point of arrival is summarized here against the limitations that Section 20 acknowledged by theme — the absence of measurement frameworks, the incompleteness of formalization, the absence of opportunities for falsification together with the thinness of evidence, the failure to reach design, the limitations that accompany the choice of framework and the position of observation, and the cost of the editorial policy itself. The first six theses correspond to the static skeleton of this paper; the next three to the dynamic and human-foundation layer; the next two to the position of this paper itself — for whom it is written, what it states and what it does not state; the next one to the second axis; the next two to the non-uniformity of the coordinate system and to the cost of the recommendations themselves; the next one to the two faces of the supply side and the procurement side; the next one to the simultaneous presentation of the naming of a type and the limits of the metaphor; and the last one to the conditions under which embedding and portability are compatible and to the distinction between lock-in and indispensability. First, an analogy is neither to be discarded nor to be used as it stands. The formula "AI is the new oil" is, as its critics have correctly pointed out, mistaken in its mode of scarcity — the scarcity of oil is the scarcity of a stock held in reserves, whereas the scarcity of AI is the scarcity of productive capacity in compute, electricity, and people, and the model itself is replicable (Proposition 1; Section 3). But this error calls for decomposition rather than for wholesale rejection of the analogy. The analogy holds for the structure of strategic dependence (Definition 1(ii) dependence on supply from outside the jurisdiction, (iii) infrastructural criticality, (iv) the determining force of capability gaps), and does not hold for inferences about depletion, reserves, and production quotas. Making the unit of transfer precise is decisive here — what transfers is the institutional objective of purchasing time against an interruption of supply, and the institutional means of the buffer (physical storage) does not transfer. Embedding this distinction between end and means at the level of Proposition 1 shows most directly the type of insight that the discipline of analogy produces. Further, the range over which the analogy holds is not static — Proposition 1 holds only for capabilities at Tier C2 (the frontier tier), and for capabilities that have descended to C1 the elements (ii), (iii), and (iv) of Definition 1 all attenuate, so that the dependence-structure portion ceases to hold as well. Frontier Descent contracts, year by year, the very range over which the analogy holds. Setting out the properties that 918 transfer and the properties that do not transfer as an explicit correspondence table — the procedure this paper has called the discipline of analogy — is not a method specific to AI, but a method applicable in every setting in which the international political economy of resources and technology is discussed. The first contribution of this paper lies in this methodology. Second, AI has no single face as a resource. The capability tiers (Definition 2) are defined solely by capability distance from the frontier; neither market structure nor form of governance enters the definition. That market structure and form of governance differ by tier is not a consequence of the definition but the empirical content asserted by Proposition 2 (covariation of tier and governance) — supplier concentration and the effectiveness of access management change with respect to capability distance not continuously and monotonically but in steps, and the number of tiers is determined empirically as the number of these points of discontinuity. This gives the paper an answer to "why three and not two or four." The institutional treatment of C3 capabilities by governments is likewise not a definition but a prediction of Proposition 2b (Regime-Class Transition) (Section 5). The three types of national value model — resource-producing, transformation, and utilization — therefore differentiate into nine cells as the product with the tiers, and the cells are non-equivalent in the institutions, investment, and composition of people they require, in their mode of value, and in their mode of failure (Proposition 3; Sections 6–9). The practical consequence that follows is stronger than the introduction foreshadowed. National strategy is not the choice of a single cell but the design of a weighted portfolio over the nine cells; and because Frontier Descent (yesterday's C2 is tomorrow's C1) moves the cells themselves, the portfolio is a problem of dynamic reallocation rather than of static positioning. Third, as AI is built into critical processes, a new systemic risk arises in the form of correlated stoppage of supply. This paper calls this "AI outage" and formalizes it as the product of dependence, supplier concentration, and outage correlation (Definition 4; Proposition 7; Section 13) in order to bring out its specific character by contrast with a power outage. Whereas a power outage is localized geographically, an AI outage correlates across borders and across sectors precisely because supplier concentration is global. The sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6) as preparation against it cannot be designed on the model of oil stockpiles — because it depreciates in proportion to the speed at which the frontier advances, it holds only as continuous construction rather than as a one-time stockpile (Proposition 8). This asymmetry implies that assurance of AI supply is not a capital expenditure but a standing fiscal, electrical, and human commitment. Fourth, the governance of the critical tier cannot be designed as a copy of the nuclear control regime. Section 9 conducted this examination in the most cautious language of the paper — C3 is an anticipatory category not yet realized, and whether and when it arrives is an empirical question. On that basis, what this paper reached is not an inference from a single regime but a cross-regime comparative proposition. Observed across the four regimes of nuclear, chemical, biological, and missile technology, verifica‐ 919 tion mechanisms have come into being only in regimes whose objects of control are accompanied by measurable physical correlates (nuclear = accounting and control of fissile material; chemical = declaration and inspection of precursors and facilities), while in regimes that lack physical correlates (biological = dual-use production equipment and pathogens; cyber = the absence of a physical signature of the act) verification mechanisms have either not come into being or, where they have, remain dependent on declaration. In particular, the fact that the Biological Weapons Convention, which carries the same existential externality as the nuclear case and for which an international treaty was likewise concluded, has to this day no verification mechanism because the negotiation of a verification protocol broke down, exhibits the variable of this claim as a fact of institutional history in a contrasting case (Appendix B). This is Proposition 9 (the verification anchor hypothesis), and in AI only compute, electricity, and facilities can serve as such an anchor, while the layers of model weights, inference, and applications lack one. And this anchor is not static. Because of Frontier Descent, the compute required to attain any given level of capability declines at the half-life of the anchor (Definition 9), so that a fixed threshold based on quantity of computation loses effectiveness over a period of a few multiples of that half-life. The verification function of critical-tier governance therefore persists only by building continuous downward revision of the threshold into the institution, not by fixing the threshold. This is the counterpart, in the institutions of verification, of the fact that assurance of supply holds only as continuous construction because a stockpile depreciates (Proposition 8). Propositions 8 and 9 are not two unrelated propositions but two manifestations of the same asymmetry. The question has moved from "is there an anchor?" to "can institutions keep pace with the depreciation of the anchor?" This dynamic also has an implication for Proposition 10 — because the very threshold that incumbent holders would seek to fix moves downward year by year, a freeze is intrinsically more difficult than in the nuclear case. If difficulty of verification is combined with an expectation of first-mover advantage, deterrence may become less stable than nuclear deterrence (Proposition 10). The conclusion that emerges from this analysis is not a warning but an observation about order — critical-tier governance is a kind of institution for which it is too late to design after arrival, and in that sense it is a "constructed contingency." Fifth, the state is at once the layer that distributes preconditions to the layers below it and a subject that redefines itself. As formalized in Section 17, the configuration of Layer Zero distributes to capital the range of future value that can be priced, to society the material conditions of self-definition, and to enterprises the outer boundary of the set of redefinition options that can be reached (Proposition 11). At the same time, the state's own definition of value — what is to count as national value — is itself an object of rewriting, and the five dimensions of enterprise redefinition (Kadowaki, 2026b) have concrete counterparts at the level of the state (Proposition 14). There is no neutral option of not choosing a position on the nine cells. A state that does not choose has a position assigned to it by the policy decisions of other states, the commercial judgments of suppliers, and Frontier Descent.

Sixth, Japan's conditions of survival can be built only upon a transformation margin protected by integration cost. The postwar processing-trade model depended on the condition that the refining margin on oil was physically defensible. Of the margin on application that corresponds to the "refining" of AI, the portion reducible to general-purpose functions is structurally compressed, because producers can internalize it along a path of near-zero marginal cost by making it standard in the next generation of models. The cost of internalizing the portion consisting of integration into work processes, regulatory compliance, and the assumption of liability is, by contrast, not zero. What is structurally compressed is therefore the transformation margin reducible to general-purpose functions, not the transformation margin protected by integration cost (Proposition 4). With this refinement, the paper has an answer to "why do thin wrappers die while vertical applications for regulated industries survive." The substance of complementary assets is the endowment of assets that keep this integration cost high for the producer, and that endowment is measured by four ex ante observable indicators — exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, and linguistic-contextual specificity. Japan's portfolio is therefore a set of three: M2′, which moves the locus of transformation value onto the complementary assets that these four indicators measure; M3, which compounds through depth of utilization in administration, healthcare, manufacturing, and long-term care; and the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Proposition 13; Section 18). The object guaranteed by the third element is neither the frontier of capability nor "selective C2 capability," but the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition, which sustain the degraded operation of critical processes in a situation where external supply has stopped. Already published open weights supply a lower bound on capability itself, free of charge and irrevocably, but they do not supply the compute capacity and electricity to run it, the renewal capability to follow new generations, or the conditions for domestic processing of sensitive data. The object of national investment is not the acquisition of capability but the construction of the conditions that execute, renew, and protect capability. With this recomposition, the convergence of domestic actors on "lightweight, compute-frugal, on-premises, confidential" is consistent as it stands without any strained reinterpretation, and a gap of one to two orders of magnitude in compute can be read as design rather than as defect. The digital- related balance deficit, now a standing feature, is not evidence of a transfer of rents but an indicator of the scale of external procurement of AI inputs (exposure; Definition 4), and a leading indicator that casts doubt on the consequences of pure importation and utilization without the set of three. The indicator by which the success or failure of policy is to be judged is not the size of the deficit but domestic value added per yen of digital procurement — an exact mapping of energy intensity after 1973 (primary energy per trillion yen of GDP, 70 PJ → 35 PJ). Seventh, the nine cells are not a static classification but a field of transitions. This is the first layer that the paper places over the static skeleton. Cell transition (Definition 10) decomposes into three directions — horizontal, vertical, and cross-axis — and the trans‐ 921 ition is asymmetric between ascent and descent in cost and in time required (Proposition 15). Upward transitions — from the Utilization Model to the Transformation Model, from the Transformation Model to the Resource-Producing Model, from a lower tier to a higher tier — require accumulation in complementary assets (the four indicators of Proposition 4), national brain capital (Definition 11), computing infrastructure, and electricity, and the time constant of that accumulation is measured in years, longer than the time constant of policy decision. A downward transition requires no accumulation and occurs passively, solely through the relative depreciation of existing accumulation (Proposition 8). A state therefore descends if it does nothing, and to ascend it must sustain a period in which the speed of accumulation exceeds the speed at which the frontier advances. On this asymmetry another irreversibility is superimposed. A rise in the level of capability generates pressure that moves the logic governing the allocation of that capability from the logic of economics (markets, trade, competition policy) to the logic of security (export controls, alliances, nonproliferation), and this movement operates independently of the preferences of private actors (Proposition 16). For a capability with respect to which a crossaxis transition has occurred, the procurability of that capability by non-aligned states becomes a function of the political position of the state concerned, and ceases to be a function of price and quality. Section 15 analyzed four transition scenarios — bifurcation of the Transformation Model, cross-axis vertical integration, upstream movement driven by capital, and downward transition driven by physical constraints — in order to show what these two asymmetries mean as actual paths. It also formalized the conditions under which the group of states outside the two resource-producing poles may constitute an independent third pole, as three conditions of complementarity, mutual assurance of access, and shared discipline (Proposition 19). This paper does not, however, state which scenario occurs with what probability, and it has not estimated the time constants of transition (Section 20.9(a)). Eighth, the diffusion of AI moves the focus of competition from efficiency to definition. As capabilities descend to C1, the competitive advantage yielded by making existing work more efficient with those capabilities diminishes toward zero as the cost of imitation falls. The further AI capability diffuses, therefore, the more the residual that generates differences between states and between firms moves to the capability to select and realize what is to be aimed at (value-definition capability; Definition 12), rather than the efficiency with which a given objective is attained (Proposition 17). This is the consequence at the level of the state of the inversion of the origin of value — from past realization to the conception of a future — that Future Value Theory (Kadowaki, 2026a) carried out at the level of the enterprise. The claim has a direct implication for policy design. To evaluate AI policy solely by indicators of productivity improvement, adoption rate, and cost reduction is to maximize a diminishing variable, and the point of arrival if that effort succeeds is a point of convergence. To stand at the point of convergence is a necessary condition, not an objective function. It is in this sense that Section 17 stated that "to design AI policy as an efficiency policy is a systematic error." Value-definition capability is not, however, a construct that is at present directly measured, and the proxy indicators (distinctiveness of 922 objective-setting, consistency of long-horizon resource allocation, rate of creation of new markets) remain a provisional proposal. Proposition 17 is a testable proposition as regards its first part (the diminishing returns to efficiency), and has the status of a hypothesis with a specified test procedure as regards its second part (the attribution of the residual) (Section 20.8(c)). Ninth, the basis of the defensibility of the Transformation Model is national brain capital. AI capability can be imported. Published open weights supply a lower bound on capability free of charge and irrevocably, and that lower bound rises over time. But the tacit knowledge of practice, judgment embedded in language and culture, the professional ethics and working conventions that make institutions trustworthy, and the auditing capability grounded in long domain experience (the four components of Definition 11) cannot be imported. They accumulate only through the repetition of practice and through training that spans generations, and years of experience cannot be shortened with money. What Proposition 18 asserts is the consequence of this asymmetry — of the four indicators of Proposition 4, exclusive data endowment and physical-interface intensity are externalized traces of national brain capital, and institutional embeddedness and linguisticcontextual specificity are its institutionalized forms; therefore a strategy that aims at the Transformation Model while lacking national brain capital reduces to transformation without complementary assets. Through this proposition, the series' arguments about human foundations — Brain Capital Management (Kadowaki, 2026e) and Ageless Management (Kadowaki, 2026i), which treated the redefinition of roles independently of age and the intrinsic value of auditing capability — connect to Layer Zero and become one theory together with the argument about national strategy. At the same time, this connection makes the path of attrition a variable of national strategy. The exit of experienced workers, the severing of skill transmission, and the deterioration of institutional trust may all improve efficiency as measured while they are in progress, and so undermine the basis of the Transformation Model without issuing a warning (Sections 17.4.4 and 18.5). The measurement framework for national brain capital is, however, not yet built, and the falsification condition of Proposition 18 does not operate until proxy indicators are constructed (Section 20.8(a)). Tenth, this paper is a general theory and not an argument about Japan. The devices of the nine cells, the dynamics of transition, critical-tier governance, and value-definition capability apply equally to every state outside the two poles of the United States and China — middle powers in Europe, oil-producing states of the Gulf, industrial states of East Asia, hub states of Southeast Asia, and populous states of the Global South. The three constraints that middle powers commonly face — the energy constraint, by which the expansion of computing infrastructure is rate-limited by electricity supply and grid development; the data-sovereignty constraint, arising from the inability to design for oneself the conditions on which the data of one's own language, industry, and administration are handed over to infrastructure outside the jurisdiction; and the value-definition constraint, arising from limiting the purpose of AI adoption to efficiency — operate independently of region, income level, and political system (Proposition 21). None of the three constraints 923 depends on the level of technological capability: it is possible both for a technologically advanced state to fail on one of the three and for a technologically late-developing state to satisfy all three. Section 18, which treats Japan, is not the purpose of the theory but an example of its application, and results from the author's choosing the country to whose primary sources he has the most detailed access. The same procedure can be applied to any middle power, and that procedure has been separated from the body and placed in Appendix D (National Diagnostic Checklist), Appendix E (the Cell-Transition Matrix and a Measurement Framework for National Brain Capital), and Appendix F (Scenario Monitoring Indicator Table). That the procedure is general is, however, distinct from the output of the procedure being general — Japan has a particular combination of high income, high technology, and energy importation, and extrapolation to countries without this combination has limits (Section 20.12(j)). Eleventh, this paper makes no predictions, but it supplies instruments of discrimination. There are at least three branches in the mode of advance of AI capability — S1 (fragmentation), S2 (diffusion), and S3 (stagnation) (Definition 13) — and the optimal national investment differs according to which branch is realized. This paper does not state which will occur. It supplies instead the observables (leading indicators; Definition 14) that identify which branch is in progress before the consequences of that scenario appear, together with the set of no-regret actions that carry positive expected value in all three branches (Proposition 20). The result that the no-regret set consists of national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, and operational readiness shows that the foundation which the paper derived theoretically in Sections 10 and 17 also withstands a robustness check across scenarios. Conversely, holding frontier-class computing infrastructure of one's own is scenario-dependent: it has high value under S1, becomes over-investment under S2, and becomes a stranded asset under S3. The order of investment should therefore be decided by robustness across scenarios rather than by height of expected value. This framework has two costs. First, because it assigns no probabilities, the paper states nothing about allocation once the no-regret set has been executed. Second, the discriminating power of the leading indicators was chosen by theoretical conditions and has not been backtested against past data (Sections 20.8(e) and 20.12(g)). Twelfth, position and leverage are distinct variables. The nine cells describe the mode of value generation (where one stands), and geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15) describes power in negotiation (how far one can push back). The two do not coincide — there are states that stand in the Utilization Model and yet hold a node without which producers' production plans do not come together, and there are states that stand close to production and yet are little sought as partners by others. One therefore cannot be derived from the other (Proposition 22), and national strategy has two objective functions — the capture of transformation value (optimization of position) and resistance to changes of conditions imposed from outside (maximization of leverage) — which do not necessarily call for the same policies. The two components of leverage differ both in the direction of the force and in the mode of depreciation. Indispensability is a pushing-back force 924 denominated in the losses of others, and desirability is a drawing-in force denominated in the gains of others. And indispensability grounded in the holding of a chokepoint does not depreciate while it is held, and begins to depreciate the moment it is exercised — exercise induces, on the side affected, a search for substitutes with differing time constants: building inventory, redesigning to bypass, developing alternative sources of supply, and investing in domestic production; and to the extent that this search succeeds, the indispensability of that chokepoint itself declines (Proposition 23). There is no such paradox on the side of desirability: conformity investment in a set of rules is sunk and reinforces desirability. Indispensability is an asset to be conserved; desirability is an asset to be exercised continuously. This asymmetry explains the phenomenon whereby an expansion of export controls simultaneously induces a search for substitutes, not as a collision of two separate forces but as the consequence of a single structure. This axis also recovers, within the theory, the position of standard-setting and conformity assessment that the note to Definition 3 excludes from the domain of quantification — a position not described by the coordinates of the nine cells alone — not as a fourth value model but as leverage on the desirability side (Section 11). The reason the note gives for the exclusion, namely that "the source of value lies in constraining the actions of other actors," is precisely the content of the definition of leverage, so that the reason for the exclusion itself specifies where this position belongs. The measurement framework for the two components of leverage is, however, provisional, and the diagnostic in Appendix G remains qualitative. The definition of "exercise" in Proposition 23 is also coarse, and the treatment of partial exercise and of threat alone is unsettled (Sections 20.8(g) and 20.9(c)). Thirteenth, the nine cells are not a uniform lattice. The M axis (position of value generation) and the C axis (capability tier) are not orthogonal. The higher the capability tier, the narrower the set of positions that can be occupied at that tier (the feasible region; Definition 18), because of the rise in the class of externality (Proposition 29). At the tier where strategic character is lowest, the producing position is not accompanied by exclusive capture of value, so that the Resource-Producing Model satisfies the requirements of the definition only in part. At the tier where strategic character is highest, actors that hold or use the capability are required to be subjects of control, so that a pure utilization position does not stably obtain. The nine cells are therefore a non-uniform space in which the feasible region changes by tier, and stability and the density of instances differ across cells. This paper retains the nine cells as a coordinate system, but does not assert that every cell is an equally occupiable position. This correction acknowledges that there is a distance between the homogeneous appearance that the description from Section 6 onward gives the reader through the form of the nine cells and its substance, and that this distance has not been closed is acknowledged as a limitation by Section 20 (20.12(c)). The ground for the judgment to retain the coordinate system lies in the analogy that the existence of uninhabited districts on a map does not invalidate the map's coordinates, and the conditions under which that judgment may be wrong are set out in the same item. Fourteenth, recommendations have costs. This paper argued "what should be done" up to Section 18, but the recommendations themselves carry costs and constraints. Because 925 domestic guarantee runs against economies of scale, it generates a sovereignty premium (Definition 19); it is not justified from the standpoint of efficiency and is justified only as insurance against a stoppage of supply (Proposition 30). Justification as insurance obtains only where the total premium falls below the expected value of the losses avoided when supply stops; a guarantee at a scale that does not satisfy this condition destroys more value than it protects. The requirement of redundancy appears to actors at Layer Three as a reduction in capital efficiency, and since its benefits accrue to the system as a whole while its costs fall on individual actors, this mismatch is not resolved in the market, so that the requirement does not hold unless it is designed together with an allocation of the cost burden (Proposition 31). Consistency between requirements on domestic guarantee, the handling of data, and procurement, on the one hand, and existing international commitments, on the other, is an indispensable step of design; but legal judgment on the interpretation and applicability of particular agreements exceeds the competence of this paper. And because the diagnostic framework this paper presents itself consumes the administrative capacity of the implementing body, it has no implementability unless accompanied by a minimum indicator set (Proposition 36). Section 19 counts these not in order to withdraw the recommendations but in order to fix the range within which the recommendations operate. Calculating the cost of one's own recommendations oneself is a condition of the credibility of those recommendations. As Section 20 (20.9(f)) acknowledges, however, this paper has enumerated the costs but has not calculated their levels. What Section 19 supplies is the structure of the costs and the conditions under which they operate as constraints, not the level of the costs. Fifteenth, the Transformation Model may export three different things. Definition 3 (Section 6) defined M2 as "the type that adds value by transformation and supplies it externally," but did not distinguish the form of what is supplied. Section 12 divides this into three forms — capability itself (access to models), products, and integrated systems (Definition 20). The three differ in their resistance to compression. Export of capability is exposed to the compression of general-purpose functions (Proposition 4) because the marginal cost of replication is near zero; export of products is partly protected by the physical interface; and only the export of integrated systems is protected by the wall of integration cost. The conditions under which export of integrated systems obtains are four in number, and the most restrictive is (iv) portability — that the system be separable from the institutions of its own jurisdiction (Proposition 39). What divides the exportable from the nonexportable is therefore not the height of capability but the looseness of the coupling between capability and the institutions of the home jurisdiction: an excellent system that is inseparable from its own jurisdiction cannot be exported. From this follows the consequence that the two components of leverage have opposite signs with respect to exercise — indispensability depreciates through exercise (Proposition 23), whereas the desirability formed by the export of integrated systems appreciates, because the recipient's conformity investment accumulates with each adoption (Proposition 38). A strategy resting on indispensability carries an incentive to restrain exercise; a strategy resting on desirability carries an incentive to promote diffusion. And seen from the importing side, the 926 three forms correspond to three procurement modes — construction within one's own jurisdiction, procurement of capability, and procurement of integrated systems — which form a portfolio used differently by domain according to three variables: the severity of the consequences of failure, the domain-specificity of judgment, and reversibility (Proposition 40). In domains where procurement of integrated systems is chosen, the attrition of Proposition 24 operates not as a side effect of use but as a direct consequence of the procurement mode. The theory of the supply side and the theory of the procurement side are two faces of the same framework. Sixteenth, this configuration has a name — the AI Foundry Model. To the configuration described by the fifteenth thesis — not producing frontier capability oneself but procuring it externally, transforming it by means of the complementary assets of one's own jurisdiction (the four indicators of Proposition 4), national brain capital (Definition 11), and trust infrastructure (Definition 17) into an operable system for a particular domain of work, and supplying that system to external jurisdictions as an export of integrated systems (Definition 20) — this paper gave a name as Definition 21 (Section 12.1.6). A state that adopts this type is called an AI Foundry State. The name derives from the structural correspondence with the semiconductor foundry — a form of business that owns not designs but process capability, and that turns the designs of others into products through its own process, yield, and quality assurance. What transfers is the structure in which an actor that does not own the design (the capability) captures value by means of costs that the designer cannot internalize in the process of turning a design into a product, and, with it, the structure in which the axis of competition is placed not on the superiority of the design but on the reliability of the process — the keeping of operational records and the assumption of liability, corresponding to yield and quality assurance in semiconductors. Half the content of this thesis, however, consists in stating the limits of the metaphor at the same time. A semiconductor foundry holds a genuine chokepoint — indispensability in the language of Definition 15 — through the combination of the scale of capital investment, the availability of manufacturing equipment, and the difficulty of reproducing the process. This property does not transfer to the AI Foundry State (Section 12.1.7; Table 27). A system of transformation consists not of physical equipment but of institutions, people, and records, and what separates it is a wall of time, not a wall of physics that limits the number of actors able to cross it. The position of an AI Foundry State therefore rests on desirability rather than on indispensability (Proposition 38), and its bargaining power accumulates through adoption rather than through interdiction. A reading that expects the source of a semiconductor foundry's bargaining power to carry over as it stands overlooks the difference in sign between Proposition 23 and Proposition 38, and invites designs that seek power by closing. To state, when giving a name to a metaphor, which parts of that metaphor do not transfer is the application to this paper's own naming of the discipline (Proposition 1) that it imposed on itself in Section 3. If the discipline were applied only to the arguments of others and not to one's own naming, the discipline would remain rhetoric rather than method. This paper does not state that this type is desirable, nor that any particular jurisdiction falls under it — Defini‐ 927 tion 21 is a configuration delimited by a combination of conditions, and is neither a classification nor an evaluation of states (the editorial policy of Section 1). Seventeenth, embedding and portability are made compatible by the design of the interface — and lock-in is not indispensability. This paper had imposed two contradictory requirements on the same system: Propositions 4 and 18 state that "deep institutional embeddedness and linguistic-contextual specificity protect the transformation margin," while Proposition 39(iv) requires "separability from the institutions of one's own jurisdiction" as a condition of export. Proposition 41 handles this contradiction through a solution concerning not the quantity of embedding but its locus — the two requirements are satisfied simultaneously only where the system is separated into (a) a jurisdiction-specific layer and (b) a portable core, and the interface between them is explicitly defined. In a system whose interface is not made explicit, how much is transplantable cannot be specified in advance, so that each transplantation requires the reconstruction of the entire system, and deeper embedding progressively reduces portability. In a system whose interface is made explicit, embedding is confined outside the interface, and the cost of transplanting the portable core becomes independent of the depth of embedding. The design principle is therefore not to make embedding shallow but to confine the locus of embedding outside the interface. And Proposition 42 places two limits on the self-reinforcement of desirability in Proposition 38 — lock-in is not indispensability. That an individual recipient finds it hard to leave and that a third party cannot bypass the actor in question are questions posed about different sets, and a high level of lock-in is not evidence of indispensability unless it is accompanied by an indicator of supplier concentration. And self-reinforcement has an upper bound. A rise in switching costs simultaneously raises the recipient's incentive to institutionalize in-house production, multi-sourcing, and requirements of portability, so that desirability reaches an upper bound at the point where the recipient prefers to recover autonomy even at the price of paying the switching costs. Neither proposition strengthens the claims of this paper; both narrow the conditions under which those claims hold — the first imposes on compatibility the condition of an explicit interface, and the second places a ceiling on the accumulation of desirability. Section 20 acknowledges, as the four items 20.11(e), 20.9(h), 20.9(e), and 20.8(j), that the observations newly required by this narrowing — the three variables of the presence or absence of an explicit interface, supplier concentration, and the upper bound — have not been constructed. One claim runs through these seventeen theses, and it is stated here as the final formulation of this paper. The position of a state in the age of AI is determined not by the level of AI capability it holds, but by the thickness of the slow complements — institutions, trust, electricity, people, and physical interfaces — that convert that capability into national value. The more abundant AI becomes, the wider this asymmetry grows (Section 17; the national version of the bottleneck theorem). Competition among states, observed as competition to acquire capability, is in equilibrium a competition to build complements. The seventh through ninth theses are the consequences of placing this formulation in time — the building of complements is accumulation, accumula‐ 928 tion has a speed, and if that speed falls below depreciation, position descends. The tenth and eleventh theses fix the addressee and the reach of the formulation — it is stated not about a particular country but about middle powers in general, and it contains a portion that can be executed without stating which world will arrive. The twelfth thesis gives the formulation a second coordinate — granting that the thickness of complements determines position, that position may be rewritten by external decisions, and whether one can push back against the rewriting is determined by a variable distinct from thickness. But the portion of the pushing-back force that rests on chokepoints diminishes when used. The fifteenth thesis views the formulation from both sides of a transaction — the thickness of complements determines the form that can be exported, and the absence of the same thickness determines the mode of procurement. The portion of the pushing-back force that rests on desirability increases when used. The sixteenth thesis gives the formulation a name and at the same time delimits the range of the implications the name brings with it — the name "AI Foundry Model" (Definition 21) makes it possible to refer in a single word to the structure of capturing value by process rather than by capability, but it must be stated together with the name that this process, unlike that of semiconductors, does not generate non-substitutability. And the seventeenth thesis acts on the formulation in the direction opposite to the other sixteen — whereas the other sixteen delimit the range that this paper can explain, the seventeenth narrows the range within which the claims of this paper hold, by imposing on compatibility the condition of an explicit interface and on self-reinforcement the ceiling of recipient-side counteraction. It is the result of handling a contradiction and a counter-argument that arose inside the theory as propositions rather than concealing them. The point of arrival is now recounted here in the form of contributions. The contributions of this paper are eight. (1) The rendering of the discipline of analogy into a methodology — decomposing a resource analogy into a bundle of properties and formalizing it as a correspondence table in which transferability is judged item by item (Section 3; Proposition 1). (2) The nine-cell theory — describing the position of a state as the product of the three types of national value model and the three AI capability tiers, and systematizing the institutional requirements, mode of value, and mode of failure of each cell as nonequivalent (Sections 5–10; Propositions 2–6). (3) An analysis of the transplantability of critical-tier governance — setting the conditions for the emergence of verification mechanisms as a comparative proposition across the four regimes of nuclear, chemical, biological, and missile technology, and incorporating the dynamic structure of the half-life of the anchor (Section 9; Propositions 8–10). (4) The dynamics of cell transition — repositioning position from a static classification to a field of transitions, and formalizing the asymmetry between ascent and descent and the irreversibility of cross-axis transition (Section 15; Propositions 15, 16, 19). (5) The connection of Layer Zero to Layers One through Three by value-definition capability and national brain capital — connecting the series' arguments about human foundations to the argument about national strategy by means of the two concepts of the movement of the residual from efficiency to definition and the thickness of human capital that cannot be imported (Sections 10 and 17; Propositions 17, 18, 929 24). (6) The introduction of geoeconomic leverage as a second axis, and the resolution of the M4 problem by that means — supplying coordinates that treat position and leverage simultaneously as independent variables, formalizing the paradox that the exercise of indispensability depreciates indispensability itself, and recovering the position of standard-setting and conformity assessment, which the coordinates of the nine cells do not describe, as leverage on the desirability side (Section 11; Propositions 22, 23, 25, 28). (7) Having a section that calculates the cost of the recommendations itself — enumerating, as an independent section, the diseconomies of scale of domestic guarantee (the sovereignty premium), the fiscal ceiling, the friction in the cost of capital produced by redundancy, the process of examining consistency with international commitments, the staging of data handling, and the administrative capacity that the diagnostic framework itself consumes, and thereby fixing the range within which the recommendations operate (Section 19; Propositions 29–36). It is customary for works that discuss policy not to treat the cost of their own recommendations head-on; but recommendations whose costs are not counted encounter those costs at the stage of implementation and stop there. Section 19 moves that encounter forward from the stage of implementation to the stage of design. (8) Treating the supply side and the procurement side as two faces of the same framework — dividing what the Transformation Model may export into three forms, formalizing the conditions for the export of integrated systems (Definition 20) as four conditions (Proposition 39), deriving as a consequence the dynamic by which desirability appreciates through adoption (Proposition 38), and redescribing the same variables, viewed from the importing side, as a portfolio of procurement modes (Section 12; Proposition 40). The theory of the supply side alone does not yield a decision rule for the procurement side. What Section 12 shows is that the portability of Proposition 39(iv) and the domainspecificity of Proposition 40(b) are the same variable, and that what can be exported and what can be procured are the same set. This contribution is accompanied by an act of naming, and for this paper naming is not the mere affixing of a label — since the name is borrowed from a metaphor, judging which properties of that metaphor transfer and which do not is required as a condition of the naming, and Definition 21 (the AI Foundry Model) becomes a contribution only when paired with the judgment of transferability (Section 12.1.7; Table 27). The eight are not independent: they form a single line from method to structure, from structure to dynamics, from dynamics to institutions and foundations, from foundations to bargaining power, from bargaining power to the cost of the recommendations themselves, and from cost to both sides of a transaction. The seventh, however, differs in character from the other seven — whereas the other seven are the content of this paper's claims, the seventh is this paper's own constraint on its claims. As Section 20 (20.9(f)) states, that section enumerated the costs but did not calculate them, and what can be counted as a contribution extends only to having supplied a list of items.

21.2 Table 10 — The Map of the Verification of the Propositions (All 42 Numbers, 44 Statements) In accordance with the discipline of this series, every proposition of this paper is presented as an empirical claim accompanied by a falsification condition. But writing a falsification condition and designing a procedure for falsification are distinct. If a falsification condition is not tied to observable quantities, the proposition in question yields no verdict even when the test is carried out — a form that permits ex post reclassification of complementary assets, a form in which cell assignment and test are circular, a form that tests a claim about an upper bound by means of an average, a form that states only a possibility, and a form whose falsification condition does not measure rents are all failures of this type. The falsification conditions of this paper's propositions are written so as to avoid these forms. Among the propositions, eight form a group that treats the costs and constraints of this paper's own recommendations: non-orthogonality of the axes and the feasible region (Proposition 29), the sovereignty premium and the lower bound of scale (Proposition 30), inter-layer conflict of interest and the need for compensation (Proposition 31), conditions for the propagation of value-definition capability (Proposition 32), asymmetry in the mobility of national brain capital (Proposition 33), mismatch of time scales (Proposition 34), hysteresis of securitization (Proposition 35), and administrative capacity constraints and the minimum set for monitoring (Proposition 36). Table 10 organizes, for the propositions of 42 numbers and 44 statements, the testable implication, the required data and identification strategy, and the current evidence grade. The identificationstrategy column makes the estimation method explicit for each proposition — quantile regression, event study, interaction tests, ex ante measured panels; estimation of the time constants of transition, event studies taking policy changes in export controls as events, panels of proxy indicators for national brain capital; panels of chokepoint concentration, difference-in-differences estimation of investment in the search for substitutes before and after events of exercise, sectoral panels of indicators of skill formation, international comparison of depth of deployment and trust infrastructure, measurement of the time-constant ratio, observation of price differences for data with verifiable provenance; measurement of the density of instances by cell, paired comparison of guarantee scale and unit cost, difference-in-differences estimation taking the application of requirements as events, tracking of the extraterritorial reception of definitions, decomposition of the net increase in national brain capital, estimation and comparison of two time constants, measurement of the lag between descent and relaxation, parallel application of a comprehensive version and a minimum-set version; and comparison of transplantation costs stratified by the presence or absence of an explicit interface, simultaneous observation of the level of lockin and supplier concentration, and time series of rising switching costs together with the institutionalization of in-house production and multi-sourcing. The evidence grades are the four classes common to the series (◎ well established / ○ supported by evidence / △ contested / ▽ grey literature, not relied upon), and the table shows explicitly that many of this paper's propositions remain at ○ or △ — that is, that what this paper has presented is not verified findings but a verifiable structure. 931 Table 10. The map of the verification of the propositions (all 42 numbers, 44 statements) Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade 1 The Discipline of Analogy An interruption of access to C2 capability is accompanied by degradation of output in major economies (Definition 1(iii)). On the other hand, because models are replicable, price behaviour of the depletion type does not occur. For capabilities that have descended to C1, the dependencestructure portion ceases to hold as well Event study of large-scale supply outages (high-frequency data on output and transactions). Time series of inference prices (unlike a depletable good, monotonically declining). Comparison of degradation between C1 and C2. Identification: exogeneity of the technical cause of the outage; stratification by capability distance ○ supported by evidence (the structure of dependence is supported; quantification of degradation separately for C2 and C1 is not established) 2 Covariation of Tier and Governance Supplier concentration and the effectiveness of access management change with respect to capability distance not continuously and monotonically but in steps. The number of tiers is determined as the number of points of discontinuity Construct capability distance (the difference between capability indicators for the openweight frontier and the closed frontier) as a continuous variable, and take the HHI of API suppliers and the record of circumvention of management measures as dependent variables. Identification: detection of points of discontinuity by threshold regression and structural break tests. Test of residual variance after controlling for capability distance △ contested (the divisions are in fact observed, but statistical detection of the points of discontinuity has not been carried out) 2b Regime- Class Transition If capability exceeding the C3 threshold is realized, governmental treatment shifts from the framework of economic regulation to a nonproliferationtype regime (verification, restriction of holders, stabilization negotiations) Coding of the "type of treatment" by content analysis of national security documents, export- control measures, and treaty negotiations. Because the antecedent is not yet realized, all that can be carried out at present is the ex ante definition of indicators and the construction of a standing observation arrangement ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (the antecedent is not yet realized; verification awaits the realization of the threshold. See Section 20.10(a)) 3 Non- Equivalence of Effective policy packages and characteristic modes of failure Assign cell position without using any institutional variable, using only four quantities: (a) capability distance from the frontier, (b) net exports and imports of AI-related goods and ser‐ △ contested (supported for the typology of the oil era; the 932 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade the Nine Cells differ systematically by cell position vices, (c) supplier concentration of procurement (HHI), and (d) whether access-management measures apply. On a country × period panel, estimate the between-cell heterogeneity of the relation between policy variables and outcome variables (productivity, capture of transformation value, dependence). Identification: separation of assignment from test; tests of interaction terms (policy × cell dummies) AI era is at the stage of cases. Assignment is operationalized using only the four quantities, without institutional variables) 4 Conditions for the Survival of the Transformation Model The four indicators measured ex ante (exclusive data endowment, physicalinterface intensity, institutional embeddedness, linguisticcontextual specificity) predict gross margin and survival rate after a generational change (= Hypothesis H2) Panel of application firms. Measure the four indicators before the event of a generational change in foundation models, and estimate gross margin and survival rate after the event. Identification: exogeneity of the generational change (determined by suppliers' development schedules); difference-in-differences. Decisive test: if the group of firms in the lower quantiles on all four indicators maintains gross margin across a generational change, the proposition is rejected ○ supported by evidence (supported in case studies; the ex ante measured panel has not been carried out) 5 Compounding of the Utilization Model and the Outflow of Value The level of complementary investment and absorptive capacity is related to the productivity effect, and the effect is nonlinear (J-curve) with respect to depth of utilization. (β) The rent path is specific to C2, and the competitive prices of C1 contain no rent Measurement of AI adoption and complementary investment at firm and sector level; TFP trajectories. Estimate (β) as the gross margin (markup) of foundation-model and cloud suppliers × the share of C2 capability in the procurement of the country concerned. Estimate the price elasticity of demand from the response of procurement volumes to price revisions. Identification: if external payments increase even where suppliers' markups converge to competitive levels, (β) is rejected and the account rests on the (α) cost path alone ○ supported by evidence (the delay structure of GPTs is established; extrapolation to AI and estimation of markups have not been carried out) 6a Curse of Concentration in Producing States The higher the concentration of capital and high-skill people in the AI sector in a country or region, the lower the rate of fulfilment of technical personnel and the ratio of capital investment in other sectors Panel of sectoral allocation of people and capital in producing states. Control variables are limited to three: the scale of fiscal transfers, the intensity of enforcement of competition policy, and higher-education capacity (variables concerning transformation capability are indicators on the outcome side and are not controlled for). Identification: exogenous variation in location and concentration △ contested (the resource curse is an established debate that includes contested points; the AI version is theoretical inference) 6b Extractive The larger the scale of computing A balance sheet for each attraction case (granted volumes against captured volumes). The ○ supported by evidence 933 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade Distortion in Receiving States infrastructure attracted to a region, the lower the ratio of local value added, employment, and inter-firm transactions to the volume of tax preferences, electricity, land, and water granted control variable is only a binary variable for whether the attraction conditions explicitly state a local value-capture clause. Identification: comparison using the presence or absence of such clauses across states and regions. The existing empirical work on tax preferences, employment, and electricity serves directly as the test design (supported observationally at the state level in the United States; causal estimation has not been carried out) 7 The Structure of AI Outage In log D(s) = α + β₁·log(dependence) + β₂·log(concentration) + β₃·log(correlation) + γ·(interaction term), β₁, β₂, and β₃ are all positive and γ is positive (= multiplicativity) Take past large-scale outages as natural experiments and estimate sectoral degradation with high-frequency data (transactions, payments, logistics) (= Hypothesis H3). The three factors are measured ex ante (Appendix C). Identification: exogeneity of the outage; removal of other simultaneous disturbances. Interaction test: if γ is not significant, the three factors act only additively and multiplicative amplification is rejected ○ supported by evidence (damage from outage events is observed; estimation of the interaction has not been carried out) 8 Asymmetry of Stockpiling For a capability index E₀ guaranteed domestically at time t₀ and a frontier capability index F(t) at time t, the relative value of the guarantee level depreciates as an increasing function of F(t) − E₀ Compare the capability of domestically produced foundation models and domestic computing infrastructure with the frontier over time, and construct F(t) − E₀ in capability indices. Estimate the rate of depreciation. Identification: if F(t) − E₀ remains below a specified threshold over a specified period, the proposition is rejected for that period ○ supported by evidence (the rewidening of the capability gap is observed; formalization of the rate of depreciation has not been carried out) 9 The Verification Anchor Hypothesis (General part) Verification mechanisms come into being only in regimes accompanied by physical correlates. (AI application part) Compute can serve as an anchor, but if a state in which the half-life of the anchor (Definition 9) falls below the institutional cycle of threshold revision persists, designability is lost Comparison of the institutional history of four regimes (nuclear, chemical, biological, missile) plus cyber norms (Appendix B, Table B-2). Falsification of the general part: a case in which effective third-party verification came into being in a regime lacking physical correlates, or a case in which verification systematically failed to come into being in a regime possessing physical correlates. AI part: estimate the half-life from the time series of the compute required to attain capabilities already achieved, and compare it with the time required for treaty amendment and for updating technical annexes △ contested (the general part is supported by a comparison of four cases, but the sample is four. The AI application part is contested. See Sections 20.10(c) and (d)) 934 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade 10 Asymmetry of a Freeze and Instability The presence or absence of means of verification determines the branch taken by the consequences when C3 arrives (arms-race instability / a managed hierarchy). Because the threshold moves downward year by year, a freeze is more difficult than in the nuclear case Analysis of historical analogy with nuclear nonproliferation. Content analysis of discourse on pre-emption and interdiction in national strategic documents. Counterfactuals are not directly verifiable △ contested (this is conditional inference, and direct empirical verification is constrained in principle) 11 Inter- Layer Transmission Layer Zero delimits the upper bound of the layers below but does not guarantee their lower bound. The test is therefore conducted against the upper envelope of the distribution rather than against the mean Country × firm panel. Estimate quantile regressions at the upper quantile (90th percentile) of firms' redefinition-behaviour indicators against the access conditions of the jurisdiction concerned. In addition, an event study taking the exogenous changes in access conditions of October 2022, October 2023, January 2025, and May 2025 as events. Identification: comparison between jurisdictions affected and jurisdictions not affected. Stochastic frontier estimation may also be used △ contested (the path is theoretical; quantile estimation and event studies have not been carried out) 12 Stratification of Access (First part) After controlling for income, educational attainment, first language, access to electricity, and jurisdiction explain the variance in the effective level of C2 access. (Second part) In jurisdictions where AI has become a precondition of critical processes, pressure toward universal- service treatment enters the policy agenda within five years First part: distributional statistics of AI use by individuals and firms (by income, language, region, and jurisdiction) and variance decomposition. Identification: exogenous variation from price revisions and changes in the regions served. Second part: standing observation of policy agendas by jurisdiction — if none of (a) public guarantee of basic access, (b) regulation of adverse treatment on grounds of access, or (c) universal provision with public funds is placed on the agenda within five years, the proposition is rejected ○ supported by evidence (the first part is supported observationally; the second part remains a prediction, there being no legislative instance at present) 13 Japan's Position Under a pure utilization strategy lacking complementary assets (the four indicators of Proposition 4), Construction of a time series and international comparison of the ratio with digital-related payments in the denominator and the increase in domestic value added of AI-input sectors in the numerator (the formula is in Appendix C). ○ supported by evidence (the structure of exposure is established; construc‐ 935 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade domestic value added per yen of digital procurement, productivity, and capture of transformation value do not improve. The three functions (operational capacity, renewal capability, sensitive-processing condition) are related to the depth of degradation and the time to recovery during an AI outage Measurement of the four indicators for Japanese firms and their relation to value capture. Estimation of the relation between the level of the three functions and degradation and recovery in exercises and outage events (Appendix C.6) tion of the intensity- type indicator and testing of the three functions have not been carried out) 14 National Redefinition Differences arise in the trajectories of cell position, transformation value, and dependence structure between the group of states that have carried out a redefinitional policy shift and the group that has not Classification of redefinition by content analysis of policy documents (five dimensions; Table 9). Comparison of trajectories on a country panel. Identification: the timing of changes of government and of external shocks. Unresolved: the operationalization of the classification criteria for a "redefinitional policy shift" is not supplied in this paper (Section 20.16, weakness 4) △ contested (precedents from the oil era are supportive; the observation period for the AI era is short and the classification criteria are also unsettled) 15 Asymmetry of Cell Transition In the group of states that have achieved an upward transition, accumulation of complementary assets, national brain capital, and computing infrastructure is observed prior to the transition. In the group of states that do not accumulate, a decline in relative standing is observed On a country × period panel, estimate the lagged correlation between the centroid of cell position (assigned by the four quantities of Proposition 3) and indicators of accumulation (the four indicators of Proposition 4, proxy indicators for national brain capital, compute capacity, electricity), and test whether accumulation precedes transition. Estimation of the time constant: estimate the lag from the beginning of accumulation until movement of the centroid is observed, by survival analysis of transition cases (discrete-time hazard model). Identification: fix the starting point of accumulation exogenously at the date of announcement of the policy decision or investment decision. On the descent side, take as controls the group of states that have halted accumulation. Not carried out: instances of upward transition are scarce, and retrospective measurement data for the accumulation indicators do not exist △ contested (the three series for Japan in the oil era are supportive as a precedent, but instances of transition in the AI era are insufficient. The time constant has not been estimated. See Section 20.9(a)) 936 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade 16 Pressure Toward Cross- Axis Transition As the level of capability rises, the international allocation of that capability ceases to be determined by price and quality alone, and differentiation by political position is observed. Transition in the reverse direction (return from the logic of security to the logic of economics) does not recur Event study taking as events the revisions of access conditions for advanced computing chips and advanced model weights (exportcontrol rules and their amendments, the announcement and rescission of a global allocation framework, conditional authorization and case-by-case review). The dependent variables are procurement volumes, procurement prices, and the granting or refusal of licences by jurisdiction. Identification: using an ex ante classification of alliance relations (treaty ally, non-aligned), test whether the coefficient on political position is significant after controlling for capability level (the performance thresholds subject to control). Irreversibility is tested, where a revision in the direction of relaxation occurs, by whether re-tightening subsequently follows ○ supported by evidence (the fact and direction of the policy changes are observed. Estimation of the coefficient on political position and testing of irreversibility have not been carried out) 17 Diminishing Returns to Efficiency and the Residual of Value- Definition Capability (First part) In sectors and countries where the diffusion of C1 capability is high, differences in outcome attributable to the degree of efficiency improvement narrow. (Second part) Proxy indicators of value-definition capability explain the residual not explained by efficiency First part: on a sector × country panel, estimate the trajectory of the explanatory power that the variance of efficiency indicators (unit cost, processing time) has for outcome indicators, together with the diffusion of C1 capability. Identification: exogenous variation in diffusion (price revisions, changes in the regions served). Second part: fix ex ante the proxy indicators (distinctiveness of objective-setting = similarity across strategy documents / consistency of long-horizon resource allocation = multi-year persistence of the correspondence between declarations and budget allocations / rate of creation of new markets) and regress them on the residual. Control of competing explanations: it must be shown that a residual remains even after controlling for the endowment of complementary assets (Proposition 4), national brain capital (Definition 11), the guarantee level (Definition 6), and cell position (Proposition 3) △ contested (the first part is testable but has not been tested. In the second part the proxy indicators are provisional and internationally comparable data are lacking. See Section 20.8(c)) 18 The Non-Replicability of National Brain Capital In countries where the proxy indicators of national brain capital (density of skilled labour, thickness of the stratum of domain professionals, level of trust in institutions, number of language-spe‐ Construction of a panel of proxy indicators for national brain capital (Appendix E). For each of the four components: (i) density of skilled labour = occupational composition of employment and distribution of tenure in manufacturing, maintenance, healthcare, and long-term care; (ii) language and culture = number of language-specific technical standards and certifications; (iii) trust in institutions = number of registrations under professional △ contested (the correspondence with the four indicators is theoretical; the panel of proxy indicators has not been constructed. The falsification con‐ 937 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade cific technical standards) are thin, the transformation margin at Tier C2 is not captured on a sustained basis supervision by occupation and the presence or absence of systems for renewal of qualifications; (iv) auditing capability = age composition and years of practical experience of the professional stratum in the domain concerned. Join these with the four indicators of Proposition 4 and with the transformation margin (gross margin), and test whether sustained capture occurs in countries where the proxy indicators are thin. Identification: measure the proxy indicators before the event of a generational change. Not carried out: definitions and collection methods differ across countries and internationally comparable data do not exist dition does not operate until the indicators are built. See Section 20.8(a)) 19 Conditions for a Third Pole (Necessity) A partnership lacking any one of the three conditions (complementarity, mutual assurance of access, shared discipline) does not preserve the capability of participating states against an external change of access conditions. (Sufficiency) A partnership satisfying the three conditions lowers the bipolar dependence of participating states' procurement Coding of the three conditions by clause analysis of partnership frameworks (complementarity = distribution of participating states' cell positions / mutual assurance of access = presence or absence of legally binding obligations of mutual supply when supply stops / shared discipline = presence or absence of mutual recognition of standards, assessment, and certification). Taking exogenous changes of access conditions as events, compare the degree to which participating states' procurement volumes and capability levels are preserved across partnerships differing in the degree to which the conditions are satisfied. Absence of an opportunity for falsification: because no instance of a partnership satisfying the three conditions exists at present, sufficiency can be neither supported nor rejected ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (necessity is supported by observation of existing partnerships, but as an ex post ordering. Sufficiency lacks instances. See Section 20.10(b)) 20 The Existence of No-Regret Actions The four elements of national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, and operational readiness have positive marginal value under each of the three scenarios (Definition 13). Against this, holding frontierclass computing infrastructure of one's Scenario-specific estimation of the marginal value of the no-regret set. The procedure has three stages. (i) Code the observation period into phases in which S1, S2, or S3 predominates, using the leading indicators of Section 16 (Definition 14). The coding is done not by a single indicator but by the concurrence of multiple indicators with differing discriminating power (Appendix F). (ii) Measure the proxy indicators of each of the four elements (national brain capital = the four component indicators of Appendix E / exclusive domain data = the share of data not obtainable from the public web / value-definition capability = the three ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (theoretical grounds for the four elements are given scenario by scenario, but estimation of the marginal values remains at the level of design. Criteria for coding the phases 938 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade own is positive under S1, over-investment under S2, and a stranded asset under S3 proxy indicators of Proposition 17 / operational readiness = the time required to switch and the share of personnel able to execute non-AI procedures) before the coding of the phases. (iii) Test the sign of the marginal value in each phase, in an estimating equation including interaction terms of phase dummies × element indicators. Making use of the fact that the scenario state may differ by sector and by application, use cross-sector as well as cross-country variation for identification. Decisive test: if for any element the marginal value is non-positive in any phase, that element is removed from the no-regret set. As a control, put the volume of frontier-class computing infrastructure held into the same design; if it is positive in all three phases, the claim of scenario-dependence is rejected. Not carried out: the criteria for coding the phases are not established, and the discriminating power of the leading indicators has not itself been backtested are lacking. See Sections 20.8(e) and 20.12(h)) 21 Three Constraints on Middle Powers Among states not belonging to the two poles of the Resource- Producing Model, a state that fails to satisfy any one of the three constraints — the energy constraint, the data-sovereignty constraint, and the value-definition constraint — does not sustainably maintain a Transformation Model or Resource- Producing Model position. The operation of the constraints does not differ systematically by region, income level, or political system Test of the three constraints on a middlepower panel. Take as the population the group of states excluding the two actors located at M1×C2, and measure the following. (i) Energy constraint = the ratio of connectable grid capacity to planned expansion of computing infrastructure, and the price of electricity. (ii) Datasovereignty constraint = an institutional indicator of whether the state sets for itself the conditions for cross-border transfer of the data of its own language, industry, and administration, and the share of work processed on infrastructure outside the jurisdiction. (iii) Value-definition constraint = content analysis of whether the statement of objectives in AI-related policy documents consists solely of efficiency indicators. The dependent variable is the maintenance or descent of the centroid of cell position (assigned by the four quantities of Proposition 3). Identification: measure the indicators of the three constraints before the change of position, and enter region, income level, and political system as fixed effects. The test of commonality requires that the interaction terms of these three stratifying factors with the constraint indicators be non-significant — if the interactions are significant, the operation of the constraints depends on the stratifying factors and the claim of commonality is rejec‐ △ contested (the simultaneous operation of the three constraints is supported by observation of cases, but the test of commonality on a middle-power panel has not been carried out. See Section 20.12(j)) 939 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade ted. Not carried out: the indicators of the three constraints have not been constructed in an internationally comparable form 22 The Non-Identity of Position and Leverage The level of geoeconomic leverage cannot be systematically predicted from position on the nine cells. In addition, the relation between indispensability and desirability changes with level — at low levels of both they are substitutes, and at high levels of both they are complements Construction of a panel of chokepoint concentration. Compose indispensability, item by item, from (a) geographic concentration of supply (HHI), (b) the number of alternative suppliers, and (c) the time required to switch (the realized lead time for installation, qualification, and ramp-up of equipment), and aggregate to the level of the jurisdiction. Compose desirability from (d) the scale of final demand directed at the jurisdiction concerned, (e) the number of standards and certifications outside the jurisdiction that reference its rules, (f) the volume of capital and technology provided, and (g) the level of development of trust infrastructure (the three elements of Definition 17). Identification: test whether variance in the two components of leverage remains after controlling for cell position (assigned by the four quantities of Proposition 3) — if none remains, independence is rejected. The switch between substitution and complementarity is tested by whether the sign of the interaction term of the two components changes across bands of level. Not carried out: the weights for combining the two components are undetermined, and this paper uses leverage only as an ordinal scale △ contested (the divergence between position and leverage is supported by observation of cases, but variance decomposition on a panel has not been carried out. See Sections 20.8(g) and (h)) 23 The Paradox of Leverage Exercise After the exercise of a chokepoint, investment by the affected side in the search for substitutes increases, and to the extent that the search succeeds, the concentration of that chokepoint declines. In a state of mere holding, no depreciation occurs Difference-in-differences estimation of investment in the search for substitutes before and after events of exercise. Taking exercise (the imposition or extension of scope of access-management measures) as the event, take as dependent variables the affected jurisdictions' and firms' investment in the search for substitutes — inventory levels, the number of design changes for bypass, the number of qualifications of alternative sources of supply, and capital investment relating to domestic production — and estimate by difference-indifferences against unaffected groups as controls. Track the trajectory of concentration over several years after the event. Identification: use the portion of the scope of exercise (items, destinations) that is determined by criteria published in advance. Unresolved: "exercise" is a continuous rather than a binary △ contested (the series of export controls and the responses on the demand side are observed, but difference-in-differences estimation and the coding of exercise have not been carried out. See Section 20.9(c)) 940

Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade quantity, and this paper does not supply coding criteria for partial exercise or for threat alone. Whether the event date is placed at the date of announcement of the measure, the date of advance notice, or the date of reporting affects the estimates 24 Self- Erosion of Brain Capital In sectors and countries where the depth of AI use is high, the formation of skill in the domain concerned — the distribution of years of experience within an occupation, the pass standard of skill examinations, the share of practitioners able to judge independently — declines. The attrition reduces the four indicators of complementary assets in Proposition 4 (particularly exclusive data endowment and physical-interface intensity) Sectoral panel of indicators of skill formation. Estimate on a sector × country × period panel with the depth of AI use as the explanatory variable (measuring separately the rate of use per work process and the rate of use in processes involving judgment) and indicators of skill formation as dependent variables. Identification: exogenous variation in depth of use (price revisions, changes in the regions served, changes in procurement policy). The test of the transmission path is conducted by joining the skill-formation indicators to the four indicators of Proposition 4. Separation of the opposing path is a requirement: because the path by which imported cognition accelerates arrival at practice (promotion of skill formation) and the path by which it substitutes for the repetition of practice (attrition) may operate simultaneously, enter the design of adoption (whether judgment is substituted for or supported) as a stratifying factor and identify the predominant path by sector and occupation △ contested (direct empirical work is scarce and the path in the opposite direction is equally plausible, so the point is contested at present. See Section 20.10(e)) 25 The Priority of Trust Infrastructure Even where access to capability is equal, in jurisdictions lacking rules on the allocation of liability, conformity assessment, and insurance, the deployment of AI in regulated sectors (healthcare, finance, transport, public procurement, critical infrastructure) remains confined to peripheral work where liability is less readily called into question, and does not extend to critical processes International comparison of depth of deployment and trust infrastructure. Depth of deployment is coded, after classifying the work processes of regulated sectors ex ante into critical and peripheral, by the degree of AI involvement in each process (presentation of reference information / generation of drafts / execution of judgment). Trust infrastructure is measured by the three elements of Definition 17 — (i) the presence and content of rules on the allocation of liability, (ii) the presence and scope of systems of conformity assessment and certification, and (iii) the existence and underwriting conditions of insurance products covering the application concerned. Identification: test whether the level of development of trust infrastructure explains depth of deployment after controlling for access to capability (distance from the procurable frontier, and price). An event study using differences in the timing △ contested (differences in depth of deployment across jurisdictions are observed, but estimation controlling for access to capability has not been carried out) 941 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade of institutional adoption across jurisdictions may also be used 26 Institutional Time Constant In domains where the time to decide exceeds the time over which capability changes, a rule with fixed content is already obsolete at the moment of enactment, and only rules that provide a procedure for revision can retain effectiveness Measurement of the time-constant ratio. Numerator = the time to decide of the institution (for each procedure of treaty amendment, statutory amendment, amendment of subordinate rules, and updating of technical annexes, the distribution of realized days from proposal to entry into force). Denominator = the time over which capability changes (for the capability that the rule concerned addresses, the realized period until a change of level meaningful for regulation occurs). Construct the ratio of the two by domain and estimate its relation to the effectiveness of the rule (the incidence of circumvention, the number of instances of inapplicability arising from delayed revision). Identification: within the same domain, compare rules that embed a revision procedure with rules that do not. Unresolved: this paper has not estimated the threshold at which level of the ratio effectiveness is lost, and the verdict may reverse depending on which procedure is paired with which application △ contested (the divergence between the half-life of the verification anchor (Definition 9) and institutional cycles was discussed in Section 9, but there is no estimate of the threshold of the ratio and the falsification condition does not operate. See Section 20.9(b)) 27 Relative Scarcification of Authentic Data As the share of generative- model output in the public information space rises, the gap in price and terms of use widens between data whose provenance can be verified and data whose provenance cannot. Actors that maintain, within their operations, points of contact with human practice and with physical processes become structurally advantaged in the exclusive data endowment of Proposition 4 Observation of price differences for data with verifiable provenance. For data of the same application and the same volume, compare in pairs the consideration and licensing terms of transactions accompanied by proof of provenance and those not so accompanied (licence agreements, data-provision agreements, and procurement specifications conditioned on the granting of proof of provenance are the points of entry for observation). The share of generated material is constructed as the estimated share of generative origin among newly published material in the domain concerned. Identification: the difference after controlling for application and data quality. Rejection condition: if the price difference does not widen despite a rise in the share of generated material, or if a technology enabling low-cost and universal verification of provenance becomes widespread, the premise of scarcity is lost △ contested (the rise in the share of generated material is observed, but markets in which the price difference attributable to provenance can be observed in isolation are limited) 28 Non- State Actors and In domains where private actors exceed states in capab‐ Typology of instances of negotiation between states and private actors in the domain concerned. For each instance, classify the means ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (the identi‐ 942 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade the Residual Functions of the State ility, the bargaining power of the state derives not from the volume of capability held but from the exercisability of the three functions of legal finality, physical security, and the granting of permissions for siting and resources. Where negotiation through the three functions is abandoned, the setting of discipline moves to private actors the state used into (i) final resolution of disputes and determination of rights, (ii) coercive force within the territory, (iii) rights of allocation of land, electricity grid, water, and spectrum, and (iv) other; and check whether there are instances in which means classified as (iv) generated sustained bargaining power. Count also the instances in which exercise of the three functions failed to influence the setting of discipline. Unresolved: the three functions are an ex post ordering rather than a deduction, and because this paper does not supply the extension of "paths other than the three functions," the falsification condition for convergence does not operate at present fication of the three functions is an ex post ordering from negotiations actually observed, and the falsification condition for the convergence claim does not operate. See Section 20.12(d)) 29 Non- Orthogonality of the Axes and the Feasible Region The density of stable instances differs systematically by cell, and the feasible region (Definition 18) changes with the capability tier. At the tier where strategic character is lowest, the producing position is not accompanied by exclusive capture of value; at the highest tier, a pure utilization position does not stably obtain Measurement of the density of instances by cell. Assign country × period to cells using the four quantities of Proposition 3 (capability distance, net exports and imports of AI-related goods and services, supplier concentration of procurement, and whether access-management measures apply), and aggregate the frequency of occupancy and the duration of occupancy of each cell. Non-uniformity is tested by rejection of the null hypothesis that the distributions of density and duration are equal across cells. Tier-dependence is tested by whether the set of occupiable positions is the same after controlling for the capability tier. Not carried out: the time series of cell assignment has not been constructed, and in addition this paper does not supply a criterion for distinguishing whether the absence of instances means that a position lies outside the feasible region or that the observation period is short ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (non-uniformity is an ordering from theoretical inference and observation of cases; measurement of density has not been carried out. See Section 20.12(c)) 30 The Sovereignty Premium and the Lower Bound of Scale A negative relation between the scale of guarantee and unit cost is observed (economies of scale). Domestic guarantee is justified only where the total sovereignty premium (Definition 19) falls below the expected value of the Paired comparison of guarantee scale and unit cost. For compute of the same generation and the same application, compare in pairs the unit price of use for procurement guaranteed domestically or within an alliance and for procurement from the international market without constraint, and estimate it as a function of the scale of guarantee. The minimum efficient scale is obtained as the point at which the elasticity of unit cost with respect to scale falls below a specified level. The right-hand ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (the existence of economies of scale is established for capital- intensive inputs generally, but estimation of unit-cost dif‐ 943 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade losses avoided when supply stops. The cost of continuous construction competes with other policy objectives, and there is an upper bound on the level that can be sustained side of the justification condition is constructed by multiplying the distribution of depth of degradation and time to recovery, obtained from the dependence indicator of Hypothesis H1 and the AI-outage exercises of Appendix C, by the probability of a stoppage of supply. The premises for computation are lacking: the left-hand side requires access to suppliers' cost structures, and the right-hand side requires the probability of a contingency to which this paper assigns no probability. As stated in Section 19.1.2, this paper does not compute levels ferences separately for the three functions of Definition 6 has not been carried out, and both sides of the justification condition lack a method of computation. See Sections 20.9(f) and 20.9(g)) 31 Inter- Layer Conflict of Interest and the Need for Compensation In the group of actors subject to a requirement of redundancy, capital efficiency and behaviour with respect to siting and investment differ systematically from the group not subject to it. A requirement unaccompanied by a design for the allocation of the cost burden is not complied with on a sustained basis Difference-in-differences estimation taking the application of requirements as events. Making use of the fact that the timing of the introduction of requirements of redundancy and switching capability in regulated sectors differs by jurisdiction and by industry, estimate by difference-in-differences, for the group of operators subject to the requirement and the group not subject to it, capital efficiency (return on invested capital, ratio of capital investment) and behaviour with respect to siting and investment (the trajectory of new investment and the number of sites in the jurisdiction concerned). The substance of compliance is measured not by the submission of reports but by records of switching exercises and by actual switching times. Unresolved: because this paper does not present a design for the allocation of the cost burden, whether a contrast group of "requirements with a design" and "requirements without a design" can be constructed in practice is uncertain △ contested (the relation between requirements of redundancy and capital efficiency is discussed in the literature on third-party risk management in the financial sector, but difference-in-differences estimation has not been carried out. A design for the allocation of the cost burden is not in this paper. See Section 20.11(a)) 32 Conditions for the Propagation of Value- Definition Capability A value defined by an actor possessing none of the three paths (compulsion of acceptance through the size of the market, incorporation into standards, connection to existing international frameworks) is not received on a sustained basis in ex‐ Tracking of the extraterritorial reception of definitions. Measure the extent to which objectives, criteria, and classifications defined by a given jurisdiction are referenced in standards, procurement specifications, and institutions outside it, by the number of references and the duration of reference. Possession of the three paths is coded by the scale of final demand directed at the jurisdiction concerned, the number of references by standards outside it, and participation in international frameworks. Identification: to control for the quality of the content of the definition, compare sever‐ ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (the typology of the three paths is an ordering from observation of cases, and because the proxy indicators of value-definition capability have not been con‐ 944 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade ternal jurisdictions. The capability to define and the power to circulate a definition are separate requirements al jurisdictions that have made definitions of the same kind. Unresolved: because measurement of value-definition capability itself (the three proxy indicators of Proposition 17) is lacking, for instances that were not received it is not possible to separate whether this was due to the absence of a path of propagation or to the content of the definition structed, the scope for ex post explanation is not closed. See Section 20.8(d)) 33 Asymmetry in the Mobility of National Brain Capital The proxy indicators of national brain capital are not explained by inputs relating to formation (education, training, opportunities for practice) alone, and explanatory power improves when variables relating to outflow (international movement of highly skilled people, the share of services provided to actors outside the jurisdiction) are added Decomposition of the net increase. Taking the four component proxy indicators of Appendix E as dependent variables, enter inputs on the formation side and variables on the outflow side simultaneously, and test the improvement in explanatory power from the addition of the outflow variables. Outflow is measured separately as emigration (statistics on residence and on entry and departure) and as absorption while remaining resident in the country (the share of services provided to actors outside the jurisdiction, the value of crossborder outsourcing). Not carried out: statistics capturing the latter form do not exist. In addition, because this paper does not design a response to outflow, this test remains diagnosis and does not connect to prescription ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (the structure of the asymmetry is deduced from Definition 11, but because observation on the outflow side does not exist the test cannot be entered upon. See Section 20.11(b)) 34 Mismatch of Time Scales The time constant of the formation of national brain capital exceeds the time constant of change in the capability tiers by more than an order of magnitude. Investment in capabilities transferable across generational changes (judgment, evaluation, contextual understanding, auditing) shows higher persistence than investment in skills specific to a particular technological generation Estimation and comparison of two time constants. One is the realized period until the proxy indicators of national brain capital show a specified change (shifts in the distribution of years of experience within an occupation, changes in the composition of the professional stratum). The other is the realized period until the boundaries of the capability tiers move (the time series of the points of discontinuity of Proposition 2). The claim about the objects of investment is tested by comparing the retention rate of skills across a generational change, by type of skill (judgment, evaluation, auditing / operational skills specific to a generation). Unresolved: "more than an order of magnitude" is not a quantity this paper has estimated but an estimate drawn from existing descriptions, and because transferable and generation- specific skills cannot be separated in the process of formation, comparison by type depends on ex post classification ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (the direction of the mismatch is supported but estimation of the ratio has not been carried out, and the response (investment in the transferable portion) remains an indication of direction. See Section 20.11(c)) 945 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade 35 Hysteresis of Securitization In instances where a capability has descended a tier, the framework of control that had been applied is not relaxed at a speed comparable to the descent. Relaxation of control does not precede the descent of capability Measurement of the lag between descent and relaxation. The descent of capability is coded as the point at which the gap with the open-weight frontier for the capability concerned enters the tolerance range of the application. Relaxation of control is coded as a concrete amendment: narrowing of scope, raising of thresholds, or addition of exemptions. Aggregate the lag between the two by item, and check whether there are instances in which the lag is zero or negative. Identification: control for the period required to establish the control, and test the claim that the cost of removal is equal to or greater than the cost of establishment. Unresolved: coding "the descent of capability" requires a judgment of the tolerance range of the application, and this paper does not specify that criterion △ contested (the asymmetry between the outward and return paths is supported by observation of the series of access-management measures, but measurement of the lag has not been carried out) 36 Administrative Capacity Constraints and the Minimum Set for Monitoring Where administrative capacity is constrained, a requirement of comprehensive monitoring leads to non-implementation, formalization, or delay. A determination by a minimum indicator set does not diverge systematically from a determination by the comprehensive version Parallel application of a comprehensive version and a minimum-set version. Apply in parallel, to the same object (jurisdiction, sector), the comprehensive and minimum-set versions of Appendices C, D, F, and G, and measure the rate of agreement of the determinations (cell position, level of dependence, phase of scenario, level of leverage). The test of the modes of failure estimates the relation between the volume of monitoring required and the rate of implementation, the substantiveness of the content reported (the share of entries composed of boilerplate wording), and the time required for the procedure, stratified by the capacity level of the implementing body. The premises are lacking: concrete candidates for the minimum set have not been specified (Section 19.7.6), and this paper has no indicator measuring administrative capacity itself, so that no basis for stratification exists ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (the three modes of failure are supported by experience with other monitoring systems, but because the minimum set is unspecified the test of sufficiency cannot be entered upon. See Section 20.11(d)) 37 Reduction of Exposure and Concentration of Dependence In countries and sectors that have reduced exposure in aggregate (Definition 4), supplier concentration of the residual portion rises, so that dependence (degradation upon interruption) does not decline. Reduction of Parallel observation of the two series of aggregate and concentration. For the same resource and the same country, construct as long time series the aggregate of external procurement (or its share in primary inputs) and the supplier concentration of the residual portion (HHI, the share of the top n suppliers, concentration by route), and compare their signs. Stratify by substitutability of application, and test the mechanism by which reduction of the aggregate proceeds first in applications where ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (the two series for oil in Japan are clear but the sample is single, and for AI neither the aggregate nor the concentration series has 946 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade exposure and reduction of concentration are separate policy objectives, and the pursuit of the former alone may improve the aggregate while worsening degradation upon interruption substitution is available. Transmission to dependence is confirmed by regressing the depth of degradation and the time to recovery during interruption events on concentration. Identification: take the timing of the introduction of aggregate- reduction policies as an exogenous break, and estimate on a cross-sector and cross-country panel. Unresolved: what this paper has presented is confined to the two series for oil in a single country (Japan), and does not reach the level of "systematic observation" that the falsification condition requires (Section 20.10(j)) been prepared. See Sections 20.10(h), (i), and (j)) 38 Export of Integrated Systems and the Self-Reinforcement of Desirability In domains where adoption of the export of integrated systems (Definition 20) has deepened, the recipient's switching costs rise and the exporter's proxy indicators of desirability rise. Whereas indispensability depreciates through exercise (Proposition 23), desirability appreciates through adoption — the two components have opposite signs with respect to exercise. The mechanism presupposes that conformity investment is specific to the system concerned; where the investment is general- purpose and preserved upon switching, no rise in switching costs occurs Panel of depth of adoption and switching costs. For the same domain of work, take multiple recipient jurisdictions and organizations as units, and construct a panel with depth of adoption (the accumulation of four kinds of conformity investment — work processes, contracts, supervisory procedures, and training, adapted to the system) as the explanatory variable and proxy quantities of switching cost (the realized period and cost of transition, the continuation rate of the incumbent supplier at re-tender, the length of the period of parallel operation) as dependent variables. The systemspecificity of conformity investment is coded by examination of contracts and technical documents, and stratified by three items: conformity of the interface to standards, standardization of record formats, and the system-specificity of the content of training. Identification: use differences in the timing of adoption, and absorb domain-specific demand fluctuations with period fixed effects. The test of the opposite sign is conducted by placing it alongside indicators on the indispensability side for the same period (investment in the search for substitutes after events of exercise; Proposition 23). Unresolved: a state in which no switching occurs may be interpreted either as evidence that costs are high or as evidence that there is no need to switch (Section 12.5.5). The difficulty of identification has not been resolved ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (the mechanism is supported by existing findings on switching costs and relationship- specific investment, but the accumulation of instances of export of integrated systems in AI is thin, and observation of switching costs is not obtainable from public information. See Sections 20.10(g) and 20.9(d)) 39 Conditions for a State That Exports Integ‐ Only jurisdictions satisfying the four conditions simultaneously (domain-specific national brain Comparison of the export record of jurisdictions satisfying the four conditions. Take as the unit of analysis not the jurisdiction but the pair of jurisdiction and domain; for the same domain of work, place several jurisdictions ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (the necessity of the four conditions is 947 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade rated Systems capital, trust infrastructure, an operating record within the home jurisdiction, portability) export integrated systems on a sustained basis (necessity). And if it is repeatedly observed that jurisdictions satisfying the four conditions do not proceed to export, the claim of sufficiency is rejected. (iv) Portability is not derived from (i)–(iii) and does not correlate with the height of capability side by side and code (i) the stratum of practitioners in that domain and the distribution of their years of experience, (ii) the state of development of the three elements of rules on the allocation of liability, conformity assessment, and insurance, (iii) the years of operation within the home jurisdiction and the presence or absence of records of failure and correction, and (iv) the conformity of the system's interface to standards and the degree of separation of the portions dependent on law; then link these to the presence or absence of actual external transfer. The independence of (iv) is tested by whether (iv) explains the export record after controlling for (i)–(iii), and the absence of correlation with capability is examined through the correlation between the level of (i) and the coding of (iv). The premises are lacking: this paper has no indicator that measures (iv) before transfer (Section 20.8(i)). Reliance on unstated premises escapes ex ante inspection by definition supported by findings on transfer in other fields, but for AI the applicable instances are scarce and no measurement framework for (iv) exists) 40 Portfolio of Procurement Modes A correspondence is observed between the levels of the three variables ((a) severity of the consequences of failure, (b) domain-specificity of judgment, (c) reversibility) and the procurement mode actually adopted (construction within one's own jurisdiction / procurement of capability / procurement of integrated systems). In domains that have adopted (C), the indicators of formation of national brain capital in that domain are lower than in domains of (A) and (B) Observation of the correspondence between the three variables and actual procurement modes. Take several domains of work within the same jurisdiction as units, classify the mode from published procurement records, and examine the correspondence with an assessment of the three variables (borrowing proxy indicators for (a) and (c) from existing frameworks of regulatory impact assessment and risk assessment, and approximating (b) by the share of portions dependent on law). The loss of opportunities for formation is tested, after stratifying by mode, by comparing indicators of the formation of practitioners' capability for judgment in the domain concerned (the share of duties involving independent judgment, experience in handling exceptional events, experience in designing corrective measures). This stratification is the same design as the test of Proposition 24, and the two propositions may be tested simultaneously on the same data (Section 17.4.5). Unresolved: the assessment of the three variables remains qualitative, and the determination of whether a correspondence obtains depends on the judgment of the assessor (Section 20.9(i)) ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (classification of modes is possible from procurement records, but the operationalization of the three variables is qualitative and the formation indicators are likewise not prepared. It shares the same gap in measurement as Proposition 24) 948 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade 41 The Condition Under Which Embedding and Portability Are Compatible A difference is observed, between systems whose interface is explicitly defined and systems whose interface is not, in the relation (the sign or the magnitude of the correlation) between degree of embedding and cost of transplantation. In systems with an explicit interface, the cost of transplanting the portable core becomes independent of the depth of embedding. Making the interface explicit does not itself lower the domestic margin Comparison of transplantation costs stratified by the presence or absence of an explicit interface. Take as the unit of analysis the pair of system and destination jurisdiction, and (1) code the presence or absence of an explicit interface at the level of design documents — judging from contracts, technical documents, and records of conformity certification whether it is fixed in documentary form which elements of the system belong to the jurisdiction- specific layer, which belong to the portable core, and through what the two connect. (2) Measure the degree of embedding by Proposition 4(c) (the presence and number of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations, and liability- assumption contracts). (3) Measure the cost of transplantation by the period and cost required for transplantation and the share of elements modified. For these three, take the presence or absence of an explicit interface as the stratifying variable, regress the degree of embedding on the cost of transplantation, and compare the coefficients across strata. What Proposition 41 predicts is a positive coefficient in the stratum without an explicit interface and a non-significant coefficient in the stratum with one. The test on the protective side is conducted by comparing proxy quantities of the domestic transformation margin of the system concerned (price, continuation rate, outflow to substitutes) before and after the interface is made explicit. Identification: use differences in the timing at which interfaces are made explicit, and absorb domain-specific demand fluctuations with period fixed effects. The premises are lacking: this paper does not supply a procedure for judging from outside whether an interface is explicit, and a state in which the two layers are separated in the design documents while in implementation the dependencies are scattered across layers cannot be distinguished from outward form (Section 20.9(h)). Nor does it supply a general solution for where to draw the interface (Section 20.11(e)) ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (the logic of modularization is supported by existing findings in design theory, but for systems incorporating AI neither the coding of explicit interfaces nor the observation of transplantation costs has been carried out. See Sections 20.8(i), 20.11(e), and 20.9(h)) 42 Upper Bound of Self-Reinforcement; (i) In domains where the level of lock-in is high, supplier concentration is not systematically high — (i) Simultaneous observation of the level of lock-in and supplier concentration. For the same domain of work, observe in pairs proxy quantities of lock-in (the realized period and cost of transition, the continuation rate of the ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (the conceptual distinction in (i) is sup‐ 949 Proposition Testable implication Required data and identification strategy Current evidence grade Lock-in Is Not Indispensability constraint within an individual relationship does not imply non-substitutability within the system. (ii) As switching costs rise, the frequency of inhouse production, multi-sourcing, and the institutionalization of requirements of portability on the recipient side rises. The level of the upper bound is explained by three variables: (a) the national brain capital in the domain concerned remaining on the recipient side, (b) the existence of alternative suppliers, and (c) the severity of the consequences of failure incumbent supplier at re-tender, the length of the period of parallel operation) and supplier concentration (the number of jurisdictions and actors able to supply a system of the same kind in the domain concerned, HHI, the share of the top n suppliers), and estimate their correlation across domains. What Proposition 42(i) predicts is that combinations of high lock-in and low concentration exist systematically. (ii) Time series of rising switching costs and the institutionalization of measures for the recovery of autonomy. For recipient jurisdictions, construct a survival analysis or a panel with depth of adoption (the accumulation of the four kinds of conformity investment of Proposition 38) as the explanatory variable and the occurrence of institutionalization of measures for the recovery of autonomy (formulation of in-house production plans, introduction of a second supplier in the same domain, addition of portability clauses, domestic data retention, and in-house production obligations to procurement requirements) as the dependent variable. The test of the three variables compares instances that have reached the upper bound (instances in which the recipient paid the switching costs and recovered autonomy), stratified by (a), (b), and (c). Identification: use differences in the timing of adoption, and control for exogenous occasions of institutionalization such as changes of government and budget cycles. The premises are lacking: this paper does not supply the threshold of supplier concentration that divides lock-in from indispensability (Section 20.9(e)), nor does a procedure exist for observing ex ante the measurement framework for the three variables and the upper bound itself (the turning point of the recipient's preferences) (Section 20.8(j)) ported by the breakdown of the measured quantities of Definition 15, but concentration by domain has not been measured. The mechanism in (ii) is supported by existing findings on switching costs and bargaining power, but the time series of institutionalization has not been constructed. See Sections 20.9(e) and 20.8(j)) Five things are to be read from Table 10 as a whole. First, that there is no row at ◎ (established finding) — since the propositions of this paper are claims about a new structure rather than restatements of existing established findings, this is to be expected, but it is an explicit restraint on any reading of this paper as "the presentation of conclusions backed by evidence." Second, that the distribution of evidence grades corresponds to the character of the propositions — propositions close to observable phenomena such as dependence, outages, and balances (1, 5, 7, 12, 13, 16) reach ○, while claims about structure such as heterogeneity across cells and inter-layer transmission (3, 6a, 9, 11, 14, 15, 17, 18, 21, 22,

23, 24, 25, 26, 27) remain at △. Third, that the heaviest information in Table 10 lies not in the evidence grades but in the column of identification strategies. The entry "not carried out" does not distinguish a design that yields no verdict even when executed from a state in which execution would yield a verdict but has not been begun. That this paper's propositions are of the latter kind is shown by the content of that column — Proposition 3 specifies the separation of assignment from test, Proposition 4 ex ante measurement, Proposition 7 an interaction test, Proposition 11 quantile regression and an event study, and Proposition 5 the estimation of markups, each at the level of the falsification condition. The meaning of this column is not that there is evidence, but that the state is one in which collecting evidence will yield a verdict. Fourth, the identification strategies of the five propositions concerning transition and human foundations (15–19) fall into three types. The lag type (Proposition 15) is a design that tests the temporal order of accumulation and transition, and entrusts estimation of the time constant to a discrete-time hazard model. The obstacles for this type are that instances of upward transition are scarce and that retrospective measurement of the accumulation indicators does not exist. The event type (Propositions 16 and 19) is a design that takes policy changes in access conditions as exogenous events and tests whether the consequences differ by the attributes of jurisdictions and partnerships. Because past policy changes have already occurred several times, this type has high feasibility of commencement in that estimation can be carried out retrospectively once the data are constructed. The indicator-construction type (the second part of Proposition 17, and Proposition 18) is a design in which the proxy indicators themselves must first be constructed before testing, and the distance from commencement to result is the longest. Fifth, that there are four rows at ▽ — Proposition 2b (the antecedent not yet realized), the sufficiency part of Proposition 19 (no instances), Proposition 20 (scenario-specific estimation of marginal values remaining at the level of design), and Proposition 28 (the falsification condition for convergence not operating because the extension of paths other than the three functions is unsettled). Together with Proposition 10, these are the passages in this paper furthest from evidence and to be read with the greatest caution. As Section 20 acknowledged, this is the price of discussing C3, the price of formalizing in advance the conditions of a partnership that does not exist, and the price of using scenarios without assigning probabilities. The identification strategies of the two propositions concerning scenarios and the constraints on middle powers (20 and 21) form a fourth and a fifth type, differing from all three above. The state-dependent type (Proposition 20) claims that the relation between dependent and explanatory variables changes sign according to the state of the world, and therefore requires, as a premise of the test, the coding of the state itself. The difficulty specific to this type is that where the criteria for coding are not independently established, the assignment of states and the estimation of marginal values may become circular — the circularity avoided in Proposition 3 by separating assignment from test may recur at the level of scenarios. The design this paper puts in place to avoid this circularity has two elements: coding the phases using the leading indicators (Definition 14) alone and 951 using no outcome variables whatever, and entrusting the coding to the concurrence of multiple indicators so as to avoid dependence on a single indicator (Appendix F). But so long as the discriminating power of the leading indicators has not itself been backtested, this design avoids circularity without guaranteeing power of determination. The panel type (Proposition 21) becomes, by the structure of the claim of commonality, a design that shows the interactions with the stratifying factors (region, income level, political system) to be non-significant. A structure that supports a claim by non-rejection of a null hypothesis cannot be distinguished from insufficient power when the sample is small, so that coverage of the population and precision of the indicators are required to a greater degree than usual. These two types are as distant as the indicator-construction type in feasibility of commencement. The identification strategies of the seven propositions concerning leverage and institutional foundations (22–28) distribute among the types already set out. Belonging to the event type are Proposition 23 (difference-in-differences estimation of investment in the search for substitutes before and after events of exercise) and Proposition 25 (an event study using differences in the timing of institutional adoption across jurisdictions); in both, the events concerned have already occurred several times, so estimation can be carried out retrospectively once the data are constructed. For Proposition 23, however, the coding of events — what is to count as "exercise" — must be settled first, and in this respect it is one step further off than the pure event type. Belonging to the indicator-construction type are Proposition 22 (constructing indicators for each component of indispensability and desirability), Proposition 24 (joining indicators of skill formation to depth of use), the dependent variable of Proposition 25 (coding of depth of deployment), and Proposition 26 (the realized distributions of both time to decide and time over which capability changes). For these a framework of measurement must first be created before testing, and the distance from commencement to result is the longest. Proposition 27 is exceptionally close to observation — the difference in price and terms of use according to the presence or absence of proof of provenance can obtain a point of entry for observation from existing terms of transaction. Proposition 28 fits none of the types. So long as the extension of paths other than the three functions is unsettled, the claim of convergence cannot take the form of a test, and remains the descriptive work of a typology of cases. The fact that Table 10 shows about these seven propositions is stated here directly. Of the seven, not one is equipped with a measurement framework and ready to be tested immediately. All seven have falsification conditions, but the observable quantities that those conditions name have not been constructed on their side. The same structure arises for national brain capital, value-definition capability, and the leading indicators. The reason is that this paper sets its propositions not in areas where existing observation exists, but in areas where theory is blank precisely because existing observation does not exist (Section 20.8). The reader is asked to read at the same time that the second axis widens the explanatory range of this paper and that the evidence within that range is thin. 952 The fact that Table 10 shows about the eight propositions treating the cost of the recommendations (29–36) is of the same form, differing in one respect of character. Of the eight, not one is equipped with a measurement framework and ready to be tested immediately, and for two of them both sides of the falsification condition lack a method of computation. The justification condition of Proposition 30 requires, on the left-hand side (the total sovereignty premium), access to suppliers' cost structures, and on the right-hand side (the expected value of the losses avoided), the probability of a contingency that lies outside this paper's framework. The test of the sufficiency part of Proposition 36 lacks one of the two versions to be compared, because concrete candidates for the minimum indicator set have not been specified. What differs in character is the reason for this thinness. The preceding propositions are far from evidence because this paper sets its propositions in areas where existing observation does not exist. These eight propositions are far from evidence because they are propositions about the cost of this paper's own recommendations, and computing the level of those costs exceeds this paper's unit of analysis. That Section 19 issues no figures while being "the section that counts the costs" is a limitation of that section's design and not a shortfall of observation — though for the reader the distinction does not change the result. Whichever the reason, these eight propositions cannot at present be entered into testing. Section 20 acknowledges this state in separate items by theme. For the three propositions treating the export and procurement of integrated systems (38– 40), Table 10 shows two facts. First, none of the three can be tested immediately, and the reason is the same as for the preceding propositions — the observable quantities have not been constructed on their side. Second, in addition, the three share a constraint of a different kind: thinness on the side of instances. Propositions 38 through 40 speak of the export of integrated systems in AI, but the accumulation of instances in which the five elements of Definition 20 have been transferred as a bundle across jurisdictions is at present thin, and this paper's formalization rests on analogy from other fields and on theoretical inference (Section 20.10(g)). The three therefore yield no verdict, even once indicators are constructed, until instances sufficient to enter into the test are assembled. Because this double constraint applies to none of the other groups of propositions in this paper, the reader is asked to read the three rows of Table 10 not as "verification designs" in the same sense as the other rows, but as a list of the preconditions under which verification becomes possible. That the identification-strategy column is not empty does have meaning, however — the observations that the three rows name (the system-specificity of conformity investment, the degree of separation of portions dependent on law, and the classification of modes from procurement records) are all feasible even now at the level of case study, and constitute a procedure for advancing the accumulation of instances itself in a designed form. For the two propositions that restore consistency (41 and 42), the fact Table 10 shows differs in character from every other group. Both are propositions that limit the conditions under which existing propositions hold, rather than widening the explanatory range of this paper — Proposition 41 imposes the condition of an explicit interface on the 953 compatibility of Propositions 4 and 18 with Proposition 39(iv), and Proposition 42 imposes an upper bound on the self-reinforcement of Proposition 38. The function of the two rows in Table 10 is therefore not to supply a verification design for a new phenomenon but to add a second observation to the tests of the existing rows (4, 18, 38, 39). The stratification by "presence or absence of an explicit interface" that the row for Proposition 41 requires rewrites the test of portability in Proposition 39(iv) into a stratified design, and the simultaneous observation of supplier concentration that the row for Proposition 42 requires adds a second variable to the panel of switching costs in Proposition 38. That is, these two rows are not independent tests but rows that modify the test designs of four existing rows. This structure is the manifestation, on the side of the table, of the fact that the two were introduced not as an extension of the theory but as a restoration of consistency. Propositions that limit conditions nonetheless also require new observation — the three variables of the presence or absence of an explicit interface, supplier concentration, and the upper bound are all quantities this paper has not hitherto observed, and Section 20 acknowledges that their construction has not been begun, as the four items 20.11(e), 20.9(h), 20.9(e), and 20.8(j). 21.3 Hypotheses H1–H3 and Plans of Implementation The three hypotheses below carve out, from the propositions of 42 numbers and 44 statements, the portion that is verifiable in the near future with existing data and standard quantitative methods. They are the range of what this paper undertakes to verify itself, and in that sense they form the core of the research agenda. Hypothesis H1 (Measurability of Dependence and Its Divergence from Exposure) A state's AI dependence (Definition 4) is measurable as a composite dependence indicator synthesized from sectoral AI input ratios, the speed of degradation upon interruption, and supplier concentration, and it has risen monotonically in the major economies since 2023. Further, dependence diverges systematically from exposure (rate of use, external payments), and the size of that divergence is explained by the degree to which alternative procedures are in place. Verification constructs a composite indicator of the same form as indicators of energy security (import dependence, HHI of supplier concentration, and so on), and supports it with input-output tables, firm surveys, outageevent data, and measurements from simulated interruption exercises (Appendix C: the AI Dependence Audit Protocol). Plan of implementation for H1. It proceeds in three stages. The first stage is the design of the indicator — fixing the sectoral classification (starting from the seven domains of administration, finance, healthcare, manufacturing, logistics, education, and news, and joining them to the sector definitions of the input-output tables), operationalizing the three sub-indicators (input ratio, speed of degradation upon interruption, supplier concentra‐ 954 tion), and deciding the method of composition. The design philosophy of indicators of energy security (measuring import dependence and supplier dispersion separately, and conducting sensitivity analysis before composition) is transplanted, and the weights of composition are set out in several variants so as to show the robustness of the results. The second stage is data collection — input ratios come from joining input-output tables to statistics on ICT investment, and from firm surveys (since self-report generates a bias toward over-declaration, responses are cross-checked against expenditure data). Supplier concentration is computed from estimates of shares in the API and cloud markets, but for the portion that depends on non-public market data the range of the estimate is stated explicitly. The speed of degradation upon interruption is estimated on two tracks: surveys of firms under interruption scenarios, and measurements from past outage events. The third stage is construction of the time series and international comparison, together with measurement of the divergence from exposure. Hypothesis H1 includes, in the second part of its claim, that dependence diverges systematically from exposure (rate of use, external payments) and that the size of the divergence is explained by the degree to which alternative procedures are in place. The system of indicators therefore composes the dependence indicator and the exposure indicator separately (Appendix C.3), estimates the difference between them by organization and by sector, and regresses it on the degree to which alternative procedures are in place (the time required to switch, measured in exercises, and the share of personnel able to execute non-AI procedures). This measurement of divergence does not hold without exercises (Appendix C.6) — exposure can be measured from statistics, but dependence appears only through interruption. Three obstacles are anticipated. First, that statistical capture of AI inputs does not sit well with existing industrial classifications — a portion of AI input embedded in cloud expenditure remains inseparable. Second, the non-public character of the market data required to measure supplier concentration. Third, the possibility that the dependence indicator is itself politically sensitive, and that publication changes the behaviour of what is measured (the indicator becomes a management target). Against the third obstacle, a design-level defence — positioning the indicator as an audit tool rather than as a policy target — is built into the protocol of Appendix C. 955 Hypothesis H2 (The Transformation Margin Hypothesis) The persistence of value capture at the application layer is positively related not to the conditions of access to models but to the endowment of complementary assets (the four indicators of Proposition 4: exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, linguistic-contextual specificity). Verification estimates, on a cross-sector and cross-country panel of application firms, the relation between the four indicators measured before the event and gross margin and survival rate, taking events of foundation-model replacement (generational change of models, price revisions) as exogenous shocks. The four indicators are fixed in advance, excluding data mining through ex post selection of indicators. Prediction: the ordering of the coefficients follows the order of the degree to which each keeps integration cost high (physical-interface intensity and exclusive data endowment > institutional embeddedness > linguistic-contextual specificity). Plan of implementation for H2. The core of the identification strategy lies in treating generational change and price revision of foundation models as shocks exogenous to application firms. Because a generational change is determined by suppliers' development schedules rather than by the individual circumstances of application firms, it may be regarded as broadly exogenous to those firms' performance; but exogeneity is impaired where a supplier adds functionality aimed at a promising area of application — this endogeneity can be partly mitigated by distinguishing cases in which the direction of the added functionality follows a research plan announced in advance from cases in which it does not. The endowment of complementary assets is constructed as indicators measured before the event, using the four indicators of Proposition 4 (exclusive data endowment = the share of data not obtainable from the public web and generated only from the operating processes of the transformer concerned / physical-interface intensity = the share of revenue inseparable from the operation of physical equipment, mechanisms, and on-site work / institutional embeddedness = the presence and number of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations, and liability-assumption contracts / linguistic-contextual specificity = the number of language- and jurisdiction-specific standards that conformity of the output requires), so as to prevent data mining through ex post selection of indicators. The dependent variables are gross margin and survival rate (exit, acquisition). The test has two focal points. First, the prediction of ordering — whether the ordering of the coefficients follows the order of the degree to which each keeps integration cost high (physicalinterface intensity and exclusive data endowment > institutional embeddedness > linguistic- contextual specificity). Second, the decisive test of whether the group of firms in the lower quantiles on all four indicators maintains gross margin across a generational change; if this is observed, Proposition 4 is rejected. Ex ante measurement is a design that physically closes off the path of reclassifying a firm ex post as having "in fact possessed complementary assets." The data are the financial data of listed firms, supplemented for unlisted application firms by fundraising databases and records of business continuation. 956 The anticipated obstacles are survivorship bias (the firms observed have already been selected), measurement error in complementary assets (particularly in the proxy indicator for institutional trust), and the shortness of the observation period. On the last point, power is secured by carrying the starting point of the panel back as far as possible and by accumulating several events of generational change. Additional item of analysis for H2 (H2-b: the level of development of trust infrastructure). To the panel above, the level of development of the jurisdiction's trust infrastructure (Definition 17) — the three elements of rules on the allocation of liability, conformity assessment, and insurance — is added as an explanatory variable, and its effect on the depth of AI deployment and on the transformation margin in regulated sectors is estimated. Identification follows the strategy specified for Proposition 25, and uses differencein- differences estimation taking the date of entry into force of institutional reforms, which differs by jurisdiction, as the event, after controlling for access to capability (distance from the procurable frontier, and price) and for industrial structure. The reason for including this item is that the claim of priority in Proposition 25 is at present not identified as to the direction of causation (Section 20.10(f)), and unless it is accompanied by a design that separates reverse causation and common causes, it remains an observation of correspondence. Hypothesis H3 (AI Outage as a Natural Experiment) When a large-scale AI or cloud supply outage occurs, the more dependent a sector or country, the greater the degradation of output and transactions, and the degradation is correlated across sectors that share a supplier. Verification takes past large-scale outages (cloud outages, large-scale software failures) as natural experiments and estimates sectoral degradation with high-frequency data (transactions, payments, logistics). Prediction: the higher the HHI of dependence on a single supplier in a sector, the deeper the degradation and the slower the recovery. Plan of implementation for H3. Of the three hypotheses, this is the easiest to begin with existing data and has the clearest predictions. The design is an event study — past largescale cloud outages and large-scale software failures are identified as events, and the degradation of sectoral high-frequency indicators (numbers of payments, transaction volumes, shipment records in logistics, flight operation records) before and after the event window is estimated. The essential points of identification are that the technical cause of the outage is unrelated to the state of users (exogeneity), and the removal of other disturbances occurring at the same time. The predictions can be tested at two levels. First, the cross-sectional prediction that the higher the supplier concentration (HHI) measured in advance in a sector, the deeper the degradation and the slower the recovery. Second, the prediction about correlation structure: that degradation is correlated across sectors sharing the same supplier and uncorrelated across sectors that do not. The second prediction is the test that separates this proposition from the trivial claim that "outages 957 cause damage," and corresponds directly to the core of Proposition 7 — correlated amplification. Third, because Proposition 7 states the functional form explicitly, a test of multiplicativity is added — estimate log D(s) = α + β₁·log(dependence) + β₂·log(concentration) + β₃·log(correlation) + γ·(interaction term), and test that β₁, β₂, and β₃ are all positive and that the coefficient γ on the interaction term is positive. If γ is not significant, the three factors act only additively and the claim of multiplicative amplification is rejected. The three factors must be measured in advance as the four core indicators of Appendix C, and in this respect H3 depends on H1's preceding it. The anticipated obstacles are that measurement of damage tends to rely on published ex post estimates whose reliability varies, that firms have an incentive to under-report outages, and that instances of pure AI supply outages have not yet accumulated, so that reliance on extrapolation from cloud outages is unavoidable. The last point means that verification of this hypothesis grows stronger with the passage of time — and conversely that it remains provisional at present. 21.4 The Next Empirical Work as VURA — A Pilot of the AI Dependence Audit Protocol Merely enumerating a research agenda does not satisfy the discipline this series has imposed on itself — that whoever proposes a design assumes the burden of the first implementation. Of the proposals in this paper, what the author undertakes to execute first is a pilot of the AI Dependence Audit Protocol (Appendix C), which is the implementation of H1. The composition of the pilot is as follows. First, the objects are several organizations within Japan — a small cross-sector sample including administrative bodies, medical institutions, manufacturers, and financial institutions — and for each organization the critical processes are inventoried along the sector list of Appendix C. Second, three measurements are made for each process: (i) the presence or absence of AI input and its substitutability, (ii) the number of days until functional degradation arises if supply stops, and the depth of that degradation, and (iii) the degree of overlap among the suppliers and platforms depended upon. Third, these are composed into a dependence profile at the level of the organization, and put into a form comparable across organizations. Fourth, a simulated interruption exercise — a tabletop exercise assuming a situation in which a particular AI service has become unavailable — is conducted, and the difference between the degradation predicted by prior self-report and the actual dependence revealed in the exercise is measured. In other words, the divergence between exposure, which can be measured from statistics, and dependence, which appears only through interruption, is measured directly. This fourth stage is the most important part of the pilot and the only means of verifying the proposition about divergence stated in the second part of Hypothesis H1. As has been confirmed repeatedly in the fields of energy and finance, self-reported dependence is systematically understated, and actual dependence is made visible only through exercises. If a divergence of the same form arises for AI as well, that is a 958 methodological finding — that the measurement of dependence does not hold on the basis of self-report — and it feeds back into the design of the H1 indicators themselves. The results of the pilot are planned to be published at three levels. First, anonymized aggregate profiles (a description of dependence structures in a form that does not identify organizations). Second, a revised version of the protocol itself — including the difficulties of measurement revealed through implementation and a record of their resolution or non-resolution. Third, sensitivity analysis on the robustness of the indicators. Here the structure of the conflict of interest that this series has repeatedly acknowledged is set out again. That the actor proposing the methodology of a dependence audit is also the actor conducting that audit is a weakness from the standpoint of independence — the same problem that Redefinition Capitalism (Kadowaki, 2026g) acknowledged with respect to devices of disclosure, that "a device built by an actor with an interest fails in independence," applies here as well. This paper cannot resolve this weakness. What can be adopted as mitigation is to publish the protocol and the format of the raw data in a form that allows third parties to re-execute it, and to set out the method of composing the indicators in several variants so as to avoid convergence on a single "score." Not to claim the authority of the audit, but to provide the procedure of the audit as a public good — the position of the pilot is exhausted by this. 21.5 The Position of a Practitioner — As Hypotheses Whose Verification the Author Undertakes This paper is at once a theoretical work that establishes Layer Zero of the series and a basis for the author's business and investment judgments. This fact, which Section 20 (20.15) treated as a structural conflict of interest, must be stated not only as an acknowledgment of a limitation but also as a statement about the status of this paper's claims. This subsection does that. Each proposition of this paper has a dual status. First, they are recommendations presented as verifiable empirical claims — Table 10 is the map of that verification, and the falsification conditions are the criteria of judgment. Second, they are also judgments the author has already adopted in practice. The questions of where to stand among the nine cells, which of the four indicators of complementary assets to invest in, and how to allocate the three functions of the guarantee level are, for this paper, objects of analysis, but for the author they are at the same time objects of decision. The claims of this paper are therefore at once "recommendations" and "hypotheses whose verification the author undertakes." This duality is not to be concealed; it becomes useful information for the reader only by being made explicit. When a practitioner writes theory, there is a danger that the theory functions as a justification of the practice, and the only means of reducing that danger is to place the burden of falsification on the theory and to specify in advance the content of that burden. 959 What this paper undertakes to verify concretely is therefore stated here. What follows is written not as promotion but as an assumption of the burden of falsification. First, the pilot implementation of the AI Dependence Audit Protocol (Appendix C). Its content is as stated in 21.4, including the objects, the items measured, the design of the exercise, and the level of publication. What is undertaken here is verification of the claim of Hypothesis H1 — that dependence diverges systematically from exposure and that the size of the divergence is explained by the degree to which alternative procedures are in place. If no divergence is observed in the pilot, or if the divergence is unrelated to the degree to which alternative procedures are in place, the second part of Hypothesis H1 is rejected. Because the weakness of independence — that the implementing body is also the proponent of the methodology — cannot be resolved, the mitigation is to publish the protocol and the format of the raw data in a form that allows third parties to re-execute it. Second, the construction of a measurement framework for national brain capital (Definition 11). As Section 20 (20.8(a)) acknowledged, Definition 11 at present lacks a measurement framework, and for that reason the falsification condition of Proposition 18 does not operate. The content of this undertaking is the work of bringing the provisional proposal for proxy indicators of the four components set out in Appendix E down to data that can actually be collected. Concretely, indicators are constructed with Japan as the starting point, and published in a form that makes explicit the limits of international comparability, for (i) the occupational composition of employment and the distribution of tenure in manufacturing, maintenance, healthcare, and long-term care, (ii) the number of language-specific technical standards and certifications, (iii) the number of registrations under professional supervision by occupation and the presence or absence of systems for renewal of qualifications, and (iv) the age composition and years of practical experience of the professional stratum in the domain concerned. The result of this work does not in itself support Proposition 18. Rather the reverse: only once the indicators are constructed does Proposition 18 become capable of being rejected. What is undertaken is the work of making one's own proposition falsifiable. Third, direct measurement of the four indicators of Proposition 4 in businesses falling under M2×C2. Proposition 4 operationalizes the endowment of complementary assets by four ex ante observable quantities — exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, and linguistic-contextual specificity — and Hypothesis H2 requires that these be measured before an event of generational change in foundation models. For those of the businesses in which the author is involved that fall under M2×C2, these four indicators are measured in advance and recorded together with the trajectory of gross margin and survival across generational changes. The four indicators are fixed in advance, and no ex post selection or addition of indicators is made. This record is no more than the observation of a single operator and does not substitute for the panel estimation of Hypothesis H2. But there is value in adding one sample that satisfies the design requirement of ex ante measurement — that estimation may be medium-term while measurement must begin in the short term (21.7).

Next, what will be withdrawn if falsified is stated in advance. This is the core of this subsection. First, if in the pilot of Hypothesis H1 no divergence between exposure and dependence is observed, or if the divergence is not explained by the degree to which alternative procedures are in place, this paper's methodological claim that dependence can be measured only through exercises is withdrawn. In that case dependence would be constructible from statistics, and the exercise portion of Appendix C would have been an unnecessary burden. Second, if it is systematically observed that the group of application firms in the lower quantiles on all four indicators of Proposition 4 maintains gross margin across generational changes in foundation models, the central concept of this paper, the transformation margin protected by integration cost, is withdrawn. This is the decisive test stated explicitly in the falsification condition of Proposition 4, and the object of withdrawal does not stop at Proposition 4 — the M2′ of Proposition 13, the argument on M2×C2 in Section 10, and item (a) of Japan's portfolio in Section 18 are all conditioned on Proposition 4, and are withdrawn simultaneously. Third, if, after proxy indicators of national brain capital have been constructed, it is systematically observed that the transformation margin at Tier C2 is captured on a sustained basis in countries where those indicators are thin, Proposition 18, and the description of Japan in Section 18.5 that rests on it, are withdrawn. Fourth, if domestic value added per yen of digital procurement, productivity, and the capture of transformation value improve under a pure utilization strategy lacking complementary assets, the portfolio claim of Proposition 13 is withdrawn. In that case the point that Section 20 (20.15) named as "the second place to doubt" — the underestimation of the rationality of the option of committing wholly to the Utilization Model — will in fact have obtained. A declaration of withdrawal requires conditions that make it effective, since a declaration alone fixes neither the timing nor the subject of the determination. Two conditions can be put in place by this paper. First, all four withdrawal conditions above are derived directly from the falsification conditions of Table 10, so that the scope for reinterpretation at the author's discretion is minimized. Second, the determination of withdrawal can be made by a third party on the basis of the indicator definitions and measurement procedures this paper has published. These are not sufficient conditions. There is no guarantee that a third party will in fact make the determination, and no guarantee beyond the declaration itself that the author would accept it if the determination were made. This limitation is of the same form as the fact that disclosure does not resolve a conflict of interest (Section 20, 20.15). Finally, what this subsection does not do is stated. This subsection neither introduces the author's businesses nor reinforces the credibility of this paper's claims by the author's practical experience. Practical experience says nothing about the truth or falsity of this paper's propositions — that a judgment was made in practice is not evidence that the judgment was correct. What this subsection states is only these two things: that the claims of this paper are presented in a form that is withdrawable by the author, and that the con‐ 961 tent of the withdrawal has been specified in advance. It may be added that, since the framework of this paper is written for middle powers in general, circulation in the Japanese edition alone would be a mismatch between addressee and medium, and an English edition is therefore planned. To the discipline of this series — that whoever proposes a design assumes the burden of the first implementation (21.4) — this subsection adds one clause. Whoever presents a claim states in advance what will be lost if that claim is wrong. 21.6 What the Completion of Layer Zero Means for the Four-Layer Architecture With this paper, the series has obtained a four-layer architecture: Layer Zero (national structure), Layer One (the structure of the era: capital allocation), Layer Two (social structure: the institutional footing of self-definition), and Layer Three (enterprise management: redefinition and value creation). With the layers assembled, four things can now be stated that could not be stated before. The fourth concerns the fact that the paths connecting the layers are not the three paths of Proposition 11 alone. First, the chain of exogeneity has closed. As stated in Section 17, what the ordering of the layers declares is not the direction of causation but which variables are treated as given in the analysis of which layer — a declaration of exogeneity. In a three-layer architecture, the conditions presupposed by the topmost Layer One (capital allocation) — the material and institutional conditions under which the generative capability that capital seeks to price is feasible in the first place — lay outside the architecture. Layer Zero brings this outside inside. Layer Zero itself has, to be sure, an outside of its own — suppliers' technical achievements, the policy decisions of other states, and physical resource constraints. The architecture does not regress infinitely, but not because the architecture is complete: it is because a point has been reached at which adding further layers no longer increases explanatory power as a theory of management. That this paper calls Layer Zero "Layer Zero" rather than "the topmost layer" is in part to preserve this openness. Second, the range of application of the series' central claim has been fixed. The foundational axiom of this series was the inversion of the origin of value from past realization to the capability of creating future value (Kadowaki, 2026a). This inversion has been developed at the level of the enterprise from financial statements to generative capability Λ, at the level of capital markets from the evaluation of past performance to the pricing of the capability for redefinition, and at the level of society from the history of affiliation to the possibility of self-definition. By sketching the counterpart at the level of the state — from GDP to the state's Λ — in Section 17, it has been shown that the inversion is not a claim about a single level but a structural claim consistent across levels of analysis. At the same time, it has been shown that the inversion is incomplete at each level. Measurement of the enterprise's Λ is not built (2026g), and measurement of the state's Λ is still further back. The meaning of the four layers being assembled is not that the answers are as‐ 962 sembled, but that the form of the question has been confirmed to be the same across levels. Fourth, the paths connecting the layers have become two. The path placed first as connecting Layer Zero to the three layers below is the three paths of Proposition 11 — toward RCap, toward SDS, and toward the ER group. All three have the direction from configuration to conditions of operation. That is, they are the transmission of constraint by which the state's cell position and access conditions delimit the upper bound of the layers below. There is a second connection with a different direction. Value-definition capability (Definition 12; Proposition 17) and national brain capital (Definition 11; Proposition 18) are both assets distributed in the layers below, and yet are variables that determine the position of Layer Zero. The actual bearers of value-definition capability are enterprises and individuals (Section 17.2.3), and what the state can hold is no more than the design of the venue in which the work of definition is carried out and aggregated. The substance of national brain capital is distributed across the workplaces of enterprises and the working conventions of professionals. This second connection therefore has the direction from the state of the layers below to the position of Layer Zero. The meaning of the two connections being assembled is that description of the circulation has become possible. The state's cell position delimits the outer boundary of enterprises' set of redefinition options (Proposition 11); the practice of enterprises carried out inside that boundary forms national brain capital and value-definition capability; and the thickness of these determines the state's cell position through the defensibility of the Transformation Model (Propositions 18 and 17). What Section 15 described as the dynamics of transition, and the mutual complementarity of the set of three that Section 18 described for Japan as "utilization generates transformation, transformation supports the guarantee, and the guarantee makes the deepening of utilization possible," are concrete manifestations of this circulation. This circulation is not, however, determinism — as Section 17 (17.5.2) noted in adducing evidence of independence, no layer is uniquely determined by the state of the others. That the circulation has become describable does not mean that the relations among the layers can be solved as a closed system. In addition, because both of the concepts constituting this second connection lack measurement frameworks (Section 20, 20.8(a) and (c)), the existence of the circulation remains at present a theoretical claim. What the completion of the four-layer architecture means is that the list of quantities to be measured has been fixed, not that measurement has been carried out. Third, misattribution of failure can now be diagnosed. An analysis that looks at only one of the four layers misattributes constraints originating in other layers as failures of the actors in the layer examined. An analysis that attributes the scarcity of enterprise redefinition to the conservatism of management culture overlooks the narrowness of the outer boundary set by the state's access conditions (Section 17). Conversely, an analysis that attributes the failure of national strategy to the judgment of policymakers overlooks the Layer Three condition of the thickness of the group of enterprises holding transforma‐ 963 tion assets. An analysis that attributes disparities in individual AI use to education or motivation overlooks the Layer Zero configuration of the stratification of access (Proposition 12). Diagnosis of misattribution across layers is the most practical use of the four-layer architecture. The converse error must, however, be guarded against at the same time — attributing all of one's own layer's inaction to the constraints of other layers is also misattribution, and the asymmetry stated in Section 17, that Layer Zero delimits the upper bound but does not guarantee the lower bound, is the check against error in this direction. 21.7 Priorities in the Research Agenda The map of verification shown in Table 10 is vast, and it is not possible to advance all of it at once. Priorities are assigned on two criteria: feasibility of commencement, and centrality of the proposition. The principle of prioritization corresponds to the three types of identification strategy described in 21.2 — tests for which indicators already exist are placed in the short term, tests that can be carried out by joining indicators together in the medium term, and tests for which the indicators themselves must first be constructed in the long term. Of these, the time constant of Proposition 15, the value-definition capability of Proposition 17, and the national brain capital of Proposition 18 all belong to the third type. Short term (commencement possible with existing data). First, the dependence audit of H1 — construction of a first version of the dependence indicator, and implementation of the pilot described in 21.4. There are three reasons for placing it first. First, the claim that the exposure indicator and the dependence indicator are to be composed separately and their divergence measured (the second part of Hypothesis H1) can be tested immediately with a combination of existing statistics and tabletop exercises. Second, the three factors that are the output of H1 (dependence, supplier concentration, outage correlation) are required as ex ante measurements for the test of multiplicativity in Proposition 7, so that delay in H1 translates directly into delay in H3. Third, as stated in 21.5, this is an item whose implementation the author undertakes, so that the timing of commencement does not depend on conditions external to this paper. Second, the cross-sectional part of the H3 event study of AI outage — since past large-scale outages and high-frequency data already exist, the cross-sectional prediction that sectors with higher supplier concentration suffer deeper degradation and slower recovery can be tested with existing data. The test of multiplicativity (the coefficient on the interaction term), which is the core of Proposition 7, requires ex ante measurement of the three factors, however, and therefore depends on H1's preceding it and belongs to the medium term. Third, the descriptive verification of Proposition 13 through construction of domestic value added per yen of digital procurement — this ratio, with digital-related payments in the denominator and the increase in domestic value added of AI-input sectors in the numerator, can be composed by re-editing existing statistics; it does not reach causal identification, but it has meaning as prior work in fixing Japan's present position as an indicator of the same form as energy intensity after 1973. Fourth, construction of a time series of capability distance 964 and detection of points of discontinuity (monitoring of the falsification condition of Proposition 2), which is a matter of a standing observation arrangement rather than of a single study. Fifth, the test of Proposition 6b — a design that controls for the single binary variable of whether the attraction conditions explicitly state a local value-capture clause, and for which the existing state-level empirical work serves directly as the test design, so that feasibility of commencement is high. Medium term (construction of data required). The core of the medium term is the remaining parts of H2 and H3. First, construction and estimation of the H2 panel of application firms — because the four indicators must be measured before an event of generational change, measurement must begin without waiting for the next generational change, so that in this sense the urgency of commencement is high while the production of results is medium-term. Second, the quantile estimation and event study of inter-layer transmission in Proposition 11, which requires a dataset joining enterprises' redefinition indicators to states' access conditions. Because the events (the changes of access conditions of October 2022, October 2023, January 2025, and May 2025) have already occurred, estimation can be carried out retrospectively once the data are constructed. Third, the construction of cell assignment in Proposition 3 by the four quantities, and estimation of interactions of policy × cell dummies. Fourth, the classification of national redefinition in Proposition 14 — coding of the five dimensions (Table 9) by content analysis of policy documents, and its construction into an internationally comparative panel; but the operationalization of the classification criteria is itself unresolved (Section 20.16, weakness 4). Fifth, verification of the curse of concentration in producing states in Proposition 6a, which requires a panel of sectoral allocation of people and capital in producing states under a design that limits control variables to three. Sixth, the test of multiplicativity in H3 — after measuring the three factors in advance as the four core indicators of Appendix C, test the coefficient on the interaction term in the estimating equation for log D(s). Because it can be begun only after the H1 pilot has supplied the indicators, it lags one step behind the cross-sectional part. Seventh, the event study of Proposition 16 (pressure toward cross-axis transition). Policy changes in the access conditions for advanced computing chips and advanced model weights have already occurred several times, and data on the events exist. What is required is a dataset joining procurement volumes, procurement prices, and the granting or refusal of licences by jurisdiction, together with an ex ante classification of alliance relations. By testing whether the coefficient on political position is significant after controlling for capability level, the claim that "allocation ceases to be a function of price and quality" is opened to testing. The portion concerning irreversibility requires the passage of time for observation, since it is judged, where a revision in the direction of relaxation occurs, by whether re-tightening subsequently follows. Eighth, the necessity part of Proposition 19 (conditions for a third pole) — coding of the three conditions and comparison of the degree to which participating states' capability is preserved against exogenous changes of access conditions can be begun with clause analysis of existing partnership frameworks. The sufficiency part cannot be placed on the agenda, 965 since no instance of a partnership satisfying the three conditions exists (Section 20, 20.10(b)). Long term (institutions and an observation period required). First, verification of the compounding of the Utilization Model and the J-curve in Proposition 5 — since the delay structure of GPTs is measured in years, a short-term null result is not a falsification, and a sufficient observation period is required. Together with this, estimation of the (β) rent path — the product of suppliers' gross margin and the share of C2 capability in procurement — becomes a long-term task, since it requires access to non-public cost structures. Second, estimation of the rate of depreciation in Proposition 8 (construction of F(t) − E₀ in capability indices). Third, estimation of the half-life of the verification anchor (Definition 9), which is the work of deriving the half-life from the time series of the compute required to attain capabilities already achieved, and comparing it with the institutional cycle required for treaty amendment and for updating technical annexes. This is a research task that directly tests the falsification condition of the AI application part of Proposition 9. Fourth, research on the institutional design of critical-tier governance in relation to Propositions 9 and 10, which has the character less of empirical verification than of an examination of the technical feasibility of accounting for and controlling compute, and of design research on institutional forms that embed continuous downward revision of thresholds (automatic updating of technical annexes by decision of a governing board, and the like). For Propositions 10 and 2b, since direct empirical verification is constrained in principle as acknowledged in Section 20, the research agenda is limited to "analytical examination of counterfactuals," "content analysis of discourse," and "standing observation of the type of treatment." Long term (continued) — three measurement tasks concerning transition and human foundations. Three items of a different character belong to the long-term division. All share the structure that the framework of measurement itself must be constructed before testing can be carried out. First, estimation of the time constant of transition in Proposition 15. The quantity at the core of the asymmetry that Proposition 15 asserts — ascent requires accumulation and has a time constant measured in years, descent requires no accumulation — is this time constant. The design of the estimation is as set out in 21.2: estimate, by survival analysis of transition cases, the lag from the beginning of accumulation until movement of the centroid is observed. There are two reasons for placing it in the long term. First, instances of upward transition are scarce, and the sample grows only with the passage of the observation period. Second, data measuring the accumulation indicators (the four indicators of Proposition 4, proxy indicators for national brain capital, compute capacity, electricity) retrospectively do not exist, and retrospective measurement requires re-editing of each country's statistics. Until this estimation is carried out, the policy implication of this paper remains the qualitative statement that "a state descends if it does nothing," and does not become material for deciding priorities of resource allocation (Section 20, 20.9(a)). 966 Second, measurement of value-definition capability in Proposition 17. The second part of Proposition 17 (the attribution of the residual) requires that the proxy indicators be fixed in advance and regressed on the residual, and that a residual remain even after controlling for competing explanations — the endowment of complementary assets, national brain capital, the guarantee level, and cell position. As a premise of this test, the three proxy indicators (distinctiveness of objective-setting, consistency of long-horizon resource allocation, rate of creation of new markets) must be composed in an internationally comparable form. Since systems of documents, classifications of budgets, and industrial classifications all differ by country, a common framework must be constructed first for comparison. In addition, since all three indicators are exposed to Goodhart's problem, it is a requirement that the design of measurement be fixed before the indicators are adopted as policy targets. The discipline of not composing them into a single score (Section 17.3.5) is also carried over into this work of construction. Third, measurement of national brain capital in Proposition 18. This is also an item whose implementation the author undertook in 21.5. It is the work of composing proxy indicators for each of the four components — the occupational composition of employment and the distribution of tenure, the number of language-specific technical standards and certifications, the number of registrations under professional supervision by occupation and the presence or absence of systems for renewal of qualifications, and the age composition and years of practical experience of the professional stratum — and joining them to the four indicators of Proposition 4 and to the transformation margin. The reason for placing it in the long term is that securing international comparability is the most difficult part. On the other hand, composition of indicators for a single country starting from Japan can be begun in the short term, and in that sense this item has the temporal structure of short-term commencement, long-term result. This structure is the same as that of the ex ante measurement of the four indicators in H2. Long term (continued) — two measurement tasks concerning scenarios and the constraints on middle powers. Two further items of a different character exist. Both share with the three items above the structure that the framework of measurement itself must first be constructed, but differ in that what must be constructed is not indicators but criteria of determination. First, backtesting of the leading indicators. The set of leading indicators presented in Section 16 and Appendix F was selected as satisfying theoretically the three conditions of Definition 14 — observability, discriminating power, and precedence. But no result of testing condition (ii), discriminating power, against past data is contained in this paper. The work required has three stages. (i) For a given past period, reconstruct the set of indicators retrospectively from public information available at the time (since a test of precedence does not hold if information that became available later is used, temporal consistency of the information set is a requirement). (ii) For the same period, code the state that actually obtained in the vocabulary of S1, S2, and S3. (iii) Test whether the reconstructed indicators separate the coded states before the consequences of those states appear. The 967 greatest obstacle lies in (ii) — this paper has no criterion for coding "the state that actually obtained" in the vocabulary of the scenarios, and to code without a criterion would be to anticipate the conclusion at the stage of coding. The first stage of this task is therefore in fact the construction of coding criteria, and that is the work of establishing rules that determine, for each series of the advance of capability, supplier concentration, and physical constraints, not thresholds but changes of direction. Until this verification is carried out, the leading indicators carry no guarantee of operating as instruments of determination (Section 20, 20.8(e)). Second, the test of Proposition 21 on a middle-power panel. Proposition 21 asserts that states not belonging to the two poles of the Resource-Producing Model are commonly subject to the three constraints of energy, data sovereignty, and value-definition capability, irrespective of differences of region, income level, and political system. The test requires construction of a panel whose population is the group of states excluding the two actors located at M1×C2. What must be measured are three series: (i) the ratio of connectable grid capacity to planned expansion of computing infrastructure, and the price of electricity; (ii) an institutional indicator of whether the state sets for itself the conditions for cross-border transfer of the data of its own language, industry, and administration, and the share of work processed on infrastructure outside the jurisdiction; and (iii) content analysis of whether the statement of objectives in AI-related policy documents consists solely of efficiency indicators. The dependent variable is the maintenance or descent of the centroid of cell position. The difficulty specific to this test lies in the structure of the claim of commonality. Commonality is supported by the non-significance of the interactions between the stratifying factors (region, income level, political system) and the constraint indicators; but a structure that supports a claim by non-rejection of a null hypothesis cannot be distinguished from insufficient power when the sample is small. Coverage of the population — including as far as possible without omission the countries falling under the definition of a middle power — therefore becomes as important as the precision of the indicators. The reason for placing it in the long term is that none of the three series has been constructed in an internationally comparable form. Long term (continued) — measurement tasks concerning leverage and institutional foundations. The seven propositions 22 through 28 distribute across short, medium, and long term. Two are placed in the medium term. First, the study of events of exercise in Proposition 23. The imposition and extension of scope of access-management measures have already occurred several times, and if the inventory levels, numbers of design changes for bypass, numbers of qualifications of alternative sources of supply, and capital investment relating to domestic production of the affected jurisdictions and firms are joined together, difference-in-differences estimation is possible retrospectively. The premise for commencement is to settle the criteria for coding exercise first — how partial exercise, threat, and advance notice are to be handled, and where the event date is to be placed, fixed in advance; this work is itself the first stage of the task (Section 20, 20.9(c)). Second, the inter-jurisdictional comparison of Proposition 25. Classify the work processes of regulated sectors ex ante into critical and peripheral, code the degree of AI in‐ 968 volvement in each process, and match this against the level of development of the three elements of Definition 17. Because access to capability must be controlled for, series for distance from the procurable frontier and for price are composed alongside. An event study using differences in the timing of institutional adoption across jurisdictions may also be used. Four are placed in the long term. First, construction of the leverage panel of Proposition 22. Indispensability is composed from concentration of supply by item, the number of alternative suppliers, and the time required to switch; desirability from the scale of final demand, the number of references by standards outside the jurisdiction, the volume of capital and technology provided, and the level of development of trust infrastructure. There are two reasons for placing it in the long term — that realized data on the time required to switch (lead times for installation, qualification, and ramp-up of equipment) can be recovered only in part from public information, and that this paper has no basis on which to assign weights for combining the two components, so that for the time being it remains a description on an ordinal scale. This paper does not hasten composition. If composition is carried out without a basis for the weights, the conclusion is manufactured at the stage of composition (Section 20, 20.8(g) and (h)). Second, the sectoral panel of indicators of skill formation in Proposition 24. Depth of AI use is measured separately as the rate of use per work process and the rate of use in processes involving judgment, and joined to the distribution of years of experience within an occupation, the pass standard of skill examinations, and the share of practitioners able to judge independently. The requirement specific to this task is separation of the opposing path — because the path by which imported cognition accelerates arrival at practice and the path by which it substitutes for the repetition of practice may operate simultaneously, the design of adoption (whether judgment is substituted for or supported) must be entered as a stratifying factor, or neither path can be identified as predominant. If estimation proceeds without this design, the interpretation is not fixed whichever sign emerges. Third, measurement of the time-constant ratio in Proposition 26. The time to decide of institutions is composed, for each type of procedure (treaty amendment, statutory amendment, amendment of subordinate rules, updating of technical annexes), as the distribution of realized days from proposal to entry into force; the time over which capability changes is composed, for the object of the rule concerned, as the realized period until a change of level meaningful for regulation occurs. The reason for placing it in the long term is that, since the verdict may reverse depending on which procedure is paired with which application, rules of correspondence must be settled first. Fourth, the typology of negotiation cases in Proposition 28. This is descriptive rather than estimative work: classify the means the state used into legal finality, physical security, the granting of permissions for siting and resources, and other, and check whether there are instances in which means classified as "other" generated sustained bargaining power. It is placed in the long term because, so long as the extension of paths other than the three functions is unsettled, it cannot take the form of a test. 969 One item can be begun in the short term: observation of the price difference for data with verifiable provenance in Proposition 27. Comparing in pairs, for data of the same application and the same volume, the consideration and licensing terms of transactions accompanied by proof of provenance and those not so accompanied has existing points of entry for observation in licence agreements, data-provision agreements, and procurement specifications conditioned on the granting of proof of provenance. Of the seven propositions, this one is the closest to existing observation. Four verification tasks concerning the cost of the recommendations. The eight propositions 29 through 36 are uniformly distant in terms of distance from evidence, but divide into four types in terms of feasibility of commencement. They are stated in order. First, direct measurement of the sovereignty premium (the first part of Proposition 30). This is the work of comparing in pairs, for compute of the same generation and the same application, the unit price of use for procurement guaranteed domestically or within an alliance and for procurement from the international market without constraint, and estimating the unit-price difference as a function of the scale of guarantee. It is placed in the medium term, because if contract information on public procurement is joined to the series of unit prices disclosed by operators, it can be composed in part from existing information. But specifying the location of the minimum efficient scale requires observation over a wide range of scales, and observation of a single country is not sufficient. In addition, because economies of scale operate differently for the three functions of Definition 6 — operational capacity, renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition (Section 19.2.5) — a single unit-price difference mixing the three functions has no meaning. The first stage of this task is therefore the design of a measurement that separates unit prices by function. Second, design of a method for estimating expected losses (the second part of Proposition 30). Whereas direct measurement of the sovereignty premium supplies the left-hand side of the justification condition, this task supplies the right-hand side. The right-hand side is composed as the product of the probability of a stoppage of supply and the distribution of the depth of degradation and the time to recovery when supply stops; but this paper has no framework that assigns a probability to the former (Section 18.13). This task is therefore begun not as estimation of the probability but as a rewriting into a form that derives the guarantee scale justified given a probability — that is, a correspondence table showing what scale is justified under what probability of occurrence, leaving the judgment of probability to the designer. The distributions of depth of degradation and time to recovery are supplied by the dependence indicator of H1 and the AI-outage exercises of Appendix C. In this sense the task depends on H1's preceding it, and belongs to the latter half of the medium term. Third, verification of the sufficiency of the minimum indicator set (Proposition 36). This is the work of applying the comprehensive version and the minimum-set version in parallel to the same object and measuring the rate of agreement of the determinations. Before commencement, this task must satisfy two premises — specification of concrete 970

candidates for the minimum set (at present deferred to a revision of the appendices; Section 19.7.6), and measurement of the level of administrative capacity as a criterion for stratification (at present there is no indicator). What can be begun in the short term is therefore the first premise, that is, the specification of candidates; measurement of the rate of agreement itself belongs to the medium term. This task is closer to practice than any other, in that it determines whether the framework of this paper has implementability. The success or failure of the reduced and distributed model of implementation presented in Section 18.2.1 in the Japanese context also depends on this verification. Fourth, backtesting of the discrimination protocol. This is an extension of the task of backtesting the leading indicators, but because determination is entrusted to a combination of indicators rather than to a single indicator, the object of verification shifts — what is to be verified is not the discriminating power of individual indicators but whether the combination generates different patterns under the three scenarios. The work has three stages: (i) reconstruct the set of indicators for a given past period from public information available at the time, (ii) code, for the same period, the state that actually obtained in the vocabulary of S1, S2, and S3, and (iii) test whether the reconstructed combination separates the coded states before the consequences become manifest. The greatest obstacle is the absence of coding criteria in (ii), as acknowledged in 20.8(f). In addition, because determination by combination has more degrees of freedom than a single indicator, verification cannot be distinguished from ex post rationalization unless the decision rule is fixed in advance. The first stage of this task is therefore the ex ante fixing of the decision rule, which is the work of writing into the monitoring table of Appendix F "which set of indicators, moving in which direction, is to be determined as which phase." It is placed in the long term. Verification tasks concerning the export of integrated systems — headed by verification of the conditions for an AI Foundry State (Proposition 39) and construction of a measurement framework for portability. The AI Foundry Model to which Definition 21 gives a name brings in no new empirical content — whether the type in question obtains reduces to whether the four conditions of Proposition 39 ((i) domain-specific national brain capital, (ii) trust infrastructure, (iii) an operating record within the home jurisdiction, (iv) portability) are simultaneously satisfied for a pair of jurisdiction and domain. The consequence of the naming for the research agenda is therefore clear — verification of the conditions for an AI Foundry State is nothing other than measurement of the four conditions of Proposition 39. Together with this, the portion of the judgment of transferability shown in Section 12.1.7 (Table 27) that can be tested empirically — the judgment that the position of an AI Foundry State rests on desirability rather than on indispensability — is opened to falsification by measuring, for the jurisdiction and domain concerned, the cost required to bypass and the time required to switch. The verification of Propositions 38 through 40 divides into three in feasibility of commencement. Placed first in priority is the construction of a measurement framework for portability. There are two reasons. First, since Proposition 39 states that of the four conditions (iv) portability is the most restrictive, the centre of gravity of this paper's claim rests on the 971 condition most difficult to measure — so long as the centre of gravity cannot be measured, Proposition 39 has no point of entry for testing. Second, since (b) the domain-specificity of judgment in Proposition 40 is the same variable seen from the recipient side, the construction of a single framework opens the tests of two propositions at once. The procedure of construction begins by setting up items corresponding to the four paths of dependence identified in Section 12.3.4 — the share of the design of work processes that references specific statutory provisions, forms, and deadlines; the number of points at which the authority to judge depends on jurisdiction-specific qualification systems; the degree to which the format, granularity, and process of generation of the data the system uses are specific to the home jurisdiction's institutions; and the degree to which the interface conforms to published standards. As to the third path (unstated premises), because itemization in advance is difficult in principle, reliance for the time being on induction from ex post analysis of failures in attempts at transfer is unavoidable. This asymmetry — three can be measured in advance, one appears only ex post — should be stated as a limitation of the framework from the outset. Two are placed in the medium term. First, classification of procurement modes in Proposition 40 and observation of their correspondence with the three variables. The work of classifying modes from published procurement records can be begun with existing data, and for (a) the severity of the consequences of failure and (c) reversibility among the three variables, proxy indicators may be borrowed from existing frameworks of regulatory impact assessment and risk assessment. Because this task shares the same data design as the test of Proposition 24 (stratification by procurement mode rather than by depth of use; Section 17.4.5), it is efficient to construct the two as a single panel. Second, systematic collection of instances of the export of integrated systems. That instances available for the tests of Propositions 38 through 40 are at present thin (Section 20.10(g)) does not mean that instances do not exist; it means that a set of instances coded along the five elements of Definition 20 does not exist. The unit of collection is the pair of jurisdiction and domain, and what is to be recorded is the range of elements transferred, the presence or absence of portability clauses in the contract, the audit rights and data ownership reserved to the recipient, and the record of the transition. This work is a premise both of the comparison in Proposition 39 and of the observation in Proposition 40, and is the one most liable to be delayed in commencement. One is placed in the long term: formalization of the upper bound of self-reinforcement in Proposition 38. Section 12.5.4 identified three constraints (negotiation over portability, the existence of competing systems, and obsolescence), but this paper does not supply the degree of attenuation (Section 20.9(d)). What is required is a formula that, with the share of system-specific conformity investment, the number of competing systems, and the speed of obsolescence of the system as variables, places an upper bound on the appreciation of desirability; and this is a task of theory before it is a task of testing. This task pairs with the coarseness of the coding of exercise similarly left open for Proposition 23 (20.9(c)) — for the two components of leverage, the asymmetry of sign has been shown, while the magnitude has been shown for neither component. Treating the dynamics of 972 the two components at the level of magnitude is the remaining work that would complete the theory of the second axis. Verification tasks concerning the restoration of consistency — refinement of the design principle of the interface, and estimation of the threshold that divides lock-in from indispensability. Propositions 41 and 42, by narrowing the conditions under which this paper's claims hold, require two new observations. These two are added to the research agenda. First, refinement of the design principle of the interface. Proposition 41 states that an explicit interface is a necessary condition of compatibility, but does not supply a rule for where to draw the interface (Section 20.11(e)). What is required is a procedure for judging, for any domain of work, which elements belong to the jurisdiction-specific layer and which to the portable core. The work has three stages — (i) creating rules for coding which of the four paths of jurisdiction-dependence (reference to statutory provisions, the structure of occupations and qualifications, unstated premises, and the structure of data) operates for each of the five elements of Definition 20 (access to capability, the design of incorporation into work processes, arrangements for the allocation of liability, proof of conformity, and the human capability that carries out operation and verification); (ii) carrying out this coding for several domains and obtaining the cross-domain distribution of the depth of the interface (the share of the system occupied by the portable core); and (iii) measuring the cost of making the interface explicit — the efficiency lost by a separated structure relative to a structure directed at a single jurisdiction, the cost of coordination across the interface, and the cost of maintaining specification documents — and estimating the point at which it balances against the benefit obtained from compatibility. The third stage corresponds directly to the absence acknowledged in Section 20.9(h). This task is placed in the medium term — the first stage can be begun by examining existing design documents and contracts, while the second stage onward requires an accumulation of instances. Even if the task is completed, however, there is a strong possibility that no general solution will be obtained. The determination of the location of the interface belongs to the judgment of those who hold practical knowledge of the domain concerned, and that capability for judgment is itself the content of the national brain capital of Definition 11 (Section 12.3.7). What is obtained is not a rule but a coding framework that supports determination. Second, estimation of the threshold that divides lock-in from indispensability. Proposition 42(i) shows that the two are questions posed about different sets, and derived the measurement rule that a high level of lock-in is not evidence of indispensability unless accompanied by an indicator of supplier concentration. But at what level supplier concentration turns constraint within an individual relationship into non-substitutability within the system has not been formalized (Section 20.9(e)). What is required is (i) specification of the unit for counting the number of actors able to supply a system of the same kind in the domain concerned — whether the unit is the jurisdiction or the supplying actor, and at what granularity the domain is delimited; (ii) estimation of the cost of bypass as a func‐ 973 tion of concentration; and (iii) identification, on that function, of the interval that divides the level at which bypass "exists as a costly option" from the level at which it "does not substantially exist." Because this task shares the same data design as the test of Proposition 23 (the panel of chokepoint concentration) and as the dependence indicator of Definition 4 in Section 13, it is efficient to construct the three as a single panel. It is placed in the long term — the time series of concentration by domain is itself not prepared (Section 18.11.2), and instances of the export of integrated systems in AI are also thin. Because this task simultaneously supplies measurement of (b) among the three variables of the upper bound in Proposition 42(ii), it connects to the task of formalizing the upper bound of Proposition 38 placed above. Taking the two tasks together: what this paper has supplied concerning the dynamics of the two components of leverage is the structure of sign and of upper bound, and the magnitude is still shown for neither component. A property common to these four tasks is stated here. None is work undertaken in order to support the claims of this paper; all are work undertaken in order to determine whether the recommendations of this paper are implementable. Whereas the preceding measurement tasks ask whether this paper's account is correct, these four ask whether this paper's design works. If the former is false, the theory is wrong; if the latter is false, the theory is right but unusable. The point of placing Section 19 is to put this second question inside this paper. A property common to these measurement tasks is stated. In every case, only once the indicators are constructed does the corresponding proposition become capable of being rejected. That is, these are not work undertaken in order to support the claims of this paper, but work undertaken in order to make the claims of this paper falsifiable. As Section 20 (20.8(a) and (c)) acknowledged, national brain capital and value-definition capability are both delimited by negation, and so long as measurement frameworks are lacking they may function as a destination to which unexplained differences are attributed. The only means of removing this danger is the construction of measurement. The two items concerning scenarios and the constraints on middle powers have the same property — the leading indicators become instruments of determination only once their discriminating power is tested, and Proposition 21 becomes capable of being rejected only once a middle-power panel is constructed. The seven items concerning leverage and institutional foundations have the same property as well — the independence of leverage from position is opened to testing only once a panel of the two components is constructed; the event study of Proposition 23 holds only once criteria for coding exercise are settled; the contested point in Proposition 24 moves toward settlement only once a stratified design separating the opposing path is obtained; and the falsification condition of Proposition 26 operates only once rules of correspondence for the time-constant ratio are settled. What the research agenda enumerates, then, is not new conclusions but a list of the work that must be completed first in order to make new conclusions falsifiable. There is one tension in this prioritization. The propositions of highest centrality (3, 11, 14 — non-equivalence of the nine cells, inter-layer transmission, and national redefinition) 974 can none of them be verified before the medium term. The propositions that can be begun in the short term (6b, 7, 12, 13) are not peripheral to the theoretical structure of this paper, but neither are they central. Whatever the results of short-term verification, therefore, the core theses of this paper are neither supported nor rejected — this fact is not to be taken as pride in the defensibility of the theory but to be acknowledged as slowness of verification. A structure in which a theory is shielded from short-term evidence is itself a weakness of the theory. Writing falsification conditions in a testable form does not resolve this tension. What it supplies is a state in which a verdict is yielded when the work is begun in the medium term, not an advancement of the time at which work can be begun. One point of ordering has changed, however — because the four indicators of H2 must be measured before an event of generational change, estimation may be medium-term but measurement must begin in the short term. The design requirement of ex ante measurement governs the order of commencement. The breadth of the explanatory range does not weaken this tension but strengthens it. Of the five propositions concerning transition and human foundations, the two this paper regards as most important — Proposition 15 (asymmetry of cell transition) and Proposition 18 (the non-replicability of national brain capital) — both fall into the long-term division. That is, the breadth of the explanatory range is accompanied by the size of the distance from evidence (Section 20, 20.16). Two responses can be put in place by this paper against this structure. First, for the items requiring ex ante measurement — the four indicators of H2, the proxy indicators of national brain capital, and the proxy indicators of Proposition 17 — bring the beginning of measurement forward into the short term even where estimation is long-term. Second, for the items using events that have already occurred — Proposition 11, Proposition 16, and the necessity part of Proposition 19 — make use of the advantage that estimation can be carried out retrospectively because the events are past, and begin them early in the medium term. What these two advances shorten is the time of commencement, not the time at which results emerge. The weakness that the theory is shielded from short-term evidence is not thereby resolved. Scenarios and the constraints on middle powers strengthen this tension by a further degree. Propositions 20 and 21 are the two propositions this paper places closest to practice, and yet the former cannot be entered into testing until criteria for coding phases are constructed, and the latter until a middle-power panel is constructed. That is, the parts that appear most useful to the reader — the set of investments to be made in any world, and the constraints one's own country commonly faces as a middle power — are also the parts furthest from evidence. This correspondence is not accidental. Usefulness comes from the generality of a claim, and the more general the claim, the larger the population and the observation period required for testing. The reader is asked not to invert the order that the parts of this paper that appear most useful are the most provisional. 975 21.8 Concluding Remarks This paper is not a prediction. It does not predict which resource AI will come to resemble, whether the critical tier will arrive, or which country will settle into which cell. What this paper has presented is a conditional theory of design — claims of the form: if a certain condition obtains, what institutions become the conditions of survival for that cell. This form was chosen not only out of caution. On one side there is the record that statements about technology and states written in the form of prediction have repeatedly turned out wrong; on the other, the record that predictions that turned out wrong have long constrained the direction of policy. A conditional theory of design is a form in which the reader can determine for himself the applicability of a claim by observing whether the antecedent has been satisfied. Falsification conditions were attached to every proposition in order to make this determination possible. On that basis, one claim without an antecedent is left standing from the analysis of this paper. A regime is not an era that arrives but a contingency that is constructed. This proposition, which Redefinition Capitalism (Kadowaki, 2026g) stated at the level of capital allocation, holds still more strongly at the level of the state. Position on the nine cells is not assigned by technological necessity, but constructed by the accumulation of commitments in institutions, investment, and time — or else, by the neglect of construction, assigned by the decisions of others. Just as critical-tier governance is an institution for which it is too late to design after arrival (Proposition 10), the position of a state is likewise one for which it is too late to move after the position has been fixed. What Japan experienced in 1973 was at once the damage of an exogenous shock and an occasion for rewriting the state's definition of value. The rewriting did not begin after the shock occurred: the shock merely gave direction to the resource-saving technology and industrial transformation capability that had been accumulating before it. For a country lacking that accumulation, the same shock appeared not as direction but only as damage. The same can be said of AI. Whether an AI outage occurs is a matter of prediction, and this paper has no answer. But whether, when it occurs, it appears as direction or only as damage is determined by the thickness of the slow complements accumulated beforehand — institutions, trust, electricity, people, and physical interfaces. And that accumulation either is being carried out now or is not. This paper presented the framework of national value models in order to name the object and the order of this accumulation in a form that can be discussed. Whether the objects named are the right ones is to be verified along the map of Table 10, and the theory of this paper is written on the premise that it will be corrected, or rejected, by that verification. Here, for the reader who has finished this paper, the form of the questions into which its framework can be translated is set out. This paper is written in Japanese for Japanese readers, but the addressee of the framework is not Japan. The devices of the nine cells, geoeconomic leverage, the asymmetry of transition, the governance of the critical tier, the movement of the residual from efficiency to definition, and the three world scenarios all operate in the same form for every state outside the two poles of the Resource-Producing 976 Model — and for organizations that, like states, must choose their own position. The whole of this paper can therefore be translated into the following four questions. The first question: where does your country or organization stand among the nine cells? This question must be answered by observation rather than by self-perception. Cell position is assigned using only four quantities — capability distance from the frontier, net exports and imports of AI-related goods and services, supplier concentration of procurement, and whether access-management measures apply — in order to separate the features used for assignment from the outcomes to be tested (Proposition 3). For the position assigned, the conditions of survival and modes of failure specific to that cell are in Sections 7 through 9, and the conditions under which the Transformation Model stands at the frontier tier are in Section 10. The second question: for which scenario are you preparing? The content of preparation differs according to whether S1, S2, or S3 is presupposed. Since this paper does not state which will come, what it supplies for this question is not an answer but observables that identify which branch is in progress before its consequences become manifest (Definition 14). Avoiding determination by a single indicator, determining by the concurrence of multiple indicators, and mapping in advance the investment items to be reviewed when the determination changes — this is the substance of preparation. The third question: by what can you push back? Position on the nine cells does not determine what can be done when conditions are changed from outside. Indispensability — the cost and dysfunction that others would incur in attempting to bypass one's own country — and desirability — the degree to which others voluntarily seek partnership with one's own country — are variables independent of position (Proposition 22), and since they cannot be derived from position, they must be measured separately. The procedure for measuring them is in Appendix G. What must also be confirmed is that indispensability held is an asset that diminishes when used (Proposition 23), and that trust, one component of desirability, can be built as institutions — rules on the allocation of liability, conformity assessment, and insurance (Definition 17; Proposition 25). The fourth question: what will you execute first as no-regret actions? At a stage where discrimination among scenarios is difficult, the priority of investment should be decided by robustness across scenarios rather than by height of expected value (Proposition 20). National brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, and operational readiness have positive marginal value in every world, whereas holding frontier-class computing infrastructure of one's own is scenario-dependent. The order is to place the former first and to stage the latter after confirmation of the leading indicators. The procedures for running these four questions with the facts of one's own country or organization have been separated from the body and placed in the appendices. Appendix D handles the first question (diagnosis of current position, target position, and the accumulation that is lacking); Appendix E handles the measurement that is its premise (transition possibilities across the nine by nine cells, proxy indicators for the four components of national brain capital, and proxy indicators for value-definition capability); Appendix G handles the third question (inventory of the nodes one's own country holds, estimation of the time required to switch, assessment of the five components of desirabil‐ 977 ity, inspection of the three elements of trust infrastructure, and the conditions required to move to an adjacent quadrant); and Appendix F handles the second and fourth questions (quarterly monitoring of the leading indicators, and a correspondence table of investment items to be reviewed if the determination changes). Section 18 is a demonstration of running this procedure to the end on the single example of Japan, and is in that sense a worked example of the appendices. The reader need not import the conclusions of Section 18. What is to be imported is only the quantities to be measured and the order in which they are compared. This paper makes no appeal to any particular country. What any country should do is a function of that country's resources, institutions, history, and geography, and lies outside this paper. What this paper does is to hand to the reader the form of the questions, the quantities to be measured in order to answer them, and the design of the observation by which to know when the answers have changed. To hand over a framework and to recommend a conclusion are different things. The former creates a state in which the reader can determine for himself; the latter has the author perform the determination on the reader's behalf. As Section 20 acknowledged as a structural conflict of interest, the author of this paper has business opportunities in the direction this framework recommends. It is precisely for that reason that what this paper should place last is not a recommendation but a procedure. A word is added in the concluding remarks about this paper's having given a name to one type. A name supplies visibility and at the same time creates a path for misreading. The name "AI Foundry Model" (Definition 21) makes it possible to refer in a single word to the configuration of capturing value in the process of transformation without owning frontier capability, to connect it to other arguments, and to name it as an object of criticism — this is the visibility the name supplies. But the same name is also a path along which a property that does not transfer, namely the non-substitutability that a semiconductor foundry retains through capital specificity, is silently imported. This paper placed the judgment of transferability (Section 12.1.7; Table 27) alongside the naming in order to close that path. Only one thing is asked of readers who use the name — that when borrowing a name, they confirm at the same time how far the name can be borrowed. This is nothing other than the application to this paper's own naming of the discipline it imposed on the metaphors of others in Section 3. Finally, the meaning of what has been said about what this paper does not treat is positioned here as discipline rather than as limitation. Section 20 (20.14) declared, together with the reason for not treating each, the subjects that this paper examined in the course of its conception but deliberately did not treat — the post-truth condition and the redesign of democracy, the state as a provider of existential purpose or meaning, civilizational-historical arguments about the multipolarization of intelligence, and the development of Compute-Dollar as a theory of currency. This declaration is not a confession of failure to cover everything. It is the consequence of a judgment not to exempt any subject from the discipline this paper imposed on all its propositions — that each proposition be 978 written with a falsification condition. If a single claim to which no falsification condition can be given were admitted into the framework, that claim would survive even when all the other propositions had been falsified, and a structure would arise in which the surviving claim appeared to guarantee the continued existence of the framework as a whole. Drawing a boundary is the operation that prevents that structure from forming. To declare the range one does not treat strengthens rather than weakens the claims about the range one does treat — because a claim with an explicit boundary can be rejected by observation inside that boundary. This paper does not claim comprehensiveness. This paper is a limited set of instruments, and that very limitation is what makes it a falsifiable document. Finally, one record is left of the discipline of handling that this paper imposed on itself. Of the points that may be directed at this paper's framework, those bearing on the skeleton of the theory are incorporated into the body as propositions rather than left as an enumeration of limitations — non-orthogonality of the axes corresponds to Proposition 29, the sovereignty premium and the lower bound of scale to Proposition 30, inter-layer conflict of interest to Proposition 31, the conditions for the propagation of value-definition capability to Proposition 32, the outflow of brain capital to Proposition 33, the mismatch of time scales to Proposition 34, hysteresis of securitization to Proposition 35, and administrative capacity constraints to Proposition 36. That Section 19 (the cost of sovereignty) is placed as an independent section is likewise in order to have a place within the body where the cost of the recommendations is treated. Points not bearing on the skeleton are handled within the individual sections, and the inclusion in Section 18 of an examination of the institutional preconditions that made the response of 1973 possible, and of an acceptance of the limits of the measurability of the judgment indicators, are examples of this. But rendering something into a proposition is not a solution. Rendering into a proposition is the operation of rewriting a limitation that has been pointed out into the form of a falsifiable claim; it is not the operation of removing the limitation. Section 20 acknowledges, by theme, the limitations that remain even after this rendering — that the verification anchor holds only for a limited period; that part of the explanatory power of the matrix was lost as a result of admitting the non-uniformity of the nine cells; that this paper does not compute the figures for the sovereignty premium and the fiscal ceiling; that it does not present a design for the allocation of the cost burden; that it makes no legal judgment about consistency with international commitments; that the danger of value-definition capability as a residual concept is not closed; that the measurement framework for national brain capital is provisional and that the criticism that "a concept that cannot be measured has been placed at the base of the theory" cannot at present be fully rebutted; that the response of betting on slow complements remains an indication of direction; that no response to the outflow of brain capital has been designed; that the sufficiency of the minimum indicator set has not been verified; that the transfer from the theory of the enterprise does not capture the state's inclusiveness, responsibility for redistribution, and costs of building consensus; that the backtesting of the discrimination protocol has not 979 been carried out; that the degree to which the possibility of choice is itself exogenously determined has not been estimated; and that no method of estimating expected losses has been supplied for the dilemma of self-provision. In addition, Section 20.13 states that the political neutrality this paper placed as its highest discipline carries two costs: that normative questions cannot be treated, and that explanatory power is constrained because motives cannot be analysed. Accordingly, this paper does not claim to be a "complete theory." What it claims is only these three things. First, that it has presented a coordinate system and a vocabulary for discussing the position of the state in the age of AI, as a set of propositions accompanied by falsification conditions. Second, that it has left in the body, without concealment, the points that may be directed at the framework, either rendered into propositions or acknowledged as limitations. Third, that it has counted the costs that accompany its recommendations within the same body as the recommendations. None of these three means that the theory is correct. What they mean is only that a path for detecting the error, should the theory be wrong, has been prepared inside this paper. The 44 statements of Table 10 are the list of that path, and the acknowledgments of Section 20 are the list of the places along that path that have not yet been traversed. Some of the remaining limitations may be dissolved by the accumulation of observation — the proxy indicators of national brain capital, the unit-price difference of the sovereignty premium, and the backtesting of the discrimination protocol will all move toward settlement as the work of measurement proceeds. Others may not be dissolved — the emptying of the verification anchor proceeds on the side of technology, the exogenous constraints on the space of options lie outside this paper's unit of analysis, and the cost of political neutrality remains so long as the discipline is maintained. This paper has recorded these two kinds separately. Recording the distinction determines what is to be begun next. This paper is not a final form. This paper is in an intermediate state, to be rewritten in response to what is pointed out. That this document is open to that rewriting has been shown by the two forms of falsification conditions and acknowledged limitations, and this is taken to have been the minimum obligation this paper owes to its readers. With the addition of Layer Zero, this series has come to have four layers running from the state to the individual. But the completion of the layers is not the completion of the description. The question at the centre of each layer — how to measure the capability of creating future value — is unresolved at every layer. This paper has extended that question to the level of the state and has gone no further than presenting the first design of measurement (Appendix C). What should come next is not the addition of theory but the construction of measurement. 980

22. References This section consolidates the works cited in the body of Sections 2 through 21 and in Appendices A through H. The arrangement is: references in Western languages (alphabetical by author surname), followed by references in Japanese and primary sources (Japaneselanguage works in Japanese syllabary order, followed by primary legislation, treaties, government documents, and materials of international organizations, arranged by issuing body). Style follows APA 7th edition. Japanese-language works are given in romanized transliteration of the original title with an English translation in square brackets, and the sequence of those entries follows the syllabary order of the Japanese edition rather than English alphabetical order; primary sources retain their formal names, numbers, dates of promulgation and entry into force, and URLs. The following discipline for the recording of recently published web materials, official gazettes, news reports, and peer-reviewed articles is applied to every item. (i) URLs are recorded only for the location, at the level of the document, at which the statement in question can be identified; where a URL is recorded it is placed as a rule at the end of the entry, and no period is placed immediately after it (no URL is given for materials for which only the entry page at the root of a domain is known). Further, for materials whose URL path contains wording indicating the designation, the cause, or the location of an event, this section, in accordance with the editorial policy (political neutrality) set out in Section 1, does not record the URL, and identifies the material instead by issuing body, document name, and date. Within the scope of this section, three items fall under this rule. Every absence of a URL is a deliberate omission and does not mean that the material cannot be identified. (ii) DOIs are recorded at the end of the entry in the form https://doi.org/ only where the source has assigned one — within the scope of this section, no item falls under this rule. (iii) Retrieval dates are not recorded for any item. APA 7th edition calls for a retrieval date only for materials whose content is updated from time to time and whose version cannot be identified, whereas the materials recorded in this section are limited to those identifiable by version, date of publication, or document number. (iv) Dates of promulgation, of entry into force, and of publication in an official gazette are appended in parentheses immediately after the title for primary legislation, official gazettes, and government documents (for example: "…. Interim final rule, 90 FR 4544 (published in the Federal Register on 15 January 2025)"). For materials such as news reports and newsletters, in which the date of issue itself serves as the identifier of the version, the date is placed in the year position immediately after the name of the author (for example: "Nihon Keizai Shimbun (2025, August)."). 981 References in Western Languages Aarne, O., Fist, T., & Withers, C. (2024). Secure, governable chips: Using on-chip mechanisms to manage national security risks from AI and advanced computing. Center for a New American Security. Acemoglu, D. (2024). The simple macroeconomics of AI (NBER Working Paper No. 32487). National Bureau of Economic Research. https://www.nber.org/papers/w32487 Aegis Hedging. (2025, July 9). EIA lifts near-term crude price forecasts. https://aegis-hedging.com/insights/ eia-lifts-near-term-crude-price-forecasts Afina, Y., & Lewis, P. (2023, June 28). The nuclear governance model won't work for AI [Expert comment]. Chatham House. Aghion, P., Jones, B. F., & Jones, C. I. (2019). Artificial intelligence and economic growth. In A. Agrawal, J. Gans, & A. Goldfarb (Eds.), The economics of artificial intelligence: An agenda (pp. 237–282). University of Chicago Press. Akamatsu, K. (1962). A historical pattern of economic growth in developing countries. The Developing Economies, Preliminary Issue No. 1, 3–25. Akerlof, G. A. (1970). The market for “lemons”: Quality uncertainty and the market mechanism. Quarterly Journal of Economics, 84(3), 488–500. Alemohammad, S., Casco-Rodriguez, J., Luzi, L., Humayun, A. I., Babaei, H., LeJeune, D., Siahkoohi, A., & Baraniuk, R. G. (2024). Self-consuming generative models go MAD. In Proceedings of the Twelfth International Conference on Learning Representations (ICLR 2024) (arXiv: 2307.01850). Altman, S. (2024, September). The intelligence age [Essay]. Amazon Web Services. (2025). Summary of the Amazon DynamoDB service disruption in the Northern Virginia (us-east-1) region. https://aws.amazon.com/message/101925 Amsden, A. H. (1989). Asia's next giant: South Korea and late industrialization. Oxford University Press. Arab News. (2025). Saudi Arabia's 2024 budget revenues. https://www.arabnews.com/node/2590103/ business-economy Arab News. (2026, August 4). Aramco second-quarter and half-year 2026 results. https://www.arabnews. com/node/2653315/business-economy Arms Control Association. (2026a). The Biological Weapons Convention (BWC) at a glance [Fact sheet]. Arms Control Association. (2026b). The Chemical Weapons Convention (CWC) at a glance [Fact sheet]. Arms Control Association. (2026c). The Missile Technology Control Regime at a glance [Fact sheet]. Argote, L., & Ingram, P. (2000). Knowledge transfer: A basis for competitive advantage in firms. Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes, 82(1), 150–169. Arrow, K. J. (1962). The economic implications of learning by doing. Review of Economic Studies, 29(3), 155–173. Arrow, K. J. (1963). Uncertainty and the welfare economics of medical care. American Economic Review, 53(5), 941–973. 982 Baldwin, C. Y., & Clark, K. B. (2000). Design rules: The power of modularity. MIT Press. Baldwin, R., & Ito, T. (2021). The smile curve: Evolving sources of value added in manufacturing. Canadian Journal of Economics, 54(4), 1842–1880. Barney, J. (1991). Firm resources and sustained competitive advantage. Journal of Management, 17(1), 99–120. Beason, R., & Weinstein, D. E. (1996). Growth, economies of scale, and targeting in Japan (1955–1990). Review of Economics and Statistics, 78(2), 286–295. Beblawi, H., & Luciani, G. (Eds.). (1987). The rentier state. Croom Helm. Bengio, Y., et al. (2025). International AI Safety Report (1st ed., published January 29, 2025; Interim Report May 2024; Key Update October 2025). Bengio, Y., et al. (2026). International AI Safety Report 2026 (published February 3, 2026). Bipartisan Policy Center. (n.d.). How the U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve works. https://bipartisanpolicy. org/explainer/how-the-u-s-strategic-petroleum-reserve-works/ Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System. (2025, October 6). The state of AI competition in advanced economies. FEDS Notes. https://www.federalreserve.gov/econres/notes/feds-notes/thestate- of-ai-competition-in-advanced-economies-20251006.html Borealis. (2026, March 31). OMV and XRG complete transactions to create Borouge International [Press release]. https://www.borealisgroup.com/news/omv-and-xrg-complete-transactions-tocreate- borouge-international-boosting-global-chemicals-leadership Bradford, A. (2020). The Brussels effect: How the European Union rules the world. Oxford University Press. Brattle Group. (2024, September). Value of lost load study for the ERCOT region. Bresnahan, T. F., & Trajtenberg, M. (1995). General purpose technologies “Engines of growth”? Journal of Econometrics, 65(1), 83–108. Breznitz, D. (2007). Innovation and the state: Political choice and strategies for growth in Israel, Taiwan, and Ireland. Yale University Press. Briggs, J., & Kodnani, D. (2023, March 26). The potentially large effects of artificial intelligence on economic growth. Goldman Sachs Global Economics Analyst. Broeders, D., Cristiano, F., & Kaminska, M. (2023). In search of digital sovereignty and strategic autonomy: Normative power Europe to the test of its geopolitical ambitions. JCMS: Journal of Common Market Studies, 61(5), 1261–1280. Brunnschweiler, C. N., & Bulte, E. H. (2008). The resource curse revisited and revised: A tale of paradoxes and red herrings. Journal of Environmental Economics and Management, 55(3), 248–264. Brynjolfsson, E., Li, D., & Raymond, L. R. (2025). Generative AI at work. Quarterly Journal of Economics, 140(2), 889–942. Brynjolfsson, E., Rock, D., & Syverson, C. (2021). The productivity J-curve: How intangibles complement general purpose technologies. American Economic Journal: Macroeconomics, 13(1), 333–372. Caldecott, B. (Ed.). (2018). Stranded assets and the environment: Risk, resilience and opportunity. Routledge. 983 Callon, S. (1995). Divided sun: MITI and the breakdown of Japanese high-tech industrial policy, 1975–1993. Stanford University Press. Cameron, D. R. (1978). The expansion of the public economy: A comparative analysis. American Political Science Review, 72(4), 1243–1261. Carbon Tracker Initiative. (2011). Unburnable carbon: Are the world’s financial markets carrying a carbon bubble? Center for Strategic and International Studies [CSIS]. (2024). Understanding the Biden administration’s updated export controls. Cloudflare. (2025). Cloudflare outage on November 18, 2025 [Post-mortem blog post]. CNBC. (2025, August 27). Saudi Arabia wants to be world's third-largest AI provider, HUMAIN CEO says. https://www.cnbc.com/2025/08/27/saudi-arabia-wants-to-be-worlds-third-largest-aiprovider- humain.html Coalition for Content Provenance and Authenticity. (2024). Content Credentials: C2PA technical specification (Version 2.1, September 20, 2024). Coase, R. H. (1937). The nature of the firm. Economica, 4(16), 386–405. Cohen, W. M., & Levinthal, D. A. (1990). Absorptive capacity: A new perspective on learning and innovation. Administrative Science Quarterly, 35(1), 128–152. Corden, W. M., & Neary, J. P. (1982). Booming sector and de-industrialisation in a small open economy. The Economic Journal, 92(368), 825–848. Corrado, C., Hulten, C., & Sichel, D. (2005). Measuring capital and technology: An expanded framework. In C. Corrado, J. Haltiwanger, & D. Sichel (Eds.), Measuring capital in the new economy. University of Chicago Press. Cottier, B., Rahman, R., Fattorini, L., Maslej, N., & Owen, D. (2024). The rising costs of training frontier AI models (arXiv:2405.21015). Epoch AI. Couldry, N., & Mejias, U. A. (2019). The costs of connection: How data is colonizing human life and appropriating it for capitalism. Stanford University Press. Covington & Burling LLP. (2021). An overview of the recast EU dual-use regulation. Crawford, K. (2021). Atlas of AI: Power, politics, and the planetary costs of artificial intelligence. Yale University Press. David, P. A. (1990). The dynamo and the computer: An historical perspective on the modern productivity paradox. American Economic Review, 80(2), 355–361. Davies, H., & Ellis, P. (2000). Porter's Competitive Advantage of Nations: Time for the final judgement? Journal of Management Studies, 37(8), 1189–1213. DeepSeek-AI. (2024). DeepSeek-V3 technical report. DeepSeek-AI. (2025). DeepSeek-R1: Incentivizing reasoning capability in LLMs via reinforcement learning. Nature (published September 17, 2025). DefenseScoop. (2025, July 14). Pentagon awards contracts to four commercial firms for frontier AI projects. Dell'Acqua, F., et al. (2023). Navigating the jagged technological frontier (Harvard Business School Working Paper No. 24-013). Dixit, A. K., & Pindyck, R. S. (1994). Investment under uncertainty. Princeton University Press. 984 Economics Observatory. (n.d.). Why did Venezuela's economy collapse? https://www.economicsobservatory. com/why-did-venezuelas-economy-collapse Ehrlich, I., & Becker, G. S. (1972). Market insurance, self-insurance, and self-protection. Journal of Political Economy, 80(4), 623–648. Electricity Consumers Resource Council [ELCON]. (2004, February). The economic impacts of the August 2003 blackout. Energy Connects. (2026, July 22). One billion barrels of emergency stocks remain in oil reserves, IEA says. https://www.energyconnects.com/opinion/features/2026/july/one-billion-barrels-ofemergency- stocks-remain-in-oil-reserves-iea-says/ Epoch AI. (2025). LLM inference prices have fallen rapidly but unequally across tasks [Data insight]. https://epoch.ai/data-insights/llm-inference-price-trends Epoch AI. (2026, May 29). Open models lag state-of-the-art closed models by 4 months [Data insight]. https://epoch.ai/data-insights/open-closed-eci-gap EuroHPC Joint Undertaking. (2024–2025). Selection of AI Factories [Announcements of December 10, 2024; March 12, 2025; October 10, 2025]. European Commission. (2025). InvestAI and AI Gigafactories. https://commission.europa.eu/topics/ competitiveness/competitiveness-coordination-tool-projects/ai-gigafactories_en European Commission. (2026, May 5). EU and Japan accelerate cooperation on AI, data, quantum and chips [Press release]. Evans, P. (1995). Embedded autonomy: States and industrial transformation. Princeton University Press. Farrell, J., & Klemperer, P. (2007). Coordination and lock-in: Competition with switching costs and network effects. In M. Armstrong & R. Porter (Eds.), Handbook of Industrial Organization (Vol. 3, pp. 1967–2072). Elsevier. Farrell, H., & Newman, A. L. (2019). Weaponized interdependence: How global economic networks shape state coercion. International Security, 44(1), 42–79. Financial Stability Board [FSB]. (2023, December). Enhancing third-party risk management and oversight: A toolkit for financial institutions and financial authorities. Floridi, L. (2020). The fight for digital sovereignty: What it is, and why it matters, especially for the EU. Philosophy & Technology, 33, 369–378. Freeman, C. (1987). Technology policy and economic performance: Lessons from Japan. Frances Pinter. Friesen, G. (2026, July 23). Refining stocks soar as crack spread hits record high in 2026. Forbes. https:// www.forbes.com/sites/garthfriesen/2026/07/23/refining-stocks-soar-as-crack-spread-hitsrecord- high-in-2026/ Fuhrmann, M. (2012). Atomic assistance: How "Atoms for Peace" programs cause nuclear insecurity. Cornell University Press. Fuhrmann, M., & Tkach, B. (2015). Almost nuclear: Introducing the nuclear latency dataset. Conflict Management and Peace Science, 32(4), 443–461. Gereffi, G., Humphrey, J., & Sturgeon, T. (2005). The governance of global value chains. Review of International Political Economy, 12(1), 78–104. 985 Gerschenkron, A. (1962). Economic backwardness in historical perspective. Belknap Press of Harvard University Press. Gerstgrasser, M., Schaeffer, R., Dey, A., Rafailov, R., Sleight, H., Hughes, J., Korbak, T., Agrawal, R., Pai, D., Gromov, A., Roberts, D. A., Yang, D., Donoho, D. L., & Koyejo, S. (2024). Is model collapse inevitable? Breaking the curse of recursion by accumulating real and synthetic data (arXiv: 2404.01413). Gillingham, K., Rapson, D., & Wagner, G. (2016). The rebound effect and energy efficiency policy. Review of Environmental Economics and Policy, 10(1), 68–88. Global Trade Alert. (2025). A widening net: A short history of Chinese export controls on critical raw materials and their usage. Good Jobs First. (2024). Cloudy with a loss of spending control: How data centers are endangering state budgets. https://goodjobsfirst.org/cloudy-with-a-loss-of-spending-control-how-data-centersare- endangering-state-budgets/ Goodhart, C. A. E. (1975). Problems of monetary management: The U.K. experience. Papers in Monetary Economics. Reserve Bank of Australia. GOV.UK. (2026, January). AI Opportunities Action Plan: One year on. UK Government. https:// www.gov.uk/government/publications/ai-opportunities-action-plan-one-year-on Grant, R. M. (1991). Porter's "Competitive Advantage of Nations": An assessment. Strategic Management Journal, 12(7), 535–548. Griffin, J. M., & Neilson, W. S. (1994). The 1985–86 oil price collapse and afterwards: What does game theory add? Economic Inquiry, 32(4), 543–561. Hall, P. A., & Soskice, D. (Eds.). (2001). Varieties of capitalism: The institutional foundations of comparative advantage. Oxford University Press. Haskel, J., & Westlake, S. (2017). Capitalism without capital: The rise of the intangible economy. Princeton University Press. Henderson, R. M., & Clark, K. B. (1990). Architectural innovation: The reconfiguration of existing product technologies and the failure of established firms. Administrative Science Quarterly, 35(1), 9–30. Hendrycks, D., Schmidt, E., & Wang, A. (2025). Superintelligence strategy: Expert version (arXiv: 2503.05628). Hidalgo, C. A., & Hausmann, R. (2009). The building blocks of economic complexity. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, 106(26), 10570–10575. Hidalgo, C. A., Klinger, B., Barabási, A.-L., & Hausmann, R. (2007). The product space conditions the development of nations. Science, 317(5837), 482–487. HM Government. (2026, July). UK financial system strengthened with new safeguards for major technology providers. Hogarth, I. (2018, June). AI nationalism [Essay]. Humphrey, J., & Schmitz, H. (2002). How does insertion in global value chains affect upgrading in industrial clusters? Regional Studies, 36(9), 1017–1027. Industrial Info Resources. (2025, December 17). As global refining slows, producers look to petrochemicals. https://www.industrialinfo.com/iirenergy/industry-news/article/as-global-refiningslows- producers-look-to-petrochemicals--350673 986 Innis, H. A. (1930). The fur trade in Canada. Innis, H. A. (1940). The cod fisheries. International Energy Agency [IEA]. (2025a, April). Energy and AI. https://www.iea.org/reports/energyand- ai International Energy Agency [IEA]. (2025b, October). With new export controls on critical minerals, supply concentration risks become reality. International Energy Agency [IEA]. (2025c). Oil 2025 [Executive summary]. https://www.iea.org/ reports/oil-2025/executive-summary International Energy Agency [IEA]. (2026a). Global EV Outlook 2026 [Executive summary]. https:// www.iea.org/reports/global-ev-outlook-2026/executive-summary International Energy Agency [IEA]. (2026b). Oil Market Report — March 2026. https://www.iea.org/ reports/oil-market-report-march-2026 International Energy Agency [IEA]. (2026c, May 13). Oil Market Report — May 2026. https:// www.iea.org/reports/oil-market-report-may-2026 International Energy Agency [IEA]. (2026d, July 10). Oil Market Report — July 2026. https:// www.iea.org/reports/oil-market-report-july-2026 International Energy Agency [IEA]. (2026e, August 12). Oil Market Report — August 2026. https:// www.iea.org/reports/oil-market-report-august-2026 International Energy Agency [IEA]. (2026f, May 28). World Energy Investment 2026. https:// www.iea.org/reports/world-energy-investment-2026 International Energy Agency [IEA]. (2026g, February). Strait of Hormuz [Oil security]. https:// www.iea.org/about/oil-security-and-emergency-response/strait-of-hormuz International Energy Agency [IEA]. (2026h). Update on IEA collective action decision of 11 March 2026. https://www.iea.org/news/update-on-iea-collective-action-decision-of-11-march-2026 International Energy Agency [IEA]. (2026i, March). IEA confirms Member country contributions to collective action to release oil stocks [News release]. International Energy Agency [IEA]. (n.d.). Oil security and emergency response. https:// www.iea.org/about/oil-security-and-emergency-response International Telecommunication Union & International Cable Protection Committee [ITU & ICPC]. (2024). International Advisory Body for Submarine Cable Resilience. Jervis, R. (1978). Cooperation under the security dilemma. World Politics, 30(2), 167–214. Jervis, R. (1989). The meaning of the nuclear revolution: Statecraft and the prospect of Armageddon. Cornell University Press. Jevons, W. S. (1865). The coal question. Macmillan. Johnson, C. (1982). MITI and the Japanese miracle: The growth of industrial policy, 1925–1975. Stanford University Press. Jones, C. I., & Tonetti, C. (2020). Nonrivalry and the economics of data. American Economic Review, 110(9), 2819–2858. Joskow, P. L. (2007). Regulation of natural monopoly. In A. M. Polinsky & S. Shavell (Eds.), Handbook of law and economics (Vol. 2). Elsevier. 987 Klemperer, P. (1987). Markets with consumer switching costs. Quarterly Journal of Economics, 102(2), 375–394. Kadowaki, N. (2026a). Future Value Theory. VURA Working Paper Series No. 1. Kadowaki, N. (2026b). Enterprise Redefinition. VURA Working Paper Series No. 2. Kadowaki, N. (2026c). Enterprise Redefinition Observed. VURA Working Paper Series No. 3. Kadowaki, N. (2026d). From Job Description to Purpose Description. VURA Working Paper Series No. 4. Kadowaki, N. (2026e). Brain Capital Management. VURA Working Paper Series No. 5. Kadowaki, N. (2026f). Self-Defined Society. VURA Working Paper Series No. 6. Kadowaki, N. (2026g). Redefinition Capitalism. VURA Working Paper Series No. 7. Kadowaki, N. (2026h). Human on the Loop. VURA Working Paper Series No. 8. Kadowaki, N. (2026i). Ageless Management. VURA Working Paper Series No. 9. Kadowaki, N. (2026j). National Value Model. VURA Working Paper Series No. 10. (this paper) Kahn, A. E. (1970). The economics of regulation: Principles and institutions. Wiley. Kahn, H., & Wiener, A. J. (1967). The year 2000: A framework for speculation on the next thirtythree years. Macmillan. Katzenstein, P. J. (1985). Small states in world markets: Industrial policy in Europe. Cornell University Press. Kohler, K. (2024). Is AI the "new electricity"? Machinocene. Kojima, K. (2000). The "flying geese" model of Asian economic development: Origin, theoretical extensions, and regional policy implications. Journal of Asian Economics, 11(4), 375–401. Koopman, R., Wang, Z., & Wei, S.-J. (2014). Tracing value-added and double counting in gross exports. American Economic Review, 104(2), 459–494. Krugman, P. (1994). Competitiveness: A dangerous obsession. Foreign Affairs, 73(2), 28–44. Kuznets, S. (1934). National income, 1929–1932 (NBER Bulletin 49). National Bureau of Economic Research. Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory [LBNL]. (2025). Queued up: 2025 edition. Lehdonvirta, V., Wú, B., & Hawkins, Z. (2024). Compute North vs. Compute South: The uneven possibilities of compute-based AI governance around the globe. Proceedings of the AAAI/ACM Conference on AI, Ethics, and Society (AIES 2024). https://ojs.aaai.org/index.php/AIES/article/ view/31683 Lempert, R. J., Popper, S. W., & Bankes, S. C. (2003). Shaping the next one hundred years: New methods for quantitative, long-term policy analysis (MR-1626). RAND Corporation. Levite, A. E. (2002/2003). Never say never again: Nuclear reversal revisited. International Security, 27(3), 59–88. Lundvall, B.-Å. (Ed.). (1992). National systems of innovation: Towards a theory of innovation and interactive learning. Pinter. Luo, Y. (2022). Illusions of techno-nationalism. Journal of International Business Studies, 53, 550– 567. Machine Intelligence Research Institute. (2025, April). Refining MAIM. 988 Mahdavy, H. (1970). The patterns and problems of economic development in rentier states: The case of Iran. In M. A. Cook (Ed.), Studies in the economic history of the Middle East. Oxford University Press. McKinsey Global Institute. (2023). The economic potential of generative AI: The next productivity frontier. Mehlum, H., Moene, K., & Torvik, R. (2006). Institutions and the resource curse. The Economic Journal, 116(508), 1–20. METR. (2025, December). Common elements of frontier AI safety policies. Microsoft. (2024, July). Helping our customers through the CrowdStrike outage [Blog post]. Milgrom, P., & Roberts, J. (1990). The economics of modern manufacturing: Technology, strategy, and organization. American Economic Review, 80(3), 511–528. Miller, C. (2022). Chip war: The fight for the world's most critical technology. Scribner. Narang, V. (2022). Seeking the bomb: Strategies of nuclear proliferation. Princeton University Press. Narayanan, A., & Kapoor, S. (2025, April). AI as normal technology. Knight First Amendment Institute. National Bureau of Economic Research. (n.d.). The Model T (NBER Working Paper No. 31454). Nelson, R. R. (Ed.). (1993). National innovation systems: A comparative analysis. Oxford University Press. Nelson, R. R., & Winter, S. G. (1982). An evolutionary theory of economic change. Harvard University Press. Ng, A. (2017). Artificial intelligence is the new electricity [Lecture]. Stanford Graduate School of Business. (Statements to the same effect precede this in 2016.) Nordhaus, W. D. (1996). Do real-output and real-wage measures capture reality? The history of lighting suggests not. In T. F. Bresnahan & R. J. Gordon (Eds.), The economics of new goods. University of Chicago Press. Norges Bank Investment Management. (n.d.). About the fund. https://www.nbim.no/en/about-us/ about-the-fund/ North, D. C. (1990). Institutions, institutional change and economic performance. Cambridge University Press. Norwegian Ministry of Finance. (n.d.). The Norwegian fiscal policy framework. https:// www.regjeringen.no/en/topics/the-economy/economic-policy/economic-policy/id418083/ Noy, S., & Zhang, W. (2023). Experimental evidence on the productivity effects of generative artificial intelligence. Science, 381(6654), 187–192. Nuclear Threat Initiative. (n.d.-a). Missile Technology Control Regime (MTCR) [Treaties and regimes fact sheet]. Nuclear Threat Initiative. (n.d.-b). The Biological Weapons Convention (BWC) compliance protocol [Analysis]. OilPrice.com. (2026, August). U.S. shale majors cut spending despite higher oil prices. https://oilprice. com/Energy/Crude-Oil/US-Shale-Majors-Cut-Spending-Despite-Higher-Oil-Prices.html Olson, M. (1965). The logic of collective action: Public goods and the theory of groups. Harvard University Press. 989 OpenAI. (2023, May 22). Governance of superintelligence [Blog post by S. Altman, G. Brockman, & I. Sutskever]. OpenAI. (2024, December 11). API, ChatGPT & Sora facing issues [Incident post-mortem]. Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries [OPEC]. (2026a, March 1). Press release. https:// www.opec.org/pr-detail/593-1-march-2026.html Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries [OPEC]. (2026b, August 2). Press release. https:// www.opec.org/pr-detail/1854611-2-august-2026.html Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries [OPEC]. (2026c, August 12). Monthly Oil Market Report, August 2026. https://publications.opec.org/momr Ornston, D. (2012). When small states make big leaps: Institutional innovation and high-tech competition in Western Europe. Cornell University Press. Parametrix. (2024, July). CrowdStrike's impact on the Fortune 500. Parametrix Insurance. Pigou, A. C. (1920). The economics of welfare. Macmillan. Pillsbury Winthrop Shaw Pittman LLP. (2025). China suspends export controls on certain critical minerals and related items. Pilz, K., et al. (2025). Trends in AI supercomputers (arXiv:2504.16026). Epoch AI. Polanyi, M. (1966). The tacit dimension. Routledge & Kegan Paul. Porter, M. E. (1990). The competitive advantage of nations. Free Press. Porter, M. E. (1996). What is strategy? Harvard Business Review, 74(6), 61–78. RAND Corporation. (2025, March). Seeking stability in the competition for AI advantage [Commentary]. RAND Corporation. (n.d.). Insights from nuclear history for AI governance (PE-A3652-1). Reuters. (2025, September 30). Huawei plans to double output of Ascend 910C AI chips in 2026. Rodrik, D. (1998). Why do more open economies have bigger governments? Journal of Political Economy, 106(5), 997–1032. Rothman, D. S., & Robinson, J. B. (1997). Growing pains: A conceptual framework for considering integrated assessments. Environmental Monitoring and Assessment, 46(1–2), 23–43. Sachs, J. D., & Warner, A. M. (1995). Natural resource abundance and economic growth (NBER Working Paper No. 5398). National Bureau of Economic Research. https://www.nber.org/papers/ w5398 Sachs, J. D., & Warner, A. M. (2001). The curse of natural resources. European Economic Review, 45(4–6), 827–838. Samuels, R. J. (1994). "Rich nation, strong army": National security and the technological transformation of Japan. Cornell University Press. Samuelson, P. A. (1954). The pure theory of public expenditure. Review of Economics and Statistics, 36(4), 387–389. Sastry, G., Heim, L., Belfield, H., Anderljung, M., Brundage, M., et al. (2024). Computing power and the governance of AI (arXiv:2402.08797). Centre for the Governance of AI. Saudi Aramco. (2025). Results and performance 2025. https://www.aramco.com/en/investors/annualreport/ results-and-performance

Saudi Aramco. (2026, August 4). Half-year 2026 interim report. https://www.aramco.com/-/media/ publications/corporate-reports/reports-and-presentations/2026/h1/saudi-aramco-h1-2026-interimreport- english.pdf Schelling, T. C. (1960). The strategy of conflict. Harvard University Press. Schelling, T. C., & Halperin, M. H. (1961). Strategy and arms control. Twentieth Century Fund. Schröder, T., & Kuckshinrichs, W. (2015). Value of lost load: An efficient economic indicator for power supply security? A literature review. Frontiers in Energy Research, 3, 55. Schwartz, P. (1991). The art of the long view: Planning for the future in an uncertain world. Doubleday. Sen, A. (1999). Development as freedom. Alfred A. Knopf. Shapiro, C., & Varian, H. R. (1999). Information rules: A strategic guide to the network economy. Harvard Business School Press. Shavit, Y. (2023). What does it take to catch a Chinchilla? Verifying rules on large-scale neural network training via compute monitoring (arXiv:2303.11341). Shumailov, I., Shumaylov, Z., Zhao, Y., Papernot, N., Anderson, R., & Gal, Y. (2024). AI models collapse when trained on recursively generated data. Nature, 631(8022), 755–759. (Author Correction: 21 March 2025) Siegmann, C., & Anderljung, M. (2022). The Brussels effect and artificial intelligence: How EU regulation will impact the global AI market (arXiv:2208.12645). Centre for the Governance of AI. Simon, H. A. (1962). The architecture of complexity. Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society, 106(6), 467–482. Singh, J. (1998). Against nuclear apartheid. Foreign Affairs, 77(5), 41–52. Stanford Institute for Human-Centered Artificial Intelligence [Stanford HAI]. (2025). The AI Index 2025 annual report. Stanford University. Stanford Institute for Human-Centered Artificial Intelligence [Stanford HAI]. (2026). The AI Index 2026 annual report. Stanford University. https://hai.stanford.edu/ai-index/2026-ai-index-report Stiglitz, J. E., Sen, A., & Fitoussi, J.-P. (2009). Report by the Commission on the Measurement of Economic Performance and Social Progress. Strange, S. (1988). States and markets. Pinter. Szulanski, G. (1996). Exploring internal stickiness: Impediments to the transfer of best practice within the firm. Strategic Management Journal, 17(S2), 27–43. Taylor, M. Z. (2004). Empirical evidence against varieties of capitalism's theory of technological innovation. International Organization, 58(3), 601–631. Teece, D. J. (1986). Profiting from technological innovation: Implications for integration, collaboration, licensing and public policy. Research Policy, 15(6), 285–305. Teece, D. J., Pisano, G., & Shuen, A. (1997). Dynamic capabilities and strategic management. Strategic Management Journal, 18(7), 509–533. The Economist. (2017, May 6). The world's most valuable resource is no longer oil, but data. U.S. Energy Information Administration [EIA]. (n.d.-a). An introduction to crack spreads. https:// www.eia.gov/todayinenergy/detail.php?id=1630 991 U.S. Energy Information Administration [EIA]. (n.d.-b). 3:2:1 crack spread. https://www.eia.gov/todayinenergy/ includes/crackspread_explain.php U.S. Energy Information Administration [EIA]. (2023). What is OPEC+ and how is it different from OPEC? Today in Energy. https://www.eia.gov/todayinenergy/detail.php?id=61102 U.S. Energy Information Administration [EIA]. (2024, October 11). Today in Energy (maritime chokepoint transit volumes). https://www.eia.gov/todayinenergy/detail.php?id=63446 U.S. Energy Information Administration [EIA]. (2025, July). Short-Term Energy Outlook, July 2025. U.S. Energy Information Administration [EIA]. (2026a, August). Short-Term Energy Outlook, August 2026 (including the chapters on Global oil markets and Energy security). https://www.eia.gov/ outlooks/steo/ U.S. Energy Information Administration [EIA]. (2026b, July 9). Today in Energy. https://www.eia.gov/ todayinenergy/detail.php?id=67844 U.S.–Canada Power System Outage Task Force. (2004). Final report on the August 14, 2003 blackout in the United States and Canada. University of Sheffield. (n.d.). Clive Humby [Academic visitor profile]. https://sheffield.ac.uk/cs/people/ academic-visitors/clive-humby ushistory.org. (n.d.). The age of the automobile. https://www.ushistory.org/us/46a.asp van der Heijden, K. (1996). Scenarios: The art of strategic conversation. John Wiley & Sons. van der Ploeg, F. (2011). Natural resources: Curse or blessing? Journal of Economic Literature, 49(2), 366–420. Venables, A. J. (2016). Using natural resources for development: Why has it proven so difficult? Journal of Economic Perspectives, 30(1), 161–184. Vernon, R. (1971). Sovereignty at bay: The multinational spread of U.S. enterprises. Basic Books. von Hippel, E. (1994). “Sticky information” and the locus of problem solving: Implications for innovation. Management Science, 40(4), 429–439. Wack, P. (1985a). Scenarios: Uncharted waters ahead. Harvard Business Review, 63(5), 73–89. Wack, P. (1985b). Scenarios: Shooting the rapids. Harvard Business Review, 63(6), 139–150. Wade, R. (1990). Governing the market: Economic theory and the role of government in East Asian industrialization. Princeton University Press. Watkins, M. H. (1963). A staple theory of economic growth. Canadian Journal of Economics and Political Science, 29(2), 141–158. Williamson, O. E. (1985). The economic institutions of capitalism: Firms, markets, relational contracting. Free Press. Winter, S. G., & Szulanski, G. (2001). Replication as strategy. Organization Science, 12(6), 730–743. Wohlstetter, A. (1959). The delicate balance of terror. Foreign Affairs, 37(2), 211–234. Xing, Y., & Detert, N. (2010). How the iPhone widens the United States trade deficit with the People's Republic of China (ADBI Working Paper No. 257). Asian Development Bank Institute. 992 References in Japanese and Primary Sources Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. (2011). Denki jigyō-hō ni motozuku shiyō seigen no gutaiteki naiyō ni tsuite [On the specific content of the restriction on use of electricity under the Electricity Business Act] (25 May 2011). [in Japanese] Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. (2024). AI / handōtai sangyō kiban kyōka furēmu [Framework for strengthening the industrial base for AI and semiconductors] (November 2024). [in Japanese] Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. (2026a). Nenryōyu / sekiyu seihin no antei kyōkyū kakuho ni kansuru shiryō [Materials on securing the stable supply of fuel oil and petroleum products] (24 March 2026). [in Japanese] Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. (2026b). Nenryōyu / sekiyu seihin no antei kyōkyū kakuho ni kansuru shiryō [Materials on securing the stable supply of fuel oil and petroleum products] (31 March 2026). [in Japanese] Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. (2026c). GENIAC dai-4-ki saitaku ni tsuite [On the selections for the fourth term of GENIAC] (4 June 2026). [in Japanese] Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. (n.d.-a). Tokutei jūyō busshi "kuraudo puroguramu" ni kakaru kyōkyū kakuho keikaku no nintei ni tsuite [On the certification of supply-assurance plans concerning the specified critical material "cloud programs"]. [in Japanese] Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. (n.d.-b). Rapidus Kabushiki Kaisha no jisshi keikaku no gaiyō [Outline of the implementation plan of Rapidus Corporation] (certification under the Act on Facilitation of Information Processing). [in Japanese] National Diet Library. (2025). Rapidus o meguru dōkō [Developments concerning Rapidus]. Chōsa to jōhō — ISSUE BRIEF [Research and Legislative Reference Bureau, Issue Brief], No. 1330 (9 September 2025). [in Japanese] National Institute of Population and Social Security Research. (2023). Nihon no shōrai suikei jinkō (Reiwa 5-nen suikei) [Population Projections for Japan: 2023 projections]. [in Japanese] Agency for Natural Resources and Energy. (2023). Enerugī hakusho 2023 [Annual Report on Energy 2023]. Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. https://www.enecho.meti.go.jp/about/ whitepaper/2023/html/2-1-1.html Agency for Natural Resources and Energy. (2025). 2024-nendo enerugī jukyū jisseki (sokuhō) [Energy supply and demand results for fiscal 2024 (preliminary)] (published 12 December 2025). Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. [in Japanese] Agency for Natural Resources and Energy. (2026a). Enerugī dōkō (2026-nen ban), dai-1-shō dai-3- setsu [Energy trends (2026 edition), Chapter 1, Section 3]. Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. https://www.enecho.meti.go.jp/about/energytrends/2026/html/s-1-3.html Agency for Natural Resources and Energy. (2026b). Sekiyu bichiku no genkyō (Reiwa 8-nen 2-gatsu) [Current status of petroleum stockpiles (February 2026)]. Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. https://www.enecho.meti.go.jp/statistics/petroleum_and_lpgas/pl001/pdf/ 2026/260216oil.pdf Agency for Natural Resources and Energy. (2026c). Sekiyu tōkei sokuhō (2026-nen 1-gatsu bun) [Preliminary petroleum statistics (January 2026)] (published 31 March 2026). Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. [in Japanese] 993 Agency for Natural Resources and Energy. (n.d.). Nihon no enerugī, 150-nen no rekishi ④ (Shōwa kōki) [Japan's energy: 150 years of history, part 4 (the later Shōwa period)]. Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. https://www.enecho.meti.go.jp/about/special/johoteikyo/history4shouwa2. html InfoCom Research, Inc. (2025). Dejitaru akaji no jōtaika to kongo no hōkōsei [The normalization of the digital deficit and future directions]. InfoCom Newsletter (March 2025). [in Japanese] Japan Organization for Metals and Energy Security (JOGMEC). (2026). Kokka bichiku sekiyu no hōshutsu ni tsuite [On the release of national petroleum stockpiles] (24 March 2026). https:// www.jogmec.go.jp/news/release/release_01248.html Petroleum Association of Japan. (2025). Kyō no sekiyu sangyō 2025 [The petroleum industry today 2025]. https://www.paj.gr.jp/pdf/today_paj2025.pdf Petroleum Association of Japan. (2026). Seiyusho no shozaichi to gen'yu shori nōryoku (2026-nen 4- gatsu-matsu genzai) [Locations of refineries and crude-oil processing capacity (as of the end of April 2026)]. https://www.paj.gr.jp/sites/default/files/2026-06/paj-04_refining% 20capacities_202604r.pdf SoftBank Corp. (2024). Keizai anzen hoshō suishin-hō ni motozuku kyōkyū kakuho keikaku no nintei ni kansuru puresu rirīsu [Press release on the certification of a supply-assurance plan under the Economic Security Promotion Act] (10 May 2024). [in Japanese] Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications. (2024). Reiwa 6-nen ban jōhō tsūshin hakusho [White Paper on Information and Communications in Japan 2024]. [in Japanese] Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications. (2025). Reiwa 7-nen ban jōhō tsūshin hakusho [White Paper on Information and Communications in Japan 2025] (including Part I, "Trends in the services balance of digital-related items"). https://www.soumu.go.jp/johotsusintokei/ whitepaper/ja/r07/html/nd113220.html Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications. (2026). Reiwa 8-nen ban jōhō tsūshin hakusho [White Paper on Information and Communications in Japan 2026] (summary). [in Japanese] Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications & Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. (2025). AI jigyōsha gaidorain (dai-1.1-han) [AI Guidelines for Business, Version 1.1] (28 March 2025). https://www.soumu.go.jp/main_content/001002576.pdf National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology (AIST). (2024). ABCI 3.0 no kadō ni kansuru puresu rirīsu [Press release on the commencement of operation of ABCI 3.0] (October 2024). [in Japanese] Federation of Electric Power Companies of Japan. (2023). Dai-1-ji oiru shokku kara 50-nen [Fifty years since the first oil shock]. ENELOG, vol. 60. [in Japanese] Organization for Cross-regional Coordination of Transmission Operators, Japan (OCCTO). (2026). Zenkoku oyobi kyōkyū kuiki goto no juyō sōtei (2026-nendo) [Demand projections for the nation and for each supply area (fiscal 2026)] (21 January 2026). [in Japanese] Tokyo Electric Power Company. (2011). Denki jigyō-hō dai-27-jō no hatsudō ni tsuite [On the invocation of Article 27 of the Electricity Business Act] [Press release] (25 May 2011). [in Japanese] Cabinet Office. (2022–2025). Keizai anzen hoshō suishin-hō / tokutei jūyō busshi kanren shiryō [Materials relating to the Economic Security Promotion Act and to specified critical materials]. [in Japanese] 994 Cabinet Office. (2025). Jinkō chinō kihon keikaku [Basic Plan on Artificial Intelligence] (Cabinet decision of 23 December 2025). [in Japanese] Nihon Keizai Shimbun. (2025, August). "Dejitaru akaji" takadomari, 1–6-gatsu ni 3.4-chō en ["Digital deficit" remains elevated: 3.4 trillion yen in January–June]. https://www.nikkei.com/article/ DGXZQOUA073OI0X00C25A8000000/ Japan Productivity Center. (2025). Rōdō seisansei no kokusai hikaku 2025 [International Comparison of Labor Productivity 2025]. [in Japanese] Recruit Works Institute. (2023). Mirai yosoku 2040 — "hatarakite busoku 1100-man-nin" no shōgeki [Future projection 2040: the impact of a shortfall of 11 million workers]. [in Japanese] Ministry of Finance. (2024). "Kokusai shūshi kara mita Nihon keizai no kadai to shohōsen" kondankai hōkokusho [Report of the study group on "Issues and prescriptions for the Japanese economy viewed from the balance of payments"] (2 July 2024). [in Japanese] Ministry of Finance & Bank of Japan. (n.d.). Kokusai shūshi tōkei [Balance of Payments Statistics] (digital- related balance). [in Japanese] — The following are primary legislation, treaties, government documents, and materials of international organizations — Electricity Business Act (Denki Jigyō-hō, Act No. 170 of 1964), Article 27 (Restriction on the Use of Electricity, etc.). Act on the Promotion of Ensuring National Security through Integrated Implementation of Economic Measures (Economic Security Promotion Act; Keizai Anzen Hoshō Suishin-hō, Act No. 43 of 2022). Act on the Promotion of Research and Development and Utilization of Artificial Intelligence-Related Technologies (AI Promotion Act; AI Suishin-hō, Act of 2025; enacted 28 May 2025, promulgated 4 June 2025, fully in force 1 September 2025). Seventh Strategic Energy Plan (Dai-7-ji Enerugī Kihon Keikaku) (Cabinet decision of February 2025). Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. Regulation (EU) 2024/1689 of the European Parliament and of the Council laying down harmonised rules on artificial intelligence (Artificial Intelligence Act) (entered into force 1 August 2024). Regulation (EU) 2021/821 setting up a Union regime for the control of exports, brokering, technical assistance, transit and transfer of dual-use items (EU Dual-Use Regulation, 2021 recast). Regulation (EU) 2019/943 on the internal market for electricity. Regulation (EU) 2022/2554 on digital operational resilience for the financial sector (DORA) (fully applicable from 17 January 2025). European Parliament (2025). AI liability directive. Legislative Train Schedule (the proposed AI Liability Directive of 28 September 2022 was formally withdrawn by publication in the Official Journal on 6 October 2025). Financial Services and Markets Act 2023 (UK), and the designation of Critical Third Parties by HM Treasury (July 2026). Netherlands, Government of the (2024). The Netherlands expands export control measure for advanced semiconductor manufacturing equipment (published 6 September 2024, effective 7 September 2024; expansion of the scope of the measure that took effect on 1 September 2023). Trading Economics. (n.d.-a). Brent crude oil [Spot quotation]. https://tradingeconomics.com/ commodity/brent-crude-oil 995 Trading Economics. (n.d.-b). United States strategic petroleum reserve crude oil stocks [EIA weekly data]. https://tradingeconomics.com/united-states/strategic-petroleum-reserve-crude-oilstocks U.S. Bureau of Industry and Security (2022). Implementation of additional export controls: Certain advanced computing and semiconductor manufacturing items; Supercomputer and semiconductor end use. Interim final rule, 87 FR 62186 (published in the Federal Register on 13 October 2022). U.S. Bureau of Industry and Security (2023). Implementation of additional export controls: Certain advanced computing items; Supercomputer and semiconductor end use; Updates and corrections. Interim final rule (published 17 October 2023, effective November 2023). U.S. Bureau of Industry and Security (2025a). Framework for artificial intelligence diffusion. Interim final rule, 90 FR 4544 (published in the Federal Register on 15 January 2025; scheduled effective date 15 May 2025). U.S. Bureau of Industry and Security (2025b). Department of Commerce rescinds Biden-era artificial intelligence diffusion rule [Press release] (13 May 2025). https://www.bis.gov/press-release/ department-commerce-rescinds-biden-era-artificial-intelligence-diffusion-rule-strengthens-chiprelated Federal Register (2025). American AI Exports Program (implementation of Executive Order 14320) (published in the Federal Register on 28 October 2025). U.S. Department of Commerce. Shengchengshi rengong zhineng fuwu guanli zanxing banfa [Interim Measures for the Administration of Generative Artificial Intelligence Services]. Cyberspace Administration of China and seven other departments; promulgated 13 July 2023, in force 15 August 2023. [in Chinese] Rengong zhineng shengcheng hecheng neirong biaoshi banfa [Measures for the Labelling of AI-Generated Synthetic Content]. Cyberspace Administration of China and others; in force 1 September 2025. [in Chinese] State Council of the People's Republic of China (2025). Guanyu shenru shishi "rengong zhineng+" xingdong de yijian [Opinions on the in-depth implementation of the "Artificial Intelligence Plus" initiative] (promulgated 26 August 2025). [in Chinese] Treaty on the Non-Proliferation of Nuclear Weapons (NPT). Opened for signature 1 July 1968, entered into force 5 March 1970, extended indefinitely in 1995. International Atomic Energy Agency. The structure and content of agreements between the Agency and States required in connection with the Treaty on the Non-Proliferation of Nuclear Weapons. INFCIRC/153 (Corrected), 1972. International Atomic Energy Agency. Model protocol additional to the agreement(s) between State(s) and the IAEA for the application of safeguards. INFCIRC/540 (Corrected), approved by the Board of Governors in May 1997. Comprehensive Nuclear-Test-Ban Treaty (CTBT). Adopted by the United Nations General Assembly on 10 September 1996, opened for signature on 24 September 1996, not yet in force. The International Monitoring System (IMS) is operated by the CTBTO Preparatory Commission. Treaty on the Prohibition of Nuclear Weapons (TPNW). Adopted in 2017, entered into force 22 January 2021. Convention on the Prohibition of the Development, Production, Stockpiling and Use of Chemical Weapons and on their Destruction (Chemical Weapons Convention, CWC). Opened for signature 13 January 1993, entered into force 29 April 1997. 996 Organisation for the Prohibition of Chemical Weapons. Verification Annex, Parts VI–VIII (Verification Annex to the Chemical Weapons Convention; the provisions concerning Schedule 1, Schedule 2, and Schedule 3 chemicals and the facilities relating to them). Organisation for the Prohibition of Chemical Weapons. Changes to the Annex on Chemicals to the Chemical Weapons Convention. C-24/DEC.4 and C-24/DEC.5, decisions of the Conference of the States Parties of 27 November 2019, entered into force 7 June 2020. Convention on the Prohibition of the Development, Production and Stockpiling of Bacteriological (Biological) and Toxin Weapons and on their Destruction (Biological Weapons Convention, BWC). Opened for signature 10 April 1972, entered into force 26 March 1975. Missile Technology Control Regime (MTCR) (established 1987; annex as of the 2025 edition). MTCR Guidelines and Equipment, Software and Technology Annex. United Nations Group of Governmental Experts (2015). Report on developments in the field of information and telecommunications in the context of international security. A/70/174. United Nations Group of Governmental Experts (2021). Report on developments in the field of information and telecommunications in the context of international security (adopted by consensus). United Nations Open-Ended Working Group on ICT security (2025). Final report. Treaty on the Limitation of Anti-Ballistic Missile Systems (ABM Treaty). Signed 1972 (United States and Soviet Union). Baruch Plan (14 June 1946; proposal of the United States at the United Nations Atomic Energy Commission, based on the Acheson–Lilienthal Report). Atoms for Peace (8 December 1953; address by U.S. President Eisenhower to the United Nations General Assembly). Export-control guidelines of the Zangger Committee (established 1971), the Nuclear Suppliers Group (NSG, established 1975), and the Wassenaar Arrangement (established 1996). United Nations General Assembly. Global Digital Compact (adopted at the Summit of the Future, September 2024). United Nations General Assembly. Resolution A/RES/79/325 (adopted 26 August 2025). Establishment of the Independent International Scientific Panel on AI and of the Global Dialogue on AI Governance. Bletchley Declaration (1 November 2023; UK AI Safety Summit; 28 countries and the EU). Seoul Frontier AI Safety Commitments (21 May 2024; AI Seoul Summit). New Delhi Declaration (19 February 2026; India AI Impact Summit; endorsed by 89 countries and international organizations). Agreement between the heads of state of the United States and China that "human control over the decision to use nuclear weapons should be maintained" (16 November 2024; APEC leaders' meeting in Lima). 997 998 Appendix A. The Nine Cells in Detail This appendix sets out, cell by cell and in six items (defining features / institutional requirements / mode of value / modes of failure / states and actors currently applicable / monitoring indicators), the Nine-Cell Matrix developed in Sections 6 to 9 (the national value models M1/M2/M3 of Definition 3 × the AI capability tiers C1/C2/C3 of Definition 2), as a detailed table for policy reference. The theoretical grounds for each cell lie in the corresponding section of the text (row C1 = Section 7, row C2 = Section 8, row C3 = Section 9), and this appendix is not a summary but a conversion into operational form. Three cautions are stated first. First, an actual state does not belong to a single cell but is described as a weighted portfolio over the nine cells (Definition 3). The column "states and actors currently applicable" lists descriptively those states and actors whose weight in the cell concerned is relatively large, or which are attempting a move into that cell as a matter of policy; it is not a classification of the state as a whole. Second, through Frontier Descent (Definition 2), the boundary between C1 and C2 moves with time. The entries for applicable states and actors in this table are observations as of August 2026 and are dynamic descriptions that should be updated by the indicators in the column of monitoring indicators. Third, C3 (the critical tier) is an unrealized, prospective class as of the time of writing (Definition 2), and the three cells of row C3 are described not as observed realities but as conditional design theory. As a supplementary note on how to read the table, the implications obtained differ according to whether one fixes the row or the column. Reading across with the row (the capability tier) fixed shows how, for the same level of capability, the institutional requirements change according to whether one stands in the position of production, transformation or utilization. Reading down with the column (the value model) fixed shows how the same value model changes its character as the capability tier rises — for example, the Transformation Model (M2) is at C1 a market competition in which the presence or absence of complementary assets divides life from death, at C2 a managed division of labour in which the security of procurement depends on political decision, and at C3 (if it arrives) the object of diffusion management itself. That the same self-understanding as a "transforming state" faces entirely different institutional problems as the tier rises is the reason the nine cells were constructed as a product. On the column "position on the feasible region" — the nine cells are not a uniform grid. Section 6.10 formalized the fact that the M axis (the position of value generation) and the C axis (the capability tier) are not orthogonal, that is, that the higher the capability tier the narrower the set of positions that can be occupied (the feasible region, Definition 18) (Proposition 29). Taking up that result, each cell table in this appendix carries the column "position on the feasible region (Definition 18)," and assigns to each cell the three classes of density given in Section 6.10 — (A) Stably occupied positions (satisfying 999 the requirements of the definition in full, not constrained by the permission of other actors, with several instances persistently observed) / (B) Positions on the boundary (falling partly under one of (i) to (iii) of Definition 18, so that either part of the definitional requirements is lacking, or the position persists only in combination with other positions, or the instances are singular or intermittent) / (C) Positions outside the feasible region (falling entirely under one of (i) to (iii) of Definition 18, for which stable occupation is not established — existing only as a limiting value). The assignments in this appendix are identical with the text of Section 6.10 and with Figure 12 (the feasible region and the density of the nine cells), and are not claims made independently by this appendix. The assignments are as follows — Row C1: M1×C1 (B), M2×C1 (B), M3×C1 (A). Row C2: M1×C2 (A, though the density is the lowest), M2×C2 (A), M3×C2 (A). Row C3 (all conditional on "if C3 arrives"): M1×C3 (B), M2×C3 (B), M3×C3 (C). The addition of this column requires one correction to the way this appendix is read. This table does not treat the nine cells as equivalent. Because each cell table is written with the same composition of items, nine positions appear formally to stand side by side as options of equal rank, but that reading is not the claim of this paper. First, the three classes of density are a cutting of a continuous quantity, and their boundaries are not precise. Second, the determination of the three classes depends on how instances are counted — what is to be regarded as "stable occupation," and above what level a weight is to be regarded as an instance of the cell concerned — and this paper does not give an operational definition of that counting (Section 6.10). The determination of density is the part of this paper's claims most liable to be updated. Third, low density and lying outside the feasible region are different things — the former reflects the height of the cost of reaching the position, the latter the possibility of the position being established. Fourth, because the instances of the three cells of row C3 are by definition zero (Definition 2), no empirical classification can be given, and all entries are conditional determinations. The reader is asked to use the column "position on the feasible region" of each cell as a column for distinguishing, when a move into that cell is under consideration, whether the move is blocked by insufficiency of accumulation or by the non-establishment of the position. This distinction between two kinds of unreachability connects directly to the reading of the table of transition possibilities in Appendix E (Table E-1). A.1 The Three Cells of Row C1 (the Commodity Tier) Table A-1. M1×C1 (commodity production): definition, institutions, value, failure, applicable actors, monitoring indicators Item Content Defining features Production and publication of AI at a level of capability distant enough from the frontier that substitutes meeting the requirements of the use concerned exist in multiple jurisdictions. The publication of open-weight models and low-priced APIs are the typical forms. M1 is "the type that produces the resource itself and obtains value from the fact of that production" (Definition 3), and the path by which value is realized depends on the tier

Item Content — at C1, where strategic character is low, it takes the non-exclusive path of ecosystem externalities and standard formation rather than revenue from sales. Exclusive command over supply is not established. Position on the feasible region (Definition 18) (B) Positions on the boundary (the three classes of Section 6.10). The definitional core of M1 in Definition 3 (obtaining value from the fact of production) is satisfied, but the exclusive capture of value that accompanies the other M1 cells is lacking (Proposition 29(i)). Instances do exist, but this cell alone is not complete as a national value model, and it turns into national value only where the circuits for recovering spillover gains (standard formation, the domestic capture of ecosystem externalities) are held in other cells. The mechanism operating at the lower tier is non-exclusivity: because the cost of replicating the output is nearly zero, the exclusive paths of value capture are closed. Institutional requirements Cultivation of a developer ecosystem; intellectual-property and licensing institutions permitting distribution and modification; involvement in standardization; supply of the compute and personnel that sustain production. All of these are closed within domestic institutions — at C1, (ii), (iii) and (iv) of Definition 1 all remain at low levels, so that there is no room for variables of diplomacy, alliance or security to enter the institutional requirements (A.4). Mode of value Revenue from sales is thin. Value is realized principally as ecosystem externalities (drawing developers into the home technical lineage), the formation of de facto standards, and derivative influence. Modes of failure "Production without command." The inference price of already attained capability has been falling, at constant performance, at annual rates of between 9-fold and 900-fold (Epoch AI), so that the output is commoditized before the investment is recovered. States and actors currently applicable The open-weight frontier is led by Chinese actors (DeepSeek, Alibaba/Qwen, Moonshot/ Kimi, Zhipu/GLM); Meta (United States) has retreated; in Europe, Mistral (France) is almost the sole presence (as of 2026). Monitoring indicators Rate of decline of inference prices (by level of performance) / the lag width in capability between the open-weight and closed frontiers (approximately four months on the principal 2026 estimate, three to twelve months depending on the indicator) / the scale of derivative models and adopting ecosystems. What is readily overlooked in the institutional design of M1×C1 is that the purpose of production is not revenue from sales. The publication of open weights, while the producer forgoes direct revenue from sales, is accompanied by the indirect consequences of the formation of a developer ecosystem, the establishment of a de facto standard, and the accumulation of subsequent development on the technical lineage concerned. Evaluating policy investment in this cell by revenue from sales therefore fails to measure that consequence. It is for this reason that the scale of derivative models and adopting ecosystems is included among the monitoring indicators; the axis of evaluation is not "how much was sold" but "who is building on the output of this jurisdiction." The central lesson of M1×C1 is that the fact of production and the capture of value come apart. What the publication of DeepSeek-R1 (January 2025) showed was that the fall of 1001 capability into the commodity tier may be accelerated by the choice of the producing state itself, and that its shock propagates by way of capital markets (Sections 5 and 7). Table A-2. M2×C1 (commodity transformation): definition, institutions, value, failure, applicable actors, monitoring indicators Item Content Defining features Procurement of AI at the commodity level and its transformation into applications, products and services for supply. The cell with the lowest barriers to entry and the largest number of transformers. Position on the feasible region (Definition 18) (B) Positions on the boundary. Thin transformation lacking complementary assets (the four indicators of Proposition 4) dies out, and the transformation that survives has in effect moved to a position protected by integration cost — that is, to a structure isomorphic with M2 in row C2 (Section 6.10). It is therefore accurate to read this cell less as an independent stable point than as a band lying on the way to transition into the cells above and below. That the number of entrants is the largest and that stable occupation is established are different matters. Institutional requirements Institutions supporting the formation of complementary asset endowment (the four indicators of Proposition 4: exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, linguistic-contextual specificity) — the preparation of domain data and the management of its exclusivity, sector-specific institutions of quality and trust, common platforms supporting the entry of small and medium transformers. All are closed within domestic institutions (A.4). Mode of value Transformation value (Definition 5 — the accounting quantity of the difference between the consideration paid for the AI capability procured and the consideration received from final demanders). Since access to the model is not itself a factor of differentiation, however, what escapes compression is limited to the portion protected by integration cost, and its magnitude is a function of the complementary asset endowment measured by the four indicators of Proposition 4 (the determinants of attribution are an empirical question, not a matter of the content of the definition). Modes of failure "The death of thin wrappers." Transformation in which all four indicators lie in the lower quantiles disappears through the standard incorporation of general-purpose functionality into the next generation of models (at nearly zero marginal cost) (the structural compression of Proposition 4, Section 7). Conversely, vertical applications protected by integration cost survive — because the cost of internalizing integration into operating processes, regulatory compliance and the assumption of liability is not zero. States and actors currently applicable The applied industries of almost every country. Those that state it explicitly as national strategy include Singapore (a hub type) and India (the redeployment of IT services to transformation). Monitoring indicators Gross margins and survival rates of applied firms after foundation-model turnover events (generational change, price revision) (the test system for Hypothesis H2) / the attribution of value added in the applications layer (its ratio to the producer's share). M2×C1 is the most populous of the nine cells, and also the one with the highest rate of attrition. Unlike petroleum refining, which held a defensible margin as a process industry, 1002 the transformation margin on commodity AI is structurally thin so long as it lacks the backing of complementary assets. The focus of policy here is not the protection of transformers but support for the formation of complementary assets that are difficult to replicate. Table A-3. M3×C1 (commodity utilization): definition, institutions, value, failure, applicable actors, monitoring indicators Item Content Defining features Input of AI at the commodity level into domestic processes of production and life, used to amplify other values. The fastest diffusion is possible, while the capability itself does not differentiate. Position on the feasible region (Definition 18) (A) Stably occupied positions. As Section 7.4 shows, the friction of participation is minimal, and substantially every state holds some weight here. It falls under none of (i) to (iii) of Definition 18. That the position can be stably occupied does not, however, mean advantage — the modes of failure of this cell (below) appear not as instability of occupation but as insufficiency of absorptive capacity once the position is occupied. Institutional requirements Complementary investment in absorptive capacity (education, organizational redesign, reform of operating processes); a regulatory environment that does not impede adoption; support for diffusion to small and medium enterprises and to administration. All are closed within domestic institutions (A.4). Mode of value Compounding of productivity through the rate of diffusion × absorptive capacity (Proposition 5, Section 7). Effects are unlikely to appear until complementary investment passes a threshold (the J-curve). Modes of failure "A capability everyone can use is nobody's advantage." Utilization that pursues the rate of diffusion alone and lacks absorptive capacity has shallow effects, and the consideration paid for use flows out as payment abroad rather than being retained domestically. At C1, however, this outflow is the (α) cost channel and not a transfer of rent — because a tier in which price collapses towards marginal cost contains no excess return. The (β) rent channel is specific to C2 (Proposition 5, Section 7). States and actors currently applicable All countries. Levels of diffusion differ greatly — the rate of individual use of generative AI in Japan rose sharply from 9.1% (fiscal 2023) to 58.8% (fiscal 2025), yet remains low against 75.6% in the United States and Germany and 93.6% in China (White Paper on Information and Communications, Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications). Monitoring indicators Rates of adoption and depth of use by individuals, firms and administration / the level of complementary investment (investment in intangible assets) / domestic value added per yen of digital procurement (the ratio taking external payments as denominator and the increment of domestic value added in AI-inputting sectors as numerator; for the formula see Appendix C.3.1). M3×C1 is a cell in which the speed of diffusion and the depth of effect readily diverge. That the rate of individual use in Japan rose sharply from 9.1% to 58.8% in two years shows that diffusion at the commodity tier is extremely rapid in phases where institutional barriers are low; but in the light of the compounding structure of Proposition 5 (Section 7), what should be measured is not the rate of use but the level of complementary invest‐ 1003 ment in absorptive capacity. As the history of general-purpose technologies shows (the dynamo delay in electrification, the productivity J-curve of information technology), the absence of visible productivity effects early in diffusion is not evidence of failure, and a high rate of diffusion is not evidence of success. Domestic value added per yen of digital procurement is included among the monitoring indicators in order to keep under permanent observation, as a risk specific to this cell, the (α) cost channel of the latter part of Proposition 5 — that in pure utilization lacking transformation capability (M2), the portion paid abroad as consideration for the input is not retained domestically. What should be noted here is that this outflow at C1 is not rent — a tier in which price competition operates and price collapses towards marginal cost contains no excess return above the opportunity cost of factors. What should therefore be monitored in this cell is not the size of the payments but the ratio of value added formed domestically per yen paid, and a fall in that ratio is the sign of failure. The (β) rent channel operates at C2, and is treated in Table A-6. A.2 The Three Cells of Row C2 (the Frontier Tier) Table A-4. M1×C2 (frontier production): definition, institutions, value, failure, applicable actors, monitoring indicators Item Content Defining features Production of the models and computing platforms at the frontier of capability. Suppliers are concentrated in a small number, and export controls and access controls are actually applied. The actors capable of frontier development number about ten worldwide as of 2026, and the closed frontier is concentrated almost entirely in the United States. Position on the feasible region (Definition 18) (A) Stably occupied positions, though the density is the lowest of the nine cells. The three levels of requirement in capital, electricity and people shown in Section 8.2 do not prevent the position from being established; they narrow the number of actors able to reach it. It falls under none of (i), (ii) or (iii) of Definition 18 — instances are few but persistently present. Low density and lying outside the feasible region are different things (Section 6.10). The former reflects the height of the cost of reaching the position, the latter the possibility of the position being established. Institutional requirements Supply of large and continuous capital (training costs growing at approximately 2.4-fold per year: Epoch AI), electricity and personnel; an enforcement apparatus for export controls; frontier safety frameworks (publication of capability thresholds and safety levels); institutions of competition and distribution that handle the internal contradictions of concentration. Mode of value Monopoly rent on frontier capability, the power to set terms of access, the power to form standards and safety norms, and the geopolitical asset of guaranteed supply to allied states. Modes of failure The "curse of concentration" inside the producing state (Proposition 6a, Section 8) — the contraction of other sectors through the attraction of people and capital into the AI sector, distortion of institutions through the concentration of tax revenue and power in a small number of firms, and the risk of a reversal of the investment cycle. States and actors cur‐ A bipolarity of the United States (approximately 75% of world AI supercomputer performance, the closed frontier) and China (approximately 15%, the open-weight frontier 1004 Item Content rently applicable and the construction of a self-sufficient sphere) (Epoch AI, 2025). The United Arab Emirates and Saudi Arabia are attempting entry through capital and electricity (an attempt at conversion to M1). Monitoring indicators Growth rate of training costs / national shares of AI supercomputer performance / the number and nationality of frontier-developing actors / the concentration of private AI investment / electricity reserve margins and constraints on grid interconnection. The asymmetry of M1×C2 can be summarized in a pair of figures. The capital intensity of building the frontier rises at approximately 2.4-fold per year (Epoch AI, with a projection that a single training run will exceed one billion dollars by 2027), while the inference price of already attained capability collapses at annual factors of one to two orders of magnitude. That is, the cost of entry into this cell continues to rise while the shelf life of its output continues to shrink. In addition, the observation that the performance gap between the top United States and Chinese models has almost disappeared despite a difference of more than twentyfold in private AI investment (AI Index) shows that the amount invested is not converted directly into position within the cell — that the efficiency of transformation is at issue inside producing states as well. Actors other than the United States and China (the European gigafactory conception, the expansion of public computing platforms in the United Kingdom, entry through capital and electricity by the United Arab Emirates and Saudi Arabia) all pursue a strategy of acquiring one element of this cell (the computing platform) first, and none has reached the acquisition of frontierdeveloping actors themselves (as of August 2026). This fact shows that while the elements of the cell (compute, electricity, capital, people, development organizations) can be procured separately, establishment as a cell requires the simultaneous satisfaction of all elements. Table A-5. M2×C2 (managed transformation): definition, institutions, value, failure, applicable actors, monitoring indicators Item Content Defining features Procurement of capability and inputs at the frontier level under export controls and access controls, and their transformation for supply. The security of procurement (condition (i) of Proposition 4, Section 7) depends on decisions of the producing state and of the control regime. Position on the feasible region (Definition 18) (A) Stably occupied positions. As Section 10 analyses on its own, its establishment requires four conditions, but where the conditions are met stable occupation is established and several instances are observed. The reason this cell is the central concern of this paper among the nine is not the height of its density but that its conditions can be explicitly specified — a position whose conditions can be specified is a position that may become an object of policy design. Institutional requirements Diplomacy and alliance become the central axis — the institutionalization of transformation within the alliance (friend-shoring), the express statement of supply guarantees, coordinated participation in export controls, and control systems for the technologies subject to control. To these are added domestic requirements (the maintenance of 1005 Item Content the complementary assets specific to transformation). At C2, (ii) external dependence of supply and (iv) the determinative character of capability gaps in Definition 1 both hold at high levels, so that the institutional requirements cannot be closed within the domestic (A.4). Mode of value The margin attributable to a position in the division of labour within the control regime (semiconductors, manufacturing equipment, materials, specialized applications). Holding a chokepoint is itself a bargaining asset. Modes of failure A structure in which the guarantee of access holds the power of life and death — through changes in control measures (the policy uncertainty shown by the repeated shifts in United States export controls between 2022 and 2026), the premise of transformation disappears exogenously. States and actors currently applicable Korea (the position of supplier of memory and semiconductors), the Netherlands and Japan (manufacturing equipment and materials, and coordination on export controls), and emerging data-centre host states within the alliance. Monitoring indicators Scope and frequency of change of export-control measures / share of supply within the control regime / substitutability of chokepoint items (the progress of domestic substitution on the other side). What is specific to M2×C2 is that, among the conditions of survival for transformation (Proposition 4, Section 7), "the security of procurement" is determined not by the market but by the politics of the control regime. The course by which United States export controls were repeatedly altered, from the first tranche of October 2022 to the withdrawal of the comprehensive rule and the shift to transaction-based control in 2025, showed that for transformers in this cell the greatest uncertainty in the business environment is neither technology nor demand but the control measures themselves. On the other hand, states holding chokepoint items (manufacturing equipment, materials, memory) can, through participation in the control regime, convert their own position in transformation into a bargaining asset. The progress of domestic substitution on the other side is included among the monitoring indicators because the value of a chokepoint depreciates as a function of the counterpart's capacity to substitute. Table A-6. M3×C2 (frontier utilization): definition, institutions, value, failure, applicable actors, monitoring indicators Item Content Defining features Advanced utilization of frontier-level capability procured from outside. "Advanced utilization without sovereignty" — depth of utilization and heteronomy of supply coexist. Position on the feasible region (Definition 18) (A) Stably occupied positions. The vulnerability described in Section 8.4 is not instability of occupation but the three risks of changed terms, price and data reflux borne once the position is occupied; the position itself is established (Section 6.10). This distinction matters diagnostically — the problem of this cell is not "being unable to stand" but "standing while bearing heteronomy," and the response turns not to movement but to the design of the guarantee level (the three functions of Definition 6). 1006 Item Content Institutional requirements Design of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6) — (i) domestically held capability composed as the three functions of operational capacity, renewal capability and the sensitive-processing condition (Definition 6(i-a) to (i-c)); (ii) alliance guarantees composed as supply guarantees by treaty and long-term contract; (iii) operational readiness composed as switching exercises. To these are added the measurement and audit of dependence and exposure (Appendix C), advance design of the order of priority allocation for critical sectors, and local value-capture clauses in the attraction of data centres. Since (ii) is included, diplomacy and alliance enter the central axis of the institutional requirements (A.4). Mode of value Amplification of productivity through frontier capability. The consideration for use, however, becomes a permanent payment abroad, and in this tier, where supplier concentration is high and demand inelastic, that consideration contains a mark-up above marginal cost — it is in this cell that the (β) rent channel operates (the latter part of Proposition 5, Section 7). Its magnitude is estimated as the product of the supplier's gross margin and the proportion of C2 capability in procurement. Modes of failure (1) Vulnerability to changes in the terms of access, to command over price, and to data reflux; (2) high sensitivity to AI outage (Definition 4); (3) extractive distortion in which the attraction of computing infrastructure ends as a "granting of drilling rights," supplying electricity, land and water without accompanying transformation value (Proposition 6b, Section 8) — in the United States, more than ten states are reported to have lost over 100 million dollars a year in tax revenue through data-centre tax preferences, with subsidies reaching up to two million dollars per job in some cases (Good Jobs First). States and actors currently applicable Numerous high-income and middle-income countries, beginning with Japan, the states of the European Union, Singapore and India. Only about thirty countries worldwide have GPUs for AI on the public cloud (Lehdonvirta et al., 2024); the remainder cannot stand even in this cell to a sufficient degree. Monitoring indicators Exposure indicators (the digital-related balance, rate of cloud use) and domestic value added per yen of digital procurement / sectoral AI dependence and supplier HHI, and the divergence between exposure and dependence (Appendix C) / local value capture from data-centre attraction (tax revenue, employment, local transformation capability) / the three components of the sovereign minimum guarantee level, and in particular the level of the three functions of (i) (operational capacity, renewal capability, the sensitiveprocessing condition). M3×C2 is the cell in which the largest number of high-income countries actually stand in the present world, and the detailed analysis of Japan (Section 18) also places its present location here. What should be separated in diagnosing this cell is the benefit of utilization (which is at present large) from the heteronomy of supply (which is at present large). Since both may be true at once, "utilization is advancing, so there is no problem" and "there is dependence, so it should be reduced" are each in isolation mistaken; what is required is the design of dependence — the measurement of dependence (Appendix C), the design of the guarantee level (Definition 6), and advance agreement on priority allocation. The attraction of data centres, moreover, is a typical policy carried out by states in this cell in the expectation that the element of computing infrastructure will serve as a foothold for cell movement (in the direction M3 → M1); but where attraction is not connected to 1007 the cultivation of local transformation capability, evidence at the level of United States states shows that it ends in an extractive outcome, supplying electricity, land and water without accompanying transformation value. The success of attraction must be measured not by the number of data centres sited but by local value capture (tax revenue, employment, transformation capability). A.3 The Three Cells of Row C3 (the Critical Tier) C3 is an unrealized, prospective class as of the time of writing (Definition 2), and the three cells below are not descriptions of observed realities but conditional design theory for the case "if C3 arrives" (Section 9). The column of applicable states and actors is at present "none applicable" in every case, and the column of monitoring indicators includes indicators for observing the arrival of C3 itself. Table A-7. M1×C3 (critical holding): definition, institutions, value, failure, applicable actors, monitoring indicators Item Content Defining features Production and holding of capability treated as of the same class as nuclear weapons in its security externality (assumed). The dominant form of governance shifts to state management and international regimes (Proposition 2, Section 5). Position on the feasible region (Definition 18) Conditional determination: (B) Positions on the boundary. C3 is an unrealized, prospective class (Definition 2), and because instances are by definition zero it falls entirely under (iii) of Definition 18 — the three cells of this row cannot at present be assigned to (A), (B) or (C) empirically. What follows is a conditional determination for the case in which C3 arrives. On the analysis of Section 9.9, this cell is subject to the constraint of permission (Definition 18(ii)) that accompanies the rise in the class of externality, but that constraint appears not as the non-establishment of the position but as an added weight in the institutional requirements — acceptance of verification, cooperation with the accountancy of supply chains, and transparency as to latent capability. Institutional requirements Acceptance of the three functions of critical-tier governance (Definition 7) (verification, nonproliferation, stabilization); participation in the accountancy management of compute; maintenance of human control over grave decisions (an extension of the norm on which the United States and China agreed in November 2024 with respect to the decision to use nuclear weapons); third-party verification of frontier safety frameworks. Mode of value The security value of deterrence and of the power to extend guarantees. The mode of economic value depends on the design of a channel for peaceful use (the counterpart of Atoms for Peace). Modes of failure Arms-race instability and incentives to pre-empt where non-verifiability combines with an expectation of first-mover advantage (Proposition 10, Section 9). A permanent legitimacy cost arising from the asymmetry of a freeze on holders. States and actors currently applicable None applicable (unrealized). 1008 Item Content Monitoring indicators Changes in the ranking of AI capability in national security documents / results of capability- threshold evaluations under frontier safety frameworks (approach to grave capability levels) / consensual scientific assessments such as the International AI Safety Report. Table A-8. M2×C3 (critical subcontracting): definition, institutions, value, failure, applicable actors, monitoring indicators Item Content Defining features Participation as a transformer in the supply network for capability and inputs at the critical level (assumed). The counterpart of a supplier of sensitive technology in nuclear nonproliferation; the position of transformation may at the same time be a path of proliferation. Position on the feasible region (Definition 18) Conditional determination: (B) Positions on the boundary. As with Table A-7, since C3 is unrealized (Definition 2), every determination is conditional on "if C3 arrives." This cell too receives the constraint of permission (Definition 18(ii)) as an added weight in the institutional requirements — because the position of transformation may at the same time be a path of proliferation, the added weight concentrates on the accountancy, declaration and transfer control of the supply network. It is not a non-establishment of the position, but the level of the added weight may be higher than in Table A-7 — an actor that participates in the supply network without holding capability receives the application of the transfer-control regime on top of the verification accepted by holders. Institutional requirements Participation in a suppliers' regime (an export-control cartel of the NSG type); systems for the accountancy and tracking of transfers; a structure coupling support for peaceful use with safeguards (Appendix B, item 7). Mode of value Transformation margins within a managed supply network, and the trust and standing that participation in the regime itself confers. Modes of failure Becoming a node of proliferation (diversion of the peaceful-use channel — the counterpart of the history by which the NSG was founded in the wake of the Indian test of 1974), and exclusion following a finding of breach of the regime. States and actors currently applicable None applicable (unrealized). The states participating in export controls on advanced semiconductors (the United States, Japan, the Netherlands and others) are, however, already operating the institutional precursor of this cell. Monitoring indicators Whether the scope of export-control regimes extends from chips to the training and model layers / the establishment of international systems for the accountancy and reporting of transfers of compute. Table A-9. M3×C3 (utilization under the umbrella of critical capability): definition, institutions, value, failure, applicable actors, monitoring indicators Item Content Defining features Utilization of critical capability, without holding it domestically, while receiving its benefits and protection under an alliance guarantee (the "umbrella") (assumed). The counterpart of the nuclear umbrella. 1009 Item Content Position on the feasible region (Definition 18) Conditional determination: a position close to (C) Positions outside the feasible region. This cell is the very position that Proposition 29(ii) names — an actor connecting to capability at the critical tier is required to be, at the same time as a utilizer, a party to control (acceptance of declaration and monitoring, submission to terms of access, transparency as to its own latent capability), so that it is unlikely to be stably established as pure utilization. A position that would confine itself to utilization is pushed out into a mixed position of utilization and control by the requirement of being a party to control (Section 9.10.3). In the expression of Section 6.10, this cell is the closest to a "position existing only as a limiting value." This determination too, however, is conditional on the arrival of C3. Institutional requirements Express statement of the guarantee (treaty, long-term contract); mechanisms of verification and consultation with the guaranteeing state; management and declaration of domestic latent capability ("AI latency" — the short-term attainability conferred by accumulations of compute, personnel and data). Mode of value The saving of cost from maintaining a high level of utilization while avoiding critical investment of one's own, and standing within the alliance through contribution to the guarantee (siting, transformation, funding). Modes of failure Structural vulnerability to a decline in the credibility of the guarantee (a policy shift by the guaranteeing state); deepening subordination as the price of the guarantee; tension between the maintenance of latent capability and nonproliferation obligations. States and actors currently applicable None applicable (unrealized). The present M3×C2 states (states utilizing within an alliance, including Japan) are, however, in the position of moving first into this cell should C3 arrive. Monitoring indicators The state of treaty-making and express statement of alliance guarantees / the history of changes in the terms of access set by the guaranteeing state / the level of indicators of domestic latent capability (installed compute capacity, personnel, electricity). Three supplementary points on the three cells of row C3. First, the discipline of including row C3 in this appendix at all. To present an unrealized class in tabular form is not an act of predicting its arrival but an act of enumerating in advance the institutional requirements that would be needed should it arrive (as a response to the risk of incitement acknowledged in Section 20, the column of applicable states and actors is kept blank and only the monitoring indicators for signs of arrival are connected to existing institutions — capability-threshold evaluations under frontier safety frameworks, and consensual scientific assessment). Second, many of the institutional requirements of row C3 have precursors on the line of extension of the institutions of row C2. Coordination on export controls (M2×C2) is the institutional prototype of the suppliers' regime of M2×C3, and supply guarantees within an alliance (M3×C2) that of the umbrella of M3×C3; the greater part of preparation for row C3 is in fact equivalent to deepening the institutions of row C2 in the direction of verifiability (Appendix B). Third, the inclusion of domestic latent capability ("AI latency") among the monitoring indicators of M3×C3 deserves emphasis. As the nuclear experience shows, regimes are operated not on a binary of holding and non-holding

but on a continuum of latent capability. The maintenance of latent capability is a component of the guarantee level (Definition 6) and at the same time may become an object of declaration and monitoring should a nonproliferation-type regime be established — the management of this ambivalence becomes the core of institutional design for a state under the umbrella. A.4 The Deduction of Institutional Requirements — What Follows From the Tier-by-Tier Establishment of Strategic Character The column "institutional requirements" of these tables is written not as a description converting the observations of the sections of the text into operational form, but as something deduced from the tier-by-tier establishment of the strategic character of Definition 1. This point bears on the theoretical standing of the nine-cell construction rather than on the content of what is entered. The skeleton of the deduction is as follows. Definition 1 defines the strategic character of a general-purpose input as the degree to which three properties hold: (ii) external dependence of supply; (iii) that an interruption of supply degrades the output of the national economy within a short period (infrastructural criticality); (iv) that the level of holding and access determines capability gaps between states. Strategic character is a degree and not a binary attribution, and the same input may have different strategic character at different levels of capability (tier relativity). What Proposition 2 asserts is that the level at which these three properties hold changes stepwise as a function of capability distance — at C1, (ii), (iii) and (iv) are all low; at C2, (ii) and (iv) are high and (iii) rises as a function of dependence; at C3 (if it arrives) the three properties reach their highest levels. From this the institutional requirements follow. The institutional requirements of row C1 are closed within domestic institutions. For where (ii) external dependence of supply is at a low level, there is no need to secure the safety of supply by diplomacy; where (iv) the determinative character of capability gaps is at a low level, the acquisition of access does not become a subject of alliance; and where (iii) infrastructural criticality is at a low level, an interruption of supply is not constituted as a problem of security. That the institutional-requirements columns of Tables A-1 to A-3 are composed solely of domestic variables — people, data, quality, clarity of regulation — and contain almost no variables of diplomacy, alliance or security is neither an editorial accident nor a fact of observation, but a consequence of the three properties of Definition 1 not holding at C1. By contrast, the institutional requirements of row C2 have diplomacy and alliance as their central axis. Where (ii) external dependence of supply is at a high level, the security of procurement depends on political decision (Table A-5); where (iv) the determinative character of capability gaps is at a high level, the setting of the terms of access becomes a matter of negotiation between states (Table A-6). That the institutional requirements of M2×C2 place first the institutionalization of transformation within the alliance, the express statement of supply guarantees and coordinated participation in export controls, 1011 and that the institutional requirements of M3×C2 include the alliance guarantees of Definition 6(ii) among their components, are consequences of this deduction. M1×C2 alone appears to be an exception, but it is not — for a state standing on the producing side, the height of (ii) and (iv) means that it may itself set the terms of access for other states, and the institutional requirements accordingly show an enforcement apparatus for export controls and guarantees of supply to allied states (Table A-4). It remains no less in contrast with row C1 in not being closed within domestic institutions. The institutional requirements of row C3 are described as the form the three properties would take at their highest levels. That the institutional requirements of Tables A-7 to A-9 — acceptance of the three functions of critical-tier governance (Definition 7), participation in a suppliers' regime, express statement of the guarantee with mechanisms of verification and consultation — are all written in the vocabulary of international institutions follows from the same deduction. Since C3 is an unrealized, prospective class, however, these are to be read only as conditional design theory. Three consequences of this deduction for the table may be stated. First, the nine cells are not "a mechanical multiplication of a convenient tripartition M1/M2/M3 by a convenient tripartition C1/C2/C3." Both axes are defined over the same object domain — the relation to a general-purpose input (the base of Definition 3 is the general-purpose input) — and it is for that reason that the product has meaning. The rows are the tier-by-tier patterns in which the three properties of strategic character hold, the columns the positions of value generation, and the product is theoretically necessary. Second, the cells of row C1 do not lie outside the domain of definition. Were Definition 1 a binary definition requiring the simultaneous satisfaction of four properties, AI at C1, where (iv) does not hold, would fall outside the definition and the three cells of row C1 could not be formally constructed. Because Definition 1 in this paper defines strategic character as a degree and places the base of Definition 3 at the general-purpose input, this violation of the domain does not arise. Third, the institutional-requirements column of this table is therefore not "a list of observed facts" but "a list of consequences drawn from definitions and propositions." The reader should examine each column not as description but as the conclusion of a deduction — if a case is observed in any cell of row C1 in which diplomacy and alliance enter the central axis of the institutional requirements, that is not an omission in the table but a falsification of the tier-by-tier establishment of strategic character asserted by Proposition 2. A.5 Early Signs of the Modes of Failure The column "modes of failure" of Tables A-1 to A-9 is written as consequences that become apparent after the event. For policy operation it is necessary to translate these into early signs observable before the consequence is settled. Table A-10 rewrites the modes of failure of the nine cells in the form of early signs. The signs are all qualitative items of observation, and because thresholds depend on the structure of each country they are not fixed uniformly. 1012 Table A-10. Modes of failure by cell and their early signs Cell Mode of failure Early signs (items of observation) M1×C1 Production without command The price of the output falls before the cost of inputs is recovered / adoption of the domestic output remains within the country and does not spread to external ecosystems / improvement of derivative models is led by actors in other jurisdictions M2×C1 The death of thin wrappers The gross margins of applied firms fall with each generational change of foundation models / when the four indicators of Proposition 4 are measured before a generational change, a high proportion of firms lies in the lower quantiles / a high proportion of firms, when explaining their own factor of differentiation, cite the performance of the model rather than assets protected by integration cost / substitution is easy once the producer incorporates functionality of the same kind as standard M3×C1 A capability everyone can use is nobody's advantage A rise in the rate of adoption is not accompanied by investment in the reform of operating processes or in the retraining of people / use is left to individual discretion and is not incorporated into organizational processes / domestic value added per yen of digital procurement falls (the growth of payments abroad exceeds the growth of domestic value added) M1×C2 The curse of concentration The movement of people and capital into the AI sector appears as vacancies and reduced investment in other sectors / tax revenue and political influence concentrate in a small number of firms / expectations in the producing sector advance accompanied by relative contraction of other sectors M2×C2 Life and death by the guarantee of access The frequency of change in control measures is shorter than the business planning period / supply guarantees are not expressly stated in contract or treaty and depend on policy goodwill / domestic substitution by the counterpart advances with respect to chokepoint items M3×C2 Advanced utilization without sovereignty / extractive attraction Supplier concentration and cross-sector shared dependence are high at the same time (Appendix C) / exposure is measured but dependence is not measured by exercise (the divergence is unknown) / the tax revenue, employment and local transformation capability from data-centre attraction are not commensurate with the electricity, land and water supplied / changes in the terms of access are notified without prior consultation / one of the three functions of the guarantee level (operational capacity, renewal capability, the sensitive-processing condition) is unassessed M1×C3 Arms-race instability The ranking of capability moves into security documents without agreement on means of verification / the expectation of first-mover advantage is used openly as a ground of policy / objections to the legitimacy of a freeze on holders appear as counter-norms outside the institution M2×C3 Becoming a node of proliferation Transfers within the supply network expand without being accounted for and tracked / support for peaceful use is provided detached from safeguard conditions M3×C3 Decline in the credibility of the guarantee The guarantee is operated without being expressly stated / a history accumulates of policy shifts by the guaranteeing state made without prior consultation / the maintenance of latent capability lacks consistency with nonproliferation obligations 1013 A.6 How the Monitoring Indicators Are Measured The column of monitoring indicators for each cell becomes operable only when connected to a measurement procedure. Table A-11 organizes the monitoring indicators of the nine cells by type of measurement. There are four types — (α) re-editing of existing statistics, (β) surveys of firms and organizations, (γ) tracking of price and market data, and (δ) direct measurement through exercises and natural experiments — and the difficulty of establishment and the frequency of updating are determined by which type an indicator belongs to. Table A-11. Types of measurement of the monitoring indicators and their updating frequency Group of indicators Type of measurement Concrete procedure Indicative updating frequency Rate of decline of inference prices and lag width in capability (row C1) γ Tracking of the lowest price at a fixed level of performance, and of the difference between capability indicators for the open and the closed frontier. Because estimates vary with the indicator, several series are reported side by side Quarterly Attribution of transformation value (row M2) α+β Estimation, by the methods of trade in value added, of the proportion of the value added of applications attributable to domestic transformers. Panel tracking of gross margins and survival rates before and after foundation-model turnover events (Hypothesis H2) Annual (as occasion requires at the time of events) Depth of utilization (row M3) β In addition to the rate of adoption, measurement in the same survey of whether use is incorporated into the critical processes of the organization (questions at the level of the process; Appendix C, Table C-2) and of the level of complementary investment (investment in intangible assets, retraining) Annual Compute and electricity (M1×C2, the guarantee level) α Installed compute capacity; reconciliation of datacentre electricity demand projections with grid plans; electricity reserve margins and the queue for grid interconnection Annual Supplier concentration and outage correlation (M3×C2) β+δ Layer-by-layer HHI and shared-supplier exposure (Appendix C.3.1); direct measurement of correlation through AI outage exercises Annual (exercises once to several times a year depending on the stage) Local value capture from attraction (M3×C2) α Publication, for each attraction project, of a balance sheet setting the tax revenue, employment By project, with annual aggregation 1014 Group of indicators Type of measurement Concrete procedure Indicative updating frequency and local transformation capability against the tax preferences, electricity, land and water granted Changes in control measures (M2×C2) α Maintenance of a chronology of the scope of export- control and access-control measures and of the history of their change, and assessment of the frequency of change and of advance predictability As occasion requires Signs of the arrival of C3 (row C3) α Fixed-point observation of changes in the positioning of AI capability in national security documents, of the results of capability-threshold evaluations under frontier safety frameworks, and of changes in the wording of consensual scientific assessments Half-yearly The types of measurement also indicate an order of establishment. Type (α) can be begun by re-editing existing statistics, and type (γ) requires no more than the tracking of public information. Type (β) requires survey design and adjustment of the burden of response, and type (δ) requires institutional underpinning (Appendix C.6.3) and therefore takes the longest. A realistic order of establishment is accordingly to bring (α) and (γ) forward so as to secure time series, to embed the questions of (β) in existing core statistics in parallel, and to introduce (δ) stepwise as institutionalization progresses. What matters is the structure whereby the most informative indicators (direct measurement by (δ) of the speed of degradation and the number of days of substitutability) are established last, and that it should be made explicit in operation that until then the indicators of (α) to (γ) serve only as proxies. A.7 How to Use This Table This table can be used in three ways. First, for the description of one's own current portfolio — by comparison with the "states and actors currently applicable" of each cell, the cells in which one's own weight lies are identified (connecting to Block I of the checklist in Appendix D). Second, for advance audit of the modes of failure — the "modes of failure" column of the cells in which one's own weight is large serves directly as the risk register to be audited. Third, for the design of cell movement — the difference between the "institutional requirements" column of the target cell and the present state gives the list of objects for policy investment. As Proposition 3 (Section 6) shows, an institution optimal in one cell is inferior or harmful in another, so that institutions must stand side by side in accordance with each cell of the portfolio, and unification into a single "AI policy" is itself a mode of failure. Three limits on use should be made explicit. First, the placement of cells in this table is not a static classification. Through Frontier Descent (Definition 2), yesterday's C2 becomes to‐ 1015 morrow's C1, and the same industry moves across cells. Diagnosis by this table should therefore be updated annually, and fixing institutions on the ground of the previous year's diagnosis is a misuse that reads a dynamic matrix as a static industrial policy. Second, this table gives no ranking of superiority or inferiority among states. The cells differ only in the institutions they require and the modes of failure they carry, and stand in no relation of higher and lower (Proposition 3, Section 6). A reading on which standing in M1×C2 is the goal is not the claim of this paper; the purpose is to design a sustainable portfolio in the light of one's own assets and constraints. Third, the column "states and actors currently applicable" is description and not evaluation. That this table uses no vocabulary adjudicating the policy of a particular country as superior or backward is not an editorial accident but follows from the discipline of the paper as a whole: to confine itself to the description of positions and constraints. 1016 1017 Appendix B. Nuclear–AI Governance Correspondence Table On the analysis in the text on which this appendix rests. The correspondence table of this appendix does not rest on observation of the nuclear regime alone; it rests on the analysis of Section 9.4 (the comparison of control-group regimes), which compared five regimes — nuclear, chemical, biological, missile and cyber norms — across the board. The regularity established in Section 9.4 — that verification mechanisms have been established as institutions only in regimes whose object of control is accompanied by a measurable physical correlate — is the content of Proposition 9 (Section 9.11), and the item-by-item determinations of this appendix are its result of application. Table B-1 therefore contains rows for the four non-nuclear regimes (chemical, biological, missile and cyber norms) and, together with the row for AI (as of August 2026), consists of six rows. That the title reads "nuclear–AI" is due to the nuclear regime being the most detailed counterpart for the determinations on the AI side, and does not mean that the population of the comparison is confined to the nuclear. The comparative analysis in the text (Section 9.4) and this appendix form a single whole, and reading Table B-1 detached from the text invites the misreading that the ground for Proposition 9 is a single case. The reader is asked to consult Section 9.4 first, or alongside. The relevant definitions and propositions are Definition 7 (critical-tier governance, Section 9), Definition 9 (the half-life of the verification anchor, Section 9), Propositions 9 and 10 (Section 9), and Proposition 8 (continuous construction, Section 13). This appendix sets out, as a table of determinations by component of the regime, the analysis of transferability from the nuclear management regime to C3 governance conducted in Section 9. C3 (the critical tier) is an unrealized, prospective class as of the time of writing (Definition 2), and this table is conditional design theory sorting out in advance "what, of the institutional assets of nuclear management, could be reused should C3 arrive, and what would have to be newly built." Two points on the notation of the determinations. First, the symbols A/B/C/D are used for determinations — A (already transferred, or readily transferable) / B (transferable, partly implemented) / C (partially possible, with difficulties) / D (not transferable under present conditions). The symbols ◎○△× are not used because ◎, ○ and △ among them are identical with the evidence-grade symbols common to this series (◎ well established, ○ supported by evidence, △ contested, ▽ grey literature, not relied upon), and there is a danger that a reader will misread "△ partially possible" in a table of determinations as "△ contested." Second, a separate column is provided for the evidence grade, apart from the determination. The determination is an analytical assessment of whether the conditions under which the nuclear side was established are satisfied on the AI side; the evidence grade is the strength of the empirical support for that determination. The two are independent items of information, and showing them separately increases the inform‐ 1018 ation content of the table. In particular, the institutional facts on the nuclear side (treaty texts, the state of accession, the composition of inspection institutions) are established knowledge (◎), whereas judgements about the counterparts on the AI side are often contested (△), and this asymmetry cannot be expressed in a single column. The grounds of each determination rest solely on a structural comparison of whether the conditions of establishment on the nuclear side are satisfied on the AI side, and not on predictions of capability. This appendix takes the following order. B.1 places first the cross-regime comparison of the five regimes — nuclear, chemical, biological, missile and cyber norms — that constitute the population for Proposition 9 (the verification-anchor hypothesis) (Table B-1). One cannot determine transferability to AI from the single case of the nuclear management regime and then call the regularity in the distribution of those determinations "the inductive ground for Proposition 9." That would be circular — from a set of determinations made by applying a criterion (that verification depends on a physical correlate), the criterion itself cannot be induced. This appendix therefore first establishes Proposition 9 as a comparative proposition whose population is four regimes (plus cyber norms), and positions the item-by-item determinations of Table B-2 as its result of application. The error of calling the result of a deduction the ground of the deduction is avoided by this order. B.1 Cross-Regime Comparison of the Control Group — The Population for Proposition 9 Proposition 9 asserts that, in international regimes for the management of dangerous capability, whether a verification function is established as an institution is governed by whether the act that is the object of control is accompanied by a measurable physical correlate. This assertion has empirical content only across several regimes. Looking at the nuclear regime alone, the fact that "verification was established" and the fact that "a physical correlate existed" are merely observed together, and the relation between them cannot be identified. What is required is a control group of regimes possessing an existential externality and having produced an international treaty, yet lacking a verification mechanism. Table B-1 sets out that population. Table B-1. Establishment or non-establishment of verification mechanisms across regimes for the management of dangerous capability (the population for Proposition 9) Regime Object of control Measurable physical correlate Verification mechanism Outcome Evidence grade Nuclear (NPT, opened for signature 1968, entered Manufacture, acquisition and transfer of nuc‐ Present — fissile material. Weaponization physically requires a certain quantity of a specific material, and Accountancy, containment, surveillance and environmental sampling of declared nuclear material by a permanent international agency (the IAEA). Established ◎ well established (the treaty text, the state of accession and 1019 Regime Object of control Measurable physical correlate Verification mechanism Outcome Evidence grade into force 1970 / IAEA safeguards INFCIRC/ 153, Additional Protocol INFCIRC/ 540) lear weapons that material can be accounted for, sealed and tracked. The production routes (enrichment, reprocessing) are concentrated in largescale, observable industrial facilities The Additional Protocol extended verification from "the correctness of declarations" to "the completeness of declarations" the institutional composition of safeguards are all established knowledge) Chemical (CWC, opened for signature 1993, entered into force 1997 / OPCW) Development, production, stockpiling and use of chemical weapons Present — precursors and production facilities. These are typologized as the chemicals of Schedules 1 to 3 of the Annex on Chemicals (CWC Schedule 1 = highrisk substances with almost no use for peaceful purposes; CWC Schedule 2 = important precursors produced in limited quantities; CWC Schedule 3 = lower-risk substances produced in larger quantities) and are subject to declaration and inspection Declaration, routine inspection of facilities, challenge inspection that may be conducted at any location, and investigation of alleged use, by a permanent international agency (the OPCW, with 193 states parties) Established ◎ well established (the treaty text, the Verification Annex and the institutional composition of the OPCW are established knowledge) Biological (BWC, opened for signature 1972, entered into force 1975) Development, production and stockpiling of biological and toxin weapons Absent — pathogens and production equipment are inherently dualuse, and the equipment of vaccine, pharmaceutical and research work cannot be distinguished from that of a weapons programme as a physical quantity. Be‐ Does not exist. From January 1995 to July 2001 an Ad Hoc Group negotiated a verification protocol including declaration of treaty-relevant facilities and activities and routine and challenge inspection, but in July 2001 the United States rejected the draft and the negotiation broke down. Negotiation of a verification mechanism has not resumed since. Not established ◎ well established (the course of the negotiations, the date of their breakdown and the absence of a verification mechanism are all recorded

Regime Object of control Measurable physical correlate Verification mechanism Outcome Evidence grade cause propagation from small quantities is possible, accountancy of "inventory" does not hold Concerns about compliance are left to consultation among states parties and to complaint to the United Nations Security Council, the latter never having been invoked. The Implementation Support Unit established after the 2006 Review Conference remains an administrative support body, initially of three full-time staff institutional facts) Missile (MTCR, established 1987) Transfer of missiles and unmanned aerial vehicles capable of delivering weapons of mass destruction, and of the associated technology Present in a limited way (only for the objects of transfer) — complete systems, components and technology are tangible objects subject to export control, but no object is set for accounting for development or holding as such Transfer control only. It is not a treaty but an informal intergovernmental arrangement, composed of Guidelines and an Equipment, Software and Technology Annex (Category I = complete delivery systems and the like, subject to a strong presumption of denial; Category II = components such as propulsion systems and propellants, subject to case-bycase review). The control criterion is capability to deliver 500 kg or more to 300 km or more. It has neither a permanent secretariat nor a verification mechanism, and implementation depends on each state's export-control legislation and political commitment Verification not instituted (transfer control alone established) ◎ well established (the year of establishment, the seven original members, the non-treaty character and the composition of the annex are established institutional facts) Cyber norms (United Nations GGE report 2015 / OEWG 2021– 2025) Responsible use of ICT by states (restraint in attacks on critical infrastructure and the like) Absent — the act leaves no distinctive physical signature, and traces can be disguised, routed through third parties and denied, so that attribution of the act is at once a technical prob‐ Does not exist. The eleven norms set out in the 2015 GGE report are all voluntary and nonbinding, and no mechanism for confirming compliance and no body for finding a breach have been provided. The OEWG concluded its mandate in 2025 and a transition to a Not established ◎ well established (the voluntary and non-binding character of the norms and the absence of a verification mech‐ 1021 Regime Object of control Measurable physical correlate Verification mechanism Outcome Evidence grade lem and a political judgement successor permanent mechanism was decided, but its mandate too is dialogue, capacity-building and the promotion of implementation, not verification anism are facts on the face of the documents) AI (as of August 2026) Development, holding and transfer of capability at the critical level (an unrealized, prospective class) Divergent by layer — compute, electricity and facilities are tangible and measurable (of the nuclear and chemical type). Model weights, inference and applications are replicable, the concept of "inventory" does not hold for them, and the act lacks a physical signature (of the biological and cyber type) At the chip layer, supply control has been implemented in advance without a treaty (Table B-2, item 3). Accountancy at the training layer is at the stage of proposal and research. No third-party verification agency exists at any layer Designable only at the chip and training layers △ contested (whether compute can serve as an anchor is disputed. Depreciation through the half-life of the anchor is a claim of this paper and is untested) The regularity this table shows is not the self-application of a criterion of determination but a fact of institutional history. The nuclear and the chemical had their objects of control anchored in measurable physical quantities and established verification mechanisms operated by permanent international agencies. The biological and the cyber lack measurable physical quantities for their objects and have no verification mechanism. The missile lies in between: the movement of tangible objects that constitutes transfer can be controlled, but verification of development and holding is not instituted. The Biological Weapons Convention is the control case of highest value for this paper. The BWC possesses an existential externality as the nuclear does, was established as an international treaty earlier than the nuclear regime (opened for signature 1972, entered into force 1975), and has a broad membership of 187 states parties. Nor can it be explained by an absence of political will — for six and a half years from 1995 to 2001 a verification protocol including declaration and routine and challenge inspection was negotiated in an Ad Hoc Group. Even so, no verification mechanism was established. The difference between what the nuclear established and what the BWC could not establish lies neither in the age of the treaty, nor in the breadth of accession, nor in the quantity of negotiating effort, but in whether the object of control is accompanied by a measurable physical correlate. Pathogens propagate from small quantities, production equipment is inherently dual-use, and no unit of account corresponding to a "significant 1022 quantity" can be defined. What the CWC was able to establish, it established because there were precursors as measurable intermediates and facilities that could be typologized by the quantities they process. By this comparison Proposition 9 is raised from "the self-application of the author's criterion of determination" to "a comparative proposition whose population is several regimes." That the falsification condition of Proposition 9 is written as "if a case is observed in which an effective third-party verification mechanism has been established in a regime lacking a physical correlate, or (b) if cases are observed in which verification mechanisms systematically failed to be established in regimes possessing a physical correlate" means that it is to be tested over this population. As acknowledged in Section 15.8(b), however, the sample number is limited to four (five including cyber), the regimes are not independent since they were formed with mutual reference historically, and there may be selection bias in the choice of regimes themselves. What this table gives is not statistical inference but the identification of structure by case comparison. B.2 Determinations of the Transferability to AI of the Components of the Nuclear Management Regime Having established Proposition 9 over the population above, this section applies it to AI. Table B-2 determines, for each of the ten components of the nuclear management regime, whether the conditions of establishment on the nuclear side are satisfied on the AI side. This table is not "the inductive ground for Proposition 9" but the item-by-item consequence of applying Proposition 9 to AI. The ten items are therefore each independently falsifiable predictions. Table B-2. Determinations of the transferability to AI of the components of the nuclear management regime (as of August 2026) # Component of the nuclear regime Conditions of establishment (nuclear side) Candidate counterpart in AI Present existence Determination (A– D) Evidence grade Grounds 1 Nuclear material accountancy (IAEA safeguards, INFCIRC/ 153) Weaponization physically requires a certain quantity of a specific material, and that material can be accounted for, Accountancy of advanced chips and of large-scale training compute (compute accounting); verification mechanisms embedded in hardware At the stage of proposal and research (Shavit 2023; Sastry et al. 2024; CNAS 2024). No institu‐ C ◎ well established (the institutional composition of safeguards on the nuclear side) / △ contested (compute governance on the AI Chips are tangible and measurable. Trained weights, however, are replicable and the concept of "inventory" breaks down (Afina & Lewis, 2023). It may hold at the chip and training layers; it does not 1023 # Component of the nuclear regime Conditions of establishment (nuclear side) Candidate counterpart in AI Present existence Determination (A– D) Evidence grade Grounds sealed and tracked. The production routes are concentrated in large-scale, observable industrial facilities tional implementation side is at the stage of proposal and research and is disputed) hold at the weights and inference layers 2 Remote detection system (CTBT/ IMS type) The violating act (a nuclear explosion) emits an unavoidable physical signature (seismic waves, hydroacoustics, infrasound, radionuclides) that can be detected remotely from beyond the border Observation of data-centre electricity, heat and construction, and of chip logistics Observation of indirect indicators is possible, but there is no dedicated institution C–D ◎ well established (the composition and operational status of the IMS) / △ contested (the observability of signatures on the AI side is disputed) The signatures of AI training are indirect and avoidable and do not correspond one to one with the act (the observability problem). Hardware- embedded verification is an attempt to "create a signature artificially," and its design principle differs from the CTBT type, which relies on a natural signature 3 Suppliers' regime (Zangger Committee 1971, NSG 1975, Wassenaar 1996) Chokepoints in the means of production are concentrated in a small number of states and firms, so that a suppliers' cartel can unify the con‐ Export controls on the design, manufacture and manufacturing equipment of advanced semiconductors (United States measures from 2022 onward, with Japanese and Dutch coordination) Implemented (an advance implementation without a treaty) B ◎ well established (the institutional facts of the Zangger Committee, the NSG and Wassenaar, and the measures from 2022 onward) / ○ supported by evidence The concentration of the design, manufacture and manufacturing equipment of advanced AI chips in a small number of actors makes NSG-type control possible. But the risk of decaying effectiveness through autonomous technical advance, 1024 # Component of the nuclear regime Conditions of establishment (nuclear side) Candidate counterpart in AI Present existence Determination (A– D) Evidence grade Grounds ditions of export (the risk of decaying effectiveness) smuggling and domestic substitution is isomorphic with the nuclear case, and the change of United States policy from 2025 onward also showed the political instability of such control 4 Freeze on holders plus grand bargain (NPT type: nonproliferation + disarmament obligation + right to peaceful use) Holders can be fixed at a small number, and compensation to the nonholding side (support for peaceful uses, disarmament undertakings) can be written into the text so as to obtain broad accession The conception of a "club of frontier-developing states plus diffusion of AI benefits to developing countries" (the commons conception of the New Delhi Declaration is a nascent form) No binding framework. Voluntary declarations only C ◎ well established (the text of the NPT, the state of accession, the entry into force of the TPNW) / △ contested (the definability of a threshold on the AI side is disputed) AI capability is continuous and a threshold of "holding" is difficult to define. The cause of the impossibility of fixing a threshold lies not in the continuity of capability but in the exponential fall in the cost of attaining a given capability, which makes a costbased threshold change meaning as a function of time (Definition 9, Proposition 9). Because development is led by private firms, a freeze at the level of states does not capture its object. Where an asymmetric structure is adopted, a burden isomorphic with the legitimacy cost observed in the 1025 # Component of the nuclear regime Conditions of establishment (nuclear side) Candidate counterpart in AI Present existence Determination (A– D) Evidence grade Grounds nuclear regime (the "nuclear apartheid" critique, the leakage of norms towards the TPNW) arises, which is the prediction of the first part of Proposition 10 5 Stabilization of mutual deterrence (MAD type: survivable retaliatory capability + mutual vulnerability + verifiability) Survival of secondstrike capability, limitation of defence, and observability of the other side's capability and deployment (Schelling & Halperin 1961; Wohlstetter 1959; Jervis 1978) MAIM (Mutual Assured AI Malfunction: Hendrycks, Schmidt & Wang 2025) At the stage of theoretical proposal (controversy in progress since 2025) C ◎ well established (the ABM Treaty, the strategic arms treaties and the classical formulations of arms-control theory) / △ contested (MAIM has been in controversy since 2025) The identifiability and attributability of a "destabilizing AI project" are not established. The reversibility of sabotage and the management of escalation are also unverified. The central proposition of armscontrol theory — that deterrence lacking observability loses its theoretical support — itself constitutes the critique of MAIM 6 Consensual scientific assessment (IPCC type — a reference from outside the nuclear regime) A consensual synthesis of scientific evidence separated from politics International AI Safety Report (first edition 2025, second edition 2026, chaired by Bengio); the United Nations Independent International Scientific Panel on AI (established February 2026) In operation A ◎ well established (the operation of the International AI Safety Report and of the Independent International Scientific Panel on AI is a fact) The only component already operating as an institution. There is, however, no direct counterpart in the nuclear regime, and what has in fact been transferred is the IPCC model — the substance of "already transferred" is climate- 1026 # Component of the nuclear regime Conditions of establishment (nuclear side) Candidate counterpart in AI Present existence Determination (A– D) Evidence grade Grounds type, not nucleartype 7 Management of the twin character of peacefuluse support (Atoms for Peace 1953 → IAEA 1957) Institutionalizing the channel of benefit diffusion coupled with verification (safeguards) Support for the diffusion of AI capability (Global AI Impact Commons and similar) plus coupling with safety conditions Diffusion support has started (New Delhi 2026). Coupling with safeguards is not implemented C ◎ well established (the institutional history from Atoms for Peace to the establishment of the IAEA) / △ contested (the quantitative causal estimate of Fuhrmann (2012) from peacefuluse cooperation to weapons programmes is contested within the quantitative literature) The twin character by which support for peaceful use spreads latent capability across the world operates isomorphically for AI as well (the nuclear lesson indicated by the quantitative support of Fuhrmann 2012). Diffusion support lacking a structure that couples support with verification produces the diffusion of hedging capability as a byproduct 8 Management of latency (declaration and monitoring of enrichment and reprocessing capability) An intermediate layer on the path to weaponization (sensitive capability) can be defined and made an object of declaration and monitoring Ascertainment of the compute holdings, datacentre capacity and personnel of states and firms ("AI latency") The concept holds. Quantitative indicators can be defined, but there is no system of declaration B ○ supported by evidence (the formulation of nuclear hedging is supported knowledge) / ○ supported by evidence (the operationalization of AI latency is analytical, but the in‐ Regimes are operated not on a binary of holding and non-holding but on a continuum of latent capability (Levite 2002/03). AI latency can be theorized as intermediate inventory on the path from resource to transformation in the national value models, and can 1027 # Component of the nuclear regime Conditions of establishment (nuclear side) Candidate counterpart in AI Present existence Determination (A– D) Evidence grade Grounds dicators already exist) be operationalized through indicators such as installed compute capacity 9 Minimal norm agreed at leader level (hotline and détente type) Declaratory confirmation of the minimal common interest of avoiding mutual destruction The concurrence of the United States and Chinese leaders on "maintaining human control over the decision to use nuclear weapons" (16 November 2024) Established (minimally) B ◎ well established (the concurrence of 16 November 2024 is a recorded fact) / ▽ grey literature, not relied upon (institutional continuation cannot be confirmed as of August 2026, and grey information is not relied upon) The minimal unit of norm formation at the AI–nuclear interface has been established at the level of leaders. It is not accompanied by institutionalization or verification, however, and the institutional continuation of the dialogue after the change of administration cannot be confirmed as of August 2026 10 Binding treaty plus permanent verification agency (the NPT plus the IAEA proper) A party structure of sovereign states, a verification anchor in material, and more than twenty years of stepwise construction (1946 Baruch → 1953 Atoms for Peace → 1957 IAEA None applicable Does not exist (as of August 2026) D ◎ well established (the absence of a binding treaty and a third-party verification agency is a fact) Present international AI governance is a fivelayer patchwork (scientific assessment / summit diplomacy / voluntary corporate frameworks / supply control / minimal norms), all of it non-binding. The three obstacles of private-sector leadership, replicability and the absence of a 1028 # Component of the nuclear regime Conditions of establishment (nuclear side) Candidate counterpart in AI Present existence Determination (A– D) Evidence grade Grounds → 1968 NPT) signature are unresolved. In terms of periodization it corresponds to the years before the establishment of the IAEA (1953–57) B.3 Commentary by Row Each row of Table B-2 is discussed below under four heads: (a) what the institution on the nuclear side achieved, (b) the conditions that made that achievement possible, (c) whether those conditions exist on the AI side, and (d) the determination and its grounds. The determinations are confined to the level of institutions and governance and do not enter into predictions of capability or technical matters of weaponization. B.3.1 Item 1: Nuclear Material Accountancy (IAEA Safeguards) (a) What was achieved: the IAEA's comprehensive safeguards (modelled on INFCIRC/153, 1972) confined the object of verification to "detecting in a timely manner the diversion of significant quantities of nuclear material from peaceful uses, and deterring diversion by the risk of early detection." The object of verification is not the intention of the state but the flow and inventory of declared nuclear material. By this limitation, verification became not a "subjective assessment of a state's good faith" but a quasi-accounting, quasitechnical operation of "reconciling books with physical quantities," and it became possible for an international agency to work within the territory of sovereign states while maintaining political neutrality. Nuclear material accountancy is positioned as a safeguards measure of fundamental importance; containment and surveillance (seals, cameras) fill the gaps between one accounting and the next; environmental sampling captures traces of activity inconsistent with declarations; and the Additional Protocol (modelled on INFCIRC/ 540, 1997) extended the reach of verification from "the correctness of declarations" to "the completeness of declarations." (b) Conditions of establishment: these reduce to three. First, that diversion to weapons physically requires a certain quantity of a specific material. Second, that the material can be accounted for, sealed and tracked. Third, that the production routes (enrichment, reprocessing) are concentrated in large-scale, observable industrial facilities. That is, verification has its anchor in the accountancy of material. (c) Conditions on the AI side: the can‐ 1029 didate anchor is compute. There is a theoretical account holding that compute is detectable, excludable and quantifiable, and is supplied through an extremely concentrated supply chain, and is therefore superior to data or algorithms as a point of intervention (Sastry et al., 2024); and the technical skeleton of a framework for verifying the conduct of large-scale training at the hardware level through on-chip logging and the like has also been presented (Shavit, 2023). On the other hand, trained model weights are a non-rival good that does not diminish when copied, are irrecoverable once leaked, and the concept of "inventory" itself does not readily hold for them (Afina & Lewis, 2023). (d) Determination C: an anchor may hold at the chip and training layers but does not hold at the weights and inference layers. Transfer of this row is therefore not wholesale but layer-by-layer, and the question of institutional design is refined into "on which layer accountancy is to be imposed." B.3.2 Item 2: Remote Detection System (CTBT and the International Monitoring System) (a) What was achieved: the Comprehensive Nuclear-Test-Ban Treaty was adopted in 1996 but has not entered into force, ratification by the states required for entry into force being incomplete. Even so, the Preparatory Commission has built and operated the International Monitoring System in advance, and of its full complement of 321 monitoring stations plus 16 laboratories, about 90% are in operation as of 2026 and transmitting data in real time. The unusual institutional form in which "verification infrastructure operates before entry into force" was thereby established. (b) Conditions of establishment: that the prohibited act necessarily generates a large-scale signature that cannot be hidden as a matter of physical law — seismic waves, hydroacoustics, infrasound, radionuclides — and that this can be detected remotely from beyond the border. Radionuclides in particular are the only means of establishing the nuclear character of an explosion, and made multilateral verification without intrusive inspection possible. (c) Conditions on the AI side: large-scale training has the indirect signatures of electricity consumption, facility construction and chip procurement, but lacks an unavoidable physical signature corresponding one to one with the act. Indirect signatures can be dispersed, avoided and disguised, and are moreover hard to distinguish from ordinary computational demand. Hardware-embedded verification mechanisms are an attempt to "create a signature artificially," but their design principle differs from the CTBT type, which relies on a natural signature, and they presuppose institutional control over every stage of the manufacture and distribution of chips. (d) Determination C–D: remote, non-intrusive verification, the greatest institutional asset of the nuclear regime, is the least transferable to AI. This absence of observability is also the source of the difficulty of item 5 (mutual deterrence). B.3.3 Item 3: Suppliers' Regime (Zangger Committee, NSG, Wassenaar) (a) What was achieved: the effectiveness of nuclear nonproliferation was sustained not by the treaty alone but by control on the supply side. The Zangger Committee (established 1971) drew up a trigger list of items whose export should be conditioned on the applica‐ 1030

tion of safeguards, and the Nuclear Suppliers Group (established 1975) unified the conditions of export from the side of the supplying states, with the Indian nuclear test of 1974 — a case in which material originating in peaceful-use assistance was used — as its direct occasion. The Wassenaar Arrangement (established 1996) extended a framework of the same form to conventional arms and dual-use items outside the nuclear field. (b) Conditions of establishment: that the chokepoints of the means of production are concentrated in a small number of states and firms, and that supplying states can act in concert to unify the conditions of export. In the nuclear case, the limited number of suppliers of enrichment and reprocessing technology and dedicated equipment made cartel-type control possible. (c) Conditions on the AI side: the industrial structure in which the design, manufacture and manufacturing equipment of advanced AI chips are concentrated in a small number of actors is in fact making control of the same form possible. Export controls on semiconductors towards China originating in the United States rule of October 2022, together with Japanese and Dutch coordination, can be organized as an advance implementation of NSG-type chokepoint control of supply without a treaty. (d) Determination B: this is one of the few components of the ten that can be said to be implemented on the AI side. Two reservations, however. First, decay of effectiveness through autonomous technical advance, circumvented procurement and domestic substitution arises isomorphically with the nuclear case. Second, the course by which the comprehensive allocation framework announced in January 2025 was withdrawn before entry into force, with a subsequent shift to transaction-based control, showed that supply control not underpinned by a treaty is fragile against shifts in domestic politics. The NSG was maintained for half a century because behind it stood the purposive provisions of a treaty, the NPT. B.3.4 Item 4: Freeze on Holders Plus Grand Bargain (NPT Type) (a) What was achieved: the NPT, opened for signature in 1968 and entered into force in 1970 with 191 states parties, achieved the broadest accession in the history of arms-control treaties. Its structure is a permanent two-tier structure fixing the nuclear-weapon states at five by the reference date of 1 January 1967, while obtaining broad acceptance as a "grand bargain" by writing into the text, as compensation to the non-nuclear-weapon states, the obligation to negotiate disarmament (Article VI) and the "inalienable right" to peaceful use (Article IV). (b) Conditions of establishment: that the threshold of holding can be clearly defined (the manufacture and detonation of a nuclear explosive device, a fact with a reference date), that the holders are a small number of sovereign states, and that compensation to the non-holding side can be expressly stated in the text of the treaty. (c) Conditions on the AI side: none of these conditions is readily satisfied. AI capability is continuous, and there exists no objective criterion defining a threshold of "holding." Development is led by private firms, and a freeze at the level of states fails to capture the object of regulation. Support for the diffusion of capability, corresponding to compensation, has a nascent form in the commons conception of the New Delhi Declaration of 2026 and the like, but all such initiatives are voluntary and non-binding. (d) Determination C: the difficulty of transfer is structural rather than technical. In addition, the cause of the 1031 impossibility of fixing a threshold lies not in the continuity of capability but in the exponential fall in the cost of attaining a given capability (Definition 9). This identification carries an implication for the asymmetry of a freeze in Proposition 10 as well — because the very threshold that prior holders would seek to fix moves downward year by year, a freeze is intrinsically more difficult than in the nuclear case. In addition, the nuclear experience demonstrates that an asymmetric regime goes on paying a permanent legitimacy cost — non-performance of the disarmament obligation gave rise to the "nuclear apartheid" critique, and dissatisfaction leaked into a counter-norm outside the regime, the Treaty on the Prohibition of Nuclear Weapons, adopted in 2017 and entered into force in 2021. Conceptions of an AI regime including a freeze on frontier holders necessarily inherit this problem of asymmetry. B.3.5 Item 5: Stabilization of Mutual Deterrence (Arms-Control Treaties, MAD Type) (a) What was achieved: arms control is distinguished from disarmament and proceeds on the premise that even between adversaries there exists a common interest in "avoiding a war neither side wants," aiming at reducing the probability of war, limiting damage, and lightening the burden of armament (Schelling & Halperin, 1961). Its practical achievements are the limitation of defence that institutionalized the acceptance of mutual vulnerability (the ABM Treaty of 1972) and the strategic arms treaties that institutionalized mutual verification of capability and deployment. (b) Conditions of establishment: three — the securing of survivable retaliatory capability (second-strike capability), the limitation of defence, and verifiability with respect to the other side's capability and deployment. To break the mechanism of the reciprocal fear of surprise attack — where the fear that the other side may strike first is itself an incentive to strike first (Schelling, 1960) — the survival of retaliatory forces against a first strike must be observable (Wohlstetter, 1959). A world in which offence and defence cannot be distinguished and offence has the advantage is the most unstable (Jervis, 1978). (c) Conditions on the AI side: the conception of Mutual Assured AI Malfunction (MAIM) (Hendrycks, Schmidt & Wang, 2025) presented, by analogy with MAD, a system in which the mutual possibility of sabotaging destabilizing AI projects functions as deterrence; but neither the identifiability of a "destabilizing project" nor the attributability of acts of sabotage is established. The reversibility of sabotage and the management of escalation are likewise unverified, and from 2025 onward a controversy has formed, including criticism directed at the absence of observability. (d) Determination C: arms control is not an institution of trusting the other side but an institution that stakes itself on the other side's rationality and on observability. The central proposition of arms-control theory, that a fall in observability deprives it of its theoretical support, itself constitutes the obstacle to transfer to AI. B.3.6 Item 6: Consensual Scientific Assessment (IPCC Type) (a) What was achieved: the institutional form of a consensual synthesis of scientific evidence separated from political negotiation. On the AI side, the International AI Safety Report commissioned by the participating states at the summit of November 2023 published 1032 its first edition in January 2025 and its second in February 2026, with the involvement of a panel of about 100 experts and nominated representatives of more than thirty countries; and the United Nations, on the basis of a 2025 resolution, established the Independent International Scientific Panel on AI in February 2026. (b) Conditions of establishment: confining the role to the synthesis of evidence rather than policy recommendation; breadth of participation; independence of the chair and the panel. (c) Conditions on the AI side: all are satisfied and the institution is in fact operating. (d) Determination A: the sole component of Table B-2 operating as an institution. Its substance, however, requires care. This is not a transfer from the nuclear regime — the nuclear has no institution directly corresponding to a permanent body of consensual scientific assessment, and what has actually been transferred is the model of the climate-change regime. This fact is an instance of why the institutional design of AI governance should not take the nuclear alone as its frame of reference, and at the same time an instance of the regularity of Table B-2 as a whole (B.4), that "institutions requiring no verification are easily transferred." B.3.7 Item 7: Management of the Twin Character of Peaceful-Use Support (Atoms for Peace) (a) What was achieved: Atoms for Peace, beginning with the address to the United Nations General Assembly of December 1953, was presented as a conception of pooling part of the world's nuclear material in an international agency and directing it to peaceful uses, and led to the establishment of the IAEA in 1957. The United States supplied research reactors, nuclear material and training widely through bilateral agreements. (b) Conditions of establishment and side effects: that the channel of benefit diffusion be institutionalized coupled with verification (safeguards). This coupling was, however, ex post and incomplete, and the assessment that support for peaceful use simultaneously gave states a base of technology, personnel and material, and spread latent capability across the world, is academically settled. The quantitative research showing that recipients of peaceful-use cooperation have a higher probability of beginning and succeeding in a weapons programme (Fuhrmann, 2012) provides its support, and the Indian test of 1974 is the symbolic instance. (c) Conditions on the AI side: the structure whereby the diffusion of benefits and the diffusion of dangerous capability pass through the same channel operates isomorphically for AI as well. The framework for support for the diffusion of capability announced at the 2026 summit in India started the diffusion side, but a structure coupling support with safety conditions and verification is not implemented. (d) Determination C: precisely because it has not been begun, this is also the row to which the nuclear lesson applies most directly. Because the causation by which policies promoting diffusion produce hedging capability as a by-product derives from the nature of the technology rather than from a failure of design, the choice to advance diffusion support while lacking a coupling structure is a choice made in advance knowledge of its consequence. 1033 B.3.8 Item 8: Management of Latency (a) What was achieved: the nuclear regime has been operated not on a binary of holding and non-holding but on a continuum of latent capability, by defining enrichment and reprocessing as sensitive capabilities constituting an intermediate layer and making them objects of declaration and monitoring. The academic formulation of nuclear hedging — the intermediate strategy of maintaining a technical capability to weaponize within a comparatively short period while withholding actual acquisition (Levite, 2002/03) — captures this reality. (b) Conditions of establishment: that the capability of the intermediate layer can be specified as facilities and technology and made an object of declaration and monitoring. (c) Conditions on the AI side: the concept of AI latency — "states and firms that do not hold frontier models but could attain them within a short period through accumulations of compute, personnel and data" — holds, and can be operationalized through indicators such as installed compute capacity, data-centre capacity and personnel. There is, however, no institution of declaration and monitoring. (d) Determination B: transfer of the concept is possible, and from the theoretical interest of this paper there is a further implication — AI latency can be theorized as intermediate inventory on the path from resource to transformation in the national value models, and overlaps with the components of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6). That is, the same accumulation of capability appears, from the side of the state, as the maintenance of a guarantee level, and from the side of the regime, as latent capability to be monitored. The management of this ambivalence becomes the central problem of institutional design for nonholding states should C3 arrive (Table A-9). B.3.9 Item 9: Minimal Norm Agreed at Leader Level (a) What was achieved: crisis management in nuclear history was built up, without waiting for a comprehensive treaty, from thin agreements grounded in the minimal common interest of avoiding mutual destruction — the establishment of a direct communications line, arrangements for accident prevention. As to AI, the concurrence at the United States– China leaders' meeting of 16 November 2024 that "human control over the decision to use nuclear weapons should be maintained" became the minimal unit of norm formation at leader level at the AI–nuclear interface. (b) Conditions of establishment: an interest in avoiding catastrophe that is manifestly common to both sides, and a declaratory form requiring no verification. (c) Conditions on the AI side: the same conditions were satisfied. Neither institutionalization nor verification accompanies it, however, and the institutional continuation of the bilateral dialogue cannot be confirmed as of August 2026. (d) Determination B (minimal): the design lesson this row shows is that the question of "identifying the decisions that must not be entrusted to autonomous systems" is a minimal unit on which agreement is possible without waiting for the establishment of a comprehensive regime. Among the three functions of critical-tier governance (Definition 7), the first steps of stabilization may begin from declaratory norms requiring no verification. 1034 B.3.10 Item 10: Binding Treaty and Permanent Verification Agency (a) What was achieved: the combination of the NPT and the IAEA is the completed form of the institutional format in which a treaty among sovereign states is accompanied by a permanent international verification agency. (b) Conditions of establishment: a party structure of treaty parties (that the objects of regulation are sovereign states), a verification anchor in material, and more than twenty years of stepwise construction — the accumulation of the failure of the international control conception of 1946, the peaceful-use conception of 1953, the establishment of the agency in 1957 and the signature of the treaty in 1968. (c) Conditions on the AI side: no counterpart exists as of August 2026. Present international AI governance is a five-layer patchwork of scientific assessment, summit diplomacy, voluntary corporate frameworks, semiconductor supply control and the minimal United States–China norm; every layer is non-binding, and no third-party verification agency exists at any layer. As to voluntary corporate frameworks, a framework in which each firm publishes capability thresholds and safety levels spread to several firms following signature at the Seoul summit of 2024, but third-party verification is not established and verification depends on self-declaration and the voluntary assessment of external evaluation bodies — an instance of institution formation led by private firms without parallel in the history of the nuclear regime. (d) Determination D: so long as the three obstacles of private-sector leadership, replicability and the absence of a signature remain unresolved, transfer of this row is not established. As a metaphor of periodization, it stands at the early stage of institution formation corresponding to the years before the establishment of the IAEA (1953–57). B.4 The Regularity of the Determinations — The Application of Proposition 9 to AI Read down, Table B-2 shows a clear regularity in its determinations. The items determined to be transferable or already transferred (3, 6, 8, 9) are all cases in which either (a) the verification anchor lies in the physical layer — chips, electricity, facilities, measurable tangible objects — or (b) verification is not required in the first place (scientific assessment, declaratory norms). Conversely, the difficulty of the items determined to be difficult or impossible (1, 2, 4, 5, 10) derives in every case from the intangible layer — replicable model weights, "holding" that is hard to identify, development acts that are hard to observe. The standing of this regularity must here be made explicit. This regularity cannot be read as "the inductive ground for Proposition 9 in the text." That would be circular — each item of the table is determined precisely by applying the criterion that "verification is established only where it has an anchor in a physical correlate" (item 1: "chips are tangible and measurable"; item 2: "the signature is indirect and avoidable"; item 3: "chokepoints in the means of production are concentrated"; item 10: "private-sector leadership, replicability and the absence of a signature"). From a set of determinations made by applying a criterion, the criterion itself cannot be induced. 1035 The order of this appendix is the reverse. Proposition 9 is established independently by the cross-regime comparison of five regimes in B.1 (Table B-1), and Table B-2 is the result of applying it to AI. The regularity above is therefore not the ground of Proposition 9 but the predicted pattern that should appear in Table B-2 if Proposition 9 is correct, together with the confirmation that the pattern does appear. On this positioning, the ten items of Table B-2 become independently falsifiable predictions — if, for instance, as to item 2 (remote detection), an effective remote verification system were established in the absence of a physical signature corresponding one to one with the act, the AI-application part of Proposition 9 would be falsified. The general part of Proposition 9 may be stated thus: verification is internationally institutionalized only where it has an anchor in a measurable resource. The design of critical-tier governance must therefore be not a copy of the NPT but a new design taking compute, electricity and facilities as the physical correlates in which verification is anchored. This is a transfer of the lesson of institutional history that the IAEA safeguards acquired political neutrality and effectiveness by reducing verification to the quasi-accounting operation of "reconciling declared books with physical quantities" rather than "assessing the intention of the state." This anchor, however, is not static. Proposition 9 contains a second content. Through Frontier Descent (Section 5), the compute required to attain any given level of capability falls at the half-life of the anchor (Definition 9 — the time required for the compute needed to attain a given level of capability to fall by half from its level at first attainment). A fixed threshold based on quantity of computation therefore loses effectiveness over a period of a few multiples of the half-life. If a capability that required a gigawatt-class cluster at the time of attainment is reproduced some years later with computation smaller by orders of magnitude, at that point the capability concerned slips beneath the net of accountancy management of compute. The determinations of items 1 (nuclear material accountancy) and 3 (suppliers' regime) of Table B-2 must be read with this dynamic incorporated — for a determination that an anchor exists and a determination that an anchor persists are different. The consequence of this dynamic for institutional design is plain. The verification function of critical-tier governance persists only by building continuous downward revision of thresholds into the institution, not by fixing thresholds. The design problem moves from "is there an anchor?" to "can the institution follow the depreciation of the anchor?" Concretely, the format of writing numerical thresholds into the text of a treaty cannot follow the half-life, because of the weight of amendment procedures. What can follow is the format of updating a technical annex by decision of a governing body — the format for which the amendment procedures of the MTCR Equipment, Software and Technology Annex and of the CWC Schedules provide institutional precedent. Falsification condition (c) of Proposition 9 is accordingly formulated as: "if a state persists in which the half-life of the verification anchor is shorter than the institutional cycle of threshold revision (the time required for treaty amendment or for updating a technical annex), a verification 1036 function based on quantity of computation loses its designability." Conversely, where the half-life exceeds the institutional cycle, or where an institution is established that can follow the half-life in revising thresholds, transferability is maintained. This point integrates Proposition 8 (the asymmetry of stockpiling) and Proposition 9 as two appearances of one structure. Proposition 8 states that, because the holding of AI capability depreciates in proportion to the speed of the frontier's advance, the securing of supply is established only as continuous construction and not as a single act of stockpiling. Applying the same logic to institutions of verification: because the verification anchor likewise depreciates in proportion to the speed of the frontier's advance, an institution of verification is established only as continuous revision of thresholds. Two propositions apparently unrelated become two appearances of the same asymmetry. B.5 The Structure of Time: The Lesson of the Baruch Plan The institutional history of the nuclear teaches one further variable — the timing of a proposal. The Baruch Plan (1946) showed that a conception in which the holder of a technological monopoly proposes international control while retaining its advantage appears to latecomers as "the fixing of an advantage" and is rejected, and that the feasibility of a proposal decays as capability diffuses. International control of the nuclear required more than twenty years from the first proposal to a binding treaty (the NPT, signed 1968, entered into force 1970, 191 states parties), during which the number of holders rose from one to five. What is presently established as to AI are items 3, 6, 8 and 9 of Table B-2 — supply control, scientific assessment, the concept of latent capability, and minimal norms — which in nuclear history correspond to the institutional stock on the eve of the establishment of the IAEA. Since, as Proposition 10 (Section 9) states, a system is a contingency that is constructed, the blanks in this correspondence table (items 1, 2 and 10) are not things that "will be filled in due course" but objects of design about which the choice to fill or not to fill will be made before the expectation of C3's arrival strengthens. B.6 Cautions on Use First, the literature supporting the determinations of Table B-2 (the compute-governance strand, MAIM) and the literature criticizing them (the Chatham House strand, arguments on the unsuitability of a nonproliferation framework) should be consulted as a pair, and citation of a determination resting on one side alone is contrary to the purport of this table. The present state of the controversy has been refined from "is wholesale transfer of nuclear-type verification possible?" into the layered question "at which layer of AI (chips / training / weights / inference / applications) does nuclear-type verification hold?" Second, the determinations are as of August 2026 and may change with technical change. In particular, should the attainment of critical capability with small-scale computation occur, the anchors of items 1, 3 and 8 would be lost simultaneously (falsification condition (d) of Proposition 9, Section 9). And even short of losing the anchor, where a state persists in which 1037 the half-life of the anchor is shorter than the institutional cycle of threshold revision, a verification function based on quantity of computation loses its designability (falsification condition (c) of the same proposition). The determinations concern the existence of an anchor, not its persistence. Third, this table is described only at the level of institutions and governance and contains no claim whatever about levels of capability or technical details of weaponization. Fourth, the determination symbols (A to D) and the evidence-grade symbols (◎○△▽) are distinct items of information and must not be conflated — the determination is an analytical assessment of whether the conditions of establishment on the nuclear side are satisfied on the AI side, the evidence grade the strength of the empirical support for that determination. Fifth, the five-regime comparison of Table B-1 is a case comparison with a sample number of four (five including cyber), and is not statistical inference (Section 15.8(b)). 1038 1039 Appendix C. AI Dependence Audit Protocol For the reader who begins with this appendix without reading the text. The devices of the text on which this appendix rests are the following — Definition 4 (AI dependence, exposure, AI outage / Section 13, 13.3), Definition 6 (the sovereign minimum guarantee level and its three functions = operational capacity, renewal capability, the sensitiveprocessing condition / Section 13, 13.6), Proposition 7 (the amplification of AI outage = dependence × supplier concentration × outage correlation / Section 13), Proposition 8 (the depreciation of stockpiles and continuous construction / Section 13), Proposition 13 (Japan's portfolio and the indicators of determination / Section 18), Proposition 36 (the constraint of administrative capacity and the minimum set of monitoring / Section 19), and Hypothesis H1 (Section 21). The reader is asked in particular to confirm first the distinction in Definition 4 between dependence and exposure — the design of this protocol as a whole is derived from that distinction and from the purpose of measuring directly the divergence between the two. C.1 Purpose and Design Principles What this appendix implements is Hypothesis H1 (the measurability of dependence and its divergence from exposure). That hypothesis is formulated in Section 21, and asserts that the AI dependence of a state (Definition 4) is measurable as a dependence indicator composed from sectoral AI input ratios, speed of degradation at the time of interruption, and supplier concentration; that this indicator has risen monotonically in the major economies since 2023; and further, that dependence diverges systematically from exposure (the rate of use, payments abroad), and that the magnitude of that divergence is explained by the state of preparation of substitute procedures. As means of testing, it requires the construction of a composite indicator isomorphic with indicators of energy security (import dependence, the HHI of supplier concentration and the like), and corroboration by input–output data, enterprise surveys, failure-event data and direct measurement in simulated cut-off exercises; this appendix makes concrete, down to the level of procedure, the parts consisting of "the construction of the composite indicator" and "the direct measurement of the divergence." That this hypothesis contains the claim of divergence has decisive consequences for the design of this protocol. Definition 4 explicitly distinguishes dependence from exposure — dependence is defined by "degradation at the time of interruption," and exposure by "the scale and proportion of external procurement of AI inputs (the rate of use, payments abroad, the proportion of operations processed on external platforms)." Exposure bounds dependence from above but is not identical with it. Where exposure is high, dependence is low if substitution functions immediately; where exposure is low, dependence is high if substitution is lacking. This protocol therefore composes exposure indicators and 1040 dependence indicators separately (C.3) and treats the difference between them as the object of measurement itself. This difference can never emerge from the re-editing of statistics — exposure can be measured from statistics, but dependence appears only through interruption. Direct measurement of the divergence between exposure and dependence is the first purpose of the AI outage exercise of C.6. This appendix thus brings Hypothesis H1 (Section 21) down into an implementable audit procedure. There are three design principles. First, the redeployment of an existing toolkit: energy security built over half a century a quantitative system of monitoring based on import dependence, supplier concentration (HHI) and days of stockpile. Electricity has methods for estimating the cost of outage (VoLL) and outage statistics (of the SAIDI/SAIFI type). Since AI has no equivalents, this protocol is designed not as a new invention but as the transfer of an isomorphic system of indicators. Second, measurement by layer: an AI outage (Definition 4) is not the risk of a single vendor. As the successive failures in the cloud and CDN layers in the autumn of 2025 showed, AI supply is a four-layer stack of electricity, telecommunications, cloud and model APIs, and dependence and concentration must be measured layer by layer. Third, direct measurement by exercise: because there are limits to the precision with which the speed of degradation at the time of interruption can be estimated from statistics in normal times, direct measurement by "AI outage exercises" (simulated cut-off drills) is built in as the counterpart of supply–demand drills in electricity. This third principle is not a convenience of design but a logical requirement — since dependence is defined as degradation at the time of interruption, there exists in principle no method of measuring dependence without bringing about an interruption. What statistics in normal times can measure extends only to exposure; beyond that, measurement depends on exercises. C.2 Sectors Subject to Audit The objects of audit are the critical sectors in which an interruption of supply degrades the output and functioning of the national economy within a short period (corresponding to the infrastructural criticality of Definition 1(iii)). Table C-1 shows the sectors covered and, for each sector, representative critical processes, paths of dependence and principal data sources. Table C-1. Sectors subject to audit and representative paths of dependence Sector Representative critical processes Typical paths of AI and platform dependence Principal data sources Electricity Supply–demand operation, plant maintenance, demand forecasting AI-based forecasting and optimization systems; cloud connection of control systems System operator data; operator surveys Finance Payments, credit assessment, market Assessment and detection models; core banking sys‐ Third-party dependence reporting by financial authorities (re‐ 1041

dependence indicators separately (C.3) and treats the difference between them as the object of measurement itself. This difference can never emerge from the re-editing of statistics — exposure can be measured from statistics, but dependence appears only through interruption. Direct measurement of the divergence between exposure and dependence is the first purpose of the AI outage exercise of C.6. This appendix thus brings Hypothesis H1 (Section 21) down into an implementable audit procedure. There are three design principles. First, the redeployment of an existing toolkit: energy security built over half a century a quantitative system of monitoring based on import dependence, supplier concentration (HHI) and days of stockpile. Electricity has methods for estimating the cost of outage (VoLL) and outage statistics (of the SAIDI/SAIFI type). Since AI has no equivalents, this protocol is designed not as a new invention but as the transfer of an isomorphic system of indicators. Second, measurement by layer: an AI outage (Definition 4) is not the risk of a single vendor. As the successive failures in the cloud and CDN layers in the autumn of 2025 showed, AI supply is a four-layer stack of electricity, telecommunications, cloud and model APIs, and dependence and concentration must be measured layer by layer. Third, direct measurement by exercise: because there are limits to the precision with which the speed of degradation at the time of interruption can be estimated from statistics in normal times, direct measurement by "AI outage exercises" (simulated cut-off drills) is built in as the counterpart of supply–demand drills in electricity. This third principle is not a convenience of design but a logical requirement — since dependence is defined as degradation at the time of interruption, there exists in principle no method of measuring dependence without bringing about an interruption. What statistics in normal times can measure extends only to exposure; beyond that, measurement depends on exercises. C.2 Sectors Subject to Audit The objects of audit are the critical sectors in which an interruption of supply degrades the output and functioning of the national economy within a short period (corresponding to the infrastructural criticality of Definition 1(iii)). Table C-1 shows the sectors covered and, for each sector, representative critical processes, paths of dependence and principal data sources. Table C-1. Sectors subject to audit and representative paths of dependence Sector Representative critical processes Typical paths of AI and platform dependence Principal data sources Electricity Supply–demand operation, plant maintenance, demand forecasting AI-based forecasting and optimization systems; cloud connection of control systems System operator data; operator surveys Finance Payments, credit assessment, market Assessment and detection models; core banking sys‐ Third-party dependence reporting by financial authorities (re‐ 1041 Sector Representative critical processes Typical paths of AI and platform dependence Principal data sources trading, fraud detection tems on the cloud; concentration on a small number of clouds porting obligations of the United Kingdom CTP and EU DORA type) Healthcare Diagnostic support, image reading, administration (claims, records) Diagnostic support AI; voice input and document generation; migration of electronic health records to the cloud Surveys of medical institutions; failure-event reports Administration Benefits, licensing, counter services, document preparation Review-support and response AI; government cloud Government procurement records; the register of government information systems Manufacturing Design, production planning, quality inspection, maintenance Inspection AI, predictive maintenance, design support; industrial data platforms Enterprise surveys; input– output tables Logistics Delivery planning, warehouse operation, demand forecasting Route optimization, control of automated equipment, system linkage with shippers Enterprise surveys; high-frequency logistics data Education Preparation of materials, individualized learning support, assessment Learning-support AI; education cloud Educational administration surveys Telecommunications and media Network operation, content delivery, advertising Network optimization, CDN and cloud dependence, generation and recommendation systems Operator reports; analysis of failure events Retail and consumer services Ordering, pricing, customer service Demand forecasting and customer- service AI; cloud dependence of payment systems Enterprise surveys; high-frequency payments data The list of sectors is not fixed; a method of bringing into the scope of audit those sectors that pass a threshold of AI input ratio is recommended (a procedure of designation and review isomorphic with the designation of specified critical materials under economic security legislation). Japan has already designated semiconductors and cloud programs as specified critical materials under the Economic Security Promotion Act (2022), and thus itself possesses a precedent for an institutional framework treating AI platforms as "materials." The questions in sector surveys are designed in concrete forms matched to the critical processes of each sector. The abstract question "do you use AI?" is not used, because variation in the definition of use produces answers that cannot be compared. Table C-2 gives 1042 examples of questions by sector. All are composed in four types: (i) identification of the process, (ii) identification of the supplier, (iii) the presence or absence of substitute procedures, and (iv) the time profile at the time of stoppage. Table C-2. Examples of questions by sector (four types) Sector (i) Identification of the process (ii) Identification of the supplier (iii) Substitute procedures (iv) Profile at the time of stoppage Electricity Which of the processes of demand forecasting and maintenance planning use AI output in decision-making? Who supplies the models and cloud for those processes, and under what form of contract? Are procedures for continuing operation without AI output documented and practised? What degree of degradation in forecasting accuracy and maintenance planning arises at stoppages of 1, 7 and 30 days? Finance Which of the processes of credit assessment, fraud detection and market trading involve AI in judgement? Identified separately for model suppliers, cloud suppliers and data suppliers In how many hours can a switch to rulebased or manual assessment be made? The rate of decline in processing capacity at the time of stoppage, and the rate at which backlogs accumulate Healthcare Which of the processes of image reading, diagnostic support and record preparation involve AI? The vendor of the in-house system, and beyond it the cloud and model suppliers Are the personnel and skills to carry out the conventional procedures in the absence of AI maintained? The decline in the number of cases processed per day at the time of stoppage, and the impact by degree of urgency Administration Which of the processes of benefits, licensing and public response are handled by AI? Government cloud as distinct from individual procurement, and the supply chain including subcontractors Does a plan exist for reverting to paper and in-person procedures? Processing delays at the time of stoppage, and whether statutory processing deadlines would be breached Manufacturing Which of the processes of inspection, maintenance and design are such that AI output could halt the line? Suppliers including indirect dependence by way of equipment vendors Whether a switch to visual inspection and periodic maintenance is possible, and its effect on yield The decline in line utilization at the time of stoppage, and the number of days absorbable by inventory Logistics Which of the processes of delivery planning and warehouse operation have plans generated by AI? Suppliers along the chain, including the systems of shippers and prime contractors The upper limit on throughput when switching to manual planning The accumulation of delivery delays at the time of stoppage, and where the disruption propagates Education Which of the processes of preparing materials, learning Suppliers of the education cloud and Whether reversion to conventional ma‐ The impact on the conduct of classes at the 1043 Sector (i) Identification of the process (ii) Identification of the supplier (iii) Substitute procedures (iv) Profile at the time of stoppage support and assessment use AI? of individual services terials and procedures is possible time of stoppage (immediate / by term) C.3 Definition of the Indicators The system of indicators divides into two series. The exposure indicators (the E series) can be composed by re-editing existing statistics and can be updated quarterly to annually. The dependence indicators (the D series) take degradation at the time of interruption as an element and therefore require direct measurement from failure events or exercises. Not to conflate the two is the first discipline of this protocol — the usage that calls amounts of payment abroad or rates of use "proxy variables for dependence" is widely current, but it is a usage that Definition 4 explicitly excludes. Table C-3a. Exposure indicators (the E series): composable by re-editing existing statistics Indicator Definition Method of measurement Updating frequency E1 Amount of external procurement Payments abroad related to AI and cloud (nationally and by sector) Digital-related items of balance of payments statistics; enterprise procurement records Quarterly E2 Ratio of processing on external platforms The proportion of critical processes whose operations are processed on the platforms of foreign providers Cloud use surveys; system registers; ascertainment of subcontractors Annual E3 Rate of use The rate of AI use by individuals, firms and administration (presence or absence of adoption) Existing surveys of actual use Annual E4 Domestic value added per yen of digital procurement The value added formed domestically per unit of external procurement (formula in C.3.2 below) Joining of balance of payments statistics with input– output tables and ICT investment statistics Annual E4 differs in character from the other three indicators. Where E1 to E3 measure the magnitude of exposure, E4 measures its efficiency. Because the falsification condition of Proposition 13 (Section 18) specifies it as the indicator of determination, and because it is a mapping of energy intensity since 1973, this protocol includes E4 as an independent indicator (formula in C.3.2). Table C-3b. Dependence indicators (the D series): the four core indicators of the dependence audit 1044 Indicator Definition Method of measurement Existing methods referred to (1) AI input ratio The proportion of the critical processes of a sector into which AI services are an input (on a count-of-processes basis and on a value-added-weighted basis) Disaggregation of information- service inputs in input–output tables; enterprise surveys (identifying the using departments and operations); system registers of government and large firms Energy input ratios; ICT investment statistics (2) Speed of degradation at the time of interruption The depth of degradation in output or function arising within a specified number of days (1, 7, 30) after an interruption of supply. Measured as a time profile (a) Ex post estimation from failure events (natural experiment); (b) direct measurement by AI outage exercises (C.6); (c) enterprise surveys (selfdeclaration in business continuity plans) The four methods of VoLL estimation (customer survey / production function / revealed preference / ex post case study). The robust finding that the cost of a power outage reaches tens to hundreds of times the retail price shows that "the marginal value at the time of stoppage differs by orders of magnitude from the price in normal times," and grounds the rule that AI expenditure in normal times must not be used as a proxy for dependence (3) Supplier HHI Supplier concentration by layer (model API / cloud / chips / electricity). Shared suppliers within and across sectors are identified Estimation of shares by layer from procurement records and enterprise surveys, and calculation of the HHI. The world cloud market is known to be concentrated at about two-thirds in the top three firms, and the point is direct measurement of domestic shares by layer Supplier-country HHI in energy security; concentration-risk analysis by financial authorities (FSB, BoE) (4) Number of days of substitutability The number of days for which critical processes can be maintained, at the time of a stoppage of the principal supplier, by switching to substitute systems (domestically held capability, other suppliers, non-AI procedures) On-site examination of switching procedures, personnel and contracts; direct measurement of switching in AI outage exercises Days of oil stockpile (the IEA member obligation of 90 days of net imports; Japan's stockpile of approximately 254 days as of the end of December 2025). Note, however, the asymmetry of depreciation in Proposition 8 (Section 13) — the "days" of AI are not a static inventory but a function of continually renewed capability and procedures 1045 C.3.1 Formulae for the Dependence Indicators (the D Series) (1) AI input ratio. The set of critical processes of sector s is represented weighted by the value added (or the volume processed) that each process generates. The AI input ratio is defined as the sum of the weights of the processes into which AI services are an input, divided by the sum of the weights of all processes of the sector. Two series are reported side by side: a count-of-processes basis (a simple proportion) and a value-added-weighted basis. The divergence between them itself carries information — a sector low on the count basis and high on the value-added-weighted basis has AI concentrated in a small number of high-value processes, and carries a narrow, deep dependence. (2) Speed of degradation at the time of interruption. The ratio of sectoral output (or level of function) at elapsed time t after the interruption of supply, relative to normal times, is measured as a degradation function, and summarized in two numbers: the depth of degradation at the specified points (1, 7 and 30 days) and the grace period (lag) before degradation begins. As an indicator, the cumulative degradation over the specified period (a quantity of loss corresponding to the integral of the difference from normal output) is used. The correspondence with the four methods of VoLL estimation is as set out in Table C-3b(2); both direct measurement by exercise (revealed methods) and enterprise surveys (stated methods) are used, and the difference between the methods is reported side by side rather than concealed. Where this indicator is monetized it may be called the "cost of AI outage (Value of Lost AI)," but because monetization inevitably carries a wide range across estimators (C.5), it is first measured as degradation on a physical or throughput basis, and monetization is treated as a subsidiary exercise accompanied by sensitivity analysis. (3) Supplier HHI. For each layer l (model API / cloud / chips / electricity), the share of each supplier within the sector (on the basis of procurement value or volume processed) is expressed as a percentage and the sum of squares taken, as the standard Herfindahl– Hirschman Index. To capture cross-sector correlation, shared-supplier exposure — the proportion of total domestic value added accounted for by the combined value added of the sectors dependent on a given supplier — is calculated alongside the layer-by-layer HHI. The former measures concentration within a sector, the latter correlation across sectors. A state in which both are high at once is the condition under which the amplification of Proposition 7 (Section 13) operates most strongly. (4) Number of days of substitutability. Defined as the number of days for which critical processes can be maintained at or above a specified level of function (for example 80% of normal) at the time of a stoppage of the principal supplier. Its components are three: (a) the time required to switch to a substitute supplier, (b) the period over which processing can be maintained by non-AI procedures (depending on the survival of personnel, skills and paper procedures), and (c) the range over which domestically held capability can substitute; the shortest, rate-limiting element determines the number of days as a whole. The important difference from days of oil stockpile is that this number of days is not a static inventory but a function of assets — capability, procedures and contracts — that require 1046 renewal (Proposition 8, Section 13). The number of days of substitutability is therefore not measured once and for all, but requires re-measurement at each generation of capability. C.3.2 Formula for Exposure Indicator E4 — "Domestic Value Added per Yen of Digital Procurement" Proposition 13 (Section 18) specifies, as the indicator determining the success or failure of Japan's policy, not the deficit on the digital-related balance but domestic value added per yen of digital procurement. This subsection sets out its formula and measurement procedure. Basic form. For the country as a whole, it is defined as the ratio taking as denominator the external procurement related to AI and digital in the year concerned, and as numerator the increment of domestic value added formed in that year in AI-inputting sectors. That is, E4 = (increment of domestic value added in AI-inputting sectors) ÷ (external procurement related to AI and digital). The unit is "yen per yen" and is therefore dimensionless. As a time series, two series are reported side by side: the ratio of nominal values and the ratio with both terms deflated — because in phases where AI-related prices fall rapidly, the nominal ratio may rise through a price effect. Sectoral form. For sector s, E4(s) = (increment of domestic value added attributable to the AI input of sector s) ÷ (AI and cloud procurement of sector s). Attribution is estimated by joining AI and information-service inputs in input–output tables with sectoral value added, or by firm-level panels (simultaneous observation of procurement and value added). The sectoral form carries greater estimation uncertainty than the national form, but is indispensable for identifying the objects of policy — because even where the overall ratio is flat, rises and falls across sectors may be offsetting one another. Formal identity with the 1973 counterpart. Energy intensity was defined as the quantity of primary energy input required to generate one trillion yen of GDP, and in Japan this quantity halved from 70 PJ in fiscal 1973 to 35 PJ in fiscal 2021. Whereas intensity is an "input intensity" placing input in the numerator and output in the denominator, E4 is an "output efficiency" placing output in the numerator and input in the denominator; the two stand in a reciprocal relation. The orientations differ because in energy the goal was the reduction of input, whereas in AI the expansion of input (utilization) is rather preferable, and what should be reduced is not the input itself but the lowness of the result per unit of input. Setting aside this difference of orientation, the two have an identical form — in both, the indicator of policy determination is efficiency per unit rather than an aggregate such as the volume or value of imports. Three cautions in measurement. First, the estimation of attribution in the numerator carries great uncertainty. Separating the increment of value added brought about by AI input from increments due to other factors carries the same difficulty as the verification of the compounding structure of Proposition 5 (Section 7) itself. E4 is therefore an indicator to be read not as an absolute level but as the direction of a time series and a 1047 relative position in international comparison. Second, the scope of aggregation of the denominator must be made explicit. The digital-related balance is not a formal item of balance of payments statistics but a trial concept bracketing five items (telecommunications services, computer services, information services, charges for the use of intellectual property, and professional and management consulting services), and the amount varies with the scope of aggregation. Where E4 is used for international comparison, it is a precondition that each country adopt the same scope of aggregation. Third, E4 is an exposure indicator and not a dependence indicator. That E4 is high (that procurement is efficiently converted into value added) does not mean that vulnerability at the time of an AI outage is low — rather, the more deeply AI input is embedded in value added, the greater degradation at the time of interruption may be. E4 and the D series must be monitored independently. C.3.3 The Protocol for Computing E4 — From Which Statistics, by Which Procedure What requires the most care with respect to E4 is the availability of data. The difficulty decomposes into three points. First, the digital-related balance that supplies the denominator is not a formal item of balance of payments statistics but a trial concept bracketing several items, and the noise in its composition is large. Second, the input–output tables used to compute the numerator (the increment of domestic value added in AI-inputting sectors) are published with a lag of several years, so that their time axis is inconsistent with quarterly monitoring. Third, as a result of the foregoing, E4 risks becoming "an indicator whose formula can be written but which cannot be constructed." This subsection and the next answer these three points in order — this one dealing with the procedure of computation, the next with the separation of time axes. Composition of the denominator (four stages).Stage 1 — determination of the scope of aggregation. The digital-related balance is a trial concept bracketing five items of the services account: telecommunications services, computer services, information services, charges for the use of intellectual property, and professional and management consulting services; the amount differs between an aggregation bracketing three items and one bracketing five. The denominator must therefore always be composed in two series (narrow = three items, broad = five items), and neither reported alone. For Japan, a series on this five-item basis is published annually on the basis of balance of payments statistics (the aggregation of the White Paper on Information and Communications cited in C.5), and it is that series which expanded to a deficit of approximately 6.7 trillion yen in 2024. Stage 2 — narrowing to AI-related items. The five items include payments abroad other than AI input (outsourcing, advertising, charges for use of entertainment content, and the like). So far as breakdowns are available, the portion corresponding to cloud usage charges is separated from the remainder. Stage 3 — allocation to sectors. Because balance of payments statistics do not give a sectoral breakdown of paying entities, apportionment is required to compose sectoral E4. The basis of apportionment is enterprise procurement records, sectoral cloud and AI service expenditure from enterprise surveys, and published records of government procurement. Stage 4 — explicit treatment of 1048 hardware. Imports of computing equipment are recorded in trade statistics and do not appear in the services account. Whether to include them in the denominator of E4 depends on the purpose of the analysis, and both the case including them and the case excluding them are reported. Composition of the numerator (two methods). The numerator is "the increment of domestic value added formed in AI-inputting sectors in the year concerned," and no statistic observes this directly. There are two methods of estimation, and both are used in parallel. Method 1 — estimation of induced amounts by input–output tables. Using the input– output structure of the input–output tables, the value added induced in each domestic sector by an increment of input into the information-service and information-and-communications sectors is calculated. The strengths of this method are that it captures inter-sectoral propagation and that it can separate domestic value added from the imported portion structurally. It has two weaknesses — that the basic tables are compiled only once in several years, and that the publication of extension tables and international linked tables is later still. What Method 1 therefore gives is not the level in the most recent year but an apprehension of the structure at a point several years past. This lag is not removed by improvements in estimation technique. Method 2 — direct estimation by firm-level panels. Value added is composed from corporate financial statements (aggregates such as the Financial Statements Statistics of Corporations, and the disclosures of individual firms), using the accounting definition of value added as the sum of operating profit, personnel costs and depreciation, and matched with the AI and cloud procurement of the same firms. The strengths of this method are that it can be composed at quarterly frequency and that procurement and value added are observed for the same entity. Its weaknesses are that it does not capture intersectoral propagation, and that the ascertainment of procurement depends on cooperation with surveys. The relation between the two methods. Method 1 gives level and structure, Method 2 direction and timeliness. They are complementary rather than substitutes, and are placed in the relation that the series of Method 2 is calibrated in level whenever Method 1 is updated. Differences arising at calibration are recorded rather than concealed — the size of the difference is itself an indicator of the reliability of the timely series. Treatment of the uncertainty attending the estimation of attribution. By neither method can the portion of the observed increment of value added attributable to AI input be separated from increments due to other factors (the business cycle, prices, other investment, organizational change). This difficulty is identical with that carried by the verification of the compounding structure of Proposition 5 (Section 7). E4 is therefore read not as an absolute level but as the direction of a time series, and as a relative position among a group of countries whose indicators are composed on the same definition. This constraint on reading is not relaxed by refining the computation procedure. 1049 C.3.4 Separation of Time Axes — An Annual Structural Indicator and a Quarterly Timely Indicator As C.3.3 showed, the components of E4 differ greatly in updating frequency — part of the denominator (balance of payments statistics) is updated monthly or quarterly, while the principal means of estimating the numerator (input–output tables) is updated with a lag of several years. If a single indicator is composed disregarding this difference, the indicator is rate-limited by its slowest component and becomes unusable for quarterly monitoring. If, on the other hand, timeliness alone is given priority and the numerator is replaced by a coarse proxy, the meaning of the level is lost. The solution is not to make a single indicator. This protocol separates E4 into two series — the annual structural indicator E4-A and the quarterly timely indicator E4-Q. The two are different observations of the same concept, with different purposes. E4-A is used for apprehending the level, E4-Q only for apprehending the direction. Using the level of E4-Q for international comparison, and setting the level of E4-Q as a policy target, are both prohibited. Table C-4. The two-layer composition of E4 — an annual structural indicator and a quarterly timely indicator Series Purpose Numerator Denominator Updating frequency and publication lag Permissible readings Impermissible readings E4-A (annual, structural indicator) Apprehension of the level and relative position in international comparison Domestic value added induced, by input–output tables (Method 1 of C.3.3) Two series of balance of payments statistics, five items and three items. Series including and excluding hardware reported side by side Annual. Owing to the publication lag of basic and extension tables, however, the object year is several years past rather than the most recent Level, structure (sectoral breakdown), relative position among a group of countries composed on the same definition, trends over several years Determination of the effect of recent policy changes (because the object year lags) E4-Q (quarterly, timely indicator) Apprehension of direction, and monitoring in the interval Year-on-year change in value added aggregated from corporate financial statements (the sum of operating Quarterly values of balance of payments statistics (five items). Sectoral apportionment applies the annual apportionment Quarterly. Following the publication cycle of balance of payments statistics Direction (rising, falling, flat); recording of the divergence from E4-A Absolute level, international comparison, setting as a policy target 1050

Series Purpose Numerator Denominator Updating frequency and publication lag Permissible readings Impermissible readings until E4- A is updated profit, personnel costs and depreciation) (Method 2 of C.3.3) ratios carried forward Three disciplines are laid down for operating the two-layer composition. First, E4-Q is calibrated by E4-A. When E4-A is updated, the difference from the value of E4-Q corresponding to the same year is recorded, and if the difference is widening, the apportionment ratios and the accounting definition of value added are examined. Second, determination of direction requires at least three consecutive quarters of movement. Variation in a single quarter arises readily from bias in accounting periods, exchange-rate movement and large one-off procurements. Third, movement in E4-Q is not reported as a policy achievement. E4-Q is a series for monitoring direction, and determination of achievement is made only against multi-year trends in E4-A. This two-layer composition has a structure isomorphic with that of the other indicators of the dependence audit — the exposure indicators (the E series) can be composed at high frequency from existing statistics, while the dependence indicators (the D series) require direct measurement from exercises and events and are therefore of low frequency. Attempting to report indicators of differing frequency on the same cycle is the typical design error that breaks a monitoring system (the same point as that made in Appendix F.1.1 concerning why indicators updated only annually are retained in a quarterly review table). C.3.5 Treatment of the Noise Arising From Composite Items The digital-related payments abroad that compose the denominator are a composite item including a variety of transactions other than AI input. This property is only partly dissolved by efforts at narrowing. This protocol adopts a design of narrowing in three stages and, for the portion that cannot be narrowed, making explicit the reservations on interpretation. Three stages of narrowing.Stage 1 — narrowing by breakdown of items. Among the five items, those in which AI and cloud usage charges are principally recorded are separated from the others. Breakdowns by item are available from the publication system of balance of payments statistics. Stage 2 — narrowing by the distribution of counterparties. So far as breakdowns by partner country and region are available, payments to jurisdictions in which the supply of platform services is concentrated are separated from the rest. This separation, however, produces error where the location of the contracting 1051 entity and the source of the service provided do not coincide. Stage 3 — apportionment by use through enterprise surveys. Through surveys of firms, declarations are obtained of the portion of payments abroad corresponding to AI and cloud services, and apportionment ratios are estimated. Because this stage does not exist in current statistics, the addition of questions to surveys is required. Reservations where narrowing is not possible. Even after Stage 3, a considerable range remains in the apportionment ratios. In that case, the following three reservations are stated expressly in the report. (i) Not to be used for international comparison of levels — so long as the method of apportionment differs across countries, a difference in level may be a difference of apportionment rather than of substance. (ii) Confine interpretation to direction — where the total of the denominator moves while the apportionment ratios are held fixed, that movement does not depend on the precision of the narrowing, so the information about direction is preserved. (iii) Do not set the deficit itself as a policy target — this is the discipline that Proposition 13 (Section 18) states directly, and the noise of a composite item strengthens it further. To read the rise or fall of payments whose composition cannot be identified as the success or failure of policy is to issue a determination about something that has not been measured. On trial computations. This protocol presents no trial computation of the numerical value of E4. There are two reasons. First, this paper has not carried out the joining of input–output tables used to estimate the numerator, and to present as an example the result of an estimation not carried out would not be exposition of procedure but fabrication of a number. Second, because E4 is not an indicator to be read as an absolute level (C.3.2), presenting a single-year trial value would invite misreading more than presenting none. What this subsection gives is a description of procedure unaccompanied by numbers, and as to the series of the denominator it goes no further than specifying an existing and repeatedly published statistic (the aggregation of the digital-related balance based on balance of payments statistics). C.3.6 Examination of the Separation of Exposure Indicators (the E Series) From Dependence Indicators (the D Series) As stated at the head of C.3, the separation of the two series is the first discipline of this protocol. Since the two-layer composition of E4 has been introduced, whether the separation has become blurred is examined. The result of the examination is set out in four points. First, E4-A and E4-Q are both exposure indicators. E4 measures the efficiency with which external procurement is converted into domestic value added, and does not include degradation at the time of an interruption of supply as an element. It is therefore not the dependence of Definition 4. That E4 is high does not mean that vulnerability at the time of an AI outage is low — rather, the more deeply AI input is embedded in value added, the greater degradation at the time of interruption may be. The third caution of C.3.2 states this, and the separation into two layers does not alter the relation. 1052 Second, of the four indicators of the D series, the two requiring direct measurement from exercises or events are (2) speed of degradation at the time of interruption and (4) number of days of substitutability. Indicators (1) AI input ratio and (3) supplier HHI have a character close to that of exposure indicators in that they can be composed from statistics and procurement records. Both, however, are components entering into the composition of dependence, and are not dependence on their own. To preserve this distinction, this protocol treats (1) and (3) as "indicators belonging to the D series but not requiring direct measurement," and in reporting displays them in columns separate from (2) and (4), which do require direct measurement. Third, the estimation of the divergence between exposure and dependence (C.4.2(1)) presupposes that the two series are composed separately. In an estimation taking the divergence as the dependent variable, if elements of dependence are mixed into the composition of exposure, the dependent and explanatory variables are contaminated. The results of exercises must therefore not be used in composing exposure indicators. The results of exercises enter only on the dependence side. Fourth, the two series are not mixed in the same table in the reporting format. The present composition, displaying Table C-3a and Table C-3b separately, is the formal guarantee of this discipline. Where composite indicators (C.4) are published, the composite value of exposure and the composite value of dependence are published separately and the two are not bundled into a single score. A single score bundling the two erases the very object of measurement, namely the divergence. C.4 Method of Composition Composition proceeds in three stages. (1) Sectoral dependence: for each sector, a sectoral dependence score is composed from the AI input ratio and the speed of degradation at the time of interruption (the depth of degradation at the specified number of days). (2) Sectoral risk: sectoral dependence is multiplied by the layer-by-layer supplier HHI and by outage correlation (identification of the groups of sectors sharing the same supplier and the same platform), expressing sectoral AI outage risk as the product "dependence × supplier concentration × outage correlation" of Proposition 7 (Section 13). (3) National dependence indicator: composed with sectoral value-added weights and published as a time series. The test of Hypothesis H1 is conducted as a test of whether the movement of this indicator since 2023 shows a monotone increase in the major economies. Because discretion enters into the choice of weights and functional forms at each stage of composition, a non-composite dashboard of the four core indicators is always published alongside the single composite value (mitigating the dispute over weights that is the fate of composite indicators by transparency as to their components). 1053 C.4.1 The Approach to Weighting and the Treatment of Arbitrariness A composite indicator contains discretion at all four stages of selection of components, normalization, weighting and the aggregation function. As the lineage of energy security indicators shows, this discretion cannot be eliminated and must be managed. This protocol imposes four disciplines. First, explicit statement of weights and a default: sectoral value-added weights are the default weights, and where other weights are used (for example additional weight on sectors bearing on human life), they are published as a separate series together with their grounds. Second, mandatory sensitivity analysis: whether sectoral rankings and the direction of time series change when the weights are varied within a certain range is reported every time, separating the parts of the conclusion that are robust to the weights from those that are not. Third, explicit statement of the choice of aggregation function: additive aggregation permits substitution among components, so that high dependence in one sector may be offset by lowness in another. For objects having the property that "the most vulnerable sector governs the whole," as AI outage risk does, multiplicative aggregation or aggregation based on the minimum or on a quantile is used alongside, to express non-substitutability. Fourth, publication of a noncomposite dashboard alongside: in parallel with the single composite value, the raw values of the four core indicators are published continuously by sector and by layer. The composite value is a device for drawing attention, and policy judgement should be made on the basis of the non-composite components. By these means the dispute over weights that is unavoidable in a composite indicator is placed outside policy judgement by transparency as to the components. C.4.2 Design of the Analysis of Exercise Data — Estimation of the Divergence and the Interaction Test for Proposition 7 The data obtained from exercises (C.6) and from failure events are not only used to update indicators but directly test two propositions of this paper. This subsection sets out the estimation design. (1) Estimation of the divergence between exposure and dependence (the latter part of Hypothesis H1). For organization i and process k, the difference between the dependence D(i,k) directly measured in the exercise and the exposure E(i,k) composed from statistics is taken as the dependent variable, and the state of preparation of substitute procedures as the explanatory variable. The state of preparation is composed from three quantities observed in the exercise — (a) whether substitute procedures are documented and have recently been practised (three-valued), (b) the time required for switching, and (c) the proportion of personnel able to carry out non-AI procedures. The prediction of Hypothesis H1 is that the magnitude of the divergence is explained by this state of preparation, that is, that the better prepared an organization, the lower its dependence for the same exposure. If this estimation holds, dependence can be decomposed in a form close to "exposure × (1 − capacity to substitute)," and it is shown that the point of policy intervention lies not in reducing exposure but in building capacity to substitute. Conversely, where the 1054 state of preparation does not explain the divergence — where degradation at the time of interruption does not change even when substitute procedures are put in place — the latter part of Hypothesis H1 is rejected, and dependence may be treated as a monotone function of exposure. This test bears on the reason for the existence of this protocol as a whole — for if the latter part is rejected, the costly measurement instrument of the exercise is unnecessary and exposure statistics suffice. (2) The interaction test for Proposition 7 (a test of multiplicativity). Proposition 7 (Section 13) asserts that the systemic risk of an AI outage is amplified as the product dependence × supplier concentration × outage correlation. This subsection makes that assertion explicit as an estimable functional form. For the degradation D(s) of sector s at the time of a failure, the following is estimated. log D(s) = α + β₁·log(dependence) + β₂·log(concentration) + β₃·log(correlation) + γ·(interaction term) + ε(s) Here dependence is the sectoral dependence composed from indicators (1) and (2) of Table C-3b, concentration is the layer-by-layer HHI of indicator (3), and correlation is shared-supplier exposure (C.3.1(3)). The interaction term is composed as the product of the logarithms of the three factors (or as the sum of the products of pairs of factors), and several specifications are reported side by side to show the robustness of the results. The prediction of Proposition 7 is that β₁, β₂ and β₃ are all positive and that γ is positive. The falsification condition is plain — if the coefficient on any of the three factors is significantly non-positive, or if the interaction term is not significant (that is, if the three factors act only additively), the claim of multiplicative amplification is rejected. There are three design points in this test. First, the three factors must be measured before the event or exercise. Dependence measured after the event includes the results of degradation, so that the dependent and explanatory variables are contaminated. The annual measurement of this protocol therefore has the role of pre-processing for event studies. Second, identification depends on the exogeneity of the failure. The requirements are that the technical cause of the failure be unrelated to the state of the user side, and that other disturbances arising at the same time be removed; in the case of an exercise, because the object and timing of the cut-off are determined by the analyst, exogeneity is secured by design — this is the advantage of exercises over natural experiments. Third, the constraint of sample number is large. Large-scale failure events number a few a year, and exercises no more than one to a few a year, so that a design securing sample number by taking sector s as the unit of analysis (a sector × event panel) is required. In this respect the third stage of C.6 (the cross-sector exercise) has the specific value not merely of a wider measurement scope but of generating at one time the sample required for this test. (3) Testing the three functions of Proposition 13. The falsification condition of Proposition 13 (Section 18) provides that if none of the three functions of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (operational capacity, renewal capability, the sensitive-processing condi‐ 1055 tion) is associated with the depth of degradation and the time to restoration in AI outage events, the identification of the object of guarantee in (c) is rejected. Exercise data are used directly for this test as well — the level of the three functions is assessed in advance by organization (items 17 to 24 of Block III of Appendix D provide the assessment framework) and regressed on the depth of degradation and the time to restoration directly measured in the exercise. The prediction is that all three functions carry negative coefficients, that is, that the higher the level of the three functions in an organization, the shallower the degradation and the faster the restoration. Estimating the three functions separately yields information bearing directly on the allocation of investment in the guarantee level, namely which function most strongly suppresses degradation. C.5 Data Sources and Reporting Institutions In addition to the existing statistics and surveys set out in Tables C-1 and C-3, two institutional gaps must be filled on the side of data sources. First, a public system for reporting failure events. Electricity has outage statistics (of the SAIDI/SAIFI type), but stoppages of AI and cloud have no public framework of measurement and reporting and depend on providers' status pages and ex post private estimates. Ex post estimates of past events carry wide ranges depending on method — in the CrowdStrike failure (19 July 2024) approximately 8.5 million Windows devices worldwide stopped simultaneously (as published by Microsoft), and the direct losses of Fortune 500 companies were estimated at 5.4 billion dollars, of which 10 to 20% was estimated to be covered by insurance (Parametrix). As with the precedent of the major power outage of 2003 in North America, whose estimated economic damage varied more than twofold among estimators at 4.5 to 10 billion dollars, a range in damage estimates is unavoidable, and it is for that reason that a reporting obligation collecting primary data at the time of occurrence is required. As precedents, the United Kingdom CTP regime in the financial sector (in force July 2026, designating four firms — Microsoft, Google Cloud, AWS and Oracle — under the direct supervision of the financial authorities) and EU DORA (fully applicable January 2025) have already institutionalized incident reporting obligations and resilience testing, and extending this form to critical sectors outside finance is the shortest path. Second, connection to the balance of payments. The digital-related balance (in Japan a deficit of approximately 6.7 trillion yen in 2024, the largest on record, principally due to cloud usage charges) is an existing statistic capturing the exposure of AI input on the monetary side (not dependence — Definition 4), and supplies the denominator of exposure indicators E1 and E4 (C. 3.2). Its relation to the dependence indicators is not that of an external criterion of validation but an object of measurement of the divergence. Table C-5. Data sources by indicator 1056 Indicator Existing statistics and administrative records Newly required collection Institutional vehicle (precedents) AI input ratio Input–output tables (information- service inputs), ICT and intangible- asset investment statistics, enterprise surveys of IT investment, the register of government information systems Surveys of actual use at the level of the process (the questions of Table C-2) Addition of questions to core statistical surveys Speed of degradation at the time of interruption Ex post reporting of failure events and providers' ex post reports; entries in business continuity plans Records of direct measurement in AI outage exercises; high-frequency data at the time of failures (payments, logistics, trading) Extension to other sectors of incident reporting obligations in finance (the United Kingdom CTP regime, EU DORA) Supplier HHI Procurement records and contract databases, published government procurement, thirdparty dependence reporting by financial authorities Identification of suppliers by layer (model / cloud / chips / electricity) and ascertainment of subcontractors Regimes designating critical third parties; supplychain surveys accompanying the designation of materials under economic security legislation Number of days of substitutability Business continuity plans; substitution clauses in contracts On-site examination of switching and direct measurement in exercises; inventory of the personnel and skills for non-AI procedures Resilience testing in critical infrastructure sectors Exposure indicators (E1 to E4) Balance of payments statistics (the digital-related balance), cloud use surveys, surveys of actual use, input–output tables and ICT investment statistics, trade statistics, electricity demand projections Estimation of attribution for the numerator of E4 (the increment of domestic value added in AI-inputting sectors) Re-editing of existing statistics (E4 requires the joining set out in the formula of C.3.2) C.6 Design of the AI Outage Exercise (Simulated Cut-Off Drill) Whereas the electricity system possesses drills assuming tight supply and demand, and a statutory allocation procedure (the sequence of requests to save electricity → orders restricting use → rolling outages; in Japan an order restricting use under Article 27 of the Electricity Business Act was actually issued in 2011), the capacity tightness and supply stoppages of AI have no public framework other than price and providers' discretionary rate limits. The AI outage exercise is a first step in filling this void, and is at the same time the means of directly measuring indicators (2) and (4). The first purpose of the exercise is direct measurement of the divergence between exposure and dependence. Since Definition 4 defines dependence by "degradation at the 1057 time of interruption" and distinguishes it explicitly from exposure (the rate of use, payments abroad, the proportion of operations processed on external platforms), dependence cannot be measured without bringing about an interruption. What can be obtained from statistics extends only to the E series (exposure); the D series (dependence) requires direct measurement from exercises or failure events. Since Hypothesis H1 asserts that "dependence diverges systematically from exposure, and the magnitude of that divergence is explained by the state of preparation of substitute procedures," the measurement of this divergence is not a by-product of the exercise but its principal purpose. In practical terms, this governs the design of the exercise — the exercise is conducted not only to see "how much stops," but to record the difference between "the prediction of degradation self-declared in advance" and "the degradation directly measured." As has been confirmed repeatedly in the fields of energy and finance, self-declaration of dependence is systematically understated, and actual dependence becomes visible only through exercises. The second purpose is direct measurement of indicators (2) speed of degradation at the time of interruption and (4) number of days of substitutability; the third is operational verification of substitute procedures and priority allocation. The design is as follows. Table C-6. The three-stage design of the AI outage exercise Stage Form Assumed scenario Items measured Stage 1: Tabletop exercise Within a sector, once a year. Tabletop verification of business continuity plans A 24-hour stoppage of a principal model API / a failure in a principal cloud region Inventory of affected processes, presence or absence of switching procedures, confirmation of lines of responsibility, recording of the prediction of degradation self-declared in advance (the difference from the later direct measurement is the estimate of the divergence) Stage 2: Sectoral field exercise Actual cut-off of AI services at selected organizations (or forced switching to substitute systems) while continuing operations Stoppage of a single supplier / halving of capacity through rate limits / exogenous change in the terms of access Direct measurement of the speed of degradation (time profile), direct measurement of the number of days of substitutability, feasibility of non-AI procedures (survival of personnel and skills), the divergence between exposure and dependence (the difference between the values of the E series and the directly measured dependence) Stage 3: Crosssector exercise Joint exercise of several sectors and suppliers. A national- level comprehensive exercise A composite scenario in which a failure in the cloud layer propagates vertically into the model API layer (a realistic assumption referring to the three successive major failures of the autumn of 2025 [AWS 20 October, Azure 29 October, Cloudflare 18 November]) / long- Direct measurement of inter-sectoral outage correlation, operational verification of the order of priority allocation, the effectiveness of the three components of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (Definition 6) — in particular the three functions of (i) (operational capacity, renewal capability, the sensitiveprocessing condition), generation of the sector × event panel required for 1058 Stage Form Assumed scenario Items measured term restriction of access through geopolitical measures the interaction test of Proposition 7 (C.4.2) C.6.1 Implementation Guidance by Stage Stage 1 (tabletop exercise). Participation comprises, as a minimum composition, the three parties within the sector responsible for operations, for information systems and for crisis management. Proceedings follow the order of presentation of the scenario, enumeration of the affected processes, declaration of the substitute procedures for each process, and identification of the officer responsible for the decision to switch; the deliverable is a "register of affected processes" (with four columns: process, supplier, substitute procedure, responsible officer). The purpose of this stage is not direct measurement of degradation but the making visible of dependence, and the sorting of processes that may and may not be cut off in the later stages. It is usual for a certain proportion of processes to be found at the tabletop stage to have "no substitute procedure," and that proportion is itself the first indicator of outcome. Stage 2 (partial cut-off). At selected organizations and processes, connection to AI services is actually cut off, or switching to substitute systems is forced. The cut-off begins with a limited period within working hours (for example a few hours to one business day), and the processes covered are limited to those determined at Stage 1 to be safely capable of being cut off. As a safety valve, criteria for termination (a specified level of degradation in processes bearing on human life, statutory deadlines or payments) and procedures for immediate restoration are set in advance, and a supervisor holds the power to terminate. What is measured is the time series of throughput, processing time and error rates, the time required for switching, and the proportion of personnel able to carry out non-AI procedures. The design point of a partial cut-off is to obtain the cooperation of suppliers so as to test also the form of "halving of capacity through rate limits." Actual tightness appears more often as a narrowing of capacity than as a complete stoppage, and degradation in this form traces a different profile from that of a complete stoppage. Stage 3 (full cut-off, cross-sector). A national-level comprehensive exercise in which several sectors and several suppliers participate, assuming simultaneously a full stoppage of a single supplier and vertical propagation from the layers above it (cloud, CDN, electricity). What can be measured only at this stage is inter-sectoral outage correlation (simultaneous degradation of sectors sharing the same supplier) and the operability of the order of priority allocation. The frequency of implementation is capped at once a year, and the burden is spread by rotating the sectors covered. Because a full cut-off has a large impact on actual operations, implementation on holidays or in low-load periods, or implementation in an environment equivalent to production, is offered as an option. Implementation in a production-equivalent environment, however, fails to capture the most important ob‐ 1059 ject of measurement, namely the survival of personnel and skills, so it is preferable that at least some processes be conducted in live operations. C.6.2 Criteria of Assessment Table C-7. Criteria for assessing the results of an exercise Axis of assessment Good Requires improvement Dangerous Existence of substitute procedures All critical processes have documented substitute procedures, recently practised Procedures exist but are not practised, or are missing for some processes No substitute procedures exist for critical processes Time required for switching Switching completed within the assumed grace period The grace period is exceeded but completion occurs the same day Switching is not completed, or the switching destination depended on the same supplier Depth of degradation Degradation over the specified period is within the range assumed in advance The assumption is exceeded but continuity of operations is possible Statutory deadlines or safety levels are breached Survival of personnel and skills Several personnel able to carry out non-AI procedures in each process Personnel able to carry them out are limited No personnel able to carry them out (a break in skills) Operation of priority allocation Allocation to protected demand was operated as designed in advance There was confusion in operation but it was corrected Priorities were not defined in advance Ascertainment of correlation Shared suppliers and paths of propagation had been identified in advance Unknown dependencies came to light during the exercise The overall picture of dependence cannot be ascertained (invisibility of subcontractors) Assessment is not a pass–fail determination; it is used to update the directly measured values of indicators (2) and (4), to estimate the divergence from exposure (C.4.2), and to identify the objects of remediation plans. Items falling under "dangerous" in particular are recorded as matters requiring remediation before the next exercise, and the completion of the remediation is itself included among the objects of measurement at the next exercise. C.6.3 Cautions in Implementation First, the treatment of trade secrets. Shares by supplier, terms of contract and internal procedures at the time of failures are competitively sensitive information for providers, and publishing them as they stand would not obtain cooperation. The design solution is to follow the method adopted in third-party dependence supervision in the financial sector — a two-layer structure in which details are reported confidentially to the supervisory au‐ 1060 thority and publication is confined to sectoral aggregates and anonymized distributions. Among the indicators, the supplier HHI serves the policy purpose if published only as a numerical value of concentration with the names of individual suppliers withheld. Second, the treatment of security information. The detailed location of vulnerabilities in critical infrastructure may itself be a blueprint for attack. Exercise scenarios, details of vulnerabilities and the specific thresholds of priority allocation are kept unpublished, and publication is confined to methodology and aggregate results. On the other hand, if the methodology too were unpublished the verifiability of the indicators would be lost, so the methodology is always published. Third, incentives to participate. Because exercises impose a burden on participants, mandating them alone leads to formalization. As precedents show, effective participation is obtained only where there is institutional underpinning in the designation and supervision of critical suppliers and in mandatory resilience testing. At the same time, the diversification of suppliers and the maintenance of substitute procedures on the basis of exercise results return a benefit as an improvement in the participants' own capacity for business continuity, and making that benefit visible is the condition of continuation. Fourth, international consistency. AI outages are correlated across borders precisely because supplier concentration is global (Proposition 7, Section 13). An exercise by a single country therefore cannot capture the overall picture of correlation, and international consistency in the definition of indicators and the design of exercises — the counterpart of international stockpiling standards and coordinated release frameworks in energy security — becomes a medium-term task. There are three key points in the design of exercises. First, advance design of prioritization: in rolling outages of electricity, the drawing of the line excluding critical facilities (hospitals and the like) became a social controversy at the stage of implementation. Who is to be protected to the last in the supply of AI at the time of an outage — the designation of protected demand such as healthcare, administration and payments — is an allocation design on which consensus should be built in normal times through exercises rather than at the time of crisis. Second, monitoring of depreciation: as Proposition 8 (Section 13) states, substitute systems and domestically held capability depreciate with the advance of the frontier, so that the exercise must be not a single verification but a periodic institution repeated at each generation of capability, re-measuring the possibility of switching. Third, publication of results: sectoral summaries of exercise results are incorporated into the updating of the dependence indicators (C.4), and unpublished details are reported to the supervisory authority, in a two-layer structure. By this, the exercise becomes, at the same time as a means of measurement, a disciplinary instrument prompting each actor's voluntary remediation of concentrated dependence (diversification of suppliers, maintenance of substitute procedures). 1061 C.7 The Minimum Indicator Set — The Minimum Five Indicators of the Dependence Audit C.7.1 Why a Minimum Set Is Required The audit set out in C.1 to C.6 is comprehensive — surveys at the level of the process for nine sectors, identification of suppliers for each of four layers of the stack, composition of annual indicators, implementation of three stages of exercise, and operation of a reporting system for failure events. This volume of work consumes a considerable amount of the implementing body's administrative capacity. Proposition 36 (Section 19) lists three modes to which a demand for comprehensive monitoring leads where administrative capacity is constrained — non-implementation, formalization, and delay of the very activity being monitored — and states that in none of these cases is the purpose of monitoring achieved. An audit attempting to ascertain exhaustively even the AI use latent in corporate activity itself generates administrative costs and may turn into a regulatory bottleneck slowing the speed of transformation. This is not a criticism external to this protocol but an internal design requirement — for an audit that cannot be implemented has failed as a design. This section responds to Proposition 36 and lays down a minimum indicator set for the dependence audit. The design principle follows Section 19.7.3 — a minimum set is composed not of the indicators individually richest in information but of the indicators giving information that no other indicator can substitute for. Taking indicators from the top in order of information content overlooks overlaps among indicators and produces a set that measures the same information several times. The correct method of selection is a determination of non-substitutability — one asks, on removing a given indicator, whether its value can be inferred from the remaining indicators; if it can, the indicator is removed, and if it cannot, it is retained. The determination of inferability rests not on statistical correlation alone but includes determination by mechanism. C.7.2 The Minimum Five Indicators and the Reasons for Their Selection Table C-8 shows the result of reducing the indicators of C.3 (four exposure indicators, four dependence indicators and derived quantities) as the starting point. The minimum set is composed not independently of the comprehensive version but as a reduction of it — this is a procedure for guaranteeing that the minimum set supports the same judgements as the comprehensive version. Table C-8. The minimum indicator set of the dependence audit (five indicators) — source of reduction, grounds of non-substitutability, character of observation 1062

# Indicator of the minimum set Source in the comprehensive version Why no other indicator can substitute for it Cost and frequency of observation Difficulty of manipulation Cmin1 Shared-supplier exposure — the proportion of total domestic value added accounted for by the combined value added of the sectors dependent on a single supplier (recorded with the layer identified) A derived quantity of C. 3.1(3) The layer-by-layer HHI measures concentration within a sector; shared-supplier exposure measures correlation across sectors. They are different quantities and neither can be inferred from the other. The condition under which an AI outage is amplified from a local failure into a stoppage of the system as a whole (Proposition 7, Section 13) is observed only through the latter Composed from procurement records and contract databases. Annual High (based on procurement records, hard to move at the discretion of those monitored) Cmin2 Number of days of substitutability — the number of days for which critical processes can be maintained at or above a specified level of function at the time of a stoppage of the principal supplier (the shortest, rate-limiting element recorded) Table C-3b(4) It can be inferred neither from exposure nor from the AI input ratio. That the capacity to substitute differs for the same exposure is the very content of the divergence asserted by the latter part of Hypothesis H1. If the number of days of substitutability is dropped, monitoring degenerates into the observation of exposure On-site examination of switching procedures, personnel and contracts. In the minimum version, examination without an exercise suffices. Annual Medium (a portion depending on self-declaration remains, so corroboration by Cmin3 is required) Cmin3 A directly measured value of the speed of degradation at the time of interruption — at least once a year, a time profile of degradation obtained from an exercise or failure event for at least one sector Table C-3b(2), C.6 Dependence is defined by Definition 4 as "degradation at the time of interruption." There exists in principle no method of measuring dependence without bringing about an interruption. What can be obtained from statistics extends only to exposure, and if this single indicator is dropped the audit becomes one that measures no dependence at all The highest. In the minimum version it may be confined to a tabletop exercise (Stage 1) plus a partial cut-off in one sector (Stage 2). Once a year High (a directly measured value; the difference from the prior self-declaration is itself recorded) Cmin4 AI input ratio (value-addedweighted basis) — the value-added- One of the two series of It is the quantity that weights the magnitude of the damage from degradation, and is the sole basis for extrapolating Composed from enterprise surveys and system Medium (depends on responses to surveys) 1063 # Indicator of the minimum set Source in the comprehensive version Why no other indicator can substitute for it Cost and frequency of observation Difficulty of manipulation weighted proportion of the critical processes of a sector into which AI services are an input Table C-3b(1) the direct measurement of Cmin3 (one sector) to other sectors. The count-of-processes series can be approximated from the value-added- weighted series and the process composition of the sector, and is therefore reducible; the converse does not hold registers. Annual Cmin5 The HHI of the most concentrated layer, with the layer identified — identifying, among the four layers (model API, cloud, chips, electricity), the most concentrated layer and recording the HHI of that layer A reduction of Table C-3b(3) It identifies the layer that is the origin of amplification without paying the cost of maintaining the HHI of all four layers. The HHIs of all layers cannot be inferred from the HHI of the most concentrated layer, but for the judgement of which layer is the rate-limiting element of an AI outage the most concentrated layer suffices. A numerical value of concentration without identification of the layer is not used, because it does not indicate the object of remediation Composed from procurement records and market aggregates. Annual High (can be reconciled with external market aggregates) The principal indicators dropped by reduction, and the grounds. Exposure indicators E2 (ratio of processing on external platforms) and E3 (rate of use) can be inferred by mechanism from the AI input ratio of C-min4 — both measure the spread of the input of AI services from another angle and give no independent information. E1 (amount of external procurement) remains in the comprehensive version as the denominator of E4, but does not enter the minimum set — because, once the capacity to substitute is controlled for, the magnitude of procurement contributes almost nothing to the prediction of degradation. E4 (domestic value added per yen of digital procurement) does not enter the minimum set of the dependence audit. The judgement E4 supports is the efficiency of transformation and utilization, not the structure of dependence, and minimum sets are composed judgement by judgement. The quarterly timely version of E4 (E4-Q) is placed on the side of the minimum item set of the national diagnostic (Appendix D.3). 1064 What cannot be determined with the minimum set. With these five indicators the following judgements do not hold. (i) Estimation of the divergence between exposure and dependence (C.4.2(1), the latter part of Hypothesis H1) — estimating the divergence requires observing both exposure and dependence at the level of the organization, and direct measurement in one sector does not provide sufficient sample. (ii) The interaction test for Proposition 7 (C.4.2(2)) — it requires a sector × event panel and cannot be conducted without the cross-sector exercise (Stage 3). (iii) Decomposition of the three functions of the sovereign minimum guarantee level (C.4.2(3)) — which function most strongly suppresses degradation cannot be obtained without assessing the three functions in advance and comparing several organizations. (iv) The overall picture of inter-sectoral paths of propagation — C-min1 gives the magnitude of correlation but not the structure of the paths. (v) The level of E4 — as stated above, E4 lies outside the minimum set. Users of the minimum set must record, as an absence of judgement, that they hold no judgement on these five points. Holding a list of what one is not looking at is as important as holding a list of what one is looking at — for monitoring that lacks the former misreads what lies outside its field of vision as "no abnormality" (Section 19.7.4). C.7.3 Treatment Where the Determinations of the Simplified and Comprehensive Versions Diverge The latter part of the falsification condition of Proposition 36 provides that where determinations by the minimum set diverge systematically from determinations by the comprehensive version, the design of the minimum set is rejected (a rejection of the design, not of the framework). The treatment where divergence is observed is laid down in three stages. Stage 1 — classify the type of divergence. There are two types of divergence. Type A (oversight): the comprehensive version issues a warning and the minimum version does not. Type B (over-warning): the minimum version issues a warning and the comprehensive version does not. Their implications differ. Type A suggests that a non-substitutable indicator is missing from the minimum set; Type B suggests that an indicator of the minimum set moved for other reasons (error or manipulation). Type A is graver than Type B — an oversight forfeits the very opportunity for remediation, whereas an overwarning is corrected by implementation of the comprehensive version. Stage 2 — distinguish the cause. A distinction is drawn between an error in the determination of non-substitutability, observational error, and manipulation of the indicator. If it is an error of determination, it is identified which of the dropped indicators had given the Type A warning, and that indicator is returned to the minimum set. If it is observational error, the observation procedures of the minimum version (the scope of examination, the response rate of surveys) are examined. If it is manipulation, the indicator concerned is replaced by one of high difficulty of manipulation (the third criterion of Section 19.7.3). Stage 3 — treat the determination of the comprehensive version as correct until the divergence is resolved. This is the practical default and applies also at stages at which 1065 the presence or absence of divergence has not been confirmed. A minimum set may be used as a substitute for the comprehensive version only once it has been confirmed that it can reach determinations equivalent to those of the comprehensive version. This confirmation can be carried out only by bodies with slack in their administrative capacity, but for a body with slack to implement both versions in parallel and report the presence or absence of divergence is a public good for bodies without slack (Section 19.7.5). One substantive reason why international consistency in the definition of indicators is called for (C.6.3) is that the cost of this confirmation can be shared. C.8 Regard for Unintended Adverse Effects Attending Implementation Implementation of this protocol may produce consequences distinct from the purpose of monitoring. What is treated here is not the consequences where implementation fails, but the secondary consequences that arise even where implementation succeeds. Five types are set out, each matched with a design for mitigation. (a) Excessive reporting burden. Sector surveys, identification of suppliers, exercises and failure reporting all impose work on the organizations covered. Where the burden passes a threshold, the quality of responses falls and the indicators lose precision. There are three designs for mitigation — riding on existing formats (diverting existing entries in business continuity plans and internal control documents, and minimizing new formats), integration of surveys (combining the questions of the dependence audit with the items required for measuring audit capacity [the third order of priority in Appendix E.4] into a single exercise), and presentation of a minimum set (C.7). The third is the most effective — to present only the comprehensive version is to leave the judgement of feasibility to the organizations covered, and the consequence is non-implementation or formalization. (b) Formalization. A reporting obligation carries an incentive to generate reports lacking substance. The declaration that "substitute procedures are documented" is satisfied by the existence of a document, but whether the document is executable is another matter. The design for mitigation is to pair declaration with direct measurement — the first function of the exercise (C.6) is direct measurement of dependence, but its second function is the recording of the difference between declaration and direct measurement, and the recording of that difference is the sole means of detecting formalization. The "recording of the prediction of degradation self-declared in advance" was placed at Stage 1 of Table C-6 for this detection. Not using the criteria of assessment (Table C-7) as a pass–fail determination likewise contributes to restraining formalization — if a pass or fail is attached, reports are adjusted with a view to passing. (c) Delay of the activity being monitored. If the audit is operated as a precondition of procurement and deployment, the procedure of the audit itself delays activity. Under Proposition 34 (the mismatch of time scales, Section 17), delay is not mere inefficiency but may turn into failure, because the object itself changes during the period of delay. The design for mitigation is to confine the audit to ex post observation and not divert it 1066 into ex ante review. The indicators of this protocol are all descriptions of procurement and operation already carried out, and are not material for judging whether procurement to come should be permitted. Diversion of the audit framework into requirements for licensing is contrary to the intent of the design. (d) Incentives to conceal. Where declaration of dependence is expected to lead to disadvantage (supervisory findings, unfavourable contractual treatment, reputational loss), the organizations covered will either understate dependence or shift use to routes outside the scope of the audit. The latter is the perverse effect of monitoring increasing latent use. The designs for mitigation are thorough application of the two-layer structure described in C. 6.3 for trade secrets — details reported confidentially to the supervisory authority, publication confined to aggregated and anonymized distributions — and treatment that does not connect declared deficiencies immediately to sanctions. Items determined "dangerous" in an exercise are recorded as matters for remediation before the next exercise, and the completion of remediation becomes an object of measurement at the next exercise (C.6.2). This design is also a structure for preserving the incentive to declare. (e) The burden of the act of measurement itself. A field cut-off stops operations for the sake of measurement. This burden collides directly with the value of the measurement. The design for mitigation is to place upper limits on the frequency and scope of implementation — the cross-sector exercise of Stage 3 is capped at once a year with the sectors covered rotating (C.6.1). In addition, in the minimum version Stage 3 need not be implemented and the exercise may be confined to Stage 1 and a Stage 2 cut-off in one sector (Cmin3 of Table C-8). If the output lost for the sake of measurement exceeds the loss avoided by the measurement, that measurement should not be carried out — this applies to the cost of monitoring the condition for justification as insurance that Proposition 30 (Section 19) states for domestic guarantees. The structure common to these five types may be stated last. These adverse effects arise not when monitoring fails but when monitoring is implemented as required. The response therefore lies on the side of design rather than of thoroughness of implementation. That this protocol presents a minimum set (C.7) alongside the comprehensive version, places upper limits on the frequency and scope of exercises, and confines the audit to ex post observation, all follow from the same design judgement — a framework of monitoring must handle, within the framework itself, the resources it consumes and the conduct it induces. 1067 1068 Appendix D. National Diagnostic Checklist For the reader who begins with this appendix without reading the text. The devices of the text on which this checklist rests are the following — Definition 3 (the national value models M1/M2/M3), Proposition 3 (the non-equivalence of the nine cells), Definition 18 and Proposition 29 (the feasible region / all in Section 6), Definition 2 (the AI capability tiers / Section 5), Proposition 4 (the four indicators of complementary asset endowment / Section 7), Definition 4, Definition 6, Proposition 7 and Proposition 8 (Section 13), Definition 10 and Proposition 15 (cell transition and the asymmetry of descent / Section 15), Definition 11 and Proposition 18 (national brain capital / Section 10, with its connection to Layer Zero in Section 17, 17.4), Proposition 11 and Proposition 14 (inter-layer transmission and national redefinition / Section 17), Proposition 13 (Section 18), and Proposition 36 (Section 19). The reference column of each item shows this correspondence item by item. This appendix is a checklist of 56 items by which a policymaker may diagnose the position of their own country (or the region for which they are responsible) within the framework of this paper. It is composed of seven blocks of eight items each — I determination of cell position / II dependence structure (exposure and dependence) / III guarantee level / IV transformation assets / V inter-layer transmission / VI transition diagnostic / VII national brain capital. Block III is composed along the three functions of Definition 6(i) (operational capacity, renewal capability, the sensitive-processing condition), and Block IV along the four indicators of Proposition 4 (exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, linguistic-contextual specificity). The items of both blocks thus correspond one to one with the definitions and propositions of this paper, in a form in which the results of diagnosis can be used directly as data for testing the propositions. Each item takes the form of asking "is it implemented or in place," and responses are envisaged as recorded in three values (in place / partial / not in place). This checklist is not a score sheet of superiority and inferiority; following the implication of Proposition 3 (Section 6) — that the institutions required differ according to cell position — it is a diagnostic questionnaire for identifying which of the items not in place are fatal for one's own portfolio. The reference column indicates the relevant definitions, propositions and appendices of this paper. The last two blocks correspond to Section 15 (the dynamics of national value models) and to Sections 10 and 17 (national brain capital). Whereas Blocks I to V are a static diagnosis of the present position, Block VI (transition diagnostic) asks in which direction that position is moving. As Proposition 15 (Section 15) shows, a state descends if it does nothing, so that a description of the present position alone does not complete the diagnosis. Block VII (national brain capital) asks after the present state and the signs of attrition of the four components of national brain capital (Definition 11), which Proposition 18 (Section 1069 10) identified as the base of the defensibility of the Transformation Model. Whereas Block IV asks after the four indicators of complementary assets, Block VII asks after their base — as Section 17.4 states, the four indicators of Proposition 4 are nothing other than the externalized traces and institutionalized forms of national brain capital, so that deterioration in Block IV appears as the outward form of attrition in Block VII. The two blocks are therefore not independent diagnostics; the latter constitutes a leading indicator of the former. The measurement framework for both blocks is set out in Appendix E, but as Appendix E makes explicit, the measurement frameworks for national brain capital and value-definition capability are not yet in place, and the items of Block VII include parts that cannot at present be fully measured. That they are nonetheless set up as items, in full awareness of this, rests on the judgement that leaving the unmeasurable parts blank does less harm than dropping them from the object of diagnosis. Each item carries a "criterion of determination." This is the condition under which the item may be answered "in place"; where the criterion is only partly satisfied it is recorded as "partial," and where none of it is satisfied as "not in place." The criteria are all written in the verifiable form of the existence of documents, records or results — the standard is the presence or absence of deliverables that a third party can confirm, rather than the expression of a policy or the existence of an intention, in order to prevent the diagnosis from lapsing into self-assessment. Table D-1. Block I: determination of cell position (description of the present location) # Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference 1 Does an estimate exist of the present portfolio, allocating the country's AI-related employment, value added and investment across the nine cells (M1/M2/M3 × C1/C2/C3)? An estimate of the allocation by cell exists as a document, with the method of estimation and the date of updating stated Definition 3, Appendix A 2 Do frontier-level (C2) developing actors and computing platforms exist within the country, and where they do not, is that fact stated expressly in policy documents? An inventory of developing actors and computing platforms exists, and where they are absent that premise is stated expressly in policy documents Definition 2, Section 5 3 Is there production at the commodity tier (C1) within the country (supply of open weights, supply of APIs), and are the conditions for its continuation ascertained? Producing actors are enumerated, and the compute, personnel and funds required for continuation are ascertained in outlook Table A-1 4 Is it organized whether the country stands as a state applying, a state participating in, or a state targeted by export-control measures on advanced semiconductors and AI? A list of the measures the country receives and the measures it imposes is maintained, with arrangements for updating it when they change Section 8, Table B-2 item 3 5 Is the scale of external supply through transformation (M2) — applications, products, services, An estimate exists of the value of external supply and of the portion

# Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference components — and the margin attributable to it measured? of its value added attributable to the country Definition 5 6 Is the depth of utilization (M3) — rates of adoption and depth of use by individuals, firms and administration — measured continuously in an internationally comparable form? Measured annually on the same definition and published as an internationally comparable series Proposition 5 (Section 7) 7 Is the targeted cell movement (recomposition of the portfolio) stated expressly in policy documents, and is the difference from the necessary institutional requirements (the relevant column of Appendix A (A.4)) identified? The target cell is identified in a document, and a table of differences between institutional requirements and the present state has been prepared Appendix A.7 8 Are the domains identified in which the determination of cell position is in effect left to the decisions of other states and actors (domains of passive adaptation)? Matters depending on the decisions of others are enumerated, with responsibility and monitoring assigned for each Proposition 14 (Section 17) Table D-2. Block II: dependence structure (exposure and dependence) # Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference 9 Is there a statistical or survey framework measuring the AI input ratio by critical sector? Measurement through questions at the level of the process is institutionalized and updated annually Definition 4, Table C-3b(1) 10 Is the supplier concentration (HHI) of the model API layer ascertained by sector? Sectoral HHIs are calculated and held by the supervisory authority, including on an unpublished basis Table C-3b(3) 11 Is the concentration of the cloud layer, the chip layer and the electricity layer ascertained layer by layer, and is dependence described as a four-layer stack? Layer-by-layer concentration is calculated for all four layers, and the dependency relations among the layers are set out diagrammatically Section 13, C.1 12 Are the groups of sectors sharing the same supplier and the same platform (the paths of outage correlation) identified? Shared-supplier exposure (the proportion of combined value added of the dependent sectors) is calculated Proposition 7 (Section 13) 13 Is there a public system recording and reporting the damage from AI and cloud failure events (extension to other sectors of the incident reporting obligation in finance)? A reporting obligation exists as legislation or as a supervisory framework, and there is a record of reports made C.5 14 Is there a record of directly measuring the speed of degradation at the time of Within a specified recent period there is a record of direct measurement using an 1071 # Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference interruption not only by self-declaration but by exercise or natural experiment? And is the divergence between exposure and dependence estimated? exercise or a failure event, and the difference from exposure composed from statistics is estimated Table C-3b(2), C. 4.2, C.6 15 Is the digital-related balance (or equivalent statistics of payments abroad) monitored as a monetary indicator of exposure, and is domestic value added per yen of digital procurement constructed alongside it (and is the deficit itself not set as a policy target)? Published periodically and aggregated at a granularity at which the AI and cloud components can be identified. E4 is constructed in accordance with the formula, with its time series and its position in international comparison shown. Reduction of the deficit is not set as a policy target Proposition 13 (Section 18), C.3.2, C.5 16 Is a composite indicator of dependence published as a time series, with decomposition of the factors of rise and fall? The composite indicator is published, with factor decomposition and sensitivity analysis of the weights reported alongside Hypothesis H1, C.4 Table D-3. Block III: guarantee level (design of the sovereign minimum guarantee level) # Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference 17 (i-a) Operational capacity — is the capacity to execute, on domestic computing platforms and electricity, the inference required for degraded operation of critical processes in a situation where external supply has stopped, identified, and is the required level derived by working backwards? The volume of inference required for degraded operation of the critical processes to be guaranteed is aggregated, and a required level converted into domestic installed compute capacity and electricity exists as a document. The difference from the effective domestic capacity is shown Definition 6(i-a), Proposition 13 (Section 18) 18 Are the electricity demand projections for data centres and computing platforms connected to generation and grid planning (identification of the period in which electricity becomes the rate-limiting factor for (ia))? The demand projections are reflected in generation and grid plans, and the period in which they become rate-limiting is identified. The proportion of the increment to be secured domestically as part of the guarantee level is shown Sections 13 and 15 19 (i-b) Renewal capability — are the personnel, procedures and compute secured for fine-tuning, evaluating and deploying the latest published generation of weights domestically, so as to recover the relative depreciation of capability within a specified period? The organizations and personnel responsible for renewal are identified, and for the most recent generational change an actual value of "the period from publication to domestic deployment" is recorded. The specified period (the target value) is stated expressly Definition 6(i-b), Proposition 8 (Section 13) 20 (i-c) The sensitive-processing condition — is the range of data whose re‐ The range of data that cannot be removed abroad is enumerated against legislation Definition 6(i-c) 1072 # Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference moval abroad is not permitted legally or contractually identified, and is a platform secured for processing it domestically? and contracts, and for each range the location and processing capacity of the domestic processing platform is confirmed 21 (ii) Alliance guarantees — for C2 capability not covered by the three functions, are supply guarantees by treaty or long-term contract expressly stated, and are their conditions of invocation and their limits verified? The guarantee is expressly stated in a treaty or contract, and its conditions of invocation and limits are verified in tabletop form. The state of jurisdictional diversification of suppliers is ascertained Definition 6(ii) 22 (iii) Operational readiness — are the personnel and procedures able to execute a switch to substitute systems maintained, tied to specified organizations and training? The organizations and personnel responsible for switching are designated, training has recently been conducted, and the proportion of personnel able to carry out non- AI procedures is measured Definition 6(iii) 23 Are AI outage exercises (tabletop, field, cross-sector) conducted periodically, and are the results connected to the updating of indicators, the estimation of the divergence, operational verification of the order of priority allocation, and remediation? The three stages of exercise are conducted periodically, and the results are reflected in (a) updating of the dependence indicators, (b) estimation of the divergence between exposure and dependence, (c) operational verification of priority allocation to protected demand, and (d) remediation plans Table C-6, C.4.2, C.6 24 Is renewal investment against the depreciation of the guarantee level (Proposition 8) committed on a standing basis, and does a selective political agreement exist, premised on the impossibility of full domestic production, as to the range of "what is to be guaranteed domestically and how far"? Assessment of depreciation is carried out periodically and renewal investment is positioned in a multi-year budget. The selection of the range of guarantee is stated expressly in government documents or in the legislative process, with the range excluded shown alongside. The object of guarantee is described as the three functions rather than as a level of capability Proposition 8 (Section 13), Proposition 13 (Section 18) Table D-4. Block IV: transformation assets (the conditions of survival of M2 — the four indicators of Proposition 4) # Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference 25 (a) Exclusive data endowment — for the principal fields of application, is the proportion of the data used that cannot be obtained from the public web and is generated only from the operating processes of the transformer concerned measured? The proportion is estimated for the principal sectors, with the method and date of measurement stated Proposition 4 (Section 7) (a), Hypothesis H2 26 (b) Physical-interface intensity — for the principal fields of application, is the pro‐ The proportion is estimated for the principal sectors, with the fields in‐ Proposition 4 (Section 7) 1073 # Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference portion of revenue inseparable from the operation of physical equipment, mechanisms and on-site work measured? cluding manufacturing, robotics and on-site data identified (b), Proposition 13 (Section 18) 27 (c) Institutional embeddedness — is the presence and number of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations and liability- assumption contracts to which the principal fields of application are subject ascertained? A list of certifications, registrations and assumptions of liability is maintained by sector, with the counts tracked over time Proposition 4 (Section 7) (c) 28 (d) Linguistic-contextual specificity — is the number of language- and jurisdictionspecific standards with which the outputs of the principal fields of application must conform ascertained? The relevant standards are enumerated and their number ascertained. In addition, the decay of the defensive power of this indicator through improvements in the multilingual performance of frontier models is incorporated into the assessment Proposition 4 (Section 7) (d) 29 Are arrangements in place to measure the four indicators before a generational turnover event of foundation models (ex post measurement cannot be used for verification)? The definitions of the four indicators are fixed in advance and measurement has begun without waiting for the next generational change. The temporal order of the measurement and of the generational change is recorded Hypothesis H2, the falsification condition of Proposition 4 30 Is the resilience of the country's applied industries to foundation-model turnover events (generational change, price revision) — gross margins, survival rates — tracked by level of the four indicators? Panel tracking of gross margins and survival rates before and after turnover events is carried out and aggregated by quantile of the four indicators. In particular, the trajectory of the group of firms in the lower quantiles on all four indicators can be identified Hypothesis H2, Table A-2 31 Is the attribution of the transformation margin — the share of value added going to domestic transformers — measured by the methods of trade in value added? And is it distinguished whether what is being compressed is the portion reducible to generalpurpose functionality or the portion protected by integration cost? The share of domestic transformers is estimated by the methods of trade in value added and tracked over time. The locus of compression is assessed separately for the two portions Definition 5, Proposition 4 (Section 7), Section 4 32 Is complementary investment in absorptive capacity (retraining of people, organizational redesign, investment in intangible assets) built into measures supporting utilization, and connected to improvement in do‐ Complementary investment is built into the requirements or the assessment indicators of support measures, and its results are tracked as the movement of E4 (Appendix C. 3.2) Proposition 5 (Section 7), C.3.2 1074 # Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference mestic value added per yen of digital procurement? Table D-5. Block V: inter-layer transmission (from Layer Zero to the three layers below) # Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference 33 Is the effect of the country's cell position and terms of access on the range of future value that its capital markets can price assessed (towards Layer One, RCap)? An analytical document exists on the effect of changes in cell position and terms of access on capital allocation Proposition 11(i) (Section 17) 34 Is the distributive design of access to AI (universal basic access or market allocation) examined as a question of institutional design (towards Layer Two, SDS)? There is a record of comparative examination of the options of distributive design as institutional proposals Proposition 11(ii), Proposition 12 (Section 17) 35 Is the ceiling or the extension that the country's cell position imposes on the set of redefinition options of its firms assessed (towards Layer Three, the ER group)? An analysis exists of the national constraints on and extensions of firms' redefinition options Proposition 11(iii) (Section 17) 36 Are the factors amplifying disparities of access (education, language, electricity, regulation) monitored as disparity statistics? Disparities of access are measured statistically by factor and updated periodically Proposition 12 (Section 17) 37 Is there a record of examining, for each of the five dimensions of national redefinition (purpose, boundary, time, subject, measurement), whether redefinition by AI is required? A record of examination exists for each of the five dimensions, with the conclusion (whether redefinition is required) stated Proposition 14 (Section 17) 38 Has the redefinition of measurement — complementing GDP and extending to national accounts and dashboards including AI dependence, transformation value and the guarantee level — been begun? There is a prototype or publication of an extended account or dashboard Proposition 14 (Section 17), Section 4 39 Is the country's position of participation in international AI governance (scientific assessment, summits, supply control, minimal norms) designed consistently with its own cell position? The policy of participation in each layer is documented, and consistency with the country's cell position is confirmed Section 9, Appendix B 40 Are the results of this checklist updated periodically (annually), reflecting the movement of cell boundaries through Frontier Descent? There is a record of updating since the previous diagnosis, and the movement of cell boundaries is reflected Definition 2, Appendix A 1075 Having completed Block V, one point should be confirmed as to Block IV. The items of Block IV correspond one to one with the four indicators of Proposition 4 (Section 7) — item 25 to (a) exclusive data endowment, item 26 to (b) physical-interface intensity, item 27 to (c) institutional embeddedness, and item 28 to (d) linguistic-contextual specificity — and the definitions of the indicators coincide with the wording of Proposition 4 (the proportion that cannot be obtained from the public web and is generated only from the operating processes of the transformer concerned / the proportion inseparable from the operation of physical equipment, mechanisms and on-site work / the presence and number of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations and liability-assumption contracts / the number of language- and jurisdiction-specific standards). Items 29 to 32 are not the four indicators themselves but ask after the conditions for using the four indicators in verification (arrangements for prior measurement, tracking of resilience, measurement of attribution, complementary investment), and this distinction is maintained. That said, one point should be added — because Hypothesis H2 (Section 21) predicts an ordering among the magnitudes of the coefficients on the four indicators, "physical-interface intensity, exclusive data endowment > institutional embeddedness > linguisticcontextual specificity", aggregating the four indicators separately rather than as a single composite value in the tracking of item 30 is a precondition for testing that prediction of ordering. Tracking by a composite value makes the ordering untestable. Table D-6. Block VI: transition diagnostic (the direction in which the position is moving — Propositions 15 and 16, Appendix E.1) # Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference 41 Present position — is the centroid of portfolio weights on the nine cells identified, and is it recorded over time whether the centroid has moved in the past? The estimate of item 1 of Block I is read not as attribution to a single cell but as the centroid and dispersion of weights, and the centroid at at least two points in time is recorded on the same method of estimation Definition 3, Definition 10 (Section 15), item 1 42 Target cell — is the target cell identified, and is it determined whether the transition from the present position is upward, downward, diagonal or cross-axis? The target cell is identified in policy documents, and the transition concerned is matched to the relevant row of Tables E-1 to E-3 of Appendix E. Where it is a transition moving both axes at once, that fact is stated expressly Proposition 15 (Section 15), Table E-1, item 7 43 Accumulation lacking for reaching the target — is the difference between the level required by the target cell and the present state measured for each of the four indicators of complementary assets, national brain capital, computing platforms and electricity? The difference is estimated for all four kinds of accumulation. Where even one is unestimated, the answer is "partial" — because the accumulations are not mutually substitutable, a partial estimate does not give the estimate as a whole Proposition 15 (Section 15), Proposition 4 (Section 7), Definition 11 (Section 10), Table E-1 44 1076 # Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference Comparison of the speed of accumulation with the speed of the frontier's advance — is it assessed whether the speed of accumulation exceeds the speed of the frontier's advance? The annual increment of accumulation and the annual movement of the frontier's advance (the widening of capability distance) are assessed side by side for the same period. Where it does not exceed, that fact is recorded in policy documents Proposition 15 (Section 15), Proposition 8 (Section 13), Definition 2 (Section 5) 45 Presence of downward pressure — are the paths of descent actually operating identified, and is it determined whether they are of the reversible or the irreversible type? It is determined which rows of Table E-2 of Appendix E are operating, and irreversibility is determined for each (whether the return path is satisfied by rebuilding renewal arrangements, or requires the time constant of formation of national brain capital) Proposition 15 (Section 15), Table E-2, Section 17.4 46 Proportion of procurement affected by cross-axis transition — of procurement taking C2 capability as an input, is the proportion measured for which availability is a function of political position rather than of price and quality? The proportion is estimated and recorded together with a breakdown of suppliers by jurisdiction. There are arrangements for updating it when measures change Proposition 16 (Section 15), Table E-3, items 4 and 21 47 Estimate of the time constant required for ascent — is the time constant required for ascent to the target cell estimated at the level of an order of magnitude, and is it determined whether it lies inside or outside the time constant of policy decision? The time constant is estimated by order of magnitude (months to years / years / decades), and where it lies outside, arrangements for continuity spanning several administrations and several planning periods are identified. Estimation by precise figures is not required — this paper too does not estimate the time constants of transition Proposition 15 (Section 15), Table E-1, Section 20 48 Presence of irreversible dependence — are the dependencies identified whose restoration, should they be interrupted or lost, would require the time constant of formation of national brain capital? The relevant dependencies (automation accompanied by the loss of the layer able to verify, substitution of operations that severs the path of transmission, externalization of processes that cannot be reproduced domestically) are enumerated, with the order of magnitude of the period required for restoration shown for each Table E-2, Proposition 18 (Section 10), Section 17.4 Table D-7. Block VII: national brain capital (the base of the defensibility of the Transformation Model — Definition 11 and Proposition 18, Appendix E.2) # Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference 49 1077 # Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference Component (i) tacit knowledge on the ground — are the density of skilled labour and the distribution of years of experience within occupations measured, and are the signs of attrition monitored (a state in which the exit of the skilled cohort exceeds the accumulation of the succeeding cohort)? The proportion of workers by occupational classification and years of experience within occupations are recorded by quantile, and the ratio of the size of the exiting age cohort to that of the succeeding cohort is tracked over time. Recording of means alone counts as "partial" Definition 11(i) (Section 10), Table E-4, Section 17.4 50 Component (ii) judgement embedded in language, culture and aesthetic sensibility — is the number of language- specific professional standards and certifications ascertained, and is the decay of their defensive power incorporated into the assessment? A list and count of the relevant standards is maintained, and the decay of defensive power through improvements in the multilingual performance of frontier models is stated expressly in the assessment. A flat count is not read as maintenance of substance Definition 11(ii) (Section 10), Proposition 4(d) (Section 7), Table E-4, item 28 51 Component (iii) the professional ethics and practices that establish trust in institutions — are trust in institutions and the professions, the rate of disposal of disciplinary cases, and the rate of maintenance of certifications and supervisory registrations ascertained, and are the signs of attrition monitored? The three kinds of observed quantity are recorded, and it is stated expressly that survey values of trust are no more than a proxy for practices (the direction of causation being the reverse). The proportion of unverified automated judgements repeated within institutions is monitored alongside Definition 11(iii) (Section 10), Table E-4, Section 17.4 52 Component (iv) capacity for audit and verification grounded in long domain experience — is the scale of occupations such as audit, inspection, maintenance and clinical practice, and the proportion of operations in which a process for verifying AI output is institutionalized, ascertained, and are the signs of attrition monitored? The scale of the relevant occupations is recorded over time, and the proportion of institutionalization of verification processes is measured. Formal approval is not counted as verification Definition 11(iv) (Section 10), Table E-4, 2026h 53 State of the transmission of skills — is the volume of opportunities for junior staff to bear judgements carrying responsibility ascertained, and is it examined whether the introduction of AI is substituting first for junior judgement work? The proportion of junior judgement work substituted by AI, and the retention rate of new entrants to the occupations concerned, are measured. That short-term gains in efficiency may proceed simultaneously with a break in transmission is stated expressly in the assessment framework for adoption Section 17.4, 2026i, Table E-4 component (iv) 54 Age composition of the professions — for occupations such as audit, inspection, maintenance and clinical practice, are the age distribution and the ratio of the succeeding cohort The age distribution by occupation is measured and the ratio of the exiting cohort to the succeeding cohort calculated. Occupations in which the ratio Definition 11(i)(iv) (Section 10), Table E-4, E. 2.3 1078 # Diagnostic item Criterion of determination (conditions under which it may be said to be in place) Reference measured, and are the occupations identified in which the ratio falls below one? falls below one are enumerated, with responsibility assigned for each 55 Thickness of the layer able to bear audit and verification — is the capacity to detect errors directly measured by exercise rather than by statistics? Exercises using verification tasks on AI output are conducted, and the detection rate and the time to detection are recorded. Where conducted in integration with AI outage exercises (Appendix C.6), that fact is recorded Table E-4 component (iv), C.6, E.4 56 Discipline of measurement — are the four components not composed into a single score, shown as distributions, and are the level of the stock and the flow of attrition recorded separately? Recorded as separate indicators by component, with no composite index prepared. Each indicator is shown as a distribution (quantiles, age composition) rather than as a mean, and level and change are recorded separately. Items that could not be measured are recorded as "not measurable" rather than left blank E.2.1, 2026e (three-layer disclosure), Section 20 One point on the relation between Block VI and Block VII should be made explicit. The items of the two blocks are not independent: where Block VII is not in place, items 43, 45 and 48 of Block VI cannot be answered. The national-brain-capital component of the accumulation lacking for reaching the target (item 43) cannot be estimated without the measurements of Block VII. Determining the reversibility of downward pressure (item 45) requires distinguishing whether what is being lost is national brain capital or renewal capability. Identifying irreversible dependence (item 48) presupposes measurement of the thickness of the layer able to bear audit and verification (item 55). In the order of diagnosis, therefore, Block VII precedes Block VI. As Appendix E makes explicit, however, the measurement framework for national brain capital is not in place, and many items of Block VII are expected to be answered "not in place" in every country at present. That answer is not a demerit of the country concerned but a reflection of the fact that no measurement framework exists internationally. The diagnosis must record this distinction — between not having built an institution, and the institution that ought to be built not yet having been designed. D.1 How to Read the Results of the Diagnosis Aggregation is presented not as a simple total score but as a list of the items not in place, block by block. Comparison by total score imports the same problem of the choice of weights (Appendix C.4.1), and induces rankings among states that would defeat the purpose of this checklist. What is useful in practice are the following three readings. First, imbalance across blocks: a state in which the dependence structure (II) is well in place 1079 while the guarantee level (III) is not means that one is measuring but not preparing. Conversely, a state in which investment in the guarantee level advances while the dependence structure is unmeasured means that investment is being made without defining what one is guarding against. Both are typical inconsistencies, and in order of precedence measurement should come first. The same kind of imbalance exists within Block II — a state in which exposure (item 15) is measured but direct measurement of dependence (item 14) is not in place is the state against which this paper warns most strongly. Exposure only bounds dependence from above, and the divergence between the two appears only through exercises. Second, concentrations of "partial": where "partial" answers concentrate in a group of items, they mostly derive not from the absence of an institution but from a halt in updating — a document once prepared has not been revised. The diagnosis should record this distinction, since not having begun and having become obsolete require different responses. Third, determination of fatality: among the items not in place, those corresponding to the institutional requirements (Appendix A) of the cells in which the country's portfolio weight is large are extracted as fatal. Items not in place that correspond to other cells may not require immediate remediation. Reading Blocks VI and VII together adds a fourth reading: the divergence between static provision and dynamic diagnosis. A state in which Blocks I to V are all in place while Block VI is not means that the present position is being measured precisely while the question of the direction in which that position is moving is not being asked. Under the asymmetry of Proposition 15 (Section 15) — ascent requires accumulation, descent does not — this state permits descent to proceed beneath an appearance of static soundness. Conversely, a state in which Block VI is in place while Blocks I and II are not means that the direction of movement is being discussed while the point of departure is not being measured, so that neither the origin nor the destination of a transition can be identified. In order of precedence, the present position of Block I is the premise of Block VI, and Block VII is the premise of some items of Block VI (items 43, 45 and 48). One reading specific to Block VII should be added. "Not in place" in Block VII differs in meaning from "not in place" in the other blocks. In the other blocks, "not in place" indicates that a measurement, design or agreement feasible with existing means has not been carried out. For many items of Block VII, by contrast, the feasible means of measurement is itself not established internationally (Appendix E.2). The diagnosis should therefore record, as to items not in place in Block VII, a distinction between (a) items for which means of measurement exist but have not been implemented, and (b) items for which means of measurement do not exist. To (a) corresponds a remediation plan, and to (b) participation in the building of a measurement framework (the fourth order of priority in Appendix E.4, the forum of international consistency). Neglecting this distinction reduces the diagnosis to an enumeration of not having measured what cannot be measured, and it ceases to give any feasible order of priority for remediation.

1080 D.2 Implementation Arrangements and Frequency Implementation of the diagnosis is not completed within a single responsible bureau. Blocks I and V bear on policy planning in economy, industry and foreign affairs; II and III on crisis management and critical infrastructure, and on statistics; IV on industrial policy and statistics; VI on cross-cutting policy planning (since the setting of transition targets belongs to policy choice); and VII on the authorities responsible for labour, education and professional supervision, and on statistics. A realistic method is therefore to establish a cross-cutting coordinating body and then assign responsibility for answering each item by bureau. As to Block VII, because the holders of the data are actors outside government such as professional bodies and certification agencies (Appendix E.4.2), arrangements for cooperation are a precondition of implementation. The frequency is annual as a basis, with items that change rapidly — export-control measures (item 4), supplier concentration (items 10 and 11), the boundaries of the capability tiers (item 40), and the proportion of procurement affected by cross-axis transition (item 46) — updated as occasion requires. The items of Block VII, by contrast, have long time constants of change (attrition of national brain capital proceeds over decades) and their annual variation is buried in measurement error, so they are recorded annually but assessed against multi-year trends. The deliverables of the diagnosis are three: the record of answers to the 56 items, the list of fatal items not in place, and a summary of changes since the previous diagnosis; of these, publication of at least the summary of changes is preferable. Publication prevents the diagnosis from closing into internal self-confirmation, and at the same time makes comparison with the diagnoses of other countries possible, providing a foothold for international consistency in the definition of indicators (Appendix C.6.3). The scope of publication must, however, be judged under the constraint that the detailed location of vulnerabilities may be a blueprint for attack (Appendix C.6.3). Three cautions in operation should be added. First, the 56 items are not of equal weight. Priority should go to the blocks corresponding to the cells in which the country's portfolio weight is large (if the weight of production is large, I and III; if of utilization, II and III; if of transformation, IV and VII are relatively heavy), and identifying that weight is itself the function of Block I (item 1). Item 29 of Block IV (arrangements for prior measurement of the four indicators) has, however, a specific urgency — because the four indicators cannot be used for verification unless measured before a generational turnover event of foundation models, this item alone must be begun without waiting for the next generational change, irrespective of the order in which other items are put in place. The same kind of urgency extends in part to items 49 and 54 of Block VII (the exit of the skilled cohort and the age composition of the professions) — these can be composed solely by re-aggregating existing labour-force statistics (the first order of priority in Appendix E.4) and are cheap to begin, while unless measurement is started the trend of attrition itself is not observed. Second, each item of this checklist asks after "the existence of measurement, design or agreement," and does not recommend any particular policy content (for example a level of domestic production or a strength of regulation). As is consistent with this paper's position throughout, this is not a counsel of closure but a theory of the design of dependence, 1081 and the purpose of the diagnosis is to replace passive adaptation, which leaves the choice of cell position to the decisions of other states (Proposition 14, Section 17), with a choice underwritten by measurement. Third, the addition of Blocks VI and VII must not be read as this checklist specifying the "correct direction" of transition. What Block VI asks is whether a target cell has been identified and the differences and time constants measured, not which cell ought to be the target. As Proposition 3 (Section 6) states, the nine cells are mutually non-equivalent, but non-equivalence does not mean that an ordering of superiority exists — the claim that an institution optimal in one cell is inferior in another is also the claim that there is no common measure across cells. The choice of a target cell is a choice each country makes upon the information the framework of this paper supplies, and that choice itself belongs to the exercise of value-definition capability (Definition 12, Section 17). D.3 The Minimum Item Set — Eight Items to Be Maintained as a Priority Under the Constraint of Administrative Capacity D.3.1 Why a Minimum Set Is Required This checklist consists of 56 items, each requiring a three-valued determination and confirmation of the documents, records and results grounding it. As D.2 stated, responsibility for answering spans six lines of authority, and Block VII presupposes arrangements for cooperation with actors outside government. This volume of work consumes a considerable amount of the implementing body's administrative capacity. Proposition 36 (Section 19) lists three modes to which a demand for comprehensive monitoring leads where administrative capacity is constrained — non-implementation, formalization, and delay of the very activity being monitored — and states that in none of these cases is the purpose of monitoring achieved. To present only the comprehensive version is to leave the judgement of feasibility to the implementing body, and the consequence is an arbitrary selection of some part of the 56 items. Unless a criterion of selection is supplied, what is selected will be not the non-substitutable items but the items that are easy to answer. This section responds to Proposition 36 and lays down the minimum item set to be maintained as a priority where administrative capacity is constrained. The design principle follows Section 19.7.3 and is identical with that of Appendix C.7 — composed not of the items individually richest in information but of the items giving information that no other item can substitute for. Non-substitutability is the first criterion of determination, with cost of observation and difficulty of manipulation as secondary criteria. If the order were reversed and the items easy to answer chosen first, the framework of diagnosis would be governed by ease of measurement and information that is hard to measure would drop out structurally. 1082 D.3.2 The Minimum Eight Items and the Reasons for Their Selection Table D-8. The minimum item set of the national diagnostic (eight items) — item numbers in the source of reduction, grounds of non-substitutability, judgements supported # Item of the minimum set Item number in the comprehensive version Why no other item can substitute for it Judgement supported Dmin1 Does an estimate of portfolio weights across the nine cells exist as a document stating the method of estimation and the date of updating? Item 1 (Block I) Every "determination of fatality" in this checklist (the third reading in D.1) presupposes identification of the cells in which the country's portfolio weight is large. If this item is dropped, it cannot be judged whether the other items not in place are fatal Determination of position. The basis for weighting the other seven items Dmin2 Are the groups of sectors sharing the same supplier and the same platform identified, and is shared-supplier exposure calculated? Item 12 (Block II) Layer-by-layer concentration (items 10 and 11) measures concentration within a sector; this item measures correlation across sectors. They are different quantities and neither can be inferred from the other. The conditions for the amplification of an AI outage (Proposition 7, Section 13) are ascertained only through this item Ascertainment of the dependence structure (cross-sector) Dmin3 Is the speed of degradation at the time of interruption directly measured by exercise or failure event, and is the divergence from exposure composed from statistics estimated? Item 14 (Block II) Dependence is defined by Definition 4 as degradation at the time of interruption, and cannot be measured without bringing about an interruption. If this item is dropped, the diagnosis degenerates into the observation of exposure. In addition, the substance of item 22 (operational readiness) — the time required for switching and the proportion of personnel able to carry out non-AI procedures — is observed from the records of the exercise, so that this item partly substitutes for the information of item 22 Ascertainment of dependence. Indirect observation of the level of operational readiness Dmin4 Is domestic value added per yen of digital procurement (E4) constructed in accordance with the formula, and is the deficit itself not set as a policy target? Item 15 (Block II) It is the quantity that Proposition 13 (Section 18) specifies as the indicator determining the success or failure of policy, and cannot be inferred from the other indicators measuring the magnitude of exposure (amount of external procurement, rate of use). In the minimum version, apprehension of direction by the quarterly timely version E4-Q (Appendix C.3.4) suffices Determination of the efficiency of transformation and utilization 1083 # Item of the minimum set Item number in the comprehensive version Why no other item can substitute for it Judgement supported Dmin5 Is the volume of inference required for degraded operation of the critical processes to be guaranteed aggregated, and is the difference from the effective domestic capacity shown? Item 17 (Block III) Of the three functions of the guarantee level, it is the only item giving a quantitative required level. Renewal capability (item 19) and the sensitive-processing condition (item 20) can both, if accompanied by a description of the ranges covered, be recorded within the same document as this item and require no separate work — but because such joint recording does not give a decomposition of the three functions, which function suppresses degradation cannot be determined in the minimum version Confirmation of the sufficiency of the guarantee level Dmin6 Are the definitions of the four indicators of Proposition 4 fixed in advance, and has measurement begun before a generational turnover event of foundation models? Item 29 (Block IV) The levels of the four indicators (items 25 to 28) can be measured after the event as well, but unless measured in advance they cannot be used for verification. The urgency specific to this item is independent of the order in which any other item is put in place (the cautions in operation in D.2). Dropping it makes delay a loss not of the quality of measurement but of verifiability itself Securing the verifiability of transformation assets Dmin7 Are the annual increment of accumulation and the movement of the frontier's advance (the widening of capability distance) assessed side by side for the same period? Item 44 (Block VI) From the static state of provision in Blocks I to V, the direction in which the position is moving cannot be inferred. Under the asymmetry of Proposition 15 (Section 15) — ascent requires accumulation, descent does not — descent may proceed beneath an appearance of static soundness. This item is the only reducible item that gives the direction of transition Determination of the direction of transition Dmin8 For occupations such as audit, inspection, maintenance and clinical practice, are the age distribution and the ratio of the succeeding cohort measured, and are the occupations identified in which the ratio falls below one? Item 54 (Block VII) The attrition of national brain capital appears later than the indicators of any other block (Appendix E.5.5). This item can be composed solely by re-aggregating existing labour-force statistics (the first order of priority in Appendix E.4) and is cheap to begin, while unless measurement is started the trend of attrition itself is not observed. It is moreover observable from outside and cannot be moved at the discretion of the implementing body Monitoring of the base of the defensibility of the Transformation Model 1084 The items dropped by reduction, and the grounds. Many items of Blocks I and II (items 2 to 11, 13 and 16) either share a mechanism with one of D-min1, D-min2 and D-min3, or are implemented as their components. Items 18 to 21, 23 and 24 of Block III may be described within the document of D-min5 as the ranges covered and the premises. Items 25 to 28 of Block IV continue to be measured if the prior fixing of D-min6 has been carried out, and are therefore not asked as separate items in the minimum version. Items 49 to 53, 55 and 56 of Block VII are partly composed incidentally to the measurement of the age distribution in D-min8, but no information is obtained on component (ii) linguistic context and component (iii) practices. Block V (inter-layer transmission, items 33 to 40) leaves not a single item in the minimum set. This is not because inter-layer transmission is unimportant, but because each of its items has the character of asking after "the existence of an analytical document," can be determined independently of the state of provision of the other items, and yet its absence does not directly indicate a situation requiring short-term remediation. This judgement is itself an exercise of discretion in the design of the minimum set, and is an object of record. What cannot be determined with the minimum set. With these eight items the following judgements do not hold. (i) Decomposition of the three functions of the guarantee level (which function most strongly suppresses degradation). (ii) Testing the prediction of ordering among the four indicators of Proposition 4 (Hypothesis H2) — D-min6 asks only after the existence of arrangements for prior measurement, and does not include the tracking of levels and resilience by indicator (item 30). (iii) Determination of the reversibility of downward pressure (item 45) and identification of irreversible dependence (item 48) — both presuppose several items of Block VII. (iv) The state of components (ii) and (iii) of national brain capital. (v) Direct measurement of the thickness of the layer able to bear audit and verification (item 55). (vi) Inter-layer transmission as a whole (Block V). (vii) The diagnostic of geoeconomic leverage (Appendix G). Users of the minimum version must record, as an absence of judgement, that they hold no judgement on these seven points. Holding a list of what one is not looking at is as important as holding a list of what one is looking at (Section 19.7.4). D.3.3 Composition as a Ladder, and Treatment Where Determinations Diverge As Section 19.7.4 states, because the level of a minimum set depends on the level of administrative capacity, the correct design is not a single set but a ladder. This checklist establishes three stages — the minimum version (the eight items of this section), the standard version (the minimum version plus all the items of the blocks corresponding to the cells in which the country's portfolio weight is large; the identification of the weight being given by D-min1), and the comprehensive version (the 56 items). What is indispensable in the design of a ladder is explicit statement of the correspondence between its steps, and the column "item number in the comprehensive version" of Table D-8, together with the list of "dropped items" in the preceding paragraph, constitutes that correspondence. 1085 The treatment where the determinations of the simplified and comprehensive versions diverge follows the same three stages as Appendix C.7.3. At Stage 1 the type of divergence is classified — Type A (the comprehensive version warns and the minimum version does not; oversight) and Type B (the minimum version warns and the comprehensive version does not; over-warning), of which Type A is the graver. At Stage 2 the cause is distinguished — if it is an error in the determination of non-substitutability, the dropped item is returned; if observational error, the procedures of answering are examined; if manipulation of an item, it is replaced by an item of high difficulty of manipulation. At Stage 3, until the presence or absence of divergence is confirmed, the determination of the comprehensive version is treated as correct. As the latter part of the falsification condition of Proposition 36 states, where the divergence is systematic what is rejected is not the framework but the design of the minimum set, and this distinction is the premise for treating a minimum set as a testable object. One caution specific to this section should be added. That only one item of Block VII remains in the minimum set does not mean that the importance of national brain capital is low. The reverse is the case: as Appendix E makes explicit, because the measurement framework is not in place, the items that can be retained in a form withstanding the determination of non-substitutability are confined to D-min8 (an indicator composable from existing statistics and difficult to manipulate). That information which is hard to measure drops out of a minimum set must not be read as that information being unimportant — preventing this misreading is the reason for setting out explicitly the list of dropped items. D.4 Regard for Unintended Adverse Effects Attending the Diagnosis Implementation of this checklist may produce consequences distinct from the purpose of the diagnosis. What is treated here is not the consequences where implementation fails, but the secondary consequences that arise even where implementation proceeds as required. Four types are set out. (a) Reporting burden and the consequent fall in the quality of answers. Three-valued determination of 56 items and confirmation of the supporting materials impose work on six lines of authority. Where the burden passes a threshold, answers degenerate into selfdeclaration unaccompanied by confirmation of grounds, and the diagnosis loses precision. There are three designs for mitigation — presentation of the minimum version (D.3), diversion from existing policy documents and statistics (the criteria of determination were all written as the existence of documents, records or results precisely so that the preparation of new materials is not required), and item-by-item setting of updating frequency (this is the reason D.2 separated the rapidly changing items from the long time constants of Block VII). (b) Formalization — inflation of "in place." So long as the determination is a self-assessment, an incentive operates to declare items in place. The designs for mitigation are 1086 writing all criteria of determination as the presence or absence of deliverables that a third party can confirm (the discipline stated at the head of this appendix), and requiring the composition of "partial" to be recorded — the distinction between not begun and obsolete (the second reading in D.1). In addition, not using the results of the diagnosis as a score sheet of superiority and inferiority is the strongest restraint on formalization. If rankings among states by total score are produced, answers will be adjusted with a view to improving the ranking. D.1 rejected aggregation by total score both because of the problem of the choice of weights and in order not to generate this incentive. (c) Delay through the diagnosis turning into a precondition of policy decision. If the decision and execution of policy are withheld on the ground that the diagnosis is incomplete, the diagnosis becomes a device that delays activity. Under Proposition 34 (the mismatch of time scales, Section 17), because the object itself changes during the period of delay, delay may turn into failure. The design for mitigation is not to divert the diagnosis into a requirement of permission for policy. This checklist is a diagnostic questionnaire for identifying which of the items not in place are fatal for one's own portfolio (as stated at the head), and is not a criterion of review determining the propriety of policy. Investments belonging to no-regret actions (Proposition 20, Section 16) — national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, operational readiness — should be continued without waiting for the completion of the diagnosis, and this point is consistent with the classification of Table F-4 in Appendix F.4. (d) Blanks for unmeasurable items being read as "no problem." Many items of Block VII are expected to be answered "not in place" in every country at present (as stated at the head of this appendix). If that answer is treated as a demerit, the implementing body has an incentive to exclude the block from the object of diagnosis. The design for mitigation is to record the distinction laid down in the third reading of D.1 — (a) items for which means of measurement exist but have not been implemented, and (b) items for which means of measurement do not exist — and it is for this reason that item 56 requires that "items that could not be measured be recorded as 'not measurable' rather than left blank." A blank and "not measurable" are different information: the former makes what lies outside the field of vision read as no abnormality, the latter indicates the building of a framework as an object of remediation. The structure common to the four types may be stated. These adverse effects arise not when the diagnosis fails but when the diagnosis is implemented as required. The response therefore lies on the side of design rather than of thoroughness of implementation. A framework of diagnosis must handle, within the framework itself, the administrative capacity it consumes and the answering behaviour it induces — this is what it means to implement Proposition 36 at the level of an appendix. 1087 1088 Appendix E. The Cell-Transition Matrix and a Measurement Framework for National Brain Capital This appendix consists of six parts. First, a cell-transition matrix that assesses the possibility of transition for every pair among the nine cells (Definition 3, Section 6) (E.1). Second, a measurement framework for the four components of national brain capital (Definition 11, Section 10) (E.2). Third, a provisional proposal for proxy indicators of value-definition capability (Definition 12, Section 17) (E.3). Fourth, the order in which these measurements may be undertaken, set out in relation to the dependence audit protocol of Appendix C (E.4). Fifth, the formulas, the discipline of setting cutoffs in advance, and the standardization procedure for the four indicators of complementary asset endowment (Proposition 4, Section 7) (E.5), together with the calculation procedures that map the proxy indicators of national brain capital and value-definition capability onto objective statistics, and the limits of their international comparability (E.6). Sixth, a provisional proposal for measuring portability (Proposition 39(iv), Section 12) (E.7) — a part that places, against the absence acknowledged in Section 20.8(i) ("this paper does not provide a framework for measuring portability in advance"), the provisional proposal that lies within what this paper can offer. E.5 and E.6 respond to the heaviest criticism that may be directed at this paper's framework — that for the concepts placed at the base of the theory (complementary asset endowment, national brain capital, value-definition capability), it is not defined which objective statistics are to be used or how the calculation is to proceed, so that any observed result could be accounted for by adjusting the level after the fact. What this appendix provides is a procedure for calculation, not the result of a calculation. This paper has not measured these indicators. The standing of this appendix is stated at the outset. The measurement frameworks for national brain capital and value-definition capability are not yet developed, and E.2 and E.3 are provisional proposals. This paper does not possess validated means of measuring these concepts. As Section 20 acknowledges among its limitations, the measurement framework for national brain capital is not yet developed, and the proxy indicators for value-definition capability are provisional. This appendix presents them in tabular form not in order to claim that measurement is possible, but in order to disclose, at the level of individual items, what can be measured and what cannot. Each row of the tables sets out, alongside the candidate proxy indicator, the limits of that indicator, and for each component the part that cannot be measured at present is stated explicitly. A presentation of proxy indicators unaccompanied by such disclosure would do no more than paper over what has not been developed. The same reservation is required for the transition matrix of E.1 — the time-constant columns give an order-of-magnitude guide derived from the physical and institutional formation periods of the object of accumulation, and 1089 are not statistical estimates of the time constants of transition. This paper has not estimated the time constants of transition (Section 15.9, Section 20). Three notes on notation. First, the table numbers in this appendix belong to the E series (Tables E-1 to E-8), which is independent of Tables 1 to 27 in the body and of the series in Appendices A to D and F to H. The symbols E1 to E4 used for the exposure indicators in Appendix C (Table C-3a) are identifiers of indicators, not table numbers, and bear no relation to the table numbers of this appendix. Second, the assessment symbols are the same A/B/C/D system used in Table 7 (Section 9) of the body. This is a different dimension from the evidence grades common to the series (◎ well established, ○ supported by evidence, △ contested, ▽ grey literature), and the two are not mixed. Third, irreversibility in the tables of E.1 refers to the difficulty of reversing the transition in question. For an upward transition, low irreversibility means that the position attained may be lost passively through a change in external conditions; for a downward transition, high irreversibility means that recovery of the position lost is difficult. E.1 The Cell-Transition Matrix E.1.1 The Construction of the Matrix — Relation to Table 13 Table 13 in Section 15.9 contrasts the driving factors, the accumulation required, the order- of-magnitude guide to the time constant, and the irreversibility for the eight principal transition types corresponding to the four scenarios this paper analyses. Tables E-1 to E-3 of this appendix are the exhaustive version of that table — they take as their object every pair among the nine cells (the 72 ordered pairs excluding self-transitions) and give an assessment for pairs that Table 13 did not treat. For pairs that overlap with Table 13, the same assessment, accumulation, time constant, and irreversibility are used. Where the two descriptions diverge, that is an error in this paper and not a matter open to interpretation. So that readers may reconcile Table 13 with this appendix, overlapping rows are marked "corresponds to Table 13" in the column of observed instances. The matrix is constructed as follows. Proposition 15 (Section 15) identifies upward transitions as movement "from the Utilization Model to the Transformation Model, from the Transformation Model to the Resource-Producing Model, and from a lower tier to a higher tier," and defines downward transitions as the converse. The M axis therefore carries the order "M2 above M3, M1 above M2," and the C axis the order "C2 above C1, C3 above C2." A transition is an upward transition (Table E-1) when both axes move weakly upward and at least one moves strictly upward; a downward transition (Table E-2) when both axes move weakly downward and at least one moves strictly downward; and a diagonal transition (treated in E.1.4) when one axis rises and the other falls. In addition, the third direction given by Definition 10 (Section 15), the cross-axis transition — the movement of the logic of allocation from economics to national security — is not a movement between cells but a change of state within each cell, and is therefore assessed separately for each of the nine cells (Table E-3).

The assessment symbols have the following meanings. A = attainable (the position in question may be reached if the required accumulation is sustained; on the downward side, it may arise passively without accumulation). B = attainable conditionally (in addition to accumulation, satisfaction is required of exogenous conditions that the state cannot set by its own choice — measures taken by other states, conditions of access, resources of location). C = difficult (this paper's framework cannot identify a path of attainment). D = not applicable; outside this paper's domain of quantification. Every pair involving row C3 is D — Tier C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category as of the time of writing (Definition 2, Section 5), and its attainability, time constants, and irreversibility lie outside this paper's domain of quantification. This discipline applies at every point in this appendix at which Tier C3 is mentioned. E.1.2 Upward Transitions (Table E-1) Table E-1. Attainability of upward transitions (assessment A = attainable / B = attainable conditionally / C = difficult / D = not applicable, outside the domain of quantification) Origin → destination Direction Assessment Accumulation required Order-ofmagnitude guide to the time constant Irreversibility Observed instance or not applicable M3×C1 → M2×C1 Horizontal A Complementary assets (a) exclusive data endowment and (b) physical-interface intensity; national brain capital (i) tacit knowledge on the ground and (iv) the capacity for audit and verification; minimal operational capacity Years Low (maintained only while accumulation continues) Corresponds to Table 13. Transformation at Tier C1 nonetheless carries the failure mode of degenerating into a thin wrapper (Section 7, Table A-2) M3×C1 → M3×C2 Vertical A Procurement contracts and conditions of access; operational capacity (ia); operational readiness (iii) Months to years (the shortest of all transitions) Low (reverses passively upon a change in the conditions of access) Corresponds to Table 13. Corresponds to the account of M3×C2 in Section 8 M3×C1 → M1×C1 Horizontal (two steps) B Compute, personnel, and funding sufficient to sustain an openweight supply; participation in standard formation Years Low (reverses immediately if supply ceases) Because production at Tier C1 obtains value through a non-exclusive channel (Definition 3), a separate fiscal basis for continu‐ 1091 Origin → destination Direction Assessment Accumulation required Order-ofmagnitude guide to the time constant Irreversibility Observed instance or not applicable ation is required (Section 7) M3×C1 → M2×C2 Horizontal and vertical simultaneously B The composition of the accumulation in the two rows above, together with renewal capability (ib), computing infrastructure, the four indicators of complementary assets, and the four components of national brain capital Latter part of a decade to decades Medium (exclusive data and institutional embeddedness are difficult to transfer) The path of attainment to the focal cell discussed in Section 10. It is usually designed as the composition of two steps rather than as a single-step transition M3×C1 → M1×C2 Horizontal and vertical simultaneously B Capital and electricity (procurable); personnel and access (difficult to procure); national brain capital (cannot be imported) Latter part of a decade to decades or more (the order of "5 to 10 years or more" in Table 13) Low (absent local valuecapture provisions and the retention of personnel, the facilities remain but the position does not) Corresponds to Table 13. Scenario [C], moving upstream through capital (Section 15.5) M2×C1 → M2×C2 Vertical A Renewal capability (i-b); computing infrastructure; specialist personnel Years Medium (reverses passively if renewal is interrupted) Corresponds to Table 13. The conditions for M2×C2 in Section 8 M2×C1 → M1×C1 Horizontal B Formation of producing entities; compute; participation in standard formation Years Low (reverses if supply ceases) The path on which a record in transformation becomes the point of departure for production. The revenue channel of production at Tier C1 is nonetheless non-exclusive (Definition 3) M2×C1 → M1×C2 Horizontal and ver‐ C Requires accumulation on both axes at once, and on each Decades Low to medium Not applicable (no case corresponding to the range of 1092 Origin → destination Direction Assessment Accumulation required Order-ofmagnitude guide to the time constant Irreversibility Observed instance or not applicable tical simultaneously axis the requirement is higher than for the transition on that axis alone this paper's account can be identified) M1×C1 → M1×C2 Vertical B The computing infrastructure, electricity, specialist personnel, and funding required to reach the frontier; sustained keeping pace with the speed of its advance Latter part of a decade to decades Low (ceasing to keep pace returns the position passively to Tier C1) The position of middle-power producers holding independent foundation models (Section 14, Section 15.7) M3×C2 → M2×C2 Horizontal A The four indicators of complementary assets; the four components of national brain capital; access to the demand market for the transformed output (Proposition 4(iii)) Years to decades Medium (exclusive data and institutional embeddedness are difficult to transfer) The conditions in Section 10. The path on which depth of utilization generates the complementary assets of transformation (Proposition 13, Section 18) M3×C2 → M1×C2 Horizontal (two steps) C Requires meeting the requirements of M1×C2 for capital, electricity, personnel, and access without passing through a record in transformation Decades Low Not applicable (moving upstream without passing through transformation is subject in substance to the same conditions as Scenario [C]) M2×C2 → M1×C2 Horizontal B The four indicators of complementary assets; the four components of national brain capital; computing infrastructure; electricity (as domain-specialized production) Latter part of a decade to decades (the order of "5 to 10 years" in Table 13) Medium (exclusive data and institutional embeddedness are difficult to transfer) Corresponds to Table 13. Scenario [A], path (i) (Section 15.3) Any cell → M1×C3 Includes vertical D Outside this paper's domain of quantification Outside this paper's domain of Outside this paper's domain of Not applicable (Tier C3 is an unrealized anticipat‐ 1093 Origin → destination Direction Assessment Accumulation required Order-ofmagnitude guide to the time constant Irreversibility Observed instance or not applicable quantification quantification ory category; Proposition 2b, Section 5; Section 9) Any cell → M2×C3 Includes vertical D Outside this paper's domain of quantification Outside this paper's domain of quantification Outside this paper's domain of quantification Not applicable (as above) Any cell → M3×C3 Vertical D Outside this paper's domain of quantification Outside this paper's domain of quantification Outside this paper's domain of quantification Not applicable (as above) Three regularities are to be read from Table E-1. First, only four upward transitions receive the assessment A. The four rows M3×C1→M2×C1, M3×C1→M3×C2, M2×C1→M2×C2, and M3×C2→M2×C2 are A; the remainder are B (conditional), C (difficult), or D (outside the domain of quantification). What the four A rows have in common is that the span of movement is confined to one step on one axis. Transitions that move both axes at once (M3×C1→M2×C2, M3×C1→M1×C2, M2×C1→M1×C2) all fall to B or below. This is because the object of accumulation differs by axis — moving up the M axis requires complementary assets and national brain capital, while moving up the C axis requires computing infrastructure, electricity, and renewal capability. The two are not substitutes, and simultaneous accumulation competes for both fiscal capacity and personnel. Ascent as a strategy therefore has a higher attainability when designed as a sequence of one axis at a time rather than as movement on both axes at once. That Section 15.3, in discussing the branching of the Transformation Model, poses the choice of which among the four indicators of complementary assets to prioritize is the practical manifestation of this structure. Second, the irreversibility of upward transitions is in every case low or medium. There is no "high" anywhere in Table E-1. A position attained is lost passively if accumulation stops. This asymmetry is the content of Proposition 15 (Section 15) itself, and this table confirms it at the level of cell pairs. Those with relatively high (medium) irreversibility are the transitions that require exclusive data endowment and institutional embeddedness — the rows involving M2×C2. These are assets whose transfer is costly, and there is an interval of grace between the cessation of accumulation and the lapse of the position. Conversely, a transition that depends solely on conditions of access (M3×C1→M3×C2) reverses immediately upon a change in those conditions. The "quality" of an ascent is 1094 measured not by the name of the cell attained but by the difficulty of transferring the accumulation that sustains that position. Third, the shortest time constant is months to years and the longest is decades, and the difference exceeds an order of magnitude. The shortest is M3×C1→M3×C2 — achieved by setting procurement contracts and conditions of access, and therefore requiring no formation of accumulation — and the longest is moving upstream through capital (M3×C1→M1×C2). This span is decisive in the design of policy. The time constant of policy decision (electoral cycles, budget years) is on the order of years, so that the shortest transition lies inside the time constant of policy and the longest lies outside it. A transition whose time constant exceeds the time constant of policy is not completed by a single administration or a single plan. Proposition 15's statement that "the time constant of accumulation is on the order of years and is longer than the time constant of policy decision" is the general statement of this structure. E.1.3 Downward Transitions (Table E-2) Table E-2. Possibility of occurrence of downward transitions (assessment A = may arise passively without accumulation / B = conditional / C = unlikely to arise / D = not applicable, outside the domain of quantification) Origin → destination Direction Assessment Driving factor (no accumulation required) Order-ofmagnitude guide to the time constant Irreversibility (difficulty of the return path) Observed instance or not applicable M2×C1 → M3×C1 Horizontal A Compression of the transformation margin that reduces to general- purpose functionality (Proposition 4, Section 7). Internalization through standard inclusion by the producer The cycle of generational change in foundation models (months to years) Medium (the return path requires the accumulation in the first row of Table E-1) The extinction of thin wrappers (Section 7, Table A-2) M1×C1 → M2×C1 Horizontal A Disappearance of the fiscal basis for continued production. A consequence of the non-exclusive revenue channel of production at Tier C1 (Definition 3) Years Low to medium The path on which the position of production is lost through the cessation of supply 1095 Origin → destination Direction Assessment Driving factor (no accumulation required) Order-ofmagnitude guide to the time constant Irreversibility (difficulty of the return path) Observed instance or not applicable M1×C1 → M3×C1 Horizontal (two steps) A Composition of the driving factors in the two rows above Years Medium The path on which both production and transformation are lost and utilization alone remains M3×C2 → M3×C1 Vertical A Exogenous change in the conditions of access (a consequence of cross-axis transition, Proposition 16); price revision; commercial decisions of the supplier The time constant of policy decision (months to years) Low to medium (recovery may follow if conditions return, but the return does not belong to the decision of the state in question) Section 15.4[B], transmission to the demand side. The group of states fixed in the Utilization Model in Section 15.8 M2×C2 → M2×C1 Vertical A Relative depreciation through interruption of renewal capability (i-b) (Proposition 8, Section 13) Passive (follows the speed of the frontier's advance) Medium (the return path requires rebuilding the renewal apparatus) The path on which the depreciation of stockpiles appears in the position of transformation (Proposition 8) M2×C2 → M3×C2 Horizontal A Degradation of complementary assets; attrition of national brain capital (Section 17.4). Loss of the transformation margin The cycle of generational change in foundation models (months to years) Medium to high (the return path requires the time constant of forming national brain capital) The path on which the position of transformation is lost and only utilization at Tier C2 remains M2×C2 → M3×C1 Horizontal and vertical simultaneously A Composition of the driving factors in the two rows above. Deepening dependence and attrition of national Passive (follows the speed of the frontier's advance) High (the return path requires the time constant of forming national brain capital) Corresponds to Table 13. Scenario [A], path (ii) (Section 15.3) 1096 Origin → destination Direction Assessment Driving factor (no accumulation required) Order-ofmagnitude guide to the time constant Irreversibility (difficulty of the return path) Observed instance or not applicable brain capital proceeding together M1×C2 → M2×C2 Horizontal A Discontinuation of the maintenance costs of frontier production (computing infrastructure, electricity, personnel) Years Medium The path on which the position of production is lost and transformation alone is retained M1×C2 → M1×C1 Vertical A Ceasing to keep pace with the frontier. Passive widening of the capability distance (Definition 2) Passive (follows the speed of the frontier's advance) Medium The path on which the Frontier Descent of Section 5 acts on the producing side M1×C2 → M3×C2 Horizontal (two steps) A Discontinuation of the conditions for maintaining both production and transformation Years Medium to high Not applicable (a two-step descent ordinarily arises sequentially) M1×C2 → M2×C1 Horizontal and vertical simultaneously A Discontinuation of maintenance costs and ceasing to keep pace, proceeding together Passive Medium to high Not applicable (as above) M1×C2 → M3×C1 Maximum span, horizontal and vertical A Composition of all the driving factors above Passive High Not applicable (this appears not as a single event but as the accumulation of several descents) Any cell → same M, lower C (through constraints of electricity and grid) Vertical A Physical constraints of electricity, grid, and compute. Operates independently of the will of the state Rate-limited by the formation time constant of generation and grid (the order of "5 to High (requires a period of high accumulation exceeding the period of stagnation) Corresponds to Table 13. Scenario [D], downward transition through physical con‐ 1097 Origin → destination Direction Assessment Driving factor (no accumulation required) Order-ofmagnitude guide to the time constant Irreversibility (difficulty of the return path) Observed instance or not applicable 10 years" in Table 13) straints (Section 15.6) Any cell in row C3 → any cell Includes vertical D Outside this paper's domain of quantification Outside this paper's domain of quantification Outside this paper's domain of quantification Not applicable (Tier C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category) The contrast between Table E-2 and Table E-1 is the central finding of this appendix. First, the assessments on the downward side are all A, apart from row C3. Whereas only four rows on the upward side receive A, there is no exception on the downward side. This is not an analytical accident but follows from the definition of the assessment criteria — because descent requires no accumulation, there is no condition that constrains attainability. The assessments "conditional" (B) and "difficult" (C) have meaning only where the possibility of accumulation or the satisfaction of exogenous conditions is at issue. Descent has no conditions. This is how the asymmetry of Proposition 15 appears on the matrix. Section 15.9's statement that "doing nothing" is not "maintaining" but "descending" can be confirmed at the level of cell pairs as the difference between the distributions of assessments in Tables E-1 and E-2. Second, the distribution of irreversibility is inverted between the upward and downward sides. There is no "high" on the upward side, and there are three on the downward side (M2×C2→M3×C1, M1×C2→M3×C1, and downward transition through physical constraints). "High" appears where what is lost is national brain capital or generation and grid — accumulations that require decades to form. Here lies the most important distinction for policy — even among descents, there are those from which recovery is possible and those from which recovery is difficult. M2×C2→M2×C1 (interruption of renewal capability) has medium irreversibility, and the position may be regained by rebuilding the renewal apparatus. By contrast, M2×C2→M3×C1 (a fall accompanied by attrition of national brain capital) has high irreversibility, and the return path requires the time constant of forming national brain capital — that is, a period encompassing generational change. What should take priority in diagnosis is not whether a descent is occurring but the discrimination of which of the two types an ongoing descent belongs to (Appendix D, Blocks VI and VII). Third, the time constants of descent are systematically shorter than those of ascent. The time-constant column on the downward side is filled with "passive (follows the speed of the frontier's advance)," "the cycle of generational change in foundation models (months to years)," and "the time constant of policy decision (months to years)." Each of 1098 these is a clock external to the decision of the state in question, and each is shorter than the time constant of ascent (years to decades). Descent proceeds faster than ascent, on a clock the state does not control. The exception is downward transition through physical constraints, which proceeds on the order of a decade because it is rate-limited by the formation time constant of generation and grid; but this does not mean that it is slow — what is rate-limited is recovery, while the constraint itself becomes manifest as demand increases (Section 15.6). E.1.4 Diagonal Transitions — The Composition of Ascent and Descent This appendix calls a transition in which one axis rises and the other falls a diagonal transition. Confined to rows C1 and C2, six pairs apply — M3×C2→M2×C1, M3×C2→M1×C1, M2×C2→M1×C1, M2×C1→M3×C2, M1×C1→M3×C2, and M1×C1→M2×C2. No independent table is given to them because a diagonal transition is to be read as the composition of an upward component and a downward component. The ground for this reading is that Definition 10 (Section 15) decomposes transition into the three directions of horizontal, vertical, and cross-axis. The reading as composition proceeds as follows. M2×C2→M1×C1 (rising from transformation to production while descending from the frontier to the commodity tier) is read as the composition of M2×C2→M2×C1 (descent, assessment A, passive) and M2×C1→M1×C1 (ascent, assessment B). This diagonal transition therefore requires no conditions with respect to its downward component and requires conditions of the order of B with respect to its upward component. The assessment of a diagonal transition as a whole is governed by the assessment of its upward component — since the downward component carries no conditions, it is always the upward component that is rate-limiting. Likewise, the time constant is governed by the time constant of the upward component and the irreversibility by the irreversibility of the downward component. Using these three relations of governance, an assessment for any of the six pairs may be derived from the corresponding rows of Tables E-1 and E-2, and no independent table is required. Among the diagonal transitions, the type with practical significance is M2×C2→M1×C1. This corresponds to a strategy of abandoning the effort to keep pace with the frontier while taking a position in production at the commodity tier (open-weight supply, standard formation). Because production at Tier C1 obtains value through a non-exclusive channel (Definition 3), sales revenue is scant; yet participation in standard formation and ecosystem externalities may become conditions for maintaining the complementary assets of transformation. This paper holds no judgment as to whether such a strategy succeeds — it has not undertaken systematic observation of corresponding cases. It is recorded here only that a diagonal transition is not a blank on the matrix but a position that may be read as a composition. 1099 E.1.5 Cross-Axis Transitions (Table E-3) A cross-axis transition is not a movement between cells. As Definition 10 (Section 15) sets out, it is the movement from a state in which the capability in question is allocated by the logic of economics (markets, trade, competition policy) to a state in which it is allocated by the logic of national security (export controls, alliances, nonproliferation), and the converse. The form of the matrix therefore differs as well, and for each of the nine cells the assessment concerns what changes when a cross-axis transition occurs. The assessment symbols carry the same meanings as in Table E-1, except that "attainment" here refers to the occurrence of a cross-axis transition in the cell in question. Table E-3. Possibility of occurrence of a cross-axis transition (logic of economics → logic of national security) in each cell Cell Content of the cross-axis transition and the procurement or supply affected Assessment Order-ofmagnitude guide to the time constant Irreversibility Observed instance or not applicable M1×C1 (commodity production) Control measures on the output lose effectiveness through circumvention, since substitutes exist in multiple jurisdictions (Proposition 2(i), Section 5). The share of procurement affected is small C Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable (open weights already released cannot be withdrawn, and controls applied after the fact do not reach the floor of capability) M2×C1 (commodity transformation) Arises partially, and only where the transformed output falls within the security regulation of the final demand jurisdiction. The effect depends on the composition of destinations for the transformed output C The time constant of policy decision (months to years) Medium Not applicable (this paper has not undertaken systematic observation of corresponding cases) M3×C1 (commodity utilization) The channels through which control measures reach the procurement of Tier C1 capability are limited. Indirect effects transmitted through the infrastructural layer (cloud, chips) nonetheless remain C Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable M1×C2 (frontier production) Appears on the producing side as intervention by the state (export controls, investment screening, procurement priority). What is affected is the A (already occurring) The time constant of policy decision High (Proposition 16, Export controls on advanced semiconductors (Table 7, assess‐ 1100 Cell Content of the cross-axis transition and the procurement or supply affected Assessment Order-ofmagnitude guide to the time constant Irreversibility Observed instance or not applicable whole of access to advanced semiconductors, manufacturing equipment, and models (months to

Cell Content of the cross-axis transition and the procurement or supply affected Assessment Order-ofmagnitude guide to the time constant Irreversibility Observed instance or not applicable whole of access to advanced semiconductors, manufacturing equipment, and models (months to years) Section 15) ment #3, Section 9; Section 15.4) M2×C2 (managed transformation) Appears on the demand side as the confinement of sources of procurement within an alliance (friend-shoring). All procurement for transformation processes that take Tier C2 capability as an input is affected. Availability of procurement becomes a function of political position rather than of price and quality A (already occurring) The time constant of policy decision (months to years) High Section 15.4[B]. The focal cell discussed in Section 10 is the cell most broadly affected by cross-axis transition M3×C2 (frontier utilization) The continuation of use of Tier C2 capability is itself subordinate to conditions of access. What is affected are the critical processes with a high depth of utilization A (already occurring) The time constant of policy decision (months to years) High The vulnerability of the group of states fixed in the Utilization Model in Section 15.8 M1×C3 (critical holding) Outside this paper's domain of quantification. Proposition 2b (Section 5) states that the institutional treatment of capability beyond the Tier C3 threshold moves into the framework of a nonproliferation-type regime, but this is a conditional proposition premised on the existence of the transition and is not an anticipation of its arrival D Outside this paper's domain of quantification Outside this paper's domain of quantification Not applicable (Tier C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category) M2×C3 (critical subcontracting) As above D Outside this paper's domain of quantification Outside this paper's domain of quantification Not applicable (as above) M3×C3 (utilization under the umbrella As above D Outside this paper's domain of Outside this paper's domain of Not applicable (as above) 1101 Cell Content of the cross-axis transition and the procurement or supply affected Assessment Order-ofmagnitude guide to the time constant Irreversibility Observed instance or not applicable of critical capability) quantification quantification The distribution in Table E-3 divides clearly between row C2 and row C1. The three cells of row C2 are all A (already occurring), and the three cells of row C1 are all C. This distribution is consistent with the content of Proposition 2 (Section 5) — at Tier C1 control measures lose effectiveness through circumvention, while at Tier C2 control measures do constrain capability on the demand side. Cross-axis transition is a function of the AI capability tier and not of the type of value model (M1/M2/M3). This point is easily overlooked when the position on the nine cells is discussed. Whether a state is of the Resource- Producing or the Utilization Model does not determine whether a cross-axis transition occurs; it determines only what is affected when one does — for the Resource-Producing Model the conditions of its own supply, for the Utilization Model the conditions of its own procurement, and for the Transformation Model both. One note on time constants. The time constants in Table E-3 are all the time constant of policy decision (months to years), which is shorter than the time constants of upward transition in Table E-1 (years to decades). Cross-axis transitions therefore occur faster than upward transitions. This difference in speed creates a structural difficulty for a state that intends to ascend — if the conditions of procurement change in the course of accumulation, the very premise of that accumulation may be lost. Section 15.4's statement that cross-axis transition "strengthens the inducement to ascend while at the same time constraining the conditions of access in a discontinuous manner" is a consequence of this difference in speed. As to irreversibility, given that Proposition 16 (Section 15) asserts irreversibility, "high" has been entered for all three cells of row C2. This is, however, an assertion of this paper and not an observed fact. As the falsification condition of Proposition 16 provides, if transitions in the reverse direction (a return from the logic of national security to the logic of economics) are observed repeatedly, the assertion of irreversibility is rejected. The irreversibility column of Table E-3 is to be read as a prediction open to this falsification, and not as an established finding. E.1.6 Limits of the Matrix This matrix has four limits. First, the time constants have not been estimated. Every entry in the time-constant columns is an order-of-magnitude guide derived from the formation period of the object of accumulation, and is not a statistical estimate of the time a 1102 transition takes. An order-of-magnitude guide is useful only for the coarse judgment of comparison with the time constant of policy decision — inside or outside. Second, the assignment of cell positions itself carries a range. The falsification condition of Proposition 3 (Section 6) prescribes assignment by four observable quantities that do not use institutional variables, but for states near the boundary of that assignment the identification of the origin and destination of a transition is not unique. Third, the transition of a portfolio is described as the movement of a single cell. Definition 3 describes actual states as weighted portfolios over the nine cells, and a transition is the movement of the centroid (Definition 10). This matrix approximates the movement of the centroid as a discrete pair, and does not represent continuous changes in the weights — for example, a change that increases the weight of utilization while preserving the weight of transformation. Fourth, the column of observed instances is a reference to cases described in the body of this paper and is not a new empirical claim. "Not applicable" means not that the transition in question does not exist, but that this paper has not undertaken systematic observation of corresponding cases. E.2 A Measurement Framework for National Brain Capital (Provisional Proposal) E.2.1 Design Principles, and an Explicit Statement That the Framework Is Not Yet Developed This is stated again. The measurement framework for national brain capital (Definition 11, Section 10) is not yet developed, and this part is a provisional proposal. As Section 20 acknowledges among its limitations, this paper does not possess validated means of measuring national brain capital. What this part does is to enumerate, component by component, candidate proxy indicators that may be constructed from existing statistics, to set out the limits of each alongside it, and to state explicitly the part that the proxy indicators do not reach. The simultaneous presentation of these three is the minimum condition that a provisional proposal must satisfy. There are four design principles. First, present distributions. Mean values do not capture the substance of national brain capital, which is the thickness of the skilled layer (Section 17.4). Every proxy indicator is recorded not as a mean but as quantiles, age composition, and thickness in the upper part of the distribution. Second, do not aggregate into a single score. Constructing a "national brain capital index" by compounding the four components conceals the fact that the components have different rates of attrition and different policy instruments. This is a transfer of the discipline established by Brain Capital Management (2026e) in its three-layer disclosure, and the same discipline applies to the three indicators of value-definition capability (E.3). Third, distinguish what can be constructed from existing statistics from what requires a new survey. The former is low in the cost of commencement, the latter requires the creation of an institution. The order of implementation in E.4 rests on this distinction. Fourth, record the level of the stock 1103 and the attrition of the flow separately. National brain capital is not only accumulated but also subject to attrition (Section 17.4), and since attrition may proceed in a phase in which measured efficiency is in fact improving, a measurement that looks only at levels issues no warning. Table E-4. Candidate proxy indicators for the four components of national brain capital (Definition 11): data sources, international comparability, and what cannot be measured (provisional proposal) Component Candidate proxy indicators and the limits of each Type of data source International comparability What cannot be measured at present (i) Tacit knowledge on the ground (embodied skill in manufacturing, maintenance, medicine, care, and the like) / Density of skilled labour (share of employment in skilled trades, maintenance occupations, and professionaltechnical occupations under the occupational classification) / Limit: occupational classification does not measure the level of skill and does not capture the dispersion of proficiency within a single class. / Rate of holding trade certifications and professional qualifications / Limit: the existence and design of qualification systems differ across states, and a qualification confirms explicit knowledge rather than guaranteeing tacit knowledge. / Distribution of years of experience within an occupation (quantiles rather than mean tenure) / Limit: tenure is duration of stay at a firm rather than experience within an occupation, and differences in labour-market fluidity distort international comparison systematically. Occupationalclassification tabulations of the labour force survey and the employment structure survey; registration statistics of qualification- issuing bodies; firm panels; sectorlevel equipment and maintenance statistics Medium to low. An international framework exists for occupational classification, but the meaning of qualification systems and of tenure depends on the labour law of each state The level of tacit knowledge itself (what can be done, and how accurate the judgment is). Classifications, years, and qualifications are all proxies for presence and formal credentials, and do not reach the quality of embodied judgment. No internationally comparable direct measurement of the accuracy of judgment on the ground exists 1104 Component Candidate proxy indicators and the limits of each Type of data source International comparability What cannot be measured at present / Equipment utilization rates and downtime attributable to maintenance / Limit: confounded with factors other than skill (the age of equipment, investment in upkeep). (ii) Judgment embedded in language, culture, and aesthetic sensibility / Number of languagespecific technical standards and certifications (an indicator shared with Proposition 4(d), linguistic-contextual specificity) / Limit: a count does not measure defensive strength, and its value as a barrier decays as the multilingual performance of frontier models improves (Appendix D, item 28). / Volume of specialist writing, technical documentation, and records of practical judgment produced in the language in question / Limit: volume does not measure quality, and the indicator is contaminated by the increase of machine translation and machine generation. / Size of the occupational layer that operates the specialist terminology of the language in question / Limit: no more than an approximation from occupational classification, and coarse. Registers of standardization and certification bodies; publishing, academic, and legalinformation databases; occupationalclassification tabulations Low. The definition of the scope of "language-specific" itself differs by jurisdiction, and no common framework exists The content of judgment (what is held to be appropriate). The level of aesthetic sensibility, of propriety, and of context-dependent adequacy is not reducible to any count. This paper states explicitly that this part lies outside the measurement framework and does not substitute a proxy indicator for it (iii) The professional ethics and prac‐ / Survey values for trust in institutions and in the professions / Limit: a meas‐ Attitude surveys; annual reports of professional bodies Medium (survey values) to low (institution- depend‐ Practical conventions themselves (the discipline of judgment in situations that are not re‐ 1105 Component Candidate proxy indicators and the limits of each Type of data source International comparability What cannot be measured at present tical conventions that make trust in institutions possible urement of attitudes rather than of practical conventions, and cultural differences in survey design, translation, and response format produce systematic bias in international comparison. / Rate of occurrence and rate of disposition of professional disciplinary and misconduct cases / Limit: the observed rate of occurrence is the product of the underlying rate and the rate of detection, and comes out higher in states where supervision is effective (a risk that the sign is inverted). / Penetration of liability- assumption contracts and professional indemnity insurance / Limit: confounded with the development of the insurance market. / Maintenance rates of certification and supervisory registration (continuation rather than acquisition) / Limit: measures the existence of an institution, not ethics. and supervisory authorities; insurance statistics; registration and renewal records of certification bodies ent indicators). Survey values are formally comparable but, given the bias above, do not bear comparison of levels corded). In particular, survey values do not distinguish a state in which trust is accompanied by grounds from a state in which the grounds have been lost and only the form remains (Section 17.4). This distinction is the greatest gap in the present framework (iv) The capacity for audit and verification grounded in long domain experience (2026i) / Age composition of the professions (age distribution and the share of the succeeding layer in occupations such as audit, inspection, maintenance, and clinical practice) / Limit: age is a proxy for years of experience and does Occupational age distributions from the labour force survey; membership statistics of professional bodies; reports of supervisory authorit‐ Medium (age composition) to none (maintenance of apprenticeship). Age composition is comparable, but differences in the definition The level of audit capacity itself (the probability of detecting an error). This cannot be constructed from existing statistics and may be measured only through exercises — of the same design as the AI outage exercise in 1106 Component Candidate proxy indicators and the limits of each Type of data source International comparability What cannot be measured at present not measure the quality of experience. / Numbers of new entrants and rates of departure in occupations responsible for audit and inspection / Limit: a measurement of flow that does not give the level of the stock. / Share of operations in which a process for verifying AI outputs is institutionalized / Limit: measures the existence of an institution and not the effectiveness of verification — formal approval is not verification (2026h). / Volume of opportunities for junior personnel to bear judgment carrying responsibility (maintenance of cognitive apprenticeship) / Limit: no internationally comparable existing statistic exists, and a new survey is required. ies; firm surveys (new) of occupations remain Appendix C.6. Measurement through exercises is at present institutionalized in no state E.2.2 Notes by Component On component (i). Of the four proxy indicators, those that may be constructed by re-tabulating existing statistics alone are the density of skilled labour and the distribution of years of experience within an occupation. These two indicators are low in the cost of commencement and are placed in the first order of priority in E.4. Both, however, are measurements of presence and not of capability. There are two directions in which this limit may be mitigated — decomposing the occupational classification into finer units of task, and reading it together with outcome indicators for equipment and process (downtime attributable to maintenance and the like). Both reduce the coarseness of the indicator, but neither reaches the level of tacit knowledge itself. This gap is one of principle and is not resolved by improvements in measurement technique. 1107 On component (ii). This component is the most difficult of the four to measure. Because the first indicator (number of language-specific technical standards and certifications) is shared with Proposition 4(d), the same data may be used as for the diagnosis of transformation assets (Appendix D, Block IV, item 28). As that item already notes, however, the defensive strength of this indicator decays as the multilingual performance of frontier models improves. The structure in which the object the indicator measures itself loses value over time is a feature not found in the other components, and calls for care in interpreting time series — even where the number of standards is flat, their substance as a barrier may decline. As to the content of judgment (what is held to be appropriate), this paper presents no proxy indicator. Presenting none is, in this case, the honest treatment. On component (iii). Survey values for trust are the indicator with the lowest cost of commencement, in the sense that internationally comparable series already exist. The price of this, however, is that what they measure is furthest from the third component of Definition 11 — Definition 11 speaks of "the professional ethics and practical conventions that make trust in institutions possible," not of trust itself. Trust is a consequence; the component lies on the side of the cause. Where survey values are used as a proxy for component (iii), this reversal of the direction of causation must be stated explicitly. As to the rate of occurrence of disciplinary and misconduct cases, the risk that the sign is inverted — a higher observed rate of occurrence in states where supervision is effective — is serious, and the indicator is not used on its own. Reading it together with the rate of disposition (the share of complaints brought to completion) may mitigate this in part. On component (iv). This component occupies a special position in this paper's argument, since Proposition 18 (Section 10) locates the basis of the defensibility of the Transformation Model in national brain capital, and Section 17.4 connects two of the three channels of attrition (exit of the skilled layer, severing of skill transmission) to this component. At the same time, this component carries the clearest prescription from the standpoint of measurement — audit capacity may be measured through exercises. The three-stage design that Appendix C.6 establishes for the AI outage exercise (tabletop, live, cross-departmental) may be transferred directly to the measurement of audit capacity. That is, a design in which verification tasks with errors embedded in AI outputs are given to practitioners, and the rate of detection and the time to detection are measured. This measurement cannot be constructed from existing statistics, but it can be designed as an exercise, and in this respect the gap differs in kind from the gaps in components (i) to (iii). It appears plausible that this component is the one this framework may be able to develop first. E.2.3 Observing Attrition — Measuring Change Rather Than Level Section 17.4 identified three channels of attrition of national brain capital — exit of the skilled layer, severing of skill transmission, and degradation of institutional trust. Because the proxy indicators of Table E-4 are oriented toward the measurement of levels, a differ‐ 1108 ent reading is required for the observation of attrition. Observable quantities corresponding to each of the three channels are set out below. Exit of the skilled layer is observed through the time series of age composition in components (i) and (iv). What should be observed is not the mean age but the ratio of the size of the exiting age band to the size of the succeeding band. Where a period in which this ratio falls below one persists, the stock is declining. This observation may be constructed from existing labour statistics and requires no additional survey — it is the part of the measurement of the four components that may be undertaken earliest. Severing of skill transmission is observed through the volume of opportunities for junior personnel to bear judgment carrying responsibility, but no existing statistic corresponds to this. As an approximation, the combination of the share of junior judgment tasks that have been substituted by AI and the retention rate of new entrants to the occupation may be considered, but both are indirect. This channel is the most difficult to observe, and, as Section 17.4 notes, it proceeds while short-term efficiency is improving, so that the other indicators issue no warning. Degradation of institutional trust is observed through the time series of survey values in component (iii), together with the share of automated judgments repeated inside institutions without being verified — that is, as a decline in the third indicator of component (iv) (share of operations in which a verification process is institutionalized). Of the three channels, this is the only one that appears across the indicators of two components. E.2.4 Relation to the Testing of Proposition 18 The falsification condition of Proposition 18 (Section 10) names four proxy indicators for national brain capital: "the density of skilled labour, the thickness of the layer of domain professionals, the level of trust in institutions, and the number of language-specific technical standards." Table E-4 contains these four, and their correspondence with the components is as follows — the density of skilled labour to component (i), the thickness of the layer of domain professionals to component (iv), the level of trust in institutions to component (iii), and the number of language-specific technical standards to component (ii). The four indicators named in the falsification condition thus correspond one to each of the four components. The testing of Proposition 18 is therefore carried out by taking at least one indicator from each component of Table E-4 and using them individually rather than compounding them. Testing with a compounded index contravenes the second design principle of this framework (do not aggregate into a single score) and conceals the differing rates of attrition across components; it must not be done. The reservation stated at the outset is repeated at the close of this part. The measurement framework of this part is not yet developed and is a provisional proposal. None of the proxy indicators of Table E-4 measures the components of Definition 11 adequately. In particular, this paper has no proxy indicators for the content of judgment in component (ii) and for the practical conventions themselves in component (iii). To treat this gap as though it had been filled by proxy indicators would turn Proposition 18 into an untestable 1109 claim. The gap is disclosed as a gap, and the development of the measurement framework remains a task for the future. E.3 Proxy Indicators for Value-Definition Capability (Provisional Proposal) The falsification condition of Proposition 17 (Section 17) names three proxy indicators for value-definition capability (Definition 12, Section 17) — the distinctiveness of goal-setting, the consistency of long-term resource allocation, and the rate of creation of new markets. Section 15.3.5 discusses the content and the weaknesses of these three indicators and refers consideration of detailed specifications to this appendix. This part gives the provisional proposal for those specifications. This part too is a provisional proposal, and this paper does not present these as validated means of measurement. Definition 12 constitutes value-definition capability as two components — selecting for oneself the future state to be attained, and realizing that selection by translating it into resource allocation, institutional design, and organizational structure. The three indicators correspond to these two components and to their consequence. Table E-5. Provisional proposal for the operationalization of the three proxy indicators for value-definition capability (Definition 12) Indicator Component of Definition 12 to which it corresponds Provisional proposal for operationalization Type of data source Weakness Safeguard (a) Distinctiveness of goalsetting First component (selection) Measure how far the statement of goals in national strategy documents and industrial policy documents differs from the statement of goals in documents of the same kind in other states, as the complement of the similarity between documents. The set of documents, the years covered, and the states used for comparison are fixed before measurement Official strategy and policy documents of each state (public) Distinctiveness is not correctness — a mistaken statement of goals may equally be distinctive. Distinctiveness of documents is distinctiveness of declaration, and does not necessarily accompany realization (the second component is not being measured) Not used on its own; used only in combination with (b). The set of documents is fixed in advance, and later addition or exclusion is prohibited (b) Consistency Second compon‐ Measure the correspondence between Budget documents and Consistency and rigidity cannot be Read together with the pres‐

Indicator Component of Definition 12 to which it corresponds Provisional proposal for operationalization Type of data source Weakness Safeguard of longterm resource allocation ent (realization) declared goals and actual resource allocation (budgets, the enactment and repeal of regulation, the allocation of authority across organizations), and the extent to which that correspondence is maintained over several fiscal years. The number of reversals in the destination of allocation is taken as a secondary observable settlements of account, records of the enactment and repeal of regulation, organizational ordinances and staffing determinations distinguished at the level of the indicator — consistent allocation to a mistaken goal is not a high valuedefinition capability but an absence of renewal capability ence or absence of a renewal condition (a condition that triggers reconsideration of the goal). Unconditional consistency is not rated highly (a transfer of the discipline of the defence of time in 2026g) (c) Rate of creation of new markets Consequence side (the result of the composition of the two components) Measure the rate at which goods and services appear that do not fall within existing industrial classifications, and the position that entities of the state in question occupy in that appearance. The lag structure (the delay from the exercise of definition to the observation of creation) is specified in advance Records of revision of industrial classifications, corporate registries, records of newly established standards and classifications Lagging character and difficulty of attribution — creation is observed with a delay of years, and whether that creation is attributable to the value-definition capability of the state in question, or is merely the implementation within that state of goals defined elsewhere, cannot be discriminated from the fact of creation alone The criterion of attribution (what warrants attributing creation to the value-definition capability of the state in question) is defined before measurement. The lag structure is not adjusted after the fact E.3.1 Safeguards Against Making a Residual Concept a Universal Explanatory Variable Value-definition capability is a concept introduced in Proposition 17 as a residual — it is posited as the locus to which differences unexplained by efficiency are attributed. Residual concepts carry a characteristic risk: that of absorbing everything that is unexplained and becoming an unfalsifiable, universal explanatory variable. Section 15.3.6 discusses 1111 safeguards against this risk; this part gives those safeguards concrete form at the level of the measurement procedure. There are three safeguards. The first safeguard is the fixing of proxy indicators in advance. In testing the latter half of Proposition 17, the definitions, data sources, periods covered, and objects of comparison of the three indicators are fixed before the test, and the manufacture of explanatory power through the selection, addition, or exclusion of indicators after the fact is prohibited. This is the same discipline by which Hypothesis H2 (Section 21) requires that the four indicators of complementary assets be "measured before the event," excluding the channel of later reclassification. The fixing must be documented, and the point in time at which it was fixed must be recorded. Selection of indicators without such fixing can explain any residual whatever as "value-definition capability," and thus gives the appearance of a test without its content. The second safeguard is control for competing explanations. This paper's framework itself supplies variables other than value-definition capability as candidates for gaps unexplained by efficiency — complementary asset endowment (Proposition 4, Section 7), national brain capital (Definition 11, Section 10), the guarantee level (Definition 6, Section 13), and the cell position itself (Proposition 3, Section 6). A claim attributing a residual to value-definition capability is supported only if a residual remains after controlling for these and if the three indicators explain that residual. The list of variables to be controlled for is likewise fixed before the test. This requirement is demanding, but it cannot be relaxed — attributing a residual without controlling for competing explanations is naming rather than explanation. The third safeguard concerns the Goodhart problem. All three indicators become manipulable the moment they are adopted as policy targets — by writing distinctive language, by aligning the appearance of allocation, and by creating new classifications, the indicators may improve without any accompanying substance. This risk is not resolved by the design of the indicators. There are three responses. (1) Do not set the three indicators as policy target values. This framework is for diagnosis and does not give a level to be attained. (2) Separate the party that measures from the party that makes policy. (3) Where improvement in an indicator is observed, examine whether it is accompanied by substance through a separate observation — for instance, whether improvement in (a) is accompanied by improvement in (b). Section 15.3.5's provision that (a) is not used on its own builds this examination into the design of the indicator. In addition, as a discipline shared with E.2, the three indicators are not compounded into a single score. Compounding gives the appearance that the weaknesses of the indicators compensate for one another, but in fact it merely conceals them. Finally, the range of claims this framework can support is stated explicitly. As Section 15.3.6 sets out, Proposition 17 is at present a testable proposition as to its first half (the diminishing returns to efficiency), while as to its second half (attribution of the residual to value-definition capability) it retains the standing of a hypothesis for which a testing 1112 procedure has been specified. The proxy indicators of this part are a sketch of the procedure for making that second half testable, and do not indicate that the second half is already supported. While the proxy indicators remain coarse, a failure of the indicators to explain a gap is not proof that value-definition capability is not the substance of the residual — it may equally be a consequence of the coarseness of the indicators. This asymmetry will not be resolved until the measurement framework is developed. E.4 The Order of Implementation of Measurement None of the measurements presented in this appendix can be undertaken in full immediately. Three criteria determine the order of commencement — (1) whether additional data collection is required, (2) whether delay in commencement destroys testability itself, and (3) whether the measurement is a precondition for other measurements. From these three criteria the following four orders of priority follow. First order: what may be constructed by re-tabulating existing statistics. The exposure indicators of Appendix C (the E series, Table C-3a) may be constructed by re-tabulating existing statistics and form the point of departure of the dependence audit protocol. Among the measurements of this appendix, those with the same character are the density of skilled labour and the distribution of years of experience within an occupation for component (i) of Table E-4, the age composition of the professions for component (iv), and the number of language-specific technical standards for component (ii). These may be constructed from labour statistics, qualification registers, and the registers of standardization bodies, and require no additional survey. Measurement of this order may be commenced in parallel with the construction of the exposure indicators of Appendix C. The observation of exit of the skilled layer set out in E.2.3 (the ratio of the size of the exiting age band to that of the succeeding band) also belongs to this order. Second order: what requires fixing in advance. The four indicators of Proposition 4 (Appendix D, Block IV, item 29) and the three indicators of Definition 12 (E.3) fall here. What they have in common is that measurement after the fact cannot be used for testing. The four indicators must be measured before the event of generational change in foundation models (Hypothesis H2, Section 21), and the three indicators must be fixed before the test (the first safeguard in E.3.1). This order carries a deadline — delay in commencement does not lower the quality of the measurement; it destroys testability itself. For the same reason for which Appendix D.2 recognizes an urgency specific to item 29, this order must be commenced in parallel without waiting for completion of the first order. The number of the order denotes the sequence of dependence, not importance. Third order: what may be measured only through exercises. Direct measurement of dependence (the AI outage exercise of Appendix C.6) and measurement of audit capacity (component (iv) of Table E-4) fall here. Both share the same design principle — they cannot be constructed from statistics gathered in normal times and may be measured only by imposing a simulated load and observing the response. The two may therefore be meas‐ 1113 ured simultaneously within a single exercise. If tasks requiring verification of AI outputs are incorporated into the AI outage exercise and the rate of detection and the time to detection are recorded, direct measurement of dependence and measurement of audit capacity may be carried out in a single implementation. Given the high cost of conducting exercises, this integration in design is of practical importance. Fourth order: what requires the creation of a new survey. The state of skill transmission (maintenance of cognitive apprenticeship), the size of the layer that operates the linguistic context, and direct observation of practical conventions fall here. None has a corresponding item in existing statistics, and it is necessary to begin from the design of a questionnaire. The items of the fourth order coincide with the parts where the gaps in this framework are largest — the parts that cannot be measured are large because the surveys do not exist. This order is therefore last in sequence, yet from the standpoint of developing the framework it contains the most essential parts. E.4.1 Scale and Design of a Pilot Measurements of the first and second orders may be commenced nationwide at once, but those of the third and fourth orders can only begin from a pilot. Three points are set out on the design of a pilot. Scale. Rather than all sectors at once, begin with two or three sectors. The criterion for selecting sectors is neither size nor importance but that the type of the dependence channel differs — from the sectors covered in Appendix C.2, select those whose mode of dependence on external infrastructure differs. The purpose of a pilot is not the estimation of levels but the stabilization of indicator definitions. Whether the same definition functions in sectors of different types is what should be confirmed before nationwide deployment. Duration and repetition. A single-year implementation does not observe attrition. Because the measurement of national brain capital aims at the observation of change rather than of level (the fourth design principle in E.2.1), measurement at at least two points in time is required, and indicator definitions must not be changed between them. A change in definition makes the observation of change impossible. Outputs. A pilot has three outputs — (1) a record, for each indicator, of whether measurement was possible, (2) the items that could not be measured and the reasons, and (3) proposed revisions to indicator definitions. Of these, (2) is the most important. Since the purpose of this appendix is "to disclose what can be measured and what cannot," a record of what could not be measured is not a record of failure but a primary result in the development of the framework. E.4.2 The Cooperating Parties Required The measurements of this appendix are not completed within a single area of jurisdictional competence. In the same form as Appendix D.2 describes for the conduct of the dia‐ 1114 gnosis, the realistic arrangement for measurement is to place a cross-cutting coordinating body and to assign responsibility item by item. Five types of cooperating party are required. Statistical authorities undertake the measurement of the first order — the re-tabulation of labour statistics by occupational classification and by age. Since the emphasis falls on rearranging existing tabulations rather than on adding new questions to existing surveys, the burden is relatively small. Sectoral supervisory authorities undertake the conduct of the exercises of the third order and the definition of sector-specific indicators. Where these are integrated with the AI outage exercise of Appendix C.6, the implementing party is the same. Professional bodies and certification bodies are indispensable to the measurement of components (iii) and (iv) — records of disciplinary and misconduct cases, maintenance rates of certification, and the age composition of the professions are all data held by these parties. Much of this is not maintained as official statistics, and an agreement on cooperation is a precondition. Firms are at once the object of the exercises and the holders of firm-side data for components (i) and (iv) (years of experience within an occupation, the state of institutionalization of verification processes). Forums for international alignment undertake the harmonization of indicator definitions. As Table E-4 shows, the international comparability of the proxy indicators for the four components is medium to low, and the principal cause of that low comparability is not technical difficulty in the indicators but the absence of uniform definitions. As Appendix C.6.3 states of the dependence indicators, comparison does not hold unless a common framework is built first. As to the scope of publication, the constraints described in Appendix C.6.3 and Appendix D.2 apply to the measurements of this appendix as well. The results of measuring national brain capital do not directly indicate the location of vulnerabilities, but thinness in a particular component indicates a weakness in the defensibility of the Transformation Model (Proposition 18, Section 10), so the scope of publication requires judgment. Given the character of this appendix, however, the measurement framework itself and the record of items that could not be measured should be published — the fact that the framework is not yet developed is not a vulnerability to be concealed but a task to be shared. E.4.3 Restatement of the Standing of E.1 to E.3 The reservation stated at the outset is set out again at the close. The measurement framework for national brain capital in E.2 and the proxy indicators for value-definition capability in E.3 are both not yet developed, and what this appendix has presented is a provisional proposal. This paper has not carried out these measurements and has not validated the adequacy of the proxy indicators. The limits set out alongside each row of Tables E-4 and E-5 include both those that may be resolved by future development and those that are not resolvable in principle — the content of judgment in component (ii), and the practical conventions themselves in component (iii). For the latter, this 1115 paper has chosen the treatment of not substituting proxy indicators and of stating explicitly that they lie outside the measurement framework. The same reservation is required for the transition matrix of E.1. All time constants in Tables E-1 to E-3 are order-of-magnitude guides and are not statistical estimates. The assessment symbols are analytical evaluations based on this paper's framework and are not frequencies of observed transitions. "Not applicable" in the column of observed instances means not that the transition in question does not exist, but that this paper has not undertaken systematic observation of corresponding cases. These limits correspond to the limitations acknowledged in Section 20 — that the dynamic scenarios are conditional paths rather than predictions and that the time constants of transition have not been estimated; that the measurement framework for national brain capital is not yet developed; and that the proxy indicators for value-definition capability are provisional — and this appendix gives that acknowledgment concrete form at the level of individual items. The value of this appendix lies not in having shown that measurement is possible, but in having disclosed what can be measured and what cannot in a form that subsequent research may take up. E.5 Operationalization of the Four Indicators of Complementary Assets (Proposition 4) — Formulas, Cutoffs, and Standardization E.5.1 The Criticism to Which This Part Responds Proposition 4 (Section 7) requires, as one of the necessary conditions for the existence of the Transformation Model, a complementary asset endowment "at or above a prescribed level" in at least one of four indicators — (a) exclusive data endowment, (b) physical-interface intensity, (c) institutional embeddedness, and (d) linguistic-contextual specificity. The heaviest criticism directed at this paper's framework is directed at this requirement. The criticism has two stages. The first stage is the absence of a formula — this paper gives definitional statements for the four indicators but does not define from which objective statistics, or by which procedure, numerical values are to be obtained. The second stage is the absence of a cutoff — since no value is given for the "prescribed level," choosing the level after observation allows any observed result to be reconciled with Proposition 4. The two stages are not independent, and the latter is the heavier. Without a formula there can be no measurement; but even with a formula, if the cutoff is chosen after the fact, measurement becomes a device for overfitting. This criticism is warranted, and this part accepts it and responds through three pieces of work. (1) For each of the four indicators, the type of variable (continuous variable or graded assessment) and the formula are specified (E.5.2, Table E-6). (2) A procedural discipline is established requiring that the cutoff be defined, before the analysis begins, as a quantile within the sample, and it is stated explicitly that this paper gives no absolutevalue cutoff and why none can be given (E.5.3). (3) The procedure for standardizing and compounding the four indicators, and the cases in which they must not be compounded, 1116 are established (E.5.4). What is given below is a procedure for calculation, not the result of a calculation. This paper has not measured the four indicators. E.5.2 Formulas for the Four Indicators (a) Exclusive data endowment. The type of variable is a continuous variable between 0 and 1. It is calculated as the ratio, to the total volume of data used by the application in question, of the volume of the part that is "unobtainable from the public web and generated only from the operating processes of the transformer in question." The requirement in the definitional statement is a conjunction — data that, though unobtainable from the public web, may be purchased from others confer no exclusivity and are not counted in the numerator. Conversely, data generated from one's own operating processes are also not counted where data of the same kind exist in sufficient volume on the public web. The first thing to be fixed in calculation is the unit of volume. There are three candidates — (i) number of records, (ii) storage volume (bytes), and (iii) contribution to training and adjustment (measured as the degradation in performance when the data in question are removed). The three give different values for the same application. (iii) is conceptually the most appropriate, but its calculation requires a counterfactual experiment (retraining with the data in question removed) and is therefore costly, so that (i) tends to be used in practice. What this framework requires is that the unit be fixed in advance as one of the three and that the same unit be used in all subsequent observations. If the unit is chosen application by application, the ratios become incomparable. The data sources are firm disclosures (the description of the business and of research and development activities in annual securities reports) and direct declaration through the questionnaire described below. (b) Physical-interface intensity. The type of variable is a continuous variable between 0 and 1. It is calculated as the share of the revenue of the application in question that is "inseparable from the operation of physical equipment, mechanisms, or work on site." The operational criterion for the assessment is the following counterfactual — could that revenue be recognized without the operation of the corresponding physical equipment or the performance of work on site? If it could not, it is counted in the numerator. This criterion is adopted because a criterion of "whether physical products are handled" would wrongly count transactions that are completed by the provision of software alone while physical products are sold. Two rules are established for borderline cases. First, services such as remote monitoring and predictive maintenance, which are tied to physical equipment but do not involve work on site, are counted in the numerator, since the operation of the equipment is the premise of the revenue. Second, maintenance contracts attached to the sale of equipment are counted in the numerator to the extent that the contract makes work on site a requirement, and are not counted to the extent that it does not (the part performed by remote updating alone). Because the assessment of borderline cases is the largest source of variation across those performing the calculation, the rules of assessment are 1117 documented in advance, and it is the rules, not the results of the assessment, that are published. The data sources are firm revenue segmentation (segment information and the breakdown of revenue categories) and the input composition of the sector in question in the input-output tables. (c) Institutional embeddedness. The type of variable is a non-negative integer count, not a ratio. It is calculated as the number of statutory certifications, supervisory registrations, and liability-assumption contracts to which the application in question is subject. That it is a count has two consequences. First, since it has no upper bound, a transformation is required to place it on the same scale as the other indicators (E.5.4). Second, a count abstracts from differences in quality — a certification carrying renewal obligations and on-site inspection and a registration satisfied by a single notification are counted alike as one. To address this abstraction, this framework requires that no weighting be applied and that two series be reported side by side — the total count, and among it the count "carrying periodic renewal obligations or inspection by a supervisory authority." Weighting is not applied because the choice of weights would govern the result and there is no means of validating the grounds for the weights (the same discipline as the treatment of weights in Appendix C.4.1). The ratio of the two series — the share of the total count that carries inspection — may be read as a coarse indicator of whether institutional embeddedness is formal or substantive. The data sources are the registers of certification bodies and supervisory authorities and firm disclosures (lists of licences and registrations). (d) Linguistic-contextual specificity. The type of variable is a non-negative integer count. It is calculated as the number of language- and jurisdiction-specific standards with which the outputs of the application in question are required to conform. "Required" here means that non-conforming outputs cannot be used in the jurisdiction in question, and carries no level of desirability. What is counted are standards, criteria, and prescribed forms, and it does not matter whether their basis is statutory or an industry standard — what is at issue is the compulsory force of conformity and not the form of its basis. This indicator has a property the other three do not. The object the indicator measures itself loses value over time (the same point as the discussion of component (ii) in E.2.2). As the multilingual performance of frontier models improves, the range within which language- specific conformity functions as a barrier contracts. This indicator should therefore carry, in addition to the time series of counts, a secondary series — the count among them for which it has recently been confirmed that the standard output of a generalpurpose model does not satisfy the requirement. Calculating this secondary series requires conducting an evaluation and cannot be constructed from existing records. The data source is the registers of standards held by standardization bodies and competent authorities. 1118 Table E-6. The four indicators of complementary assets in Proposition 4 — type of variable, formula, data source, calculation procedure, and anticipated measurement error (a proposed calculation procedure; this paper has not measured them) Indicator Type of variable Formula Data source (existing statistics and records) Calculation procedure Anticipated sources and direction of measurement error (a) Exclusive data endowment Continuous variable (0 to 1) (Volume of data unobtainable from the public web and generated only from the operating processes of the transformer in question) ÷ (total volume of data used by the application in question). The unit of volume is fixed in advance as number of records, storage volume, or contribution to training Firm disclosures (description of the business and of research and development activities in annual securities reports), declarations through a questionnaire to firms, contractual conditions on the use of data (1) Fix the scope of the application; (2) fix the unit of volume; (3) compute the denominator (the total volume of data used); (4) assess the two requirements of the numerator (unobtainability and inhouse generation) individually; (5) compute the ratio and record it together with the unit and the rules of assessment Bias in the direction of overstatement through selfdeclaration (exclusivity is readily declared as a competitive strength). Variation according to how the scope of the application is cut. Systematic differences according to the choice of unit (number of records overstates low-volume operating logs) (b) Physicalinterface intensity Continuous variable (0 to 1) (Revenue that could not be recognized without the operation of physical equipment or work on site) ÷ (total revenue of the application in question) Firm revenue categories and segment information, the content of maintenance contracts, the input composition of the sector in question in the input-output tables (1) Decompose revenue into units of transaction; (2) apply the counterfactual criterion (could it be recognized without equipment operation or work on site) to each unit; (3) apply rules of assessment for borderline cases, documented in advance; (4) compute the ratio Two-directional error according to the granularity of revenue categories (coarse categories record mixed transactions as one). Non-agreement across those performing the calculation owing to differences in the rules for borderline cases. Differences in the accounting point of revenue recognition (c) Institutional em‐ Non-negative integer (count). Two series — Count the statutory certifications, supervisory registrations, Registers of certification bodies and supervisory (1) Define in advance the scope of the three types counted (certifica‐ Systematic noncomparability arising from differences in institu‐ 1119 Indicator Type of variable Formula Data source (existing statistics and records) Calculation procedure Anticipated sources and direction of measurement error beddedness total count, and the count carrying renewal obligations or inspection and liability-assumption contracts to which the application in question is subject. No weighting is applied authorities, published registrations and designations of competent authorities, firm disclosures (lists of licences and registrations), insurance contract records tion, registration, liability assumption); (2) reconcile registers with disclosures; (3) divide into two series according to the presence of renewal obligations or inspection; (4) record the counts and the ratio (count carrying inspection ÷ total count) tional design across states (the same substance appears as one item in one jurisdiction and as several in another). Discontinuities in the time series caused by renaming of the same institution (d) Linguisticcontextual specificity Non-negative integer (count). Secondary series — the count for which it has recently been confirmed that the standard output of a general-purpose model does not satisfy the requirement Count the language- and jurisdiction-specific standards with which the outputs of the application in question are required to conform Registers of standards held by standardization bodies and competent authorities, prescribed forms and criteria published by industry bodies, lists of requirements of conformity assessment bodies (1) Select the objects by the presence of compulsory force of conformity (levels of desirability are excluded); (2) count them; (3) for the secondary series, attempt conformity with the standard using the standard output of a general-purpose model and record whether the requirement is satisfied Bias in the direction that the count does not reflect the decay of substance (the value as a barrier may decline even where the number of standards is flat). The secondary series depends on the point in time of the evaluation and on the model generation, and comparison requires the point of measurement to be stated E.5.3 The Discipline of Setting the Cutoff (Prescribed Level) in Advance Proposition 4 makes "at or above a prescribed level" a requirement, but this paper gives no value for that level. Not giving one is not an omission; it is an explicit statement that one cannot be given. There are two reasons. First, among the four indicators (a) and (b) are ratios and (c) and (d) are counts, and all have distributions specific to the sector. It is structural that physical-interface intensity is high in applications in manufacturing and maintenance and low in applications in document processing, and to impose a common absolute value on both would be to mistake the structure of the sector for a differ‐ 1120

ence in endowment. Second, the substance of the four indicators is "the endowment of assets that keep the cost of internalization high for the producer," and the cost of internalization depends on the capability of the frontier at the time in question. As the frontier advances, the degree of protection conferred by the same indicator value declines. An absolute- value cutoff acquires meaning only once the sector and the point in time are fixed. This framework therefore requires that the cutoff be established by the following procedure. This procedure is designed to prevent overfitting not by giving a value but by binding in advance the manner in which the value is determined. Procedure 1 — fix the definition of the sample first. Define the set of firms and applications to be analysed by sector, size, and period of observation, and document it. If the definition of the sample changes later, the quantiles change too. Exclusion from the sample is carried out only by exclusion rules established in advance (for example, an entity for which no revenue from the application in question is recognized in the period), and exclusion after observing values is prohibited. Procedure 2 — specify the cutoff as a quantile within the sample. The cutoff is established not as an absolute value but as a position within the distribution of the sample in question. The default is quartiles — the upper quartile (at or above the third quartile) is treated as "at or above the prescribed level," the lower quartile (at or below the first quartile) as "low," and the two middle quartiles are left unassessed. The position of the quantile (quartile, tercile, or decile) may be chosen according to the purpose of the analysis, but the choice is made before observation and is not changed. A consequence of using quantiles is that the cutoff takes different values for different samples — this is not a defect but the result of treating explicitly the dependence on sector and on point in time. Procedure 3 — record the point in time of fixing. Compile the definition of the sample, the choice of unit, the position of the quantile, and the rules of assessment for borderline cases into a single document and record the date of its preparation. Appendix D, Block IV, item 29 requires "an apparatus for measuring before the event of generational change in foundation models," which is equivalent to requiring that this document exist before that generational change. A document prepared after the fact does not perform the function of fixing in advance. Procedure 4 — where a change is made, report in parallel. Where the definition of the cutoff must unavoidably be changed, report not only the assessment under the new definition but the assessments under both the prior and the new definitions in parallel for at least one period, and record the difference between them. This discipline is the same as the one Appendix F.3.1 establishes for changes in indicator definitions. Under these procedures, the test of Proposition 4 takes the following form — divide, in advance, the entities in the sample into a group in which at least one of the four indicators falls in the upper quantile and a group in which all four fall in the lower quantile, and 1121 compare the movement of gross margin and survival rate between the two groups before and after the event of generational change in foundation models (Appendix D, Block IV, item 30). Under this design, the cutoff does not depend on the result of the test. The quantile is determined mechanically from the distribution of observed values, and no discretion on the part of the analyst enters. Under a design in which the analyst chooses an absolute-value cutoff, by contrast, the division into groups may itself be adjusted according to the result. E.5.4 Standardization and Compounding — Cases in Which Compounding Must Not Be Done The four indicators are on different scales — (a) and (b) are ratios between 0 and 1, and (c) and (d) are counts without an upper bound. The need to place them on the same scale arises where comparison between indicators is to be made and where they are to be compounded. The procedure for standardization is set out first, and the permissibility of compounding is discussed after. Procedure for standardization. Within-sample Z-scoring is used — for each indicator, obtain the mean and standard deviation within the sample and render the value dimensionless as (observed value − mean) ÷ standard deviation. For the count indicators ((c) and (d)), since the distribution has a long right tail, a logarithmic transformation (the natural logarithm of the count plus one) or a rank transformation (the rank within the sample divided by the sample size) is applied before Z-scoring. The choice of transformation is fixed in advance, as in Procedure 3 of E.5.3. A Z-score is a relative position within the sample, and the same entity takes a different value if the sample changes. Where Zscores are compared over time, it must therefore be confirmed that the composition of the sample is stable throughout the period — if the sample changes, Z-scores move even where the substance of an entity does not. Cases in which compounding must not be done. The requirement of Proposition 4 is a disjunction — what is required is that at least one of the four indicators be at or above the prescribed level. Replacing a disjunctive requirement with a conjunctive quantity such as the mean of the four indicators alters the content of the proposition. An entity extremely high on one indicator and low on the other three satisfies the requirement of Proposition 4 but is placed in the middle by the mean. This substitution occurs whether the mean is weighted or unweighted. For the purpose of assessing satisfaction of the requirement of Proposition 4, the four indicators must therefore not be compounded. The assessment is made indicator by indicator, taking the form of confirming "whether at least one falls in the upper quantile." More generally, compounding is permitted only where substitutability between indicators may be assumed. Substitutability is the property that a low value on one indicator may be compensated by a high value on another. For the four indicators, this paper has no grounds for such an assumption — transformation protected by a physical interface and transformation protected by institutional embeddedness differ in the mechan‐ 1122 ism of protection, and no relation has been shown by which the absence of one is filled by the other. In addition, Hypothesis H2 (Section 21) predicts an ordering among the coefficients of the four indicators — "physical-interface intensity and exclusive data endowment > institutional embeddedness > linguistic-contextual specificity" — and tracking by a compounded value makes this ordering untestable (the note following Table D-4 in Appendix D states the same point). To compound a set of indicators about which an ordering is predicted is to give up the means of testing one's own prediction. Compounding may be justified only in the limited case in which all three of the following conditions are satisfied — (i) that the purpose of the assessment is not satisfaction of the requirement of Proposition 4 but coarse comparison across sectors or across points in time; (ii) that the assumption of substitutability is stated explicitly and its grounds given; and (iii) that the individual series for the four indicators are always presented alongside the compounded value. Condition (iii) is the same discipline as the "accompanying noncompounded dashboard" of Appendix C.4.1. Compounding that does not satisfy these three conditions is not performed. E.5.5 The Relation Between the Four Indicators and National Brain Capital, and What This Part Does Not Measure As Section 17.4 states, the four indicators of Proposition 4 are the externalized traces (exclusive data, physical interface) and the institutionalized forms (institutional embeddedness, linguistic context) of national brain capital (Definition 11). This relation has two consequences for the design of measurement. First, degradation in the four indicators appears later than attrition of national brain capital — traces and institutions persist for a time after the human substrate that supports them has been lost. An apparatus that monitors only the four indicators therefore issues its warning late. That Block VII of Appendix D is positioned as a leading indicator for Block IV is due to this lag. Second, the inference in the reverse direction does not hold — the level of national brain capital cannot be inferred from the level of the four indicators, since the volume of the traces does not correspond monotonically to the volume of the substrate. What this part does not measure is stated explicitly. None of the four indicators measures whether the asset in question is in fact keeping the integration cost high. The four indicators are ex ante observables of endowment and are not measurements of the effectiveness of protection. The effectiveness of protection is observed only after the fact, by how far the gross margin of the application in question falls when standard inclusion by the producer occurs. That the test of Proposition 4 is designed as a before-and-after comparison around a generational-change event follows from this structure — reconciling ex ante observables with ex post consequences is what constitutes the test, and ex ante observables alone do not constitute one. In this respect, the calculation procedure of this part makes Proposition 4 measurable but does not support Proposition 4. 1123 E.6 Rendering the Proxy Indicators for National Brain Capital and Value- Definition Capability Objective E.6.1 The Purpose of This Part — What It Adds to Table E-4 Table E-4 in E.2 enumerated candidate proxy indicators and their limits for the four components of national brain capital, but did not give the calculation procedure for each indicator or the names of specific data sources. This shortfall is of the same kind as the criticism cited in E.5.1 — that the mapping onto objective statistics is not defined. This part supplies that shortfall through Table E-7 and, in addition, assesses the international comparability of each indicator individually. The conclusion of that assessment is stated first — the proxy indicators for the four components do not at present bear standardized international comparison. What this part can support is only comparison of time series within a single state, and comparison across a limited group of states for which indicator definitions have been explicitly harmonized. This part names specific data sources not in order to claim that measurement is possible, but in order to show, in a form that subsequent research may take up, which existing statistics can be used and from which point existing statistics no longer reach. Those listed below are confined to statistics and records that are published, that are updated repeatedly, and whose acquisition requires no special authority (this criterion of selection is the same as the criterion Appendix F.2 imposes on the data sources of its indicators). Table E-7. Rendering the proxy indicators for the four components of national brain capital (Definition 11) objective — formulas, names of data sources, and individual assessment of international comparability (provisional proposal; this paper has not measured them) Component Proxy indicator Formula Names of data sources (published and repeatedly updated) Assessment of international comparability and reasons Limits (i) Tacit knowledge on the ground Distribution of years of experience within an occupation By occupational classification, compute the quantiles (first, median, third quartile) of years of experience in the occupation in question. Years of experience within the occupation are used, not tenure at a firm Labour force survey; employment structure survey (tabulations by occupational classification and by age band); basic survey on wage structure (tabulations by occupation and by band of years of experience) Low to medium. Mapping through an international standard classification of occupations (ISCO) is possible, but the definition of years of experience (within the occupation or within the firm) depends A measurement of duration of presence, not of capability. Differences in labour- market fluidity distort international comparison systematically (values come out shorter in states with higher fluidity) 1124 Component Proxy indicator Formula Names of data sources (published and repeatedly updated) Assessment of international comparability and reasons Limits on the survey design of each state Rate of holding trade certifications and professional qualifications, and the level at which they are awarded The share of qualification holders among those employed in the occupation in question. In addition, the ratio of successful candidates to candidates sitting in the year in question (a proxy for the level at which the qualification is awarded) is taken as a secondary series Published materials of the competent bodies on the conduct of trade certification (numbers of applicants and of successful candidates); registration statistics of the registering bodies for each qualification (published numbers of licence holders and registrants in medicine, architecture, and technical fields) Low. The existence, grade structure, and renewal requirements of qualification systems differ greatly across states, and there is no basis for comparing the level of holding rates between states A qualification confirms explicit knowledge and does not guarantee embodied judgment. Pass rates move with changes in the composition of candidates, so interpretation of levels requires that the composition of candidates be reported alongside Density of skilled labour The share, in total employment, of those classified in skilled trades, maintenance occupations, and professional- technical occupations Occupationalclassification tabulations of the labour force survey and the employment structure survey; for international comparison, the ILO's statistics by occupational classification Medium. Since an international framework for occupational classification exists, formal comparison is possible. The dispersion of proficiency within a single class is nonetheless not captured Classification does not measure the level of skill. Discontinuities in the time series caused by revision of the occupational classification (ii) Judgment embedded in language, culture, and aesthetic Number of jurisdictionspecific standards and certifications held The count of standards, criteria, and prescribed forms specific to the jurisdiction in question, and the count of certifications registered Records of the establishment and revision of domestic standards (published by standardization bodies); registers of certification Low. The definition of the scope of "jurisdictionspecific" itself differs by jurisdiction, and no common A count does not measure defensive strength, and its substance decays as the multilingual performance of 1125 Component Proxy indicator Formula Names of data sources (published and repeatedly updated) Assessment of international comparability and reasons Limits sensibility (shared with Proposition 4(d)) under those standards. As a secondary series, the count for which it has recently been confirmed that the standard output of a general-purpose model does not satisfy the requirement (E.5.2(d)) bodies and competent authorities; legal-information databases framework exists frontier models improves. It does not reach the content of judgment (what is held to be appropriate) — for this part this paper presents no proxy indicator (iii) The professional ethics and practical conventions that make trust in institutions possible Survey indicators of trust in institutions and in the professions The share of affirmative responses to questions on trust in institutions and in the professions. Read as change over time under the same question and the same format, not as a level Periodic domestic surveys on social attitudes; repeated waves of international values surveys (confined to those in which the same question is maintained across several waves) Low. Formally comparable series exist, but cultural differences in survey design, translation, and response format mean they do not bear comparison of levels A measurement of attitudes, not of practical conventions. The direction of causation is reversed — trust is a consequence, and the component lies on the side of the cause (E. 2.2) Maintenance rates of certification and supervisory registration, and rate of disposition of disciplinary cases Maintenance rate = the share of those registered at the start of the period who have renewed by its end. Rate of disposition = the share of complaints brought in the period that have been disposed of Annual reports of professional bodies and supervisory authorities; registration and renewal records of certification bodies Low. Depends on the existence and design of institutions, and is undefined in jurisdictions that have none The rate of occurrence is the product of the underlying rate and the rate of detection, and comes out higher in jurisdictions where supervision is effective (inversion of the sign). Read only together with the rate of disposition (iv) The capacity for audit and verification Age composition of the professions and the For occupations such as audit, inspection, maintenance, and clinical practice, tabulate Occupational and age-band tabulations of the labour force survey and the employ‐ Medium. The comparability of age composition is relatively high, Age is a proxy for years of experience and does not measure the quality 1126 Component Proxy indicator Formula Names of data sources (published and repeatedly updated) Assessment of international comparability and reasons Limits grounded in long domain experience succession ratio employment by age band and compute the ratio of the size of the entering age band to that of the exiting age band (for example, the final ten-year band). Enumerate the occupations for which the ratio falls below one ment structure survey; published age composition of the membership of professional bodies and registering bodies but differences in the definition of occupations remain of experience. Where the definition of an occupation is coarse, internal heterogeneity is concealed Share of practitioners able to exercise judgment independently The share of those employed in the occupation in question who hold authority to sign, approve, or make a final determination on their own No corresponding existing statistic exists. As approximations, the share holding the higher grades of a qualification, and declarations of holders of such authority through firm surveys None. Since a new survey is required, international comparison does not hold at present The approximating indicator (the rate of holding highergrade qualifications) is no more than a proxy for authority. It belongs to the fourth order of priority in E.4 and is one of the parts where the gaps in this framework are largest Share of operations in which a process for verifying AI outputs is institutionalized The share of operations in the sector in question for which a process of human verification of AI outputs is established as procedure. Two series — weighted by value added, and by number of processes Firm surveys (new, or the addition of questions to existing surveys on business continuity and internal control); inspection records of supervisory authorities None to low. The definition of institutionalization is not harmonized Measures the existence of an institution and not the effectiveness of verification — formal approval is not verification. Effectiveness may be measured only through exercises (E.2.2; the third order of priority in E. 4) 1127 E.6.2 Summary of International Comparability — Why It Does Not Bear Comparison at Present The column of international comparability in Table E-7 contains two entries of "medium," four of "low," and two of "none to low." There is not a single "high." This distribution arises not from the skill or otherwise of the selection of indicators but from three structural reasons. First, the mapping of occupational classifications is coarse. An international framework for occupational classification exists, and through it tabulations by occupation may be formally mapped. What national brain capital is concerned with, however, is not the classification but the distribution of proficiency within the classification, and even where the mapping of classifications holds, comparison does not hold if the composition within a classification differs across states. Second, the design of qualification and certification systems is asymmetric. The function performed by a single qualification in one jurisdiction is divided among several qualifications in another, and in yet another is performed not by qualifications but by employment conventions. In such cases, the numerical values of holding rates do not correspond to the same substance. Third, cultural differences in survey design distort attitude indicators systematically. Responses to questions on trust depend on the response format (the presence or absence of a middle option) and on the manner in which social desirability operates, and this dependence is not removed by translation. Of these three reasons, the first and the second may be reduced by harmonizing definitions, whereas the third is difficult to reduce. Improvement of international comparability is therefore appropriately begun, in sequence, from components (i) and (iv), while for component (iii) the honest treatment is to abandon international comparison of levels and confine analysis to time series within a single state. It is on this judgment that E.4.2 lists "forums for international alignment" as the fifth type of cooperating party and states that the principal cause of low comparability is not technical difficulty but the absence of uniform definitions. The present use of this framework is stated explicitly. The indicators of Table E-7 are used only for (1) observation of change over time within a single state and (2) comparison across a limited group of states for which indicator definitions have been explicitly harmonized. They are not used for (3) the construction of standardized international rankings. A ranking gives the appearance of established comparability to indicators for which comparability has not been established, and is therefore incompatible with the disclosure of this framework's limits. This prohibition rests on the same reason for which Appendix D.1 rejects the ranking of states by total scores. 1128 E.6.3 Additions to the Operationalization of Value-Definition Capability (Definition 12) and Restatement of the Safeguards Against the Goodhart Effect Table E-5 gave the provisional proposal for operationalization, the weaknesses, and the safeguards for the three indicators of Definition 12, but did not establish the granularity of calculation or the unit of observation. Three points are added. (a) Distinctiveness of goal-setting. The unit of observation is the document, and the calculation is performed as the complement of the similarity between sets of documents. Four things must be fixed here — the set of documents covered (which kinds of documents from which institutions), the years covered, the states used for comparison, and the method of computing similarity (based on lexical overlap, or on the distance between semantic representations). The last of the four governs the result most strongly, so a change in the method of computation is treated as a change of indicator. This indicator is not used on its own (the safeguard column of Table E-5). (b) Consistency of long-term resource allocation. The unit of observation is three series — budget line items, the enactment and repeal of regulation, and the allocation of authority across organizations. The calculation rests on the share of allocation that can be mapped to declared goals and on the extent to which that share is maintained over several fiscal years (the fewness of reversals). The data sources are budget documents and settlements of account, records of the enactment and repeal of legislation, and organizational ordinances and staffing determinations, all of which are published. Because consistency and rigidity cannot be distinguished at the level of the indicator, whether a condition triggering reconsideration of the goal (a renewal condition) exists as an institution is reported alongside, and consistency lacking a renewal condition is not rated highly. (c) Rate of creation of new markets. The units of observation are records of revision of industrial classifications and newly established classification items for goods and services. In calculation, the lag structure from the exercise of definition to the observation of creation is specified in advance and not adjusted after the fact. The criterion of attribution — what warrants attributing creation to the value-definition capability of the state in question — is likewise defined in advance. This indicator is the most strongly lagging and is not used to interpret change over short periods. Restatement of the safeguards against the Goodhart effect. The three safeguards set out in E.3.1 — fixing proxy indicators in advance, controlling for competing explanations, and not making the indicators policy target values — are not altered by the additions in this part. A fourth safeguard is added here. The three indicators of Definition 12 are not placed in the minimum indicator set (Proposition 36, Section 19). As Section 19.7.3 states, the pressure by which an indicator turns into a target concentrates the more strongly the fewer the indicators. Because the three indicators of Definition 12 may improve without accompanying substance — by writing distinctive language, aligning the appearance of allocation, and creating new classifications — they do not satisfy the criterion of difficulty of manipulation. The minimum set should be composed of indicators 1129 that are observable from outside and that cannot be moved at the discretion of the implementing party, and under this criterion the three indicators of Definition 12 are confined to the comprehensive version. Not placing in the most conspicuous position an indicator that it may be harmful to measure is this framework's practical response to the Goodhart effect. E.6.4 The Standing of This Part This part has added calculation procedures and specific data sources to the provisional proposals of E.2 and E.3, but its standing as a provisional proposal is unchanged. What Table E-7 shows is what may be constructed from existing statistics and how, not that the indicators so constructed measure the components of Definition 11 adequately. The "limits" column of Table E-7 contains both what may be resolved by future development (the coarseness of occupational definitions, the absence of surveys) and what is not resolvable in principle (the content of judgment in component (ii), the practical conventions themselves in component (iii)). For the latter, this paper does not substitute proxy indicators. E.7 A Provisional Proposal for Measuring Portability (Proposition 39(iv)) E.7.1 The Acknowledgment to Which This Part Responds, and the Narrowing of Its Scope by Proposition 41 Section 20.8(i) acknowledged the following as one of this paper's limitations — Proposition 39 states explicitly that among the four conditions, (iv) portability is the most constraining. The centre of gravity of this paper's claim thus rests on the condition among the four that is most difficult to measure. This paper has no indicator for determining, before transfer is attempted, how portable a given system is. That section further stated that this limitation runs deeper than the difficulty of measuring national brain capital (20.8(a)) — for national brain capital, candidate proxy indicators could be given, whereas for portability not even the level of candidates has been reached. This part places, against that absence, the provisional proposal that lies within what this paper can offer. The position of this part is not to remove the absence but to advance as far as the level of candidates. Before turning to that work, it should be confirmed that Proposition 41 (Section 12.3.7) has narrowed the scope of the acknowledgment in 20.8(i). Section 20.8(i) cited the structure in which "only when transfer fails does it become apparent what was presupposed" as a ground for the possibility that portability may be observed only after the fact. Proposition 41 showed that this structure is an account of systems whose interface is not made explicit — in a system whose interface is made explicit, which elements belong to the jurisdiction-specific layer and which to the portable core is settled at the level of design documents, so that the range that is to be transplanted is identified in advance. The acknowledgment in 20.8(i) is therefore narrowed from a limitation concerning portability in general to a limitation concerning systems whose interface is not made explicit. 1130

This narrowing has a direct consequence for the design of measurement — it is not that ex ante measurement is impossible in principle, but that the condition under which ex ante measurement is possible (explicitness of the interface) has been identified. It is on this consequence that Table E-8 of this part arranges ex ante and ex post indicators separately. Four design principles are established. Each is an application to portability of the principles E.2.1 established for the measurement framework for national brain capital. First, separate what may be observed in advance from what may be observed only after the fact. Indicators based on a record of transplantation do not exist before the first transplantation. This blank is not treated as though it had been filled by ex ante indicators. Second, do not compound into a single indicator. Constructing a "portability index" is an operation that forces heterogeneous observations — the presence of design and the presence of a record — onto a single scale, and conceals the fact that the two have different points in time and different error structures. Third, distinguish in the name what is being measured. What ex ante indicators measure is not portability itself but evidence that design intended to raise portability has been carried out. This distinction is stated in the title of the table. Fourth, give no thresholds. For none of the indicators does this paper give a level separating satisfaction from non-satisfaction. Giving thresholds to indicators that have not been calibrated produces an illusion of precision (Appendix G.5). E.7.2 Candidate Proxy Indicators for Portability (Table E-8) Table E-8 enumerates candidate indicators together with the point of observation (ex ante or ex post), the type of data source, and the limits. Everything listed in the data-source column is documents and records existing inside the entity that holds the system in question, and not published statistics. In this respect these differ in character from the proxy indicators of Tables E-4 and E-7 — whereas the proxy indicators for national brain capital may be constructed by re-tabulating existing official statistics, the proxy indicators for portability can be constructed only from the design documents and transplantation process records of each system. The indicators of this part therefore cannot be used for international comparison or for comparison across jurisdictions. What they can be used for is confined to comparison of time series for a single system, and comparison among several systems held by the same entity. That Table G-6 in Appendix G.9 requires records to be kept as diagnostic items is precisely the material for these indicators — the relation is that Table G-6 creates the records and Table E-8 constructs indicators from them. Table E-8. Candidate proxy indicators for portability (Proposition 39(iv)) — point of observation, data source, and limits (provisional proposal. What the ex ante indicators measure is not portability itself but evidence that design intended to raise portability has been carried out. This paper has not measured them) 1131 # Candidate indicator Point of observation Type of data source Limits P1 Time required for transplantation (by jurisdiction and by element) Ex post Transplantation process records (G98 of Table G-6) Does not exist before the first transplantation. Since the second and subsequent instances incorporate the learning of the first, instances cannot be compared straightforwardly across cases. The definitions of the start and completion of transplantation differ across organizations P2 Cost required for transplantation (four cost categories: modification, translation, recertification, retraining) Ex post Transplantation process records and accounting records (G98 of Table G-6) The separation of cost categories depends on the accounting classifications of the organization and is not comparable across entities. Costs borne by the recipient side are readily omitted from the tally P3 Number of destination jurisdictions and cumulative years in operation Ex post Operating records (G97 of Table G-6) The number is a result of portability, not its cause. Since it is confounded with the presence or absence of demand, an absence of record does not mean low portability, and the presence of a record does not immediately mean high portability P4 Share of elements documented as belonging to the portable core (number of elements classified as portable core ÷ total number of constituent elements) Ex ante The list and classification of constituent elements (G78 of Table G-6) The classification is self-declared and does not guarantee separation in implementation. Because it depends strongly on how the denominator (the granularity of constituent elements) is set, it is not used for comparison across systems and is used only for time series within a single system P5 Number of references from the portable core to jurisdiction-specific elements Ex ante Inspection of design documents and of the implementation (G81 of Table G-6) The manner of counting references (by clause or by document) is not settled. A value of zero does not mean that separation has succeeded, since it may equally mean that no inspection has been carried out; it is therefore read only paired with the record of inspections performed P6 Share of statutory requirements composed as substitutable annexes Ex ante The composition of design documents (G82 of Table G-6) Taking the form of an annex and actually being substitutable are different things. The indicator shows a high value where only the form has been put in order P7 Presence of templates covering multiple jurisdic‐ Contract templates and re‐ Existence is a minimum condition and not proof of effectiveness. Being bin‐ 1132 # Candidate indicator Point of observation Type of data source Limits tions (templates for contracts on the allocation of responsibility; separated specifications of conformity assessment requirements) Ex ante; binary quirement specifications (G86 and G89 of Table G-6) ary, it has low power to detect change, and is used together with other indicators P8 Number of jurisdictions for which the templates have undergone legal review Ex ante Records of legal review (G90 of Table G-6) Does not measure the quality of the review. That a review has been undergone does not guarantee effectiveness in the jurisdiction in question P9 Presence of externalization of the language-dependent parts (whether terminology, forms, and response text have been factored out of the logic of the system) Ex ante; binary Inspection of design documents and of the implementation (G91 of Table G-6) The completeness of externalization cannot be confirmed until the point of transplantation. The parts requiring reconstruction of the terminological system itself (G92 of Table G-6) are not resolved by externalization P10 Number of points that failed to function in transplantation (the number of dependencies not recognized in advance as jurisdiction- specific) Ex post Transplantation process records (G99 of Table G-6) Has meaning only for the second and subsequent instances. The incentive to record is structurally weak (since it is a record of one's own error of classification), and it is readily under-recorded P11 Presence of an encapsulated configuration (whether a configuration combining execution on local facilities with the provision of remote audit rights is possible by design) Ex ante; binary Design documents (G93 and G94 of Table G-6) A possibility by design, not a record of having operated in that configuration. Since the content of requirements differs by jurisdiction, the binary remains at the level of "whether some configuration can be accommodated" Two points on how the indicators are read. First, the ex ante indicators (P4 to P9 and P11) and the ex post indicators (P1 to P3 and P10) are not compounded. They answer different questions — the ex ante indicators measure "whether the design for separation was carried out," the ex post indicators "whether the separation in fact functioned." A compounded value may place at the same level a system for which the design was carried out but no transplantation attempted and a system for which no design was carried out and transplantation was performed at high cost. Second, the reconciliation of the ex ante indicators with the ex post indicators is the principal use of this part. Where P4 (the share classified as portable core) is high for a system and P10 (the number of points that failed to function in transplantation) is large, the classification of that system was mistaken — that is, the interface was located too shallowly (the third limitation in Section 12.3.7). This reconciliation is also the entry point for observing the second falsification 1133 condition of Proposition 41 — whether, even in a system whose interface has been made explicit, the transplantation cost of the portable core continues to rise as embedding deepens. The structure by which ex ante observables alone do not constitute a test is the same as that stated by E.5.5 for Proposition 4. E.7.3 Explicit Statement of What Cannot Be Measured What the indicators of this part do not reach is stated explicitly in three points. First, before the first transplantation there is no measurement based on a record. P1 to P3 and P10 are all constructed from records of transplantation. For a system with no record of transplantation, these columns are blank. The determination of portability before the first transplantation must therefore rest on inspection of design documents. This constraint arises not from immaturity of measurement technique but from the structure of portability as a property — portability is the property of "functioning in another jurisdiction," and until operation occurs in another jurisdiction, that property does not become manifest. In this respect portability differs in the structure of its observation from the other three conditions of Proposition 39. Conditions (i) domain-specific national brain capital, (ii) trust infrastructure, and (iii) a record of operation within the home jurisdiction are all accumulations observable inside the home jurisdiction, whereas (iv) portability alone requires an event outside the home jurisdiction. That Proposition 39 makes (iv) the most constraining condition is at once a claim about the severity of the condition and a statement about the structure of its observation. Second, inspection of design documents does not guarantee separation in implementation. As the first limitation of Proposition 41 names, declaring an interface without paying the cost creates a state in which the two layers are separated in the design documents while dependencies are scattered across the layers in the implementation. P4, P6, P7, P8, and P9 are all observations on the side of the documents and therefore do not detect this divergence. The only indicator that can detect it is P5 (the number of references from the portable core to jurisdiction-specific elements), and this indicator requires inspection on the side of the implementation. A measurement that lacks P5 is therefore measuring only the outward form of the interface. That Table G-6 in Appendix G.9 requires G79 (existence of the specification) and G81 (separation in implementation) to be recorded as a pair, and requires "the interface is made explicit" to be recorded only where both are satisfied, is intended to detect this divergence through the form of the diagnosis itself. Third, presuppositions that are not made explicit escape ex ante inspection by definition. The third channel of dependence in Section 12.3.4 — presuppositions that go undocumented because they are self-evident in the home jurisdiction, such as how accurately records are created, how faithfully instructions are carried out, and how exceptions are reported — is not discovered through inspection of documents. That they are undocumented is the definition of such presuppositions. For this part, this paper has no proxy indicator. P10 (the number of points that failed to function in transplantation) re‐ 1134 cords after the fact that such presuppositions existed, but it does not measure them in advance. What Proposition 41 offers against this channel is not resolution but limitation — in a system whose interface is made explicit, the presence or absence of tacit presuppositions becomes an object of deliberate inspection for the elements declared to belong to the portable core. That an inspection was carried out does not, however, mean that it was carried out without omission. For this gap, this paper chooses the treatment of not substituting a proxy indicator and of stating explicitly that it lies outside the measurement framework. This treatment is the same as that adopted in E.2 for the content of judgment in component (ii) and the practical conventions in component (iii). E.7.4 A Proposal to Use the Explicitness of the Interface as a Proxy Indicator On the foregoing, the simplest proposal for a proxy indicator of portability is set out separately. It is the proposal to use as a proxy indicator of portability the presence or absence of the explicitness of the interface established by Proposition 41. Grounds. Proposition 41 states that the joint attainment of embedding and portability has the explicitness of the interface as a necessary condition. That it is a necessary condition means that, for systems whose interface is not made explicit, the relation between the deepening of embedding and the diminution of portability does obtain. Whether the interface is made explicit therefore gives a distinction, observable in advance, as to whether the system in question is in a configuration capable of retaining portability. What this indicator measures is not the level of portability but the satisfaction of a necessary condition for portability. That it does not measure the level is a weakness, but in being observable in advance it has a property that the record-based indicators P1 to P3 and P10 do not. Construction. The indicator is treated as three categories rather than as binary — "the interface is made explicit" where both G79 (a specification of the interface exists as a document) and G81 (separation is maintained in implementation) of Table G-6 in Appendix G.9 are satisfied; "outward form only" where only one of the two is satisfied; and "not made explicit" where neither is satisfied. It is made three categories rather than binary because the state of "outward form only," while it behaves under Proposition 41 in the same way as the state of "not made explicit," is arrived at by a different path — the intent of the design is present but the cost has not been paid — and therefore carries different implications for policy. Three limitations on its use are established. First, it is not converted into a degree. Replacing the three categories with the values 1, 2, and 3 and compounding them with other indicators under weights is not done, since the categories carry an order but not intervals. Second, it is not used to rank jurisdictions. This is an indicator concerning systems, not concerning jurisdictions. The same jurisdiction may hold a system whose interface is made explicit in one domain and a system whose interface is not made explicit in another (as Section 12.3.7 states, this paper "does not determine which jurisdictions have succeeded in making interfaces explicit"). Aggregation with the jurisdiction as the unit 1135 conceals this dispersion. Third, the adequacy of the proxy indicator has not been validated retrospectively. This is the most important reservation in this part — validating the adequacy of this proxy indicator and testing Proposition 41 are one and the same undertaking. The first falsification condition of Proposition 41 requires rejection where no difference is observed, between systems whose interface is explicitly defined and systems whose interface is not, in the relation between embeddedness and transplantation cost. To carry out that observation is at the same time to validate whether the explicitness of the interface functions as a proxy for portability. This proxy indicator can therefore claim no adequacy until the proposition it is said to proxy for has been tested. Not concealing this circularity is the minimum condition a provisional proposal must satisfy. There is only one path that breaks the circle — recording, for systems for which the presence or absence of the explicitness of the interface has been recorded, the cost and time of their subsequent transplantation (P1 and P2), and reconciling the two. That Table G-6 and Table E-8 are designed to be constructed from the same records is intended to leave this reconciliation in a form that subsequent research may carry out. E.7.5 The Standing of This Part This part is a provisional proposal, and this paper has measured none of the indicators of Table E-8. The acknowledgment in Section 20.8(i) is not removed by this part — what has been removed extends only to the part reading "not even the level of candidates has been reached." What this part has given is eleven candidate indicators, the limits of each, and an explicit statement of three parts that cannot be measured; it is not a calibrated scale. That 20.8(i) was placed in the research agenda of Section 21 is not altered by this part. The value of this part lies not in having shown that portability is measurable, but in having distinguished, in a form that subsequent research may take up, which parts of portability may be measured in advance, which parts only after the fact, and which parts remain unmeasurable. This approach is the same as the one this appendix has adopted for E.2, E.3, E.5, and E.6. The statement made at the outset about the value of this appendix is repeated, now with E.5 to E.7 added. Not writing that what cannot be measured can be measured is part of the value of this appendix. E.5 gave formulas and a discipline for cutoffs in order to make Proposition 4 measurable, but E.5.5 at the same time stated explicitly that ex ante observables alone do not constitute a test of Proposition 4. E.6 gave the mapping onto objective statistics in order to identify the parts of the measurement of national brain capital that may be undertaken, but E.6.2 at the same time stated explicitly that they do not at present bear standardized international comparison. E.7 gave candidate proxy indicators for portability in order to show what lies within what this paper can offer against the absence acknowledged in 20.8(i), but E.7.3 at the same time stated explicitly that before the first transplantation there is no measurement based on a record, that inspection of design documents does not guarantee separation in implementation, and that presuppositions which are not made explicit escape ex ante inspection. Operationalization unaccompanied by an explicit statement of limits turns into a device for papering over what has 1136 not been developed. What this appendix seeks to leave in a form that may be taken up is, more than the formulas themselves, the list of limits attached to those formulas. 1137 1138 Appendix F. Scenario Monitoring Indicator Table For readers who begin from this appendix without reading the body. The apparatus in the body on which this table rests is as follows — Definition 13 (the three world scenarios: S1 Fragmentation, S2 Diffusion, S3 Stagnation), Definition 14 (the three conditions for leading indicators), Proposition 20 (the existence of no-regret actions; all in Section 16, the theoretical selection of indicators in Section 16.5), Definition 2 (AI capability tiers and Frontier Descent, Section 5), Definition 6 (the three functions of the sovereign minimum guarantee level, Section 13), Proposition 16 (the pressure of cross-axis transition — the movement of the logic of allocation from economics to national security, Section 15), Proposition 23 (the paradox of leverage exercise), Proposition 25 (trust infrastructure), Definition 15 and Definition 17 (Section 11), Proposition 21 (the three constraints on middle powers, Section 14), and Proposition 36 (the constraint of administrative capacity, Section 19). The three conditions of Definition 14 should be consulted first — why the indicators of Table F-1 are written in the form they are can be understood only from those three conditions. This appendix renders the world scenarios (Definition 13) and leading indicators (Definition 14) presented in Section 16 into the form of a monitoring table that may be operated repeatedly in practice. It consists of six parts. First, the standing of this table and its relation to Tables 16 and 19 in the body (F.1). Second, the list of indicators (F.2, Table F-1). Third, the procedure for quarterly review and the design that prevents a determination from depending on a single indicator — discrimination by the pairs of indicators in Table 19, the order of determination, and the recording of deferred determinations (F.3, Tables F-2 and F-3). Fourth, a correspondence table of the investment items to be reconsidered when a scenario determination changes (F.4, Table F-4). Fifth, the limits of this table (F.5). Sixth, the minimum monitoring version to be maintained under the constraint of administrative capacity (F.6, Table F-5). Three reservations are placed at the outset. First, every indicator in this appendix is provisional. This paper has not retrospectively validated the discriminating power of the indicators listed here, nor has it calibrated any thresholds. The judgment that an indicator moves in different directions across the three scenarios is an anticipation deduced from the definitions of the scenarios (Definition 13), and is not a confirmation that it has in fact so moved in past data. Second, this appendix does not aim at predicting scenarios. As Section 16 repeatedly states, this paper does not say which world will be realized and provides only a tool for identifying which world one is in. The purpose of a monitoring table is not to guess the future but to notice, before the consequences are realized, that a state of affairs has arisen in which the determination should change. Third, the table numbers in this appendix belong to the F series (Tables F-1 to F-5), which is independent of Tables 1 to 27 in the body and of the series in Appendices A to E and G to H. 1139 The "S1, S2, S3" in Table F-1 are identifiers of scenarios and not table numbers, and the "P1 to P7" in Table F-2 are identifiers of pairs of indicators and not table numbers. As to references to Tier C3 (the critical tier), the discipline common to this series is stated once at the outset. Tier C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category as of the time of writing (Definition 2, Section 5). This appendix lists investment items relating to Tier C3 in Table F-4 not in order to anticipate the arrival of that capability, but in order to set out how investments premised on its arrival should be treated when a determination changes. F.1 The Standing of This Table F.1.1 Relation to Table 16 — Elaboration Rather Than Duplication Table 16 in Section 16.5 is the theoretical selection of leading indicators. Against the three conditions imposed by Definition 14 — (i) repeated observability from public information, (ii) movement in different directions across the three scenarios (discriminating power), and (iii) a time from observation to a change of policy or investment shorter than the realization of the consequences (leadingness) — Table 16 is the result of determining which observable quantities qualify as leading indicators and excluding the candidates that do not. The question Table 16 answers is "what should be observed," and the grounds for its answer lie on the side of theory. Table F-1 of this appendix, by contrast, is a manual for operation in practice covering the same set of indicators. The question to be answered is "who obtains what, from where, at what frequency, and how are the values obtained to be read." Table F-1 therefore adds a column that Table 16 does not have — the data source — and separates the frequency of observation, which in Table 16 was combined with the object of observation, into an independent column. The "leadingness" column of Table 16, on the other hand, is material for the judgment of qualification rather than a step in operation, and is not carried over into Table F-1. The two tables share the thirteen indicators of Table 16 (to which Table F-1 adds five), and differ in the level at which they operate. Table 16 is the record of the qualification review of the indicators; Table F-1 is the operating specification for the indicators that passed that review. There is one further table this appendix must carry over. It is Table 19 in Section 16.5.4, "The identification problem in discrimination and discrimination by combination." Whereas Table 16 gives "the mapping from scenario to observation," Table 19 gives "the mapping from a set of observations to a discrimination." The relation between the two is as Section 16.5.4 states, and in the practice of determination they are used in the order of recording the movement of each indicator with Table 16 and reading the simultaneous pattern of a set with Table 19. Table F-1 of this appendix is the operating specification for Table 16, and correspondingly Table F-2 is the operating specification for Table 19 — since Table 19 is written with the indicator numbers of Section 16 while Table F-1 uses its

own numbering (#1 to #18), Table 19 does not connect to the operation of this appendix unless the correspondence between the two is made explicit. Table F-2 (F.3.2) gives that correspondence. Table 19 is also the ground for the "paired reading" that requirement 3 in F.3.2 establishes — Table 19 systematically establishes seven pairs and, for each pair, specifies even the patterns that remain unidentifiable. This distinction is not a formal one. It frequently happens that an indicator with theoretical discriminating power cannot be obtained in practice, or can be obtained but does not fit a quarterly cycle. That is why several indicators carry "annual" in the "frequency of observation" column of Table F-1. An indicator updated only annually will, at each round of the quarterly review, be read again at the same value as the previous round. This is not redundancy; it acquires meaning in the "making the inertia of determination visible" discussed below in F.3.4 — where the values have not moved and yet a change of determination is being pressed, what drives that change is not the indicators but the impressions of the participants in the review. F.1.2 For Whom Is This Table Intended The intended users of this appendix are not confined to policy departments of states. The framework of Section 16 may be applied by any party considering scenario-dependent large-scale investment — those responsible for computing infrastructure and electricity policy in central government, those responsible for attracting data centres in local government, decision-makers on AI investment in operating companies, and those responsible for asset allocation among institutional investors. Whether it is necessary to follow all the indicators of Table F-1 varies with the level of application. At the level of a state all indicators are relevant, whereas in a business judgment for a single sector the weighting rises on the indicators bearing on the required performance level for the uses of that sector (indicators 1, 4, 7, and 11 of Table F-1). The selection of indicators must, however, be decided before the review begins. If exclusion on the ground that "this indicator is not relevant to the sector in question" is permitted after a determination has been issued, the monitoring table turns into a device for justifying determinations after the fact. The decision as to which indicators to follow and the decision as to how to read the indicators followed must be separated in time. F.2 The List of Indicators (Table F-1) Table F-1 lists eighteen indicators. All thirteen indicators to which Table 16 in Section 16.5 granted qualification are included under the same indicator names (#1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #7, #9, #10, #14, #15, #16, #17, and #18 of Table F-1 correspond respectively to indicators 1, 2, 3, 9, 7, 4, 5, 8, 6, 10, 11, 12, and 13 of Table 16), and the remaining five (#6 supplier concentration; #8 frequency of open-weight releases and distribution of those releasing them; #11 satisfaction rate for critical uses; #12 the logic of allocation; #13 linkage between electricity prices and compute cost) are corroborating indicators added by this appendix to re‐ 1141 inforce the indicators of Table 16 in operation. The additions are not used on their own for a determination and are read paired with the corresponding indicator. The data sources are confined to sources that exist as of the time of writing, are public, and are updated repeatedly — official statistics, notices of regulatory authorities, periodic corporate disclosures, public data series of research institutions, and statistics of industry bodies. Sources whose acquisition requires special authority or a contract are not adopted, since they do not satisfy Definition 14(i). The final four indicators (#15 to #18) are a series observing geoeconomic leverage (Definition 15, Section 11) and correspond to indicators 10 to 13 of Table 16. These four are placed in this table because whether S1 (Fragmentation) persists is a function of the efficacy of the control measures that maintain fragmentation — that is, of the rate of depreciation of indispensability (Proposition 23). Indicator #17 observes the scope of exercise, indicator #16 the search that exercise induces, and indicator #15 the change in concentration as the consequence of that search, and the three carry an order in time. Whether this order — #17 moves, #16 follows, and #15 follows later — is observed is at once a reading as a leading indicator and a test of Proposition 23. The relation between indicator #5 and indicator #17 is stated explicitly. The two take the same institutions as their object but are treated as separate rows. What #5 observes is the efficacy of the measures — whether transfer is in fact constrained under them — while what #17 observes is their scope, that is, the breadth and frequency of exercise. The two are separated because "exercise" in Proposition 23 is a quantity on the side of scope. A state in which efficacy is lost while scope continues to expand (the measures becoming a dead letter while the objects covered widen) can in fact be envisaged, and in that state the two indicators move in opposite directions. In such a case, a strengthening of S1 must not be determined on the ground of the expansion of #17 alone. Indicator #18 is treated differently from the other seventeen. This indicator is not added to the inputs of a scenario determination and is treated as a variable monitored independently of the determination. There are two reasons. First, what this indicator observes is institutions rather than the structure of capability, and its discriminating power for scenarios is indirect. Second, and more importantly, the level of development of trust infrastructure (Definition 17) prescribes the upper bound of a state's own depth of deployment whichever scenario is realized (Proposition 25). That is, the variable this indicator shows is at once an object observed for the identification of scenarios and an object whose development should be pursued regardless of the outcome of the determination. This dual character is close to the character of no-regret actions (Proposition 20), and indeed the development of trust infrastructure operates as an institutional precondition for both the exploitation of domain data and operational readiness within the no-regret set. Indicator #18 is therefore not counted toward the satisfaction of requirement 1 in F. 3.2 (multiplicity in the same direction), and its value and change are recorded as an independent item at each round of review in F.3. 1142 The column "strength of discriminating power" is an assessment of the extent to which the indicator separates the three scenarios, and is recorded in three grades. High = it may be expected to move in different directions across the three scenarios, and other explanations are relatively difficult to construct. Medium = it separates two scenarios but overlaps with the remaining one, or the directions differ but the amplitude is small. Low = there are differences in direction, but they are readily buried in variation from other factors. Indicators of low discriminating power are retained in the table because, while they are not used on their own for a determination, they serve as corroboration when read together with other indicators. Table F-1. List of scenario monitoring indicators (all provisional; calibration of thresholds and retrospective validation of discriminating power have not been carried out) # Indicator Object of observation Data source (public information) Frequency of observation Anticipated movement under S1 (Fragmentation) Anticipated movement under S2 (Diffusion) Anticipated movement under S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power 1 Lag width of the capability gap The lag (in months) until the openweight frontier follows the closed frontier Epoch AI's capability index and public data series on the open/ closed gap; the annual "AI Index" report of Stanford HAI; published evaluation results for each model Quarterly (corrected against the annual report) Flat or widening. Widening in particular where release is restrained by access controls Narrowing. Converges to a lag width that satisfies the required performance level for the use Narrows, but the meaning of the gap thins because the advance on the closed side itself slows High 2 Rate of decline of inference price per unit of performance The minimum inference price (price per token) at which a given benchmark attainment Epoch AI's inference price series; published price lists of major suppliers Quarterly Decline continues, but at the higher levels the conditions of access diverge by jurisdiction and prices fragment Rapid decline across all levels. No fragmentation across jurisdictions arises Decline continues, but the series becomes static as the higher levels that serve as reference points Medium 1143 # Indicator Object of observation Data source (public information) Frequency of observation Anticipated movement under S1 (Fragmentation) Anticipated movement under S2 (Diffusion) Anticipated movement under S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power level is met are not updated 3 Growth rate of frontier training cost The annual growth of the computation and cost committed to the largest training runs Epoch AI's estimated series for training cost and computation; announcements by developing entities; financial disclosures of suppliers Halfyearly The rise continues The rise may continue but is decoupled from the satisfaction of requirements for use Levelling off or decline Medium 4 Increment of performance across generations on benchmarks The increment of performance obtained per generational change on the same benchmark Published MLPerf results of MLCommons; evaluation records of public benchmarks; the AI Index Quarterly to halfyearly Maintained Maintained (particularly marked on the open side) Diminishing. The principal indicator for S3 High 5 Scope and efficacy of export and access controls Expansion or contraction of the items, countries, and acts covered Publication in the Federal Register of rules of the Bureau of Industry and Security (BIS) of the U.S. Department of Commerce; As published; summarized quarterly Expansion. The objects extend to the transfer of weights and services as well Contraction, or de facto relaxation through loss of efficacy Stagnation through declining policy attention (neither expansion nor contraction) High 1144 # Indicator Object of observation Data source (public information) Frequency of observation Anticipated movement under S1 (Fragmentation) Anticipated movement under S2 (Diffusion) Anticipated movement under S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power amendments to the relevant ministerial ordinances under Japan's Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Act; official publication of the relevant EU regulations 6 Supplier concentration Concentration among the entities supplying frontierclass capability and infrastructural services Public estimates of the share of AI supercomputer performance by state and by entity (Epoch AI); industry compilations of cloud infrastructure market shares; quarterly financial disclosures of suppliers Quarterly Persists at a high level or rises Declines. Approaches the falsification condition of Proposition 2 Remains high while the size of the market does not grow, so that the meaning of concentration thins Medium 7 1145 # Indicator Object of observation Data source (public information) Frequency of observation Anticipated movement under S1 (Fragmentation) Anticipated movement under S2 (Diffusion) Anticipated movement under S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power Diffusion of inference semiconductors for the edge The value of shipments and rate of incorporation of semiconductors performing inference on devices and equipment Shipment statistics by category of WSTS (World Semiconductor Trade Statistics); equipment shipment statistics of SEMI; product specifications and financial disclosures of device manufacturers Halfyearly Grows, but does not meet the required performance level for critical uses Increases rapidly and meets the required performance level for the use Levels off. Grows but without accompanying expansion of uses Medium to high 8 Frequency of openweight releases and distribution of those releasing them The interval between updates of released weights; the number and geographical distribution of releasing entities Release records of major model repositories (Hugging Face and the like); official announcements of developing entities Quarterly Release restrained or made conditional. Uneven distribution of those releasing Increases, and those releasing become multipolar Release continues but the interval between updates lengthens High 9 Electricity supply constraints and grid inter‐ The capacity and time held up in interconnection queues for IEA "Energy and AI"; for the United States, the capacity held up Annual (demand projections); as they occur (indi‐ Lengthening of the queue. Electricity operates as the ratelimiting Easing of the rate limit. Concentrated demand thins as The queue shortens through withdrawal and re‐ High 1146 # Indicator Object of observation Data source (public information) Frequency of observation Anticipated movement under S1 (Fragmentation) Anticipated movement under S2 (Diffusion) Anticipated movement under S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power connection queues data centre demand; revisions of demand projections and median time required in "Queued Up" of Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; for Japan, the demand projections and supply plans of the Organization for Cross-regional Coordination of Transmission Operators (OCCTO) and published materials of the advisory councils of the Agency for Natural Resources and Energy vidual projects) factor (Proposition 21(i)) inference disperses duction of plans 10 Capital raising and investment recovery of frontier Capital expenditure, changes in amortization periods, recognition of impairment, revi‐ Quarterly financial disclosures and annual reports of major suppliers and Quarterly Investment continues. Extension of amortization periods may be observed The source of revenue moves from training to inference Recognition of impairment and scaling back of plans. The principal in‐ High 1147 # Indicator Object of observation Data source (public information) Frequency of observation Anticipated movement under S1 (Fragmentation) Anticipated movement under S2 (Diffusion) Anticipated movement under S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power laboratories sions of investment plans hyperscalers and the edge dicator for S3 11 Satisfaction rate for critical uses The share of the state's own critical processes for which Tier C1- class capability meets the required performance level Official domestic surveys of adoption (in the case of Japan, the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications "Communications Usage Trend Survey" and the like); the chapter on adoption rates in the AI Index; benchmark surveys of industry bodies Annual Dependence on the frontier persists for critical uses Critical uses are met at Tier C1 class. Corresponds to the degeneration of the nine cells into three The satisfaction rate levels off. The remaining unmet part persists structurally Medium 12 Logic of allocation (commercial contract or allocation within an alliance) The weight of government contracts and interstate arrangements in the allocation of frontier- Notices and published contracts of government procurement in each state; published agree‐ Quarterly The weight of allocation within an alliance rises (cross-axis transition, Proposition 16) Commercial allocation remains dominant throughout Both forms of allocation contract, and the controversy itself subsides Medium 1148 # Indicator Object of observation Data source (public information) Frequency of observation Anticipated movement under S1 (Fragmentation) Anticipated movement under S2 (Diffusion) Anticipated movement under S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power class capability ments between suppliers and governments; official announcements of the parties 13 Linkage between electricity prices and compute cost The degree to which variation in wholesale electricity prices is reflected in the procurement price of compute IEA electricity market reports; for Japan, the published contract prices of the Japan Electric Power Exchange (JEPX); published values of grid operators and regulatory authorities in each state Quarterly The linkage strengthens The linkage weakens (through the geographical dispersion of demand) The linkage loosens as the growth of demand slows Low 14 Gross margin of major suppliers The gross margin of the AI-related business of foundation model suppliers and cloud suppliers (a proxy for the markup; Segment information in the quarterly financial disclosures and annual reports of major suppliers and hyperscalers; Quarterly (following the disclosure categories) Maintained high or rising. The markup is preserved through supplier concentration and the inelasticity of demand Compression accompanied by rising volume. The increase of alternatives erodes pricing power Compression accompanied by stagnant volume. The growth of demand halts and pricing power High (may separate all three scenarios) 1149 # Indicator Object of observation Data source (public information) Frequency of observation Anticipated movement under S1 (Fragmentation) Anticipated movement under S2 (Diffusion) Anticipated movement under S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power an input to the estimation of the rent channel in Proposition 5(β)) market study reports of competition authorities declines as well 15 Movement of chokepoint concentration (leverage- related) For each of the sources of indispensability identified in Section 11.2 — manufacturing equipment for advanced semiconductors, particular manufacturing sites (advanced logic), highbandwidth memory, minerals and refining, cooling water and siting (the location of large-scale computing infrastructure), and the routes and repair capacity of submarine Equipment shipment statistics of SEMI; shipment statistics by category of WSTS (World Semiconductor Trade Statistics); for minerals and refining, compilations of international organizations and regulatory authorities (IEA, 2025b); annual compilations by research institutions on the location of large-scale computing infrastruc‐ Annual (announcements and commencement of construction by new entrants, as they occur) Maintained high or rising. The cultivation of alternative suppliers is confined within alliance blocs, and separate concentrations form bloc by bloc Decline. Some choke points become bypassable as execution on the device side grows Declines, but for a different reason — the scarcity of the choke points themselves thins as demand stagnates High (separates S1. Read via the first derivative rather than the level) 1150 # Indicat

# Indicator Object of observation Data source (public information) Frequency of observation Anticipated movement under S1 (Fragmentation) Anticipated movement under S2 (Diffusion) Anticipated movement under S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power cables — the supplier concentration and estimated time required to switch, together with announcements and commencement of construction by new alternative suppliers ture (Pilz et al., 2025); publications of international organizations on the laying and repair of submarine cables; published capital expenditure plans of operators 16 Level of investment in the search for alternatives (leverage- related) The scale of each of the four forms of the search for alternatives listed in Proposition 23 — inventory building, circumvention by design, development of alternative sources of supply, and investment in domestic production — and Days of inventory turnover for the items concerned and periodic corporate disclosures; published changes in product specifications made with regulatory thresholds in view; published budgets and progress of publicly funded Quarterly Increases, and the centre of gravity of the search shifts from forms with short time constants to forms with long time constants Increases, but with a different composition of forms — investment in execution environments on the device side rather than in inventory becomes central Decreases. Capability itself does not advance, and the inducement to hasten substitution weakens High (separates S1 from S3. Read paired with indicator 15) 1151 # Indicator Object of observation Data source (public information) Frequency of observation Anticipated movement under S1 (Fragmentation) Anticipated movement under S2 (Diffusion) Anticipated movement under S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power the time constant of the form on which the centre of gravity of the search rests domestic production plans; published changes of procurement sources 17 Expansion or contraction of the scope of accesscontrol measures (leverage- related. Indicator 5 is efficacy; this indicator is scope. The two are treated as separate rows) The items, countries, and levels of thresholds covered by transferrestriction measures, and the suspension and revival of measures Publication in the Federal Register of rules of the Bureau of Industry and Security (BIS) of the U.S. Department of Commerce; amendments to the relevant ministerial ordinances under Japan's Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Act; official publication of the relevant EU regulations; notices of the suspen‐ As published; summarized quarterly Expansion, or highfrequency change accompanied by suspension and revival The scope remains but contracts, and the thresholds diverge from effective levels of capability Contracts, and the objects return to the frame of general technology Medium (separates S1. Because it correlates with indicator 5, its independent information content is limited) 1152 # Indicator Object of observation Data source (public information) Frequency of observation Anticipated movement under S1 (Fragmentation) Anticipated movement under S2 (Diffusion) Anticipated movement under S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power sion and revival of measures 18 International progress in the development of trust infrastructure (Definition 17) (leverage- related. Not added to the inputs of the determination; treated as a variable monitored independently) The state of development of each of the three elements of Definition 17 — (i) enactment, amendment, and withdrawal of rules for the allocation of liability specific to AI; (ii) issuance of harmonized standards and certification schemes, their scope of application, and the presence or absence of mutual recognition across jurisdictions; and (iii) the existence and underwriting terms of insur‐ Legislation and official gazettes of each jurisdiction (the Official Journal of the EU, national gazettes); issuance records of standardization bodies and the progress of standardization requests; public materials of the insurance market. Element (iii) depends on market disclosure and is therefore relatively low in observability Halfyearly Proceeds divergently by jurisdiction. Mutual recognition does not advance, and a state in which the same conformity assessment does not hold across several jurisdictions becomes fixed As execution disperses, pressure rises for the focus of liability allocation to move from suppliers to implementers and users Progress is slow. Where the depth of deployment does not rise, demand for institutional development is also weak Medium (indirect. Not usable alone; not added to the inputs of the determination) 1153 # Indicator Object of observation Data source (public information) Frequency of observation Anticipated movement under S1 (Fragmentation) Anticipated movement under S2 (Diffusion) Anticipated movement under S3 (Stagnation) Discriminating power ance products that expressly assume losses arising from AI outputs Four notes on Table F-1. First, several indicators do not separate S1 from S3. Indicator 5 (export and access controls), indicator 6 (supplier concentration), and indicator 12 (the logic of allocation) all show the direction of high under S1 and declining under S2, but under S3 they may remain in the same direction as under S1 — because a world in which fragmentation does not dissolve while the advance of capability halts is logically possible. This overlap is not a defect of the indicators but a reflection of the content of Definition 13, that the scenarios are neither exclusive nor exhaustive. The principal means of separating S1 from S3 are indicator 4 (increment of performance across generations on benchmarks) and indicator 10 (capital raising and investment recovery of frontier laboratories), and a determination of S3 does not hold unless these two indicators move. Second, indicator 1 and indicator 4 may be read in opposite directions. A narrowing of the lag width of the capability gap (indicator 1) is the principal indicator for S2 and at the same time arises under S3 — because if the advance of the party being followed halts, the gap narrows automatically. Indicator 1 therefore carries no meaning on its own and must always be read paired with indicator 4. If the gap narrows and the increment across generations is maintained, the direction is S2; if the gap narrows and the increment across generations also diminishes, the direction is S3. This paired reading corresponds to the first of the seven pairs systematized by Table 19 in Section 16.5.4 (P1 in Table F-2), and is the most important application of the paired reading established by requirement 3 in F.3.2. Third, indicators observed annually (indicator 9, electricity supply constraints and grid interconnection queues, and indicator 11, the satisfaction rate) are not updated in a quarterly review. Indicators that are not updated are retained in the table each round in order to make the absence of a value visible. Where an indicator is cited as a ground for a determination although its value has not been updated, that is a reinterpret‐ 1154 ation of the previous value and not a new observation — leaving a record of this distinction is the purpose of F.3.4. Fourth, some of the data sources bear the risk of revision or discontinuation. Public data series of research institutions may cease to be updated through changes in the institution's policy or its funding position. Notices of regulatory authorities may change in form and frequency with a change of administration — as this paper discusses in Section 15, the framework of export controls has undergone several qualitative shifts in a short period. At least one alternative data source should therefore be prepared for each indicator, and the procedure for switching in the event that the principal source is lost should be established in advance. This requirement may be understood as the application of the operational readiness of Definition 6(iii) to the monitoring apparatus itself. F.3 The Procedure for Quarterly Review This section sets out the procedure for a quarterly review using Table F-1 in five stages. The design principle of the procedure is a single one — a determination must depend neither on a single indicator nor on a single interpreter. Each of the stages below gives that principle concrete form. F.3.1 Stage 1: Updating the Indicators For each indicator, the person responsible obtains the latest value from public sources and records it alongside the previous value. Three disciplines are to be observed at this stage. Separate acquisition from interpretation. The person responsible for updating records values only and does not enter a judgment as to which scenario a value supports. Entries involving judgment are made in the collective deliberation of Stage 2. Where the party acquiring is at the same time the party interpreting, unconscious selection operates at the stage of acquisition — a channel arises in which series consistent with the expected direction are chosen and series that are not consistent drop out as "not adopted because the definition has changed." Fix the definitions. The definition, data source, and method of acquisition of an indicator must be identical to the previous round. A change in definition makes the observation of change impossible. Where a change is unavoidable, values under the new definition are acquired in parallel for at least two periods, the magnitude of the discontinuity is recorded, and the transition is then made. This discipline is the same as the one Appendix E.4.1 sets out for the design of a pilot. Record failures of acquisition. That the data source has not been updated, that publication has been delayed, that the format has changed so that comparison with the previous round is impossible — all of these are objects of record. A blank and "could not be ob‐ 1155 tained" are different information, and the latter is also a leading indicator of the degradation of the monitoring apparatus. F.3.2 Stage 2: Determining the Direction — Discrimination by Pairs of Indicators and the Order of Determination From the updated set of indicators a determination is issued as to the direction of the scenario. This is the core of the procedure, and here a design that structurally excludes determination by a single indicator is placed. The requirements of this stage follow Table 19 and the order of determination in Section 16.5.4. The reason is as Section 16.5.4 made clear — the direction of a single indicator is consistent with several scenarios however far the precision of observation is raised. What each indicator measures is a lower-level change that several scenarios contain in common (capability gap, price, investment, concentration), and scenarios are defined as combinations of those changes. A determination must therefore be defined not against the value of an indicator but against the pattern that two or more indicators show simultaneously. First, the seven pairs of indicators in Table 19 are translated into the numbering of this appendix. Table 19 is written with the indicator numbers of Section 16 (the numbers of Table 16), which belong to a different system from the numbers of Table F-1, so that without this correspondence table Table 19 cannot be connected to operation. Table F-2. Correspondence between the pairs of indicators of Table 19 (Section 16.5.4) and the indicator numbers of Table F-1 — the operating specification for discrimination by simultaneous patterns Pair Pair of indicators in Table 19 (numbering of Section 16) Numbers in Table F-1 Simultaneous pattern → discrimination Patterns that remain unidentifiable Rate-limiting factor in operation (frequency of acquisition) P1 Indicator 1 (lag width of the capability gap) × [the set of indicators 3, 8 and 9] (advance on the frontier side) #1 × [#3, #10, #4] Narrowing + advance continues → S2 / narrowing + advance slows → S3 / flat or widening + advance continues → S1 Flat + advance slows (consistent with both S1 and S3: fragmented stagnation) #3 is half-yearly. In a quarterly determination the previous value is read again P2 Indicator 2 (rate of decline of inference price) × indicator 4 (diffusion of inference semiconduct‐ #2 × #7 Spread across all performance bands + diffusion into the core of business uses → S2 / slowing + diffusion only as cost reduction → S3 / widening Decline continues and diffusion advances, but both slowly (consistent with all three scenarios) #7 is half-yearly. The "centrality to uses" of the diffusion is not included in the object of observation of Table F-1 and requires separate confirmation 1156 Pair Pair of indicators in Table 19 (numbering of Section 16) Numbers in Table F-1 Simultaneous pattern → discrimination Patterns that remain unidentifiable Rate-limiting factor in operation (frequency of acquisition) ors for the edge) dispersion + bifurcation of uses → S1 P3 Indicator 6 (gross margin of major suppliers) × movement of sales volume #14 × the quantity recorded alongside #14 (sales volume) Compression + rising volume → S2 / compression + stagnant volume → S3 / maintained high → S1 Compression + flat volume (below the resolution of discrimination) Sales volume has no independent row in Table F-1. It is obtained from the same disclosure as #14 and recorded as a quantity alongside #14 P4 Indicator 3 (growth rate of frontier training cost) × indicator 9 (increment of performance across generations) #3 × #4 High growth + increments maintained → S1 / slowing + increments maintained → efficiency improvement (toward S2) / slowing + increments diminishing → S3 Slowing + measurement of increments impossible through benchmark saturation (false positives for S3 cannot be excluded) #3 is half-yearly. Confirmation of the degree of saturation (F. 3.5(d)) must always accompany it P5 Indicator 5 (electricity supply constraints and interconnection queues) × indicator 8 (capital raising of frontier laboratories) #9 × #10 Backlog continues + raises enlarge → S1 / backlog eases + raises become difficult → S3 / backlog eases + raises continue → S2 (dispersion of demand to the device side) Backlog eases + raises continue, but where the easing originates in institutional reform (does not separate S1 from S2) #9 is annual. In a quarterly determination the previous value is read again and is not counted as an indicator that has moved P6 Indicator 12 (scope of control measures) × indicator 7 (efficacy of control measures) #17 × #5 Scope expands + efficacy maintained → S1 / scope maintained or expands + efficacy lost → S2 / scope contracts + objects return to the frame of general technology → S3 Scope contracts + efficacy unobservable (does not separate contraction from political fluctuation from structural contraction) Because both are obtained from the records of the same gazettes and ordinances, the acquisition process is shared, but for the purpose of discrimination they are different quantities (the note in F.2) P7 Indicator 10 (chokepoint #15 × #16 Maintained high + search increases Maintained high + search does not #15 is annual and #16 quarterly. Dis‐ 1157 Pair Pair of indicators in Table 19 (numbering of Section 16) Numbers in Table F-1 Simultaneous pattern → discrimination Patterns that remain unidentifiable Rate-limiting factor in operation (frequency of acquisition) concentration) × indicator 11 (investment in the search for alternatives) (centre of gravity toward long time constants) → S1 / decline + search increases → S2 / decline + search decreases → S3 move (includes the possibility that the mechanism of Proposition 23 does not apply to the choke point in question; not used for scenario discrimination) crimination in periods in which the annual side does not move is not treated as the movement of #16 alone Three notes on Table F-2. First, Table F-2 is a translation of Table 19 and adds no discrimination of its own. The content of the simultaneous patterns and of the unidentifiable patterns is word for word identical with Table 19, and where the two diverge that is an error and not a matter open to interpretation. Second, the second element of P3 (sales volume) has no independent indicator row in Table F-1. Since it may be obtained from the same quarterly disclosure as the gross margin of #14, it is treated not as an additional indicator but as a quantity recorded alongside #14 — adding an indicator number would require revising every reference in Table F-1, and the gain does not justify that cost. Third, the pairs of Table F-2 are not independent. Indicators #3 and #4 appear in both pair P1 (the set for advance) and pair P4, #15 and #16 in pair P7, and #5 and #17 in pair P6, so that the same lower-level change moves several pairs. As the third limitation of Table 19 states, that several pairs point to the same scenario does not by itself amount to an accumulation of independent evidence. Requirement 1 is designed with this point built in. Requirement 1 (multiplicity in the same direction — counting by pairs of indicators). To accept a shift in a given direction, the condition is that at least two pairs of indicators point to the same scenario and that the observations do not overlap between the two pairs. Since the direction of a single indicator does not point to a scenario, the unit of counting is not the indicator but the pair of indicators. There is no theoretical ground for the number two — it is a practical threshold set at the level at which two combinations without overlapping observations can be secured among the seven pairs of Table 19, and this paper has not calibrated it. Operating parties may adjust it according to the cost of a mistaken determination, but the adjustment is made before operation begins and not in the forum of determination. The determination of overlap in observation is made mechanically from the "numbers in Table F-1" column of Table F-2 — two pairs sharing the same number are not counted as two independent pairs (for example, since P1 and P4 share #3 and #4, their agreement is counted only as one pair). Requirement 2 (a floor for discriminating power, and adherence to the order of determination). First, of the two pairs pointing to the same scenario, at least one pair 1158 must contain an indicator of "high" discriminating power. A state in which only indicators of "medium" or "low" discriminating power are moving is more likely to reflect variation common to all three scenarios — business cycles or exchange-rate movements — than a shift in that direction. Second, the order in which the pairs are read follows the order of determination established in Section 16.5.4(c). The order is arranged not by the strength of discriminating power but by the relation of dependence in which a later discrimination presupposes an earlier one. Stage 0 — specify the unit of determination. Before determining, specify the domain of use in which the state seeks to capture value. As Definition 13 states explicitly, the three states may hold simultaneously in different forms sector by sector and use by use, so that determining for the whole world and all uses at once artificially increases ambiguity at every stage below. This stage is the counterpart, on the side of determination, of the discipline stated in F.1.2 that the decision as to which indicators to follow is made before the review begins. The domain of use specified is recorded and is not changed after the determination. Stage 1 — see whether the frontier is advancing. What is read first is the set #3, #10, and #4 (the set of indicators 3, 8, and 9 of Table 19). Since S3 is separated from the other two states on the axis of advance while S1 and S2 are separated on the axis of concentration, fixing the axis of advance first allows subsequent discrimination to deal only with the axis of concentration. In addition, where S3 holds, the distinction between S1 and S2 largely loses practical significance. At this stage, in order to exclude false positives from saturation in #4, it is also confirmed whether a move to unsaturated benchmarks has been made (this is the same work as the consideration of contrary hypotheses in F.3.5(d), and the two need not be performed twice). Stage 2 — where advance continues, see whether the capability distance is narrowing. Pair P1 (#1 × the set for advance) is read, together with pair P2 (#2 × #7), which reinforces it. Where the lag width narrows and practical uses have become executable on the device side, the direction of S2 is supported. Where the lag width narrows but execution on the device side has not reached the core of business, the necessary condition for S2 is satisfied but the sufficient condition is not. Because this distinction cannot be determined from the object of observation of #7 alone (value of shipments and rate of incorporation), separate confirmation of the centrality of the uses is required (the rate-limiting column of P2 in Table F-2). Stage 3 — where the capability distance is not narrowing, see whether concentration is maintained. Pair P7 (#15 × #16) and pair P6 (#17 × #5) are read. Where concentration is maintained at a high level, the scope of control measures expands, and their efficacy is preserved, the direction of S1 is supported. Here, reading also the centre of gravity of #16 — whether the search is shifting from forms with short time constants (inventory building) to forms with long time constants (investment in domestic production) — gives information about the durability of S1. Where the centre of gravity is shifting toward long time constants, the operation of Proposition 23 (Section 11) allows the present S1 to 1159 be read as moving in a direction that is not self-sustaining. This reading treats the same object as the observation of the temporal order #17 → #16 → #15 stated in F.2 for the four leverage-related indicators, and whether that order is observed is at the same time a test of Proposition 23. Stage 4 — where advance is slowing, separate the cause of the slowing. Pair P4 (#3 × #4) is read. Where the growth of training cost slows while the increment of performance across generations is maintained, that is not stagnation of capability but improvement in efficiency, an acceleration of the Frontier Descent of which Definition 2 speaks. In this case, return to Stage 2. Where a slowing of growth and a diminution of increments occur together and the terms of capital raising deteriorate (#10 of pair P5), the direction of S3 is supported. At this stage the caution operates most strongly that it is difficult to distinguish in advance whether observed stagnation is diminishing returns or a delay in the take-off of productivity owing to lagging complementary investment (Section 16.5.3). A determination of S3 is therefore made more cautiously than a determination of any other scenario. Two points are made explicit about this order. First, the branching at each stage is not binary. The answer to "is it advancing" often takes the form "it is advancing for some uses and slowing for others." In that case, return to Stage 0 and subdivide the unit of determination further. Second, the order prescribes only which observations are read in which sequence; requirement 4 (multiplicity of those determining), requirement 5 (granularity of the determination), and the disciplines of recording in F.3.3 and below are imposed independently of the order. Requirement 3 (adherence to the paired reading of Table 19 — prohibition of use on its own). The first indicator of each of the seven pairs listed in Table F-2 is not used on its own for a determination. Specifically: (i) #1 (lag width of the capability gap) is not used for a determination without the set for advance (#3, #10, #4) — because narrowing is consistent both with S2 and with S3. (ii) #2 (rate of decline of inference price) is not used without #7. (iii) #14 (gross margin) is not used without sales volume recorded alongside. (iv) #15 (chokepoint concentration) is not used without #16. (v) #17 (scope of measures) is not used without #5 (efficacy) — since scope may expand even where efficacy is lost, a strengthening of S1 must not be determined on the ground of an expansion of scope alone (the note in F.2). (vi) #9 (interconnection queues) is not used without #10. (vii) Even where #5, #6, and #12 show the same direction of high under S1 and declining under S2, these three indicators do not separate S1 from S3, so they are counted toward the satisfaction of requirement 1 but are not adopted as grounds for a determination of S1 until the continuation of advance is confirmed by pair P1 or pair P4. Requirement 4 (multiplicity of those determining). The determination is made not by a single person responsible but by the collective deliberation of at least three. The participants in the deliberation are chosen so far as possible from different specialist backgrounds — technology, energy and infrastructure, policy and regulation, and finance. A deliberation composed only of persons of the same specialist background is, even where

the number of participants is formally plural, no different from a determination by a single person, in the sense that the grounds of the determination depend on a single interpretive framework. Requirement 5 (granularity of the determination). The determination is recorded not as the assertion "it is S1" or "it has shifted to S2" but in the graded form "the evidence supporting the direction of S1 is preponderant," "evidence supporting the direction of S2 has increased but does not satisfy the requirements." An assertive style of determination raises the psychological cost of overturning a determination at the next review and strengthens the inertia of determination. F.3.3 Stage 3: Recording the Change from the Previous Determination The present determination and the previous determination are set side by side, and where there has been a change its driving factors are recorded. Four matters are to be recorded — (a) which indicators moved, (b) whether the indicators that moved satisfied requirements 1 to 3, (c) whether there were dissenting views in the deliberation on the change of determination and what they were, and (d) whether the change of determination triggers a reconsideration of investment items (F.4). The recording of dissenting views under (c) is not a formality. Where a determination later proves to have been mistaken, the recorded dissent is the only evidence of what alternative interpretation was available at the time. An apparatus in which minority views are not recorded in deliberation has no capacity to learn from mistaken determinations. F.3.4 Stage 4: Recording When the Determination Is Not Changed — Making the Inertia of Determination Visible A record is kept also where the determination is not changed. This is the stage of the procedure most readily omitted and at the same time the most important. What is to be recorded is not the single word "no change" but the grounds for not changing. Specifically — (a) whether any indicator moved in this round, (b) where indicators moved and yet the determination is not changed, which of requirements 1 to 3 was not satisfied, (c) which indicators support maintaining the determination, and (d) how many quarters have elapsed since the previous determination. The record of elapsed time under (d) has a function of its own. A state in which the same determination has been maintained over a long period means one of two different things — either the world is in fact stable, or the monitoring apparatus has become unable to detect change. These two cannot be distinguished from the record of determinations alone. It is therefore recommended that where the same determination continues for a given period (for example, four quarters), a round be set aside to examine not the validity of the determination but the validity of the monitoring apparatus. That examination consists of a re-assessment of whether the discriminating power of the indicators has 1161 been as assumed, confirmation of the update status of the data sources, and consideration of adding indicators to or removing them from Table F-1. Behind this design lies a failure mode repeatedly observed in the practice of scenario planning — a state in which, after scenarios have been set, indicators established, and a review cycle fixed, the form continues while the actual determination is never once changed. That a determination does not change is not itself an error. The error is that the reason it does not change is not examined. The inertia of determination becomes an object of examination only once it is recorded. A category for deferred determination — distinguishing "no change" from "deferral." A category of deferred determination is placed within the recording procedure of this stage. As Section 16.5.4(d) made explicit, even with the design of Table 19 there exist observed patterns consistent with all three scenarios. That is why the unidentifiable pattern for each pair is set out in the fifth column of Table F-2. Three cases arise particularly readily in practice — (i) periods in which no indicator shows a change exceeding the resolution of discrimination; (ii) periods in which indicators point in mutually contradictory directions (in which case one returns to the specification of the unit at Stage 0); and (iii) fragmented stagnation — a state in which the advance of the frontier slows while control measures and concentration are maintained as they are, which is consistent with both S1 and S3 (the unidentifiable pattern of P1 in Table F-2). The response where these are detected is deferral of the determination. Deferral differs from "no change." "No change" means that, against requirements 1 to 3, the evidence supporting the previous determination continues to be preponderant, whereas deferral means that which scenario holds cannot be identified. To treat the two under the same form of record would be to record a failure of identification as stability of determination — which is contrary to the very purpose of this stage, the making visible of the inertia of determination. Deferral consists in doing the following three things at once. (a) Recording the deferral. Which indicators moved in which direction, and in which pair of Table F-2 identification failed to hold, is left in a form that may be carried over to the next determination. What is to be recorded is, for each pair, whether it was satisfied or not, which of the unidentifiable patterns applied, and how many consecutive rounds the deferral has run. (b) Non-firing of the staged investment triggers. The stages of investment that are activated in correspondence with a determination (Section 16.7.3) are not activated in a state in which no determination has been issued. Filling an unidentifiable observation, in place of a determination, by extrapolation of the most recent trend contravenes this discipline. Investment items classified as "scenario-dependent" in Table F-4 are, during a period of deferral, not the object of any measure of acceleration, reduction, or freezing consequent on a change of determination. (c) Continuation of the no-regret actions. Investment in the top four rows of Table F-4 — national brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, and operational readiness — is continued and expanded during a period of deferral as well. As Proposition 20 (Section 16) shows, the marginal value of this set is positive under all three scenarios, and it is therefore justified even 1162 in a state in which which scenario holds cannot be identified. Deferral is not the stopping of action but the stopping only of scenario-dependent action. Table F-3. The three categories of determination and the items to be recorded — distinguishing "change," "no change," and "deferral" Category Conditions under which it holds Items to be recorded Staged investment trigger No-regret actions Reference Change of determination Requirements 1 to 5 are all satisfied and a scenario different from the previous one is indicated (a) The indicators and pairs that moved, (b) whether requirements 1 to 3 were satisfied, (c) the content of dissenting views, (d) the items of reconsideration triggered Fires (following the corresponding column of Table F-4) Continued and expanded (not an object of reconsideration) F.3.3 No change The evidence supporting the previous determination continues to be preponderant. Even where indicators moved, one of requirements 1 to 3 is not satisfied (a) The indicators that moved in this round, (b) the requirement that was not satisfied, (c) the indicators supporting maintenance of the determination, (d) the number of quarters the same determination has continued Does not fire (stages already fired continue) Continued and expanded F.3.4 Deferral of determination An unidentifiable pattern of Table F-2 applies, and which scenario holds cannot be identified (a) The pairs and patterns for which identification failed to hold, (b) whether the unit specification of Stage 0 was subdivided and with what result, (c) the number of consecutive deferrals, (d) a list of the noregret items continued during the deferral Does not fire (substitution by extrapolation of the most recent trend is prohibited) Continued and expanded (suspension during a period of deferral destroys the very capacity to begin acting once identification holds) Section 16.5.4(d), Table F-2 The record of the number of consecutive deferrals has the same function as the record of elapsed time in F.3.4(d). Where deferral continues for a given period (for example, four quarters), a round is set aside to examine the validity of the scenario framework itself. A state in which identification fails to hold over a long period means either that the world is in fact between the three states or that the set of indicators does not capture the branching in question, and these two cannot be distinguished from the record of deferrals alone. The examination consists of consideration of adding or replacing pairs in Table F-2 and of reconsidering the granularity of the unit specification at Stage 0. The significance of continuing investment in the no-regret set during a period of deferral becomes clearest here — had this paper given only scenario-dependent prescriptions, 1163 there would be no prescription for an unidentifiable period. The no-regret set is the set derived in order to make action possible even in an unidentifiable period. F.3.5 Stage 5: Consideration of Contrary Hypotheses At the end of each round of review, it is considered, for each indicator that moved, whether an explanation other than a shift of scenario is possible. This stage is built into the procedure because reading the movement of an indicator as evidence of a scenario is the default posture of those using a monitoring table. A default posture is not corrected without an explicit contrary step. There are at least the following five categories of alternative explanation to be considered. (a) Change of definition or format. The possibility that a discontinuity has arisen in the series because the classification or method of calculation has changed on the side of the data source. Indicator 7 (semiconductor shipment statistics) and indicator 11 (adoption surveys) are readily subject to revision of classifications. (b) Cyclical variation. Variation arising from corporate fiscal periods, government budget years, and product announcement cycles. Indicators 3 and 10 are strongly affected by the fiscal cycle. Recording the year-on-year comparison alongside, rather than a simple quarter-on-quarter comparison, may mitigate this in part. (c) Dependence on a single event. Where the movement of an indicator reduces to a single large project, a single amendment of a rule, or the decision of a single entity. Indicators 5, 9, and 12 may by their nature move substantially on a single event. Movement arising from a single event is separately assessed for whether that event carries repetition before it is used in determining direction. (d) Change on the side of measurement. Saturation of benchmarks, changes of evaluation methodology, optimization to public evaluations. Indicators 1 and 4 show diminishing increments unrelated to changes in capability where a benchmark has saturated. This cannot be distinguished from a sign of S3 — where a diminution of indicator 4 is observed, the degree of saturation of the benchmark must therefore always be confirmed alongside. (e) Exogenous change of policy. The possibility that an indicator moved through political circumstances rather than the state of technology or markets. Indicators 5 and 12 are particularly subject to this. A shift in the regulatory framework accompanying a change of administration may in some cases be read not as a shift of scenario but as a policy fluctuation within the same scenario. The results of the consideration of contrary hypotheses are recorded whether or not they are accepted. A record that "alternative explanations were considered but did not apply" becomes a clue for identifying what was overlooked, should the determination later prove mistaken. 1164 F.4 Investment Items to Be Reconsidered on a Change of Determination (Table F-4) Table F-4 sets out which investment items are to be reconsidered where a scenario determination changes. The organizing principle of this table is Proposition 20 (Section 16) — the four items constituting the no-regret actions are not objects of reconsideration however the determination changes. What Proposition 20 identifies as the no-regret set is the four items "national brain capital (Definition 11), exclusive domain data, value-definition capability (Definition 12), and the securing of substitutability (operational readiness, Definition 6(iii))," and these have positive marginal value in every world — under S1 as complementary goods that become scarce, under S2 as the sole differentiating factor that converts dispersed capability into value, and under S3 as the receptacle for the return of the sources of value to the physical world and the human side. The "classification" column of Table F-4 carries this distinction. No-regret = not reconsidered on a change of scenario determination. Scenario-dependent = an object of staging, reduction, withdrawal, or acceleration according to a change of determination. The classification column is not an object of discussion in the forum of review — the classification is a consequence derived from this paper's theory and is not a matter for quarterly judgment. Table F-4. Treatment of investment items on a change of scenario determination (no-regret actions are not objects of reconsideration) Investment item Classification Treatment under S1 (present determination) On a change from S1 to S2 On a change from S1 to S3 On a return from S2 or S3 to S1 Object of reconsideration Formation and maintenance of national brain capital (the four components of Definition 11) No-regret Continued and expanded Continued and expanded (its importance in fact rises, since it becomes the sole differentiating factor converting dispersed capability into value) Continued and expanded (it becomes the receptacle as the sources of value return to human beings and the ground) Continued and expanded Not an object Securing exclusive domain data and designing the terms on which it is held No-regret Continued and expanded Continued and expanded (the more capability becomes general-purpose, the Continued and expanded Continued and expanded Not an object 1165 Investment item Classification Treatment under S1 (present determination) On a change from S1 to S2 On a change from S1 to S3 On a return from S2 or S3 to S1 Object of reconsideration more differentiation moves to data) Formation of value-definition capability (Definition 12) No-regret Continued and expanded Continued and expanded Continued and expanded (the more a world loses the advantage of efficiency gains, the larger the residual left to value-definition capability; Proposition 17) Continued and expanded Not an object Operational readiness — procedures and personnel for switching to alternative systems, and pluralization of suppliers (Definition 6(iii)) No-regret Continued and expanded Continued and expanded (the more options increase, the greater the value of the capacity to switch) Continued and expanded Continued and expanded Not an object Outright ownership of frontier- class computing infrastructure Scenariodependent High value. Staging is nonetheless maintained Over-investment. Freeze new stages and redirect the existing stock to inference and finetuning uses Stranded asset. Halt new investment and consider redirecting or selling the existing stock Lift the freeze and resume staging (assessing, however, the technical depreciation since the point of freezing) An object Dedicated investment in large-scale electricity facilities and grid reinforcement Scenariodependent High priority as the removal of the rate-limiting factor Reassess separately from general growth in demand, since the premise of dedicated Scale back and defer plans in line with downward revision of demand projections Priority rises again. Lead times, however, cannot be shortened An object 1166 Investment item Classification Treatment under S1 (present determination) On a change from S1 to S2 On a change from S1 to S3 On a return from S2 or S3 to S1 Object of reconsideration demand collapses Long-term commitments to a particular supplier (capacity reservations, dedicated procurement contracts) Scenariodependent Carries value as a guarantee of supply, but entails the cost of concentration Consider shortening contract terms and exercising termination clauses, since supply becomes abundant Negotiate a reduction of the committed volume in line with the decline in the demand outlook The value of commitment rises again, but bargaining power has declined An object Operational capacity — domestic compute and electricity for degraded operation (Definition 6(i-a)) Scenariodependent (scale only) Secure the level required for degraded operation of critical processes The required scale contracts (edge execution substitutes). The requirement to secure it does not, however, disappear The required scale contracts. Narrow the range of uses Re-expansion of scale An object (scale) Renewal capability — domestic finetuning, evaluation, and deployment of released weights (Definition 6(i-b)) Scenariodependent (scale only) Maintained as the means of recovering from relative depreciation Importance rises. Since released weights meet the requirements for use, renewal capability becomes the principal means of differentiation The required frequency falls as the rate of depreciation declines, but the capability is maintained High-frequency renewal is required again An object (scale and frequency) Domestic infrastructure for the sensitive-processing condition (Definition 6(ic)) Scenariodependent (scale only) Secured according to legal and contractual requirements The scale may contract as the means of execution become cheaper, but the requirement does not disappear, since it de‐ As at left Re-expansion of scale An object (scale) 1167 Investment item Classification Treatment under S1 (present determination) On a change from S1 to S2 On a change from S1 to S3 On a return from S2 or S3 to S1 Object of reconsideration rives from the legal system Edge execution infrastructure and the apparatus for operating small models Scenariodependent (inverse direction) Auxiliary. Dependence on the frontier persists for critical uses Accelerated. Becomes the central means of implementation under S2 Maintained (as a low-cost means of executing levelled capability) Priority falls, but it is maintained as part of operational readiness An object (on the acceleration side) Participation in verification and nonproliferation institutions premised on the critical tier (Tier C3) Scenariodependent Maintain participation at a low level (Tier C3 is an unrealized anticipatory category) Maintained (since the dispersion of capability makes verification more difficult, the discussion of institutional design remains) Becomes counterfactual. Tier C3 does not arrive and the argument of Section 9 remains only as analysis. Minimize the commitment of resources Raise the level of participation again An object Three notes on Table F-4. First, the asymmetry between the top four rows and the lower eight is the claim of this table. Every column of the four no-regret items is filled with "continued and expanded" however the determination changes. This is not a convenience of table construction but the content of Proposition 20 itself. If, for any of these four items, conditions were identified under which contraction would be appropriate under some scenario, that would amount to a falsification of Proposition 20 — the item in question would not have been an element of the no-regret set. Table F-4 therefore functions also as a test table for Proposition 20. Where an operating party has had a round in which contraction of a no-regret item was considered, it should record the reason for that consideration. It is a candidate for empirical falsification of this paper's theory. Second, an intermediate classification of "scenario-dependent (scale only)" has been placed. For each of the three functions of Definition 6(i) — operational capacity, renewal capability, and the sensitive-processing condition — the required scale changes with the scenario, but whether it is to be secured does not. The sensitive-processing condition is the clearest — the existence of data whose removal abroad is not legally permitted arises 1168 from the legal system independently of the mode of advance of AI capability. For the items in this intermediate classification, what is reconsidered on a change of determination is the level and not the policy. Treating it as a reconsideration of policy allows a contraction of scale to slide into withdrawal. Third, there is an asymmetry in the column for return (from S2 or S3 to S1). Where staging of frozen computing infrastructure is resumed, technical depreciation has advanced during the period of the freeze. Where a contracted long-term commitment is reexpanded, bargaining power in a phase of tight supply has declined. Where deferred grid reinforcement is resumed, the lead time cannot be shortened — the physical character of the energy constraint of which Proposition 21(i) speaks. A contraction based on a change of determination does not return to its former state by retracing the same change of determination in reverse. This irreversibility is of the same form as the asymmetry that Proposition 15 (Section 15) states of transitions, and is also the reason why the threshold for a change of determination must not be lowered lightly. The caution required by requirements 1 to 3 in F.3.2 is a consequence of this asymmetry. F.5 The Limits of This Table The limits of this appendix are set out explicitly under five heads. F.5.1 The Indicators Are Provisional and the Thresholds Are Not Calibrated The eighteen indicators of Table F-1 are candidates selected by this paper against the three conditions of Definition 14, and are not a set of indicators whose discriminating power has been validated. The columns such as "anticipated movement under S1" are deductions from the definitions of the scenarios and are not observations that they in fact moved in that direction as the scenario proceeded. The requirements on the three indicators in F.3.2 are likewise uncalibrated, both as to the number three and as to the requirement of at least one of "high" discriminating power. What this appendix provides is the structure of a procedure, not the values of thresholds. F.5.2 It Cannot Capture Branching by Sector or by Use Definition 13 states explicitly that "the three states are neither exclusive nor exhaustive, and different states may hold simultaneously sector by sector and use by use." Table F-1 defines its indicators as aggregates at the level of the state and across all sectors, and does not capture this sectoral branching. In reality, a state may hold simultaneously in which S2 proceeds in one sector (for example, administrative processes centred on language processing) while S1 persists in another (for example, control processes with high safety requirements). Aggregate indicators average this simultaneity away. Where monitoring by sector is to be carried out, Table F-1 cannot be applied to a sector as it stands. Among the indicators, only three may be decomposed by sector — indicator 7 (semiconductor shipments), indicator 11 (satisfaction rate), and indicator 13 (linkage with 1169 electricity prices) — while the remaining fifteen are defined only at the level of the state or of the world. The four leverage-related indicators (indicators 15 to 18) may likewise be decomposed by choke point and by jurisdiction, but not by sector. The design of a monitoring table by sector is a task left outstanding and not treated by this paper. This limit corresponds to the limitation Section 20 acknowledges of the dynamic scenarios — that they are conditional paths rather than predictions. F.5.3 Retrospective Validation of Discriminating Power Has Not Been Carried Out Properly, the discriminating power of an indicator is validated by constructing the indicator retrospectively for a past period and confirming whether it indicated in advance the change that in fact occurred in that period. This paper has not carried out such retrospective validation. There are two reasons why it did not. First, the scenario framework is itself this paper's proposal, and there exists no correct answer as to "which scenario was proceeding" for a past period. Second, several of the data sources of Table F-1 have only a short retrospective span — public series for the capability gap and inference prices have been established only in recent years, and the period of observation is insufficient relative to the cycle of the scenarios (years to decades). The "discriminating power" column of Table F-1 is therefore a theoretical expectation and not a statistically estimated discriminating power. An operating party can replace the content of this column with empirical content only by accumulating the records of its own operation. The disciplines of recording in F.3.3 and F.3.4 are required for that accumulation. F.5.4 The Indicators Themselves May Be Subject to the Goodhart Effect An indicator that has become an object of monitoring may, through the very fact of being monitored, change its properties as an indicator — the general proposition, current since Goodhart (1975), that when a measure becomes a target it ceases to be a good measure. The indicators of this appendix are no exception. Susceptibility differs by indicator. Relatively robust are indicators that arise as aggregates of the behaviour of many independent parties — indicator 7 (semiconductor shipment statistics), indicator 9 (interconnection queues), and indicator 13 (electricity prices) are difficult for a single party to manipulate. Relatively fragile are indicators that depend on the published behaviour of a small number of parties — indicators 1 and 4 (performance on public benchmarks) may diverge from the actual state of capability through optimization to evaluation data. Indicator 8 (frequency of open-weight releases) counts only the fact of release and may therefore move independently of the practical utility of the weights released. Indicator 10 (state of investment recovery) is affected by accounting discretion such as changes in amortization periods and rearrangement of categories.

There is no complete response to this fragility. Three responses may be placed by this appendix — (a) considering change on the side of measurement as a contrary hypothesis at every round (F.3.5(d)); (b) not using fragile indicators on their own for a determination (requirement 2 in F.3.2 calls for "high" discriminating power while requirement 1 calls for multiplicity, and this duplication also serves to dilute the effect of manipulating a single indicator); and (c) mixing robust and fragile indicators and, where the two diverge, recording the divergence itself. Divergence between robust and fragile indicators is itself a sign that the Goodhart effect is operating, and for a monitoring table that is information. F.5.5 Restatement of the Standing of This Appendix The reservation stated at the outset is set out again at the close. All indicators and thresholds in Table F-1 are provisional, and this paper has not validated their discriminating power. The classification of investment items in Table F-4 is a consequence that follows if Proposition 20 is correct, and is not a validation of Proposition 20. The procedure of F.3 does not guarantee the quality of a determination; it makes it possible to record how a determination was issued. The value of this appendix does not lie in leading to correct determinations. It lies in leaving, in a form that may be confirmed after the fact, that a determination did not depend on a single indicator or a single interpreter. What has repeatedly failed in the practice of scenario planning is less that the scenarios were wrong than that the process of determination was not recorded and therefore could not be learned from. The practical content of what this paper states in Section 16 — that it identifies instead of predicting — is exhausted in this discipline of recording. Identification is not the issuing of a determination but the keeping of the grounds of a determination in a state in which they may be examined afterwards. F.6 The Minimum Monitoring Version — A Version With the Indicators Reviewed Quarterly Narrowed Down F.6.1 Why a Minimum Monitoring Version Is Needed Updating the eighteen indicators of Table F-1 every quarter and conducting the five-stage review of F.3 each round requires a considerable volume of standing work. As Proposition 36 (Section 19) states, where administrative capacity is constrained, a requirement of comprehensive monitoring issues in non-implementation, formalization, or delay of the activity monitored, and in none of these cases is the purpose of monitoring achieved. A party that cannot follow eighteen indicators each round will inevitably select and operate only the indicators it can follow. The problem is not the selection itself but that, where no criterion of selection is given, the indicators chosen are the ones easy to obtain rather than the ones that are non-substitutable. 1171 This section responds to Proposition 36 by establishing the minimum set of indicators to be maintained as a priority in quarterly monitoring. The design principle follows Section 19.7.3 and is identical with Appendix C.7 and Appendix D.3 — the set is composed not of the indicators with the greatest information content on their own but of indicators that give information no other indicator can substitute for, with non-substitutability as the first criterion and cost of observation and difficulty of manipulation as secondary criteria. One constraint specific to this appendix is added — the minimum monitoring version must make the order of determination established in F.3.2 (Stages 0 to 4) hold. If even one side of the pair to be read at any stage is missing, the discrimination at that stage becomes impossible and the monitoring table can issue no determination. The reduction is therefore carried out not by indicator but by pair. F.6.2 The Composition of the Minimum Monitoring Version Table F-5. The minimum monitoring version — the minimum set of indicators that makes the order of determination hold (five quarterly, two half-yearly, two annual) Indicator Frequency Stage and pair supported Why no other indicator can substitute for it Difficulty of manipulation #4 Increment of performance across generations on benchmarks Quarterly Stage 1 (the set for advance), Stage 4 (P4) The only quarterly indicator that directly measures the axis of advance separating S3 from the other two states. Dropping it makes Stage 1 fail to hold, and every subsequent discrimination loses its premise Low (readily subject to optimization to public evaluations. Confirmation of the degree of saturation is essential) #1 Lag width of the capability gap Quarterly Stage 2 (P1) A quantity connecting to the axis of concentration that separates S1 from S2. It cannot be inferred from #4 — the lag width is the difference between the following side and the leading side, and #4, which measures only the leading side, gives only one of the two Low (depends on public evaluations) #16 Level of investment in the search for alternatives Quarterly Stage 3 (P7) Separates whether a decline in concentration is due to increased bypassability or to stagnant demand. It is also the observation of the operation of Proposition 23, and cannot be inferred from concentration itself High (constructed from days of inventory turnover, capital expenditure plans, and published changes of procurement sources) #5 Efficacy of control measures / #17 Scope of Quarterly (summarizing notices Stage 3 (P6) Because efficacy and scope may move in opposite directions, neither can be inferred from the other. Since both may be obtained from the re‐ High (based on the records of published rules) 1172 Indicator Frequency Stage and pair supported Why no other indicator can substitute for it Difficulty of manipulation control measures as they occur) cords of the same gazettes and ordinances, they are two indicators with a single acquisition process, and from the standpoint of cost amount in substance to one indicator #3 Growth rate of frontier training cost Half-yearly Stage 1 (the set for advance), Stage 4 (P4) The only external estimated series that excludes false positives from saturation in #4. #10 (capital raising) derives from the same cause (continuation of investment) and is therefore mechanistically correlated, but #3 is an external estimate whereas #10 is affected by accounting discretion, so #3 is superior in difficulty of manipulation High (a thirdparty estimated series) #7 Diffusion of inference semiconductors for the edge Half-yearly Stage 2 (P2) Measures the sufficient-condition side of S2. #1 (narrowing of the lag width) gives only the necessary condition for S2, and whether the required performance level for uses is met on the device side can be obtained only from #7 High (an aggregate of the behaviour of many independent parties) #15 Movement of chokepoint concentration Annual Stage 3 (P7) Forms a pair with #16. Being annual, the previous value is read again in a quarterly determination, but it is indispensable as one side of the pair High (equipment and shipment statistics and compilations by research institutions) #18 International progress in the development of trust infrastructure Annual Not an input to the determination (monitored independently) It is retained in the minimum version despite not being added to the inputs of the determination because this variable prescribes the upper bound of the state's own depth of deployment whichever scenario is realized (Proposition 25, Section 11). It is not an object on which to economize the cost of determination Medium The indicators dropped by the reduction, and the grounds. #2 (inference price) is the first indicator of pair P2, but like #1 it measures the levelling of capability, and if the pair of #1 and #7 holds, the discrimination at Stage 2 holds — pair P2 reinforces pair P1 rather than substituting for it. #6 (supplier concentration) shares its mechanism with #15. #8 (frequency of open-weight releases) is close to a constituent of #1 and is included in the observation of the lag width. #9 (electricity supply constraints) and #10 (capital raising) consti‐ 1173 tute pair P5, but the distinction between S1 and S3 that pair P5 draws may also be obtained from pairs P1 and P4, so it drops out in the reduction by pair — as to #10, however, only the discontinuous event of the recognition of impairment is picked up as an exceptional item as it occurs (it is the principal indicator for S3, and the occurrence of the event may be grasped from announcements without following the quarterly series). #11 (satisfaction rate for critical uses), #12 (the logic of allocation), #13 (linkage between electricity prices and compute cost), and #14 (gross margin) are all of medium or low discriminating power and, under requirement 2, cannot serve on their own as grounds for a determination. F.6.3 What the Minimum Monitoring Version Cannot Determine Under the minimum monitoring version, the following judgments do not hold. (i) Discrimination by pair P3 (gross margin × sales volume) — the channel for separating intensified competition under S2 from stagnant demand under S3 from the side of suppliers' revenue structure is lost. (ii) Discrimination by pair P5 (interconnection queues × capital raising) — direct observation of whether electricity is operating as the rate-limiting factor is lost, and the progression of the energy constraint of which Proposition 21(i) speaks can no longer be detected from the monitoring table. (iii) The state of satisfaction by sector and by use (#11) — where the unit specification of Stage 0 is subdivided, observation of satisfaction for the subdivided unit is not obtained. (iv) Change in the logic of allocation (#12) — the progression of cross-axis transition (Proposition 16, Section 15) cannot be detected from the monitoring table. (v) The price path of S2 (#2) and the multipolarization of those releasing (#8). These consequences may be stated in a sentence — the minimum monitoring version gives a "warning of direction" but not an "identification of mechanism." It can determine in the direction of which scenario matters are moving, but not by which mechanism that movement arises. Given that Section 16.5.4 designed discrimination as a nested structure, and that each pair of Table F-2 doubles as an observation of mechanism, this loss is not small. Users of the minimum version must record their want of a judgment on these five points as an absence of judgment. Holding a list of what is not being observed is as important as holding a list of what is (Section 19.7.4). F.6.4 Composition as a Ladder, Divergence of Determinations, and Unintended Adverse Effects The ladder. As Section 19.7.4 states, the level of a minimum set depends on the level of administrative capacity, so that the correct design is not a single set but a ladder. This appendix places three steps — the minimum monitoring version (the nine indicators of this section, of which five are obtained quarterly and, as acquisition processes, four), the standard version (the minimum monitoring version plus the indicators bearing on the domain of use specified at Stage 0 — in many cases #2, #11, and #14), and the comprehensive version (the eighteen indicators of Table F-1). The correspondence between the 1174 steps is given by the "stage and pair supported" column of Table F-5 and by the list of "indicators dropped" in F.6.2. Treatment where determinations diverge. As the latter part of the falsification condition of Proposition 36 provides, where the determination under the minimum version diverges systematically from the determination under the comprehensive version, what is rejected is not the framework but the design of the minimum set. The treatment follows the same three stages as Appendix C.7.3 and Appendix D.3.3 — classify type A (the comprehensive version detects a change of direction and the minimum version does not: a miss) and type B (the converse: over-warning), and treat type A as the graver. Separate the cause into error in the determination of non-substitutability, observation error, and manipulation of an indicator, and treat the determination of the comprehensive version as authoritative until the divergence is resolved. As a point specific to this appendix, detection of divergence presupposes that the form of the record of determinations is identical in the two versions — the items to be recorded in F.3.3, F.3.4, and Table F-3 are not omitted in the minimum version either. The discipline of recording is the part that is not reduced even where the number of indicators is. Unintended adverse effects. The minimum monitoring version carries secondary consequences specific to narrowing the indicators. Three are set out. First, the concentration of Goodhart pressure. The pressure by which an indicator turns into a target concentrates the more strongly the fewer the indicators (Section 19.7.3). That Table F-5 carries a column for difficulty of manipulation and, among candidates of comparable non-substitutability, chose indicators observable from outside (retaining #3 rather than #10 is an instance) is a response to this pressure. #4 and #1, however, depend on public evaluations and are low in difficulty of manipulation, yet must be retained — because no substitute exists for measuring the axis of advance and the axis of concentration. For these two indicators, therefore, not omitting the consideration of change on the side of measurement in F.3.5(d) at any round becomes a requirement in the minimum version. Second, the thinning of the mixture of robust and fragile indicators. Response (c) listed in F.5.4 — mixing the two and, where they diverge, recording the divergence itself — functions less well the more the indicators are narrowed. In the minimum version, divergence between the annual #15 and the quarterly #4 becomes the principal means of this examination. Third, the formalization of monitoring. The fewer the indicators, the shorter the review, and a review that ends quickly leaves a thin record. The response is to maintain the making visible of the inertia of determination in F.3.4 and the items to be recorded in Table F-3 in the minimum version as well; what is to be cut is the number of indicators and not the items of the record. This section closes by connecting to the restatement of the standing of this appendix (F. 5.5). The minimum monitoring version does nothing to improve the limit that the indicators of Table F-1 are provisional and their thresholds uncalibrated. What it improves is feasibility alone. A monitoring table that cannot be implemented is, as a tool of identi‐ 1175 fication, the same as one that does not exist — in this single respect, the minimum monitoring version serves the purpose of this appendix. 1176 1177 Appendix G. Geoeconomic Leverage Diagnostic For readers who begin from this appendix without reading the body. The apparatus in the body on which this diagnostic rests is as follows — Definition 15 (geoeconomic leverage = indispensability × desirability), Definition 17 (the three elements of trust infrastructure), Proposition 22 (the non-identity of position and leverage), Proposition 23 (the paradox of leverage exercise), Proposition 25 (trust infrastructure and the depth of deployment), and Proposition 28 (non-state actors and the residual functions of the state), all in Section 11. Together with these, Definition 20 (export of integrated systems), Proposition 38 (export of integrated systems and the self-reinforcement of desirability), Proposition 39 (the conditions for a state that exports integrated systems), and Proposition 40 (the portfolio of procurement modes), all in Section 12 (G.7 and G.8 correspond to these). Reference is also made to Definition 3 (national value models, Section 6), Proposition 20 (no-regret actions, Section 16), Proposition 8 (continuous construction, Section 13), Definition 16 (authentic data, Section 17), and Proposition 24 (self-erosion of brain capital, Section 17). Definition 15 and Proposition 22 should be consulted first — that position on the nine cells (Appendix D) and leverage (this appendix) are separate coordinates is the reason this diagnostic stands on its own. G.1 The Standing and Limits of This Diagnostic This appendix renders the geoeconomic leverage introduced in Section 11 as Definition 15 into a diagnostic procedure that a policy officer may carry out for the officer's own jurisdiction (or region of responsibility). Section 11 showed that while the nine cells describe the mode by which a state generates value, they do not describe whether it can push back when conditions are changed from outside, and introduced a second axis composed of the two components of indispensability and desirability. What this appendix treats is the practical stocktaking of that second axis. The composition of this appendix. G.2 to G.4 are the stocktaking of the two components (Tables G-1 to G-3); G.5 is the grading of the record; G.6 is the fixing of the quadrant and the consideration of movement. Up to this point the appendix diagnoses the present leverage of the home jurisdiction. G.7 and G.8, which follow, correspond to the formulations of supply and procurement introduced in Section 12 — G.7 (Table G-4) is an inspection of whether the home jurisdiction may carry out the export of integrated systems (Definition 20) for a particular domain of work, and asks after the conditions for the existence of one form of desirability. G.8 (Table G-5) is the procedure for selecting the mode by which the home jurisdiction receives capability and systems from outside (Proposition 40), and as a diagnostic of leverage it consists of items inspecting the consequences for the position of the home jurisdiction of the accumulation of procurement of integrated systems across several domains. G.9 (Table G-6) and G.10 (Table G-7) corres‐ 1178 pond to the two devices Section 12 formulated as Proposition 41 and Proposition 42 — G.9 is an item table that recasts the inspection of portability from a "stocktaking of dependencies" into an inspection of the explicitness of the interface (Proposition 41, Section 12.3.7), and G.10 is an item table for distinguishing whether what the home jurisdiction has obtained is lock-in or indispensability (Proposition 42, Sections 12.5.6 to 12.5.8). G.11 covers the order of implementation and the cautions in handling. The appendix consists of seven tables and 113 items in total, but it is not envisaged that all items be carried out at once — the scope and order of implementation are set out in G.11. The limits are stated explicitly at the outset. The measurement framework for leverage is provisional, and this diagnostic extends only to a qualitative stocktaking. As Section 11.1 stated, Definition 15 suggests ways of measuring the two components, but this paper presents no single indicator compounding them. Compounding requires weights between the components, and the weights depend on the context of negotiation. This appendix therefore gives no procedure for computing the level of leverage as a numerical value. What it gives is (a) an item table for writing out exhaustively the choke points the state holds and the grounds on which other states wish to engage with it, and (b) guides for discriminating the durability and exercisability of what has been written out, against the propositions of this paper. The output of the diagnostic is not a score but a description item by item, together with a list of the locations of the documents that support that description. It does not aim at ranking states, nor does it assess the merits of the policies of other states from its results. This limitation has three consequences. First, this diagnostic determines the attribution of a quadrant only on an ordinal scale. A determination that "indispensability is high" does not mean that an absolute threshold has been exceeded but only that the case stands relatively high within the set of cases used for comparison. Second, comparison between components is not made. The operation of comparing one state's indispensability with another's desirability on a single scale is not supported by this framework. Third, being recorded as "not applicable" in this diagnostic is not a loss of points. As Section 11.5.2 states, the quadrant in which both components are low (the Dependent–Peripheral Type) is a position that many states in fact occupy, and recording that fact accurately is the purpose of the diagnostic. Recording higher than the reality is more harmful than recording lower than the reality, in that it delays preparation against changes of condition imposed from outside. The relation to Appendix D is stated explicitly. Appendix D (the national diagnostic checklist) is a diagnostic of position; this appendix is a diagnostic of leverage. Block I of Appendix D asks where the state stands on the nine cells, and Block VI asks in which direction that position is moving. Both are descriptions on the coordinates of Definition 3. This appendix, by contrast, asks after the second coordinate that Proposition 22 asserts to be an independent variable. The two do not stand in a relation of substitution, and neither result can be derived from the other — that is the content of Proposition 22. Both are therefore required for the description of a state, and a diagnostic that carries out only 1179 Appendix D will have measured position precisely while measuring nothing about the possibility that the position may be rewritten from outside. Conversely, a diagnostic that carries out only this appendix will have measured bargaining power without identifying what that bargaining power is to be used for — which position is to be defended and to which position it is to move. The order of implementation is set out in G.11. G.2 The Diagnostic of Indispensability (Table G-1) The diagnostic of indispensability begins from a stocktaking of the candidate chokepoints the state holds. A candidate here means any good, service, process, site, or licence that may generate cost and malfunction where other states seek to bypass or exclude the state. Section 11.2 listed six sources (manufacturing equipment for advanced semiconductors, particular manufacturing sites, high-bandwidth memory, minerals and refining, cooling water and siting, and the routes of submarine cables) in order to explain the mechanism of concentration, and not as an exhaustive enumeration of candidates. Candidates specific to a given state — a particular component, particular process knowledge, particular inspection and certification facilities, a particular port or landing point, a particular allocation of spectrum — may lie outside those six. The first thing to confirm in the stocktaking is that candidates are identified in units of process. As Section 11.2.4 showed, concentration may arise in units of process rather than in units of goods, and a structure that is dispersed at the stage of production while concentrated at the stages of refining, separation, or processing is not observed so long as aggregation is by units of goods. Each item of Table G-1 is therefore recorded in units of process stage rather than of goods. Table G-1 is an item table applied repeatedly, once for each candidate. A guide to the determination is appended to each item in a single line. All the guides are written in the verifiable form of the existence of a document, a record, or a track record — the criterion is the presence or absence of an output a third party may confirm, rather than the expression of an intention or the existence of an expectation, so that the diagnostic does not drift into self-assessment. This approach is shared with Appendix D. Table G-1. Diagnostic items for indispensability (applied once for each candidate chokepoint) # Diagnostic item Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be recorded) Reference G1 Is the inventory of candidate chokepoints compiled in units of process stage rather than of goods? A list of candidates exists as a document, and for each candidate the process stage in question (production, refining, processing, assembly, inspection, maintenance, siting, or licensing) is identified Definition 15; Section 11.2 G2 1180

Diagnostic item Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be recorded) Reference Has the state's share of world supply of the good or service been measured for that process stage? The numerical share is recorded, together with its denominator (quantity, value, or capacity), its source, and the year and month of measurement Section 11.2 G3 Is the unit in which the share is measured recorded separately from the shares of other process stages upstream and downstream? Shares by process stage for the same good are set out side by side, and the differences between stages are made explicit Section 11.2.4 G4 Have the number and location (jurisdiction) of alternative suppliers been identified? Alternative suppliers are enumerated by name and the jurisdiction of each is recorded. Where none exists, "absent" is stated expressly Definition 15 G5 Has it been confirmed that the alternative suppliers enumerated in fact hold spare capacity to take orders? The current utilization rate or an estimate of unused capacity is recorded for each alternative supplier, and nominal existence is distinguished from effective substitutability Section 11.2.3 G6 Has the time required for substitution (the time required to switch) been estimated to the order of months or years? The estimate is recorded by order of magnitude (several months, around one year, several years, decades), with the grounds of the estimate appended (past analogous cases, technical process, licensing periods) Definition 15; Section 11.2 G7 Has the time required to switch been compared with the cycle of policy decision in the other state (budget year, elections, the period of an industrial plan)? The comparison is made explicit, and candidates whose time to switch is shorter than the decision cycle are classified as "candidates that do not serve as instruments of negotiation" Section 11.2 G8 Have the capital requirements of substitution been estimated? The order of magnitude of the investment required to establish an alternative source of supply is recorded, together with the identification of parties able to bear that funding (the government of the other state, firms, an international consortium) Section 11.3.3 G9 Has the degree of quality degradation on switching been estimated? The decline in performance, yield, and reliability on switching to an alternative source is recorded by degree (no practical impediment / substitutable for limited uses / not substitutable) Section 11.2.2 G10 Has it been discriminated which of the five mechanisms (economies of scale, learning effects, capital specificity, the physical conditions of location, the ac‐ The dominant mechanism is identified for each candidate, and the part that may be shortened by the injection of capital is distinguished from the part that may not Section 11.2.7 1181 # Diagnostic item Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be recorded) Reference cumulation of skill) sustains the concentration in the candidate? G11 Do legal instruments enabling exercise exist in the home jurisdiction? Among export licensing, investment screening, licences, and technology transfer controls, the legislation applicable to the candidate is identified clause by clause. Where none exists, "no instrument" is stated expressly Section 11.2; Proposition 28 G12 Has it been confirmed whether the entity holding the candidate is subject to the home jurisdiction, or whether some part is subject to another jurisdiction's authority? The location and capital relationships of the holding entity and the jurisdiction of origin of the equipment and technology used are recorded, and the parts where holding is separated from the right of exercise are identified Section 11.2.3 G13 Have the constraints on exercise arising under alliances and treaties been set out? The applicable multilateral arrangements, consultation obligations within alliances, and constraints under trade agreements are enumerated, and the prior procedures required for exercise are recorded Section 11.8 G14 Has an estimate been prepared, for each of the four forms (inventory building, circumvention by design, development of alternative sources of supply, investment in domestic production), of the search for alternatives that exercise would induce? For each of the four forms, the likelihood of inducement and the order of magnitude of the time constant are recorded, and consistency with the mechanism discriminated in G10 is confirmed Proposition 23; Section 11.6.2 G15 Are the history of past exercise and the depreciation it has already caused recorded? The date and scope of exercise, and the search for alternatives on the other side observed thereafter (announcements of investment, changes of procurement source, changes of standards), are recorded in time series Proposition 23; Section 11.6.3 G16 Is the cost of maintaining a state in which the candidate is held but not exercised understood? The costs required for continued operation (renewal of facilities, reproduction of skill, research and development) are estimated, and it is recorded as a premise that if operation stops, accumulation stops Section 11.5.2; Proposition 8 Among the items of Table G-1, the three that most strongly govern the quality of the diagnostic are G6, G10, and G14. G6 (time required to switch) carries the greatest information content among the three ways of measuring listed in Definition 15 — the absence of alternative suppliers is close to a binary description, whereas the time required to switch is a continuous quantity and connects directly to the temporal structure of negotiation. G10 1182 (discrimination of the mechanism) gives the prediction of the candidate's durability. As Section 11.2.7 derives, of the five mechanisms only economies of scale can be shortened by the injection of funds, and choke points sustained by learning effects and by the accumulation of skill are not dissolved by capital. A candidate discriminated in G10 as sustained by "economies of scale alone" must therefore be classified as one that will be lost within a few years if sufficient capital is injected from outside. G14 (estimate of the search for alternatives) is the item that builds the paradox of Proposition 23 into the diagnostic. The point is that this estimate is to be prepared at the stage of confirming that the candidate is held, and not at the stage of considering exercise — the situation in which a decision on exercise is called for is in most cases one in which there is no time to spare, and the estimate cannot be prepared on the spot. One note on G15. As Section 11.6.1 stated explicitly, this paper does not treat the manifestation of exercisability as a form of exercise. What is recorded in G15 is therefore actual measures, and announcements, intimations, and reports of measures are recorded in a separate column. Confusing the two makes it impossible to identify events of exercise when the record is used to test Proposition 23. Since a search on the other side in anticipation may nevertheless arise, such matters are not excluded from the record but retained separately. G.3 The Diagnostic of Desirability (Table G-2) The logic of the diagnostic of desirability is the converse of that of indispensability. Whereas indispensability asks after "the loss other states incur when they bypass the state," desirability asks after "the gain other states obtain when they engage with the state." The diagnostic items must therefore be written in the form of asking not what the state has, but whether reasons for other states to wish to engage with it in fact exist. It is not rare for an asset regarded as valuable from the state's own side not to constitute, from the other side, a reason for engagement. That the items of Table G-2 place "is it observed as behaviour on the other side" as their guide is intended to detect this divergence. Definition 15 lists five components as sources of desirability: market, rules, technology, capital, and trust. The items are arranged below in the order of these five components. As to the component of trust, a detailed inspection along the three elements of Definition 17 is separated into G.4, and Table G-2 extends only to confirming its location. Table G-2. Diagnostic items for desirability (by the five components. Each asks whether it is observed as behaviour on the other side) # Component Diagnostic item Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to apply) G17 Market Is the size of the home market at a level suppliers of the good or service find hard to abandon? The share of the home market in the revenue of major suppliers is estimated, and the loss on abandonment is recorded 1183 # Component Diagnostic item Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to apply) G18 Market Is the home market inelastic — do suppliers not hold exit as an option? The record of whether suppliers on whom conditions were imposed in the past exited or conformed is recorded, and it is confirmed that instances of exit are exceptional G19 Market Is it costly for suppliers to split specifications for the home market from those for other jurisdictions? The existence of instances of splitting has been investigated, and goods for which splitting is carried out are recorded separately from those for which it is not G20 Rules and standards Are the home jurisdiction's criteria, standards, and conformity assessment framework referred to in the legislation, standards, and procurement requirements of other jurisdictions? The places in the legislation, subordinate rules, and public procurement specifications of other jurisdictions in which the home criteria are cited or applied mutatis mutandis are enumerated clause by clause G21 Rules and standards Are there instances in which suppliers apply to their worldwide operations the documentary systems, test procedures, and internal controls built in order to conform to the home jurisdiction's requirements? Statements in suppliers' published materials, audit reports, and the like confirming that the home requirements are used as the worldwide operating standard have been identified G22 Rules and standards Does the capacity to enforce rules (a record of inspections, tests, and sanctions) exist in fact? The numbers of inspections, corrective orders, and sanctions over recent years are published or recorded, and it can be confirmed that the rules do not exist on paper alone G23 Rules and standards Is the investment made for compliance sunk in a form specific to the home jurisdiction (the existence of switching costs)? The share of the part that could not be carried over on a move to the requirements of another jurisdiction is broadly understood, through interviews with operators and the like G24 Rules and standards Do entities of the home jurisdiction hold positions such as secretariat, chair, or working-group convenor in forums of international standardization? The relevant standardization organizations, committees, and positions are maintained as a list and kept up to date G25 Technology Have the technologies, components, and processes other states wish to obtain from the home jurisdiction been identified? The items named in the policy documents, procurement plans, and proposals for joint research of other states are recorded G26 Technology Where the technology provided is packaged, is the structure that lengthens the recipient's time to switch understood? The degree of integration of the elements provided, and the difficulty of later replacing only a part with another supplier, are recorded G27 1184 # Component Diagnostic item Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to apply) Technology Does the home jurisdiction recognize the structure by which the provision of technology constitutes an expansion of exposure for the other side? The other side's need to prepare alternative procedures upon provision is recorded as an agenda item in consultations or as a contractual clause G28 Capital Have the scale and terms of the long-term capital the home jurisdiction can supply abroad been identified? The scale and terms of possible outward investment by public financing bodies, pension funds, sovereign funds, and the like are maintained as a list G29 Capital Is the range of what capital can obtain understood as limited? The obtaining of engagement through capital and the obtaining of indispensability (the mechanism discriminated in G10 of Table G-1) are distinguished in planning documents G30 Trust Has the state of development of the three elements of Definition 17 been inspected sector by regulated sector? The inspection of Table G-3 has been carried out and the record is maintained G31 Trust Are there instances in which producers of capability treat the home jurisdiction as "a place where deployment in regulated sectors is in fact possible"? Instances in which the home jurisdiction was selected as a site decision, a joint venture, or a destination for products aimed at regulated sectors on the producers' side are recorded G32 Crosscutting Among the five components, are those on which the home jurisdiction in fact relies distinguished from those assumed to be relied upon but not observed as behaviour on the other side? The column "observed behaviour on the other side" is filled in for each component, and the components left blank are made explicit Items are placed thickly on the component of rules in Table G-2 because that component forms the core of the recovery in Section 11.4. The position that Definition 3 in Section 6 excluded as outside the domain of quantification — the position that obtains value through standard-setting, conformity assessment, and certification — was recovered within the theory in Section 11 as leverage on the side of desirability. For that recovery not to be an empty word, the value of that position must be observable. That G20 asks clause by clause whether "the home jurisdiction's criteria are referred to in other jurisdictions" follows from this requirement of observability. Writing rules and having the rules one has written referred to in other jurisdictions are different facts. The former may be confirmed from the record of the home jurisdiction's own legislation; the latter may be confirmed only by examining the legislation, subordinate rules, and public procurement specifications of other jurisdictions. The burden of the diagnostic is greater in the latter, and that forms part of what Section 11.4 means in saying that "the recovery imposes a burden of measurement." 1185 G32 is the item that cuts across the results for the five components to detect divergence between self-declaration and observation. The error most readily made in the diagnostic of desirability is to record an asset the home jurisdiction regards as valuable as a source of desirability without obtaining corroboration in behaviour on the other side. This error, through overestimation of leverage, leaves preparation against changes of condition imposed from outside insufficient. G.4 Checklist for the Level of Development of Trust Infrastructure (Table G-3) Trust infrastructure (Definition 17) is at once the fifth component of desirability and, as Proposition 25 states, a condition prior to both the depth of the Utilization Model and the margin of the Transformation Model. Its inspection is therefore used not only as a diagnostic of leverage but also as an input to the diagnostic of position. Table G-3 is an item table confirming, for the three elements of Definition 17 — (i) rules for the allocation of liability (legislation), (ii) conformity assessment and certification, and (iii) insurance and compensation — the state of development sector by regulated sector (medicine, finance, transport, public procurement, critical infrastructure). It consists of fifteen items, three elements × five sectors. The inspection is made sector by sector because the development of the three elements does not proceed uniformly across sectors but proceeds by being grafted onto the existing institutions specific to each sector (medical device regulation, financial supervision, transport safety regulation, procurement legislation, critical infrastructure protection regimes). The existence of a comprehensive AI regulation is a different matter from the three elements being in place for a particular sector — this distinction is a point Section 11.3.5 recorded as an institutional fact, and inspection by sector is the method of building that distinction into the diagnostic. Table G-3. The level of development of trust infrastructure (the three elements of Definition 17 × five regulated sectors) # Sector Element Item to be confirmed Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be developed) G33 Medicine (i) Allocation of liability For losses arising from diagnostic or therapeutic judgments made using AI outputs, is the allocation of liability among medical practitioners, medical institutions, and suppliers settled in advance? The allocation may be identified from legislation, guidelines, or case law, and exists as a document practitioners may consult in advance G34 Medicine (ii) Conformity assessment For AI in medical uses, are the framework by which a third party certifies conformity and the requirements to which conformity is certified settled? Certification bodies are designated, the applicable standards and requirements are published, and there is a record of certificates actually issued 1186 # Sector Element Item to be confirmed Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be developed) G35 Medicine (iii) Insurance and compensation Are insurance products covering medical losses in which AI is involved in fact available for underwriting? Insurers that underwrite exist, the scope of cover and the exclusions are set out in the policy terms, and there is an underwriting record G36 Finance (i) Allocation of liability Is the allocation of liability for losses arising from AI outputs in credit, asset management, fraud detection, and the like settled as a matter of supervisory discipline? The location of management responsibility, the duty of explanation, and the duty to remedy may be identified from supervisory guidelines or legislation G37 Finance (ii) Conformity assessment Is a framework for third-party validation and audit of models (external validation within model risk management) institutionalized? The requirements for external validation are laid down in supervision, and there are qualification requirements for the parties conducting validation and a record of implementation G38 Finance (iii) Insurance and compensation Does insurance or a compensation scheme covering operational losses and systemic failures in which AI is involved exist? An insurer or an industry compensation fund exists, and the scope of cover and the conditions for activation are set out G39 Transport (i) Allocation of liability Is the allocation of liability for accidents in which AI has been involved in operation or control settled? The liabilities of the operator, the manufacturer, and the user may be identified from legislation, and the treatment in accident investigation procedures is settled G40 Transport (ii) Conformity assessment Are the frameworks of type approval for safety and of operating authorization developed in a form applicable to systems that include AI? Approval criteria are set out in writing for systems including AI, and there is a record of approvals G41 Transport (iii) Insurance and compensation Is underwriting of compulsory and voluntary insurance available for operations in which AI is involved? Underwriting criteria are settled, the basis for calculating premium rates is stated, and there is an underwriting record G42 Public procurement (i) Allocation of liability For losses arising from the outputs of procured AI, is the allocation of liability between the contracting authority and the contractor settled as a standard contractual clause? AI-related liability clauses are placed in the standard contract forms of government procurement, and there is a record of their application G43 Public pro‐ (ii) Conformity Are the content of the conformity required as a procurement re‐ Conformity requirements are set out expressly in the procurement 1187 # Sector Element Item to be confirmed Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be developed) curement assessment quirement and the method of demonstrating it published? specifications, and the form of the supporting documents is settled G44 Public procurement (iii) Insurance and compensation Is there a requirement that contractors carry liability insurance, and a procedure for confirming compliance? Carrying insurance is stated expressly as a condition of procurement, and the procedure for submitting and verifying the policy is settled G45 Critical infrastructure (i) Allocation of liability Is the allocation of liability, and the duties of operators, settled for cases in which AI is involved in the control of electricity, water, telecommunications, and the like? Responsibility for the operation of systems including AI may be identified in the legislation and standards on critical infrastructure protection G46 Critical infrastructure (ii) Conformity assessment Is there a framework of conformity assessment and review for introduction into core control systems? The party conducting the review, the criteria, and the frequency are settled, and there is a record of reviews G47 Critical infrastructure (iii) Insurance and compensation Is there a framework of insurance or public compensation covering losses from large-scale loss of function? The party providing the cover and its scope are set out, and the conditions and procedure for activation are settled For Table G-3 to be used directly in testing Proposition 25, three further kinds of record must be set alongside the fifteen items under the same sectoral division. First, the depth of AI deployment in the sector in question. Since Proposition 25 asserts that the depth of deployment is bounded above by the level of development of trust infrastructure, the test does not hold unless the depth of deployment is measured as the dependent variable. The depth of deployment is recorded as the distinction between remaining in peripheral tasks where liability is unlikely to be raised and extending to critical processes — a requirement is that what constitutes a critical process be identified in advance for each sector and that identification be fixed before the diagnostic is carried out. Changing the definition of critical processes after the fact prevents the test from holding. Second, the level of access to capability in the sector in question. Since Proposition 25 is asserted under the condition "even where access to capability is equal," access to capability must be recorded as a control variable. Third, the timing of development of the three elements. What Proposition 25 asserts is precedence, and precedence is observed as an order in time. Without a record of timing, a correlation between the level of development and the depth of deployment may be observed, but which precedes cannot be discriminated. That the development of the three elements is not synchronized should be observed frequently in the diagnostic. As Section 11.3.5 showed, the relation among the three elements 1188 is sequential, and element (i) is the point of departure — unless the allocation of liability is settled, conformity assessment cannot identify what conformity is being certified to, and unless conformity assessment holds, insurance can have no basis for underwriting. Where a sector is observed in which only element (ii) or element (iii) has been developed in advance, it should therefore be suspected that the development may extend no further than form. Conversely, a sector in which only element (i) has been developed stands at the correct stage in the sequence, and the development of the remaining two elements is identified as the task. This judgment concerning the sequence is one of the few design guides this diagnostic can give beyond a determination of high or low levels of development. G.5 An Illustration of Scoring and Weights — The Rule of the Minimum Distinguished From the Rule of Addition The item tables of G.2 to G.4 call for the presence or absence of a record and for a description, not for a score. In practice, however, at the stage of handling many candidates and many components, the requirement invariably arises that comparison and prioritization are impossible while matters remain as descriptions. This part gives one example of grading in response to that requirement. The scoring shown here is an illustration, and is a matter of design that each jurisdiction and each organization should adjust in its own context. This paper has not calibrated this scoring and has not validated the adequacy of the thresholds. Adopting the scoring as it stands is not the intention of this part. Indispensability — grading a group of items. An example is given of assessing, for a single candidate chokepoint, four representative items of Table G-1 on a three-point scale. (a) Number of alternative sources of supply (G4, G5): 3 = no alternative with effective spare capacity exists / 2 = alternatives exist but their spare capacity is limited / 1 = alternatives with spare capacity exist in several jurisdictions. (b) Time required to switch (G6, G7): 3 = several years to decades / 2 = around one year / 1 = within several months. (c) Quality degradation on switching (G9): 3 = not substitutable (does not meet the required level) / 2 = substitutable only for limited uses / 1 = no practical impediment. (d) Exercisability (G11, G12, G13): 3 = legal instruments are identified clause by clause, the holding entity is subject to the home jurisdiction, and treaty constraints have been dealt with / 2 = any one of these is lacking / 1 = there is no instrument, or holding is separated from the right of exercise. These four items must not be summed. Indispensability is defined as the cost that arises when other states seek to bypass the state (Definition 15). Bypass proceeds through the easiest route among the four items. Even for a candidate for which no alternative source of supply exists, for which switching takes several years, and for which quality degradation is severe, if exercisability is 1 (there is no instrument, or the holding entity is subject to another jurisdiction's authority), that candidate confers no power to push back in negotiation. For these four items, therefore, the level should be constrained by the lowest item rather than by a simple sum — the rule of the minimum. A sum carries the im‐ 1189 plication that a low item may be made good by a high one, and that implication is contrary to the structure of bypass. As a practical form of record, setting out the four grades side by side and recording alongside them "level of indispensability = min(a, b, c, d)" together with the name of the item that yields the minimum allows comparison without loss of information. That the name of the item yielding the minimum is recorded alongside is the point — it is the rate-limiting item that governs the durability of the candidate. By contrast, there are items that may be added. The number of independent candidates the state holds against the same other state operates additively. Candidates belonging to different process stages and different goods, whose routes of bypass do not overlap, each generate cost independently. Addition is nevertheless conditional on independence — several candidates depending on the same skill, the same location, or the same upstream input are not independent and should be counted as one candidate. The record of G10 (the mechanism sustaining the concentration) is used for this discrimination. Desirability — grading the five components. A similar distinction is required for the five components of Definition 15 (market, rules and standards, technology, capital, trust). An example is given of assessing each component on a three-point scale. 3 = there are several instances observed as behaviour on the other side, and the record remains in the form of clauses, contracts, siting decisions, and the like / 2 = the instances are single or intermittent / 1 = there is an assumption on the home side but nothing observed as behaviour on the other side (a component left blank in G32 of Table G-2). The logic of composition for the five components of desirability differs from that for the four items of indispensability. Because the reasons another state wishes to engage with the home jurisdiction may coexist in several forms, the components are substitutable, and a low value on one component does not cancel the value of the others. The five components may therefore be added. Two reservations attach, however. First, the component of trust has a part that operates as a condition for the effectiveness of the other components. Where deployment in regulated sectors is at issue, if the three elements of Definition 17 (rules for the allocation of liability, conformity assessment, insurance) are absent, neither the size of the market nor technology converts into depth of deployment (Proposition 25). In a diagnostic addressed to regulated sectors, therefore, the rule of the minimum is applied in addition for the component of trust alone — that is, treating the matter as "level of desirability in regulated sectors = min(trust, the sum of the other four components converted to a grade)" — which is consistent with the implications of Proposition 25. Second, where weights between components are set, those weights depend on the context of negotiation. The weight of the same asset changes according to what the other side seeks. Constructing a single table of weights independent of context is not supported by this framework (Section 11.1). How to read the scores — change and skew rather than absolute values. Finally, the discipline for reading where the scoring of this part is used. What is to be read is not the absolute value of the score but (i) change over time and (ii) skew between items. The

absolute values are not calibrated — a record of "indispensability = 2" is not a determination against an absolute threshold but only a relative position within the set of cases used for comparison (G.1). By contrast, the difference between records at two points in time prepared by the same method of recording carries information whether or not calibration has been performed. That the grade for time required to switch has fallen from 3 to 2, or that exercisability has fallen from 2 to 1, is in each case an observation of depreciation in the candidate — the post-exercise depreciation of which Proposition 23 speaks is observed in no other form. Skew between items carries information in the same way. A candidate in which only one of the four items is 1 is a candidate whose level would jump if investment were made in that one item, and carries entirely different policy implications from a candidate in which all four items are uniformly 2. A summed value erases this difference. Scores should therefore be used not as declarations of level but as detectors of change and as devices for identifying the rate-limiting item. It is also asked that the scoring of this part not be over-refined. Constructing a system that subdivides the grades from three to five or ten and fixes weights between components to two decimal places is technically possible, but such a system contradicts the position that this paper's measurement framework is provisional (G.1, Section 20). Making an uncalibrated indicator appear precise produces an illusion of precision and in fact damages the reliability of the diagnostic. The coarseness of three grades is also a device for displaying, on the side of form, that the framework is provisional. Subdivision of the grades should be carried out only for items whose discriminating power has been confirmed by retrospective validation, and only within the range confirmed. G.6 Position on the 2×2 and Movement From the records of Tables G-1 to G-3, it is determined where the home jurisdiction stands among the four quadrants of Section 11.5.2. The procedure of determination has the following four steps. Step one. Determine the level of indispensability. Among the candidates recorded in Table G-1, extract as "effective candidates" those that satisfy all three of the following conditions — (a) alternative suppliers are recorded in G4 as absent or few, (b) the time required to switch in G6 exceeds the policy decision cycle of the other state in the comparison of G7, and (c) legal instruments enabling exercise are identified in G11. Where one or more effective candidates exist, indispensability is determined to be "high." Where none exists, it is determined to be "low." This determination is recorded together with the discrimination of mechanism in G10 — because where an effective candidate is sustained by economies of scale alone, the determination of "high" carries an expiry of a few years. Step two. Determine the level of desirability. Among the five components of Table G-2, count the components for which corroboration observed as behaviour on the other side has been recorded. The point is to count only the components for which G32 is not blank. Where corroboration has been recorded for two or more components, desirability is de‐ 1191 termined to be "high." Where it is one or fewer, it is determined to be "low." Since the component of market operates as a multiplier on the other components (Section 11.3.1), where market alone is "high" and the other four components are "low," it is recorded alongside that desirability as a whole is fragile against a contraction of market size. Step three. Fix the quadrant. Where both indispensability and desirability are high, the Structurally Indispensable Type; where indispensability is low and desirability high, the Normative–Market Type; where indispensability is high and desirability low, the Bottleneck- Specialized Type; where both are low, the Dependent–Peripheral Type. The determination is recorded together with the "characteristic vulnerability" column of Table 17 (Section 11), and the vulnerability the home jurisdiction faces is identified. Step four. Set the result alongside the position on the nine cells (Appendix D, Block I). Where the two coordinates do not agree, that disagreement is what best characterizes the structure of the home jurisdiction (Section 11.9). Disagreement is not an error in the diagnostic but the ordinary state that Proposition 22 predicts. Next, the paths of movement to an adjacent quadrant are considered. There are two directions of movement, and the conditions they require differ fundamentally. The path of raising indispensability. This is the acquisition or deepening of a choke point. The time required is determined by the mechanism discriminated in G10. In a domain sustained by economies of scale alone, entry may be achieved within a few years by the injection of sufficient capital. In a domain sustained by learning effects and the accumulation of skill, it cannot be obtained by the injection of capital and requires the accumulation of years of operation — the time constant in that case is on the order of a decade. In a domain sustained by the physical conditions of location, acquisition is a function of geography and law and cannot be substituted by investment. Where this path is chosen, the first thing to be done is therefore to discriminate which mechanism sustains the domain the home jurisdiction seeks to acquire, and not to decide the amount of investment. As Section 11.3.3 states, what capital can buy is engagement, not indispensability. In addition, since indispensability once acquired is maintained only through continued operation (G16), this path means a standing commitment of cost rather than a single investment. The path of raising desirability. This runs through three routes: rules, trust infrastructure, and the inelasticity of the market. Of the three, the one most directly open to the home jurisdiction's own discretion is trust infrastructure — developing the elements of Table G-3 in order from element (i) can be carried out without presupposing the behaviour of other states. The route through rules requires a process leading to the home jurisdiction's criteria being referred to in other jurisdictions, and its success is conditioned on the size of the home market and on regulatory capacity (G17, G22). The inelasticity of the market is, in the short term, given. The practical point of departure for this path is therefore the settling of rules for the allocation of liability sector by regulated sector, and its effect extends through Proposition 25 to the depth of utilization as well. Since the compon‐ 1192 ents of desirability do not depreciate through exercise but grow stronger the more they are applied (Section 11.6.5), the cost of maintaining this path after acquisition is smaller than that of the path of indispensability. It nonetheless depreciates exogenously when the inelasticity of the market is lost, and may not therefore be left unattended. The importance of not pursuing both at once. The most practical implication this diagnostic gives lies in this point. The two paths overlap in the kinds of resources they require — both consume fiscal capacity, personnel, electricity, and administrative implementation capacity, and both require continuation on the order of years. Where finite resources are allocated half to each, the path of indispensability will not reach the required rate of accumulation, and on the path of desirability both the capacity to enforce rules and the development of trust infrastructure will remain half-finished. As Section 11.5.1 states, the two are different objective functions and are measured by different outputs. Where the two are designed as a single "AI strategy," it is likely that neither objective is achieved. The conclusion of the diagnostic must therefore contain an explicit decision as to which path is chosen. The materials for that decision are three — (a) the present quadrant fixed at step three, (b) the time constant of acquiring indispensability indicated by the discrimination of mechanism in G10, and (c) the present level of development of trust infrastructure shown by Table G-3. Where the present quadrant is the Dependent– Peripheral Type and the choke points that might be acquired are, in the discrimination of G10, all sustained by learning effects and skill, the path of indispensability has a time constant on the order of a decade and it is likely that the path of desirability yields results sooner. Conversely, where effective candidates are already held in a particular process, it may be rational to concentrate resources on maintaining and deepening those candidates. This paper gives no general solution — what it gives is a structural observation about the consequence of dispersion that arises where the decision is not made explicitly. Whichever path is chosen, investments belonging to the no-regret actions (Proposition 20, Section 16) are continued independently of the choice of path. National brain capital, exclusive domain data, value-definition capability, and operational readiness serve both the objective function of position and that of leverage, and are therefore not made objects of reduction in the allocation of resources. This point is the same as the principle Appendix F.4 establishes for the reconsideration of investment items. G.7 The Diagnostic of Capacity to Export Integrated Systems (Table G-4) The diagnostic up to G.6 was a stocktaking of the choke points the state holds (indispensability) and the grounds on which other states wish to engage with it (desirability). What this part adds is an item table inspecting whether the home jurisdiction may take one particular route belonging to the side of desirability — the export of integrated systems (Definition 20, Section 12). The reason for placing this item table in this appendix relates to G.6's listing of three routes for "raising desirability": rules, trust infrastructure, and the inelasticity of the market. Proposition 38 in Section 12 showed that the desirability formed through the export of integrated systems is a component that appreci‐ 1193 ates the more it is adopted — the opposite sign from indispensability, which depreciates through exercise (Proposition 23). The export of integrated systems is therefore not a fourth route distinct from the three G.6 listed, but a concrete form of desirability that appears when the development of rules and trust infrastructure comes to fruition in a particular domain of work, and whether its conditions of existence are satisfied must be inspected as part of the diagnostic of desirability. The four conditions to be inspected are formulated by Proposition 39 — (i) domain-specific national brain capital, (ii) trust infrastructure, (iii) a record of operation within the home jurisdiction, and (iv) portability. The content of the four conditions is set out verbatim in Section 12.3, and this part merely refers to it rather than repeating it. What this part gives are items for confirming, as a record, whether the home jurisdiction satisfies each of the four conditions. The allocation of items is not equal across the conditions. Items are placed thickly on (iv) portability because Proposition 39 holds (iv) to be the most constraining of the four conditions. Conditions (i) to (iii) are accumulations of capability, institutions, and record in the domain in question, and each may be written as an item asking "is it held?" Condition (iv), by contrast, asks whether what has been accumulated can be separated from the institutions of the home jurisdiction, and is determined independently of the amount accumulated. Proposition 39's statement that "the capacity to export is governed not by the height of capability but by the looseness of the coupling between capability and the institutions of the home jurisdiction" points to this independence. The inspection of (iv) is therefore constituted as the work of enumerating the constituent elements of the system and classifying what each element depends on — that is, as a stocktaking of dependencies. The classification of dependencies is divided into four: dependence on the legal system, dependence on language, dependence on convention, and dependence on particular equipment and standards. The four-way division does not claim to be exhaustive, but it is the minimum division that distinguishes, as different in kind, the forms in which obstacles to separation appear in practice — dependence on the legal system requires amendment of legislation or reading across into the recipient's legal system, dependence on language requires translation and reconstruction of the terminological system, dependence on convention requires alteration of the recipient's segmentation of work, and dependence on equipment and standards requires modification or recertification of standards; the work required and the order of magnitude of the cost are not the same. Table G-4 is applied repeatedly, once for each domain of work whose exportability is under consideration. No aggregation across domains is carried out. The four conditions of Proposition 39 are all domain-specific conditions, and a jurisdiction that satisfies the four conditions for one domain does not necessarily satisfy them for another. Table G-4. Diagnostic items for the capacity to export integrated systems (the four conditions of Proposition 39. Applied once for each domain of work) 1194 # Condition Diagnostic item Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be satisfied) G48 (i) Domainspecific national brain capital Is the accumulation of practice in the domain recorded as years of operation and as the thickness of the layer of those who carry it? The period at which operation in the domain began, the number of years of continuation, and the size of the personnel engaged in practice are recorded G49 (i) Domainspecific national brain capital Has a human layer capable of designing, verifying, and correcting the system — as distinct from operating it — been identified? For each of the functions of design, verification, and correction, the parties and personnel capable of taking responsibility are identified by name and distinguished from those who carry out operation G50 (ii) Trust infrastructure Are the three elements of Definition 17 in place for the domain in question? The record for the relevant sector in Table G-3 is reproduced for the domain, and none of the three elements is marked "not developed" G51 (ii) Trust infrastructure Is the sequence of the timing of development of the three elements recorded, with element (i) allocation of liability as the point of departure? The timing of development of each of the three elements is recorded by year and month, and it can be confirmed that element (i) precedes elements (ii) and (iii) G52 (iii) Record of operation within the home jurisdiction Are the period and the number of installations for which the system has operated within the home jurisdiction recorded? The date operation began, the present number of installations, and cumulative operating hours or number of transactions processed are recorded G53 (iii) Record of operation within the home jurisdiction Is the history of failures and corrections recorded event by event? For each deviation event, the date, content, causal analysis, corrective measure, and whether it recurred are recorded. A record that there were no events is not a history G54 (iii) Record of operation within the home jurisdiction Are the records held in a form that may be presented to the recipient or to a third party? The format of the records is settled, a procedure for removing sensitive information is established, and there is a record or a procedure for external presentation G55 (iv) Portability Have the constituent elements of the system been taken stock of as parts specific to the home jurisdiction and parts that may be separated? For each of the five elements of Definition 20, the constituent elements are enumerated and each is classified as "specific," "separable," or "not yet determined" G56 (iv) Portability — dependence on Has it been identified which parts of the system depend on the legislation, rules for the allocation of liab‐ The clauses depended on are enumerated clause by clause, and the response required for reading them across into the recipient's legal system (reading across, 1195 # Condition Diagnostic item Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be satisfied) the legal system ility, and licensing procedures of the home jurisdiction? substitute clauses, exemption) is described G57 (iv) Portability — dependence on language Has it been identified which parts of the terminological system, forms, records, and user-facing points depend on the language of the home jurisdiction? The language-dependent places are enumerated, and the parts for which translation suffices are distinguished from the parts requiring reconstruction of the terminological system itself G58 (iv) Portability — dependence on convention Has it been identified which parts of the segmentation of work, the allocation of authority among occupations, and the procedures on the ground depend on the conventions of the home jurisdiction? The segmentation of processes and the allocation of authority the system presupposes are set out in writing, and the location of presuppositions not set out in writing (tacit procedures) has been inspected G59 (iv) Portability — dependence on equipment and standards Has it been identified which parts of the standards referred to, the equipment connected to, and the data formats depend on standards specific to the home jurisdiction? A list of the standards referred to is compiled, the parts consistent with international standards are distinguished from the parts specific to the home jurisdiction, and the availability of alternatives is recorded for the latter G60 (iv) Portability For the parts determined to be separable, is the procedure for re-embedding into the recipient's institutions documented? The steps required for re-embedding (recertification of conformity, training, transitional operation) are described as a procedure, and the parties to carry them out are identified G61 (iv) Portability Has the cost of separation been estimated to an order of magnitude? For the four cost categories of modification, translation, recertification, and retraining, the cost and time required are estimated by order of magnitude (several months, around one year, several years), with the grounds of the estimate appended G62 Cross-cutting Are the conditions among the four that are not satisfied made explicit, and is the rate-limiting condition identified? The state of satisfaction of the four conditions is set out side by side, the unsatisfied conditions are made explicit, and it is determined whether (iv) is the ratelimiting condition Three notes on the operation of Table G-4. First, "not yet determined" in G55 is not to be replaced by a blank. Since a determination of separability includes a prediction of whether the element will function within the recipient's institutions, it is not settled at a stage prior to verification in the field. Recording this indeterminacy as "separable" distorts cost estimates systematically downward through overestimation of exportability. Leaving what is undetermined as undetermined, and identifying the work required to determine 1196 it (institutional investigation of candidate recipients, trial application) as a task, is of higher value as a record. This approach is the application to portability of the principle stated in G.1, that "recording higher than the reality is more harmful than recording lower than the reality." Second, the four-way division of G56 to G59 comprises items that discriminate the mode of separation rather than its possibility. In many cases any of these dependencies may be separated if the cost is paid. What is to be determined is not "can it be separated" but "what does separation require," and the cost estimate of G61 takes this up. There is nevertheless one exception — the part in which the judgment itself is inseparable from the legal effects of the home jurisdiction does not separate as a matter of principle rather than of cost. That Table 26 in Section 12 recorded the infrastructures of civil registration and taxation as "low in portability as a matter of principle" points to this distinction. In the record of G56, the point is to record separately, among dependencies on legislation, the parts that may be dealt with by reading across and the parts that cannot be dealt with because they are inseparable from legal effect. Third, the record of this table gives no judgment on the merits of export. What Table G-4 determines is the structural condition of whether the four conditions of Proposition 39 are satisfied, not whether export ought to be carried out. The merits of export depend on considerations outside this table — consideration, counterparty, the sensitivity of the domain, consistency with international undertakings. In particular, assessing export relations between particular states from the record of this table is a use that this paper's editorial policy (political neutrality) expressly excludes. This table is a tool for describing conditions, not a tool for assessing relations. On the recasting of the items for (iv) portability. The items belonging to (iv) portability in Table G-4 (G55 to G61) are constituted as a stocktaking of dependencies classifying what the constituent elements of the system depend on. In the light of Proposition 41 (Section 12.3.7) this construction does not by itself suffice. Proposition 41 formulates portability not as a question of "how thin are the dependencies" but as a question of whether the system is separated into a jurisdiction-specific layer and a portable core and whether the interface between them is made explicit. The two do not measure the same object — a stocktaking of dependencies is the work of estimating the volume of transplantation work by enumerating where dependencies lie, whereas inspection of the interface is the work of asking whether the range to be transplanted is settled in advance. As Proposition 41 showed, in a system whose interface is not made explicit, dependencies omitted from the enumeration appear at the point of transplantation even after dependencies have been enumerated (the third channel in Section 12.3.4). The inspection of (iv) must therefore be recast into an inspection of the explicitness of the interface, while including the stocktaking of dependencies as its first stage. Table G-6 in G.9 is that recasting. From here on, the diagnostic of portability is carried out by Table G-6, and Table G-4 is used as the inspection table for the three conditions (i) to (iii) and the cross-cutting item (G62). G55 to G61 are absorbed as sub-items of the first group of Table 1197 G-6 (G78 to G81), and existing cross-references — the four-way division referred to by G65 of Table G-5, and the handling categories of G.11 — are applied by reading them across to the corresponding items of Table G-6. This recasting neither loosens nor tightens the condition of portability. It shifts the framing of the question from the volume of dependencies to the presence or absence of a design for separation. G.8 The Procedure for Selecting the Procurement Mode (Table G-5) This part shifts the viewpoint to the side of procurement. The items up to G.7 were a diagnostic of what the home jurisdiction holds and what it may provide. What this part treats is the procedure for deciding what the home jurisdiction receives from outside, and in which mode. There are two reasons for placing this procedure in this appendix. First, among the three variables of Proposition 40 (the severity of the consequences of failure, the domain-specificity of judgment, and reversibility), variable (b) the domain-specificity of judgment is portability under Proposition 39(iv) seen from the recipient's side, and Tables G-4 and G-5 describe the same condition from the two sides (Section 12.6.3). Second, since choosing procurement of integrated systems for several domains generates at once an accumulation of desirability on the other side in those domains (Proposition 38) and the loss of opportunities to form national brain capital in the home jurisdiction (Proposition 24), it must be inspected as part of the diagnostic of leverage. The procedure consists of six steps. Step one, delimitation of the domain. The unit of application of Proposition 40 is a domain of work and not an individual procurement. As the third observation in Section 12.6.3 states, the implications of the choice of mode do not appear at the level of the individual procurement; they appear after decisions of the same kind have accumulated. The first task is therefore to raise the level of the decision from the procurement to the domain. Steps two to four, assessment of the three variables. (a), (b), and (c) are each assessed. Step five, application of the rule and decomposition into layers. Candidate modes are derived from the combination of the three variables, and the system is then decomposed into layers and a mode assigned to each layer. As the second observation in Section 12.6.3 states, many domains do not fit a pure single mode and require a mixture. Step six, inspection of the aggregate and confirmation of mitigation. The decisions by domain are aggregated, supplier concentration is inspected, and for domains in which (C) has been chosen it is confirmed whether the design of mitigation is settled at the time of procurement. Of these, the confirmation of mitigation at step six is the core of this table. Section 12.7.3 lists five means of mitigation and states of each that "mitigation for which the cost is not paid extends no further than form." Items for mitigation are placed in the diagnostic sheet in order to render the presence or absence of mitigation confirmable before the procurement decision. In particular, Section 12.7.3's statement that "these clauses may be negotiated only at the time of procurement" prescribes the timing of the inspection — G71 to G76 of Table G-5 make no sense as an inspection carried out after the conclusion of the contract. Once adoption has deepened, the bargaining power to add clauses has already 1198 been lost. This table is an inspection table that must be used prior to the procurement decision. Table G-5. The procedure for selecting the procurement mode (Proposition 40. Applied once for each domain of work. G71 to G76 are mandatory where (C) is chosen) # Step Procedure Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be complete) G63 Step one, delimitation of the domain Is the unit of decision delimited as a domain of work rather than as an individual procurement? A list of domains exists as a document, and the scope of each domain (the business processes covered) is described G64 Step two, assessment of (a) Have the losses arising where an error occurs in the domain been assessed in terms of effects on life, person, property, rights, and social function? The kinds and scale of effect are described, and a three-point assessment (low / medium / high) together with its grounds is recorded G65 Step three, assessment of (b) Has the extent to which judgment in the domain depends on the institutions, language, and conventions of the home jurisdiction been assessed? The location of dependencies is described along the four-way division of G56 to G59 of Table G-4, and a three-point assessment together with its grounds is recorded G66 Step four, assessment of (c) Has it been assessed whether errors may be detected, reversed, and restored? The means of restoration and the time required are described, the presence of consequences that cannot be restored is made explicit, and a three-point assessment is recorded G67 Step five, application of the rule Have candidate modes been derived from the levels of the three variables, and is the process of derivation recorded? The result of applying the rule of Proposition 40 ((a) low → (B) / (b) high → (A) / (a) high and (b) low and (c) low → (C)) is recorded, together with the reasons for the judgment where the rule does not determine a mode uniquely G68 Step five, decomposition into layers Is the system decomposed into layers, with a mode assigned to each layer? A mode is stated for each layer of the division (capability, integration design, allocation of liability, demonstration of conformity, operation), and the reason a mixture is required is described G69 Step six, inspection of the aggregate Where (C) has been chosen for several domains, has supplier concentration been inspected? The list of domains for which (C) was chosen and the supplier for each are set out side by side, and the number of domains depending on the same supplier is aggregated (Propositions 7 and 37) G70 Step six, inspection of the aggregate Is the possibility of changing mode recorded together with the time constant in each direction? The period required to move from (C) to (A) is estimated by order of magnitude, and the asymmetry with the reverse direction (Proposition 15) is recorded 1199 # Step Procedure Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be complete) G71 Step six, mitigation of (C) Is the reservation of audit rights to the home jurisdiction laid down as a contractual clause? The four items of full access to records, verification of operating conditions, prior notice of updates and an opportunity to evaluate, and an obligation to report deviation events exist as clauses G72 Step six, mitigation of (C) Is a human layer capable of exercising the audit rights in place? The staff and number of personnel conducting inspections are identified, and an annual plan of implementation is established. Where there are rights but no staff, this is recorded as "form" G73 Step six, mitigation of (C) Is the reservation of authentic data (Definition 16) to the home jurisdiction laid down? Three points are laid down in the contract: (1) storage within the home jurisdiction, (2) the scope of independent use not requiring the supplier's permission, and (3) retention in a form that remains transferable on a change of system G74 Step six, mitigation of (C) Is a plan for staged internalization laid down at the time of procurement? The five items of the processes to be internalized, the deadline, the method of developing personnel, the method of measuring progress, and the measures on delay are set out in a planning document G75 Step six, mitigation of (C) Are the objects of internalization selected as processes that include judgment and verification? It is identified which among the handling of exceptional events, causal analysis of deviations, design of corrective measures, and evaluation and re-evaluation of performance are the objects of internalization G76 Step six, mitigation of (C) Are portability clauses placed in the contract? The five items of conformity of the interface to published standards, standardization of record formats, transferability of data, the scope of technical documentation provided, and duties of cooperation during a transition period exist as clauses G77 Step six, record of the decision Is the choice of (C) made explicitly at the level of the domain and recorded together with its implications? The date of the decision, the decision-maker, the domain covered, and an acknowledgment of the loss of opportunities to form national brain capital in that domain (Proposition 24) are recorded Three notes on the operation of Table G-5. First, the paired items G71 and G72, and G74 and G75, are always recorded together. A state in which only one of a pair is satisfied — writing audit rights into a contract while placing no staff to conduct inspections, or drawing up a plan of internalization while setting its objects on processes of simple operation — has the outward form of mitigation but not its substance (Section 12.7.3). As a matter of the diagnostic sheet, it is recommended that where one of a pair is unsatisfied, the de‐

termination for that mitigation be recorded as "form." This form of record follows the same thought as the rule of the minimum that G.5 adopted for the four items of indispensability — the effectiveness of mitigation is constrained by its weakest constituent. Second, the portability clauses of G76 pair with G56 to G59 of Table G-4. The stocktaking of portability for the exporting side appears, for the recipient side, as the design of the unit of procurement (Section 12.6.3). That is, procuring a system that has not been separated means abandoning the very option of choosing a mode layer by layer (G68). G68 and G76 are therefore divided between steps five and six in sequence, but in practice they are considered together — because the possibility of separation governs the possibility of decomposition into layers. Third, this table does not determine the merits of a mode. What Table G-5 gives is a procedure for applying the rule that derives candidate modes from the assessment of the three variables, together with a list of matters to be confirmed where (C) is chosen. The rule of Proposition 40 does not determine a unique mode for domains in which the levels of the three variables are intermediate — many of the domains appearing in Table 26 of Section 12 fall here, and a mixture is recommended for each. The judgment where the rule does not determine a unique mode belongs to the context of each jurisdiction. That G67 calls for a record of "the reasons for the judgment where the rule does not determine a mode uniquely" presupposes that judgment itself cannot be replaced by a rule. A reservation common to both tables — do not refine them. The position stated in G.5 applies as it stands to Tables G-4 and G-5 as well. The items and guides shown here are illustrations, and are matters of design that each jurisdiction and each organization should adjust in its own context. This paper has not calibrated these items and has not validated the adequacy of the thresholds of satisfaction. In particular, constructing a system that subdivides the three-point assessments of the three variables (a), (b), and (c) into five or ten points, fixes weights between the variables, and derives the mode mechanically is technically possible but contradicts this paper's position. As Section 12.6.2 states explicitly, this paper presents no quantitative scale for the three variables — what it presents is a rule deriving the mode from the combination of levels, and the application of the rule involves the judgment of each jurisdiction. Making an uncalibrated indicator appear precise produces an illusion of precision and in fact damages the reliability of the diagnostic (G.5). In addition, in the light of the constraint of administrative capacity of which Proposition 36 in Section 19 speaks, a framework demanding refined measurement issues in non-implementation, formalization, or delay. The coarseness of three grades is at once a device for displaying on the side of form that the framework is provisional, and a requirement of feasibility. One final point on the relation between Tables G-4 and G-5. The first observation in Section 12.6.3 noted that the exportable domain on the supply side and the domain suited to (C) on the demand side are delimited by the same conditions. This identity may be confirmed at the level of the diagnostic by setting the two tables side by side — where G56 to G59 of Table G-4 record for a domain that "dependencies specific to the 1201 home jurisdiction are thin," G65 of Table G-5 should record for the same domain that "(b) domain-specificity is low." Where the two diverge, either one of the assessments is in error, or the determination of specificity to the home jurisdiction is being made by different criteria in the export setting and in the procurement setting. Carrying out this reconciliation after the two tables have been filled in independently makes it function as an inspection of the consistency of the assessments. G.9 The Diagnostic of the Explicitness of the Interface (Table G-6) This part gives an item table recasting, along Proposition 41 (Section 12.3.7), the inspection of portability that G.7 placed as (iv) of Table G-4. The reason for the recasting was stated at the end of G.7. What the inspection comes to ask is fixed here first. The shift in the question. Proposition 41 states that the two conflicting requirements of embedding and portability are jointly attainable only where the system is separated into (a) a jurisdiction-specific layer and (b) a portable core and the interface between them is explicitly defined. That joint attainment has the explicitness of the interface as a necessary condition means, seen from the side of the diagnostic, that the inspection of portability is not a measurement of "how thin are the dependencies" but an inspection of "whether a design for separation has been carried out and exists as a document." This shift has three consequences. First, the object of inspection becomes not the system itself but the design documents — that the interface is made explicit means that which elements belong to which layer, and by what the two layers connect, is settled at the level of design documents (Section 12.3.7). Second, the inspection must detect divergence between outward form and substance. As the first limitation of Proposition 41 names, declaring an interface without paying the cost creates a state in which the two layers are separated in the design documents while dependencies are scattered across the layers in the implementation, and a system in that state behaves in the same way as a system with no interface. Items asking after the existence of a specification and items asking after separation in implementation must therefore be established as pairs. Third, the inspection does not determine whether the position of the interface is correct. As the second limitation of Proposition 41 states, where the interface is to be drawn differs by domain, and this paper gives no rule for fixing the position. What Table G-6 asks is whether an interface has been drawn, whether its position was chosen deliberately, and whether the reason for the choice is recorded — not whether that position is correct. The composition of the item groups. Table G-6 consists of eight groups. The first group (G78 to G81) is identification of the two layers and the location of the interface, and absorbs G55 to G61 of Table G-4 (the stocktaking of dependencies). The second group (G82 to G85) is separation of business logic, verification procedures, quality assurance, and allocation of liability, corresponding to the four elements Section 12.3.7 enumerated as the content of the portable core. The third group (G86 to G88) is the interface of modularized conformity assessment. The fourth group (G89 and G90) is contract templates for the allocation of liability covering multiple jurisdictions. The fifth group (G91 and 1202 G92) is separation of language. The sixth group (G93 to G96) is response to requirements of the recipient concerning the handling of data, corresponding to the encapsulation of Section 12.3.5(vi). The seventh group (G97 to G99) is the record of operation in other jurisdictions. The eighth group (G100 and G101) is cross-cutting inspection. As with Table G-4, it is applied repeatedly once for each domain of work, and no aggregation across domains is carried out. Table G-6. Diagnostic items for the explicitness of the interface (Proposition 41. Applied once for each domain of work. A recasting of the items for (iv) portability in Table G-4) # Group Diagnostic item Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be satisfied) G78 Identification of the two layers Is it identified as a document which parts of the system are the jurisdiction-specific layer and which are the portable core? A list of constituent elements exists, each element is classified as "jurisdiction-specific layer," "portable core," or "not yet determined," and the date of classification and the party who carried it out are recorded. "Not yet determined" is not replaced by a blank (the first caution in G.7) G79 Identification of the two layers Is the interface itself — by what the two layers connect — described as a specification? The information, calls, and records passed between the layers are enumerated, and the format and meaning of each item are laid down in a document. Where there is only a list of layers and no description of the connection, the item is unsatisfied G80 Identification of the two layers Is the specification of the interface placed under a procedure by which it is updated at each revision of the system? A step confirming the consistency of the interface specification is built into the revision procedure, and there is a record that this step was carried out at the most recent revision G81 Identification of the two layers Is the separation in the design documents maintained in the implementation as well (are dependencies not scattered across the layers)? References from elements belonging to the portable core to jurisdiction-specific elements are counted, the places where references remain are enumerated as exceptions, and for each exception either a plan for resolution or the reason for not resolving it is recorded G82 Separation of the portable core Is the skeleton of the business logic separated from direct references to the provisions of the home jurisdiction's legislation? The design documents are divided into a description of "what is to be achieved" and a description of "which statutory requirements are met and how," the latter being composed as a substitutable annex (Section 12.3.5(ii)) G83 Separation of the portable core Are the verification procedures — what is confirmed at what frequency, which deviations are detected at which thresholds, and how they are corrected — described independently of the su‐ The document laying down the content of verification is separate from the document laying down the format of submission to the authorities (Section 12.3.5(iv)) 1203 # Group Diagnostic item Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be satisfied) pervisory forms of the home jurisdiction? G84 Separation of the portable core Is the skeleton of the quality assurance procedure — the matters to be recorded, the procedure for designing corrective measures, the triggers for re-evaluation — separated from the forms specific to the home jurisdiction? The definition of the items to be recorded and the definition of the format of the forms are placed in separate documents, and it is shown as a procedure that substituting the format does not entail revision of the skeleton G85 Separation of the portable core As to the allocation of liability, are the substantive allocation and the legal construction documented separately? The arrangement of who makes which judgment and who bears the outcome (the substance), and the contractual types and clauses that realize it (the legal construction), exist as separate documents (Section 12.3.5(iii)) G86 Interface of conformity assessment Does an interface of modularized conformity assessment — a specification separating certification requirements into jurisdiction-specific requirements and common requirements — exist? The list of requirements is divided into "common" and "jurisdiction-specific," the correspondence of the common requirements with international standards is shown, and the jurisdiction-specific requirements are gathered as a unit of substitution G87 Interface of conformity assessment Are the content of the records evidencing conformity and the format of submission separated? A definition document for the items to be recorded and a definition document for the format of submission exist separately, and it is confirmed that a change of format does not require a change to the items recorded G88 Interface of conformity assessment Are the results of assessments obtained for the common requirements held in a form that may be reused in other jurisdictions? There is a record of an investigation into the institutions of candidate recipient jurisdictions as to whether reuse is possible. What this item asks after is the existence of the investigation, not an assertion that reuse is possible G89 Contract templates Is a contract template for the allocation of liability covering multiple jurisdictions prepared? A template exists and is divided into a body independent of jurisdiction and annexes substituted jurisdiction by jurisdiction. A copy of a contract drafted for a single jurisdiction is not a template G90 Contract templates Has the template undergone legal review under several legal systems? The number of jurisdictions in which review was carried out, and the timing, are recorded. This item asks after the existence of review and does not guarantee validity in the jurisdiction in question G91 Separation of language Are the language-dependent parts — terminology, forms, response text to users — separated from the parts that are not dependent? Terminology, forms, and response text are factored out of the logic of the system as external resources, and it has been inspected 1204 # Group Diagnostic item Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be satisfied) that no character strings are embedded on the side of the logic G92 Separation of language As to the terminological system, are the parts for which translation suffices distinguished from the parts requiring reconstruction of the concepts themselves? The list of terms is marked with this distinction, and for the latter the work required for reconstruction is described (G57 of Table G-4 reread in the vocabulary of the interface) G93 Handling of data Is a configuration in which execution of the system and storage of the data arising in the course of execution take place on facilities within the recipient's jurisdiction possible by design? A configuration for execution on local facilities is described in the design documents as an option, and the requirements for the necessary facilities are identified G94 Handling of data Are remote audit rights defined within a scope that does not require the crossing of borders by the raw data? For the four items of querying settings, confirming version identity, obtaining aggregate performance indicators, and receiving notification of deviation events, the scope of information leaving the jurisdiction is made explicit (Section 12.3.5(vi)) G95 Handling of data Can supply be made to several jurisdictions with differing requirements concerning the handling of data by substituting only the configuration inside the capsule? The unit of substitution is identified and the work required for substitution is described as a procedure. This item asks after the capacity to respond to the structural fact that there are jurisdictions in which such requirements exist, and does not assess the merits of those requirements G96 Handling of data Are the costs entailed by encapsulation estimated by order of magnitude, and is the allocation of the burden recognized as a matter for negotiation? For the three cost categories of developing local facilities, building and maintaining the mechanism of remote audit, and managing configurations jurisdiction by jurisdiction, the cost and time required are estimated by order of magnitude. The merits of the allocation are not an object of determination in this table G97 Record of operation Is there a record of operation in other jurisdictions — how many jurisdictions and how many years? The number of jurisdictions transplanted to, and the date operation began and the number of years of continuation in each, are recorded. Where there is no record, "none" is recorded. "None" is not a loss of points; it means a state in which the ex ante determination must rest on inspection of design documents (Appendix E.7) G98 Record of operation Where there is a record of transplantation, are the time and cost For each jurisdiction, the elements substituted, the time required, and the cost are recorded under the four cost categories of modification, translation, recertification, and 1205 # Group Diagnostic item Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be satisfied) required recorded by cost category? retraining, and for the second and subsequent instances the difference from the first is recorded G99 Record of operation Are the points that failed to function in transplantation — dependencies not recognized in advance as jurisdiction-specific — recorded and reflected in the specification of the interface? There is a list of the dependencies that had not been recognized and a record of the revision of the interface specification made in response. Since this record can be created only after the fact, it is created at the time of transplantation G100 Cross-cutting Has the divergence between the outward form and the substance of the interface been inspected? "The interface is made explicit" is recorded only where both G79 (existence of the specification) and G81 (separation in implementation) are satisfied; where only one is satisfied, "outward form only" is recorded G101 Cross-cutting Has the position of the interface been inspected for being both too shallow and too deep? Elements included in the portable core about which there is concern that they will not function on the recipient's side, and elements pushed into the jurisdiction-specific layer that could be made common, are each enumerated. A determination of the merits of the position is not given by this table (the second limitation in Section 12.3.7) Four notes on the operation of Table G-6. First, the form of record "outward form only" in G100 is the core of this table. The first limitation of Proposition 41 states that a system that declares an interface without paying the cost behaves in the same way as a system with no interface. If a diagnostic asked only after the presence or absence of a declaration of an interface, that diagnostic would record every system that had made a declaration as portable, producing a record higher than the reality. The principle of this appendix that the harm of recording higher than the reality exceeds the harm of recording lower (G.1) operates most strongly here — an excessive record concerning the explicitness of the interface distorts estimates of the cost of transplantation systematically downward, and that distortion does not become apparent until transplantation is attempted. G79 and G81 are therefore always recorded as a pair, and where only one is satisfied the interface for that domain is recorded as "outward form only." This form of record rests on the same thought as the rule of the minimum G.5 adopted for the four items of indispensability and as the treatment of the pair G71 and G72 in Table G-5. Second, the group of G97 to G99 on the record of operation differs from the other groups in its point of observation. Whereas G78 to G96 are all items that may be inspected in advance — inspection of design documents and contract templates — G97 to G99 can be recorded only after transplantation has been carried out. Before the first 1206 transplantation, every item of this group will be "none." The point is not to treat this blank as a deficiency. The absence of a record does not mean that portability is low — a record fails to arise from the absence of demand as well. Conversely, the presence of a record does not immediately mean that portability is high — a record appears as the product of portability and demand. This group is positioned as a record for validating after the fact the adequacy of the ex ante inspection (G78 to G96). Where an element classified as "portable core" in the ex ante inspection fails to function at the point of transplantation (G99), that fact is evidence of an error in the classification and must be reflected in the specification of the interface. The provisional proposal for measuring portability is placed in Appendix E.7 (Table E-8). The relation between this table and E. 7 is that this table records the presence of design and E.7 constructs indicators from that record. Third, in the record of G95, do not touch on the merits of the regulation of a jurisdiction. That there are jurisdictions in which requirements to retain data within the jurisdiction exist as an institution, and that there are jurisdictions that have laid down frameworks for pursuing liability for the processing of such data, are both observed structural facts (the fifth channel in Section 12.3.4). What this table asks after is the capacity by design of a system to respond to such requirements, not the propriety of the requirements themselves. Describing the regulation of a particular jurisdiction in the diagnostic sheet as "excessive," "unreasonable," "protectionist," and the like is a use that this paper's editorial policy (political neutrality) expressly excludes. What is to be recorded extends only to the content of the requirement and to the configuration and cost required to meet it. This discipline is of the same character as the third caution on Table G-4 (that this table does not judge the merits of export). Fourth, do not refine this table either. The items and guides shown here are illustrations, and are matters of design that each jurisdiction and each organization should adjust in its own context. This paper has not calibrated these items and has not validated the adequacy of the thresholds of satisfaction. In particular, aggregating the number of the twenty-four items satisfied to construct a composite indicator such as a "degree of interface explicitness," and ranking jurisdictions or systems by its value, contradicts this paper's position. That the measurement framework for portability is provisional is acknowledged in Section 20.8(i), and while Proposition 41 has narrowed the scope of that acknowledgment it has not removed it (Appendix E.7). Aggregating uncalibrated items to make them appear precise produces an illusion of precision and in fact damages the reliability of the diagnostic (G.5). The use of this table is the same as the discipline G. 5 stated for scores — what is to be read is not the absolute number of items satisfied but the change over time (what has moved to satisfied since the previous inspection) and the skew between groups (which group alone remains unsatisfied). A record showing that, for a given domain, the second through fifth groups are satisfied while only the sixth group (handling of data) is unsatisfied says far more than a record showing that twenty of the twenty-four items are satisfied. 1207 G.10 Distinguishing Lock-in From Indispensability (Table G-7) The purpose of this part is stated first. The purpose of Table G-7 is to distinguish whether what the home jurisdiction has obtained in a particular domain is lock-in or indispensability. More precisely, it is not to mistake a high level of lock-in for indispensability. This misidentification is not merely a technical flaw in a diagnostic. A jurisdiction that has so mistaken records itself as holding bargaining power it does not hold, and will make choices on the basis of that record. Why the misidentification occurs. As Proposition 42(i) (Section 12.5.6) shows, the two concepts differ in the subject of their question. Indispensability (Definition 15) is the property of "whether a third party can bypass the entity in question," and lock-in is the property of "whether a party already engaged can leave." The former is asked of the whole system, including those not currently transacting with the entity; the latter is asked of a particular counterparty currently in a relationship. Since the two questions are posed of different sets, it is possible both logically and empirically for one to be at a high level while the other is at a low level. The misidentification occurs because both are accompanied by the same felt sense that "the other party finds it hard to leave." A counterparty whose adoption of the integrated system has deepened does in fact find it hard to leave. The inference from that felt sense to indispensability is the inference Proposition 42(i) denies. A high level of lock-in does not constitute evidence of indispensability unless accompanied by an indicator of supplier concentration — this is the rule of measurement Proposition 42(i) derived, and this table is the device that implements that rule at the level of individual items. Three consequences of the misidentification are made explicit. First, counting negotiation by cutting off supply among one's options. A position resting on indispensability may exercise bargaining power by restricting supply. A position resting on desirability cannot do so — as Section 12.5.3 stated, on the side of desirability the sign of strategy is inverted, and it is being adopted, not closing off, that forms the asset. A jurisdiction that has mistaken lock-in for indispensability counts an exercise it cannot perform among its options. Second, neglecting investment in portability. Under the logic of indispensability, keeping the interface unpublished and enclosing the system looks like defence. Under the logic of desirability, it is an act that halts the formation of the asset itself (Section 12.1.7). The misidentification causes this sign to be mistaken. Third, underestimating the appearance of alternative suppliers. Where what separates entrants is a wall of time, that wall may be crossed by several jurisdictions in parallel (Section 12.5.6). A diagnostic that reads a high level of lock-in as evidence of indispensability drops this parallel progression from the objects of monitoring. In order to detect these misidentifications, Table G-7 is constructed so as to place the items measuring lock-in and the items measuring indispensability in separate columns, and expressly to prohibit the inference connecting the two. The relation to Table G-1 (the diagnostic of indispensability) is as follows — whereas Table G-1 is applied to candidate chokepoints held by the home jurisdiction generally, this table is applied to a 1208 domain of work in which the export of integrated systems is being carried out (or is to be carried out), and determines on which of the two components of leverage the home jurisdiction's position in that domain rests. Some of the items (G105, G106) bring the logic of Table G-1 into this domain, and are an application rather than a duplication. Table G-7. Diagnostic items for distinguishing lock-in from indispensability (Proposition 42. Applied once for each domain of work in which the export of integrated systems is carried out) # Group Diagnostic item Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be satisfied) G102 Record of lock-in Are the recipient's switching costs estimated by cost category? For the three cost categories of migration of data, redefinition of the responsible party (re-conclusion of contracts and insurance, consultation with the authorities), and retraining on the ground, the time required and the cost are recorded by order of magnitude (Section 12.5.6) G103 Record of lock-in Is the record of switching costs placed in a separate column from the record of indispensability? In the format of the diagnostic sheet the column for lock-in and the column for indispensability are separated, and it can be confirmed that there is no trace of one record having been derived from the other G104 Number of suppliers Has the number of entities capable of supplying a system of the same kind in the domain been counted? Candidate alternative suppliers are enumerated by name, and for each candidate the presence or absence of a record of supply is recorded. The distinction between zero, one, and more than one candidate is the minimum information G105 Number of suppliers Is concentration measured for the number of entities capable of supplying rather than the number of counterparties currently transacting? The number of existing relationships and the number of entities capable of entering are aggregated separately. Where only the former is recorded, the item is unsatisfied (the same logic as G4 of Table G-1) G106 Number of suppliers Has the kind of wall separating entrants been discriminated — whether it arises from the scale of capital and the difficulty of reproducing the process, or from the accumulation of time? The record of G10 of Table G-1 (the mechanism sustaining concentration) is reproduced for the domain, and where it is a wall of time the determination that "several jurisdictions may cross it in parallel" is stated expressly (Section 12.5.6) G107 Counteraction on the recipient's side Has the presence or absence of moves toward internalization on the recipient's side been observed? Whether any of a plan for internalization, a budget, an assignment of personnel, or a change of procurement requirements is observed as behaviour on the other side is recorded. Conjectures on the home jurisdiction's side are not included in the record (the same discipline as Table G-2) G108 1209 # Group Diagnostic item Guide to the determination (conditions under which it may be said to be satisfied) Counteraction on the recipient's side Has the presence or absence of moves toward plural sourcing on the recipient's side been observed? Whether several systems are operated in parallel for the same domain, or whether suppliers are dispersed by dividing the domain, is recorded G109 Counteraction on the recipient's side Has the presence or absence of the institutionalization of requirements of portability on the recipient's side been observed? The presence or absence of the fact that requirements for procurement in the domain generally — conformity of the interface to published standards, standardization of record formats, transferability of data — have been laid down, as distinct from negotiation in an individual procurement, is recorded. Since institutionalized requirements operate even after adoption has deepened, they are recorded separately from individual negotiation (Section 12.5.7) G110 Record of the upper bound Are the three variables of the upper bound in Proposition 42(ii) recorded domain by domain? The three of (a) the national brain capital remaining on the recipient's side in the domain, (b) the existence of alternative suppliers, and (c) the severity of the consequences of failure in the domain are described, and it is recorded that (a) and (b) act to lower the upper bound while (c) acts to raise it G111 Determination Does the description of the home jurisdiction's position make explicit whether it rests on lock-in or on indispensability? Where there is a statement that "in this domain the home jurisdiction is indispensable," it can be confirmed that its grounds are supported by the records of G104 and G105. A claim of indispensability grounded only on the record of switching costs (G102) is treated in this table as a mis-record G112 Determination Has it been inspected whether the pursuit of selfreinforcement is inviting counteraction? Where any of keeping the interface unpublished, making record formats proprietary, or making training content specific to the system is being carried out, whether it is appearing as requirements of portability, requirements for retaining data within the jurisdiction, or clauses obliging internalization on the recipient's side is recorded (Section 12.5.8) G113 Determination Does the record of this table extend no further than a description of structural position? The record is written in terms of position as exporting side or importing side, and contains no description touching on particular states, governments, or the merits of their policies (Section 12.8.3; the editorial policy in Section 1) Three notes on the operation of Table G-7. First, G111 is the item of determination in this table. The other eleven items are no more than an inspection of the materials that make that determination hold. The form of the determination is as follows — only where switching costs are high (G102) and the number of entities capable of supplying is small (G104, G105) may the home jurisdic‐ 1210

tion's position in the domain be recorded as resting on indispensability. Where switching costs are high and the number of entities capable of supplying is large, what should be recorded is lock-in and not indispensability. The combination of low switching costs and few suppliers also holds (Section 12.5.6), and the record in that case is that indispensability is high and lock-in low. The fact that all four combinations may exist must be displayed by the format of the diagnostic sheet itself — that is why G103 calls for the separation of the columns. A diagnostic sheet that merges the two components into a single column cannot record this four-way division and therefore cannot detect the misidentification. Second, the group of counteraction in G107 to G109 comprises items that record observations unfavourable to the home jurisdiction. The incentive not to record therefore operates structurally. A record that the recipient is advancing internalization indicates a future decline in the home jurisdiction's position in that domain. As Proposition 42(ii) states, however, counteraction does not arise because a particular counterparty is hostile; it arises from the structure whereby a rise in switching costs gives an entity placed in the position of recipient an inducement to recover autonomy. A record of counteraction is not an assessment of the counterparty but an observation of the consequences of the design the home jurisdiction has adopted. In addition, observation in this group is subject to the same discipline as Table G-2 (the diagnostic of desirability) — only facts observed as behaviour on the other side may be recorded, and conjectures as to intent are not included in the record. A statement that "the other party intends to recover autonomy" is not an item of this table. A statement that "a budget for internalization has been appropriated for the domain" is an item of this table. Third, for this table too, the items and guides are illustrations and are matters of design that each jurisdiction and each organization should adjust in its own context. This paper has not calibrated these items and has not validated the adequacy of the thresholds of satisfaction. In particular, this paper gives no concrete threshold for the number of alternative suppliers in G104 — how many or more entities entail that indispensability does not hold. Since Definition 15 defines indispensability as the cost of bypass, the threshold depends on the feasibility of bypass in the domain in question and is not fixed independently of the domain. What this table gives is the rule that what is to be counted is not "the number of counterparties transacting" but "the number of entities capable of supplying," and not a determination as to the level of that number. This point is the application to this table of the position G.5 stated on scoring — that making an uncalibrated indicator appear precise produces an illusion of precision. It is also asked that assessment be kept to the coarseness of three grades, and that no total of items satisfied be constructed. G.11 The Order of Implementation of the Diagnostic and Cautions Order of implementation. It is preferable that this diagnostic be carried out with Appendices D and F in the following order. First, carry out Block I of Appendix D (determination 1211 of cell position) — unless where the state stands on the nine cells has been fixed, there is nothing alongside which to set the results of the leverage diagnostic. Second, carry out G.2 to G.4 of this appendix. Third, grade each item by G.5 of this appendix, fix the quadrant by G.6, and set the result alongside the result of Block I. Fourth, carry out Block VI of Appendix D (transition diagnostic) — the judgment as to which direction the position is moving gains in precision when made in the light of the present state of leverage. Fifth, connect to the quarterly review of Appendix F (the scenario monitoring indicator table). As Section 11.6.4 states, the scale of investment in the search for alternatives and the movement of chokepoint concentration function as leading indicators for the scenarios, so that G15 of Table G-1 (the record of exercise and depreciation) gives a direct input to the updating of the indicators in Appendix F. The place of G.7 and G.8. Tables G-4 and G-5 connect to the above order as follows. Table G-4 (capacity to export integrated systems) is carried out after the determination of desirability at the third step, confined to particular domains. Unless the stocktaking of the five components of desirability (Table G-2) has been completed, the level of rules and trust infrastructure for the domain will not have been fixed and the inspection of Proposition 39(ii) will be left blank. The domains made the object of implementation may be confined to those appearing in G25 of Table G-2 (technologies, components, and processes other states wish to obtain) and G31 (instances of being treated as a place where deployment in regulated sectors is in fact possible) — applying Table G-4 to all domains is not realistic in the light of the constraint of administrative capacity (Proposition 36). Table G-5 (selection of the procurement mode) is carried out independently of the above order, prior to each procurement decision. It differs from the other tables in being applied at the point at which the procurement policy for a domain is fixed, rather than being placed on an annual diagnostic cycle. G69 (supplier concentration) and G70 (possibility of changing mode) of Table G-5 are, however, items of aggregation, and these are carried out in the annual diagnostic in the form of aggregating the decisions made by domain during that year. The place of G.9 and G.10. Tables G-6 and G-7 connect to the above order as follows. Table G-6 (explicitness of the interface) is carried out on the same occasion as Table G-4, for the same domain of work. The two tables cannot be separated — Table G-4 inspects (i) to (iii) and Table G-6 inspects (iv), and only together do they complete the inspection of the four conditions of Proposition 39. The cross-cutting item G62 of Table G-4 (identification of the rate-limiting condition) is therefore determined after Table G-6 has been filled in. The seventh group of Table G-6 (G97 to G99, the record of operation in other jurisdictions) is, however, recorded at the time of transplantation. That it is a record which can be created only after the fact and is difficult to reconstruct afterwards is the same as for G53 of Table G-4 (the history of failures and corrections). Table G-7 (distinguishing lock-in from indispensability) is carried out only for domains in which the export of integrated systems is in fact being carried out. In domains with no record of export, neither G102 (switching costs) nor G107 to G109 (counteraction on the recipient's side) has an object of observation. The timing of implementation is annual, and it is 1212 preferable that it be carried out on the same occasion as the annual updating of Table G-1 (the diagnostic of indispensability) — because G106 calls for the record of G10 of Table G-1 to be reproduced, and because the determination of Table G-7 (G111) is a determination as to which component of leverage the home jurisdiction's position in the domain rests on, and carries no meaning unless reconciled with the stocktaking of Tables G-1 and G-2. There is one exception to this order. Table G-3 (trust infrastructure) may be commenced without waiting for the completion of the other items. There are two reasons. First, the record of Table G-3 is used not only in testing Proposition 25 but also gives the premise for the items of Block IV of Appendix D (transformation assets) — Proposition 4(c) institutional embeddedness — and is therefore also an input to the diagnostic of position. Second, the settling of the rules for the allocation of liability in element (i) is the point of departure for the three elements, and since the time constant from commencement to effect is long, the cost of waiting on the sequence is large. Responsible departments. This diagnostic is not completed within a single department of competence. Table G-1 (indispensability) requires, in addition to the departments responsible for industrial policy, trade controls, and resource policy, the involvement of the departments that hold licensing powers (electricity grid, water, land use, spectrum) — as the third function in Proposition 28 shows, licensing of siting and resources is one of the functions the state supplies without substitute, and the state of its holding is hard to see from the side of industrial policy. Table G-2 (desirability) requires the involvement of the departments responsible for trade and foreign affairs, the departments responsible for standardization and standards, and the supervisory authorities of each regulated sector. G20 in particular (references to the home jurisdiction's criteria in other jurisdictions) requires investigation of the legislation of other jurisdictions and cannot be answered without the involvement of overseas missions or a specialist legal function. Table G-3 (trust infrastructure) is shared among the supervisory authorities of each of the five sectors and the departments responsible for legal affairs and insurance supervision. Table G-4 (capacity to export integrated systems) requires the involvement of the authority responsible for the domain of work, the departments responsible for export promotion and international standardization, and a specialist legal function — G56 in particular (dependence on the legal system) is the identification of which provisions of the home jurisdiction's legislation are built into the system, and cannot be answered by practitioners in the domain alone. Table G-5 (selection of the procurement mode) is shared among the agencies conducting procurement and the coordinating body above them — since decisions at the level of the domain (G63, G77) exceed the authority of an individual procuring agency, decisions will remain at the level of the individual procurement unless a coordinating body is placed. That a realistic arrangement is to place a cross-cutting coordinating body and then to allocate responsibility for answering item by item across departments is the same as in Appendix D.2. Table G-6 (explicitness of the interface) requires, in addition to the authority responsible for the domain, the involvement of the parties that design and maintain the system — G81 (separation in implementation) and G91 (separation of language) cannot be answered without reference to both the design documents 1213 and the implementation, and are not visible from the side of the responsible authority. G86 (separation of the interface of conformity assessment) also requires the involvement of the departments responsible for certification and standardization, and G89 and G90 (contract templates covering multiple jurisdictions) that of a specialist legal function. Table G-7 (distinguishing lock-in from indispensability) is shared between the departments responsible for trade and foreign affairs and the authority responsible for the domain — G104 and G105 (the number of entities capable of supplying) require investigation of the industrial structure of other jurisdictions, and G107 to G109 (counteraction on the recipient's side) require observation of the institutions and budgets of the other side, so that neither can be answered without the involvement of overseas missions or an equivalent investigative function. Frequency of updating. The basis is annual. For items that change quickly, however, updating is as matters occur — specifically, G11 (legal instruments) and G13 (constraints under alliances) are updated when legislation or arrangements are amended, G15 (history of exercise) when an event occurs, and G4 and G5 (the number of alternative suppliers and their spare capacity) when capital investment or withdrawal in the industry concerned is announced. By contrast, G10 (discrimination of the mechanism) and G16 (maintenance costs) have long time constants of change and their annual variation is buried in measurement error, so they are recorded annually while assessment is made against the trend over several years. For Table G-3, since the development of the three elements requires institutional processes, annual updating suffices, but the record of the timing of development is made when an event occurs — reconstructing the timing after the fact is difficult and prevents the test of precedence from holding. Table G-4 may be updated annually, but G53 (the history of failures and corrections) is recorded when an event occurs — this too is a record difficult to reconstruct after the fact. Table G-5 does not lend itself to annual updating. It is filled in at the point at which the procurement policy for a domain is fixed, and refilled at the point of contract renewal or replacement of the system. The progress of G74 (the plan for staged internalization) is, however, updated according to the measurement cycle laid down in the plan — confirming annually only the existence of the plan without measuring progress is to abandon the use as a "detector of change" of which G.5 spoke. Table G-6 may be updated annually, with two exceptions — G80 (the procedure for updating the interface specification) is recorded at the point of revision of the system, and G97 to G99 (the record of operation in other jurisdictions) at the point of transplantation. Both are records difficult to reconstruct after the fact. Table G-7 is annual. G107 to G109 (counteraction on the recipient's side) are, however, updated at the point at which a change in the other side's institutions, budgets, or procurement requirements is announced — buried in an annual aggregation, these would lose their proper use of detecting change. Handling of trade secrets and security information. A substantial part of the items of this diagnostic cannot be answered from public information alone. G5 (utilization rates and unused capacity of alternative suppliers), G8 (capital requirements of substitution), G9 (quality degradation on switching), and G23 (the sunk character of compliance invest‐ 1214 ment) all belong to the internal information of firms. Bringing such information into the diagnostic will rest on voluntary provision by operators or on statutory reporting, but in either case, unless the information provided is held in a form that does not bring competitive disadvantage, provision will not be obtained on subsequent occasions. It is therefore a practical precondition that the level of aggregation and anonymization be agreed in advance, that the agreement be documented, and that collection then begin. Stronger constraints apply to security information. G11 to G14 are a group of items describing the choke points the state holds, the legal instruments for exercising them, and the estimate of the other side's response upon exercise, and taken as a whole they are nothing other than a description of the state's own hand in negotiation. At the same time, the record of Table G-1 is the obverse of the state's own vulnerabilities — the list of choke points the state holds is also a list of targets for those who would attack them. The outputs of this diagnostic are therefore placed under the same constraint that Appendix D. 2 stated for the publication of diagnostic results — that a detailed record of the location of vulnerabilities may serve as a blueprint for attack. As a practical matter of handling, the following three categories are recommended. First category (publishable): the state of development in Table G-3, and the items of Table G-2 concerning rules and standards. These describe the existence of institutions, and their publication itself raises the value of trust infrastructure as desirability. Second category (limited sharing): G1 to G10 of Table G-1, and the items of Table G-2 concerning market, technology, and capital. Shared with allies and friendly states only for the purpose of consulting on mutual substitutability. Third category (not published): G11 to G16. The legal instruments of exercise, the location of separations between holding and the right of exercise, the estimate of the search for alternatives, and the breakdown of maintenance costs. The same principle applies to Tables G-4 and G-5 — G50 and G51 (state of development of trust infrastructure) and G54 (external presentability of records) in Table G-4 are in the first category. These are matters that must be published before the home jurisdiction is recognized by other jurisdictions as a counterpart for receiving integrated systems, and the principle that the components of desirability grow stronger by being shown operates here as well. G55 to G62 of Table G-4 (the stocktaking of portability and the cost estimate) are in the second category — an estimate of the cost of separation corresponds to the breakdown of a price in negotiation, and publication would bring disadvantage in negotiation. The whole of Table G-5 is in the second category. The list of domains for which (C) was chosen (G69) is a description of the home jurisdiction's dependence on external systems in those domains, and is, like Table G-1, the obverse of vulnerability. Publishing G71, G73, and G76 (audit rights, reservation of data, portability clauses) in advance as procurement requirements is not inconsistent with this, however — what is published is the content of the requirement, not the location of dependence. Indeed, publication in advance is also a practical response to the constraint that clauses may be negotiated only at the time of procurement (Section 12.7.3). The same principle applies to Tables G-6 and G-7. Within Table G-6, G79 (the interface specification), G86 (separation of the interface of conformity assessment), G89 (contract templates covering multiple jurisdictions), 1215 and G97 (the record of operation in other jurisdictions) are in the first category (publishable) — these are matters that must be published before the home jurisdiction is recognized by other jurisdictions as a counterpart for receiving integrated systems, and the principle that the components of desirability grow stronger by being shown operates here as well. Publishing the specification of the interface is, in the logic of Proposition 38, not an abandonment of defence but the formation of an asset (Section 12.5.8). Within Table G-6, G81 (the actual state of separation in implementation), G96 (the cost of encapsulation), G98 (the cost and time of transplantation), and G99 (dependencies that had not been recognized) are in the second category (limited sharing) — the places where separation is incomplete and the breakdown of the cost of transplantation both correspond to the breakdown of a price in negotiation. The whole of Table G-7 is in the second category. The determination of G111 — whether the home jurisdiction's position rests on lock-in or on indispensability — is a self-assessment of the home jurisdiction's own standing in negotiation, and the observations of counteraction in G107 to G109 amount to an outlook for a future decline in the home jurisdiction's position in the domain. This category is not, however, aimed at concealment. The purpose of Table G-7 is not to mistake lock-in for indispensability, and correcting the misidentification need only take place inside the home jurisdiction. This categorization is distinctive in fixing whether publication is permissible not by the sensitivity of the information alone but by whether publication serves the purpose of the diagnostic. The state of development of trust infrastructure is recognized by other states as "a place where deployment in regulated sectors is in fact possible" only once it is published (G31). That is, for the components of desirability, publication itself strengthens the component. For the component of indispensability, by contrast, publication hastens the other side's search for alternatives — the anticipatory search initiated by the manifestation of exercisability, of which Section 11.6.1 spoke. The asymmetry of the two components appears in the handling of diagnostic results as well. Desirability grows stronger by being shown; indispensability grows weaker by being shown. Publishing diagnostic results uniformly, or withholding them uniformly, without recognizing this asymmetry brings disadvantage to the state in either case. Finally, the standing of this diagnostic is restated. This appendix is not a tool for measuring the level of leverage but a questionnaire for writing out the constituent elements of leverage and discriminating their durability and exercisability against the propositions of this paper. With the addition of G.7 and G.8, the object of the questioning has widened beyond what the home jurisdiction holds to what it may provide (Table G-4) and what it receives (Table G-5), and further, with G.9 and G.10, to how it composes what it may provide (Table G-6) and what it obtains thereby (Table G-7); but the standing is unchanged — every table calls for description and for the location of records, not for a score. And no table assesses the merits of relations with other jurisdictions. Table G-4 describes the conditions of export, Table G-5 the conditions of procurement, Table G-6 the presence or absence of a design for separation, and Table G-7 which component of leverage the home jurisdiction's position rests on; none determines with which counterparty transactions are 1216 preferable. That Table G-6 asks after the capacity to respond to the recipient's requirements concerning the handling of data, and that Table G-7 observes the recipient's moves toward internalization, both extend no further than a description of structure — neither the propriety of the regulation of the jurisdiction imposing those requirements nor the merits of the conduct of the party advancing internalization is an object of assessment in this paper. As Section 12.8 states, the interests of the exporting side and the importing side do not coincide, but that does not mean that either is unwarranted. What the diagnostic treats is the identification of what the home jurisdiction may make an object of negotiation under this asymmetry (audit rights, data, portability), not an assessment of the counterparty. As stated in G.1, the measurement framework is provisional, and this provisional character is acknowledged as a limitation of this paper in Section 20. That the items are nonetheless established rests on the judgment that leaving what cannot be measured as a blank is less harmful than dropping it from the objects of the diagnostic — the same judgment Appendix D adopted for Block VII (national brain capital). What this diagnostic should record is the distinction between what has not been developed and what has not yet had a framework designed for it, and accumulating records while preserving that distinction is the only route to the improvement of the measurement framework. 1217 1218 Appendix H. Glossary (Japanese–English) This appendix is the glossary of the terms of this paper. For the concepts proper to this paper and for its principal concepts, it sets out the English term, the Japanese original, the number of the definition or proposition at which the term first appears (with the section), and a one-line gloss. The table is numbered Table H-1 and belongs to a series independent of Tables 1 to 27 in the body and of the series in Appendices A to G. Three reservations are placed at the outset. First, the English terms in this table are the terms used throughout this paper; the Japanese originals are given for readers consulting the Japanese edition. They are not glosses appended after the fact but the vocabulary in which the argument is conducted, and the Japanese column is provided so that a reader who moves between the two editions may align the two texts term by term. Where a term functions in Japanese as a single word (「停AI」, 「定義力」) the English may require a phrase or a descriptive form; the Japanese column preserves the compactness that the English cannot carry. Second, the one line in the gloss column is a summary and not a definition. The definitions and propositions of this paper are placed verbatim at their own locations, and this table does not replace them. Where the content of a definition is at issue, the location indicated by the column of first appearance must be consulted. The summaries are written as aids to search. Third, the choice of terms gives priority to consistency with the English title of this paper (National Value Models: A Theory of Resource, Transformation, and Utilization for Nations in the Age of AI, with Critical-Tier Governance) and with the English titles of the earlier papers in this series. That is, value model, resource / transformation / utilization, and criticaltier governance are the reference terms. For concepts that already have English titles in the earlier papers of the series (Future Value Theory; Enterprise Redefinition; Brain Capital Management; Self-Defined Society; Redefinition Capitalism; Human on the Loop; Ageless Management), those terms take priority and no new term is coined in this paper. Table H-1. The principal concepts of this paper: English terms, Japanese originals, and first appearance English Japanese First appearance Gloss (summary) National Value Models 国家価 値モデ ル Definition 3 (Section 6) The configuration by which a state generates national value in its relation to a general-purpose input. Divided into the three basic types M1/M2/M3. Resource- Producing Model (M1) 産出型 (M1) Definition 3 (Section 6) The type that produces the resource itself and obtains value from the fact of that production. The channel through which value is realized depends on the capability tier. 1219 English Japanese First appearance Gloss (summary) Transformation Model (M2) 変換型 (M2) Definition 3 (Section 6) The type that procures the resource from outside, adds value through transformation (processing, application, integration), and supplies it outward. Utilization Model (M3) 活用型 (M3) Definition 3 (Section 6) The type that puts the resource into domestic processes of production and daily life and uses it to amplify other value. Nine-Cell Matrix 9セ ル・マ トリク ス Proposition 3 (Section 6) The product of the three types of value model and the three AI capability tiers. The cells are non-equivalent in institutions, conditions of survival, and modes of failure. AI Capability Tiers AI能力 階層 Definition 2 (Section 5) A division of AI capability by capability distance from the frontier. Market structure and mode of governance are not included in the definition. Tier C1 (Commodity Tier) C1(コ モディ ティ層) Definition 2 (Section 5) A level of capability far enough from the frontier that substitutes meeting the required level exist in several jurisdictions. Tier C2 (Frontier Tier) C2(フ ロン ティア 層) Definition 2 (Section 5) The frontier, and the levels of capability within a short lag width of it. Tier C3 (Critical Tier) C3(臨 界層) Definition 2 (Section 5) An unrealized anticipatory category exceeding the frontier of the time by at least a prescribed threshold. Frontier Descent フロン ティア の逓降 Definition 2 (Section 5) The downward movement over time of the boundaries between tiers, as a function of the lag width and of the required level for a use. General- Purpose Input 汎用投 入財 Definition 1 (Section 2) An input that governs productivity across a broad range of sectors of the economy. Strategic Character (Strategicness) 戦略性Definition 1 (Section 2) The degree to which, for a general-purpose input, the three properties of external dependence, infrastructural criticality, and the governing of capability gaps hold. A matter of degree, not binary. Strategic General- Purpose Resource 戦略的 汎用資 源 Definition 1 (Section 2) A general-purpose input for which all three properties of strategic character hold at a high level. Discipline of Analogy アナロ ジーの 規律 Section 3 (Proposition 1) The methodological discipline of giving, for an analogy, an explicit correspondence table of which properties transfer and which do not.

English Japanese First appearance Gloss (summary) Transformation Value 変換価 値 Definition 5 (Section 7) The difference between what the transformer pays for the AI capability procured and what it receives from final demand (the counterpart of the refining margin). Defined as an accounting quantity. Locus of Transformation Value 変換価 値の locus Section 18.8 The position to which the transformation margin actually accrues. Its movement from the part that reduces to general-purpose functionality to the part protected by integration cost is discussed. Four Indicators of Complementary Asset Endowment 補完資 産賦存 の4指 標 Proposition 4 (Section 7) Exclusive data endowment, physical-interface intensity, institutional embeddedness, and linguistic-contextual specificity. Ex ante observables for the existence of the Transformation Model. Integration Cost 統合費 用 Proposition 4 (Section 7) / Section 10 The cost required to embed general-purpose capability into business processes, regulation, and structures of liability. It operates as a wall protecting the transformation margin from compression. AI Dependence AI依存 度 Definition 4 (Section 13) The share of critical processes whose output or function degrades within a prescribed number of days should supply be interrupted, and the depth of that degradation. Defined by degradation upon interruption. Exposure 曝露Definition 4 (Section 13) The scale and share of external procurement of AI inputs. It bounds dependence from above but is not identical with it. AI Outage 停AI Definition 4 (Section 13) A correlated cessation of the supply of AI services, arising from technical failure, commercial decision, or geopolitical measure. A term coined in this paper. Outage Correlation 障害相 関 Proposition 7 (Section 13) The channel by which a local failure is amplified into a halt of the whole system, among groups of sectors sharing the same supplier or the same substrate. Sovereign Minimum Guarantee Level 主権的 最低保 障水準 Definition 6 (Section 13) The level of AI use guaranteed domestically that a state can maintain even where external supply is interrupted, refused, or subjected to changed conditions. Operational Capacity 実行容 量(第1 機能) Definition 6(i-a) (Section 13) The volume of computation and operation to be secured domestically in order to run the critical processes covered by the guarantee. Renewal Capability 更新能 力(第2 機能) Definition 6(i-b) The capability to fine-tune, evaluate, and deploy the latest released generation domestically, and to recover the relative depreciation of capability within a prescribed period. 1221 English Japanese First appearance Gloss (summary) (Section 13) Sensitive- Processing Condition 機微処 理条件 (第3機 能) Definition 6(i-c) (Section 13) Securing infrastructure capable of processing domestically the data whose removal abroad is not permitted legally or contractually. Continuous Construction 継続的 建造 Proposition 8 (Section 13) That, because stockpiles depreciate as the frontier advances, security of supply holds not as a requirement attained but only as an activity continued. Critical- Tier Governance 臨界ガ バナン ス Definition 7 (Section 9) A mode of governance addressed to Tier C3 capability, composed of the three functions of verification, nonproliferation, and stabilization. Verification Anchor 検証の 錨 Proposition 9 (Section 9) A measurable physical correlate accompanying the object of control that makes a mechanism of verification possible. For AI, only compute, electricity, and facilities are candidates. Half-Life of the Verification Anchor 検証の 錨の半 減期 Definition 9 (Section 9) The time required for the compute needed to attain a given level of capability to halve from its level at first attainment. Layer Zero 第0層Definition 8 (Section 2) The layer at which the arrangement of resources, capabilities, and institutions among states distributes the operating conditions of the three layers below. The layer this paper newly establishes. Four-Layer Architecture 4層体 系 Definition 8 (Section 2) / Section 17 The architecture of the series, composed of Layer Zero (national structure), Layer One (capital allocation), Layer Two (the institutional footing of self-definition), and Layer Three (enterprise management). Cell Transition セル遷 移 Definition 10 (Section 15) The movement of the centroid of portfolio weights from one cell of the nine to another. Decomposed into the three directions of horizontal, vertical, and cross-axis. Asymmetry of Transition 遷移の 非対称 性 Proposition 15 (Section 15) That an upward transition requires accumulation and has a long time constant, whereas a downward transition arises passively through the relative depreciation of accumulation alone. Cross-Axis Transition 軸間遷 移 Definition 10 / Proposition 16 (Section 15) The movement of the logic that governs the allocation of capability from the logic of markets and trade to the logic of national security. 国家脳 資本 1222 English Japanese First appearance Gloss (summary) National Brain Capital Definition 11 (Section 10) The whole of that part of the human capital of the state that AI cannot replicate or transfer at low cost. It cannot be imported, but it can flow out. Self- Erosion of Brain Capital 脳資本 の自己 侵食 Proposition 24 (Section 17) The self-reinforcing downward loop in which reliance on imported cognition wears away national brain capital and reduces the complementary assets that had defended the Transformation Model. Value- Definition Capability 価値定 義能力 (定義 力) Definition 12 (Section 17) The capability to select for oneself the future state to be attained and to realize it by translating that selection into resource allocation, institutional design, and organizational structure. Distinguished from the efficiency of attainment. From Efficiency to Definition 効率か ら定義 へ Proposition 17 (Section 17) The structure in which the advantage of efficiency gains diminishes through the descent of capability to Tier C1, and the residual that generates difference moves to value-definition capability. National Redefinition 国家再 定義 Proposition 14 (Section 17) A framework for the redefinition of the state itself, mapping the five dimensions of enterprise redefinition onto the level of the state. World Scenarios 世界シ ナリオ Definition 13 (Section 16) Exogenous states of the world, fixed by the combination of the mode of advance of AI capability, the structure of supply, and physical constraints, that govern the consequences of national strategy. S1: Fragmentation S1(分 断) Definition 13 (Section 16) The state in which the advance of the frontier continues to depend on large-scale computation, supplier concentration is maintained, and allocation is taken into the logic of national security. S2: Diffusion S2(分 散) Definition 13 (Section 16) The state in which capability disperses widely through the growth of open weights and of the edge. S3: Stagnation S3(停 滞) Definition 13 (Section 16) The state in which the advance of capability slows through diminishing returns to scaling and commoditization proceeds. Leading Indicators 先行指 標 Definition 14 (Section 16) Observable quantities that identify which scenario is coming to hold before its consequences appear. Those that satisfy three conditions. No-Regret Actions 無後悔 行動 Proposition 20 (Section 16) The set of actions with positive expected value under all three scenarios. National brain capital, exclusive domain data, valuedefinition capability, and operational readiness. Three Constraints on 中堅国 の3制 約 Proposition 21 (Section 14) The three constraints of energy, data sovereignty, and value-definition capability to which states outside the two poles of the Resource- Producing Model are subject irrespective of region, income, and political system. 1223 English Japanese First appearance Gloss (summary) Middle Powers Geoeconomic Leverage 地経学 的レバ レッジ Definition 15 (Section 11) The power to realize one's own preferences in international negotiation. A second axis composed of the two components of indispensability and desirability. Indispensability 不可欠 性 Definition 15 (Section 11) The magnitude of the cost and malfunction that arises where other states seek to bypass or exclude the state in question. Desirability 必要性Definition 15 (Section 11) The degree to which other states voluntarily wish to engage with the state in question. Composed of the five components of market, rules, technology, capital, and trust. Paradox of Leverage Exercise レバ レッジ 行使の 逆説 Proposition 23 (Section 11) That indispensability based on a chokepoint does not depreciate while it is held, and begins to depreciate from the moment it is exercised. Chokepoint チョー クポイ ント Section 11.2 A point on a supply network whose bypass requires cost and time. It arises in units of process stage rather than of goods. Trust Infrastructure 信頼イ ンフラ Definition 17 (Section 11) The whole of the institutions of liability and conformity attending the use of AI, composed of the three elements of rules for the allocation of liability, conformity assessment and certification, and insurance and compensation. Export of Integrated Systems 統合の 輸出 Definition 20 (Section 12) The transfer to an external jurisdiction of neither capability itself nor a product but of the whole system that renders capability operable in a particular domain of work (five elements: capability, the design of its embedding, the allocation of liability, the demonstration of conformity, and the human capability to operate it). AI Foundry Model AIファ ウンド リ・モ デル Definition 21 (Section 12) The configuration, among the national value models (Definition 3), that does not itself produce frontier capability but procures it externally, transforms it into an operable system by means of the complementary assets of the home jurisdiction (the four indicators of Proposition 4), national brain capital (Definition 11), and trust infrastructure (Definition 17), and supplies it to external jurisdictions as an export of integrated systems (Definition 20). That is, the type that has chosen integration as the form of its output within M2×C2. The name derives from the structural correspondence with the semiconductor foundry — a form of business that owns not the design but the process capability, and turns the designs of others into products through its own process, yield, and quality assurance. The correspondence is confined to the structure of "taking value at the process without holding the design," and the indispensability (Definition 15) that a semiconductor foundry retains through capital specificity and the difficulty of 1224 English Japanese First appearance Gloss (summary) reproducing the process does not transfer (Section 12.1.7, Table 27). AI Foundry State AIファ ウンド リ国家 Definition 21 (Section 12) A state that adopts the AI Foundry Model. It does not own frontier models; it owns the capability of transformation. The axis of competition rests not on the level of capability but on the reliability of the process — the record of operation and the assumption of liability, corresponding to yield and quality assurance in semiconductors. Its bargaining power rests on the side of desirability rather than indispensability (Proposition 38), and is accumulated by being adopted rather than by cutting off. What separates the system is a wall of time, not a wall of physics limiting the number of entities that may enter. It is a configuration delimited by a combination of conditions, and is neither a classification nor an evaluation of states. Conformity Investment 適合投 資 Proposition 38 (Section 12) The investment the party that has accepted an integrated system makes in business processes, contracts and insurance, supervisory procedures, and the training of personnel in order to fit that system. Being specific to the system, it raises switching costs. Self-Reinforcement of Desirability 必要性 の自己 強化 Proposition 38 (Section 12) The structure by which the desirability formed through the export of integrated systems appreciates the more it is adopted. Its sign is the opposite of that of indispensability, which depreciates through exercise (Proposition 23). Portability 可搬性Proposition 39 (Section 12) The degree to which a system is separable from the legal institutions, language, conventions, and standards specific to the home jurisdiction and may be re-embedded in the institutions of a recipient. The most constraining of the four conditions for the export of integrated systems. Interface 界面Proposition 41 (Section 12) The boundary between the jurisdiction-specific layer and the portable core. That which elements belong to which layer, and by what the two layers connect, is settled at the level of design documents is what it is for the interface to be "made explicit." Explicitness of the interface is a necessary condition for the joint attainment of embedding and portability. Jurisdiction- Specific Layer 法域固 有層 Proposition 41 (Section 12) The part of a system that depends on the legal institutions, language, conventions, and standards of the jurisdiction in question. It is the layer substituted on transplantation, and institutional embedding (Proposition 4(c)) deepens on the side of this layer. Portable Core 可搬中 核 Proposition 41 (Section 12) The part of a system that does not depend on jurisdiction — the business logic of the domain, the procedures of verification, the structure of the allocation of liability, and the skeleton of the procedures of quality assurance. So long as the specification of the interface is met, it requires no modification on transplantation. In a system whose interface is made explicit, its cost of transplantation becomes independent of the depth of embedding in the jurisdiction-specific layer. 1225 English Japanese First appearance Gloss (summary) Locus of Embedding 埋め込 みの位 置 Proposition 41 (Section 12) The term for the design principle Proposition 41 gives: not to make embedding shallow but to confine the locus of embedding to the outside of the interface. The resolution of the contradiction is given with respect to the locus of embedding, not its quantity. Encapsulation カプセ ル化 Section 12.3.5(vi) The configuration in which execution of the system and storage of data take place on facilities within the recipient's jurisdiction, while the exporting side retains rights of remote audit within a scope that does not require the crossing of borders by the raw data. The concretization of the design of the interface at the layer of data. Supply may be made to several jurisdictions with differing requirements concerning the handling of data by substituting only the configuration inside the capsule. Lock-in ロック イン Proposition 42 (Section 12) The property of whether a party already engaged can leave — a constraint internal to a particular relationship, appearing as the height of switching costs accumulated through conformity investment. It is a distinct property from indispensability (Definition 15), which asks whether a third party can bypass the entity in question; the subject of the question differs. A high level of lockin therefore does not constitute evidence of indispensability unless accompanied by an indicator of supplier concentration. Upper Bound of Self-Reinforcement 自己強 化の上 限 Proposition 42 (Section 12) The upper bound the self-reinforcement of desirability (Proposition 38) reaches at the point at which the recipient prefers to recover autonomy even at the price of switching costs. Its level is a function of three variables: the national brain capital remaining on the recipient's side in the domain, the existence of alternative suppliers, and the severity of the consequences of failure. Recipient- Side Counteraction 受入側 の反作 用 Proposition 42 (Section 12) The effect by which a rise in switching costs simultaneously raises the recipient's inducement toward internalization, plural sourcing, and the institutionalization of requirements of portability. The mechanism of self-reinforcement generates, through its own operation, a component that lowers its own upper bound. It is stated of the structural position of recipient, and not of the policy of any particular state. Procurement Modes 調達様 式 Proposition 40 (Section 12) The three modes available to the party importing capability — (A) building within the home jurisdiction, (B) procurement of capability, and (C) procurement of integrated systems. Their domains of fit are governed by the three variables of the severity of the consequences of failure, the domain-specificity of judgment, and reversibility. Procurement of Integrated Systems 統合の 調達 Proposition 40 (Section 12) Procurement mode (C). To receive the system of Definition 20 as a bundle. It is accompanied by the loss of opportunities to form national brain capital in the domain (Proposition 24). Domain- Specificity Proposition 40 1226 English Japanese First appearance Gloss (summary) of Judgment 判断の 領域固 有性 (Section 12) The extent to which judgment in the domain depends on the institutions, language, and conventions of the home jurisdiction. Portability (Proposition 39) seen as a variable from the recipient's side. Authentic Data 真正 データ Definition 16 (Section 17) Data generated directly from human acts or physical processes, whose provenance is verifiable. Distinguished from synthetic data. Institutional Time Constant 制度の 時定数 Proposition 26 (Section 17) The time required to form and revise an institution. Its difference from the speed of technological change becomes a constraint on the design of governance. Time-Constant Ratio 時定数 比 Proposition 26 (Section 17) The time an institution requires for a decision, divided by the time the capability under control requires to change. In domains where the ratio exceeds one, rules with fixed content do not maintain effective control. Proposition 34 applies a ratio of the same form between the formation of national brain capital and change in the AI capability tiers. Feasible Region 実行可 能領域 Definition 18 (Section 6) The set of positions of value generation a state may actually occupy at a given capability tier. It narrows as the tier rises. Non-Orthogonality of the Axes 軸の非 直交性 Proposition 29 (Section 6) That the M axis and the C axis are not orthogonal and the nine cells are not a uniform lattice. The coordinate system is retained and only the implication of uniformity is withdrawn. Sovereignty Premium 主権プ レミア ム Definition 19 (Section 19) The difference between the unit price of use guaranteed domestically or within an alliance and the unit price of use were it procured from an unconstrained international market. Inter-Layer Conflict of Interest 層間の 利益相 反 Proposition 31 (Section 19) That the redundancy Layer Zero requires lowers the capital efficiency of Layer Three, and that those who bear the benefit and those who bear the cost do not coincide. Minimum Indicator Set 最小指 標集合 Proposition 36 (Section 19) A set of monitoring indicators confined so that implementation may be sustained even under the constraint of administrative capacity. Evidence Grade 証拠グ レード Section 3 A display of the strength of the empirical support for each claim on four levels: ◎ well established, ○ supported by evidence, △ contested, ▽ grey literature. Eleven notes on the terms of this paper. These are distinctions to bear in mind in reading the English terms of this paper, and in rendering them into a further language. First, "AI outage" (停AI) is a term coined in this paper, and in Japanese the word itself carries a phonetic and structural correspondence with 停電 (power outage). The English AI outage 1227 does not carry that correspondence, and a note is therefore placed at its first appearance recording that it is a coinage formed against the power outage of electricity. Blackout, shutdown, and stoppage are not used: outage is neutral as to cause, whereas blackout carries connotations this paper does not assert. Second, "desirability" (必要性) is the term requiring the greatest care. In Japanese, 必要性 is close in feeling to 不可欠性 (indispensability), and the distinction between the two is hard to convey. In English the contrast between indispensability (the loss borne by the party bypassed) and desirability (the degree to which engagement is sought) is comparatively clear, and this paper places that contrast in the foreground. Because desirability nevertheless carries a normative connotation, a limiting note is placed at its first appearance recording that in this paper it denotes the observed propensity of other states to seek engagement and carries no normative evaluation. Necessity, essentiality, need, and demand are not used, since they would be read as indispensability. Third, 定義力 is used in the Japanese edition as an abbreviation of 価値定義能力; in English no abbreviation is established and value-definition capability is used throughout. Fourth, "feasible region" (実行可能領域) is homonymous with an existing term in mathematical programming, and a note is placed at its first appearance recording that the usage of this paper is not the constraint set of an optimization problem but "the set of positions that may be occupied." Fifth, "portability" (可搬性) is homonymous with data portability in data protection law, and requires a note against confusion. The portability of this paper is the property of a system laid down by Proposition 39(iv) — its separability from the legal institutions, language, conventions, and standards of the home jurisdiction — and does not denote a right of an individual to obtain and transfer their own data. This distinction is stated at first appearance, and where necessary the term is limited to portability of integrated systems. Sixth, "export of integrated systems" (統合の輸出) is not rendered export of integration, which would be the unnatural form of exporting an abstract noun, nor systems export, which collides with the existing vocabulary of infrastructure export. The plural integrated systems is used so as to preserve the content of Definition 20 — that what is transferred is the whole of a system composed of five elements. The relation to integration cost is stated at first appearance — what protects the export of integrated systems from compression is precisely the wall of integration cost (Proposition 4). Seventh, "conformity investment" (適合投資) shares a stem with conformity assessment, and the relation between the two is noted. Conformity investment is investment the recipient makes to fit the system; conformity assessment is the institutional framework of demonstration that forms the second element of Definition 17. The former is an investment and the latter an institution, and they operate at different levels. Compliance investment is not adopted, since it carries a strong connotation of regulatory compliance and diverges from the usage of this paper (fitting to a system). Eighth, for "AI Foundry Model" and "AI Foundry State" there is, prior to any question of wording, a discipline of notation. "AI Foundry" must not be used as a bare term standing alone — where a state is meant, always AI Foundry State; where the model or type is meant, always AI Foundry Model, with the qualifier (State / Model) attached. There are two reasons. First, "AI Foundry" or a similar name is already in use in the field of information technology as the product name 1228 of a particular commercial vendor (Section 12.1.6), and a form lacking the qualifier will be read as denoting that commercial product rather than the type introduced in this paper. The term of this paper is the name of a type of national model unrelated to that product, and the object of quantification is jurisdictions and not vendors — this identification is stated at first appearance, and no evaluation whatever is made of the content, quality, or market position of that product. Second, the qualifier operates as a tether binding the name to the definition — a device preventing the name from circulating independently of the definition, and not a matter of form. The qualifier is not omitted in plurals, possessives, or headword forms (AI Foundry States, the AI Foundry Model's …, chapter titles). A note on the property that does not transfer (indispensability) is placed at first appearance as well — the word foundry may, through associations with the semiconductor industry, connote irreplaceability, oligopoly, and the standing of a choke point, but none of these transfers to the model of this paper (Section 12.1.7). Ninth, the distinction between "lock-in" and "indispensability" is the distinction among the terms of this paper most readily lost in translation. The English lock-in is already established as denoting the height of switching costs, and is used in contexts adjacent to words such as essential, critical supplier, and irreplaceable, so that the two may merge in the course of translation even where the original sharply distinguishes them. The discipline is: do not render lock-in by indispensability, essentiality, or irreplaceability, and do not supply words of the indispensable family at places stating the height of switching costs. At the first appearance of Proposition 42 the difference in the subject of the two questions is made explicit in a single sentence — lock-in asks whether a party already engaged can leave; indispensability asks whether a third party can bypass. Unless that sentence is placed, the rule of measurement in Proposition 42(i) (that a high level of lock-in does not constitute evidence of indispensability unless accompanied by an indicator of supplier concentration) will appear to the reader as a tautology. Tenth, "interface" (界面) is homonymous with API and user interface in the field of information technology, and requires a note. The interface of this paper is a concept of design denoting the specification that settles, at the level of design documents, the boundary between the two layers of a system (the jurisdiction-specific layer and the portable core), and is not confined to a technical specification of connection. Interface is used, with the definition — the specified boundary between the jurisdiction-specific layer and the portable core — appended at first appearance, together with a statement that it stands in the line of the usage of interface in the literature on modularity (Simon 1962; Baldwin & Clark 2000). Eleventh, for "jurisdiction- specific layer" (法域固有層) and "portable core" (可搬中核), the essential point is not to read jurisdiction as country or nation. The unit of analysis of this paper is the jurisdiction and not the state; that the same jurisdiction may stand in different positions domain by domain, and that state and jurisdiction may not correspond one to one, are the substance of this distinction. Jurisdiction is used, and is not omitted in compounds. For the portable core, core is used and kernel and nucleus are not adopted — the former carries a particular connotation from computer science and the latter a connotation of indivisibility, and both diverge from the usage of this paper, "the part requiring no modification so long as the specification of the interface is met." 1229 Alongside these, the expressions to be avoided are recorded. The editorial policy of this paper (political neutrality) applies identically to this edition. That is, terms implying a judgment on the merits of a particular state, government, or political position — verbs attributing motive or intent (seeks to dominate, aims to undermine, and the like), qualifiers containing an evaluation of policy (aggressive, misguided, wise, and the like), framing terms implying support for a camp — are readily introduced in the course of writing in English even where the underlying statement is neutral. A description of the fact of concentration of supply (supply is concentrated in …) is indispensable to the analysis and is neutral, but expressions touching on the intent or legitimacy of those who brought about the concentration are not used. Care must be taken not to supply a subject (a bearer of intent) that the argument does not contain, merely for the sake of English word order. This list of prohibitions includes the following item — a bare "AI Foundry" lacking the qualifier is not used anywhere as a term denoting the type introduced in this paper (always AI Foundry State or AI Foundry Model). Because a commercial product of the same or a similar name exists in the field of information technology, the absence of the qualifier is a channel by which the object of analysis is mistaken from a jurisdiction to a vendor, and by which an evaluation of firms and products that this paper does not make is read into the text. This list of prohibitions includes one further item — words connoting indispensability, such as indispensable, irreplaceable, and chokepoint, are not supplied at places stating the height of switching costs (lock-in) (the ninth note above). In addition, at places stating the structural fact that there are jurisdictions in which requirements concerning the handling of data exist (the fifth channel in Section 12.3.4; item G95 of Table G-6 in Appendix G), qualifiers evaluating those requirements — restrictive, protectionist, onerous, and the like — are not used. Where the text states only the content and the consequences of a requirement, supplying an evaluative qualifier for the sake of natural English is a breach of the editorial policy. The standing of this table and its future handling. This table is the glossary of this edition, and its English column is the vocabulary in which the argument of this paper is conducted. The Japanese column is not a translation appended to the English but the wording of the Japanese edition, and is provided so that a reader consulting that edition may align the two texts. Where the concepts of this paper are to be cited in a further language, it is asked that the Japanese original be given alongside the English term, so that the coinages of this paper (in particular 停AI / AI outage, 必要性 / desirability, and 界面 / interface, each of which carries a limiting note) are not detached from their definitions. Where the selection of entries or the numbering of first appearances is revised in a later version, the revision will be made in this table and the correspondence between the two columns maintained. 1230

© 2026 by Vura Capital Innovation Holdings Inc.
​ビューラキャピタルイノベーションホールディングス株式会社

bottom of page